MSC Nastran 2019 Quick Reference Guide

MSC Nastran 2019
MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide

Corporate Europe, Middle East, Africa
MSC Software Corporation MSC Software GmbH
4675 MacArthur Court, Suite 900 Am Moosfeld 13
Newport Beach, CA 92660 81829 Munich, Germany
Telephone: (714) 540-8900 Telephone: (49) 89 431 98 70
Toll Free Number: 1 855 672 7638 Email: europe@mscsoftware.com
Email: americas.contact@mscsoftware.com
Japan Asia-Pacific
MSC Software Japan Ltd. MSC Software (S) Pte. Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F 100 Beach Road
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku #16-05 Shaw Tower
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku Singapore 189702
Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN Telephone: 65-6272-0082
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200 Email: APAC.Contact@mscsoftware.com
Email: MSCJ.Market@mscsoftware.com
Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com
Disclaimer
MSC Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained
in this document without prior notice.
The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only,
and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC Software
Corporation assumes no liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting
from the use of any information contained herein.
User Documentation: Copyright  2018 MSC Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or
distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC Software Corporation is
prohibited.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC
Software suppliers. Additional terms and conditions and/or notices may apply for certain third party software. Such
additional third party software terms and conditions and/or notices may be set forth in documentation and/or at
http://www.mscsoftware.com/thirdpartysoftware (or successor website designated by MSC from time to time).
PCGLSS 8.0, Copyright © 1992-2016, Computational Applications and System Integration Inc. All rights reserved.
PCGLSS 8.0 is licensed from Computational Applications and System Integration Inc.
MSC, Dytran, Marc, MSC Nastran, Patran, the MSC Software corporate logo, e-Xstream, Digimat, and Simulating
Reality are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MSC Software Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in the
United States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. FLEXlm and FlexNet Publisher are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Flexera Software. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Use, duplicate, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subjected to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212
(Commercial Computer Software) and DFARS 227.7202 (Commercial Computer Software and Commercial
Computer Software Documentation), as applicable.
U.S. Patent 9,361,413

December 18, 2018
NA:V2019:Z:Z:Z:DC-QRG-PDF
Main Index
Documentation Feedback
At MSC Software, we strive to produce the highest quality documentation and welcome your feedback.
If you have comments or suggestions about our documentation, write to us at: documentation-
feedback@mscsoftware.com.
Please include the following information with your feedback:
 Document name
 Release/Version number
 Chapter/Section name
 Topic title (for Online Help)
 Brief description of the content (for example, incomplete/incorrect information, grammatical
errors, information that requires clarification or more details and so on).
 Your suggestions for correcting/improving documentation
You may also provide your feedback about MSC Software documentation by taking a short 5-minute
survey at: http://msc-documentation.questionpro.com.
Note: The above mentioned e-mail address is only for providing documentation specific
feedback. If you have any technical problems, issues, or queries, please contact Technical
Support.
C O N T E N T S
MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide
Contents
Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Preface  List of MSC Nastran Books, xx
 Technical Support, xxi
 Training and Internet Resources, xxii
1
Executing MSC Nastran  Executing MSC Nastran, 2
2
NASTRAN Statement  The NASTRAN Statement, 2
- NASTRAN, 3 - SPARSE (126), 6
- BUFFSIZE (1), 4 - UPDTTIM (128), 7
- F06 (2), 4 - SMPYAD67 (129), 7
- NLINES (9), 4 - MAXDBSET, 7
- MAXLINES (14), 4 - AUTOASGN (133), 7
- METIME (20), 4 - TSTAMP (135), 7
- APP (21), 4 - QUADINT (141), 7
- MACHTYPE (22), 4 - SCR300 (142), 7
- DIAGA (25), 4 - LOCBULK (143), 8
- CONFIG (28), 4 - (144), 8
- MESH (31), 4 - BFGS (145), 8
- ADUMi (46 - 54), 4 - FBSMEM (146), 8
- HEAT (56), 4 - UWM (147), 8
- DIAGB (61), 4 - DBVERCHK (148), 8
- PUNCH (64), 4 - SCR300DEL (150), 9
- MPYAD (66), 4 - (151), 9
- DCMPOUT(69), 5 - DBLAMKD (155), 9
- DELFF (77), 5 - (162), 9
- DBSET, 5 - (166), 9
- DMAP (82), 5 - LDQRKD (170), 10
- F04 (86), 5 - OLDQ4K (173), 10
- RADMTX (87), 5 - Q4TAPER (189), 10
- RADLST (88), 6 - Q4SKEW (190), 10
- SMP (107), 6 - TETRAAR (191), 10
- NEWHESS (108), 6 - SCRSAVE (196), 11
- (109), 6 - MINFRONT (198), 11
- BUFFPOOL (114), 6 - NSEGADD (200), 11
- (119), 6 - CORDM (204), 11
- ATTDEL (124), 6 - (205), 11
- NOKEEP (125), 6 - DCMPSEQ (206), 11
Main Index
- USPARSE (209), 12 - , 18
- PUNCHTYPE (210), 12 - (414), 18
- CHEXAINT (212), 12 - OLDTLDMTH (428), 18
- DISTORT (213), 12 - NONLRGAP (431), 18
- T3SKEW (218), 12 - ESLNRO (443), 19
- (219), 12 - (444), 19
- (220), 13 - IFPSTAR, 19
- (221), 13 - MNLQ4C (445), 19
- (253 - 262), 13 - (446), 19
- MAXSET (263), 13 - PARSLAVE(449), 20
- QUARTICDLM (270), 13 - (451), 20
- (273), 13 - IFPBUFF(624), 20
- DBCFACT (274), 13 - NONUPIV (653), 21
- (275), 13 - GPU_MIN_FRONT (655), 21
- SPLINE_METRICS (281), 13 - GPU_MIN_RANK (656), 21
- MINDEF (303), 13 - (662), 21
- MPERTURB (304), 14 - SEGLOG(664), 22
- (309), 14 - CNTBKCMP(666), 22
- OLDRBE3 (310), 14 - (670), 22
- TBCMAG (311), 14 - LMFBKCMP(676), 22
- INDEX (316), 14 - FFOBKCMP(677), 23
- XMSG (319), 14 - OLDLCNTR(678), 23
- OLDDAREA (320), 14 - (679), 23
- RSEQCONT (357), 15 - (684), 23
- QLHOUL (359), 15 - RDBOTH(695), 24
- PRTPCOMP (361), 15 - S2SDEF(701), 24
- STRICTUAI (363), 15 - HDF5 (702), 24
- STPFLG (366), 15 - H5NORDOF(730), 24
- QRMETH (370), 15 - OBEAMS (725), 25
- PARAMCHK (372), 16 - OLDCCONE (726), 25
- TZEROMAX (373), 16 - METS2S (727), 25
- NOLIN (386), 16 - DMP (728), 25
- KRYLOV1 (387), 16 - N2SDOF (729), 25
- KRYLOV2 (388), 16 - (738), 26
- KRYLOV3 (389), 16 - H5MTX (739), 26
- KRYLOV4 (390), 17 - H5MDL (740), 26
- KRYLOV5 (391), 17 - (746), 26
- BARMASS (398), 17 - ACCSDLSZ(747), 26
- DPBLKTOL (402), 17 - H5GM34 (751), 26
- OP2NEW (403), 17 - UDEFGRID(753), 26
- DEF_DENS (408), 18 - CNTBACK(758), 27
- DEF_TECO (410), 18 - OP2NEW(761), 27
- DEF_TEIJ (411), 18 - IGNBLN(767), 27
- DEF_DAMP (412), 18 - BLNMEM(768), 27
- OPTCOD (413), 18 - OPENFSI(776), 28
3
File Management Statements  Key to Descriptions, 30
 The File Management Section (FMS), 31
 File Management Statement Summary, 31
 File Management Statement Descriptions, 32
Main Index
 File Management Statements, 36
- $, 36 - DBUNLOAD, 74
- ACQUIRE, 37 - DBUPDATE, 76
- ASSIGN, 38 - DEFINE, 77
- CONNECT, 46 - ENDJOB, 80
- DBCLEAN, 50 - EXPAND, 81
- DBDICT, 51 - INCLUDE, 83
- DBDIR, 65 - INIT, 84
- DBFIX, 66 - MEMLIST, 88
- DBLOAD, 67 - PROJ, 89
- DBLOCATE, 70 - RESTART, 90
- DBSETDEL, 73
4
Executive Control Statements  Key to Descriptions, 94
 Executive Control Section, 95
 Executive Control Statement Summary, 95
 Executive Control Statement Descriptions, 96
- $, 97 - ID, 125
- ALTER, 98 - INCLUDE, 126
- APP, 101 - LINK, 127
- CEND, 102 - MALTER, 129
- COMPILE, 103 - MODEL_CHECK, 133
- COMPILER, 107 - SOL, 136
- DIAG, 108 - SOL 600,ID, 139
- DOMAINSOLVER, 112 - SOL 700,ID, 158
- ECHO, 119 - SPARSESOLVER, 170
- ENDALTER, 120 - TIME, 175
- GEOMCHECK, 121
5
Case Control Commands  Key to Descriptions, 178
 The Case Control Section, 179
 Case Control Command Descriptions, 179
 Case Control Command Summary, 181
 Subcase Definition, 181
 Data Selection, 182
 Output Selection, 187
 Superelement Control, 191
 Miscellaneous, 192
 Case Control Commands, 193
- $, 193 - ACTRIM (Case), 204
- $S700, 194 - ADACT (Case), 205
- A2GG (Case), 196 - ADAMSMNF* (Case), 206
- ACCELERATION (Case), 197 - ADAPT (Case), 216
- ACFPMRESULT (Case), 200 - AECONFIG (Case), 217
- ACPOWER (Case), 202 - AERCONFIG (Case), 218
- ACTIVAT (Case), 203 - AEROF (Case), 219
Main Index
- AESYMXY (Case), 220 - ENTHALPY (Case), 307
- AESYMXZ (Case), 221 - EQUILIBRIUM (Case), 308
- AEUXREF (Case), 222 - ERP (Case), 309
- ANALYSIS (Case), 223 - ESE (Case), 312
- APRESSURE (Case), 231 - EXPORTLD (Case), 315
- AUTOSPC (Case), 232 - EXTDRIN (Case), 317
- AUXCASE (Case), 235 - EXTDROUT(Case), 326
- AUXMODEL (Case), 236 - EXTSEOUT (Case), 328
- AVLEXB (Case), 237 - FATIGUE (Case), 340
- AXISYMMETRIC (Case), 243 - FBODYLD (Case), 346
- B2GG (Case), 244 - FEMCHECK (Case), 347
- B2PP (Case), 245 - FLSFSEL (Case), 348
- BC (Case), 246 - FLSPOUT (Case), 350
- BC (Case), 247 - FLSTCNT (Case), 353
- BCHANGE (Case), 248 - FLUX (Case), 355
- BCONCHK (Case), 249 - FMETHOD (Case), 356
- BCONTACT (Case), 250 - FORCE (Case), 357
- BCONTACT (Case), 254 - FREQUENCY (Case), 360
- BCMOVE (Case), 257 - FRF (Case), 361
- BEGIN BULK (Case), 258 - GPFORCE (Case), 377
- BENDL(Case), 261 - GPKE (Case), 379
- BOUTPUT (Case), 263 - GPRSORT (Case), 380
- BSQUEAL (Case), 264 - GPSDCON (Case), 381
- CAMPBELL (Case), 265 - GPSTRAIN (Case), 382
- CLOAD (Case), 266 - GPSTRESS (Case), 383
- CMETHOD (Case), 267 - GROUNDCHECK (Case), 384
- CMSENRGY (Case), 268 - GUST (Case), 386
- CSSCHD (Case), 271 - GVECTOR (Case), 387
- DATAREC (Case), 272 - HADAPT (Case), 388
- DBSAVE (Case), 273 - HARMONICS (Case), 389
- DEACTEL (Case), 275 - HDOT (Case), 390
- DEFORM (Case), 276 - HISTOGRAM (Case), 391
- DESGLB (Case), 277 - HOUTPUT (Case), 393
- DESMOD (Case), 278 - HTFLOW (Case), 394
- DESOBJ (Case), 279 - IC (Case), 395
- DESSUB (Case), 280 - ICF (Case), 397
- DESVAR (Case), 281 - INCLUDE (Case), 399
- DISPLACEMENT (Case), 282 - INTENSITY (Case), 400
- DIVERG (Case), 287 - IRLOAD (Case), 401
- DLOAD (Case), 288 - K2GG (Case), 402
- DRSPAN (Case), 289 - K2PP (Case), 403
- DSAPRT (Case), 290 - K42GG (Case), 404
- DSYM (Case), 292 - LABEL (Case), 405
- ECHO (Case), 293 - LINE (Case), 406
- EDE (Case), 295 - LOAD (Case), 407
- EKE (Case), 297 - LOADNAME (Case), 408
- ELSDCON (Case), 299 - LOADSET (Case), 409
- ELSENS (Case), 300 - M2GG (Case), 411
- ELSUM (Case), 302 - M2PP (Case), 412
- ENDSTEP (Case), 304 - MASSSET (Case), 413
- ENDTIME (Case), 305 - MASTER (Case), 414
- ENDMODULE (Case), 306 - MAXLINES (Case), 416
Main Index
- MAXMIN (Case), 417 - RESVEC (Case), 515
- MAXMIN (Case), 419 - RGYRO (Case), 517
- MAXMIN(DEF) (Case), 421 - RIGID (Case), 518
- MCFRACTION (Case), 424 - RSDAMP (Case), 520
- MCHSTAT (Case), 427 - SACCELERATION (Case), 521
- MEFFMASS (Case), 428 - SDAMPING (Case), 522
- METHOD (Case), 430 - SDISPLACEMENT (Case), 523
- MFLUID (Case), 431 - SEALL (Case), 524
- MFREQUENCY (Case), 432 - SEDAMP (Case), 525
- MODALKE (Case), 436 - SEDR (Case), 526
- MODALSE (Case), 440 - SEDV (Case), 527
- MODES (Case), 444 - SEEXCLUDE (Case), 528
- MODESELECT (Case), 445 - SEFINAL (Case), 530
- MODTRAK (Case), 451 - SEKREDUCE (Case), 531
- MONCARL (Case), 452 - SELGENERATE (Case), 532
- MONITOR (Case), 453 - SELREDUCE (Case), 533
- MPC (Case), 455 - SEMGENERATE (Case), 534
- MPCFORCES (Case), 456 - SEMREDUCE (Case), 535
- MPRES (Case), 458 - SERESP (Case), 536
- NLHARM (Case), 459 - SET (Case), 537
- NLIC (Case), 460 - SETP (Case), 539
- NLLOAD (Case), 462 - SETS DEFINITION (Case), 540
- NLOPRM (Case), 463 - SKIP (Case), 541
- NLPARM (Case), 467 - SMETHOD (Case), 542
- NLRESTART (Case), 468 - SOLUTION (Case), 543
- NLSTEP (Case), 471 - SPC (Case), 544
- NLSTRESS (Case), 472 - SPCFORCES (Case), 545
- NONLINEAR (Case), 473 - SPLINOUT (Case), 548
- NOUTPUT (Case), 474 - STATSUB (Case), 549
- NSM (Case), 475 - STEP (Case), 551
- NVELOCITY (Case), 476 - STOCHASTICS (Case), 552
- OFREQUENCY (Case), 478 - STRAIN (Case), 553
- OLOAD (Case), 480 - STRESS (Case), 556
- OMODES (Case), 483 - STRFIELD (Case), 559
- OTIME (Case), 485 - SUBCASE (Case), 560
- OUTPUT (Case), 487 - SUBCOM (Case), 561
- OUTRCV (Case), 488 - SUBSEQ (Case), 563
- P2G (Case), 489 - SUBSEQ1 (Case), 564
- PACCELERATION (Case), 490 - SUBSTEP (Case), 565
- PAGE (Case), 491 - SUBTITLE (Case), 567
- PARAM (Case), 492 - SUPER (Case), 568
- PARTN (Case), 493 - SUPORT1 (Case), 570
- PFGRID (Case), 494 - SVECTOR (Case), 571
- PEAKOUT (Case), 496 - SVELOCITY (Case), 572
- PFMODE (Case), 497 - SYM (Case), 573
- PFPANEL (Case), 501 - SYMCOM (Case), 574
- PLOTID (Case), 505 - SYMSEQ (Case), 575
- POST (Case), 506 - TEMPERATURE (Case), 576
- PRESSURE (Case), 510 - TERMIN (Case), 580
- RANDOM (Case), 511 - TFL (Case), 581
- RCROSS (Case), 512 - THERMAL (Case), 582
- REPCASE (Case), 514 - TITLE (Case), 583
Main Index
- TRIM (Case), 584 - VCCT (Case), 592
- TRIMF (Case), 585 - VECTOR (Case), 593
- TRIMGRP (Case), 587 - VELOCITY (Case), 594
- TSTEP (Case), 588 - VINTENSITY (Case), 597
- (Case), 589 - VUGRID (Case), 599
- TSTRU (Case), 590 - WEIGHTCHECK (Case), 600
- UNGLUE (Case), 591 - WETSENS (Case), 602
 Case Control Applicability Tables, 604
 X-Y PLOT Commands, 618
 X-Y Output Command Summary, 618
- ALLEDGE TICS, 622 - XTITLE, 656
- BALL EDGE TICS, 623 - XYPAPLOT, 657
- BLEFT TICS, 624 - XYPEAK, 658
- BRIGHT TICS, 625 - XYPLOT, 659
- CAMERA, 626 - XYPRINT, 665
- CLEAR, 627 - XYPUNCH, 666
- CSCALE, 628 - XVALUE PRINT SKIP, 667
- CURVELINESYMBOL, 629 - YAXIS, 668
- DENSITY, 630 - YBDIVISIONS, 669
- LEFT TICS, 631 - YBINTERCEPT, 670
- LONG, 632 - YBGRID LINES, 671
- LOWER TICS, 633 - YBLOG, 672
- PENSIZE, 634 - YBMAX, 673
- PLOTTER, 635 - YBMIN, 674
- RIGHT TICS, 636 - YBTITLE, 675
- SEPLOT, 637 - YBVALUE PRINT SKIP, 676
- SEUPPLOT, 638 - YDIVISIONS, 677
- TALL EDGE TICS, 639 - YINTERCEPT, 678
- TCURVE, 640 - YGRID LINES, 679
- TLEFT TICS, 641 - YLOG, 680
- TRIGHT TICS, 642 - YMAX, 681
- UPPER TICS, 643 - YMIN, 682
- XAXIS, 644 - YPAPER, 683
- XBAXIS, 645 - YTAXIS, 684
- XBGRID LINES, 646 - YTDIVISIONS, 685
- XDIVISIONS, 647 - YTGRID LINES, 686
- XGRID LINES, 648 - YTINTERCEPT, 687
- XINTERCEPT, 649 - YTITLE, 688
- XLOG, 650 - YTLOG, 689
- XMAX, 651 - YTMAX, 690
- XMIN, 652 - YTMIN, 691
- XPAPER, 653 - YTTITLE, 692
- XTAXIS, 654 - YTVALUE PRINT SKIP, 693
- XTGRID LINES, 655 - YVALUE PRINT SKIP, 694
 OUTPUT(POST) Commands, 695
- SURFACE, 695 - VOLUME, 698
 OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands, 699
- AXES, 701 - CSCALE, 706
- CAMERA, 703 - DISTORTION, 707
- CONTOUR, 704 - FIND, 708
Main Index
- MAXIMUM DEFORM, 710 - PROJECTION, 726
- OCULAR SEPARATION, 711 - PTITLE, 727
- ORIGIN, 712 - SCALE, 728
- ORTHOGRAPHIC, etc., 713 - SEPLOT, 729
- PAPER SIZE, 714 - SET, 730
- PEN, 715 - SEUPPLOT, 733
- PERSPECTIVE, 716 - STEREOSCOPIC, 734
- PLOT, 717 - VANTAGE POINT, 735
- PLOTTER, 725 - VIEW, 736
6
Parameters  Parameter Descriptions, 740
- ACEXTMTD, 740 - AUTOSPCR, 751
- ACEXTSET, 740 - AUTOSPRT, 751
- ACOUT, 740 - BAILOUT, 751
- ACOWEAK, 740 - BEAMBEA, 751
- ACSYM, 741 - BEIGRED, 752
- ACTDMP, 741 - BIGER, BIGER1, BIGER2, BIGER3, 752
- ACTSMP, 741 - BUCKLE, 752
- ADJMETH, 741 - CASIEMA, 752
- ADMPOST, 742 - CASPIV, 752
- ADPCON, 742 - CB1, CB2, 753
- ADSTAT, 742 - CDIF, 753
- AERODOF, 742 - CDITER, 753
- AESDISC, 743 - CDPCH, 753
- AESMAXIT, 743 - CDPRT, 753
- AESMETH, 743 - CFDIAGP, 754
- AESRNDM, 743 - CFRANDEL, 754
- AESTOL, 743 - CHECKOUT, 754
- AGGROT, 743 - CK1, CK2, 755
- ALPHA1, ALPHA2, 744 - CK3, 755
- ALPHA1FL, ALPHA2FL, 745 - CLOSE, 756
- ALTRED, 745 - CM1, CM2, 756
- ALTSHAPE, 746 - COMPMATT, 756
- ARBMASP, 746 - CONFAC, 757
- ARBMFEM, 746 - COSUBCYC, 757
- ARBMNOW, 746 - COSUBMAX, 757
- ARBMPS, 746 - COUPMASS, 758
- ARBMSS, 746 - CP1, CP2, 758
- ARBMSTYP, 747 - CQC, 758
- ARF, 747 - CURV, 758
- ARS, 747 - CURVPLOT, 761
- , 747 - CWDIAGP, 762
- ASCOUP, 747 - CWRANDEL, 762
- ASING, 747 - DBALL, 762
- AUNITS, 747 - DBCCONV, 763
- AUTOADJ, 747 - DBCDIAG, 763
- AUTOGOUT, 749 - DBCOVWRT, 763
- AUTOMSET, 749 - DBDICT, 763
- AUTOQSET, 750 - DBDN, 763
- AUTOSPC, 751 - DBDRPRJ, 764
Main Index
- DBDRVER, 764 - FACTOR, 780
- DBEXT, 764 - FASTFR, 781
- DBRCV, 764 - FBATOLR, 781
- DBUP, 764 - FBLEND, 781
- DDRMM, 764 - FDRLDS, 782
- DELCLUMP, 764 - FIXEDB, 783
- DESPCH, 765 - FKSYMFAC, 783
- DESPCH1, 765 - FLEXINCR, 784
- DFREQ, 766 - FLUIDMP, 784
- DIROUT, 766 - FLUIDNE, 784
- DOPT, 766 - FLUIDSE, 785
- DPEPS, 766 - FMULTI, 785
- DPHFLG, 766 - FOLLOWK, 785
- DSNOKD, 767 - FRQDEPO, 785
- DSO, 767 - FULLSEDR, 786
- DSZERO, 768 - FZERO, 786
- DV3PASS, 768 - G, GFL, 786
- DYNSPCF, 768 - GEOMU, 786
- EIGFILT, 768 - GPECT, 786
- ENFMETH, 768 - GRADMESH, 786
- ENFMOTN, 769 - GRAVSET, 787
- EPPRT, 770 - GRDPNT, 787
- EPSILONT, 770 - GUSTAERO, 788
- EPZERO, 770 - GYROAVG, 788
- ERPC, 771 - HEATCMD, 788
- ERPREFDB, 771 - HEATSTAT, 789
- ERPRHO, 771 - HFREQ, HFREQFL, 789
- ERPRLF, 771 - HTOCITS, 789
- ERROR, 771 - HTOCPRT, 790
- ESLFSAV, 771 - HTOCTOL, 790
- ESLMOVE, 771 - HTSYM, 790
- ESLLCOMP, 772 - ICOPT, 790
- ESLMPC1, 772 - IFP, 790
- ESLOPTEX, 772 - INREL, 790
- ESLPRT, 773 - INRLM, 791
- ESLPRT1, 773 - IRES, 791
- ESLRCF,user_rc_file, 773 - ITAPE, 791
- ESLTOPCV, 774 - IUNIT, 791
- ESLUNT2, 774 - JWLDET, 791
- ESLUNT1, 774 - KDAMP, KDAMPFL, 792
- EST, 774 - KDIAG, 792
- EULBND, 774 - K6ROT, 792
- EULSTRES, 775 - LANGLE, 793
- EUSUBCYC, 776 - LDSUM, 793
- EXCLUDE, 776 - LFREQ, LFREQFL, 794
- EXTDR , 777 - LGDISP, 794
- EXTDROUT , 777 - LMFACT, 794
- EXTDRUNT, 777 - LMODES, LMODESFL, 795
- EXTOUT, 777 - LOADU, 795
- EXTRCV, 780 - LOOPID, 795
- EXTUNIT, 780 - LSTRN, 796
- , 780 - , 796
Main Index
- MACH, 796 - MARCMPCC, 814
- MARALPHA, 796 - MARCMPII, 815
- MARAUTOC, 797 - MARCND99, 815
- MARBATCH, 797 - MARCNOER, 815
- MARBK105, 798 - MARCOFFT, 816
- MARBK106, 798 - MARCONTF, 816
- MARC4401, 798 - MARCOOCC, 816
- MARC7601, 798 - MARCOPT, 817
- MARCASUM, 799 - MARCOSET, 817
- MARCAUTO, 799 - MARCOTIM, 818
- MARCAXEL, 800 - MARCOUTR, 818
- MARCBEAM, 800 - MARCPARR, 818
- MARCBODY, 801 - MARCPENT, 819
- MARCBUSH, 801 - MARCPINN, 819
- MARCCBAR, 801 - MARCPLAS, n, 819
- MARCCENT, 802 - MARCPOS, 820
- MARCCON2, 802 - MARCPOST, 820
- MARCCON3, 802 - MARCPR99, 821
- MARCCPY, 802 - MARCPRN, 821
- MARCDEF, 803 - MARCPRNG, 821
- MARCDILT, 804 - MARCPRNR, 821
- MARCDIS2, 804 - MARCPROG, 822
- MARCDIS3, 804 - MARCRACC, 822
- MARCDIS4, 804 - MARCRBAL, 823
- MARCDMIG,N, 805 - MARCRBAR, 823
- MARCDUPE, 805 - MARCRBE2, 823
- MARCDYND, 805 - MARCRBE3, 824
- MARCEKND, 806 - MARCREVR, 824
- MARCEXIT, 806 - MARCREVRX, 824
- MARCFEAT,N, 806 - MARCRIGD, 825
- MARCFILi, 806 - MARCSAME, 825
- MARCFRIC, 807 - MARCSCLR, 826
- MARCGAPD, D, 807 - MARCSETS, 826
- MARCGAPN, ID, 808 - MARCSETT, 827
- MARCGAPP, 808 - MARCSINC, 827
- MARCGAUS, 808 - MARCSIZ3, Value, 827
- MARCGLUE, 808 - MARCSIZ4, Value, 827
- MARCGRAV, 809 - MARCSIZ5, Value, 827
- MARCHOST, 809 - MARCSIZ6, Value, 828
- MARCIAMN, 809 - MARCSLHT, 828
- MARCINTC, 810 - MARCSOLV, 828
- MARCINTF, 810 - MARCSPCC, 829
- MARCITER, 810 - MARCSTIFF, Time, 829
- MARCL001, 811 - MARCSTOP, 829
- MARCLOWE, 812 - MARCSUMY, 829
- MARCLUMP, 812 - MARCT16, 830
- MARCMAT2, 812 - MARCT19, 831
- MARCMAT3, 812 - MARCTABL, 831
- MARCMATT, 813 - MARCTEDF, 831
- MARCMEM, Value, 813 - MARCTEDN, 832
- MARCMID3, 814 - MARCTEMP, 832
- MARCMNF, 814 - MARCTETT, 832
Main Index
- MARCTIEC, 833 - MDK4OPT, 851
- MARCTOL, 833 - MDOPT14, 851
- MARCTOTD, 833 - MDOTM, 851
- MARCTOTL, 833 - MDOTMFAC, 851
- MARCTOTT, 834 - MDREDOPT, 851
- MARCTUBE, 834 - MDUMLOAD, 852
- MARCTVL, Value, 834 - MECHFIL, 852
- MARCUSUB, chr, 835 - MECHFIX, 852
- MARCVERS, 835 - MECHPRT, 852
- MARCWDIS, 835 - MESH, 852
- MARCWELD, 836 - METHCMRS, 853
- MARELSTO, 836 - MEXTRNOD, 853
- MARGPFEL, 836 - MEXTSEE,N, 853
- MARGPFOR, 836 - MFASTCMP, 853
- MARFACEA, 837 - MFEA5701, 854
- MARFACEB, 837 - MFORCOR1, 854
- MARFATAL, 837 - MFORDUPE, 854
- MARHEATM, 837 - MFSKIPPP, 855
- MARHTPRT, 838 - MGAPINIT, 855
- MARIBOOC, 838 - MGLUETOL, 855
- MARIPROJ, 838 - MHEATSHL, 855
- MARLDCMB, 838 - MHEATUNT, 856
- MARLDRMV, 839 - MHEMIPIX, 856
- MARMPCHK, 839 - MHOUBOLT, 856
- MARMPCID, 840 - MHRED, 856
- MARMTLCK, 840 - MICRO , 857
- MARNOCID, 841 - MINCLDSB, 857
- MARNOSET, Name, 841 - MINIGOA, 857
- MAROFSET, 841 - MINRECCC, N, 858
- MARPLANE, 841 - MINSOUTT, 858
- MARPROCS, 842 - MINVASHF, 858
- MARRBAR2, 842 - MINVCITR, 858
- MARROUTT, 842 - MINVCSHF, 858
- MARSHRII, 843 - MINVCTOL, 858
- MARTET10, 843 - MINVFMAX, 859
- MARTETIN, 844 - MINVNMOD, 859
- MARUPDAT, 844 - MLDALLOW, 859
- MARVFCUT, 845 - MLSTRAIN, 859
- MAUTOSPC, 845 - MLSTRAN2, 860
- MAXAPL, 845 - MMAT2ANI, 860
- MAXDAMP, 845 - MMBOLTUS, 861
- MAXIREVV, 846 - MMEMDETT, 861
- MAXLP, 847 - MMFIL, 862
- MAXRATIO, 847 - MNASTLDS, 862
- MBENDCAP, 847 - MODACC, 863
- MCNLPARM, 848 - MODEL, 863
- MCON2D3D, 848 - MOFFCORE, 863
- MCORDUPD, 848 - MOP2TITL, 864
- MCSSHLCK, 848 - MOUTRCOR, 864
- MCSSHORR, 849 - MP1SET, 864
- MDAREAMD, 850 - MPCX, 864
- MDEFSEPP, 850 - MPERMPRT, 865
Main Index
- MPTUNIT, 865 - MRMAT8A3, Value, 882
- MQUATERN, 865 - MRMAT8E3, Value, 882
- MRADUNIT, 865 - MRMAT8N1, Value, 882
- MRAFFLOR, N, 866 - MRMAT8N3, Value, 882
- MRAFFLOT, N, 866 - MRMAXISZ, 882
- MRAFFLOW, Name, 866 - MRMAXNUM, 882
- MRALIAS ID (MALIAS02, MALIAS03, etc.), - MRMEMSUM, 882
866 - MRMTXKGG, Name, 883
- MRALLOCG, 867 - MRMTXNAM, Name, 883
- MRALLOCS, 867 - MRNOCOMP, 883
- MRBE3SNG, 867 - MRNOCOR, 884
- MRBEAMB, 868 - MRNOECHO, 884
- MRBEPARM, IJK, 868 - MRORINTS, 884
- MRBDYCVT, 869 - MROUTLAY, 885
- MRBIGMEM, 869 - MRPARALL, 886
- MRBUKMTH, 869 - MRPBUSHT, 886
- MRC2DADD, 870 - MRPIDCHK, 887
- MRCKBODY, 870 - MRPELAST, 887
- MRCKLOAD, 870 - MRPLOAD4, 887
- MRCONADD, 870 - MRPLOD4R, 888
- MRCONRES, 871 - MRPLSUPD, 888
- MRCONTAB, 871 - MRPOISCK, 888
- MRCONUSE, 872 - MRPREFER, 889
- MRCONVER, 872 - MRPRSFAC, 889
- MRCOORDS, 872 - MRPSHCMP, 890
- MRCQUAD4, 873 - MRPSHELL, 890
- MRCTRIA3, 873 - MRRBE3TR, 891
- MRCWANGL, 873 - MRRCFILE, RCF, 891
- MRDELTTT, 873 - MRRELNOD, 892
- MRDISCMB, 874 - MRRSTOP2, 892
- MRDUPMAT, 875 - MRSCMOD, 892
- MRDYNOLD, 875 - MRSETNA1, N, 893
- MREIGMTH, 875 - MRSETNA2, M, 893
- MREL1103, 876 - MRSETNAM, N, 893
- MRELRB, 876 - MRSPAWN2, CMD, 894
- MRELSPCD, 876 - MRSPLINE, 894
- MRENUELE, 877 - MRSPRING, 894
- MRENUGRD, 877 - MRSPRVER, 895
- MRENUMBR, 878 - MRSTEADY, 895
- MRESTALL, 878 - MRT16STP, N, 895
- MRESULTS, 878 - MRTABLIM, 895
- MREVPLST, 879 - MRTABLS1, 896
- MRFINITE, 879 - MRTABLS2, 897
- MRFOLLOW, 879 - MRTABPRC, 897
- MRFOLLO2, 879 - MRTFINAL, 897
- MRFOLOW1, 879 - MRTHREAD, 897
- MRFOLOW3, 880 - MRTIMING, 898
- MRFOLOW4, 880 - MRTSHEAR, 898
- MRGAPUSE, 880 - MRUSDATA, 898
- MRHERRMN, 881 - MRVFIMPL, 899
- MRHYPMID, 881 - MRV09V11, 899
- MRITTYPE,, 881 - MSIZOVRD, 899
Main Index
- MSOLMEM, MBYTE, 900 - NOMSGSTR, 915
- MSPCCCHK, 900 - NONCUP, 915
- MSPCKEEP, 900 - NQSET, 915
- MSPEEDCB, 901 - NUMOUT, NUMOUT1, NUMOUT2,
- MSPEEDCW, 901 NUMOUT3, 915
- MSPEEDOU, 901 - OELMOPT, 916
- MSPEEDP4, 901 - OELMSET , 916
- MSPEEDPS, 902 - OG, 916
- MSPEEDSE, 902 - OGEOM, 916
- MSPEEDS2, 902 - OGRDOPT, 916
- MSPEEDSH, 903 - OGRDSET, 916
- MSPLINC0, 903 - OLDSEQ, 917
- MSTFBEAM, 903 - OLDWELD, 919
- MSTRFREE, 903 - OMACHPR, 919
- MSTTDYNE, 904 - OMAXR, 919
- MTABIGNR, 904 - OMID, 919
- MTABLD1M, 905 - OMSGLVL, 919
- MTABLD1T, 905 - OPCHSET, 920
- MTEMPCHK, 905 - OPGEOM, 920
- MTEMPDWN, 906 - OP2GM34, 920
- MTET4HYP, 906 - OPGTKG, 920
- MTLD1SID, 907 - OPPHIB, 920
- MUALLUDS, 907 - OPPHIPA, 920
- MULRFORC, 907 - OPTEXIT, 920
- MUMPSOLV, 907 - OPTION, 921
- MUSBKEEP, 908 - OSETELE, 921
- MVERMOON, 908 - OSETGRD, 921
- MWINQUOT, 908 - OSWELM, 922
- MWLDGSGA, 908 - OSWPPT, 922
- MXICODE0, 909 - OUGCORD, 922
- MXLAGM1, 909 - OUGSPLIT, 922
- NASPRT, 909 - OUNIT1, 923
- NDAMP, NDAMPM, 910 - OUNIT2, 923
- NEWMARK, 911 - OUTOPT, 923
- NFDOPTS, 911 - PACINFID, 923
- NHPLUS, 911 - PANELMP, 923
- NINTPTS, 911 - PATPLUS, 923
- NLAYERS, 911 - PATVER, 923
- NLHTLS, 912 - PCOMPRM, 923
- NLHTOL, 912 - PDRMSG, 924
- NLHTWK, 912 - PEDGEP, 924
- NLMAX, 912 - PEMMAPC, 924
- NLMIN, 912 - PEMNPART, 925
- NLPACK, 912 - PEMSKIN, 925
- NLTOL, 913 - PENFN, 925
- NMLOOP, 914 - PERCENT, 925
- NMNLFRQ, 914 - PH2OUT, 925
- NOCOMPS, 914 - PKRSP, 926
- NODCMP, 914 - PLTMSG, 926
- NOELOF, 914 - POST, 926
- NOELOP, 915 - PARAM,POST,-7, 931
- NOGPF, 915 - POSTEXT, 932
Main Index
- POSTADF, 932 - SOFTEXIT, 949
- POSTU, 933 - SOLADJC, 949
- PREFDB, 933 - SOLID, 950
- PRGPST, 933 - SPARSEDM, 950
- PRINT, 933 - SPARSEDR, 950
- PROUT, 933 - SPARSEPH, 951
- PRPA , 933 - SPDRRAT, 951
- PRPJ, 933 - SPCGEN, 951
- PRPHIVZ, 933 - SPDMRAT, 951
- PRTMAXIM, 934 - SQSETID, 951
- PRTRESLT, 934 - SRCOMPS, 951
- PSENPCH, 934 - SRTELTYP, 952
- PVALINIT, 934 - SRTOPT, 952
- Q, 934 - START, 952
- RADMOD, 934 - STEPFCT, 952
- RBSETPRT, 936 - STEPFCTL, 952
- RESLTOPT, 936 - STIME, 952
- RESVEC, 936 - STRUCTMP, 953
- RFORSET, 936 - SUBCASID, 953
- RHOCP, 936 - SUBID, 953
- RIMINTP, 936 - SUPAERO, 953
- RKSCHEME , 936 - SUPDOF, 953
- RMSINT, 937 - SUPER, 954
- ROHYDRO , 937 - TABID, 954
- ROMULTI , 938 - TABS, 954
- ROSTR , 939 - TDAMP, 954
- ROTSEKE, 939 - TESTNEG, 954
- RSPECTRA, 939 - TFSYMFAC, 955
- RSPRINT, 940 - TINY, 955
- RSTTEMP, 940 - TOLRSC, 955
- S1, S1G, S1M, 940 - TOPOCONV, 956
- S1AG,S1AM, 942 - TRMBIM, 956
- SCALEMAS, 942 - TSTATIC, 956
- SCRSPEC, 942 - UGASC, 956
- SDRPOPT, 943 - UNSYMF, 957
- SEKD, 943 - UNSYMKB, 957
- SEMAP, SEMAPOPT, SEMAPPRT, 943 - UPDTBSH, 957
- SENSUOO, 945 - USETPRT, 957
- SEP1XOVR, 945 - USETSEL, 958
- SEQOUT, 945 - USETSTRi, 958
- SERST, 945 - VARPHI, 959
- SESDAMP, 946 - VELCUT , 959
- SESEF, 946 - VMOPT, 960
- SHIFT1, 946 - VREF, 960
- SHLDAMP, 947 - VUELJUMP, VUGJUMP, 960
- SIGMA, 947 - VUBEAM,
- SKINOUT, 947 VUHEXA, VUPENTA, VUQUAD4, VUTETR
- SKPAMP, 947 A, VUTRIA3, 960
- SLOOPID, 947 - WHIRLOPT, 961
- SMALLQ, 948 - WMODAL, 961
- SNORM, 948 - WRBEAMB, 961
- SNORMPRT, 949 - WTMAS600, 962
Main Index
- WTMASS, 962 - XFLAG, 963
- W3, W4, W3FL, W4FL, 962 - XYMPCH, 964
- WR3, WR4, WRH, 963 - XYUNIT, n, 965
- XFACT, 963 - ZROCMAS, 965
- XFACTX, 963 - ZROVEC, 965
 Parameter Applicability Tables, 966
7
Item Codes  Item Code Description, 1000
 Element Stress (or Strain) Item Codes, 1001
- CAXIF2 (47), 1002 - , 1016
- CAXlF3 (48), 1002 - , 1016
- CAXIF4 (49), 1002 - , 1016
- CAXISYM (241), 1003 - , 1016
- CBAR (34), 1003 - , 1016
- CBAR (100), 1004 - , 1016
- CBAR (238), 1004 - , 1016
- CBEAM (2), 1005 - , 1016
- CBEAM (94), 1005 - , 1016
- CBEAM (239), 1005 - , 1016
- CBEAM3 (184), 1006 - , 1016
- CBEND (69), 1007 - , 1016
- CBUSH (102), 1007 - , 1016
- CBUSH1D (40), 1008 - , 1016
- CCONEAX (35), 1008 - CQUAD4 (33), 1016
- CDUM3, 1009 - CQUAD4 (90), 1017
- CDUM9 (55-61), 1009 - CQUAD42 (95), 1017
- CELAS1 (11), 1009 - CQUAD4 (144), 1018
- CELAS2 (12), 1009 - CQUAD8 (64), 1019
- CELAS3 (13), 1009 - CQUAD82 (96), 1019
- CGAP (86), 1009 - CQUADFD (201), 1020
- CHEXA (67), 1009 - CQUADFD (208), 1020
- CHEXA (93), 1010 - CQUADR (82), 1020
- CHEXAFD (202), 1011 - CQUADR (172), 1020
- CHEXAFD (207), 1011 - CQUADR (232), 1020
- CIFHEX (65), 1011 - CQUADX(18), 1021
- CIFPENT (66), 1012 - CQUADXFD (214), 1021
- CIFQDX (73), 1012 - CQUADXFD (215), 1022
- CIFQUAD (63), 1012 - CROD (1), 1022
- CONROD (10), 1013 - CROD (89), 1022
- CONROD (92), 1013 - CSHEAR (4), 1022
- CPENTA (68), 1013 - CSLOT3 (50), 1022
- CPENTA (91), 1014 - CSLOT4 (51), 1022
- CPENTAFD (204), 1014 - CTETRA (39), 1023
- CPENTAFD (209), 1015 - CTETRA (85), 1024
- CPYRAM (242), 1015 - CTETRAFD (205), 1024
- CPYRAM (242), 1016 - CTETRAFD (210), 1024
- , 1016 - CTRIA3 (74), 1025
- , 1016 - CTRIA32 (97), 1025
- , 1016 - CTRIA3 (88), 1025
Main Index
- CTRIA6 (75), 1025 - (200), 1028
- CTRIA62 (98), 1025 - VUHEXA (145), 1028
- CTRIAFD (206), 1025 - VUPENTA (146), 1028
- CTRIAFD (211), 1026 - VUTETRA (147), 1028
- CTRlAR (70), 1026 - VUHEXA (145), 1029
- CTRIAR (173), 1026 - VUPENTA (146), 1029
- CTRIAR (233), 1026 - VUTETRA (147), 1029
- CTRIAX(17), 1026 - VUQUAD (189)
- CTRIAX6 (53), 1026 VUTRIA (190), 1030
- CTRIAXFD (212), 1027 - VUQUAD (189)
- CTRIAXFD (213), 1027 VUTRIA (190), 1031
- CTUBE (3), 1027 - VUQUAD (189)
- CTUBE (87), 1027 VUTRIA (190), 1032
- CWELDP, 1028 - VUQUAD (189)
- (118), 1028 VUTRIA (190), 1034
- CWELDC, 1028 - VUQUAD (189)
- (117), 1028 VUTRIA (190), 1035
- CWELD, 1028 - VUBEAM (191), 1036
 Element Force Item Codes, 1038
- CBAR (34), 1038 - CQUAD8 (64), 1044
- CBAR (100), 1038 - CQUAD82 (96), 1045
- CBEAM (2), 1039 - CQUADR (82), 1045
- CBEAM3 (184), 1039 - CQUADR (235), 1045
- CBEND (69), 1040 - CROD (1), 1046
- CBUSH (102), 1041 - CSHEAR (4), 1046
- CCONEAX - CTRIA3 (74), 1047
(35), 1041 - CTRIA32 (97), 1047
- CDAMP1 (20), 1041 - CTRlA6 (75), 1047
- CDAMP2 (21), 1041 - CTRlA62 (98), 1047
- CDAMP3 (22), 1041 - CTRIAR (70), 1047
- CDAMP4 (23), 1041 - CTRIAR (236), 1048
- CDUM3 thru CDUM9 (55 - 61), 1041 - CTUBE (3), 1048
- CELAS1 (11), 1042 - CVlSC (24), 1048
- CELAS2 (12), 1042 - CWELDP (118), 1048
- CELAS3 (13), 1042 - CWELDC (117), 1048
- CELAS4 (14), 1042 - CWELD (200), 1048
- CGAP (38), 1042 - VUQUAD (189)
- CONROD (10), 1042 VUTRIA (190), 1048
- CQUAD4 (33), 1042 - VUQUAD (189)
- CQUAD4 (95), 1043 VUTRIA (190), 1049
- CQUAD4 (144), 1043 - VUBEAM (191), 1050
 Fluid Virtual Mass Pressure Item Codes, 1052
 2D Slideline and 3D Surface Contact Item Codes, 1053
- CSLIFID (116), 1053 - 203, 1054
- 203, 1053
 Element Strain Energy Item Codes, 1056
 Fatigue Item Codes, 1057
 Equivalent Radiated Power (ERP) Item Codes, 1063
Main Index
8
Degree-of-Freedom Sets  Degree-of-Freedom Set Definitions, 1066
 Degree-of-Freedom Set Bulk Data Entries, 1070
9
Bulk Data Entries  Key to Descriptions, 1072
 The Bulk Data Section, 1073
 Bulk Data Entry Descriptions, 1074
 Format of Bulk Data Entries, 1075
 Continuations, 1080
 Bulk Data Entry Summary, 1088
 Constraints and Partitioning, 1089
 Elements, 1091
 Geometry, 1100
 Loads, 1104
 Materials, 1108
 Miscellaneous, 1110
 Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600), 1116
 Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700), 1119
 Solution Control, 1129
 Entries A - B, 1135
- $, 1135 - AESCALE, 1177
- /, 1136 - AESTAT, 1178
- ABINFL, 1140 - AESURF, 1180
- ACCEL, 1142 - AESURFS, 1182
- ACCEL1, 1144 - AETRIA3, 1183
- ACCSSPT, 1145 - ALIASM, 1184
- ACLOAD, 1146 - ASET, 1186
- ACMODL, 1147 - ASET1, 1187
- ACPEMCP, 1153 - ATBACC, 1188
- ACSRCE, 1155 - ATBJNT, 1189
- ACTIVAT, 1157 - ATBSEG, 1191
- ACTRIM, 1158 - AXIC, 1192
- ADAPT, 1159 - AXIF, 1194
- ADUMi, 1162 - AXSLOT, 1196
- AECOMP, 1163 - BAROR, 1197
- AECOMPL, 1164 - BARRIER, 1199
- AEDW, 1165 - BCAUTOP, 1201
- AEFACT, 1166 - BCBDPRP, 1204
- AEFORCE, 1167 - BCBMRAD, 1210
- AEGRID, 1168 - BCBODY, 1212
- AELINK, 1169 - BCBODY, 1224
- AELIST, 1170 - BCBODY1, 1239
- AELISTC, 1171 - BCBOX, 1241
- AEPARM, 1172 - BCBZIER, 1243
- AEPRESS, 1173 - BCELIPS, 1245
- AEQUAD4, 1174 - BCGRID, 1246
- AERO, 1175 - BCHANGE, 1247
- AEROS, 1176 - BCHANGE, 1249
Main Index
- BCMATL, 1251 - BCTABLE, 1330
- BCMOVE, 1252 - BCTABL1, 1337
- BCMOVE, 1253 - BCTRIM, 1339
- BCNURB2, 1255 - BDYLIST, 1340
- BCNURBS, 1257 - BDYOR, 1341
- BCONECT, 1259 - BEADVAR, 1342
- BCONP, 1261 - BEAMOR, 1346
- BCONPRG, 1263 - BFRlC, 1348
- BCONPRG-700, 1272 - BIAS, 1349
- BCONPRP, 1277 - BJOIN, 1352
- BCONPRP-700, 1282 - BLSEG, 1354
- BCONUDS, 1283 - BNDFIX, 1356
- BCONUDS, 1285 - BNDFIX1, 1357
- BCPARA, 1287 - BNDFREE, 1359
- BCPARA, 1294 - BNDFRE1, 1360
- BCPATCH, 1300 - BNDGRID, 1362
- BCPFLG, 1301 - BOLT, 1363
- BCPROP, 1304 - BOUTPUT, 1365
- BCPROP, 1305 - BRKSQL, 1367
- BCRIGID, 1306 - BSET, 1370
- BCRGSRF, 1308 - BSET1, 1371
- BCSCAP, 1309 - BSQUEAL, 1373
- BCSEG, 1311 - BSURF, 1379
- BCTABLE, 1312 - BWIDTH, 1381
- BCTABLE - Glued Option, 1326
 Entries CA - CM, 1383
- CAABSF, 1383 - CDAMP4, 1433
- CACINF3, 1385 - CDAMP5, 1434
- CACINF4, 1386 - CDUMi, 1435
- CAERO1, 1387 - CELAS1, 1436
- CAERO2, 1389 - CELAS1D, 1437
- CAERO3, 1391 - CELAS2, 1439
- CAERO4, 1393 - CELAS2D, 1440
- CAERO5, 1395 - CELAS3, 1442
- CAMPBLL, 1399 - CELAS4, 1443
- CAXIFi, 1401 - CFAST, 1444
- CAXISYM, 1402 - CFLUIDi, 1446
- CBAR, 1403 - CGAP, 1448
- CBARAO, 1408 - CHACAB, 1450
- CBEAM, 1410 - CHACBR, 1452
- CBEAM3, 1415 - CHBDYE, 1454
- CBEND, 1418 - CHBDYG, 1458
- CBUSH, 1421 - CHBDYP, 1462
- CBUSH1D, 1425 - CHEXA, 1466
- CBUSH2D, 1426 - CIFHEX, 1470
- CCONEAX, 1427 - CIFPENT, 1472
- CDAMP1, 1428 - CIFQDX, 1474
- CDAMP1D, 1429 - CIFQUAD, 1476
- CDAMP2, 1430 - CINTC, 1478
- CDAMP2D, 1431 - CLOAD, 1479
- CDAMP3, 1432 - CMARKB2, 1480
Main Index
- CMARKN1, 1481 - CMASS4, 1485
- CMASS1, 1482 - CMREBAI, 1486
- CMASS2, 1483 - CMREBAR, 1488
- CMASS3, 1484
 Entries CO - CY, 1490
- COHESIV, 1490 - CRAC3D, 1558
- COHFRIC, 1492 - CREEP, 1562
- COMPUDS, 1493 - CROD, 1567
- CONCTL, 1496 - CSEAM, 1569
- CONM1, 1497 - CSET, 1578
- CONM2, 1498 - CSET1, 1579
- CONROD, 1500 - CSHEAR, 1581
- CONTRLT, 1502 - CSLOT3, 1584
- CONV, 1506 - CSLOT4, 1585
- CONVM, 1508 - CSPR, 1586
- CORD1C, 1511 - CSSCHD, 1587
- CORD1R, 1513 - CSSHL, 1588
- CORD1S, 1515 - CSSHLH, 1590
- CORD2C, 1517 - CSSHLM, 1591
- CORD2R, 1519 - CSSHLP, 1592
- CORD2S, 1521 - CSUPER, 1593
- CORD3G, 1523 - CSUPEXT, 1595
- CORD3R, 1525 - CTETRA, 1596
- COUCOHF, 1526 - CTRIA3, 1599
- COUOPT, 1527 - CTRIA6, 1603
- COUP1FL, 1529 - CTRIAR, 1607
- COUPINT, 1530 - CTRIAX, 1610
- COUPLE, 1531 - CTRIAX6, 1612
- CPENTA, 1535 - CTUBE, 1616
- CPYRAM, 1539 - CVISC, 1617
- CQUAD, 1541 - CWELD, 1618
- CQUAD4, 1543 - CYAX, 1628
- CQUAD8, 1547 - CYJOIN, 1629
- CQUADR, 1551 - CYLINDR, 1631
- CQUADX, 1554 - CYSUP, 1632
- CRAC2D, 1556 - CYSYM, 1634
 Entries D - E, 1635
- DAMPING, 1635 - DLINK, 1657
- DAREA, 1638 - DLOAD, 1658
- DCONADD, 1639 - DMI, 1659
- DCONSTR, 1640 - DMIAX, 1663
- DDVAL, 1642 - DMIG, 1665
- DEACTEL, 1644 - DMIG,UACCEL, 1668
- DEACTEL, 1645 - DMIGOUT, 1670
- DEFORM, 1646 - DMIGROT, 1674
- DEFUSET, 1647 - DMIJ, 1676
- DELAY, 1648 - DMIJI, 1679
- DEQATN, 1649 - DMIK, 1682
- DESVAR, 1654 - DOPTPRM, 1685
- DETSPH, 1655 - DPHASE, 1693
- DIVERG, 1656 - DRESP1, 1694
Main Index
- DRESP2, 1706 - DYPARAM,FASTCOUP, 1792
- DRESP3, 1712 - DYPARAM,HYDROBOD, 1794
- DSCREEN, 1716 - DYPARAM,HGCMEM, 1795
- DTABLE, 1718 - DYPARAM,HGCOEFF, 1796
- DTABLE2, 1719 - DYPARAM,HGCSOL, 1797
- DTI, 1720 - DYPARAM,HGCTWS, 1798
- DTI,ESTDATA, 1722 - DYPARAM,HGCWRP, 1799
- DTI,INDTA, 1726 - DYPARAM,HGSHELL, 1800
- DTI,SETREE, 1729 - DYPARAM,HGSOLID, 1801
- DTI,SPECSEL, 1731 - DYPARAM,HGTYPE, 1802
- DTI,SPSEL, 1732 - DYPARAM,HICGRAV, 1803
- DTI,UNITS, 1733 - DYPARAM,HVLFAIL, 1804
- DVBSHAP, 1735 - DYPARAM,IMM, 1805
- DVCREL1, 1736 - DYPARAM,INFOBJ, 1806
- DVCREL2, 1738 - DYPARAM,INISTEP, 1807
- DVGRID, 1740 - DYPARAM,LIMCUB, 1808
- DVLREL1, 1742 - DYPARAM,MATRMERG, 1809
- DVMREL1, 1744 - DYPARAM,MATRMRG1, 1810
- DVMREL2, 1746 - DYPARAM,MAXSTEP, 1811
- DVPREL1, 1748 - DYPARAM,MESHPLN, 1812
- DVPREL2, 1750 - DYPARAM,MINSTEP, 1813
- DVSHAP, 1752 - DYPARAM,MIXGAS, 1814
- DVPSURF, 1753 - DYPARAM,NZEROVEL, 1815
- DYFSISW, 1754 - DYPARAM,OLDLAGT, 1816
- DYPARAM, ATBAOUT, 1755 - DYPARAM,JWLDET, 1817
- DYPARAM, ATBHOUT, 1756 - DYPARAM,LIMITER, 1818
- DYPARAM, ATBTOUT, 1757 - DYPARAM,PARALLEL, 1819
- DYPARAM,AUTOCOUP, 1758 - DYPARAM,PLCOVCUT, 1820
- DYPARAM,AXIALSYM, 1761 - DYPARAM,PMINFAIL, 1821
- DYPARAM,AXREMAP, 1763 - DYPARAM,RBE2INFO, 1822
- DYPARAM,BULKL, 1764 - DYPARAM,RHOCUT, 1823
- DYPARAM,BULKQ, 1765 - DYPARAM,RJSTIFF, 1824
- DYPARAM,BULKTYP, 1766 - DYPARAM,SHELLFRM, 1825
- DYPARAM,CFULLRIG, 1767 - DYPARAM,SHELMSYS, 1826
- DYPARAM,CLUFLIM, 1768 - DYPARAM,SHPLAST, 1827
- DYPARAM,CLUMPENR, 1769 - DYPARAM,SHSTRDEF, 1828
- DYPARAM,CONM2OUT, 1770 - DYPARAM,SHTHICK, 1829
- DYPARAM,CONTACT, 1771 - DYPARAM,SLELM, 1830
- DYPARAM,COSUBMXT, 1774 - DYPARAM,SMP,BATCHSIZ, 1831
- DYPARAM,COUFRIC, 1775 - DYPARAM,SMP,CPUINFO, 1833
- DYPARAM,COHESION, 1776 - DYPARAM,SNDLIM, 1834
- DYPARAM DUMSEGS, 1777 - DYPARAM,SPREMAP, 1835
- DYPARAM,ELDLTH, 1778 - DYPARAM,SPHERSYM, 1836
- DYPARAM,EULERCB, 1779 - DYPARAM,STRNOUT, 1837
- DYPARAM,EULERPR, 1780 - DYPARAM,TOLCHK, 1838
- DYPARAM,EULTRAN, 1782 - DYPARAM,VDAMP, 1839
- DYPARAM,EUSUBMAX, 1783 - DYPARAM,VELMAX, 1840
- DYPARAM,EUSUBCYC, 1785 - DYPARAM,VELMAX1, 1841
- DYPARAM,FAILDT, 1786 - DYPARAM,VISCPLAS, 1843
- DYPARAM,FAILOUT, 1787 - ECHOOFF, 1844
- DYPARAM,FLOWMETH, 1788 - ECHOON, 1845
- DYPARAM,GEOCHECK, 1791 - EIGB, 1846
Main Index
- EIGC, 1848 - EOSIG, 1877
- EIGP, 1853 - EOSJWL, 1883
- EIGR, 1854 - EOSMG, 1885
- EIGRL, 1858 - EOSNA, 1887
- ELEMUDS, 1862 - EOSPOL, 1889
- ELEMUDS, 1864 - EOSUDS, 1891
- ELIST, 1866 - EPOINT, 1893
- ENDDATA, 1867 - ERPPNL, 1894
- ENDDYNA, 1868 - EULFOR, 1895
- ENTUDS, 1869 - EULFOR1, 1896
- EOSDEF, 1871 - EULFREG, 1897
- EOSGAM, 1874 - EXCLUDE, 1899
- EOSGRUN, 1876 - EXTRN, 1900
 Entries F - L, 1901
- FAILJC, 1901 - FRFXIT1, 1963
- FAILMPS, 1903 - FSICTRL, 1964
- FAILUDS, 1904 - FSLIST, 1965
- FBADLAY, 1906 - FTGDEF, 1966
- FBALOAD, 1907 - FTGEVNT, 1970
- FBAPHAS, 1908 - FTGLOAD, 1972
- FBODYLD, 1909 - FTGPARM, 1977
- FBODYSB, 1910 - FTGSEQ , 1993
- FEEDGE, 1911 - GBAG, 1997
- FEFACE, 1914 - GBAGCOU, 2000
- FFCONTR, 1916 - GENEL, 2001
- FLFACT, 1918 - GENUDS, 2004
- FLOW, 1920 - GMBC, 2005
- FLOWC, 1922 - GMBNDC, 2013
- FLOWDEF, 1925 - GMBNDS, 2015
- FLOWT, 1927 - GMCONV, 2017
- FLOWUDS, 1930 - GMCORD, 2020
- FLSYM, 1932 - GMCURV, 2022
- FLUTTER, 1933 - GMINTC, 2028
- FORCE, 1935 - GMINTS, 2030
- FORCE1, 1936 - GMLOAD, 2032
- FORCE2, 1937 - GMNURB, 2035
- FORCEAX, 1938 - GMQVOL, 2038
- FORCUDS, 1939 - GMSPC, 2039
- FREEPT, 1941 - GMSURF, 2040
- FREQ, 1942 - GRAV, 2046
- FREQ1, 1943 - GRDSET, 2048
- FREQ2, 1944 - GRID, 2049
- FREQ3, 1945 - GRIDA, 2051
- FREQ4, 1948 - GRIDB, 2052
- FREQ5, 1951 - GRIDF, 2053
- FRFCOMP, 1953 - GRIDS, 2054
- FRFCONN, 1956 - GUST, 2055
- FRFFLEX, 1958 - HADACRI, 2056
- FRFRELS, 1960 - HADAPTL, 2059
- FRFSPC1, 1961 - HEATLOS, 2061
- FRFXIT, 1962 - HGSUPPR, 2063
Main Index
- HTRCONV, 2065 - ISTRESS, 2086
- HTRRAD, 2066 - ITER, 2088
- HYBDAMP, 2067 - LEAKAGE, 2091
- HYDSTAT, 2069 - LOAD, 2094
- INCLUDE, 2071 - LOADCLID, 2096
- INFLCG, 2072 - LOADCNAM, 2097
- INFLFRC, 2074 - LOADCSUB, 2098
- INFLGAS, 2076 - LOADCYH, 2099
- INFLHB, 2078 - LOADCYN, 2101
- INFLTNK, 2079 - LOADCYT, 2102
- INFLTR, 2081 - LOADOF, 2103
- INITGAS, 2083 - LOADT, 2104
- IPSTRAIN, 2084 - LORENZI, 2106
- IPSTRN, 2085 - LSEQ, 2110
 Entries M - O, 2111
- MACREEP, 2111 - MATHED, 2262
- MARCIN, 2113 - MATHP, 2265
- MARCOUT, 2115 - MATNLE, 2268
- MARPRN, 2123 - MATORT , 2273
- MASSSET, 2125 - MATPE1, 2278
- MATBV, 2126 - MATRIG, 2280
- MAT1, 2127 - MATS1, 2282
- MAT1A, 2131 - MATS3, 2287
- MAT1F, 2132 - MATS8, 2289
- MAT2, 2133 - MATSMA, 2290
- MAT2F, 2136 - MATSORT, 2294
- MAT3, 2138 - MATT1, 2296
- MAT4, 2140 - MATT2, 2298
- MAT5, 2142 - MATT3, 2300
- MAT8, 2143 - MATT4, 2301
- MAT8A, 2145 - MATT5, 2302
- MAT8F, 2149 - MATT8, 2303
- MAT9, 2151 - MATT9, 2305
- MAT9F, 2153 - MATTEP, 2307
- MAT10, 2154 - MATTEP, 2309
- MAT10F, 2156 - MATTF, 2311
- MATDEUL, 2157 - MATTG, 2314
- MATDIGI, 2159 - MATTHE, 2315
- MATEP, 2161 - MATTORT, 2318
- MATEP, 2173 - MATTUSR, 2319
- MATEP, 2188 - MATTVE, 2320
- MAT1F, 2199 - MATUDS, 2323
- MATF, 2200 - MATUDS, 2326
- MATF, 2212 - MATUSR, 2329
- MATF, 2223 - MATVE, 2332
- MATF1, 2229 - MATVE, 2336
- MATFAB, 2230 - MATVP, 2338
- MATFTG , 2234 - MAUXCMD, 2343
- MATG, 2247 - MBOLT, 2344
- MATHE, 2250 - MBOLTUS, 2346
- MATHE, 2258 - MCHSTAT, 2348
Main Index
- MCOHE, 2350 - MONPNT2, 2444
- MDBCNCT, 2352 - MONPNT3, 2446
- MDBCTB1, 2354 - MONSUM, 2448
- MDBNDRY, 2356 - MONSUM1, 2451
- MDBOLT, 2357 - MONSUMT, 2454
- MDBULK, 2359 - MPC, 2456
- MDCONCT, 2362 - MPCADD, 2457
- MDDMIG, 2364 - MPCAX, 2458
- MDELAM, 2366 - MPCD, 2459
- MDEXCLD, 2367 - MPCREEP, 2460
- MDFAST, 2368 - MPCY, 2462
- MDLABEL, 2370 - MPHEAT, 2463
- MDLOC, 2371 - MPROCS, 2464
- MDLPRM, 2373 - MREVERS, 2466
- MDMIAUX, 2384 - MRSSCON, 2468
- MDMIOUT, 2385 - MSTACK, 2470
- MDMIR1, 2387 - MT16SEL, 2471
- MDMIR2, 2388 - MT16SPL, 2473
- MDMOVE, 2389 - MTABRV, 2476
- MDMPC, 2390 - MTCREEP, 2478
- MDMPLN, 2391 - MTHERM, 2480
- MDRBE2, 2392 - NHRMPRM, 2481
- MDRBE3, 2393 - NLADAPT, 2482
- MDRJNT, 2395 - NLAUTO, 2484
- MDROT1, 2396 - NLCYSYM, 2489
- MDROT2, 2397 - NLDAMP, 2493
- MDRROD, 2398 - NLFREQ, 2494
- MDSEAM, 2399 - NLFREQ1, 2495
- MDTRAN, 2401 - NLHARM, 2496
- MDWELD, 2402 - NLHEATC, 2497
- MESH, 2407 - NLMOPTS, 2498
- MESUPER, 2414 - NLOUT, 2513
- METADATA, 2417 - NLOUTUD, 2516
- MFLUID, 2418 - NLPARM, 2518
- MGRSPR, 2420 - NLPCI, 2526
- MINSTAT, 2421 - NLRGAP, 2528
- MISLAND, 2423 - NLRSFD, 2531
- MIXTURE, 2424 - NLSTEP, 2534
- MKAERO1, 2426 - NLSTRAT, 2548
- MKAERO2, 2427 - NOLIN1, 2558
- MLAYOUT, 2428 - NOLIN2, 2560
- MNF600, 2429 - NOLIN3, 2562
- MODTRAK, 2431 - NOLIN4, 2564
- MOMAX, 2432 - NSM, 2566
- MOMENT, 2433 - NSM1, 2567
- MOMENT1, 2434 - NSMADD, 2569
- MOMENT2, 2435 - NSML, 2570
- MONCARL, 2436 - NSML1, 2571
- MONCNCM, 2438 - NTHICK, 2573
- MONDSP1, 2439 - OMIT, 2574
- MONGRP, 2441 - OMIT1, 2575
- MONPNT1, 2442 - OMITAX, 2576
Main Index
- OUTPUT, 2577 - OUTRCV, 2580
 Entries P, 2583
- PAABSF, 2583 - PDUMi, 2730
- PACABS, 2585 - PELAS, 2731
- PACBAR, 2586 - PELAS1, 2732
- PACINF, 2587 - PELAST, 2733
- PAERO1, 2588 - PERMEAB, 2735
- PAERO2, 2589 - PERMGBG, 2737
- PAERO3, 2591 - PEULER, 2739
- PAERO4, 2593 - PEULER1, 2741
- PAERO5, 2595 - PFAST, 2742
- PANEL, 2599 - PFASTT, 2746
- PARAM, 2600 - PFTG , 2748
- PARAMARC, 2602 - PGAP, 2752
- PAXISYM, 2605 - PHBDY, 2755
- PAXSYMH, 2607 - PINTC, 2756
- PBAR, 2609 - PINTS, 2757
- PBARL, 2611 - PLCOMP, 2758
- PBARN1, 2617 - PLOAD, 2762
- PBCOMP, 2621 - PLOAD1, 2764
- PBEAM, 2626 - PLOAD2, 2767
- PBEAM3, 2631 - PLOAD4, 2769
- PBEAMD, 2634 - PLOADB3, 2772
- PBEAML, 2635 - PLOADX1, 2774
- PBELT, 2643 - PLOTEL, 2777
- PBEMN1, 2646 - PLPLANE, 2778
- PBEND, 2650 - PLSOLID, 2780
- PBMARB6, 2658 - PMARKER, 2781
- PBMNUM6, 2661 - PMASS, 2782
- PBMSECT, 2665 - PMINC, 2783
- PBRSECT, 2671 - PMREBAI, 2785
- PBUSH, 2674 - PMREBAR, 2789
- PBUSH1D, 2678 - POINT, 2792
- PBUSH2D, 2683 - POINTAX, 2793
- PBUSHT, 2685 - PORFCPL, 2794
- PCOHE, 2691 - PORFGBG, 2796
- PCOMP, 2692 - PORFLOW, 2798
- PCOMPA, 2697 - PORFLWT, 2800
- PCOMPF, 2699 - PORHOLE, 2803
- PCOMPFQ, 2701 - PORHYDS, 2805
- PCOMPG, 2702 - PORUDS, 2806
- PCOMPLS, 2707 - PRAC2D, 2807
- PCONEAX, 2712 - PRAC3D, 2808
- PCONV, 2714 - PRESAX, 2809
- PCONVM, 2717 - PRESPT, 2810
- PCONV1, 2719 - PRIMx, 2811
- PDAMP, 2721 - PRJCON, 2818
- PDAMP5, 2722 - PROD, 2820
- PDAMPT, 2723 - PRODN1, 2821
- PDISTB, 2724 - PSEAM, 2823
- PDISTBM, 2728 - PSET, 2825
Main Index
- PSHEAR, 2827 - PSPRMAT, 2857
- PSHEARN, 2829 - PSSHL, 2858
- PSHELL, 2831 - PTUBE, 2859
- PSHELL1, 2836 - PVAL, 2860
- PSHLN1, 2838 - PVISC, 2862
- PSHLN2, 2843 - PVISC1, 2863
- PSLDN1, 2848 - PWELD, 2864
- PSOLID, 2852
 Entries Q-S, 2867
- QBDY1, 2867 - RLOAD2, 2941
- QBDY2, 2868 - ROTHYBD, 2943
- QBDY3, 2869 - ROTOR, 2944
- QHBDY, 2870 - ROTORAX, 2946
- QSET, 2872 - ROTORG, 2948
- QSET1, 2873 - ROTORSE, 2950
- QVECT, 2874 - RROD, 2952
- QVOL, 2877 - RSPINR, 2954
- RADBC, 2879 - RSPINT, 2959
- RADBND, 2880 - RSPLINE, 2963
- RADC, 2881 - RSSCON, 2965
- RADCAV, 2883 - RTRPLT, 2968
- RADCOL, 2886 - RTRPLT1, 2970
- RADCT, 2887 - RVDOF, 2972
- RADLST, 2888 - RVDOF1, 2973
- RADM, 2890 - SANGLE, 2974
- RADMT, 2891 - SEBNDRY, 2975
- RADMTX, 2892 - SEBSET, 2976
- RADSET, 2893 - SEBSET1, 2977
- RANDPS, 2894 - SEBULK, 2979
- RANDT1, 2896 - SECONCT, 2982
- RBAR, 2897 - SECSET, 2984
- RBAR1, 2899 - SECSET1, 2985
- RBAX3D, 2901 - SECTAX, 2987
- RBE1, 2903 - SEDLINK, 2988
- RBE2, 2905 - SEDRSP2, 2990
- RBE2GS, 2907 - SEDRSP3, 2993
- RBE3, 2910 - SEELT, 2996
- RBE3U, 2913 - SEEXCLD, 2997
- RBJOINT, 2914 - SELABEL, 2998
- RCONN, 2917 - SELOC, 2999
- RCPARM, 2919 - SEMPLN, 3001
- RCROSS, 2922 - SENQSET, 3002
- RELEASE, 2924 - SEQGP, 3003
- RELEX, 2925 - SEQSEP, 3004
- RESTART, 2926 - SEQSET, 3006
- RFORCE, 2929 - SEQSET1, 3008
- RGYRO, 2933 - SESET, 3010
- RINGAX, 2935 - SESUP, 3011
- RINGFL, 2937 - SET1, 3012
- RJOINT, 2938 - SET2, 3013
- RLOAD1, 2939 - SET3, 3014
Main Index
- SET4 , 3016 - SPCR, 3043
- SETREE, 3017 - SPHERE, 3045
- SEUSET, 3019 - SPLINE1, 3046
- SEUSET1, 3020 - SPLINE2, 3048
- SHREL, 3021 - SPLINE3, 3050
- SHRPOL, 3022 - SPLINE4, 3052
- SHRUDS, 3023 - SPLINE5, 3054
- SLBDY, 3024 - SPLINE6, 3056
- SLOAD, 3025 - SPLINE7, 3059
- SLOADN1, 3026 - SPLINEX, 3061
- SNORM, 3027 - SPLINRB, 3063
- SPBLND1, 3029 - SPOINT, 3064
- SPBLND2, 3031 - SPRELAX, 3065
- SPC, 3032 - STOCHAS, 3066
- SPC1, 3034 - SUPAX, 3068
- SPCADD, 3036 - SUPORT, 3069
- SPCAX, 3037 - SUPORT1, 3070
- SPCD, 3038 - SUPORT6, 3072
- SPCOFF, 3041 - SURFINI, 3074
- SPCOFF1, 3042 - SWLDPRM, 3076
 Entries T-Y, 3087
- TABD1MD, 3087 - TEMPP1, 3139
- TABDMP1, 3089 - TEMPP3, 3142
- TABL3D, 3092 - TEMPRB, 3143
- TABLE3D, 3097 - TERMIN, 3146
- TABLED1, 3098 - TF, 3148
- TABLED2, 3101 - THPAD, 3150
- TABLED3, 3103 - TIC, 3155
- TABLED4, 3105 - TICEL, 3156
- TABLED5, 3106 - TICEUL1, 3158
- TABLEHT, 3107 - TICEUDS, 3159
- TABLEH1, 3108 - TICREG, 3160
- TABLEL1, 3109 - TICVAL, 3162
- TABLEM1, 3110 - TIC3, 3164
- TABLEM2, 3112 - TIM2PSD, 3166
- TABLEM3, 3114 - TLOAD1, 3169
- TABLEM4, 3116 - TLOAD2, 3172
- TABLES1, 3117 - TMPSET, 3176
- TABLEST, 3119 - TODYNA, 3177
- TABLFTG, 3120 - TOMVAR, 3178
- TABLUDS, 3121 - TOPVAR, 3181
- TABRND1, 3122 - TRIM, 3185
- TABRNDG, 3124 - TRIM2, 3186
- TABSCTL, 3125 - TRMCPL, 3188
- TEMP, 3127 - TSTEP, 3190
- TEMPAX, 3129 - TSTEPNL, 3191
- TEMPB3, 3130 - TTEMP, 3198
- TEMPBC, 3132 - UDNAME , 3199
- TEMPD, 3135 - UDSESV, 3200
- TEMPF, 3137 - UNBALNC, 3201
- TEMPN1, 3138 - UNGLUE, 3204
Main Index
- UNGLUE, 3205 - WETLOAD, 3232
- USET, 3207 - WETSURF, 3234
- USET1, 3208 - YLDHY, 3235
- USRSUB6, 3210 - YLDJC, 3236
- UXVEC, 3211 - YLDMC, 3238
- VCCT, 3212 - YLDMSS, 3239
- VCCT, 3214 - YLDPOL, 3241
- VIEW, 3217 - YLDRPL, 3242
- VIEW3D, 3219 - YLDSG, 3243
- VIEWEX, 3221 - YLDTM, 3245
- WALL, 3226 - YLDUDS, 3248
- WEAR, 3228 - YLDVM, 3250
- WETELME, 3230 - YLDZA, 3253
- WETELMG, 3231
A
Configuring the Runtime  Specifying Parameters, B
Environment  Command Initialization and Runtime Configuration Files, B
 Environment Variables, F
 User-Defined Keywords, G
 General Keywords, G
 PARAM Keywords, H
 Value Descriptors, I
 Examples:, J
 Resolving Duplicate Parameter Specifications, L
 Customizing Command Initialization and Runtime Configuration Files, O
 Examples, Q
 Symbolic Substitution, U
 Introduction, U
 Simple Examples, U
 Detailed Specifications, W
 Examples, AF
Main Index
Preface
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s GuideMSC Nastran Quick Reference
Guide
Preface

List of MSC Nastran Books

Technical Support
 Training and Internet Resources
Main Index
xx MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide

A list of some of the MSC Nastran documents is as follows:
Installation and Release Guides

 Installation and Operations Guide
 Release Guide
Reference Guides
 Quick Reference Guide
 DMAP Programmer’s Guide
 Reference Guide
 Utilities Guide
Demonstration Guides
 Linear Analysis
 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400)
 Explicit Nonlinear (Dytran based SOL 700)
User’s Guides
 Getting Started
 Linear Static Analysis
 Dynamic Analysis
 Embedded Fatigue
 Embedded Vibration Fatigue
 Thermal Analysis
 Superelements
 Design Sensitivity and Optimization
 Rotordynamics
 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400)
 Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)
 Aeroelastic Analysis
 User Defined Services
 Non Linear (SOL 400)
 High Performance Computing
 DEMATD
You may find any of these documents from MSC Software at:
Main Index
Preface xxi
Technical Support
http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com/infocenter/index?page=home
Technical Support
For technical support phone numbers and contact information, please visit:
http://www.mscsoftware.com/Contents/Services/Technical-Support/Contact-Technical-Support.aspx
Support Center (http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com)
The SimCompanion link above gives you access to the wealth of resources for MSC Software products. Here
you will find product and support contact information, product documentations, knowledge base articles,
product error list, knowledge base articles and SimAcademy Webinars. It is a searchable database which allows
you to find articles relevant to your inquiry. Valid MSC customer entitlement and login is required to access
the database and documents. It is a single sign-on that gives you access to product documentation for
complete list of products from MSC Software, allows you to manage your support cases, and participate in
our discussion forums.
Main Index
xxii MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide
Training and Internet Resources
Training and Internet Resources

MSC Software (www.mscsoftware.com)
MSC Software corporate site with information on the latest events, products and services for the
CAD/CAE/CAM marketplace.
http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com
The SimCompanion link above gives you access to the wealth of resources for MSC Software products. Here
you will find product and support contact information, product documentations, knowledge base articles,
product error list, knowledge base articles and SimAcademy Webinars. It is a searchable database which
allows you to find articles relevant to your inquiry. Valid MSC customer entitlement and login is required to
access the database and documents. It is a single sign-on that gives you access to product documentation for
complete list of products from MSC Software, allows you to manage your support cases, and participate in
our discussion forums.
http://www.mscsoftware.com/msc-training
The MSC-Training link above will point you to schedule and description of MSC Seminars. Following
courses are recommended for beginning Nastran users.
NAS101A - Linear Static and Normal Modes Analysis using MSC Nastran
This course serves as an introduction to finite element analysis. It includes discussion of basic features
available in MSC Nastran for solving structural engineering problems. In this course, all finite element
models will be created and edited using a text editor, not a graphical pre-processor. Proper data structure of
the MSC Nastran input file is covered. At the conclusion of seminar, the student will be familiar with
fundamental usage of MSC Nastran.
NAS101B - Advanced Linear Analysis using MSC Nastran
This course is a continuation of NAS101A - Linear Static and Normal Modes Analysis using MSC Nastran.
In this class, you will learn: Theory of buckling analysis and how to perform a buckling analysis About rigid
elements - MPC, RBAR,RBE2, and RBE3 Modeling with interface element CINTC and connectors
Lamination theory and composite materials MSC Nastran composite theory Failure theories Linear contact
and permanent glued contact Different model checks Modeling tips and tricks
NAS120 - Linear Static Analysis using MSC Nastran and Patran
This seminar introduces basic finite element analysis techniques for linear static, normal modes, and buckling
analysis of structures using MSC Nastran and Patran. MSC Nastran data structure, the element library,
modeling practices, model validation, and guidelines for efficient solutions are discussed and illustrated with
examples and workshops. Patran will be an integral part of the examples and workshops and will be used to
generate and verify illustrative MSC Nastran models, manage analysis submission requests, and visualize
results. This seminar provides the foundation required for intermediate and advanced MSC Nastran
applications.
Main Index
Chapter 1: Executing MSC Nastran
Guide
1 Executing MSC Nastran

Executing MSC Nastran
Main Index
2 MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide

MSC Nastran is executed from the command line using the command nast20190. This command sets
environment variables in order for MSC Nastran to correctly execute on your system and it also has
capabilities to predict memory and solvers (as of MSC Nastran 2019.0 with solve=auto). The basic format of
the nast20190 command is
nast20190 input_data_file keywords
nast20190 input_data_file [keyword1=value1 keyword2=value2 …]
where input_data_file is the name of the file containing the input data and keyword=valuei is one or more
optinal keyword assignment arguments. For example, to run an MSC Nastran job using the data file
example1.dat, enter the following command:
nast20190 example1
Most keyword assignments can be specified as command line arguments and/or included in RC files. There
are some exceptions such as solve=auto may be specified on the command line or the User RC files, but not
in the system RC files (MSC_BASE/conf/RCfile).
There are two RC files controlled by the user:
 The user RC file is in your home (or login) directory. This file should be used to define parameters
that are applied to all jobs run by the user.
 The local RC file is .nast2019rcf on Linux and nast2019.rcf on Windows, and is located in the same
directory as the input data file. If the “rcf” keyword is used, this local RC file is ignored. This file
should be used to define parameters that are applied to all jobs contained in the input data file
directory.
1. The tilde (~) character is not recognized within RC files.
2. Environment variables are only recognized when used in the context of a logical symbol (on Windows
nast2019.rcf) (see Using Filenames and Logical Symbols (p. 60) in the MSC Nastran 2019 Installation and
Operations Guide).
3. When a keyword is specified on the command line, embedded spaces or special characters that are
significant to the shell must be properly quoted; quotes should not be used within RC files.
The keywords listed as follows are the most common for various computers, but are not available on all
computers. Also, the defaults may be site-dependent. Please consult your Keywords and Environment Variables
(p. 181) in the MSC Nastran 2019 Installation and Operations Guide for keyword applicability, specialized
keywords, and further discussion of the keywords and their defaults. Keywords that use yes/no values accept
partial specification and case-independent values. For example, “yes” may be specified as “y”, “ye”, or “yes”
using uppercase or lowercase letters. The examples assume the jobs are run under a Linux operating system.
after after = time Default: None

(Linux) Holds the job’s execution until the time specified by time. See the description of the “at”
command in your system documentation for the format of time
Example: nast20190 example after=10:00
The job is held until 10:00 AM.
Main Index
Chapter 1: Executing MSC Nastran 3
append append={yes|no} Default: no

Combines the .f04, .f06, and .log files into a single file after the run completes. If “no”
is specified, the files are not combined. If “yes” is specified, the files are combined into
one file with the suffix “.out”.
Example: nast20190 example append=yes
Result: The .f04, .f06, and .log files are combined into a file named example.out.
batch batch={yes|no} Default: yes

(Linux) Indicates how the job is to be run. If “yes” is specified, the job is run as a background
process. If “no” is specified, the job is run in the foreground. If the “aft” or “queue”
keywords are specified, the batch keyword is ignored. Jobs submitted with “batch=yes”
will run under nice(1).
Note: If the job is already running in an NQS or NQE batch job, the default is “no”.
Example: nast20190 example batch=no

Result: The job is run in the foreground.
bpool bpool=value Default: 25% of memory requested
Used to control the amount of memory for IO buffering.
Buffer pooling is achieved by dedicating a portion of MEM to buffer pool activity
("BPOOL"). An exception to this process occurs when running SOL 101 or SOL 400.
In these cases, "mem=max" invokes the estimate program, which determines the
BPOOL size. The amount of memory can be specified in either GINO blocks, in GB,
or as a percentage of the physical memory.
The use of bufferpool reduces the amount of I/O to physical devices, but too large a
bufferpool results in insufficient memory to obtain an efficient computational sollution.
buffsize buffsize=value Default: 32769 words
Use to control the number of words per I/O record.
For large models, it is recommended to change buffsize to 65537, which is the maximum
allowed.
casi If set to "no", this flag will disable the Casi solver as a possible option when "solve=auto"
is specified.
Main Index
dbs dbs=pathname Default= . {Current directory}

Creates database files (see Using the NASTRAN Statement (p. 87) in the MSC Nastran 2019
Installation and Operations Guide) using an alternate file prefix. If “dbs” is not specified,
database files are created in the current directory using the basename of the input data
file as the prefix. If the “dbs” value is a directory, database files are created in the specified
directory using the basename of the input data file as the filename.
Note: If “dbs” is specified and “scratch=yes” is specified, a warning will be issued
and “scratch=no” is assumed.
In the following examples, assume the current directory includes subdirectories “mydir”
and “other”, and that an “example.dat” exists in both the current directory and “other”.
That is, ./example.dat, ./mydir, ./other, and ./other/example.dat exist on Linux,
and .\example.dat, .\mydir, .\other, and .\other\example.dat exist on Windows.
Example: nast20190 example
Result: Database files are created in the current directory with the name “example”
e.g., ./example.DBALL on Linux; and .\example.DBALL on Windows.
Example: nast20190 other/example
Result: Database files are created in the “other” directory with the name “example”,
e.g., ../other/example.DBALL on Linux, and .\other\example.DBALL on Windows.
Example: nast20190 example dbs=myfile
Result: Database files are created in the current directory with the name “myfile”,
e.g., ./myfile.DBALL on Linux, and .\myfile.DBALL on Windows.
Example: nast20190 example dbs=mydir
Result: Database files are created in the mydir directory with the name “example”, e.g.,
./mydir/example.DBALL on Linux, and .\mydir\example.DBALL on Windows.
Example: nast20190 example dbs=mydir/myfile
Result: Database files are created in the mydir directory with the name “myfile”,
e.g., ./mydir/myfile.DBALL on Linux, and .\mydir\myfile.DBALL on Windows
Example: nast20190 example dmp=4 host=a:b:c:d
dbs=/aa:/bb:/cc:/dd
Result: This example will set the “dbs” directory to “/aa” on host a, “/bb” on host b, “/cc”
on host c, and finally “/dd” on host d.
Note: The use of distinct per-task database directories can have a significant impact
on elapsed time performance of DMP jobs on SMP and NUMA systems.
dmp dmp=dmparallel Default: No parallelism based upon dividing the model
The dmp keyword specifies the number of processors used to efficiently obtain a
solution to the simulation. These processors may be on the same node or on multiple
nodes specified by the HOST command line option.
Main Index
Specifying dmparallel > 1 and not including a DOMAINSOLVER Executive

Command Statement has the following effects.
 The direct solution of the linear system of equations will be performed in parallel for
all solution sequences
 The extraction of real eigenvalues using the default Lanczos method will be
performed in parallel in SOL 103 and 111.
 The frequency response using SOL 111 will be performed in parallel.
Specifying dmp > 1 and using the DOMAINSOLVER provides the following addition
user controlled performance gains using parallel processing
 The extraction of eigenvalues may be performed using Automated Component

Modal Synthesis (ACMS) which is an approximate method that is very
computational efficient when a large number of modes (high frequencies) are
required.
 Design sensitivity may be performed in parallel in SOL 200
 The formation of the element stiffness matrices may be performed in parallel for
SOL 400.
It may also be necessary to define a host file if a network based distributed computing is
used. See the MSC Nastran Installation and Operators Guide.
gpuid gpuid=id,id or gpuid=id:id Default: none

id: the ID of a licensed GPU device to be used in the analysis. Multiple IDs may
be assigned to MSC Nastran distributed memory processor (DMP) runs.
Separate a list of IDs with a comma or a colon. Each DMP process will be assigned
a GPU ID in round robin fashion.
GPGPU processing is available for direct solution methods only; iterative

methods are not supported.
gpu_min_front gpu_min_front=value Default: 16
The criteria for GPGPU execution during matrix factorization are the frontal
matrix front size and the rank of the frontal matrix. Minimum dimensions are set
via gpu_min_front and its companion parameter, gpu_min_rank. The value
specified must be an integer greater or equal to 1. If the front size is smaller than
value, the rank update of the front is processed on the CPU. Otherwise, the
GPGPU device would be used for the rank update of the front. This keyword
may also be set via SYSTEM cell 656.
Main Index
gpu_min_rank gpu_min_rank=value Default: 1024

The criteria for GPGPU execution during matrix factorization are the frontal
matrix front size and the rank of the frontal matrix. Minimum dimensions are set
via gpu_min_front and its companion parameter, gpu_min_rank. The value
specified must be an integer greater or equal to 1. If the rank of the frontal matrix
is smaller than value, the rank update of the front is processed on the CPU.
Otherwise, the GPGPU device would be used for the rank update of the front.
This keyword may also be set via SYSTEM cell 655.
memorymax memorymax=maximum user Default: 0.5 x the amount of physical memory on your
memory machine
The user can enter the amount of memory as nGB or as fxphysical; f is the fraction
between 0 and 1.
When dmp is used, the amount of memory per processor is memorymax / dmp.
If the machine is going to be used by a single user or a single job, it is recommended to
set memorymax to 0.75xPhysical.
memory memory=memory_size Default=max
Specifies the amount of open core memory to allocate. The memory_size can be specified
either as a number of words, or as a number followed by one of the following modifiers:
G or Gw Multiply memory_size by 1024**3.
Gb Multiply memory_size by (1024**3)/bytes_per_word.
where bytes_per_word is 8or you can enter a faction of the physical memory
If "memory=estimate" is specified, ESTIMATE will be used to determine size. If
"memory=max" is specified, then the amount of memory allocated depends on the
"memorymaximum" keyword.
Example: nast20190 example memory=5gb
Result: The job is run using an open core memory size of 5 gigabytes.
memory=0.5xPhysical
Result: The job is run using one-half the amount of physical RAM.
For a more detailed description, see the memory (Ch. B) in the MSC Nastran 2019
Installation and Operations Guide.
Main Index
news news={yes|no|auto} Default=yes

Displays the news file (install_dir/msc20190/nast/news.txt on Linux and
install_dir\msc20190\nast\news.txt on Windows) in the .f06 file. If “auto” is specified,
the news file is only displayed if it has been modified since the last time it was displayed
for you. If “yes” is specified, the news file is displayed in the .f06 file regardless of when
it was last changed. If “no” is specified, the news file is not displayed in the .f06 file.
Example: nast20190 example news=yes
Result: The news file is displayed in the .f06 file after the title page block.
notify notify={yes|no} Default=yes
Sends notification when the job is completed. See the “ncmd” keyword to define an
alternate notification command.
Note: If the job is queued using the queue keyword, or the job is already running in
an NQS batch job, the default is “no”.
Example: nast20190 example notify=yes
old old={yes|no} Default=yes

Saves previous copies of the .f04, .f06, .log, .op2, .out, pch, and .plt output files using
sequence numbers (additional user-specified file types can be versioned with the
“oldtypes” keyword). Sequence numbers are appended to the keyword filenames and are
separated by a period.
If “yes” is specified, the highest sequence number of each of the output files is
determined. The highest sequence number found is incremented by one to become the
new sequence number. Then, all current output files that do not include sequence
numbers are renamed using the new sequence number as a type.
Example: nast20190 example old=yes
For example, assume your current working directory contains the following files:
v2401.dat v2401.f04.1 v2401.f06 v2401.log v2401.log.1
v2401.f04 v2401.f04.2 v2401.f06.1 v2401.log.1 v2401.log.3
Apparently, the user ran the job four times, but deleted some of the files; e.g.
v2401.f04.3
v2401.f06.3
v2401.f06.3. When the job is run again with “old=yes”, the files are renamed as follows:
v2401.f04 is renamed to v2401.f04.4
v2401.f06 is renamed to v2401.f06.4
v2401.log is renamed to v2401.log.4. The sequence number 4 is used because it is one
greater than the highest sequence number of all of the selected files (the highest being
v2401.log.3).
Main Index
out out=pathname Default= .

Saves the output files using a different file prefix or in a different directory. If “out” is
not specified, the output files are saved in the current directory using the basename of
the input data file as a prefix. If the “out” value is a directory, output files are created in
the specified directory using the basename of the input data file as the filename.
In the following examples, assume the current directory includes subdirectories “mydir”
and “other”, and that an “example.dat” exists in both the current directory and “other”.
That is, ./example.dat, ./mydir, ./other, and ./other/example.dat exist on Linux; and
.\example.dat, .\mydir, .\other, and .\other\example.dat exist on Windows.
or: nast20190 other/example
Result: Output files are created in the current directory with the name “example”,
e.g., ./example.f06 on Linux and .\example.f06 on Windows.
Example: nast20190 example out=myfile
Result: Output files are created in the current directory with the name “myfile”,
e.g., ./myfile.f06 on Linux and .\myfile.f06 on Windows.
Example: nast20190 example out=mydir
Result: Output files are created in the mydir directory with the name “example”,
e.g., ./mydir/example.f06 on Linux and .\mydir\example.f06 on Windows.
Example: nast20190 example out=mydir/myfile
Result: Output files are created in the mydir directory with the name “myfile”,
e.g., ./mydir/myfile.f06 on Linux and .\mydir\myfile.f06 on Windows.
Main Index
rcf rcf=pathname Default=no

Specifies the name of the local RC file. If this keyword is not specified, the .nast2019rc
file on Linux and nast2019.rcf on Windows located in the input data file’s directory is
used.
Example: $ nast20190 example rcf=nast.rc
Result: The nastran command will process ./nast.rcf on Linux, or .\nast.rcf on
Windows in lieu of the default local RC file ./.nast2019rc on Linux, and .\nast2019.rcf
on Windows.
scratch scratch={yes|no|mini|post} Default=no

Deletes the database files at the end of the run. If the database files are not required,
“scratch=yes” can be used to remove them, thereby preventing cluttering of the directory
with unwanted files. If “mini” is specified, a reduced size database (that can only be used
for data recovery restarts) will be created. See Database Concepts (p. 421) in the MSC
Nastran Reference Manual for further details on the “mini” database. If scratch=post is
specified, a reduced size database intended for use by Patran or the toolkit will be created.
Scratch=post also performs the actions of NASTRAN INDEX=19.
Example: nast20190 example scratch=yes
All database files created by the run are deleted at the end of the job in the same way as
the FMS statement INIT MASTER(S).
sdirectory sdirectory=directory Default: See the description below.
See Determining Resource Requirements (p. 65) in the MSC Nastran 2019 Installation and
Operations Guide for information on estimating a job’s total disk space requirements.
Specifies the directory to use for temporary scratch files created during the run. MSC
Nastran can create very large scratch files; therefore, the scratch directory should contain
sufficient space to store any scratch files created during a run. You must have read, write,
and execute privileges to the directory.
Linux: The default value is taken from the TMPDIR environment variable if it is set to
a nonnull value. Otherwise, the computer’s default temporary file directory is chosen;
this is usually /tmp.
Windows: The default value is taken from the TEMP environment variable.
Linux Example: nast20190 example sdir=/scratch
Result: Scratch files are created in the directory /scratch.
smp smp=number Default: No use of shared memory parallelization
The smp keyword specifies the number of threads used in the simulation. The threads
can only be launched on a single machine. In some cases SMP parallelization can be
combined with DMP. In such cases, threads will be created by each DMP process
independently (hybrid parallelization).
Main Index
smp parallelization is available for mathematical kernels.

smp parallelization is available for the Intel MKL PARDISO solver in SOL 101, 107,
108, 111, 200, and 400; see the SPARSESOLVER section of this document.
smp parallelization is available for the NLEMG modules and is disabled in the following
cases:
 DMP (DMP overrides SMP);

 heat transfer and coupled analysis simulations;
 models that have contact between Advanced elements and Nastran elements;
 models that have QUADR/QUAD4 or TRIAR/TRIA3 element types arranged into
the same element groups.
 models that have friction.
If models have contact between Nastran and Advanced elements resulting in a SYSTEM
FATAL MESSAGE (SFM) with smp > 1, then rerun the job with
sys107=65536+number. For example, if smp=8 is desired but an SFM results, then rerun
with sys107=65544 in replace of smp=8. This turns off the SMP parallelization for
NLEMG.
solve solve={auto|train} Default (not set)
If solve=auto then Nastran will automatically select the solver/parallel/memory.
If solve=train then Pardiso memory coefficients will be updated. These options
may be placed on the command line or in the User's RC files.
symbol symbol=name=string Default: None
Defines a symbolic (or logical) name used in ASSIGN and INCLUDE statements and
in command line arguments. This keyword may be specified in initialization or RC files
and on the command line. The symbol definition may include references to previously
defined symbols or environment variables using the standard "$name" or "${name}"
syntax on Linux or %name% syntax on Windows. For convenience, the character
separating the "symbol" and "name" specification and the "name" and "string"
specification may be either an equal sign ("='") or a hash mark ("#"). The use of a hash
mark allows this keyword to be specified as an argument to a Windows .bat file.
If "node" is specified, symbolic names defined using this keyword are not used on the
local system. Instead the specified values are passed to the remote system. This means
that any pathnames must be valid on the remote system. Use the "lsymbol" keyword to
specify symbolic names for the local system.
If "node" is not specified, symbolic names defined using the "lsymbol" keyword are
processed as if they were defined using the “symbol” keyword.
Symbolic names are processed in the order they are encountered while processing the
initialization and RC files and the command line. If a duplicate symbolic name is
encountered, the new value replaces the previously specified value.
Main Index
Symbolic names must be 16 characters or less. The value assigned to the symbolic name
must be 256 characters or less. If the symbolic name used in an ASSIGN or INCLUDE
statement or in command line arguments is not defined, it is left in the filename
specification as is.
For example, many of the .tpl and .demo input data files have ASSIGN statements such
as the following:
ASSIGN 'MASTER=DBSDIR:abc.master'
The string "DBSDIR:" specifies a symbolic name that is to be replaced by another string.
The replaced string is defined by the "symbol=" keyword (or "lsymbol=" keyword if
"node" was not specified) in an initialization or RC file, on the command line, or as
environment variable. For example,
(Linux) symbol=DBSDIR=/dbs
(Windows) symbol=DBSDIR=d:\dbs
When the previous ASSIGN statement is processed, the filename assigned to the logical
name MASTER is /dbs/abc.master on Linux and d:\dbs\abc.master on
Windows. An alternate way of defining symbolic names is through the use of
environment variables. For example, typing the following command
export DBSDIR=/dbs
at a Korn shell prompt, or
setenv DBSDIR /dbs
at a C-shell prompt, or
at a Windows shell prompt, is equivalent to the “symbol” keyword definition.
Note: If a symbolic name is defined by both a symbol statement in an RC file and by
an environment variable, the symbol statement value will be used.
The section titled Environment Variables (p. 228) in the MSC Nastran 2019 Installation and
Operations Guide contains a list of environment variables that are automatically created
by the nastran command. Of particular interest to the logical symbol feature are the
OUTDIR and DBSDIR variables. These variables refer to the directory that will
contain the output files (set using the “out” keyword) and the directory that will contain
the permanent database files (set using the “dbs” keyword), respectively.
uds uds={filename | model} Default: None

The file name is the source file that defines user subroutines. This keyword is used to build
user service at nastran job submittal time. The user subroutines implementations are from
the specified file and the user service name is from the connect service statement in input
file.
Main Index
Example:
If user routine is written in Fortran: nast20190 example uds=mysource.F
If user routine is written in C++: nast20190 example

uds=mysource.cpp
The mysource.F includes all user defined subroutines. There may be multiple user
subroutines from multiple interfaces in the file. The user subroutine names are predefined
and documented in User Defined Services.
Another option to define user subroutines is to put them in BEGIN BULK UDS section
in the input file. The content in this section will be used to create source file when building
user service. If this option is used, the uds keyword should be set to model.
Example: nast20190 example uds=model
udssave udssave=pathname Default: output directory
The udssave is the location to build user service. If udssave is given, the path will be used
to build and save user service. If it is not given, the nastran output directory will be used
and the user service will be removed after nastran job run.
Example: nast20190 example uds=mysource.F
udssave=/scratch/mydir
xdbold xdbold={yes|no} Default=yes
Keeps or deletes the previous copy of the .xdb.
If “yes” is specified, the previous copy is kept and appended by the current run.
If “no” is specified, the previous copy is deleted and a new file is created. This gives the
same behavior as below FMS statement:
ASSIGN dbc=<file_name>.xdb delete
Example: nast20190 example xdbold=no
Main Index
Chapter 2: NASTRAN Statement
Guide
2 NASTRAN Statement

The NASTRAN Statement
Main Index

The NASTRAN statement is used to specify values for certain Executive System operational parameters.
These parameters are also called system cells. The NASTRAN statement is used for exceptional circumstances
and is therefore not needed in most runs. The NASTRAN statement may also be specified in the runtime
configuration (RC) files at the system, user, and job level as described in the MSC Nastran 2019.0 Installation and
Operations Guide.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 3
NASTRAN Statement
NASTRAN Executive System Parameter Modification
Specifies values for certain Executive System operational parameters called system cells.
Format:
NASTRAN cellnamei=expressioni, ..., cellnamen=expressionn
or
NASTRAN SYSTEM(i)=expressioni, ..., SYSTEM(n)=expressionn
Describer Meaning
cellnamei System cell names from Table 2-1.
SYSTEM Specifies the system cell number.
expression See DEFINE statement for description.
i System cell number from Table 2-1 or from the SYSTEM common block
described in the MSC Nastran User Modifiable User’s Guide.
Remarks:
1. The NASTRAN statements may appear anywhere in the File Management Section. The NASTRAN
statement may also be specified in runtime configuration (RC) files. See Customizing Command
Initialization and Runtime Configuration Files (App. A) in the MSC Nastran Configuring the Runtime
Environment.
2. System cell values and their associated cell names may also be set with the DEFINE statement. They
may also be set or values returned with the DMAP PUTSYS and GETSYS functions and the PARAM
module. See PUTSYS, GETSYS (p. 27) in the DMAP Programmer’s Guide.
3. More than one NASTRAN statement and/or DEFINE statement may be present and, if a system cell
is specified more than once among these statements, then the last specification takes precedence.
4. The expression will use type conversion rules based on the type (i.e., integer, real, or logical) of the
cellname, as defined on a previous DEFINE statement (see the DEFINE statement for conversion
rules).
5. If expression is omitted, the system cell associated with the cellname will be assigned the value as set
on a previous DEFINE statement.
Examples:
1. Either of the following statements could be used to change the default value for block size.
NASTRAN SYSTEM (1) = 4097
or
NASTRAN BUFFSIZE = 4097
or, if a prior DEFINE statement had defined a keyword MY_SYSBUF to the value 4097, then the
following code could be used:
Main Index
Executive System Parameter Modification
NASTRAN SYSTEM(1)=MY_SYSBUF
or
NASTRAN BUFFSIZE=MY_SYSBUF
The following statement is used to request execution of MSGMESH:
NASTRAN MESH
2. Table 2-1 gives a summary of the recommended system cells. System Cells
.
Table 2-1 System Cell Summary

System Cell
Name (Number) Function and Reference
BUFFSIZE (1) Specifies the number of words in a physical record. Also called
block length.
F06 (2) Specifies FORTRAN unit number for standard output file (.f06).
(Integer>0; a value of 0 sends the results to the log file; Default=6).
This system cell may not be set for SOL 600 or SOL 700.
NLINES (9) Specifies the number of lines printed per page of output. LINE (Case),
406.
MAXLINES (14) MAXLINES (Case), 416
METIME (20) Minimum time for execution summary table message. Output
Description (p. 314) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
APP (21) Approach Flag. See the APP, 101 Executive Control statement. If
APP HEAT is specified, then this system cell is set to 1.
MACHTYPE (22) Machine type
DIAGA (25) Alternate method to set DIAGs 1 through 32. DIAG, 108.
CONFIG (28) Machine subtype
MESH (31) Requests execution of MSGMESH.
ADUMi (46 - 54) Dummy element flag, i=1 through 9.
HEAT (56) APP, 101
0 Structural analysis (Default).
1 Heat transfer
DIAGB (61) Alternate method to set diagnostics 33 through 64. DIAG, 108.
PUNCH (64) Specifies FORTRAN unit number for PUNCH file (.f07).
(Default=7)
MPYAD (66) Selects/deselects multiplication methods. MPYAD (p. 2143) in the
MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 5
NASTRAN Statement
Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

System Cell
DCMPOUT(69) Controls matrix decomposition for MSCLDL and MSCLU. Same
as DECOMP (p. 1639) in the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s
Guide and the Option Selection (p. 77) in the MSC Nastran
Numerical Methods User’s Guide.
0 or -1 Print up to 50 messages for null columns and zero
diagonals (Default=-1).
1 Terminates execution when first null column is
encountered.
2 Suppress printing of message when a null column is
encountered.
4 Terminates execution when first zero diagonal term is
encountered.
16 Place 1.0 in diagonal position for all null columns and
proceed with the decomposition.
32 Terminates execution on zero diagonal term.
64 Exit after execution of preface for symmetric
decomposition.
256 Print MAXRATIO messages (SIM 4159) from DCMP.
DELFF (77) Deletes form feeds.
DBSET Database neutral file set. SubDMAP DBFETCH (p. 1619) in the MSC
Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide.
DMAP (82) Allows NOGO to operate. See Processing of User Errors (p. 34) in the
DMAP Programmer’s Guide.
F04 (86) Specifies FORTRAN unit number for Execution Summary Table
(.f04). Output Description (p. 314) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Manual (Integer > 0; a value of 0 sends the results to the log file;
Default = 4).
RADMTX (87) Type of radiation exchange coefficients, RADMTX, 2892.
1 Direct input of a symmetric SCRIPT-AF matrix on
RADMTX and RADLST entries is allowed. Due to the
symmetry, only one-half of the RADMTX may be
entered.
2 Direct input of a unsymmetric SCRIPT-AF matrix on
RADMTX and RADLST entries is allowed. Due to the
symmetry, the full matrix must be specified on the
RADMTX entries.
Main Index

System Cell
3 If you are running a view factor calculation in an opened
enclosure, NASTRAN assumes that the radiation will be
lost to space at absolute zero degrees Kelvin. You can set
SYSTEM(87)=3 so that radiation will not be lost to
space.
RADLST (88) Print radiation area summary. RADLST, 2888.
SMP (107) Number of processors used for Shared Memory Parallel
NEWHESS (108) Request complex eigenvalue method. See the EIGC, 1848 entry, MSC
Nastran Numerical Methods User’s Guide.
(109) Controls DMAP execution:
0 Do not execute DMAP instruction if all outputs are
previously computed.
1 Always execute DMAP instruction (Default).
BUFFPOOL (114) Bufferpool size. Keywords and Environment Variables (p. 181) in the
MSC Nastran 2019 Installation and Operations Guide.
(119) Controls the type of bufferpool method to be used:
4 Use Version 2012.2 bufferpool method. Default = 4.
Not 4 Use Version 2012.1 bufferpool method.
ATTDEL (124) Controls the automatic assignment of the delivery database.
Database Concepts (p. 421) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
See also Creating and Attaching Alternate Delivery Databases (p. 143) in
the MSC Nastran 2019 Installation and Operations Guide.
0 Enables automatic assigning (Default).
-1 Disables automatic assigning.
NOKEEP (125) Controls NOKEEP option of the RESTART File Management
statement.
0 Disable NOKEEP
1 Enable NOKEEP
SPARSE (126) Sparse matrix method selection for MSCLDL and MSCLU. For
unsymmetric sparse matrix decomposition method selection, see
cell number 209. The following values may be summed in order to
select sparse matrix methods in the operations listed below:
0 Deactivate sparse methods
1 Multiplication
8 Symmetric decomposition
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 7
NASTRAN Statement

System Cell
16 Forward-backward substitution
The default is 25, which is the sum of all values.
UPDTTIM (128) Specifies database directory update time.
DBUPDATE, 76 FMS statement.
0 Do not update.
>0 Time, in minutes, between database directory updates.
SMPYAD67 (129) Select pre-Version 67 method in the SMPYAD module. SMPYAD
(p. 2441) in the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide.
0 Use current method (Default).
1 Use pre-Version 67 method.
MAXDBSET The maximum number of online DBsets attached to the run.
AUTOASGN (133) Controls autoassigning of dbsets. Sum the desired values.
(Default=7). Database Concepts (p. 421) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual.
0 No databases are automatically assigned.
1 Only the primary database is automatically assigned.
2 Only the delivery database is automatically assigned.
4 Only located databases are automatically assigned.
TSTAMP (135) Controls timestamp checking of DBsets.
0 Do not check
1 Check (Default)
2 Same as 1 and print diagnostics
QUADINT (141) Specifies quadratic or linear interpolation for the line search
method in nonlinear analysis (SOL 106, SOL 129, and SOL 153).
0 Quadratic interpolation (Default)
1 Linear interpolation
SCR300 (142) Requests creation of SCR300 partition on SCRATCH DBset.
INIT, 84 FMS statement.
1 Do not create SCR300 partition.
2 Create SCR300 partition (Default).
Main Index

System Cell
LOCBULK (143) LOCBULK=1 or 2 specifies that Bulk Data is being obtained via
the DBLOCATE FMS statement. NASTRAN LOCBULK=2 is
specified when no Bulk Data entries, except for PARAM entries,
are to be deleted or added. All PARAM entries must be respecified.
All other entries will be ignored and, if present, may increase CPU
times in XSORT and IFP. With LOCBULK=2, the XSORT and
IFP modules will not reprocess the Bulk Data Section stored in the
SEMAP run. Also, GP1, TASNP2, SEP1 and SEP1X modules will
be skipped. 0 is the default, which assumes the RESTART FMS
statement. This system cell is recognized only in SOLs 101
through 200.
(144) RESTART FMS statement existence flag. Set to 1 if RESTART
statement is present.
BFGS (145) Selects strategies of BFGS updates for the arc-length methods in
nonlinear analysis. Please see the MSC Nastran Nonlinear
Handbook.
0 Update Δu R and Δu p at every iteration with 2 (Default).
1 Update Δu R only with 2.
2 Update Δu R only with 2*.
FBSMEM (146) Reserves part of Nastran open core memory for faster solution in
the Lanczos method of eigenvalue extraction. Default = 0. When
FBSMEM is less than or equal to 0, available memory is used to
store the factor matrix for use during forward-backward
substitution (FBS) operations (aka “factor caching”). System
Information Message 4199 is printed in the F04 file when the
factor matrix is cached.
Set FBSMEM=1 to disable Lanczos factor caching.
UWM (147) SYSTEM(147)=1 issues a User Warning Message for a DMAP
parameter appearing on a CALL statement that has an inconsistent
authorization in the called subDMAP. 0 is the default, which
means no message is issued. A value of 1 also issues User Warning
Message 1 during DMAP compilation if a module instruction is
missing trailing commas for input and output data blocks.
DBVERCHK (148) In general, databases are not compatible between major releases;
therefore, a check is performed in MSC Nastran to ensure that the
major version which created the database is the same as that being
executed. Since specific data on the database may be compatible,
SYSTEM(148) allows this check to be circumvented. However,
circumventing the check may lead to problems later in the run.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 9
NASTRAN Statement

System Cell
0 Check is performed (Default)
1 Check is not performed
SCR300DEL (150) Sets minimum number of blocks of SCR300 partition of
SCRATCH DBset at which it is deleted. INIT, 84 FMS statement
(Default = 100).
(151) Requests spill or no spill of the SCR300 partition of SCRATCH
DBset. INIT, 84 FMS statement (Default = 0).
DBLAMKD (155) Differential stiffness formulation for CBEAM and CTETRA
elements.
0 Current formulation (Default)
1 Pre-Version 67 formulation
(162) Reserves MSC Nastran executive first number for GINO for each
of the tables DBTEMP, FCB, DBDIR, and FIST. Default value is
6000 and is often controlled in DMAP just before and just after
modules that deal with large input families. Usually a user will have
no need to modify. However if the user gets the following message:
*** SYSTEM FATAL MESSAGE 1267 (XSTORE)

NO MORE MEMORY SPACE AVAILABLE FOR
EXECUTIVE TABLES.
USER ACTION: INCREASE DEFAULT NUMBER OF
EXECUTIVE TABLES ENTRIES VIA SYSTEM CELL 162.
SYSTEM(162) IS CURRENTLY SET TO 6000
A DMAP workaround is of the form:

Just before the offending module
NP=GETSYS(NP,162) $
NP1= value $ value > 6000
PUTSYS(NP1,162) $
Just after offending module
PUTSYS(NP,162) $
(166) Controls sparse symmetric decomposition. Sum the desired values
(Default = 0).
0 No action
1 If insufficient core is encountered, then switch to
conventional decomposition and continue (Default).
2 Print diagnostics.
Main Index

System Cell
4 Do not issue fatal message if maximum ratios are
exceeded. Although high maximum ratios may be
printed, they will not cause job termination. This applies
to the DCMP, DECOMP, REIGL, and LANCZOS
modules.
8 Output a matrix containing the maximum ratio vector
in the output slot for the upper factor.
32 Turn off internal matrix scaling in the READ module.
64 Turn off internal matrix balancing in the READ module.
8192 Use in-core sparse Cholesky factorization method. Only
valid for the DCMP, SOLVE, and DECOMP modules.
The in-core sparse CHOLESKY factorization code is
derived from the TAUCS software package. See
http://www.tau.ac.il/~stoledo/taucs/ for more
information.
LDQRKD (170) Selects the differential stiffness method for CQUAD4 and
CTRIA3 elements:
0 Version 68, improved method (Default).
1 Pre-Version 68 method
OLDQ4K (173) Requests the pre-Version 68 CQUAD4 element stiffness
formulation. No value is required after the keyword. Equivalent to
SYSTEM(173)=1.
0 Default
1 Requests pre-V68 QUAD4 formulation.
2 Requests V68 - V70.5 QUAD4 formulation.
Q4TAPER (189) Specifies the maximum allowable value of taper for CQUAD4
element. Taper is computed by connecting opposite grid points
and computing the area of the enclosed triangles. Another way to
think of taper is the ratio of the areas on the two sides of a diagonal
(Real > 0.0; Default = 0.5).
Q4SKEW (190) Specifies the minimum allowable value of skew for the CQUAD4
element. Skew is the angle measured in degrees between the lines
that join opposite midsides (Real > 0.0; Default = 30.0).
TETRAAR (191) Specifies the maximum allowable aspect ratio of the longest edge
to the shortest altitude for the CTETRA element (Real > 0.0;
Default=100.0).
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 11
NASTRAN Statement

System Cell
SCRSAVE (196) Lanczos high performance option: Controls reuse of scratch files in
segment logic.
0 Do not reuse (Default)
1 Reuse
MINFRONT (198) Lanczos high performance option: minimum front size. (The
default value is machine dependent).
NSEGADD (200) Number of segments in the element error table that is generated in
adaptive analysis (Default = 2).
CORDM (204) Specifies the default value for CORDM field on the PSOLID entry
(Integer >-1; Default = 0).
(205) Rank to use for real symmetric sparse decomposition high rank
update. Default is hardware dependent.
DCMPSEQ (206) Selects ordering method for sparse matrix decomposition.
0 Method selected automatically in symbolic factoring
phase (Default).
1 Minimum degree ordering.
2 Modified minimum degree ordering for indefinite
matrices.
3 No ordering (uses given sequence).
4 Extreme ordering. (BEND)
8 METIS ordering. Metis was developed by George Karpis
and Vipin Kumar at the University of Minnesota. More
information may be found at
http://www.cs.umn.edu/~karypis/metis.
9 Selects the better of METIS and MMD.
10 Selects dof-based (rather than grid-based) modified
minimum degree ordering.
68 This option may reduce the number of nonzero factors
in the sparse decompensation method.
132 Similar to 68 but does not require the USET and SILS
table as input. Uses extreme reordering.
136 Same as 132 but performs METIS reordering.
260 Selects dof-based (rather than grid-based) extreme
ordering.
Main Index

System Cell
264 Selects dof-based (rather than grid-based) METIS
ordering.
1024 Selects Minimum Degree reordering in Intel MKL
Pardiso sparse solver.
2048 Selects METIS reordering in Intel MKL Pardiso sparse
solver.
4096 Selects OpenMP (SMP) METIS reordering in Intel
MKL Pardiso sparse solver.
USPARSE (209) Unsymmetric sparse matrix method selection for the
decomposition and forward-backward substitution operations.
0 Deactivate
1 Select Nastran unsymmetric sparse factorization
(Default).
16 Select UMFPACK unsymmetric sparse factorization.
64 Select LUSOL unsymmetric sparse factorization.
PUNCHTYPE (210) Used to control punch formula.
0 “Old” punch, default in MSC Nastran 2001 and earlier
versions.
1 “New” punch, default in MSC Nastran 2004 and uses
the NDDL.
2 Same as 1 except the line numbers are eliminated.
CHEXAINT (212) Specifies CHEXA element’s integration rule for p-adaptive analysis
and p=2x2x2 (only).
0 Reduced (Default)
1 Full
DISTORT (213) Element distortion fatal termination override. Applies to all
p-elements and the TETRA h-elements.
0 Terminate run (Default)
1 Do not terminate run.
T3SKEW (218) Allows the user to control the minimum vertex angle for CTRIA3
elements at which USER WARNING MESSAGE 5491 is issued.
See the description of CTRIA3.
(219) Rank to use for complex symmetric sparse decomposition high
rank update (Default = 1).
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 13
NASTRAN Statement

System Cell
(220) Rank to use for real unsymmetric sparse decomposition high rank
update (Default = 1).
(221) Rank to use for complex unsymmetric sparse decomposition high
rank update (Default = 1).
(253 - 262) SYSTEM(252) to (262) have been set aside for user DMAPS.
MSC will not use these values in its code in present or future
versions. The SSSAlter library may use this range.
MAXSET (263) Controls the default number of vectors in block or set for Lanczos
Eigenvalue extraction. See EIGRL, 1858. The default is 7 for most
machines but it is machine dependent.
QUARTICDLM (270) A value of 1 selects the new quartic formulation of the doublet
lattic kernel (N5KQ), while 0 selects the original quadratic form
(Default = 0).
(273) A value of 1 selects the old Lanczos shift logic from Version 70 and
previous systems (Default = 0).
DBCFACT (274) Option to create an xdb file with a multi-key data format and is
intended for “large” xdb files.
0 no multi-key format (default)
2 auto-select multi-key format
4 multi-key format
(275) Specifies the timeout for ISHELL in seconds. Values greater than
2,678,400 (31 days) will be set to 31 days.
SPLINE_METRICS (281) Print additional spline quality information
=0 Don't print (default).
=1 Print quality information for each user-generated spline.
=2 Print quality information for each user-generated spline
and each Nastran-generated center-to-corner point
spline.
Note that if SPLINE_METRICS is defined on the NASTRAN
statement without a numeric value, then a value of 1 will be used.
MINDEF (303) Indefinite mass matrix check, the Default = 1 does not perform the
check.
>0 Check is not performed
<0 Epsilon is set to -1.E(MINDEF)
0 MINDEF defaults to -6
Main Index

System Cell
MPERTURB (304) Perturbation factor for indefinite mass matrix. The Default = 1
does not perturb the mass.
>0 The mass is not perturbed
<0 The mass 1.E(MPERTURB) is added to the diagonal
terms of the mass matrix
0 MPERTURB defaults to -6. The perturbed mass matrix
is used in the subsequent eigenvalue analysis
(309) If set to 1, requests the pre-Version 70.7 CHEXA8 element
stiffness formulation (Default = 0).
OLDRBE3 (310) If set to 1, requests the pre-Version 70.7 RBE3 formulation
(Default = 0).
TBCMAG (311) Change the stiffness to 1.0E2 if using thermal conductivity in
Btu/sec/in.F. See Bulk Data entry TEMPBC, 3132 for more
information. The default stiffness is 1.0E10.
INDEX (316) Indexes and/or saves a minimum set of data blocks to the database
needed to for postprocessing in Patran or the toolkit. This cell must
be used with scratch=no on the nastran command. This cell has
several options which are set by adding the following values:
1 Index IFP data blocks.
2 Index OFP data blocks.
4 Save above data blocks to the MASTER dbset.
16
Save above data blocks to the DBALL dbset.
For example, INDEX=7 will index the IFP and OFP data blocks
and save them to the MASTER dbset. (Scratch=post is equivalent
to scratch=no and INDEX=19.)
XMSG (319) If set to 1, gives extended error messages (Default = 0).
OLDDAREA (320) Do not convert DAREA Bulk Data entries for grid and scalar
points to equivalent FORCE/MOMENT/SLOAD Bulk Data
entries (equivalent to SYSTEM(320) = -1).
Controls the conversion of DAREA Bulk Data entries for grid and
scalar points to equivalent FORCE/MOMENT/ SLOAD Bulk
Data entries as appropriate.
0 Perform the conversion, but do not give details of the
conversion (Default).
N Perform the conversion and give details of the first N
such conversions.
-1 Do not perform the conversion.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 15
NASTRAN Statement

System Cell
RSEQCONT (357) If system cell IFPSTAR=NO, RSEQCONT default = 0
1 causes all continuation fields to be ignored and treated as
blank. If set to 1, the continuation entries must
immediately follow the parent
2 causes fatal message to be issued if there are orphaned
continuation entries.
System cell (357) only works when IFPSTAR=NO, it is fixed to 1
when IFPSTAR=YES
QLHOUL (359) 0 Use the user-requested eigensolution method.
<>0 When LAN is requested, switch to AHOU if the
number of DOFs sent to the eigensolver is < “nswitch”,
an input parameter to the READ module. This
parameter has an MPL default of 20. It may be set to
other values in the solution sequences, depending on the
context. When HOU, MHOU, or AHOU is selected,
switch to the new Householder-QL solution
(Default = 1).
PRTPCOMP (361) If set to 1, then the equivalent PSHELLs and MAT2s from
PCOMPs or PCOMPGs are printed to the .f06 file provided that
ECHO = NONE is not set. (Default = 0, suppresses this printout).
STRICTUAI (363) A value of 1 accepts strict UAI/Nastran Bulk Data entries
(Default = 0).
STPFLG (366) Selects the SUBCASE or STEP layout when there are a number of
SUBCASE commands and no STEP command in a Case Control
file for SOL 400 (Default = 0).
0 Keep all SUBCASE commands in the Case Control
file and insert a “STEP 1” for each SUBCASE.
1 Convert all the SUBCASE IDs into STEP IDs, and
then insert a “SUBCASE 1” before the first STEP.
QRMETH (370) When the input consists of CQUADR/CTRIAR elements,
QRMETH allows you to convert them to QUAD4/TRIA3
elements or when the input consists of QUAD4/TRIA3 elements
to convert them to CQUADR/CTRIAR elements.
Some of the output requests for CQUAD4/CTRIA3 are not
available for CQUADR/CTRIAR, for example, the CUBIC
option on the STRESS Case Control command. In this case, the
equivalent CQUADR/CTRIAR options are used.
Main Index

System Cell
0 Use the user input CQUADR/CTRIAR elements.
(Default)
3 Converts user input CQUADR/CTRIAR into
CQUAD4/CTRIA3.
5 Converts user input CQUAD4/CTRIA3 into
CQUADR/CTRIAR.
PARAMCHK (372) DMAP parameter initialization check.
0 Issue User Fatal Message for an input parameter that is
not used in a type statement in the subDMAP argument
1 Issue User Fatal Message for the initialized parameter
(Default = 0)
TZEROMAX (373) Controls time step adjustment in nonlinear transient analysis.
>0 Maximum number of times to return to time zero.
0 No initial time step adjustment (identical to V2001),
default for SOL 400 with CGAP elements.
<0 No limit on DT adjustment.
4 Default for SOL 400 without CGAP element or for SOL
129.
NOLIN (386) (Real, Default = 1.0) Tolerance value for controlling adaptive time
step bisection for NOLIN1 entries in SOL 129. Turned off for
rotor dynamics. For NLRGAP see SYSTEM (431).
0. Bisection is suppressed (same as Version 2001).
.001 Increase accuracy slightly.
.01 Increase accuracy a little more.
1.0 Allow full adaptive time step bisection.
KRYLOV1 (387) Fast direct frequency response option.
-1 Yes
0 No (Default)
KRYLOV2 (388) Options related to fast direct frequency response analysis.
Selects subspace generation method.
1 Lanczos (Default)
2 Arnoldi (Use for unsymmetric systems)
KRYLOV3 (389) Options related to fast direct frequency response analysis. Defines
exponent of relative accuracy.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 17
NASTRAN Statement

System Cell
-4 Error<1.0E-4 (Default)
-6 Error<1.0E-6
KRYLOV4 (390) Options related to fast direct frequency response analysis.
Defines pole selection distance.
0 Next pole is next unconverged frequency (Default).
2 2*next frequency distance.
-2 1/2*next frequency distance.
KRYLOV5 (391) Options related to fast direct frequency response analysis. Selects
decomp/fbs tradeoff parameter determining Krylov method
accuracy.
0 never terminate, do FBS iterations till accuracy is met
1 terminate when FBS time > decomposition time
(Default)
2 terminate when FBS time > 2 * decomposition time
-2 terminate when FBS time > (1/2) * decomposition time
BARMASS (398) Allows the user to select the bar torsional mass moment of inertia.
If set to 0, request the pre-MSC Nastran 2004 (Default = 0).
If set to greater than 0, the torsional mass moment of inertia term
is included in the mass matrix formulation of bar elements. For
both values of COUPMASS, the torsional inertia is added.
For COUPMASS = 1, the axial mass will be consistent rather than
coupled.
DPBLKTOL (402) Specifies Bulk Data tolerance value for GRID, CORD2C,
CORD2R, and CORD2S entries. (Default = 0). See / Control
Input Stream section under Bulk Data Entries below
<0 Do not remove duplicate entries
0.0 Check specified Bulk Data entries for exact physical
match and remove duplicates
>0 Then perform the DPBLKTOL=0.0 check and
additionally GRID entry as duplicate if
{ x1 ( i ) – x2 ( i ) ≤ DPBLKTOL ; i = 1, 2, 3 and ( cp1 ≠ cp2
and cp1 ⋅ cp2 = 0 ) and ( cd1 ≠ cd2 and cd1 ⋅ cd2 = 0 ) and
(ps1 = ps2) and (seid1 = seid2)} using entry with cpi ≠ 0
and cdi ≠ 0 if possible
OP2NEW (403) Selects the additional version information in the OUTPUT2 file.
(Default = 0)
Main Index

System Cell
0 Leave alone and unidentified, pre-2004 convention
1 Add version major, minor, special to tape label and
change IFP datablock locate code word 3
DEF_DENS (408) Set DEFAULT value for the MODEL_CHECK Executive
statement MAT_DENSITY=DEFAULT operation (Default =
0.0).
DEF_TECO (410) Set DEFAULT value for the MODEL_CHECK Executive
statement MAT_TECO=DEFAULT operation (Default = 0.0).
DEF_TEIJ (411) Set DEFAULT value for the MODEL_CHECK Executive
statement MAT_TEIJ=DEFAULT operation (Default = 0.0).
DEF_DAMP (412) Set DEFAULT value for the MODEL_CHECK Executive
statement MAT_DAMP=DEFAULT operation (Default = 0.0).
OPTCOD (413) Specifies which optimization code to be used in SOL 200 (Default
= 0; automatic selection for a better performance based on number
of design variables, number of constraints, number of
active/violated constraints and computer memory).
Note: Options 1 and 2 are no longer used.
3 MSCADS
4 IPOPT Optimizer
(414) Only used if COUPMASS < 0. Default = 0 Coupled Mass for
CBAR and CBEAM elements.
> Lumped Mass matrix will contain translational
components only for CBAR and CBEAM elements.
OLDTLDMTH (428) If nonzero, requests the pre-version 2005 r3 method for
computing thermal expansion in CHEXA, CPENTA, and
CTETRA elements.
NONLRGAP (431) (Real, Default = -1.0) Sets tolerance value for controlling adaptive
time step bisection for NLRGAP entries in SOL 129 and SOL
400. Time step bisection will occur if the contact force magnitude
changes more than the tolerance.
= 0. (Same logic as Version 2005)
< 0. Tolerance = 1.E+9
> 0. Tolerance = 1000./SYSTEM(431)
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 19
NASTRAN Statement

System Cell
ESLNRO (443) Flag to invoke Nonlinear Response Optimization with the concept
of Equivalent Static Loads
0 No ESLNRO (Default)
1 Turn on ESLNRO
(444) 0 Selects the pre Nastran 2010 release of IFP for bulk data
processing.
1 Selects the MSC Nastran 2010 release Common Data
Model for data processing, do not allow an integer in a
field that the only possible format is real. (Default)
9 Selects the MSC Nastran 2010 release Common Data
Model for data processing, allow an integer in a field that
the only possible format is real.
On command line SYS444=0, 1 or 9.
Or
IFPSTAR YES Selects the MSC Nastran 2010 release Common Data
Model for data processing, do not allow an integer in a
field that the only possible format is real. (Default)
NO Select the MSC Nastran IFP for bulk data processing.
On command line IFPSTAR=YES or NO is able to express the
value of 1 or 0 only.
MNLQ4C (445) Allows or disallows corner stress calculations for CQUAD4 if
material nonlinear (Default = 1).
0 Allows material nonlinear CQUAD4 corner stress
calculations if plastic deformation has occurred, results
may be totally incorrect.
1 Disallows material nonlinear CQUAD4 corner stress
calculations. If corner requested and material nonlinear
sensed, corner is turned off and center only is computed.
(446) Controls 4 noded CTETRA fluid mass calculations. (Default=0)
0 To improve the modal results for fluid mass and remove
the possibility of spurious fluid modes, a four point
integration method is used.
1 A one point integration method is used to compute the
fluid mass.
Main Index

System Cell
PARSLAVE(449) Bitwise control of DMP operations in SOL 400 nonlinear analysis.
Bit Value Description
1 0 Slave processes execute the entire analysis. This
value is recommended for distributed
execution. (Default)
1 Slave processes only participate in parallel
computational tasks. Recommended for DMP
running on a single host (i.e., non-distributed
DMP execution).
2 0 DMP linear equation solver disabled.
1 DMP linear equation solver enabled (default).
3 0 DMP nonlinear element matrix generation
disabled.
1 DMP nonlinear element matrix generation
enabled (default).
The default value if Bit 1 is determined automatically at job
startup. When running the job on multiple hosts, the value is set
to 0; otherwise (single host), it is set to 1.
To change defaults for this system cell, use the DOMAINSOLVER
command in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
(451) If set nonzero, requests the method to calculate transverse shear
correction for elements using MID4, or “Z0” on the PCOMP to
offset a shell element. The default 0 uses a new method that avoids
excessive transverse shear stiffness. This is expected to have small
effect on most models, unless the shell is thick and the offset is
large.
IFPBUFF(624) Specifies the size of IFPSTAR data base I/O transfers
Default value=1024 words
The physical I/O size is IFPBUFF words. The maximum value of
IFPBUFF is 65536 words.
Example: NASTRAN IFPBUFF=8192
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 21
NASTRAN Statement

System Cell
NONUPIV (653) Parameter to select the numeric compute kernel and pivoting
methods in MSCLDL and MSCLU sparse direct solvers. Also see
the bulk data entry MDLPRM, 2373,NONUPIV.
0 Use the native Bunch-Kauffman threshold pivoting in
MSCLDL, and the native threshold partial pivoting in
MSCLU (Default).
1 Use no numeric pivoting in MSCLDL and MSCLU.
BLAS3 TRSMs are called to compute the pivot column
update to improve performance. Ill-conditioned models
may die of “singular matrix” during sparse factorization.
3 LAPACK SYTRFs with Bunch-Kaufman pivoting and
GETRFs with partial pivoting are called to perform
factorizations, and BLAS3 TRSMs are called to compute
pivot column update to improve performance.
GPU_MIN_FRONT (655) The criteria for GPGPU execution during matrix factorization are
the frontal matrix front size and the rank of the frontal matrix.
Minimum dimensions are set via gpu_min_front and its
companion parameter, gpu_min_rank. The value specified must
be an integer greater or equal to 1.
If the front size is smaller than value, the rank update of the front
is processed on the CPU. Otherwise, the GPGPU device would be
used for the rank update of the front. The default value for
GPU_MIN_FRONT is 1024.
GPU_MIN_RANK (656) If the rank of the frontal matrix is smaller than value, the rank
update of the front is processed on the CPU. Otherwise, the
GPGPU device would be used for the rank update of the front.
The default value for GPU_MIN_RANK is 16.
(662) Controls CBUSH internal load calculation for radial dependence.
(Default=0)
0 Radial dependence of PBUSHT entries DOES NOT
depend on the alignment of the CBUSH element when
subject to nonlinear force deflection relations.
1 Radial dependence of PBUSHT entries DOES depend
on the alignment of the CBUSH element when subject
to nonlinear force deflection relations.
Main Index

System Cell
SEGLOG(664) Control the logic to compute the default value of PENALT in
segment-to-segment contact analysis. Before v2017, Default value
is 0.
0 Use the existing/old logic where the default value is
based on the average elastic stiffness of the two contact
bodies and the default error tolerance.
1 Use new logic (Default) for PENALT to avoid a too large
value of PENALT, where the default value is defined by
the body with the softer material and the minimum edge
length of the two contact bodies. This logic is often
better for thin shell structures.
CNTBKCMP(666) Control the logic to compute the contact at shell corners in node-
to-segment contact analysis to ensure backward compatibility.
0 Use the current/new contact logic for shell corners
(Default). This logic uses weighted average normal
vector and adjusted thickness for a better representation
of the sharp corner at both top and bottom of the shell.
1 Use old contact logic for shell corners to ensure
backward compatibility. This logic uses average
thickness and average normal vector even at sharp
corners.
(670) Control for Automatic Contact Generation. Used when
BCONTACT=AUTO is present in case control.
0 Default, Nastran run to completion after generating acg
file.
3 Nastran terminates after generating acg file.
LMFBKCMP(676) Control the logic to compute the default value of Lagrange
multiplier (LMFACT and PENFN)
0 (Default) Use new algorithm for LMFACT/PENFN,
which are two order lower than previous value
1 Use old algorithm (Before 2013.0 Version)
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 23
NASTRAN Statement

System Cell
FFOBKCMP(677) Control the logic to compute the unloading follower force.
0 (Default) Use new algorithm for unloading follower
force, i.e., follower force in the previous loadcase will be
unloaded by follower force method but not by linear
interpolation.
1 Use old algorithm for unloading follower force, i.e., by
linear interpolation (before 2013.0 Version).
OLDLCNTR(678) Ensure backward compatibility for linear connector elements.
0 Use existing algorithm with RBE3 relationships for
linear connectors (Default).
1 Use old algorithm (v2014.1 or earlier) for linear
connectors to ensure backward compatibility.
PARAM,OLDWELD,YES is equivalent to a value NASTRAN
OLDLCNTR=1
(679) Controls checking for validity of sparse matrix passed to Intel
MKL Pardiso. Column indices must be in increasing order within
rows.
0 Disable matrix checking (Default)
1 Enable matrix checking
(684) Control of matrix type for Intel MKL Pardiso. For more
information, see Intel MKL Paridso documentation
Main Index

System Cell
RDBOTH(695) Parameter to select Rayleigh damping approach for rotordynamics
(compatibility withV2005) implementation, Integer
0 Uses implementation for Rayleigh Damping as
described in RSPINR/RSPINT entry description
(Default)
1 Switch to V2005 implementation of Rayleigh damping
where damping coefficients specified in the model
through "PARAM, ALPHA1" and "PARAM, ALPHA2"
are applied to the complete model and Rayleigh
damping specified through "ALPHAR1" and
"ALPHAR2" in RSPINR/RSPINT are not used
2 Ignore circulation effects in rotordynamic analysis.
4 Include effect of stress stiffening using method = 1 (see
RFORCE entry)
8 Include effect of stress stiffening using method = 2 (see
RFORCE entry)
S2SDEF(701) Parameter to control backward compatibility of Seg-to-Seg contact
default values.
0 Original Seg-to-Seg contact default values Original Seg-
to-Seg contact default values
1 New Seg-to-Seg contact default values (Default)
HDF5 (702) Control NH5RDB database creation.
-1 Do not create NH5RDB database (Default).
0 Create NH5RDB database without compression.
1 Create NH5RDB database with compression.
2 Create uncompressed NH5RDB database without input
data.
3 Create compressed NH5RDB database without input
data.
H5NORDOF(730) To suppress output rotational components to NH5RDB database
0 Output both translational and rotational components to
NH5RDB database (Default).
1 Do not output rotational components to NH5DB
database.
Only used when HDF5(702) is 0 or 1.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 25
NASTRAN Statement

System Cell
OBEAMS (725) Control Linear format output of Advanced Nonlinear Bar
Element.
Default: 0
0 New. Output of beam stress is separated into Bending
and Axial stresses.
1 Old. Output of beam stress combines bending and axial
stresses together.
OLDCCONE (726) The CCONEAX Force/Stress Recovery element coordinate system
is inconsistent with the input RINGAX coordinate system relative
to the RINGAX A/RINGAX B order. The CCONEAX
Force/Stress Recovery has now been made consistent. For those
who may have post processing that recognized the inconsistency
and do not wish to change, the inconsistency may be restored with
OLDCCONE.
0 Default: Force/Stress output consistent with RINGAX
coordinate.
1 Restore inconsistent RINGAX A/RINGAX B
Force/Stress output.
METS2S (727) Control Segment to Segment contact.
Default: 0
0 Support SEGTOSEG only since 2017 BETA and later
version
1 Old. Support SEGSMALL, SEGLARGE, as well
SEGTOSG.
DMP (728) The number of Distributed Memory Processes used. This option
is only useful for specific Solution Sequences as described in the
“MSC Nastran HPC User’s Guide”
N2SDOF (729) Control node freedom number of contact
Default: 0
0 Depend on contact type: 3 for touching contact; 6 for
glued contact
1 Set the node freedom of contact to be 6 always
Main Index

System Cell
(738) Represents the chosen solver used during solve=auto. Utilized in
specific solution sequences 101, 400. For internal use only.
1 = MSCLDL
2 = Pardiso
3 = CASI
H5MTX (739) Write matrix data in separate file
1 Write matrix data into a separate file
0 Do not write matrix data into a separate file (Default)
H5MDL (740) Write model input data in separate file
1 Write model input data into a separate file
0 Do not write model input data into a separate file
(Default)
-1 Use OP2GM34 setting for GEOM3 and GEOM4
output (Default)
(746) Represents the chosen solver used during solve=auto. Utilized in
specific solution sequences 103, 111. For internal use only.
1 = NewAcms
2 = Lanczos
ACCSDLSZ(747) SDL work area memory size of IFPStar, defaut=100000
> 100000, work area size in word
H5GM34 (751) Write GEOM3 and GEOM4 data in NH5RDB
1 Write GEOM3 and GEOM4 data in NH5RDB
0 Do not write GEOM3 and GEOM4 data in NH5RDB
UDEFGRID(753) Control whether having undefined grid points on ASET/ASET1
entries is allowed.
Default=0.
0 Issue a User Warning Message and continue the
simulation.
1 Issue a User Fatal Message and terminate the simulation
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 27
NASTRAN Statement

System Cell
CNTBACK(758) BIAS=0.0 on BCONPRG/BCTABLE will be used as 0.0 in
analysis.
Before 2018.2, BIAS=0.0 is treated as default, same as blank,
which will turn to the value of BIAS on BCPARA and so the user
has to put a small value to approximate absolute 0.0.
Since 20190.0, seg-to-seg initial stress free contact can adjust
geometry to clear gap/penetration.
Default=0.
0 BIAS=0.0 on BCONPRG/BCTABLE is treated as 0.0
and will override BIAS on BCPARA.
Seg-to-seg Contact will adjust geometry by Initial Stress
Free.
1 (backward compatible) BIAS=0.0 on
BCONPRG/BCTABLE is treated as blank (default);
BIAS on BCPARA will be used in analysis.
2 Switch to Step Glue if Permanent Glue with LGDISP>1
8 (back to 2018.2) No geometry adjustment in seg-to-seg
Contact Initial Stress Free
OP2NEW(761) Select option to improve OUTPUT2 performance when
converting data from I8 to I4 binary format.
Default=1
0 Use the pre-existing I8-I4 conversion method.
1 Use the new conversion method
IGNBLN(767) Control if ignore blank lines in an entry followed by continuation
lines.
0 (Default) Don't ignore and issue UFM when blank lines
followed by continuations are found.
1 Ignore those blank lines.
BLNMEM(768) Memory size in bytes to store blank line numbers in input files.
8000: Default, 8000 bytes.
>=800: User specified size.
<800: Will be forcedly changed to 800.
Main Index

System Cell
OPENFSI(776) Type: Integer
OpenFSI interface option.
0: (Default) For implicit type, skip the
putWettedNodeDisp method call when the current time
is converged and no displacement update from last
iteration.
1 Do not skip the putWettedNodeDisp call even there is
no displacement update.
Main Index
Chapter 3: File Management Statements
Guide
3 File Management
Statements

Key to Descriptions
 The File Management Section (FMS)
Main Index
Key to Descriptions
Key to Descriptions
A brief sentence about
the function of the
statement is given.
If the describers are

stacked vertically,
Describers in uppercase then only one may
letters are keywords that be specified.
must be specified as shown.
Describers in lower
case are variables.
The default
describers are
Brackets [] indicate that shaded.
a choice of describers Braces { } indicate that
is optional. a choice of describers
is mandatory.
Each of the describers is discussed briefly.

Further details may be discussed under
Remarks.
If the describer is in lower case, then it is a variable

and the describer’s type (e.g., Integer, Real, or
Character), allowable range, and default value are
enclosed in parentheses. If no default value is given,
the describer must be specified by the user.
The
Theremarks
remarksarearegenerally
generallyarranged
arrangedininorder
orderofof
importance
importanceand andindicate
indicatesuch
suchthings
thingsasasthethe
statement’s
statement’srelationship
relationshiptotoother
otherstatements,
statements,
restrictions
restrictionsand
andrecommendations
recommendationson onitsitsuse,
use,
and
andfurther
furtherdetails
detailsregarding
regardingthe
thedescribers.
describers.
Main Index
Chapter 3: File Management Statements 31
The File Management Section (FMS)

The File Management Section (FMS) is primarily intended for the attachment and initialization of Database
sets (DBsets) and FORTRAN files. The initialization of DBsets includes specification of their maximum size,
member names, and physical filenames. The initialization of FORTRAN files includes the specification of
their filenames, FORTRAN unit numbers, and FORTRAN attributes.
In most classes of problems that use MSC Nastran solution sequences (SOLs), no File Management
statements are required because a default File Management Section is executed at the beginning of every run.
The default File Management Section is described in the Database Concepts (p. 421) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual. If a restart is desired, then the RESTART statement is required. All other solutions may
not be restarted. If the problem is large in terms of requiring significant amounts of memory or disk space,
then the INIT, ASSIGN, and EXPAND statements may be required. If any FORTRAN files are required,
then the ASSIGN statement is required; for example, the OUTPUT2 DMAP module. The ASSIGN
statement is also required to assign databases for DBLOCATE, DBLOAD, and DBUNLOAD. Special
database operations are performed by the DBLOCATE, DBLOAD, DBUNLOAD, DBLCLEAN,
ACQUIRE, DBDICT, DBFIX, DBSETDEL, DBUPDATE, and PROJECT statements.
File Management Statement Summary

The following is a summary of all File Management statements:
$ Comment statement.
ACQUIRE Selects NDDL schema and MSC Nastran delivery database.
ASSIGN Assigns physical files to DBset members or special FORTRAN files.
CONNECT Group geometry data by evaluator and database.
DBCLEAN Deletes selected database version(s) and/or projects.
DBDICT Prints the database directory in user-defined format.
DBDIR
DBFIX Identifies and optionally corrects errors found in the database.
DBLOAD Loads a database previously unloaded by DBUNLOAD.
DBLOCATE Obtains data blocks and parameters from databases.
DBSETDEL Deletes DBsets.
DBUNLOAD Unloads a database for compression, transfer, or archival storage.
DBUPDATE Specifies the time between updates of the database directory.
ENDJOB Terminates a job upon completion of FMS statements.
EXPAND Concatenates additional DBset members to an existing DBset.
INCLUDE Inserts an external file in the input file.
INIT Creates a temporary or permanent DBset.
Main Index
NASTRAN Specifies values for system cells.

PROJ Defines the current or default project identifier.
The FMS statements are executed in the following order regardless of their order of appearance in the input
file:
NASTRAN, DEFINE
RFINCLUDE, INCLUDE
ASSIGN, INIT, EXPAND, DBUPDATE
PROJECT
DBCLEAN
DBFIX
DBDICT(1)
DBSETDEL
ACQUIRE
RESTART
DBLOCATE
DBUNLOAD
DBLOAD
DBDIR (2), DBDICT(2)
ENDJOB
If DBDICT is specified before any of the FMS statements DBSETDEL through DBLOAD, then the
directory printout will reflect the processing of DBCLEAN and DBFIX only. If DBDICT is specified after
DBSETDEL through DBLOAD, then the directory printout will reflect the processing of all statements in
the FMS Section. We recommend that the DBDICT statements be specified last in the FMS Section.
Multiple DBLOCATE, DBLOAD, or DBUNLOAD statements are processed in the order in which they
appear. If the ENDJOB statement is specified, then only the File Management Section is processed and the
Executive Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data Sections are ignored.
File Management Statement Descriptions

File Management statements may be abbreviated down to the first four characters as long as the abbreviation
is unique relative to all other statements. Each statement is described as follows:
Description
A brief sentence about the function of the statement is given.
Main Index
Format
Describers in uppercase are keywords that must be specified as shown. In addition, describers in lowercase
indicate that the user must provide a value.
Braces { } indicate that a choice of describers is mandatory. If the describers are stacked vertically, then only
one may be specified.
Brackets [ ] indicate that a choice of describers is optional. If the describers are stacked vertically, then only
Describers that are shaded indicate the defaults.
If the statement line is longer than 72 columns, then it may be continued to the next line with a comma as
long as the comma is preceded by one or more spaces and no keyword is split across lines. For example:
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(KAA) ,
WHERE(PROJECT=’FRONT BUMPER’ AND ,
SEID>0 AND VERSION=4) ,
LOGI=MASTER3
However, if a filename is to be continued on the next line, no space must precede the comma, and the
continuation line must have no leading spaces.
Example
ASSIGN SDB=’/jw/johannes/Projects/secret/Aero/Tests/wing/,
Modes/wing_modal.MASTER’
Note that all quote marks shown under formats and examples are right-handed single quotation marks and
must be entered as such. For example:
PROJ=’MYJOB’
Example
A typical example is given.
Describers and Meaning

Each of the describers is briefly discussed. The describer’s type (e.g., Integer, Real, or Character), allowable
range, and default value are enclosed in parentheses. The describer must be specified by the user if no default
value is given.
Remarks
The remarks are generally arranged in order of importance and indicate such things as the FMS statement’s
relationship to other commands, restrictions and recommendations on its use, and further descriptions of the
describers.
Main Index
WHERE and CONVERT Clauses

The WHERE clause is used in the selection of items (data blocks and parameters) on the DBDICT,
DBLOCATE, DBLOAD, and DBUNLOAD statements. The CONVERT clause modifies qualifier values
of items selected by the WHERE clause on the DBLOCATE and DBLOAD statements.
The WHERE and CONVERT clauses specify values for PROJECT, VERSION, qualifiers, and DBSET.
PROJECT specifies the project-ID that is originally defined on the PROJECT FMS statement at the time
the project is created. VERSION specifies the desired version-ID under the project-ID. Qualifiers are used
to uniquely identify items on the database with the same name. For example, data block KAA has SEID as
one of its qualifiers, which is the superelement ID. An item may have more than one qualifier and the
collection of all qualifiers assigned to an item is called a path. All data blocks and parameters with qualifiers
are defined in the NDDL Sequence (NASTRAN Data Definition Language), see MSC Nastran DMAP
Programmer’s Guide. Data blocks and parameters are defined on the DATABLK and PARAM NDDL
statements. The DATABLK and PARAM statements specify the name of the data block, parameter, and also
its pathname. The pathnames are defined on the PATH NDDL statement, which lists the qualifiers assigned
to the path. Qualifiers are defined on the QUAL NDDL statement. DBSET specifies the desired DBset. The
DBset of an item is specified after the LOCATION keyword on the DATABLK and PARAM NDDL
statement.
The format of the WHERE clause is:
WHERE (where-expr)
where-expr is a logical expression that specifies the desired values of qualifiers, PROJECT, VERSION, and
DBSET. If the result of the logical expression is TRUE for an item on the database then the item is selected.
For example, WHERE(VERSlON=4 AND SElD<>2 AND SElD>0) selects all items under version 4 for all
values of SEID greater than 0 except 2.
A simple where-expr is a comparison using the following relational operators: =, >, <, <, >, >< or <>. For
example, SElD>0 means if SEID is greater than zero, then the logical expression is true. Several simple where
expressions may be joined into one where expression by the following logical operators: AND, OR, XOR,
and EQV. The NOT operator may be used to negate a where expression. For example, NOT(SEID>0) is the
same as SEID< 0. Arithmetic operations and DMAP functions may also be specified in the where expression
(see the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide.)
If a qualifier in a where-expr is not a qualifier in the path of a specified item, then the where-expr is set to
FALSE. If the where-expr does not contain a specification for all qualifiers in the path of an item, then the
unspecified qualifiers will be wildcarded (i.e., quali=*, all values will be selected.) The default values of
qualifiers, PROJECT, VERSION, and DBSET are described under the statement in which the WHERE
clause is specified.
Examples of the WHERE clause are:
1. Select all items in the database for all superelements except 10 and 30 from Version 1.
WHERE (VERSION=1 AND SEID>=0 AND NOT(SEID=10 OR SEID=30))
2. Select all entries in database on DBSET=DBALL from all projects and versions.
WHERE(PROJECT=PROJECT AND VERSlON>0 AND DBSET=’DBALL’)
Main Index
The CONVERT clause modifies project- and version-ID, DBset-name (see INIT statement), and qualifier
values of items selected by the WHERE clause on the DBLOCATE and DBLOAD statements. It contains
one or more assignment statements separated by semicolons. The format of CONVERT clause is:
CONVERT(PROJECT=project-expr; VERSION=version-expr; ,
DBSET=DBset-expr;quali=qual-expri[;...])
The PROJECT and VERSION statements modify the project-ID (see PROJECT FMS statement) and
version-ID. The DBSET statement modifies the DBset-name. The value of quali will be replaced by
qual-expri for selected items that have quali in their path. qual-expri is any valid expression (see Expressions
and Operators (p. 8) in the DMAP Programmer’s Guide) containing constants or any qualifier name defined in
the path of the item. If qual-expri contains names of qualifiers not in the path of the selected item, then a
fatal message is issued. If project-expr and/or version-expr produces a project- or version-ID which does not
exist, then one will be created. Also, all version-IDs less than version-expr that do not exist will be created;
but they will be “empty.”
Examples of the CONVERT clause are:
1. Set qualifiers SEID, PEID, and SPC to constants 10, 20, 102 respectively.
CONVERT(SEID=10;PEID=20;SPC=102)
If more than one value of a qualifier is found for an item by the WHERE clause, then each value is
processed in qual-expri to define the new qualifier value for each of the selected items. In the following
example, if the original values of PEID were 1, 2, and 3; then the new values for the SElD qualifier
will be 2, 4, and 6.
2. Set all values of qualifier SElD to be twice the value of the PEID qualifier:
CONVERT(SElD=2*PElD)
Main Index
36 $
Comment
File Management Statements

$ Comment
Used to insert comments into the input file. Comment statements may appear anywhere within the input file.
Format:
$ followed by any characters out to column 80.
Example:
$ TEST FIXTURE-THIRD MODE
Remarks:
1. Comments are ignored by the program.
2. Comments will appear only in the unsorted echo of the Bulk Data.
Main Index
ACQUIRE 37
Selects NDDL Schema
ACQUIRE Selects NDDL Schema
Selects the NDDL schema and MSC Nastran delivery database to be used for primary database creation.
Format:
 
ACQUIRE NDDL =  NDDL 
 nddl-name 
Describer Meaning
NDDL MSC Nastran NDDL schema.
nddl-name Name of a user NDDL schema specified on a COMPILE NDDL statement
when the user NDDL was stored.
Remark:
This statement is used to specify the delivery database when the user wishes to create a solution sequence, yet
use the subDMAP objects or NDDL schema or both from the MSC-supplied delivery database.
Example:
The following requests the MSC Nastran NDDL schema to be used when creating a new database.
ACQUIRE NDDL
SOL MYDMAP
COMPILE DMAP=MYDMAP,SOUOUT=USROBJ
.
.
.
LINK MYDMAP,SOLOUT=USROBJ
Main Index
38 ASSIGN
Assigns Physical File
ASSIGN Assigns Physical File
Assigns physical file names or other properties to DBset members or special FORTRAN files that are used by
other FMS statements or DMAP modules. Also, assigns physical name and/or other properties to modal
neutral files (.mnf ) for MSC Nastran/ADAMS interface.
Format 1: Assign a DBset member name

= ′filename1′
ASSIGN log-name= = * [TEMP] [ DELETE] [ SYS=’sys-spec’ ]
= ′*′
Format 2: Assign a FORTRAN file

= ′filename2′
ASSIGN logical-key = * [UNIT = u]
= ′*′
[ STATUS = ]  NEW 
 
 OLD 
 
 UNKNOWN 
 FORMATTED 
[ FORM = ]   [ RECL = 1 ] [ SIZE = s ]
 UNFORMATTED 
 AIX64 
 
 LITTLEENDIAN (or LTLEND) 
 
 LITTLEENDIAN64 (or LITT64) 
 LTLEND64 (or LTLE64) 
 
 <ostype> 
TEMP
[DEFER ] [ DELETE] [SYS = ‘sys-spec’]
DELZERO
[IMPORT]
Examples:
1. Assign the DBALL DBset:
ASSIGN DB1=’filename of member DB1’
INIT DBALL LOGI=(DB1)
2. Assign FORTRAN file 12 to the OUTPUT4 module using the ASCII option:
ASSIGN OUTPUT4=’filename of FORTRAN file’
UNIT=12, FORM=FORMATTED
3. Assign FORTRAN file to the OPCASE using the ASCII option:
Main Index
ASSIGN 39
ASSIGN OPCASE=’Filename of FORTRAN file’, STATUS=NEW

4. Define SYS parameters for the SCR300 DBset file using the default file name:
ASSIGN SCR300 SYS=’...’
5. Set the default .op2 file format to LITTLEENDIAN and assign two .op2 files, one to unit 12 with
the file name “test_op2.12’ and one to unit 35 with file name ‘test_op2.35’ in ASCII mode.
ASSIGN OUTPUT2 LITTLEENDIAN
...
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’test_op2.12’ UNIT=12
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’test_op2.35’ UNIT=35 FORM=FORMATTED
6. Assign a Fortran unit to the Universal File (UF) containing the FRF information for a test FRF
component to be used in an FRF Based Assembly (FBA) process.
ASSIGN UNVFILE=’testcomp_unv’ UNIT=25
Describer Meaning
log-name The name of a DBset member name. log-name may also be referenced on an
INIT statement after the LOGICAL keyword.
filename1 The physical filename assigned to the DBset member. If the default filename
(if there is one) is to be used, filename1 may be omitted or specified as * or ‘*’.
See Remark 6.
logical-key Specifies defaults for STATUS, UNIT, and FORM of FORTRAN files for
other FMS statements, DMAP modules, punching, and plotting operations.
filename2 The physical file name assigned to the FORTRAN file. If the default filename
is to be used, filename2 may be omitted or specified as * or ‘*”. See Remark 7.
UNlT=u u is the FORTRAN unit number of the FORTRAN file. If this describer is
omitted and if filename2 is omitted, this ASSIGN statement will update the
defaults for subsequent ASSIGN statements for the same logical-key value. See
Remark 7.
TEMP Requests that the file associated with log-name or logical-key/UNIT be deleted
at the end of the run. Warning, using TEMP on OP2 or XDB files will result
in the inability to postprocess the results.
DELETE Requests that the file associated with logical-key/UNIT, if it exists before the
start of the run, be deleted.
DELZERO Requests that the file associated with logical-key/UNIT be deleted at the end
of the run if it is zero-length; that is, if it does not contain any data.
STATUS Specifies whether the FORTRAN file is being created (STATUS=NEW) or has
been created prior to the run (STATUS=OLD). If its status is not known, then
STATUS=UNKNOWN is specified.
FORM Indicates whether the FORTRAN file is written in ASCII
(FORM=FORMATTED) or binary (FORM=UNFORMATTED,
LITTLEENDIAN, LTLEND, LITTLEENDIAN64, LTLEND64, <ostype>)
format. See Remark 10., 11., 12., 13. and 18.
Main Index
40 ASSIGN
Describer Meaning
DEFER Defers opening/creating the specified file. That is, the file will not be
opened/created during MSC Nastran initialization. The file must be explicitly
opened by the module or DMAP accessing the file using, for example,
FORTIO, before it can be used.
sys-spec System-specific, machine-dependent or application-specific controls. For
DBset files, these control I/O performance. For FORTRAN files, only the
PLOT and DBC Logical-Key Names use this field. For the DBC Logical-Key,
these controls are for I/O performance just as for DBset files. For the PLOT
Logical-Key, these controls are used for PostScript processing when
FORM=FORMATTED is in effect and are ignored otherwise. See Remark 14.
RECL = l The size of a block of input/output information specified in words. See Remark
15.
SIZE = s The number of blocks allocated to the DBC database. See Remark 16.
IMPORT Imports external ifpdb. When this is absent, IFPDB is for export.
Remarks:
1. The ASSIGN statement and its applications are discussed further in the Database Concepts (p. 421) in
the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
2. The log-name or logical-key describer must be the first describer on the ASSIGN statement. All other
describers may appear in any order. With the exception of log-name, logical-key, filename1,
filename2, and sys-spec, describers and values longer than four characters may be abbreviated to four
characters.
3. For FORTRAN files, the logical-key names and their default attributes are listed in Table 3-1. If a
logical-key name is identified as “Assignable YES”, then the defaults may be overridden on the
ASSIGN statement.
4. Certain reserved names may not be used for log-names or logical-key names. These names are the
logical names listed in Table 3-1 that are identified as “Assignable NO”. This list includes: SEMTRN,
LNKSWH, MESHFL, LOGFL, INPUT, PRINT, INCLD1, and CNTFL. If they are used, then a
User Fatal Message is issued. Unit numbers 1 through 10, 14, 16, 18, 19 and 21 should not be
assigned. Up to 4000 ASSIGNs are allowed. Unit numbers 1234, 1133 to 2269 are not allowed.
Some operating systems may have their own limit on the number of open files as well. PUNCH and
PLOT may be used, but are not recommended. Most keyword assignments can be specified as
command line arguments and/or included in RC files. There are some exceptions such as solve=auto
may be specified on the command line or the User RC files, but not in the system RC files
(MSC_BASE/conf/RCfile).
5. If one of the logical-key names indicated in the Remarks 3. and 4. is not specified on this statement,
then it is assumed to be a DBset member name log-name as shown in Format 1.
6. If the same log-name is used on more than one DBset ASSIGN statement, the following rules apply:
Main Index
ASSIGN 41
a. If there is no current entry for the specified log-name, a new entry in the DBset tables will be
created. If there is an existing entry for the specified log-name, the ASSIGN parameters will
modify that entry instead of creating a new one.
b. If filename1 is omitted or is specified as * or ‘*’, the default file name or, if this is a second or
subsequent ASSIGN statement for the same log-name, the previously specified file name (or
default name if none was previously specified) will be used.
7. If the same logical-key is used on more than one FORTRAN file ASSIGN statement, the following
rules apply:
a. If filename2 is omitted (or specified as * or ‘*’) and if the UNIT describer is omitted, the ASSIGN
parameters will modify the system default entry for the logical-key, establishing the new defaults
for any subsequent ASSIGN entry for the logical-key. Note, however, that any entries previously
created with the same logical-key will not be modified by the new parameters specified on this
ASSIGN statement.
b. If the value specified by the UNIT describer matches the value for an entry created by a previous
ASSIGN statement with a UNIT describer, then:
• If the logical-key values are different, a UFM will be generated; and
• If the logical-key values are the same, the previous entry will be updated instead of having a new
entry created.
c. If the value specified by the UNIT describer does not match the value for an entry created by a
previous ASSIGN statement with a UNIT describer, then a new entry will be created in the
FORTRAN unit tables.
d. If the file name is omitted or specified as * or ‘*’, the default file name or, if this is a second or
subsequent ASSIGN statement for the same logical-key/UNIT combination, a previously
specified file name (or default name if none was previously specified) will be used.
8. If you are using IFPSTAR (default), you can use below command to import IFPDAT file created by
the initial run if the file is not located in the same directory as MASTER and DBALL files. ASSIGN
IFPDB=first_run_directory/run1.IFPDAT IMPORT.
9. STATUS, UNIT, and FORM are ignored if assigning a log-name (DBset member name).
10. FORM=FORMATTED must be specified for a unit when:
• ASCII output is desired from the OUTPUT4 DMAP modules that processes the unit. See the
MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide.
• FORMAT=NEUTRAL is selected on the DBUNLOAD and DBLOAD FMS statements that
process the unit. See the Database Concepts (p. 421) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
• The neutral file format is desired for the OUTPUT2 module.
• PostScript output is desired for PLOT requests when “PLOTTER NAST” is in effect.
11. For the DBUNLOAD FMS statement and the OUTPUT2 and OUTPUT4 modules, binary format
may be requested using FORM=UNFORMATTED using FORM=LITTLEENDIAN,
FORM=LTLEND, FORM=LITTLEENDIAN64, FORM=LTLEND64 or FORM=<ostype>. The
keywords with a "64" appended are for use on long-word systems (mode=i8) or FORM=<ostype>.
The FORM= specifications are used when the generated output file is to be processed on a platform
Main Index
42 ASSIGN
other than current platform. The format appropriate for the platform on which the file is to be
processed (the target platform) must be specified. The FORM=<ostype> specification can by used as
a convenience, allowing the desired output format to be specified using the target platform OS name
or vendor (if there can be no ambiguity) instead of its actual binary file format. <ostype> can be one
of the following:
• Machines Linux and WINDOWS are equivalent to LITTLEENDIAN.
See the MSC Nastran 2019.0 Installation and Operations Guide for further information on binary file
formats.
12. The FORM= describer is ignored for the DBLOAD FMS statement and INPUTT2 and INPUTT4
modules. MSC Nastran determines the actual file format when it accesses the specified file. If the
FORM= describer is specified on an ASSIGN statement for these logical-keys, the syntax of the
describer will be validated but will otherwise be ignored. However,
• For non-native binary files the INPUTT2 modules can only process data blocks with an NDDL
description. (See the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide under the DATABLK statement.) An
NDDL description is required for TYPE=TABLE and none is required for TYPE=MATRIX. The
data block must be processed with FORM=UNFORMATTED if TYPE=UNSTRUCTURED,
KDICT, or KELM.
• Although formatted files are machine independent, if the file in unformatted DBLOAD can only
process input files in native binary format. That is, a binary file in BIGENDIAN format cannot
be processed on a LITTLEENDIAN platform and vice versa. This is also true on long-word
systems where for example a BIGENDIAN64 cannot be processed as a BIGENDIAN.
13. For the DBUNLOAD FMS statement and OUTPUT2 module, if FORM is other than
UNFORMATTED (or equivalent, e.g., LITTLEENDIAN on a Linux or Windows platform), then
only data blocks with an NDDL description are processed. (See the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s
Guide under the DATABLK statement.) An NDDL description is required for TYPE=TABLE and
none is required for TYPE=MATRIX. The data block must be processed with
FORM=UNFORMATTED if TYPE=UNSTRUCTURED, KDICT, or KELM.
14. See the MSC Nastran 2019.0 Installation and Operations Guide for further information on sys-spec controls
and on machine-dependent aspects of the ASSIGN statement. Also, if there are SYS specifications on
more than one ASSIGN statement specifying the same log-name or logical-key/UNIT combination,
the second and subsequent specifications will appended to the current SYS specification with a
comma separator.
15. Currently the RECL keyword is used by the DBC module and has a default minimum of 1024 words.
The maximum allowed is 65536 words and is used to increase the database capacity.
16. The SIZE keyword is used by the DBC module and has a default of 16777215. The maximum
allowed is 2147483647 and is used to increase the database capacity. Patran releases before 2001
should use the defaults for RECL and SIZE or database verification failures will occur.
17. logical-key name MNF does not utilize UNIT or FORM.
Main Index
ASSIGN 43
18. For logical-key DBC, if the .xdb file is new, the desired binary format may be specified in the same
way as for the OUTPUT2 and OUTPUT4 modules, as described in Remark 11., except that
FORM=FORMATTED is not valid. If the .xdb file is not new, the FORM= describer is ignored and
MSC Nastran determines the format of the existing .xdb file. MSC Nastran can read and or update
an .xdb file in any valid format. Note, on long-word systems (mode=i8) the effect of 64-bit output
files is that ADAMS(MNF), Patran, and SimXpert may fail to process the results.
19. SOL700 reserves unit numbers 87-92 for its internal use. When using SOL700 users should not use
these unit number to avoid conflicts.
Table 3-1 FORTRAN Files and Their Default Attributes

Logical Physical Unit Description/
Key Name Name No. Form Status Assignable Open Access Application
SEMTRN sdir/data.f01 1 FORMATTED NEW NO YES SEQ. Input Data Copy Unit
LNKSWH sdir/data.f02 2 UNFORMATTED NEW NO YES SEQ. Link Switch Unit
MESHFL sdir/data.f03 3 FORMATTED NEW NO YES SEQ. Input Data Copy Unit
LOGFl out.f04 4 FORMATTED NEW NO YES SEQ. Execution Summary
Unit
INPUT data.dat 5 FORMATTED OLD NO YES SEQ. Input File Unit
PRINT out.f06 6 FORMATTED NEW NO YES SEQ. Main Print Output
Unit
PUNCH out.pch 7 FORMATTED NEW YES YES SEQ. Default Punch Output
Uniit
authorize.dat 8 FORMATTED OLD NO YES SEQ. Authorization File
INCLD1 NO Available for Use
CNTFL NO Available for Use
INPUTT2 REQ REQ OLD YES NO SEQ. INPUTT2 Unit
OUTPUT2+ out.op2 12 UNFORMATTED* NEW YES YES SEQ. OUTPUT2 Unit
INPUTT4 REQ REQ OLD YES NO SEQ. INPUTT4 Unit
OUTPUT4 REQ REQ UNFORMATTED* NEW YES NO SEQ. OUTPUT4 Unit
PLOT out.plt 14 UNFORMATTED++ NEW YES YES SEQ. Plotter Output Unit
BULKECHO out.becho 18 FORMATTED NEW YES YES SEQ. Bulk EchoUnit
OUTPUT2F out 19 UNFORMATTED NEW YES SEQ. Named OUTPUT2
Pattern
OPCASE REQ 22 FORMATED NEW YES SEQ. Available for Use
TOPDES out.des 21 FORMATTED NEW YES YES SEQ. Topology Optimization
AESO out.AESO 23 FORMATTED NEW YES YES SEQ. Optimization
DBC out.xdb 40 UNFORMATTED NEW YES YES DIRECT Database Converter
Unit
DBUNLOAD REQ 50 UNFORMATTED* NEW YES NO SEQ. DBUNLOAD FMS
statement
DBLOAD REQ 51 OLD YES NO SEQ. DBLOAD FMS
statement
MNF out.mnf none none NEW YES NO SEQ. Interface for
ADAMS/Flex
A502LU Available for Use
DBMIG Available for Use
Main Index
44 ASSIGN
Table 3-1 FORTRAN Files and Their Default Attributes (continued)

Logical Physical Unit Description/
Key Name Name No. Form Status Assignable Open Access Application
USERFILE REQ REQ REQ REQ YES NO SEQ. Any User-Defined File
UNVFILE REQ REQ FORMATTED OLD YES NO SEQ. Universal File (UF)
Unit
ADFFILE out.afu none none NEW YES NO SEQ. Associated Data File
Unit
IFPDB out.IFPDB no no NEW YES NO SEQ Export or import
IFPDAT file
ACG out.acg no no NEW YES NO SEQ Automatic Contact
Generation file
HDF5 out.h5 no no NEW YES NO N/A Nastran HDF5 result
database
where:
Logical Key Name Specifies the logical-key NAME used on the ASSIGN statement.
Physical Name Specifies the default name used to open the file; i.e., the default
filename2 name.
“REQ” means that this parameter is required in the ASSIGN statement
from the user.
Unit No. Specifies the default FORTRAN unit number used by MSC Nastran.
from the user.
Form Specifies the default FORM used when the file is opened.
Status Specifies the default STATUS used when the file is opened.
from the user.
Assignable If “YES”, the user may assign a physical file to this logical name.
If “NO”, the unit (if any) and logical name are reserved by MSC
Nastran.
Open If “YES”, the file is opened by default.
If “NO”, the file must be explicitly opened.
Access If “SEQ”, the file is opened for sequential access.
If “DIRECT”, the file is opened for direct access.
sdir The scratch directory specified using the “sdirectory” keyword.
data The name of the input data file with all directory and extensions
removed.
out The directory and file prefix specified using the “out” keyword or taken
by default.
Main Index
ASSIGN 45
Notes: + The actual logical-key name for this is “.op2”. If you use “OUTPUT2” (even though
this is still the logical-key name put out by Patran) you will get a User Fatal Message
from MSC Nastran.
* FORMATTED is required for neutral-format OUTPUT2 files and ASCII-format
OUTPUT4 files.
++ If FORM=FORMATTED is specified, the default extension is changed to “.ps” and,
if PLOTTER NAST is requested (PLOTTER SC is not supported in PostScript
mode), the plot data will be generated in PostScript format directly instead of having
to use the PLOTPS or MSCPLOTPS utility programs. Any desired plotting options
may be specified as keywords in the SYS= field of the ASSIGN statement or using the
SYSFIELD command-line option, specifying PLOT(keyword=value,...).
The valid keywords are the same as those that can be specified for the PLOTPS or
MSCPLOTPS utility programs except that the “begin”, “debug”, “dump”, “end”,
“format” and “output” keywords are not allowed. PostScript mode can be made the
default by specifying the following ASSIGN statement in an RC file:
ASSIGN PLOT=*,FORM=FORMATTED
This ASSIGN statement may also include a SYS= specification if any special
PostScript keywords are to be used for every plot.
Main Index
46 CONNECT
User Defined Service and Group Evaluator Data
CONNECT User Defined Service and Group Evaluator Data
Defines the newly introduced Simulation Component Architecture (SCA) User Defined Service (UDS) into
MSC Nastran via a new CONNECT SERVICE statement. Bulk Data entries such as NLRSFD and
MATUDS refer to this new service.
External geometric or beam cross section entities, external design responses, and external splines are still
defined through the old grouping also described below. These entities should belong to the same
evaluator-class (set of routines that process them), and in the case of geometric data, should reside on the same
database.
1. A group of external geometric entities. These entities should belong to the same evaluator-class (a set
of routines that process them), and should reside on the same database. The GMCURV and
GMSURF Bulk Data entries relate to the GEOMEVAL type.
2. A group of external beam cross section entities. These entities should belong to the same evaluator-
class (a set of routines that process them). The PBARL and PBEAML entries relate to the
BEAMEVAL type.
3. A group of external spline entities. The SPLINEX Bulk Data entry relates to the SPLINEX type.
4. A group of external design response entities. The DRESP3 Bulk Data entry relates to the DRESP3
type.
UDS Format:
CONNECT SERVICE <service_identifier> <service_name>
Old Group Format:

GEOMEVAL
BEAMEVAL
CONNECT group evaluator ’path’ ’data’
DRESP3
SPLINEX
UDS Examples:
CONNECT SERVICE mysub ' SCA.MDSolver.Util.Ums '
Creates a service identifier “mysub” which points to the “SCA.MDSolver.Util.Ums” service.
CONNECT SERVICE MYSUB ' ExtServ.Nlrsfd '
In this case, the user is requesting the NLRSFD Bulk Data entry with the GRPNAME MYSUB
obtain its characteristics from the externally connected service defined in the CDL file under the
component keyword. The user must create an external shared object library (dynamic link library on
Windows) using the SCA Scons utility and configure it to function with the MSC Nastran executable.
Old Group Examples:

CONNECT GEOMEVAL FENDER, CATIA, ‘ ‘/u/kiz/adp’, ‘Version=6 as of
1/31/93’
Main Index
CONNECT 47
In this case, the user is requesting that all calculations on GMCURV and GMSURF Bulk Data entries
that are grouped as FENDER use the CATIA database/evaluator. For each GMCURV and
GMSURF entry where the group parameter is set to FENDER, appropriate evaluator routines will
be called to initialize and perform computations on the curve or surface.
CONNECT GEOMEVAL HOOD, MSCRPC
that are grouped as HOOD use the Nastran RPC database/evaluator. There is no need for additional
routines to be supplied by the user since the MSCRPC and MSCEQN evaluator libraries are included
in the standard Nastran delivery.
CONNECT GEOMEVAL DOOR, MSCEQN
that are grouped as DOOR use the Nastran EQUATION database/evaluator. There is no need for
additional routines to be supplied by the user since the MSCRPC and MSCEQN evaluator libraries
are included in the Nastran standard delivery.
CONNECT BEAMEVAL HOIST, NEWBEAMS
In this case, the user is requesting that all calculations on PBARL and PBEAML Bulk Data entries
that are grouped as HOIST use the NEWBEAMS evaluator. In this case, the user must supply the
NEWBEAMS beam cross section evaluator library, and configure it to function with the Nastran
executable program.
CONNECT DRESP3 TAILWING, EXTRESP
In this case, the user is requesting that all calculations on DRESP3 Bulk Data entries, that are grouped
as TAILWING use the EXTRESP evaluator. Thus, the user must create the EXTRESP external
response server program, and configure it to function with the MSC Nastran executable.
CONNECT SPLINEX SPLNGRP EXTSPLN
In this case, the user is requesting that all calculations on SPLINEX Bulk Data entries, that are
grouped as SPLNGRP, use the EXTPLN evaluator. Thus, the user must create the EXTSPLN
external spline server program and configure it to function with the Nastran executable.
Describer Meaning
(UDS Format)
group Group name referenced by the GROUP field on the NLRSFD and MATUDS
Bulk Data entries.
service_identifier service_identifier is a name tag (8 characters long) which will be used to identify
the service implementation to be used for a specific bulk data entry.
service_name service_name is the name of service
Main Index
48 CONNECT
Describer Meaning
(Old Group Format)
group Group name referenced by the GROUP field on DRESP3, GMCURV,
GMSURF, PBARL, PBEAML, and SPLINEX Bulk Data entries.
evaluator Identifies the particular class of evaluator to which the geometric, beam cross
section, external response, or external spline entities belong. Entities belonging
to one evaluator-class are handled by the same set of routines (either MSC-
provided or user-provided). For geometry, two classes of evaluators are
provided internally with MSC Nastran. They are MSCRPC (rational
parametric cubic) and MSCEQN (generic equation). For beam cross sections,
the class MSCBML (MSC Beam Library) is provided internally. Users may
develop custom evaluator libraries for geometry, beam cross sections, external
responses, or external splines and configure them for use with MSC Nastran.
See Remarks 4., 5., and 7.
path Optional pathname or filename used by evaluator. Path must be enclosed by
single quotation marks if it contains lowercase characters.
data Optional character string passed to the evaluator. Data must be enclosed by
single quotation marks if it contains lowercase characters or embedded blanks.
Remarks (UDS Format):

1. The process of enabling User Defined Services in MSC Nastran consists of the following four steps:
a. Creating the desired implementation for the User Defined Services in the form of dynamic-link
libraries,
b. Defining the location of the user defined service, service catalogue, service resource directory.
c. Specifying the proper commands in the model to load the service,
d. Identifying the elements that use the user supplied implementation.
2. In order to create a dynamic-link library suitable for usage with MSC Nastran, a build environment
is delivered to assist the user in building the library. Please refer to the Simulation Component
Architecture Guide and the User Defined Service Guide which describe the features and capabilities of
the build system.
Remarks (Old Group Format):

1. CONNECT requests:
• An external data base or evaluator, or
• A user-defined grouping for geometric data defined by GMCURV and GMSURF entries, or
beam cross section data defined by PBARL and PBEAML entries.
Main Index
CONNECT 49
2. Two reserved group names, MSCGRP0 and MSCGRP1, have been predefined for geometric entities.
These names may be used in the GMCURV and GMSURF entries without being defined explicitly
by means of a CONNECT FMS statement. The group MSCGRP0 corresponds to the MSCRPC
(rational parametric cubic) evaluator and the group MSCGRP1 corresponds to the MSCEQN
(Generic Equation) evaluator.
3. A single reserved group name, MSCBML0, has been predefined for beam cross section entities. It may
be used in the PBARL and PBEAML entries without being defined explicitly by means of a
CONNECT FMS statement. It corresponds to the MSCBML (MSC Beam-Library) evaluator.
4. Custom geometric evaluator libraries developed by users should comply with the MSC Nastran
Geometry Evaluator Developer’s Guide.
5. Custom beam cross section evaluator libraries developed by users should comply with the guidelines
in the MSC Nastran V69 Release Guide, Section 3.1, Beam Cross-Section Library, and Appendix C:
Adding Your Own Beam Cross-Section Library.
6. Custom responses developed by users should comply with the procedures and guidelines in “Support
of External Response in SOL 200” on page 55 of the MSC Nastran 2004 Release Guide.
7. Once developed, an evaluator may be configured as:
• Internal, where the evaluator routines are linked with the rest of the Nastran object modules to
comprise the Nastran executable program; or
• External, where the evaluator routines are linked with an MSC-provided server program to
constitute an independent geometry server.
Main Index
50 DBCLEAN
Deletes Database Versions and/or Projects
DBCLEAN Deletes Database Versions and/or Projects
Deletes one or more versions and/or projects from the database.
Format:
DBCLEAN VERSlON = {version-ID,*} [PROJECT={’project-lD’,*}]
Describer Meaning
version-ID Version identifier of the database to be deleted.
* Wildcard. All versions or projects to be deleted.
project-ID Project identifier of the project to be deleted. (See the FMS statement, PROJ, 89.)
Remarks:
1. There may be up to ten DBCLEAN statements in the FMS Section.
2. If no project-ID is given, the current project-ID is assumed.
Example:
DBCLEAN VERS = 7 PROJ = ’OUTER WING - LEFT’
The preceding example would delete from the database all data blocks and parameters stored under Version
7 of the project identified as OUTER WING - LEFT.
Main Index
DBDICT 51
Prints Database Directory Tables
DBDICT Prints Database Directory Tables
DBDICT prints the following database directory tables:

 Data blocks described by an NDDL DATABLK statement.
 Parameters described by an NDDL PARAM statement.
 All unique paths (KEYs) and their qualifier values.
 Qualifiers and their current values.
 Data blocks not described by an NDDL DATABLK statement.
 Parameters not described by an NDDL PARAM statement.
 Project and version information.
Basic Format:
The basic format of DBDICT specifies which tables to print and prints all items (data blocks and parameters)
found in the directory. Also, the attributes (colnames) to be printed, and the print format, are predefined.
Note that more than one table may be specified on the same DBDICT statement.
DBDICT [ DATABLK PARAM PROJVERS QUALCURR QUALIFIERS ]
Examples:
DBDICT
DBDICT PARAM PROJVERS
Full Format:
The full format permits the selection of items by name and/or by the WHERE describer. The full format also
permits the attributes to be printed using the SELECT describer. In addition, the print format can be
specified with the SORT, FORMAT, and LABEL describers. Note that the full format only allows the
specification of a single table on a DBDICT statement.
 DATABLK * 
 = 
 DATABLK ( LOCAL ) ( datablk-list ) 
 PARAM * 
DBDICT  =  WHERE(where-expr),
 PARAM ( LOCAL ) ( param-list ) 
PROJVERS
QUALCURR
QUALIFIERS
SELECT(colname[- ‘ col-label’]. . . ),
FORMAT (FWIDTH = w [.d] DWIDTH = w [.d] AWIDTH = a IWIDTH = i,

LWIDTH = k COLSPACE = c VALUE = w,
colname = col-width, . . .),
Main Index
52 DBDICT
 A , … ,
SORT  colname = 
 D 
 RIGHT 

LABEL  ′page - title‘ CENTER 
 
 LEFT 
Describer Meaning
DATABLK Print the data blocks. datablk-list specifies a list of NDDL-defined data blocks
separated by commas. If LOCAL is specified, the non-NDDL-defined data
blocks are printed.
PARAM Print the parameter table. param-list specifies a list of parameters separated by
commas. If LOCAL is specified, the non-NDDL-defined parameters are
printed.
PROJVERS Print the project-version table.
QUALIFIERS Print the qualifier table.
QUALCURR Print the current values of the qualifiers. SORT is ignored.
where-expr Logical expression that specifies the desired values of colnames described below.
For example, WHERE(VERSION=4 AND SEID < >2 AND SEID>0) selects
all items under version 4 for all values of SEID greater than 0 except 2. See the
beginning of this section for a further description. The default for VERSION is
the last version, and PROJECT is the current project. The default for qual
is*,which is all qualifier values found on the database. See also Remark 12.
SELECT Specifies a list of column names to be printed. The order of the specified
colnames will be printed from left to right. If colname is not specified, then all
columns will be printed.
colname Column name. Colname specifies a particular attribute of the database item such
as data block name (NAME), creation date (CDATE), number of blocks
(SIZE), or qualifier name (SEID, SPC, etc.). The allowable colnames are given
in the Remarks.
col-label The label to printed above the column identified by colname. The default for
col-label is the colname. col-label may not be specified for the following
colnames: QUALSET, QUALALL, and TRAILER.
FWIDTH=w.d Specifies the default width for single-precision real numbers in real and complex
qualifiers (Integers: w>0 and d>0; Default=12.5).
DWIDTH=w.d Specifies the default width for double-precision real numbers in real and
complex qualifiers (Integers: w>0 and d>0; Default=17.10).
AWIDTH=a Specifies the default width for character string qualifiers. Character strings are
printed with enclosing single quotation marks, even if the string is blank
(Integer>0; Default=8).
Main Index
DBDICT 53
Describer Meaning
IWIDTH=i Specifies the default width for integer qualifiers (Integer> 0; see Remarks for
defaults).
LWIDTH=k Specifies the default width for logical qualifiers. Logical values are printed as
either “T” for TRUE or “F” for FALSE (Integer> 0; Default=1).
COLSPACE=c Specifies the default number of spaces between columns (Integer> 0; see
Remarks for defaults).
VALUE=w Specifies the default width for parameter values. The values are printed as
character strings with left justification (Integer>0; Default=40)
col-width The print width of the data under colname or qual-name. For real numbers,
specify w.d where w is the width of the field and d is the number of digits in the
mantissa. For integers and character strings, specify w, where w is the width of
the field. col-width may not be specified for colnames QUALSET, QUALALL,
and TRAILER.
SORT Specifies how the rows are sorted. The sort is performed in order according to
each colname specified in the list. A “D” following the colname causes the sort
to be in descending order. An “A” following the colname causes the sort to be in
ascending order. Colnames QUALSET, QUALALL, and TRAILER may not be
specified under SORT. Each colname specified in SORT must be separated by
commas.
page-title A title to be printed on each page of the directory output.
RIGHT, Print justification of the page title.
CENTER, LEFT
Remarks:
1. DBDICT prints seven different tables according to a default or a user-defined format. The tables are:
Table 1 DBDICT Tables

See
Describer Description Default Page-Title Remark
DATABLK Data blocks described by a NDDL DATABLOCKS 2.
NDDL DATABLK statement.
PARAM Parameters described by a NDDL PARAMETERS 3.
NDDL PARAM statement.
QUALCURR Current qualifiers and their CURRENT 4.
values. QUALIFIERS
Main Index
54 DBDICT
Table 1 DBDICT Tables (continued)

See
Describer Description Default Page-Title Remark
QUALIFIERS Qualifiers and their values for QUALIFIERS 5.
each key number.
DATABLK(LOCAL) Data blocks not described by a LOCAL DATABLOCKS 6.
NDDL DATABLK statement.
PARAM(LOCAL) Parameters not described by a LOCAL PARAMETERS 7.
NDDL PARAM statement.
PROJVERS Project-Version. PROJECT-VERSION 8.
If DBDICT is specified without any describers, then the NDDL Data blocks Table will be printed.
See Remark 2.
DATABLK(LOCAL) and PARAM(LOCAL) produce no output, and QUALCURR produces the
default values specified on the NDDL QUAL statement.
The defaults and allowable colnames for SELECT, FORMAT, SORT, and LABEL depend on the
table. The defaults are described in the following remarks and tables.
2. The default print of the NDDL Data Blocks Table is obtained by
DBDICT
or
DBDICT DATABLK
and is equivalent to
DBDICT DATABLK ,
SELECT(NAME,DATABASE,DBSET,PROJ,VERS,CDATE,CTIME,
SIZE,KEY,PURGED=’PU’,EQUIVD=’EQ’,
POINTER=’FILE’,QUALSET) ,
FORMAT(NAME=8,DBSET=8,CDATE=6,CTIME=6,SIZE=5,
KEY=4 ,PURGED=4,EQUIVD=4,POINTER=8,
IWIDTH=5,COLSPACE=1) ,
SORT(PROJ=A,VERS=A,DBSET=A,NAME=A) ,
LABEL(’NDDL DATABLOCKS’ CENTER)
and looks like:
Main Index
DBDICT 55
* * * * D I C T I O N A R Y P R I N T * * * *
EXECUTION OF DMAP STATEMENT NUMBER 20

MODULE NAME = DBDICT , SUBDMAP SEKRRS , OSCAR RECORD NUMBER 16
NDDL DATABLOCKS
NAME DATABASE DBSET PROJ VERS CDATE CTIME SIZE KEY PU EQ FILE SEID PEID LOAD SPC MPC METH
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------
AGG MASTER DBALL 1 1 930805 72340 0 326 1 0 132484 0 0
AXIC MASTER DBALL 1 1 930805 72336 0 315 1 0 65764
BGPDTS MASTER DBALL 1 1 930805 72338 1 324 0 2 131332 0
BGPDTX MASTER DBALL 1 1 930805 72338 1 324 0 1 131332 0
BJJ MASTER DBALL 1 1 930805 72341 0 332 1 0 132612 0
BULK MASTER DBALL 1 1 930805 72336 2 315 0 0 65700
CASECC MASTER DBALL 1 1 930805 72336 1 316 0 2 67428
Figure 3-1 DBDICT DATABLK Example
Table 2 gives the allowable colnames and a description that may be specified in the FORMAT,
SELECT, and SORT describers.
Table 2 DBDICT DATABLK Colnames

Default Default
colname col-width col-label Description
PROJECT 40 PROJECT NAME Project name defined by
PROJECT statement.
PROJ 4 PROJ NO Project number associated
with PROJECT.
VERS 4 VERSION Version number.
CDATE 6 CDATE Creation date.
CTIME 6 CTIME Creation time.
NAME 8 NAME Parameter name.
DATABASE 8 DATABASE MASTER DBset name.
DBSET 8 DBSET DBset name.
RDATE 6 RDATE Revision date.
RTIME 6 RTIME Revision time.
SIZE 5 SIZE Number of blocks.
qual-name See Note. qualifier name Qualifier name.
KEY 4 KEY Key number.
TRLi 8 TRLi i-th word in the trailer.
TRAILER 8 TRLi All 10 trailer words.
EXTNAME 8 EXTNAME Extended name.
EQUIVD 4 EQ Equivalenced flag.
PURGED 4 PU Purged flag.
Main Index
56 DBDICT
Table 2 DBDICT DATABLK Colnames (continued)

Default Default
EQFLAG 4 EF Scratch equivalenced flag.
SCRFLAG 4 SF Scratch DBSET flag.
POINTER 8 POINTER Directory pointer.
DBENTRY 8 DBENTRY Database entry pointer.
FEQCHAIN 8 FEQCHAIN Forward equivalence chain.
BEQCHAIN 8 BEQCHAIN Backward equivalence chain.
DBDIR20 9 DBDIR(20) Directory word 20.
QUALALL See Note. qualifier name All qualifiers.
QUALSET See Note. qualifier name Predefined subset of all
qualifiers.
Note: Default widths for qualifiers are DWIDTH=17.10, IWIDTH=5, LWIDTH=1,

AWIDTH=8, and FWIDTH=12.5.
3. The default print of the NDDL Parameter Table is obtained by

DBDICT PARAM
DBDICT PARAM,
SELECT(NAME,DATABASE,DBSET,PROJ,VERS,CDATE,CTIME,
KEY,VALUE,QUALSET),
FORMAT(NAME=8,DATABASE=8,DBSET=8,CDATE=6,CTIME=6,
KEY=4,VALUE=40,IWIDTH=5,COLSPACE=1),
SORT(PROJ=A,VERS=A,DBSET=A,NAME=A),
LABEL(’NDDL PARAMETERS’ CENTER)
Main Index
DBDICT 57
and looks like:

NDDL PARAMETERS
NAME DATABASE DBSET PROJ VERS CDATE CTIME KEY VALUE SEID PEID LOAD SPC MPC METH
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ACOUSTIC MASTER MASTER 1 1 930805 72338 323 0 0 0
ALTRED MASTER MASTER 1 1 930805 72338 319 NO
BCHNG MASTER MASTER 1 1 930805 72337 325 FALSE 0
DBALLX MASTER MASTER 1 1 930805 72336 318 DBALL -1 -1
EPSBIG MASTER MASTER 1 1 930805 72339 323 1.000000E+12 0 0
ERROR MASTER MASTER 1 1 930805 72338 319 -1
FIXEDB MASTER MASTER 1 1 930805 72338 323 0 0 0
Figure 3-2 DBDICT PARAM Example
Table 3 gives the allowable colnames along with a description that may be specified in the FORMAT,
Table 3 DBDICT PARAM Colnames

Default Default
PROJECT 40 PROJECT NAME Project name defined by
PROJECT statement.
PROJ 5 PROJ Project number associated with
PROJECT.
VERS 4 VERS Version number.
CDATE 6 CDATE Creation date.
CTIME 6 CTIME Creation time.
DATABASE 8 DATABASE MASTER DBset name.
DBSET 8 DBSET DBset name.
RDATE 6 RDATE Revision date.
RTIME 6 RTIME Revision time.
VALUE 40 VALUE Parameter value.
QUALSET See Note. qualifier name Predefined subset of all qualifiers.
Main Index
58 DBDICT
Note: Default widths for qualifiers are DWIDTH=17.10, AWIDTH=8, IWIDTH=5,

LWIDTH=1, and FWIDTH=12.5.
4. The default print of the qualifier table is obtained by

DBDICT QUALIFIERS
DBDICT QUALIFIERS ,
SELECT(KEY QUALALL) ,
FORMAT(DWIDTH=17.10 AWIDTH=8 IWIDTH=5 LWIDTH=1 ,
FWIDTH=12.5 COLSPACE=2) SORT(KEY=A) ,
LABEL(’QUALIFIERS’ CENTER )
and looks like:

QUALIFIERS
KEY APRCH B2GG B2PP BMETH CMETH CONFIG DEFORM DELTA DESITER DLOAD DRMM DYRD EXTRCV FMETH FREQ
FSCOUP GUST HIGHQUAL HINDEX IC IKBAR IMACHNO IPANEL IQ ISA ISOLAPP K2GG K2PP LOAD
M2GG M2PP MACHINE METH METHF MFLUID MODEL MPC MTEMP NCASE NL99 NLOAD NLOOP NOQUAL OPERALEV
OPERASYS P2G PEID PVALID SDAMP SEDWN SEID SOLAPP SOLID SPC STATSUB SUBDMAP SUBMODEL SUPORT
TEMPLD TFL TSTEP ZNAME ZUZR1 ZUZR2 ZUZR3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
335 ’ ’ F 0
0 ’ ’
’ ’ 0
’ ’ 0 0 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
336 ’ ’ 0
0 ’ ’
0 0 -1
0 0 0
Figure 3-3 DBDICT QUALIFIERS Example
QUALALL selects all qualifiers to be printed. The qualifiers will be printed in alphabetic order.
QUALSET selects the only the qualifiers SEID, PEID, SPC, MPC, LOAD, and METH to be
printed.
SELECT, and SORT describers. QUALALL and QUALSET may not be specified in the FORMAT
or SORT describers. The qualifier names and values are not printed one per row, but rather from left
to right as one logical line that is allowed to wrap after 132 columns.
Main Index
DBDICT 59
Table 4 DBDICT QUALIFIERS Colnames

Default Default
QUALSET See Note. qualifier name Predefined subset of all
qualifiers.
Note: Default widths for qualifiers are DWIDTH=17.10, IWIDTH=5, LWIDTH=1, and
FWIDTH=12.5. AWIDTH defaults to the length specified on the QUAL statement in
the NDDL sequence.
5. The default print of the current qualifier table is obtained by

DBDICT QUALCURR
DBDICT QUALCURR SELECT(QUALALL),
FORMAT(AWIDTH=8,IWIDTH=5,LWIDTH=1,COLSPACE=2),
LABEL=(’CURRENT QUALIFIERS’ CENTER)
and looks like:

CURRENT QUALIFIERS
APRCH B2GG B2PP BMETH CMETH CONFIG DEFORM DELTA DESITER DLOAD DRMM DYRD EXTRCV FMETH FREQ FSCOUP
GUST HIGHQUAL HINDEX IC IKBAR IMACHNO IPANEL IQ ISA ISOLAPP K2GG K2PP LOAD M2GG
M2PP MACHINE METH METHF MFLUID MODEL MPC MTEMP NCASE NL99 NLOAD NLOOP NOQUAL OPERALEV OPERASYS
P2G PEID PVALID SDAMP SEDWN SEID SOLAPP SOLID SPC STATSUB SUBDMAP SUBMODEL SUPORT
TEMPLD TFL TSTEP ZNAME ZUZR1 ZUZR2 ZUZR3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ 0 0 0 0 F 0 0 F 0 0 0 0 F
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ’ ’ ’ ’ 300 ’ ’
’ ’ 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0
’ ’ 0 0 0 0 0 ’ ’ 0 400 0 ’ ’ 0 0
0 0 0 ’ ’ 0 0 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 3-4 DBDICT QUALCURR Example
Table 5 gives the allowable colnames and a description that may be specified in the SELECT
describers.
Main Index
60 DBDICT
Table 5 DBDICT QUALCURR Colnames

Default Default
QUALSET See Note. qualifier name Predefined subset of all qualifiers.
Note: Default widths for qualifiers are DWIDTH=17.10, IWIDTH=5, LWIDTH=1, and
FWIDTH=12.5. AWIDTH defaults to the length specified on the QUAL statement in
the NDDL sequence.
6. The default print of the Local Data Block Table is obtained by

DBDICT DATABLK(LOCAL)
DBDICT DATABLK(LOCAL),
SELECT(NAME,SUBDMAP,SIZE=’BLOCKS’,PURGED=’PU’,
EQUIVD=’EQ’,POINTER,TRL1,TRL2,TRL3,TRL4,
TRL5,TRL6,TRL7),
FORMAT(NAME=8,SUBDMAP=8,IWIDTH=8,COLSPACE=2),
SORT(NAME=A) LABEL(’LOCAL DATABLOCKS’ CENTER)
and looks like:

LOCAL DATABLOCKS
NAME SUBDMAP BLOCKS PU EQ POINTER TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRL4 TRL5 TRL6 TRL7
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CASEW PHASE1DR 1 0 0 131780 201 4 0 308 0 0 0
Figure 3-5 DBDICT DATABLK(LOCAL) Example
TRLi specifies the data block trailer word i where 1 < i < 10. TRAILER selects all 10 data block trailer
words.
Main Index
DBDICT 61
Table 6 DBDICT DATABLK(LOCAL) Colnames

Default Default
SUBDMAP 8 SUBDMAP SubDMAP name.
SIZE 8 BLOCKS Number of blocks.
EQUIVD 8 EQ Equivalenced flag.
PURGED 8 PU Scratch flag.
TRLi 8 TRLi i-th word in the trailer.
TRAILER 8 TRLi All 10 trailer words.
EXTNAME 8 EXTNAME Extended name.
7. The default print of the local parameter table is obtained by

DBDICT PARAM(LOCAL)
DBDICT PARAM(LOCAL) SELECT(NAME,SUBDMAP,VALUE),
FORMAT(COLSPACE=4,VALUE=40,AWIDTH=8),
SORT(NAME=A) LABEL(’ LOCAL PARAMETERS’ CENTER)
and looks like:

LOCAL PARAMETERS
NAME SUBDMAP VALUE
----------------------------------------------------------------
AERO SESTATIC FALSE
AERO PHASE1DR FALSE
ALTRED SESTATIC NO
ALTRED PHASE1DR NO
ALTSHAPE SESTATIC 0
ALWAYS PHASE1DR -1
ALWAYS PHASE1C -1
ALWAYS SEKRRS -1
ALWAYS SESTATIC -1
APP PHASE1DR STATICS
APP PHASE1C STATICS
APP SESTATIC STATICS
APRCH SESTATIC
ASING PHASE1DR 0
ASING SEKRRS 0
ASING PHASE1C 0
ASING SESTATIC 0
Figure 3-6 DBDICT PARAM(LOCAL) Example
Main Index
62 DBDICT
Table 7 DBDICT PARAM(LOCAL) Colnames

Default Default
SUBDMAP 8 SUBDMAP SubDMAP name.
VALUE 40 VALUE Parameter name.
8. The default print of Project-Version Table is obtained by

DBDICT PROJVERS
DBDICT PROJVERS ,
SELECT(PROJECT=’PROJECT NAME’,PROJ=’PROJ NO.’ ,
VERS=’VERSION’,DELFLG=’DELETED’ ,
CDATE=’CREATION DATE’ CTIME=’CREATION
TIME’) ,
FORMAT(PROJECT=40,PROJ=10,VERS=10,DELFLG=7,
COLSPACE=1 ,CDATE=13,CTIME=13) ,
LABEL(’PROJECT-VERSION’,CENTER) ,
SORT(PROJ=A,VERS=A)
and looks like:
PROJECT-VERSION
PROJECT NAME PROJ NO. VERSION DELETED CREATION DATE CREATION TIME
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
’LEFT FENDER ’ 1 1 930805 72319
Figure 3-7 DBDICT PROJVERS Example
Table 8 DBDICT PROJVERS Colnames

Default Default
PROJECT 40 PROJECT NAME Project name defined by PROJECT statement.
PROJ 10 PROJ NO Project number associated with PROJECT.
Main Index
DBDICT 63
Table 8 DBDICT PROJVERS Colnames

Default Default
VERS 10 VERSION Version number.
DELFLG 7 DELETED Flag indicating whether this project/version has
been deleted by the RESTART NOKEEP or
DBCLEAN statements.
CDATE 13 CREATION DATE Creation date.
CTIME 13 CREATION TIME Creation time.
CDATE is printed as YYMMDD where YY, MM, and DD are the year, month, and date,
respectively. CTIME is HHMMSS where HH, MM, and SS are the hour, minute, and second,
respectively.
9. If a parameter or qualifier value is defined to be character string, then the value will be printed with
enclosing single quotation marks. Blank strings will also be printed with single quotation marks.
10. If a given qualifier is not in the path of a given data block or parameter, then blank spaces will be
printed.
11. A line will wrap if additional columns need to be printed and not enough space is available on the
output (assumed to be 132). The first column of each additional line is to be indented by the width
of the first column printed for the entry.
12. The where-expr has the following rules:
• If the where-expr specifies a colname that is not assigned to the data block or parameter, then no
directory information will be printed for that data block or parameter. For example, given that
SPC is not a qualifier for KGG, the following DBDICT statement will produce no output:
DBDICT DATABLK=KGG WHERE(SPC=10)
• If the where-expr does not specify a colname that is assigned to the data block (or parameter), then
the qualifier is wildcarded. For example, given that SEID is a qualifier for KAA, the following
DBDICT statements are equivalent:
DBDICT DATABLK=KAA
DBDICT DATABLK=KAA WHERE(SEID = *)
13. A colname specified in the where-expr must be specified in the SELECT clause if the SELECT clause
is also specified.
Examples:
1. Print the project version table with a title.
DBDICT PROJVERS SORT(PROJ,VERSION) LABEL(’PROJECT
VERSION TABLE’ LEFT)
2. Print a directory of all data blocks qualified with PEID=10 or SEID=10. Print columns for the
NAME and DBSET, and the qualifiers SPC, MPC, and LOAD.
DBDICT DATABLK SELECT(NAME,SPC,MPC,LOAD,DBSET,SIZE,
Main Index
64 DBDICT
SEID,PEID) ,
SORT(NAME,SIZE=D) WHERE( SEID=10 OR PEID=10)
Main Index
DBDIR 65
DBDIR Prints Database Directory Tables
Obsolete. See the DBDICT statement.
Main Index
66 DBFIX
Database Directory Error Detection
DBFIX Database Directory Error Detection
Detects and optionally corrects errors in the database directory.
  
Format: DBFIX  LIST   CORRECT 
 NOLIST   NOCORRECT 
Example:
DBFIX LIST,NOCORRECT
The preceding example requests a printout of the directory pointers and any errors, but not the corrections.
Describer Meaning
LIST Requests a debug listing of the database directory pointers.
NOLIST Suppresses a debug listing of the database directory.
CORRECT Corrects the database if any errors are found.
NOCORRECT Suppresses the correction of the database.
Remarks:
1. It is recommended that a backup copy of the database be made before this statement is used, since
corrections of the database are achieved through the deletion of data. Data blocks and parameters are
deleted from the database if they have (1) incorrect paths (different than listed in the NDDL); (2)
incorrect names (two or more names that are not equivalenced and reference the same data), or (3)
incorrect directory pointers.
2. NOLIST does not suppress the listing of any corrections made to the database.
Main Index
DBLOAD 67
Loads a Database from a FORTRAN File
DBLOAD Loads a Database from a FORTRAN File
Recovers data blocks or parameters from a database created by the DBUNLOAD statement.
Format:
* *
DBLOAD DATABLK = PARAM = WHERE ( where-expr ) ,
(datablk-list) (param-list)
  
CONVERT ( convert-expr )UNIT = unit FORMAT  BINARY  OVRWRT 
 NEUTRAL  NOOVRWRT 
Example:
1. Load the database stored in ASClI format on FORTRAN unit 12.
DBLOAD UNIT=12 FORMAT=NEUTRAL

ASSIGN DBLOAD=’physical file name of unloaded database’
UNIT=12 FORMATTED
2. Load version 1 of KAA under project FRONT BUMPER and store it on the primary database under
version 5 and project BUMPER. Overwrite duplicates found on the primary database.
DBLOAD DATABLK=(KAA) WHERE(PROJECT=’FRONT BUMPER’

AND,SEID=10 AND VERSION=1) CONVERT(VERSION=5; ,
PROJECT=’BUMPER’) OVRWRT
ASSIGN DBLOAD=’physical file name of unloaded database’
Describer Meaning
datablk-list Specifies a list of data blocks separated by commas. The default is * which
selects all data blocks. The loaded data block may be renamed in the primary
database by specifying a slash after the old name, followed by the new name.
For example, if KLL is to be renamed to KLL1, then DATABLK=(KLL/KLL1)
is specified.
param-list Specifies a list of parameters separated by commas. The default is *, which
selects all parameters. The loaded parameter may be renamed in the primary
database by specifying a slash after the old name followed by the new name. For
example, if LUSETS is to be renamed to LUSET, then
PARAM=(LUSETS/LUSET) is specified.
Main Index
68 DBLOAD
Describer Meaning
where-expr A logical expression that specifies the desired values of qualifiers PROJECT,
VERSION, and DBSET. For example, WHERE(VERSlON=4 AND
SElD<>2 AND SEID>0) selects all items under version 4 for all values of SElD
greater than 0 except 2. See the beginning of this section for more information
on WHERE and CONVERT clauses.
The default for VERSION is * for all versions; PROJECT is * for all projects;
and DBSET is* for all DBsets. The default for qual is *, which is all qualifier
values found on the loaded database. See also Remark 8.
convert-expr Modifies the values for PROJECT, VERSION, DBSET, and qualifiers selected
by the where-expr. The format of convert-expr is:
PROJECT=project-expr; VERSION=version-expr; DBSET=DBset-name;
quali=qual-expri[;..]
For example, CONVERT (SEID=100+SElD; SPC=102). See the beginning of
this section for more information on WHERE and CONVERT clauses.
The default action for VERSION and PROJECT is to use the same version lDs
and project IDs; i.e., CONVERT(PROJECT=PROJECT;
VERSlON=VERSlON). But if either PROJECT or VERSION is specified in
the convert-expr, then both must be specified. The default action for qualifiers
and DBSET is to use the same values as long as they are defined in both
databases. If not, see Remark 8.
unit Specifies the FORTRAN unit number of the database to be loaded. The unit
must be specified on an ASSIGN statement that references the physical
filename of the loaded database. The default is 51.
OVRWRT By default, if duplicate data blocks or parameters exist on the loaded and
NOOVRWRT primary databases, then a fatal message is issued. A duplicate means that a data
block or parameter has not only the same name but also the same qualifier
values, PROJECT, VERSION, and DBSET as a data block or parameter on
the primary database.
NEUTRAL The database to be loaded may be in BINARY or NEUTRAL format. BlNARY
BINARY indicates the database to be loaded is in binary or FORTRAN unformatted
format. NEUTRAL indicates the database to be loaded is in ASClI format. The
default is BlNARY.
Remarks:
1. The DBLOAD statement and its applications are discussed further in Database Concepts (p. 421) in
2. If the DATABLK keyword is specified and PARAM is not specified, then only data blocks may be
loaded. If the PARAM keyword is specified and DATABLK is not specified, then only parameters
may be loaded. If neither DATABLK nor PARAM is specified, then all data blocks and parameters
may be loaded.
Main Index
DBLOAD 69
3. The DB keyword is equivalent to DATABLK, and the PARM keyword is equivalent to PARAM.
4. The database to be loaded is attached as read-only. In other words, items can only be fetched and not
stored on this database.
5. If more than one DBLOAD statement is specified, then they will be processed in the order in which
they appear. If a duplicate data block or parameter is found on two or more different DBLOAD
statements, then the last duplicate will be used.
6. If NEUTRAL is specified, then the FORMATTED keyword must be specified on the corresponding
ASSIGN statement.
7. If a data block or parameter is being renamed, then the new name must be defined in the NDDL of
8. If the database to be loaded and the primary database have different NDDL schemes and CONVERT
is not used, then the following is performed:
• If a qualifier in the NDDL of the database to be loaded is not in the NDDL of the primary
database, then all of its values are converted to the null value corresponding to its type. For
example, if the qualifier is integer, real, double-precision, complex, or character, then the value is
converted to 0, 0., 0.D0, (0.,0.), or blank, respectively. If this conversion results in a duplicate
data block(s) or parameter(s), then a User Warning Message is printed and the duplicates are not
loaded.
• If a DBset-name in the NDDL of the database to be loaded is not in the NDDL of the primary
database, then its values will be converted to the PARAM default value in the NDDL of the
database to be loaded.
9. Data blocks that are equivalenced on the database to be loaded remain equivalenced as long as they
are loaded in the same DBLOAD statement or in consecutive DBLOAD statements with the same
unit number. Otherwise, a separate copy for the secondary data block is produced.
10. It is not possible to restart from a database created by DBLOAD in the same run.
11. SOL 190 (or DBTRANS) is also required with DBLOAD if:
• The database to be loaded has a different BUFFSlZE.
• The database to be loaded is in neutral format or is being transferred between different machine
types.
See also the Database Concepts (p. 421) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
Main Index
70 DBLOCATE
Attaches Secondary Databases
DBLOCATE Attaches Secondary Databases
Obtains data blocks or parameters from prior versions of the primary database, or other databases.
DBLOCATE may also be used to compress the primary database and to migrate databases created in prior
MSC Nastran versions.
Format:
DBLOCATE DATABLK = * PARAM = * WHERE ( where-expr ) ,

( datablk-list ) ( param-list )
CONVERT ( convert-expr )LOGICAL = dbname OVRWRT COPY ]

NOOVRWRT
Example:
1. Locate in version 4 of MASTER3 all data blocks named KAA for all superelements with IDs greater
than 0.
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(KAA) WHERE(PROJECT=’FRONT BUMPER’ ,AND

SEID>0 AND VERSION=4) LOGI=MASTER3
ASSIGN MASTER3=’physical file name of master DBset’
2. Copy all data blocks and parameters from the last version of MASTER3 to the primary database. For
all items with the qualifier SEID, change the SEID to twice the old ID number.
DBLOCATE CONVERT(SEID=2*SEID) COPY LOGI=MASTER3

ASSIGN MASTER3=’physical file name of master DBset’
3. Compress a database with multiple versions. All versions under the current project-ID (see PROJ
statement) will be copied from the database OLDDB to NEWDB.
ASSIGN MASTER3=’physical filename of new master DBset’

ASSIGN OLDDB=’physical filename of old master DBset’
DBLOCATE LOGI=OLDDB COPY WHERE(VERSION=*) ,
CONVERT(VERSION=VERSION;PROJECT=PROJECT)
Main Index
DBLOCATE 71
Describer Meaning
datablk-list Specifies a list of data blocks separated by commas. The default is *, which selects all data
blocks. The located data block may be renamed in the primary database by specifying a
slash after the old name followed by the new name. For example, if KLL is to be renamed
to KLL1, then DATABLK=(KLL/KLL1) is specified.
param-list Specifies a list of parameters separated by commas. The default is *, which selects all
parameters. The located parameter may be renamed in the primary database by
specifying a slash after the old name followed by the new name. For example, if LUSETS
is to be renamed to LUSET, then PARAM=(LUSETS/LUSET) is specified.
where-expr A logical expression that specifies the desired values of qualifiers PROJECT, VERSION,
and DBSET. For example, WHERE(VERSlON= 4 AND SEID<>2 AND SEID>0)
selects all items under version 4 for all values of SEID greater than 0 except 2. See the
beginning of this section for more information on WHERE and CONVERT clauses.
The default for VERSION is the last version-ID and PROJECT is the current
project-ID. The default for qual is *, which is all qualifier values found on the located
database. See also Remark 9.
convert-expr Modifies the values for PROJECT, VERSION, DBSET, and qualifiers selected by the
where-expr. The format of convert-expr is:
PROJECT=project-expr; VERSION=version-expr; DBSET=DBset-name;
quali=qual-expri[;...]
For example,
CONVERT (SEID=100+SEID; SPC=102)
See the beginning of this section for more information on WHERE and CONVERT
clauses.
The default action for VERSION and PROJECT is to convert to the current version-ID
and current project-ID. But if either PROJECT or VERSION is specified in the
convert-expr, then both must be specified. See Example 3. The default action for
qualifiers and DBSET is to use the same values as long both databases have the same
NDDL scheme. If not, see Remark 9.
dbname Specifies the logical name of the master directory DBset of the located database. dbname
must be specified on an ASSIGN statement, which references the physical file name. By
default, the located database is also the primary database. (If dbname is specified for the
primary database, then dbname must be MASTER.)
OVRWRT By default, duplicate data blocks or parameters on the located database will take
NOOVRWRT precedence over those on the primary database. A duplicate means that a data block or
parameter has not only the same name but also the same qualifier values, PROJECT,
VERSION, and DBSET as the data block or parameter on the primary database. If
NOOVRWRT is specified, then a fatal message is issued.
COPY Requests that the located data blocks or parameters be copied to the primary database.
Main Index
72 DBLOCATE
Remarks:
1. The DBLOCATE statement and its applications are discussed further in the Database Concepts
(p. 421) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
located. If the PARAM keyword is specified and DATABLK is not specified, then only parameters
may be located. If neither DATABLK nor PARAM is specified, then all data blocks and parameters
may be located.
4. If more than one DBLOCATE statement is specified, then they will be processed in the order in
which they appear. If a duplicate data block or parameter is found on two or more different
DBLOCATE statements, then the last duplicate will be used.
5. If the located database is not the primary database, then it is attached for read-only purposes. In other
words, items can only be fetched and not stored on the located database.
6. If the RESTART FMS statement is also specified, then located data blocks and parameters are treated
as if they exist in the restart version. In other words, restart equivalences will be made on located items
at the beginning of the run and can be subsequently broken as a result of regeneration and/or NDDL
dependencies.
7. If a data block or parameter is being renamed, then the new name must be defined in the NDDL of
8. If LOGICAL refers to the primary database and one version is to be copied to another, then the items
are equivalenced.
9. If the located database and the primary database have different NDDL schemes and CONVERT is
not used, then the following is performed:
• If a qualifier in the NDDL of the located database is not in the NDDL of the primary database,
then all of its values are converted to the null value corresponding to its type. For example, if the
qualifier is integer, real, double precision, complex or character then the value is converted to 0,
0., 0.D0, (0.,0.), or blank, respectively. If this conversion results in a duplicate data block(s) or
parameter(s), then a User Warning Message is printed and the duplicates are not located.
• If a dbset-name in the NDDL of the located database is not in the NDDL of the primary database,
then its values will be converted to the PARAM default value in the NDDL of the located
database.
Main Index
DBSETDEL 73
Deletes a DBset
DBSETDEL Deletes a DBset
Deletes a DBset, all of its members, and associated physical files.
Format:
DBSETDEL dbsetnamei
Example:
Delete DBset DBUP20 from the database.
DBSETDEL DBUP20
Describer Meaning
dbsetnamei Specifies the name(s) of DBset(s) to be deleted. The DBset names MASTER,
OBJSCR, or SCRATCH may not be specified.
Remarks:
1. The DBSETDEL statement and its applications are discussed further in Database Concepts (p. 421) in
2. If dbsetnamei does not exist, then no action is taken.
3. After a DBset has been deleted with this statement, it may be recreated with the INIT statement in a
subsequent run.
Main Index
74 DBUNLOAD
Unloads a Database to a FORTRAN File
DBUNLOAD Unloads a Database to a FORTRAN File
Stores data blocks or parameters from the primary database onto a FORTRAN file in a binary or neutral
format, for purposes of database compression or database transfer between different computers.
Format:
DBUNLOAD DATABLK = * PARAM = * WHERE ( where-expr )

( datablk-list ) ( param-list )
  
UNIT = unit FORMAT =  BINARY  REWIND 
 NEUTRAL  NOREWIND 
Example:
1. Unload the database in ASCII format onto FORTRAN unit 12.
DBUNLOAD UNIT=12 FORMAT=NEUTRAL

ASSIGN DBUNLOAD=’physical file name of FORTRAN unit 12’ ,
UNIT=12 FORMATTED
2. Unload version 1 of KAA under project FRONT BUMPER.
DBUNLOAD DATABLK=(KAA) WHERE(PROJECT=’FRONT BUMPER’ ,AND

SEID=10 AND VERSION=1)
ASSIGN DBUNLOAD=’physical file name of FORTRAN unit 50’
Describer Meaning
datablk-list Specifies a list of data blocks separated by commas. The default is*, which selects
all data blocks.
param-list Specifies a list parameters separated by commas. The default is*, which selects
all parameters.
where-expr Logical expression that specifies the desired values of qualifiers PROJECT,
VERSION, and DBSET. For example,
WHERE(VERSION=4 AND SElD<>2 AND SElD>0)
selects all items under version 4 for all values of SEID greater than 0 except 2.
See the beginning of this section on WHERE and CONVERT Clauses.
Main Index
DBUNLOAD 75
Unloads a Database to a FORTRAN File
Describer Meaning
The default for VERSION is * for all versions; PROJECT is* for all projects;
and DBSET is * for all DBsets. The default for qual is*, which is all qualifier
values found on the primary database.
unit Specifies the FORTRAN unit number to unload the database. The unit must
be specified on an ASSIGN statement, which references its physical filename.
The default is 50.
NEUTRAL The database may be unloaded in BINARY or NEUTRAL format. BlNARY
BINARY indicates the database is to be unloaded in binary or FORTRAN unformatted.
NEUTRAL indicates the database is to be unloaded in ASCII format. The
default is BlNARY.
NOREWIND By default, if DBUNLOAD is executed more than once for the same unit, then
REWIND the unit is not rewound. REWlND requests that the unit be rewound prior to
unloading.
Remarks:
1. The DBUNLOAD statement and its applications are discussed further in Database Concepts (p. 421)
in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
unloaded. If the PARAM keyword is specified and DATABLK is not specified, then only parameters
may be unloaded. If neither DATABLK nor PARAM is specified, then all data blocks and parameters
may be unloaded.
4. If more than one DBUNLOAD statement is specified, then they will be processed in the order in
which they appear.
5. If NEUTRAL is specified, then the FORMATTED keyword must be specified on the corresponding
ASSIGN statement.
6. If NEUTRAL is specified, then only data blocks with an NDDL description are unloaded. (See the
MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide under the DATABLK statement.) An NDDL description is
required for TYPE=TABLE and none is required for TYPE=MATRlX. The data block must be
unloaded in BINARY if TYPE=UNSTRUCTURED, KDlCT, or KELM.
7. Data blocks that are equivalenced on the primary database remain equivalenced as long as they are
unloaded in the same DBUNLOAD statement or in consecutive DBUNLOAD statements with the
same unit number. Otherwise, a separate copy for the secondary data block is produced.
Main Index
76 DBUPDATE
Specifies Database Directory Update Interval
DBUPDATE Specifies Database Directory Update Interval
Specifies the maximum length of CPU time between database directory updates to the MASTER DBset. This
statement is intended to be used if the INIT MASTER(RAM=r) option is specified.
Format:
DBUPDATE [=] update-time
Example:
DBUPDATE = 5.5
The preceding example would call for a database directory update at the end of a DMAP module execution
after five and one-half minutes of CPU time have elapsed from the last update.
Describer Meaning
update-time CPU time interval in minutes (real or integer) between database directory
updates.
Remarks:
1. The difference in CPU time from the last update is checked after the execution of each DMAP
instruction. The database directory is updated if this difference is greater than update-time.
Update-time and CPU time is accurate to the nearest whole second only.
2. If update-time < 0, then database directory updates are only performed at the end of the run.
3. Defaults for update-time are machine dependent and may be found in the MSC Nastran Installation
and Operations Guide.
4. Periodic updates of the directory tables to MASTER DBset increases the integrity of the database
during system crashes (for example, crashes due to insufficient time or space).
5. Directory updates are performed automatically at various points in the execution of the DMAP in
addition to those specified by DBUPDATE. An asterisk appears after the word “BEGN” in the
executive summary table whenever an update occurs. See the Output Description (p. 314) in the MSC
Nastran Reference Manual. These updates occur whenever a permanent data block, parameter DMAP
equivalence, or restart equivalence is broken. Updates also occur upon deletions. Additions to the
database do not automatically cause a directory update to take place.
6. This statement is in effect only when INIT MASTER(RAM=r) is being used. INIT MASTER(S) and
INIT MASTER(NORAM) disable periodic and automatic updates.
7. Update-time may also be changed with the DMAP instruction PUTSYS(update-time, 128) or the
NASTRAN SYSTEM(128)=update-time statement. (The update-time must be a real,
single-precision value specified in minutes.)
Main Index
DEFINE 77
Parameter Definition
DEFINE Parameter Definition
Assigns user-defined keywords (or cellnames) to a NASTRAN system cell. (See the NASTRAN statement for
a description of “cellname”.) In addition, the DEFINE statement provides a mechanism to set default values
for system cells.
Format:
DEFINE keyword [ =expression ] [ LOCATION=SYSTEM(i) ] [ TYPE=type ]
Describer Meaning
keyword User-defined name, 1 through 24 characters in length. The first character must be
alphabetic. The following characters can be used for keywords: A through Z, ’_" ,
and 0 through 9. Any other characters are invalid.
expression Expression produces a single value from a set of constant and/or variable parameters
separated by operators. The value is assigned to the “keyword” and is also used to set
the value for the NASTRAN system cell specified by “LOCATION”. TYPE
determines both the type of the result and the type conversions that will be applied
to the constants and variables within the expression--mixed mode expressions are
allowed (see Remark 6.). The parentheses can be used to change the order of
precedence. Operations within parentheses are performed first, with the usual order
of precedence being maintained within the parentheses. The variable parameters
within the expression must be keywords previously defined on a DEFINE statement.
The following operations are allowed:
Parameter Type Operator Operation

Integer or Real + Addition
- Subtraction
Multiplication
* Division
/
Logical + Bit-wise OR
Logical - Bit clear. For example, the result of
a-b is equal to the value of a with the
bits associated with b set to 0.
Main Index
78 DEFINE
Describer Meaning
SYSTEM(I) Specifies the NASTRAN system cell number to be associated with the keyword.
type The type of expression result, and the type of conversions that will be applied to the
constants and variables within the expression. Allowable data types are as follows:
Description Type
Integer (default) I
Real R
Logical LOGICAL
Remarks:
1. If TYPE, LOCATION, and EXPRESSION are omitted, the default data type is Integer and the
default value is zero.
2. If EXPRESSION is omitted, an internal default will be assigned to the keyword/cellname based on
the LOCATION (See The NASTRAN Statement for a list of internal default values).
3. A DEFINE statement that specifies a LOCATION is actually setting the default for a NASTRAN
system cell,9 and therefore it is not necessary to also set the system cell value on a subsequent
NASTRAN statement unless the user wishes to override the previous DEFINE statement setting.
Also, since more than one DEFINE statement may be present for the same “keyword”, the last
specification takes precedence. “Keywords” referenced on a NASTRAN statement, or in an
expression on the DEFINE statement, are automatically substituted by the last specification of the
“keyword” prior to the current statement being processed.
4. DEFINE statements may also be specified in runtime configuration (RC) files. See the MSC Nastran
2019.0 Installation and Operations Guide.
5. System cells may also be set with the NASTRAN statement. In addition, they may be set or values
returned with the DMAP PUTSYS and GETSYS functions and the PARAM module. See the MSC
Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide.
6. Each operand within the expression will be converted to the result type prior to the arithmetic
operation. For example: the statement “DEFINE JJ=2.5 + 3.6 TYPE=I” would result in 2.5 and 3.6
being converted to 2 and 3, respectively, and the result of 5 would be assigned to JJ.
Examples:
1. Change the default value for block size:
DEFINE BUFFSIZE=4097 LOCATION=SYSTEM(1)
2. Set the sparse matrix selection to forward-backward substitution only:
DEFINE SPARSE=16 LOCATION=SYSTEM(126)
Main Index
DEFINE 79
3. Define the system cell keyword and default value for the maximum output line count and then reset
it to another value on a NASTRAN statement. Note: The DEFINE statement would typically be
placed in an RC file and the NASTRAN statement would be placed in the File Management Section
whenever the user wants to override the DEFINE statement default setting.
DEFINE MAXLINES=999999999 LOCATION=SYSTEM(9)

NASTRAN MAXLINES=100000
4. Define system cells that behave like “toggles,” turning some feature on or off:
DEFINE MESH=2 LOCATION=(31)

DEFINE NOMESH=0 LOCATION=(31)
NASTRAN MESH
Note: Since each subsequent DEFINE statement redefines the default value, the second
DEFINE of system cell location 31 sets the default value to 0. A NASTRAN statement
can then be inserted in the input file to reset the MESH system cell back to a value of 2.
This same technique can be used with any system cell where the user wishes to refer to
the system cell keyword and have the system cell set to a previous DEFINE statement
default.
5. Invalid usage of the DEFINE and NASTRAN statement:
DEFINE BUFFSIZE=4097
NASTRAN BUFFSIZE=2048
Valid usage:
DEFINE BUFFSIZE=4097 LOCATION=SYSTEM(1)

NASTRAN BUFFSIZE=2048
Main Index
80 ENDJOB
Terminates Job
ENDJOB Terminates Job
Terminates the job at a user-specified location in the FMS Section.
Format:
ENDJOB
Example:
DBDICT
ENDJOB
Remark:
ENDJOB is normally used after a DBDICT or DBDIR statement, or after database initialization.
Main Index
EXPAND 81
Concatenates New DBset Members
EXPAND Concatenates New DBset Members
Concatenates additional DBset members on an existing permanent DBset previously defined with an INIT
statement.
Format:
EXPAND dbset-name LOGlCAL=( log-namei [(max-sizei)]...)
Example:
ASSIGN DBMEM02=’physical file name’
EXPAND DBALL LOGICAL=(DBMEM02)
This would create and add the DBset member DBMEM02 to the existing DBset DBALL.
Describer Meaning
dbset-name The name of a DBset previously defined with an INIT statement.
log-namei Specifies the logical name of a DBset member. log-namei may also be
referenced on an ASSIGN statement which refers to the physical file name of
the DBset member.
Main Index
82 EXPAND
Concatenates New DBset Members
Describer Meaning
max-sizei Specifies the maximum size in blocks, words or bytes of a DBset member. For
storage units specified in words or bytes, the size must be followed by one of
the following unit keywords:
Unit Keyword Storage Unit

W Words
B Bytes
KW, K Kilowords (1024 words)
KB Kilobytes (1024 bytes)
MW, M Megawords (10242 words)
MB Megabytes (10242 bytes)
GW, G Gigawords (10243 words)
GB Gigabytes (10243 bytes)
TW, T Terawords (10244 words)
TB Terabytes (10244 bytes)
For example, 100MB = 100 megabytes, 1.5GB = 1.2 gigabytes = 1536

megabytes, and 2.5M = 2.5 megawords = 2560 kilowords. The size of a block
in words is defined by BUFFSlZE.
Remark:
1. On all computers with dynamic file allocation, the physical filename of a DBset member may be
specified on an ASSIGN statement:
ASSIGN log-name=’physical filename’
If an ASSIGN statement is not specified for the member, then a name is automatically assigned. The
naming convention is described in Database Concepts (p. 421) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
Main Index
INCLUDE 83
Inserts External File
INCLUDE Inserts External File
Inserts an external file into the input file. The INCLUDE statement may appear anywhere within the input
data file.
Format:
INCLUDE 'filename'
Example:
The following INCLUDE statement is used to obtain the bulk data from another file called
MYBULK.DATA:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = STATIC ANALYSIS
LOAD = 100
BEGIN BULK
INCLUDE 'MYBULK.DATA'
ENDDATA
Describer Meaning
filename Physical filename of the external file to be inserted. The user must supply the
name according to installation or machine requirements. It is recommended
that the filename be enclosed by single right-hand quotation marks ( ‘ ).
Remarks:
1. INCLUDE statements may be nested; that is, INCLUDE statements may appear inside the external
file. The nested depth level must not be greater than 10.
2. The total length of any line in an INCLUDE statement must not exceed 72 characters. Long file
names may be split across multiple lines. For example, the file:
/dir123/dir456/dir789/filename.dat
may be included with the following input:
INCLUDE ‘/dir123
/dir456
/dir789/filename.dat’
3. See the MSC Nastran 2019.0 Installation and Operations Guide for more examples.
Main Index
84 INIT
Creates a DBset
INIT Creates a DBset
Creates a temporary or permanent DBset. For the SCRATCH and MASTER DBsets, all or some of their
space may be allocated to real memory.
Format 1: Initialize any DBset except MASTER and SCRATCH:

INIT DBset-name [LOGICAL=(log-namei(max-sizei),...) BUFFSIZE=b CLUSTER=c]
Format 2: Initialize the MASTER DBset:

 
INIT MASTER  RAM = r , S LOGICAL = (log-name(max-sizei), ...),
 NORAM 
BUFFSIZE = b CLUSTER = c ]
Format 3: Initialize the SCRATCH DBset:

 
INIT SCRATCH  MEM = m  LOGICAL = (log-name(max-sizei), ...),
 NOMEM 
SCR300 = (log-namei(max-sizei),...) BUFFSIZE = b CLUSTER=c ]
Example:
1. Modify the default allocation of the DBALL DBset to 50000 blocks:
INIT DBALL LOGI=(DBALL(50000))
2. Do not allocate any real memory for the MASTER and SCRATCH DBsets:
INIT MASTER(NORAM)
INIT SCRATCH(NOMEM)
3. Create a new DBset called DBUP with two members DBUP1 and DBUP2:
INIT DBUP LOGI=(DBUP1, DBUP2)

ASSIGN DBUP1 =’physical filename 1’
ASSIGN DBUP2=’physical filename 2’
Main Index
INIT 85
Creates a DBset
Describer Meaning
dbset-name The name of a temporary or permanent DBset.
MASTER
SCRATCH
log-namei Specifies the logical name of a DBset member. log-namei may also be referenced
on an ASSIGN statement, which refers to the physical file name of the DBset
member. If no log-namei is specified, then the DBset will have one member and
the log-name will be the same as the DBset-name. A maximum of twenty
log-names may be specified. For the SCRATCH DBset, see also Remark 8.
SCR300 is a special keyword that indicates that the log-names are members
reserved for DMAP module internal scratch files.
max-sizei Specifies the maximum size, in blocks, words, or bytes, of a DBset member. For
storage units specified in words or bytes, the size must be followed by one of the
following unit keywords:
Unit Keyword Storage Unit

W Words
B Bytes
KW, K Kilowords (1024 words)
KB Kolobytes (1024 bytes)
MW, M Megawords (10242 words)
MB Megabytes (10242 bytes)
GW, G Gigawords (10243 words)
GB Gigabytes (10243 bytes)
TW, T Terawords (10244 words)
TB Terabytes (10244 bytes)
For example, 100MB = 100 megabytes, 1.5GB = 1.5 gigabytes = 1536

megabytes, and 2.5M = 2.5 megawords = 2560 kilowords. The size of a block
in words is defined by BUFFSlZE. The default for DBALL and SCRATCH
may be found in the MSC Nastran 2019.0 Installation and Operations Guide and ranges
from 250,000 blocks to 4,000,000 blocks.
RAM RAM=r requests that r words of real memory are to be allocated for the
NORAM MASTER DBset. See the nast20180 Command (p. 13) in the . The default is
RAM or RAM=30000. NORAM or RAM=0 specifies that no real memory is
to be allocated.
Main Index
86 INIT
Creates a DBset
Describer Meaning
S If the primary database is being created in the run, this option requests that all
DBsets in the primary database will be automatically deleted at the end of the
run. INIT MASTER(S) is equivalent to specifying scr=yes on the “nastran”
statement. See Executing MSC Nastran, 1. If the run is a restart, then this option is
ignored.
MEM MEM=m specifies that m blocks of real memory are to be allocated for the
NOMEM SCRATCH DBset. See The NASTRAN Statement (Optional) (p. 14) in the . The
default m is machine dependent and may be found in the MSC Nastran 2019.0
Installation and Operations Guide. NOMEM or MEM=0 requests that no real
memory is to be allocated.
BUFFSlZE BUFFSlZE=b specifies the number of words per block in the DBset and will
override the value specified by the BUFFSlZE keyword on the NASTRAN
statement. The default for b is obtained from the NASTRAN BUFFSIZE
statement. See the MSC Nastran 2019.0 Installation and Operations Guide.
CLUSTER CLUSTER=c specifies the number of blocks per cluster in the DBset. The
default is 1, and any other value is not recommended.
Remarks:
1. The INIT statement and its applications are further discussed in Database Concepts (p. 421) in the
MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
2. Four DBsets are predefined and automatically allocated by the program. Their DBset-names are
MASTER, DBALL, SCRATCH, and OBJSCR, and they are described in Database Concepts (p. 421)
in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
3. On all computers with dynamic file allocation, the physical filename of a DBset member may
specified on an ASSIGN statement:
ASSIGN log-name=’physical filename’
If an ASSIGN statement is not specified for the member, then a name is automatically assigned. The
naming convention is described in Database Concepts (p. 421) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
4. It is recommended that there be sufficient physical space to hold a DBset member should it reach its
maximum size (max-sizei). The max-sizei may be converted to words by multiplying by b. A summary
of space usage and allocation is printed at the end of the execution summary table.
5. In restart runs, the INIT statement is ignored for preexisting permanent DBsets. The INIT statement
is intended to be specified only in the run in which the DBset is being created. If more DBset
members need to be added to the DBset, then the EXPAND statement is used.
6. If RAM or RAM=r is specified and the run terminates because the computer operating system detects
insufficient space or time, or the computer halts due to a power outage or operator interruption, then
it may not be possible to restart from the database. See the DBUPDATE FMS statement.
Main Index
INIT 87
Creates a DBset
7. BUFFSIZE=b and CLUSTER=c must satisfy the following inequality:

64000
b ≤ --------------- + 5
c
8. By default, the SCRATCH DBset is divided into two partitions: LOGICAL and SCR300. The
LOGICAL partition, log-names after the LOGICAL keyword, are reserved for DMAP scratch data
blocks, and the SCR300 partition for DMAP module internal scratch files.
• The maximum total number of log-names for LOGICAL and SCR300 is 20. For example, if
LOGICAL has 8 log-names, then SCR300 can have no more than 12 log-names.
• If NASTRAN SYSTEM(142)=1 is specified, then the SCR300 partition is not created and
internal scratch files, along with DMAP scratch data blocks, will reside on the LOGICAL
partition. The default is SYSTEM(142)=2.
• If NASTRAN SYSTEM(151)=1 is specified and the LOGICAL partition has reached its
maximum size, then the SCR300 partition will be used. The default is SYSTEM(151)=0.
• By default, the space specified for the SCR300 partition is released to the operating system after
each DMAP module is executed if the module used more than 100 blocks for internal scratch files.
If 100 blocks is not a desirable threshold, then it may be changed by specifying NASTRAN
SYSTEM(150)=t, where t is the number of blocks for the threshold.
9. BUFFSlZE=b is predefined for DBset-names MSCOBJ, OBJSCR, and USROBJ and may not be
changed by BUFFSIZE on this statement or if the NASTRAN BUFFSlZEbmax statement (see The
NASTRAN Statement (Optional) (p. 14) in the ). The default for b is recommended for all except very large
problems. bmax must reflect the maximum of b specified for all DBsets attached to the run, including
the delivery database. See MSC Nastran 2019.0 Installation and Operations Guide for the defaults of b and
bmax.
10. If INIT MASTER(RAM=r) and INIT SCRATCH(MEM=m) are specified, then BUFFSIZE for
these DBsets must be the same. If not, a warning message is issued, and the BUFFSlZE for the
SCRATCH DBset is reset to that of the MASTER DBset.
11. Only one INIT statement per dbset-name may be specified in the File Management Section.
Main Index
88 MEMLIST
Specify Datablocks Eligible for SMEM
MEMLIST Specify Datablocks Eligible for SMEM
Specifies a list of scratch datablocks that may reside in scratch memory (SMEM).
Format:
MEMLIST DATABLK = (DBname1, DBname2, ..., DBnamei)
Example:
MEMLIST DATABLK = (KOO, MOO, KQQ, MQQ)
If generated, datablocks KOO, MOO, KQQ, and MQQ will reside in scratch memory. All other datablocks
will be excluded from scratch memory.
Describer Meaning
DBnamei Name of a Nastran datablock.
Remarks:
1. Only NDDL and local scratch datablocks may be included in MEMLIST specification.
2. Datablocks specified will reside in SMEM on a first-come, first-served basis.
3. Datablocks not specified by this statement will not reside in SMEM.
4. Database directories for the SCRATCH DBset reside in SMEM and are not affected by any
MEMLIST specification.
5. Continuation lines are allowed.
6. Multiple MEMLIST statementss are honored.
7. Scratch I/O activity is reported in the .f04 file by including DIAG 42 in the Executive Control
Section.
Main Index
PROJ 89
Defines Database Project-Identifier
PROJ Defines Database Project-Identifier
Defines the current or default project identifier, project-ID.
Format:
PROJ [=] ’project-ID’
Examples:
1. PROJ = ’MY JOB’
2. The following project-ID will be truncated to 40 characters:
PROJ ’CAR MODEL 1999 BODY FRAME SYM - PROTYP B RUN’
and all subsequent restarts must have the statement.
PROJ ’CAR MODEL 1999 BODY FRAME SYM - PROTYP B’
Describer Meaning
project-ID Project identifier. Must be enclosed in single quotes. (Character string,
maximum of 40 characters; Default=blank)
Remarks:
1. There may be only one PROJECT statement in the File Management Section. The PROJECT
statement must be specified before all DBCLEAN, DBDIR, DBDICT, RESTART, DBLOCATE,
and DBLOAD statements where project-ID is not specified by the user.
2. This statement is optional and specifies that all data blocks and parameters to be stored on or accessed
from the database in the current run shall also be identified by project-ID. Therefore, in subsequent
runs that may access this data through other FMS statements such as RESTART, the project-ID must
be specified.
3. Project-ID is the default on DBCLEAN, DBDIR, DBDICT, and RESTART FMS statements and
in the WHERE and CONVERT clause of the DBLOCATE statement.
4. Leading blanks and trailing blanks enclosed within the single quotes are ignored. All other blanks are
considered part of the project-ID.
5. Project-ID is saved with only the first 40 characters specified.
Main Index
90 RESTART
Reuses Database From a Previous Run
RESTART Reuses Database From a Previous Run
Requests that data stored in a previous run be used in the current run.
Format:
RESTART PROJECT=′project′ VERSION = version-ID KEEP LOGICAL = dbname

LAST NOKEEP
Examples:
1. RESTART VERSION=7
Version number 7 will be retrieved for this run (version 8). At the end of the run, version 7 will be
deleted.
2. PROJ=’FENDER’
RESTART
The last version under project-ID FENDER will be used in the current run.
3. ASSIGN RUN1=’run1.MASTER’
RESTART LOGICAL=RUN1
The run1.MASTER and its associated database will be used (read only) for restart purposes.
Describer Meaning
project-ID Project identifier. See description of the PROJ FMS statement. Must be
enclosed in single right-hand quotation marks (’) (Character string, maximum
of 40 characters; default is the project-ID specified on the PROJ FMS
statement).
version-ID Version number (Integer > 0).
LAST Specifies the last version under project-ID.
KEEP Data stored under VERSION will remain on the database after the run is
completed.
NOKEEP Data stored under VERSION will be deleted from the database after the run is
completed.
dbname Specifies the logical name of an existing MASTER (master directory) DBset to
be used for restart purposes. This MASTER and its associated database will be
opened in a read-only mode to perform the restart; any new data will be written
to the database for the current run.
Remarks:
1. There may only be one RESTART statement in the File Management Section.
2. A new version-ID is automatically assigned whenever a restart is performed.
Main Index
RESTART 91
3. If project-ID or version-ID or both are specified and cannot be found, then a fatal message will be
issued.
4. The RESTART statement is required to perform restarts in solution sequences 4, and 101 through
200 and SOL 400.
5. If PROJECT is not specified, then the run will restart from the project-ID specified on the PROJ
statement (See Example 2.).
6. Databases created in one version typically cannot be directly restarted into a different version.
Restrictions are typically documented in the current release guide; however, a DBLOCATE type
restart might work.
7. Restarts do not work with ACMS and DMP.
8. If NASTRAN IFPSTAR=YES (default) and scr=no then the Bulk Data images will be stored on the
IFPDAT file; for example, if the input file name is run1 then run1.IFPDAT will be created along
with run1.MASTER and run1.DBALL. Please note the following when performing a restart.
a. If run1.IFPDAT, run1.MASTER and run1.DBALL are in the same folder then only the
MASTER file needs to be specified on an ASSIGN statement. For example, ASSI
cold='run1.MASTER' RESTART LOGI=cold
b. If run1.IFPDAT is in a different folder than that of run1.MASTER and run1.DBALL (or
IFPDAT has been renamed in the same folder) then both the MASTER and IFPDAT must
specified on ASSIGN statements and the IMPORT keyword must be specified on the ASSIGN
IFPDB statement:
ASSI cold='run1.MASTER'
RESTART LOGI=cold
ASSI IFPDB='other_folder/run1.IFPDAT' IMPORT
9. For SOL 400 one must also use NLRESTART (Case).
Main Index
92 RESTART
Main Index
Chapter 4: Executive Control Statements
Guide
4 Executive Control
Statements

Key to Descriptions 94
 Executive Control Statement Descriptions 96
Main Index
Key to Descriptions
Key to Descriptions
Braces { } indicate A brief sentence Brackets [ ] indicate
that a choice of de- about the function that a choice of de-
scribers is mandato- of the statement is scribers is optional.
ry. given.
The
Thedefault
defaultdescribers
describersare
are
shaded.
shaded.
Describers in uppercase letters are

keywords that must be specified as
shown.
Describers in lower
case are variables.
If the describers are stacked vertically,

then only one may be specified.
If the describer is in lower case, then it is a variable and

the describer’s type (e.g., Integer, Real, or Character),
allowable range, and default value are enclosed in pa-
rentheses. If no default value is given, the describer
must be specified by the user.
Each of the describers is discussed briefly.

Further details may be discussed under
Remarks.
The remarks are generally arranged in order of im-

portance and indicate such things as the statement’s
relationship to other statements, restrictions and rec-
ommendations on its use, and further details regard-
ing the describers.
Main Index
Chapter 4: Executive Control Statements 95
Key to Descriptions
Executive Control Section

This section describes the Executive Control statements. These statements select a solution sequence and
various diagnostics.
Most Executive Control statements are order independent. The exceptions are the COMPILE, COMPILER,
ALTER, ENDALTER, and LINK statements. If used, the LINK statement must appear after all COMPILE
statements. The COMPILER statement (or equivalent DIAGs) must appear before all COMPILE
statements. The COMPILER statement also sets the defaults for subsequent COMPILE statements.
Executive Control Statement Summary

The Executive Control statements are summarized as follows:
ALTER Specifies deletion and/or insertion of the DMAP statements that follow.
APP Specifies an approach in a solution sequence.
CEND Designates the end of the Executive Control statements.
COMPILE Requests compilation of specified subDMAPs or the NDDL file.
COMPILER Specifies DMAP compilation diagnostics.
DIAG Requests diagnostic output or modifies operational parameters.
DOMAINSOLVER Selects domain decomposition solution methods.
ECHO Controls the echo of Executive Control statements.
ENDALTER Designates the end of a DMAP sequence headed by an ALTER.
GEOMCHECK Specifies tolerance values and options for optional finite element geometry
tests.
ID Specifies a comment.
LINK Requests the link of a main subDMAP.
MALTER Inserts and/or deletes DMAP statements in solution sequences
MODEL_CHECK Specifies model checkout run options.
SOL Requests execution of a solution sequence or DMAP program.
SOL 600,ID Creates Marc input and optionally executes Marc from SOL 600
SOL 700,ID Executes MSC Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)
SPARSESOLVER Specifies various options used in sparse solution if equations operations.
TIME Sets the maximum allowable execution time.
Main Index
Executive Control Statement Descriptions
Executive Control Statement Descriptions

Executive Control statements may be abbreviated down to the first four characters as long as the abbreviation
is unique relative to all other statements. Each statement is described as follows:
Description
A brief sentence about the function of the statement is given.
Format
If the statement line is longer than 72 columns, then it may be continued to the next line with a comma. For
example:
COMPILE SEDRCVR SOUIN=MSCSOU,
NOREF NOLIST
Example

Each of the describers is briefly discussed. The describer’s type (e.g., Integer, Real, or Character), its allowable
range, and its default value are enclosed in parentheses. The describer must be specified by the user if no
default value is given.
Remarks
The remarks in the remarks section are generally arranged in order of importance and indicate such things as
the Executive Control statement’s relationship to other statements, restrictions and recommendations on its
use, and further descriptions of the describers.
Main Index
$ 97
Comment
$ Comment
Format:
Example:
Remarks:
2. Comments will appear only in the unsorted echo of the bulk data.
Main Index
98 ALTER
Inserts and/or Deletes DMAP Statements
ALTER Inserts and/or Deletes DMAP Statements
Inserts and/or deletes DMAP statements in a subDMAP.
Format:
ALTER k1 [,k2]
or
ALTER ’string1’[(occurrence,offset)] ,[’string2’[(occurrence,offset)]
]
or
ALTER k1 , [’string2’[(occurrence,offset)] ]
or
ALTER ’string1’[(occurrence,offset)] , [k2]
Examples:
1. The following alter will insert a MATPRN DMAP statement after the first occurrence of the string
’SDR2’ in subDMAP DSASTAT:
SOL 101
COMPILE DSASTAT $
ALTER ’SDR2’ $
MATPRN OESDS1//$
CEND
2. The following alter will delete the second occurrence of the OUTPUT4 DMAP statement in
subDMAP DSASTAT and replace it with a MATPRN DMAP statement:
SOL 101
COMPILE DSASTAT $
ALTER ’OUTPUT4’(2),’OUTPUT4’(2) $
$ OR
$ ALTER ’OUTPUT4’(2),’’ $
MATPRN OESDS1//$
CEND
Describer Meaning
k1 If k2 or ’string2’ is not specified, the subsequent DMAP statements will be
inserted after either the statement number k1 or the ’string1’,
[(occurrence,offset)] reference point.
k1, k2 DMAP statements numbered k1 through k2 will be deleted and may be
replaced with subsequent DMAP statements.
’string1’ if ’string2’ or k2 is not specified, the subsequent DMAP statements will be
inserted after the first occurrence of ’string1’.
Main Index
ALTER 99
Describer Meaning
’string1’,’string2’ DMAP statements beginning with the first occurrence of ’string1’ through
DMAP statements containing the first occurrence of ’string2’ will be deleted
and may be replaced with subsequent DMAP statements.
occurrence This flag indicates which occurrence of the preceding string is to be used,
starting at the beginning of the subDMAP (Integer > 0; Default = 1).
offset This flag indicates the offset from the reference DMAP statement.
Depending on the sign the specific DMAP statement may be above (-offset)
or below (+offset) the referenced DMAP statement (Integer; Default = 0).
Remarks:
1. The ALTER statement must be used in conjunction with the COMPILE Executive Control
statement. Note: ALTER statements cannot be used in conjunction with an MALTER statement,
and therefore should never immediately follow this statement.
2. If an MALTER statement is used in conjunction with the ALTER statement, then the MALTER
should be placed above the COMPILE statements. Failure to place the MALTER in this position may
cause ALTER statements to be ignored.
3. The ALTERs can reference the DMAP statements in any order within a subDMAP. Two restrictions
on ordering are:
• K2 or ’string2’(occurence, offset) references must refer to a DMAP statement number that is
greater than or equal to the k1 or ’string1’(occurrence,offset) reference within a single ALTER
statement.
• K1 or ’string1’ and k2 or ’string2’ cannot overlap DMAP line positions with another ALTER that
references the same subDMAP.
4. The ’string1’ or ’string2’ used as a search pattern will apply to one complete DMAP statement; i.e., a
multiline DMAP statement will be searched for a pattern match as if each 72 character line of the
DMAP statement were concatenated together into one string–all blanks and comments either
embedded or immediately preceding the DMAP statement, will be retained. However, comments are
ignored for the following type of alter:
alter ‘^ *gp0’
5. Within a SUBDMAP, both ’string1’ and ’string2’ will be used to search for a pattern match starting
at the beginning of the subDMAP–not at the current position of the last string match.
6. The special characters (metacharacters) used for string searching are described in Remark 9. The
characters <, >, and $, which are common DMAP characters, are also special metacharacters. If they
are to be used in the search string as regular characters, then they must be preceded by a backward
slash (\). For example, to find the string
IF(DDRMM >=-1)
the command is
ALTER ’IF (DDRMM \>= -1)’ $
7. The ALTER statement must not exceed 72 characters (no continuations are allowed).
Main Index
100 ALTER
8. ’string2’ (r2,02) can be defaulted to ’string1’ (r1,01) by using a null string (’’). For example, the alter
statement
ALTER ’string1’(r1,01),’’
is equivalent to
ALTER ’string1’(r1,01),’string1’(r1,01)
The defaults for (r2,02) using the null string can be overridden by specifying (r2,02).
As another example, the alter statement
ALTER ’string1’(r1,01),’’(r2,02)
is equivalent to
ALTER ’string1’(r1,01),’string1’(r2,02)
9. Metacharacters*:
. Matches any single character except newline.

* Matches any number (including zero) of the single character (including a character
specified by a regular expression) that immediately precedes it. For example, since
“.” (dot) means any character, “.*” means “match any number of characters”.
[...] Matches any one of the characters enclosed between the brackets. For example,
or < > “[AB]” matches either “A” or “B”. A range of consecutive characters can be
specified by separating the first and last characters in the range with a hyphen. For
example “[A-Z]” will match any uppercase letter from A to Z and “[0-9]” will
match any digit from 0 to 9. Some metacharacters lose special meaning inside
brackets. A circumflex (^) as the first character in the bracket tries to match any one
character not in the list.
^ or ! Requires that the following regular expression be found at the beginning of the line.
or . Note that these metacharacters may lead to User Fatal Message 802 if the preceding
line is a comment.
$ Requires that the preceding regular expression be found at the end of the line.
\ Treats the following special character as an ordinary character. For example, “\.”
stands for a period and “\*” for an asterisk. Also, to search for a tic (’), the search
string must be single quotes.
’ Marks the beginning and end of a pattern to be matched.
Note: Nonportable characters such as [ ] and ^ should be replaced (e.g., ^ ->! and [ ] -><>)
if portability is required. However, all the preceding characters are recognized by
MSC Nastran.
10. If a string-based alter uses the “!” in the expression (find occurrence at the beginning of line), it is
possible MSC Nastran will fail with User Fatal Message 802.
Main Index
APP 101
Specifies Solution Sequence Approach
APP Specifies Solution Sequence Approach
Selects heat transfer analysis in the linear static solution sequence SOL 101, or a coupled analysis combining
heat transfer and structural analysis in SOL 153.
Format:
APP approach
Example:
The following requests a heat transfer rather than a structural analysis in SOL 101.
SOL 101
APP HEAT
Describer Meaning
approach Specifies one of the following:
HEAT Indicates that heat transfer is to be performed in SOL 101.
COUPLED Indicates that a coupled analysis combining heat transfer and
structural analysis is to be preformed in SOL 153.
Remarks:
1. The APP statement is optional.
2. The APP HEAT statement applies only to linear static SOL 101. The APP HEAT statement is not
required in SOLs 153 and 159, or in SOL 101 if PARAM,HEATSTAT,YES is specified.
3. The NASTRAN HEAT=1 statement is an alternate specification of APP HEAT. See Executing MSC
Nastran, 1.
Main Index
102 CEND
End of Executive Control Section Delimiter
CEND End of Executive Control Section Delimiter
Designates the end of the Executive Control Section.
Format:
CEND
Remark:
1. CEND is an optional statement. If CEND is not specified, then the program will automatically insert
one.
Main Index
COMPILE 103
Compiles DMAP Statements
COMPILE Compiles DMAP Statements
Requests the compilation of a subDMAP, subDMAP alter, or NDDL sequence.
Format 1: Compiles a subDMAP or subDMAP alter sequence
COMPILE SUBDMAP subDMAP-name [ SOUIN = souin-DBset SOUOUT = souout-DBset,

DMAP
OBJOUT = objout-DBset LIST REF DECK

NOLIST NOREF NODECK
Format 2: Compiles an NDDL sequence

   REF  DECK 
COMPILE NDDL = nddl-name   SOUIN = souin-dbset  LIST   
  SOUOUT = souout-dbset  NOLIST  NOREF  NODECK 
Examples:
1. The following compiles an alter in subDMAP PHASEIDR:
COMPILE PHASE1DR
ALTER ’CALL PHASE1A’
CEND
2. The following compiles a subDMAP called MYDMAP. (SUBDMAP and END are DMAP
statements; see the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide):
COMPILE MYDMAP LIST REF
SUBDMAP MYDMAP $
.
.
.
END $
CEND
3. The following obtains a listing of the NDDL:
ACQUIRE NDDL
COMPILE NDDL=NDDL LIST
CEND
Main Index
104 COMPILE
Describer Meaning
subDMAP-name The name of a subDMAP sequence. SubDMAP-name must be 1 to 8
alphanumeric characters in length and the first character must be alphabetic.
The keywords DMAP and SUBDMAP are optional and do not have to be
specified.
nddl-name The name of an NDDL sequence (Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters
in length and the first character must be alphabetic). The keyword NDDL
must be specified.
souin-DBset The name of a DBset from which the subDMAP or NDDL source
statements will be retrieved (Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters in
length and the first character must be alphabetic). The default is MSCSOU
if the next statement is not a subDMAP statement.
souout-DBset The name of a DBset on which the subDMAP or NDDL source statements
will be stored (Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters in length and the
first character must be alphabetic). The default is the SCRATCH DBset.
objout-DBset The name of a DBset on which the subDMAP object code will be stored
(Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters in length and the first character
must be alphabetic). The default is the OBJSCR DBset.
LIST,NOLIST LIST requests a compiled listing of the subDMAP or NDDL sequence.
NOLIST suppresses the listing. NOLIST is the default.
REF,NOREF REF requests a compiled cross reference of the subDMAP or NDDL
sequence. NOREF suppresses the cross reference. NOREF is the default.
DECK,NODECK DECK requests the subDMAP or NDDL source statements to be written to
the PUNCH file. NODECK suppresses the writing to the PUNCH file.
NODECK is the default.
Remarks:
1. SubDMAP names for MSC Nastran solution sequences are given in the SOL statement description.
The “COMPILER LIST REF” statement may be used to determine the appropriate
subDMAP-name.
2. If a subDMAP is being compiled and SOUIN=souin-DBset is specified, then an ALTER Executive
Control statement, or an INCLUDE statement which contains an ALTER statement as the first non-
comment line, must appear immediately after this statement. If not, then the SUBDMAP DMAP
statement must appear immediately after this statement. See the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide.
3. Starting in MSC/Nastran Version 69, DBsets USRSOU and USROBJ were no longer automatically
created. They must be initialized by the INIT FMS statement and then may be specified for
souin-dbset (or souout-dbset) and objout-dbset, respectively. They may be used to store the
subDMAP source statements and object code on the primary database for reexecution in a subsequent
run. Consider the following example:
In the first run, the following COMPILE statement compiles and stores a subDMAP called
MYDMAP:
Main Index
COMPILE 105
COMPILE MYDMAP SOUOUT=USRSOU OBJOUT=USROBJ

SUBDMAP MYDMAP $
.
.
END $
CEND
In the second run, the SOL statement is used to execute the MYDMAP stored in the previous run.
The LINK statement is required to retrieve the object code from the USROBJ DBset:
SOL MYDMAP
LINK MYDMAP INCL=USROBJ
CEND
In the third run, the COMPILE statement is used to alter MYDMAP and execute:
SOL MYDMAP
COMPILE MYDMAP SOUIN=USRSOU
ALTER...
.
.
.
CEND
4. If SOUOUT or OBJOUT is specified and a subDMAP with the same name as subDMAP-name
already exists on the database, then its source statements or object code will be replaced.
5. A COMPILE statement is required for each subDMAP to be compiled. If two or more COMPILE
statements reference the same subDMAP name, then only the last is used in the linking of the object
code. If the COMPILE statement is being used only to alter a subDMAP and two or more
COMPILE statements reference the same subDMAP name, then the multiple alters are assembled
and the subDMAP is compiled only once.
6. Only one COMPILE statement for an NDDL sequence may be specified in the input file.
• SOUIN=souin-DBset requests only a compilation of the NDDL sequence stored on souin-DBset
for purposes of obtaining a listing or a cross reference, and it cannot be modified with the ALTER
statement. See Remark 3. COMPILE NDDL=NDDL SOUIN=MSCSOU LIST requests a
listing of the MSC Nastran NDDL sequence. The ACQUIRE FMS statement or the SOL
statement must be specified in order to attach the corresponding delivery database.
• To alter the MSC Nastran NDDL sequences, the entire modified NDDL sequence is included
after the COMPILE statement, and SOUIN=souin-DBset is not specified.
• SOUOUT=souout-DBset requests the storage of the NDDL source statements on the
souout-DBset, and may not be specified with SOUIN=souin-DBset.
7. The COMPILER statement may be used to override the defaults of NOLIST, NOREF, and
NODECK. In other words, if LIST or NOLIST, REF or NOREF, or DECK or NODECK is not
specified, then the corresponding option on the COMPILER statement will be used. In the following
example, REF on the COMPILER statement will override the default of NOREF on the COMPILE
statement:
COMPILER REF
Main Index
106 COMPILE
COMPILE MYDMAP
8. MSCSOU and MSCOBJ, specified with SOUOUT and OBJOUT, are special DBsets similar to
USRSOU and USROBJ except that they are used in the creation or modification of a delivery
database. For an example application, see the MSC Nastran 2019.0 Installation and Operations Guide.
Main Index
COMPILER 107
DMAP Compiler Output Options
COMPILER DMAP Compiler Output Options
Requests compilation of a DMAP sequence and/or overrides defaults on the COMPILE statement.
Format:
COMPILER [ = ] LIST DECK REF GO SORT

NOLIST NODECK NOREF NOGO NOSORT
Example:
COMPILER=LIST
Describer Meaning
LIST, NOLIST LIST requests the compilation listing of the solution sequence. NOLIST suppresses the
listing.
DECK, DECK requests that the DMAP source statements of the solution sequence be written
NODECK to the PUNCH file. NODECK suppresses the DECK option.
REF, NOREF REF requests a compilation cross reference. NOREF suppresses a compilation cross
reference.
GO, NOGO GO requests the execution of the solution sequence following compilation. NOGO
requests termination following compilation.
SORT, SORT compiles subDMAPs in alphabetical order. NOSORT compiles subDMAPs in
NOSORT calling sequence order.
Remarks:
1. REF is equivalent to DIAG 4. LIST is equivalent to DIAG 14. DECK is equivalent to DIAG 17.
2. NOGO is an alternative to NOEXE on the SOL statement.
3. This statement provides a means of obtaining a compilation or source listing, or both, of a complete
solution sequence, including all the component subDMAPs.
4. See the COMPILE statement to compile a single subDMAP.
5. This statement also requests the automatic link of the solution sequence. Therefore, all objects must
be created in the current run or obtained from the DBset such as USROBJ. See the COMPILE
statement for how to create and store objects.
6. The COMPILER statement may be used to override the defaults of NOLIST, NOREF, NODECK
on the COMPILE entry when they are not explicitly specified. However, COMPILER LIST
produces a list of the entire solution sequence. If a listing of only specific subdmaps is desired, then
COMPILER LIST should not be specified and the LIST request should be made on the COMPILE
entry.
COMPILER REF
COMPILE MYDMAP
Main Index
108 DIAG
Requests Diagnostic Output
DIAG Requests Diagnostic Output
Requests diagnostic output or special options.
Format:
DIAG [=] k1[k2, ..., kn]
Examples:
DIAG 8,53
or
DIAG 8
DIAG 53
Describer Meaning
ki A list separated by commas and/or spaces of desired diagnostics.
Remarks:
1. The DIAG statement is optional.
2. Multiple DIAG statements are allowed.
3. The following table lists the possible values for ki and their corresponding actions:
k=1 Dumps memory when a nonpreface fatal message is generated.

k=2 Prints database directory information before and after each DMAP statement. Prints
bufferpooling information.
k=3 Prints “DATABASE USAGE STATISTICS” after execution of each functional
module. This message is the same as the output that appears after the run terminates.
See the Output Description (p. 314) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
k=4 Prints cross-reference tables for compiled sequences. Equivalent to the COMPILER
REF statement.
k=5 Prints the BEGIN time on the operator’s console for each functional module. See the
Output Description (p. 314) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
k=6 Prints the END time for each functional module in the log file or day file, and on the
operator’s console. Modules that consume less time than the threshold set by
SYSTEM(20) do not create a message. See the Output Description (p. 314) in the MSC
Nastran Reference Manual.
k=7 Prints eigenvalue extraction diagnostics for the complex determinate method.
k=8 Prints matrix trailers as the matrices are generated in the execution summary table.
See the Output Description (p. 314) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
Main Index
DIAG 109
k=9 Prints a message in the .f04 file when EQUIV and EQUIVX perform a successful
equivalence; in other words, both the input and output exists.
k=10 Uses alternate nonlinear loading in linear transient analysis. Replaces N n + 1 with
( Nn + 1 + Nn + Nn – 1 ) ⁄ 3
k=11 DBLOAD, DBUNLOAD, and DBLOCATE diagnostics.

k=12 Prints eigenvalue extraction diagnostics for complex inverse power and complex
Lanczos methods.
k=13 Prints the open core length (the value of REAL). See the Output Description (p. 314) in
k=14 Prints solution sequence. Equivalent to the COMPILER LIST statement.
k=15 Prints table trailers.
k=16 Traces real inverse power eigenvalue extraction operations
k=17 Punches solution sequences. Equivalent to the COMPILER DECK statement.
k=18 In aeroelastic analysis, prints internal grid points specified on SET2 Bulk Data
entries.
k=19 Prints data for MPYAD and FBS method selection in the execution summary table.
k=20 Similar to DIAG 2 except the output appears in the execution summary table and has
a briefer and more user-friendly format. However, the .f04 file will be quite large if
DIAG 20 is specified with an MSC Nastran solution sequence. A DMAP alter with
DIAGON(20) and DIAGOFF(20) is recommended. DIAG 20 also prints DBMGR,
DBFETCH, and DBSTORE subDMAP diagnostics. See the MSC Nastran DMAP
Programmer’s Guide.
k=21 Prints diagnostics of DBDIR and DBENTRY table.
k=22 EQUIV and EQUIVX module diagnostics.
k=23 Not used.
k=24 Prints files that are left open at the end of a module execution. Also prints DBVIEW
diagnostics.
k=25 Outputs internal plot diagnostics.
k=27 Prints Input File Processor (IFP) table. See the MSC Nastran Programmer’s Manual,
Section 4.5.9.
k=28 Punches the link specification table (XBSBD). The Bulk Data and Case Control
Sections are ignored, and no analysis is performed.
k=29 Process link specification table update. The Bulk Data and Case Control Sections are
ignored, and no analysis is performed.
k=30 In link 1, punches the XSEMii data (i.e., sets ii via DIAG 1 through 15). The Bulk
Data and Case Control Sections are ignored, and no analysis is performed. After link
1, this turns on BUG output. Used also by MATPRN module. See also Remark 5 on
the TSTEP, 3190 Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
110 DIAG
k=31 Prints link specification table and module properties list (MPL) data. The Bulk Data
and Case Control Sections are ignored, and no analysis is performed.
k=32 Prints diagnostics for XSTORE and PVA expansion.
k=33 Not used.
k=34 Turns off plot line optimization.
k=35 Prints diagnostics for 2-D slideline contact analysis in SOLs 106 and 129.
k=36 Prints extensive tables generated by the GP0 module in p-version analysis.
k=37 Disables the superelement congruence test option and ignores User Fatal Messages
4277 and 4278. A better alternative is available with PARAM,CONFAC. See
Parameters, 739.
k=38 Prints material angles for CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CTRIA3, and CTRIA6 elements.
The angle is printed only for elements that use the MCID option of the connection
entry.
k=39 Traces module FA1 operations and aerodynamic splining in SOLs 145 and 146.
k=40 Print constraint override/average information for edges and faces in p-adaptive
analysis
k=41 Traces GINO OPEN/CLOSE operations.
k=42 Prints output on .f04 file the usage statistic for datablock defined in the FMS
command, MEMLIST.
k=43 Print output for Buffer Pool Diagnostics.
k=44 Prints a mini-dump for fatal errors and suppresses user message exit.
k=45 Prints the same database directory information as DIAG 2 except that it prints only
after each DMAP statement.
k=46 Used by MSC Nastran development for GINO printout.
k=47 Prints DBMGR, DBFETCH, and DBSTORE subDMAP diagnostics.
k=48 Used by MSC Nastran development for GINO printout.
k=49 DIAG 49 is obsolete and should not be used. The utility f04rprt should be used to
summarize the .f04 execution summary instead.
k=50 Traces the nonlinear solution in SOLs 106, 129, 153, and 159. Prints subcase status;
echoes NLPARM, NLPCI, and entry fields; and prints initial arc-length. Prints
iteration summary only in SOLs 129, and 159.
In static aeroelastic analysis (SOL 144), prints transformation information associated
with the generation of the DJX matrix in the ADG module and intermediate
solutions information in the ASG module.
k=51 Prints intermediate displacement, load error vectors, and additional iteration
information helpful in debugging in SOLs 106, 129, 153, and 159.
k=52 Disables the printing of errors at each time step in SOLs 129 and 159.
Main Index
DIAG 111
k=53 MESSAGE module output will also be printed in the execution summary table. See
the Output Description (p. 314) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
k=54 Linker debug print.
k=55 Performance timing.
k=56 Extended print of execution summary table (prints all DMAP statements and
RESTART deletions). See the Output Description (p. 314) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Manual.
k=57 Executive table (XDIRLD) performance timing and last-time-used (LTU)
diagnostics.
k=58 Data block deletion debug and timing constants echo.
k=59 Buffpool debug printout.
k=60 Prints diagnostics for data block cleanup at the end of each module execution in
subroutines DBCLN, DBEADD, and DBERPL.
k=61 GINO block allocator diagnostics.
k=62 GINO block manager diagnostics.
k=63 Prints each item checked by the RESTART module and its NDDL description.
k=64 Requests upward compatibility DMAP conversion from Version 65 only. Ignored in
Version 70.5 and later systems.
Main Index
112 DOMAINSOLVER
Domain Decomposition Solution Method
DOMAINSOLVER Domain Decomposition Solution Method
Selects domain decomposition solution methods.
Format:
STAT
MODES  DOF
FREQ  GRID ,NUMDOM = int,
DOMAINSOLVER  PARTOPT =
ACMS  FREQ

DSA ELEM
NLSOLV
YES SUPER
UPFACT = real ,PRINT = , NCLUST = int, CLUSTSZ = int, COMPMETH = GRID ,
NO
NONE
BEND 0 
RUNOPT= MSTSLV , PARTMETH= MSCMLV , TIPSIZE=int, VERSION= NEW , SCHED = STATIC , GRPSIZ = N 
MULTIMST METISG OLD DYNAMIC 
–1 
METISO
Examples:
DOMAINSOLVER STAT (PARTOPT=DOF)
DOMAINSOLVER ACMS (UPFACT=3.0,NUMDOM=128)
DOMAINSOLVER DSA
DOMAINSOLVER STAT, NLSOLV
DOMAINSOLVER ACMS (PARTMETH=BEND, NUMDOM=128)
DOMAINSOLVER ACMS (PARTMETH=METISO, TIPSIZE=500)
DOMAINSOLVER STAT (PARTMETH=MSCMLV)
DOMAINSOLVER ACMS (VERSION=NEW) - default
DOMAINSOLVER ACMS (VERSION=OLD)
The keywords function as follows:
STAT Linear statics.

MODES Normal modes.
FREQ Frequency response.
ACMS Automated component modal synthesis.
DSA Design sensitivity analysis. (See Remark 2.)
NLSOLV Nonlinear analysis
The descriptions of the parameters are as follows:
Main Index
DOMAINSOLVER 113
PARTOPT Partitioning option. Selects which domain is to be decomposed.

DOF Degree of freedom domain.
GRID Grid point (geometric) domain.
FREQ Frequency domain.
ELEM Finite element domain.
The default is dependent upon solution sequence. See Table 4-1 for further
descriptions.
Note that ACMS (VERSION=NEW) requires PARTOPT=DOF. If it is not set by

the user, ACMS will use it automatically. However, if the user specifies a different
value for PARTOPT, for example, ACMS (VERSION=NEW, PARTOPT=GRID),
then MSC Nastran will execute old ACMS rather than new ACMS.
NUMDOM Selects the number of domains as follows:
(ACMS) If NUMDOM = 0 or 1, then the model will not be split. Default depends on the
model size and the value of PARTOPT.
NUMDOM will be ignored for ACMS (VERSION=NEW); instead of the number

of domains, new ACMS uses the size of the tip domains being specified via TIPSIZE
(see below).
NUMDOM Default = dmp; if NUMDOM has any other value, it will automatically be set to dmp
(STAT) (equal to the number of processors used for the run). The model will be divided into
NUMDOM domains in either the geometric (grid-based) or DOF domains,
depending on the value of PARTOPT.
NUMDOM Default = dmp; if NUMDOM has any other value, it will be reset to dmp (equal to
(MODES) the number of processors used for the run). The model will be divided into
NUMDOM domains in either the frequency, geometric (grid-based) or DOF
domains, depending on the value of PARTOPT.
NUMDOM Default = dmp; if NUMDOM has any other value, it will automatically be set to dmp
(FREQ) (equal to the number of processors used for the run). The frequency range will be
divided into NUMDOM regions which are then solved independently.
UPFACT By default, the frequency range used for upstream component modes is two times
(ACMS) larger than the desired range on the EIGR/L entry. To modify this factor, specify the
UPFACT parameter (Real; Default=2.0).
PRINT Controls intermediate print of upstream and data recovery processing in .f06 and
(ACMS) .f04 files. Default=‘NO’. If PRINT=NO and an error occurs upstream, the
intermediate output is placed in a separate output file named “jid.acms_out” for
examination.
Main Index
114 DOMAINSOLVER
NCLUST Specifies the number of frequency segments for hierarchic parallel Lanczos. The
(MODES) frequency range is divided into NLCUST segments and, if PARTOPT=DOF, the
stiffness and mass matrices are partitioned into dmp/NCLUST matrix domains. If
PARTOPT = GRID, or if PARTOPT is not specified, the model geometry is
partitioned into dmp/NCLUST domains.
CLUSTSZ Specifies the number of matrix or geometric domains for hierarchic parallel Lanczos.
(MODES) If PARTOPT=DOF, the stiffness and mass matrices are partitioned into CLUSTSZ
matrix domains. If PARTOPT = GRID, or if PARTOPT is not specified, the model
geometry is partitioned into CLUSTSZ domains. In either case, the frequency range
is divided into dmp/CLUSTSZ frequency segments.
COMPMETH Specifies the compression method used before domain decomposition.

COMPMETH is considered only for keywords STAT, MODES and ACMS with
PARTOPT = DOF, for all other settings of the keyword and parameter PARTOPT,
COMPMETH will be ignored. The following are valid options for COMPMETH:
SUPER Specifies the SUPER compression method. (Default)
GRID Specifies the GRID compression method.
NONE Specifies that no compression should be done.
RUNOPT Specifies the DMP run option. The following are valid options for RUNOPT:
MSTSLV Specifies "master-slave" DMP execution mode. Only the Master
DMP process executes the full Nastran solution. This is optimal for
single-host DMP execution.
MULTIMST Specifies "multiple-master" DMP execution mode. All DMP
processes execute the full Nastran solution. This is optimal for
multiple-host DMP execution.
Nastran detects single- and multiple-host DMP execution and sets the default run
option accordingly.
PARTMETH Partitioning option (characher string). PARTMETH selects which method is used for
domain decomposition.
BEND Specifies the Extreme/BEND partitioning method
MSCMLV Specifies the MSCMLV partitioning method
METISG Specifies the METIS partitioning method based on number of tip
domains requested (see NUMDOM above/below)
Main Index
DOMAINSOLVER 115
METISO Specifies the METIS partitioning method based on the desired tip size
(see TIPSIZE below). Available for ACMS only.
Note: NUMDOM (see above/below) will be ignored for

PARTMETH=METISO.
Note: ACMS (VERSION=NEW) requires PARTMETH=METISO.

If this is not set by the user, ACMS will use it automatically. If the user
sets a different value for PARTMETH when ACMS
(VERSION=NEW) is also specified, then the MSC Nastran will
automatically re-set PARTMETH to METISO and run with new
ACMS.
TIPSIZE Specifies a desired number of nodes in the tip domains (integer). ACMS only. This is
used only when PARTMETH=METISO; otherwise, it is ignored.
Default: 1000 (ACMS Version=OLD);
200 (ACMS Version=NEW)
VERSION Selects new ACMS (MSC Nastran Version 2017 +) or old ACMS (prior to MSC
Nastran Version 2017). The default value of VERSION is ‘NEW’.
SCHED For ACMS parallel scheduling with VERSION=NEW. Default is DYNAMIC, which
is generally more efficient. Select STATIC for static parallel scheduling. See Remark 7.
GRPSIZ Specifies parallel group size for ACMS Dynamic scheduling. Integer:
0 Default
N Set parallel group size to “N” SMP threads.
-1 Use single parallel group; number of threads in the group is NSMP.
Table 4-1 Analysis Types and Partitioning Methods

Partitioning Methods Available
Solution
Sequence DMP Method GRID DOF FREQ DOF+FREQ ELEM
101 STAT * *
MODES * * *
103
ACMS(OLD) * *
ACMS(NEW) *
108 FREQ *
MODES *
110
ACMS *
Main Index
116 DOMAINSOLVER
Table 4-1 Analysis Types and Partitioning Methods (continued)

Partitioning Methods Available
Solution
Sequence DMP Method GRID DOF FREQ DOF+FREQ ELEM
MODES * *
ACMS(OLD) * * * *
111
ACMS(NEW) *
FREQ *
MODES *
112
ACMS *
MODES * * *
ACMS * * *
200
FREQ *
DSA
400 STAT *
NLSOLV *
ACMS *
The DOMAINSOLVER command is optional. If “dmp=” is specified on the command without a

DOMAINSOLVER command in the Executive Control Section, the actions shown in Table 4-2 will result
based on solution sequence.
Table 4-2 DOMAINSOLVER Defaults with “dmp=” on command line

Default DOMAINSOLVER Options
Solution Sequence DMP Method Partitioning Option
101 STAT DOF
103 MODES DOF
108 FREQ FREQ
110 MODES FREQ
MODES FREQ
111
FREQ FREQ
112 MODES FREQ
MODES DOF
200
FREQ FREQ
400 STAT DOF
NLSOLV ELEM
Main Index
DOMAINSOLVER 117
Note that DOMAINSOLVER ACMS is not the default for the relevant solution sequences, but it is the
recommended option for larger models for SOL 103, 111, 112, and 200 to obtain the best performance.
Remarks:
1. Grid Point Weight Generator output selected by PARAM,GRDPNT or the WEIGHTCHECK Case
Control command is not available when PARTOPT=GRID.
2. In SOL 200, design sensitivity calculations may be performed in a distributed parallel environment
in SOL 200 with the DSA keyword. It is a coarse parallel implementation that divides the sensitivity
task across a number of processors so that each processes a subset of the total number of design
variables. Following the sensitivity analysis and before optimization, the separate sensitivity data are
appended into a global sensitivity set. Also,
a. The dmp=n keyword must be specified on the Nastran submittal command where n is the
number of available processors.
b. The ACMS keyword may also be specified or modified along with DSA. For example,
DOMAINSOLVER DSA, ACMS
3. In SOL 400, the STAT method is used for DMP parallelism of matrix factorization and the NLSOLV
method is used for DMP parallelism of the NLEMG process. The NLSOLV method is intended for
nonlinear analysis using advanced nonlinear methods. To only use the STAT method or to change
its option to use, for example, a different compression method, specify the following
DOMAINSOLVER command:
DOMAINSOLVER STAT(COMPMETH=GRID)
Note that if STAT is changed as specified above, then the DMP parallelism for NLEMG will be
turned off. If you want to change the STAT as described above and also keep NLSOLV for NLEMG
parallelism, then use the following DOMAINSOLVER command:
DOMAINSOLVER NLSOLV,STAT(COMPMETH=GRID)
Note that this can equivalently be written as follows:
DOMAINSOLVER NLSOLV
DOMAINSOLVER STAT(COMPMETH=GRID)
Lastly, to only use the NLSOLV method for NLEMG parallelism, specify the following option:
DOMAINSOLVER NLSOLV
4. In SOL 400, the DOMAINSOLVER NLSOLV (RUNOPT=MULTIMST) is not supported in
combination with Intel MKL Pardiso Solver option, i.e., SPARSESOLVER
NLSOLV(FACTMETH=PRDLDL).
5. In SOL 111, the MODES or ACMS option is used for DMP parallelism of the modal calculations
and the FREQ option is used for the DMP parallelism of the frequency response calculations. The
DOMAINSOLVER FREQ is always turned on for SOL 111. To use the ACMS option for the modal
calculation, use the following DOMAINSOLVER command:
DOMAINSOLVER ACMS
Main Index
118 DOMAINSOLVER
Furthermore, if the MODES option needs to be changed for SOL 111, then the correct approach is
to include the following DOMAINSOLVER option:
DOMAINSOLVER MODES(PARTOPT=GRID).
6. Residual vectors are not available when PARTOPT=GRID.
7. Dynamic parallel scheduling is available for ACMS and VERSION=NEW. Dynamic scheduling
provides better parallel speedup for larger numbers of threads. For NSMP less than or equal to 2,
static scheduling is used regardless of the setting of SCHED.
Main Index
ECHO 119
Controls Printed Echo
ECHO Controls Printed Echo
Controls the echo (printout) of the Executive Control Section.
Formats:
ECHOOFF
ECHOON
Remarks:
1. The ECHO statement is optional.
2. ECHOOFF suppresses the echo of subsequent Executive Control statements. ECHOON reactivates
the echo after an ECHOOFF statement.
Main Index
120 ENDALTER
End of DMAP Alter
ENDALTER End of DMAP Alter
Designates the end of an alter.
Format:
ENDALTER
Remark:
1. The ENDALTER statement is required when using an alter unless the alter package ends with a
CEND, COMPILE, or LINK statement.
Main Index
GEOMCHECK 121
Specifies Geometry Check Options
GEOMCHECK Specifies Geometry Check Options
Specifies tolerance values and options for optional finite element geometry tests.
Format:
FATAL
GEOMCHECK test_keyword [ = tol_value ], [ MSGLIMIT = n ], MSGTYPE = INFORM ,
WARN
[ SUMMARY ], [ ADVNLELM ], [ NONE ]
Examples:
1. Set the tolerance for the CQUAD4 element skew angle test to 15.0 degrees and limit messages to 50:
GEOMCHECK Q4_SKEW=15.0,MSGLIMIT=50
2. Limit messages to 500 for each element type:
GEOMCHECK MSGLIMIT=500
3. Set the message type to fatal for CQUAD4 element taper tests:
GEOMCHECK Q4_TAPER,MSGTYPE=FATAL
4. Request summary table output only using default tolerance values:
GEOMCHECK SUMMARY
5. Request advanced and conventional element geometry check output using default tolerance values:
GEOMCHECK ADVNLELM
Describer Meaning
test_keyword A keyword associated with the particular element geometry test. See Remark 2. for a list
of acceptable selections.
tol_value Tolerance value to be used for the specified test. See Remark 2. for default values of the
test tolerances.
n The minimum number of messages that will be produced. The default is 100 messages
for each element type. See Remark 3.
FATAL Geometry tests that exceed tolerance values produce fatal messages. See Remark 4.
INFORM Geometry tests that exceed tolerance values produce informative messages. See Remark 4.
WARN Geometry tests that exceed tolerance values produce warning messages. See Remark 4.
SUMMARY A summary table of the geometry tests performed is produced. No individual element
information messages are output.
ADVNLELM Geometry check performed on Advanced and conventional elements. If no
ADVNLELM, geometry check only performed on conventional element.
NONE None of the optional element geometry tests will be performed.
Main Index
122 GEOMCHECK
Remarks:
1. The GEOMCHECK statement controls the number and severity of certain informational and
warning messages produced by element matrix generation geometry checking operations. Controls
are currently available for the CQUAD4, CQUADR, CTRIA3, CTRIAR, CHEXA, CPENTA,
CTETRA, CPYRAM, CBAR, and CBEAM elements only. Multiple GEOMCHECK statement may
be present. Continuations are acceptable.
2. The following table summarizes the acceptable specifications for test_keyword.
Name Value Type Default Comment

Q4_SKEW Real > 0.0 30.0 Skew angle in degrees.
Q4_TAPER Real > 0.0 0.50 Taper ratio.
Q4_WARP Real > 0.0 0.05 Surface warping factor.
Q4_IAMIN Real > 0.0 30.0 Minimum interior angle in degrees.
Q4_IAMAX Real > 0.0 150.0 Maximum interior angle in degrees.
T3_SKEW Real > 0.0 10.0 Skew angle in degrees.
T3_IAMAX Real > 0.0 160.0 Maximum interior angle in degrees.
TET_AR Real > 0.0 100.0 Longest edge to shortest edge aspect ratio.
TET_EPLR Real > 0.0 0.50 Edge point length ratio.
TET_EPIA Real > 0.0 150.0 Edge point included angle in degrees.
TET_DETJ Real 0.0 | J | minimum value.
TET_DETG Real 0.0 | J | minimum value at vertex point.
HEX_AR Real > 0.0 100.0 Longest edge to shortest edge aspect ratio.
HEX_EPLR Real > 0.0 0.50 Edge point length ratio.
HEX_EPIA Real > 0.0 150.0 Edge Point Included Angle in degrees.
HEX_DETJ Real 0.0 | J | minimum value.
HEX_WARP Real > 0.0 0.707 Face warp coefficient.
PEN_AR Real > 0.0 100.0 Longest edge to shortest edge aspect ratio.
PEN_EPLR Real > 0.0 0.50 Edge point length ratio.
PEN_EPIA Real > 0.0 150.0 Edge point included angle in degrees.
PEN_DETJ Real 0.0 | J | minimum value.
PEN_WARP Real > 0.0 0.707 Quadrilateral face warp coefficient.
PYR_AR Real > 0.0 100.0 Longest edge to shortest edge aspect ratio.
PYR_EPLR Real > 0.0 0.50 Edge point length ratio.
PYR_EPIA Real > 0.0 150.0 Edge point included angle in degrees.
Main Index
GEOMCHECK 123
Name Value Type Default Comment

PYR_DETJ Real 0.0 | J | minimum value.
PYR_WARP Real > 0.0 0.707 Quadrilateral face warp coefficient.
BEAM_OFF Real > 0.0 0.15 CBEAM element offset length ratio.
BAR_OFF Real > 0.0 0.15 CBAR element offset length ratio.
where:
• Test_keyword names starting with the characters Q4 are applicable to CQUAD4 and CQUADR
elements. Test_keyword names starting with the characters T3 are applicable to CTRIA3 and
CTRIAR elements. Test_keyword names starting with the characters TET_ are applicable to
CTETRA elements. Test_keyword names starting with the characters HEX_ are applicable to
CHEXA elements. Test_keyword names starting with the characters PEN_ are applicable to
CPENTA elements. Test_keyword names starting with the characters PYR_ are applicable to
CPYRAM elements.
• Skew angle for the quadrilateral element is defined to be the angle between the lines that join
midpoints of the opposite sides of the quadrilateral. Skew angle for the triangular element is
defined to be the smallest angle at any of the three vertices.
• Interior angles are defined to be the angles formed by the edges that meet at the corner node of
an element. There are four for quadrilateral shapes and three for triangular shapes.
• Taper ratio for the quadrilateral element is defined to be the absolute value of [the ratio of the area
of the triangle formed at each corner grid point to one half the area of the quadrilateral minus 1.0.
The largest of the four ratios is compared against the tolerance value. Note that as the ratio
approaches 0.0, the shape approaches a rectangle.
• Surface warping factor for a quadrilateral is defined to be the distance of the corner points of the
element to the mean plane of the grid points divided by the average of the element diagonal
lengths. For flat elements (such that all of the grid points lie in a plane), this factor is zero.
• The edge point length ratio and edge point included angle tests are only performed for the solid
elements when edge node points exist. The length ratio test evaluates the relative position of the
edge node point along a straight line connecting the two vertex nodes of that edge. Ideally, the
edge point should be located on this line at a point midway between the two end points. The
default tolerance allows the edge node to be positioned anywhere between the two quarter points
on this line. In addition, the angle between the lines joining the edge node and the end points is
determined. If the angle is less than the tolerance (default is 150° ), then the interior angle test is
considered violated and a diagnostic message will be generated if appropriate.
• The face warp coefficient test tolerance is the cosine of the angle formed between the normal
vectors located at diagonally opposite corner points on each face surface. This value is 1.0 for a
face where all four corners lie in a plane. The default tolerance allows angles of up to 45° before
a message is generated.
Main Index
124 GEOMCHECK
3. A single line of output summarizing the results of all tests for an element will be output if any of the
geometry tests exceeds the test tolerance. Only the first n of these messages will be produced. A
summary of the test results indicating the number of tolerances exceeded, as well as the element
producing the worst violation, is also output. If the SUMMARY keyword has been specified, only the
summary table is produced and none of the single line element messages will be output.
4. When SUMMARY is not specified, each geometry test that exceeds the tolerance will be identified in
the single line output summary by an indicator based on the specification for MSGTYPE. For the
FATAL option, the indicator is “FAIL”; for the INFORM option, it is “xxxx”; for the WARN option,
it is “WARN”. If the FATAL option is specified and any test fails, the run is terminated.
Main Index
ID 125
Comment
ID Comment
Specifies a comment.
Format:
ID [=] i1, i2
Describer Meaning
i1, i2 Character strings (1 to 8 characters in length and the first character must be
alphabetic).
Remark:
1. The ID statement is optional and not used by the program.
Main Index
126 INCLUDE
Inserts External File
INCLUDE Inserts External File
data file.
Format:
INCLUDE ’filename’
Example:
The following INCLUDE statement is used to obtain the bulk data from another file called
MYEXEC.DATA:
SOL 101
INCLUDE ’MYEXEC.DATA’
CEND
LOAD = 100
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA
Describer Meaning
filename Physical filename of the external file to be inserted. The user must supply the name
according to installation or machine requirements. It is recommended that the
filename be enclosed by single right-hand quotation marks (’).
Remarks:
names may be split across multiple lines. For example, the file
INCLUDE ‘/dir123
/dir456
Main Index
LINK 127
Links a Main SubDMAP
LINK Links a Main SubDMAP
Links a main subDMAP to form a solution sequence.
Format:
 n 
LINK   [ SOLOUT = solout-DBset EXECOUT - exeout-DBset,
 subDMAP-name 
INCLUDE - incl-DBset MAP SOLNAME = newname ]

NOMAP
Examples:
1. LINK STATICS
Links the STATICS main subDMAP. The program links any subDMAPs compiled in this run, with
any other subDMAP objects called in STATICS and stored on the MSCOBJ DBset.
2. LINK MYDMAP,SOLNAM=STATICS,SOLOUT=USROBJ, NOMAP,INCLUDE=USROBJ
Links MYDMAP and renames the solution sequence executable to STATICS. The executable will
be saved on the USROBJ DBset. The order of search for subDMAP objects is:
• Compiled subDMAP in this run.
• USROBJ DBset.
Describer Meaning
n The solution number of the main subDMAP. See the SOL statement
description for the list of valid numbers (Integer > 0).
subDMAP-name The name of a main subDMAP. See the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide
(Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters in length and the first character
must be alphabetic).
solout-DBset The name of a DBset where the solution sequence executable and the link
table of the solution sequence may be stored. See Remark 6. (Character; 1
to 8 alphanumeric characters in length and the first character must be
alphabetic).
exeout-DBset The name of an alternate DBset different than solout-DBset where only the
solution sequence executable may be stored. See Remark 6. (Character; 1 to
8 alphanumeric characters in length and the first character must be
alphabetic).
incl-DBset The name of a DBset where other subDMAP objects are obtained. See
Remark 2. (Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters in length and the first
character must be alphabetic).
Main Index
128 LINK
Links a Main SubDMAP
Describer Meaning
newname A new name which is referenced by the SOL statement. (Character; 1 to 8
alphanumeric characters in length and the first character must be
alphabetic; default is subDMAP-name.)
MAP Prints the link map. A link map will give the name of all the subDMAPs that
make up the solution sequence.
NOMAP Suppresses printing of the link map.
Remarks:
1. All DBsets specified on this statement must have the same BUFFSIZE. See the INIT, 84 FMS
statement.
2. SubDMAP objects are created with the COMPILE statement either in the current run or obtained
from previous runs. The LINK statement collects objects in the following order:
• Objects created with the COMPILE statement in the current run.
• Objects residing on the DBset-name specified by the INCLUDE keyword. The default is
MSCOBJ.
3. Upon successful linking of a subDMAP, the subDMAP may be executed with the SOL statement.
4. The LINK statement must appear after all the COMPILE packages, if any. A compile package begins
with the COMPILE statement and is delimited by the ENDALTER, CEND, LINK, or another
COMPILE statement.
5. The link table is necessary for COMPILER (or DIAG 4, 14, 17) Executive Control statement
requests and the automatic link process.
6. EXEOUT is useful in building delivery databases where executables are not to be saved. EXEOUT
will be defaulted to the same DBset as specified by SOLOUT.
Main Index
MALTER 129
Inserts and/or Deletes DMAP Statements in Solution Sequences
MALTER Inserts and/or Deletes DMAP Statements in Solution Sequences
Inserts or deletes DMAP statements by allowing a global “string” search across all subDMAPs within the
current solution sequence.
Format:
MALTER ‘string1’[(occurrence,offset)] , [‘string2’[(occurrence,offset)] ]
or
MALTER ’string1’[(occurrence,offset)] , [k2]
Examples:
1. The following MALTER will insert a MATPRN DMAP statement to print the KJJ matrix for each
superelement.
SOL 101
MALTER ’MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT STIFFNESS .* GENERATION’
MESSAGE //’SEID=’/SEID $
MATPRN KJJZ/ $
2. The following MALTER will add a user DMAP after the PREFACE modules in SOL 100
(USERDMAP).
SOL 101
MALTER ’AFTER CALL PREFACE’
.
.
.
Describer Meaning
’string1’ If ‘string2’ or k2 is not specified, the subsequent DMAP statements will be
inserted after the first occurrence of ‘string1’.
’string1’,’string2’ DMAP statements beginning with the first occurrence of ‘string1’ through
DMAP statements containing the first occurrence of ’string2’ will be deleted and
may be replaced with subsequence DMAP statements.
k2 If k2 is specified, it is applied to the subDMAP in which ‘string1’ was found
(Integer > 0).
occurrence This flag indicates which occurrence of the preceding string is to be used, starting
at the beginning of the subDMAP (Integer > 0; Default=1).
offset This flag indicates the offset from the referenced DMAP statement. Depending
on the sign, the specific DMAP statement may be above (-offset) or below
(+offset) the referenced DMAP statement (Integer; Default = 0).
Main Index
130 MALTER
Remarks:
1. If an MALTER statement is used in conjunction with the ALTER statement, then the MALTER
should be placed above the COMPILE statements. Failure to place the MALTER in this position may
cause ALTER statements to be ignored.
2. The MALTER statement can reference the DMAP statements in any order within a subDMAP. Two
restrictions on ordering are:
• K2 or ’string2’(occurence,offset) references must refer to a DMAP line number that is greater than
or equal to the k1 or ’string1’(occurrence,offset) reference within a single MALTER statement.
• ’string1’ and k2 or ’string2’ cannot overlap DMAP line positions with another MALTER that
references the same subDMAP.
3. The ’string1’ or ’string2’ used as a search pattern will apply to one complete DMAP statement; i.e., a
multiline DMAP statement will be searched for a pattern match as if each 72 character line of the
DMAP statement were concatenated together into one string; all blanks and comments (either
embedded or immediately preceding the DMAP statement) will be retained.
4. The special characters used for string searching are described in Remark 9. The characters <, >, and
$, which are common DMAP characters, are also special metacharacters. If they are to be used in the
search string as regular characters, then they must be preceded by a backward slash (\). For example,
to find the string
IF (DDRMM >=-1)
the command is
ALTER ’IF (DDRMM \>=-1)’ $
5. ’string2’ (r2,02) can be defaulted to ’string1’ (r1,01) by using a null string (’’). For example, the alter
statement
MALTER ’string1’(r1,01),’’
is equivalent to
MALTER ’string1’(r1,01),’string1’(r1,01)
The defaults for (r2,02) using the null string can be overridden by specifying (r2,02).
As another example, the alter statement
MALTER ’string1’(r1,01),’’(r2,02)
is equivalent to
MALTER ’string1’(r1,01),’string1’(r2,02)
6. The existing COMPILE statement options, such as LIST, XREF, SOUIN, etc., cannot be directly
specified on the new MALTER statement. They are obtained as follows:
• If a COMPILE statement exists for the subDMAP referenced by the MALTER, then options
from this COMPILE statement will be used.
Otherwise, they will be taken from the COMPILER statement, with the exception that the LIST,
and SORT option is always on.
Main Index
MALTER 131
7. The MALTER string search order is as follows:

• All COMPILE statement references that are part of the existing solution sequence (i.e., SOL=)
are searched first.
• Then, all remaining subDMAPs in the solution sequence are searched in ascending alphabetical
order.
• Within a subDMAP, both ’string1’ and ’string2’ will be used to search for a pattern match starting
at the beginning of the subDMAP (not at the current position of the last string match).
8. The MALTER statement must not exceed 72 characters (no continuations are allowed).
9. Metacharacters:
. Matches any single character except newline.

* Matches any number (including zero) of the single character (including a
character specified by a regular expression) that immediately precedes it. For
example, since “.” (dot) means any character, “.*” means “match any number of
characters.”
[...] Matches any one of the characters enclosed between the brackets. For example,
or< > “[AB]” matches either “A” or “B”. A range of consecutive characters can be
specified by separating the first and last characters in the range with a hyphen.
For example “[A-Z]” will match any uppercase letter from A to Z and “[0-9]”
will match any digit from 0 to 9. Some metacharacters lose special meaning
inside brackets. A circumflex (^) as the first character in the bracket tries to
match any one character not in the list.
^ or ! Requires that the following regular expression be found at the beginning of the
or . line.
$ Requires that the preceding regular expression be found at the end of the line.
\ Treats the following special character as an ordinary character. For example “\.”
stands for a period and “\*” for an asterisk. Also, to search for a tic (’), the search
string must be “\’”.
’ Marks the beginning and end of a pattern to be matched.
Note: Nonportable characters such as [ ] and ^ should be replaced (e.g., ^ → ! and
[ ] → < > ) if portability is required. However, all the preceding characters are
recognized by MSC Nastran.
10. Labels for use with the MALTER have been included in the solution sequences. See Table 1. These
labels will be maintained in future versions and it is strongly suggested that alters which use the
MALTER command take advantage of the unique MALTER labels. Use of the MALTER labels will
significantly reduce the time required to convert alters between versions.
Main Index
132 MALTER
Table 1 DMAP Labels and Corresponding SubDMAP Positions

DMAP MALTER Labels
$MALTER:AFTER PREFACE MODULES
$MALTER:TOP OF PHASE 1 SUPERELEMENT LOOP, AFTER PARAMETERS AND
QUALIFIERS SET
$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT STIFFNESS, VISCOUS DAMPING, MASS,
AND ELEMENT STRUCTURAL DAMPING GENERATION (KJJZ, BJJZ, MJJZ,
K4JJ)
$MALTER:AFTER X2JJ MATRICES READ (K2JJ, M2JJ, B2JJ)
$MALTER:AFTER TOTAL SUPERELEMENT STIFFNESS, VISCOUS DAMPING,
AND MASS FORMULATED, STRUCTURAL + DIRECT INPUT
$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT LOAD GENERATION (PJ)
$MALTER:AFTER UPSTREAM SUPERELEMENT MATRIX AND LOAD ASSEMBLY
(KGG, BGG, MGG, K4GG, PG)
$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT MATRIX AND LOAD REDUCTION TO A-SET,
STATIC AND DYNAMIC (KAA, KLAA, MAA, MLAA, BAA, K4AA, PA)
$MALTER:BOTTOM OF PHASE 1 SUPERELEMENT LOOP
$MALTER:AFTER X2PP MATRICES READ (K2PP, M2PP, B2PP)
$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT DISPLACEMENT RECOVERY (UG)
$MALTER:AFTER ELEMENT STRESS, STRAIN, ETC. DATA RECOVERY, SORT1
(OUGV1, OES1, OEF1, ETC.)
$MALTER:AFTER ELEMENT STRESS, STRAIN, ETC. DATA RECOVERY, SORT2
(OUGV2, OES2, OEF2, ETC.)
$MALTER:BOTTOM OF SUPERELEMENT DATA RECOVERY LOOP
$MALTER:USERDMAP - AFTER CALL PREFACE
Main Index
MODEL_CHECK 133
Specifies Model Check Options
MODEL_CHECK Specifies Model Check Options
Specifies model checkout run and specifies options to be used.
Format:
   OFF 
OFF  
MODEL_CHECK MAT_DENSITY =  
 MAT_TECO =  α  ,
ρ
   
 DEFAULT   DEFAULT 
 OFF   OFF 
   
MAT_TEIJ =  α ij  MAT_DAMPING =  ge  ,
   
 DEFAULT   DEFAULT 
[ CHECKOUT ] [ PRINT = item_list ]
Examples:
1. Execute a basic model checkout run. No special output is required.
MODEL_CHECK CHECKOUT
2. Execute a model checkout run. Print coordinate system and basic grid point data.
MODEL_CHECK CHECKOUT PRINT=(CSTM,BGPDT)
3. Execute a full solution. Modify the material density temporarily to a value of 0.0.
MODEL_CHECK MAT_DENSITY=OFF
or
MODEL_CHECK MAT_DENSITY=0.0
4. Execute a full solution. Temporarily modify the values for material density and thermal expansion
coefficient.
MODEL_CHECK MAT_DENSITY=0.001 MAT_TECO=1.0 MAT_TEIJ=0.0
Describer Meaning
MAT_DENSITY Selects material density processing option.
ρ Value to be used for the density.
MAT_TECO Selects material thermal expansion direct coefficient processing option.
α Value to be used for the thermal expansion direct coefficients.
MAT_TEIJ Selects material thermal expansion shear coefficient processing option.
α ij Value to be used for the thermal expansion shear coefficients.
MAT_DAMPING Selects material structural element damping processing option.
Main Index
134 MODEL_CHECK
Describer Meaning
ge Value to be used for the structural element damping coefficient.
OFF Sets material property value to zero.
DEFAULT Material property value is set to system default value. See Remark 3.
CHECKOUT Selects model checkout solution option. See Remark 5.
PRINT Selects items to be printed during model checkout solution.
item_list List of model data items to be printed during model checkout run. If more than
one item is specified, enclose the list in parenthesis. See Remark 6.
Remarks:
1. The MODEL_CHECK statement is ignored in RESTART runs.
2. The values specified for material properties using the MODEL_CHECK statement will be used to
temporarily update data for all MAT1, MAT2, MAT3, MAT8, and MAT9 Bulk Data entries only
for the duration of the run. These values do not replace data specified on the MATi Bulk Data
entries. Caution should be used when postprocessing results via the PARAM POST options since
operations using inconsistent data could be performed. Furthermore, when layered composite
element properties and materials (PSHELL and MAT2 MID1/MID2/MID3/MID4) are generated,
these equivalent MAT2 property entries are not considered to be original input data and the effects
of the MODEL_CHECK directives are permanently reflected in these MAT2 properties. Restarts
should not be attempted in this case.
3. System default values of 0.0 have been defined for each of the properties. The defaults can be changed
using the following Nastran statement keywords: DEF_DENS for MAT_DENSITY, DEF_TECO
for MAT_TECO, DEF_TEIJ for MAT_TEIJ, and DEF_DAMP for MAT_DAMPING.
4. The MAT_TECO describer causes the direct components of the thermal expansion coefficient to be
modified. The MAT_TEIJ describer causes the shear components of the thermal expansion
coefficient to be modified.
5. The CHECKOUT option has the same effect as a PARAM,CHECKOUT,YES Bulk Data entry.
6. The following table summarizes the acceptable specifications for the PRINT item_list.
Value Output Generated Parameter

CSTM Coordinate systems PRTCSTM
BGPDT Basic grid point data PRTBGPDT
GPTT Grid point temperature data PRTGPTT
MGG G-set mass matrix PRTMGG
PG G-set load vectors PRTPG
Main Index
MODEL_CHECK 135
See the DMAP parameter descriptions in Section 5 for a discussion of the parameter name in the last
column of the table and the output generated. The specification of a print item has the effect of
adding a PARAM,parameter,YES entry to the Case Control Section of the file.
Main Index
136 SOL
Executes a Solution Sequence
SOL Executes a Solution Sequence
Specifies the solution sequence or main subDMAP to be executed.
Format:
 n 
SOL   [ SOLIN = obj-DBset NOEXE ]
 subDMAP-name 
Examples:
1. In the following example, SOL 103 is executed from MSCOBJ.
SOL 103
2. In the following example, the PHASE0 subDMAP is altered, SOL 103 is relinked onto the OBJSCR
DBset (which is the default for SOLOUT), and SOL 103 is executed.
SOL 103
COMPILE PHASE1
ALTER ’DTIIN’
TABPT SETREE,,,,// $
.
.
.
ENDALTER $
3. In the following example, the solution sequence called DYNAMICS is executed from the USROBJ
DBset.
SOL DYNAMICS SOLIN = USROBJ
Describer Meaning
n Solution number. See Remark 6. for the list of valid numbers (Integer > 0).
subDMAP-name The name of a main subDMAP. See the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide
(Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters in length and the first character must
be alphabetic).
obj-DBset The character name of a DBset where the OSCAR is stored. See Remarks 1. and
2. (Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters in length and the first character
must be alphabetic).
NOEXE Suppresses execution after compilation and/or linkage of the solution is
complete. Also, the Bulk Data Section and Case Control Section are not read or
processed.
Main Index
SOL 137
Remarks:
1. If SOLIN keyword is not given and if there are no LINK statements within the input data, the
program will perform an automatic link. The program will first collect the objects created in the
current run by the COMPILE statement and the remaining objects stored in the MSCOBJ DBset.
The program will then perform an automatic link of the collected objects.
2. If the SOLIN keyword is not given but a LINK statement is provided, the SOLIN default will be
obtained from the SOLOUT keyword on the LINK statement.
3. The operation sequence control array (OSCAR) defines the problem solution sequence. The OSCAR
consists of a sequence of entries with each entry containing all of the information needed to execute
one step of the problem solution. The OSCAR is generated from information supplied by the user’s
entries in the Executive Control Section.
4. The SOLIN keyword will skip the automatic link and execute the OSCAR on the specified DBset.
5. The DOMAINSOLVER may be used in conjunction with solution sequences 101, 103, 108, and
111 to select domain decomposition solution methods.
6. The following Solution Sequences are currently available in MSC Nastran:
Table 2 Solution Sequences

SOL Number SOL Name Description
101 SESTATIC Statics with options:
Linear steady state heat transfer.
Alternate reduction.
Inertia relief.
103 SEMODES Normal modes.
105 SEBUCKL Buckling with options:
Static analysis.
Inertia relief.
106 NLSTATIC Nonlinear or linear statics.
107 SEDCEIG Direct complex eigenvalues.
108 SEDFREQ Direct frequency response.
109 SEDTRAN Direct transient response.
110 SEMCEIG Modal complex eigenvalues.
111 SEMFREQ Modal frequency response.
112 SEMTRAN Modal transient response.
114 CYCSTATX Cyclic statics with option:
115 CYCMODE Cyclic normal modes.
116 CYCBUCKL Cyclic buckling.
Main Index
138 SOL
Table 2 Solution Sequences

SOL Number SOL Name Description
118 CYCFREQ Cyclic direct frequency response.
128 SENLHARM Nonlinear Harmonic Response
129 NLTRAN Nonlinear or linear transient response.
144 AESTAT Static aeroelastic response.
145 SEFLUTTR Aerodynamic flutter.
146 SEAERO Aeroelastic response.
153 NLSCSH Static structural and/or steady state heat Transfer
analysis with options:
Linear or nonlinear analysis.
159 NLTCSH Transient structural and/or transient heat Transfer
analysis with options:
Linear or nonlinear analysis.
200 DESOPT Design optimization.
400 NONLIN Nonlinear Static and Implicit Transient Analysis and
all linear sequences from statics, modes, frequency,
and transient inclusive with perturbation analysis
based on previous nonlinear analysis
600 SESTATIC ( See MSC Nastran API into MSC MARC nonlinear
SOL 600,ID, 139)
700 NLTRAN ( See SOL Nonlinear Explicit Transient Analysis
700,ID, 158)
Main Index
SOL 600,ID 139
Executes Marc from Inside Nastran
SOL 600,ID Executes Marc from Inside Nastran
Creates Marc input and optionally executes Marc from inside SOL 600.
Format:
SOL 600, ID PATH= COPYR= NOERROR MARCEXE=SOLVE NOEXIT
OUTR=op2,xdb,pch,f06,eig,dmap,beam, sdrc,pst,cdb=(0, 1, 2, or 3) STOP= CONTINUE=
S67OPT= MSGMESH= SCRATCH= TSOLVE= SMEAR PREMGLUE MRENUELE= MRENUGRD=
MRENUMBR= SYSabc= S6NEWS=
Examples:
SOL 600,106 STOP=1
SOL 600,106 OUTR=OP2,F06
SOL 600,106 PATH=/progs/marc2003/tools OUTR=op2,f06
SOL 600,129 PATH=1 STOP=1
SOL 600,129 PATH=1 OUTR=OP2,CDB=0
SOL 600,106 PATH=1 CONTINUE=1
SOL 600,106 PATH=1 MARCEXE=SOLVE OUTR=OP2
SOL 600,153 PATH=1 STOP=1 TSOLVE=M
SOL 600,106 OUTR=OP2,F06 SMEAR
SOL 600,106 OUTR=OP2 PERMGLUE
SOL 600,106 PATH=1 STOP=1 MRENUELE=2
SOL 600,106 PATH=1 STOP=1 MRENUGRDD=2
SOL 600,106 PATH=1 STOP=1 MRENUMBR=2
SOL 600,106 STOP=1 SYS001=8193 SYS9=6000
SOL 600,106 STOP=1 S6NEWS=YES
SOL 600,ID is an Executive Control statement similar to SOL. The difference between SOL and
SOL 600,ID is that the computations (element matrix formulations, matrix decomposition, etc.) will be
performed by Marc rather than by Nastran. Inputs and outputs as much as possible will be the same as (or
similar to) the familiar Nastran inputs and outputs, however standard Marc inputs and outputs are also
available. SOL 600 is primarily intended for nonlinear static and dynamic analysis of 3D structures that have
already been manufactured and assembled. Although it has capabilities for 2D structures and for certain
manufacturing processes, those capabilities should only be used for “simple” cases. For more complex 2D and
manufacturing analyses either a standalone version of Marc or SOL 400 is recommended.
The SOL 600,ID statement should normally be used only for nonlinear analysis, but it may also be used for
certain classes of linear static or dynamic analyses. The recommended form of this command is shown with
the options provided above. If entered with “SOL 600,ID” only, it acts just like SOL except a Marc input
data file “jid.marc.dat” will be generated (“jid” is the name of the Nastran input file without the extension.)
For example, if the Nastran input file is named abcd.dat, (or abcd.bdf ) then “jid”=abcd.
The required ID represents many valid solution sequence integer or names shown in Table 2 for the SOL
statement. Examples are 106, 129, NLSTATIC, NLTRAN. The following solutions are not available: 107,
108, 110, 111, 112, 114, 115, 116, 118, 144, 145, 146, 190, 200, and 400 (and their equivalent names).
Solutions specified in Table 2 of the SOL statement may be used. If the model has contact, ID must be 106,
129, 153, 159 or their equivalent names unless PERMGLUE is used.
Main Index
140 SOL 600,ID
Although SOL 600 supports 2D analyses (axisymmetric and plane strain), the support is not complete. It is
strongly recommended that 2D analyses use some other solution sequence.
Most items on the SOL 600,ID after ID itself may be specified in environmental variables. This may be done
any way environmental variables can be set. They may be set by the Nastran user at run time or by the system
administrator when Nastran is installed. Any values specified on the SOL statement override those in the
environment. Environmental variables are fully described in the MSC Nastran 2019.0 Installation and Operations
Guide. A keywords file is available to describe the format of each variable. The variable is normally set in the
system-wide rc file, a user’s rc file, a local rc file or in a script used to submit Nastran. Any string or value
listed on the SOL 600,ID statement is also valid as an environmental variable. If the environmental variables
are placed in the system-wide rc file, they may be used by a company for all Nastran users and even hide the
fact that Marc is being spawned if so desired.
The following environmental variables are available:
Environmental Variable Item on SOL Statement

NASM_PATH PATH
NASM_COPYR COPYR
NASM_OUTR OUTR
NASM_STOP STOP
NASM_NOERROR NOERROR
NASM_STRFILE Path and name of marcfilt.txt file (see below)
PATH
PATH is an optional item which determines the location of the version of Marc to be executed. If PATH is
omitted, the version of Marc included with Nastran will be used if it can be located. In this case, the run script
for Marc (run_marc or run_marc.bat) will be expected to be in a directory under /MSC_BASE. MSC_BASE
is an environmental variable set when Nastran first starts execution that defines the base installation directory
for Nastran. If for some reason MSC_BASE cannot be determined, the commands to spawn Marc will fail
and the user must re-run Nastran with one of the PATH options set or the NASM_PATH environmental
option set to the desired location of Marc’s tools directory.
PATH=1
If PATH=1 is specified, Nastran will determine the proper command to execute the companion program. To
aid Nastran in determining the program’s location, a file named marcrun.pth must be available in the same
directory where the Nastran input file resides. The marcrun.pth file must contain one line providing the
location (complete path) of the run_marc script. A typical example of the line in the file marcrun.pth would
be
/mycomputer/marc200x/tools
To this path is appended the string “/run_marc -jid name.marc -v no” and possibly other items to form the
complete string used to execute Marc. This complete string looks like the string shown in the following
Main Index
SOL 600,ID 141
PATH=3 example. Note that on Windows systems, substitute a back slash for the forward slashes shown. Do
not terminate the line with a forward slash or back slash.
PATH=2
If PATH=2 is specified, it is expected that the directory with the run_marc script is on the PATH. If PATH=2
is specified, Marc will be executed from inside Nastran using the command:
run_marc -jid jid.marc.dat -v no
PATH=3
When PATH=3 is specified, the complete command to execute Marc must be contained in a file named
marc.pth (lowercase). This file should typically contain one line of the form:
/mycomputer/marc200x/tools/run_marc -jid name.marc -v no
COPYR
COPYR is an optional item. If COPYR is specified, Marc output files will be copied to Nastran output files
and/or deleted according to the options shown in the following table:
Copy Marc Output Files to Nastran Output Delete Marc Input & Output
COPYR Option Files Files
0 (default) No No
1 or -1 (see below) Yes Yes
2 or -2 (see below) Yes No
3 No Yes
If COPYR is 1 or 2, Marc’s out and log files will be copied exactly as produced by Marc.
If COPYR is -1 or -2 the actions as shown above for +1 or +2 will occur, and Marc-type text will be converted
to Nastran-type text (or any other desired text) using an ASCII file named marcfilt.txt. This file must be
located in the same directory where the Nastran input resides or in the same directory where the Marc
executable resides. The marcfilt.txt file can contain as many lines as desired like the one shown below:
"Marc string 1" "Replacement String 1"
"Marc string 2" "Replacement String 2"
That is, each line contains two strings. Each string starts and ends with a double quote sign ("). The Marc
string must match the exact content and case as found in the Marc .out or .log files. The replacement string
may be any string desired and can be the same length, shorter or longer than the Marc string. The two strings
must be separated by at least one space, but more spaces are acceptable. Line lengths for marcfilt.txt, as well
as Marc’s .out and .log files are limited to 200 characters for the text replacement option.
Main Index
142 SOL 600,ID
The following Marc files are potentially affected by the COPYR option:
Marc Output File Nastran Output Copied to COPYR

name.marc.out name.f06 1, 2, -1, -2
name.marc.log name.log 1, 2, -1, -2
name.marc.t16 Not copied, will remain if produced
name.op2, fort.11 or ftn11 Not copied, will remain if produced
MARCEXE=SOLVE
MARCEXE=SOLVE is an optional item. If MARCEXE is entered, an existing input file named jid.marc.dat
is assumed to exist in the directory where the run was submitted. Nastran will execute Marc using the existing
jid.marc.dat file. A new Marc file will not be created. Other options available when MARCEXE is used are
PATH and OUTR. Options not available with MARCEXE are COPYR, STOP, NOEXIT, NOERROR and
CONTINUE. Beware that the original jid.marc.dat will be renamed to jid.marc.dat.1 automatically by
Nastran just like an existing jid.f06 is renamed to jid.f06.1
NOERROR
NOERROR is an optional item. If NOERROR is specified, errors due to features that are available in
Nastran but not available in Marc, and/or features not yet supported by the translator will be ignored (see
Restrictions and Limitations). If NOERROR is entered and STOP=2 (or 3) is not specified, Marc will be
executed even though the complete Nastran model may not have been completely translated. We recommend
that NOERROR only be used by experienced analysts and then only with extreme caution.
MSGMESH
MSGMESH is an optional item and should be omitted unless the Bulk Data contains some entries in the
MSGMESH format. If there are any MSGMESH entries present, set MSGMESH=Nhigh, where Nhigh is
an integer equal to the largest node, element, material or property in the model (after MSGMESH entries
have been expanded). Optionally this item can be set as an environmental variable S600_M001=Nhigh. If
MSGMESH entries are present and neither S600_M001 nor MSGMESH on the SOL 600 statement are set,
the job will terminate with an appropriate message.
NOEXIT
NOEXIT is an optional item. If entered, the DMAP generated “on the fly” to process the OUTR options
will not contain EXIT and Nastran will proceed. This means in most cases, the Nastran solution as well as
the Marc solution will occur. If .f06 is specified as one of the OUTR options, this could cause confusing
output as both the Marc and Nastran results will be in the .f06 file. Confusion could also result from both
outputs being in .op2, .xdb and/or .pch files. Therefore, this option should only be used with great care.
Listing of the DMAP generated on the fly for SOL 600 can be suppressed by placing ECHOOFF just after
the SOL 600 entry.
Main Index
SOL 600,ID 143
Restrictions:
 OUTR options may not be used with restart jobs.
 OUTR options are not available for SOL 600 2D analysis such as axisymmetric or plane strain.
 OUTR options are not available for SOL 600 heat transfer.
 Spaces in the list of OUTR items are not allowed.
OUTR
OUTR is an optional item. If OUTR is specified, Marc output results will be converted to various types of
Nastran formats. The OUT option on the Nastran command should not be used with any OUTR options.
The type of output to be produced depends on the OUTR options entered as well as any DMAP entered in
the executive control. If OUTR is omitted, no Marc output will be brought back into Nastran, but standard
Marc .out, .t16 and/or .t19 as well as an op2 file will be available depending on the options selected with
PARAM,MARCT16, PARAM,MARCT19 and other options. OUTR options may not be used with restart
jobs.
The following options are available:
Option 1 -- Specify a String of Desired Output Types (Preferred Method)

OUTR=OP2,F11,F06,PCH,XDB,T16,T19,PST
Use any or all of the above to request the following options except that both OP2 and XDB should not be
entered:
OP2 Create output2 file named jid.op2 consisting of input model and output results datablocks.
This option requires PARAM,POST,-1 or PARAM,POST,-2 in the Bulk Data.
F11 Create output file fort.11 or ftn11 (depending on the computer system) consisting of output
results datablocks only.
F06 Put Marc output results (displacements, stresses, strains) in Nastran’s jid.f06 file using OFP.
The resulting output will look just like any standard Nastran run.
PCH Create punch file named jid.pch with Marc’s output in standard Nastran punch format.
XDB Create .xdb database file named jid.xdb with input model and output results. This option
requires PARAM,POST,0 in the Bulk Data. XDB is not available with the eig option and if
entered will switch to the OP2 option.
eig The eig option must be specified if .op2, .xdb, .pch, or .f06 options are specified and Marc
performs natural frequency or buckling eigenvalue analysis. The reason it must be provided
on the SOL entry is to enable Nastran to create DMAP on the fly which include the LAMA
data block. If the eig option is omitted, eigenvectors will be present in the Nastran output
but no eigenvalues will be available. The beam and eig options are mutually exclusive (you
cannot specify both).
BEAM The BEAM option must be specified if .op2, .xdb, .pch, or .f06 options are specified and
you want to place internal loads in any of these files.The BEAM option is not available for
Windows systems.
Main Index
144 SOL 600,ID
SDRC An SDRC op2 file will be produced. PARAM,POST,-2 is also necessary in the Bulk Data
for this option. Note: The datablocks might be in a different order than for other solution
sequences.
T16 Marc’s results will be saved during the Marc execution on a binary (or unformatted) file
named jid.marc.t16 (this happens by default and does not need to be specified on the SOL
600 line).
T19 Marc’s results will be saved during the Marc execution on an ASCII file named jid.marc.t19.
The t19 file will normally be saved if param,maract19,1 is entered.
PST Nastran will be run to output a previous Marc run’s results contained on t16 file in the
desired forms (OP2,F11,F06,PCH and/or XDB). The appropriate OUTR T16 options
must be selected in addition to PST (specify one or more of OP2,F11,F06,PCH and/or
XDB.) Nastran will not be run past IFP and is used only to perform the desired output
results conversions. A previous Marc t16 file must be copied to the new jid.marc.t16.1 (you
may not process XDB and OP2 in the same run.)
DMAP The user will enter his own DMAP to create whatever type of output that is desired, such
as .op2, .xdb, .pch, or .f06. For all other options, DMAP as needed is generated internally
by Nastran.
cdb 3D Contact will be output in one of the datablocks described below:
0 Store output in OESNLBR and OESNLXR (OESNLXR will be empty like SOL 106)
1 Store output in OESNLBR
2 Store output in OESNLBD
3 Store output in OESNLXD
Note: 1. SOL 106 outputs both OESNLBR and OESNLXR but OESNLXR is empty.
2. SOL 129 only outputs the OESNLXD datablock and it is empty.
3. Case Control BOUTPUT is also required to obtain this type of output.
4. The default is 0 if contact is present in the model and OUTR=op2 (or .xdb, punch
and/or .f06).
5. This option is specified like the example shown:
OUTR=OP2,F06,CDB=0
6. The datablocks have the same names and type of information whether executing
SOL 600,106 or SOL 600,129.
Option 2 -- Specify an Integer to Select Certain Options (Not Recommended)

OUTR=1 or 2 and an op2 file named fort.11 or ftn11 will be produced and DMAP as shown below is
required to bring the Marc output results back into the Nastran database.
COMPILE NLSTATIC
ALTER ‘SUPER1’ $
INPUTT2 /OUGV1,OES1,OSTR1,TOL,/-1/11 $
OFP OUGV1,OES1,OSTR1//0/1 $
EXIT $
Main Index
SOL 600,ID 145
The 1 at the end of the OFP statement produces output in the .f06 file. If a punch file is also needed, change
the 1 to a 5. If an XDB file is also needed, add the following lines just after the OFP line:
DBC TOL,CASECC,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,//
'OL'/'CASECC'///////////////////
-1/DBCPATH/S,N,CP/''TRAN''//GEOMU/LOADU/POSTU/
DBCDIAG/DBCCONV/DBCOVWRT $
DBC OUGV1,OES1,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,//
'OUG'/'OES'///////////////////
DBC OSTR1,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,//
'OES'////////////////////
OUTR can be set to one of the following values to automatically produce the output in Nastran form without
entering any DMAP. In fact, no DMAP should be entered for the options greater than 2 shown:
Table 4-3 Integer Options Available Using SOL 600 OUTR Option --
Nastran Output Results Produced When Marc Exits
fort.11 or
OP2 with
OUTR ftn11 Output .f06 .pch Marc File
Input .xdb
(IO) Datablocks (Print) (Punch) Used
Datablocks
Only
1 N Y N N N .t19
2 N Y N N N .t16
16 Y Y N N Y .t16
166 Y Y Y N Y .t16
266 Y Y N Y Y .t16
366 Y Y Y Y Y .t16
19 Y Y N N Y .t19
199 Y Y Y N Y .t19
299 Y Y N Y Y .t19
399 Y Y Y Y Y .t19
If OUTR = –1, -2, –16, -166, -266, -366, -19, -199, -299 or –399 only the output conversion process takes
place. An Marc input file is not produced, Marc is not spawned from Nastran, but .op2, .xdb, .pch and/or
.f06 results can be produced. For such cases, the Case Control and Bulk Data files can be dummies (for
example, they can contain several nodes and one element) or a full file could be used. These options are
handy if Marc is run by modifying the Marc input file (jid.marc.dat) with an editor or for someone who
creates Marc input and runs Marc outside the Nastran environment, but wants output in one of the Nastran
formats (see Remark 6.)
Main Index
146 SOL 600,ID
STOP
STOP is an optional item. STOP is used to prevent execution of Marc or exit Nastran after IFP, if so desired.
DO NOT ENTER any of the STOP options if any of the OUTR options are entered as the DMAP generated
automatically by Nastran will put an EXIT in the proper place. The various options are as follows:
STOP=0
If STOP=0 Nastran will not be stopped after Marc exits. Nastran will attempt to obtain its own solution to
the problem if possible. Use of this option can lead to confusion because results from both Marc and Nastran
will be available. If the Marc results are placed in the .f06 file and if the Nastran results are also available in
the .f06 file, it will be difficult to tell which results came from Nastran and which results came from Marc.
This also applies to .op2 files and .xdb files. It is suggested the STOP=0 option be used by extremely
experienced SOL 600 users and even then with great care.
STOP=1
If STOP=1 Nastran will be gracefully stopped after IFP. This option is used to prevent Nastran from
performing its own solution (normally used when the solution is performed by the Marc). STOP=1 should
be normally used if OUTR is not specified. STOP=1 is the default if no STOP, CONTINUE or OUTR
options are entered.
STOP=2
For STOP=2 Marc will not be executed. This option is used if you wish to examine the Marc input file and
make changes prior to running Marc. However, if STOP=2 is entered, the OUTR options will not be
available.
STOP=3
STOP=3 is a combination of STOP=1 and STOP=2. Nastran is stopped after IFP and Marc is not executed.
This would be the normal STOP option if you want to examine a Marc input file, then execute Marc
manually. The STOP=2 option is normally used if you want to obtain comparative results between standard
Nastran solutions and Marc solutions (in which case, all input options must be fully supported by both
programs). If STOP=3 is entered, the OUTR options will not be available.
CONTINUE=
CONTINUE= specifies an option as to how Nastran will continue its analysis after Marc finishes. For this
to happen, do not enter any STOP or OUTR options. It is not usually possible to perform more than one of
these operations if necessary.
Main Index
SOL 600,ID 147
0 Nastran will continue the current solution sequence as normal. For example if
SOL 600,106 is entered, SOL 106 will continue as normal after Marc finishes. Of
course, no 3D contact or materials not supported by SOL 106 may be used.
1 Nastran will switch to SOL 107 to compute complex eigenvalues. Marc will generate
DMIG matrices for friction stiffness (and possibly damping) on a file specified by
pram,marcfil1,name and time specified by param,marcstif,time. This is accomplished
by making a complete copy of the original Nastran input file and spawning off a new
job with the SOL entry changed and an include entry for the DMIG file. The user
must put CMETHOD and CEIG in the original Nastran input file.
2 (Option not presently available.) Nastran will switch to SOL 107 to compute complex
eigenvalues. Marc will generate OUTPUT4 matrices for friction stiffness (and possibly
damping) on a file specified by pram,marcfil2,name and time specified by
param,marcstif,time. This is accomplished by making a complete copy of the original
Nastran input file and spawning off a new job with the SOL entry changed and an
include entry for the DMIG file.
The original Nastran file should include CMETHOD=id in the Case Control
command and a matching EIGC entry in the Bulk Data.
In addition, the DMIG entries specified by MDMIOUT will be included in a separate
Nastran execution spawned from the original execution. Case Control and Bulk Data
will be added to the original input to properly handle these matrices in the spawned
Nastran execution.
6 Same as option 1 except SOL 110 is run. For this option, the original Nastran input
file must contain METHOD=ID1 and CMETHOD=ID2 in the Case Control as well
as matching EIGRL (or EIGR) and EIGC entries in the Bulk Data.
7 Same as option 1 except SOL 103 is run for real eigenvalues/eigenvectors. The
database can be saved to restart into SOL 110 if desired. This should be done on the
command line or in a rc file with scratch=no. For this situation, the original Nastran
input file must include METHOD=id in the Case Control command and a matching
EIGRL or EIGR entry in the Bulk Data. (CMETHOD and EIGC can also be
included.) The actual restart from SOL 103 to 110 must be performed manually at the
present time.
101+ Continue options 101 to 400 are used to convert Marc’s initial contact tying
constraints to MPC’s and then continue in SOL 101 to 112 as a standard Nastran
execution. For example, if CONTINUE=101, a SOL 101 run with all the geometry
load cases, etc. from the original run would be conducted with the addition of the
initial contact MPC determined from Marc. The continue=101+ options are
frequency used to model dissimilar meshes as well as glued contact which does not
change throughout the analysis. This option can be used for any standard Nastran
sequence where the initial contact condition does not change. In order for initial
contact to work, the surfaces must be initially touching. If they are separated by a gap,
the MPC’s will be zero until the gap closes and thus the initial MPC’s are zero. This
option automatically sets BCPARA INITCON=1.
Main Index
148 SOL 600,ID
S67OPT=NO
If S67OPT=NO is entered the following action will be taken for SOL 600 or SOL 700: TA1MCK and
EMGPRO will not be disabled (when these routines are disabled, materials used only by SOL 600 or SOL
700 such as MATG, MATF, MATHP, etc. may be in the model and the t16op2 conversion will take place,
otherwise the job will fail with a FATAL ERROR). Also, Case Control FATAL error termination will occur
at the same place as other Nastran Solution Sequences. If S67OPT=YES or S67OPT is omitted entirely,
TA1MCK and EMGPRO will be disabled and Case Control FATAL ERRORS will cause job termination
immediately. S67OPT=YES is the default.
SCRATCH=
Determines what will happen when a SOL 600 job is initiated with SOL 600 database files (*.3dc, *.prp)
present in the run directory (this usually means another job is running and conflicts can occur.) The default
is SCRATCH=WAIT01. Options are as follows:
SCRATCH=DELETE Attempt to delete all *.3dc and *.prp files, continue with present job. If
the attempt to delete them fails, the job will terminate with an
appropriate message.
SCRATCH=ABORT If any *.3dc or *.prp files are found, abort the present job with an
appropriate message.
SCRATCH=WAIT If any *.3dc or *.prp files are found, wait until they disappear, then begin
current run. This option will wait an “indefinite” amount of time.
SCRATCH=WAITxx If any *.3dc or *.prp files are found, wait for xx minutes or until they
disappear, then begin current job. If they do not disappear within xx
minutes, abort the current job with an appropriate message. Examples, to
wait up to 1 minute, enter SCRATCH=WAIT01, to wait up to 15
minutes, enter SCRATCH=WAIT15. Note: xx can range from 01 to 99.
SCRATCH= Remarks:
1. For the WAIT options, if no *.3dc or *.prp files are found, the job will start immediately.
2. No spaces are allowed.
TSOLVE
Determines which “solver” (Nastran or Marc) is used to solve a heat transfer analysis. The default is Nastran.
TSOLVE=M Marc is used as the thermal solver.

TSOLVE=MS Marc is used as the thermal solver followed by a structural analysis using the
temperatures from the end of thermal analysis.
TSOLVE=N Nastran is used as the thermal solver (default).
Main Index
SOL 600,ID 149
TSOLVE Remarks:
1. If the default is used and thermal contact is present, SOL 600 spawns Marc to calculate initial thermal
contact variables which are then read by Nastran, turned into Nastran CELAS and other variables. A
second Nastran run is spawned for the primary Nastran run to complete the heat transfer calculations.
2. If OUT or OUTDIR are used with thermal contact in SOL 600 they must both reference the same
directory.
3. This option should be entered for heat transfer analysis only.
SMEAR
The term SMEAR, as used by SOL 600, is different then that used on the PCOMP Bulk Data entry. For
SOL 600, SMEAR is the same as LAM=BLANK on the PCOMP entry. Other LAM options are not available
using SOL 600, however complete integration and fast integration methods are available, see the PCOMPF
Bulk Data entry.
If the string SMEAR is entered on the SOL 600,ID command line, composite shell entries using PCOMP
will use the smeared approach. If SMEAR is not entered, the through-the-thickness integration approach will
be used. The smeared approach is identical to other Nastran solution sequences where PCOMP entries are
converted to PSHEL and MAT2 entries. The through-the-thickness integration approach is more accurate
for post-buckling and nonlinear analyses but takes more computer time. OP2.f06 and punch outputs are
available and are controlled by the OUTR options OUTR=xxx where xxx is .op2, .f06 and/or .pch. If any
OUTR options are specified, .op2 must be included. In addition, standard Case Control requests are
required.
SMEAR Option Restrictions

1. The SMEAR option may only be used if all composite materials in the model are made of shell
elements (if there are any composite solid elements, this option may not be used.)
2. Case Control requests for DISP(options)=ALL, the STRESS(options)=ALL must be entered.
STRAIN(options)=ALL is optional. (options) consist of any combination of (print,plot,punch)
3. The SMEAR output options may not be controlled using sets.
4. It is suggested that the Marc t16 file be limited to only those output “items” absolutely necessary as
composite output can be large and take significant computer time.
5. If OUT or OUTDIR are used with this option, they must reference the same directory.
PERMGLUE
Specify PERMGLUE if permanent glued contact is to be used. Permanent glued contact is glued contact
where the glued condition is determined using initial contact. This glued condition will remain throughout
the analysis. The MPC’s produced by the PERMGLUE option are identical to those formed in SOL 101 or
SOL 103 when the permanent glue option is specified. When this option is used, set
BCONTACT=ALLGLUP. For SOL 600, the PERMGLUE option is the only way contact can be used with
SOL600,101 or SOL 600,103 or other “linear” analyses.
Main Index
150 SOL 600,ID
MRENUELE
Determines if SOL 600 elements will be renumbered or not. (Default = 0)
0 No renumbering will occur (suggested for models with largest element number less than
approximately 20000)
1 All elements will be renumbered and the new numbers will be used in the Marc analysis. An
equivalence list will be output on file elenum.txt
2 All elements will be renumbered internally during translation, however the original element
numbers will be used in the Marc input file and Marc analysis.
Remarks concerning MRENUELE:

1. MRENUELE must be set on the SOL 600 entry if the maximum element number is greater than
9,999,999.
2. The “=” and an integer of “0” “1” or “2” must follow “MRENUELE” with no spaces when
MRENUELE is entered on the SOL 600 entry.
3. If the maximum element is 9,999,999 or smaller MRENUELE may be set as a parameter in the bulk
data or placed in a rc file.
4. MRENUELE should not be set on the SOL 600 and as a parameter.
5. For MRENUELE=1 an equivalence list of original and re-numbered element numbers is output on
file elenum.txt
MRENUGRD
Determines if SOL 600 grid ID’s will be renumbered or not. (Default = 0)
0 No renumbering will occur (suggested for models with largest grid ID less than approximately
20000)
1 All grid ID’s will be renumbered and the new numbers will be used in the Marc analysis. An
equivalence list will be output on file grdid.txt
2 All grid ID’s will be renumbered internally during translation, however the original element
numbers will be used in the Marc input file and Marc analysis.
Remarks concerning MREUGRD:

1. MRENUGRD must be set on the SOL 600 entry if the maximum element number is greater than
9,999,999.
2. The “=” and an integer of “0” “1” or “2” must follow “MRENUELE” with no spaces when
MRENUGRD is entered on the SOL 600 entry.
3. If the maximum grid ID is 9,999,999 or smaller MRENUGRD may be set as a parameter in the bulk
data or placed in a rc file.
4. MRENUGRD should not be set on the SOL 600 and as a parameter.
Main Index
SOL 600,ID 151
5. For MRENUGRD=1 an equivalence list of original and re-numbered grid id’s is output on file
gridnum.txt
MRENUMBR
Determines both grid and element ID’s for SOL 600 will be renumbered or not. (Default = 0)
20000)
1 All grid and element ID’s will be renumbered and the new numbers will be used in the Marc
analysis. An equivalence list will be output on file grdid.txt
2 All grid and element ID’s will be renumbered internally during translation, however the original
element numbers will be used in the Marc input file and Marc analysis.
Remark concerning MREUMBR: All remarks for MRENUELE and MRENUGRD apply.
S6news
S6news can be set to YES or NO. If set to YES, a list of new features currently considered to be in beta tests
are output complete with the Case Control and/or Bulk Data descriptions anticipated once these features are
released.
SYSabc
Allows Nastran system cells to be set on the SOL 600 Executive Control statement if desired. Abc must be
an integer ranging from1 to 500 and be a valid system number. INTT must be an integer with 1-8 digits.
More than one SYSabc=INTT statement may be made if so desired, however abc may not be repeated. Note
that the limit on the integer following the equal sign is 8 digits.
Running SOL 600 in Steps -- Modification of the SOL 600 Statement Using Environmental
Variables:
It is possible to run the main portions of SOL 600 in single steps without changing the Nastran input file.
This is accomplished using one of the two environmental variables discussed below. A user can set these
variables in a script that runs Nastran, from the command line or for Windows using the control panel. Note
that on Linux systems, the name of the environmental variable must be in upper case. The string to which it
is set can be in upper or lower case and will be converted to upper case.
To Run SOL 600 in Three Steps Without Changing the SOL 600 Statement in the Input File:
First, make sure that your SOL 600 input file has a SOL 600 statement that contains all of the features you
would want if all steps were done in a single run. For example, if you wish to make an op2 file and place the
results in the .f06 file, a typical SOL 600 statement would be as follows:
SOL 600,NLSTATIC PATH=1 OUTR=OP2,F06
or
Main Index
152 SOL 600,ID
SOL 600,NLSTATIC OUTR=OP2,F06

(if the default path to Marc is to be used).
It is important to have the OUTR options specified at the end of the SOL 600 statement. The following
environmental variable can be set as shown to run the three steps (a Linux shell example is shown):
1. export MARC_RUN=“stop”
This will tell Nastran to run the internal Nastran-to-Marc translator only. The first SOL 600
statement shown would be changed internally just for this run above to the following:
SOL 600,NLSTATIC PATH=1 OUTR=OP2,F06 STOP=3
This change will be shown in the .f06 file.
2. export MARC_RUN=“solv”
This will tell Nastran to run Marc from inside Nastran. The first SOL 600 statement shown would
be changed internally just for this run above to the following:
SOL 600,NLSTATIC PATH=1 OUTR=OP2,F06 MARCEXE=SOLVE
For this run, it is assumed that a file named jid.marc.dat resides in the input file directory created
from a previous translator-only run. The Nastran script will automatically rename jid.marc.dat to
jid.marc.dat.1, but the Nastran executive processing will name it back to jid.marc.dat
3. export MARC_RUN=“pst” This will tell Nastran to run the t16 to op2 translator inside Nastran. The
first SOL 600 statement shown would be changed internally just for this run above to the following:
SOL 600,NLSTATIC PATH=1 OUTR=OP2,F06,PST
For this run, it is assumed that a file named jid.marc.t16 as well as the original Nastran input file jid.dat
resides in the input file. The “t16” file should have been created from a previous Marc execution using the
same computer system (cross-platform support is not available for this step). The Nastran script will
automatically rename jid.marc.t16 to jid.marc.t16.1, and the Nastran t16op2 conversion routines will look
for files with names jid.marc.t16, jid.marc.t16.1, jid.marc.t16.2 up to jid.marc.t16.5 in that order. If no such
files are found, the t16op2 job will exit with a message.
Method to Completely Modify the SOL 600 Statement:

For maximum versatility without having to modify the Nastran input file, the SOL 600 statement can be
modified completely using the environmental variable SOL600_CMD. Assuming that the original SOL 600
statement in jid.dat contains the string:
SOL 600,NLSTATIC OUTR=OP2,F06
and the environmental variable is set as follows:
export SOL600_CMD=“SOL 600,NLSTATIC PATH=1 MARCEXE=SOLVE”
the new SOL command line internal to Nastran will be
SOL 600,NLSTATIC PATH=1 MARCEXE=SOLVE
and Nastran will stop after creating the Marc input file. This would be the same as if the following SOL 600
statement was entered:
Main Index
SOL 600,ID 153
SOL 600,NLSTATIC PATH=1 STOP=3

Any valid SOL 600 statement can be issued using the SOL600_CMD environmental variable without
changing the original Nastran input file at all.
Remarks:
1. Only one SOL 600,ID job may be run in a directory at any given time. However, if a previous run
was made and output files such as name.marc.t16 were produced, they will be renamed
name.marc.t16.1, etc. following the Nastran re-naming convention.
2. If OUTR is specified, STOP must not be specified.
3. The COPYR option can be used to delete all files directly created by Marc if the output desired are
Nastran files only.
4. When OUTR is specified, the Marc files such as jid.marc.out, jid.marc.t16 will be renamed to
jid.marc.out.1 and jid.marc.t16.1 at the start of the run. This renaming is accounted for when
opening the files
5. To generate .xdb files, PARAM,POST,0 must be included in the Bulk Data Section. To generate
OP2 files with geometry, PARAM,POST,-1 (for Patran and Femap) or PARAM,POST,-2 (for
SDRC) should be included in the Bulk Data.
6. Although SOL 600,ID supports linear analysis (ID=101, 103, 105), not all features are available. For
example, Case Control commands, STATSUB, SUBCOM, SUBSEQ, SYMCOM, AUXMODEL,
AXISYMMETRIC, CLOAD, DEFORM, HARMONICS, MFLUID, NSM, and REPCASE are not
available. For nonlinear analyses (ID=106, 129) Case Control commands, NNLOAD and
NONLINEAR are not available.
7. To output displacements in the jid.marc.out file, do the following:
In the Case Control, set DISP(PRINT)=ALL or DISP(PRINT,PLOT)=ALL
In the Bulk Data, include the following two parameters:
PARAM,MARCPRNR,1
PARAM,MARCND99,-1
8. All SOL 600 character variable parameters, such as MRAFFLOW, must be left justified in the starting
in field 3.
9. If generation options such as EGRID, GRIDG, CGEN, etc., are used, the MSGMESH option or the
environmental variable, S600_M001 must be set with a value equal to the largest grid ID or element
ID (whichever is larger). This is needed for initial SOL 600 memory sizing, which happens before
these generation entries are converted to standard Nastran GRID, CQUAD4, etc. entries. SOL 600
can not read the generation features. This environmental variable needs to be included in the script
or batch file that runs SOL 600 jobs (for Windows, it can be set in the environment).
10. Fixed load stepping (or time stepping) is controlled primarily by PARAM,MARCITER and
PARAM,MARCAUTO rather than NLPARM or NLAUTO.
11. 2D and 3D contact and elements may not be mixed in the same model.
Main Index
154 SOL 600,ID
12. For the OUTR options, the only stress tensor available is Cauchy stress (E341). If some other stress
tensor is selected using MARCOUT, and E341 is not selected, no stresses will be available in the .op2,
.xdb, .pch, or .f06 files.
13. For multi-layer composites, stresses in the preferred direction (E391), also known as the layer
direction, are usually necessary. The default Cauchy stresses (E341) will be automatically charged to
E391 for composites.
14. SOL 600 supports a new field on RFORCE (2nd line 4th field) to allow different portions of the
structure to have different rotation accelerations.
15. 2D Plain stress is available and this type of analysis is achieved by setting MID=-1 on all PSHELL
entries and adding the following parameters to the bulk data.
PARAM,MRALIAS,011003
PARAM,MALIAS02,006003
SOL 600 will use the alias commands to convert plain strain elements that normally are introduced
with MID2=-1 into the input into plain stress. Although MALIAS02 specifies that Marc element 3
be used for CTRIAi, the new Marc element 201 plain stress triangle will be used instead of a
degenerate element 6 plain stress quad. By default, the CTRIAi node numbers will not be reversed,
however if the user wants to reverse them enter PARAM,MREVPLST,1 in the bulk data. Any contact
entered into the file needs to specify 2D on all BCBODY entries. 2D plain stress analysis for SOL
600 is available through Patran which will generate the above alias parameters automatically.
Restrictions and Limitations of SOL 600

Certain features are available in Nastran that are not available in Marc, and vice versa, the following
restrictions/limitations are imposed on Nastran. Those restrictions indicated by (*) will be removed as soon
as possible. Items with (**) will issue a FATAL error (for the Nastran-to-Marc translator internal to Nastran)
and Marc will not be “spawned” from Nastran unless NOERROR is entered on the SOL 600 statement.
 External superelements are supported. Other types of superelements are not currently supported.
 Scalar points are not supported.
 PBCOMP is not supported.
 CCONEAX is not supported.
 CBARAO is not supported.
 Output set definitions that contain grid or element numbers greater than the largest grid or element
in the model will produce errors in Marc.
 Output set definitions may include the word BY as in output plot set definitions for use by Marc
only. Nastran must be stopped using STOP=1 or one of the OUTR options since BY is a FATAL
ERROR to Nastran.
 Nastran’s CREEP entry must be changed to the MATVP entry.
 For orthotropic materials using MATORT, all shear moduli must be entered.
 SPOINTs are mapped to GRIDs with x, y, z coordinates at (0., 0., 0.)
 SLOAD and other scalar features are not supported.
 CELAS3 and CELAS4 are not supported.
Main Index
SOL 600,ID 155
 CLOAD is not supported.

 Fracture Mechanics is available.
 Aerodynamics is not supported.
 Bulk data entries with + or * in column 73 must have an actual continuation card for most entries.
Nastran does not require this, but the internal Marc translator does. (*).
 Slideline contact is not supported (BLSEG, BWIDTH, BFRIC, BCONP, and BOUTPUT, if
entered will cause FATAL ERRORS in Nastran).
 p-elements are not supported.
 Offsets are available for CBAR, CBEAM, CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 in all types of structural analysis
(linear or nonlinear). The offsets must be specified in the global coordinate system (displacement
output coordinate system) unless PARAM,MAROFSET is 1 (2 or 3, see description in
Parameter Descriptions, 740). Offsets are available for CQUAD8 and CTRIA6 but only if all 8 or 6
grids are defined for these elements, respectively. If PARAM,MAROFSET,1 (2 or3) is included in
the bulk data, the offsets will be incorporated using a new Marc feature that does not need extra
grids or elements.
 For SOL 600, it is required that a Case Control LOAD or DLOAD entry be made for each subcase.
If there are no subcases, one LOAD or DLOAD entry must be made.
 For SOL 600, it is required that all enforced displacements (other than motion of rigid contact
surfaces applied using fields on the BCBODY entry) be applied using SPCD rather than SPC. The
ID’s of the SPCD must correlate with the Case Control LOAD or DLOAD entries.
 MPCs must be the same for all load cases.
 MAT10 is not presently supported.
 The following Solution Sequences are not presently supported: 107, 108, 110, 111, 114-116, 118,
144-146, 190, 200, 400 and 700 and will cause Severe Warnings (FATAL ERRORS) in the internal
translator.
 DOMAINSOLVER is not supported. If this Executive Control statement is entered, and Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear is requested by the SOL 600, ID statement, the DOMAINSOLVER request will
be commented out internally by Nastran.
 IDs Grids, elements, properties, materials, etc. are limited to 9,999,999 unless one of the
MRENUxxx items is specified in which case the limit is 10 digits.
 CGAP does not completely map to Marc’s gap element. The user should change all Nastran gaps to
contact before running SOL 600. If the gaps are not changed to contact, some options will fail to
translate as indicated by warning messages. Certain simple gaps translate as expected and will
produce nearly the same results as standard Nastran solution sequences, but the user is responsible
for ensuring that any model with gaps gives the behavior he expects when using SOL 600.
 Nastran MATS1 Mohr-Coulomb is mapped to Marc’s Linear Mohr Coulomb option.
 Nastran MATS1 Drucker-Prager is mapped to Marc’s Parabolic Mohr Coulomb option.
 Solid element composite output is not presently available using the OUTR options, It must be
postprocessed directly using the t16 file - Patran is recommended.
Main Index
156 SOL 600,ID
 If layered output for Composite Structures is desired, the following bulk data parameters or bulk
data entry, MARCOUT with LAYCODE of 1 or 2 should be included in the Bulk Data. If output
for all layers is desired, set LAYCODE to zero and enter the following parameters:
param,mroutlay,N
param,marcslht,N
where N is the maximum number of layers in any composite PCOMP description. The preferred
option is MARCOUT with LAYCODE=1.
 The rotational acceleration portion of RFORCE (RACC) is not supported and if entered will
generate a Severe Warning and Marc will not be spawned.
 The following Case Control option for displacement/velocity/acceleration/spcforce/ mpcforce are
not supported and will be ignored if entered:
• SORT2, REAL, IMAG, PHASE, PSDF, ATOC, CRMS, RALL, RPRINT, RPUNCH,
NORPRINT, CID, TM, RM
 Elements with mid-side nodes must have all mid-side nodes. For example CTETRA must either
have 4 or 10 nodes.
 For PC systems, if SOL 600 is run from a command prompt (DOS box), if any old DOS programs
are used prior to running SOL 600 the path where the job is being run is usually adjusted such that
any names longer than 8 characters will be shortened (for example brake-squeal becomes BRAKE-
~3). The continue options including brake squeal jobs will not work when this happens. Open a
new command prompt and run SOL 600 before any old DOS programs are run in that window.
 The CID field on the RFORCE entry is not completely supported. If entered with a positive
integer, the job will abort with a Severe Warning unless PARAM,MARCRCID is entered.
PARAM,MARCRCID,1 may be used to ignore this field in which case R1,R2,R3 define the
direction cosines of the rotation vector (see Marc Volume C, ROTATION A description) and the
magnitude is given by A*sqrt(R1**2+R2**2+R3**2) [see RFORCE description for definitions of
CID, A, R1, R2, R3 as well as Remark 16].
 Filenames entered on SOL 600 Bulk Data entries must be entered in small field fixed format, must
be left-justified in the first applicable field and must be entered in lower case unless otherwise noted.
 For any jobs using the CONTINUE option or brake squeal, the jid must be entirely in lower case
for Linux systems.
 Ixy of PBAR/PBEAM is ignored, if entered, for SOL 600.
 PARAM,MRDISCMB=1 must be used for models with multiple subcases with the same pressure
loadings in each subcase. The program will automatically attempt to reset the default (mrdiscmb=0
to mrdiscmb=1 in such circumstances, however, it is recommended that the user does this himself.
 Some Bulk Data input entries are not checked as completely for SOL 600 as they are for other
solution sequences, particularly those that apply only to SOL 600. In addition, certain checks for all
types of entries, even those that can be used in other solution sequences may be made after Marc is
spawned or the error messages not output until after Marc is spawned. For those cases, the error
message, if any, will not be visible until Marc has finished and may not even be output unless one or
Main Index
SOL 600,ID 157
more of the OUTR options is selected. Users should take special care that the SOL 600 input is free
from errors and that no duplicates occur prior to running SOL 600. One way to do this which is
highly recommended is to run a preliminary SOL 101 job with as much of the same input file as
possible.
 For SOL 600, it is required that all enforced displacements (other than motion of rigid contact
surfaces described by fields in BCBODY entries) be applied using SPCD rather than SPC. The ID’s
of the SPCD must correlate with the Case Control LOAD or DLOAD entries.
 If an .op2, .xdb, .f06, and/or punch file is requested using the OUTR option, static analyses must
have “times” ranging from 0.0-1.0 for the first subcase, 1.0-2.0 for the second subcase, etc. If
NLAUTO is used to change these times, the job will fail with an appropriate message. This means
that if NLAUTO is used TFINAL (field 4) must always be 1.0.
 Concentrated masses are not considered in gravity loading for linear or nonlinear static analyses.
 Non-structural mass is ignored by SOL 600.
Main Index
158 SOL 700,ID
Executes MSC Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)
SOL 700,ID Executes MSC Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)
Format:
SOL 700,ID PATH= STOP= NP(or DMP700)= FSIDMP= HPMPI= INTELMPI= EID=
Examples:
SOL 700,129 PATH=3 NP=4
(700,129 request nonlinear transient dynamics, path=3 requests use of the SOL 700 script called out in file
sol700.pth, np=4 requests that 4 processors be used)
Summary:
SOL 700 is an Executive Control statement like SOL that activates an explicit nonlinear transient analysis
integration scheme. The calculations will not be performed directly within MSC Nastran. Instead, SOL 700
will use a separate solver spawned from MSC Nastran. This client-server approach is similar to SOL 600,
using Marc.
The SOL 700 statement will spawn an executable which is a 3D, explicit nonlinear analyses code DMP
(distributed memory parallel processing domain decomposition) capabilities.
For ID=129 or NLTRAN, SOL 700 will generate an intermediate input data file, jid.dytr.dat, where “jid” is
the name of the MSC Nastran input file without the extension). For example, if the MSC Nastran input file
is named abcd.dat, (or abcd.bdf ) then “jid”=abcd).
Unless specified differently using the STOP=3 option, the executable will be executed from MSC Nastran
on any computer system capable of doing so (which includes most Linux systems and Windows systems). For
it to run, it must be installed, properly licensed, and accessible from the directory where the MSC Nastran
input data resides, MSC_BASE must be provided in the environment.
Nastran SOL 700 Update:

Starting in MSC Nastran 2019.0 there is a change in the execution of MSC Nastran SOL 700. SOL 700 with
LS-Dyna is no longer supported by MSC Nastran. Instead, a new explicit solver is introduced in MSC
Nastran 2019.0. This version can be activated by adding VERSION = PRIMARY to SOL 700 in the input
file or simply by leaving it blank as this will be the default. A new license feature will be needed to run this
new version: NA_Explicit_Dytran.
The new SOL 700 will support both DMP and SMP parallelization. For this, the solver will pull licenses
from the following license feature: NA_Parallel.
Customers that have a lease agreement will no longer be able to run MSC Nastran SOL 700 jobs from version
of MSC Nastran before 2018.0. The binaries needed were in the prior version located in msc20190/dytran
directory of the MSC Nastran installation. However, this directory will be missing after the installation of
MSC Nastran 2019.0.
Paid-up customers of MSC Nastran before 2018.0 can continue to use MSC Nastran SOL 700 jobs from
version of MSC Nastran before 2018.0. For those customers, there will be no change in the FlexLM License
features.
Main Index
SOL 700,ID 159
Executive Control Parameters:

The required ID may be one of several valid solution sequence integers or names shown in Table 2 for the SOL
statement. Examples are 129 and NLTRAN.
The following solutions are available: 101, 106, 109, 129 (and their equivalent names).
All items on the SOL 700,ID after ID itself may be specified by environmental variables. This may be done
any way environmental variables can be set. They may be set by the MSC Nastran user at run time or by the
system administrator when MSC Nastran is installed. Any values specified on the SOL statement override
those in the environment. Environmental variables are fully described in the MSC Nastran 2019.0 Installation and
Operations Guide. A keywords file is available to describe the format of each variable. The variable is normally
set in the system-wide rc file, a user’s rc file, a local rc file or in a script used to submit MSC Nastran.
The following describes the various options for PATH. We suggest that PATH=3 for all computer systems.
PATH=1 (Windows Only)

If PATH=1 is specified, MSC Nastran will determine the proper command to execute a serial run. To aid
MSC Nastran in determining where Dytran is located, the dynrun.pth file must be located in the same
directory where the MSC Nastran input file resides. The dynrun.pth file must contain one line providing the
location (complete path) of the SOL 700 run script. A typical example of the line in the file dynrun.pth
follows.
Windows c:\sol700\
A string is appended to this path to form the complete command used to execute the SOL 700 executable.
“dytran jid=name.dytr.dat”
For Windows, MSC Nastran will spawn the external executable using the following command assuming the
MSC Nastran input data is named enf2e.dat. (Although the example appears like it is on multiple lines, it is
actually on a single line.)
c:\sol700/dytran jid=enf2e.dytr.dat
PATH=3 (All Systems)

If PATH=3 is specified, a script or batch file located in the same directory as the SOL 700 executable will be
executed. The name of the script or batch files is dytran.py. This directory and name of the script is
determined by the first line in a file named sol700.pth which must be in the same directory as the Nastran
input file. Options are specified on subsequent lines of the sol700.pth file.
Available PATH=3 options for Windows PC systems are as follows:

exe= The full path to the executable that is to be used.
Optional -- If exe= is omitted, the directory where the script or batch file resides (first line of
sol700.pth) will be used and dytran for Linux and dytran.exe for windows will be appended. If
exe= is used, it must be the second line in the sol700.pth file.
Main Index
160 SOL 700,ID
nproc Number of processors.

(Default is to used NP on the SOL 700 line. If NP and nproc are omitted, the default is 1).
For parallel execution, the directory where the MSC Nastran input file exists must be shared
with read/write privileges. If wdir is used, it must also be shared (see below). The directory
where the Dytran executable resides must also be shared for parallel execution.
bat Run in background or foreground (Default).
hlist Host file name. Name of a hostfile containing the same information as “machine”
The format of hostfile is as follows for the example for machine:
machine1 2
machine1 4
hpmpi To activate the HP MPI set hpmpi equal to yes. Default is no. If HPMPI=YES is placed directly
on the command line (not in sol700.pth) HP MPI will be activated too.
intelmpi To activate the INTEL MPI set intelmpi equal to yes. Default is no. This option is only
available on Windows 64. If INTELMPI=YES is placed directly on the command line (not in
sol700.pth) INTEL MPI will be activated too.
atb the name of atb file.
imm the name of imm file.
A Windows example of the file sol700.pth for the PATH=3 case follows.
C:\MSC.Software\MSC_Nastran\20190\msc20190\python\win64\python.exe
C:\MSC.Software\MSC_Nastran\20190\msc20190\dytran\win64\bin\dytran nastran
nproc=4
hlist=hostfile
For the above example, MSC Nastran will create the following command to spawn the SOL 700 executable
assuming your input file is named abcd.dat. (Although the example appears like it is on multiple lines, it is
actually on a single line.)
C:\MSC.Software\MSC_Nastran\20190\msc20190\python\win64\python.exe
C:\MSC.Software\MSC_Nastran\20190\msc20190\dytran\win64\bin\dytran nastran
nproc=6 hlist=hostfile
Available PATH=3 options for Linux systems follows:

debug Specifying debug=yes indicates if you want to keep scratch files and other debug
information to investigate when a job fails to run. Default is no.
eid ARCid,NCYCLE,MESHID: ARCid is the filename of archive result file of a previous
Euler calculation. NCYCLE is the cycle number in the ARC file which will be used for the
follow-up simulation. MESHID is the mesh ID of the Euler mesh that is initialized. If
EID= is placed directly on the command line (not in sol700,pth) it will work as the same
as eid in sol700.pth. If only one cycle is stored in the ARCid file, NCYCLE may remain
blank. eid can be repeated up to 10 times on the command line. If more than one eid is
used, MESHID is required to indicate which ARCid is initializing which Euler mesh. If
only one eid is used, MESHID may remain blank.
Main Index
SOL 700,ID 161
Examples:
eid=BLAST_EULER_539.ARC
or
eid=LEFT_EULER_80.ARC,,1
eid=RIGHT_EULER_80.ARC,,2
exe The full path to the executable for Dytran that is to be used. (Optional)
fsidmp Specifying fsidmp=yes indicates to run the FSI Distributed Memory Parallel version.
Default is no. If FSIDMP=YES is placed directly on the command line (not in sol700.pth)
FSI Distributed Memory Parallel will be activated too.
hlist The (local) filename containing the hosts list. If this file is not given or not found, a default
local hosts list is used. Note that the MPI universe in which the selected nodes and CPUs
reside is expected to exist and be accessible (i.e., be booted).
hpmpi To activate the HP MPI set hpmpi equal to yes. Default is no. If HPMPI=YES is placed
directly on the command line (not in sol700.pth) HP MPI will be activated too.
nproc Number of processors. (Default is to use NP on the SOL 700 line. If NP and nproc are
omitted, the default is 1.) NOTE: The number of requested processes must be a power of
2.
intelmpi To activate the INTEL MPI set intelmpi equal to yes. Default is no. If INTELMPI=YES
is placed directly on the command line (not in sol700.pth) INTEL MPI will be activated
too.
atb the name of atb file.
imm the name of imm file.
A Linux example of the file sol700.pth for the PATH=3 case is as follows:
/app/msc/msc20190/python/linux64_rhe71i8/bin/python3.5
/app/msc/msc20190/dytran/linux64/bin/dytran nastran
nproc=4
For the above example, MSC Nastran will create the a command similar to the following to spawn dytran
assuming your input file is named abcd.dat
/app/msc/msc20190/python/linux64_rhe71i8/bin/python3.5
/app/msc/msc20190/dytran/linux64/bin/dytran nastran nproc=4
If PATH is not specified, the default search path will be used to locate the dytran executable. This version
will be located in a subdirectory named dytran/machine below the MSC Nastran base directory
(MSC_BASE). Not all PATH=3 options are available using this default path option.
STOP
STOP is an optional item. STOP is used to prevent execution of Dytran or prevent execution of MSC
Nastran after IFP if so desired. The various options are as follows:
Main Index
162 SOL 700,ID
STOP=1
If STOP=1 MSC Nastran will gracefully stop after IFP. This option is used to prevent MSC Nastran from
performing its own solution (normally used when the solution is performed with ID=129).
STOP=3
STOP=3 MSC Nastran is stopped after IFP and Dytran is not executed. This would be the normal STOP
option if the user wants to examine the intermediate input file, make some changes and then execute Dytran
manually.
The following files are potentially affected by the COPYR option:
NP(or DMP700)=the Number of Processors

NP(or DMP700)=the number of processors (domains) for parallel processing. The default is one. In order to
use more than one domain, MPI, Lam, POE, or whatever parallel program is needed must be properly
installed on all computers involved and a hostfile designating which computers are to be used for each domain
must have been setup prior to running the job. If NP>1, PATH=3 is used and a file named sol700.pth is
located in the same directory as the MSC Nastran input data. The sol700.pth file should contain all
commands necessary to run in parallel. This file must have execute permissions.
Item Case Control Commands Available in SOL 700

$ Y
BCONTACT Y
BEGIN BULK Y (Other BEGIN forms are not allowed)
DLOAD Y
ECHO Y
ENDTIME Y
ENDSTEP Y
IC Y
LOADSET Y
$S700 Y
SET Y
SPC Y
TITLE Y
TSTEP Y (Same as )
TSTEPNL Y
The following summarizes the Bulk Data entries for SOL 700:
Main Index
SOL 700,ID 163
Item Bulk Data Entries Available in SOL 700 Fatal Error

ABINFL Y
ATBACC Y
ATBJNT Y
ATBSEG Y
BARRIER Y
BCBODY Y
BCBODY1 Y
BCBOX Y
BCELIPS Y
BCGRID Y
BCMATL Y
BCONECT Y
BCONPRG Y
BCONPRP Y
BCPROP Y
BCSEG Y
BCTABL1 Y
BCTABLE Y
BIAS Y
BJOIN Y
BSURF Y
CBAR Y
CBEAM Y
CDAMP1 Y
CDAMP1D Y
CDAMP2 Y
CDAMP2D Y
Main Index
164 SOL 700,ID

CELAS1 Y
CELAS1D Y
CELAS2 Y
CELAS2D Y
CHEXA Y(8 Nodes only)
CMARKB2 Y
CMARKN1 Y
COHFRIC Y
COMPUDS Y
CORD1C Y
CORD1R Y
CORD1S Y
CORD2C Y
CORD2R Y
CORD2S Y
CORD3R Y
COUCOHF Y
COUOPT Y
COUP1FL Y
COUPINT Y
COUPLE Y
CPENTA Y(5 Nodes only)
CQUAD4 Y
CROD Y
CSPR Y
CTETRA Y (4 Audio Nodes only)
CTRIA3 Y
CTUBE Y
Main Index
SOL 700,ID 165

CVISC Y
CYLINDR Y
DAREA Y
DETSPH Y
DLOAD Y
DYFSISW Y
DYPARAM Y
ENDDATA Y
ENDDYNA Y
EOSDEF Y
EOSGAM Y
EOSGRUN Y
EOSIG Y
EOSJWL Y
EOSMG Y
EOSNA Y
EOSPOL Y
EOSTAIT Y
EOSUDS Y
EULFOR Y
EULFOR1 Y
EULFREG Y
FAILJC Y
FAILMPS Y
FAILUDS Y
FFCONTR Y
FLOW Y
FLOWC Y
Main Index
166 SOL 700,ID

FLOWDEF Y
FLOWT Y
FLOWUDS N
FORCE Y
FORCE2 Y
FORCUDS Y
GBAG Y
GBAGCOU Y
GRAV Y
GRDSET Y
GRID Y
HEATLOS Y
HGSUPPR Y
HTRCONV Y
HTRRAD Y
HYDSTAT Y
INCLUDE Y
INFLCG Y
INFLFRC Y
INFLGAS Y
INFLHB Y
INFLTNK Y
INFLTR Y
INITGAS Y
LOAD Y
LEAKAGE Y
LSEQ Y
MAT1 Y
Main Index
SOL 700,ID 167

MAT2 Y
MAT8 Y
MATBV Y
MATDEUL Y
MATEP Y
MATF Y
MATFAB Y
MATHE Y
MATORT Y
MATRIG Y
MATVE Y
MESH Y
MOMENT Y
MOMENT2 Y
NLOUTUD Y
PBAR Y
PBARL Y
PBEAM Y
PBEAML Y
PBELT Y
PCOMP Y
PDAMP Y
PELAS Y
PELAS1 Y
PERMEAB Y
PERMGBG Y
PEULER Y
PEULER1 Y
Main Index
168 SOL 700,ID

PLOAD Y
PLOAD2 Y
PLOAD4 Y (Continuation supported)
PMARKER Y
PMINC Y
PORFCPL Y
PORFGBG Y
PORFLOW Y
PORFLWT Y
PORHOLE Y
PORHYDS Y
PORUDS Y
PROD Y
PSHELL Y
PSHELL1 Y
PSOLID Y
PVISC Y
PVISC1 Y
RBE2 Y
RBJOINT Y
RELEX Y
RFORCE (CID, METHOD, continuation line not supported)
SHREL Y
SHRPOL Y
SHRUDS Y
SPC Y
SPC1 Y
SPCADD Y
Main Index
SOL 700,ID 169

SPHERE Y
SURFINI Y
TABLED1 Y
TABLUDS Y
TIC Y
TIC3 Y (New Dytran type entry)
TICEL Y
TICEUDS Y
TICEUL1 Y
TICREG Y
TICVAL Y
TLOAD1 Y
TLOAD2 N
TODYNA Y
TSTEP Y (Changed to TSTEPNL)
TSTEPNL Y
WALL Y
WALL Y (New rigid wall entry)
YLDHY Y
YLDJC Y
YLDMSS Y
YLDPOL Y
YLDRPL Y
YLDSG Y
YLDTM Y
YLDUDS Y
YLDVM Y
YLDZA Y
Main Index
170 SPARSESOLVER
Sparse Solver Options
SPARSESOLVER Sparse Solver Options
Specifies options used in sparse solution of equations operations.
Format:
SPARSESOLVER { target } ( [ COMPMETH = { cmeth } ] [ ORDMETH = { ometh } ],
 T 
[ FACTMETH = { fmeth } ]MDTRATIO =  [ NO ]CHART  [ = nsegs ] ,
 R 
T  T  T 
[ NO ]TABLE   NMAXRAT   = nratios MAXRAT   = maxratio ,
R
  R  R 
 GRID  
  
SORT =  VALUE   ,
  
 BOTH  
 T 
MDTSTATS =  [ NO ]CHART   [ = nsegs ] ,
 R 
T  T  T 
[ NO ]TABLE   NMAXVAL   = nmax NMINVAL   = nmin ,
R
  R  R 
T  T 
MAXVAL   = vmax MINVAL   = vmin ,
R  R 
 GRID  
  
SORT =  VALUE   )
  
 BOTH  
Examples:
1. For the READ module, specify METIS reordering, and for the FRRD1 module, specify the UMFLU
factorization method:
SPARSESOLVER READ (ORDMETH=METIS)
SPARSESOLVER FRRD1 (FACTMETH=UMFLU)
2. Request matrix diagonal term ratio output:
SPARSESOLVER DCMP ( MDTRATIO )
3. Request matrix diagonal term ratio output in chart format for translational DOFs, and limit the
number of printed diagonal ratios to 50:
SPARSESOLVER DCMP ( MDTRATIO=(CHART,TABLET,NMAXRATT=50) )
4. Request Matrix Diagonal Term statistics output for:
• Chart format for translational and rotational DOF
• Table format for translational dof limited to largest 10 terms greater than 1.0E+08
Main Index
SPARSESOLVER 171
• Table format for translational dof limited to smallest 20 terms smaller than 1.0
• Table format for rotational dof limited to smallest 30 terms smaller than 100.0
SPARSESOLVER DCMP (MDTSTATS=(CHART,TABLET,NMAXVALT=10,
MAXVALT=1.0E+08, NMINVALT=20, MINVALT=1.0,TABLER, NMINVALR=30,
MINVALR=100.00))
Describer Meaning
target The target application for the options. The target application choices are: CEAD,
DCMP, DECOMP, MDSTAT, NLSOLVE, READ, SOLVE, FRRD1, and
TRD1.
cmeth Compression method to be used (Default = GRID).
The choices for compression method are: GRID, SUPER, GRDSUPER and
NONE.
ometh Ordering method to be used (Default = Automatic). The choices for ordering
method are: AMF, BEND, MD, METIS, MMD, PRDMD, PRDMETIS,
PRDSMPMS, and NONE. The default automatically selects among METIS,
MMD and BEND
fmeth Factorization method to be used (MSCLDL).
The choices for factorization method are: MSCLDL, MSCLU, UMFLU,
NUMFLU, PRDLDL, and PRDLU. The default factorization method for
symmetic matrices is MSCLDL. For unsymmetric matrices, the default is
MSCLU.
NO No output is to be produced for the keyword.
T The keyword applies to translational DOF only.
R The keyword applies to rotational DOF only.
nsegs Number of bars to be used in chart (Default = 0).
nratios Number of diagonal term ratios to be included in table (Default = 25).
maxratio Diagonal term ratio above which ratios are included in the table (Default =
1.0E+5).
GRID Table output is sorted on GRID ID and component code.
VALUE Sort table output on term values.
BOTH Table is output once sorted on GRID ID and once on term value.
nmax Number of largest values to print (Default = 25).
nmin Number of smallest values to print (Default = 25).
vmax All terms larger than vmax are printed (Default = 1.0E+10).
vmin All terms smaller than vmin are printed (Default = 1.0).
Remarks:
1. All of the keywords for the target application must be enclosed in parentheses.
Main Index
172 SPARSESOLVER
2. The following table correlates target applications with available factorization methods.
Module MSCLDL MSCLU UMFLU NUMFLU PRDLDL PRDLU

CEAD Yes Yes No Yes No Yes
DCMP Yes Yes No No Yes No
DECOMP Yes Yes No No No No
FRRD1 Yes Yes Yes No No Yes
MDSTAT Yes Yes No No No No
NLSOLV Yes Yes No No Yes No
READ Yes No No No No No
SOLVE Yes Yes No No No No
TRD1 Yes Yes Yes No No No
3. More than one SPARSESOLVER entry may be used, so that one may specify different options for
different target modules.
4. System cell 206 can specify both a reordering method and a compression method by adding the
respective values. For example, to specify GRDSUPER compression method with BEND reordering,
SYSTEM(206) would be set to 68 (since 64+4=68). Or, to specify SUPER compression with METIS
reordering, SYSTEM(206) would be set to 136 (since 128+8=136).
5. Note that SYSTEM(166), SYSTEM(206) and SYSTEM(209) have precedence over the
SPARSESOLVER command, whether set on the submittal line or in DMAP.
6. System cell 166 can also be used to turn on extra diagnostic output from the sparse factorization by
setting SYSTEM(166)=2.
7. The choices for ordering method are: AMF, BEND, MD, METIS, MMD, PRDMD, PRDMETIS,
PRDSMPMS, and NONE. The default automatically selects among METIS, MMD and BEND.
8. The UMFLU factorization method ignores COMPMETH and ORDMETH since it contains its
own compression/reordering method.
9. The matrix diagonal term ratio (MDTRATIO) and value (MDTSTATS) keywords and options are
used only by the DCMP target application. They will be ignored by other target applications.
10. The MDTRATIO and MDTSTATS keywords apply to both translational and rotational degrees of
freedom unless modified by the T or R describer. Separate output is produced for each of the
translational and rotational degrees of freedom in the matrix.
11. The MDTRATIO and MDTSTATS CHART option default produces a chart of values contained
in powers of ten bandwidths. A specification for the nsegs describer causes the bandwidth to be
internally computed to produce nsegs bars. Bars are produced for the bandwidths only if they contain
terms.
12. MDTRATIO and MDTSTATS keywords are processed in the order given. It is possible for a
keyword to modify the effects of a previously processed keyword. For example, the combination
CHART, m CHARTR=5 produces different outputs compared to CHARTR=15, CHART.
Main Index
SPARSESOLVER 173
13. The MDTRATIO NMAXRAT describer limits the content of the TABLE output to the specified
highest number of diagonal ratios that exceed the value of the MAXRAT describer.
14. MDTSTATS generates output for matrix diagonal term values. For the TABLE option, it produces
a table containing the NMINVAL=nmin smallest terms smaller than MINVAL=vmin as well as the
NMAXVAL=nmax largest terms larger than MAXVAL=vmax.
15. The ORDMETH option must be one of PRDMD, PRDMETIS, or PRDSMPMS for PRDLDL and
PRDLU.
16. The COMPMETH option is ignored for PRDLDL and PRDLU.
17. The DOMAINSOLVER (RUNOPT=MULTIMST) option is not supported with PRDLDL or
PRDLU.
18. For PRDLDL and PRDLU, if there is not sufficient memory for an in-core solver, then an out-of-
core solver wil be attempted and performance will be negatively affected.
19. The following special rules apply for PRDLDL for NLSOLV:
a. The maximum number of threads used is given by DMP*SMP, and PRDLDL will choose a
number of threads, up to this maximum, most suitable to the problem size.
b. Only the FNT/PFNT methods for nonlinear iteration (KMETHOD field of NLPARM
parameter) are supported.
c. If the problem fails to converge with PRDLDL, then add MDLPRM,LMT2MPC,1 to the bulk
data section in order to convert Lagrange multipliers to MPCs.
20. The following special rules apply for PRDLDL for DCMP:
a. DMP is not supported for PRDLDL for DCMP as it only gets parallelism from SMP
b. PRDLDL automatically provides parallelization over multiple RHSs with SMP.
c. If PRDLDL encounters a zero pivot issue (SFM 11332), the user should rerun with bulk data
entry MDLPRM,PRDMTYPE,-2 to have Intel MKL Pardiso regard the matrix as indefinite, and
entry MDLPRM,PRDWMTCH,0 in order to turn off weighted matching. Problems involving
linear contact (BCONTACT) are particularly liable to creating indefinite systems. Turning off
weighted matching will speed time to solution.
21. The following special rules apply for PRDLU for CEAD:
a. PRDLU is only supported for the CLAN option within CEAD (refer to CMETHOD option).
22. The following special rules apply for PRDLU for FRRD1:
a. The Krylov solver is not supported with PRDLU for FRRD1.
b. DMP is supported for PRDLU for FRRD1.
c. MKL Pardiso is not supported in the uncoupled solution algorithm for FRRD1.
23. For CEAD, the default solver for unsymmetric matrices is UMFPACK while for Hermitian matrices
the default is MSCLU.
24. User specified factorization method (fmeth) via SPARSESOLVER entry or SYSTEM(209) may be
overwritten automatically due to matrix type or symmetry by MSC Nastran.
Main Index
174 SPARSESOLVER
25. Several options for Intel MKL Pardiso are controlled using the MDLPRM bulk data entry. See the PRD*
parameters detailed in the MDLPRM section.
Main Index
TIME 175
Sets Maximum CPU and I/O Time
TIME Sets Maximum CPU and I/O Time
Sets the maximum CPU and I/O time.
Format:
TIME[=]t1[,t2]
Examples:
1. The following example designates a runtime of 8 hours:
TIME 480
2. The following example designates 90 seconds:
TIME 1.5
Describer Meaning
t1 Maximum allowable execution time in CPU minutes (Real or Integer>0;
Default=1.89E9 seconds).
t2 Maximum allowable I/O limit in minutes (Real or Integer>0; Default is infinity,
which is machine dependent).
Remarks:
1. The TIME statement is optional.
2. If t2 is specified then t1 must be specified.
Main Index
176 TIME
Sets Maximum CPU and I/O Time
Main Index
Chapter 5: Case Control Commands
Guide
5 Case Control Commands

Key to Descriptions

The Case Control Section
 Case Control Command Summary

Case Control Commands

Case Control Applicability Tables
 OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands

X-Y PLOT Commands
 OUTPUT(POST) Commands
Main Index
Key to Descriptions
Key to Descriptions
Brackets [ ] indicate that AAbrief

brief description ofthe
description of the
a choice of describers is command
command isisgiven.
given.
optional.
Describers
Describers ininuppercase
uppercase letters
letters are keywords
are keywords that mustthat
be speci-
must
fied asbe specified as shown.
shown.
Describers
Describers inin
lower
lower case
case are
are variables.
variables.
IfIfthe
the describers are
describers are
stacked vertically,then Braces
Braces {{ }}indicate
indicate that
that a
stacked vertically, achoice
choiceofofdescribers
describers
then
only oneonlymay
onebemay
speci- is
be specified. ismandatory.
mandatory.
fied.
The
The default describersare
default describers are shaded.
shaded.
.Parentheses are required if

items inside the parentheses
are specified.
Each of the describers is discussed briefly. Further

details may be discussed under Remarks.
If the describer is in lower case, then it is a variable

and the describer’s type (e.g., Integer, Real, or
Character), allowable range, and default value are
enclosed in parentheses. If no default value is
given, the describer must be specified by the user.
The remarks are generally arranged in order of

importance and indicate such things as which
Bulk Data entries are selected by the Case
Control command, the command’s relationship
to other commands, restrictions and
recommendations on its use, and further details
regarding the describers.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 179

The Case Control Section has several basic functions. Specifically, it:
 Selects loads and constraints.
 Requests printing, plotting, and/or punching of input and out data (plotter commands are described
in Plotting (p. 427) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual).
 Defines the subcase structure for the analysis.
Table 5-3 through Table 5-8 at the end of this section indicate the applicability of each command in all solution
sequences.
Case Control Command Descriptions

Case Control commands may be abbreviated down to the first four characters if the abbreviation is unique
relative to all other commands. If not, the full name of the command (or at least the first eight characters if
the name exceeds eight characters) must be specified in order to avoid errors. Each command is described as
follows:
Description
A brief sentence about the function of the command is given.
Format
If the command line is longer than 72 columns, then it may be continued to the next line with a comma. For
example:
SET 1 = 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
10 THRU 55
Example

Each of the describers is briefly discussed. The describer’s type (e.g., Integer, Real, or Character), allowable
range, and default value are enclosed in parentheses. The describer must be specified by the user if no default
value is given.
Main Index
Remarks
The remarks are generally arranged in order of importance and indicate such things as which Bulk Data
entries are selected by the Case Control command; the command’s relationship to other commands,
restrictions and recommendations on the command’s use; and further descriptions of the describers.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 181
Case Control Command Summary

This section contains a summary of all Case Control commands under the following headings:
Subcase Definition
1. Output Request Delimiters
ENDCARDS Reactivates processing of Bulk Data entries (MSGMESH).

OUTPUT (Case) Delimits the various types of commands for the structure
plotter, curve plotter, grid point stress, and MSGSTRESS.
OUTPUT(PLOT) Beginning of structure plotter output request.
OUTPUT(POST)
or Indicates beginning of grid point stress output requests
SETS DEFINITION and/or p-element data recovery set definition.
OUTPUT(XYOUT)
or Indicates beginning of curve plotter output request.
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
OUTPUT(CARDS) Suppresses processing of Bulk Data entries (MSGMESH).
2. Subcase Delimiters
REPCASE (Case) Delimits and identifies a repeated output request subcase.

SUBCASE (Case) Delimits and identifies a subcase.
SUBCOM (Case) Delimits and identifies a combination subcase.
SYM (Case) Delimits and identifies a symmetry subcase.
SYMCOM (Case) Delimits and identifies a symmetry combination subcase.
3. Subcase Control
MASTER (Case) Allows the redefinition of a MASTER subcase.

MODES (Case) Repeats a subcase.
SUBSEQ (Case) Gives the coefficients for forming a linear combination of the
previous subcases.
SYMSEQ (Case) Gives the coefficients for combining the symmetry subcases
into the total structure.
Main Index
Data Selection
1. Static Load Selection
DEFORM (Case) Selects the element deformation set.

CLOAD (Case) Requests a CLOAD Bulk Data entry that defines a list of superelement
loads and their scale factors in nonlinear static analysis only.
LOAD (Case) Selects an external static loading set.
LOADNAME (Case) Provides a name to be associated with a loading condition.
2. Dynamic Load Selection
DLOAD (Case) Selects a dynamic load or an acoustic source to be applied in a transient

or frequency response problem.
LOADSET (Case) Selects a sequence of static load sets to be applied to the structural
model. The load sets may be referenced by dynamic load commands.
NONLINEAR (Case) Selects nonlinear dynamic load set for transient problems.
3. Constraint Selection
AXISYMMETRIC Selects boundary conditions for an axisymmetric shell problem or

(Case) specifies the existence of fluid harmonics for hydroelastic problems.
AUTOSPC (Case) Requests that stiffness singularities and near singularities be
automatically constrained via single or multipoint constraints.
BC (Case) Identifies multiple boundary conditions for normal modes, buckling,
and flutter analysis in SOLs 103, 105, 145, and 200.
DSYM (Case) Provides for either one or two planes of overall symmetry in DIH-type
cyclic symmetry problems.
MPC (Case) Selects a multipoint constraint set.
SPC (Case) Selects a single-point constraint set to be applied.
STATSUB (Case) Selects the static solution to use in forming the differential stiffness for
buckling, normal modes, complex eigenvalue, frequency response, and
transient response analysis.
SUPORT1 (Case) Selects the fictitious support set (SUPORT1 entries only) to be applied
to the model.
4. Thermal Field Selection
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 183
TEMPERATURE (Case) Selects the temperature set to be used in either material property
calculations, or thermal loading in heat transfer and structural
analysis.
TEMPERATURE (Case) Selects initial temperature distribution for temperature-dependent
(INITIAL) material properties and heat transfer problems.
TEMPERATURE (Case) Selects temperature set for static thermal load.
(LOAD)
TEMPERATURE (Case) Selects temperature set for temperature-dependent material
(MATERIAL) properties.
TSTRU (Case) Defines a temperature set ID for a structures run based on a heat
transfer subcase.
5. Static Solution Conditions
SMETHOD (Case) Selects iterative solver parameters.
6. Dynamic Solution Conditions
CMETHOD (Case) Selects complex eigenvalue extraction parameters.

FREQUENCY (Case) Selects the set of forcing frequencies to be solved in frequency
response problems.
FRF (Case) Specifies data for Frequency Response Function (FRF) generation or
for the FRF Based Assembly (FBA) process.
IC (Case) Selects the initial conditions for direct transient analysis (SOLs 109,
129, and 159).
METHOD (Case) Selects the real eigenvalue extraction parameters.
MODESELECT (Case) Requests a set of computed mode shapes for inclusion in dynamic
analysis.
NSM (Case) Selects nonstructural mass set.
RANDOM (Case) Selects the RANDPS and RANDT1 Bulk Data entries to be used in
random analysis.
RESVEC (Case) Specifies options for and the calculation of residual vectors.
RGYRO (Case) Activates gyroscopic effects and selects RGRYO or UNBALNC
entries.
SDAMPING (Case) Requests modal damping as a function of natural frequency in
modal solutions, or viscoelastic materials as a function of frequency
in direct frequency response analysis.
Main Index
SMETHOD (Case) Selects iterative solver override options in frequency response

analysis.
TSTEP (Case) Selects integration and output time steps for linear or nonlinear
transient analysis.
7. Direct Input Matrix Selection
A2GG (Case) Selects direct input fluid-structure coupling matrix.

B2GG (Case) Selects direct input damping matrices.
B2PP (Case) Selects direct input damping matrices.
K2GG (Case) Selects direct input stiffness matrices.
K2PP (Case) Selects direct input stiffness matrices, which are not included in normal
modes.
K42GG (Case) Selects direct input structural damping matrices.
M2GG (Case) Selects direct input mass matrices.
M2PP (Case) Selects direct input mass matrices, which are not included in normal
modes.
MFLUID (Case) Selects the MFLUID Bulk Data entries to be used to specify the fluid-
structure interface.
P2G (Case) Selects direct input load matrices.
TFL (Case) Selects the transfer function set(s) to be added to the direct input
matrices.
8. Nonlinear Analysis
ENDSTEP (Case) Specifies final analysis step for SOL 700.

ENDTIME (Case) Specifies final analysis time for SOL 700.
NLHARM (Case) Selects the parameters used for nonlinear harmonic response analysis.
NLOPRM (Case) Controls MSC Nastran nonlinear output, debug printout and debug
POST.
NLPARM (Case) Selects the parameters used for nonlinear static analysis.
SMETHOD (Case) Selects iterative solver override parameters in nonlinear static analysis.
STEP (Case) Defines and identifies a nonlinear analysis for SOL 400.
(Case) Transient time step set selection for nonlinear analysis.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 185
9. Aerodynamic Analysis
AECONFIG (Case) Assigns the aerodynamic configuration parameter used to locate the
associated datablocks on the aerodynamic and aeroelastic databases.
AESYMXY (Case) Aerodynamic XY plane of symmetry flag.
AESYMXZ (Case) Aerodynamic XZ plane of symmetry flag.
AEUXREF (Case) Define the reference aerodynamic extra point (controller) vector)
CSSCHD (Case) Aerodynamic control surface schedule.
DIVERG (Case) Selects the divergence parameters in a static aeroelastic divergence
problem.
FMETHOD (Case) Selects the parameters to be used in the aerodynamic flutter analysis.
GUST (Case) Selects the field in an aerodynamic response problem.
TRIM (Case) Selects trim variable constraints in static aeroelastic response.
10. Design Sensitivity and Optimization (SOL 200)
ANALYSIS (Case) Specifies the type of analysis being performed for the current subcase.
AUXCASE (Case) Delimits Case Control commands for an auxiliary model in SOL 200.
AUXMODEL (Case) References an auxiliary model for generation of boundary shapes in shape
optimization.
DESGLB (Case) Selects the design constraints to be applied at the global level in a design
optimization task.
DESMOD (Case) Assigns the design model parameter used to locate the associated
datablocks for merging of two or more SOL 200 using the MultiOpt
tookit application.
DESOBJ (Case) Selects the DRESP1 or DRESP2 entry to be used as the design objective.
DESSUB (Case) Selects the design constraints to be used in a design optimization task for
the current subcase.
DESVAR (Case) Selects a set of DESVAR entries for the design set to be used.
DRSPAN (Case) Selects a set of DRESP1 entries for the current subcase that are to be used
in a DRESP2 or DRESP3 response that spans subcase.
DSAPRT (Case) Specifies design sensitivity output parameters.
MODTRAK (Case) Selects mode tracking options in design optimization (SOL 200).
Main Index
11. .p-Element and p-Adaptivity Analysis
ADAPT (Case) Specifies whether or not the subcase is to participate in the p-adaptivity
process.
ADAPT (Case) Specifies p-adaptivity control parameters.
DATAREC (Case) Requests form and type of output for p-version elements.
OUTRCV (Case) Selects the output options for p-elements defined on an OUTRCV Bulk
Data entry.
SET (Case) Defines a set of element identification numbers only for the SURFACE
and VOLUME commands (grid point stress) or the OUTRCV Bulk Data
entry (p-element data recovery). This form of the SET command must
and can only be specified after the SETS DEFINITION or
OUTPUT(POST) command delimiter.
SETS DEFINITION Delimits the various type of commands under grid point stress and/or
(Case) p-version element set definitions. This command is synonymous with
OUTPUT(POST).
VUGRID (Case) Requests output of view grid and view element entries used in p-version
element data recovery.
12. Adaptive Meshing
HADAPT (Case) Specifies Mesh adaptivity control parameters.
13. Fluid-Structure Analysis
A2GG (Case) Selects a direct input fluid-structure coupling matrix.

ACFPMRESULT Requests output of acoustic field point mesh results.
(Case)
ACPOWER (Case) Request output of the power radiated from the wetted surface.
FLSFSEL (Case) Fluid-structure parameter collector for frequency and fluid superelement
selection.
FLSPOUT (Case) Fluid-structure parameter collector for mode participation.
FLSTCNT (Case) Fluid-structure parameter collector for symmetry and force request.
INTENSITY (Case) Requests output of acoustic intensity on wetted surface.
TRIMGRP (Case) Selection of Trim Component(s)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 187
14. Nastran/ADAMS Interface
ADAMSMNF* Control for Nastran/ADAMS interface modal neutral file (MNF).

(Case)
For MSC Nastran 2004, to ensure compatibility with the Adams msc2mnf
took kit, if the ADAMSMNF Case Control command has the keyword
ADMOUT=YES, the Nastran SYSTEM word OP2NEW is automatically set
to OP2NEW=0. This means that any output2 files generated will have a pre-
MSC Nastran 2004 format.
15. Contact
BCHANGE (Case) Selects the change of the definition contact bodies in contact analysis.
BCMOVE (Case) Contact body movement selection in contact analysis.
BCONCHK (Case) Requests contact model check.
BCONTACT (Case) Requests contact analysis.
BOUTPUT (Case) Requests output for contact analysis.
BSQUEAL (Case) Selects data for brake squeal analysis
UNGLUE (Case) Selects the grids should use standard contact instead of glued contact
in glued bodies.
16. Monte-Carlo simulation
MONCARL (Case) Control for Monte-Carlo simulation.
Output Selection
1. Output Control
ECHO (Case) Controls echo (i.e., printout) of the Bulk Data.

ECHOOFF Suppresses echo of Case Control.
ECHOON Reactivates echo of Case Control.
LABEL (Case) Defines a character string that will appear on the third heading line of each
page of printer output.
LINE (Case) Defines the maximum number of output lines per printed page.
MAXLINES Sets the maximum number of output lines.
(Case)
PAGE (Case) Causes a page eject in the echo of the Case Control Section.
Main Index
PLOTID (Case) Defines a character string that will appear on the first frame of any plotter
output.
POST (Case) Activates postprocessor operations for selected output data.
SKIP (Case) Activates or deactivates the execution of subsequent commands in the Case
Control Section (including plot commands).
SKIPON Defines commands in the Case Control Section that are not to be processed.
SKIPOFF Resumes processing of commands in the Case Control Section.
SUBTITLE Defines a subtitle that will appear on the second heading line of each page of
(Case) printer output.
TITLE (Case) Defines a character string that will appear on the first heading line of each page
of MSC Nastran printer output.
2. Set Definition
MAXMIN (Case) Specifies options for max/min surveys of certain output data associated with
grid points.
OFREQUENCY Selects a set of frequencies for output requests.
(Case)
OMODES (Case) Selects a set of modes for output requests.
OTIME (Case) Selects a set of times for output requests.
PARTN (Case) Specifies a list of grid point identification numbers that will be partitioned
with the DMAP module MATMOD (Option 17). In SOLs 111 and 200,
the PARTN Case Control command specifies the points at which modal
participation factors are to be computed.
SET (Case) Defines a set of element or grid point numbers to be plotted.
SURFACE Defines a surface for the calculation of grid point stresses, strains, or mesh
stress discontinuities.
VOLUME Defines a volume for the calculation of grid point stresses, strains, or mesh
stress discontinuities.
3. Physical Set Output Requests
ACCELERATION (Case) Requests the form and type of acceleration vector output.
BOUTPUT (Case) Requests line or 3D (SOL 600) contact output.
CMSENRGY (Case) Requests the output of component (superelement) modal strain,
kinetic, and damping energies.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 189
DISPLACEMENT (Case), Requests the form and type of displacement or pressure vector
VECTOR (Case), or output. Note: PRESSURE and VECTOR are equivalent
PRESSURE (Case) commands.
EDE (Case) Requests the output of the energy loss per cycle in selected
elements.
EKE (Case) Requests the output of the kinetic energy in selected elements.
ELSDCON (Case) Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on element stresses (see
STRESS).
ENTHALPY (Case) Requests form of enthalpy vector output in transient heat transfer
analysis (SOL 159).
ESE (Case) Requests the output of the strain energy in selected elements.
EQUILIBRIUM (Case) Requests equilibrium force balance output.
FATIGUE (Case) Request a fatigue analysis with life/damage output in SOLs 101,
103, 108, 111, or 112.
FLUX (Case) Requests the form and type of gradient and flux output in heat
transfer analysis.
FORCE (Case) or Requests the form and type of element force output or particle
ELFORCE velocity output in coupled fluid-structural analysis. Note:
ELFORCE is an equivalent command.
GPFORCE (Case) Requests grid point force balance at selected grid points.
GPKE (Case) Requests the output of the kinetic energy at selected grid points in
normal modes analysis only.
GPSDCON (Case) Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on grid point stresses
(see GPSTRESS).
GPSTRAIN (Case) Requests grid points strains for printing only.
GPSTRESS (Case) Requests grid point stresses for printing only.
GVECTOR (Case) Requests the form and type of g-set eigenvector output in SOLs
200 and 400.
HDOT (Case) Requests form of rate of change of enthalpy vector output in
transient heat transfer analysis (SOL 159).
HISTOGRAM (Case) Requests resultant stress/strain time history and/or rainflow cycle
histogram output from entities of a FATIGUE output request in
SOL 101, 103, and 112.
MCFRACTION (Case) Requests modal contribution fractions output.
MODALKE (Case) Requests modal kinetic energy output.
MODALSE (Case) Requests modal strain energy output.
Main Index
MEFFMASS (Case) Requests the output of the modal effective mass, participation
factors, and modal effective mass fractions in normal modes
analysis.
MPCFORCES (Case) Requests the form and type of multipoint force of constraint vector
output.
NLSTRESS (Case) Requests the form and type of nonlinear element stress output in
SOL 106.
NOUTPUT (Case) Requests physical output in cyclic symmetry problems.
OLOAD (Case) Requests the form and type of applied load vector output.
RCROSS (Case) Requests computation and output of cross-power spectral density
and cross-correlation functions in random analysis.
SPCFORCES (Case) Requests the form and type of single-point force of constraint
vector output.
STRAIN (Case) Requests the form and type of strain output.
STRESS (Case) or Requests the form and type of element stress output. Note:
ELSTRESS ELSTRESS is an equivalent command.
STRFIELD (Case) Requests the computation of grid point stresses for graphical
postprocessing and mesh stress discontinuities.
THERMAL (Case) Requests the form and type of temperature output.
VELOCITY (Case) Requests the form and type of velocity vector output.
4. Solution Set Output Requests
AEROF (Case) Requests the aerodynamic loads on aerodynamic control points.

APRESSURE (Case) Requests the aerodynamic pressures in static aeroelastic response.
HARMONICS (Case) Controls the number of harmonics output in axisymmetric shell or
axisymmetric fluid problems; controls the number of harmonics to be
used for analysis in cyclic symmetry problems.
HOUTPUT (Case) Requests harmonic output in cyclic symmetry problems.
MPRES (Case) Requests the pressure for selected wetted surface elements when virtual
mass (MFLUID) is used.
NLLOAD (Case) Requests the form and type of nonlinear load output for transient
problems.
SACCELERATION Requests the form and type of solution set acceleration output.
(Case)
SDISPLACEMENT Requests the form and type of solution set displacement output.
(Case)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 191
SVECTOR (Case) Requests the form and type of solution set eigenvector output.
SVELOCITY (Case) Requests the form and type of solution set velocity output.
TRIMF (Case) Specifies options for the output of trim loads from a static aeroelastic
analysis as FORCE/MOMENT Bulk Data entries.
5. Model Checkout
ELSUM (Case) Requests a summary of element properties for output.

GROUNDCHECK Requests grounding check analysis on stiffness matrix to expose
(Case) unintentional constraints by moving the model rigidly.
WEIGHTCHECK At each stage of the mass matrix reduction, computes rigid body mass
(Case) and compares with the rigid body mass t the g-set.
Superelement Control
EXTDRIN (Case) Requests the job to perform an external superelement data recovery
restart. Also specifies the storage media of the boundary solution data.
EXTDROUT(Case) Requests the job to store external superelement boundary displacements
and column labels; e.g., eigenvalues, forcing frequencies, time steps. Also
specifies the storage media of the boundary solution data.
EXTSEOUT (Case) Specifies the data to be saved for an external superelement, and the
medium on which the data is to be saved.
SEALL (Case) Specifies the superelement identification numbers of phase 1 processing
wherein all matrices and loads are generated and assembled. Controls
execution of the solution sequence.
SEDR (Case) Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which data
recovery will be performed.
SEDV (Case) Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which the design
variables will be processed.
SEEXCLUDE (Case) Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which all matrices
and loads will not be assembled into the downstream superelement.
SEFINAL (Case) Specifies the superelement identification number of the final
superelement to be assembled.
SEKREDUCE (Case) Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which stiffness
matrices are assembled and reduced.
SELGENERATE Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which static loads
(Case) will be generated.
Main Index
SELREDUCE (Case) Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which the static
load matrices will be assembled and reduced.
SEMGENERATE Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which stiffness,
(Case) mass, and damping matrices will be generated.
SEMREDUCE (Case) Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which the mass
and damping matrices will be assembled and reduced. In buckling
analysis, the differential stiffness matrices are assembled and reduced.
SERESP (Case) Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which the design
sensitivity matrices will be generated.
SOLUTION (Case) Selects the solution ID for a 3rd step external superelement data recovery
restart in SOL 400.
SUPER (Case) Assigns a subcase(s) to a superelement or set of superelements.
Miscellaneous
$ Used to insert comments into the input file. Comment statements may
appear anywhere within the input file.
BEGIN BULK (Case) Designates the end of the Case Control Section and/or the beginning of
a Bulk Data Section.
INCLUDE (Case) Inserts an external file into the input file. The INCLUDE statement may
appear anywhere within the input data file.
NSM (Case) Request nonstructural mass distribution selection.
OUTPUT (Case) Delimits the various types of commands for the structure plotter, curve
plotter, grid point stress, and MSGSTRESS.
PARAM (Case) Specifies values for parameters.
POST (Case) Controls selection of data to be output for postprocessing.
RIGID (Case) Selects type of rigid element formulations to be used.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 193

$ Comment
For SOL 700 only, the string ‘$S700’ (starting in column 1 with a blank in column 6) may be used to transfer
any Case Control string directly to Dytran. For example:
$S700 ELOUT(TEST1)=XVEL,YVEL,ZVEL,DENSITY,SIE,PRESSURE,fmat
will become
ELOUT(TEST1)=XVEL,YVEL,ZVEL,DENSITY,SIE,PRESSURE,fmat
in the Case Control Section of the Dytran input (jid.dytr.dat) file. Please see descriptions of ‘$S700’ Case
Control entries elsewhere in this section.
Format:
Example:
Remarks:
Main Index
Direct Case Control Command for SOL 700
$S700 Direct Case Control Command for SOL 700
All entries which start with $S700 in the Case Control Section will be passed directly to the SOL 700 solver.
No need to use the nastran classical case control output (STRESS,DISP,…). This option controls ARC (state
file) and THS (time history file) output files.
You need to specify the following for a complete output specification:
1. Type of the file
2. What entities (e.g., grid points,
3. What results are output
4. How often it is saved
5. How often data is written
Format:
$S700 TYPE(logical_file) = ARCHIVE
$S700 Entity Type(logical_file) = setid
$S700 SET setid = idi
$S700 Entity Var(logical_file) = var
$S700 TIMES(logical_file) = ti
$S700 STEPS(logical_file) = stepi
$S700 SAVE(logical_file) = n
Example:
$S700 TYPE (elements) = ARCHIVE
$S700 ELEMENTS (elements) = 1
$S700 SET 1 = 16805 THRU 16875 16877 THRU 16947 16949 THRU 18080 ,
$S700 59 THRU 945 1067 1068 1069 1070 1181 THRU 1412 ,
$S700 1423 THRU 2965 3076 THRU 3930 4041 THRU 4895 ,
$S700 5006 THRU 5860 5971 THRU 7744 10855 THRU 12025 ,
$S700 12138 THRU 12990 13103 THRU 13955 14068 THRU 14920 ,
$S700 15033 THRU 15885 15998 THRU 16875 16877 THRU 16947 ,
$S700 16949 THRU 18080 16805 THRU 16875 16877 THRU 16947 ,
$S700 17005 THRU 18080 16949 THRU 17004 BY 1
$S700 ELOUT (elements) = EFFSTS, PRESSURE, FMAT, YMOM ,
$S700 QDIS,
$S700 MASST
$S700 TIMES (elements) = 0,THRU,END,BY,4e-4
$S700 SAVE (elements) = 1
Describer Meaning
logical_file The logical name of the file to which the user output is written. The logical name may
not contain any spaces or special characters and must be restricted to 8 characters or less.
(Characters; Required)
setid Number of a SET command. Only data for elements that appear in the set are output.
(Integer > 0; Required)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 195
Direct Case Control Command for SOL 700
Describer Meaning
Idi Identification numbers at which the output is requested. “THRU” and “BY”; for the
“THRU” and “BY” options, respectively. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0 or characters;
Required)
Var Variable name to be output. See Remark 7. (Characters; Required)
Ti Times at which output is required. “THRU” and “BY”; for the “THRU” and “BY”
options, respectively. “END” indicates the end time of analysis. See Remarks 3. and 4.
(Real > 0.0 or characters; Required)
stepi Steps at which output is required. “THRU” and “BY”; for the “THRU” and “BY”
options, respectively. See Remarks 3. and 4. (Integer > 0 or characters; Required)
N The number of times an output file is written before it is closed and saved. (Integer > 0;
Required)
Remarks:
1. Default of ARC output control is set to the ARC file generation of all Eulerian elements with all
available variables.
2. Continuation lines are supported for SET, ELOUT, TIMES and STEPS. The continuation lines
must start with at least two spaces after the $S700 string. A comma (,) at the end of a line signifies
that the next line is a continuation.
3. Either STEPS or TIMES must be specified. STEPS and TIMES can not be used for the same
logical_file.
4. A list of times or steps should be in ascending order.
5. Check Chapter 11: Outputting Results in MSC Nastran SOL700 User’s Guide. It includes all Entity types,
Entity variables and Variable names.
Main Index
Selects a Direct Input Fluid-Structure Coupling Matrix
A2GG (Case) Selects a Direct Input Fluid-Structure Coupling Matrix
Selects a direct input fluid-structure coupling matrix.
Format:
A2GG = name
Example:
A2GG = AGG0
Describer Meaning
name Name of a fluid-structure coupling matrix that is input on the DMIG Bulk Data entry.
Remarks:
1. DMIG entries will not be used unless selected by the A2GG Case Control command.
2. This entry must be above subcase level or in the first subcase.
3. If the A2GG Case Control command selects a DMIG entry, then Nastran will add the selected fluid-
structure coupling matrix to the computed coupling matrix. To replace the computed coupling
matrix with the selected A2GG matrix, set PARAM,ASCOUP,NO. The user may still define panels
with the panel selection procedure.
4. When filling out the DMIG entries: IFO = 1, NCOL = g-size, GJ-column index corresponds to fluid
points, CJ = 0, Gi-row index corresponds to structural points, Ci-corresponds to DOF, Ai-the area
values.
5. A2GG is supported in dynamic solutions with fluid-structure coupling.
6. Only one A2GG command should be used. It must appear above any subcase structure.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 197
Acceleration Output Request
ACCELERATION (Case) Acceleration Output Request
Requests form and type of acceleration vector output.
Format:
SORT1 PRINT, PUNCH REAL or IMAG PSDF, ATOC ,CRMS
ACCELERATION ( , , , ,
SORT2 PLOT PHASE or RALL
RPRINT
, RPUNCH ,CID ,
NORPRINT
 ALL 
   
[TRMC =  ALL  =  n 
 setid   
 NONE 
Examples:
ACCELERATION=5
ACCELERTION(SORT2, PHASE)=ALL
ACCELERTION(SORT1, PRINT, PUNCH, PHASE)=17
ACCELERATION(SORT2, PRINT, PSDF, CRMS, RPUNCH)=20
ACCELERATION(PRINT, RALL, NORPRINT)=ALL
ACCELERATION(TRMC=100)=101
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each load,
frequency, eigenvalue, or time, depending on the solution sequence.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of frequency or time for each grid
point.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium.
PLOT Computes, but does not print or punch, acceleration output.
REAL or IMAG Requests rectangular format (real and imaginary) of complex output. Use of
either REAL or IMAG yields the same output.
PHASE Requests polar format (magnitude and phase) of complex output. Phase output
is in degrees.
PSDF Requests the power spectral density function be calculated for random analysis
postprocessing. Request must be made above the subcase level and RANDOM
must be selected in the Case Control Section.
ATOC Requests the autocorrelation function be calculated for random analysis
Main Index
Describer Meaning
CRMS Requests the cumulative root mean square function be calculated for random
analysis postprocessing. Request must be made above the subcase level and
RANDOM must be selected in the Case Control Section.
RALL Requests all of PSDF, ATOC and CRMS be calculated for random analysis
RPRINT Writes random analysis results in the print file (Default).
NORPRINT Disables the writing of random analysis results in the print file.
RPUNCH Writes random analysis results in the punch file.
CID Requests printing of output coordinate system ID in printed output file (.f06).
ALL Accelerations at all points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only accelerations
of points with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will
be output (Integer > 0).
NONE Accelerations at no points will be output.
TRMC Selects a set of trim components for output. The default is NONE. See Remark
10..
TRMC=ALL: Output the solution results from all trim components involved
in the analysis by Case Control command, TRIMGRP.
setid is the identification of a trim component set, defined by a previously

appearing SET command. (Integer>0).
Remarks:
1. Both PRINT and PUNCH may be requested.
2. Acceleration output is only available for transient and frequency response problems. Acceleration is
only available for transient and frequency response problems and when response spectra is requested
in eigenvalue analysis.
3. See Remark 2 under DISPLACEMENT (Case), 282 for a discussion of SORT1 and SORT2.
4. ACCELERATION=NONE allows overriding an overall output request.
5. The PLOT option is used when curve plots are desired in the magnitude/phase representation and
no printer request is present for magnitude/phase representation.
6. Acceleration results are output in the global coordinate system (see field CD on the GRID Bulk Data
entry).
7. The option of PSDF, ATOC, CRMS, and RALL, or any combination of them, can be selected for
random analysis.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 199
8. Note that the CID keyword affects only grid point related output, such as displacement (DISP),
velocity (VELO), acceleration (ACCEL), OLOAD, SPCforce (SPCF), and MPCforce (MPCF). In
addition, the CID keyword needs to appear only once in a grid-related output request anywhere in
the Case Control Section to turn on the printing algorithm.
9. The selected trim components must be specified by TRIMGRP for the analysis. Since the same grid
point identifications can be shared by several trim components as well as the structure/cavity,
unintentional output could happen.
10. TRMC subcommand should be used to identify the IDs of trim component for which data recovery
operation is requested. The interface grid IDs of trim components that data recovery is desired should
be included in the set n of the request.
Main Index
Acoustic Field Point Mesh Results Output Request
ACFPMRESULT (Case) Acoustic Field Point Mesh Results Output Request
Requests output of field point mesh results. This Case Control command can be used in SOL 108 and SOL
111 only.
Format:
  
ACFPMRESULT  SORT1 , PRINT,PUNCH , VELOCITY =  YES 
 SORT2 PLOT  NO 
  ALL 
REAL or IMAG ,     
POWER =  YES   =  n 
PHASE  NO    
 NONE 
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as tabular listing of grid points for each excitation
frequency (Default).
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of excitation frequencies for each
grid point.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium (Default).
PLOT Results are generated but not output to f06 or pch file.
The PLOT option is used if results are requested for postprocessing but no
printer output is desired.
VELOCITY Requests output of particle velocities (Default = NO).
REAL or IMAG Requests rectangular format (real or imaginary) of complex output. Use of
ALL Radiated power will be processed for the wetted surface and all panels.
PHASE Requests polar format (magnitude and phase) of complex output. Phase
output is in degrees.
POWER Requests output of power through field point mesh (Default = YES).
ALL Results of all field point meshes, AFPMIDs, will be processed.
n Set identification of a previously defined set of field point mesh identifiers,
AFPMIDs, Results will be processed for the field point meshes in this set only.
NONE Field point mesh results will not be processed. ACFPMRESULT = NONE
overrides an overall request.
Remark:
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 201
Acoustic Field Point Mesh Results Output Request
2. If the acoustic model references multiple PACINF entries that do not have coincident pole locations
and if the acoustic field point meshes contain element data, then a PACINFID parameter entry is
required in the bulk data for each mesh to identify the PACINF bulk data entry that is used to define
the location of the pole. Data recovery operations require that the element surface normal vector
point away from the pole location.
3. The member of set for ACFPMRESULT must be the IDs of 'BEGIN AFPM='; not GRID IDs or
element IDs under a 'BEGIN AFPM='.
Main Index
Acoustic Power Output Request
ACPOWER (Case) Acoustic Power Output Request
Requests output of the power radiated from the wetted surface.

This Case Control command can be used in SOL 108 and SOL 111 only.
Format:
 ALL 
   
ACPOWER  SORT1 , PRINT,PUNCH , [ CSV = unit ] =  n 
 SORT2 PLOT   
 NONE 
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of panels for each excitation frequency.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of excitation frequencies for each panel
(Default).
The PLOT option is used if results are requested for postprocessing but no printer
output is desired.
CSV Results will be written to a .CSV file. See Remark 2.
unit Unit of the .csv file as used on the ASSIGN statement.
ALL Radiated power will be processed for the wetted surface and all panels.
n Set identification of a previously defined set of panels. Radiated power will be
processed for the wetted surface and all panels in the referenced set.
NONE Radiated power will not be processed.
ACPOWER = NONE overrides an overall request.
Remarks:
2. If output to an .CSV file is requested, the file must be assigned with logical key “USERFILE” and
FORM=FORMATTED, e.g.,
ASSIGN USERFILE = ‘myfile.csv’ UNIT=50 FORM=FORMATTED STATUS=NEW
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 203
Elements to be Reactivated in SOL 600
ACTIVAT (Case) Elements to be Reactivated in SOL 600
Indicates which Bulk Data ACTIVAT entry is used to control the elements to be activated in this subcase.
This entry may only be used in SOL 600.
Format:
ACTIVAT=N
Example:
ACTIVAT=3
Describer Meaning
N ID of a matching Bulk Data ACTIVAT entry specifying the elements to be
reactivated for this subcase.
Remarks:
1. Different sets of elements can be reactivated during different subcases using this Case Control
command.
2. The elements specified in the matching ACTIVAT Bulk Data entry must currently be in a
deactivated state.
Main Index
ACTRAN Trimmed Material Matrices for SOL 108/111
ACTRIM (Case) ACTRAN Trimmed Material Matrices for SOL 108/111
Select ACTRAN trimmed material matrices.
Format:
ACTRIM = name1, name2, … namen
Example:
ACTRIM = FLOOR_F, FLOOR_R, DASH
SET 10 = FR_LH, RR_LH
ACTRIM = 10
Describer Meaning
namei Name of the ACTRAN trimmed material matrices that is input on the ACTRIM
bulk data entry, or name list.
Remarks:
1. This entry must be above subcase level or in the first subcase.
2. If the ACTRIM Case Control command selects ACTRIM bulk data entries, Nastran will add the
selected ACTRAN matrices to fluid-structure coupling problem in all subcases.
3. ACTRIM is supported in frequency response analysis for fluid-structure coupling problem and the
frequency dependent algorithm will be adopted automatically.
4. PARAM, ACSYM, YES should be set for ACTRIM (default).
5. The effect of ACTRIM will be considered in standard frequency response analysis and participation
factor analysis by PFMODE, PFPANEL and PFGRID.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 205
p-Adaptivity Subcase Selection
ADACT (Case) p-Adaptivity Subcase Selection
Specifies whether or not the subcase is to participate in the p-adaptivity process.
Format:
 ALL 
 
ADACT =  n 
 
 NONE 
Examples:
ADACT=NONE
ADACT=10
Describer Meaning
ALL All subcases will participate in the error analysis.
n The first n modes in a normal modes analysis will participate in the error analysis
(Integer > 0).
NONE The current subcase will not participate in the error analysis.
Remarks:
1. ADACT is processed only when an adaptive analysis is requested. An ADAPT Case Control
command must be present in order to have an p-adaptive analysis.
2. In a static analysis, ADACT=n is equivalent to ADACT=ALL, and ALL means that the results of all
subcases will be included in the error analysis. When ADACT=NONE in any subcase, the results of
that subcase are excluded from the error analysis and adaptivity.
3. In an eigenvalue analysis, ALL means that the results of all the modes will be included in the error
analysis.
4. Only one ADACT command may be specified per subcase.
Main Index
Control for Nastran/ADAMS Interface
ADAMSMNF* (Case) Control for Nastran/ADAMS Interface
Control for Nastran/ADAMS Interface modal neutral file (.mnf )
Format:
 NO   YES 
ADAMSMNF FLEXBODY =   , FLEXONLY =   ,
 YES   NO 
 NO   NO 
ADMCHECK =   , ADMOUT =   ,
 YES   YES 
 YES   YES 
OUTGSTRS =   , OUTGSTRN =   ,
 NO   NO 
 NO   NO 
OUTSTRS =   , OUTSTRN =  
 YES   YES 
 – 1.0   1.0e8 
V1ORTHO =   , V2ORTHO =   ,
 value1   value2 
 PARTIAL 
 
 CONSTANT   NONE   MNF 
     
MINVAR =  FULL  , PSETID =  setid plotel  , EXPORT =  DB 
     
 NONE   ALL   BOTH 
 RIGID 
 
Example(s):
ADAMSMNF FLEXBODY = YES
Note: *Nastran/ADAMS modal stress recovery (MSR) interface is also available. See Remark 19.
CAUTION: Do not use mode=i8 (64 bit integer, 64 bit float) option when submitting the
Nastran job if the ADAMSMNF EXPORT option specifies DB or BOTH and your intent is
to use the DB in ADAMS. ADAMS does not currently support i8 DB files. If you use
mode=i8, you must use the MNF in ADAMS.
NASTRAN/ADAMS MNF can be used with SOL 400 as described in Remark 21.
Describer Meaning
FLEXBODY Requests that the Nastran/ADAMS interface be executed.
NO Executes standard Nastran.
YES Executes Nastran/ADAMS interface.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 207
Describer Meaning
FLEXONLY Requests standard DMAP solution and data recovery following Nastran/Adams
interface execution.
YES Executes only the Nastran/ADAMS interface.
NO Executes Nastran/ADAMS interface and standard DMAP solution and data
recovery.
ADMCHECK Requests Nastran/ADAMS diagnostic output.
YES Prints diagnostic output.
NO Suppresses diagnostic output.
ADMOUT Requests that the Nastran/ADAMS interface outputs Nastran .op2 files.
YES .op2 files are generated.
NO Requests that .op2 files are not generated.
OUTGSTRS Controls grid point stress output to .op2 file or .mnf or both.
YES Grid point stress is output to .op2 file or .mnf or both.
NO Grid point stress is not output to .op2 file, or .mnf file.
OUTGSTRN Controls grid point strain output to .op2 file, or .mnf or both.
YES Grid point strain is output to .op2 file or .mnf or both.
NO Grid point strain is not output to .op2 file or .mnf.
OUTSTRS Controls element stress output to .op2 file.
YES Element stress is output to .op2 file.
NO Element stress is not output to .op2 file.
OUTSTRN Controls element strain output to .op2 file.
YES Element strain is output to .op2 file.
NO Element strain is not output to .op2 file.
V1ORTHO Lower frequency bound of the Craig-Bampton modes in cycles/unit time.
value1 Value of lower bound.
V2ORTHO Higher frequency bound of the Craig-Bampton modes in cycles/unit time.
value2 Value of higher bound.
MINVAR Requests the type of mass invariants to be computed. See Remark 3.
FULL All nine mass invariants will be calculated.
CONSTANT Only mass invariants (5-1), (5-2), (5-6), and (5-7) will be calculated.
PARTIAL All mass invariants except (5-5) and (5-9) will be calculated.
NONE No mass invariants are computed.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
RIGID No modal information is output to the .mnf file. Only units, grid point
coordinates, element connectivity, interface nodes, and invariant (5-1), (5-2), and
(5-7) data are shared in the .mnf file.
EXPORT Controls modal output to MNF file, Nastran database or both.
PSETID Selects a set of elements (including PLOTEL) whose grids are retained in the
MNF, and whose connectivity defines face geometry for ADAMS display.
setid plotel Specified in the OUTPUT(PLOT) Section of Nastran.
ALL Select all the sets defined in the OUTPUT(PLOT) Section of Nastran.
Remarks:
1. This entry represents a collection of PARAM,name,value entries. A license is required for the
Nastran/ADAMS interface.
2. ADAMSMNF FLEXBODY = YES is required to execute the Nastran/ADAMS interface, all other
ADAMSMNF items are optional. The ADAMSMNF FLEXBODY = YES must occur above subcase
level.
If you want standard Nastran data recovery in addition to that produced for ADAMS, you need to
run with FLEXONLY=NO. The orthonormal modes produced for ADAMS and the modes
produced by the standard MSC Nastran run may be viewed in Patran if run with PARAM,POST,0.
3. The nine mass invariants are defined by Eqs. (5-1) through (5-9):
N
1
I
1×1
=  mp (5-1)
p =1
N
2
I
3×1
=  mp sp (5-2)
p = 1
3 N
Ij
3×M
=  m p Φ p j = 1, … , M (5-3)
p =1
N
4
I *
3×M
=  m p s̃ pΦ + I p Φ p
p
(5-4)
p =1
5 N
Ij
3×M
=  m p φ̃ pj Φ p j = 1, …, M (5-5)
p= 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 209
N
6
I T *T *
M×M
=  mp Φp Φp + Φp Ip Φp (5-6)
p =1
N
7
I T
3×3
=  m p s̃ p s̃ p + I p (5-7)
p =1
8 N
Ij
3×3
=  m p s̃ p φ̃ pj j = 1, …, M (5-8)
p= 1
9 N
Ijk
3×3
=  m p φ̃ pj φ̃ pk j, k = 1, …, M (5-9)
p=1
where s p = [ xyz ] T are the coordinates of grid point p in the basic coordinate system;
0 –z y
s̃ p = z 0 –x
–y x 0
is the skew-symmetric vector cross product operator; Φ p is the partitioned orthogonal modal matrix
that corresponds to the translational degrees-of-freedom of grid p; I p is the inertia tensor; Φ *p is the
partitioned orthogonal modal matrix that corresponds to the rotational degrees-of-freedom of grid p;
φ̃ pf is the skew-symmetric matrix formed for each grid translational degree-of-freedom for each mode;
M is the number of modes; and N is the number of grid points.
4. The preceding mass invariant calculation currently depends on a lumped mass formulation. The
parameter PARAM,COUPMASS should not be specified when executing the Nastran/ADAMS
interface. Since p-elements use a coupled mass formulation, they should not be used.
5. If the CONM1 is used, M21, M31, and M32 entries should be left blank.
6. If PARAM,GRDPNT,value specified, mass invariants 1I , 2I , and 7I will be obtained from an
Nastran grid point weight generator execution in the basic system.
7. The following DTI,UNITS Bulk Data entry is required for a FLEXBODY=YES run:
Since ADAMS is not a unitless code (as is Nastran), units must be specified. A DTI Bulk Data entry
provides ‘UNITS’ (a unique identifier) input as the following example illustrates. Once identified, the
units will apply to all superelements in the model. Acceptable character input strings are listed in the
following table.
Format:
DTI UNITS 1 MASS FORCE LENGTH TIME
Example:
DTI UNITS 1 KG N M S
Main Index
Mass: Force:
kg - kilogram n - newton
lbm - pound-mass lbf - pounds-force
slug - slug kgf - kilograms-force
gram - gram ozf - ounce-force
ozm - ounce-mass dyne - dyne
klbm - kilo pound-mass (1000.lbm) kn - kilonewton
mgg - megagram klbf - kilo pound-force (1000.lbf)
slinch - 12 slugs mn - millinewton
ug - microgram un - micronewton
ng - nanogram nn - nanonewton
uston - US ton
Length: Time:
km - kilometer h - hour
m - meter min - minute
cm - centimeter s - sec
mm - millimeter ms - millisecond
mi - mile us - microsecond
ft - foot nanosec - nanosecond
in - inch d - day
um- micrometer
nm - nanometer
ang - angstrom
yd - yard
mil - milli-inch
uin - micro-inch
A note of clarification about UNITS and its relation to Nastran’s WTMASS parameter: WTMASS,
though necessary to achieve units consistency in Nastran, is ignored in the output for ADAMS. Units
data for ADAMS is supplied on the UNITS DTI entry. For example, consider a model with mass in
grams, force in Newtons, length in meters, and time in seconds. A WTMASS parameter equal to
0.001 would ensure that Nastran works with a consistent set of units (kg, N, and m). The units
reported to ADAMS should then be: “DTI, UNITS, 1, GRAM, N, M, S.”
8. OUTSTRS or OUTSTRN entries require the use of the standard Nastran STRESS= or STRAIN=
Case Control commands to produce element stress or strain. STRESS(PLOT)= or STRAIN(PLOT)=
will suppress stress or strain output to the Nastran .f06 file. The OUTSTRS or OUTSTRN entries
are required for importing ADAMS results into MSC Fatigue. See the Nastran/ADAMS/durability
documentation for more information.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 211
9. OUTGSTRS or OUTGSTRN entries require the use of the standard Nastran STRESS= or
STRAIN= Case Control commands used in conjunction with GPSTRESS= or GPSTRAIN= Case
Control commands to produce grid point stress or strain. GPSTRESS(PLOT)= or
GPSTRAIN(PLOT)= will suppress grid stress or strain output to the Nastran .f06 file.
10. To reduce the finite element mesh detail for dynamic simulations, PSETID=set_entry is used to
define a set of PLOTELs or other elements used to display the component in ADAMS. If a mass
invariant computation is requested, this option can significantly reduce the size of the .mnf without
compromising accuracy in the ADAMS simulation.
If PSETID specifies an existing set from the OUTPUT(PLOT) Section of Nastran, this single set is
used explicitly to define elements to display in ADAMS. Otherwise, the Nastran Case Control
Section will be searched for a matching set ID. This matching set ID list then represents a list of
OUTPUT(PLOT) defined elements sets, the union of which will be used to define a set of PLOTELS
or other elements used to display the component in ADAMS. If the user wishes to select all of the sets
in the OUTPUT(PLOT) Section, then use PSETID=ALL.
The elements defined may include rigid element IDs. When defining these sets, do not use
EXCLUDE and EXCEPT descriptions.
If a superelement analysis is being executed, any element defined on the PSETID=set_entry that lies
entirely on the superelement boundary (i.e., all of its grids are a-set or exterior to the superelement)
must also be specified on a SEELT Bulk Data entry. The SEELT entry would not be required for part
superelements, as boundary elements stay with their component.
OUTPUT(PLOT)
SET 7722 = 10001 THRU 10010
11. The ADMOUT=YES option is intended for users who plan to import ADAMS results into MSC
Fatigue. This option requires the following assignment command in the File Management Section of
the Nastran file:
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’name.out’ STATUS=UNKNOWN UNIT=20 FORM=UNFORM
It causes .op2 files with an .out extension to be generated for input into MSC Fatigue.
FLEXBODY=YES is required with its use. The files’ outputs are: DTI-units, SE-number of
superelements (9999 if residual), SEIDX-superelement id, ASETX-size of a-set, BGPDTS-grid
location table, GEOM2S-element connections, GEOM4S-constraints and sets, MGGEW-physical
mass external sort with weight mass removed, VAEXT-a-set partition vector, VGEXT-g-set partition
vector, VAPEXT-eigenvalue size partition vector, MAAEW-modal mass, KAAE-modal stiffness,
BAAE-modal damping, RAE-modal preload, PAE-modal loads, CMODEXT-component modes,
OES1-element stress shapes, OSTR1-element strain shapes, OGS1-grid point stress shapes,
OGSTR1-grid point strain shapes, OGSIPL-grid point physical preload stress, OGTRIPL-grid point
physical preload strain. The files are output for each superelement and their generation depends on
the loading and output requests.
To ensure compatibility with the ADAMS .op2-to-.mnf translator, if the ADAMSMNF Case
Control command has the keyword ADMOUT=YES, the Nastran SYSTEM word OP2NEW is
automatically set to OP2NEW=0. This means that any .op2 files generated will have a pre-MSC
Nastran 2004 format.
Main Index
12. Environment variables controlling .mnf generation can be set before submitting the Nastran job, or
by using the Nastran keyword ‘MNFWRITEOPTIONS’ which can be abbreviated to any short
unique string such as ‘MNFW’. The Nastran keyword can be entered on the NASTRAN submittal
command line or in a user .nastran rc file. For example, interior grids and elements can be removed
in the .mnf by entering, prior to the Nastran submittal, with Korn shell:
export MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS=strip_face
with C shell:
setenv MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS=strip_face
Or, at the time of Nastran submittal:
nastran_submittal_command jid MNFW=strip_face
Consult the ADAMS/Flex documentation for more information on the use of environment variables
during .mnf generation.
The command
nastran_submittal_command help mnfw
will generate the description of the symbol keyword.
The command
nastran_submittal_command help all
will generate a complete set of Nastran submittal keywords.
13. .mnf naming convention is as follows: for a single superelement run, ‘jid.mnf ’; for a residual only or
multiple superelement run ‘jid_seid.mnf’, etc.; where seid1 and seid2 are the integer numbers of the
superelement. The default location of these files is the same directory as the jid.f06 file. See the
ASSIGN .mnf command to change directory location.
14. When supplying SPOINT/QSET combinations, there should be a sufficient number of
combinations to correctly capture the modal shapes. If n is the number of modes specified on the
EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries and p is the number of loadcases specified, then the number of
SPOINTs(ns) should be at least ns = n + ( 6 + p ) assuming that residual flexibility is on. In general,
there cannot be too many SPOINTS, as excess ones will simply be truncated with no performance
penalty.
15. The user can have Nastran automatically specify the SPOINT/QSET by including, above the Case
Control Section the parameter PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES. In this case no SPOINT/QSET can
appear in the Bulk Data. See the PARAM,AUTOQSET description for detailed requirements or
limitations.
16. By default, MSC Nastran 2005 will create a version 6.0 MNF. ADAMS 2005 is able to read the
version 6.0 .mnf file. Earlier ADAMS versions are not able to read a 6.0 .mnf file. Nastran can be
instructed to write a backward-compatible .mnf file by submitting the Nastran job with
MNFWRITEOPTIONS=full_str. Alternatively, the user may set the environment variable
MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS to ‘full_str’. See Remark 12. for more information on controlling
the .mnf format.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 213
17. In addition to modal stiffness and modal mass matrices, the modal damping matrix may also be
output to the .mnf. The damping allowed is the standard Nastran damping matrix consisting of [ B gg ]
viscous damping, ( 1 ⁄ w4 ) [ K4 gg ] structural damping, ( g ⁄ ( w3 ) + α2 ) [ K gg ] structural and Rayleigh
damping, and ( α1 ) [ M gg ] Rayleigh damping. Where g is set by PARAM,G,value, w3 is set by
PARAM,W3,value; w4 is set by PARAM,W4,value; α1 is set by PARAM,ALPHA1,value,0.;and α2
is set by PARAM,ALPHA2,value,0.
Additionally, [ B2H ] modal damping can be included by use of the Case Control command
SDAMP=n. For part superelement or superelement analyses, modal damping for each individual part
or superelement can be controlled by PARAM,SESDAMP,YES or, for a Nastran/ADAMS interface
run, by PARAM,SESDAMP,FRB (PARAM,SESDAMP,NO is the default).
SESDAMP
sesdamp = no Modal damping for each superelement SDAMP  TABDMP1
using the free boundary modes. SDAMP above subcase.
sesdamp = yes Modal damping for each superelement SDAMP  TABDMP1
using the fixed boundary CMS modes. SDAMP in superelement subcase.
sesdamp = frb Modal damping for each superelement SDAMP  TABDMP1
using the free boundary modes. SDAMP in superelement subcase.
For part superelements
each part may have a PARAM,SESDAMP
The Nastran/ADAMS interface does not allow for adding modal damping to structural damping
using PARAM,KDAMP,-1.
Direct input damping may also be included with the Case Control command B2GG=n. For part
superelement or superelement analyses, use of this command with the Nastran/ADAMS interface
requires fully expanded case control.
18. If preload is present in the model, physical gridpoint stress and strain for the preload may be output
to the .mnf using standard GPSTRESS= or GPSTRAIN= commands.
If preload is generated in a SOL 106 run for a SOL 103 restart, and the physical grid point stresses
for the preload are desired for the SOL 103 MNF run, then PARAM,FLEXNLS,YES is required
above the subcase level in the SOL 106 run.
For preload generated in a SOL 106 run for a SOL 103 restart, the preload subcase must be replicated
in the first subcase of the SOL 103 run.
19. After using the Nastran/ADAMS interface to produce an .mnf file and after preforming an ADAMS
solution, it is possible to bring the ADAMS results into Nastran for modal data recovery. ADAMS
produces .op2 files for input to Nastran SOL 111 and SOL 112. The files are binary format with an
.mdf extension. The File Management Section requires an assign command for each file:
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’name.mdf’ UNIT=ni
with a DLOAD = ni in the appropriate subcase.
Main Index
Also, in the Bulk Data Section, the parameter PARAM,ADMPOST = m (m = 0, by default no MSR
performed) is required. If m = 1, rigid body motion is not considered in the structural deformation.
If m = 2, rigid body motion is considered in the structural deformation.
Full details of the generation of the .mdf files and their use with Nastran are to be found in the
Nastran/ADAMS durability documentation.
20. In order to obtain consistent results, the ADAMS results, when brought back into Nastran SOL 111
or SOL 112, must be restarted from the original Nastran database that produced the original .mnf
which was the basis of the ADAMS run.
21. Typically SOL 400 is used to produce a preload for an ADAMS flexbody MNF run.
a. In the preload run the structure should be statically supported and follower loading must be
applied as a self equilibrating load set (not with SPC relationships!). In the ANALYSIS=MODES
step the structure must be a free-free structure as the resulting orthonormalization requires that
six rigid body modes be present.
In order to produce modal amplitudes and mode shapes and to ensure residual vector calculations,
SPOINTs and Q-sets are required. The SPOINTs must be included in the MAIN Bulk Data as
they are included in the overall matrix size.
A new BULK data section labeled BEGIN FLXBDY =id must be included with the run. This new
bulk section must contain the Q-set associate with the SPOINTs (in main bulk!) for modal
amplitudes and the A-set required for attachment point designation.
The example below is a typical SOL400 problem setup:
SOL 400
CEND
$ Case Control Section
$ Output ADAMSMNF REQUIRED ABOVE SUBCASE
ADAMSMNF flexbody=yes, psetid=all, outgstrs=yes, outgstrn=yes
SUBCASE 1
$ Preload
STEP 10
$ Static load and support for preload
SUBTITLE = PRELOAD
ANALYSIS = NLSTATICS
NLSTEP = 110
LOAD = 120
SPC = 130
BCONTACT = 140
SPCF = ALL
$ Generate stress and strain grid shapes
STRESS(PLOT) = ALL
STRAIN(PLOT) = ALL
GPSTRESS(PLOT) = ALL
GPSTRAIN(PLOT) = ALL
$ Modal Step for Producing MNF
$ Default: Select the end of previous load step to output
$ ADAMSMNF
STEP 20
ANALYSIS = MODES
$ Select real Eigen Value Parameters
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 215
METHOD = 210
$ Turn residual vectors on
RESVEC = COMPONENT
STRESS(PLOT) = ALL
STRAIN(PLOT) = ALL
b. In the above example, the SPC set in the ANALYSIS=NLSTAT must be a static (non-redundant)
constraint condition. Note that in the ANALYSIS=MODES STEP, the SPC constraint set has
been removed.
In SOL 400, the definition of the attachment a-set for identifying attachment points and for q-
set for specifying the desired number of modal amplitudes for orthonormalization is done in a
separate new FLXBDY Bulk Data Section shown below:
$ FLEXBODY Bulk section
BEGIN BULK FLXBDY = 10
$ Attachment point and component mode (A-SET) selection
ASET1,123456,1,11,111,121
QSET1,0,100001,THRU,100020
In SOL400, the ASET/ASET1 and QSET/QSET1, MUST, appear in the FLXBDY bulk data
section.
Currently, only one FLXBDY bulk data section (with a positive Flexbody ID) is supported in
SOL 400. Any non set related Bulk entries appearing in this Section will be ignored.
c. If CONTACT is required as part of the preloading for the FLEXBODY=YES run, it is Highly
Recommended that the friction option be turned on by using an appropriate BCPARA bulk data
entry setting, e.g.,
$ Select bilinear Coulomb friction for all subcases
BCPARA, 0, FTYPE, 6
If contact friction is not turned on, the tangential motion between the two parts coming into
contact will most likely not be constrained and incorrect or fatal results will occur.
d. If RIGID elements (RBE1/RBE2/RBE3/RBAR/RROD/RJOINT) are in the model, then the
Case Control RIGID= LAGRANGE (default for SOL400) should be used to avoid possible
wrong results. If an attachment point happens to touch a rigid element, the point should be
associated with the independent degree of freedom of the rigid element. Though not
recommended, if for some modeling requirement, a dependent rigid element grid is required to
be in the attachment set, the user MUST include at least one independent/reference grid for that
specific rigid element in the ASET.
Main Index
p-Adaptivity Control Selection
ADAPT (Case) p-Adaptivity Control Selection
Specifies p-adaptivity control parameters.
Format:
ADAPT=n
Example:
ADAPT=12
Describer Meaning
n Set identification for either an ADAPT or PSET Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. ADAPT is required only when an analysis with p-elements is requested.
2. A multiple p-level analysis with error analysis is performed whenever the ADAPT command
references an ADAPT Bulk Data entry.
3. A single p-level analysis without error analysis is performed whenever the ADAPT command
references a PSET Bulk Data entry.
4. Only one ADAPT may appear in the Case Control Section, and should appear above all SUBCASE
commands.
5. The subcases that will not participate in the error analysis/p-adaptivity must contain the
ADACT=NONE command.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 217
Aeroelastic Configuration Name
AECONFIG (Case) Aeroelastic Configuration Name
Assigns the aerodynamic configuration parameter used to locate the associated datablocks on the
aerodynamic and aeroelastic databases.
Format: Assign a DBset member name

AECONFIG =config-name
Example:
Assign a MASTER file for the aerodynamic and aeroelastic DBsets
AECONFIG =PROTO_A
Describer Meaning
config-name The configuration name. This is the aerodynamic supergroup name identified
as part of the aeroelastic model (Character; Default = AEROSG2D).
Remarks:
1. Typically, the aeroelastic configuration name is specified as the aerodynamic supergroup as part of the
model generation in MSC FlightLoads.
2. If AECONFIG is not present, aerodynamic and aeroelastic datablocks will be created from the data
in the Bulk Data Section and assigned the default value AECONFIG=AEROSG2D.
3. Multiple configuration names are supported.
4. AECONFIG is typically assigned above the subcase level. If it is overridden at the subcase level, it is
necessary to attach an existing aerodynamic database.
Main Index
Aerodynamic Model to be Used for the Rigid Aerodynamics
AERCONFIG (Case) Aerodynamic Model to be Used for the Rigid Aerodynamics
Enables the user to select a different mesh for the rigid portion of the aerodynamics than for the elastic
portion.
Format:
AERCONFIG=config-name
Examples:
AERC=RAERO
Describer Meaning
AERC The configuration name. This is the aerodynamic supergroup name for the
aerodynamic model that is used to create the rigid aerodynamics.
Remarks:
1. If the AERCONFIG Case Control command is not present in the subcase, the rigid portion of the
aerodynamics is based on the same AECONFIG as the flexible aerodynamics.
2. The rigid aerodynamics must be precomputed and attached from an assigned database using FMS
commands such as:
ASSIGN RMASTER = “raero.master”
DBLOCATE WHERE(AECONFIG=’rconfig’) LOGICAL=RMASTER
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 219
Aerodynamic Force Output Request
AEROF (Case) Aerodynamic Force Output Request
Requests the aerodynamic loads on aerodynamic control points.
Format:
AEROF=n
Examples:
AEROF=ALL
AEROF=5
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command (Integer > 0).
ALL Forces at all points will be output.
Remarks:
1. This command is supported in SOLs 144, 146 (frequency response only) and 200 for
ANALYSIS=SAERO.
2. The SET command references box or body element identification numbers.
3. Output is in the units of force or moment.
4. Only aerodynamic forces on points specified on the SET command will be output.
Main Index
Aerodynamic Flow Symmetry About The XY Plane
AESYMXY (Case) Aerodynamic Flow Symmetry About The XY Plane
Aerodynamic XY plane of symmetry flag. This is used to indicate whether the aerodynamic model has
symmetry with respect to the ground.
Format:
 SYMMETRIC 
 
AESYMXY =  ANTISYMMETRIC 
 
 ASYMMETRIC 
Example:
AESYMXY = ASYMMETRIC
Describer Meaning
SYMMETRIC Indicates that the aerodynamic model is moving in a symmetric manner
with respect to the XY plane.
ANTISYMMETRIC Indicates that the aerodynamic model is moving in an antisymmetric
manner with respect to the XY plane.
ASYMMTRIC Indicates that the aerodynamic model has no reflection about the XY
plane.
Remarks:
1. If AESYMXY is not present in case control, aerodynamic XY symmetry will be determined from the
SYMXY field of the AEROS Bulk Data entry for static aeroelastic analysis, and from the SYMXY field
of the AERO Bulk Data entry for flutter and dynamic aeroelastic analysis.
2. If AESYMXY is present above the subcase level, it is applied to all subcases until overridden.
3. SYMMETRIC implies ground effect, and ASYMMETRIC implies free air analysis.
4. Multiple aerodynamic symmetries are supported.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 221
Aerodynamic Flow Symmetry About The XZ Plane
AESYMXZ (Case) Aerodynamic Flow Symmetry About The XZ Plane
Aerodynamic XZ plane of symmetry flag. This is used to support symmetric models about the centerline.
Format:
 SYMMETRIC 
 
AESYMXZ =  ANTISYMMETRIC 
 
 ASYMMETRIC 
Example:
AESYMXZ = SYMMETRIC
Describer Meaning
SYMMETRIC Indicates that a half span aerodynamic model is moving in a symmetric
manner with respect to the XZ plane.
ANTISYMMETRIC Indicates that a half span aerodynamic model is moving in an
antisymmetric manner with respect to the XZ plane.
ASYMMETRIC Indicates that a full aerodynamic model is provided (Default).
Remark:
1. If AESYMXZ is not present in case control, aerodynamic XZ symmetry will be determined from the
SYMXZ field of the AEROS Bulk Data entry for static aeroelastic analysis, and from the SYMXZ field
of the AERO Bulk Data entry for flutter and dynamic aeroelastic analysis.
2. If AESYMXZ is present above the subcase level, it is applied to all subcases until overridden.
3. Multiple aerodynamic symmetries are supported.
Main Index
Defines the Reference Aerodynamic Extra Point (Controller) Vector
AEUXREF (Case) Defines the Reference Aerodynamic Extra Point (Controller) Vector
Reference UXVEC selector for the aeroelastic trim analysis. This is used to indicate an aerodynamic extra
point vector about which the stability derivatives are to be computed and printed. The stability derivatives
are the change in force due to a unit perturbation of each parameter in the aerodynamic extra point set. Due
to the nonlinear nature of the aeroelastic loads, the stability derivatives can be (but are not required to be) a
function of the point about which the slope is computed. This input defines which point is to be used in
computing the stability derivatives for printing (local slopes will be computed as needed in the trim solver).
This selection is typically done within each subcase, but a case control default can be defined by placing an
entry above the subcase level.
Format:
 n 
AEUXREF =  
 TRIM 
Examples:
AEUXREF=100
AEUXREF=TRIM
Describer Meaning
n The identification number of a UXVEC Bulk Data entry that defines the point
about which stability derivatives will be computed in TRIM cases.
TRIM Indicates that the stability derivatives should be computed about the trimmed state.
Remarks:
1. If, for a particular subcase, AEUXREF is not defined, the “free stream” state will be used (that is, the
stability derivatives will be computed about zero values for all parameters). This results in upward
compatibility with the linear database paradigm.
2. Only one of a TRIM or a UXVEC ID may be specified on any given subcase. To see stability
derivatives about additional points, you must define additional trim subcases.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 223
Analysis Discipline SUBCASE/STEP/SUBSTEP Assignment
ANALYSIS (Case) Analysis Discipline SUBCASE/STEP/SUBSTEP Assignment
Specifies the type of analysis being performed for the current SUBCASE/STEP/SUBSTEP.
Format:
ANALYSIS=type
Examples:
SOL 200
SUBCASE 10
ANALYSIS=STATIC
SUBCASE 20
ANALYSIS=MODES
Describer Meaning
type Analysis type. Allowable values and applicable solution sequences (Character):
STATICS Linear Static Analysis (SOLs 200 & 400)
MODES Normal Modes Analysis (SOLs 110, 111, 112, 106, 200, & 400) See
Remarks 2., 3. and 4.
BUCK Buckling (SOLs 200 and 400)
DFREQ Direct Frequency (SOLs 106, 200 and 400). See Remark 4.
MFREQ Modal Frequency (SOLs 200 and 400)
MTRAN Modal Transient (SOLs 200 and 400)
DCEIG Direct Complex - Eigenvalue Analysis (SOLs 200 & 400)
MCEIG Modal Complex - Eigenvalue Analysis (SOLs 200 & 400)
SAERO Static Aeroelasticity (SOLs 200 and 400)
DIVERGE Static Aeroelastic - Divergence (SOLs 200 & 400.
FLUTTER Flutter (SOLs 200 and 400)
HEAT Heat Transfer Analysis (SOLs 153, 159 and 600 only)
STRUCTURE Structural Analysis (SOLs 153 & 159 only, default for these two
SOLs)
HSTAT Steady State Heat Transfer (SOL 400)
HTRAN Transient Heat Transfer (SOL 400)
NLSTATICS Nonlinear Static Analysis (SOL 400). See Remark
NLTRAN Nonlinear Transient Analysis (SOL 400). See Remark 3.
HOT2COLD Hot-to-cold Analysis (SOL 106 only). See Remark 4.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
RCNS RC Network Thermal Solver Steady State
RCNT RC Network Thermal Solver Transient
Remarks:
1. This entry is used in solution sequences that are capable of multiple analysis types and selects the
actual analysis to be performed in the SUBCASE (or for SOL 400 the SUBCASE, STEP, or
SUBSTEP).
• For linear solution sequences SOLs 110, 111, and 112 and the nonlinear SOLs 106, 153, and
159, and for Optimization SOL 200 there can be only one ANALYSIS= per SUBCASE
• SOL 600,153 and SOL 600,159 require ANALYSIS=HEAT. For other SOL 600,ID executive
control entries, ANALYSIS= is not used and should not be entered.
• For SOL 200, EVERY SUBCASE including any superelement SUBCASE must be assigned an
ANALYSIS= Case Control command either in the explicit SUBCASE or above all SUBCASEs in
which case it defaults to all the subcases.
• For SOL 400 there can, for single physics analysis or chained multi physics analysis, be only one
ANALYSIS= per STEP.
• For SOL 400 coupled multi physics analysis there can be only one ANALYSIS= per SUBSTEP.
2. In the linear solution sequences SOLs 110, 111, 112 this entry allows data recovery of the normal
modes data used in the in the complex Eigenvalue analysis, modal frequency analysis, or modal
transient analysis. All commands which control the boundary conditions (SPC, MPC, and
SUPORT) and METHOD selection should be copied inside the ANALYSIS=MODES SUBCASE
or specified above the SUBCASE level. Note in the example below, SOL111 is a frequency response
solution sequence so in the frequency response SUBCASE 2 below an ANALYSIS=MFREQ is
allowed but not required.
SOL 111
METH=40
SPC=1
SUBCASE 1 $ Normal Modes
ANALYSIS=MODES
DISP=ALL
SUBCASE 2 $ Frequency response
STRESS=ALL
DLOAD=12
FREQ=4
3. SOL 400 analysis allows for seven analysis type combinations (nonlinear single physics, nonlinear
chained physics, nonlinear coupled physics, linear perturbation analysis, standard linear physics,
nonlinear chained analysis with mesh/time change physics, and nonlinear response optimization with
ESLNRO (Equivalent Static Loads Nonlinear Response Optimization)).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 225
If there are linear, nonlinear and perturbation subcases, the linear subcases will be solved first. The
linear subcases are reordered for processing and the output will be in the following order regardless of
original subcase number: STATICS, MODES, BUCKLING, DFREQ or MFREQ, DCEIG or
MCEIG, SAERO, FLUTTER.
The general rule is: The solutions of all SUBCASEs are independent of each other. The solution of
any STEP is a continuation of the solution of the previous STEP in the same SUBCASE. The
solutions of the SUBSTEPs occur simultaneously within a STEP (coupled analysis):
Additionally the following rules should be observed:
• All Coupled Multi-Physics steps have to come before the Single-Physics steps.
• Single-Physics steps can follow the Multi-Physics Steps.
• All linear perturbation steps need to be at the end after definition of all possible coupled multi-
physics steps and single-physics steps.
• The Case Control Command NLIC used for Nonlinear Initial Condition should be referenced
for further requirements between the analysis types allowed in SOL 400.
a. Nonlinear single physics: Nonlinear structures or nonlinear heat: For nonlinear structures a
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT must come before a ANALYSIS=NLTRAN. Only Statics to Transient is
allowed for structures. For heat transfer a nonlinear steady state heat transfer to a nonlinear
transient heat transfer is not allowed.
A structural example:
SUBCASE 1
STEP 10
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
STEP 20
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
STEP 30
ANALYSIS=NLTRAN
b. Nonlinear chained physics: A nonlinear steady state heat with results used for a nonlinear static
structural analysis. Only a steady state heat to a structural nonlinear Statics is allowed.
SUBCASE 1
STEP 10
ANALYSIS=HSTAT
STEP 20
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
c. Nonlinear coupled physics: This allows for four combinations of STEP/SUBSTEP within the
SUBCASE
• ANALYSIS=HSTAT for the first SUBSTEP and ANALYSIS=NLSTAT for the second
SUBSTEP
• ANALYSIS=HTRAN for the first SUBSTEP and ANALYSIS=NLTRAN for the second
SUBSTEP
• ANALYSIS=HTRAN for the first SUBSTEP and ANALYSIS=NLSTAT for the second
SUBSTEP
Main Index
• ANALYSIS=HSTAT for the first SUBSTEP and ANALYSIS=NLTRAN for the second
SUBSTEP
A coupled analysis example is:
SUBCASE 100
STEP 10
STRESS= ALL
NLSTRESS=ALL
NLSTEP=84
SUBSTEP 1
ANALYSIS=HSTAT
THERMAL=ALL
FLUX=ALL
SPC=35
LOAD=11
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
SPC=2
LOAD=110
DISP(PLOT)=1456
STEP 20
ANALYSIS=NLTRAN (single physics rules follow)
d. Linear perturbation analysis: Linear perturbation analysis is run directly after a nonlinear static
(ANALYSIS=NLSTAT) analysis using additional STEP commands containing
ANALYSIS=MODES, DFREQ, MFREQ, MTRAN, DCEIG, and MCEIG entries.
An example is:
SOL 400
CEND
TITLE=MSC Nastran SOL 400, Linear Perturbation Analysis
SUBTI=3D General Contact with Large Displacement Turned on
$
SUBCASE 1
STEP 1
LABEL=Nonlinear Static Analysis with Contact
ANALYSIS = NLSTATIC
NLPARM = 1
BCONTACT = 1
BOUTPUT=ALL
SPC = 2
LOAD = 3
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL
STEP 2
LABEL=Linear Perturbation, DFREQ
ANALYSIS = DFREQ
DLOAD=200
FREQ =10
AUTOSPC=YES
SPC = 2
DISPLACEMENT = ALL
STEP 3
LABEL=Linear Perturbation, MFREQ
ANALYSIS = MFREQ
NLIC STEP 1 LOADFAC 1.0
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 227
METHOD = 30
DLOAD=200
FREQ =10
AUTOSPC=YES
RESVEC =NO
SPC = 2
DISPLACEMENT = ALL
e. Standard linear physics: Runs can include ANALYSIS=STATICS, MODES, BUCKL, DFREQ,
MFREQ, MTRAN, DCEIG, MCEIG, SAERO, and FLUTTER. These are standard SUBCASE
type of analysis.
An example is:
SUBCASE 2
LABEL=Linear Static
ANALYSIS = STATIC
LOAD = 1001
DISP = 10
STRESS = ALL
SUBCASE 101
DISP = 10
STRESS = ALL
$
STEP 11
LABEL=Nonlinear Statics, Load 1001
ANALYSIS = NLSTATIC
NLPARM = 11
LOAD = 1001
$
STEP 12
LABEL=Nonlinear Statics, Load 1005
ANALYSIS = NLSTATIC
NLPARM = 11
LOAD = 1005
$
STEP 13
LABEL=Linear Perturbation, Modes
ANALYSIS = MODES
METHOD = 1003
RESVEC = NO
AUTOSPC(NOPRINT) = YES
DISPL = ALL
SUBCASE 1004
LABEL=Get Linear Normal Modes
ANALYSIS = MODES
SVECTOR = ALL
METHOD = 1004
f. Nonlinear chained analysis with mesh/time change physics: A standard single physics nonlinear
steady state ANALYSIS=HSTAT or transient heat transfer ANALYSIS=HTRAN with either
scratch=no or scratch=mini on the job submittal. This is followed by a mechanical job submittal
with an ASSIGN hrun='name_of_heat_run.MASTER' and DBLOC DATABLK=(HEATDB)
LOGI=hrun in the File Management Section of the Nastran executive and an
Main Index
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT or ANALYSIS=NLTRAN with a

TEMP(LOAD,HSUB,HSTEP,HTIME) in the subsequent mechanical job STEP. The
subsequent mechanical job can have both a different mesh than the heat job and different time
steps.
An example:
SOL 400 (submitted with SCRATCH=MINI from a bulk file named
Course_Mesh_Heat.dat)
CEND
SPC = 1
IC = 10
THERMAL=ALL
SUBCASE 3
STEP 4
ANALYSIS=HSTAT
NLPARM = 1
LOAD = 202
SUBCASE 10 (Note if STEP not provided STEP=1 defaulted)
ANALYSIS=HTRAN
= 2
DLOAD = 404
BEGIN BULK
SOL 400 (Mechanical run using solution from

Course_Mesh_Heat.dat)
ASSIGN hrun= 'Course_Mesh_Heat.MASTER' (the ticks ( ' ) are
required)
DBLOC DATABLK=(HEATDB), LOGI=hrun
CEND
TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) = 1
SUBCASE 1
ANALYSIS=NLTRAN
STEP 1
= 1
SPC = 2
TEMP (LOAD, HSUBC=3) = 3
NLSTRESS = ALL
STRESS = ALL
STEP 2
= 2
SPC = 2
TEMP (LOAD, HSUBC=10, HTIME=0.80) = 4
NLSTRESS = ALL
STRESS = ALL
SUBCASE 2
ANALYSIS=NLTRAN
STEP 3
= 3
SPC = 2
TEMP (LOAD, HSUBC=10, HTIME=ALL) = 5
NLSTRESS = ALL
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 229
stress = all
BEGIN BULK
g. Nonlinear response optimization with ESLNRO: A standard single physics nonlinear
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT is performed with a NASTRAN ESLOPT=1in the bulk data file. Besides
the usual model grid, loads, element data etc., the bulk data file should contain the standard SOL
200 design criteria.
An example:
NASTRAN ESLOPT=1 $
SOL 400
CEND
DESOBJ(MIN) = 10000
ANALYSIS = NLSTATIC
DESSUB = 1
LOAD = 300
SPC = 1
STRESS = ALL
DISP = ALL
NLPARM = 1
BEGIN BULK
4. In SOL 106, the ANALYSIS Case Control command may be used to define a ‘linear’ perturbation
analysis SUBCASE or a user input of the ‘stressed’ or deformed geometry (normal bulk data input)
and ‘unload’ the structure to determine the unstressed shape SUBCASE.
a. ‘Linear’ perturbation analysis: The ANALYSIS Case Control command may be used to define a
‘linear’ perturbation analysis SUBCASE, separate from the subcases used to load the model.
Normal modes and frequency response subcases with ANALYSIS=MODES or
ANALYSIS=DFREQ will use the final displacement results and loads from the previous nonlinear
subcase to generate the stiffness, differential stiffness, and follower force matrices for use in the
‘linear’ response analyses. Data recovery will be based on the requests above and within the
subcase.
An example is:
SUBCASE 1
$ LOAD STRUCTURE
LOAD= 100
NLPARM= 100
SUBCASE 2
$ NORMAL MODES
ANALYSIS= MODES
METHOD= 100
DISP= ALL
SUBCASE 3
$ FREQUENCY RESPONSE
ANALYSIS= DFREQ
SET 100= 1 THRU 1000
DISP= 100
SUBCASE 4
$ CONTINUE LOADING STRUCTURE
LOAD= 200
NLPARM= 100
Main Index
DISP= ALL
SUBCASE 5
$ NORMAL MODES AT THE NEW LOADING
ANALYSIS= MODES
In the previous example, subcases 2 and 3 will use the results from subcase 1, subcase 4 will
continue the loading application, and subcase 5 will use the results from subcase 4. For the ‘linear’
analyses, the mass matrix will be based on the undeformed geometry and the damping matrix will
be generated using the deformed geometry. This will allow analyses of ‘large’ displacement results
(PARAM, LGDISP, 1), in addition to material nonlinear analyses.
b. User input of the ‘stressed’ or deformed geometry: ANALYSIS=HOT2COLD allows the user to
input the ‘stressed’ or deformed geometry (normal bulk data input) and ‘unload’ the structure to
determine the unstressed shape. This uses an iterative technique with each iteration a nonlinear
analysis. This feature will also ‘reset’ the geometry to the ‘unstressed’ position for additional
subcases. Related PARAMETERS are HTOCTOL, HTOCITS, and HTOCPRT.
An example is:
SUBCASE 1
$ UNLOAD STRUCTURE
ANALYSIS=HOT2COLD
LOAD= 100
NLPARM= 100
SUBCASE 2
$ NORMAL MODES UNLOADED STRUCTURE
ANALYSIS= MODES
METHOD= 100
DISP=ALL
SUBCASE 3
$ LOAD the STRUCTURE
LOAD= 100
NLPARM= 100
SUBCASE 4
$ NORMAL MODES OF LOADED STRUCTURE
ANALYSIS= MODES
METHOD= 100
DISP= ALL
SUBCASE 1 unloads the model. SUBCASE 2 calculates the modes of the ‘undeformed’ structure;
the differential stiffness and follower force effects will not be included. SUBCASE 3 loads the
model. SUBCASE 4 calculates the modes of the loaded structure; the differential stiffness and
follower forces effects will be included.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 231
Aerodynamic Pressure Output Request
APRESSURE (Case) Aerodynamic Pressure Output Request
Requests the aerodynamic pressures in static aeroelastic response.
Format:
 
APRES =  n 
 ALL 
Examples:
APRES=ALL
APRES=6
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Only aerodynamic
pressures on the referenced aerodynamic boxes will be output (Integer > 0).
ALL Pressures at all points will be output.
Main Index
Constrains Stiffness Singularities via m-sets or s-sets
AUTOSPC (Case) Constrains Stiffness Singularities via m-sets or s-sets
Requests that stiffness singularities and near singularities be automatically constrained via single or
multipoint constraints.
Format:

AUTOSPC  [ RESIDUAL ] PRINT , NOPUNCH , [ SID = n ] , [ EPS = r1 ], [ EPSSING = r2 ],
 NOPRINT PUNCH
SPC , ZERO   
=  YES 

MPC NOZERO   NO 
Examples:
AUTOSPC=YES
AUTOSPC (PRINT, PUNCH, SID=100, EPS=1.E-6, MPC)=YES
Describer Meaning
RESIDUAL For SOL 400, applies AUTOSPC to residual structure and superelements. See
Remarks 6. and 7.
For SOL 101, applies AUTOSPC to linear analysis with contact. See Remark 9.
PRINT Enables the printout of a summary table of singularities (Default).
NOPRINT Disables the printout of a summary table of singularities.
NOPUNCH Disables the creation of SPC or MPC Bulk Data entries in the PUNCH file
(Default).
PUNCH Generates SPC or MPC Bulk Data entry format in the PUNCH file.
SID=n Specifies a set identification number for option PUNCH (Default = 999).
EPS=r1 Identifies singularities with a stiffness ratio smaller than r1 to be automatically
constrained with single or multipoint constraints. See Remark 2. (Default = 1.E-
8).
EPSSING=r2 Identifies the potential singularities with stiffness ratios less than r2. See Remark
2. (Default=1.E-8).
SPC Applies single-point constraints on degrees of freedom identified as singular.
(Default)
MPC Applies multipoint constraints on degrees of freedom identified as singular.
ZERO Requests the printout of singularities with zero stiffness ratios in the singularity
summary table (Default).
NOZERO Disables the printout of those singularities with zero stiffness ratios in the
singularity summary table.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 233
Remarks:
1. AUTOSPC specifies the action to take when singularities exist in the stiffness matrix.
AUTOSPC=YES means that singularities will be constrained automatically. AUTOSPC=NO means
that singularities will not be constrained. If AUTOSPC=NO, then the user should take extra caution
analyzing the results of the grid point singularity table and the computed epsilons. See Constraint and
Mechanism Problem Identification in SubDMAP SEKR (p. 342) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual for
details of singularity and mechanism identification and constraint.
2. Singularity ratios smaller than EPSSING are listed as potentially singular. If AUTOSPC=YES, then
the identified singularities with a ratio smaller than EPS will be automatically constrained. If
EPSSING has the same value as EPS, then all singularities are listed. If EPSSING is larger than EPS,
the printout of singularity ratios equal to exactly zero is suppressed. EPSSING must be greater than
or equal to EPS. If not, the program will set EPSSING equal to EPS.
3. If the PUNCH keyword is specified, then automatically generated SPCs or MPCs are placed in SPCi
or MPCi Bulk Data entry format on the PUNCH file.
4. The default equals YES for all solutions except nonlinear SOLs 106, 129, and 153. For these SOLs
this command is ignored for the residual structure. The AUTOSPC operation provides the correct
action for upstream superelements. Parameter PARAM,AUTOSPCR, not the AUTOSPC
command, is used for the o-set (omitted set) in the residual structure in SOLs 106 and 153.
5. The MPC option may be somewhat more expensive than the SPC option. However, it provides more
realistic structural modeling than the SPC. When the MPC option is selected, the multipoint
constraint may be applied on some degree of freedom for which the stiffness matrix is identified as
singular. If the MPC is inapplicable to some degree of freedom, the SPC is used instead.
6. For SOL 400, if RESIDUAL option is requested, the AUTOSPC operation is applied to both the
residual structure and the superelements. Without RESIDUAL option, the AUTOSPC operation is
applied to the superelements only. For default (no AUTOSPCE command), AUTOSPC operation
is not applied to the residual structure, but it is applied to the superelements. Both parameters
PARAM,AUTOSPC and PARAM,AUTOSPCR have no effect in SOL 400. Please note that the
AUTOSPC (RESIDUAL) command should not be used in the geometrical nonlinear analysis,
because it may over constrain the structural model.
7. For SOL 400, the AUTOSPC (RESIDUAL) command can be placed above the subcase level,
between subcase and step, and below the step level. The AUTOSPC operation is performed each step
of a subcase if it is required. In the following example, step 10 uses SPC option, step 20 uses MPC
option, and no AUTOSPC operation is performed for step 30.
SUBCASE 1
STEP 10
AUTOSPC(RESIDUAL,SPC) = YES
LOAD = 10
STEP 20
AUTOSPC(RESIDUAL,MPC) = YES
LOAD = 20
STEP 30
LOAD = 30
Main Index
For superelements, only one AUTOSPC command can be specified. If there are multiple AUTOSPC
commands in the Case Control packet, the one for the first step of the first subcase will be used. In
the previous example, the AUTOSPC under step 10 is used.
8. For SOL 400, AUTOSPC equals YES for linear perturbation if DOMAINSOLVER ACMS is
defined in the executive system.
9. For SOL 101 with contact, user can turn on AUTOSPC by using RESIDUAL option. i.e., when
AUTOSPC(RESIDUAL)=YES, AUTOSPC will be turned on for linear analysis with contact.
10. This entry is not supported by SOL 600. Please enter PARAM,AUTOSPC in the bulk data.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 235
Auxiliary Model Case Control Delimiter
AUXCASE (Case) Auxiliary Model Case Control Delimiter
Indicates (delimits) the beginning of Case Control commands for an auxiliary model in SOL 200.
Format:
AUXCASE
Examples:
AUXCAS
AUXC
Remarks:
1. AUXCASE commands must follow the primary model Case Control commands.
2. All Case Control commands following this entry are applicable until the next AUXCASE command,
or the BEGIN BULK delimiter. Commands from preceding Case Control Sections are ignored.
3. Each auxiliary model Case Control must be delimited with the AUXCASE command.
4. The AUXMODEL command is used to associate the auxiliary model Case Control with a particular
auxiliary model.
Main Index
Auxiliary Model Identification Number
AUXMODEL (Case) Auxiliary Model Identification Number
References an auxiliary model for generation of boundary shapes in shape optimization.
Format:
AUXMODEL=n
Examples:
AUXMODEL=4
AUXM=4
Describer Meaning
n Auxiliary model identification number. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. AUXMODEL references a particular auxiliary model for analysis and may only be specified in the
auxiliary model Case Control Section.
2. See the BEGIN BULK delimiter for the Bulk Data definition of an auxiliary model.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 237
Control for MSC Nastran-AVL EXCITE™ Interface
AVLEXB (Case) Control for MSC Nastran-AVL EXCITE™ Interface
Control for MSC Nastran-AVL EXCITETM Interface: (1) EXB file export from SOL 103 and SOL 400, (2)
EXCITETM results import and data recovery in SOL 111, 112 and 400.
Format:
AVLEXB [EXBBODY = {YES, NO}],
[MASINVAR = {FULL, FIRST, NONE}],
[RECOVRYM = {YES, NO}],
[EXBOSET = {U1-U5, ALL}],
[OUTGSTRS = {YES, NO}],
[OUTGSTRN = {YES, NO}],
[V1ORTHO = {-1.0, value1}],
[V2ORTHO = {1.0e8, value2}],
[MFFEXP = {YES, NO}],
[NOD6 = {YES, NO}],
[AVLPOST = {YES, NO}],
[POSTUNT = {INP4_UNIT_NUM}]
[EXBONLY = { YES, NO }],
Examples:
EXB file export
AVLEXB EXBBODY = YES
AVL EXCITETM results import and data recovery
AVLEXB EXBBODY=NO AVLPOST=YES POSTUNT=130
Main Index
Describer Meaning
EXBBODY Controls the output of MSC Nastran-AVL EXCITETM (Default = NO):
1. NO: Do not output AVL EXB Flexible body.

2. YES: Output AVL EXB Flexible body.
MASINVAR Requests the type of mass invariants to be computed (Default = FULL) :
1. FULL: All inertia invariants are computed.

2. FIRST: Only first order inertia invariants are computed.
3. NONE: No inertia invariants are computed.
RECOVRYM Controls the output of recovery (output transformation) matrix (Default = No) :
1. YES: Output A-set to (O+M)-set recovery matrix.

2. NO: Do not output the A-set to (O+M)-set recovery matrix.
EXBOSET Selects a set of DOFs for controlling the output of recovery matrix (Default =
ALL):
1. U1-U5: DOFs in the user defined set only are included in the O-set output
to the EXB file and the partial recovery matrix output for these DOFs.
These need to be defined in the bulk data using the USET/USET1 bulk
data entry.
2. ALL: Complete O-set in the model is retained for recovery.
OUTGSTRS Outputs Grid Point Modal Stresses (Default = NO) to the MSC Nastran op2
requires PARAM,POST,1 or PARAM,POST,-1.
OUTGSTRN Outputs Grid Point Modal Strains (Default = NO) to the MSC Nastran op2
requires PARAM,POST,1 or PARAM,POST,-1.
V1ORTHO Lower frequency bound of the Craig-Bampton modes in cycles/unit time.
value1: Value of the lower bound.

V2ORTHO Higher frequency bound of the Craig-Bampton modes in cycles/unit time.
value2: Value of higher bound.

MFFEXP Requests output of Mass matrix of O+M set (Default = No). MFFEXP = YES
requires the user to request full recovery (RECOVRYM=YES and EXBOSET =
ALL).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 239
Describer Meaning
NOD6 If model is pure bar/beam elements with concentrated masses, this option can
output the element dictionary table as well as element stiffness matrix (Default =
No):
1. YES: Output KDICT & KELM

2. NO: Do not output KDICT & KELM
If NOD6 = YES these parameters are automatically set MASINVAR = NONE,
RECOVRYM = NO, MFFEXP = NO, EXBOSET = YES
AVLPOST Requests data recovery using the INP4 file generated by AVL EXCITETM (Default
= No):
1. YES: Request data recovery

2. NO: data recovery
AVLPOST = YES requires EXBBODY = NO as the MSC Nastran AVL
EXCITETM interface cannot generate the EXB file and conduct data recovery in
the same run.
POSTUNT Unit number of the assigned INP4 file generated by AVL EXCITETM which will
be used for data recovery.
EXBONLY Requests standard DMAP solution and data recovery following
MSC Nastran-AVL EXCITETM interface (Default = NO):
1. NO: Proceed with standard DMAP solution and data recovery after
generating EXB file.
2. YES: Executes only MSC Nastran-AVL EXCITETM interface.
Remarks:
1. It is highly recommended that the user should run MSC Nastran for Step-1 with maximum smp
setting. Calculation of higher order mass invariants are very computation intensive; to make their
calculation faster MSC Nastran leverages efficient shared memory parallelization (SMP).
2. To minimize the data storage and enable efficient data recovery in MSC Nastran, the use of MSC
Nastran-AVL EXCITETM Interface requires the use of EXTSEOUT feature. The use of this feature
would be in its standard MSC Nastran capacity in SOL 103 or 400, e.g.:
ASSIGN OUTPUT2='crankextse.op2',UNIT=80,DELETE
...
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=20) DMIGOP2=80
...
During step-1 (EXB file export), to limit the size of external superelement (SE) .op2 the user should
only request outputs for sets of physical quantities that are of interest. For, e.g., displacement and
velocities on surface nodes:
Main Index
DISP(PLOT) = 101
...
STRESS(PLOT) = 102
above, the displacement and velocity can only be recovered on set 101 and stresses on set 102 during
step-2 (data recovery).
DISP=ALL, STRESS=ALL, STRAIN=ALL, etc., should be used carefully for large models during
step-1 as it could lead to significant performance degradation and large external SE .op2 file size.
3. AVL EXCITETM supports the following flexbody types which will be set automatically based on the
user inputs of AVLEXB case controls:
a. CON6: Is General large motion flexbody which is selected when the user enters “NOD6=NO”
and “MASINVAR=FULL/FIRST”.
b. SMOT: Is Small motion flexbody which is selected when the user enters “NOD6=NO” and
“MASINVAR=NONE”.
c. NOD6: Is a special flexbody model consisting of pure bar/beam (1-D) elements with
concentrated masses. It is selected when the user enters “NOD6=YES”. Here the dictionary table
for bar/beam elements for each bear/beam element shall be outputted into the EXB file. NOD6
automatically means that the following are not calculated and output into the EXB file: (1) Mass
invarients, (2) Recovery Matrix, (3) A-set Orthonormalization and associated
Eigenvalue/Eigenvector and (4) Component modes.
4. MSC Nastran does not export KELM to EXB file for NOD6 body. AVL EXCITETM v2019 provides
a utility to calculate and write KELM to existing EXB file.
5. Degree of freedom (dof) table (DOFTtable) is written to EXB file for the following dof sets:
a. A-set : Dof table for a-set are always written out to the EXB file.
b. O+M-set : Dof table for o+m-set are only written out to the EXB file if the recovery matrix is
requested by the user. In case the user selects partial recovery by specifying the EXBOSET only a
subset of o+m-set would be output in the dof Table.
6. GEOM table contains the coordinates of nodes in MSC Nastran basic coordinate system. Two table
of coordinates are always written to the EXB file: (1) A-set and (2) F+M-set.
7. OUTGSTRS or OUTGSTRN entries require the use of the standard MSC Nastran STRESS= or
STRAIN= Case Control commands used in conjunction with GPSTRESS= or GPSTRAIN= Case
Control commands to produce modal grid point stress or strain. They also require the use of
PARAM,POST,-1 or PARAM,POST,1. GSTRESS(PLOT)= or GPSTRAIN(PLOT)= will suppress
grid stress or strain output to the MSC Nastran .f06 file. The modal grid point stress or strain are not
output to the EXB file but to standard MSC Nastran .op2 file.
8. The default value of “MASINVAR = FULL” calculates all the mass invariants. In case of large models
the calculations of higher order mass invariants can be time consuming; hence, it is recommended
that the user first run with either “MASINVAR = FIRST” or “MASINVAR =NONE” to validate the
model.
9. MFFEXP = YES requests output of Mass matrix of F+M set and requires the user to request full
recovery (RECOVRYM=YES and EXBOSET = ALL).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 241
10. Typically SOL 400 is used to produce a preloaded AVL EXCITETM EXB file.
a. Standard SOL 400 nonlinear analysis prohibits the existence of an o-set; hence the EXTSEOUT
case control must be used (see above Remark 2.).
b. In the preload run the structure should be statically supported and follower loading must be
applied as a self equilibrating load set (not with SPC relationships!). In the ANALYSIS=MODES
step, usually, the structure should be a free-free structure to preserve its six rigid body modes. In
order to produce modal amplitudes and mode shapes and to ensure residual vector calculations,
SPOINTs and Q-sets are required.
The example below is a typical SOL400 problem setup:
ASSIGN OUTPUT2='seplt3rbe.out2',UNIT=80,DELETE
SOL 400
CEND
$
$ Initiate an Nastran-AVL-EXCITETM interface run
$ AVL REQUIRED ABOVE SUBCASE
AVLEXB EXBBODY=YES, EXBONLY=YES
SUBCASE 1
$ Preload
STEP 10
$ Static load and support for preload
SUBTITLE = PRELOAD
ANALYSIS = NLSTATICS
NLSTEP = 110
LOAD = 120
SPC = 130
BCONTACT = 140
SPCF = ALL
$ Generate stress and strain grid shapes
STRESS(PLOT) = ALL
STRAIN(PLOT) = ALL
$ Modal Step for Producing EXB file
$ Default: Select the end of previous load step to output
$ AVL EXCITETM EXB
STEP 20
$ EXTSEOUT must be used to as Standard SOL 400 nonlinear analysis
$ prohibits the existence of an o-set
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=100) DMIGOP2=80
ANALYSIS = MODES
$ Select real Eigen Value Parameters
METHOD = 210
$ Turn residual vectors on
RESVEC = COMPONENT
STRESS(PLOT) = ALL
STRAIN(PLOT) = ALL
c. In the above example, the SPC set in the ANALYSIS=NLSTAT must be a static (nonredundant)
constraint condition. Note that in the ANALYSIS=MODES STEP, the SPC constraint set has
been removed. The definition of the attachment a-set for identifying attachment points and for
q-set for specifying the desired number of modal amplitudes for orthonormalization should be
done in the main bulk data section, e.g.:
Main Index
$ Main Bulk section

$ Attachment point and component mode (A-SET) selection
ASET1,123456,1,11,111,121
QSET1,0,100001,THRU,100020
d. If CONTACT is required as part of the preloading, it is highly recommended that the friction
option be turned on by using an appropriate BCPARA bulk data entry setting, e.g.,
$ Select bilinear Coulomb friction for all subcases
BCPARA, 0, FTYPE, 6
If contact friction is not turned on, the tangential motion between the two parts coming into
contact will most likely not be constrained and incorrect or fatal results will occur.
11. The AVL EXCITETM solver expects singularities, other than the rigid body modes, of the model to
be constrained; hence, it is recommended that the user constrain singularities automatically using the
PARAM,AUTOSPC in SOL 103 and AUTOSPC (RESIDUAL) command in SOL 400.
12. After conducting the AVL EXCITETM simulation the data recovery is conducted in SOL 111, SOL
112 and SOL 400 using the EXTSEOUT feature. Using External SE to conduct data recovery would
make the data recovery faster and minimize the database size by storing only the information required
for recovery. The user interface for data recovery is straightforward requiring the attachment of the
SE databases, stored on the .op2 file, generated in the SE generation step during EXB file export
together with the ASM and PCH files.
13. During the data recovery it should be noted that PARAM,POST setting for the External SE are not
picked up from the main bulk. If physical quantities inside External SE (stresses,etc) are to be output
to op2 the user can add PARAM,POST in the case control if they want it applied globally or add
PARAM,POST manually to the External SE pch file.
14. Virtual mass is supported in MSC Nastran-AVL EXCITETM Interface through the use of standard
VMOPT parameter entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 243
Conical Shell Boundary Conditions
AXISYMMETRIC (Case) Conical Shell Boundary Conditions
Selects boundary conditions for an axisymmetric shell problem or specifies the existence of fluid harmonics
for hydroelastic problems.
Format:
 SINE 
 
AXISYMMETRIC =  COSINE 
 
 FLUID 
Example:
AXISYMMETRIC=COSINE
Describer Meaning
SINE Sine boundary conditions will be used.
COSINE Cosine boundary conditions will be used.
FLUID Existence of fluid harmonics.
Remarks:
1. This command is required for conical shell problems.
2. If this command is used for hydroelastic problems, at least one harmonic must be specified on the
AXIF command.
3. See the Surface Elements (p. 111) in the for a discussion of the conical shell problem.
4. See the Additional Topics (Ch. A) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual for a discussion of the
hydroelastic formulation.
5. The sine boundary condition will constrain components 1, 3, and 5 at every ring for the zero
harmonic.
6. The cosine boundary condition will constrain components 2, 4, and 6 at every ring for the zero
harmonic.
7. SPC and MPC Case Control commands may also be used to specify additional constraints. See Case
Control Commands, 177.
Main Index
Direct Input Damping Matrix Selection
B2GG (Case) Direct Input Damping Matrix Selection
Selects direct input damping matrix or matrices.
Format:
B2GG=name
Examples:
B2GG = BDMIG
B2GG = BDMIG1, BDMIG2, BDMIG3
B2GG = 1.25*BDMIG1, 1.0*BDMIG2, 0.82*BDMIG3
SET 100 = B1, B2
B2GG = 100
Describer Meaning
name Name of [ B 2gg ] matrix that is input on the DMIG Bulk Data entry, or name list,
with or without factors (see Remark 5.).
Remarks:
1. DMIG matrices will not be used unless selected.
2. Terms are added to the damping matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric, and field 4 on the DMIG,name Bulk Data entry must contain the
integer 6.
4. A scale factor may be applied to this input via the PARAM, CB2 entry. See Parameters, 739.
5. The formats of the name list:
a. Names without factor.
Names separated by comma or blank.
b. Names with factors.
Each entry in the list consists of a factor, followed by a star, followed by a name. The entries are
separated by commas or blanks. The factors are real numbers. Each name must be with a factor
including 1.0.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 245
Direct Input Damping Matrix Selection
B2PP (Case) Direct Input Damping Matrix Selection
Selects direct input damping matrix or matrices.
Format:
B2PP=name
Example:
B2PP = BDMIG
B2PP = BDMIG1, BDMIG2, BDMIG3
B2PP = 5.06*BDMIG1, 1.0*BDMIG2, 0.85*BDMIG3
B2PP = (1.25, 0.5) *BDMIG1, (1.0, 0.0) *BDMIG2, (0.82,-2.2) *BDMIG3
Describer Meaning
name Name of [ B 2pp ] matrix that is input on the DMIG or DMIAX Bulk Data entry, or
name list, with or without factors. See Remark 7. (Character).
Remarks:
1. DMIG entries will not be used unless selected.
2. B2PP is used only in dynamics problems.
3. DMIAX entries will not be used unless selected by the B2PP command.
4. The matrix must be square or symmetric, and field 4 on the DMIG,name Bulk Data entry must
contain a 1 or 6.
5. It is recommended that PARAM,AUTOSPC,NO be specified. See the Constraint and Mechanism
Problem Identification in SubDMAP SEKR (p. 342) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
6. The matrices are additive if multiple matrices are referenced on the B2PP command.
a. Names without factor
separated by commas or blanks. The factors are either all real numbers, or all complex numbers
in the form of two real numbers, separated by a comma, within parentheses as shown in the
preceding example. The first real number of the pair is the real part, and the second is the
imaginary part. Either part may be zero or blank, but not both. Mixed real numbers and complex
numbers are not allowed. Each name must be with a factor including 1.0 for real and (1.0, 0.0)
for complex.
Main Index
Boundary Condition Identification
BC (Case) Boundary Condition Identification
Identifies multiple boundary conditions for normal modes, buckling, and flutter analysis in SOLs 103, 105,
145, and 200.
Format:
BC=n
Example:
BC=23
Describer Meaning
n Identification number (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. In SOLs 103, 105, 145, and 200, BC is required in each subcase if multiple boundary conditions are
specified for normal modes, buckling, or flutter analysis.
2. If only one boundary condition is specified, then BC does not have to be specified, and n defaults to
zero.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 247
Boundary Condition Identification
BC (Case) Boundary Condition Identification
Identifies multiple boundary conditions for normal modes, buckling, and flutter analysis in SOLs 103, 105,
145, and 200.
Format:
BC=n
Example:
BC=23
Describer Meaning
n Identification number (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. In SOLs 103, 105, 145, and 200, BC is required in each subcase if multiple boundary conditions are
specified for normal modes, buckling, or flutter analysis.
2. If only one boundary condition is specified, then BC does not have to be specified, and n defaults to
zero.
Main Index
Contact Bodies Definition Change Selection
BCHANGE (Case) Contact Bodies Definition Change Selection
Selects the changes of the definition of contact bodies in SOL 400.
Format:
BCHANGE=n
Example:
BCHANGE=10
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of the BCHANGE Bulk Data entry, see Remark 2. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. This command is used only in SOL 400 for 3D Contact analysis.
2. The default SID of the BCHANGE Bulk Data entry is defined on the BCONTACT Case Control
command if applicable; however, the SID on the BCHANGE Case Control command can overwrite
it.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 249
Contact Model Check
BCONCHK (Case) Contact Model Check
This entry is used to activate contact model check before analysis in SOL 101, 103, 105, 107~112, 200 and
400.
With the contact model check, the initial contact status is checked and output. Displacement-like vectors and
norm distance of active nodes to the corresponding contact body and distance to the body are generated. Sign
of the distance stands for its status: positive for gap; 0.0 on surface; negative for penetration. It is a global case
control and must be above SUBCASE.
 RUN 
Format: BCONCHK (PRINT,PLOT)=  STOP 
 
 STEP 
Example:
BCONCHK(PRINT)= Run
Describer Meaning
PRINT The print file is the output media.
PLOT Output table is generated by not printed.(Default)
RUN Execute contact model check and proceed analysis normally.
STOP Only run contact check and exit job before normal analysis.
STEP Execute contact check at each output request LOAD/TIME step.
Main Index
Selects 3D Contact Surfaces
BCONTACT (Case) Selects 3D Contact Surfaces
This entry activates contact analysis and selects contact definition tables.
Overview of contact type definition:

General Contact - two bodies may come into contact and separate at any point in the simulation and the
bodies may slide alone each other's surface with or without friction. The fundamental constraint is no relative
normal displacement when bodies are in contact. General contact is available in SOL 101, SOL 400, SOL
600 or SOL 700 only. For SOL 101, contact is the only source of nonlinearity, no large displacements, large
rotations or material nonlinearity is available.
Glued Contact - two bodies may come into contact and separate at any point in the simulation, but when in
contact there is no relative sliding. The fundamental constraint is no relative normal displacement or
tangential displacement when bodies are in contact. One can consider this equivalent to two surfaces that
have infinite friction. Note that the word glued, only refers to the constraint on the tangential behavior.
Bodies that are in glued contact may lose contact if the separation (force or stress based) separation criteria is
exceeded, due to Unglue or Breaking Glue.
Step Glued Contact - this is available for SOL 400 only. Step Glued contact is activated using a value a
negative value of IGLUE for each contact pair. It is similar to Glued Contact, there are two conditions.
1. The contact status will be checked at the beginning of the step, and those nodes or segments that are
in contact will remain in glued contact for the entire step. The constraints will change due to large
rotations. Furthermore if a large tensile force or stress developed over the interface in the current
loadcase, no separation would occur for these regions which are initially in contact. . Performing an
Unglue of Breaking glue would also not be enforced during the step for these regions. This may be
successfully used to model the union of dissimilar meshes, where at a later time one wanted to separate
the bodies (like opening of a door).
2. When using Step Glue conventional contact occurs for the nodes/segments of the body which are not
in contact at the beginning of the step. That means when they come into contact, they will glue, but
they may separate within the same step.
Permanently Glued Contact -this is a special case of contact, where the initial configuration is used to
determine the contact constraint, and these contact changes due not change throughout the analysis. Nodes
or segments which are not initially in contact do not come into contact, and in fact may penetrate the model.
The constraint is a glue type, meaning there will be no relative normal or tangential displacement. Permanent
glued may be used to connect dissimilar meshes or for simple assembly modeling when no other contact
occurs. The bodies will never separate. Permanent glue should not be used in models that experience large
rotations. It is applicable to SOL 101, 103, 105, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, SOL 200 and SOL 400.
Permanent Glued contact is activated if the BCTABLE or BCTABL1 that is referenced in the first Loadcase
(SOL 100*) or in the first Step (SOL 200) has a value of IGLUE greater than zero for all contact body pairs.
If the user requires conventional (general) contact for the complete simulation, but Permanent Glued contact
is invoked, enter bulk data BCPARA,0,NLGLUE,1 to deactivate the Permanent Glue in a subsequent step.
If large rotation/deformation effect present, turn on SYSTEM(758)=2 will switch Permanently Glued
Contact to Step Glued Contact automatically in SOL 400.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 251
Because glued contact is very useful in assembly modeling problems encountered in engineering practice,
several special cases are considered as well.
Moment Carrying Glue - For General Contact - when a node or surface comes into contact the default
condition is that constraints are only placed on the translational degrees of freedom. When Moment Carrying
Glue is activated the rotational degrees of freedom are also constrained to ensure moment carrying behavior.
This may be used with either beam elements or shell elements.
Symmetry Contact - Deformable contact with a rigid Symmetry surface. In this case no friction is allowed.
Furthermore no separation is allowed, and finally if the rigid surface is contacted by beams or shells - the
rotations are automatically constrained to satisfy the symmetry constraints. You do not need to specify any
additional input, other than specifying that the rigid surface is a SYMM body.
Format:
 n 
   
BCONTACT=  ALLBODY  or  ALLELE  or AUTO(,ctype)
   
 NONE 
SOL 700 only
Examples:
BCONTACT = 5
BCONTACT=ALLBODY
BCONTACT=AUTO,PGLUE
Describer Meaning
n Identification number of a BCTABLE, BCTABL1, BCONECT, BCHANGE, and/or
BCMOVE Bulk Data entry.
ALLBODY All bodies defined using all the BCBODY entries can potentially contact each other.
This option can only be used if it applies to all subcases. (all SOLs) In SOL 400, when
BCONTACT=ALLBODY, in any STEP, all BCBODY entries defined in the model
can potentially contact each other. In this case, no BCTABLE, BCTABL1, BCONECT
is required. See also Remark 3.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
NONE All contact definitions (BCTABLE, BCTABL1, BCONECT, BCBODY, and
BCBODY1) are ignored. For SOL 400 and SOL 101, if BCONTACT = NONE is
entered in any subcase, it applies for all subcases. (Default for SOLs 101 and 400.)
AUTO(,ctype) Automatic generate contact. ctype is optional. It may be
TOUCH (default) -- general touching contact;
PGLUE -- Permanently glued contact;
GGLUE -- General Glued Contact; and
SGLUE -- Step Glued Contact.
It works with bulk data section entry BCAUTOP, BCAUTOP is optional. See remark
5. and 6.
Remarks:
1. BCONTACT is recognized in SOLs 101, 400, and 700, and under the special condition of
permanent glued contact in SOLs 103, 105, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112 and 200. The standard
SOL 200(without calling SOL 400) can only support permanent glue; but when SOL 200 calls SOL
400(or say SOL 400 optimization), it can support all contact types.
2. For SOLs 101 and 400, if the form BCONTACT=n is applied in any loadcase (subcase or step),
Nastran looks into the Bulk Data file to get all BCTABLE, BCTABL1 or BCONECT (required),
BCMOVE (optional) and BCHANGE (optional), in the same SID=n. The user can always specify
Case Control commands, BCMOVE and/or BCHANGE, to select different SID.
BCONTACT=0 can invoke initial preload contact conditions, such that the contact bodies will just
touch each other before analysis begins, but it's not necessary. If presence of BCTABLE, 0, initial
contact condition will also be processed, no matter if BCONTACT=0 is given or not. (please refer to
BCTABLE, 0 for more information).
The contact analysis during any loadcase is dominated by BCONTACT=n (n>0). Without presence
of BCONTACT=n (n>0), no contact analysis works in that particular loadcase.
In SOL 400 one can have multiple contact interaction types in the model meaning general contact,
glued contact, step contact on a contact pair basis. These can change from step to step by activating
a new BCTABLE or BCTABL1.
SOL 700 allows only one BCONTACT Case Control command and only one subcase.
3. For SOLs 101 and 400, if the form BCONTACT=ALLBODY is applied in any loadcase (subcase or
step), Nastran does not look into corresponding BCTABLE, BCTABL1 or BCONECT but uses the
defaults for all entries on BCTABLE, BCONPRG or BCONPRP. If the user wants to specify
BCMOVE and/or BCHANGE Bulk Data entries, the BCMOVE and/or BCHANGE Case Control
commands must be given.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 253
4. Permanent glued contact for small deformation and rotation is initiated by BCONTACT=n pointing
to BCTABLE/BCONECT referring a valid positive IGLUE field.
If all slave's for the BCTABLE or BCONPRG corresponding to the first loadcase (first subcase and
first step) contain IGLUE >0, permanent glued contact with small rotation condition will be used for
all SLAVE entries in all subcases and all steps unless BCPARA,0,NLGLUE,1 is specified.
If IGLUE < 0 exists, step glue is activated to support large deformation and large rotation.
5. For glue contact (PGLUE, GGLUE, and SGLUE), default is to implement the moment carrying glue
without node projection, i.e., Insures full moment carrying glue when shells contact. The node will
not be projected onto the contact body and an existing initial gap or overlap between the node and
the contacted body will not be removed, as the node will not be projected onto the contacted body.
Unless IGLUE is defined in BCAUTOP.
6. CTYPE can be specified by bulk data section BCAUTOP also, the value of CTYPE in BCAUTOP
will be used if it is specified.
7. When BCONTACT=AUTO is specified, acg file will be generated. An acg file is a file consists of all
generated contact bodies, contact pairs and parameters. The name of acg file can be specified by
ASSIGN FMS statement.
8. When BCONTACT=AUTO is specified, only elements in residual structure are used to construct
contact bodies in superelement models.
9. BEAMB in bulk data entry BCPARA is set to 1 when BCONTACT=AUTO is specified.
Main Index
Selects 3D Contact Surfaces in SOL 600
BCONTACT (Case) Selects 3D Contact Surfaces in SOL 600
This entry is used to initiate and control 3D contact in SOL 600.

Standard subcase rules apply and BCONTACT may be specified within each subcase to define which bodies
may make contact during that particular subcase. A BCONTACT = 0 above the subcase level is used in SOL
600 to invoke an option such that the contact surfaces will just touch each other before the nonlinear
simulation begins. It is highly recommended that if contact is specified for any subcase in SOL 600, and if
there are any rigid contact surfaces, BCONTACT = 0 and a matching BCTABLE with ID = 0 be included.
Format:
 ALL 
 
 ALLELE 
 
 ALLELE2 
 
 ALLGLUE 
 n   ALLGLU2 
   
BCONTACT=  ALLBODY  or  ALLGLUM 
   
 NONE   ALLGLM4 
 ALLGLUP 
 
 BCBOX 
 
 BCPROP 
 
 BCMATL 
Examples:
BCONTACT = 5
BCONTACT=ALLBODY
Describer Meaning
n Identification number of a BCTABLE, BCHANGE, and/or BCMOVE Bulk Data
entry. If the model has beams, this option or BCPROP or MCMATL must be used.
ALLBODY All bodies defined using all the BCBODY entries can potentially contact each
other. This option can only be used if it applies to all subcases.
NONE All contact definitions (BCTABLE, BCBODY) are ignored. BCONTACT =
NONE may be used for any subcase desired and/or for increment zero - some
subcases can have contact and others no contact.
ALL All elements in the model can potentially contact with each other (Default). When
this option is specified, no 3D contact input is required in the bulk data and, if
entered, will be ignored. Warning–this option may take excessive computer time.
This option can only be used if it applies to all subcases.
ALLELE Same as ALL. All elements in the model must be the same kind (either shell or
solid). This option may not be used if there are beams, bars or rods in the model.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 255
Describer Meaning
ALLELE2 Same as ALLELE except shell and solid elements may both be in the model in
which case separate bodies for each are formed. (This option requires that both
shells and solids be in the model.) All beams, bars and rods in the model will be
ignored with respect to contact.
ALLGLUE Same as ALLELE or ALLELE2 except glued contact will be used for all bodies. The
glued contact can vary from increment to increment, however when grids come
into contact they cannot separate. BCBODY and BCTABLE entries are created
automatically. BCBODY slave entries have IGLUE=I (see BCTABLE entry).
ALLGLU2 Same as ALLELE or ALLELE2 except glued contact will be used for all bodies. The
glued contact can very from increment to increment, however when grids come
into contact they cannot separate. BCBODY and BCTABLE entries are created
automatically. BCBODY slave entries have IGLUE=2 (see BCTABLE entry).
ALLGLUM Same as ALLELE or ALLELE2 except glued contact with moment carrying glue
will be used for all bodies. BCBODY and BCTABLE entries are created
ALLGLM4 Same as ALLELE or ALLELE2 except glued contact with moment carrying glue
will be used for all bodies. BCBODY and BCTABLE entries are created
ALLGLUP Same as ALLELE or ALLELE2 except “permanent glue” is used. This option
determines which grids are initially in contact and uses this contact situation in a
glued condition for the remainder of the analysis. To use this option, specify
PERMGLUE on the SOL 600 Executive Control statement. (SOL 600 only) Note
for SOL 600, the PERMGLUE option is the only way contact can be used with
SOL 600,101 or SOL 600,103 or other “linear” analyses.
BCBOX All elements defined within a box-like region as defined by the Bulk Data entry
BCBOX can potentially contact each other. See Remark 2.
BCPROP All elements defined by the Bulk Data entry BCPROP can potentially contact each
other. See Remark 2.
BCMATL All elements defined by the Bulk Data entry BCMATL can potentially contact each
other. See Remark 2.
Remarks:
1. Normally, only one form of this entry may be used in any given analysis. Analysis restarts must use
the same form as the original run. An exception is that if BCONTACT = NONE is entered for any
subcase, BCONTACT=N may also be specified for different subcases. BCONTACT=ALLxxx
cannot be mixed with BCONTACT=NONE or BCONTACT=N in the same input file.
2. Bulk Data entries BCBOX, BCPROP, and BCMATL may be used with BCONTACT = n, wherein
case IDs specified on the BCBODY entry and on the BCBOX, BCPROP, and/or BCMATL entries
must match.
Main Index
3. For options ALLELE, ALLELE2, ALLGLUE, ALLGLU2, ALLGLUM, and ALLGLM2, no

BCBODY or BCTABLE entries should be included in the model. Nastran will automatically create
BCBODY and/or BCTABLE entries as necessary for these options.
4. The ALLELE option requires that the model be made up of either all shells or all solids.
5. The ALLELE2 option requires that the model have both shells and solids.
6. The ALLGLUE, ALLGLU2, ALLGLUM and ALLGLM4 options can be used with models with
shells only, solids only for a combination of shells and solids.
7. The ALLGLUP option can either be used with BCBODY/BCTABLE entries or without them. If
there are not BCBODY/BCTABLE entries, SOL 600 will create them. If they exist, all SLAVE lines
on all BCTABLE entries must specify IGLUE=1.
8. The ALLG* options are not available for edge contact. Edge contact may only be run using
BCONTACT=N and the corresponding BCTABLE having a FBSH line with COPS1 and/or
COPM1 properly specified.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 257
Contact Body Movement Selection
BCMOVE (Case) Contact Body Movement Selection
Selects movement of bodies in contact in SOL 400.
Format:
BCMOVE=n
Example:
BCMOVE=10
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of the BCMOVE Bulk Data entry. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
2. The default SID of the BCMOVE Bulk Data entry is defined on the BCONTACT Case Control
command if applicable; however, the SID on the BCHANGE Case Control command can overwrite
it.
Main Index
Case Control and Bulk Data Delimiter
BEGIN BULK (Case) Case Control and Bulk Data Delimiter
Designates the end of the Case Control Section and/or the beginning of a Bulk Data Section.
Format:
AFPM = afpmid
ARBMODEL = arbmid
AUXMODEL = auxmind
MASSID = massid [ LABEL = masslabel ]
BEGIN [ BULK ] MODULE = moduleid [ LABEL = modlabel ]
FLXBDY = flexbody
SUPER = seid
TRMC = trimid
UDS
Examples:
BEGIN BULK
BEGIN AUXMODEL=22
BEGIN BULK TRMC=101

BEGIN TRMC=102
Describer Meaning
AFPM Indicates the beginning of an acoustic field point mesh Bulk Data Section.
afpmid Acoustic field point mesh identification number (Integer > 0).
ARBMODEL Indicates the beginning of a finite element model FEM for an arbitrary beam cross-
section.
arbmid FEM identification number (Integer > 0).
AUXMODEL Indicates the beginning of an auxiliary model Bulk Data Section.
auxmid Auxiliary model identification number (Integer > 0).
FLXBDY Indicates the beginning of a Adams/Nastran MNF flexbody Bulk Data Section for
SOL400 analysis.
flexbody Flexbody MNF component identification number (Integer>0; Required). Component
usually consists of ASET and QSET description for attachment points.
MASSID Indicates the beginning of the incremental mass case Bulk Data Section.
massid Incremental mass case identification number (Integer>0; Required).
LABEL Indicates a massid label.
MODULE Indicates the beginning of a Module Bulk Data section
moduleid Module identification number (Integer>0)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 259
Describer Meaning
LABEL Indicates a Module label. This option will be converted to an MDLABEL Bulk Data
entry in the main Bulk Data section.
modlabel Module label.
SUPER Indicates the beginning of partitioned superelement Bulk Data Section.
seid Superelement identification number (Integer > 0).
TRMC Indicates the beginning of Bulk Data Section for a trim component model. See
Remark 9.
trimid Trim component identification number (Integer>0; Required).
UDS Indicates the beginning of user defined subroutine section.
Remarks:
1. BEGIN BULK is not required but it is highly recommended that the user supply it. If not specified,
then the program will automatically insert one, before the first unique bulk type entry. Parameters are
not considered unique bulk type entries so automatic BEGIN BULK inclusion will come after any
parameter that precedes entries unique to bulk.
2. For an auxiliary model, AUXMID is referenced by the AUXMODEL Case Control command.
3. Partitioned Bulk Data Sections defined by BEGIN SUPER are used to define only one superelement
each. Bulk Data commands which define superelements are ignored in partitioned Bulk Data
Sections.
Superelements specified by a BEGIN SUPER entry can be automatically attached to other
superelements based on relative locations of grid points. For connection to the downstream
superelement, the global coordinate directions of the attachment grid points of the upstream
superelement will be internally transformed to the global coordinate directions of the grid points of
the downstream superelement. For displacement data recovery, the output will be in the original
global coordinate directions.
4. An acoustic field point mesh section defined by BEGIN AFPM is used to define one acoustic field
point mesh. Acoustic field point meshes are used for postprocessing of acoustic results in the far field
only; i.e., at locations within the acoustic infinite elements.
5. The BEGIN SUPER, BEGIN AUXMODEL, and BEGIN AFPM Bulk Data entries must lie
between BEGIN BULK and ENDDATA.
6. When employing part superelements using the BEGIN BULK SUPER (or BEGIN SUPER) entry,
it should be noted that any parameters that are specified in the main Bulk Data Section apply only to
the residual and not to any of the part superelements. Accordingly, to apply certain parameters to all
of the superelements, they must be specified in the Case Control Section, or explicitly in all of the
BEGIN BULK SUPER (or BEGIN SUPER) portions of the Bulk Data. A common example of such
a parameter specification is PARAM,POST, which is used to request postprocessing of results.
7. arbmid can be referenced under the OUTM keyword of the PBMSECT Bulk Data entry to define
the geometry of the arbitrary beam cross-section.
Main Index
8. For model using user defined subroutines, the subroutines can be put in the UDS section. Nastran
can build user service from the subroutines using command line keyword uds=model. See the
document User Defined Service User's Guide for detail.
9. The parameter WTMASS is supported for trim components with a PARAM, WTMASS, value in
each BEGIN TRMC=n Bulk Data.
10. BEGIN MODULE command can only be specified after the BEGIN BULK or an ENDMODULE
command has already been specified. In other words, a Module Bulk Data section cannot be nested
inside another Module’s Bulk Data section.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 261
BAR/BEAM end load Subcase Selection
BENDL(Case) BAR/BEAM end load Subcase Selection
Function to calculate bar end loads and shear flow.
Format:
BENDL ( PRINT = [YES,NO] ) = [ALL, n, NONE ]
Examples:
To output a table of bar end loads/shear flows.
BENDL = ALL
To output a table of bar end loads/shear flows and print table to F06.
BENDL (PRINT) = ALL
Describer Meaning
PRINT Prints bar end loads and panel shear flow to the F06 file.
YES BAR/BEAM end loads and associated CSHEAR, CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 panel shear
flows will be printed.
NO BAR/BEAM end loads and associated CSHEAR, CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 panel shear
flows will not be printed. (Default)
ALL Select all bar/beam/rod type elements associated with “Shell” panels.
n Identification of a previously defined SET listing “Flange/Boom” elements.
NONE Turn off BENDL in selected subcases.
Remarks:
1. A BENDL Case Control Command is to appear in any subcase for which Bar End Loads and Panel
shear flows are required. This entry is only applicable in SOL101 or ANALYSIS=STATIC.
2. The presence of BENDL in a linear statics run will automatically turn on GPFORCE=ALL as well as
PARAM, NOELOF, 1.
3. Only CSHEAR, CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUADR, and CTRIAR panels will contribute to shear flow
and bar end load calculations.
4. Include MDLPRM HDF5 to output OUTSFLOW data block to the HDF5 output file.
Main Index
BAR/BEAM end load Subcase Selection
5. The following figure shows a typical bar end load and shear flow panel.
6. Print and table FORMAT is:

B A R E N D L O A D S A P P R O X I M A T I O N S ( C B A R )
ELEMENT TOTAL END LOADS
ID. END 1 END 2
6 -1.994413E+03 -1.136868E-13
11 2.082592E+03 3.638604E-01
16 -4.721992E+02 -7.329887E+01
21 4.984904E+02 -4.987337E+02
B A R E N D L O A D S S H E A R F L O W A P P R O X I M A T I O N S ( C
Q U A D 4 )
ELEMENT ID. SHEAR 12 SHEAR 23 SHEAR 34 SHEAR 41
1 9.972063E+01 -2.493060E+02 -9.972063E+01 3.989003E+01
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 263
Line Contact or 3D Contact Output Requests
BOUTPUT (Case) Line Contact or 3D Contact Output Requests
Selects contact regions for output.
Format:
 ALL 
 
BOUTPUT ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH ) =  n 
SORT2 PLOT  
 NONE 
Examples:
BOUTPUT=ALL
BOUTPUT=5
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output is presented as a tabular listing of slave nodes for each load or time depending on
the solution sequence.
SORT2 Output is presented as a tabular listing of load or time for each slave node.
PRINT The print file is the output media.
PUNCH The punch file is the output media.
PLOT Output histories for slave nodes are generated by not printed.
ALL Histories of all the slave nodes (all nodes for 3D Contact) listed in all the BOUTPUT Bulk
Data entries are output. If no BOUTPUT Bulk Data entries are specified, histories of all
the slave nodes in all the contact regions are output.
n Set identification of previously appearing SET command. Only contact regions with
identification numbers that appear on the SET command are selected for output. If there
is a BOUTPUT Bulk Data entry for a contact region selected via the set command,
histories for slave nodes listed in the Bulk Data entry are output. If there is no BOUTPUT
Bulk Data entry for a contact region selected via the set command, histories for all the slave
nodes in that contact region are output.
NONE Result histories for slave nodes are not calculated or output.
Remarks:
1. BOUTPUT is processed in SOLs 101, 106, 112, 122, 129, 153, 159, 400, and 600 only.
2. SORT1 is the default in SOLs 106 and 153. SORT2 is the default in SOLs 129 and 159.
3. Only SORT1 is available for 3D Contact.
4. The initial contact status may be output when presence of BCTABLE/ID=0. Please note that all the
contact force/stress in the initial state are zero. Only the contact status is relevant.
Main Index
Brake Squeal Analysis Data Selection
BSQUEAL (Case) Brake Squeal Analysis Data Selection
Selects data for brake squeal analysis in SOL 400.
Format:
BSQUEAL= n
Example:
BSQUEAL=10
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a BSQUEAL Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remark:
This command is used only in SOL 400 for brake squeal analysis with 3D Contact.
This command is not available with segment-to-segment contact.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 265
Campbell Diagram Parameters
CAMPBELL (Case) Campbell Diagram Parameters
Specifies Campbell Diagram parameters.
Format:
CAMPBELL= n
Example:
CAMPBELL= 10
Describer Meaning
n Identification number of a CAMPBLL Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remark:
1. CAMPBELL option is supported for both SOL 107 and SOL 110 analysis.
2. When there is a Case Control request for Campbell diagram, the selected RGYRO Bulk Data entry
must have the ASYNC option specified in its SYNCFLG field (Field 3). Otherwise, the program
terminates the execution with an appropriate fatal message.
Main Index
Static Load Request for Upstream Superelement Loads
CLOAD (Case) Static Load Request for Upstream Superelement Loads
Requests a CLOAD Bulk Data entry that defines a list of superelement loads and their scale factors in
nonlinear static analysis only.
Format:
CLOAD=n
Example:
CLOAD=15
Describer Meaning
n Identification number of a unique CLOAD Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. This command may only appear in the residual structure subcases (see the Case Control command,
SUPER (Case), 568) and, if used, it must be specified in all of them.
2. The CLOAD Bulk Data entry must reference previously processed LSEQ (load sequence) Bulk Data
that was requested by LOADSET Case Control commands on the upstream (SUPER ≠ 0) subcases.
3. The resulting load is added to those produced by LOAD and TEMP(LOAD) Case Control
commands in the residual structure subcases.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 267
Complex Eigenvalue Extraction Method Selection
CMETHOD (Case) Complex Eigenvalue Extraction Method Selection
Selects complex eigenvalue extraction parameters.
Format:
CMETHOD=n
Example:
CMETHOD=77
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of EIGC (and EIGP) Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. The CMETHOD command must be specified in order to compute complex eigenvalues.
2. See description of the parameter, UNSYMF, 957, to perform complex eigenvalue analysis in SOL 106.
Main Index
Component Modal Synthesis Energy Output Request
CMSENRGY (Case) Component Modal Synthesis Energy Output Request
Requests the form and type of component modal synthesis (CMS) energy output.
Format:
 MODE 
CMSENRGY ( PRINT, PUNCH ,
REAL or IMAG ,  
ESORT =  ASCEND  ,
PLOT PHASE  
 RATIO 
   
 BOTH   ALL   ALL 
     
RESPONSE =  MODAL  , CMSE =  NONE  , CMKE =  NONE  ,
   TOTAL   TOTAL 
 FORCED   QSET   QSET 
   
 
 ALL   ALL 
     
CMDE =  NONE  , FILTER =  0.001  , [ TOPN = m ] ) =  n 
 TOTAL   fratio   
 QSET   NONE 
 
Example:
CMSENRGY (PHASE,RESPONSE=FORCED,CMSE=TOTAL,CMKE=QSET) = ALL
SET 1001 = 10,40
CMSENRGY (PUNCH,PRINT,RESPONSE=BOTH,CMSE=ALL,FILTER=0.01) = 1001
Describer Meaning
PLOT Generates modal fractions for the requested set, but no printer output.
REAL or IMAG Requests rectangular format (real and imaginary) of complex output.
PHASE Requests polar format (magnitude and phase) of complex output.
ESORT Keyword selecting one of the output sorting options: MODE, ASCEND, or RATIO.
MODE Results are output in order of increasing CMS natural mode number.
ASCEND Results are output in order of increasing energy ratio magnitudes.
RATIO Results are output in order of decreasing energy ratio magnitudes.
RESPONSE Keyword selecting the types of results to be produced.
BOTH Requests output for both free and forced response solutions.
MODAL Specifies that output is to be generated for the free (or real eigenvalue)
response solution.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 269
Describer Meaning
FORCED Specifies that output is to be generated for the forced response (modal
frequency or modal transient) solution.
CMSE Keyword requesting output of CMS strain energy ratios.
CMKE Keyword requesting output of CMS kinetic energy ratios.
CMDE Keyword requesting output of CMS damping energy ratios.
ALL Requests both TOTAL and QSET output.
NONE Requests that no CMS energy output be generated.
TOTAL Requests CMS energy ratio totals in all component modes of a
superelement.
QSET Requests CMS energy ratios for individual component modes.
FILTER Keyword specifying the value of the printed output data filter.
fratio Value of output filter ratio (Default = 0.001).
TOPN Keyword specifying the number of largest CMS energy ratios to be output.
m The number of largest CMS energy ratios to be output (Default is all
ratios).
n Results for superelement IDs in SET n will be output.
ALL Results for all recovered superelements will be output.
NONE No CMS energy ratios will be output.
Remarks:
1. The CMSENRGY command may be requested in the modal solution sequences (SOLs 110, 111,
112, 145, 146, 200) and the real eigenvalue analysis solution sequences (SOLs 103 and 106). It is
intended for use when superelements are defined and component modal synthesis techniques are
employed. (See the MODALKE and MODALSE Case Control commands for other options.)
3. ESORT, FILTER, and TOPN describers apply only to QSET results output. TOTAL results output
is always in increasing order of superelement ID number.
4. QSET CMS energy ratios are output in increasing order of component mode number unless the
ESORT keyword specifies a particular sorting order. If a sorting order is specified, the magnitude of
the energy ratio is sorted. DESCEND can be used as a synonym for RATIO.
5. The FILTER keyword specifies an absolute value that is used to limit the amount of printed output
produced. It is applied to the magnitude of the CMS energy ratio. If the CMS energy ratio magnitude
is less than fratio for any natural mode, no output for that natural mode is produced. THRESH can
be used as a synonym for FILTER.
6. In order to obtain unforced response (RESPONSE=BOTH or MODAL) output in SOL 111 and
SOL 112, a subcase containing the ANALYSIS = MODES option must be present.
Main Index
7. For modal transient response solution sequences, response quantities are real numbers. There are no
imaginary terms. Therefore, polar representations of the data have no meaning.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 271
Aerodynamic Control Surface Schedule
CSSCHD (Case) Aerodynamic Control Surface Schedule
Selects control system schedule information.
Format:
CSSCHD = n
Example:
CSSCHD=10
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a control system schedule that appears on a CSSCHD Bulk
Data entry.
Remark:
1. One or more CSSCHD Bulk Data entries can be invoked by this Case Control command.
Main Index
Data Recovery Output for p-Version Elements
DATAREC (Case) Data Recovery Output for p-Version Elements
Requests form and type of output for p-version elements.
Format:
DATAREC ( SORT1 ) = n
SORT2
Example:
DATAREC=12
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid point results per loadcase.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of loadcase per grid point.
n SID of OUTPUT Bulk Data entry to be used. Only displacements, stresses, and
strains of p-version elements with identification numbers that appear on the
OUTPUT Bulk Data entry with SID=n will be output (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. DATAREC is processed only when an adaptive analysis is requested.
2. Only one command per subcase is allowed.
3. This information is used only for output control and does not affect the analysis.
4. Displacements, stresses, and strains will be calculated and printed only for p-version elements on
OUTPUT Bulk Data entries. Those elements listed that are not p-version elements will be ignored.
5. The coordinates of the view points (points at which the displacements are calculated and printed) can
be printed by using the VUGRID command.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 273
Saving Control Parameter of Datablocks for Advanced Nonlinear Elements
DBSAVE (Case) Saving Control Parameter of Datablocks for Advanced Nonlinear

Elements
Selects saving of datablocks of advanced nonlinear elements for static and transient nonlinear analysis in SOL
400.
Format:
DBSAVE=n
Example:
DBSAVE =2
SUBCASE=1
ANALYSIS=HSTAT
SUBCASE=2
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
DBSAVE = -1
SUBCASE=1
STEP = 1
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
DBSAVE = 1
STEP = 2
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
SUBCASE=2
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
SUBCASE=3
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
SUBCASE=4
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
Describer Meaning
n selected value to control saving of datablocks of advanced nonlinear elements (Integer > =
-1).(Default=0)
Default saving datablocks of advanced nonlinear elements at the end of each loadcase
-1 No datablocks of advanced nonlinear elements is saved
0 Saving datablocks of advanced nonlinear elements at the end of each loadcase
>0 Saving datablocks of advanced nonlinear elements at the every nth output
request of results
Remarks:
1. DBSAVE can be applied above all the subcases, within subcases, and steps. DBSAVE above all the
subcases is going to be applied to all the subcases.
Main Index
Saving Control Parameter of Datablocks for Advanced Nonlinear Elements
2. If DBSAVE is present both above subcase and in step, the DBSAVE in step is dominant and used to
control datablocks saving in this step.
3. When DBSAVE=-1, advanced nonlinear element can't be used in Linear Perturbation or other
analysis step with NLIC.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 275
Elements to be Deactivated for SOL 400 Analysis
DEACTEL (Case) Elements to be Deactivated for SOL 400 Analysis
Indicates which DEACTEL Bulk Data entry is used to control the elements to be deactivated in a single
physics job, or a particular physics pass of a coupled job. SOL 400 for NLSTATIC, and NLTRAN, as well
Perturbation analyses only.
Format:
DEACTEL=N
Example:
DEACTEL=2
Describer Meaning
N ID of a matching DEACTEL Bulk Data entry specifying the elements to be
deactivated.
Remarks:
1. Usage is limited to the first subcase (or prior to it), the first step or the first substep of a particular
physics pass. Elements are deactivated at the start of the job or the start of the particular physics pass
and remain deactivated for the entire job.
2. Elements deactivated can not be reactivated at later stage in the analysis.
Main Index
Element Deformation Static Load
DEFORM (Case) Element Deformation Static Load
Selects the element deformation set.
Format:
DEFORM=n
Example:
DEFORM=27
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of DEFORM Bulk Data entries (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. DEFORM Bulk Data entries will not be used unless selected by the DEFORM command in the Case
Control Section.
2. DEFORM is only applicable in linear statics, inertia relief, differential stiffness, and buckling
problems (SOLs 101, 105, 114, and 200), and will produce a fatal message in other solution
sequences.
3. The total load applied will be the sum of external (LOAD), thermal (TEMP(LOAD)), element
deformation (DEFORM), and constrained displacement loads (SPC, SPCD).
4. Static, thermal, and element deformation loads should have unique identification numbers.
5. In the superelement solution sequences, if the DEFORM Case Control command is used in a cold
start, it must also be specified in the restart.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 277
Request Design Constraints at the Global Level
DESGLB (Case) Request Design Constraints at the Global Level
Selects the design constraints to be applied at the global level in a design optimization task.
Format:
DESGLB=n
Examples:
DESGLB=10
DESG=25
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a set of DCONSTR or a DCONADD Bulk Data entry
identification number (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. If used, this command must occur before the first subcase.
2. The DESGLB Case Control command is optional and invokes constraints that are to be applied
independently of a particular subcase. These constraints could be based on responses that are
independent of subcases (e.g., WEIGHT, VOLUME, WMPID, FRMASS, and FATIGUE). The
DESGLB command must be used when applying constraints to FRMASS, WMPID and FATIGUE
responses.
3. The DESGLB Case Control command can be used to invoke constraints that are not functions of
DRESP1 entries; e.g., DRESP2 responses that are not functions of DRESP1 responses are subcase
independent.
4. Constraints that are applied to responses that span subcases through the use of the DRSPAN
command must be invoked using the DESGLB command.
Main Index
Design Model Name
DESMOD (Case) Design Model Name
Assigns the design model parameter used to locate the associated datablocks for merging of two or more SOL
200 models using the MultiOpt application.
Format:
DESMOD=name
Examples:
DESMOD=FLUTTER
Describer Meaning
Name User-specified name to designate the model. (up to 8 characters)
Remarks:
1. The name is an attribute of the datablocks that require merging across models in order to perform a
simultaneous design.
2. The parameter is only used with MultiOpt, that merges simultaneous models.
3. A unique value of DESMOD is needed for each model invoked by MultiOpt.
4. If DESMOD is used in a SOL 200 input file that is not being used in MultiOpt, it will result in a
fatal error.
5. MultiOpt supports Multi Model Optimization (MMO) and Global Optimization (GO), see Design
Sensitivity and Optimization User’s Guide
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 279
Design Objective
DESOBJ (Case) Design Objective
Selects the DRESP1, DRESP2 or DRESP3 entry to be used as the design objective.
Format:
DESOBJ ( MAX ) = n
MIN
Examples:
DESOBJ=10
DESO=25
Describer Meaning
MIN Specifies that the objective is to be minimized.
MAX Specifies that the objective is to be maximized.
n Set identification number of a DRESP1, DRESP2 or DRESP3 Bulk Data entry
(Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. A DESOBJ command is required for a design optimization task and is optional for a sensitivity task.
Only one DESOBJ command may appear in a Case Control Section.
2. The referenced DRESPi entry must define a scalar response (e.g., WEIGHT or VOLUME).
3. If the DESOBJ command refers to a global response, such as weight, it should appear above the first
subcase. If the DESOBJ command refers to a subcase-dependent response such as an element stress,
it should appear in that subcase. If it refers to a subcase dependent response but is inserted above the
first subcase, it will select the response from the first subcase for the objective and ignore the responses
in subsequent subcases.
4. Using DREPS2 with weight factors, SOL200 can support multiple objective optimization.
5. MSC Nastran MultiOpt utility supports Multi Model Optimization (MMO) and Global
Optimization (GO), see Design Sensitivity and Optimization User’s Guide
Main Index
Design Constraints Request at the Subcase Level
DESSUB (Case) Design Constraints Request at the Subcase Level
Selects the design constraints to be used in a design optimization task for the current subcase.
Format:
DESSUB=n
Examples:
DESSUB=10
DESS=25
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a set of DCONSTR and/or a DCONADD Bulk Data entry
identification number (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. A DESSUB Case Control command is required for every subcase for which constraints are to be
applied. An exception to this is ‘global constraints’, which are selected by the DESGLB Case Control
command.
2. All DCONSTR and DCONADD Bulk Data entries with the selected set ID will be used.
3. Constraints cannot be applied to the FRMASS, FATIGUE, or FRFTG response using the DESSSUB
command. Use the DESGLB command instead.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 281
Design Variable Selection
DESVAR (Case) Design Variable Selection
Selects a set of DESVAR entries for the design set to be used.
Format:
DESVAR = ALL
n
Example:
DESVAR=10
Describer Meaning
Only DESVAR Case Control commands with IDs that appear on this SET
command will be used in the SOL 200 design task.
Remarks:
1. Only one DESVAR Case Control command may appear in the Case Control Section and should
appear above all subcase commands.
2. The DESVAR Case Control command is optional. If it is absent, all DESVAR Bulk Data entries will
be used.
Main Index
Displacement Output Request
DISPLACEMENT (Case) Displacement Output Request
Requests the form and type of displacement or pressure vector output. Note: PRESSURE and VECTOR are
equivalent commands.
Format:
DISPLACEMENT ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH , REAL or IMAG PSDF, ATOC, CRMS ,

SORT2 PLOT PHASE RALL
RPRINT TM = f RM = f
, RPUNCH , [ CID ], ------------------------------------------------------- , -------------------------------------------------------- ,
NORPRINT T1 = f, T2 = f, T3 = f R1 = f, R2 = f, R3 = f
STRUCTURE   ALL 
  
[CONNECTOR = ALL , [TRMC= ALL ,
FLUID  =  n 
m setid   
NONE   NONE 
Examples:
DISPLACEMENT=5
DISPLACEMENTS(REAL)=ALL
DISPLACEMENT(SORT2, PUNCH, REAL)=ALL
DISPLACEMENT(SORT2, PRINT, PSDF, CRMS, RPUNCH)=20
DISPLACEMENT(PRINT, RALL, NORPRINT)=ALL
DISP (T1=1.-3, T3=1.-2) = ALL
DISP (TM=1.-3, PRINT,PLOT) = ALL
DISP (TM=1.-3,PRINT,PLOT,SORT2) = 20
DISP (CONN=23)=54
DISPLACEMENT (TRMC=100) = 101
Describer Meaning
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of load, frequency, or time for each
grid point.
PLOT Generates, but does not print, displacement data.
is in degrees.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 283
Describer Meaning
PSDF Requests that the power spectral density function be calculated for random
analysis postprocessing. Request must be made above the subcase level, and
RANDOM must be selected in the Case Control Section. See Remark 8.
ATOC Requests that the autocorrelation function be calculated for random analysis
postprocessing. Request must be made above the subcase level, and RANDOM
must be selected in the Case Control Section. See Remark 8.
CRMS Requests that the cumulative root mean square function be calculated for
random analysis postprocessing. Request must be made above the subcase level,
and RANDOM must be selected in the Case Control Section. See Remark 8.
RALL Request that all of PSDF, ATOC, and CRMS be calculated for random analysis
must be selected in the Case Control Section. See Remark 8.
CID Requests printing of output coordinate system ID in printed output file, (.f06).
TM Translational magnitude filter. See Remark 10.
T1, T2, T3 Translational component filters. See Remark 10.
RM Rotational magnitude filters. See Remark 10.
R1, R2, R3 Rotational component filters. See Remark 10.
F Filter value (Real > 0.0). See Remark 10.
CONNECTOR A set of CWELD or CFAST, elements are defined from which auxiliary grids
will be determined for output post-processing for displacement display in the
basic system. This command produces the following actions:
The auxiliary point “grids” determined by the set m of connector elements

specified on this entry will be appended to the set n defined on the right side of
the DISP command.
m is the identification of a connector element set defined by a previously

appearing SET command.
If the right side of the DISP command is defined as NONE, then no points will
be output even if the user has defined the keyword CONN=ALL or CONN=m.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
If the right side of the DISP command is defined as ALL, then auxiliary point
“grids” for all connectors will be generated regardless if CONN= is specified.
If the user wishes to produce displacements for all the connector elements and
have them appended to the set n defined on the right side of the DISP
command, then to avoid having to define a previously appearing m SET
command with all connectors listed, the user may define CONN=ALL.
ALL Displacements for all points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only displacements
of points with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be
output (Integer > 0).
NONE Displacement for no points will be output.
13..
TRMC=ALL: Output the solution results from all trim components involved in
the analysis by Case Control command, TRIMGRP.

Remarks:
2. The defaults for SORT1 and SORT2 depend on the type of analysis:
a. SORT1 is the default in static analysis, frequency response, steady state heat transfer analysis, real
and complex eigenvalue analysis, flutter analysis, and buckling analysis.
b. SORT2 is the default in transient response analysis (structural and heat transfer). SORT2 is not
available for real eigenvalue (including buckling), complex eigenvalue, or flutter analysis. If
SORT1 is selected in a transient solution for one or more of the commands ACCE, DISP,
ENTH, FORC, HDOT, MPCF, OLOA, SPCF, STRA, STRE, and VELO, then the remaining
commands will also be output in SORT1 format. If SORT2 is selected in a static or frequency
response solution for one or more of the commands ACCE, DISP, FORC, MPCF, OLOA,
SPCF, STRA, STRE, and VELO, then the remaining commands will also be output in SORT2
format.
c. XY plot requests forces SORT2 and overrides SORT1 requests!
d. If a RANDOM request occurs the output will be in SORT2 format, even if SORT1 is requested.
3. VECTOR and PRESSURE are alternate forms and are equivalent to DISPLACEMENT. In complex
analysis, the pressure is ALWAYS magnitude-phase.
4. DISPLACEMENT=NONE overrides an overall output request.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 285
5. The PLOT option is used when curve plots are desired in the magnitude/phase representation and
no printer output request is present for magnitude/phase representation.
6. The units of translation are the same as the units of length of the model. Rotations are in units of
radians.
7. Displacement results are output in the global coordinate system (see field CD on the GRID Bulk
Data entry).
random analysis.
9. Note that the CID keyword affects only grid point related output, such as DISPlacement, VELOcity,
ACCEleration, OLOAD, SPCForce and MPCForce. In addition, CID keyword needs to appear only
once in a grid-related output request anywhere in the Case Control Section to turn on the printing
algorithm.
10. Displacement components may be selected to control filtering to reduce the amount of output
produced. When magnitudes are selected, the component values are ignored. Only a single positive
value for f can be supplied, and comparisons are performed in the global reference frame.
Comparisons are performed after the SET intersection is performed against the domain. Selection of
this option does not effect the MAXMIN(GRID) operations. Scalar comparisons are performed using
the minimum of all supplied values for the filters.
For complex vectors encountered in frequency response analysis, the magnitudes TM and RM follow
a derivation using a deterministic interpretation and are calculated as follows:
• For Grid Points
TM
Define
C1 = T1real**2 + T2real**2 + T3real**2
C2 = T1imag**2 + T2imag**2 + T3imag**2
C3 = T1real*T1imag + T2real*T2imag + T3real*T3imag
C4 = (C1 + C2)/2
C5 = (C1 - C2)/2
Then,
TM = C4 + SQRT (C5**2 + C3**2)
RM
The calculations are similar to the above, except that R1, R2 and R3 are used in place of T1, T2
and T3, respectively.
• For Scalar Points
In this case, TM and RM have the same meaning.
Define
C1 = T1real**2
C2 = T1imag**2
Main Index
C3 = T1real*T1imag
C4 = (C1 + C2)/2
C5 = (C1 - C2)/2
Then,
TM (or RM) = C4 + SQRT (C5**2 + C3**2)
11. When using filters, the compound usage of the verbs PRINT, PLOT is allowed. The entries in the
printed output are the entries that exceed any threshold, while the remaining entries within the SET
are marked as plot to allow for postprocessing operations. When SORT2 is selected, then PRINT,
PLOT must be used to allow for table transpose operations to occur. When any entry in the SORT2
format is above the threshold, all values for time or frequency will be printed for the grid point.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 287
Static Aeroelastic Divergence Request
DIVERG (Case) Static Aeroelastic Divergence Request
Selects the divergence parameters in a static aeroelastic divergence problem.
Format:
DIVERG=n
Example:
DIVERG=70
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a DIVERG Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remark:
1. Static aeroelastic divergence analysis can be performed only in SOLs 144, 200 and 400.
Main Index
Dynamic Load Set Selection
DLOAD (Case) Dynamic Load Set Selection
Selects a dynamic load or an acoustic source to be applied in a transient or frequency response problem.
Format:
DLOAD=n
Example:
DLOAD=73
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a DLOAD, RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2, or
ACSRCE Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. RLOAD1 and RLOAD2 may only be selected in a frequency response problem.
2. TLOAD1 and TLOAD2 may be selected in a transient or frequency response problem.
3. Either an RLOADi or TLOADi entry (but not both) must be selected in an aeroelastic response
problem. If RLOADi is selected, a frequency response is calculated. If TLOADi is selected, the
transient response is computed by Fourier transform. When there are only gust loads (GUST Bulk
Data entry), the DLOAD selects a TLOADi or RLOADi Bulk Data entry with zero load, along with
field 3 of the GUST command.
4. The DLOAD command will be ignored if specified for upstream superelements in dynamic analysis.
To apply loads to upstream superelements, refer to the LOADSET Case Control command.
5. For nonlinear dynamic analysis with SOL 400, TEMPERATURE load can't be applied by
DLOAD/TEMP/TLOADi. TEMP (case control) and TTEMP (Bulk data) should be used to apply
the temperature load. However, for pure linear analysis, DLOAD/TEMP has to be used for
temperature load.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 289
Response Spanning Set Selection
DRSPAN (Case) Response Spanning Set Selection
Selects a set of DRESP1 entries for the current subcase that are to be used in a DRESP2 or DRESP3 response
that spans subcases.
Format:
DRSPAN=n
Example:
DRSPAN=10
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. In SOL 200, DRESP2 or DRESP3 Bulk Data entries can invoke DRESP1 responses that span
subcases if these DRESP1 responses have been identified using a DRSPAN Case Control command
that references a SET request that identifies the DRESP1 Bulk Data entries.
2. Each DRESP1 identified must produce a scalar value.
3. The DRSPAN Case Control command must be at the subcase level, whereas the SET request can be
specified above the subcase level.
4. DRESP2, or DRESP3 that SPANS subcases, cannot reference another DRESP2 and/or DRESP3.
5. DRSPAN must appear in every subcase in the file if the synthetic response is to span the subcases.
The synthetic response via DRESP2 or DRESP3 must reference all DRESP1 IDs defined in SETs of
DRSPAN. In DEQATN, all DRESP1 IDs should show up in the list of variables. For those DRESP1
IDs that are not needed, it can be dropped from the definition of equation(s).
6. To check the value of spanned response, set parameter P2 of DOPTPRM to a value equal to or larger
then 8, see DOPTPRM for details. Note that verification requires performing hand calculation based
on user-provided DEQATN for the spanned response.
Main Index
Design Sensitivity Output Parameters
DSAPRT (Case) Design Sensitivity Output Parameters
Specifies design sensitivity output parameters.
Format:
FORMATTED ALL
NOEXPORT , START = i, BY = j, END = k
DSAPRT UNFORMATTED , = n
EXPORT
NOPRINT NONE
Examples:
DSAPRT(FORMATTED,EXPORT)
DSAPRT(FORMATTED,START=FIRST,BY=3,END=LAST)=101
DSAPRT(UNFORMATTED,START=FIRST)
DSAPRT(UNFORMATTED,EXPORT)
DSAPRT(FORMATTED,END=4)=ALL
DSAPRT(UNFORMATTED,END=SENS)=ALL
DSAPRT(NOPRINT, EXPORT)
Describer Meaning
FORMATTED Output will be presented with headings and labels.
UNFORMATTED Output will be printed as a matrix print (see description of the MATPRN
module in the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide).
NOPRINT No output will be printed.
EXPORT Output will be exported to an external binary file specified by
PARAM,IUNIT.
NOEXPORT Output will not be exported to an external binary file.
START=i Specifies the first design cycle for output (Integer > 0 or Character:
“FIRST” or “LAST”; Default = 1 or “FIRST”).
BY=j Specifies the design cycle interval for output. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0;
Default = 0).
END=k Specifies the last design cycle for output. (Integer > 0 or Character:
“FIRST”, “LAST”, or “SENS”; Default = “LAST”)
ALL All retained design responses (defined on DRESP1, DRESP2 and
DRESP3 entries) will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only
sensitivities of retained responses with identification numbers that appear
on this SET command will be output (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. Only one DSAPRT may appear in the Case Control Section and it must occur with or above the first
SUBCASE command.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 291
Design Sensitivity Output Parameters
2. Sensitivity data will be output at design cycles i, i+j, i+2j, ..., k. Note that the BY=0 implies no
sensitivity results will be output at the intermediate design cycles.
3. END=SENS requests design sensitivity analysis, and no optimization will be performed.
4. If both DSAPRT and PARAM,OPTEXIT, 4, -4, or 7 are specified, then DSAPRT overrides
PARAM,OPTEXIT, 4, -4, or 7. PARAM,OPTEXIT values and the equivalent DSAPRT commands
are described as follows:
OPTEXIT Equivalent DSAPRT Command

4 DSAPRT(UNFORMATTED, END=SENS)
-4 DSAPRT(NOPRINT, EXPORT, END=SENS)
7 DSAPRT(UNFORMATTED, START=LAST)
5. The n and NONE options are not supported for UNFORMATTED output. Only the
UNFORMATTED option is supported for EXPORT.
6. PARAM,DSZERO can be used to set a threshold for the absolute value of the formatted sensitivity
prints.
7. Design Sensitivity analysis is never performed following a discrete design optimization. Therefore, no
sensitivity output will be produced with DSAPRT(END=LAST) when discrete optimization is
performed at the end of a job.
8. Formatted sensitivity data can also be written into Comma Separated Values(or CSV) file with
following steps
a. DSAPRT(formatted,..) request in case control. Note that 'formatted' is a default option.
b. PARAM,XYUNIT,52 in bulk data. Unit 52 is simply chosen as an example.
c. file assignment statement, such as
ASSIGN USERFILE='jobname.csv' FORM=formatted STATUS=new UNIT=52
Main Index
Dihedral Symmetry Option in Cyclic Symmetry
DSYM (Case) Dihedral Symmetry Option in Cyclic Symmetry
Provides for either one or two planes of overall symmetry in DIH-type cyclic symmetry problems.
Format:
 
 S 
 
 A 
 SS 
DSYM =  
 SA 
 AS 
 
 AA 
 
Example:
DSYM=AS
Describer Meaning
S, A The problem is assumed to be symmetrical (S) or antisymmetrical (A) with
respect to the plane containing side 1 of segment 1.
SS, SA, The problem is assumed to be symmetrical (or antisymmetrical) with respect to
AS, AA the plane containing side 1 of segment 1 (denoted by the first symbol), and also
with respect to a plane perpendicular to side 1 (denoted by the second symbol).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 293
Bulk Data Echo Request
ECHO (Case) Bulk Data Echo Request
Controls echo (i.e., printout) of the Bulk Data.
Format:
 
 SORT ( [ EXCEPT ]cdni,... )  SORT  
 
ECHO =  UNSORT , PUNCH  BOTH  , FILE 
 
 BOTH  NEWBULK 
 
 NONE 
Examples:
ECHO=NOSORT
ECHO=BOTH
ECHO=PUNCH, SORT (MAT1, PARAM)
ECHO=SORT (EXCEPT DMI, DMIG)
ECHO=BOTH,PUNCH,FILE
(In the above examples See Remark 7.: the PUNCH keyword will always result in the PUNCH file containing
the entire bulk data input. Explicit inclusion indicators (CDNI) such as (MAT1, PARAM) will always cause
a F06 file to be written that contains only the (CDNI) data.)
Describer Meaning
SORT The sorted (arranged in alphanumeric order) Bulk Data will be printed.
EXCEPT Excludes cdni Bulk Data entries from sorted echo printout. See Remark 6.
cdni,... Defines Bulk Data entry names to be included, or excluded by EXCEPT, in the
sorted echo printout. The PUNCH (.pch) file is not affected by cdni.
UNSORT The unsorted Bulk Data will be printed. If SORT is also not specified, the sorted
Bulk Data will not be printed.
BOTH Both sorted and unsorted Bulk Data will be printed. This is equivalent to
ECHO=SORT, UNSORT.
NONE Neither sorted nor unsorted Bulk Data will be printed.
PUNCH The entire Bulk Data will be written to the punch (.pch) file. See Remark 7. for
options.
FILE The entire Bulk Data echo will be written to the separate file with a default suffix
of .BECHO in *.f06 form. A user-defined filename must be specified in the
ASSIGN statement.
NEWBULK In SOL 200, a complete unsorted Bulk Data file is written to the PUNCH file
with updated design model entries.
Remarks:
1. If no ECHO command appears, sorted Bulk Data will be printed.
Main Index
Bulk Data Echo Request
2. Comments will appear at the front of the sorted file if ECHO=PUNCH.

3. Portions of the unsorted Bulk Data can be selectively echoed by including the commands ECHOON
and ECHOOFF at various places within the Bulk Data. ECHOOFF stops the unsorted echo until
an ECHOON commands is encountered. Many such pairs of commands may be used. The
ECHOON and ECHOOFF command may be used in the Executive and Case Control Sections;
however, ECHOOF should not be the first entry and continuation entries are not handled correctly.
4. If the SORT (cdni,...) describer is specified in a restart in SOLs 101 through 200, then the
continuation entries will not be printed.
5. If the SORT (cdni,...) describer is used, then it must appear as the last describer, as in the preceding
example.
6. If the EXCEPT describer is specified, then it must be specified before all cdni. All Bulk Data entry
types will be listed except those given for cdn1, cdn2, etc. If EXCEPT is not specified, then only those
Bulk Data entry types listed under cdn1, cdn2, etc. will be listed.
7. PUNCH without options or PUNCH(SORT) produces a sorted listing of the entire bulk data input
in the punch file. PUNCH(NEWBULK) produces unsorted bulk data input with updated design
model entries in the punch file. PUNCH(BOTH) combines these two outputs.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 295
Element Energy Loss Per Cycle Output Request
EDE (Case) Element Energy Loss Per Cycle Output Request
Requests the output of the energy loss per cycle in selected elements.
Format:
AVERAGE  ALL 
PRINT, PUNCH  
EDE ( AMPLITUDE [ THRESH = p ] [ NOPERCENT ] ) =  n 
PLOT  
PEAK  NONE 
Examples:
EDE=ALL
EDE(PUNCH, THRESH=.0001)=19
Describer Meaning
PRINT Write energy values to the print file.(Default).
PUNCH Write energy values to the punch file.
PLOT Do not write energy values to either the punch file or the print file.
AVERAGE Requests average energy (in frequency response analysis only) (Default).
AMPLITUDE Requests amplitude of energy (in frequency response analysis only).
PEAK Requests peak energy (for frequency response analysis only). PEAK is the sum of
AVERAGE and AMPLITUDE.
THRESH Energies for elements having an energy value of less than p% will be suppressed in
all output files: print, punch, plot, .op2, and .xdb. THRESH overrides the value
of TINY described in Remark 1. (Default = 0.001).
NOPERCENT Do not compute TOTAL ENERGY OF ALL ELEMENTS IN PROBLEM and
PERCENT OF TOTAL. The values will be appears as zeros. Sparse data recovery
and NOPERCENT can result in significant reduction in computing resources.
But if RTYPE=TOTSE appears on a DRESP1 entry then full data recovery is
necessary and no savings will be realized.
ALL Energy for all elements will be computed.
n Set identification number. Energy for all elements specified on the SET n
command will be computed. The SET n command must be specified in the same
subcase as the EDE command, or above all subcases (Integer > 0).
NONE Element energy loss will not be output.
Remarks:
1. If THRESH = p is not specified, then p defaults to the values specified by user parameter TINY.
2. The energy calculations include the contribution of initial thermal strain.
Main Index
Element Energy Loss Per Cycle Output Request
3. Energy density (element energy divided by element volume) is also computed in some solution
sequences. It can be suppressed by use of PARAM,EST,-1.
4. For frequency response analysis, the energy may be computed in one of three ways as selected by
AVERAGE:
T T
E o = πω ( { u r } [ B e ] { u r } + { u i } [ B e ] { u i } )
AMPLITUDE:
T T 2 T 2
E a = πω ( { u r } [ B e ] { u r } – { u i } [ B e ] { u i } ) + ( 2 { u r } [ B e ] { u i } )
PEAK:
E peak = E o + E a
where:
E = elemental energy.
{ u r }= displacement (real part).
{ u i }= displacement (imaginary part).
[ B e ]= elemental damping.
5. In SOLs 111 and 112, EDE is not available if both PARAM,DDRMM,0 and
PARAM,SPARSEDR,NO are specified.
6. Only damping from the viscous dampers (e.g., CVISC, CDAMPi, etc.) are included. Structural
damping is not included in the calculation.
7. The usages of REPCASE and OMODES Case Control directives is not supported for ESE, EKE,
EDE and GPFO output selections and should not be used.
8. If there are any frequency dependent CBUSH elements present then all CBUSH elements will be
excluded from the element energy loss output.
9. For transient response, EDE is computed in a quasi-static manner at each time step: 1--- { v } T [ B e ] { u } ;
2
where Be is elemental damping and v and u are velocity and displacement respectively.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 297
Element Kinetic Energy Output Request
EKE (Case) Element Kinetic Energy Output Request
Requests the output of the kinetic energy in selected elements.
Format:
AVERAGE  ALL 
EKE ( AMPLITUDE [ THRESH = p ] [ NOPERCENT ] ) =  n 
PLOT  
PEAK  NONE 
Examples:
EKE=ALL
EKE(PUNCH, THRESH=.0001)=19
Describer Meaning
PRINT Writes energy values to the print file (Default).
PUNCH Writes energy values to the punch file.
PLOT Do not write energy values to either the punch file or the print file.
AVERAGE Requests average energy (in frequency response analysis only) (Default).
AMPLITUDE Requests amplitude of energy (in frequency response analysis only).
PEAK Requests peak energy (for frequency response analysis only). PEAK is the sum of
THRESH Kinetic energies for elements having a energy value of less than p% will be
suppressed in all output files: print, punch, plot, .op2, and .xdb. THRESH
overrides the value of TINY described in Remark 1. (Default = 0.001).
PERCENT OF TOTAL. The values will be appears as zeros. Sparse data recovery
and NOPERCENT can result in significant reduction in computing resources.
But if RTYPE=TOTSE appears on a DRESP1 entry then full data recovery is
necessary and no savings will be realized.
ALL Kinetic energy for all elements will be computed.
subcase as the EKE command, or above all subcases (Integer > 0).
NONE Kinetic energy values will not be output.
Remarks:
Main Index
Element Kinetic Energy Output Request
3. Energy density (element energy divided by element volume) is also computed in some solution
4. For frequency response analysis, the energy values may be computed in one of three ways as selected
by
AVERAGE:
1 T T
E o = --- ( { v r } [ M e ] { v r } + { v i } [ M e ] { v i } )
4
AMPLITUDE:
1 T T 2 T 2
E a = --- ( { v r } [ M e ] { v r } – { v i } [ M e ] { v i } ) + ( 2 { v r } [ M e ] { v i } )
4
PEAK:
E peak = E o + E a
where:
{ vr } = velocity (real part).
{ vi } = velocity (imaginary part).
[ Me ] = elemental mass.
5. In SOLs 111 and 112, EKE is not available if both PARAM,DDRMM,0 and
7. EKE output request is not available for linear perturbation analysis.
excluded from the element kinetic energy output.
9. For transient response, EKE is computed in a quasi-static manner at each time step: 1--- { v } T [ M e ] { v } ;
2
where Me is elemental mass and v is velocity.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 299
Element Stress Discontinuity Output Request
ELSDCON (Case) Element Stress Discontinuity Output Request
Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on element stresses.
Format:
 ALL 
ELSDCON =  n 
PLOT  
 NONE 
Examples:
ELSDCON=ALL
ELSDCON=19
Describer Meaning
ALL Stress discontinuity requests for all SURFACE and VOLUME Case Control
commands defined in the OUTPUT(POST) Section will be output.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Only surfaces
and volumes with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be
included in the stress discontinuity output request (Integer >0).
NONE No element stress discontinuity output.
Remarks:
1. This output is available in linear static analysis SOLs 101 and 144 only. Output will be presented for
each surface or volume as a tabular listing of stress discontinuities for each subcase.
2. Only elements used to define the surface or volume are output. See the description of the SURFACE
or VOLUME Case Control commands.
3. Element stress output (STRESS) must be requested for elements referenced on SURFACE and
VOLUME Case Control commands. Also, the GPSTRESS command must be present for printed
output and the STRFIELD command for postprocessing output using the .xdb file
(PARAM,POST,0) for the same surfaces and volumes.
Main Index
Element Sensitivity Output for SOL 108/111
ELSENS (Case) Element Sensitivity Output for SOL 108/111

Select SOLUTION frequencies and RESPONSE DOFs for the generation element sensitivity.
Format:
ELSENS ( [ PRINT , PUNCH / PLOT] , [ REAL or IMAG / PHASE ] , [ THRESH = p ] ,
RESPONSE = r ,[ SOLUTION = { ALL / setf }] , [ MASS , STIFF
, DYNAMIC , SQMASS ,
SQSTIFF , SQDYNA] ) = { ALL / n / NONE }
Example
SET 81 = 100.0, 120.0
SET 91 = 11240/T3, 4001/T1
SET 96 = 15920 THRU 15950
$
ELSENS(RESPONSE=91, SOLUTION=81,MASS,STIFF,DYNAMIC) = 96
Describer Meaning
PRINT Writes sensitivities to the print file (Default).
PUNCH Writes sensitivities to the punch file.
PLOT Do not write sensitivities to either the print file or punch file.
THRESH The magnitude of element sensitivity less than p will be suppressed in all output files:
print, punch, plot, .op2, and .xdb. (Default = 0.0).
RESPONSE Adjoint load response will be computed for unit load applied at grid point components
in SET r.
SOLUTION Frequency responses at these forcing frequencies, defined in setf, will be used for element
sensitivity computation. (Default=all forcing frequencies)
MASS Sensitivity with element mass matrices will be computed and output.
STIFF Sensitivity with element stiffness matrices will be computed and output.
DYNAMIC Sensitivity with element stiffness and mass matrices will be computed and output.
SQMASS Squared sensitivity with element mass matrices will be computed and output.
SQSTIF Squared sensitivity with element stiffness matrices will be computed and output.
SQDYNA Squared sensitivity with element stiffness and mass matrices will be computed and
output.
ALL Sensitivities for all elements will be calculated.
n Set identification number. Sensitivity for all elements specified on the SET n command
will be calculated. The SET n command must be specified in the same subcase as the
ELSSENS command, or above all subcases ( Integer > 0 ). The IDs in set n must be EID
(element ID).
NONE Elemental sensitivity will not be output.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 301
Element Sensitivity Output for SOL 108/111
Remarks:
1. Set r for RESPONSE has no default.
2. The equations various options of ELSENS
ELSENS(MASS) = [Asetf]t[Melem][Ar]
ELSENS(STIFF) = [Usetf]t[Kelem][Ur]
ELSEND(DYNAMIC) = [Asetf]t[Melem][Ar] + [Usetf]t[Kelem][Ur]
ELSENS(SQMASS) = [Asetf]t[Melem][Ar] + [Asetf]*t[Melem]* [Ar]*
ELSENS(SQSTIF) = [Usetf]t[Kelem][Ur] + [Usetf]*t[Kelem]* [Ur]*
ELSEND(DYNAMIC) = [Asetf]t[Melem][Ar] + [Usetf]t[Kelem][Ur] +

[Asetf]*t[Melem]* [Ar]* + [Usetf]*t[Kelem]* [Ur]*
where [Usetf] is the displacement of SOLUTION

[Asetf] is the acceleration of SOLUTION
[Ur] is the displacement of RESPONSE
[Ar] is the acceleration of RESPONSE
[Kelem] is element stiffness matrix
[Melem] is element mass matrix
superscript * means complex conjugate of the term.
Main Index
Element Summary Output Request
ELSUM (Case) Element Summary Output Request
Requests that a summary of element properties grouped by element type and/or element property type are to
be printed.
Format:
 ALL 
 
ELSUM ( [ EID, PID, BOTH, EIDSUM, PIDSUM, NSMCONT,SUMMARY ] ) =  n 
 
 NONE 
Examples:
ELSUM = 9
ELSUM (PID) = ALL
Describer Meaning
EID Element summary output is grouped by element type.
PID Element summary output is grouped by element property type.
BOTH Both EID and PID groupings are produced.
EIDSUM Only a summary of the mass totals for the EID grouping is produced.
PIDSUM Only a summary of the mass totals for the PID grouping is produced.
NSMCONT Nonstructural mass contributions from NSM, NSM1, NSML, and NSML1 Bulk
Data entries are identified.
SUMMARY Only a summary of the mass totals is produced.
ALL Element summary output for all elements
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Produces output for
only those elements whose identification numbers appear in the list of this SET
command.
NONE No element summary output is produced.
Remarks:
1. The ELSUM Case Control command produces a summary of properties for elements. The properties
include element ID, material ID, length or thickness, area, volume, structural mass, nonstructural
mass, total mass, and the product of total mass * WTMASS. Total mass is the sum of the structural
and nonstructural masses.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 303
Element Summary Output Request
2. Certain element types produce only partial data. For these element types, no mass data is produced,
and mass totals will not include any contributions from these element types. Mass data is computed
for the following element types: CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND, CHEXA, CMASSi, CONM1,
CONM2, CONROD, CPENTA, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CRAC2D, CRAC3D,
CROD, CSHEAR, CTETRA, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CTRIAX6, and CTUBE. The mass of
elements with mid side nodes is approximated using only the geometry of the corner nodes. To get
an accurate total mass, use the output from the Grid Point Weight Generator (PARAM,GRDPNT).
3. EIDSUM takes precedence over EID if both are present. Likewise, PIDSUM takes precedence over
PID.
4. The ELSUM Case Control command is ignored in heat transfer solution sequences.
5. The NSMCONT describer produces various amounts of output depending upon whether the
summary option is selected (SUMMARY, PIDSUM or EIDSUM requested). If NSMCONT is
combined with PID, a table is produced that identifies the contribution of each NSM type Bulk Data
entry to the total element nonstructural mass. If SUMMARY is included with PID and NSMCONT,
an additional table is produced that identifies the mass contributions for each property type by
property ID.
6. ELSUM output is only available for the PRINT option, not the PUNCH or PLOT options used in
other commands.
7. ELSUM does not support advanced nonlinear elements.
Main Index
Specifies Final Analysis Step
ENDSTEP (Case) Specifies Final Analysis Step
Specifies final analysis step for SOL 700.
Format:
ENDSTEP = Value
Example:
ENDSTEP = 10000
Describer Meaning
Value Steps to end the simulation (Integer, Default = 9999999).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 305
Specifies Final Analysis Time
ENDTIME (Case) Specifies Final Analysis Time
Specifies final analysis time for SOL 700.
Format:
ENDTIME = Value
Example:
ENDTIME = 0.01
Describer Meaning
Value Time in the applicable units for the model (usually seconds) (Real; Default =
1e+20).
Main Index
Module Bulk Data section delimiter
ENDMODULE (Case) Module Bulk Data section delimiter
Indicates (delimits) the end of a Module’s Bulk Data section.
Format:
ENDMODULE
Example:
ENDMODULE
END MODULE
Remarks:
1. A BEGIN MODULE command must appear somewhere before ENDMODULE.
2. The ENDDATA command may be used to terminate the last Module’s Bulk Data section.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 307
Heat Transfer Enthalpy Output Request
ENTHALPY (Case) Heat Transfer Enthalpy Output Request
Requests form of enthalpy vector output in transient heat transfer analysis (SOL 159).
Format:
 ALL 
 
ENTHALPY ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH ) =  n 
SORT2 PLOT  
 NONE 
Example:
ENTHALPY=5
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each time.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of time for each grid point.
PLOT Generates, but does not print, enthalpies.
ALL Enthalpy for all grid points will be output.
n Set identification of previously appearing SET command. Only enthalpies of grid
points with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be
NONE Enthalpy for no grid points will be output.
Remark:
1. ENTHALPY=NONE is used to override a previous ENTHALPY = n or ENTHALPY = ALL
command.
Main Index
Equilibrium Force Output Request
EQUILIBRIUM (Case) Equilibrium Force Output Request
Specifies options for equilibrium force balance output of applied loads, single point constraint forces and
forces due to multi-point constraints and rigid elements.
Format:
 YES 
EQUILIBRIUM ( ) =  gid 
PLOT  
 NONE 
Examples:
EQUILIBRIUM
EQUILIBRIUM = 501
Describer Meaning
PLOT Generates, but does not print, equilibrium force balance data block.
YES Requests moment summation referenced to origin of basic coordinate system.
gid Requests moment summation referenced to basic system location specified by the
coordinates of grid point gid.
NONE Equilibrium force balance output will not be generated.
Remarks:
1. The EQUILIBRIUM Case Control command produces a summary of the applied loads, single point
forces of constraint (SPC), and multipoint/rigid body element forces of constraint (MPC), as well as
a summation of these quantities. In order for the summation to represent all of the forces in the
problem, these forces must be available and, therefore, the specification of an EQUILIBRIUM Case
Control command causes the program to automatically compute the SPC and MPC forces. However,
if desired, the associated Case Control commands should request output. The single point forces of
constraint are requested by the presence of an SPCFORCE command, and the multipoint/RBE
constraint forces are requested by an MPCFORCE command. Applied loads are automatically
generated by the presence of the LOAD selection Case Control command.
2. Results are always output in the basic coordinate system.
3. The EQUILIBRIUM Case Control command is applicable to Linear Static analysis (SOL101) only,
and does not produce output if any superelements are present.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 309
Equivalent Radiated Power Panel Participation Factor Output Request
ERP (Case) Equivalent Radiated Power Panel Participation Factor Output Request
Requests the form and type of ERP panel participation factor output for frequency or transient analysis.
Format:
  ALL 
 SORT2 PRINT, PUNCH  
ERP  , SOLUTION =  setf  , MPF=(ALL,nlm,NONE)],[MPFSORT=sorttype],
 SORT1 PLOT  
  sett  [ELEMENT],
 frequency 
   0.01 
KEY =  fraction  , FILTER =   ,
   real _value 
 time 
 1.0   1.0 
ERPRHO =   , ERPC =  
 real _value   real _value 
 1.0   1.0 
RHOCP =   , ERPRLF =  
 real _value   real _value 
 ALL 
 1.0   
ERPREFDB =   , [ CSV = unit ] =  setp 
 real _value   
 NONE 
Examples:
SET 17 = 10.,20.,30.,40.,80.,100. $ A list of frequencies
SET 25 = ROOF, DOORLF $ A list of ERP Panel names
$ from a ERPPNL Bulk Entry
ERP ( PRINT,PUNCH,SOLUTION=17,KEY=frac ) = 25
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output is presented as a tabular listing of ERP panels for each frequency.
SORT2 Output is presented as a tabular listing of frequency for each ERP panel.
PRINT Output is written to the .f06 file
PUNCH Output is written to the .pch file
PLOT Results are computed and placed on the ERP table but not output.
SOLUTION Keyword to select frequencies or time.
ALL If associated with SOLUTION, all frequencies or times are selected. If
associated with setp, all ERPPNL entries are selected.
setf Identifier of Case Control SET command defining frequencies.
sett Identifier of Case Control SET command defining times.
MPF Requests the output of Modal Participation Factors for ERP. See Remark 9.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
ALL All structural modes for which MPF will be computed
nlm Number of lowest structural modes for which MPF will be computed
NONE MPF will not be computed. (Default)
MPFSORT Keyword selecting the sort type. Default is sorting by increasing natural mode number. See
Remark 10.
Sorttype Sort options:
ABSA output will be sorted by absolute value in ascending order.
ABSD output will be sorted by absolute value in descending order.
ALGA output will be sorted by algebraic value in ascending order.
ALGD output will be sorted by algebraic value in descending order
ELEMENT Keyword to request element–by-element ERP output
KEY Keyword selecting the output item used to sort the printed output. The default produces
output sorted on either frequency (SORT2) or ERP panel name (SORT1).
KEY=fraction produces output sorted in descending order of the fractional ERP value of
maximum ERP across all frequencies or time steps of a panel.
KEY=time produces output sorted on either time (SORT2) or ERP panel name (SORT1).
In transient the default KEY=frequency will automatically become KEY=time.
FILTER Keyword specifying the value of a filter to be applied to the printed output only. ERP
values are printed only if the fractional ERP value of maximum ERP across all frequencies
or time steps of a panel exceeds the filter value.
ERPRHO Fluid density for Equivalent Radiated Power (ERP) analysis. This item is actually an MSC
Nastran parameter.
ERPC Phase speed of the fluid for Equivalent Radiated Power (ERP) analysis. This item is
actually an Nastran parameter.
ERPRLF Radiation loss factor. In frequency the scale factor C = ERPRLF * (½ERPRHO * ERPC).
In transient the scale factor C = ERPRLF * (ERPRHO * ERPC).
RHOCP Scale factor used in dB computation. This item is actually an MSC Nastran parameter.
ERPREFDB Scale factor used in dB computation. This item is actually an MSC Nastran parameter.
ERP
The dB calculation is ERPdB = 10 log  RHOCP ⋅ -----------------------------
- .

ERPREFDB
CSV Results will be written to a .csv file.

unit Unit of the .csv file as used on the required ASSIGN statement.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 311
Describer Meaning
setp Identifier of case control SET command defining NAMEi entries from an
ERPPNL Bulk Data entry defining panels.
NONE No ERP output is produced.
Remarks:
1. ERP is required to produce any ERP output and ERP request must appear either above SUBCASE
level or within 1st SUBCASE. Subsequent SUBCASEs, from 2nd onwards, may or may not have
ERP request.
2. Output is generated in SORT2 by default. Unlike other Case Control requesting SORT2 format, the
ERP command does not force all other output into SORT2 format.
3. FILTER has no effect on PUNCHed, CSV or OP2 output.
4. In addition to individual panel output a summary named ALLPANEL is produced. If there are
multiple subcases, the panel name is formed from the serial subcase number (1-nsubc) and the
characters ‘ALLP’ as in ALLP0002 unless the ERP command request output for ALL panels across
the Subcases. In this case, the summary panel name ALLPANEL is retained.
5. Selectable frequencies are dependent on the presence of an OFREQ Case Control command.
6. ERPRHO, ERPC, ERPRLF, RHOCP, and ERPREFDB are actually PARAM,name,value entries.
7. The filter process avoids printing ERP for cases where ERP/ERPMAX is less than the FILTER value.
ERPMAX is the maximum ERP value across all frequencies for a panel.
8. If output to a .csv file is requested, the file must be assigned with logical key USERFILE and
FORM=FORMATTED, e.g.,
ASSIGN USERFILE = myfile.csv UNIT=50 FORM=FORMATTED STATUS=NEW
9. The MPF of ERP will be computed with the same parameters, such as SOLUTION, csv, setp and etc.
10. MPFs for ERP are sorted by increasing order of natural frequencies unless the MPFSORT keyword
specifies a different sorting order. If a sorting order is specified, the KEY keyword selects the item that
is used for sorting. Since ERP is always positive, ABSA/ALFA and ABSD/ALFD will produce same
sorting results.
11. Element ERP includes elements defined via ERPPNL and SET3. For 3D element types, such as
HEXA, PENTA and TETRA, element ERP includes those elements at the outer surface of the model.
For an element with multiple faces exposed, the element ERP is the summation of ERP of all exposed
faces.
12. MPF for ERP and element ERP may increases the volume of output significantly.
Main Index
Element Strain Energy Output Request
ESE (Case) Element Strain Energy Output Request
Requests the output of the strain energy in selected elements.
Format:
AVERAGE
PRINT, PUNCH  
ESE ( AMPLITUDE [ THRESH = p ] [ NOPERCENT ] ) =  ALL 
PLOT  n 
PEAK
Examples:
ESE=ALL
ESE (PUNCH, THRESH=.0001)=19
Describer Meaning
PRINT Writes energies to the print file (Default).
PUNCH Writes energies to the punch file.
PLOT Do not write energies to either the punch file or the print file.
AVERAGE Requests average energy in frequency response analysis only.
AMPLITUDE Requests amplitude of energy in frequency response analysis only.
PEAK Requests peak energy for frequency response analysis only. PEAK is the sum of
THRESH Energies for elements having an energy value of less than p% will be suppressed
in all output files: print, punch, plot, .op2, and .xdb. THRESH overrides the
value of TINY described in Remark 1. (Default = 0.001).
PERCENT OF TOTAL. The values will be appears as zeros. Sparse data
recovery and NOPERCENT can result in significant reduction in computing
resources. But if RTYPE=TOTSE appears on a DRESP1 entry then full data
recovery is necessary and no savings will be realized.
ALL Energy values for all elements will be computed.
subcase as the ESE command, or above all subcases (Integer >0).
NONE Element strain energy will not be output.
Remarks:
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 313
3. Energy density (element strain energy divided by element volume) is also computed in some solution
4. For frequency response analysis, the energy may be computed in one of three ways as selected by
AVERAGE:
1 T T
E o = --- ( { u r } [ K e ] { u r } + { u i } [ K e ] { u i } )
4
AMPLITUDE:
1 T T 2 T 2
E a = --- ( { u r } [ K e ] { u r } – { u i } [ K e ] { u i } ) + ( 2 { u r } [ K e ] { u i } )
4
PEAK:
E peak = E o + E a
where:
{ ur } = displacement (real part).
{ ui } = displacement (imaginary part).
[ Ke ] = elemental stiffness.
5. In SOLs 111 and 112, ESE is not available if both PARAM,DDRMM,0 and
6. Element data recovery for thermal loads is not currently implemented in dynamics.
7. Element strain energy is available for nonlinear static analysis (SOL 106). However, in a normal
modes analysis in SOL 106 with PARAM,NMLOOP (or ANALYSIS=MODES) or a PARAM
NMLOOP restart into SOL 103, energies are computed for elements with linear properties only. All
other nonlinear solution sequences do not support element strain energy output.
8. The strain energy for nonlinear elements is calculated by integrating the specific energy rate, the inner
product of strain rate, and stress over element volume and time.
t
·T
E = ε σ dV dτ (5-10)
0V
where:
σ = stress tensor
·
ε = tensor of the strain rate
Main Index
V = element volume
t = actual time in the load history
Loads from temperature changes are included in Eq. (5-10). If we assume a linear variation of
temperatures from subcase to subcase, then the strain energy in Eq. (5-10) for the special case of linear
material and geometry becomes
1 T 1 T
E = --- u K e u – --- u P et (5-11)
2 2
where P et is the element load vector for temperature differences.

For linear elements, the default definition of element strain energy is
1 T T
E = --- u K e u – u P et (5-12)
2
where P et is the element load vector for temperature differences and element deformation.
In Eq. (5-12), the temperatures are assumed to be constant within a subcase. The default definition of
the strain energy for linear elements differs from the definition for nonlinear elements by a factor of
1/2 in the temperature loads. To request the strain energy for linear elements using Eq. (5-11), set the
parameter XFLAG to 2; the default value for XFLAG is 0, which uses Eq. (5-12) for the strain energy
of linear elements.
10. The advanced elements are not supported in ESE.
excluded from the element strain energy output.
12. For transient response, ESE is computed in a quasi-static manner at each time step: 1--- u T K e u ; where Ke
2
is elemental stiffness and u is displacement.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 315
Saves a Load Vector on the Database for Subsequent Reuse
EXPORTLD (Case) Saves a Load Vector on the Database for Subsequent Reuse
Saves the load vector for the current subcase on the database.
Format:
EXPORTLD [ ( [ LOADID = lid ] [ LOADNAME = Idname ] ) ] [ = { n, ALL } ]
Examples:
EXPO(LOADNAME=LANDGEAR)
EXPORTLD=10
Describer Meaning
LOADID=lid User assignable value for the LOADID describer. Used to uniquely identify a
saved load vector for later retrieval (using DBLOCATE, for example). The
default value is the subcase ID.
LOADNAME=Idname User-assignable value (of up to eight characters) for the LOADNAME
describer. Used to uniquely identify a saved load vector for later retrieval. The
default value is blank.
N Results for grid point components in SET n will be exported.
ALL Results for ALL grid point components will be exported. Default is ALL.
Remarks:
1. Each load vector is stored individually as a one column matrix that is qualified by LOADID and
LOADNAME. The combination of both the LOADID and the LOADNAME describers should
uniquely identify the load vector to avoid overwriting (or possibly triggering the output twice rule an
existing load vector).
2. If placed above the SUBCASE entry, then the load vectors for all subcases are saved.
3. The load vectors are qualified by LOADID and LOADNAME for selection using the WHERE clause
on FMS commands that support it.
4. The following table shows the value of the LOADID and LOADNAME describers that are assigned
for various EXPORTLD requests:
Main Index
Saves a Load Vector on the Database for Subsequent Reuse
Example Results
EXPORTLD LOADID=subcase ID, LOADNAME=’ ‘ -
default value applied.
EXPORTLD(LOADID=12) LOADID=12, LOADNAME=’ ‘
EXPORTLD(LOADID=1,LOADNAME=F LOADID=1, LOADNAME=’FORCE12’
ORCE12)
EXPORTLD(LOADNAME=ALLCASES) LOADID=subcase ID,
LOADNAME=’ALLCASES’
5. The load vector is typically imported into a run using the FMS DBLOCATE statement. The
imported load is referenced by using its LOADID value on a LOAD Case Control command or Bulk
Data entry. For example:
ASSIGN loads1=’run1.MASTER’
DBLOCATE datablk=(EXTLD) WHERE(LOADNAME=’ALLCASES’),
CONVERT (LOADID=LOADID+1000) LOGICAL=loads1
...
CEND
LOADS=1001 $ Select external load with LOADID=1001, imported from
previous run.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 317
External Superelement Data Recovery Restart Run Request
EXTDRIN (Case) External Superelement Data Recovery Restart Run Request
Requests the job to perform an external superelement data recovery restart. Also specifies the storage media
of the boundary solution data.
Format:
 DMIGOP2 [ = unitop2 ] 
EXTDRIN  MATRIXOP4orMATOP4 [ = unitop4 ]
 
 MATRIXDBorMATDB
-------------------------------------------------------------- 
 DMIGDB 
Examples:
EXTDRIN
EXTDRIN(DMIGOP2=45)
EXTDRIN(MATOP4)
Describer Meaning
DMIGOP2 = unitop2 Retrieve the boundary solution data stored in DMIG Bulk Data internal format
on an .op2 file whose Fortran unit number is given by unitop2 (Integer > 0,
Default=31).
MATRIXOP4 or Retrieve the boundary solution data on an .op4 file whose Fortran unit number
MATOP4 = unitop4 is given by unitop4. (Integer > 0, Default=31).
MATRIXDB or Retrieve the boundary solution data stored in the standard matrix format from
MATDB the database.
DMIGDB Retrieve the boundary solution data stored in the DMIG Bulk Data internal
format from the database.
Remarks:
1. EXTDRIN is intended for step three in external superelement analysis. External superelement data
recovery is accomplished by restarting from the data base created in step one (external superelement
creation run) and attaching the boundary solution data from step two (assembly run). The boundary
solution data must have been stored in step two via the EXTDROUT Case Control command or user
parameter EXTDROUT.
2. External superelement data recovery restarts are limited to SOLs 101, 103, 107 through 112, and
400.
3. EXTDRIN must be specified above all subcases.
4. User parameters EXTDR and EXTDRUNT are the old method for requesting an external
superelement data recovery restart. EXTDRIN Case Control command takes precedence over the
EXTDR and EXTDRUNT user parameters.
Main Index
5. If data recovery is desired for the external component in SOLs 101, 103, 107 through 112 and 400,
there are four methods to transmit the displacements of the reduced model, in Step 2, to the external
full model. The method is selected by the EXTDROUT Case Control command in Step 2. The
options are as follows:
a. EXTDROUT(MATRIXDB[=dbext]). The displacements of the reduced component model are
stored directly on the database. The sequencing of the displacement degrees-of-freedom
corresponds to the sequencing in the reduced model. Keyword dbext exports the boundary
solution data to a new DBset initialized by the “INIT dbext” statement in the File Management
section of the input.
b. EXTDROUT(DMIGDB[=dbext]). The displacements of the reduced model are stored on the
database in a format which allows automatic connection to the reduced component model if the
reduction grid points and scalar points are the same grid points and scalar points used in the
analysis model. Keyword dbext exports the boundary solution data to a new DBset initialized by
the “INIT dbext” statement in the File Management section of the input.
c. EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=unit). The same as EXTDROUT(DMIGDB) except that the
displacements of the reduced model are written in OUTPUT2 format to a tape unit specified by
the unit keyword (Default=31). The output unit can be assigned to a specific file by using an
ASSIGN OUTPUT2 command in the File Management Section.
d. EXTDROUT(MATOP4=unit). The same as EXTDROUT(MATRIXDB) except that the
the unit keyword (Default=31). The output unit can be assigned to a specific file by using an
ASSIGN OUTPUT4 command in the File Management Section.
Data recovery restart for the external superelement (Step 3) is available in SOLs 101, 103, 107
through 112, and 400 and is accomplished by using a restart procedure from the data base created in
Step 1 and specifying the EXTDRIN Case Control command to import the solutions from Step 2.
The method on inputting the reduced displacements into the component model depends on the
method used to output the external component in Step 2. The setups for Steps 2 and 3 are:
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 319
EXTDROUT Step-2 Step-3

Option Assembly Job Data Recovery for External SE
MATRIXDB, If dbext is specified in EXTDROUT In FMS:
or DMIGDB then in FMS:
ASSIGN SEXX=’step1.MASTER’
RESTART LOGICAL=SEXX
INIT dbext ASSIGN SEYYY=’step2.MASTER’
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB),
In Case Control: WHERE(SEID=YYY), LOGICAL=SEYYY
EXTDROUT(MATRIXDB(or
DMIGDB)[=dbext]) In Case Control:
EXTDRIN(MATRIXDB or DMIGDB)
On command line run with scr=no
assuming job name is called
‘step2.dat’
DMIGOP2 In FMS: In FMS:
ASSIGN ASSIGN SEXX=’step1.MASTER’

OUTPUT2=’extsedr.op2’, RESTART LOGICAL=SEXX
UNIT=45 ASSIGN INPUTT2=’extsedr.op2’,
UNIT=45
In Case Control:
In Case Control:
EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=45)
EXTDRIN(DMIGOP2=45)
MATOP4 In FMS: In FMS:
ASSIGN ASSIGN SEXX=’step1.MASTER’

OUTPUT4=’extsedr.op4’, RESTART LOGICAL=SEXX
UNIT=45 ASSIGN INPUTT4=’extsedr.op4’,
UNIT=45
In Case Control:
EXTDROUT(MATOP4=45)
In Case Control:
EXTDRIN(MATOP4=45)
6. For SOL 101, the Step 3 Case Control structure must match the system model subcase structure in
the numbers of loading conditions. The loading used in step one to generate the loads transmitted to
the analysis model must also be specified in this step. If the analysis model had more loading
conditions than the component model, then the loadings defined in Step 1 must be specified first.
7. For SOLs 103 and 107 through 112, the Step 3 Case Control structure must match the analysis
model subcase structure in the number of eigenvalue extractions, FREQ/DLOAD or
TSTEP/DLOAD subcases.
Main Index
8. SOL 400 with multidisciplinary and linear perturbation analyses will produce multiple boundary
solutions in Step 2; i.e., a boundary solution for each SUBCASE with a unique ANALYSIS
command. Hence in SOL 400 for Step 3 as soon as the boundary solutions have been imported, a
summary of the boundary solutions will be printed in the f06. Here is a sample:
=====================================================================================================================================
Assembly Run Solutions
==========|==========|==========|==========|==========|==============================================================================
Solution | Analysis | | | Super- |
ID | type | Subcase | Step | element | Title/Subtitle/Label
==========|==========|==========|==========|==========|==============================================================================
| | | | | MODEL T-6A (NTA) SEPARATION LOADS ANALYSIS, 270 KEAS
1 | STATICS | 2 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | STATICS
| |----------|----------|----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | 5 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | STATICS FOR BUCKLING ANALYSIS
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 | MODES | 7 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | NORMAL MODES - SOLVE ALL EIGENVALUES
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 | BUCKLE | 6 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | BUCKLING - SOLVE ALL EIGENVALUES
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODAL FREQUENCY - FOUR FREQUENCIES AND DELTA-F=.001 AND F1=1.04
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 | MFREQ | 3 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | MODAL FREQUENCY - FOUR FREQUENCIES AND DELTA-F=.001 AND F1=1.04
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODAL TRANSIENT - FIFTY TIME STEPS AND DELTA-T=.001
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 | MTRAN | 1 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | MODAL TRANSIENT - FIFTY TIME STEPS AND DELTA-T=.001
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 | MCEIG | 4 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | MODAL COMPLEX - SOLVE FOR FIRST FIVE EIGENVALUES
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The “Solution ID” column contains an arbitrary identification number which may be specified on
the SOLUTION Case Control command in Step 3 whose usage will be described below. The
“Analysis Type”, “Subcase”, and “Step” columns are the same as the ANALYSIS, SUBCASE, and
STEP commands specified on Step 2. The “Superelement” column pertains the external
superelement ID processed in Step 2. The “Title/Subtitle/Label” is taken from the TITLE,
SUBTITLE, and LABEL commands specified in Step 2.
In Step 3, as with any restart, the Case Control must contain the same loads and boundary condition
(LBC) commands specified in Step 1 like LOAD, SPC, MPC, METHOD, etc. If there is only one
subcase specified in Step 3 then, by default, SOL 400 will perform external superelement data
recovery for all solutions above. Here is a sample Step 3 Case Control setup:
EXTDRIN ...
SPC=1
MPC=3
LOAD=5
$
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
The displacement and element stress request for all solutions listed in the table above will be
computed.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 321
If, however, data recovery is desired at only a few solutions then a SUBCASE and SOLUTION
command pair is required to obtain data recovery at each of the desired solutions. The subcases may
be specified in any order and the SOLUTION command specifies the desired “Solution ID” from
the table above. For example,
EXTDRIN ...
SPC=1
MPC=3
SUBCASE 1
SOLUTION=5
STRESS=ALL
SUBCASE 2
SOLUTION=3
DISP=ALL
Alternatively, the ANALYSIS command may be used instead of the SOLUTION command. For
example,
EXTDRIN ...
SPC=1
MPC=3
SUBCASE 1
ANALYSIS=MFREQ
STRESS=ALL
SUBCASE 2
ANALYSIS=BUCKLE
DISP=ALL
If there is more than on solution associated with a particular analysis type, then results will be
computed for all “Solution IDs” corresponding to that analysis type.
9. In Step 2, more than one external superelement may be processed by EXTDROUT. The following
must be noted if DMIGOP2 or MATOP4 is used.
a. In SOLs 101, 103, and 107 through 112, the user must specify separate EXTDROUT as shown
in the example below:
SUBCASE 1
SUPER=10
SUBCASE 2
SUPER=20
b. In SOL 400, the user may specify separate EXTDROUT as described above or the same
EXTDROUT command for all external superelements. If the user specifies the same
EXTDROUT, then in the 3rd step a fatal message will be issued as shown below:
=====================================================================================================================================
Assembly Run Solutions
==========|==========|==========|==========|==========|==============================================================================
Solution | Analysis | | | Super- |
ID | type | Subcase | Step | element | Title/Subtitle/Label
==========|==========|==========|==========|==========|==============================================================================
| | | | | MODAL, 3-STEP EXTERNAL SE, DMIGDB, ASSEMBLY
1 | MODES | 1 | 0 | 10 |
| | | | |
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODAL, 3-STEP EXTERNAL SE, DMIGDB, ASSEMBLY
2 | MODES | 1 | 0 | 20 |
| | | | |
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 22907 (EXTDRSUM)
Main Index
The attached boundary solutions %1 contains solutions for more than one external superelement
and the desiredsuperelement ID has not been selected.
USER ACTION: If the EXTDROUT Case Control command (or PARAM,EXTDROUT) specified DMIGOP2 or
MATOP4 then you must specify the superelement ID on the SUPER Case Control
command to select the appropriate boundary solution.
If EXTDROUT Case Control command (or PARAM,EXTDROUT) specified MATRIXDB or

DMIGDB then you must specify the superelement ID
a) On the SUPER Case Control command to select the appropiate boundary solution.
or
b) In the WHERE(SEID=superelement_ID) clause on the DBLOCATE statement of the
boundary solutions database to select the appropiate boundary solution.
The summary shows that the solution file contains solutions for superelements 10 and 20 and the
message indicates that only one solution may be processed. So the user must specify the SUPER
command to select the desired superelement; e.g.,
SUPER=10
EXTDRIN(DMIGOP2=45)
Alternatively for EXTDRIN(DMIGDB or MATRIXDB) only, the user may specify
WHERE(SEID=10) on the DBLOCATE statement of the boundary solution database.
10. The following examples continue from the examples described in Remark 18 under the EXTSEOUT
Case Control command description.
Example 1. MATDB / MATRIXDB or DMIGDB Option

 Assembly Job (assume input file is named “assembly.dat”)
• File Management Section (FMS) Requirement only if it is desired to store the
boundary solutions on a dbset separate from DBALL
INIT EXTDRDB
• Case Control Requirement for MATDB / MATRIXDB Option.
Store boundary solutions on the DBALL dbset
EXTDROUT
Store boundary solutions on the EXTDRDB dbset
EXTDROUT ( MATRIXDB = EXTDRDB )
• Case Control Requirement for DMIGDB Option
Store boundary solutions on the DBALL dbset
EXTDROUT ( DMIGDB )
Store boundary solutions on the EXTDRDB dbset
EXTDROUT ( DMIGDB = EXTDRDB )
For all options above, “scr = no” must be specified on the Nastran command line to ensure
that the databases are saved at the end of the jobs.
 External Superelement Data Recovery Restart Job (repeat following setup for each
superelement)
• File Management Section (FMS) Requirement
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 323

ASSIGN SE10=’extse10.MASTER’
RESTART LOGI=SE10
ASSIGN ASMB=’assembly.MASTER’
DBLOC DATABLK=(EXTDB) WHERE(SEID=10) LOGI=SE10
• Case Control Requirement for MATDB / MATRIXDB Option
EXTDRIN
• Case Control Requirement for DMIGDB Option
EXTDRIN ( DMIGDB )
Example 2. DMIGOP2 Option

 Assembly Job
• Setup for SOLs 101, 103, 107 through 112, and 400 each superelement boundary
solution is stored on a separate Fortran unit
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’extse10dr.op2’ UNIT=25 DELETE
• Case Control Requirement
SUBCASE 1
SUPER = 10
EXTDROUT ( DMIGOP2 = 25 )
SUBCASE 2
SUPER = 20
SUBCASE 3
SUPER = 30
• Alternative setup for SOL 400 only – all superelement boundary solutions are
stored on the same Fortran unit
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’extalldr.op2’ UNIT=25 DELETE
superelement)
• Setup for SOLs 101, 103, 107 through 112, and 400
Main Index

RESTART LOGICAL=SE10
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’extse10dr.op2’ UNIT=25
EXTDRIN ( DMIGOP2 = 25 )
stored on the same Fortran unit
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’extalldr.op2’ UNIT=25
• Case Control Requirement – SUPER command is required to select the
correct superelement boundary solution
SUPER = 10
EXTDRIN ( DMIGOP2 = 25 )
Example 3. MATOP4 Option

 Assembly Job
• Setup for SOLs 101, 103, 107 through 112, and 400 each superelement boundary
solution is stored on a separate Fortran unit.
SUBCASE 1
SUPER = 10
EXTDROUT ( MATOP4 = 25 )
SUBCASE 2
SUPER = 20
SUBCASE 3
SUPER = 30
stored on the same Fortran unit.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 325

ASSIGN OUTPUT4=’extalldr.op4’ UNIT=25 DELETE
superelement)
• Setup for SOLs 101, 103, 107 through 112, and 400
ASSIGN INPUTT4=’extse10dr.op4’ UNIT=25
EXTDRIN ( MATOP4 = 25 )
 Alternative setup for SOL 400 only – all superelement boundary solutions are stored
on the same Fortran unit
ASSIGN INPUTT4=’extalldr.op4’ UNIT=25
• Case Control Requirement – SUPER command is required to select the
correct superelement boundary solution
SUPER = 10
EXTDRIN ( MATOP4 = 25 )
Main Index
External Superelement Boundary Solution Storage Request.
EXTDROUT(Case) External Superelement Boundary Solution Storage Request.
Requests the job to store external superelement boundary displacements and column labels; e.g., eigenvalues,
forcing frequencies, time steps. Also specifies the storage media of the boundary solution data.
Format:
 DMIGOP2 [ = unitop2 ] 
 MATRIXOP4orMATOP4 [ = unitop4 ]
EXTDROUT   NOCASE
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATRIXDBorMATDB [ = dbext ] 
- 
 DMIGDB [ = dbext ]
Examples:
EXTDROUT
EXTDROUT(MATOP4 NOCASE)
Describer Meaning
DMIGOP2 = unitop2 Retrieve the boundary solution data stored in DMIG Bulk Data internal format
on an .op2 file whose Fortran unit number is given by unitop2 (Integer > 0,
Default=31)..
MATRIXOP4 or Retrieve the boundary solution data on an .op4 file whose Fortran unit number
MATOP4 = unitop4 is given by unitop4. (Integer ≠ 0, Default=31). unitop4 is a non-zero integer
with the following meanings:
unitop4 > 0: Store in sparse format
unitop4 < 0: Store in non-sparse format on Fortran unit number given by

|unitop4
MATRIXDB or Retrieve the boundary solution data stored in the standard matrix format from
MATDB = dbext the database. Dbext is the name of a new dbset on which to store the boundary
data. Dbext must be allocated on an INIT FMS statement.
DMIGDB DMIGDBRetrieve the boundary solution data stored in the DMIG Bulk Data
internal format from the database. Dbext is the name of a new dbset on which
to store the boundary data. Dbext must be allocated on an INIT FMS
statement.
NOCASE NOCASEBy default in SOL 400 only, the TITLE/SUBTITLE/LABEL
contents are exported along with boundary data. Specify NOCASE if you do
not want these contents to be exported.
Remarks:
1. EXTDROUT is intended for step two (or assembly run) in external superelement analysis.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 327
External Superelement Boundary Solution Storage Request.
2. EXTDROUT is honored in SOLs 101, 103, 107 through 112, and 400 only.
3. In SOLs 101, 103, and 107 through 112, if there are multiple external superelements and DMIGOP2
or MATOP4 is requested then EXTDROUT must be specified in separate subcases for each external
superelement along with the SUPER command and unitop4 or unitop2 must be unique for each
external superelement. Separate EXTDROUT commands are not required in SOL 400. See Remarks
9. and 10. under the EXTDRIN Case Control command description.
4. User parameters EXTDROUT and EXTDRUNT are the old method for requesting the storage of
boundary solution data. EXTDROUT Case Control command takes precedence over the
EXTDROUT and EXTDRUNT user parameters.
5. See EXTDRIN’s case control command description for a description of EXTDROUT and
EXTDRIN usage.
Main Index
External Superelement Creation Specification
EXTSEOUT (Case) External Superelement Creation Specification
Format:


EXTSEOUT  STIFFNESS MASS DAMPING K4DAMP LOADS FSCOUP,


 MAN 
  QSET
ASMBULK =  MANQ  , EXTBULK , EXTID = seid, ---------------- ,
  ASET
 AUTO 
 
 MATDB (or MATRIXDB) [ = dbext ] 
 DMIGDB [ = dbext ] 
 cccccc   
DMIGSFIX =   DMIGOP2 = unitop2 
 EXTID   
 DMIGPCH 
 MATOP4 (or MATRIXOP4) = unitop4 
 
Example(s):
EXTSEOUT
EXTSEOUT(DMIGOP2=26)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=200)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTBULK EXTID=100)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=AUTO EXTBULK EXTID=100)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ EXTID=10 DMIGDB)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 DMIGOP2=26)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 DMIGPCH)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 DMIGSFIX=XSE100 DMIGPCH)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=200 DMIGSFIX=EXTID DMIGPCH)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 MATOP4=26)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=200 MATOP4=-25)
(See also Remarks 17. and 18.)
.
Describer Meaning
STIFFNESS Store the boundary stiffness matrix. See Remarks 1. and 2.
MASS Store the boundary mass matrix. See Remark 1.
DAMPING Store the boundary viscous damping matrix. See Remarks 1. and 2.
K4DAMP Store the boundary structural damping matrix. See Remark 1.
LOADS Store the boundary static loads matrix. See Remark 1.
FSCOUP Store the boundary fluid-structure coupling matrix. See Remark 1.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 329
Describer Meaning
ASMBULK or Generate Bulk Data entries for use in a subsequent superelement assembly
ASMBULK = MAN process and store them on the assembly punch file (.asm). This data, which
is used in the main bulk data portion of a subsequent assembly job, includes
an SEBULK entry that specifies MANUAL as the method for searching
boundary points, and an SECONCT entry that defines connections for
boundary grid and scalar points. See Remarks 3., 6., and 15.
ASMBULK = MANQ Similar to the ASMBULK = MAN option, except that the generated
SECONCT entry defines connections not only for boundary grid and scalar
points, but also for Q-set points. This allows the user to have control over
the Q-set points of the external superelement in the subsequent assembly
job. See Remarks 3., 5., and 15.
ASMBULK = AUTO Generate Bulk Data entries for use in a subsequent superelement assembly
process, and store them on the assembly punch file (.asm). This data, which
is to be used in the main bulk data portion of a subsequent assembly job,
includes an SEBULK entry that specifies AUTO as the method for searching
boundary points, and an SECONCT entry that defines connections for
boundary scalar points. See Remarks 3., 6., and 15.
EXTBULK Generate Bulk Data entries related to the external superelement and store
them on the standard punch file (.pch). This data is used in the BEGIN
SUPER portion of the bulk data of a subsequent assembly job. EXTBULK
need not be specified if DMIGPCH or MATOP4 (see the following
descriptions) is specified. See Remarks 3., 7., 8., and 15.
Note that, in general, the EXTBULK keyword is not required and is

provided solely for user convenience. In the absence of EXTBULK and the
associated output on the standard punch file resulting from it, the
subsequent assembly job will retrieve the required data for the external
superelement from the medium on which the boundary matrices are stored.
EXTID=seid seid (integer > 0) is the superelement ID to be used on the SEBULK and
SECONCT (if applicable) Bulk Data entries stored on the assembly punch
file (.asm) if ASMBULK is specified, and in the BEGIN SUPER Bulk Data
entry stored on the standard punch file (.pch) if EXTBULK or DMIGPCH
is specified. See Remarks 3. - 9., 13., and 17.
DMIGSFIX = cccccc cccccc is the suffix (up to six characters) to be employed in the names of the
DMIG matrices stored on the standard punch file (.pch) if the DMIGPCH
option is specified. See Remarks 10. - 13. See also Example 3 in Remark 18.
DMIGSFIX = EXTID The seid defined by the EXTID keyword is the suffix to be employed in the
names of the DMIG matrices stored on the standard punch file (.pch) if the
DMIGPCH option is specified. See Remarks 3., 10. - 13. See also Example 3
in Remark 18.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
MATDB Store the boundary matrices and other information on the database. Dbext
(or MATRIXDB) = dbext is the name of a new dbset on which to store the boundary matrices. Dbext
(Default) must be allocated on an INIT FMS statement. By default, matrices are
stored on DBALL. See Example 1 in Remark 18. Dbext is required if 3-step
external superelement data recovery will be performed.
DMIGDB= dbext Similar to MATDB (or MATRIXDB) except that the boundary matrices are
stored as DMIG Bulk Data entries on the database.Dbext is the name of a
new dbset on which to store the boundary matrices. Dbext must be allocated
on an INIT FMS statement. By default, matrices are stored on DBALL. See
Example 1 in Remark 18. Dbext is required if 3-step external superelement
data recovery will be performed.
DMIGOP2 = unitop2 Store the boundary matrices as DMIG Bulk Data entries on an .op2 file
whose Fortran unit number is given by unitop2 (Integer > 0). See Remark 16.
See also Example 2 in Remark 18.
DMIGPCH Store the boundary matrices as DMIG Bulk Data entries on the standard
punch file (.pch). Note that, if boundary matrices include both structural
and fluid grids, use DMIGOP2 instead. See Remarks 3. and 7. - 15. See also
Example 3 in Remark 18.
MATOP4 = unitop4 unitop4 is a non-zero integer with the following meanings:
(or MATRIXOP4 =
unitop4) unitop4 > 0
Store the boundary matrices in sparse format on an .op4 file whose Fortran
unit number is given by unitop4
unitop4 < 0
Store the boundary matrices in non-sparse format on an .op4 file whose

Fortran unit number is given by |unitop4|
See Remarks 3., 7., 8., 15., and 16. See also Example 4 in Remark 18.
ASET/QSET Specifies how the external superelement’s q-set dofs (dynamic degrees-of-
freedom) are defined on the exported file. By default, all q-set dofs are
written to QSET/QSET1 entries which means the superelement’s modes
will be “added” to but not synthesized into the assembly’s modes. By
specifying ASET, the q-set dofs are written to ASET/ASET1 entries and will
be synthesized into the assembly’s.
Remarks:
1. If none of the describers STIFFNESS through FSCOUP is specified, then all matrices are stored.
2. STIFFNESS and DAMPING may be abbreviated to STIF and DAMP, respectively.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 331
3. EXTID with an seid value must be specified if one or more of ASMBULK, EXTBULK, DMIGPCH,
or MATOP4 are specified.
If the DMIGSFIX = EXTID form is employed along with the DMIGPCH specification, the value
seid may not exceed 999999 since this value becomes part of the names given to the DMIG matrices
generated on the standard punch file (.pch). See Remark 13., and Example 3 in Remark 18.
If PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES is specified to used generate the Q-set degrees of freedom (DOFs)
(generalized coordinates), the value seid may not exceed 999 since this value becomes part of the
automatically generated IDs of the SPOINTs representing the Q-set DOFs. See explanation in Item
c under Remark 17.
4. If ASMBULK is specified, the following Bulk Data entries are generated and stored on the assembly
punch file (.asm):
SEBULK seid … (specifies MANUAL as the method for searching
boundary points)
SECONCT seid …(defines connections for boundary grid and scalar
points)
GRID entries for boundary and access grid points

SPOINT entries for boundary and access scalar points
CORD2x entries associated with the boundary and access GRID
entries
5. If ASMBULK = MANQ is specified, the following Bulk Data entries are generated and stored on the
assembly punch file (.asm):
SEBULK seid ... (specifies MANUAL as the method for searching
boundary points)
SECONCT seid ... (defines connections for boundary grid and
scalar points as well as for Q-set points)
GRID entries for boundary and access grid points
SPOINT entries for boundary and access scalar points as well as
for Q-set points
CORD2x entries associated with the boundary and access GRID
entries
6. If ASMBULK = AUTO is specified, the following Bulk Data entries are generated and stored on the
assembly punch file (.asm):
SEBULK seid … (specifies AUTO as the method for searching
boundary points)
SECONCT seid … (defines connections for boundary scalar
points)
GRID entries for access grid points

CORD2x entries associated with the access grid points
SPOINT entries for boundary and access scalar points
7. If DMIGPCH or MATOP4 is specified, then EXTBULK need not be specified.
8. If DMIGPCH is not specified, but EXTBULK or MATOP4 is specified, the following Bulk Data
entries are generated and stored on the standard punch file (.pch):
BEGIN BULK seid
Main Index
GRID entries for boundary points

GRID entries for interior points referenced by PLOTEL entries
SPOINT entries for boundary scalar points as well as for Q-set
points
CORD2x entries associated with the above GRID entries
EXTRN
ASET
QSET/QSET1
PLOTEL
9. If DMIGPCH is specified, the following Bulk Data entries are generated and stored on the standard
punch file (.pch):
BEGIN SUPER seid
GRID entries for boundary points
SPOINT entries for boundary scalar points as well as for Q-set
points
CORD2x entries associated with the boundary GRID entries
ASET/ASET1
PLOTEL entries referencing the boundary GRID entries
DMIG entries for the requested boundary matrices
10. The DMIGSFIX keyword is ignored if DMIGPCH is not specified.
11. If DMIGPCH is specified without the DMIGSFIX keyword, then the boundary DMIG matrices
generated and stored on the standard punch file (.pch) will have names of the following form:
KAAX (boundary stiffness matrix)
MAAX (boundary mass matrix)
BAAX (boundary viscous damping matrix)
K4AAX (boundary structural damping matrix)
PAX (boundary load matrix)
AAX (boundary fluid-structure coupling matrix)
See Example 3 in Remark 18.
12. If the DMIGSFIX = cccccc form is employed along with the DMIGPCH specification, then the
boundary DMIG matrices generated and stored on the standard punch file (.pch) will have names of
the following form:
Kcccccc (boundary stiffness matrix)
Mcccccc (boundary mass matrix)
Bcccccc (boundary viscous damping matrix)
K4cccccc (boundary structural damping matrix)
Pcccccc (boundary load matrix)
Acccccc (boundary fluid-structure coupling matrix)
13. If the DMIGSFIX = EXTID form is employed along with the DMIGPCH specification, then the
boundary DMIG matrices generated and stored on the standard punch file (.pch) will have names of
the following form:
Kseid (boundary stiffness matrix)
Mseid (boundary mass matrix)
Bseid (boundary viscous damping matrix)
K4seid (boundary structural damping matrix)
Pseid (boundary load matrix)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 333
Aseid (boundary fluid-structure coupling matrix)

where seid is the superelement ID specified by the EXTID keyword.
14. If the DMIGPCH option is specified, the boundary DMIG matrices generated and stored on the
standard punch file (.pch) may not be as accurate as the boundary matrices resulting from the other
options (MATDB/MATRIXDB, or DMIGOP2 ,or MATOP4). Accordingly, this may result in
decreased accuracy from the subsequent assembly job using these DMIG matrices.
15. The punch output resulting from EXTSEOUT usage is determined by ASMBULK, EXTBULK,
DMIGPCH, and MATOP4 as follows:
 No ASMBULK, EXTBULK, DMIGPCH or MATOP4
No punch output.
 ASMBULK, but no EXTBULK, or DMIGPCH, or MATOP4
Punch output is generated and stored on the assembly punch file (.asm) as indicated in Remarks 4.
through 6.
 No ASMBULK, but EXTBULK, DMIGPCH, or MATOP4
Punch output is generated and stored on the standard punch file (.pch) as indicated in Remarks 8. or
9. (as appropriate).
 ASMBULK and EXTBULK, DMIGPCH or MATOP4
Punch output consists of two distinct and separate parts. One part is generated and stored on the
assembly punch file (.asm) as indicated in Remarks 4. through 6. The other part is generated and
stored on the standard punch file (.pch) as indicated in Remarks 8. or 9. (as appropriate).
16. If DMIGOP2 = unitop2 or MATOP4 = unitop4 is specified, an appropriate ASSIGN OUTPUT2 or
ASSIGN OUTPUT4 statement must be present in the File Management Section (FMS) for the
specified Fortran unit numbers. See Examples 2 and 4 in Remark 18.
17. The creation of an external superelement using EXTSEOUT involves running a Nastran job, with
the following additional data:
a. The data for the creation of the external superelement is specified by the EXTSEOUT Case
Control command. It is best to specify this command above the subcase level. However, if the
Nastran job itself involves superelements, then the EXTSEOUT command may also be specified
within the subcase that is applicable to the residual.
b. The boundary points of the external superelement are specified by ASET/ASET1 Bulk Data
entries.
c. If the external superelement creation involves component mode reduction, then Q-set degrees of
freedom (DOFs) (generalized coordinates) must be defined. This can be done either by
automatically defining them via PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES or by explicitly specifying them via
QSET/QSET1 Bulk Data entries. Note that for the latter case of explicit definition, only
SPOINTs may be specified as Q-set points; no grid points may be specified. If this requirement
is not met, the program terminates the execution with an appropriate fatal message.
Main Index
If PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES is specified, SPOINTs are automatically generated internally to

represent the Q-set DOFs. The IDs of these SPOINTs are of the form 9sssnnnn where sss is the
superelement ID seid specified by the EXTID keyword, and nnnn is a mode number. Both sss and
nnnn will have leading zeros inserted in them to ensure that sss is a three-digit number and nnnn
is a four-digit number. Thus, for example, the Q-set DOF corresponding to the 8th mode of
superelement ID 5 would be represented by an SPOINT with an automatically generated ID of
90050008, while the Q-set DOF corresponding to the 50th mode of superelement ID 25 would
be represented by an SPOINT with an automatically generated ID of 90250050.
Because of the preceding numbering scheme, the superelement ID seid specified by the EXTID
keyword must necessarily not exceed 999 when PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES is specified. The
program terminates the job with a User Fatal Message if this condition is not met.
Further, because of the preceding numbering scheme, the user should ensure that, when
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES is specified, the IDs of the grid and scalar points of the external
superelement do not conflict with the automatically generated SPOINT IDs of the Q-set DOFs.
The program terminates the job with a User Fatal Message if this condition is not met.
d. The fixity of the boundary DOFs for the component mode reduction may be specified using the
BSETi/BNDFIXi and CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 Bulk Data entries. (The default scenario
assumes that all boundary DOFs are fixed for component mode reduction.)
e. The output for the external superelement is generated in the assembly job. This output consists
of displacements, velocities, accelerations, SPC forces, MPC forces and element stresses, strains
and forces. However, in order for this output to be generated in the assembly job, the output
requests must be specified in the external superelement creation run. Normally, the only output
requests for the external superelement that are honored in the assembly job are those that are
specified in the creation run. There is, however, one important exception to this: the output for
the boundary and access grid and scalar points, as well as for all grid points associated with
PLOTEL entries, can be obtained in the assembly job even if there is no output request specified for
these points in the creation run.
If the creation run contains the load requests TEMPERATURE (LOAD) or DEFORM, then
element stresses and element forces will not be available in the assembly run.
f. If the assembly job involves the use of PARAM Bulk Data entries, then the following points
should be noted:
• PARAM entries specified in the main bulk data portion of the input data apply only to the residual
and not to the external superelements.
• PARAM entries specified in the BEGIN SUPER portion of the Bulk Data for an external
superelement apply only to that superelement.
• The most convenient way of ensuring that PARAM entries apply not only to the residual, but also
to all external superelements, is to specify such PARAM entries in the Case Control Section, not
in the main bulk data. This is particularly relevant for PARAMs such as POST.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 335
18. The following examples illustrate details of job setups for the external superelement creation and the
subsequent assembly process for various scenarios. These examples assume that there are three
external superelement creation jobs, one each for external SE 10 (extse10.dat), SE 20 (extse20.dat)
and SE 30 (extse30.dat), followed by an assembly job.

 External SE Creation Jobs
• File Management Section FMS Requirement only if 3rd step external superelement
data recovery is desired
SE 10: INIT EXTDB
SE 20: INIT EXTDB
SE 30: INIT EXTDB
These INIT statements along with the DBEXT keyword below will create separate
DBsets called “extse10.EXDTB”, “extse20.EXTDB”, and “extse30.EXTDB” and store
the necessary data for the Assembly Job on them. All other data will be stored on
DBALL.
• Case Control Requirement for the MATDB / MATRIXDB option if 3rd step external
superelement data recovery is not desired.
SE 10: EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK EXTID = 10)
The EXTBULK keyword may be specified, but it is not necessary.
• Case Control Requirement for the DMIGDB option if 3rd step external superelement
data recovery is not desired.
SE 10: EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK EXTID = 10 DMIGDB)
For both options, scr = no should be specified on the Nastran job command line to ensure
• Case Control Requirement for the MATDB / MATRIXDB option if 3rd step external
superelement data recovery is desired.
SE 10: EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK EXTID = 10 DBEXT=SE10)
• Case Control Requirement for the DMIGDB option if 3rd step external superelement
data recovery is desired.
SE 10: EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK EXTID = 10 DMIGDB DBEXT=SE10)
Main Index
Example 1. MATDB / MATRIXDB or DMIGDB Option (continued)

 Assembly Job
(Note: If DBEXT was specified on the EXTSEOUT command in the External SE Creation Jobs
then the extse10.DBALL, etc. files may be hidden (moved or renamed) from the Assembly Job for
purposes of security or privacy.)
ASSIGN dbname10=’extse10.MASTER’
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10)
LOGICAL=dbname10
LOGICAL=dbname20
LOGICAL=dbname30
(Note: All of the data blocks stored on the databases for the external SEs have the same
common name of EXTDB.)
If 3rd step data recovery is desired for the external superelement then see the examples
under Remark 10 of the EXTDRIN Case Control command for additional File
Management and Case Control requirements for the Assembly Job.
• Bulk Data Requirement
The following INCLUDEs are required. They may be specified anywhere in the Main
Bulk Data.
INCLUDE ‘extse10.asm’

ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’extse10_op2’ UNIT=25 DELETE
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 337
Example 2. DMIGOP2 Option (continued)

SE 10: EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK EXTID = 10 DMIGOP2 = 25)
The EXTBULK keyword may be specified, but it is not necessary.
scr = yes may be specified on the Nastran command line unless a 3rd step external
superelement data recovery restart is desired.
 Assembly Job
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’extse10_op2’ UNIT=25
Management and Case Control requirements for the Assembly Job
The following INCLUDEs are required. They may be specified anywhere in the main
bulk data.
Example 3. DMIGPCH Option

SE 10: EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK EXTID = 10 DMIGPCH)
SE 20: EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK EXTID = 20 DMIGPCH,
DMIGSFIX = XSE20)
SE 30: EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK EXTID = 30 DMIGPCH,
DMIGSFIX = EXTID)
scr = yes may be specified on the Nastran command line since there is no need for the
databases to be saved at the end of the jobs.
 Assembly Job
Main Index
Example 3. DMIGPCH Option (continued)

K2GG = (KAAX, KXSE20, K30)
M2GG = (MAAX, MXSE20, M30)
B2GG = (BAAX, BXSE20, B30)
K42GG = (K4AAX, K4XSE20, K430)
P2G = (PAX, PXSE20, P30)
A2GG = (AAX, AXSE20, A30)
bulk data.
The following INCLUDEs are also required. They must be grouped together and
specified at the very end of the main bulk data (just before the ENDDATA delimiter).
INCLUDE ‘extse10.pch’

SE 10: EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK EXTID = 10 MATOP4 = 25)
SE 20: EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK EXTID = 20 MATOP4 = 26)
SE 30: EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK EXTID = 30 MATOP4 = -27)
Note: Boundary matrices will be stored in sparse format on .op4 files with Fortran unit
numbers 25 and 26 and in non-sparse format on the .op4 file with Fortran unit number
27.
scr = yes may be specified on the Nastran command line unless a 3rd step external
superelement data recovery restart is desired.
 Assembly Job
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 339
Example 4. MATOP4 Option (continued)

Management and Case Control requirements for the Assembly Job.
bulk data.
The following INCLUDEs are also required. They must be grouped together and
specified at the very end of the main bulk data (just before the ENDDATA delimiter).
19. If EXTBULK is specified, then METADATA entries will be copied to the .pch file.
20. Data recovery for the external superelement is possible via two methods: two-step and three-step.
a. In the two-step method, EXTSEOUT automatically generates output transformation matrices
(OTMs) based on STRESS, FORCE, DISPLACEMENT, SPCFORCE, MPCFORCE, and
STRAIN Case Control commands specified in the first (creation) run. Then in the second
(assembly) run, data recovery is performed on the external superelement. If Modules are present
in the first run, then OTMs are generated for those grid points and elements in Module 0 only.
b. The three-step method requires a restart of the first run to perform data recovery on the external
superelement. The method is explained in the description of the EXTDRIN Case Control
command. If Modules are present in the first run, this method allows for data recovery in any
Module.
c. Both methods are described in more detail in the MSC Nastran Superelement User's Guide.
Main Index
Fatigue Output Request
FATIGUE (Case) Fatigue Output Request
Requests one or more fatigue analyses for use in pseudo-static (SOL 101), modal (SOL 103), modal transient
(SOL 112), and frequency response (SOL 108 and SOL 111) runs.
Format (SOL 101, 103, 112, 200 with ANALYSIS=STATICS):
 
FATIGUE ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH , FORMAT = [ CODE ], BULK , STATICS ) =  n 
SORT2 PLOT SET  
Format (SOL 108, 111, 200 with ANALYSIS=DFREQ or MFREQ) (See Remark 13.):
FREQ  
FATIGUE ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH , FORMAT = [ CODE ], BULK , DFREQ ) =  n 
SORT2 PLOT  
MFREQ
Examples:
FATIGUE=100
SET 99 = 100, 200

FATIGUE(SET)=99
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Printed output will be presented as a tabular listing of elements for each fatigue analysis
or event. In the case of duty cycle, where multiple events are output (EVNTOUT=1 on
FTGSEQ bulk data), each event is presented as a separate fatigue analysis. Output
written to the OEFTG data blocks is always in SORT1 format.
SORT2 Printed output will be presented as a tabular listing of events for each element, node, or
angle. This is only applicable for duty cycle (loading sequences with more than one event
- EVNTOUT=1 on FTGSEQ bulk data). If there is only one event, the output is
identical to SORT1. Output written to the OEFTG data blocks is always in SORT1
format.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium (default)
PUNCH The PUNCH file will be the output medium.
PLOT Results will be generated but no printer output.
FORMAT Request that fatigue be output in specific file formats.
CODE Codes for specific file format output. See Remark 7. and 12.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 341
BULK Specifies that the n refers directly to bulk data IDs of FTGSEQ/ FTGLOAD,
FTGPARM and FTGDEF entries of the same ID (default) to process.
SET Specifies that the n refers to a previously appearing SET ID (SOL 101, 103, & 112 only)
containing the IDs of FTGSEQ/FTGLOAD, FTGPARM, FTGDEF bulk data entries
to process. This is a mechanism to request multiple fatigue output requests in a single
analysis run.
STATICS SOL 200 only. Specifies the FATIGUE case control is for ANALYSIS=STATICS
subcases in a SOL 200 optimization run. This is the default if not specified. See Remark
10.
FREQ SOL 200 only. Either of these specifies the FATIGUE case control is for frequency
DFREQ response (ANALYSIS=MFREQ or DFREQ) subcases in a SOL 200 optimization run.
MFREQ This is not the default and must be specified if the FATIGUE case control is referenced
on a DRESP1 of type FRFTG. See Remark 10.
n ID of FTGSEQ/FTGLOAD, FTGPARM, FTGDEF bulk data entries of the same ID
(BULK option) to process, or
ID of a previously occurring SET case control entry (SET option) containing the IDs of
the FTGSEQ/FTGLOAD, FTGPARM, FTGDEF bulk data entries to process (SOL
101, 103, & 112 only).
Remarks:
2. A single FATIGUE case control is required to perform one (SOL 108/111) or more (SOL
101/103/112) fatigue analyses and must be present above the SUBCASE level. If not present, no
fatigue analysis will occur regardless of the presence of other bulk data related to fatigue analysis.
3. It is not necessary to include any case control STRESS and/or STRAIN output requests in order for
the FATIGUE output request to obtain the necessary stresses or strains for the fatigue calculation.
4. For a single fatigue analysis, BULK=n points to a FTGDEF, a FTGPARM, and a FTGSEQ (or
FTGLOAD) entry, each with ID=n.
5. For multiple fatigue analyses, SET=n points to a previously appearing SET case control and each
member of the SET is the ID of a FTGDEF, a FTGPARM, and a FTGSEQ (or FTGLOAD) bulk
data entry with that ID (SOL 101, 103, or 112 only).
6. A fatigue analysis must have, at a minimum, loading and material data defined on either FTGSEQ
or FTGLOAD and MATFTG bulk data entries, respectively, for a fatigue analysis to be valid.
FTGPARM and FTGDEF entries can be absent, in which case, defaults will be used.
7. The following additional, optional, fatigue output file formats may be requested. The given codes
must be summed if multiple files are requested. Example: CSV file and FEF file CODE would be
64+128=192. Note the following:
Main Index
• SOL 101, 103, or 112: For multi-layered results, such as shells that compute top and bottom
results, a separate file for each is generated for HYP, UNV, and FEF formats with _top or
_bottom designations in the name. If only a single file with worst case layer results is desired, add
256 or 10,000 to the CODE. Using the above example would give 448 or 10192. Either
mechanism works. Note that CSV and FER file output only ever creates a single file as both layers
are reported in the single file, but adding 256 or 10,000 writes only the worst case layer result.
• SOL 108, or 111: For multi-layered results, such as shells that compute top and bottom results,
a separate file for each is generated for FEF formats with the following designations in the name:
_N or _E (for element nodal or element center, respectively), _W or _T or _B (for worst layer, top
layer or bottom layer, respectively or _EVi (for event i, or _EVS for summary only.
• Some output is not available for duty cycle jobs if EVNTOUT>0 on the FTGSEQ bulk data
entry. Check messages if the f06 and log files if the requested output files are not being
generated.
CODE for SOLs CODE for SOLs

File Format 101/103/112 108/111
No additional output 0 0
FER (Design Life Output File) 4 -
HYP (HyperMesh Results File) 8 -
UNV (Universal File) 32 -
CS*V File (Comma Separated - Excel File) 64 64
FEF (Patran Results File)† 128 128
* For random vibration fatigue using SOLs 108 or 111, the CSV file output request is also
dependent on the LOGLVL field setting on the FTGPARM entry. By default a
<jid>PSD.csv file is always generated, which at a minimum contains the input PSD,
stress transfer function (TF) and result PSD for the critical entity.
†SOL 101, 103, 112 produce FEF files of type ‘PATRAN 2 els’ or ‘PATRAN 2 nod’ with
.fef extension; SOL 108, 111 produce FEF files of type ‘PATRAN 2 els’ with .els_fef
extension. Also see Remark 12.
8. RESTARTs are possible with FATIGUE output request as long as the stress/strain state of the entities
requested does not change. Most parameters on the FTGPARM (LOC excluded as it requires a
different set of stresses/strains) can be changed on a RESTART. Different loading (FTGSEQ) and
materials (MATFTG) can also be investigated using the RESTART capability (SOLs 101, 103, &
112 only).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 343
9. Standard fatigue output is:
Stress-Life (SN) Analysis Strain-Life (eN) Analysis

LIFE (Repeats*) LIFE (Repeats)
LOG of LIFE (Repeats) LOG of LIFE (Repeats)
LIFE (user units)† LIFE (user units)
LOG of LIFE (user units) LOG of LIFE (user units)
DAMAGE DAMAGE
LOG of DAMAGE LOG of DAMAGE
MAX STRESS‡ MAX STRESS or STRAIN **
MIN STRESS MIN STRESS or STRAIN
*Or Seconds for SOL 108 and SOL 111

†User units are fatigue equivalent units as defined on the FTGSEQ or FTGLOAD entry and
other output is available depending on the settings of the FTGPARM entry. Please see those
entries for more detail.
‡For SOLs 108 and 111 Maximum Stress = Mean Stress + MAXPEAK*RMS Stress, Mini-
mum Stress = Mean Stress - MAXPEAK*RMS Stress. MAXPEAK is defined on FTGPARM
entry and is defaulted to 3.0.
**Depends on FTGPARM line used: STRESS or STRAIN.
10. STATICS, FREQ, DFREQ, MFREQ options are utilized in SOL 200 only. Fatigue and design
sensitivity analysis will be performed for the designated analysis type only. If STATICS is specified
(default), FATIGUE case control must be associated with subcases containing ANALYSIS=STATIC
for a pseudo-static fatigue analysis and the fatigue DRESP1 responses/constraints specified must be
of RTYPE=FATIGUE. If one of FREQ, DFREQ, MFREQ is specified, FATIGUE case control must
be associated with subcases containing ANALYSIS=MFREQ or DFREQ for random vibration
fatigue analysis and the fatigue DRESP1 response/constraints specified must be of RTYPE=FRFTG.
11. For SOL 108/111 with FATIGUE analysis, PARAM,SPARSEDR,no and PARAM,DDRMM,-1
both must be present. Otherwise, FATIGUE analysis will be skipped. Or, PARAM,SPARSEDR,yes,
which is default, can be used instead.
12. The FEF file output request produces PATRAN 2 stye elemental or nodal ASCII results files that can
be imported directly into Patran for post processing. In order to import these files into Patran a
template file is also required in order to tell Patran how to map the columns of data in the files to
proper, meaningful labels. The analysis job produces both the FEF file and the corresponding
template files. For SOLs 101, 103, and 112, the template file has the extension .tml with the same
base name as the FEF file. For SOLs 108 and 111, the template file is called <jid>.res_tmpl,
where <jid> is the job name. Jobs run with LOC=ELEM or NODE on the FTGPARM entry create
elemental based FEF files or all SOL sequences. Jobs run with LOC=NODA produce nodal based
FEF files for SOLs 101, 103, and 112 and produce elemental based FEF files for SOLs 108 and 111.
Main Index
In Patran these files are imported under the File|Import menu with the Object set to Results and the
Format set to either PATRAN 2 els... or PATRAN 2 nod... for elemental or nodal based FEF results
files, respectively. The Element Node Results switch must be set to Connectivity Based for proper
import of elemental based results.
You may use the job produced template files to import the FEF files or you may use standard template
files provided with the Patran installation. The advantage of using the standard template files is that
you may select them directly from the list without navigating the file browser to the location of the
job produced template files. The disadvantage is that these files use more generic labels. The job
produced template files use labels that indicate the stress units and actual defined equivalent fatigue
units as defined by the job. When using the standard template files you must know which template
file to select based on the table below.
Template Base File Name

Job Type (SOLs 101, 103, 112) (extension .res_tmpl)
Standard SN Analysis NEF_standard_SN_fef
Standard εN Analysis NEF_standard_EN_fef
Standard Spot Weld Analysis NEF_standard_SPOT_fef
Standard Seam Weld Analysis NEF_standard_SEAM_fef
Standard SN Factor of Safety Analysis NEF_standard_SN_FOS_fef
Standard εN Factor of Safety Analysis NEF_standard_EN_FOS_fef
Standard Spot Weld Factor of Safety Analysis NEF_standard_SPOT_FOS_fef
Standard Seam Weld Factof of Safety Analysis NEF_standard_SEAM_FOS_fef
SN + Multiaxial METHOD=SIMPLE NEF_multSimpl_SN_fef
SN + Multiaxial METHOD=STANDARD NEF_multStnd_SN_fef
SN + Multiaxial METHOD=AUTO NEF_multAuto_SN_fef
εN + Multiaxial METHOD=SIMPLE NEF_multSimpl_EN_fef
εN + Multiaxial METHOD=STANDARD NEF_multStnd_EN_fef
εN + Multiaxial METHOD=AUTO NEF_multAuto_EN_fef
Seam Weld + Multiaxial METHOD=SIMPLE NEF_multSimpl_SEAM_fef
Seam Weld + Multiaxial METHOD=STANDARD NEF_multStnd_SEAM_fef
SN + FOS + Multiaxial METHOD=SIMPLE NEF_multSimp_SN_FOS_fef
εN + FOS + Multiaxial METHOD=SIMPLE NEF_multSimp_EN_FOS_fef
Seam Weld + FOS + Multiaxial METHOD=SIMPLE NEF_multSimp_SEAM_FOS_fef
Template Base File Name

(extension .res_tmpl)
Job Type (SOLs 108, 111)
Standard SN or εN Analysis NEFV_standard_fef
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 345
13. When a FATIGUE case control is present to perform random vibration fatigue analysis using SOLs
108 and 111, only one FREQUENCY case control set is allowed for all transfer function SUBCASEs
and should be above the SUBCASE level or only present in 1st SUBCASE. The FREQUENCY set
cannot change from SUBCASE to SUBCASE or a fatal error is issued.
Main Index
Free Body Load Output Request
FBODYLD (Case) Free Body Load Output Request
Selects a set of submodels for which free body loads are to be produced and stored.
Format:
 ALL 
FBODYLD(LID) =  
 name1, name2, name3, … 
Examples:
FBODYLD=ALL
FOBDYLD(100)=WINGLD
FBODYLD(200)=WINGLD,TAILLD
Describer Meaning
LID Optional user-defined load ID. If LID is not supplied, the subcase ID is used to define
this value.
ALL Loads will be produced for all FBODYLD Bulk Data entries.
namei Name of an FBODYLD Bulk Data entry that defines the submodel to be used for the
load.
Remarks:
1. It is recommended, but not required, that the LID be unique across subcases.
2. A separate load is created for each namei.
3. The name list supplies one or more names separated by comma or blank.
4. Each load is stored individually as a one column matrix that is qualified by LID, namei, submodel
name, loadcase label, and submodel label (where submodel name is the name on the FBODYSB Bulk
Data entry, loadcase label is the label on the FBODYLD Bulk Data entry, and submodel is the label
on the FBODYSB Bulk Data entry).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 347
Specifies model checking options
FEMCHECK (Case) Specifies model checking options
Specifies model checking options at the start of the run. Specifically checks for RBE3 elements with
unconnected independent (spider) grids. Also validates SOL 108/111 Frequency and SOL 109/112
Transient case control before start of the run.
Format:
{NONE}
FEMCHECK = {ALL}
RE
{RBE3, DLOAD, FREQ, SDAMP, TSTEP}
Describer Meaning
NONE No checking. This is the default.
ALL Turns on all checking listed in the following.
RBE3 To make sure every independent/spider grid on a RBE3 bulk data entry is attached to an
element.
DLOAD For frequency analysis, check if DLOAD case control is specified. For transient analysis.
check if DLOAD or IC case control is specified. Make sure DLOAD case control refers
to a valid bulk data entry, i.e. DLOAD, RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2,
ACSRCE, ACLOAD.
FREQ Check if FREQUENCY case control is specified for frequency analysis. FREQ case
control must also refer to a valid bulk data entry, i.e. FREQ, FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3,
FREQ4, FREQ5.
SDAMP SDAMPING case control is required for frequency analysis. It must refer to a valid bulk
data entry, i.e. TABLED1, TABLED2, TABLED3, TABLED4, TABLED5,
TABDMP1.
TSTEP In a transient analysis, TSTEP case control must refer to a TSTEP or TSTEPNL bulk
data entry.
Remark:
1. This command should be applied above all SUBCASEs.
Main Index
Control for Fluid-Structure Frequency Selection
FLSFSEL (Case) Control for Fluid-Structure Frequency Selection
Control for fluid-structure frequency selection.
Format:
 0.0   1. + 30 
FLSFSEL LFREQFL =  -------  , HFREQFL =  -----------------  ,
fl
 1  fl 2 
 0.0   1. + 30 
LFREQ =  -------  , HFREQ =  -----------------  ,
 fs 1   fs 2 
 0   0 
LMODESFL =  ------  , LMODES =  -------  ,
mf
   ms 
 0 
FLUIDSE =  
 seidf 
Example:
FLSFSEL
.
HFREQ = 4. HFREQFL = 9
Describer Meaning
LFREQFL Requests in Hertz, lower bound frequency for modal fluid calculations.
fl 1 Lower frequency range for fluid, real number.
HFREQFL Requests in Hertz, upper bound frequency for modal fluid calculations.
fl 2 Upper frequency range for fluid, real number.
LFREQ Requests in Hertz, lower bound frequency for modal structure calculations.
fs 1 Lower frequency range for structure, real number.
HFREQ Requests in Hertz, upper bound frequency for modal structure calculations.
fs 2 Upper frequency range for structure, real number
LMODESFL Lowest modes for fluid portion of model, 0 implies LFREQFL-HFREQFL will
determine number of modes.
mf Number of lowest modes to use for fluid portion of model.
LMODES Lowest modes for structure portion of model, 0 implies LFREQ-HFREQ will
determine number of modes.
ms Number of lowest modes to use for structure portion of model.
FLUIDSE Defines a specified superelement to be used for fluids only.
seidf Defines a fluid only superelement.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 349
Control for Fluid-Structure Frequency Selection
Remarks:
1. This entry represents a collection of PARAM,name,value entries. See Parameters, 739 for detailed
description of the parameters collected on this entry. The value of any of these parameters may be
given as either the character value given in this description, or the numeric value given in Parameters
(Ch. 6) of this guide.
2. If LMODES (or LMODESFL)=0, the retained modes are determined by the parameters LFREQ and
HFREQ (or LFREQFL and HFREQFL).
Main Index
Control for Fluid-Structure Mode Participation Output
FLSPOUT (Case) Control for Fluid-Structure Mode Participation Output
Control for fluid-structure mode participation output.
Format:
 ALL 
   ALL 
FLSPOUT FLUIDMP =  n modes  , GRIDFMP =  setf 
   participations 
 NONE 
 ALL 
   1. – 11 
OUTFMP =  p highest  , FEPS =   ,
   epsf 
 NOPRINT 
 0.95 
ARF =  --------------  ,
 arf_v 
 ALL   ALL 
   
STRUCTMP =  modes  , OUTSMP =  q highest 
m
   
 NONE   NOPRINT 
   
PANELMP =  setp participations  , GRIDMP =  setg participations 
   
 NONE   NONE 
 1. – 11   0.95 
SEPS =   , ARS =  
 epss   ars_v 
  ABSOLUTE  
   DESCENDING   YES 
PSORT =   REAL ,   , O2E =  
   ASCENDING   NO 
 IMAGINARY  
Examples:
SET 23 = ROOF, DRIVERSD
SET 211 = 1023, 4069, 56790
FLSPOUT FLUIDMP = 30 STRUCTMP = 40, OUTSMP = 30,
PANELMP = 23 GRIDMP = 211
Describer Meaning
FLUIDMP Requests fluid participation calculation of fluid response on selected fluid points.
ALL Requests that all the fluid modes extracted be used.
n Requests that up to the first n fluid modes be used.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 351
Describer Meaning
NONE Requests no participation calculation.
GRIDFMP Requests inclusion or exclusion of specific fluid grids to be used in all the requested
types of participation calculations. These are also the fluid grids that can be referred
to on plot and .op2 tables.
ALL Requests inclusion in all the requested types of the participation calculations of all
fluid points.
setf Case Control set ID listing a selected set of fluid grids to be used in all the requested
types of participation calculations.
OUTFMP Requests the FLUID FLUIDMP participation factors to be output for print.
ALL Requests that all FLUID FLUIDMP participation factors to be output for print.
p Requests the p highest FLUIDMP participation factors to be output.
NOPRINT Produces tables for plotting but do not print any results.
FEPS Filters threshold for fluid participation.
epsf Threshold value.
ARF Acceptance ratio for fluid participation.
arf_v Fluid participation values < arf_v* max_value in a column of the output matrix
will be set to zero.
STRUCTMP Requests structural, load, and panel participation calculations on the selected fluid
points. FLUIDMP must be specified for this command to become active.
ALL Requests that all the structural modes extracted be used.
m Requests that up to the first m structural modes be used.
NONE Requests no participation calculation.
OUTSMP Requests that structural STRUCTMP participation factors to be output for print.
ALL Request that all STRUCTMP participation factors be output.
q Requests that the q highest STRUCTMP participation factors be output.
NOPRINT Produces tables for plotting but does not print any results.
PANELMP Requests inclusion or exclusion of panel participation calculations on the selected
fluid points. FLUIDMP and STRUCTMP must both be specified for this
command to become active.
ALL Requests all panels defined be included in the participation calculations on the
selected fluid points.
setp Case Control set ID listing selected panels for panel participation calculations on the
the set consists of the character names of the panels (new V2001)
NONE Requests exclusion from the participation calculations.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
GRIDMP Requests inclusion or exclusion of a structural panel grid participation calculation
on the selected fluid points. FLUIDMP and STRUCTMP must both be specified
for this command to become active.
ALL Requests, for panels selected, that each and every individual panel grid be included
as a separate calculation in the participation calculations on selected fluid points.
setg Case Control set ID listing structural panel grids for grid mode participation on the
NONE Requests exclusion from the participation calculations.
SEPS Filter threshold for structure participation.
epss Threshold value.
ARS Acceptance ratio for structure related fluid participation.
ars_v Structure fluid participation values < arf_v* max_value in a column of the output
matrix will be set to zero.
PSORT Requests type of sort.
O2E Controls generation of tables of mode participation versus natural frequency for
excitation frequencies. These tables are accessible in XYPLOT.
Remarks:
1. This entry represents a collection of PARAM,name,value entries and must appear above the subcase
level. See Parameters, 739 for detailed descriptions of the parameters collected on this entry. The value
of any of these parameters may be given as either the character value given in this description, or the
numeric value given in Parameters (Ch. 6) on this guide.
2. If n, m, p, or q are greater than the number computed, Nastran will invoke the ALL option for the
current value.
3. PSORT values must occur in pairs such as (ABSOLUTE,DESCENDING).
4. The underlined item in the { } braces give the value of the keyword if the keyword and its describers
are omitted from this entry. For example, if FLUIDMP is omitted from the FLSPOUT entry, then
no fluid mode participation will be computed (unless a PARAM,FLUIDMP,value explicitly appears
in a subcase or Bulk Data Entries, 1071).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 353
Miscellaneous Fluid-Structure Control Parameters
FLSTCNT (Case) Miscellaneous Fluid-Structure Control Parameters
Control for fluid-structure symmetry and force requests.
Format:
 
 PEAK
--------------- 
 YES   RMS 
FLSTCNT ACSYM =  ----------  , ACOUT =  
 NO   PEAKINT 
 RMSINT 
 
 1.0   YES 
PREFDB =  ---------  , ASCOUP =  ---------- 
 prp   NO 
 NONE 
 
 PUNCH 
SKINOUT =  
 PRINT 
 
 ALL 
Example(s):
FLSTCNT ACSYM = YES ACOUT = RMS
Describer Meaning
ACSYM Requests symmetric or nonsymmetric solution for fluid-structure analysis.
YES Requests symmetrized coupled fluid-structure analysis.
NO Requests no symmetric coupled fluid-structure analysis.
ACOUT Requests peak or rms for output to be used with the FORCE request.
PEAK, PEAKINT Requests peak value output to be used with the FORCE request.
RMS, RMSINT Requests rms value output to be used with the FORCE request.
PREFDB Specifies the peak reference pressure.
prp Value for the peak reference pressure.
ASCOUP Request a coupled or noncoupled fluid-structure analysis.
YES Request a coupled fluid-structure analysis.
NO Request a noncoupled fluid-structure analysis.
SKINOUT Request that sets of grid point and element lists be output for both the fluid and
structure at the fluid-structure interface.
NONE Requests no output of sets.
PUNCH Requests set output to punch file (.pch) only.
Main Index
Miscellaneous Fluid-Structure Control Parameters
Describer Meaning
PRINT Requests set output to .f06 file only.
ALL Requests set output to both .pch and .f06 files.
Remarks:
1. This entry represents a collection of PARAM,name,value entries. See Parameters, 739 for detailed
descriptions of the parameters collected on this entry. The value of any of these parameters may be
given as either the character value given in this description, or the numeric value given under the
parameter description in this guide.
2. Options with suffix INT generates INTENSITY, instead of ACCLERATION. Unlike
ACCELERATION which is complex, INTENSITY is a scalar quantity.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 355
Heat Transfer Gradient and Flux Output Request
FLUX (Case) Heat Transfer Gradient and Flux Output Request
Requests the form and type of gradient and flux output in heat transfer analysis.
Format:
 ALL 
FLUX =  n 
PLOT  
 NONE 
Examples:
FLUX=ALL
FLUX(PUNCH,PRINT)=17
FLUX=25
Describer Meaning
PUNCH The punch file .pch will be the output medium.
PLOT The output will be sent to the plot file.
ALL Flux for all elements will be output.
NONE Flux for no elements will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only fluxes of elements
with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be output
(Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. FLUX=ALL in SOL 159 may produce excessive output.
2. FLUX=NONE overrides an overall request.
Main Index
Flutter Analysis Method Parameter Selection
FMETHOD (Case) Flutter Analysis Method Parameter Selection
Selects the parameters to be used by the aerodynamic flutter analysis.
Format:
FMETHOD=n
Example:
FMETHOD=72
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a FLUTTER Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. An FMETHOD command is required for flutter analysis.
2. A CMETHOD command is also required for the K-method of flutter analysis.
3. If this entry is being used in SOL 200 in conjunction with flutter design conditions, the METHOD
selected on the FLUTTER Bulk Data entry must be “PK” or “PKNL”.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 357
Element Force Output or Particle Velocity Request
FORCE (Case) Element Force Output or Particle Velocity Request
Requests the form and type of element force output, or particle velocity output, in coupled fluid-structural
analysis. Note: ELFORCE is an equivalent command.
Format:
CENTER
SORT1 PRINT, PUNCH REAL or IMAG CORNER or BILIN
FORCE ( , , , ,
SORT2 PLOT PHASE SGAGE
CUBIC
 ALL 
PSDF,ATOC,CRMS RPRINT  
, , RPUNCH ) =  n 
or RALL NORPRINT  
 NONE 
Examples:
FORCE=ALL
FORCE(REAL, PUNCH, PRINT)=17
FORCE=25
FORCE(SORT2, PRINT, PSDF, CRMS, RPUNCH)=20
FORCE(PRINT, RALL, NORPRINT)=ALL
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of elements for each load, frequency,
eigenvalue, or time, depending on the solution sequence.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of frequency or time for each element
type.
PLOT Generates force output for requested set, but no printed output.
REAL or IMAG Requests rectangular format (real and imaginary) of complex output. Use of either
REAL or IMAG yields the same output.
PHASE Requests polar format (magnitude and phase) of complex output. Phase output is
in degrees.
PSDF Requests the power spectral density function be calculated and stored in the
database for random analysis postprocessing. Request must be made above the
subcase level, and RANDOM must be selected in the Case Control Section.
ATOC Requests the autocorrelation function be calculated and stored in the database for
and RANDOM must be selected in the Case Control Section.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
RALL Requests all of PSDF, ATOC, and CRMS be calculated for random analysis
CENTER Output CQUAD4, CQUADR, and CTRIAR element forces at the center only.
The default for CQUAD4 is CENTER. The default for CQUADR and CTRIAR
is CORNER.
CORNER or Output CQUAD4, QUADR, and CTRIAR element forces at the center and at
BILIN the grid points using strain gage approach with bilinear extrapolation.
SGAGE Output CQUAD4 element forces at the center and at the grid points using strain
gage approach.
CUBIC Output CQUAD4 element forces at the center and at the grid points using cubic
bending correction.
ALL Forces for all elements will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only forces of
elements with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be
NONE Forces for no elements will be output.
Remarks:
1. ALL should not be used in a transient problem.
3. ELFORCE is an alternate form and is entirely equivalent to FORCE.
4. FORCE=NONE overrides an overall request.
5. If PARAM,SPARSEDR,NO is specified, then to request force output on damping elements in modal
frequency response analysis (e.g., SOL 111), the mode displacement method (PARAM,DDRMM,-
1) must be selected.
Force output on damping elements is not available in transient response analysis.
6. In nonlinear transient analysis, the FORCE request is ignored for nonlinear elements in SOL129. In
SOL400 with "ANALYSIS=NLTRAN" Element FORCE output for the CWELD/CFAST elements
is available. All other elements capable of force output such as the CBEAM, CQUAD4, etc., will not
produce nonlinear transient force output.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 359
If "PARAM, OLDWELD, YES" is specified, then the CWELD/CFAST elements will not produce
with "ANALYSIS=NLTRAN" Element FORCE output.
7. The options CENTER, CORNER, CUBIC, SGAGE, and BILIN are recognized only in the first
subcase, and determine the option to be used in all subsequent subcases with the STRESS, STRAIN,
and FORCE Case Control commands. Consequently, options specified in subcases other than the
first subcase will be ignored.
a. If the STRESS command is specified in the first subcase, then the option on the STRESS
command is used in all subcases with STRESS, STRAIN, and FORCE commands.
b. If the STRAIN command and no STRESS command is specified in the first subcase, then the
option on the STRAIN command is used in all subcases containing STRESS, STRAIN, and
FORCE commands.
c. If the FORCE command and no STRESS or STRAIN commands is specified in the first subcase,
then the option on the FORCE command is used in all subcases containing STRESS, STRAIN,
and FORCE commands.
d. If STRESS, STRAIN, and FORCE commands are not specified in the first subcase, then the
CENTER option is used in all subcases containing STRESS, STRAIN, and FORCE commands.
random analysis.
9. In general, for nonlinear elements, force output is not available. For CGAP, CELASi, or CBUSH
elements in nonlinear analysis, use the STRESS in NLSTRESS command to obtain force output.
10. Forces and moment output for line elements are total forces and for shell elements they are forces per
unit length.
Main Index
Frequency Set Selection
FREQUENCY (Case) Frequency Set Selection
Selects the set of forcing frequencies to be solved in frequency response problems.
Format:
FREQUENCY=n
Example:
FREQUENCY=17
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of FREQ, FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4, and
FREQ5 Bulk Data entries. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. A frequency set selection is required for a frequency response problem.
2. A frequency set selection is required for transient response by Fourier methods (SOL 146).
3. All FREQi entries with the same set identification numbers will be used. Duplicate frequencies will
be ignored. f N and f N – 1 are considered duplicated if
f N – f N – 1 < DFREQ ⋅ f MAX – f MIN
where DFREQ is a user parameter with a default of 10 –5 . f MAX and f MIN are the maximum and
minimum excitation frequencies of the combined FREQi entries, respectively.
4. If there are multiple frequency response subcases, improved performance can be obtained by making
the all the subcases that share the same FREQUENCY ID contiguous. For SOL 200, it is an error if
there are noncontiguous subcases that have the same boundary condition and FREQUENCY ID.
5. When a FATIGUE case control is also present to perform random vibration fatigue analysis using
SOLs 108 and 111, only one FREQUENCY case control set is allowed for all transfer function
SUBCASEs and should be above the SUBCASE level or only present in 1st SUBCASE. The
FREQUENCY set cannot change from SUBCASE to SUBCASE or a fatal error is issued.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 361
Frequency Response Function (FRF) Generation and/or FRF Based Assembly (FBA) Specification
FRF (Case) Frequency Response Function (FRF) Generation and/or FRF Based Assembly (FBA)
Specification
Specifies the information needed for FRF generation and/or the FBA process. SOLs 108 and 111 only.
Format:
  GEN 
  
FRF   ASM  [ COMPID = cmpid ] [ COMPNAME = cmpname ]
  
  GENASM 
 
 COMP 
 UNIT   
   ALL   STD 
 UNITALL   ASSEMBLY   
[ CONNPTS = setid ] XITOUT =   ASMOUT =   LOADLBL =  ALT 
 USER   CONNINFO   
 USERTOTL     ALTX 
   n 
 
 cname 
 DB  
  
 OP2 = unit  
 
  ALL  
   
 ICFGEN=  n  
   
  compname  
   ICFDB 
  n   =  
 ICFUSE=     ICFOP2={icfunit } 
  compname  
 
 
 ICFAUTO=  n  
   
  compname  
Examples:
FRF
FRF (COMPID = 10 COMPNAME = WING CONNPTS = 1000 LOADLBL = ALT)
FRF (COMPID = 20 COMPNAME = STRUT CONNPTS = 2000 OP2 = 25)
FRF (COMPID = 30 COMPNAME = BODY CONNPTS = 300 XITOUT = UNITALL)
FRF (ASM)
FRF (ASM LOADLBL = ALTX)
FRF (ASM ASMOUT = ALL)
FRF (GENASM COMPID = 50 COMPNAME = SUSPENSN CONNPTS = 200)
Main Index
FRF (ASM ICFGEN = ALL)

FRF (ASM ICFUSE = 100)
FRF (ASM ICFGEN = 200 ICFOP2 = 33)
FRF (ASM ICFUSE = -1 ICFOP2 = 33)
FRF (ASM ICFAUTO = 100)
FRF
.
(ASM ICFAUTO = -5 ICFOP2 = 31)
Describer Meaning
GEN Generate the FRFs for the specified component. See Remarks 3. and 4.,
(Default) and the Examples in Remark 13.
ASM Compute the FRFs of an assembly of components from the FRFs of the
individual components. See Remarks 5., 9., 10. and 11., and Examples 2
and 3 in Remark 13.
GENASM Generate the FRFs for the specified component and follow it by
computing the FRFs of an assembly of components from the FRFs of the
individual components. See Remarks 4., 9., 10. and 11., and Examples 4
and 5 in Remark 13.
COMPID = cmpid cmpid (Integer > 0) is the identification number of the component whose
FRFs are to be generated. See Remarks 3. through 7., and Examples 2
through 5 in Remark 13.
COMPNAME = cmpname cmpname (up to eight characters) is the name of the component whose
FRFs are to be generated. See Remarks 3. through 7., and Examples 2
through 5 in Remark 13.
CONNPTS = setid setid (integer > 0) refers to the set that defines the points at which the FRF
component specified by the COMPID/COMPNAME keywords is to be
connected during a subsequent FRF based assembly (FBA) process. Only
those points that are defined in this set (and no others) will be considered
for connection during the FBA process. See Remarks 7., 12.(c) and 12.(d),
and Examples 2 through 5 in Remark 13.
XITOUT = UNIT Output the FRF results only for those unit excitations that are specified
explicitly via FRFXIT / FRFXIT1 Bulk Data entries or implicitly via the
DLOAD Case Control request. See Remark 8.
The output for each of the above excitations is identified by a separate

subcase. The IDs of these subcases are numbered consecutively starting
from 1.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 363
Describer Meaning
XITOUT = UNITALL Output FRF results not only for unit excitations specified explicitly via
FRFXIT / FRFXIT1 Bulk Data entries or implicitly via the DLOAD Case
Control command, but also for unit excitations that are internally applied
automatically by the program at the connection points of the FRF
component(s). See Remarks 8. and 12.(c), and Example 2 in Remark 13.
The output for each of the above excitations is identified by a separate

subcase. The IDs of these subcases are numbered consecutively starting
from 1.
XITOUT = USER Output the FRF results for the following excitations implied by the
DLOAD Case Control request:
a. A separate excitation for each individual DOF that has a non-

zero load value specified for it
b. An excitation representing the total load
Thus, if a DLOAD Case Control request involves non-zero load values on
N DOFs, then this request gives results for (N+1) excitations, with the first
N such excitations representing individual and separate loads on the N
DOFs and the (N+1)th excitation representing the total load. See Remark
8.
The output for each of the above (N+1) excitations is identified by a

separate coded subcase ID of the form xxxxyyyy. Here xxxx is the user
subcase ID corresponding to the DLOAD under consideration. For the
first N excitations, yyyy has values ranging from 1 through N (with leading
zeros where appropriate). For the (N+1)th excitation representing the
total load, the coded subcase ID is of the form xxxx9999.
Because of the above coded numbering scheme, when XITOUT = USER

is specified (or assumed; see Remark 8), the program will not allow any
user subcase ID to exceed 9999. If it does, the program terminates the job
with an appropriate fatal message.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
XITOUT = USERTOTL Output the FRF results for the single excitation representing the total load
implied the DLOAD Case Control request. This corresponds to the
(N+1)th excitation mentioned earlier. See Remark 8.
The output for this single excitation representing the total load is
identified by the coded subcase ID of the form xxxx9999 where xxxx is the
user subcase ID corresponding to the DLOAD under consideration.
Because of the above coded numbering scheme, when XITOUT =

USERTOTL is specified, the program will not allow any user subcase ID
to exceed 9999. If it does, the program terminates the job with an
appropriate fatal message.
ASMOUT = CONNINFO In the FBA process, terminate the job after generating the FRF component
connection information output without performing any further FRF
assembly calculations.
ASMOUT = COMP In the FBA process, output the FRF results for all of the individual FRF
(Default) components comprising the assembly. See Remarks 10. and 11.
ASMOUT = ALL In the FBA process, output the FRF results not only for all of the
individual FRF components comprising the assembly, but also for the
assembled FRF configuration considered as a separate entity. See Remarks
10. and 11., and Example 3 in Remark 13. See also Remark 2.
ASMOUT = ASSEMBLY In the FBA process, output the FRF results only for the assembled FRF
configuration considered as a separate entity. This is equivalent to
specifying ASMOUT = 0 (described later). See Remarks 2. and 10.
ASMOUT = n n is an integer with the following meanings:
n=0
In the FBA process, output the FRF results only for the assembled FRF
configuration considered as a separate entity. This is equivalent to
specifying ASMOUT = ASSEMBLY (described earlier). See Remarks 2.
and 10.
n>0
In the FBA process, output the FRF results only for those FRF
components of the assembly whose IDs are specified by SET ID n.
n<0
In the FBA process, output the FRF results only for that single FRF
component of the assembly whose ID is given by n .
ASMOUT = cname In the FBA process, output the FRF results only for that single FRF
component of the assembly whose name is given by cname.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 365
Describer Meaning
LOADLBL = STD The load labels in the output in the FRF and FBA jobs explicitly identify
(Default) the grid (or scalar) point and its component where the load is applied.
LOADLBL = ALT The load labels in the output in the FRF and FBA jobs identify the grid
(or scalar) point and its component where the load is applied by using the
following notation:
GGGGGGGG:+C
where GGGGGGGG is the grid (or scalar) point ID and C indicates the
component where the load is applied. C may have the following values:
X Indicates grid point component 1 or a scalar point
Y Indicates grid point component 2
Z Indicates grid point component 3
RX Indicates grid point component 4
RY Indicates grid point component 5
RZ Indicates grid point component 6
LOADLBL = ALTX Same as LOADLBL = ALT except that the load labels also identify whether
the load applied is a unit load or a user load.
DB Store the FRF matrices and other information on the database. See
(Default) Examples 2 and 4 in Remark 13.
OP2 = unit Store the FRF matrices and other information on an OUTPUT2 file
whose Fortran unit number is given by unit (integer > 0). See Examples 3
and 5 in Remark 13.
ICFGEN = ALL Generate ICF information in the FBA process for all of the FRF
components of the assembly
ICFGEN = n n is a non-zero integer with the following meanings: n > 0
Generate ICF information in the FBA process only for those FRF
components of the assembly whose IDs are specified by SET ID
n,
n<0
Generate ICF information in the FBA process only for that single FRF
component of the assembly whose ID is given by |n|.
ICFGEN = compname FRF component whose name is given by compname.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
ICFUSE = n n is a non-zero integer with the following meanings:
n>0
Use ICF information by employing in the FBA process a
Configuration that consists of only those FRF components whose
IDs are specified by SET ID n.
n<0
Use ICF information by employing in the FBA process a Configuration

that consists of only that single FRF component whose ID is given by |n|.
ICFUSE = compname Configuration that consists of only that single FRF component whose
name is given by compname.
ICFAUTO = n n is a non-zero integer with the following meanings:
n>0
First generate and then use ICF information in the FBA process only for
those FRF components whose IDs are specified by SET
ID n.
n<0
First generate and then use ICF information in the FBA process only for
that single FRF component whose ID is given by |n|.
ICFAUTO = compname only for that single FRF component whose name is given by compname.
ICFDB (Default) ICF information is to be stored or is resident on the database.
ICFOP2 = icfunit ICF information is to be stored or is resident on an OUTPUT2 file whose
Fortran unit number is given by icfunit (integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. This command is supported only in SOLs 108 and 111.
2. A component ID of 0 is assigned to the assembled FRF configuration resulting from the FBA process.
3. The COMPNAME keyword must be specified if the COMPID keyword is specified and vice versa.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 367
4. If the COMPID/COMPNAME keywords are specified along with the GEN/GENASM keyword,
then it implies that the FRFs computed for the specified component are employed in a subsequent
FBA process. In this case, the FRF generation results will be saved on the specified medium, and the
.asm (assembly punch) file will be generated and saved with a single FRFCOMP Bulk Data entry in
it for subsequent use in an FBA process.
5. If the COMPID/COMPNAME keywords are not specified with the GEN/GENASM keyword, then
it implies that the FRFs computed are for a single shot configuration with no subsequent FBA process
involved. In this case, the GENASM keyword is equivalent to the GEN keyword.
6. The COMPID/COMPNAME keywords are ignored if the ASM keyword is specified.
7. The CONNPTS keyword must be specified if the COMPID/COMPNAME keywords are specified.
It is ignored otherwise.
8. If the XITOUT keyword is not specified, the default of XITOUT = UNIT is assumed if there is no
DLOAD Case Control request and the default of XITOUT = USER is assumed if there is a DLOAD
Case Control request. If the user specifies XITOUT = USER or XITOUT = USERTOTL, but there
is no DLOAD Case Control request, the program issues a warning message and assumes XITOUT =
UNIT.
9. If the ASM/GENASM keyword is specified, the resulting FBA process will generate a connection
information table in the .f06 file, indicating the relationship between the internal point IDs of the
assembled FRF configuration (referred to as component 0 as indicated in Remark 2.) and the external
point IDs of the associated FRF components.
10. The normal output from an FBA process run, implied by the default of ASMOUT = COMP, gives
the results for the individual FRF components that comprise the assembled FRF configuration. If
output is also desired for the assembled configuration as a separate entity (component 0 as indicated
in Remark 2.), then ASMOUT = ALL must be specified in the FRF command to obtain the expanded
output. However, in this case, the output for component 0 will be limited to displacements,
velocities, and accelerations, and these will be output in terms of the internal point IDs mentioned in
Remark 9. See Example 3 in Remark 13.
11. The ASMOUT keyword is ignored if the GEN keyword is specified.
12. The generation of FRFs for a component and their use in a subsequent FBA process using the FRF
Case Control command involves running a standard SOL 108 or SOL 111 job, with the following
additional data:
a. The DOFs where loads are to be applied must be specified either indirectly via the DLOAD Case
Control command and/or directly via the FRFXIT/FRFXIT1 Bulk Data entries. The DLOAD
Case Control command points to appropriate Bulk Data loading entries. All DOFs with nonzero
load values will have unit loads applied to them. The FRFXIT entry permits specification of unit
load for a single DOF with a label. The FRFXIT1 entry permits specification of unit loads at
multiple DOFs.
b. There is no requirement that unit loading data be defined for every component for which FRFs
are generated, since some components in a configuration may not have any loads applied to them.
Main Index
c. Regardless of whether an FRF component has unit loads explicitly specified for it, as in Remark
12(a) or not, as in Remark 12(b), the program will internally apply unit loads automatically at all
DOFs for all connection points comprising the set referenced by the CONNPTS keyword. This
ensures that correct results are obtained from subsequent FBA processes.
d. The specific points at which FRFs are computed in an FRF generation run consist of the
following:
• All points specified via DISP, VELO, and ACCE requests
• All points associated with elements for which STRESS/FORCE requests are specified
• All points at which unit loads are applied (as per the scheme indicated in Remark 12(a)
• All points comprising the set referenced by the CONNPTS keyword
• All grid points referenced in PLOTEL Bulk Data entries
e. It is assumed in an FBA process that the FRFs of all of the FRF components have been generated
at the same forcing frequencies, and that these are also the forcing frequencies at which the FBA
process is to be performed. As a result, the FBA process derives these forcing frequencies from the
saved data of the first of the FRF components being assembled, and uses them in the FBA process.
In order to ensure the validity of the FBA process, the program checks to make sure that all of
the FRF components have been generated using the same number of forcing frequencies and
further that all of these forcing frequencies are the same for all of the FRF components. If both
of these conditions are not met, the program terminates the job with an appropriate fatal
message.
13. The following examples illustrate details of job setups for FRF generation and the subsequent FBA
process for various scenarios.
Example 1 involves FRF generation for a single shot configuration without any FBA process.
Examples 2 through 5 assume that there are three components – 10, 20 and 30 – for which FRFs are
to be generated (frgen10.dat, frfgen20.dat and frgen30.dat) and that the FRFs of these components
are to be subsequently assembled in an FBA process to obtain the FRFs of the assembled
configuration.
Example 6 illustrates an FBA process involving the assembly of two components – 10 and 20 – whose
FRFs are generated by Nastran, with a third FRF component – 40 – whose FRFs have been generated
from test, with its FRF and other information resident on an Universal File (UF).
Examples 2, 3 and 6 illustrate the use of the ASM option for the FBA process while Examples 4 and
5 illustrate the use of the GENASM option for the FBA process.
Examples 7 through 13 deal with an airplane model comprising five FRF components, namely,
fuselage (1), horizontal tail (2), vertical tail (3), inboard wings (4) and outboard wings (5). Example
7 illustrates the generation of the FRFs for these five components while the other examples are FBA
jobs that illustrate the generation and usage of ICFs (inter component forces) for several scenarios
using the ICFGEN, ICFUSE and ICFAUTO keywords of the FRF Case Control command,
employing both database and OUTPUT2 usage.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 369
Loading data must be defined for Example 1 either via FRFXIT/FRFXIT1 Bulk Data entries or via
the DLOAD Case Control request. For all other examples, loading data may be defined as desired
either in the FRF generation runs or in the FBA process or both.
)
Example 1. Generate FRFs for a Single Shot Configuration with No Subsequent FBA Process
 FRF Generation Job
FRF
Loading data must be defined either via the DLOAD Case Control command and/or
via FRFXIT/FRFXIT1 Bulk Data entries.
Example 2. Generate FRFs for Components 10, 20, and 30 Using the DB Option and
Subsequently Assemble Their FRFs to Obtain FRFs of the Assembled Configuration Using the
ASM Option
 FRF Generation Jobs
FRF component 10: FRF (COMPID = 10 COMPNAME = COMP10 CONNPTS = 100)
For these jobs, scr = no should be specified on the Nastran job command lines to ensure
These jobs automatically generate .asm files for subsequent use by the FBA job.
 FBA Job
ASSIGN dbname10 = ‘frfgen10.MASTER’
DBLOCATE DATABLK = (FRFDB) LOGICAL = dbname10
(Note: All of the data blocks stored on the databases from the FRF generation runs have
the same common name of FRFDB.)
FRF (ASM XITOUT = UNITALL)
The XITOUT = UNITALL request gives output for all unit excitations (both user
specified unit loads and internally applied unit loads).
Main Index
Example 2. Generate FRFs for Components 10, 20, and 30 Using the DB Option and
ASM Option
The following INCLUDEs are required.
INCLUDE ‘frfgen10.asm’
Example 3. Generate FRFs for Components 10, 20, and 30 Using the OP2 Option and
ASM Option
ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = ‘frfgen10_op2’ UNIT = 25 DELETE
ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = ‘frfgen30_op2’ UNIT = 27 DELELE
For these jobs, scr = yes may be specified on the Nastran job command lines since there
is no need for the databases to be saved at the end of the jobs.
FRF component 10: FRF (COMPID = 10 COMPNAME = COMP10 CONNPTS = 100 OP2 = 25)
 FBA Job
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = ‘frfgen10_op2’ UNIT = 25
FRF (ASM ASMOUT = ALL)
The ASMOUT = ALL request gives output from the FBA process not only for FRF
components 10, 20 and 30, but also for the assembled configuration as a separate entity
(component 0) as indicated in Remark 10.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 371
Example 3. Generate FRFs for Components 10, 20, and 30 Using the OP2 Option and
ASM Option
Example 4. Generate FRFs for Components 10 and 20 Using the DB Option and Subsequently
Assemble their FRFs with Those of Component 30 Using the DB and GENASM Options to Obtain
the FRFs of the Assembled Configuration.
For these jobs, scr = no should be specified on the Nastran job command line to ensure
 Combined FRF Generation and FBA Job
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(FRFDB) LOGICAL=dbname10
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(FRFDB) LOGICAL=dbname20
(Note: All data blocks stored on the databases from the FRF generation runs have the
same common name of FRFDB.)
For this job, scr = no should be specified on the Nastran job command line to ensure
that the database for FRF component 30 is saved for subsequent use by the FBA process.
FRF (GENASM COMPID = 30 COMPNAME = COMP30 CONNPTS = 300)
Main Index
Example 5. Generate FRFs for Components 10 and 20 Using the OP2 Option and Subsequently
Assemble their FRFs with Those of Component 30 Using the OP2 and GENASM Options to Obtain
the FRFs of the Assembled Configuration.
For these jobs, scr = yes may be specified on the Nastran job command line since there
 Combined FRF Generation and FBA Job
FRF (GENASM COMPID = 30 COMPNAME = COMP30 CONNPTS = 300 OP2 = 27)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 373
Example 6. Generate FRFs for Components 10 and 20 Using the OP2 Option and Subsequently
Assemble their FRFs with Those of Test FRF Component 40 Using the ASM Option to Obtain the
FRFs of the Assembled Configuration.
For these jobs, scr = yes may be specified on the Nastran job command line since there
 FBA Job
ASSIGN UNVFILE = ‘frfgen40_unv’ UNIT = 28 $ Universal File
FRF (ASM)
FRFCOMP,40,TSTCMP40,UF,28
The following INCLUDEs are also required.
Main Index
Example 7. Generate FRFs for Components 1 through 5 Using the OP2 Option
 File Management Section (FMS) Requirement
FRF Component 1:ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = 'fuselage_op2' UNIT=25 DELETE
FRF Component 2:ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = 'hor_tail_op2' UNIT=26 DELETE
FRF Component 3:ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = 'ver_tail_op2' UNIT=27 DELETE
FRF Component 4:ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = 'ib_wings_op2' UNIT=28 DELETE
FRF Component 5:ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = 'ob_wings_op2' UNIT=29 DELETE
 Case Control Requirement
FRF Component 1:FRF (COMPID = 1 COMPNAME = FUSELAGE CONNPTS =
1000 OP2=25)
FRF Component 2:FRF (COMPID = 2 COMPNAME = HOR_TAIL CONNPTS =
1000 OP2=26)
FRF Component 3:FRF (COMPID = 3 COMPNAME = VER_TAIL CONNPTS =
1000 OP2=27)
FRF Component 4:FRF (COMPID = 4 COMPNAME = IB_WINGS CONNPTS =
1000 OP2=28)
FRF Component 5:FRF (COMPID = 5 COMPNAME = OB_WINGS CONNPTS
= 1000 OP2=29)
These jobs automatically generate .asm files for subsequent use by the FBA process.
For these jobs, scr = yes may be specified on the Nastran job command lines since there is no need
for the databases to be saved at the end of the jobs.
Example 8. Generate ICFs on the Database for All Five FRF Components of Example 7 (Step 1 of
Two-Step Process)
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = ‘fuselage_op2’ UNIT=25
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = ‘hor_tail_op2’ UNIT=26
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = ‘ver_tail_op2’ UNIT=27
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = ‘ib_wings_op2’ UNIT=28
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = ‘ob_wings_op2’ UNIT=29
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 375
Example 8. Generate ICFs on the Database for All Five FRF Components of Example 7 (Step 1 of
Two-Step Process)
FRF (ASM ICFGEN = ALL)
 Bulk Data Requirement
INCLUDE 'fuselage.asm'
INCLUDE 'hor_tail.asm'
INCLUDE 'ver_tail.asm'
INCLUDE 'ib_wings.asm'
INCLUDE 'ob_wings.asm'
For this job, scr = no should be specified on the Nastran job command line since the database
containing the ICF information needs to be saved for use in a subsequent FBA job (Example 9).
Example 9. Use ICFs of Example 8 for An Assembly Configuration Consisting of FRF

Components 1, 4 and 5 (Step 2 of Two-Step Process)
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = 'fuselage_op2' UNIT=25
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = 'ib_wings_op2' UNIT=28
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = 'ob_wings_op2' UNIT=29
ASSIGN ICFDATA = 'example8.MASTER'
DBLOCATE (DATABLK = ICFDB) LOGICAL = ICFDATA
SET 100 = 1,4,5
FRF (ASM ICFUSE = 100)
For this job, scr = yes may be specified on the Nastran job command line since there is no need for
the database to be saved at the end of the job.
Main Index
Example 10. Generate ICFs on an OUTPUT2 File for FRF Components 1, 2 and 3
of Example 7 (Step 1 of Two-Step Process)
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = 'fuselage_op2' UNIT=25
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = 'hor_tail_op2' UNIT=26
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = 'ver_tail_op2' UNIT=27
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = 'ib_wings_op2' UNIT=28
ASSIGN INPUTT2 = 'ob_wings_op2' UNIT=29
ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = 'icf123_op2' UNIT=33 DELETE
SET 100 = 1,2,3
FRF (ASM ICFGEN = 100 ICFOP2 = 33)
INCLUDE 'hor_tail.asm'
INCLUDE 'ver_tail.asm'
For this job, scr = yes may be specified on the Nastran job command line since there is no need for
the database to be saved at the end of the job.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 377
Grid Point Force Output Request
GPFORCE (Case) Grid Point Force Output Request
Requests grid point force balance at selected grid points.
Format:
PRINT, PUNCH  
GPFORCE =  ALL 
PLOT  n 
Examples:
GPFORCE=ALL
GPFORCE=17
Describer Meaning
ALL Grid point force balance for all grid points will be output.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Only grid
included in the grid point force balance output (Integer >0).
Remarks:
1. The printing of the grid point forces will be suppressed if PARAM,NOGPF,-1 appears in the Bulk
Data.
2. The Bulk Data entry PARAM,NOELOF,+1 will cause the output of the grid point forces to be
aligned with the edges of the two-dimensional elements. The default value of -1 will suppress this
output. See Remark 4.
3. The Bulk Data entry PARAM,NOELOP,+1 will cause the output of the sum of the forces parallel to
the edges of adjacent elements. The default value of -1 will suppress this output. See Remarks 4. and
10.
4. The output of grid point forces aligned with the edges of elements is available for the following
elements:
CBAR
CROD
CBEAM
CSHEAR
CONROD
CTRIA3
CQUAD4
CTUBE
The positive direction for grid point forces aligned with the edges of elements is from the reference
point to the load point as indicated on the printed output. See Remark 10.
Main Index
Grid Point Force Output Request
5. The grid point force balance is computed from linear and nonlinear elements, and includes the sum
of applied loads, contact force, thermal loads, MPC forces, rigid elements, general elements, DMIG
entries and SPC forces. Effects not accounted for include those from mass elements in dynamic
analysis (inertia loads), slideline force contributions, and boundary loads from upstream
superelements. These effects may lead to an apparent lack of equilibrium at the grid point level. The
following table summarizes those effects that are considered and those effects that are ignored in the
calculation of grid point forces in the global coordinate system:
Contributions Included Contributions Ignored

Applied Loads DMI Forces
SPC Forces Boundary Loads from Upstream Superelements
Element Elastic Forces Forces on elements with geometric or material
nonlinear properties during normal modes
analysis in SOL 106; also called linear
perturbation analysis.
GENEL Forces Connector elements CFAST, CSEAM, and
CWELD.
DMIG Referenced by K2GG Case Control
command
Thermal Loads
MPC and Rigid Element Forces
Contact Forces
6. Only the element elastic forces are included when the grid point forces are aligned with the edges of
elements. See Remark 10.
7. In inertia relief analysis, the SPCFORCE and applied load output includes both the effect of inertial
loads and applied loads.
8. When pressure loads are applied, the GPFDR module uses the discrete load vector and does not
include any distributed effects.
9. GPFORCE is not available in SOLs 108, 111 or 129.
10. Grid point force output is available for nonlinear static analysis for SOLs 106 and 400. SOL106 with
thermal loading does not back out the thermal load so result will not sum to zero, this is a limitation
of SOL106. Contributions from slideline elements are ignored. PARAM,NOELOF and
PARAM,NOELOP are not supported in nonlinear and Remarks 2., 3., 4., and 6. do not apply.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 379
Grid Point Kinetic Energy Output Request
GPKE (Case) Grid Point Kinetic Energy Output Request
Requests the output of the kinetic energy at selected grid points in normal modes analysis only.
Format:
 ALL 
PRINT  
GPKE , ( PUNCH, THRESH = e ) =  n 
NOPRINT  
 NONE 
Examples:
GPKE=ALL
GPKE (PRINT, PUNCH)=19
Describer Meaning
NOPRINT Generates, but does not print, grid point kinetic energy output.
e Minimum energy threshold. Only energies above this value will be printed and/or punched.
ALL Grid point kinetic energy for all grid points will be output.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Only grid points with
identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be included in output
(Integer > 0).
NONE Grid point kinetic energy for no points will be output.
Remarks:
1. Grid point kinetic energy is only available for normal modes analysis.
3. GPKE=NONE overrides an overall output request.
4. For models using the lumped mass formulation, the grid point kinetic energy can be used to examine
the distribution of kinetic energy among the grid points. It is computed as:
mass mass
Ek = Φg ⊗ [ M gg Φ g ]
g
where Φ mass
g represents the mass-normalized eigenvectors so that the total grid point kinetic energy
is scaled to be unity. Note that the operator ⊗ indicates term-wise matrix multiplication.
5. The grid point kinetic energy output has limited meaning for a coupled mass formulation. Since this
mass formulation produces a coupling of mass across grid points, the sharing of kinetic energy among
grid points can occur. In general, this obscures the meaning of the computation as a means of
identifying important model parameters to control modal behavior.
Main Index
Composites Ply Results Sorted Output
GPRSORT (Case) Composites Ply Results Sorted Output
Request sorted output of composites ply results (stress, strain, and failure indices) by global ply ID for a given
element set.
Format:
 ALL 
GPRSORT =  
 n 
Examples:
GPRSORT=ALL
GPRSORT=22
Describer Meaning
ALL All composite elements referencing a PCOMPG property entry type. See Remarks
1. and 2.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command.
Remarks:
1. Composite element output will be sorted by global ply ID and element ID. Note that this sorted
output is only available for composite elements referencing a PCOMPG property entry. Global ply
IDs can only be specified on the PCOMPG entry.
2. Composite elements referencing the PCOMP property entry will be excluded from the sorted output.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 381
Grid Point Stress Discontinuity Output Request
GPSDCON (Case) Grid Point Stress Discontinuity Output Request
Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on grid point stresses.
Format:
 
GPSDCON PRINT, PUNCH =  ALL 
PLOT  n 
Examples:
GPSDCON=ALL
GPSDCON=19
Describer Meaning
ALL Stress discontinuity requests for all SURFACE and VOLUME commands defined
in the OUTPUT(POST) Section will be output.
and volumes with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will
be included in the stress discontinuity output request (Integer > 0).
NONE No grid point stress discontinuity output.
Remarks:
1. This output is available in linear static analysis SOLs 101 and 144 only. Output will be presented for
each surface or volume as a tabular listing of stress discontinuities for each subcase.
2. Only elements used to define the surface or volume are output. See the description of the SURFACE
or VOLUME commands.
VOLUME commands. Also, the GPSTRESS and STRFIELD commands must be present for
printed output.
Main Index
Grid Point Strain Output Request for Printing Only
GPSTRAIN (Case) Grid Point Strain Output Request for Printing Only
Requests grid point strains for printing only.
Format:
 ALL 
 
GPSTRAIN PRINT, PUNCH =  n 
PLOT  
 NONE 
Examples:
GPSTRAIN=ALL
GPSTRAIN=19
Describer Meaning
ALL Grid point strain requests for all SURFACE and VOLUME commands defined in
the OUTPUT(POST) Section will be output.
and volumes with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will
be included in the grid point strain output request (Integer > 0).
NONE No grid point strain output.
Remarks:
1. For statics, normal modes, and transient analysis, output will be presented for each surface or volume
as a tabular listing of grid point strains for each load, eigenvalue, and time step. (See Remark 2 under
DISPLACEMENT (Case), 282 for a discussion of SORT1 and SORT2.)
2. Only grid points connected to elements used to define the surface or volume are output. See the
description of the SURFACE or VOLUME commands.
3. Element strain output (STRAIN) must be requested for elements referenced on SURFACE and
VOLUME commands.
4. In nonlinear transient analysis, grid point strains are computed only if parameter LGDISP is -1,
which is the default, and only for elements with linear material properties.
5. For the postprocessing of grid point strains using the .xdb file or the computation of mesh strain
discontinuities, the STRFIELD command must also be specified.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 383
Grid Point Stress Output Request for Printing Only
GPSTRESS (Case) Grid Point Stress Output Request for Printing Only
Requests grid point stresses for printing only.
Format:
 ALL 
 
GPSTRESS PRINT, PUNCH =  n 
PLOT  
 NONE 
Examples:
GPSTRESS=ALL
GPSTRESS=19
Describer Meaning
ALL Grid point stress requests for all SURFACE and VOLUME commands defined in the
OUTPUT(POST) Section will be output.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Only surfaces and
volumes with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be
included in the grid point stress output request (Integer > 0).
NONE No grid point stress output.
Remarks:
1. For statics, normal modes, and transient analysis, output will be presented for each surface or volume
as a tabular listing of grid point stresses for each load, eigenvalue, and timestep. (See Remark 2 under
DISPLACEMENT (Case), 282 for a discussion of SORT1 and SORT2.)
description of the SURFACE or VOLUME commands.
VOLUME commands.
4. For the postprocessing of grid point stresses using the .xdb file or the computation of mesh stress
discontinuities, the STRFIELD command must also be specified.
5. Grid point stress is not output for midside nodes.
Main Index
Rigid Body Motion Grounding Check
GROUNDCHECK (Case) Rigid Body Motion Grounding Check
Perform grounding check analysis on the stiffness matrix to expose unintentional constraints by moving the
model rigidly.
Format:
( PRINT , PUNCH, SET = (  G, N, N + AUTOSPC, F, A  )

 
NOPRINT  ALL   
GROUNDCHECK =  YES 
 NO 
GRID = gid, THRESH = e,DATAREC = YES , ( RTHRESH = r ) )
NO
Examples:
GROUNDCHECK=YES
GROUNDCHECK(GRID=12,SET=(G,N,A),THRESH=1.E-5,DATAREC=YES)=YES
Describer Meaning
PRINT Write output to the print file. (Default)
NOPRINT Do not write output to the print file.
PUNCH Write output to the punch file.
SET Selects degree-of-freedom set(s) (Default: SET=G).
gid Reference grid point for the calculation of the rigid body motion.
e Maximum strain energy which passes the check. The default value is computed
by dividing the largest term in the stiffness matrix by 1.E10.
DATAREC Requests data recovery of grounding forces (Default: DATAREC=NO).
r Grounding forces which are larger than r percent of the largest grounding force
will be printed if DATAREC=YES (Default = .10; 0. < r < 1.0).
Remarks:
1. GROUNDCHECK must be specified above the subcase level.
2. SET=N+AUTOSPC (check the N-set stiffness, including the effect of PARAM,AUTOSPC) uses the
stiffness matrix for the n-set, with the rows corresponding to degrees-of-freedom constrained by the
PARAM,AUTOSPC operation zeroed out. If AUTOSPC was not performed, then this check is
redundant with respect to SET=N.
3. If DATAREC=YES, GROUNDCHECK FORCES will be printed in the displacement coordinate
system of the associated GRID points.
4. For CBEAM/CBEAM3, it is recommended to use SPOINT ID for warping DOFs. Use of GRID ID
for warping DOFs may cause one or more directions to fail the rigid body check.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 385
Rigid Body Motion Grounding Check
5. If Lagrange multipliers are present via RIGID=LAGRAN or LGELIM then for degree-of-freedom
sets N, N+AUTOSPC, F, and A the check will be performed on degree-of-freedom sets NL,
NL+AUTOSPC, FL, and AL. The output will also be labeled accordingly.
Main Index
Aerodynamic Gust Load Requests
GUST (Case) Aerodynamic Gust Load Requests
Selects the gust field in an aeroelastic response problem.
Format:
GUST=n
Example:
GUST=73
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a GUST Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remark:
1. The choice of transient or frequency response GUST depends upon the type of TLOAD or RLOAD
referenced on the selected GUST entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 387
Eigenvector Output Request in SOLs 200 and 400
GVECTOR (Case) Eigenvector Output Request in SOLs 200 and 400
Requests the form and type of eigenvector output in SOLs 200 and 400. For other solutions use
DISPLACEMENT (Case)
Format:
 ALL 
 
GVECTOR( PRINT,PUNCH ) =  n 
PLOT  
 NONE 
Examples:
GVECTOR=ALL
GVECTOR(PUNCH)=NONE
Describer Meaning
PLOT The eigenvectors will be generated but not written to the print or punch files.
ALL Eigenvectors for all points will be output.
NONE Eigenvectors for no points will be output.
Remarks:
2. GVECTOR=NONE overrides an overall output request.
3. Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each eigenvector.
4. GVECTOR is intended to specified in subcases with ANALYSIS=MFREQ, MTRAN, MCEIG,
FLUTTER, and SAERO.
Main Index
Mesh Adaptivity Activation and Control
HADAPT (Case) Mesh Adaptivity Activation and Control
Specifies Mesh adaptivity control parameters in SOLs 101 and 400.
Format:
HADAPT=N
Example:
HADAPT=1
Describer Meaning
N Identification number for a HADAPTL Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. The HADAPT command can be used only in SOL 101 or SOL 400 with ANALYSIS=STATICS.
HADPAT cannot be used in Linear Contact Analyses.
2. In SOL 101, with NO SUPERELEMENTS, the HADAPT command may appear either above all
SUBCASEs or within specific SUBCASEs. In the last scenario, only stresses on the solution
corresponding to the specific SUBCASE where the HADAPT command has been placed will be used
to compute error indicators should the user requests an error indicator based refinement criterion (see
Bulk Data entries, HADACRI, 2056 and HADAPTL, 2059). If superelements are present, then the HADAPT
command should appear only in Residual Superelement (SE0) SUBCASE structure.
3. In SOL 400, the HADAPT command can only be placed on a Linear static structural analysis
SUBCASE (ANALYSIS=STATICS) either above all STEPS or within each single STEP. All STEPs
must be Linear Static structural STEPS (ANALYSIS=STATICS). In other words an adaptive meshing
linear analysis cannot be chained with any other analysis type.
4. HADAPT remeshing should only be performed on lower order elements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 389
Harmonic Analysis or Printout Control
HARMONICS (Case) Harmonic Analysis or Printout Control
Controls the number of harmonics output in axisymmetric shell or axisymmetric fluid problems; controls the
number of harmonics to be used for analysis in cyclic symmetry problems.
Format for Axisymmetric Problems:

 ALL 
 
HARMONICS =  NONE 
 
 h 
Format for Cyclic Symmetric Problems:

 
HARMONICS =  ALL 
 n 
Examples:
HARMONICS=ALL
HARMONICS=32
Describer Meaning
ALL All harmonics will be output in the case of axisymmetric shell or axisymmetric fluid
problems. All harmonics will be used for analysis in cyclic symmetry problems.
NONE No harmonics will be output. This option is not available for use in cyclic symmetry
problems.
h Available harmonics up to and including harmonic h will be output in the case of
axisymmetric shell or axisymmetric fluid problems (Integer > 0).
n Harmonics specified in SET n will be used for analysis in cyclic symmetry problems
(Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. If no HARMONICS command is present in the Case Control Section for axisymmetric shell or fluid
problems, printed output is prepared only for the zero harmonic.
2. This command must be present in cyclic symmetry problems with HARMONICS=ALL or n;
otherwise, the program will abort without performing any analysis.
3. In cyclic symmetry analysis, n must be defined as a set of integers on a SET command.
Main Index
Heat Transfer Rate of Change of Enthalpy Output Request
HDOT (Case) Heat Transfer Rate of Change of Enthalpy Output Request
Requests form of rate of change of enthalpy vector output in transient heat transfer analysis (SOL 159).
Format:
 ALL 
 
HDOT ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH ) =  n 
SORT2 PLOT  
 NONE 
Example:
HDOT=5
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each time.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of time for each grid point.
PLOT Generates, but does not print, rate of change of enthalpy.
ALL Rate of change of enthalpy for all points will be output.
NONE Rate of change of enthalpy for no points will be output.
n Set identification of previously appearing SET command. Only rates of change of
enthalpy for points with identification numbers that appear on this SET
command will be output (Integer > 0).
Remark:
1. HDOT=NONE is used to override a previous HDOT=n or HDOT=ALL command.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 391
Fatigue Histogram/Time History Output Request
HISTOGRAM (Case) Fatigue Histogram/Time History Output Request
Requests resultant stress/strain time history and/or rainflow cycle histogram output from entities defined by
a FATIGUE case control output request for SOLs 101, 103, and 112 only.
Format:
BOTH  ALL 
 
HISTOGRAM ( HIST , FORMAT = [CODE] ) =  n 
 
TIME  NONE 
Examples:
SET 99 = 100,101
HISTOGRAM(TIME,FORMAT=ASCII)= 99
Describer Meaning
BOTH Both time histories and histograms are output (Default).
HIST Only histograms are output.
TIME Only time histories are output.
FORMAT Specifies the output file format of the time history and/or histogram files. Valid values of
CODE are ASCII or BINARY. (Default: FORMAT=ASCII).
ALL Time histories and/or histograms of all entities associated with a FATIGUE case control
output request are output. See Remarks below.
n Time histories and/or histograms of only entities defined in a SET of ID n are output.
The entities must also be part of a FATIGUE case control output request.
NONE No histogram or time history output is processed.
Remarks:
1. If no FATIGUE case control is defined, this output request is ignored.
2. This output request has the potential to create many thousands of files if the ALL option is used. A
separate file for each time history and/or histogram for each entity is created. It is recommended to
specify a SET to limit the output.
3. If FORMAT=BINARY, file formats are DAC for time histories and S3M for histograms.
If FORMAT=ASCII, both time histories and histograms are output in CSV format.
4. File names produced by this option are cryptic and increment by the number of time histories or
histograms being processed. You must open each file to check for which element, node, and layer it
is associated with.
Main Index
Fatigue Histogram/Time History Output Request
5. This option is not supported for duty cycle analysis and will be ignored with no output generated.
Specifically this occurs when the FTGSEQ bulk data entry references more than one FTGEVNT or
more than one repeat of a single FTGEVNT entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 393
Harmonic Output Request in Cyclic Symmetry Problems
HOUTPUT (Case) Harmonic Output Request in Cyclic Symmetry Problems
Requests harmonic output in cyclic symmetry problems.
Format:
 
HOUTPUT [ ( C, S, C*, S* ) ] =  ALL 
 K 
Examples:
HOUTPUT=ALL
HOUTPUT(C,S)=5
Describer Meaning
C, S, C*, S* Harmonic coefficients. See Remark 4.
ALL All harmonics will be output.
k Set identification number of harmonics for output (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. Set k must be defined on a SET command, and output will be computed for all available harmonics
in SET k.
2. HOUTPUT=ALL requests output for all harmonics specified on the HARMONICS command.
3. Either the HOUTPUT or NOUTPUT command is required to obtain data recovery in cyclic
symmetry analysis.
4. C and S correspond to the cosine and sine coefficients when the STYPE field is ROT or AXI on the
CYSYM Bulk Data entry.
C, S, C*, and S* correspond to the cosine symmetric, sine symmetric, cosine antisymmetric, and sine
antisymmetric coefficients, respectively, when the STYPE field is DIH on the CYSYM Bulk Data
entry.
Main Index
Elemental Heat Flow Output Request
HTFLOW (Case) Elemental Heat Flow Output Request
Requests heat flow output at selected structural elements.
Format:
   
HTFLOW  PRINT, PUNCH  =  ALL 
 NOPRINT   n 
Example:
HTFLOW = ALL
HTFLOW = 15
Describer Meaning
NOPRINT Generate, but do not print out, the output.
ALL Heat flow for all structural elements will be output.
n Set identification of previously appearing SET command. Only structural
included in the heat flow output (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. Elemental heat flow output is available for steady state thermal analysis (SOL 101 and SOL 153) and
transient thermal analysis (SOL 159).
2. Heat flow is computed from the applied heat loads and the effect of convection and radiation heat
transfer on boundary elements (CHBDYE, CHBDYG, and CHBDYP).
3. See Remarks 6.-8. of the descriptions of CHBDYE Bulk Data for the side conventions of solid
elements, shell elements, and line elements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 395
Transient Analysis Initial Condition Set Selection
IC (Case) Transient Analysis Initial Condition Set Selection
Selects the initial conditions for transient analysis (SOLs 109, 112, 129, 159, 400 and 600).
Format:
PHYSICAL
IC MODAL = n
STATSUB[,DIFFK]
Examples:
IC = 10
IC(PHYSICAL) = 100
IC(MODAL) = 200
IC(STATSUB) = 1000
IC(STATSUB,DIFFK) = 2000
Describer Meaning
PHYSICAL The TIC Bulk Data entries selected by set n define initial conditions for coordinates
involving grid, scalar, and extra points (Default).
MODAL The TIC Bulk Data entries selected by set n define initial conditions for modal
coordinates and extra points. See Remark 3.
STATSUB Use the solution of the static analysis subcase n as the initial condition. See Remark 4.
DIFFK Include the effects of differential stiffness in the solution. See Remarks 4. and 5.
n For the PHYSICAL (Default) and MODAL options, n is the set identification
number of TIC Bulk Data entries for structural analysis (SOLs 109, 112, 129, and
600) or TEMP and TEMPD entries for heat transfer analysis (SOLs 159, 400 and
600). For the STATSUB option, n is the ID of a static analysis subcase (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. For structural analysis, TIC entries will not be used (therefore, no initial conditions) unless selected
in the Case Control Section.
2. Only the PHYSICAL option (Default) may be specified in heat transfer analysis (SOLs 159, 400 and
600). The initial temperature of a point should be equal to its boundary temperature at time = 0. For
SOL 400 transient thermal analysis, the boundary temperature at time = 0 takes precedence over the
initial temperature if both temperatures are not identical.
3. IC(MODAL) may be specified only in modal transient analysis (SOL 112).
4. IC(STATSUB) and IC(STATSUB,DIFFK) may not both be specified in the same execution.
5. The DIFFK keyword is meaningful only when used in conjunction with the STATSUB keyword.
6. The following examples illustrate the usage of the various options of the IC Case Control command.
Example (a)
Main Index
Transient Analysis Initial Condition Set Selection
$ SPECIFY INITIAL CONDITIONS FOR PHYSICAL COORDINATES

$ IN SOL 109 OR SOL 112
IC(PHYSICAL) = 100
or
IC = 100
Example (b)
$ SPECIFY INITIAL CONDITIONS FOR MODAL COORDINATES
$ IN SOL 112
IC(MODAL) = 200
Example (c)
$ SPECIFY STATIC SOLUTION AS INITIAL CONDITION
$ (DIFFERENTIAL STIFFNESS EFFECT NOT INCLUDED)
SUBCASE 10 $ STATIC ANALYSIS
LOAD = 100
SUBCASE 20 $ TRANSIENT ANALYSIS
IC(STATSUB) = 10 $ POINTS TO STATIC ANALYSIS SUBCASE ID
Example (d)
$ SPECIFY STATIC SOLUTION AS INITIAL CONDITION
$ (DIFFERENTIAL STIFFNESS EFFECT INCLUDED
SUBCASE 100 $ STATIC ANALYSIS
LOAD = 1000
SUBCASE 200 $ TRANSIENT ANALYSIS
IC(STATSUB,DIFFK) = 100 $ POINTS TO STATIC ANALYSIS SUBCASE ID
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 397
Inter-Component Forces (ICF) Output Request
ICF (Case) Inter-Component Forces (ICF) Output Request
Requests the form and type of inter-component force (ICF) vector output from an FBA job.
Format:
 ALL 
 PHYSICAL   
ICF  , PRINT, PUNCH , REAL or IMAG  =  n 
 MODAL PLOT PHASE   
 NONE 
Examples:
ICF = 5
ICF (SORT2, PRINT, PUNCH, IMAG) = ALL
ICF (SORT2) = 20
ICF = ALL
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each frequency. See
Remarks 2. through 5.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of frequency for each grid point. See
Remarks 2., 4. and 6.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium. See Remark 1.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium. See Remark 1.
PLOT Generates, but does not print, ICFs.
PHASE Requests polar format (magnitude and phase) of complex output. Phase output is in
degrees.
ALL ICFs for all points will be output. See Remarks 2. through 6.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only ICFs for points with
identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be output (Integer > 0).
See Remarks 2. through 7.
NONE ICFs for no points will be output.
Remarks:
2. See Remark 2 under DISPLACEMENT (Case), 282 for a discussion of SORT1 and SORT2. In the SORT1
format, only nonzero values will be output.
Main Index
Inter-Component Forces (ICF) Output Request
3. In SORT1 format, ICFs recovered at consecutively numbered scalar points are printed in groups of
six (sextets) per line of output. However, if a scalar point is not consecutively numbered, it will begin
a new sextet on a new line of output. If a sextet can be formed and all values are zero, then the line
will not be printed. If a sextet cannot be formed, then zero values may be output.
4. ICFs are defined only for the connection points of FRF components in an FBA job and are regarded
as null for non-connection points of FRF components. Therefore, ICF output is meaningful only for
the connection points of FRF components in an FBA job.
5. In SORT1 format, ICF output is ignored for non-connection points and will be output for the
requested connection points of FRF components only if their ICFs are non-null.
6. In SORT2 format, ICF output is honored for all requested connection and non-connection points
of FRF components even if their ICFs are null.
7. ICF output request is ignored for undefined points.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 399
Insert External File
INCLUDE (Case) Insert External File
data file.
Format:
INCLUDE ’filename’
Example:
The following INCLUDE statement is used to obtain the Bulk Data from another file called
MYCASE.DATA:
SOL 101
CEND
LOAD = 100
INCLUDE ’MYCASE.DATA’
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA
Describer Meaning
filename Physical filename of the external file to be inserted. The user must supply the
name according to installation or machine requirements. It is recommended that
the filename be enclosed by single right-hand quotation marks (’).
Remarks:
names may be split across multiple lines. For example, the file:
INCLUDE ‘/dir123
/dir456
Main Index
Acoustic Intensity Output Request
INTENSITY (Case) Acoustic Intensity Output Request
Requests output of acoustic intensity on wetted surface. SOLs 108 and 111 only.
Format:
 ALL 
   
INTENSITY  SORT1 , PRINT,PUNCH  =  n 
 SORT2 PLOT   
 NONE 
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as tabular listing of grid points for each excitation frequency
(Default).
SORT2 Output will be presented as tabular listing of excitation frequencies for each grid point.
output is desired.
ALL Intensities will be computed for all grid points of the wetted surface.
n Set identification of a previously defined set of grid points. Intensities will be
computed for the grid points in this set only.
NONE Acoustic intensities will not be processed.
Remarks:
2. INTENSITY = NONE overrides an overall request.
3. The PLOT option is used if results are requested for postprocessing but no printer output is desired.
4. This Case Control command can be used in SOL 108 and SOL 111 only.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 401
Nonlinear Inertia Relief Selection (SOL 400 only)
IRLOAD (Case) Nonlinear Inertia Relief Selection (SOL 400 only)
Selects nonlinear inertia relief set for SOL 400
 
Format: IRLOAD=  QLINEAR 
 NONE 
Example:
IRLOAD=QLINEAR
Describer Meaning
QLINEAR Inertia Load Calculation with small displacement (Quasi-Linear) is activated in SOL
400.
NONE No Inertia Relief (Default)
Remark:
1. This command is active only in SOL 400 with ANALYSIS=NLSTATIC and its use requires a set of
STATIC supports that constrain all six rigid body motions.
2. IRLOAD=QLINEAR, which has to be applied above to all SUBCASES, is a global case control
command and activates the inertia load calculations in SOL 400 for all applied static loads. In
nonlinear static analyses (ANALYSIS=NLSTAT), it also activates the inertia relief analysis with small
displacement. When IRLOAD=QLINEAR with large displacement (PARAM,LGDISP,1), a fatal
error message will be issued. Also superelements in conjunction with IRLOAD=QLINEAR will cause
a fatal error.
IRLOAD=NONE (default) deactivates the inertia load calculations.
3. IRLOAD=QLINEAR is ignored by perturbation analyses in SOL 400.
Main Index
Direct Input Stiffness Matrix Selection
K2GG (Case) Direct Input Stiffness Matrix Selection
Selects direct input stiffness matrix or matrices.
Format:
K2GG=name
Example:
K2GG = KDMIG
K2GG = KDMIG1, KDMIG2, KDMIG3
K2GG = 1.25*KDMIG1, 1.0*KDMIG2, 0.82*KDMIG3
SET 100 = K2, K3, K4
K2GG = 100
Describer Meaning
name Name of a [ K 2gg ] matrix that is input on the DMIG Bulk Data entry, or name list
with or without factors. See Remark 6. (Character).
Remarks:
2. Terms are added to the stiffness matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on the DMIG,name Bulk Data entry must contain the
integer 6.
4. A scale factor may be applied to this input using the PARAM, CK2 entry. See Parameters, 739.
5. The matrices are additive if multiple matrices are referenced on the K2GG command.
Each entry in the list consists of a factor, followed by a star, followed by a name. The entries
are separated by commas or blanks. The factors are real numbers. Each name must be paired
with a factor including 1.0.
7. If there are multiple subcases in the analysis. the K2GG command must appear above the first subcase
or in the first subcase. K2GG requests in the second and subsequent subcases will be ignored. For
superelements. it should occur in the first subcase for the appropriate superelement.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 403
Direct Input Stiffness Matrix Selection
K2PP (Case) Direct Input Stiffness Matrix Selection
Selects direct input stiffness matrix or matrices, which are not included in normal modes.
Format:
K2PP=name
Example:
K2PP = KDMIG
K2PP = KDMIG1, KDMIG2, KDMIG3
K2PP = 5.06*KDMIG1, 1.0*KDMIG2, 0.85*KDMIG3
K2PP = (1.25, 0.5) *KDMIG1, (1.0,0.0) *KDMIG2, (0.82, -2.2) *KDMIG3
Describer Meaning
name Name of a [ K 2pp ] matrix that is input on the DMIG or DMlAX Bulk Data entry,
or name list with or without factors. See Remark 6.
Remarks:
1. DMIG and DMIAX entries will not be used unless selected by the K2PP command.
2. The matrix must be square or symmetric, and field 4 on the DMIG,name Bulk Data entry must
contain a 1 or 6.
3. It is recommended that PARAM,AUTOSPC,NO be specified. See the Constraint and Mechanism
Problem Identification in SubDMAP SEKR (p. 342) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
4. K2PP matrices are used only in dynamic response problems. They are not used in normal modes.
5. The matrices are additive if multiple matrices are referenced on the K2PP Case Control command.
are separated by commas or blanks. The factors are either all real numbers, or all complex
numbers in the form of two real numbers separated by a comma, within parentheses, as shown
in the preceding example. The first real number of the pair is the real part, and the second is
the imaginary part. Either part may be zero or blank, but not both. Mixed real numbers and
complex numbers are not allowed. Each name must be paired with a factor including 1.0 for
real and (1.0, 0.0) for complex.
Main Index
Direct Input Stiffness Element Damping Selection
K42GG (Case) Direct Input Stiffness Element Damping Selection
Selects direct input structural element damping matrix or matrices.
Format:
K42GG=name
Example:
K42GG = KDMIG
K42GG = KDMIG1, KDMIG2, KDMIG3
K42GG = 2.03*KDMIG1, 0.84*KDMIG2
Describer Meaning
name Name of a [ K4 2gg ] matrix that is input on the DMIG Bulk Data entry, or name
list with or without factors. See Remark 4.
Remarks:
2. Terms are added to the structural element damping matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric, and field 4 on the DMIG,name Bulk Data entry must contain the
integer 6.
are separated by commas or blanks. The factors are real numbers. Each name must be paired
5. If there are multiple subcases in the analysis. the K42GG command must appear above the first
subcase or in the first subcase. K42GG requests in the second and subsequent subcases will be
ignored. For superelements. it should occur in the first subcase for the appropriate superelement.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 405
Output Label
LABEL (Case) Output Label
Defines a character string that will appear on the third heading line of each page of printer output.
Format:
LABEL=label
Example:
LABEL=DEMONSTRATION PROBLEM
Describer Meaning
label Any character string.
Remarks:
1. LABEL appearing at the subcase level will label output for that subcase only.
2. LABEL appearing before all subcases will label any outputs that are not subcase-dependent.
3. If no LABEL command is supplied, the label line will be blank.
4. LABEL information is also placed on plotter output, as applicable. Only the first 65 characters will
appear.
Main Index
Maximum Lines Per Printed Page
LINE (Case) Maximum Lines Per Printed Page
Defines the maximum number of output lines per printed page.
Format:
LINE=n
Example:
LINE=35
Describer Meaning
n Maximum number of output lines per page (Integer > 0; Default = 50).
Remarks:
1. For 11 inch paper, 50 lines per page is recommended; for 8-1/2 inch paper, 35 lines per page is
recommended.
2. The NASTRAN statement keyword NLINES may also be used to set this value. See the Executing MSC
Nastran, 1.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 407
External Static Load Set Selection
LOAD (Case) External Static Load Set Selection
Selects an external static load set.
Format:
LOAD=n
Example:
LOAD=15
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of at least one external load Bulk Data entry. The set
identification must appear on at least one ACCEL, ACCEL1, FORCE, FORCE1,
FORCE2, FORCEAX, GRAV, LOAD, MOMAX, MOMENT, MOMENT1,
MOMENT2, MPCD, PLOAD, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4, PLOADB3,
PLOADX, QVOL, QVECT, QHBDY, QBDY1, QBDY2, QBDY3, PRESAX,
RFORCE, SPCD, or SLOAD entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. A GRAV entry cannot have the same set identification number as any of the other loading entry types.
Apply a gravity load along with other static loads, a LOAD Bulk Data entry must be used.
2. LOAD is only applicable in linear and nonlinear statics, inertia relief, differential stiffness, buckling,
and heat transfer analyses.
3. The total load applied will be the sum of external (LOAD), thermal (TEMP(LOAD)), element
deformation (DEFORM), and constrained displacement (SPC) loads.
4. Static, thermal, and element deformation loads should have unique set identification numbers.
Main Index
Name to be Associated with a SUBCASE in PAA
LOADNAME (Case) Name to be Associated with a SUBCASE in PAA
Provides a name to be associated with a loading condition.
Format:
LOADNAME = load_name
Example:
LOADNAME = GRAVITY LOAD ON OUTBOARD NACELLEL
Describer Meaning
Load_name Character string (up to 64 characters long) providing a user-defined name for a
loading in PAA.
Remark:
1. This command is used only in PAA and provides a user-defined name for a loading condition.
2. LOADNAMEs may be used to combine loads in a COMBINE or SOLVE PAA run using a
LOADCNAM Bulk Data entry.
3. The LOADNAME command is ignored in non-PAA applications
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 409
Static Load Set Selection
LOADSET (Case) Static Load Set Selection
Selects a sequence of static load sets to be applied to the structural model. The load sets may be referenced by
dynamic load commands.
Format:
LOADSET=n
Example:
LOADSET=100
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of at least one LSEQ Bulk Data entry. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. When used in superelement analysis, this command must be used for all superelements. The number
of static load vectors created for each superelement depends upon the type of analysis. In static
analysis, the number of vectors created is equal to the number of unique EXCITEIDs on all LSEQ
entries in the Bulk Data; in dynamic analysis, the number of vectors created is equal to the number
of unique EXCITEIDs on all RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2 and ACSRCE entries in
the Bulk Data.
2. When the LOADSET command is used in superelement statics, the residual structure should have as
many loading conditions as the number of unique EXCITEID sets defined on all LSEQ entries. The
subcases after the first should contain only SUBTITLE and LABEL information, and residual
structure output requests. SUBTITLE and LABEL information for all superelements will be obtained
from the residual structure.
3. When multiple subcases are specified in the dynamic solution sequences (SOLs 108, 109, 111, 112,
118, 146), the LOADSET must appear in the first subcase or above all subcases. In SOL 200 with
ANALYSIS=DFREQ, MFREQ, or MTRAN, a different LOADSET may be specified in the first
subcase pertaining to each ANALYSIS command.
4. In SOL 101, the design sensitivity output will identify all expanded subcases by a sequence of unique
integers beginning with n.
5. In the nonlinear static solution sequences (SOLs 106 and 153), the LOADSET must appear above
all subcases and only one LOADSET may be specified.
6. Only one LOADSET command is allowed per superelement and it must be specified in the
superelement’s first subcase.
7. It is no longer necessary to employ LOADSET/LSEQ data to specify static loading data for use in
dynamic analysis. In the absence of a LOADSET Case Control command, all static loads whose load
set IDs match the EXCITEIDs on all RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2, and ACSRCE
Bulk Data entries are automatically processed.
Main Index
Static Load Set Selection
8. . If you use the LOADSET command in a static analysis, the loading matrix will be generated
corresponding to, and in ascending order of, the EXCITEID's on the referenced LSEQ entries. Any
LOAD commands within subcases will be ignored.
9. Use of the LOADSET/LSEQ should be avoided as it is an obsolete entry and is never needed and is
only documented for legacy code. Some new features such as SUBSTEP do not support it and will
issue a fatal message.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 411
Direct Input Mass Matrix Selection
M2GG (Case) Direct Input Mass Matrix Selection
Selects direct input mass matrix or matrices.
Format:
M2GG=name
Example:
M2GG = MDMIG
M2GG = MDMIG1, MDMIG2, MDMIG3
M2GG = 1.25*MDMIG1, 1.0*MDMIG2, 0.82*MDMIG3
SET 200 = M1, M2
M2GG = 200
Describer Meaning
name Name of a [ M 2gg ] matrix that is input on the DMIG Bulk Data entry, or name
list with or without factors see Remark 6. (Character).
Remarks:
2. Terms are added to the mass matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric, and field 4 on the DMIG, name entry must contain a 6.
4. M2GG input is not affected by PARAM,WTMASS. M2GG input must either be in consistent mass
units or PARAM,CM2 may be used.
5. The matrices are additive if multiple matrices are referenced on the M2GG command.
separated by commas or blanks. The factors are real numbers. Each name must be paired with a
factor including 1.0.
7. If there are multiple subcases in the analysis. the M2GG command must appear above the first
subcase or in the first subcase. M2GG requests in the second and subsequent subcases will be ignored.
For superelements. it should occur in the first subcase for the appropriate superelement.
Main Index
Direct Input Mass Matrix Selection
M2PP (Case) Direct Input Mass Matrix Selection
Selects direct input mass matrix or matrices, which are not included in normal modes.
Format:
M2PP=name
Example:
M2PP = MDMIG
M2PP = MDMIG1, MDMIG2, MDMIG3
M2PP = 5.06*MDMIG1, 1.0*MDMIG2, 0.85*MDMIG3
M2PP = (1.25, 0.5) *MDMIG1, (1.0, 0.0) *MDMIG2, (0.82, -2.2) *MDMIG3
Describer Meaning
name Name of a [ M 2pp ] matrix that is input on the DMIG or DMIAX Bulk Data entry,
or name list with or without factors, see Remark 7. (Character).
Remarks:
1. DMIG and DMIAX entries will not be used unless selected by the M2PP input.
2. M2PP input is not affected by PARAM,WTMASS. M2PP input must be in consistent mass units.
3. The matrix must be square or symmetric, and field 4 on the DMIG, name entry must contain a 1 or 6.
4. It is recommended that PARAM,AUTOSPC,NO be specified. See Constraint and Mechanism Problem
Identification in SubDMAP SEKR (p. 342) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
5. M2PP matrices are used only in dynamic response problems. They are not used in normal modes
problems.
6. The matrices are additive if multiple matrices are referenced on the M2PP command.
Each entry in the list consists of a factors followed by a star, followed by a name. The entries are
separated by commas or blanks. The factors are either all real numbers, or all complex numbers
in the form of two real numbers, separated by a comma, within parenthesis as shown in the
preceding example. The first real number of the pair is the real part, and the second is
the imaginary part. Either part may be zero or blank, but not both. Mixed real numbers and
complex numbers are not allowed. Each name must be with a factor including 1.0 for real and
(1.0, 0.0) for complex.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 413
Mass Combination Selection
MASSSET (Case) Mass Combination Selection
Selection of a mass combination in multiple mass combination analysis (MMC). This case control
command can be used in various solutions sequences SOLs 101, 103, 107-112, 144-146, 200 and 400.
Format:
MASSSET = n
Example:
MASSSET = 11
Describer Meaning
n Set ID of a MASSSET bulk data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. Using a particular mass combination in analysis only requires referencing the mass combinations ID
in MASSSET case control at the subcase level (or at step level in Sol 400). If no MASSSET is defined
in the subcase then (like traditional non MMC analysis) the base mass is used as the mass for that
subcase. Example for selecting mass combinations at the subcase level:
SUBCASE 101
...
MASSSET = 11 $
...
SUBCASE 102
...
MASSSET = 12 $
2. The MASSSET bulk data entry defines a linear combination of incremental/base mass cases to form
the subcase-dependent mass. The bulk data for the incremental mass case is preceded by “BEGIN
MASSID=yyy”, where yyy > 0 is the integer ID of the mass increment case. The only data that will
be used from the incremental mass bulk data section is element connections and element mass
properties including materials (Parameters and grid data included in the incremental mass section will
be ignored). The incremental mass will be computed based on the grid data supplied in the base mass
bulk data section and the element properties supplied in the incremental mass section. Typically the
user will construct the incremental mass by adding concentrated masses (e.g. CONM2, CMASS1
etc.) or by changing the material or element properties of the set of elements defined in incremental
mass bulk data section.
BEGIN massid=101 label='mass increment using conm2s'
BEGIN massid=102 label='mass increment using materials'
3. If Part SE are used in the model, mass increment related to these SEs can be specified in a separate
bulk data section, “BEGIN SUPER=zzz MASSID=yyy”, where zzz > 0 is the Superelement ID and
yyy is the mass increment ID.
BEGIN SUPER=2 massid=101 label='mass increment using conm2s'
Main Index
Redefine the MASTER Subcase
MASTER (Case) Redefine the MASTER Subcase
Allows the redefinition of a MASTER subcase.
Format:
SUBCASE n
MASTER
Example:
SUBCASE 10
MASTER
Describer Meaning
n
Remarks:
1. All commands in a MASTER subcase apply to the following subcases until a new MASTER subcase
is defined.
2. Suppose that superelement 10 has SPC set 10, MPC set 10, and LOAD sets 101 and 102. Suppose
also that superelement 20 has SPC set 20, MPC set 20, and LOAD sets 201 and 202. Then the
following Case Control setup specifies the required subcase structure:
TITLE = MY MODEL
DISP = ALL
SEALL = ALL
SUBCASE 101
MASTER
SPC = 10
MPC = 10
SUPER = 10, 1
LOAD = 101
LABEL = SUPER 10
ESE = ALL
SUBCASE 102
LOAD = 102
SUPER = 10, 2
SUBCASE 201
MASTER
SPC = 20
MPC = 20
SUPER = 20, 1
LOAD = 201
LABEL = SUPER 20
SUBCASE 202
LOAD = 202
SUPER = 20, 2
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 415
Redefine the MASTER Subcase
3. MASTER may also be used advantageously in multiple boundary condition Case Control setups.
Suppose that constraint sets 10 and 20 are to be solved with three loading conditions each: 1, 2, and
3; and 4, 5, and 6, respectively. The following Case Control Section may be used:
TITLE = MULTIPLE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
DISP = ALL
SYM 1
MASTER
SPC = 10
LOAD = 1
SYM 2
LOAD = 2
SYM 3
LOAD = 3
SYM 4
MASTER
SPC = 20
LOAD = 4
SYM 5
LOAD = 5
SYM 6
LOAD = 6
SYMCOM 10
SYMSEQ = 1., 1., 1., -1., -1., -1.
SYMCOM 20
SYMSEQ = -1., -1., -1., 1., 1., 1.
4. The MASTER command must appear immediately after a SUBCASE or SYM command.
Main Index
Maximum Number of Output Lines
MAXLINES (Case) Maximum Number of Output Lines
Sets the maximum number of output lines.
Format:
MAXLINES=n
Example:
MAXLINES=150000
Describer Meaning
n Maximum number of output lines allowed (Integer > 0; Default = 999999999).
Remarks:
1. If MAXLINES is exceeded, the program will terminate.
2. MAXLINES does not override any system parameters such as those on job control language
commands.
3. MAXLINES may also be specified on the NASTRAN statement with SYSTEM(14). See the Executing
MSC Nastran, 1.
4. The code counts the number of pages and assumes that the number of lines output is the number of
lines allowed per page, specified by the “LINES” command, times the number of pages.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 417
MAXMIN Survey Output Request (old form)
MAXMIN (Case) MAXMIN Survey Output Request (old form)
Specifies options for max/min surveys of certain output data associated with grid points.
Format:
  MAX  
    GLOBAL    ALL 
  BOTH      
MAXMIN   , = num , CID =  BASIC  , oplist,COMP = lisst =  n 
  MIN      
  VMAG   cid    NONE 
   
Example:
MAXMIN (BOTH=10,CID=1000,DISP,COMP=T1/T3)=501
Describer Meaning
MAX Specifies that only maximum values are to be output. See Remark 1.
MIN Specifies that only minimum values are to be output. See Remark 1.
BOTH Specifies that both maximum and minimum values are to be output. See Remark
1.
VMAG Specifies that vector magnitude resultants are to be output. See Remark 2.
num Specifies the maximum number of values that will be output. See Remark 3.
(Integer > 0, Default = 5).
CID Specifies the coordinate system frame of reference in which the max/min values
will be output. See Remarks 1. and 3.
GLOBAL Requests output in the global coordinate system frame of reference.
BASIC Requests output in the basic coordinate system frame of reference.
cid Requests output in the local coordinate system defined by cid (Integer > 0).
oplist Specifies a list of one or more standard Case Control commands for which
max/min results are to be produced. The list may include any of DISP,SPCF,
OLOAD,MPCF,VELO,ACCE, or ALL. See Remark 6 (Character, no Default).
list Specifies a list of grid point degree of freedom component directions that will be
included in the max/min survey output. The components are separated by slashes
and are selected from T1, T2, T3, R1, R2, and R3. See Remarks 4. and 5.
(Character, Default=/T1/T2/T3/R1/R2/R3).
ALL MAXMIN survey results for all points will be output.
NONE MAXMIN survey results for no points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. The max/min results
survey will be output only for the points specified SET n (Integer > 0).
Main Index
MAXMIN Survey Output Request (old form)
Remarks:
1. The MAXMIN command produces an algebraically ascending sorted list of the output quantities
specified for all of the points in the selected set. MAX refers to the largest magnitude positive values,
while MIN refers to the largest magnitude negative values. The output format is similar to that of
displacement output. All components will be output for a grid point, and the order of the grid points
will be in sort on the particular component that was surveyed. The output title contains the
identification number of the set of points participating in the max/min output, the coordinate system
frame of reference, the number of MAX and MIN values output, and the component that was
surveyed. When the output being surveyed is in the global output coordinate system reference frame,
and BASIC or a local output coordinate system is specified as cid, both the sorted system output and
the original reference system output are displayed for the grid point if these systems are different.
2. Vector magnitude results are computed for both translations and rotations and are displayed under
the T1 and R1 column headings. The presence of the COMP keyword is ignored.
3. The default value of 5 generates a minimum of 10 output lines for the BOTH option. There will be
5 maximum values and 5 minimum values produced. In addition, if coordinate system are involved,
both surveyed and original data will be output. This could result in as many as 10 more lines of output
for each surveyed component.
4. Multiple MAXMIN commands may be specified for a subcase. This permits different output
quantities to have different MAXMIN specification within a subcase. For example,
SET 501=1,3,5,7 THRU 99, 1001, 2001
MAXMIN (DISP, COMP=T3) = 501
MAXMIN (SPCF, COMP=T1/R3) = ALL
5. Scalar point output is included only if component T1 is included in the list.
6. MAXMIN output will only be generated for items in the oplist when there is an associated Case
Control command present. For example, a DISP Case Control command must be present in order
for the MAXMIN(DISP) = ALL command to produce output. Use of ALL keywords for the oplist
requests MAXMIN output for all output commands acceptable to MAXMIN that are present in Case
control Section.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 419
Requests Output of Maximums and Minimums in Data Recovery (new form)
MAXMIN (Case) Requests Output of Maximums and Minimums in Data Recovery (new form)
Requests the output of maximums and minimums in data recovery.
Format:
 GRID  CENTER  ALL 
  PRINT, PUNCH VONMISES  
MAXMIN(  ELEM , ), , CUBIC , STRCUR =  n 
  NOPRINT MAXS or SHEAR SGAGE FIBER  
 BOTH   NONE 
CORNER or BILIN
Example:
MAXMIN(GRID) = 12
MAXMIN(ELEM) = ALL
MAXMIN = NONE
Describer Meaning
GRID Indicates the request is applied to grid points.
ELEM Indicates the request is applied to elements.
BOTH Indicates the request is applied to both elements and grid points (Default).
PRINT Compute and write the output to the .f06 file (Default).
PUNCH Compute and write output to the punch file.
NOPRINT Compute but do not write out the results.
ALL Max/min results will be reported for all elements.
n Set identification number. The referenced SET command defines a set of
elements or grid points to be monitored.
NONE Max/min results will not be reported.
VONMISES von Mises stress/strains are output.
MAXS or Maximum shear stress/strains are output.
SHEAR
STRCUR Strain at the reference plane and curvatures are output for plate elements.
FIBER Stress/Strain at locations Z1, Z2 are computed for plate elements.
CENTER Output CQUAD4 stress/strains at the center only.
CORNER or Output CQUAD4 element stress/strains at the center and grid points using strain
BILIN gage approach with bilinear extrapolation.
SGAGE Output CQUAD4 element stress/strains at center and grid points using strain
gage approach.
CUBIC Output CQUAD4 element stress/strains at center and grid points using cubic
bending correction.
Main Index
Requests Output of Maximums and Minimums in Data Recovery (new form)
Remarks:
1. MAXMIN is not allowed in REPCASE, but is allowed in SUBCOM and SYMCOM.
2. The OTIME command may be used to limit the time span of monitoring.
3. No corresponding output request such as DISP, STRESS, etc., is required (Except for STRAIN).
Also, SET=n may request more elements or grid points for monitoring than is requested by Outputs.
Currently for strain the output request STRAIN=n is required where n can reference any element. If
strain at fibers is requested then, then STRAIN (FIBER) = n is required.
The output is comprised of two parts: (1) a summary of the maximum/minimum values and the times
they occur, and (2) the associated output for all components of the element or grid. The first part is
always output, and the second part is only output if the FULL describer is specified on the
MAXMIN(DEF) Case Control command. See the next section for a description of the new Case
Control commands. Here are sample Case Control commands for the output of maximum von Mises
stresses using the BRIEF option:
MAXMIN(DEF) STRESS QUAD4 SMAX1 ABSOLUTE(5) BRIEF
SET 100=4
MAXMIN(ELEM)=4
4. See DISPLACEMENT, STRESS, or STRAIN Case Control commands for additional keyword
implications.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 421
Defines Parameters for Monitoring Maximums and Minimums (new form)
MAXMIN(DEF) (Case) Defines Parameters for Monitoring Maximums and Minimums (new form)
Defines parameters and output options for the monitoring of maximums and minimums in data recovery.
MAXMIN(DEF) must be specified above all subcases. The MAXMIN(ELEM) and/or MAXMIN(GRID)
Case Control command is then required to print the max/min results.
Format for Grid Point Output:

MAXMIN ( DEF ) { DISP, VELO, ACCE, MPCF, SPCF, OLOAD } { T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3 MAGT MAGR },
ABSOLUTE(p) MINALG(q) MAXALG(r) BRIEF
[ RMS ] ,
ALL(p) FULL
 GLOBAL 
 
CID =  BASIC 
 
 cid 
Format for element output:

 
 STRESS   CENTER 
   / ALL 
MAXMIN ( DEF )  STRAIN  { eltype1 [ , eltype2,... ] }  comp1 [ , comp2... ] ,
   GROUP 
 FORCE   ENDS 
 
ABSOLUTE(p) MINALG(q) MAXALG(r) BRIEF
[ RMS ]
ALL(p) FULL
Examples:
MAXMIN(DEF) stress (quad4,smax1) MAXA=5
MAXMIN(DEF) disp T1 T2 T3 MAGT RMS FULL
Describer Meaning
DISP, VELO, etc. (grid point Type of result to be monitored.
output)
STRESS, etc. (element output)
T1, T2, etc. Name of the grid point component to be monitored.
MAGT Specifies the magnitude of the translational components are to be
monitored.
MAGR Specifies the magnitude of the rotational components are to be
monitored
eltype1 eltype2 … Name of the element type(s) to be monitored. At least one
element type must be present. All elements designations are generic

and the "C", designation Connections, should be dropped. The
exceptions for this are the CONROD and CONV element types.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
comp1 comp2… Name of the element component(s) to be monitored; e.g., etmax1
for max shear strain in the Z1 plane. The component names are
defined in the Nastran Data Definition Language (NDDL). Also,
the item codes from Item Codes, 999 may be used.
ABSOLUTE(p) Print out the top p absolute values (Default for p is 5).
MINALG(q) Print out the bottom q minimum algebraic values (Default for q is
5).
MAXALG(r) Print out the top r maximum algebraic values (Default for r is 5).
ALL(p) Print out all options: ABSOLUTE, MINALG, and MAXALG.
(Default for p is 5).
BRIEF Print out only the maxmin results (Default).
FULL Print out the maxmin results followed by the standard data recovery
format for the elements and grids at the retained set of the
maximum or minimum occurrences.
GLOBAL Selects the global coordinate system (see CD on the GRID entry)
for monitoring grid point results.
BASIC Selects the basic coordinate system for monitoring grid point results
(Default).
cid Specifies a coordinate system ID for a system defined on a CORDij
entry for monitoring grid point results.
RMS Print out the root-mean-square value of each maximum or
minimum value requested by ABSOLUTE, MIN, or MAX over all
time steps.
CENTER Component selector when element allows for component name to
occur in multiple places (Default).
ALL Selects all locations in an element where multiple locations exist.
GROUP Reduces all occurrences of a component name to a single value
before the action is performed.
ENDS Selects the ends of a BEAM element ignoring intermediate stations.
Remarks:
1. MAXMIN(DEF) must be specified above all subcases, but this is not sufficient to request monitoring
of maximums and minimums. The MAXMIN command must also be specified above or inside
subcases.
2. MAXMIN(DEF) may be specified more than once.
3. Multiple element types may be grouped together, if the same component name is to be monitored
across those types, by enclosing the element types in parentheses. This grouping does not combine
the element types during processing. Each type and component action is performed in class.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 423
4. Multiple component names may be compared collectively to the current maximum (or minimum),
but only the maximum (or minimum) component in the group will be reported in the output. This
is requested by enclosing the component names in parentheses.
5. Grid point component output is always converted to the basic coordinate system for monitoring
when processing “sort1”. The global system is the default when processing in “sort2”.
6. Results for layers in composite elements, or intermediate stations in CBAR and CBEAM elements,
are not supported.
7. Only real data recovery is supported.
8. When no MINA, MAXA, or ABSO keyword is supplied, the default values of p, q, and s will be 5.
When any keyword is supplied, the other unreferenced keyword values will be set to zero, and no
output will be created.
9. The component action keywords of CENTER, ALL, GROUP, and ENDS can only be applied to
component names defined in the NDDL and occur at multiple places in element data recovery. They
cannot be used with Item Codes.
10. Specify CQUAD4C and CTRIAC for corner stresses of CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 elements.
11. MAXMIN data output to the .op2 and .xdb files are not supported.
12. SORT1 and SORT2 output Case Control options (such as DISP(SORT2)=ALL), cause MAXMIN
to behave differently.
• SORT1 is only supported in SOLs 101, 103, 105, and 109. For each static loadcase, mode
buckling eigenvalue, or time step, all the grids or elements will be searched for maximums and
minimums.
• SORT2 is only supported in SOL 112. For each selected grid or element, all the time steps will
be searched for maximums and minimums.
Main Index
Modal Contribution Fractions Output Request
MCFRACTION (Case) Modal Contribution Fractions Output Request
Requests the form and type of modal contribution fraction output.
Format:
MCFRACTION ( STRUCTURE , PRINT, PUNCH REAL or IMAG ,

( SORT = sorttype ) ,
PLOT PHASE
FRACTION ALL
FRACTION 0.001
KEY = , ITEMS = ALL SOLUTION = m FILTER =
sortitem fratio
(itemlist) NONE
 ALL 
NULL =
12  =  n 
 
ipowr   
 NONE 
Example:
SET 1001 = 10.0, 20.0, 100.0
SET 2001 = 716/T3, 809/T3, 412/T1
MCFRACTION (STRUCTURE,PRINT,PUNCH,ITEM=FRACTION,
SORT=ABSD,KEY=PROJECTION,SOLUTION=1001)=2001
MCFRACTION (ITEMS=(FRACTION,PROJECTION),FILTER=0.01)=2001
Describer Meaning
STRUCTURE Request pertains to structure points only.
PUNCH The punch file (.pch) will be the output medium.
PLOT Generate modal fractions for the requested set, but no printer output.
REAL or IMAG Requests rectangular format (real and imaginary) of complex output.
PHASE Requests polar format (magnitude and phase) of complex output.
SORT Keyword selecting one of the sort type options. Default is to produced output in
increasing natural mode number order.
sorttype One of the following modal contribution fraction output sorting options:
ABSA - output will be sorted by absolute value in ascending order.
ABSD - output will be sorted by absolute value in descending order.
ALGA - output will be sorted algebraically in ascending order.
ALGD - output will be sorted algebraically in descending order.
KEY Keyword selecting a sorting operation key quantity.
sortitem Item from the item list table on which the SORT operation is performed. (Default
is FRACTION.)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 425
Describer Meaning
ITEMS Keyword specifying data selection options.
itemlist One (or more) of the following modal contribution fraction output items. If more
than one item is selected, the list must be enclosed in parentheses:
Item Identifier Description

RESPONSE Each mode’s response at each degree of freedom is selected.
PROJECTION Projection of modal response on solution.
FRACTION Fraction of total displacement per mode (PROJECTION divided by total).
SCALED Scaled magnitude (PROJECTION divided by largest magnitude of modal response).
MODEDISP Modal displacements (complex solution at each DOF by mode number).
MODERESP Modal response for each mode (polar format with respect to total displacement).
SOLUTION Keyword specifying the output solution time step, forcing frequency, or complex
eigenvalue selections for which modal fractions will be generated (Default = ALL).
m Results for solutions in SET m will be output.
FILTER Keyword specifying the value of the printed output data filter.
fratio Value of output filter ratio (Default = 0.001).
NULL Keyword specifying the power of ten used to detect a null response quantity.
ipowr The power of ten used to detect a null response quantity (Default = 12).
n Results for grid point components in SET n will be output.
ALL Results for all solutions and/or grid point components will be output.
NONE No modal contribution fractions will be output.
Remarks:
1. The MCFRACTION Case Control command is useful in modal frequency response (SOL 111),
modal transient response (SOL 112), and modal complex eigenvalue analysis (SOL 110) solution
sequences only. If superelements are used, its use is restricted to residual structure data recovery
operations only. MCFRACTION is not supported in SOL 200 or 400.
3. Printed output includes results for all of the data items described in the itemlist table.
4. Punched output includes results for only the data items selected by the ITEMS keyword.
Main Index
5. Modal contribution fractions are sorted by increasing order of mode number unless the SORT
keywords specifies a particular sorting order. If a sorting order is specified, the KEY keyword selects
the particular data item in the printed results tabular output listing that is sorted. When MODEDISP
is selected, the magnitude is sorted. When MODERESP is selected, the real portion of the response
is sorted.
6. The SOLUTION keyword can be used to select a subset of the solutions available. If SET m is
specified, the items in the SET list are forcing frequency values, time step values, or complex
eigenvalue mode numbers, depending upon the solution sequence used.
7. The FILTER keyword specifies a filter ratio value that is used to limit the amount of printed output
produced. It applies to the data item selected by the KEY keyword if it is specified. If no KEY keyword
is present, the default value od KEY=FRACTION will be used. The maximum value for the selected
data item across all natural modes is determined. If the ratio of the data item value to the maximum
data item value is less than fratio for any natural mode, no output for that natural mode is produced.
8. If the magnitude of the total response at a selected grid pint component is less than 1.0 × 10 –ipowr , no
modal contribution fraction output is generated for that degree of freedom. If ipowr is not in the
range of 1 to 31, the default value of 12 is used for ipowr, producing a null response threshold of
– 12
1.0 × 10 .
9. For modal transient response solution sequences, response quantities are real numbers. There are no
imaginary terms. Therefore, polar representations of the data has no meaning. Furthermore,
projections of responses onto the total response are simply the individual modal contribution to the
total response at a degree of freedom. Thus, the only items available for output are the individual
modal response magnitude (PROJECTION), the modal fraction (FRACTION), and the scaled
response magnitude (SCALED). Selection of any of the other items from the itemlist table causes
selection of the modal response magnitude (PROJECTION) item.
10. A request of MCFRACTION output for a SET that contains no degrees-of-freedom in the analysis
set, will result in the message: “SYSTEM WARNING MESSAGE 2001 (MCFRAC)”
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 427
Change State in SOL 600
MCHSTAT (Case) Change State in SOL 600
Indicates which MCHSTAT Bulk Data entry option will be used to control the state variables
(temperatures)used in this subcase for a thermal stress simulation in SOL 600.
Format:
MCHSTAT=N
Example:
MCHSTAT=10
Describer Meaning
N ID of a matching Bulk Data MSCHSTAT entry specifying temperatures or other
state variable values to be used from a previous analysis for this subcase.
Remark:
1. This entry may only be used in SOL 600.
Main Index
Modal Effective Mass Output Request
MEFFMASS (Case) Modal Effective Mass Output Request
Requests the output of the modal effective mass, participation factors, and modal effective mass fractions in
normal modes analysis.
Format:
SUMMARY, PARTFAC,  
MEFFMASS PRINT PUNCH , GRID = gid, =  YES 
MEFFM, MEFFW,
NOPRINT NOPUNCH  NO 
FRACSUM, ALL
Examples:
MEFFMASS
MEFFMASS(GRID=12, SUMMARY, PARTFAC)
Describer Meaning
PRINT Write output to the print file (Default).
NOPUNCH Do not write output to the punch file (Default).
gid Reference a grid point for the calculation of the rigid body mass matrix. The
default is the origin of the basic coordinate system.
SUMMARY Requests calculation of the total effective mass fraction, modal effective mass
matrix, and the rigid body mass matrix (Default).
PARTFAC Requests calculation of modal participation factors.
MEFFM Requests calculation of the modal effective mass in units of mass.
MEFFW Requests calculation of the modal effective mass in units of weight.
FRACSUM Requests calculation of the modal effective mass fraction.
Remarks:
1. The SUMMARY describer produces three outputs:
a. Modal effective mass matrix [ ε T ] [ m ] [ ε ]
where:
ε = Modal participation factors: [ m 1 ] [ φ T ] [ M aa ] [ D ar ] .

m = Generalized mass matrix.
φ = Eigenvectors.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 429
Modal Effective Mass Output Request
M aa = Mass marix reduced to the a-set (g-set for superelements).

D ar = Rigid body transformation matrix with respect to the a-set.
b. A-set rigid body mass matrix: [ D Ta r ] [ M a a ] [ D ar ] . For superelement this is computed at the g-set
c. Total effective mass Fraction: i.e., diagonal elements of the modal effective mass matrix divided
by the rigid body mass matrix.
2. The PARTFAC describer outputs the modal participation factors table ε .
3. The MEFFM describer outputs the modal effective mass table ε 2 , the term-wise square of the modal
participation factors table.
4. The MEFFW describer outputs the modal effective weight table; i.e., the modal effective mass divided
by PARAM, WTMASS.
5. The FRACSUM describer outputs the modal effective mass fraction table; i.e., the generalized mass
matrix (diagonal term) multiplied by the modal effective mass divided by the rigid body mass matrix
(diagonal term).
6. For superelements, the MEFFMASS Case Control command uses the residual structure eigenvalues
and eigenvectors, by default. If, however, PARAM, FIXEDB, -1 is specified, then the MEFFMASS
Case Control command uses the component mode eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
Main Index
Real Eigenvalue Extraction Method Selection
METHOD (Case) Real Eigenvalue Extraction Method Selection
Selects the real eigenvalue extraction parameters.
Format:
BOTH
METHOD STRUCTURE = n
FLUID
Examples:
METHOD=33
METHOD(FLUID)=34
Describer Meaning
BOTH The referenced EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entry will be applied to both the
structure and the fluid portion of the model (Default).
STRUCTURE The referenced EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entry is applied to the structural or fluid
or FLUID portion of the model.
n Set identification number of an EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entry for normal modes
or modal formulation, or an EIGB or EIGRL entry for buckling (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. An eigenvalue extraction method must be selected when extracting real eigenvalues.
2. If the set identification number selected is present on both EIGRL and EIGR and/or EIGB entries,
the EIGRL entry will be used.
3. METHOD(FLUID) and METHOD(STRUCTURE) permits a different request of EIGR or
EIGRL for the fluid portion of the model in coupled fluid-structural analysis. See Additional Topics
(p. 511) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
• If METHOD(STRUCTURE) or METHOD(FLUID) is also specified, then they will override
the METHOD(BOTH) selection.
• The METHOD(FLUID) and METHOD(STRUCTURE) may be specified simultaneously in
the same subcase for the residual structure only. Do not specify METHOD(FLUID) in a
superelement subcase even if the superelement contains fluid elements.
• The auto-omit feature (see Real Eigenvalue Analysis in SubDMAPs SEMR3 and MODERS (p. 374) in the
MSC Nastran Reference Manual) is not recommended. Therefore, only those methods of
eigenvalue extraction that can process a singular mass matrix should be used; e.g., the EIGRL
entry, or MGIV and MHOU on the EIGR entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 431
Fluid Boundary Element Selection
MFLUID (Case) Fluid Boundary Element Selection
Selects the MFLUID Bulk Data entries to be used to specify the fluid-structure interface.
Format:
MFLUID = n
Example:
MFLUID = 919
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of one or more MFLUID Bulk Data entries (Integer > 0).
Remark:
1. For additional discussion, see Coupled Fluid-Structure Analysis (p. 391) in the Dynamic Analysis User’s
Guide.
2. Use parameter PARAM,VMOPT controls how the virtual mass is processed.
Main Index
Master Frequency Set Selection Frequency Response
MFREQUENCY (Case) Master Frequency Set Selection Frequency Response
Selects the set of forcing frequencies to be used in frequency analysis as master frequencies for K, B, and K4
matrix generation at each master frequency, in frequency dependent analysis.
Format:
AUTO
Linear  
MFREQUENCY  ,[ TOL = 0.1 ] =  NOAUTO
 Log10 
 n 
Example:
MFREQ (TOL=.15)  Nastran will generate a master frequency list with TOL=.15
Describer Meaning
Linear Linear interpolation will be used between master frequencies to compute K, B, and
K4 matrices found on selected Case Control FREQ entry. (Character, Default)
Log10 Log interpolation will be used between master frequencies to compute K, B, and K4
matrices found on selected FREQ entry. (Character)
TOL For the default option AUTO, for frequency dependent TABLEDi entries associated
with the presence of any MAT1F, MAT2F, MAT8F, MAT9F entries or the
combined presence of any MAT1F, MAT2F, MAT8F, MAT9F entries and any
PBUSHT, PELAST, PDAMPT entries a master frequency will be selected whenever
there is a TOL jump in any table value. A TOL=0.0 is the same as NOAUTO. (Real
≥0.0)
AUTO For frequency dependent analysis associated with the presence of any MAT1F,
MAT2F, MAT8F, MAT9F entries or the combined presence of any MAT1F,
MAT2F, MAT8F, MAT9F entries and any PBUSHT, PELAST, PDAMPT entries,
Nastran will automatically, depending on associated frequency dependent
TABLEDi entries and the required Case Control FREQ=m entry, generate a series
of master frequencies. (Character, Default).
If the user has supplied a Case Control MFREQ entry pointing to a FREQ, FREQ1,
or FREQ2 bulk data entry, Nastran will use the user supplied entry and its associated
frequency list.
NOAUTO If the user has not supplied a MFREQ Case Control entry and the analysis meets the
requirements of AUTO above, then NOAUTO will prevent the generation of
master frequencies. In this case, the required Case Control FREQ will be used for all
frequencies. And all frequencies are considered master frequencies. (Character)
n Set identification number of FREQ, FREQ1, and FREQ2 Bulk Data entries.
(Integer > 0)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 433
Remark:
1. Both direct frequency and modal frequency allow, through MAT1F, MAT2F, MAT8F, MAT9F,
and PBUSHT, PELAST, PDAMPT entries frequency dependent analysis. The presence of any active
MAT1F, MAT2F, MAT8F, or MAT9F entry or the combined presence of any MAT1F, MAT2F,
MAT8F, MAT9F entries and any PBUSHT, PELAST, PDAMPT entries a master frequency will
initiate the master frequency feature in frequency analysis.
2. MFREQ should be above or in the first subcase.
3. The K, B, and K4 matrices, at master frequencies, are formed in the standard way, using material and
property values at the associated current master frequency.
4. For frequencies selected between master frequencies, interpolation of the K, B, and, K4 matrices are
performed. These interpolated frequencies are selected using the required Case Control FREQ=m
entry.
5. Interpolation between master frequencies Klm and K2mi is Kij = (d2 Klmij + d1 K2mij)/(d1 + d2) where.
For Linear:
d1 = (f-f1); d2 = (f2 – f)
For Log10:
d1 = (log10(f) – log10(f1)); d2 = (log10(f2) – log10(f))
6. For master frequencies there is full displacement, velocity, acceleration type data recovery as well as
full element force and stress type data recovery.
7. For interpolated frequencies, there is only (a-set) or modal (h-set) displacement, velocity, acceleration
type data recovery. Because, the solution of interpolated frequencies is based on interpolated K, B,
and K4, there is no element data recovery at interpolated frequencies.
8. For modal frequency analysis, associated with master frequencies, residual vector methods for viscous
and structural damping have been greatly enhanced and orthogonalization techniques are employed
which require the removal of free – free modes. For this reason the structure must be statically
constrained with the use of SUPORT entries. Case Control selectable SUPORT1 entries may also be
used.
9. For preloading (STATSUB), with the presence of any MAT1F, MAT2F, MAT8F, MAT9F entries
or the combined presence of any MAT1F, MAT2F, MAT8F, MAT9F entries and any PBUSHT,
PELAST, PDAMPT entries, a fatal message will be issued.
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 22711 (MTMD56)
FREQUENCY case control command missing for frequency response analysis.
STATSUB static loading is not currently supported for frequency dependent material/property.
10. PARAM, NMNLFRQ, REAL (Default=0.0) allows users to select material or property values for
frequency dependent materials or properties at a desired frequency other than the “nominal” values
specified on the MATi or PBUSH, PCOMP, PCOMPG, PDAMP, or PELAS entries. These values
are used in determining the eigenvalue solution used in the modal frequency analysis.
Main Index
11. If a user supplies a FREQ, FREQ1, or FREQ2 entry with a 0.0 value of forcing frequency the
following message will be issued:
*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 22714 (SUBDMAP MFREQRS)
Forcing frequency value of 0.0 detected, nominal (initial) material properties used.
The rational for this selection is that 0.0 Hz is a static solution and SOL 101 would use material
nominal.
12. Some examples of interaction between MFREQ=AUTO and an always required FREQ=m and
interpolated values are as follows:
If frequency dependent TABLEDi entries associated with the presence of any MAT1F, MAT2F,
MAT8F, MAT9F entries or the combined presence of any MAT1F, MAT2F, MAT8F, MAT9F
entries and any PBUSHT, PELAST, PDAMPT entries are detected, and the user has not specified
any MFREQ Case Control entries, then Nastran will automatically scan the TABLEDi entries.
Nastran does this by using the required FREQ=m entry and for any TABLEDi where there is a TOL
jump between two consecutive FREQ=m frequencies determining a “Master frequency”.
SOL111
CEND
FREQ = 10  Required
...
BEGIN BULK
FREQ1, 10, 10.0, 5.0, 78
...
MAT1, 2, 35.46, , .49, 1.1-9
MAT1F, 2, 101, 103, 102  All 3 Tables for E, G, NU
required.
...
TABLED1, 101,
,.01, 7.3941, 50., 18.017, 100., 24.386, 200., 35.46,
,300., 44.45, 400., 51.264, 500., 56.321, ENDT
TABLED1, 102
,.01, 0.49, 1000., 0.49, ENDT
TABLED1, 103
,.01, 2.481, 50., 6.076, 100., 8.1832, 200., 11.899
,300., 14.916, 400., 17.203, 500., 18.90, ENDT
TABLED1, 200  Based on say an active PBUSHT entry.
,.01, 0.4, 50., 0.65, 100., 0.78,200., 0.92
,300., 0.99, 400., 1.03, 500., 1.07, endt
Internally Nastran Generates in Case Control:

MFREQ=11
Internally Nastran Generates in “Bulk Data”:
FREQ, 11, 10., 15., 20., 30., 40., 50., 65.,
,85., 105., 130., 160., 190., 230., 275., 330.,
,400.
Where for the above, Nastran has based on the user supplied FREQ=10 Case Control entry, scanned
all the active user supplied TABLEDi entries, and whenever there is a jump in table value of 10%
(default TOL), it creates an entry into the master frequency list MFREQ=11.
MFREQ will issue the message:
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 435
***AUTOMATIC MASTER FREQUENCY LIST HAS BEEN SELECTED FOR

SUBCASE ID 1:
FREQ, 11, 10., 15., 20., 30., 40., 50., 65.,
,85., 105., 130., 160., 190., 230., 275., 330.,
,400.
Main Index
Modal Kinetic Energy Request
MODALKE (Case) Modal Kinetic Energy Request
Requests a modal kinetic energy calculation and specifies the output form.
Format:
 MODE 
SORT1 PRINT REAL or IMAG  
MODALKE ( , PUNCH ESORT =  ASCEND 
SORT2 NOPRINT PHASE  
 DESCENT 
   ALL 
 TIME   ALL   AVERAGE   
[ THRESH = e ]  =    AMPLITUDE  ) =  n 
 FREQ   r     
 PEAK   NONE 
Examples:
MODALKE= ALL
SET 200= 1, 3, 4, 5, 7
MODALKE(ESORT=DESCEND,THRESH=.001)= 200
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of modes for each frequency or time
step.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of frequencies or time steps for each
mode.
PRINT Write the results to the .f06 file (Default).
NOPRINT Do not write the results to the .f06 file.
PUNCH Write the results to the punch (.f07) file.
ESORT Present the modal energies sorted by mode number, ascending energy value or
descending energy value (Default is MODE)
THRESH Write out only those energies greater than e (Default = 0.001).
MODES Compute energies for all modes or the set of mode numbers defined in SET n
(Default = ALL).
TIME or FREQ Compute energies at all time steps, or frequencies, or the set of frequencies defined
by SET r (Default = ALL).
AVERAGE Requests average energy in frequency response analysis only (Default).
ALL, n, NONE Compute modal energies for (1) all modes, (2) the modes defined on SET n, or (3)
no modes.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 437
Remarks:
1. Modal kinetic energy calculations will be limited to SOLs 112 (modal transient response) and 111
(modal frequency response).
2. The MODES describer selects from the set of the modes selected by the combination of the Case
Control command MODESELECT, and user parameters PARAM,LMODES; PARAM,LFREQ;
PARAM,HFREQ. If a mode is selected outside this set, a User Warning Message is issued.
3. The TIME (or FREQ) describer selects from the set of the time steps (or forcing frequencies) selected
by the OTIME (or OFREQ) Case Control command. If a time or frequency is selected outside this
set, a User Warning Message is issued.
4. For frequency response analysis, the energy may be output as real or complex values. When REAL is
specified, the output will be one of AVERAGE, AMPLITUDE or PEAK energy. (See Remark 4. of
the EKE Case Control Command for a definition of these terms.) When IMAG or PHASE is
specified, the output will be complex energy values.
Output Format:
The output formats for complex energy in frequency response analysis follow.
For SORT1 option:
FREQUENCY = 2.100000E+01
M O D A L K I N E T I C E N E R G Y
(REAL/IMAGINARY)
MODE NUMBER ACTUAL NORMALIZED FRACTIONAL

1 1.171343E-04 1.409326E-02 1.065749E-02
0.0 0.0 0.0
2 2.049217E-05 2.465558E-03 1.864483E-03
0.0 0.0 0.0
3 5.175167E-04 6.226612E-02 4.708635E-02
0.0 0.0 0.0
4 1.732168E-05 2.084095E-03 1.576016E-03
0.0 0.0 0.0
This format repeats for each frequency.
For SORT2 option:
MODE NUMBER = 1
(MAGNITUDE/PHASE)
FREQUENCY ACTUAL NORMALIZED FRACTIONAL

1.000000E+00 8.147644E-04 1.000000E+00 9.924866E-01
0.0 0.0 0.0
2.000000E+00 4.066132E-03 1.000000E+00 9.936857E-01
0.0 0.0 0.0
3.000000E+00 1.411670E-02 1.000000E+00 9.955440E-01
0.0 0.0 0.0
This format repeats for each mode number.

The output formats for AVERAGE energy in frequency response analysis follow. The particular type
(AVERAGE, AMPLITUDE or PEAK) is identified in the output title.
Main Index
For SORT1 option:
M O D A L K I N E T I C E N E R G Y ( A V E R A G E )

1 5.856715E-05 1.409326E-02 1.065749E-02
2 1.024608E-05 2.465558E-03 1.864483E-03
3 2.587583E-04 6.226612E-02 4.708635E-02
4 8.660840E-06 2.084095E-03 1.576016E-03
For SORT2 option:
MODE NUMBER = 1
M O D A L K I N E T I C E N E R G Y ( A V E R A G E )

1.000000E+00 4.073822E-04 1.000000E+00 9.924866E-01
2.000000E+00 2.033066E-03 1.000000E+00 9.936857E-01
3.000000E+00 7.058351E-03 1.000000E+00 9.955440E-01
4.000000E+00 2.872413E-02 1.000000E+00 9.977741E-01

The output formats for transient response analysis follow.
For SORT1 option:
TIME STEP = 1.000000E+00


1 1.483182E-02 3.610759E-01 2.316040E-01
2 4.107675E-02 1.000000E+00 6.414274E-01
3 2.165481E-04 5.271792E-03 3.381472E-03
4 1.387959E-05 3.378941E-04 2.167345E-04
This format repeats for each time step.
For SORT2 option:
MODE NUMBER = 2
TIME STEP ACTUAL NORMALIZED FRACTIONAL

0.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0
9.999999E-02 2.512383E-03 1.000000E+00 9.420497E-01
2.000000E-01 8.475699E-03 1.000000E+00 9.566881E-01
3.000000E-01 1.415435E-02 1.000000E+00 9.568216E-01
Processing:
Modal kinetic energy is calculated using the following relations:
For transient analysis,
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 439
1 T
[ Actual KE ] = --- { u· h } [ M hh ] { u· h }
2
For frequency response analysis,

1 T 2
[ Actual KE ] = --- { u h } [ diag ( ω i ) ] [ M hh ] { u h }
2
where ω i is the excitation frequency and output is complex. See Remark 4 of the EKE (Case)Case Control
command for energy calculation relations when output is real.
[Normalized Kinetic Energy] = norm[Actual Kinetic Energy], normalized per column.

[Fractional Kinetic Energy] = [Normalized Kinetic Energy]/[diagonal [ { 1.0 } T [Normalized
Kinetic Energy]]], term-by-term division.
Main Index
Modal Strain Energy Request
MODALSE (Case) Modal Strain Energy Request
Requests modal strain energy calculation and specifies the output form.
Format:
 MODE 
SORT1 PRINT REAL or IMAG  
MODALSE ( , PUNCH ESORT =  ASCEND 
SORT2 NOPRINT PHASE  
 DESCENT 
   ALL 
 TIME   ALL   AVERAGE   
[ THRESH = e ]  =   AMPLITUDE  ) =  n 
 FREQ   r     
 PEAK   NONE 
Examples:
MODALSE= ALL
SET 100= 1, 3, 4, 5, 7
MODALSE(ESORT=ASCEND,THRESH=.0001)= 100
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of modes for each frequency or time
step.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of frequencies or time steps for each
mode.
PRINT Write the results to the .f06 file (Default).
NOPRINT Do not write the results to the .f06 file.
PUNCH Write the results to the punch (.f07) file.
ESORT Present the modal energies sorted by mode number, ascending energy value or
descending energy value (Default is MODE).
THRESH Write out only those energies greater than e (Default = 0.001).
MODES Compute energies for all modes or the set of mode numbers defined in SET n
(Default = ALL).
TIME or FREQ Compute energies at all time steps or frequencies or the set of frequencies defined
by SET r (Default = ALL).
AVERAGE Requests average energy in frequency response analysis only (Default).
ALL, n, NONE Compute modal energies for all modes, the modes defined on SET n, or (3) no
modes.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 441
Remarks:
1. Modal strain energy calculations will be limited to SOLs 112 (modal transient response) and 111
(modal frequency response).
2. The MODES describer selects from the set of the modes prescribed by the combination of Case
Control command MODESELECT, and user parameters PARAM,LMODES; PARAM,LFREQ;
and PARAM,HFREQ. If a mode is selected outside this set, a User Warning Message is issued.
3. The TIME (or FREQ) describer selects from the set of the time steps (or forcing frequencies)
prescribed by the OTIME (or OFREQ) Case Control command. If a time or frequency is selected
outside this set, a User Warning Message is issued.
4. For frequency response analysis, the energy may be output as real or complex values. When REAL is
specified, the output will be one of AVERAGE, AMPLITUDE or PEAK energy. (See Remark 4 of
the ESE Case Control Command for a definition of these terms.) When IMAG or PHASE is
specified, the output will be complex energy values.
Output Format:
For SORT1 option:
M O D A L S T R A I N E N E R G Y
(REAL/IMAGINARY)

1 1.171343E-04 1.409326E-02 1.065749E-02
0.0 0.0 0.0
2 2.049217E-05 2.465558E-03 1.864483E-03
0.0 0.0 0.0
3 5.175167E-04 6.226612E-02 4.708635E-02
0.0 0.0 0.0
4 1.732168E-05 2.084095E-03 1.576016E-03
0.0 0.0 0.0
For SORT2 option:
MODE NUMBER = 1
(MAGNITUDE/PHASE)

1.000000E+00 8.147644E-04 1.000000E+00 9.924866E-01
0.0 0.0 0.0
2.000000E+00 4.066132E-03 1.000000E+00 9.936857E-01
0.0 0.0 0.0
3.000000E+00 1.411670E-02 1.000000E+00 9.955440E-01
0.0 0.0 0.0

The output formats for AVERAGE energy in frequency response analysis follow. The particular type
(AVERAGE, AMPLITUDE or PEAK) is identified in the output title.
Main Index
For SORT1 option:
M O D A L S T R A I N E N E R G Y ( A V E R A G E )

1 5.856715E-05 1.409326E-02 1.065749E-02
2 1.024608E-05 2.465558E-03 1.864483E-03
3 2.587583E-04 6.226612E-02 4.708635E-02
4 8.660840E-06 2.084095E-03 1.576016E-03
For SORT2 option:
MODE NUMBER = 1
M O D A L S T R A I N E N E R G Y ( A V E R A G E )

1.000000E+00 4.073822E-04 1.000000E+00 9.924866E-01
2.000000E+00 2.033066E-03 1.000000E+00 9.936857E-01
3.000000E+00 7.058351E-03 1.000000E+00 9.955440E-01
4.000000E+00 2.872413E-02 1.000000E+00 9.977741E-01

The output formats for transient response analysis follow.
For SORT1 option:
TIME STEP = 1.000000E+00


1 1.483182E-02 3.610759E-01 2.316040E-01
2 4.107675E-02 1.000000E+00 6.414274E-01
3 2.165481E-04 5.271792E-03 3.381472E-03
4 1.387959E-05 3.378941E-04 2.167345E-04
This format repeats for each time step.
For SORT2 option:
MODE NUMBER = 2
TIME STEP ACTUAL NORMALIZED FRACTIONAL

0.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0
9.999999E-02 2.512383E-03 1.000000E+00 9.420497E-01
2.000000E-01 8.475699E-03 1.000000E+00 9.566881E-01
3.000000E-01 1.415435E-02 1.000000E+00 9.568216E-01
Processing:
Modal strain energy is calculated using the following relations:
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 443
1 T
[ Actual SE ] = --- { u h } [ M hh ] { u h }
2
For frequency response analysis real output, see Remark 4 of the ESE (Case)Case Control command for energy
calculation relations.
[Normalized Strain Energy] = norm[Actual Strain Energy], normalized per column.

[Fractional Strain Energy] = [Normalized Strain Energy]/[diagonal [ { 1.0 } T [Normalized
Strain Energy]]], term-by-term division.
Main Index
Subcase Repeater
MODES (Case) Subcase Repeater
Repeats a subcase.
Format:
MODES=n
Example:
MODES=3
Describer Meaning
n Number of times the subcase is to be repeated (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. This Case Control command can be illustrated by an example. Suppose stress output is desired for
the first five modes only, and displacements for the next two modes, and forces for the remaining
modes. The following example would accomplish this:
SUBCASE 1 $ FOR MODES 1 THRU 5
MODES = 5
STRESS = ALL
SUBCASE 6 $ FOR MODES 6 AND 7
DISPLACEMENTS =
MODES = 2
SUBCASE 8 $ FOR MODE 8 AND REMAINING MODES
FORCE = ALL
2. This command causes the results for each mode to be considered as a separate, successively numbered
subcase, beginning with the subcase number containing the MODES command. In the preceding
example, this means that subcases 1, 2, 3, etc. are assigned to modes 1, 2, 3, etc., respectively.
3. If this command is not used, eigenvalue results are considered to be a part of a single subcase.
Therefore, any output requests for the single subcase will apply for all eigenvalues.
4. All eigenvectors with mode numbers greater than the number of subcases defined in the Case Control
Section are printed with the descriptors of the last subcase. For example, to suppress all printout for
modes beyond the first three, the following Case Control commands could be used:
SUBCASE 1
MODES = 3
DISPLACEMENTS = ALL
SUBCASE 4
DISPLACEMENTS = NONE
BEGIN BULK
5. This command may be of no use in non-eigenvalue analysis and may cause data recovery processing
to be repeated.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 445
Computed Mode Selection
MODESELECT (Case) Computed Mode Selection
Selects a subset of the computed modes for inclusion or exclusion in modal dynamic analysis.
Format:
Mode selection based on arbitrary mode numbers:
STRUCTURE 
MODESELECT  = n
 FLUID 
Alternate Format 1:
Mode selection based on number of lowest modes:
STRUCTURE 
MODESELECT  LMODES = lm
 FLUID 
Alternate Format 2:
Mode selection based on range of mode numbers:
STRUCTURE
MODESELECT  [ LMODENM = lom ] [ HMODENM = him ]
 FLUID 
Alternate Format 3:
Mode selection based on frequency range:
STRUCTURE
MODESELECT  [ LFREQ = lof ] [ HFREQ = hif ] ( [ UNCONSET ] = m )
 FLUID 
Alternate Format 4:
Mode selection based on modal effective mass fraction (MEFFMFRA) criteria:
STRUCTURE
MODESELECT  [ T1FR [ = t1fr ] ] [ T2FR [ = t2fr ] ] [ T3FR [ = t3fr ] ]
 FLUID
[ R1FR [ = r1fr ] ] [ R2FR [ = r2fr ] ] [ R3FR [ = r3fr ] ]
SUM
[ ALLFR [ = allfr ] ] [ UNCONSET = m ] ANYMIN
ALLMIN
See Remark 14. for examples illustrating the use of the preceding formats.
Describer Meaning
STRUCTURE References computed modes of the structure (Default).
FLUID References computed modes of the fluid.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
n>0 Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. ONLY those modes
whose mode numbers are in SET n will be included in the analysis. If SET n is not
defined, then ONLY mode n will be included in the analysis (Integer).
n<0 |n| refers to the set identification of a previously appearing SET command. The
modes whose mode numbers are in SET |n| will be EXCLUDED from the analysis.
If SET |n| is not defined, then mode |n| will be EXCLUDED from the analysis
(Integer).
lm Number of lowest modes that are to included. (Integer > 0).
lom Lower limit of the mode number range for selecting the modes. See Remark 5.
(Integer > 0).
him Upper limit of the mode number range for selecting the modes. See Remark 5.
(Integer > lom > 0).
lof Lower limit of the frequency range for selecting the modes. See Remark 6. (Real >
0.0).
hif Upper limit of the frequency range for selecting the modes. See Remark 6. (Real > lof
> 0.0).
UNCONSET Specifies a single mode or a set of modes for unconditional inclusion or exclusion,
regardless of the selection criterion, and regardless of the inclusion or exclusion of
other modes.
m>0 Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Modes whose mode
numbers are in SET m will be included in the analysis, regardless of the selection
criterion, and regardless of the inclusion or exclusion of other modes. If SET m is not
defined, then mode m will be included in the analysis, regardless of the selection
criterion, and regardless of the inclusion or exclusion of other modes (Integer).
m<0 |m| refers to the set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Modes
whose mode numbers are in SET |m| will be excluded from the analysis, regardless of
the selection criterion and regardless of the inclusion or exclusion of other modes. If
SET |m| is not defined, then mode m will be excluded from the analysis, regardless of
the selection criterion and regardless of the inclusion or exclusion of other modes
(Integer).
TiFR / RiFR Flags explicitly listing components whose modal effective mass fraction
(MEFFMFRA) values are to be considered for mode selection.
tifr / rifr Threshold values for the listed TiFR / RiFR components. See Remark 8. (0.0 < Real
< 1.0).
ALLFR Flag indicating that the MEFFMFRA values of components not explicitly listed by
the TiFR / RiFR flags are also to be considered for mode selection.
allfr Threshold value for components not explicitly listed by the TiFR / RiFR flags. See
Remark 8. (0.0 < Real < 1.0).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 447
Describer Meaning
SUM For each specified component, the modes are selected as follows:
The modes are first sorted in descending order of the corresponding MEFFMFRA
values. Then, starting from the first mode in this sorted list, the modes are selected
until the sum of corresponding MEFFMFRA values equals or just exceeds the
threshold value for that component (Default).
ANYMIN Any mode whose MEFFMFRA value for any specified component equals or exceeds
the threshold value for that component will be selected.
ALLMIN Any mode whose MEFFMFRA values for all of the specified components equal or
exceed the corresponding threshold values for those components will be selected.
Remarks:
1. This command is meaningful only in modal dynamic analysis (SOLs 110, 111, 112, 145, 146, and
200). It is ignored in all other analyses.
2. Only one MODESELECT command is allowed for the structure and only one MODESELECT
command is allowed for the fluid and these should be specified above the subcase level.
3. The various formats of this command may not be combined.
4. The computed modes used for mode selection include the augmented modes (if any) resulting from
residual vector calculations.
5. If LMODENM is specified without HMODENM, a default value of 10000000 (ten million) is
assumed for HMODENM. If HMODENM is specified without LMODENM, a default value of 1
is assumed for LMODENM.
6. If LFREQ is specified without HFREQ, a default value of 1.0E+30 is assumed for HFREQ. If
HFREQ is specified without LFREQ, a default value of 0.0 is assumed for LFREQ.
7. If the format involving the MEFFMFRA criteria is employed, it is not necessary to specify a
MEFFMASS Case Control command or, even if such a command is specified, to explicitly request
the calculation of the modal effective mass fractions. In the absence of such a command or request,
the program will automatically perform the necessary calculations internally to ensure that the
required modal effective mass fractions are computed.
8. If the T1FR / R1FR / ALLFR keywords are specified without the corresponding tifr / r1fr / allfr
threshold values, then a default value of 0.95 (that is, 95%) is assumed for these threshold values. If
the selection criterion is SUM, and a default value of 0.05 (that is, 5%) is assumed if the selection
criterion is ANYMIN or ALLMIN.
9. The modal effective mass for a given mode is a measure of how much mass is associated with that
mode, and indicates the sensitivity of that mode to base excitation. Modal effective mass is
meaningful only for fixed base modes. If a structure is not restrained, all the modal effective mass will
be associated with its rigid body modes.
Main Index
10. When the MODESELECT Case Control command is used in conjunction with the parameters
LMODES/LMODESFL, LFREQ/LFREQFL, and HFREQ/HFREQFL, the hierarchy of their
usage is as follows:
a. If there is a MODESELECT Case Control command, it takes precedence over the parameters
LMODES/LMODESFL, LFREQ/LFREQFL, and HFREQ/HFREQFL. (It does not matter
whether these parameters are defined directly via PARAM entries, or indirectly using the
FLSFSEL Case Control command.)
b. If there is no MODESELECT Case Control command, then parameter LMODES/LMODESFL
takes precedence over parameters LFREQ/LFREQFL and HFREQ/HFREQFL. In this case, the
number of lowest modes specified by LMODES/LMODESFL will be included in the modal
dynamic analysis.
c. If there is no MODESELECT Case Control command and no LMODES/LMODESFL
parameter, then parameters LFREQ/LFREQFL and HFREQ/HFREQFL are honored. In this
case, all of the computed modes whose frequencies are in the range specified by
LFREQ/LFREQFL and HFREQ/HFREQFL will be included in the modal dynamic analysis.
d. If there is no MODESELECT Case Control command and no LMODES/LMODESFL,
LFREQ/LFREQFL, or HFREQ/HFREQFL parameter, then all of the computed modes will be
included in the modal dynamic analysis.
11. If a subset of the computed modes is selected for subsequent use in the modal dynamic analysis, the
user is informed of this by a User Information Message. Also, a new eigenvalue table indicating the
actual modes selected for the analysis is output. If the user has employed a MODESELECT
command involving the MEFFMFRA criteria, the modal effective mass fractions for the selected
modes are also output.
12. If the mode selection criterion results in no modes being selected for subsequent use in the modal
dynamic analysis, the program terminates the job with a fatal message indicating that no modal
formulation is possible.
13. If the use of the MODESELECT command results in the selection of all of the computed modes for
subsequent use, the user is informed of this by a User Information Message.
14. The following examples illustrate the use of the various formats of the MODESELECT command
described above.
Examples Illustrating Mode Selection Based on Arbitrary Mode Numbers:
$ INCLUDE ONLY STRUCTURE MODES 7, 9 AND 12 IN THE ANALYSIS

SET 100 = 7,9,12
MODESELECT = 100
$ EXCLUDE FLUID MODES 5 AND 6 FROM THE ANALYSIS
SET 200 = 5,6
MODESELECT (FLUID)= -200
$ EXCLUDE STRUCTURE MODE 5 FROM THE ANALYSIS
MODESELECT = -5 $ (SET 5 NOT DEFINED)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 449
Examples Illustrating Mode Selection Based on Number of Lowest Modes:
$ INCLUDE THE LOWEST 10 STRUCTURE MODES IN THE ANALYSIS

MODESELECT (LMODES = 10)
$ INCLUDE THE LOWEST 5 FLUID MODES IN THE ANALYSIS
MODESELECT (FLUID LMODES = 5)
Examples Illustrating Mode Selection Based on Range of Mode Numbers:
$ INCLUDE ONLY STRUCTURE MODES 10 THRU 20 IN THE ANALYSIS

MODESELECT (LMODENM = 10 HMODENM = 20)
$ INCLUDE ALL STRUCTURE MODES HIGHER THAN THE 6th MODE
$ IN THE ANALYSIS
MODESELECT (LMODENM = 7)
$ INCLUDE THE LOWEST 10 FLUID MODES IN THE ANALYSIS
MODESELECT (FLUID HMODENM = 10)
Examples Illustrating Mode Selection Based on Frequency Range:
$ INCLUDE ALL STRUCTURE MODES WITH CYCLIC FREQUENCIES

$ IN THE RANGE OF 0.1 HZ. TO 100.0 HZ. IN THE ANALYSIS
MODESELECT (LFREQ = 0.1 HFREQ = 100.0)
$ EQUAL TO OR BELOW 50.0 HZ., BUT INCLUDE THE 10th AND 11th
$ MODES REGARDLESS OF THEIR CYCLIC FREQUENCIES
SET 1000 = 10, 11
MODESELECT (HFREQ = 50.0 UNCONSET = 1000)
$ EQUAL TO OR ABOVE 5.0 HZ., BUT EXCLUDE THE 6 MODE
$ REGARDLESS OF ITS CYCLIC FREQUENCY
MODESELECT (LFREQ = 5.0 UNCONSET = -6) $ SET 6 NOT DEFINED
Examples Illustrating Mode Selection Based on Modal Effective Mass Fraction (MEFFMFRA)
Criteria:
MODESELECT (T3FR)
The default selection criterion of SUM is assumed, and a default value of 0.95 (95%) is therefore assumed
for the threshold value for component T3.
As many modes with the highest MEFFMFRA(T3) values as possible, such that the sum of the values is equal
to or just exceeds 0.95, will be selected.
MODESELECT (T1FR = 0.90 T2FR R3FR = 0.85)
The default selection criterion of SUM is assumed, and a default value of 0.95 (95%) is therefore assumed
for the threshold value for component T2.
As many modes with the highest MEFFMFRA(T1) values as possible, such that the sum of the values is equal
to or just exceeds 0.90, will be selected.
Similarly, as many modes with the highest MEFFMFRA(T2) values as possible, such that the sum of those
values is equal to or just exceeds 0.95, will be selected.
Main Index
As many modes with the highest MEFFMFRA(R3) values as possible, such that the sum of those values is
equal to or just exceeds 0.85, will be selected.
MODESELECT (T1FR T3FR = 0.10 UNCONSET = -6 ANYMIN)
$ SET 6 NOT DEFINED
Since the selection criterion is specified as ANYMIN, a default value of 0.05 (5%) is assumed for the
threshold value for component T1.
All modes, excluding mode 6, whose:
MEFFMFRA(T1) values are equal to or greater than 0.05 OR
MEFFMFRA(T3) values are equal to or greater than 0.10
will be selected.
SET 1000 = 20, 30
MODESELECT (T2FR = 0.1 R3FR = 0.15 ALLFR UNCONSET = 1000 ALLMIN)
The ALLFR flag indicates that the T1, T3, R1, and R2 components which are not explicitly specified above
must also be considered in mode selection. Since the selection criterion is specified as ALLMIN, a default
value of 0.05 (5%) is assumed for the threshold value for these components.
All modes whose:
MEFFMFRA(T1) values equal or exceed 0.05 AND
MEFFMFRA(R1) values equal or exceed 0.05 AND
will be selected.
Modes 20 and 30 will be selected regardless of their MEFFMFRA values.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 451
Mode Tracking Request
MODTRAK (Case) Mode Tracking Request
Selects mode tracking options in design optimization (SOL 200).
Format:
MODTRAK = n
Example:
MODTRAK=100
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a MODTRAK Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remark:
1. Selection of a MODTRAK Bulk Data entry with the MODTRAK Case Control command activates
mode tracking for the current subcase. This request is limited to normal modes subcases
(ANALYSIS=MODES) in design optimization (SOL 200).
Main Index
Control for Monte-Carlo simulation
MONCARL (Case) Control for Monte-Carlo simulation
Control for Monte-Carlo simulation using the non-parametric variability method (NPVM). This Case
Control command can be used in SOL 111 only.
Format:
MONCARL([NSAMPLE=m],[SEED=k],[OFFD= r])=n
Example:
MONCARL(NSAMPLE=100)=5
Describer Meaning
NSAMPLE = m Specifies the number of random samples, m ( Integer >=0, Default = 0).
SEED = k Specifies the random number generator seed, k (Integer > 0, Default = 777).
OFFD = r Specifies the scale factor for off-diagonal entries of the random matrix, r (Real,
Default = 1.0).
n Set identification number of a MONCARL Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. Only one MONCARL command may appear in the Case Control Section and should appear above
all SUBCASE commands.
2. Keeping in mind the size and the naively parallel nature of Monte-Carlo problem typical simulation
would be run in a parallel mode. The parallel DMP simulation is restricted to Multi-Master mode in
order to get a good scalable performance. Multi-Master mode can be specified using
"RUNOPT=MULTIMST", in "DOMAINSOLVER" Executive Control statement, e.g.:
DOMAINSOLVER ACMS (PARTOPT=DOF, RUNOPT=MULTIMST)
3. Running the Monte-Carlo simulation in Nastran would result in a concatenated OP2, HDF5 and
PCH file containing the response results of each random sample of Monte-Carlo simulation. Each
random sample would appear as a unique subcase in the OP2, HDF5 and PCH file.
4. PLT Viewer (provided with Nastran) can be used to read the result of Monte-Carlo simulation to
generate meaningful response statistics. Currently the PLT Viewer can only read HDF5 and “PCH
files in SORT 1 format” (not OP2).
5. HDF5 is the recommended output method for reading into PLT Viewer. Use NASTRAN system cell
(702) HDF5=1 to request HDF5 output.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 453
Print Selection for Monitor Data
MONITOR (Case) Print Selection for Monitor Data
Specifies options in the printing of monitor data.
Format:
 ALL 
MONITOR [ REAL or IMAG, PHASE, NODSP1, NOPNT1, NOPNT2, NOPNT3 ] =  
 NONE 
Example:
MONITOR(PHASE,NOPNT1)=ALL
MONITOR(IMAG,NODSP1)=ALL
Describer Meaning
REAL or IMAG yields the same output (Default).
in degrees.
NODSP1 Do not include MONDSP1 results in the MONITOR point prints (default is to
provide these prints).
NOPNT1 Do not include MONPNT1 results in the MONITOR point prints (default is to
ALL Print all monitor point results, except for those deselected.
NONE Do not print monitor point results
Remarks:
1. The MONITOR command is required in order to obtain MONITOR results in the printed output
in SOLs 101, 103, 108, 109, 111, 112, 146 and 400 (ANALYSIS = NLSTAT or NLTRAN).
2. SOL 144 does not require the MONITOR command and is ignored.
3. The MONITOR command should be above the subcase level or in the first subcase (above the step
level for SOL 400). MONITOR commands in subcases subsequent to the first one or in any steps for
SOL 400 are ignored.
4. MONPNT1 is not applicable in SOL 103.
Main Index
Print Selection for Monitor Data
5. The MONITOR command is not required for SOL 144 except in the special case of MONPNT3
with any exclusion flags other than SMAD. Monitor points with exclusion flags require special
processing of the GRID point force data and are not recommended because of the potential excessive
cost.
6. Results for dynamic solutions (SOLs 108, 109, 111, 112, 146 and 400 with NLTRAN) will be in
SORT2 format. All other solutions will be in SORT1 format.
Output Format:
For SOLS 101, 103, and 144 - SORT1:
S T R U C T U R A L I N T E G R A T E D F R E E B O D Y M O N I T O R P O I N T L O A D S (MONPNT3)
MONITOR POINT NAME = FORCSM1 SUBCASE NO. 1
LABEL = SUMMATION OF FORCES AT GRID 9
CP = 0 X = 8.00000E+01 Y = 0.00000E+00 Z = 0.00000E+00
AXIS REST. APPLIED

---- -------------
CX 1.600000E+01
CY 1.600000E+01
CZ 1.600000E+01
CMX 0.000000E+00
CMY -3.200000E+02
CMZ 3.200000E+02
This format repeats for each monitor point and repeats for each subcase or mode.
SOLs 108, 109, 111, 112 and 146 - SORT2:
S T R U C T U R A L I N T E G R A T E D F R E E B O D Y M O N I T O R P O I N T L O A D S (MONPNT3)
MONITOR POINT NAME = FORCSM1 COMPONENT = CX SUBCASE NO. 1

LABEL = SUMMATION OF FORCES AT GRID 9
CP = 0 X = 8.000000E+01 Y = 0.000000E+00 Z = 0.000000E+00
TIME STEP RESULTANT
------------ ------------
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.000000E-02 7.692307E-01
2.000000E-02 1.301775E+00
3.000000E-02 1.137915E+00
4.000000E-02 6.557894E-01
5.000000E-02 9.679956E-01
6.000000E-02 1.354058E+00
7.000000E-02 9.230635E-01
8.000000E-02 6.696146E-01
9.000000E-02 1.178594E+00
9.999999E-02 1.275434E+00
This format repeats for each monitor point.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 455
Multipoint Constraint Set Selection
MPC (Case) Multipoint Constraint Set Selection
Selects a multipoint constraint set.
Format:
MPC = n
Example:
MPC=17
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a multipoint constraint set. This set identification
number must appear on at least one MPC or MPCADD Bulk Data entry
(Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. In cyclic symmetry analysis, this command must appear above the first subcase command.
2. Multiple boundary conditions (MPC sets) are not allowed in superelement analysis. If more than one
MPC set is specified per superelement (including the residual), then the second and subsequent sets
will be ignored.
3. In addition to select MPC/MPCADD bulk data entries, MPC=n can also be used to select a group
of rigid elements for the analysis via SET3,n bulk data entry with RBEin or RBEex in DES field of
SET3 bulk data entry.
4. SET3,n is not needed if ALL rigid elements in the model are to be utilized.
5. Rigid element set section is supported in SOL 400 if 'RIGID=LINEAR' is present in case control
deck.
Main Index
Multipoint Forces of Constraint Output Request
MPCFORCES (Case) Multipoint Forces of Constraint Output Request
Requests the form and type of multipoint force of constraint vector output.
Format:
SORT1 PRINT, PUNCH REAL or IMAG PSDF,ATOC,CRMS
MPCFORCES ( , , , ,
 ALL 
RPRINT  
, RPUNCH ,[ CID ]) =  n 
NORPRINT  
 NONE 
Examples:
MPCFORCES=5
MPCFORCES(SORT2, PUNCH, PRINT, IMAG)=ALL
MPCFORCES(PHASE)=NONE
MPCFORCES(SORT2, PRINT,IPSDF, CRMS, RPUNCH)=20
MPCFORCES(PRINT, RALL, NORPRINT)=ALL
Describer Meaning
point.
PLOT Generates, but does not print, multipoint constraint forces.
REAL or IMAGE Requests rectangular format (real and imaginary) of complex output. Use of
is in degrees.
PSDF Requests that the power spectral density function be calculated and stored in
the database for random analysis postprocessing. Request must be made above
the subcase level, and RANDOM must be selected in the Case Control Section.
ATOC Requests the autocorrelation function be calculated and stored in the database
for random analysis postprocessing. Request must be made above the subcase
level, and RANDOM must be selected in the Case Control Section.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 457
Multipoint Forces of Constraint Output Request
Describer Meaning
post-processing. Request must be made above the subcase level, and
CID Request the printing of output coordinate system ID in printed output file
(.f06) file.
ALL Multipoint forces of constraint for all points will be output. See Remarks 3.
and 6.
NONE Multipoint forces of constraint for no points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only multipoint
constraint forces for points with identification numbers that appear on this SET
Remarks:
3. In a statics problem, a request for SORT2 causes loads at all points (zero and nonzero) to be output.
4. MPCFORCES=NONE overrides an overall output request.
5. In SORT1 format, MPCFORCEs recovered at consecutively numbered scalar points are printed in
groups of six (sextets) per line of output. However, if a scalar point is not consecutively numbered,
then it will begin a new sextet on a new line of output. If a sextet can be formed and all values are
zero, the line will not be printed. If a sextet cannot be formed, then zero values may be output.
6. MPCFORCE results are output in the global coordinate system (see field CD on the GRID Bulk
Data entry).
7. MPCFORCE results due to linear elements only are available in SOL 129 with MDLPRM,
MPCF129, 1.
8. In inertia relief analysis, the MPCFORCE output includes both the effects of applied and inertial
loads.
random analysis.
10. Note that the CID keyword affects only grid point related output, such as DISPlacement, VELO,
ACCE, OLOAD, SPCForce and MPCF. In addition, the CID keyword needs to appear only once
in a grid related output request anywhere in the Case Control Section to turn on the printing
algorithm.
Main Index
Fluid Pressure Output Request
MPRES (Case) Fluid Pressure Output Request
Requests the pressure for selected wetted surface elements when virtual mass (MFLUID) is used.
Format:
 ALL 
 
MPRES ( PRINT, PUNCH , REAL or IMAG ) =  n 
PLOT PHASE  
 NONE 
Examples:
MPRES=5
MPRES(IMAG)=ALL
Describer Meaning
PRINT The printer will be the output medium. (Default)
PLOT Generates, but does not print or punch, data.
is in degrees.
ALL Fluid pressures for all elements will be output.
NONE Fluid pressures for no elements will be output.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Only fluid
pressures for elements in this set will be output (Integer >0).
Remark:
1. If PARAM,SPARSEDR,NO is specified, then PARAM,DDRMM,-1 is also required in the modal
solution sequences (SOLs 111, 112, 146, and 200).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 459
Nonlinear Harmonic Analysis Parameter Selection
NLHARM (Case) Nonlinear Harmonic Analysis Parameter Selection
Selects the parameters used for nonlinear harmonic response analysis.
Format:
NLHARM = n
Example:
NLHARM = 79
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of NLHARM Bulk Data entry. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. This entry references the NLHARM Bulk Data entry which defines the number of subharmonics and
harmonics to be used in the analysis as well as referencing the excitation frequency specification.
2. Gyroscopic terms are included if the RGYRO Case Control command and Bulk Data entry are
specified. If gyroscopic terms are desired, the user must specify the constant rooter speed (ASYNC
option) for the reference rotor.
Main Index
Nonlinear Initial Condition or Preload
NLIC (Case) Nonlinear Initial Condition or Preload
Selects a previously executed load increment as the initial conditions or preload for a nonlinear or
perturbation STEP in SOL 400.
Format:
NLIC SUBCASE i , STEP j , LOADFACT ( T = tol ) f

TIME NEAR
Example:
NLIC SUBCASE 100 STEP 10 LOADFACT 0.8
NLIC SUBCASE 100 STEP 10 LOADFACT (t=0.01) 0.66
NLIC STEP 10 TIME 12.0
NLIC TIME NEAR 7.8
Describer Meaning
SUBCASE Keyword to select the SUBCASE ID
i Specifies the identification number of a previously executed subcase. (Integer > 0;
Default is the subcase where the current NLIC is located).
STEP Keyword to select the STEP ID.
j Specifies the identification number of a previously executed STEP (Integer > 0,
Default is the last STEP).
LOADFACT Keyword to select load factor or time. Both keywords are equivalent.
TIME
f Specifies the load factor of a previously executed load increment in linear or
nonlinear static analysis (Real > 0.0, see Remark 3 for default).
T Keyword to select the tolerance.
NEAR Keyword for the nearest load factor or time to f.
tol Specified the load factor or time tolerance to f. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0E-06)
Remarks:
1. The NLIC command can only point to a load increment whose output flag is on - an available restart
point in the static analysis. If NLIC is not pointing to an available restart point, a fatal error will be
issued and the job will be terminated.
2. The NLIC can be used in nonlinear static, nonlinear transient and perturbation analysis. For
perturbation analysis, NLIC can only be pointed to the loadstep in the same subcase.
3. For nonlinear transient analysis (ANALYSIS=NLTRAN), NLIC can only appear in the first transient
analysis STEP in a SUBCASE. (Note that the first transient analysis step may not be the first step of
subcase.) Otherwise, it will be ignored and a warning message will be issued.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 461
Nonlinear Initial Condition or Preload
4. For linear perturbation analysis, NLIC must point to a previous NLSTATIC step in the same
SUBCASE.
5. If NLIC is specified without any of the keywords, or NLIC is not present in a nonlinear STEP or
perturbation STEP, the initial condition or PRELOAD is taken from the last available restart point
in the immediate previous static step.
6. In the same nonlinear transient step, NLIC cannot appear together with the IC Case Control
command. A fatal error message will be issued if NLIC and IC appear in the same step. Please note
that IC is meaningful only in the first STEP of a SUBCASE, and the step is a nonlinear transient
analysis.
7. When Keyword NEAR is used, the search for the nearest load factor or time is limited inside the
specified SUBCASE i STEP j.
8. NLIC can be used in SOL 400 only.
9. If NLIC is used with APPROACH=NLSTATIC it may cause convergence problems. If NLIC is used
across different subcases: the initial conditions, the deformation, the strains, the stresses, etc., are
carried over between Subcases. However, the load is NOT carried over. This can cause an unbalanced
load condition that may cause convergence problems.
Main Index
Nonlinear Load Output Request
NLLOAD (Case) Nonlinear Load Output Request
Requests the form and type of nonlinear load output for transient problems.
Format:
 ALL 
 
NLLOAD [ ( PRINT, PUNCH ) ] =  n 
 
 NONE 
Example:
NLLOAD=ALL
Describer Meaning
ALL Nonlinear loads for all solution points will be output.
NONE Nonlinear loads will not be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only nonlinear loads for
points with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be output
(Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. Nonlinear loads are output only in the solution (d or h) set.
2. The output is available in SORT2 format only.
3. Both PRINT and PUNCH may be used.
4. NLLOAD=NONE allows overriding an overall output request.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 463
Nonlinear Regular and Debug Output Control Parameters - SOL 400
NLOPRM (Case) Nonlinear Regular and Debug Output Control Parameters - SOL 400
Controls MSC Nastran nonlinear solution output, debug printout, debug POST and punch-out of contact
constraints of MPC and MPCY Bulk Data entries.
Format:
NLOPRM = [ OUTCTRL = { STD,SOLUTION,INTERM } ]
 NONE 
 
  N3DBAS  
   
NLDBG =   N3DMED  
 NLBASIC,NRDBG,ADVDBG,  
  N3DADV  
  N3DSUM  
  
NONE
 
 LTIME   NONE 
   
DBGPOST =  LSTEP  , MPCPCH =  BEGN,OTIME,STEP 
   
 LSUBC   YBEGN,YOTIME,YSTEP 
 ALL 
 
DELIMIT=  No 
 Yes 
 No 
 
GRIDINF=  MAXGRID 
 
 GID 
Example(s):
NLOPRM OUTCTRL=STD,SOLUTION DBGPOST=LTIME
NLOPRM OUTCTRL=(SOLUTION,INTERM), MPCPCH=(OTIME,STEP)
Describer Meaning
OUTCTRL Selects one or more following nonlinear solution output options
STD Standard Nastran output (Default)
SOLUTION Solution set output which does not include solutions for superelements
INTERM Intermediate nonlinear solution output in OP2 and HDF5 files, at each
solution output interval, set by the user through nonlinear solution
controls, such as NLPARM.
NLDBG Keyword selecting one or more debug printout options
NONE No debug print output (Default)
NLBASIC Basic nonlinear information printout
NRDBG Newton-Raphson iteration information printout
Main Index
Describer Meaning
ADVDBG Advance nonlinear debug printout
N3DBASE For 3D contact, it requests to print out the error tolerance of each
contact body in the F06 file.
N3DMED For 3D contact, it requests to print out the summary table of all contact
parameters, in addition to the printout by N3DBAS, in the .f06 file.
N3DADV For 3D contact, it requests to print out the body contact information
in long form, in addition to the printouts by both N3DBAS and
N3DMED, in the F06 file.
N3DSUM For 3D Contact, it simplifies body contact information in N3DADV.
DBGPOST Selects one of the following debug POST options
NONE No output (Default)
LTIME To output all iterations in the last load or time increment
LSTEP To output all iterations in the last STEP
LSUBC To output all iterations in the last SUBCASE
ALL To output all iterations
MPCPCH Selects one or more following options to punch out contact constraint equations in terms
of MPC or MPCY Bulk Data entries in Nastran PCH file. This is not available for
segment-to-segment contact.
NONE No MPC or MPCY punch output (Default)
BEGN MPC punch in the beginning of the very first iteration
OTIME MPC punch at every user requested output step
STEP MPC punch at the end of each load case, such as SUBSTEP, STEP and
SUBCASE
YBEGN MPCY punch in the beginning of the very first iteration
YOTIME MPCY punch at every user requested output step
YSTEP MPCY punch at the end of each load case, such as SUBSTEP, STEP
and SUBCASE)
DELIMIT Select output of delimiter for subcases, steps, increments, and iterations.
No No output (default)
Yes Select output
GRIDINF Select output of grid point information (1) displacements of the grid; (2) EID: element
ID connected to this grid; (3) PID: property ID of relevant elements; (4) ID of contact
body which the grid belongs to; and, (5) if the grid locates on the surface of contact body.
No No output (default)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 465
Describer Meaning
MAXGRID Output information of grid which has maximum displacement
component
GID Output information of grid which user specifies
Remarks:
1. This Case Control command is used to better control nonlinear solution output during solution
process, to provide MSC users a direct access to nonlinear solutions even the job is still running, to
give the users some tools to debug the nonlinear solution process and gain some insight of nonlinear
solution procedure, and to allow users to print out MPC and MPCY equations from contact
constraints before and during solution process.
2. OUTCTRL=SOLUTION is designed to debug nonlinear analysis which may fail during the analysis.
For other selections, some results such as displacement, SPF force, and so on, are written into F06 file
only after the analysis is finished completely. This is helpful for user to understand the nonlinear
analysis when job is terminated abnormally. With OUTCTRL=SOLUTION, only part of the results
will be output. Availability of output request for debugging purposes are summarized at the following
table.
Output Request OP2 F06

BOUTPUT NO YES
DISPLACEMENT YES YES
GPFORCE NO NO
MPCFORCES YES YES
NLSTRESS NO YES
OLOAD YES YES
SPCFORCES YES YES
STRESS NO NO
STRAIN NO NO
Please note that OP2 file only includes the results at the end time of every load step, instead of the
user-specified output intervals assigned in NLSTEP or NLPARM. It is recommended to use
OUTCTRL=SOLUTION,INTERM to get nonlinear solutions in both F06 and intermediate OP2
files for debugging purposes.
3. For OUTCTRL = INTERM, the intermediate ouptut is only available in OP2 file. GPFORCE is not
available in intermediate OP2 files and can be obtained by OUCTRL=STD.
4. For NLDBG, all nonlinear information is printed out in only F06 file.
5. For DBGPOST, all nonlinear information is printed out in the MASTER/DBALL.
6. For MPCPCH, it is a punch output that MPC and MPCY requests cannot be mixed.
Main Index
7. In MPCPCH punch output, it is restricted that SID=1 for a general contact and SID=2 for the glued
contact.
8. When using MPCPCH for the permanent glued contact, user may specify any keyword of BEGN,
STEP and OTIME to punch output MPC type of constraints, or any keyword of YBEGN, YSTEP
and YOTIME to punch out MPCY type of constraints.
9. The output to the file is also influenced by the NLPACK Param. For example, one NLTRAN analysis
has NLSTEP as:
NLSTEP,900,0.2
,fixed,2000,20
,mech,u
It has total 2000 increments, and is asked output every 20 increments. Therefore, total output is 100
time step. In NASTRAN, default value of NLPACK is 100, in this model, therefore, NASTRAN will
write the results to OP2 after collecting 100 output, i.e., this model will write results to OP2 only one
time. With "intermediate output request, you will have only one OP2 file.
If NLPACK=1, NASTRAN will write results to OP2 for every output request. In this model,
NASTRAN will write results to OP2 for every output request, i.e., writing 100 times in this model.
With "intermediate output request, you will have 100 OP2 files.
If NLPACK=2, NASTRAN will write results to OP2 for every two output requests. In this model,
NASTRAN will write results to OP2 for every two output request, i.e., writing 50 times in this model.
With "intermediate output request, you will have 50 OP2 files.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 467
Nonlinear Static Analysis Parameter Selection
NLPARM (Case) Nonlinear Static Analysis Parameter Selection
Selects the parameters used for nonlinear static analysis.
Format:
NLPARM = n
Example:
NLPARM=10
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of NLPARM and NLPCI Bulk Data entries (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. NLPARM and NLPCI Bulk Data entries will not be used unless selected.
2. NLPARM may appear above or within a subcase.
3. For SOL 600, the only fields used are ID, NINC, DT (creep only), EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW. Use
PARAM,MARCOTIM instead of INTOUT. For other fields, advanced convergence controls are
available using the NLAUTO, NLSTRAT, and PARAM,MARCDEF Bulk Data entries.
Main Index
Nonlinear Restart Request
NLRESTART (Case) Nonlinear Restart Request
Request a RESTART execution at a specified point for SOL 400.

Please note that when running NLRESTART with Advanced Nonlinear Element, the Data Blocks for
Advanced Nonlinear Element must be saved in the corresponding cold start run with the proper DBSAVE,
NLPACK, and INTOUT. See Remark 12..
Format:
NLRESTART SUBCASE i , STEP j , LOADFAC f

TIME t
Example:
NLRESTART SUBCASE 1, STEP 2, LOADFAC 0.3

Describer Meaning
i Specifies the identification number of a previously executed SUBCASE (Integer;
Default is the first SUBCASE).
j Specifies the identification number of a previously executed STEP (Integer; Default
is the first STEP).
f Specified the load factor of a previously executed load increment in nonlinear static
analysis (Real; 0.0 < f < 1.0; Default = 0.0).
t Specified the time of a previously executed time step in nonlinear transient analysis
(Real; t 0 ≤ t ≤ t n , where t 0 is the initial time of STEP j, and t n is the last time of STEP
j; Default = t 0 ).
Remarks:
1. The NLRESTART command can be used in SOL 400 (NONLIN) only.
2. The NLRESTART command must appear before any SUBCASE command.
3. To perform a restart, the data base for the original run must be made available by using the ASSIGN
File Management statement or other equivalent method.
4. The restart run can only be executed at a load increment (or time step) whose output flag is on an
available restart point. (See the field INTOUT on the NLPARM Bulk Data entry, and NO on ).
When a user-specified restart point is not available, the closest previous restart point that is available
will be applied automatically.
5. If only NLRESTART is specified, a restart begins from the last available restart point in the previous
run. Otherwise, at lease one set of the SUBCASE i, STEP j, or LOADFC f (or TIME t) must be
specified.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 469
6. In static analysis, f is reset to 0.0 when f < 0.0, and it makes the restart begin from the beginning of
STEP j. f is reset to 1.0 when f > 1.0, which makes the restart begin from the beginning of the next
STEP (after STEP j).
7. In transient analysis, t is reset to t 0 when t < t 0 , and it makes the restart begin from the beginning of
STEP j. t is reset to t n when t > t n , which makes the restart begin from the beginning of the next
STEP (after STEP j).
8. The NLRESTART Case Control command must contain all of the commands used in the original
execution up to the point where the restart is requested.
9. All data contained on the database from the restart point will be deleted when the restart begins.
10. When using NLRESTART, its corresponding COLD START input model should not use
"PARAM,DBALL,SCRATCH", which will remove the database required for NLRESTART after
completion of COLD START run.
11. NLRESTART is used for Nonlinear Restart Request. The restart step must be a nonlinear analysis,
NLSTAT or NLTRAN. NLRESTART from perturbation step is not supported in SOL400.
12. DBSAVE in the Case Control Section is used to control saving of datablocks of advanced nonlinear
elements for static and transient nonlinear analysis in SOL 400.
-1 No datablocks of advanced nonlinear elements is saved
0 Saving datablocks of advanced nonlinear elements at the end of each loadcase
(default)
>0 Saving datablocks of advanced nonlinear elements at the every nth output
request of results
In DBSAVE=0, NLRESTART may start at the end of the loadcase (load step) for advanced nonlinear
elements. If DBSAVE=n (>0), NLRESTART may start at the every INTOUT* n th output point.
For NLTRAN analysis in SOL 400, the output to the file, i.e., NLRESTART usage, is also influenced
by the NLPACK Param. For example, one NLTRAN analysis has NLSTEP as:
NLSTEP, 900, 0.2
,fixed, 2000, 20
,mech, u
It has total 2000 increments, and is asked output every 20 increments. Therefore, total output is 100
time step. In NASTRAN, default value of NLPACK is 100, in this model, therefore, NASTRAN will
write the results to OP2 after collecting 100 output, i.e., this model will write results to OP2 only one
time. With "intermediate output request, you will have only one OP2 file.
If NLPACK=1, NASTRAN will write results to OP2 for every output request. In this model,
NASTRAN will write results to OP2 for every output request, i.e., writing 100 times in this model.
With intermediate output request, you will have 100 OP2 files.
NASTRAN will write results to OP2 for every two output request, i.e., writing 50 times in this model.
With intermediate output request, you will have 50 OP2 files.
Main Index
Similarly, NLRESTART can be started at those output points ONLY.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 471
Nonlinear Control Parameters for Mechanical, Thermal, and Coupled Analysis Selection
NLSTEP (Case) Nonlinear Control Parameters for Mechanical, Thermal, and Coupled Analysis
Selection
Selects integration and output time steps for static and transient nonlinear analysis in SOL 400.
Format:
NLSTEP=n
Example:
NLSTEP=10
SUBSTEP=1
ANALYSIS=HSTAT
SUBSTEP=2
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
Describer Meaning
n Identification number of a NLSTEP Bulk Data entry. (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. An NLSTEP entry can be selected to execute a nonlinear static or nonlinear transient analysis in
SOL 400. A NLSTEP is used in lieu of a NLPARM or both.
2. If a NLSTEP is present anywhere in a SUBCASE, then any NLPARM or entries in the SUBCASE
will be ignored.
3. When used for coupled analysis, the NLSTEP must be above the first SUBSTEP command. A single
NLSTEP entry is used for all SUBSTEPs of the STEP. (See the above example for use with coupled
analysis.)
Main Index
Nonlinear Element Stress Output Request
NLSTRESS (Case) Nonlinear Element Stress Output Request
Requests the form and type of nonlinear element stress output in SOLs 106 and 400.
Format:
 ALL 
 
NLSTRESS ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH , [ NLOUT = m ] ) =  n 
SORT2 PLOT  
 See Remark 4 
Examples:
NLSTRESS=5
NLSTRESS (SORT1,PRINT,PUNCH,PHASE)=15
NLSTRESS(PLOT)=ALL
NLSTRESS(NLOUT=23)=ALL
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of elements for each load.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of load for each element type.
PLOT Generates nonlinear element stresses for requested set, but no printer output.
ALL Stresses for all nonlinear elements will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only stresses for elements
with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be output
(Integer > 0).
NONE No nonlinear element stress will be output (Default).
NLOUT For SOL 400 only. Allows the selection of additional types of nonlinear output.
m Identification of a NLOUT Bulk Data entry. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
2. ALL should not be used in a transient problem due to potentially excessive output.
4. If there is a stress request, the default output set is that of the STRESS request.
5. For NLTRAN analysis, NLSTRESS does not support SORT1 selection.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 473
Nonlinear Dynamic Load Set Selection
NONLINEAR (Case) Nonlinear Dynamic Load Set Selection
Selects nonlinear dynamic load set for transient response or nonlinear harmonic response problems.
Format:
NONLINEAR = n
Example:
NONLINEAR=75
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of NOLINi, NLRGAPor NLRSFD Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remark:
1. Nonlinear force Bulk Data entries (NOLINi, NLRGAP or NLRSFD) will be ignored unless selected
in the Case Control Section.
2. At least one degree of freedom must be defined on a nonlinear force entry and called up by the
NONLINEAR Case Control command in nonlinear harmonic response.
Main Index
Normal Output Request in Cyclic Symmetry Problems
NOUTPUT (Case) Normal Output Request in Cyclic Symmetry Problems
Requests physical output in cyclic symmetry problems.
Format:
   
NOUTPUT  k, R  =  ALL 
 L   m 
Examples:
NOUTPUT (R)=ALL
NOUTPUT (2)=5
NOUTPUT (4,L)=10
Describer Meaning
ALL Output for all segments is desired.
m Output for segments specified in SET m is desired (Integer > 0).
k Used in eigenvalue analysis to request eigenvector and internal force output for
harmonics specified in SET k (Integer > 0).
R, L Output for only the right- or left-half of segments specified as ALL or in SET m.
R and L are used in dihedral symmetry only.
Remarks:
1. Sets k and m are defined on SET commands.
2. In cyclic symmetry analysis, this command, or the HOUTPUT command, is required to obtain data
recovery.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 475
Selects Nonstructural Mass Set Entries
NSM (Case) Selects Nonstructural Mass Set Entries
Selects nonstructural mass (NSM) set for mass generation.
Format:
NSM = n
Example:
NSM = 5
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a nonstructural mass that appears on a NSM, NSML,
NSM1, NSML1, or NSMADD Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remark:
1. Different NSM sets may be selected for superelements and residuals but within a superelement or
residual it may not change within the subcase structure.
Main Index
Velocity Normal Output Request
NVELOCITY (Case) Velocity Normal Output Request
Request output of velocity normal for structural grids in SOLs 108 and 111 only.
Format:
 ALL 
   
NVELOCITY[  SORT1 , [ PRINT,PUNCH,PLOT ] , REAL or IMAG ,ERP]=  n 
 SORT2  PHASE  
 NONE 
Example:
NVELOCITY = ALL
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as tabular listing of grid points for each excitation frequency
(Default).
SORT2 Output will be presented as tabular listing of excitation frequencies for each grid point.
output is desired.
REAL or Requests rectangular format (real and imaginary) of complex output. Use of either
IMAG REAL or IMAGE yields the same output.
PHASE Requests polar format (magnitude and phase) of complex output. Phase output is In
degrees.
ERP Flag to accept ERP set convention.
ALL Velocity normal will be computed for all surface structural grid points.
n Set identification of a previously defined set of grid points. Velocity Normal will be
computed for the grid points in this set only.
NONE Velocity normal will not be processed.
Remarks:
2. NVELOCITY = NONE overrides an overall request.
3. The PLOT option is used if results are requested for post-processing but no printed or punched
output is desired.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 477
Velocity Normal Output Request
4. Even with NVELOCITY=all, Velocity Normal will be computed only for structural grids at the
surface of the model. Fluid grids, if exist, are not included in NVELOCITY output.
5. With ERP flag in NVELOCITY command, structural grids of all ERPPNL will be considered as
candidates for NVELOCITY output and subjected to further screening of NVELOCITY set.
6. For 3D model, ERPPNL points to SET3 with all PSOLID IDs in the model is the easiest way to
compute NVELOCITY of structural surface GRIDs.
7. This Case Control command can be used in SOL 108 and SOL 111 only
Main Index
Output Frequency Set
OFREQUENCY (Case) Output Frequency Set
Selects a set of frequencies for output requests.
Format:
 
OFREQUENCY =  ALL 
 n 
Examples:
OFREQUENCY=ALL
OFREQUENCY=15
Describer Meaning
ALL Output for all frequencies will be computed.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Output for
frequencies closest to those given on this SET command will be output
(Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. In real eigenvalue, buckling, and complex eigenvalue analyses, the OMODES Case Control
command allows for an alternate way of selecting the modes to be output based on their mode
numbers. In these cases, if both the OMODES and OFREQUENCY requests appear, the OMODES
request takes precedence.
2. If this command is not specified in the Case Control Section (or, in the case of real eigenvalue,
buckling, and complex eigenvalue analyses, if neither the OMODES nor the OFREQUENCY
request is specified), then output will be generated for all frequencies.
3. The number of solutions selected will always be equal to the number of quantities in the selected set.
The closest values are used.
4. In flutter analysis (SOL 145), the selected set refers to the imaginary part of the complex eigenvalues.
The physical interpretation of this quantity depends on the method of flutter analysis as follows:
• K- or KE-method: velocity (input units).
• PK-method: frequency.
5. In aeroelastic response analysis (SOL 146) with RLOAD selection, the selected set refers to the
frequency (cycles per unit time).
6. In complex eigenvalue analysis (SOLs 107 and 110), the selected set refers to the imaginary part of
the complex eigenvalues.
7. If this command is specified in more than one subcase, then it is recommended that the first subcase
contain OFREQ=ALL, and that subsequent subcases contain OFREQ = n. Also, data recovery
requests should be specified only in the subsequent subcases. For example:
SUBCASE 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 479
Output Frequency Set
OFREQ = ALL $ 0.0 through 0.5

SUBCASE 2
SET 10 = 0.0 0.1 0.3
OFREQ = 10
DISP = ALL
SUBCASE3
SET 20 = 0.4 0.5
OFREQ = 20
STRESS = ALL
Main Index
Applied Load Output Request
OLOAD (Case) Applied Load Output Request
Requests the form and type of applied load vector output.
Format:

OLOAD ( , , , ,
 ALL 
RPRINT  
, RPUNCH ,[ CID ]) =  n 
NORPRINT  
 NONE 
Examples:
OLOAD=ALL
OLOAD(SORT1, PHASE)=5
OLOAD(SORT2, PRINT, PSDF, CRMS, RPUNCH=20
OLOAD(PRINT, RALL, NORPRINT)=ALL
Describer Meaning
point.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium. (Default)
database for random analysis postprocessing. Request must be made above
the subcase level, and RANDOM must be selected in Case Control.
ATOC Requests the autocorrelation function be calculated and stored in the
database for random analysis postprocessing. Request must be made above
the subcase level, and RANDOM must be selected in Case Control.
analysis postprocessing. Request must be made above the subcase level and
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 481
Describer Meaning
postprocessing. Request must be made above the subcase level, and
RANDOM must be selected in the Case Control.
RPRINT Writes random analysis results to the print file (Default).
NORPRINT Disables the writing of random analysis results to the print file.
RPUNCH Writes random analysis results to the punch file.
CID Requests printing of output coordinate system ID to printed output file
(.f06).
ALL Applied loads for all points will be output. See Remarks 2. and 8.
NONE Applied load for no points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only loads on
Remarks:
3. In a statics problem, a request for SORT2 causes loads at all requested points (zero and nonzero) to
be output.
4. OLOAD=NONE overrides an overall output request.
5. In the statics superelement solution sequences, and in the dynamics solution sequences (SOLs 107
through 112, 118, 145, 146, and 200). OLOADs are available for superelements and the residual
structure. Only externally applied loads are printed. Loads transmitted from upstream superelements
are not printed. Transmitted loads can be obtained with GPFORCE requests.
In the nonlinear transient analysis solution sequences (SOLs 129 and 159), OLOADs are available
only for residual structure points and include loads transmitted by upstream superelements.
6. In nonlinear analyses SOL 106 and 129, OLOAD output will not reflect changes due to follower
forces. But SOL 400 OLOAD output reflects the follower force change correctly. Notes, in SOL 400,
the first OLOAD output before starting nonlinear iteration process, only reflects total non-follower
force without thermal load and follower force.
7. Loads generated by the SPCD Bulk Data entry do not appear in OLOAD output.
8. In SORT1 format, OLOADs recovered at consecutively numbered scalar points are printed in groups
of six (sextets) per line of output. However, if a scalar point is not consecutively numbered, it will
begin a new sextet on a new line of output. If a sextet can be formed and it is zero, then the line will
not be printed. If a sextet cannot be formed, then zero values may be output.
9. OLOAD results are output in the global coordinate system (see field CD on the GRID Bulk Data
entry).
Main Index
10. In static inertia relief analysis, the OLOAD output includes both the inertia loads and applied loads.
random analysis.
12. Note that the CID keyword affects only grid point related output, such as DISP, VELO, ACCE,
OLOAD, SPCF and MPCF. In addition, CID the keyword needs to appear only once in a grid point
related output request anywhere in the Case Control Section to turn on the printing algorithm.
13. OLOAD output is not available in SOL 600.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 483
Output Modes Set
OMODES (Case) Output Modes Set
Selects a set of modes for output requests.
Format:
 ALL 
OMODES =  
 n 
Examples:
OMODES = ALL
OMODES = 20
Describer Meaning
ALL Output for all extracted modes will be computed (Default).
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Output for those
extracted modes appearing on this SET command will be computed.
Remarks:
1. This command is valid only in SOLs 103, 105, 107, 110, 111, 112, 200 and 400. It is ignored in all
other analyses.
2. In contrast to the OFREQENCY Case Control command, which provides an alternate way of
selecting the modes to be output based on their frequencies, the OMODES command allows mode
selection based on integer mode ID. For example:
SUBCASE 10
…
SET 11 = 1,3,5,7
OMODES = 11
DISP = ALL
…
SUBCASE 20
…
SET 21 = 25., 28., 31.
OFREQ = 21
DISP = ALL
…
3. If both the OMODES and the OFREQUENCY requests appear, the OMODES request takes
precedence.
4. If neither the OMODES nor the OFREQUENCY request is specified, output will be generated for
all modes.
5. Note that the OMODES command has no effect on the number of modes computed. It only selects
a subset of the computed modes for which output is to be generated.
Main Index
Output Modes Set
6. In superelement analysis, the set definition, using an OMODES command, for an upstream
superelement, will not be recognized unless a similar request appears for its downstream neighbor.
The downstream request should either be comprised of the union of all upstream requests, or left
blank, as the OMODES default is ALL. Note that the program does not check to see if this condition
is satisfied.
7. If OMODES is used in conjunction with a FATIGUE case control command, the OMODES request
must be for contiguous modes from 1 through n and the FTGLOAD bulk data entries cannot invoke
modes greater than n.
8. OMODES is intended to be specified above all subcases or in the first subcase. In SOLs 200 and 400,
the first subcase would be the first subcase with ANALYSIS=MODES, MTRAN, MFREQ, MCEIG,
SEAERO, and FLUTTER. See the MODES command to allow different output requests for
individual modes.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 485
Output Time Set
OTIME (Case) Output Time Set
Selects a set of times for output requests.
Format:
 
OTIME =  ALL 
 n 
Examples:
OTIME =ALL
OTIME =15
Describer Meaning
ALL Output for all times will be computed.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Output for
times closest to those given on this SET command will be computed (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. If the OTIME command is not supplied in the Case Control Section, then output for all times will
be computed.
2. This command is particularly useful for requesting a subset of the output (e.g., stresses only at peak
times, etc.).
3. This command can be used in conjunction with the MODACC module to limit the times for which
modal acceleration computations are performed.
4. If this command is specified in more than one subcase in the modal solution sequences, then it is
recommended that the first subcase contain OTIME=ALL, and that subsequent subcases contain
OTIME=n. Also, data recovery requests should be specified only in the subsequent subcases. For
example:
SUBCASE 1
OTIME ALL
SUBCASE 2
OTIME = 10
SET10 = . . .
DISP = ALL
SUBCASE 3
OTIME = 20
SET 20 = . . .
STRESS = ALL
5. The OTIME command is not effective in nonlinear transient analysis (SOL 129). However, the
OTIME command can be used in the nonlinear transient thermal analysis (SOL 159) to limit the
output to specified output times.
Main Index
Output Time Set
6. In superelement analysis, the set definition, using an OTIME command for an upstream
superelement, will not be recognized unless a similar request appears for its downstream neighbor.
The downstream request should either be comprised of the union of all upstream requests, or left
blank, as the OTIME default is ALL. Note that the program does not check to see if this condition
is satisfied.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 487
Case Control Delimiter
OUTPUT (Case) Case Control Delimiter
Delimits the various types of commands for the structure plotter, curve plotter, grid point stress, and
MSGSTRESS.
Format:
 
 PLOT 
 POST 
 
OUTPUT (  XYOUT  )
 
 XYPLOT 
 CARDS 
 
Examples:
OUTPUT(POST)
OUTPUT(PLOT)
OUTPUT(XYOUT)
Describer Meaning
PLOT Beginning of the structure plotter request. This command must precede all structure
plotter control commands. Plotter commands are described in OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands,
699.
POST Beginning of grid point stress SURFACE and VOLUME commands. This command
must precede all SURFACE and VOLUME commands. These commands are
described in OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands, 699.
XYOUT or Beginning of curve plotter request. This command must precede all curve plotter
XYPLOT control commands. XYPLOT and XYOUT are equivalent. Curve plotter commands
are described in X-Y PLOT Commands, 618.
CARDS The OUTPUT(CARDS) packet is used by the MSGSTRESS program. See the
MSGMESH Analyst’s Guide for details. These commands have no format rules. This
package must terminate with the command ENDCARDS (starting in column 1).
Remarks:
1. The structure plotter request OUTPUT(PLOT), the curve plotter request OUTPUT(XYOUT or
XYPLOT), and the grid point stress requests (OUTPUT(POST)) must follow the standard Case
Control commands.
2. If OUTPUT is specified without a describer, then the subsequent commands are standard Case
Control commands.
3. Case Control commands specified after OUTPUT(POST) are SURFACE and VOLUME.
Main Index
P-element Output Option Selection
OUTRCV (Case) P-element Output Option Selection
Selects the output options for the p-elements defined on an OUTRCV Bulk Data entry.
Format:
OUTRCV=n
Examples:
OUTRCV=10
OUTR=25
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a OUTRCV Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remark:
1. The OUTRCV command is optional. By default, p-element output uses the defaults specified for
CID and VIEW as described in the OUTRCV Bulk Data entry description.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 489
Direct Input Load Matrix Selection
P2G (Case) Direct Input Load Matrix Selection
Selects direct input load matrices.
Format:
P2G=name
Example:
P2G = LDMIG
P2G = LDMIG1, LDMIG2, LDMIG3
SET 100 = LDMIG, L1, L8
P2G = 100
P2G = 1.25*LDMIG1, 1.0*LDMIG2, 0.82*LDMIG3
Describer Meaning
name Name of a [ P 2g ] matrix to be input on the DMIG Bulk Data entry, or name list
with or without factors. See Remark 4. (Character).
Remarks:
1. Terms are added to the load matrix before any constraints are applied.
2. The matrix must be columnar in form (e.g., Field 4 on DMIG entry, IFO, must contain the integer
9.)
3. A scale factor may be applied to this input using the user parameter PARAM,CP2. See Parameters, 739.
Names separated by a comma or blank.
are separated by a comma or blank. The factors are real numbers. Each name must be paired
5. SOL 101: P2G should be selected above all subcase. The number of columns specified for NCOL on
the DMIG Bulk Data entry must equal the number of subcases.
SOL 106 and SOL 400: There are two choices. P2G may be selected in every subcase (or step in SOL
400), with NCOL=1. Otherwise, P2G may be selected above the subcases and PARAM,CP2 selected
in every subcase.
Main Index
Particle Acceleration Output Request for SOL 108/111
PACCELERATION (Case) Particle Acceleration Output Request for SOL 108/111
Request the form and frequency steps of particle acceleration output.
Format:
PACCELERATION [ ( [ PRINT, PUNCH / PLOT ] , [ REAL or IMAG / PHASE ] ,
[ SOLUTION = { ALL / setf } ] ) ] = { ALL / setg / NONE }
Example:
PACCELERATION = ALL
SET 20 = 104 THRU 204, 1005 THRU 1901
SET 50 = 105.0, 250.0, 310.0
PACCE (PUNCH, SOLUTION=50) = 20
Describer Meaning
PLOT The particle acceleration output will be generated but does not print.
REAL or IMAG Requests rectangular format (real and imaginary). Use of either REAL or IMAG yields
the same output.
PHASE Requests polar format (magnitude and phase). Phase output is in degrees.
SOLUTION Selects a set of excitation frequencies for which the particle accelerations will be
processed. The default is all excitation frequencies. See Remark 3.
setf Set identification of excitation frequencies.
setg Set identification of grid points on wetted surface. See Remark 2.
Remarks:
1. This entry will be available only for fluid-structure coupling problem. The particle acceleration is
input force vector to each domain via wetted surface in frequency response analysis.
2. Both fluid and structure grid points can be selected. The particle accelerations of the grid points not
on wetted surface will be zero.
3. The selected frequency must be part of the excitation frequencies. If not, the nearest excitation
frequency will be selected.
4. Only SORT1 form is supported.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 491
Page Eject
PAGE (Case) Page Eject
Causes a page eject in the echo of the Case Control Section.
Format:
PAGE
Example:
PAGE
Remarks:
1. PAGE appears in the printed echo prior to the page eject.
2. PAGE is used to control paging in large Case Control Sections.
Main Index
Parameter Specification
PARAM (Case) Parameter Specification
Specifies values for parameters. Parameters are described in Parameters, 739.
Format:
PARAM,n,V1,V2
Examples:
PARAM,GRDPNT,0
PARAM,K6ROT,1.0
Describer Meaning
n Parameter name (one to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of which is
alphabetic).
V1, V2 Parameter value based on parameter type, as follows:
Type V1 V2
Integer Integer Blank
Real, single precision Real Blank
Character Character Blank
Real, double precision Real, Double Precision Blank
Complex, single precision Real or Blank Real or Blank
Complex, double precision Real, Double Precision Real, Double Precision
Remarks:
1. The PARAM command is normally used in the Bulk Data Section and is described in the Bulk Data
Entries, 1071.
2. The parameter values that may be defined in the Case Control Section are described in Parameters,
739. Case Control PARAM commands in user-written DMAPs requires the use of the PVT module,
described in the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 493
Partitioning Vector Specifications
PARTN (Case) Partitioning Vector Specifications
Specifies a list of grid point identification numbers that will be partitioned with the DMAP module
MATMOD (Option 17).
Format:
PARTN=n
Example:
PARTN=10
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. The PARTN command and the DMAP module MATMOD provide a convenient method for
building a partitioning vector for use in DMAP modules such as PARTN and MERGE.
2. The PARTN command is no longer applicable to coupled fluid-structure analysis. It has been
replaced by the FSLPOUT command.
Main Index
Acoustic Grid Participation Factor Output Request
PFGRID (Case) Acoustic Grid Participation Factor Output Request
Requests the form and type of acoustic grid participation factor output.
Format:
PFGRID ( PRINT, PUNCH , REAL or IMAG , GRIDS =  ALL  ,

 
PLOT PHASE  setg 
 ALL 
 
 setf   
SOLUTION =   ) =  setdof 
 PEAK   NONE 
 
 NONE 
Example:
SET 10 = 11217
SET 20 = 25., 30., 35.
PFGRID(PHASE, SOLUTION=20) = 10
SET 40 = 11217
PEAKOUT NPEAK=4, NEAR=2.0,
PFGRID(PLOT, PHASE, SOLUTION=PEAK) = 40
Describer Meaning
PRINT Output will be written to the .f06 file (Default).
PUNCH Output will be written to the .pch file.
PLOT Results are computed but not output.
REAL or IMAG Real and imaginary part of complex results will be output (Default).
PHASE Magnitude and phase of complex results will be output.
GRIDS Keyword selecting the structural grid points to be processed; the default is all
structural grid points.
setg Identifier of a set containing the identifiers of the structural grid points to be
processed.
SOLUTION Keyword selecting a set of excitation frequencies for which the participation
factors will be processed. Default is all excitation frequencies. PEAK activates the
PEAKOUT automatic peak frequency extraction. See PEAKOUT Case Control
Command for detailed description of PEAK parameters.
setf Identifier of a set of excitation frequencies.
setdof Identifier of a set of fluid degrees of freedom for which the participation factors
are to be processed.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 495
Acoustic Grid Participation Factor Output Request
Remarks:
1. All PFMODE(FLUID), PFPANEL, and PFGRID Case Control commands must reference the same
set of fluid degrees of freedom.
2. Acoustic grid participation factors are available in a coupled frequency response analysis (SOL 108
and SOL 111).
4. The SOLUTION keyword can be used to select a subset of solutions available. If set setf is specified,
the items in the set are excitation frequencies.
Main Index
Control peaks identification process for frequency response analysis
PEAKOUT (Case) Control peaks identification process for frequency response analysis
Format:
 DISP   NONE 
   
PEAKOUT NPEAK = p, NEAR = q, LFREQ = r, HFREQ = s , RTYPE =  VELO  , PSCALE =  DB 
 ACCE   DBA 
   
Example:
PEAKOUT NPEAK=4, NEAR=2.0, LFREQ=10.0, HFREQ=200.0, RTYPE=DISP,
PSCALE=DBA
Describer Meaning
NPEAK Requests the desired number of peaks to extract. See remark 2. (Integer,
Default=5).
NEAR Minimum allowed frequency between two peaks. If two peaks are closer than this
value, the lower frequency peak will be ignored. (Real, Default=0.01 Hz )
LFREQ Lowest frequency used in peak identification. (Real, Default=lowest forcing
frequency or 0.0 Hz)
HFREQ Highest frequency used in peak identification. (Real, Default=highest forcing
frequency or 1.0e10 Hz)
RTYPE Results type for peak identification in structural domain. (Default=DISP)
PSCALE Scaling method for acoustic pressure results in fluid domain. See remark 3.
(Default=NONE)
Remarks:
1. This command is meaningful only in frequency response analysis (SOLs 108 and 111) and SOL 200
with DFREQ and MFREQ. It is ignored in all other analyses.
2. The actual number of peaks found may be fewer than the desired number.
3. When requesting dB or dBA, the parameter PREFDB is used as a reference pressure for dB
calculation, see ACOUT parameter.
4. All GRIDs referenced on any setdof of PFMODE, PFGRID and PFPANEL requests are required
(but not limited to) on a DISP output command. The DISP command must be placed above the
SUBCASE level.
5. If non sparse data recovery is requested using PARAM,SPARSEDR,NO, then also
PARAM,DDRMM,-1 is required. Sparse Data recovery is default.
6. External super elements are not supported
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 497
Modal Participation Factor (MPF) Output Request
PFMODE (Case) Modal Participation Factor (MPF) Output Request
Requests the form and type of modal participation factor (MPF) output.
Format:
PFMODE ( STRUCTURE , PRINT, PUNCH [ PRTMSG ],
FLUID PLOT
 ALL 
[ SORT = sorttype ], [ KEY = sortitem ], ITEMS =   ,
 ( itemlist ) 
   
FLUIDMP =  m f  , STRUCTMP =  m s  ,
   
 NONE   NONE 
 ALL 
 ALL   
   setf 
PANELMP =  setp  , SOLUTION =   , [ FILTER = fratio ],
   PEAK 
 NONE   NONE 
 
 setdof 
[ NULL = ipower ] ) ] =  
 NONE 
Examples:
SET 20 = 11/T3, 33/T3, 55/T3
SET 30 = 420., 640., 660.
PFMODE(STRUCTURE, SOLUTION = 30, FILTER = 0.01, SORT = ABSD) = 20
SET 40 = 1222, 1223
SET 50 = 10., 12.
PFMODE(FLUID, STRUCTMP=ALL, PANELMP=ALL, SOLUTION=50, SORT=ABSD) = 40
PFMODE(FLUID, STRUCTMP=ALL, PANELMP=ALL, SOLUTION=PEAK) = 40
Describer Meaning
STRUCTURE Requests output of MPFs for the response of structural degrees of freedom. See
Remark 9. (Default).
FLUID Requests output of MPFs for the response of acoustic grid points (one degree of
freedom per point). See Remark 10.
PRINT Output will be written to the .f06 file. See Remarks 5. and 6. (Default).
PUNCH Output will be written to the .pch file. See Remarks 5. and 7.
PRTMSG Request generation of diagnostic messages for badly-defined output sets during
PF computations. These badly defined sets generally produce no output. See
Remark 16..
Main Index
Describer Meaning
SORT Keyword selecting the sort type. Default is sorting by increasing natural mode
number. See Remark 8.
sorttype Sort option:
ABSA output will be sorted by absolute value in ascending order.
ABSD output will be sorted by absolute value in descending order.
ALGA output will be sorted by algebraic value in ascending order.
ALGD output will be sorted by algebraic value in descending order.

KEY Keyword selecting the output item to be used for sorting; default is FRACTION.
See Remark 8.
sortitem Item from the item list, see the following table, on which the sort operation is
performed.
ITEMS Keyword specifying data selected for output to the .pch file
itemlist One or more of the items in the following table:
Table 5-1 Item List Table

RESPONSE Modal participation factor.
PROJECTION Projected modal participation factor.
FRACTION Normalized projected modal participation factor.
SCALED Projected modal participation factor divided by largest
magnitude of all modal participation factors.
MODEDISP Real and imaginary part of modal participation factors. See
Remark 8.
MODERESP Magnitude and phase relative to total response of modal
participation factors. See Remark 8.
If more than one item is selected, the list must be enclosed in parentheses.
FLUIDMP Keyword to select output of fluid MPFs. See Remarks 2. and 10.
mf Number of lowest fluid modes for which MPFs will be computed. See Remark
10.
STRUCTMP Keyword to select output of structural MPFs. See Remarks 9. and 10.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 499
ms Number of lowest structural modes for which MPFs will be computed. See
Remarks 9. and 10.
PANELMP Keyword to select output of panel MPFs. See Remark 2.
setp Identifier of a set of panels.
SOLUTION Selects a set of excitation frequencies for which MPFs will be processed. Default
is all excitation frequencies. PEAK activates the PEAKOUT automatic peak
frequency extraction. See PEAKOUT Case Control Command for detailed
description of PEAK parameters. See Remark 11.
setf Identifier of a set of excitation frequencies. See Remark 11.
FILTER Keyword specifying the value of a filter to be applied to the printed output. See
Remark 12.
fratio Filter value (Default is 0.001). See Remark 12.
NULL Keyword specifying the power of ten used to detect a null response. See Remark
13.
ipower Power of ten used to detect a null response (Default is 12). See Remark 13.
setdof Identifier of a set of structural degrees of freedom or acoustic grid points (one
degree of freedom per point) for which MPFs are to be processed. See Remark 3.
Remarks:
set of acoustic grid points.
2. Keywords FLUIDMP and PANELMP are only valid if FLUID is specified.
3. If STRUCTURE is specified, setdof must reference a set of structural degrees of freedom. If FLUID
is specified, setdof must reference a set of acoustic grid points.
4. Acoustic MPFs are available in a coupled modal frequency response analysis (SOL 111) only.
6. Printed output includes results for ALL the data items described in the Item List Table.
8. MPFs are sorted by increasing order of mode number unless the SORT keyword specifies a different
sorting order. If a sorting order is specified, the KEY keyword selects the item that is used for sorting.
When MODEDISP is selected, sorting is based on the magnitude. When MODERESP is selected,
sorting is based on the real part.
9. The STRUCTURE option selects MPF calculations for structural degrees of freedom. The
STRUCTMP value defines the number of lowest structural modes used in final output preparation
prior to any filtering. The default is ALL. If STRUCTMP=NONE, no structural MPF is generated.
Main Index
10. The FLUID option selects MPF calculations for acoustic grid points (one degree of freedom per
point). The STRUCTMP value defines the number of lowest structural modes used in final output
preparation of acoustic structure MPFs prior to any filtering. The default is NONE. The FLUIDMP
value defines the number of lowest fluid modes used in final output preparation of acoustic fluid
MPFs prior to any filtering. The default is NONE.
11. The SOLUTION keyword can be used to select a subset of solutions available. If setf is specified, the
items in the set are excitation frequencies.
12. The filter is applied to the real part of the normalized projected participation factors. Only
participation factors that pass the filter are output.
13. If the magnitude of the total response at a selected response degree of freedom is less than
10-ipowr, then no MPFs are processed. If ipower is not in the range of 1 to 31, the default of 12 is used.
14. Acoustic panel MPFs are normalized using the panel response instead of the total response.
15. If present, output of acoustic structural MPFs includes the load participation factor. The load
participation factor has a mode number of 0 and a resonance frequency of 0.
16. Output sets that define no valid model degrees of freedom for data recovery produce no PF output.
This condition is usually discovered prior to actual computations and an informational message is
generated. Occasionally, when multiple subcases are involved and one of the subcases references an
invalid set, the PF calculations are still performed for any valid combinations. PRTMSG can be used
to aid in identification of invalid set data under these conditions.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 501
Acoustic Panel Participation Factor Output Request
PFPANEL (Case) Acoustic Panel Participation Factor Output Request
Requests the form and type of acoustic panel participation factor output.
Format:
FLUID
PFPANEL ( --------------------------------- PRINT, PUNCH [ PRTMSG ] , REAL or IMAG , PANEL =  ALL 
STRUCTURE  
PLOT PHASE  setp 
,
 ALL 
[ SORT = sorttype ], [ KEY = sortitem ], ITEMS =   ,
 ( itemlist ) 
 ALL 
 
 setf 
SOLUTION =   , [ FILTER = fratio ], [ NULL = ipower ] )
 PEAK 
 
 NONE 
 setdof 
=  
 NONE 
Example:
SET 10 = 10., 12.
SET 20 = 1222, 1223
PFPANEL (SOLUTION=10, FILTER=0.01, SORT=ABSD) = 20
SET 30 = 5001/T2, 6502/T3
PFPANEL (STRUCTURE, SOLUTION=10) = 30
SET 40 = 11217
PFPANEL(SOLUTION=PEAK, FILTER=0.01, SORT=ABSD) = 40
Describer Meaning
FLUID Request output of MPFs for the response of acoustic grid points (one degree of
freedom per point). See Remark 11. (Default)
STRUCTURE Request output of MPFs for the response of structure degrees of freedom. See
Remark 12.
PRINT Output will be written to the .f06 file (Default).
PUNCH Output will be written to the .pch file.
PRTMSG Request generation of diagnostic messages for badly-defined output sets during
PF computations. These badly defined sets generally produce no output. See
Remark 13..
REAL or IMAG Real and imaginary part of complex results will be output (Default).
PHASE Magnitude and phase of complex results will be output.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
PANEL Keyword to select the panels to be processed; default is all panels.
setp Identifier of a set of panels.
SORT Keyword selecting the sort type. Default is alphabetic sorting by panel name.
sorttype Sort option:
ABSA Output will be sorted by absolute value in

ascending order.
ABSD Output will be sorted by absolute value in

descending order.
ALGA Output will be sorted by algebraic value in

ascending order.
ALGD Output will be sorted by algebraic value in

descending order.
KEY Keyword selecting the output item to be used for sorting; default is
FRACTION.
sortitem Item from the item list, see the following table, on which the sort operation is
performed.
ITEMS Keyword specifying data selected for output to the .pch file.
itemlist One or more of the items in the following table:
Table 5-2 Item List Table

RESPONSE Modal participation factor.
PROJECTION Projected modal participation factor.
FRACTION Normalized projected modal participation factor.
SCALED Projected modal participation factor divided by largest
magnitude of all modal participation factors.
MODEDISP Real and imaginary part of modal participation factors.
MODERESP Magnitude and phase relative to total response of modal
participation factors.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 503
If more than one item is selected, the list must be enclosed in parentheses.
SOLUTION Keyword selecting a set of excitation frequencies for which the participation
factors will be processed. Default is all excitation frequencies. PEAK activates
the PEAKOUT automatic peak frequency extraction. See PEAKOUT Case
Control Command for detailed description of PEAK parameters.
setf Identifier of a set of excitation frequencies.
FILTER Keyword specifying the value of a filter to be applied to the printed output.
fratio Filter value (Default is 0.001), see Remark 8.
NULL Keyword specifying the power of ten used to detect a null response, see
Remark 9.
ipower Power of ten used to detect a null response (Default is 12), see Remark 9.
setdof Identifier of a set of fluid degrees of freedom for which the participation factors
are to be processed.
Remarks:
set of fluid degrees of freedom.
2. Acoustic panel participation factors are available in a coupled frequency response analysis (SOL 108
and SOL 111).
4. Printed output includes results for all the data items described in the itemlist table.
6. Panel participation factors are alphabetically sorted by panel names unless the SORT keyword
specifies a different sorting order. If a sorting order is specified, the KEY keyword selects the item that
is used for sorting. When MODEDISP is selected, sorting is based on the magnitude. When
MODERESP is selected, sorting is based on the real part.
7. The SOLUTION keyword can be used to select a subset of solutions available. If set setf is specified,
the items in the set are excitation frequencies.
8. The filter is applied to the real part of the normalized projected participation factors. Only
participation factors that pass the filter are output.
9. If the magnitude of the total response at a selected response degree of freedom is less than
10-ipowr, then no modal participation factors are processed. If ipower is not in the range of 1 to 31,
the default of 12 is used.
10. If present, output includes the load participation factor. The panel name of the load participation
factors is –LOAD-.
11. The FLUID option selects panel PF calculation for acoustic grid points (one degree of freedom per
point) and setdof should be identification numbers.
Main Index
12. The STRUCTURE option selects panel PF calculation for structure grid points and setdof should be
identification numbers and component codes.
13. Output sets that define no valid model degrees of freedom for data recovery produce no PF output.
This condition is usually discovered prior to actual computations and an informational is generated.
Occasionally, when multiple subcases are involved and one of the subcases references an invalid set,
the PF calculations are still performed for any valid combinations. PRTMSG can be used to aid in
identification of invalid set data under these conditions.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 505
Plotter Identification
PLOTID (Case) Plotter Identification
Defines a character string that will appear on the first frame of any plotter output.
Format:
PLOTID=title
Example:
PLOTID=BLDG. 125 BOX 91
Describer Meaning
title Any character string.
Remarks:
1. PLOTID must appear before the OUTPUT(PLOT) or OUTPUT(XYOUT) Case Control
commands.
2. The presence of PLOTID causes a special header frame to be plotted, with the supplied identification
plotted several times. The header frame allows plotter output to be identified easily.
3. If no PLOTID command appears, no ID frame will be plotted.
4. The PLOTID header frame will not be generated for the table plotters.
Main Index
Postprocessor Data Specifications
POST (Case) Postprocessor Data Specifications
Controls selection of data to be output for postprocessing functions via the OUTPUT2 module interface for
selected commercial postprocessor products.
Format:
  furn  [ ppname ] [ oplist ]
POST  TOFILE   
 TOCASE   filename 
Examples:
POST PATRAN TOFILE 51 NOSTRESS
POST TOFILE SUBCASE8
POST TOCASE SUFNAME1
Describer Meaning
TOFILE Keyword to specify the destiny of .op2 output files (No default if it appears above
all subcases).
TOCASE Keyword to specify the destiny of subcase results to user-defined .f06 output files.
(No default if it appears above all subcases.)
furn Fortran file unit reference number where data will be written (Integer > 0).
filename Suffix filename (see Remark 8., 9. and 11.) (Char8)
ppname Name of the target post-processor program for TOFILE option (Default =
PATRAN).
oplist Names of output items to be processed.
Remarks:
1. The POST Case Control command controls the placement of output data on external FORTRAN
files for use by commercial postprocessors. Use of the POST command generates the proper value for
the POST DMAP parameter associated with the particular postprocessor. All of the other parameter
controls related to the POST DMAP parameter remain in effect, and are described in Parameters, 739.
The products supported are identified in the following table. PATRAN is the default postprocessor
name used for ppname. DBC output (POST=0) cannot be controlled by the POST command.
ppname Product PARAM,POST,Value

PATRAN MSC Patran V3 -1
SDRC SDRC IDEA-S -2
NF MSC/LMS NF -4
FEMTOOLS DDS/FemTools -5
UNIGRAHICS EDS/Unigraphics -6
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 507
2. The TOFILE describer is followed by the specification of either a FORTRAN unit reference number,
or a file name associated with the external file that receives the output data. If a FORTRAN unit
number is used, the file must be associated with it via the ASSIGN File Management Statement. If
POST appears above all subcases, TOFILE must be used to specify either a FORTRAN unit reference
number or a file name. The default value of TOFILE, which appears under a subcase, will inherit
from the value given in the POST above all subcases. If the unit reference number is associated with
a form=formatted file, changes in unit numbers across subcases are not allowed.
3. The data that can be controlled for each postprocessor product is limited, and is identified under the
description of the POST and related DMAP parameters as described in Parameters, 739. The keywords
that can be used for the oplist options are shown in the following table. If an output item supported
by a particular postprocessor is described in Parameters, 739 but is not listed here, then the POST
command cannot be used to control its output to the external file.
Output Item oplist Keyword Case Command

Displacements [NO]DISPLACE DISP
Forces of single point constraint [NO]SPCFORCE SPCFORCE
Element forces [NO]FORCES ELFO/FORCE
Element stresses [NO]STRESS ELST/STRESS
Element strain energy [NO]ESE ESE
Grid point force balance [NO]GPFORCE GPFORCE
Stress at grid points [NO]GPSIGMA STRESS
Strain/curvature at grid points [NO]GPEPSILON STRAIN
Composite element failure indices [NO]PLYFAILURE STRESS
Element kinetic energy [NO]EKE EKE
Element energy loss [NO]EDE EDE
Multi-point constraint forces [NO]MPCFORCE MPCFORCE
Composite lamina stresses [NO]PLYSIGMA STRESS
Composite lamina strains [NO]PLYEPSILON STRAIN
Element strains [NO]STRAIN STRAIN
Grid point stresses [NO]GPSTRESS GPSTRESS
Grid point strains [NO]GPSTRAIN GPSTRAIN
Applied loads [NO]LOAD OLOAD
No items to be output NONE ----------------
Structure mode participation factors [NO]SMPF PFMODE
Main Index
4. Output data items must have been generated via the appropriate Case Control command for the data
to be available for postprocessing options. For example, the specification of SPCF in the oplist of the
POST command will not produce forces of single point constraint on the POST output file unless
there is a SPCF Case Control command present. Refer to the tables under the POST parameter
description in Parameters, 739 for a list of the output items supported by each postprocessor.
5. Any data generated by a Case Control command is automatically included in the oplist of the POST
command. If output data is not wanted for a particular case, then the characters “NO” should be the
first two characters of the keyword in the oplist. For example, NODISP specifies that displacements
are not to be posted to the output file, even though they have been requested via the DISP Case
Control command. Alternatively, the related POST parameters may be used. For example, to avoid
outputting any displacements whatsoever to the .op2 file, use a PARAM, OUG, NO Bulk Data entry.
6. Certain data (e.g., geometry) is always generated and is not dependent upon the presence of a Case
Control command in the input data. The POST command affects the placement of this data on the
external file only insofar as the selection of the postprocessor defines the value of the POST DMAP
parameter value. The actions described in Parameters, 739 under the POST parameter description will
prevail for the particular value of POST associated with the selected postprocessor. The primary
purpose of the POST command is to give the user more control over subcase-dependent output data
being stored on the external OUTPUT2 file.
7. If a POST command is present within any subcase, a POST command must also be present above
the subcase level. The placement of the POST command above the subcase level causes a cumulative
effect on POST commands in subsequent subcases. Any options specified above the subcase level
propagate down into the POST command within a subsequent subcase. Thus, if a POST command
specifies NODISP (no displacement output wanted) above the subcase level, then a POST command
with the DISP option would be required within a subcase to generate any output to the OUTPUT2
file for displacements. This also implies that changing the OUTPUT2 file unit reference number with
the TOFILE option in a subcase causes all output quantities currently scheduled for output to be
switched to the new unit number, not just those in the oplist for the current POST command.
8. When the name of an output file is specified by keyword TOFILE, the ASSIGN statement in the File
Management Section (FMS) can be used to specify the full path of its root name. The logical-keyword
for the root name is OUTPUT2F. The default root name is the Nastran job name. FORTRAN unit
reference number 19 has been reserved by Nastran for OUTPUT2F, although the user can assign
other FORTRAN unit number to it. The full file name is in the form of <root name>.<suffix
filename>.
9. When the name of an output file is specified by keyword TOCASE, the ASSIGN statement in the
File Management Section can be used to specify the full path of its root name. The logical-keyword
for the root name is OPCASE. The default root name is the Nastran job name. FORTRAN unit
reference number 22 has been reserved by Nastran for OPCASE, although the user can assign other
FORTRAN unit numbers to it. The full file name is in the form of <root name>.<suffix filename>.
Also, ppname and oplist are not required. If ppname and oplist are specified, they will be ignored.
Suffix filename must be specified with keyword TOCASE.
10. POST commands using TOCASE for structure mode participation factor output (SMPF) are not
supported and will be ignored.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 509
11. The TOFILE option lets you control the output results (per the table in Remark 3) that are placed
on the specified file in OP2 format. The "POST TOFILE SUBASE8" example directs output to the
file named <root name>.subcase8.op2. The TOCASE option directs standard printed output
requested for a subcase to the specified file in .f06 format. The "POST TOCASE SUFNAM1"
example directs output to the file named <root name>.sufnam1.f06. The TOCASE and TOFILE
describers are independent of one another. POST commands using each describer may be present in
a subcase to specify different output destinations for both .op2 and .f06 outputs at the same time. For
both the TOCASE and TOFILE options, the resulting file name will not have the .op2 or the .f06
file extension automatically appended if the file suffix name contains a period (".").
12. The TOCASE keyword is not supported for printout in the f06 file coming from X-Y Plot
commands.
Main Index
Pressure Output Request
PRESSURE (Case) Pressure Output Request
Requests form and type of pressure output. Analogous to the DISPLACEMENT Case Control command.
See the description of the DISPLACEMENT Case Control command, DISPLACEMENT (Case), 282.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 511
Random Analysis Set Selection
RANDOM (Case) Random Analysis Set Selection
Selects the RANDPS and RANDT1 Bulk Data entries to be used in random analysis.
Format:
 
RANDOM =  n 
 i 
Examples:
RANDOM=177
SET 10=100 110 120

RANDOM=10
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command, which in turn
references multiple RANDPS/RANDT1 Bulk Data entries with different set
identification numbers.
i Set identification number of RANDPS and RANDT1 Bulk Data entries to be
used in random analysis (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. RANDOM must select RANDPS Bulk Data entries to perform random analysis.
2. RANDOM must appear in the first subcase of the current loop. RANDPS Bulk Data entries may not
reference subcases in a different loop. Loops are defined by a change in the FREQUENCY command,
or changes in the K2PP, M2PP, or B2PP commands.
3. If RANDPS entries are used in a superelement analysis, the RANDOM command may be specified
above the subcase level if a condensed subcase structure (SUPER=ALL) is used. If a condensed subcase
structure is not used, then a unique RANDOM selection of a unique RANDPS entry must be
specified within each of the desired superelement subcases.
4. P-elements are not supported in random analysis.
5. If a SET is referenced by n, then the SET identification number must be unique with respect to all
RANDPS/RANDT1 set identification numbers.
Main Index
Cross-Power Spectral Density and Cross-Correlation Function Output Request
RCROSS (Case) Cross-Power Spectral Density and Cross-Correlation Function Output Request
Requests computation and output of cross-power spectral density and cross-correlation functions in random
analysis.
Format:
RCROSS (
REAL or IMAG PRINT , [ PUNCH ], [ PSDF, CORF, RALL ] ) = n
PHASE NOPRINT
Example:
RCROSS(PHASE, PSDF, CORF) = 10
RCROSS(RALL, NOPRINT, PUNCH) = 20
RCROSS = 30
Describer Meaning
REAL or IMAG Requests rectangular format (real and imaginary) of complex output for cross-
power spectral density function. Use of either REAL or IMAG yields the same
output (Default).
PHASE Requests polar format (magnitude and phase) of complex output for cross-power
spectral density function. Phase output is in degrees.
PRINT Write output to print file (Default).
NOPRINT Do not write output to print file.
PUNCH Write output to punch file.
PSDF Requests the cross-power spectral density function be calculated and output for
random analysis postprocessing (Default).
CORF Requests the cross-correlation function be calculated and output for random
analysis postprocessing.
RALL Requests both the cross-power spectral density function and cross-correlation
function be calculated and output for random analysis postprocessing.
n Identification number of the RCROSS Bulk Data entry to be used in random
analysis (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. Case Control command RCROSS must be used along with Case Control command RANDOM. See
Remarks under the RANDOM (Case), 511 Case Control command description.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 513
Cross-Power Spectral Density and Cross-Correlation Function Output Request
2. Response quantities such as DISPLACEMENT, STRESS, and FORCE must be requested by

corresponding Case Control commands in order to compute cross-power spectral density and cross-
correlation functions between the two response quantities specified by the RCROSS Bulk Data entry.
It is recommended that those requests be put above the subcase level to avoid the situation that some
response quantities are missing when it comes to the random analysis postprocessing.
3. The response quantities must belong to the same superelement. The cross-power spectral density and
cross-correlation functions between the two responses, which belong to the different superelements,
are not supported.
Main Index
Repeat Output Subcase Delimiter
REPCASE (Case) Repeat Output Subcase Delimiter
Delimits and identifies a repeated output subcase.
Format:
REPCASE=n
Example:
REPCASE=137
Describer Meaning
n Subcase identification number. (Integer > 1)
Remarks:
1. n must be strictly increasing (i.e., must be greater than all previous subcase identification numbers).
2. REPCASE defines a subcase that is used to make additional output requests for the previous real
subcase. This command is required because multiple output requests for the same item are not
permitted in the same subcase.
3. One or more repeated subcases (REPCASEs) must immediately follow the subcase (SUBCASE) to
which they refer.
4. REPCASE may be used only in statics and normal modes analysis. In normal modes analysis, output
for only one mode is obtained. This output corresponds to the SUBCASE preceding the REPCASE.
5. If the referenced subcases contain thermal loads or element deformations, the user must define the
temperature field in the REPCASE with a TEMP(LOAD) Case Control command, or the element
deformation state with a DEFORM command.
6. Repcase is not applicable to SOLs 400, 600, and 700.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 515
Controls Residual Vectors
RESVEC (Case) Controls Residual Vectors
Specifies options for and calculation of residual vectors.
Format:
 
APPLOD ADJLOD DYNRSP 
RESVEC  INRLOD , , RVDOF , DAMPLOD ,

=
 NOINRL NOAPPL NOADJLOD NORVDO NODAMP NODYNRSP 
SYSTEM/NOSYSTEM
 
 COMPONENT/NOCOMPONENT 
 
 BOTH or YES 
 NO 
Examples:
RESVEC=SYSTEM
RESVEC(NOINRL)=COMPONENT
RESVEC=NO
Describer Meaning
INRLOD/ Controls calculation of residual vectors based on inertial forces due to rigid-
NOINRL body motion (Default =INRLOD).
APPLOD/ Controls calculation of residual vectors based on applied loads (Default =
NOAPPL APPLOD).
ADJLOD/ Controls calculation of residual vectors based on adjoint load vectors
NOADJLOD (SOL 200 only; Default = ADJLOD).
RVDOF/ Controls calculation of residual vectors based on RVDOFi entries (Default =
NORVDOF RVDOF).
DAMPLOD/ Controls calculation of residual vectors based on viscous damping (Default =
NODAMP DAMPLOD).
DYNRSP/ Controls whether the residual vectors will be allowed to respond dynamically
NODYNRSP in the modal transient or frequency response solution. See Remark 5. (Default
= DYNRSP).
SYSTEM/ Controls calculation of residual vectors for system (a-set) modes. For
NOSYSTEM NOSYSTEM, describers inside the parentheses are ignored. See Remark 2. for
default.
COMPONENT/ Controls calculation of residual vectors for component (superelement or o-
NOCOMPONENT set) modes. For NOCOMPONENT, describers inside the parentheses are
ignored. See Remark 2. for default.
Main Index
Controls Residual Vectors
Describer Meaning
BOTH or YES Requests calculation of residual vectors for both system modes and
component modes. See Remark 2. for default.
NO Turns off calculation of residual vectors for both system and component
modes, and describers inside the parentheses are ignored. See Remark 2. for
default.
Remarks:
1. RESVEC=SYSTEM/NOSYSTEM and RESVEC=COMPONENT/NOCOMPONENT may be
specified in the same subcase.
2. RESVEC=BOTH is the default in all solution sequences except SOLs 103, 106, (with
PARAM,NMLOOP), and 115, wherein RESVEC=COMPONENT is the default.
3. If the RESVEC command is specified then the user parameters PARAM,RESVEC and
PARAM,RESVINER are ignored.
4. The lower frequency cutoff on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries should be left blank or set to
a value below the minimum frequency. Residual vectors may not be calculated if all modes below the
maximum frequency cutoff are not determined. If low frequency modes are to be excluded from the
analysis, use the MODESELECT Case Control command or PARAM,LFREQ.
5. Caution needs to be exercised when allowing the residual vectors to respond dynamically in a modal
solution. The best approach is to always include enough normal modes to capture the dynamics of
the problem, and rely on the residual vectors to help account for the influence of the truncated modes
on the quasistatic portion of the response. This is not the default setting for this capability. When
choosing to allow the residual vectors to respond dynamically, it is important to be aware of the
frequency content of the excitation, as it will have the ability to excite these augmentation modes. If
this is undesirable, then the forcing function should be filtered in advance to remove any undesired
frequency content, or specify the NODYNRSP keyword.
6. Residual vectors are normalized with respect to MASS if possible. Massless residual vectors are
normalized with respect to STIFFNESS. Residual vectors are not normalized by the requested
method of the NORM field of the selected EIGR or EIGRL entry.
7. The maximum number of applied loads that may be used for residual vector calculations is controlled
by PARAM,MAXAPL. Note that if the number of applied loads is large, the cost can become
prohibitive. If the number of applies loads exceeds MAXAPL, residual vectors are disabled.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 517
Activates Gyroscopic Effects and Selects RGYRO or UNBALNC Entries
RGYRO (Case) Activates Gyroscopic Effects and Selects RGYRO or UNBALNC Entries
The RGYRO Case Control command activates the rotodynamics capability, and selects the RGYRO Bulk
Data entry for use in complex modes, frequency response, and static analysis. For transient response, the
RGYRO command selects the UNBALNC Bulk Data entry. If the UNBALNC entry is not required, setting
RGYRO to YES will include the gyroscopic effects in the transient response calculation. Setting RGYRO to
NO will deactivate gyroscopic effects in all solutions.
Format:
For complex modes, frequency response, and static analysis:
RGYRO = n or YES/NO
Examples:
RGYRO = 100
For Transient Response:

RGYRO = YES
or
RGYRO = 200
Main Index
Rigid Element Method
RIGID (Case) Rigid Element Method
Selects rigid elements processing method for RBAR, RBAR1, RJOINT, RROD, RTRPLT, RTRPLT1,
RBE1, RBE2, and RBE3.
Format:
 LINEAR 
 
RIGID =  LAGRAN 
 
 LGELIM 
Example:
RIGID=LAGRAN
Describer Meaning
LINEAR Selects the linear elimination method.
LAGRAN Selects the Lagrange multiplier method.
LGELIM Selects the Lagrange multiplier method with elimination.
Remarks:
1. The RIGID command must be above the SUBCASE level.
2. The RIGID command can be used in SOLs 101, 103, 105, and 400 only. For all other solution
sequences, only RIGID=LINEAR is available.
3. If the RIGID command is not specified in the Case Control Section, RIGID=LINEAR is used for all
solution sequences except SOL 400. For SOL 400, RIGID=LAGRAN is used. If the RIGID
command is specified, the full command must be specified, including the right hand side.
4. RIGID=LGELIM is not available for SOL 400.
5. LINEAR processing will not compute thermal loads. Also, for SOLs 103 and 105, LINEAR
processing will not compute differential stiffness. In order to compute thermal load or differential
stiffness, the LAGRAN or LGELIM methods must be used.
6. For SOL 400, the LINEAR rigid elements are valid for small rotation only. The LAGRAN method
is valid for both small and large rotation (parameter LGDISP=1).
7. For the LINEAR method, the dependent DOFs are eliminated and placed in the mp-set. For the
LAGRAN method, both independent and dependent DOFs are placed in the l-set. Lagrange
multiplier DOFs are created internally for the dependent DOFs and placed in l-set. For the LGELIM
method, the LAGRAN rigid elements are created first. Then, both the Lagrange DOFs and the
dependent DOFs are eliminated, and the dependent DOFs are placed in the mr-set. Both the mp-set
and mr-set are subsets of the m-set. See Degree-of-Freedom Set Definitions, 1066.
8. Between LAGRAN and LGELIM, LAGRAN is the preferred method. LGELIM is a backup method
if difficulty is encountered using the LAGRAN method.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 519
Rigid Element Method
9. The parameters LMFACT and PENFN can be used as scale factor and penalty function, respectively,
for the LAGRAN method of processing.
10. In a SOL 400 analysis with CWELD, CFAST, and/or CSEAM elements Nastran internally creates
RBE3 elements. These internal RBE3 elements respond in the same way to the RIGID command as
any other rigid body elements that may have been defined in the model. Therefore the RIGID
command also has an effect on the behavior of CWELD and CFAST elements in a SOL 400 analysis.
For "ANALYSIS=NLSTAT" or "ANALYSIS=NLTRAN", the generated RBE3 constraints become
Lagrange elements and will undergo large rotation. For "ANALYSIS=NLTRAN" with initial
conditions (IC=n) in case control that cause large initial stresses in the structure at time t=0, the case
control entry RIGID needs to have the value "RIGID=LINEAR." If "PARAM, OLDWELD, YES"
is specified, the CSEAM is considered a linear element.
11. For external superelements, both the Case Control Command EXTSEOUT and the PARAM,
EXTOUT, REQUIRE a value of RIGID=LINEAR (the default for non SOL400 solution sequences)
when running non SOL 400 jobs.
12. When creating superelements in SOL 400, RIGID=LAGRAN produces incorrect answers, RIGID-
LINEAR should be used or put the rigid elements into the residual.
13. When RIGID=LAGRAN is used, one may observe SWM 4968, indicating negative terms on
multiple DOF which is due to the Lagrange multiplier. This message may be ignored and an accurate
solution will be obtained.
14. When RIGID=LAGRAN is used, the CASI iterative solver may fail to converge or terminate, one
should switch to a direct solver.
Main Index
Specifying Damping for the Residual Structure
RSDAMP (Case) Specifying Damping for the Residual Structure
Requests parameter and hybrid damping for the residual structure.
Format:
 STRUCTURE 
 
RSDAMP  FLUID  = n
 
 BOTH 
Example:
RSDAMP(STRUCTURE,FLUID, or BOTH) = n
Describer Meaning
n Identification number of a DAMPING Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. For modal solutions, this entry adds to the modal damping that may be specified by the SDAMPING
Case Control command.
2. This command can be different in each residual structure subcase.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 521
Solution Set Acceleration Output Request
SACCELERATION (Case) Solution Set Acceleration Output Request
Requests the form and type of solution set acceleration output.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SACCELERATION ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH, REAL or IMAG ) =  n 
SORT2 PHASE  
 NONE 
Examples:
SACCELERATION=ALL
SACCELERATION(PUNCH,IMAG)=142
Describer Meaning
point (or mode number).
is in degrees.
ALL Acceleration for all solution set points (modes) will be output.
NONE Acceleration for no solution set points (modes) will be output.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Only
accelerations of points with identification numbers that appear on this SET
Remarks:
1. Acceleration output is only available for transient and frequency response problems.
2. The defaults for SORT1 and SORT2 depend on the type of analysis, and are discussed in Remark 2
under the DISPLACEMENT (Case), 282 Case Control command. If SORT1 is selected for any of the
commands SACC, SDIS, and SVEL, then the remaining commands will also be SORT1.
3. SACCELERATION=NONE allows an overall output request to be overridden.
Main Index
Structural Damping Selection
SDAMPING (Case) Structural Damping Selection
Requests modal damping as a function of natural frequency in modal solutions or viscoelastic materials as a
function of frequency in direct frequency response analysis.
Format:
SDAMPING ( STRUCTURE ) = n
FLUID
Example:
SDAMPING=77
Describer Meaning
STRUCTURE Modal damping is requested for the structural or fluid portion of the model.
or FLUID
n Set identification number of a TABDMP1 or TABLEDi Bulk Data entry
(Integer>0).
Remarks:
1. In the modal solutions (e.g., SOLs 110, 111, 112, 145, 146, and 200), SDAMPING must reference
a TABDMP1 entry.
2. In direct frequency response analysis (e.g., SOL 108), SDAMPING must reference a TABLEDi entry
which defines viscoelastic (frequency-dependent) material properties. See Viscoelastic Materials in
Frequency Response Analysis (p. 845) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
3. When SDAMPING is defined for a superelement, PARAM,SESDAMP must be placed either in the
SUBCASE for the superelement or in the superelement’s BEGIN SUPER section in order to activate
the modal damping for the superelement. The default for superelements is to place all boundary
points in the B set; in this case, PARAM,SESDAMP,AUG is recommended. Alternatively, place all
boundary points in the C set and set PARAM,SESDAMP,YES.
4. When SDAMPING is used during FRF component generation, PARAM,KDAMP,-1 is
recommended in order to place the modal damping terms in the imaginary part of the stiffness matrix.
The default for KDAMP is 0, which places the modal damping terms in the damping matrix, leading
to a marginally under or over damped response. When hybrid damping is used during FRF
component generation, it is recommended to set the KDAMP field to YES on the HYBDAMP entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 523
Solution Set Displacement Output Request
SDISPLACEMENT (Case) Solution Set Displacement Output Request
Requests the form and type of solution set displacement output.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SDISPLACEMENT ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH, REAL or IMAG ) =  n 
SORT2 PHASE  
 NONE 
Examples:
SDISPLACEMENT=ALL
SDISPLACEMENT(SORT2,PUNCH,PHASE)=NONE
Describer Meaning
ALL Displacements for all solution set points (modes) will be output.
NONE Displacements for no solution set points (modes) will be output.
displacements on points with identification numbers that appear on this SET
Remarks:
1. The defaults for SORT1 and SORT2 depend on the type of analysis, and is discussed in Remark 2
commands SACC, SDIS, and SVEL then the remaining commands will also be SORT1.
2. SDISPLACEMENT=NONE allows an overall output request to be overridden.
3. The SDISPLACEMENT command is required to output normalized complex eigenvectors.
Main Index
Superelement Generation and Assembly
SEALL (Case) Superelement Generation and Assembly
Specifies the superelement identification numbers of Phase 1 processing in which all matrices and loads are
generated and assembled. Controls execution of the solution sequence.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SEALL =  n 
 
 i 
Examples:
SEALL=ALL
SEALL=7
Describer Meaning
ALL Generate and assemble all superelements.
superelements with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be
generated and assembled (Integer > 0).
i Identification number of a single superelement that will be generated and assembled
(Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. This command, if present, must be located before the first SUBCASE command.
2. Zero (0) is the identification number of the residual structure, and can only appear as a member of a
SET.
3. For a further discussion of this command, see Superelement Analysis (p. 388) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual.
4. If i is used, the superelement identification number must be unique with respect to any SET
identification numbers used.
5. This command combines, in one command, the functions of the SEMG, SELG, SEKR, SELR, and
SEMR commands.
6. This command does not control superelement data recovery (Phase 3). See the SEDR (Case), 526 Case
Control command description.
7. SEALL=ALL is the default but can be overridden by specifying any of the following Phase 1
commands: SEALL, SEMG, SELG, SEKR, SELR, or SEMR.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 525
Specifying Damping for Superelements
SEDAMP (Case) Specifying Damping for Superelements
Requests parameter and hybrid damping for superelements.
Format:
SEDAMP=n
Example:
Describer Meaning
n Identification number of a DAMPING Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. This command adds to the modal damping that may be specified by the Case Control command
SDAMPING, used in conjunction with PARAM,SESDAMP,YES.
2. Multiple SEDAMP requests per superelement are not allowed. If more than one SEDAMP request is
specified per superelement, the second and subsequent requests will be ignored.
Main Index
Superelement Data Recovery
SEDR (Case) Superelement Data Recovery
Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which data recovery will be performed.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SEDR =  n 
 
 i 
Examples:
SEDR=ALL
SEDR=7
Describer Meaning
ALL Performs data recovery for all superelements.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Data recovery will
be performed for superelements with identification numbers that appear on this SET
command (Integer > 0).
i Identification number of a single superelement for which data recovery will be
performed (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
2. Zero (0) is the identification number for the residual structure, and can only appear as a member of
a SET.
Reference Manual.
5. If this command is not present, data recovery is performed for all superelements for which there are
output requests (i.e., the default for this command is SEDR=ALL).
6. The presence of the EXTDROUT Case Control command or the user PARAMeter EXTDROUT
forces SEDR=ALL.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 527
Superelement Design Variable Processing
SEDV (Case) Superelement Design Variable Processing
Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which the design variables will be processed.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SEDV =  n 
 
 i 
Examples:
SEDV=ALL
SEDV=18
Describer Meaning
ALL Requests design variable processing for all superelements. This is the default value if
SEDV is missing in the file.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Design variable
processing will be performed for superelements with identification numbers that
appear on this SET command (Integer > 0).
i Identification number of a single superelement for which design variable processing
will be performed (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
SET.
3. For a further discussion of superelement sensitivity analysis, see the MSC.Nastran Design Sensitivity
and Optimization User’s Guide.
5. If both the SEDV and SERESP commands are not present, then the design variable processing and
design sensitivity matrix generation will be performed for all superelements.
Main Index
Superelement Matrix and Load Assembly Exclusion
SEEXCLUDE (Case) Superelement Matrix and Load Assembly Exclusion
Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which all matrices and loads will not be assembled into
the downstream superelement.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SEEXCLUDE =  n 
 
 i 
Examples:
SEEXCLUDE=ALL
SEEXCLUDE=18
Describer Meaning
ALL All upstream superelements will be excluded.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Only those
superelements with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will
be excluded (Integer > 0).
i Identification number of a single superelement for which matrices will be excluded
(Integer > 0).
Remarks:
3. This command is not meaningful when applied to the residual structure.
4. For a further discussion of this command, see the MSC Nastran Handbook for Superelement Analysis.
5. If the SEEXCLUDE command is specified in a restart of SOLs 101 through 200, then
PARAM,SERST,MANUAL must be specified. Also, the SEKR command must be specified for the
superelement immediately downstream from the excluded superelement. For example, if
superelement 10 is excluded in the following superelement tree:
,
10 20
30 40
0
then the user must specify the following commands in the Case Control Section:
SEKR = 30
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 529
Superelement Matrix and Load Assembly Exclusion
PARAM,SERST,MANUAL
Main Index
Final Superelement for Assembly
SEFINAL (Case) Final Superelement for Assembly
Specifies the superelement identification number for the final superelement to be assembled.
Format:
 
SEFINAL =  n 
 i 
Example:
SEFINAL=14
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Each superelement
identification number appearing on the SET command must belong to a disjoint
model (Integer > 0).
i Identification number of the final superelement to be assembled (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. If this command is not present, the program selects the order of the superelements for assembly
operations.
4. This command can be used on restarts to ensure that minor modeling changes do not also change the
processing order. For this usage, inspect the SEMAP table to determine which superelements were
final superelements on the prior run.
5. See the MSC Nastran Handbook for Superelement Analysis for a further discussion of this command.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 531
Superelement Stiffness Matrix Assembly and Reduction
SEKREDUCE (Case) Superelement Stiffness Matrix Assembly and Reduction
Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which stiffness matrices are assembled and reduced.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SEKREDUCE =  n 
 
 i 
Examples:
SEKREDUCE=ALL
SEKREDUCE=9
Describer Meaning
ALL Assembles and reduces matrices for all superelements.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Matrices will
only be assembled for superelements with identification numbers that appear on this
SET command (Integer > 0).
i Identification number of a single superelement for which the stiffness matrix will be
assembled and reduced (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
a SET.
Reference Manual.
4. SEKREDUCE is an alternate form, and is entirely equivalent to the obsolete command
SEMASSEMBLE.
5. SEALL=ALL is the default, but can be overridden by specifying any of the following Phase 1
Main Index
Superelement Load Generation
SELGENERATE (Case) Superelement Load Generation
Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which static loads will be generated.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SELGENERATE =  n 
 
 i 
Examples:
SELGENERATE=ALL
SELGENERATE=18
Describer Meaning
ALL Generates static loads for all superelements.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Static load
matrices will only be generated for superelements with identification numbers that
i Identification number of a single superelement for which load matrices will be
generated (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
SET.
Reference Manual.
5. SEALL=ALL is the default, but can be overridden by specifying any of the following Phase 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 533
Superelement Load Assembly and Reduction
SELREDUCE (Case) Superelement Load Assembly and Reduction
Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which the static load matrices will be assembled and
reduced.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SELREDUCE =  n 
 
 i 
Examples:
SELREDUCE=ALL
SELREDUCE=9
Describer Meaning
be assembled only for superelements with identification numbers that appear on
this SET command (Integer > 0).
i Identification number of a single superelement for which the load matrices will be
assembled and reduced (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
2. Zero (0) is the identification number for the residual structure, and can only be appear as a member
of a SET.
Reference Manual.
4. This command is used on restarts to selectively assemble and reduce load matrices.
6. In superelement static analysis, SELREDUCE is equivalent to SELASSEMBLE.
7. In dynamic analysis, SELASSEMBLE combines the functions of SELREDUCE and SEMREDUCE.
8. SEALL=ALL is the default, but can be overridden by specifying and of the following Phase 1
Main Index
Superelement Matrix Generation
SEMGENERATE (Case) Superelement Matrix Generation
Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which stiffness, mass, and damping matrices will be
generated.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SEMGENERATE =  n 
 
 i 
Examples:
SEMGENERATE=ALL
SEMGENERATE=7
Describer Meaning
ALL Generates structural matrices for all superelements.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Structural
matrices will only be generated for superelements with identification numbers that
i Identification number of a single superelement for which structural matrices will be
generated (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
a SET.
Reference Manual.
5. SEALL=ALL is the default, in the structured SOLs 101 through 200. This default can be overridden
by specifying any of the following Phase 1 commands: SEALL, SEMG, SELG, SEKR, SELR, or
SEMR.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 535
Superelement Mass and Damping Assembly and Reduction
SEMREDUCE (Case) Superelement Mass and Damping Assembly and Reduction
Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which the mass and damping matrices will be
assembled and reduced. In buckling analysis, the differential stiffness matrices will be assembled and reduced.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SEMREDUCE =  n 
 
 i 
Examples:
SEMREDUCE=ALL
SEMREDUCE=9
Describer Meaning
only be assembled for superelements with identification numbers that appear on this
SET command (Integer > 0).
i Identification number of a single superelement for which the load matrices or the
mass and damping matrices will be assembled and reduced (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
a set.
3. This command is used on restart to selectively assemble and reduce mass and damping matrices. For
a further discussion of this command, see Superelement Analysis (p. 388) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Manual.
5. In dynamic analysis, SELASSEMBLE combines the functions of SELREDUCE and SEMREDUCE.
6. This command has no function in static analysis.
7. SEALL=ALL is the default but can be overridden by specifying any of the following Phase 1
Main Index
Superelement Response Sensitivity
SERESP (Case) Superelement Response Sensitivity
Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which the design sensitivity matrices will be generated.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SERESP =  n 
 
 i 
Examples:
SERESP=ALL
SERESP=18
Describer Meaning
ALL Requests design sensitivity matrix generation for all superelements. This is the
default value if SERESP is missing.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Design
sensitivity matrices will be generated for superelements with identification
numbers that appear on this SET command (Integer > 0).
i Identification number of a single superelement for which the design sensitivity
matrix will be generated.
Remarks:
1. This command, if present, then it must be located before the first SUBCASE command.
SET.
3. For a further discussion of this command, see the MSC Nastran Reference Manual .
5. If both the SEDV and SERESP commands are not present, then the design variable processing and
design sensitivity matrix generation will be performed for all superelements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 537
Set Definition, General Form
SET (Case) Set Definition, General Form
Sets are used to define the following lists:

1. Identification numbers (point, element, or superelement) for processing and output requests.
2. Frequencies for which output will be printed in frequency response problems, or times for transient
response, using the OFREQ and OTIME commands, respectively.
3. Surface or volume identification numbers to be used in GPSTRESS or STRFIELD commands.
4. DRESP1 entries that are used in the spanning of subcases.
5. Grid point number and component type code to be used by the MCFRACTION command.
Formats:
SET n = { i 1 [ ,i 2, i 3, THRU i 4, EXCEPT i 5, i 6, i 7, i 8, THRU i 9 ] }
SET n = { r 1 [ ,r 2, r 3, r 4 ] }
SET = ALL
SET n = { i 1 ⁄ c 1 [ ,i 2 ⁄ c 2, i 3 ⁄ c 3, i 4 ⁄ c 4 ] }
SET n = { l 1, [ l 2, l 3 ] }
Examples:
SET 77=5
SET 88=5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 THRU 55 EXCEPT 15, 16, 77, 78, 79, 100 THRU
300
SET 99=1 THRU 100000
SET 101=1.0, 2.0, 3.0

SET 105=1.009, 10.2, 13.4, 14.0, 15.0
SET 1001=101/T1, 501/T3, 991/R3
SET 2001=M1,M2
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number. Any set may be redefined by reassigning its identification
number. SETs specified under a SUBCASE command are recognized for that
SUBCASE only (Integer > 0).
i 1, c 1 Grid point identification numbers and component codes. The c values must be of
T1, T2, T3, R1, or R3.
l 1, l 2 etc. Identification names of literals used for matrix or group selection.
i 1, i 2 etc. Identification numbers. If no such identification number exists, the request is
ignored (Integer > 0).
i 3 THRUi 4 Identification numbers ( i 4 > i 3 ) (Integer>0).
Main Index
Set Definition, General Form
Describer Meaning
EXCEPT Set identification numbers following EXCEPT will be deleted from output list as
long as they are in the range of the set defined by the immediately preceding THRU.
An EXCEPT list may not include a THRU list or ALL.
r 1, r 2, etc. Frequencies or times for output. The nearest solution frequency or time will be
output. EXCEPT and THRU cannot be used. If an OFREQ or OTIME command
references the set then the values must be listed in ascending sequences,
r 1 < r 2 < r 3 < r 4 ...etc., otherwise some output may be missing. If an OFREQ or
OTIME command is not present, all frequencies or times will be output (Real >
0.0).
ALL All members of the set will be processed.
Remarks:
1. A SET command may be more than one physical command. A comma at the end of a physical
command signifies a continuation command. Commas may not end a set. THRU may not be used
for continuation. Place a number after the THRU.
2. Set identification numbers following EXCEPT within the range of the THRU must be in ascending
order.
3. In SET 88 above, the numbers 77, 78, etc., are included in the set because they are outside the prior
THRU range.
4. SET commands using the grid point/component code format cannot contain THRU. SETs using
this format should be selected only by the MCFRACTION Case Control command.
5. SET commands using literals apply only to direct matrix input such as K2PP etc. or FLSPOUT panel
grouping.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 539
Process Set Definition
SETP (Case) Process Set Definition
Process sets are used to define lists of SET identifications to be processed individually for data recovery:
Formats:
SETP n = { i 1 [ i 2, i 3 THRU i 4 EXCEPT i 5, i 6, i 7, i 8 THRU i 9 ] }
Examples:
SETP 77=5, 6
SETP 88=5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 THRU 55
Describer Meaning
n SETP identification number. Any SETP may be redefined by reassigning its
identification number. SETPs specified under a SUBCASE command are
recognized for that SUBCASE only (Integer > 0).
SET identification numbers. If no such identification number exists, the request is
ignored (Integer > 0).
EXCEPT Set identification numbers following EXCEPT will be deleted from output list as
long as they are in the range of the set defined by the immediately preceding THRU.
An EXCEPT list may not include a THRU list or ALL.
Remarks:
1. A SETP command may be more than one physical command. A comma at the end of a physical
command signifies a continuation command. Commas may not end a set. THRU may not be used
for continuation—place a number after the THRU.
2. Set identification numbers following EXCEPT,k within the range of the THRU, must be in
ascending order.
3. SETP usage is limited to the EDE, EKE and ESE Case Control commands.
Main Index
Case Control Processing Delimiter
SETS DEFINITION (Case) Case Control Processing Delimiter
Delimites the various type of commands under grid point stress and/or p-version element set definitions. This
command is synonymous with OUTPUT(POST).
Format:
SETS DEFINITION
Example:
SETS DEFINITION
Remark:
1. Either SETS DEFINTIION or OUTPUT(POST) may be specified, but not both.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 541
Case Control Processing Delimiter
SKIP (Case) Case Control Processing Delimiter
Activates or deactivates the execution of subsequent commands in Case Control (including plot commands).
Format:
 
SKIP  ON 
 OFF 
Example:
SKIPOFF
Remarks:
1. SKIPON and SKIPOFF commands may appear as many times as needed in the Case Control
Section.
2. Commands that are skipped will be printed.
3. SKIPON ignores subsequent commands until either a SKIPOFF or BEGIN BULK command is
encountered. This allows the user to omit requests without deleting them from the data. In the
following example, plot commands will be skipped.
TITLE=EXAMPLE
SPC=5
LOAD=6
SKIPON$SKIP PLOT REQUEST
OUTPUT (PLOT)
SET 1 INCLUDE ALL
FIND
PLOT
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
Iterative Solver Method Selection
SMETHOD (Case) Iterative Solver Method Selection
Selects iterative solver method and parameters.
Format:
 ELEMENT 
 
SMETHOD  n 
 
 MATRIX 
Example:
SMETHOD = ELEMENT $ selects element-based iterative solver defaults.
SMETHOD = MATRIX $ selects matrix based iterative solver defaults.
SMETHOD = 1000 $ specifies ID of ITER Bulk Data entry to select
iterative.
Describer Meaning
ELEMENT Selects the element-based iterative solver with default control values.
MATRIX Selects the matrix-based iterative solver with default control values.
n Sets identification of an ITER Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. The matrix-based iterative solver is available in SOLs 101, 106, 108, 111, 153, and 400 and allows
use of all features.
2. The element-based iterative solver is only available in SOLs 101, 200 and 400. SMETHOD must
be placed above all SUBCASEs in this case. It is intended primarily for very large solid element models
and does not handle p-elements. See the ITER Bulk Data entry for a list of restrictions in addition
to details on setting the convergence parameter epsilon.
3. The element-based iterative solver can be used with SMP by setting smp=number on the command
line. Please refer to smp, 9 of this manual for correct usage.
4. For SOL 600, the iterative solver is activated using the MARCSOLV PARAM.
5. GPGPU devices are not supported for iterative methods.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 543
Solution ID Selection
SOLUTION (Case) Solution ID Selection
Selects the solution ID for a 3rd step external superelement data recovery restart in SOL 400.
Format:
SOLUTION = n
Example:
SOLUTION=10
Describer Meaning
n Solution identification number.
Remarks:
1. SOLUTION command is used only in SOL 400 for 3rd step external superelement data recovery
restart.
2. See Remark 8. under EXTDRIN Case Control command’s description for a further explanation and
example.
Main Index
Single Point Constraint Set Selection
SPC (Case) Single Point Constraint Set Selection
Selects a single point constraint set to be applied.
Format:
SPC = n
Example:
SPC=10
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a single-point constraint that appears on an SPC,
SPC1, SPC2 (SOL 700), FRFSPC1 (in FRF Based Assembly or FBA process) or
SPCADD Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. In cyclic symmetry analysis, this command must appear above the first SUBCASE command.
2. Multiple boundary conditions are only supported in SOLs 101, 103, 105, 145, and 200. Multiple
boundary conditions are not allowed for upstream superelements. The BC command must be
specified to define multiple boundary conditions for the residual structure in SOLs 103, 105, 145,
and 200.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 545
Single Point Forces of Constraint Output Request
SPCFORCES (Case) Single Point Forces of Constraint Output Request
Requests the form and type of single point force of constraint vector output.
Format:
SPCFORCES ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH , REAL or NOZPRINT PSDF, ATOC, CRMS ,

 ALL 
RPRINT  
, RPUNCH , [ CID ]) =  n 
NORPRINT  
 NONE 
Examples:
SPCFORCES = 5
SPCFORCES(SORT2, PUNCH, PRINT, IMAG) = ALL
SPCFORCES(PHASE) = NONE
SPCFORCES(SORT2, PRINT, PSDF, CRMS, RPUNCH)=20
SPCFORCES(PRINT, RALL, NORPRINT)=ALL
Describer Meaning
point.
PLOT Generates, but does not print, single point forces of constraint.
in degrees.
NOZPRINT Print only nonzero SPC forces appearing in SORT2 output. This keyword does
not affect SORT1 output.
database for random analysis postprocessing. The request must be made above the
subcase level, and RANDOM must be selected in Case Control.
and RANDOM must be selected in Case Control.
Main Index
Describer Meaning
RANDOM must be selected in Case Control.
must be selected in Case Control.
PRUNCH Writes random analysis results in the punch file.
CID Request to print output coordinate system ID in printed output file (.f06).
ALL Single point forces of constraint for all points will be output. See Remarks 2.
and 5.
NONE Single point forces of constraint for no points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only single point
constraint forces for points with identification numbers that appear on this SET
Remarks:
3. In a statics problem, a request for SORT2 causes loads at all points (zero and nonzero) to be output.
4. SPCFORCES=NONE overrides an overall output request.
5. In SORT1 format, SPCFORCES recovered at consecutively numbered scalar points are printed in
groups of six (sextets) per line of output. However, if a scalar point is not consecutively numbered, it
will begin a new sextet on a new line of output. If a sextet can be formed and all values are zero, then
the line will not be printed. If a sextet cannot be formed, then zero values may be output.
6. SPCFORCES results are output in the global coordinate system (see field CD on the GRID Bulk
Data entry).
7. In SOLs 129 and 159, SPCFORCES results do not include the effects of mass and damping elements.
8. In all solution sequences except SOLs 129 and 159, SPCFORCES results do include the effects of
mass and damping, except damping selected by the SDAMPING Case Control command.
PARAM,DYNSPCF,OLD may be specified to obtain SPCFORCES results, which do not include
mass and damping effects.
9. In inertia relief analysis, the SPCFORCES output is interpreted differently for SOLs 1, 101, and 200:
a. In SOL 1, the SPCFORCE output reflects the effects due to the applied loads only, and not the
inertial loads.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 547
b. In SOLs 101 and 200, the SPCFORCE output includes both the effects due to inertial loads and
applied loads.
random analysis.
11. Note that the CID keyword affects only grid point related output such as DISP, VELO, ACCE,
OLOAD, SPCF and MPCF. In addition, the CID keyword needs to appear only once in a grid-
related output command, anywhere in the Case Control Section, to turn on the printing algorithm.
Main Index
Export of Spline Matrix
SPLINOUT (Case) Export of Spline Matrix
Requests output of the spline matrix for external use.
Format:
 BOTH 
  
SPLINOUT  DISP ,  ( OP2 = unit ) 
  DMIPCH 
 FORCE 
Examples:
Describer Meaning
BOTH Requests output of the force and displacement splines (Default).
DISP Requests output of only the displacement splines.
FORCE Requests output of only the force splines.
OP2 Requests output to an .op2 file
unit Unit the .op2 file is assigned to
DMIPCH Requests output to a .pch file.
Remarks:
1. Matrices are output in external sort.
2. If displacement and force splines are identical, only displacement splines are output.
3. Option FACTORS is only allowed together with option OP2.
4. If OP2 = unit is specified, a table relating the matrix columns to structural degrees of freedom, and
the matrix rows to aerodynamic degrees of freedom, will be written to the .op2 file.
5. If OP2 = unit is specified, an appropriate ASSIGN OP2 statement must be present in the File
Management Section for this unit.
6. If DMIPCH is specified, DMI entries are written to the.pch file.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 549
Static Solution Selection for Differential Stiffness
STATSUB (Case) Static Solution Selection for Differential Stiffness
Selects the static solution to use in forming the differential stiffness for buckling analysis, normal modes,
complex eigenvalue, frequency response and transient response analysis.
Format:
BUCKLING
STATSUB ( ) = n
PRELOAD
Examples:
STATSUB=23
STAT=4
STATSUB(PREL)=7
Describer Meaning
BUCKLING Subcase ID number corresponding to static subcase of buckling or varying load
(Default in buckling analysis).
PRELOAD Subcase ID number corresponding to static subcase of preload or constant load
(Default in dynamic analysis).
n Subcase identification number of a prior subcase specified for static analysis (Integer
> 0).
Remarks:
1. STATSUB may be used in SOLs 101,103, 105, 107 through 112, 115, 116, 200 and SOL 400
(ANALYSIS = BUCKLING only in SOL 200 and SOL 400).
2. STATSUB must be specified in the same subcase that contains the METHOD selection for buckling
or normal modes, CMETHOD for complex eigenvalue analysis, TSTEP for transient response, and
FREQ for frequency response.
3. In SOL 105, if it is intended that results from the first static subcase are used to compute the
differential stiffness, then the STATSUB command is not required. That is, the default for
STATSUB is the first static subcase identification. In SOLs 103 and 107 through 112, 115, and 116,
STATSUB must reference a separate static subcase.
4. In dynamic analysis, only one STATSUB command may be specified in each dynamic subcase. In
buckling analysis with a preload, both STATSUB (BUCKLING) and STATSUB(PRELOAD) must
be specified in each buckling subcase. STATSUB(PRELOAD) is not supported in SOL 200 or SOL
400. Buckling Analysis with a preload is not supported in SOL 200 and SOL 400.
5. In dynamic analysis, any subcase that does not contain a CMETHOD command in SOLs 107 and
110, a FREQUENCY command in SOLs 108 and 111, and a TSTEP command in SOLs 109 and
112, will be treated as a static subcase.
6. SOL 200 and SOL 400 support linear buckling analysis only, but do not support post-buckling
(nonlinear buckling analysis)
Main Index
Static Solution Selection for Differential Stiffness
7. In versions prior to 2018, if it was desired to have a dynamic subcase with the effects of preload and
another subcase without the effects of preload, then a static subcase with null load was required and
its ID was referenced by STATSUB in the dynamic subcase without the effects of preload. In version
2018, STATSUB in the dynamic subcase without the effects of preload is no longer required. If the
STATSUB is not removed and still references the static subcase with null load, then User Fatal
Message 9244 will be issued.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 551
Step Delimiter
STEP (Case) Step Delimiter
Delimits and identifies a nonlinear analysis step for SOL 400.
Format:
STEP=n
Examples:
STEP=10
Describer Meaning
n Step identification number (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. The STEP command can only be used in nonlinear solution sequence SOL 400 (NONLIN).
2. The STEP command is to be used below the SUBCASE Case Control command. If no SUBCASE
is specified, MSC Nastran creates a default SUBCASE 1.
3. The STEP identification number n in a SUBCASE must be in increasing order, and less than
9999999.
4. The following example illustrates a typical application of SUBCASE and STEP:
SUBCASE 1
STEP 1
LOAD = 1
STEP 2
LOAD = 2
SUBCASE 2
STEP 10
LOAD = 10
STEP 20
LOAD = 20
5. The solutions of all SUBCASEs are independent of each other. However, the solution of any STEP
is a continuation of the solution of the previous STEP.
Main Index
Randomization of Model Parameters
STOCHASTICS (Case) Randomization of Model Parameters
Request randomization of all or selected subsets of model parameters.
Format:
 
STOCHASTICS =  ALL 
 n 
Examples:
STOCHASTICS=10
Describer Meaning
ALL All real values of C-entries, M-entries, P-entries, loading entries, and SPCD entries
are to be randomized.
n Set identification number of a STOCHAS Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. Only one STOCHASTICS command may appear in the Case Control Section and should appear
above all SUBCASE commands.
2. The STOCHASTICS = n command may be used to request randomizing a set of analysis model
parameters with user specified statistics. (See Remark 1 of the STOCHAS Bulk Data entry.)
3. The default (STOCHASTICS = all) randomizes all scalar analysis model parameters that are real
values on the C-entries, M-Entries, P-entries, all loading entries, and SPCD entries with default
coefficients of variance (0.05) and multipliers of standard deviations (m=3.).
4. This command will only invoke a single Nastran randomization run. Separate runs can be submitted
to achieve different randomizations.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 553
Element Strain Output Request
STRAIN (Case) Element Strain Output Request
Requests the form and type of strain output.
Format:
STRAIN ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH REAL or IMAG , VONMISES , STRCUR ,

SORT2 PLOT PHASE MAXS or SHEAR FIBER
CENTER  ALL 
CORNER or BILIN , PSDF, ATOC, CRMS RPRINT  
, RPUNCH ) =  n 
SGAGE or RALL NORPRINT  
CUBIC  NONE 
Examples:
STRAIN=5
STRAIN(CORNER)=ALL
STRAIN(PRINT,PHASE)=15
STRAIN(PLOT)=ALL
STRAIN(PRINT, PSDF, CRMS, RPUNCH)=20
STRAIN(PRINT, RALL,NORPRINT)=ALL
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of elements for each load, frequency,
eigenvalue, or time, depending on the solution sequence.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of frequency or time for each element.
PLOT Generates strain for the requested set, but no printer output.
in degrees.
database for random analysis postprocessing. The request must be made above the
random analysis postprocessing. The request must be made above the subcase
level, and RANDOM must be selected in Case Control.
CRMS Requests the cumulative root mean square function to be calculated for random
Main Index
Describer Meaning
VONMISES von Mises strains are output.
MAXS or Maximum shear strains are output.
SHEAR
STRCUR Strain at the reference plane and curvatures are output for plate elements.
FIBER Strain at locations Z1, Z2 are computed for plate elements.
CENTER Output CQUAD4 element strains at the center only.
CORNER or Output CQUAD4 element strains at the center and grid points. Using strain gage
BILIN approach with bilinear extrapolation.
SGAGE Output CQUAD4 element strains at center and grid points using strain gage
approach.
CUBIC Output CQUAD4 element strains at center and grid points using cubic bending
correction.
ALL Strain for all elements will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only strain for
NONE No element strain will be output.
Remarks:
1. Fully accurate nonlinear strains for nonlinear elements are requested by the STRESS command and
appear in the nonlinear stress output. In SOLs 106 and 129, if LGDISP > 0 the center, and if
requested for CQUAD4 the corner, strains are computed from the displacements alone and are only
approximate. If LGDISP = -1 and material nonlinear then no STRAIN output will be created. In
SOL 400, if enhanced material options are used, the computed strains are accurate and in this case a
CQUAD4 corner request is ignored.
2. In SOLs 106 and 129, the STRAIN request pertains only to linear elements and only if the parameter
LGDISP is -1, which is the default. Nonlinear strains for nonlinear elements are requested by the
STRESS command and appear in the nonlinear stress output.
4. STRAIN=NONE overrides an overall output request.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 555
5. The PLOT option is used when strains are requested for postprocessing, but no printer output is
desired.
6. Definitions of stress, strain, curvature, and output locations are given in the Structural Elements (p. 39)
in the .
7. If the STRCUR option is selected, the values of Z1 will be set to 0.0. and Z2 will be set to -1.0 on
the output.
8. The VONMISES, MAXS, and SHEAR options are ignored in the complex eigenvalue and frequency
response solution sequences.
and FORCE commands. (In superelement analysis, the first subcase refers to the first subcase of each
superelement. Therefore, it is recommended that these options be specified above all subcases.)
Consequently, options specified in subcases other than the first subcase will be ignored. See also
Remark 8 under the FORCE (Case), 357 Case Control command for further discussion.
10. See Remark 2 under the DISPLACEMENT (Case), 282 Case Control command for a discussion of SORT1
and SORT2.
random analysis.
Main Index
Element Stress Output Request
STRESS (Case) Element Stress Output Request
Requests the form and type of element stress output. Note: ELSTRESS is an equivalent command.
Format:
STRESS ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH , REAL or IMAG , VONMISES ,

SORT2 PLOT PHASE MAXS or SHEAR
CENTER  ALL 
CUBIC RPRINT  
, PSDF, ATOC, CRMS , RPUNCH ) =  n 
SGAGE or RALL NORPRINT  
CORNER or BILIN  NONE 
Examples:
STRESS=5
STRESS(CORNER)=ALL
STRESS (SORT1,PRINT,PUNCH,PHASE)=15
STRESS(PLOT)=ALL
STRESS(PRINT, PSDF, CRMS, RPUNCH)=20
STRESS(PRINT, RALL, NORPRINT)=ALL
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of elements for each load,
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of frequency or time for each
element type.
PLOT Generates stresses for requested set, but no printer output.
is in degrees.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 557
Describer Meaning
VONMISES Requests von Mises stresses.
MAXS or Requests maximum shear in the plane for shell elements and octahedral stress
SHEAR for solid elements.
CENTER Requests CQUAD4, CQUADR and CTRIAR element stresses at the center
only. The default for CQUAD4 is CENTER. The default for CQUADR and
CTRIAR is CORNER.
CUBIC Requests CQUAD4 element stresses at the center and grid points using strain
gage approach with cubic bending correction.
SGAGE Requests CQUAD4 element stresses at center and grid points using strain gage
approach.
CORNER or Requests CQUAD4, CQUADR. and CTRIAR element stresses at center and
BILIN grid points using bilinear extrapolation.
ALL Stresses for all elements will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only stresses for
NONE No element stress will be output.
Remarks:
2. ALL should not be used in a transient problem due to excessive output.
3. See Remark 2 under the DISPLACEMENT (Case), 282 Case Control command description for a discussion
of SORT1 and SORT2.
4. ELSTRESS is an alternate form and is equivalent to STRESS.
5. STRESS=NONE overrides an overall output request.
6. The PLOT option is used when contour plots of stresses are requested, but no printer output of
stresses is desired. However, in versions prior to MSC Nastran 2014, in nonlinear analysis, the
nonlinear stresses will still be printed unless NLSTRESS(PLOT) is specified.
Main Index
7. The VONMISES option is ignored for ply stresses.

8. The VONMISES, MAXS, and SHEAR options are ignored in the complex eigenvalue and frequency
response solution sequences.
and FORCE commands. (In superelement analysis, the first subcase refers to the first subcase of each
superelement. Therefore, it is recommended that these options be specified above all subcases.)
Consequently, options specified in subcases other than the first subcase will be ignored. See also
Remark 8 under the FORCE (Case), 357 Case Control command for further discussion.
10. For composite ply output, the grid point option for CQUAD4 elements will be reset to the default
option (CENTER).
11. MAXS for shell elements is not an equivalent stress.
random analysis.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 559
Grid Point Stress Output Request
STRFIELD (Case) Grid Point Stress Output Request
Requests the computation of grid point stresses for graphical postprocessing and mesh stress discontinuities.
Format:
 
STRFIELD =  ALL 
 n 
Examples:
STRFIELD=ALL
STRFIELD=21
Describer Meaning
ALL Grid point stress requests for all surfaces and volumes defined in the
OUTPUT(POST) Section will be saved for postprocessing.
and volumes with identification numbers that appear on this SET command, and
in the OUTPUT(POST) Section, will be included in the grid point stress output
request for postprocessing (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. The STRFIELD command is required for the graphical display of grid point stresses in postprocessors
that use the .xdb file (PARAM,POST,0), or when the GPSDCON or ELSDCON commands are
specified, and does not provide printed output. The GPSTRESS command can be used to obtain
printed output.
SURFACE and VOLUME Case Control commands.
3. Element stress output (STRESS) must be requested for elements referenced on requested SURFACE
and VOLUME Case Control commands.
4. In nonlinear static and transient analysis, grid point stresses are computed only if parameter LGDISP
is -1, which is the default. Also, in nonlinear transient analysis, grid point stresses are computed only
for elements with linear material properties.
Main Index
Subcase Delimiter
SUBCASE (Case) Subcase Delimiter
Delimits and identifies a subcase.
Format:
SUBCASE=n
Example:
SUBCASE=101
Describer Meaning
n Subcase identification number (9999999 > Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. The subcase identification number, n, must be greater than all previous subcase identification
numbers.
2. Plot requests and RANDPS requests refer to n.
3. See the MODES Case Control command for use of this command in normal modes analysis.
4. If a comment follows n, then the first few characters of the comment will appear in the subcase label
in the upper right-hand corner of the output.
5. Note that in nonlinear statics (SOL106/129), SUBCASE's are not stand-alone solutions like in other
solution sequences. They act as a load-progression, and the ending conditions of one SUBCASE
become the initial conditions of the next SUBCASE.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 561
Combination Subcase Delimiter
SUBCOM (Case) Combination Subcase Delimiter
Delimits and identifies a combination subcase.
Format:
SUBCOM = n
Example:
SUBCOM = 125
Describer Meaning
n Subcase identification number (Integer > 2).
Remarks:
1. The subcase identification number, n, must be greater than all previous subcase identification
numbers.
2. A SUBSEQ command must follow this command.
3. SUBCOM may only be used in SOL 101 (statics) or SOL 144 (static aeroelasticity) and in SOL 200
with ANALYSIS=STATICS or ANALYSIS=SAERO.
4. Output requests above the subcase level will be used.
temperature field in the SUBCOM with a TEMP(LOAD) command, or the element deformations
with a DEFORM command.
6. SUBCOMs may be specified in superelement analysis with the following recommendations:
a. For each superelement, specify its SUBCASE(s) consecutively, directly followed by its
SUBCOM(s).
b. Specify a SUPER command with a new load sequence number under each SUBCOM command.
The following example demonstrates a model with one superelement and one load combination:
SUBCASE 101
SUPER=1,1
LOAD=100
SUBCASE 102
SUPER=1,2
LOAD=200
SUBCOM 110
LABEL=COMBINE SUBCASES 101 AND 102
SUPER=1,3
SUBSEQ=1.,1.
SUBCASE 1001
SUBCASE 1002
SUBCOM 1010
SUBSEQ=1.,1.
Main Index
Combination Subcase Delimiter
7. For static aeroelasticity, only the displacement/element responses are combined. Trim, stability
derivative and monitor point results are not combined.
8. SUBCOMs are not allowed in external superelement creation runs and are ignored in external
superelement data recovery in assembly runs.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 563
Subcase Sequence Coefficients
SUBSEQ (Case) Subcase Sequence Coefficients
Gives the coefficients for forming a linear combination of the previous subcases.
Format:
SUBSEQ=R1 [, R2, R3, ..., Rn]
Example:
SUBSEQ=1.0, -1 .0, 0.0, 2.0
Describer Meaning
Ri Coefficients of the previously occurring subcases. See Remark 4. (Real).
Remarks:
1. The SUBSEQ command can only appear after a SUBCOM command.
2. SUBSEQ may be only used in SOL 101 (statics) or SOL 144 (static aeroelasticity) and in SOL 200
with ANALYSIS=STATICS or ANALYSIS=SAERO.
3. This command list is limited to a maximum of 200 numbers.
4. R1 to Rn refer to the immediately preceding subcases. In other words, Rn is applied to the most
recently appearing subcase, R(n - 1) is applied to the second most recently appearing subcase, and so
on. The embedded comments ($) describe the following example:
DISPL = ALL
SUBCASE 1
SUBCASE 2
SUBCOM 3
SUBSEQ = 1.0, -1.0 $ SUBCASE 1 - SUBCASE 2
SUBCASE 11
SUBCASE 12
SUBCOM 13
SUBSEQ = 0.0, 0.0, 1.0, -1 .0 $ SUBCASE 11 - SUBCASE 12
or
SUBSEQ = 1.0, - 1.0 $ EQUIVALENT TO PRECEDING COMMAND. USE ONLY
ONE.
Main Index
Subcase Factors for Combination
SUBSEQ1 (Case) Subcase Factors for Combination
Gives the factors for linear combination of a specific group of SUBCASEs.
Format:
SUBSEQ1= s0, s1, sub1, s2, sub2, [sn, subn]
Example:
SUBSEQ1= 1.0, 1.0, 101, -1.0, 102
Describer Meaning
S0 Factor for all SUBCASEs involved. (No default; Real<>0.).
Sn Factor applicable to SUBn only (Real; No default).
SUBn SUBCASE ID (No default; Integer>0).
Remarks:
1. The SUBSEQ1 command can only appear after a SUBCOM command.
2. SUBSEQ1 may only be used in SOL 101 (Statics) or SOL 144 (Static Aeroelasticity) and in SOL 200
with ANALYSIS=STATIC or ANALYSIS=SAERO.
3. SUBSEQ1 and SUBSEQ are mutually exclusive and can't both appear under a SUBCOM.
4. S0, S1 and SUB1are required input for SUBSEQ1. S2,SUB2 to Sn,SUBn pair are optional.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 565
SUBSTEP Delimiter
SUBSTEP (Case) SUBSTEP Delimiter
Delimites and identifies a nonlinear analysis SUBSTEP for COUPLED analysis in SOL 400.
Format:
SUBSTEP=n
Examples:
STEP=50
NLSTEP=10
SUBSTEP=1
ANALYSIS=HSTAT
SUBSTEP=2
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
Describer Meaning
n Substep identification number. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. The SUBSTEP command can only be used in nonlinear solution sequence SOL 400 (NONLIN).
2. The SUBSTEP command can only be used in a STEP command.
3. When used in a STEP command two or more SUBSTEP commands must occur.
4. Each SUBSTEP must contain a unique ANALYSIS=type statement. Currently there is a limitation of
only two SUBSTEPs per STEP with the following options:
• ANALYSIS=HSTAT for the first SUBSTEP and ANALYSIS=NLSTAT for the second
SUBSTEP.
• ANALYSIS=HTRAN for the first SUBSTEP and ANALYSIS=NLTRAN for the second
SUBSTEP
• ANALYSIS=HTRAN for the first SUBSTEP and ANALYSIS=NLSTAT for the second
SUBSTEP
• ANALYSIS=HSTAT for the first SUBSTEP and ANALYSIS=NLTRAN for the second
SUBSTEP
5. Within a STEP the SUBSTEP identification number n must be in increasing order and not greater
then 9999999.
6. The following example illustrates a typical application of SUBCASE, STEP, and SUBSTEPs
Subcase 100
STEP 10
STRESS= ALL
NLSTRESS=ALL
SET 1456 = list
NLSTEP=84
SubSTEP 1
Main Index
SUBSTEP Delimiter
ANALYSIS=HSTAT
THERMAL=ALL
FLUX=ALL
SPC=35
LOAD=11
SubSTEP 2
ANALYSIS=NLSTAT
SPC=2
LOAD=110
DISP(PLOT)=1456
7. The solutions of all SUBCASEs are independent of each other. The solution of any STEP is a
continuation of the solution of the previous STEP. The solutions of the SUBSTEPs occur simultaneously
within a STEP.
8. In coupled analysis, TEMP(LOAD)=m will be ignored as the temperature loading from the thermal
substep is automatically transferred to the mechanical substep. Note that in this multi-physics
coupled framework, both the heat transfer and structural physics are executed on the same mesh with
the same time steps.
9. In coupled analysis, TEMP(INIT)=n will be honored. It should be noted that when a thermo-
mechanical static analysis is defined, TEMP(INIT) defines the initial temperature for both the
thermal and mechanical substeps. Note that when a transient thermal-static mechanical analysis is
define, IC=n should be used to define the initial temperature for the thermal substep and
TEMP(INIT)=n (the same ID n) should be used to define the initial temperature for the structural
substep. Then an initial thermal strain is defined as:
εT = A ( T ) ⋅ ( T – TREF ) – A ( T o ) ⋅ ( T o – TREF )
where T o comes from TEMP(INIT) and TREF comes from the material entry.
10. The LOADSET Case Control Command is not allowed with this command. All dynamic loading
must be applied through the use of the DLOAD Case Control command.
11. For coupled analysis, i.e., when two or more sub-steps are defined, a single Bulk Data entry NLSTEP
must be included in the STEP command containing the SUBSTEP commands. It must occur above
or in the STEP command and above the first SUBSTEP command.
The loads and constraints can be independently defined for each physics under the relevant
SUBSTEP. The commands that are normally used for single physics are applicable. For, e.g., for a
HTRAN-NLSTAT coupled analysis, DLOAD should be used n the HTRAN substep while LOAD
should be used in the NLSTAT substep.
12. Any case control command will apply to all SUBSTEPs when and only when it is above all the
SUBSTEPs of the STEP.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 567
Output Subtitle
SUBTITLE (Case) Output Subtitle
Defines a subtitle that will appear on the second heading line of each page of printer output.
Format:
SUBTITLE=subtitle
Example:
SUBTITLE=PROBLEM NO. 5-1A
Describer Meaning
subtitle Any character string.
Remarks:
1. SUBTITLE appearing under a SUBCASE command will appear in the output for that subcase only.
2. SUBTITLE appearing before all SUBCASE commands will appear in the output for all subcases
except those in Remark 1.
3. If no SUBTITLE command is present, the subtitle line will be blank.
4. The subtitle also appears on plotter output.
Main Index
Superelement Subcase Assignment
SUPER (Case) Superelement Subcase Assignment
Assigns a subcase(s) to a superelement or set of superelements.
Format:
 
 ALL 
 
SUPER =   n  
  [ , l ] 
  i  
 
Examples:
SUPER=17, 3
SUPER=15
SUPER=ALL
Describer Meaning
i Superelement identification number (Integer > 0).
ALL The subcase is assigned to all superelements and all loading conditions (Default).
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. The subcase is assigned
to all superelements with identification numbers that appear on this SET command
(Integer > 0).
l Load sequence number (Integer > 0; Default=1).
Remarks:
1. All subcases with requests for specific superelement(s) must contain the SUPER command. If no
SUPER command is specified in the Case Control Section, then all subcases will be assigned to all
superelements; i.e., SUPER=ALL is the default.
2. All subcases associated with superelements must precede those for the residual structure except when
SUPER=ALL or SUPER=n and the selected set includes the residual structure.
3. The load sequence number is only used in static analysis and frequency response analysis when there
are multiple loading conditions. Also, the residual structure must have a subcase specified for each
unique load condition. This is required because the number of residual structure subcases is used to
determine the number of load conditions for all superelements.
4. The load sequence number is associated with the order of the subcases for the residual structure; i.e.,
the third loading condition is associated with the third subcase for the residual structure.
5. Subcases are required for superelements when there is a load, constraint, or output request.
6. If a set is referenced by n, then the SET identification number must be unique with respect to any
superelement identification numbers. In addition, the same sets must be used for all loading
conditions.
7. If the ALL option is used, it must be used for all loading conditions.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 569
Superelement Subcase Assignment
8. If there are no superelements in the model then the SUPER command will be ignored except in 3-
step external superelement data recovery restarts in SOL 400. See Remarks 9 and 10 under the
EXTDRIN Case Control command description.
Main Index
Fictitious Support Set Selection
SUPORT1 (Case) Fictitious Support Set Selection
Selects the fictitious support set (SUPORT1 or SUPORT6 entries only) to be applied to the model.
Format:
SUPORT1=n
Examples:
SUPORT1=15
SUPO=4
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of fictitious support set defined on the SUPORT1 or SUPORT6
Bulk Data entries (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. SUPORT1 or SUPORT6 Bulk Data entries will not be used unless selected in the Case Control
Section by the SUPORT1 command.
2. SUPORT entries will be applied in all subcases.
3. For SOL 600, Case Control command SUPORT1 must reference a SUPORT6 Bulk Data entry with
ID = N.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 571
Solution Set Eigenvector Output Request
SVECTOR (Case) Solution Set Eigenvector Output Request
Requests the form and type of solution set eigenvector output.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SVECTOR( PRINT,PUNCH ) =  n 
PLOT  
 NONE 
Examples:
SVECTOR=ALL
SVECTOR(PUNCH)=NONE
Describer Meaning
PLOT The eigenvectors will be generated but not written to the print or punch files.
ALL Displacements for all points (modes) will be output.
NONE Displacements for no points (modes) will be output.
Remarks:
2. SVECTOR=NONE overrides an overall output request.
3. Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each eigenvector.
Main Index
Solution Set Velocity Output Request
SVELOCITY (Case) Solution Set Velocity Output Request
Requests the form and type of solution set velocity output.
Format:
 ALL 
 
SVELOCITY ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH, REAL or IMAG ) =  n 
SORT2 PHASE  
 NONE 
Examples:
SVELOCITY=5
SVELOCITY(SORT2,PUNCH,PRINT,PHASE)=ALL
Describer Meaning
is in degrees.
ALL Velocity for all solution points (modes) will be output.
NONE Velocity for no solution points (modes) will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only velocities of
Remarks:
2. Velocity output is only available for transient and frequency response problems.
3. The defaults for SORT1 and SORT2 depend on the type of analysis, and is discussed in Remark 2
commands SACC, SDIS, and SVEL, then the remaining commands will also be SORT1.
4. SVELOCITY=NONE overrides an overall output request.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 573
Symmetry Subcase Delimiter
SYM (Case) Symmetry Subcase Delimiter
Delimits and identifies a symmetry subcase.
Format:
SYM=n
Example:
SYM=123
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. The subcase identification number n must be greater than all previous subcase identification
numbers.
2. Plot commands should refer to n.
3. Overall output commands will not propagate into a SYM subcase (i.e., any output desired must be
requested within the subcase).
4. SYM may only be used in statics or inertia relief problems.
Main Index
Symmetry Combination Subcase Delimiter
SYMCOM (Case) Symmetry Combination Subcase Delimiter
Delimits and identifies a symmetry combination subcase.
Format:
SYMCOM=n
Example:
SYMCOM=123
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. The subcase identification number n must be greater than all previous subcase identification
numbers.
2. SYMCOM may only be used in statics problems.
temperature field in the SYMCOM by use of a TEMP(LOAD) command, or the element
deformations by a DEFORM command.
4. An alternate command is the SUBCOM command.
5. SYMCOMs may be specified in superelement analysis with the following recommendations:
a. For each superelement, specify its SUBCASEs consecutively, directly followed by its
SYMCOM(s).
b. Specify a SUPER command with a new load sequence number under each SYMCOM command.
The following example represents a model with one superelement and one load combination:
SUBCASE 101
SUPER=1,1
LOAD=100
SUBCASE 102
SUPER=1,2
LOAD=200
SYMCOM 110
SUPER=1,3
SYMSEQ=1.,1.
SUBCASE 1001
SUBCASE 1002
SYMCOM 1010
SYMSEQ=1.,1.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 575
Symmetry Sequence Coefficients
SYMSEQ (Case) Symmetry Sequence Coefficients
Specifies the coefficients for combining symmetry subcases into the total structure.
Format:
SYMSEQ=R1 [,R2,R3,..., Rn]
Example:
SYMSEQ=1.0, -2.0, 3.0, 4.0
Describer Meaning
Ri Coefficients of the previously occurring n SYM subcases. (Real)
Remarks:
1. SYMSEQ may only appear after a SYMCOM command.
2. The default value for the coefficients is 1.0 if no SYMSEQ command appears.
3. SYMSEQ may only be used in static analysis or inertia relief.
4. Ri is limited to a maximum of 200 numbers.
Main Index
Temperature Set Selection
TEMPERATURE (Case) Temperature Set Selection
Selects the temperature set to be used in either material property calculations or thermal loading in heat
transfer and structural analysis.
Format:
 INITIAL  GRID
 
TEMPERATURE  MATERIAL  , HSUBCASE = i , HSTEP = j , HTIME = t ,VERIFY= ELEMENT = n
 LOAD  BOTH
 ALL
 BOTH  NONE
Examples:
TEMPERATURE(LOAD)=15
TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL)=7
TEMPERATURE=7
TEMPERATURE(LOAD,HSUBCASE=20,HTIME=12.0)=39
Describer Meaning
MATERIAL The selected temperature set will be used to determine temperature-dependent
material properties indicated on MATTi Bulk Data entries. See Remarks 6., 7., and
8.
LOAD The selected temperature set will be used to determine an equivalent static load and
to update material properties in a nonlinear analysis. See Remarks 2., 5., 6., 7. and 14.
BOTH Both MATERIAL and LOAD will use the same temperature set.
n Set identification number of TEMP, TEMPD, TEMPP1,TEMPB3, TEMPRB,
TEMPF, or TEMPAX Bulk Data entries (Integer > 0).
INITIAL The selected temperature table will be used to determine initial temperature
distribution in nonlinear static analysis. See Remarks 4., 6., 7., 8., 9., and 12.
HSUBCASE Specifies a SUBCASE executed in the selected thermal job. See Remark 14.
i Identification number of a SUBCASE executed in the selected thermal job.
(Integer > 0, Default = 0 is the first SUBCASE) See Remark 14.
HSTEP Specifies a STEP executed in the selected thermal job. See Remark 14.
j Identification number of a STEP executed in the selected thermal job. (Integer > 0,
Default = 0 is the first STEP) See Remark 14.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 577
Describer Meaning
HTIME Specifies the time of a time step executed in the selected nonlinear transient thermal
job. See Remark 14.
t Time of a time step executed in the selected nonlinear transient thermal job.
(Real > 0.0, Default is the last time of the specified SUBCASE and/or STEP) See
Remark 14.
ALL Selects all time steps executed in the selected nonlinear transient thermal job. See
Remark 14.
VERIFY Output temperature verification data output requested
GRID Output grid temperature verification data
ELEMENT Output element temperature verification data
BOTH Output both grid and element temperature verification data
NONE Do not output any verification data
Remarks:
1. In linear analysis, only one TEMP(MATE) may be made in any problem and should be specified
above the subcase level. If there are multiple subcase and TEMP(MATE) is not above the first
subcase, then it must appear in the last subcase or it will be ignored. See also Remarks 6. and 7.
2. The total load applied will be the sum of external (LOAD command), thermal (TEMP(LOAD)
command), element deformation (DEFORM command), and constrained displacement (SPC
command) loads.
3. Static, thermal, and element deformation loads should have unique set identification numbers.
4. INITIAL is used in steady state heat transfer analysis for conduction material properties, and provides
starting values for iteration. In structural analysis, TEMP(INIT) is used to specify an initial
temperature. It may appear above or in the first subcase. In SOL 400, it may appear above or in the
first STEP.
5. In superelement data recovery restarts, TEMPERATURE(LOAD) requests must be respecified in the
Case Control Section.
6. In linear static analysis, temperature strains are calculated by
εT = A ( To ) ⋅ ( T – To )
where A ( T o ) is the thermal expansion coefficient defined on the MATi Bulk Data entries, T is the
load temperature defined with TEMPERATURE(LOAD), and T o is the initial temperature defined
as follows. The following rules apply for TEMPERATURE(INITIAL),
TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL), and TREF on the MATi entries:
a. If TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) and TREF are specified, then the TEMPERATURE(INITIAL)
set will be used as the initial temperature to calculate both the loads and the material properties.
Main Index
b. If TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) and TREF are specified, then TREF will be used as the initial
temperature in calculating the load and the TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) set will be used for
the calculation of material properties.
c. If neither TEMPERATURE(INITIAL), TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL), nor
TEMPERATURE(BOTH) is present, TREF will be used to calculate both the load and the
material properties and will be obtained from the MATi entry. The MATTi is not used in this
case.
7. In nonlinear static analysis, temperature strains are calculated with
ε T = A ( T ) ⋅ ( T – TREF ) – A ( T o ) ⋅ ( T o – TREF )
where A ( T ) is the thermal expansion coefficient defined on the MATi Bulk Data entries, T is the load
temperature defined with TEMPERATURE(LOAD), and T o is the initial temperature defined with
TEMPERATURE(INITIAL). The following rules apply:
a. The specification of TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) or TEMPERATURE(BOTH) will cause a
fatal error.
b. If a subcase does not contain a TEMPERATURE(LOAD) request, then the thermal load set will
default to the TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) set.
c. TEMPERATURE(LOAD) will also cause the update of temperature-dependent material
properties due to the temperatures selected in the thermal load set. Temperature-dependent
material properties are specified with MATi, MATTi, MATS1, and/or TABLEST Bulk Data
entries.
d. If TREF and TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) are specified, then the TEMPERATURE(INITIAL)
set will be used as the initial temperature to calculate both the loads and the material properties.
Both are used in the definition of thermal strain.
For SOL 600, TREF and TEMP(INIT) must be consistent (the same values) or unexpected results
may occur.
8. TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) and TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) cannot be specified
simultaneously in the same run.
9. TEMP(INIT) is not used with TEMPAX.
10. Temperature loads cause incorrect element forces and stresses in all the dynamic analysis except SOL
400 nonlinear transient analysis with the elements having nonlinear capability.
It should be noted that:
a. For nonlinear dynamics analysis with SOL 400, TEMPERATURE/THERMAL load can't be
applied by TEMP/DLOAD (Case Control) and TEMPD/TLOADi (Bulk Data), this load should
be applied by TEMP(Case Control) and TTEMP(Bulk Data);
b. For pure linear analysis with SOL 400, the TEMP/DLOAD (Case Control) and
TEMPD/TLOADi (Bulk Data) has to be used to apply the temperature load.
11. In linear analysis, TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) is not supported for hyperelastic elements
(MATHP). TEMP(INIT) must be placed above the subcase level, and TEMP(LOAD) placed within
the subcase.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 579
12. For layered composites, neither the TREF specified on the material entries, nor TEMP(INIT) nor
TEMP(MATE) are used to determine ply reference temperature. The TREF on the PCOMP or
PCOMPG entries is used for all plies of the element. This is true for both linear and nonlinear
analysis. This reference temperature is only used for determining the material properties, unless
TEMP(INIT) is not defined, in which case it also defines TEMP(INIT) for the calculation of thermal
strains.
13. For SOL 600, in a thermal stress analysis where the temperatures were produced in a previous SOL
600 simulation, the use of MCHSTAT is preferred.
14. For TEMPERATURE(LOAD) requests in SOL 400, HSUBCASE, HSTEP, and HTIME are used
to retrieve the temperature results from an existing thermal database. This feature allows user to select
either steady state or transient thermal results for nonlinear structural analysis, with the flexibility of
different time steps and dissimilar mesh sizes between thermal and structural runs. The following
rules apply for using this capability:
• HSUBCASE, HSTEP, and HTIME keywords must follow a LOAD keyword.
• Although all three keywords have default values, at lease one keyword must exist to apply this
uncoupled multi-physics feature in analysis.
• HTIME=ALL is used in nonlinear transient structural analysis to perform real time temperature
interpolations. In this case, the nodal temperatures of nonlinear elements are updated at each time
step. These temperatures are equal to the temperature results of the selected thermal database at
current time.
• The set IDs of TEMP(LOAD) must be different from the set IDs of TEMP(INIT).
• To save temperature results of thermal analysis in MASTER nastran database, use the following
command.
nastran thermal_job_name scratch=no
In addition, the user must specify the following Bulk Data entry:
PARAM,NLPACK,-1
for transient thermal models with number of time steps greater than the default NLPACK output
time steps.
• The following File Management Statements are required in the current structural model to select
the thermal database.
ASSIGN hrun='thermal_job_name.MASTER'
DBLOC DATABLK=(HEATDB) LOGI=hrun
• Contact body integrity is not maintained while doing the thermal mapping. While this would
not be a restriction for bodies that are not physically in contact or in glued thermal contact, it
could lead to undesirable temperature mapping for bodies that are in regular thermal contact
with temperature gradients across the contact interface.
Main Index
Conditions to Terminate in SOL 600
TERMIN (Case) Conditions to Terminate in SOL 600
Selects a TERMIN Bulk Data entry which specifies criteria such that a SOL 600 analysis can be terminated,
for example, if the displacement at a certain grid exceeds a specified value.
Format:
TERMIN=N
Example:
TERMIN=5
Describer Meaning
N ID of a matching TERMIN Bulk Data entry specifying the termination conditions
for a particular analysis.
Remarks:
1. This entry may only be used within subcases (it may not be placed above the first subcase entry). If
there are no subcase entries, it may be placed anywhere in the Case Control Section.
2. Most SOL 600 analyses do not require TERMIN entries.
3. If some subcases have TERMIN entries and others do not, only those that do will check for
termination conditions.
4. TERMIN criteria may be different for different subcases.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 581
Transfer Function Set Selection
TFL (Case) Transfer Function Set Selection
Selects the transfer function set(s) to be added to the direct input matrices.
Format:
TFL=n
Example:
TFL=77
TFL = 1, 25, 77
Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a TF Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. Transfer functions will not be used unless selected in the Case Control Section.
2. Transfer functions are supported in dynamics problems only.
3. Transfer functions are described in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide.
4. It is recommended that PARAM,AUTOSPC,NO be specified when using transfer functions. See
Constraint and Mechanism Problem Identification in SubDMAP SEKR (p. 342) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Manual.
5. The transfer functions are additive if multiple TF values are referenced on the TFL command.
Main Index
Temperature Output Request
THERMAL (Case) Temperature Output Request
Requests the form and type of temperature output.
Format:
 ALL 
 
THERMAL ( SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH ) =  n 
SORT2 PLOT  
 NONE 
Examples:
THERMAL=5
THER(PRINT,PUNCH)=ALL
Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output is presented as a tabular listing of point temperatures for each load or time
step.
SORT2 Output is presented as a tabular listing of loads or time steps for each.
PLOT Compute temperatures but do not print.
ALL Temperatures for all points will be output.
NONE Temperatures for no points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only temperatures of
points with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be output
(Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. The THERMAL output request is designed for use with the heat transfer option. The printed output
will have temperature headings. The PUNCH option produces TEMP Bulk Data entries, and the
SID on the entries will be the subcase number (=1 if no SUBCASES are specified).
2. SORT1 is the default in steady state heat transfer analysis. SORT2 is the default in transient heat
transfer analysis.
3. In a transient heat transfer analysis, the SID on the punched TEMP Bulk Data entries equal the time
step number.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 583
Output Title
TITLE (Case) Output Title
Defines a character string to appear on the first heading line of each page of MSC Nastran printer output.
Format:
TITLE=title
Example:
TITLE=RIGHT WING, LOAD CASE 3.
Describer Meaning
title Any character string.
Remarks:
1. If this command appears under a SUBCASE command, then the title appears in the output for that
subcase only.
2. If this command appears before all SUBCASE commands, then the title is used in all subcases without
a TITLE command.
3. If no TITLE command is present, then the title line will contain data and page numbers only.
4. The title also appears on plotter output.
Main Index
Aerodynamic Trim Variable Constraint Selection
TRIM (Case) Aerodynamic Trim Variable Constraint Selection
Selects trim variable constraints in static aeroelastic response.
Format:
TRIM = n
Example:
TRIM=1
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a TRIM Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remark:
1. Aerodynamic extra points (trim variables) not constrained by a TRIM Bulk Data entry will be free
during the static aeroelastic response solution.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 585
Trim Load Output Specification
TRIMF (Case) Trim Load Output Specification
Specifies options for the output of trim loads from a static aeroelastic analysis as FORCE/MOMENT Bulk
Data entries.
Format:
TRIMF [ ( [ UNIT = i ] , [ LOADSET = n ], [ LARGE ], [ INERTIA ], [ APPLIED ], [ AIR ]
 ALL 
[ NOSUM ] [ RIGID ] ,[ NOELASTIC ], [ QNORM ] ) ] =  
 n 
Example:
TRIMF(LOADSET=10001,LARGE)=ALL
TRIMF(UNIT=59,INERTIA,NOSUM)=1
Describer Meaning
UNIT Fortran unit to which data are written. (Optional; Default = 7) (punch file).
LOADSET Load set id for output bulk data entries. If the TRIMF specification results in multiple
load sets, then the defined ID will be used for the first and each subsequent load set has
an ID incremented by 1. (Optional; Default = 1)
LARGE Write the output data in large field format (16 characters per field). The default is 8
characters per field.
INERTIA Write out inertial loads as a separate load set. By default, the separate load set will not
be written.
APPLIED Write out applied loads as a separate load set. By default, the separate load set will not
be written.
AIR Write out aerodynamic loads as a separate load set. By default, the separate load set will
not be written.
NOSUM By default, the sum of the inertial, applied, and aerodynamic loads will be written as a
separate load set. This option suppresses the writing of that set of loads.
RIGID Write out rigid instances of the selected loads (Inertial, Applied, Air and/or Sum) as
separate load sets. By default, the separate load set will not be written.
NOELASTIC By default, the sum of the rigid and elastic increment loads will be written as a separate
load set. This option suppresses the writing of that set of loads.
QNORM Normalize the load by the dynamic pressure used in the trim analysis. By default, the
loads are not normalized.
ALL Loads for all points will be output
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only loads on points with
identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be output (Integer > 0)
Main Index
Trim Load Output Specification
Remark:
1. By default, the loads are written to the punch file (Fortran unit 7). If the user specifies an alternate
Fortran unit number on the TRIMF entry, by default the loads will be written to a file name that is
machine specific (i.e. ‘fort.53’ on many LINUX platforms). The user may connect the Fortran unit
to a user-defined file name by using an ASSIGN entry in the FMS Section of the input file. For
example:
ASSIGN USERFILE='load13.inc',STATUS=UNKNOWN,FORMATTED,UNIT=53
2. Up to eight loads sets are available: Rigid Inertial, Rigid Applied, Rigid Air, Rigid Sum and four more
with the sum of the rigid and elastic increment. This table indicates how the describers invoke each
of these sets:
INERTIAL APPLIED AIR SUM

RIGID O O O O
ELASTIC O O O DEFAULT
where O = Optional. For a load to appear, both the row and column in the table above have to be set.
3. Care must be taken if LOADSET is specified in a run with multiple subcases. There are no checks
that the load set IDs which are generated by one subcase are not also used for another subcase. For
example, consider the following Case Control commands:
SUBCASE 1
TRIM = 1
TRIMF(RIGID) = ALL $
SUBCASE 2
TRIM = 2
TRIMF(LOADSET=2) = ALL
Subcase 1 will generate two load sets with set IDs 1 and 2. Subcase 2 will also output a load set ID 2.
4. The LOADSET option should not be specified above the subcase level when there are multiple
subcases. If it is, each subcase will start numbering its load ID’s from LOADSET.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 587
Selection of Trim Component(s)
TRIMGRP (Case) Selection of Trim Component(s)
Selects a set of trim components for analysis.
Format:
sid
TRIMGRP = ALL
NONE
Example:
TRIMGRP=101
Describer Meaning
sid Set identification of a previously appearing SET command or TRIMID. (Integer>0).
ALL All trim components present in the model are included in the analysis.
NONE This is the default of TRIMGRP. No trim component is involved in the analysis.
Remark:
1. TRIMGRP is used to select a group of trim components for analysis, including the calculation of trim
component boundary coupling matrices.:
2. PEM capability is available in SOL 111 and SOL 200 with analysis=mfreq.
3. SUBCASEs without TRIMGRP will have the equivalent effect of TRIMGRP=none even with the
presence of 'BEGIN TRMC' in the deck.
4. To run PEM job with multiple processors, additional information is available in 'Running PEM jobs'
section of Using PEM Functions in MSC Nastran (p. 145) in the MSC Nastran 2019 Installation and
Operations Guide.
Main Index
Transient Time Step Set Selection
TSTEP (Case) Transient Time Step Set Selection
Selects integration and output time steps for linear or nonlinear transient analysis.
Format:
TSTEP=n
Example:
TSTEP=731
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a TSTEP or Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. A TSTEP entry must be selected to execute a linear transient analysis (SOLs 109 or 112) and for a
nonlinear transient analysis (SOLs 129 and 159).
2. A entry must be selected in each subcase to execute a nonlinear transient problem.
3. For the application of time-dependent loads in modal frequency response analysis (SOLs 111 and
146), the TSTEP entry must be selected by the TSTEP command. The time-dependent loads will be
recomputed in frequency domain by a Fourier transform.
4. In one subcase or STEP for SOL 400, users should only specify TSTEP or , but not both at the same
time.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 589
Transient Time Step Set Selection for Nonlinear Analysis
(Case) Transient Time Step Set Selection for Nonlinear Analysis
See the description of the TSTEP (Case), 588.
Main Index
Temperature Set ID for a Structures Run
TSTRU (Case) Temperature Set ID for a Structures Run
Defines a temperature set ID for a structures run based on a heat transfer subcase.
Format:
TSTRU=n
Example:
TSTRU=999
Describer Meaning
n Set identification for use on TEMP(LOAD)=n or TEMP(INIT)=n
Remarks:
1. TSTRU should be placed in a heat transfer subcase.
2. If TSTRU does not explicitly appear in the heat transfer subcase, it is defaulted to TSTRU=heat
transfer subcase ID.
3. In a structures run, a temperature set generated from a heat transfer run will override an existing
temperature set with identical set ID defined with TEMP, TEMPD, TEMPF, TEMPP1, TEMPRB,
or any combination.
4. TSTRU may be placed in the first subcase of a PARAM,HEATSTAT,YES run.
5. TSTRUs may be placed in each subcase of an APPHEAT run. The associated structural analysis then
requires the following:
ASSIGN heat_run=’heat transfer job name.MASTER’
DBLOC DATABLK=(UG,EST,BGPDTS,CASECCR/CASEHEAT) LOGICAL=heat_run
6. Heat transfer runs and structural runs must have the same mesh. P-elements should also have the same
geometry description. P-order between runs can be different.
7. For nonlinear heat transfer SOL 106 or SOL 153, the INOUT field on the NLPARM Bulk Data
entry must be blank or NO if the results of the run are to be transferred to a linear structures run.
PARAM,NLHTLS,-1
The following parameter should be placed in the nonlinear heat run. This will place UG heat transfer
on the database.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 591
Contact Body Unglue Selection
UNGLUE (Case) Contact Body Unglue Selection
Selects the grids should use standard contact instead of glued contact in glued bodies in SOL 400.
Format:
UNGLUE=n
Example:
UNGLUE=10
Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of the UNGLUE Bulk Data entry (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
2. The default SID of UNGLUE Bulk Data entry is defined on BCONTACT Case Control command
if applicable; however, the SID on UNGLUE Case Control command can overwrite it.
Main Index
Virtual Crack Closure Technique for SOLs 400/600 Analysis
VCCT (Case) Virtual Crack Closure Technique for SOLs 400/600 Analysis
Selects grid sets to be used for virtual crack closure analysis in SOL 600 and SOL 400.
Format:
VCCT=N
Example:
VCCT=0
VCCT=1
Describer Meaning
N ID of a matching Bulk Data VCCT entry specifying the crack.
Remarks:
1. This entry can only be used in SOLs 400/600.
2. Different sets of cracks can be selected for different subcases using this option.
3. For SOL 600, N=0 may be entered above any subcases; then, the Bulk Data entry VCCT with ID=0
will be used in the Marc model definition section. The fracture mechanics calculations will be
performed for all subcases. Otherwise, if N > 0, the matching Bulk Data entry VCCT will be used in
Marc’s history definition section for the applicable subcase, and all subsequent subcases, until a new
VCCT is activated.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 593
VECTOR (Case) Displacement Output Request
Requests the form and type of displacement vector output.

See the description of the DISPLACEMENT (Case), 282.
Main Index
Velocity Output Request
VELOCITY (Case) Velocity Output Request
Requests the form and type of velocity vector output.
Format:

VELOCITY ( , , , ,
RPRINT
, RPUNCH ,[CID ,
NORPRINT
 ALL 
    
TRMC =  ALL   =  n 
 setid    
 NONE 
Examples:
VELOCITY=5
VELOCITY(SORT2,PHASE,PUNCH)=ALL
VELOCITY(SORT2, PRINT, PSDF, CRMS, RPUNCH)=20
VELOCITY(PRINT, RALL, NORPRINT)=ALL
VELOCITY(TRMC=100)=10
Describer Meaning
point.
PLOT Generates, but does not print, velocities.
is in degrees.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 595
Describer Meaning
CID Request to print output coordinate system ID in printed output (.f06) file.
ALL Velocity for all solution points will be output.
NONE Velocity for no solution points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only velocities of
10.
TRMC=ALL: Output the solution results from all trim components involved in
the analysis by Case Control command, TRIMGRP.

Remarks:
2. Velocity output is only available for transient and frequency response problems.
4. VELOCITY=NONE overrides an overall output request.
5. The PLOT option is used when curve plots are desired in the magnitude/phase representation, and
no printer request is present for magnitude/phase representation.
6. Velocity results are output in the global coordinate system (see field CD on the GRID Bulk Data
entry).
random analysis.
8. Note that the CID keyword affects only grid point related output, such as DISP, VELO, ACCEL,
OLOAD, SPCF and MPCF. In addition, the CID keyword needs to appear only once in a grid point-
related output request anywhere in the Case Control Section to turn on the printing algorithm.
Main Index
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 597
Vibration Intensity, VI, Output Request
VINTENSITY (Case) Vibration Intensity, VI, Output Request
Request output of vibration intensity for structural elements in SOLs 108 and 111 only.
Format:
 ALL 
 
VINTENSITY [ ( [ PRINT,PUNCH,PLOT ] ) ] =  n 
 
 NONE 
Examples:
VINTENSITY = ALL
Describer Meaning
The PLOT option is used if results are requested for postprocessing but no
printer output is desired.
ALL Vibration Intensities will be computed for all supported structural elements.
n Set identification of a previously defined set of structural elements. Vibration
Intensities will be computed for the structural elements in this set only.
NONE Vibration intensity will not be processed.
Remarks:
2. VINTENSITY = NONE overrides an overall request.
3. The PLOT option is used if results are requested for post-processing but no printed or punched
output is desired.
4. This Case Control command can be used in SOL 108 and SOL 111 only
5. Structural element types covered for VI computations are BAR, BEAM, QUAD4, TRIA3, QUADR,
TRIAR, QUAD8, TRIA6, HEXA, PENTA and TETRA.
6. For BAR/BEAM element types, VI is computed in element axial direction using following equation
Where Fx = axial force in element x direction,

V1 = shear force in element y direction,
V2 = shear force in element z direction,
Main Index
Vibration Intensity, VI, Output Request
T = torsion about element x direction,

M2 = Bending moment in element y direction,
M1 = Bending moment in element z direction,
vi = Translational velocity about element i direction,
ωi = Rotational velocity about element i direction,
'*' superscript denotes complex conjugate of the complex value. VIx is computed at both end of
BAR/BEAM element and the average of ends VI is presented as element VIx.
7. For 2D element types, such as QUAD4/TRIA3, VI is computed in element coordinate system using
following equations
* * * * *
VI x = REAL [ – ( V x ν z – M x ω y + M xy ω x + F x ν x + F xy ν y ) ] ⁄ Areax,
* * * * *
VI y = REAL [ – ( V y ν z + M y ω x – M xy ω y + F y ν y + F yx ν x ) ] ⁄ Areay,
Where Vx , Vy = transverse shear forces,

Mx , My= Bending moments,
Mxy = twisting moment,
Fx , Fy = Membrane forces,
Fxy, Fyx = Membrane shear,
Areax, Areay = Area in the corresponding element axes,
vi = Translational velocity about element i direction,
ωi = Rotational velocity about element i direction,
'*' superscript denotes complex conjugate of the complex value. VIi, VIi are computed element
coordinate system using average corner velocities and the element forces at the element center.
8. For 3D element types, VI is computed in basic coordinate system using following equations
VI x = REAL[ – ( σ x v x + τ xy v y + τ xz v z ) ]
VI y = REAL[ – ( σ y v y + τ yx v x + τ yz v z ) ]
VI z = REAL[ – ( σ z v z + τ zx v x + τ zy v y ) ]
Where VIx , VIy , VIx = VI in basic coordinate system,

σ x, σ y , σ z = Normal stresses,
τ xy , τ yz , τ xz = Shear stresses,
vi = Translational velocity in basic i direction,
9. VI for all element types is presented in basic coordinate system in print and/or punch output.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 599
View Geometry Output for p-Version Analysis
VUGRID (Case) View Geometry Output for p-Version Analysis
Requests output of view grid and view element entries used in p-version element data recovery.
Format:
 
VUGRID ( PRINT, PUNCH ) =  ALL 
PLOT  n 
Example:
VUGRID(PRINT)=n
Describer Meaning
ALL All view element and grid entries will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only those p-version
PLOT Generate entries, but do not print or punch.
Remarks:
1. VUGRID is processed only when an analysis with p-version elements is requested.
2. Only one VUGRID command per analysis is allowed.
3. The VUGRID command is used only for output control, and does not in anyway affect the p-version
analysis.
4. See parameters VUHEXA, VUTETRA, and VUPENTA in Parameters, 739, for renaming element
entries.
5. See parameters VUELJUMP and VUGJUMP in Parameters, 739, for numbering of view grid and view
element entries.
Main Index
Rigid Body Mass Reduction Check
WEIGHTCHECK (Case) Rigid Body Mass Reduction Check
At each stage of the mass matrix reduction, compute rigid body mass and compare with the rigid body mass
t the g-set.
Format:
( PRINT PUNCH, SET = (  G, N, N + AUTOSPC, F, A,V )

 
NOPRINT  ALL   
WEIGHTCHECK =  YES 
YES , WEIGHT )  NO 
GRID = gid, CGI =
NO MASS
Examples:
WEIGHTCHECK=YES
WEIGHTCHECK(GRID=12,SET=(G,N,A),MASS)=YES
Describer Meaning
PRINT Write output to the print file (Default).
SET Selects degree of freedom set(s) (Default SET=G).
gid Reference grid point for the calculation of rigid body motion. The default is
the origin of the basic coordinate system.
CGI For SET ≠ G , CGI = YES requests output of center of gravity and mass
moments of inertia (Default: CGI = NO).
WEIGHT/MASS Selects output in units of weight or mass (Default = WEIGHT).
Remarks:
1. WEIGHTCHECK must be specified above the subcase level.
2. For SET=N, N+AUTOSPC, F, or A, the WEIGHTCHECK command also outputs a percentage
loss or gain in the reduced rigid body mass matrix (e.g., MAA) as compared to the g-set rigid body
mass matrix (e.g., MGG). G must also be requested to obtain this comparison; e.g.,
WEIGHTCHECK(SET=(G,A))=YES.
3. SET=N+AUTOSPC uses the mass matrix for the n-set with the rows corresponding to degrees of
freedom constrained by the PARAM, AUTOSPC operation zeroed out. If AUTOSPC was not
performed, then this check is redundant with respect to SET=N.
4. WEIGHTCHECK is available in all SOLs. However for the residual structure in SOLs 101, 105,
114, and 116, because no mass reduction is performed, only WEIGHTCHECK(SET=J) is available.
The 'J' set does not include upstream superelements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 601
Rigid Body Mass Reduction Check
5. If Lagrange multipliers are present via RIGID=LAGRAN or LGELIM then for degree-of-freedom
sets N, N+AUTOSPC, F, and A the check will be performed on degree-of-freedom sets NL,
NL+AUTOSPC, FL, and AL. The output will also be labeled accordingly.
Main Index
Sensitivity Wetted Grids for SOL 108/111
WETSENS (Case) Sensitivity Wetted Grids for SOL 108/111
Select SOLUTION frequencies and RESPONSE DOFs for the generation of sensitivity for wetted grids..
Format:
WETSENS ( [ PRINT , PUNCH / PLOT] , [ REAL or IMAG / PHASE ] , [ THRESH = p ] ,
RESPONSE = r ,[ SOLUTION = { ALL / setf }] , [WETTED , SQWETT]) = { ALL / n / NONE }
Example:
SET 81 = 100.0, 120.0
SET 91 = 11240/T3, 4001/T1
SET 95 = 9000000 THRU 9000050
$
WETSENS(RESPONSE=91,solution=81,WETTED) = 95
Describer Meaning
PRINT Writes sensitivities to the print file (Default).
PUNCH Writes sensitivities to the punch file.
PLOT Do not write sensitivities to either the print file or punch file.
THRESH The magnitude of element sensitivity less than p will be suppressed in all output files:
print, punch, plot, .op2, and .xdb. (Default = 0.0).
RESPONSE Adjoint load response will be computed for unit load applied at grid point components
in SET r.
SOLUTION Frequency responses at these forcing frequencies, defined in setf, will be used for
element sensitivity computation. (Default=all forcing frequencies)
WETTED Sensitivity for wetted grids will be computed and output.
SQWETT Squared sensitivity for wetted grids will be computed and output.
ALL Sensitivities for all elements will be calculated.
n Set identification number. Sensitivity for all elements specified on the SET n command
will be calculated. The SET n command must be specified in the same subcase as the
ELSSENS command, or above all subcases ( Integer > 0 ). The IDs in set n must be GID
(grid ID).
NONE Elemental sensitivity will not be output.
Remarks:
1. Set r for RESPONSE on WETSENS is default to set r on ELSENS. If no ELSENS in the
deck, set r for WETSENS must be provided.
2. The equations for various options of WETSENS
WETSENS(WETTED) = [Usetf]t[AGG][Ur]
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 603
Sensitivity Wetted Grids for SOL 108/111
WETSENS(SQWETT) = [Usetf]t[AGG][Ur] + [Usetf]*t[AGG]* [Ur]*
where [Usetf] is the displacement of SOLUTION

[Ur] is the displacement of RESPONSE
[AGG] is Fluid/Structure Coupling matrix
superscript * means complex conjugate of the term.
Main Index

The following tables describe the applicability of Case Control commands to Solution Sequences:
Table 5-3 and SOLs (101 through 200) -- Subcase Definition, Superelement Control, and
Table 5-4 Auxiliary Model Control
Table 5-5 and SOLs (101 through 200) -- Data Selection
Table 5-6
Table 5-7 and SOLs (101 through 200) -- Output Selection
Table 5-8
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 605
Table 5-3 Case Control Commands in SOLs 101 Through 112 -- Subcase Definition, Superelement Control, and Auxiliary Model
Control
Solution Number
Command Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
ADACT X X
ANALYSIS
AUXCAS
AUXMODEL
BEGIN BULK X X X X X X X X X X
CAMPBLL X
EXTDRIN X X X X X X X X
EXTDROUT X X X X X X X X
EXTSEOUT X X X X X X X X
MASTER X X X X X X X X X X
MCFRACTION X X X
MODES X
OUTPUT(blank) X X X X X X X X X X
OUTPUT(PLOT) X X X X X X X X X X
OUTPUT (POST) or X X X X X X X X X X
SETS DEFINITION
OUTPUT X X X X X X X X X X
(XYPLOT)
REPCASE X X
SEALL X X X X X X X X X X
SEDR X X X X X X X X X X
SEDV
SEEXCLUD X X X X X X X X X X
SEFINAL X X X X X X X X X X
SEKR X X X X X X X X X X
SELG X X X X X X X
SELR X X X X X X X
SEMR X X X X X X X X X X
SEMR X X X X X X X X
SERE
Main Index
Control
Solution Number
Command Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
STOCHASTICS X X
SUBCASE X X X X X X X X X X
SUBCOM X
SUBSEQ X
SUPER X X X X X X X X X X
SYM X
SYMCOM X
SYMSEQ X
Control
Solution Number
Command Name 114 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400
ADACT
ANALYSIS X X
AUXCAS X
AUXMODEL X
BEGIN BULK X X X X X X X X X X X
EXTDRIN X
EXTDROUT X
EXTSEOUT X
MASTER X X X X X X X X X X X
MODES X X X
OUTPUT(blank) X X X X X X X X X X X
OUTPUT(PLOT) X X X X X X X X X X X
OUTPUT (POST) or X X X X X X X X X X X
SETS DEFINITION
OUTPUT(XYPLOT) X X X X X X X X X X X
REPCASE X
SEALL X X X X X X X X X X X
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 607
Control
Solution Number
Command Name 114 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400
SEDR X X X X X X X X X X X
SEDV X
SEEXCLUD X X X X X X X X X X X
SEFINAL X X X X X X X X X X X
SEKR X X X X X X X X X X X
SELG X X X X X X X X X
SELR X X X X X X X X X
SEMR X X X X X X X X X X X
SEMR X X X X X X X X X
SERE X
STOCHASTICS X X
SUBCASE X X X X X X X X X X X
SUBCOM X
SUBSEQ X
SUPER X X X X X X X X X X X
SYM X
SYMCOM X
SYMSEQ X
Table 5-5 Case Control Commands in SOLs 101 Through 112 -- Data Selection
Structured Solution Number
Command Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
ADAPT X X
AUTOSPC X X X X X X X X X
AXISYMME X X X X X X X X X
B2GG X X X X X X X X X X
B2PP X X X X X X
BC X
CLOAD X
CMETHOD X X
Main Index
Table 5-5 Case Control Commands in SOLs 101 Through 112 -- Data Selection (continued)
Command Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
DEFORM X X
DESGLB
DESOBJ
DESSUB
DLOAD X X X X X X
DSYM
FMETHOD
FREQUENC X X
GUST
HARMONIC X X X X X X X X X
IC X
K2GG X X X X X X X X X X
K2PP X X X X X X
LOAD X X X X X X X
LOADSET X X X X X X X
M2GG X X X X X X X X X X
M2PP X X X X X X
METHOD X X X X X X X X
MFLUID X X X X X X X
MODTRAK
MPC X X X X X X X X X X
NLPARM X
NONLINEA X X
OMODES X X X* X* X*
P2G X X X X X X X
RANDOM X X
RESVEC X X X X X X X X
SDAMPING X X X
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 609
Command Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
SDENSITY X X X
SMETHOD X X X X
SPC X X X X X X X X X X
STATSUB* X X X X X X X X X
SUPORT1 X X X X X X X X X X
TEMPER(INIT) X
TEMPER(LOAD) X X X X X X X
TEMPER(MATE) X X X X X X X X X X
TFL X X X X X X
TRIM
TRIMGRP X
TSTEP X X
WEIGHTCHECK X X X X X X X X X X
*If STATSUB is specified, then the Case Control commands that select static loads become
applicable to the solution sequence supporting STATSUB.
Table 5-6 Case Control Commands in SOLs 114 Through 400 -- Data Selection
Solution Number
Command Name 114 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400
ADAPT
AUTOSPC X X X X X X X X X
AXISYMME X
B2GG X X X X X X X X X X X
B2PP X X X X X X
BC
CLOAD X
CMETHOD X
DEFORM X X X X
DESGLB X
DESMOD X
Main Index
Solution Number
Command Name 114 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400
DESOBJ X
DESSUB X
DESVAR X
DLOAD X X X X X X
DSYM X X X X
FMETHOD X X
FREQUENC X X X
GUST X X
HARMONIC X X X X X
IC X
K2GG X X X X X X X X X X X
K2PP X X X X X X
LOAD X X X X X X X X
LOADSET X X X X X X X X X
M2GG X X X X X X X X X X X
M2PP X X X X X X
METHOD X X X X X X X X X X
MFLUID X X X X X X X X
MODTRAK
MPC X X X X X X X X X X X
NLPARM X
NONLINEA X X
OMODES X X
P2G X X X X X X X X
RANDOM X X
RESVEC X X X X X X X X X
SDAMPING X X X
SMETHOD
SPC X X X X X X X X X X X
STATSUB X X
SUPORT1 X X X X X X X X X X X
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 611
Solution Number
Command Name 114 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400
TEMPER(INIT)
Main Index
Solution Number
Command Name 114 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400
TEMPER(LOAD) X X X X X
TEMPER(MATE) X X X X X X X X X X X
TFL X X X X X X
TRIM X X
TRIMGRP X
TSTEP X X X X
WEIGHTCHECK X X X X X X X X X
Table 5-7 Case Control Commands in SOLs 101 Through 112 -- Output Selection
Solution Number
Command Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
ACCELERA X X X X X
ACFPMRESULT X X
ACPOWER X X
AEROF
APRESSURE
BOUTPUT X
CMSENRGY X X X X X
DATAREC X X X X X X
DISPLACE X X X X X X X X X X
DSAPRT
ECHO X X X X X X X X X X
EDE X X X X X* X X
EKE X X X X X* X X
ELSDCON X X
ELSUM X X X X X X X X X X
ENTHALPY
ERP X X
ESE X X X X X X X X* X X
FLUX X
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 613
Table 5-7 Case Control Commands in SOLs 101 Through 112 -- Output Selection (continued)
Solution Number
Command Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
FORCE X X X X X X X X X X
GPFORCE X X X X X+ X+
GPKE X X* X* X*
GPSDCON X X
GPSTRAIN X X X X X
GPSTRESS X X X X X
GROUNDCHECK X X X X X X X X X X
HARMONIC X X X X X X X X X
HDOT
HOUTPUT
INTENSITY X X
LABEL X X X X X X X X X X
LINE X X X X X X X X X X
MAXLINES X X X X X
MAXMIN (old form) X X X X X
MAXMIN (DEF) X X X X X X
MPCFORCE X X X X X X X X X
MPRES X X X X X X X
NLLOAD X X
NOUTPUT
OFREQUEN X X
OLOAD X X X X X X X
OTIME X X
OUTRCV X X X X X
PAGE X X X X X X X X X X
PARTN X X X X X X X X X X
PLOTID X X X X X X X X X X
POST X
PRESSURE X X X X
SACCELER X X X X
Main Index
Table 5-7 Case Control Commands in SOLs 101 Through 112 -- Output Selection (continued)
Solution Number
Command Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
SDISPLAC X X X X X X X
SET X X X X X X X X X X
SKIP X X X X X X X X X X
SPCFORCE X X X X X X X X X X
STRAIN X X X X X X X X X X
STRESS X X X X X X X X X X
STRFIELD X X X X X
SUBTITLE X X X X X X X X X X
SURFACE X X X X X
SVECTOR X X X X X
SVELOCITY X X X X
THERMAL X
TITLE X X X X X X X X X X
VECTOR X X X X X X X X X X
VELOCITY X X X X
VOLUME X X X X X
VUGRID X X X X X X
*For modal part of solution.
+
Forces limited to stiffness contributions.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 615
Table 5-8 Case Control Commands in SOLs 114 Through 400 --Output Selection
Solution Number
Command Name 114 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400
ACCELERA X X X X
ACFPMRESULT
ACPOWER
AEROF X X X X
APRESSURE X X
BOUTPUT X X X
CMSENRGY X X X
DATAREC X
DISPLACE X X X X X X X X X X X
DSAPRT X
ECHO X X X X X X X X X X X
EDE X X X
EKE X X X
ELSDCON X X
ELSUM X X X X X X X X X
ENTHALPY X
ERP X X
ESE X X X X X X
FLUX X X X X
FORCE X X X X X X X X X X X
GPFORCE X X X X X
GPKE X X
GPSDCON X X X X
GPSTRAIN X X X X X X
GPSTRESS X X X X X X
GROUNDCHECK X X X X X X X X X
HARMONY X X X X X
HDOT X
HOUTPUT X X X X
INTENSITY
Main Index
Table 5-8 Case Control Commands in SOLs 114 Through 400 --Output Selection (continued)
Solution Number
Command Name 114 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400
LABEL X X X X X X X X X X X
LINE X X X X X X X X X X X
MAXLINES X X X X X X X X X X X
MAXMIN(DEF) X
MPCFORCE X X X X X X X X
MPRES X X X X X X
NLLOAD X
NLOPRM X
NLSTEP X
NOUTPUT X X X X
OFREQUEN X X X
OLOAD X X X X X X X X X
OTIME X X X X X X X X X
OUTRCV
PAGE X X X X X X X X X X X
PARTN X X X X X X X X X X X
PLOTID X X X X X X X X X X X
PRESSURE X
SACCELER X X X X
SDISPLAC X X X X X X X
SET X X X X X X X X X X X
SKIP X X X X X X X X X X X
SPCFORCE X X X X X X X X X X X
STRAIN X X X X X X X X X X X
STRESS X X X X X X X X X X X
STRFIELD X X X X X
SUBSET X
SUBTITLE X X X X X X X X X X X
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 617
Table 5-8 Case Control Commands in SOLs 114 Through 400 --Output Selection (continued)
Solution Number
Command Name 114 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400
SURFACE X X X X
SVECTOR X X X X X X
SVELOCITY X X X X
TEMPERATURE
THERMAL X X X X
TITLE X X X X X X X X X X X
TRIMF X X
VECTOR X X X X X X X X X X X
VELOCITY X X X X
VOLUME X X X X
VUGRID
Main Index
X-Y PLOT Commands
X-Y PLOT Commands

The X-Y output request packet of the Case Control Section includes all commands between either
OUTPUT(XYPLOT) or OUTPUT(XYOUT), and either BEGIN BULK or OUTPUT(PLOT). The
remainder of this section describes the X-Y output commands.
A single set of plotted X-Y pairs is known as a curve. Curves are the entities to be plotted. The surface (paper,
microfilm frame, etc.) on which one or more curves is plotted is known as a frame. Curves may be plotted
on a whole frame, an upper-half frame, or a lower-half frame. Grid lines, tic marks, axes, axis labeling, and
other graphic control options may be chosen by the user. The program will select defaults for parameters not
selected by the user.
Only two commands are required for an X-Y output request.
1. Only one of OUTPUT(XYPLOT) or OUTPUT(XYOUT) at the beginning of the X-Y output
command packet.
2. At least one of the commands XYPLOT, XYPEAK, XYPRINT, XYPUNCH, XYPAPLOT.
The commands OUTPUT(XYPLOT) and OUTPUT(XYOUT) are equivalent. If the X-Y output is to be
printed and/or punched, a PLOTTER command is not required.
If only the required commands are used, the graphic control options will all assume default values. Curves
using all default parameters have the following general characteristics.
1. Tic marks are drawn on all edges of the frame. Five spaces are provided on each edge of the frame.
2. All tic marks are labeled with their values.
3. Linear scales are used.
4. Scales are selected such that all points fall within the frame.
5. The plotter points are connected with straight lines.
6. The plotted points are not identified with symbols.
The above characteristics may be modified by inserting any of the parameter definition commands in the next
section, ahead of the XY____ command(s). The use of a parameter definition command sets the value of that
parameter for all following command operation commands unless the CLEAR command is inserted. If grid
lines are requested, they will be drawn at the locations of all tic marks that result from defaults or user request.
The locations of tic marks (or grid lines) for logarithmic scales cannot be selected by the user. Values for
logarithmic spacing are selected by the program. The values for the number of tic marks (or grid lines) per
cycle depend on the number of logarithmic cycles required for the range of the plotted values.
The definition and rules for the X-Y output commands follow. The form of X-Y output commands differ in
many instances from that of similar commands used in the OUTPUT(PLOT) section.
X-Y Output Command Summary

Commands Applied To All Curves
PLOTTER Selects format of plot file for interpretation by plotter postprocessor.
CAMERA Selects plotter media.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 619
X-Y PLOT Commands
Commands Applied To All Curves

PENSIZE Selects pen number.
DENSITY Selects the line density for microfilm plotters only.
XPAPER Defines the size of the paper in x-direction.
YPAPER Defines the size of the paper in y-direction.
XMIN Specifies the minimum value on the x-axis.
XMAX Specifies the maximum value on the x-axis.
XLOG Selects logarithmic or linear x-axis.
YAXIS Controls the plotting of the y-axis on all curves.
XINTERCEPT Specifies the location of the x-axis on the y-axis.
UPPER TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on upper edge.
LOWER TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on lower edge.
CURVELINESYMBOL Selects lines and/or symbols to be drawn through the x-y points.
XDIVISIONS Specifies spacing of tic marks on the x-axis for all curves.
XVALUE PRINT SKIP Specifies how often to print the x-values alongside the x-axis tic marks.
CLEAR Resets X-Y Plot commands to their default value.
XTITLE Defines a character string that will appear along the x-axis.
TCURVE Defines a character string that will appear at the top of the plot frame.
LONG Controls amount of curve’s summary printout.
CSCALE Defines scale factor for characters in the plot frame.
Commands Applied to Whole Frame Curves Only

YMIN Specifies the minimum value on the y-axis.
YMAX Specifies the maximum value on the y-axis.
XAXIS Controls the plotting of the x-axis.
YINTERCEPT Specifies the location of the y-axis on the x-axis.
YLOG Selects logarithmic or linear y-axis.
LEFT TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on left edge.
RIGHT TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on right edge of the frame.
ALLEDGE TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on all edges of the frame.
YDIVISIONS Specifies spacing of tic marks on the y-axis.
YVALUE PRINT Specifies how often to print the y-values alongside the y-axis tic marks
SKIP applies.
Main Index
X-Y PLOT Commands
Commands Applied to Whole Frame Curves Only

XGRID LINES Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the y-axis at the x-axis tic
marks.
YGRID LINES Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the x-axis at the y-axis tic
marks.
YTITLE Defines a character string that will appear along the y-axis
Commands Applied to Upper Half Frame Curves Only

YTMIN Specifies the minimum value on the y-axis.
YTMAX Specifies the maximum value on the y-axis.
YTAXIS Controls the plotting of the y-axis.
YTINTERCEPT Specifies the location of the y-axis on the x-axis.
YTLOG Selects logarithmic or linear y-axis.
TLEFT TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on the left edge.
TRIGHT TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on all edges.
TALL EDGE TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on all edges.
YTDIVISIONS Specifies spacing of tic marks on the y-axis.
YTVALUE PRINT Specifies how often to print the y-values alongside the y-axis tic marks.
SKIP
XTGRID LINES Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the y-axis at the x-axis tic
marks.
YTGRID LINES Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the x-axis at the y-axis tic
marks.
YTTITLE Defines a character string that will appear along the y-axis.
Commands Applied to Lower Half Frame Curves Only

YBMIN Specifies the minimum value on the y-axis.
YBMAX Specifies the maximum value on the y-axis.
XBAXIS Controls the plotting of the x-axis.
YBINTERCEPT Specifies the location of the y-axis on the x-axis.
YBLOG Selects logarithmic or linear y-axis.
BLEFT TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on left edge.
BRIGHT TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on right edge.
BALL EDGE TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on all edges.
YBDIVISIONS Specifies spacing of tic marks on the y-axis.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 621
X-Y PLOT Commands
Commands Applied to Lower Half Frame Curves Only

YBVALUE PRINT Specifies how often to print the y-values alongside the y-axis tic marks.
SKIP
XBGRID LINES Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the y-axis at the x-axis tic
marks.
YBGRID LINES Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the x-axis at the y-axis tic
marks.
YBTITLE Defines a character string that will appear along the y-axis.
X-Y Plot Generation Commands

XYPAPLOT Generate X-Y plots for a printer.
XYPEAK Print only the summary for all curves.
XYPLOT Generate X-Y plots for a plotter.
XYPRINT Generate table of X-Y pairs for a printer.
XYPUNCH Generate table of X-Y pairs for the PUNCH file
Main Index
Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on All Edges
ALLEDGE TICS Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on All Edges
Specifies how to draw tic marks on all edges of the frame.
Format:
ALLEDGE TICS tic
Example:
ALLEDGE -1
Describer Meaning
tic Specifies how to draw tic marks (Integer, Default= 0).
-1 Draw tic marks only.
0 Do not draw tic marks or associated values (Default).
1 Draw tic marks and associated values.
Remarks:
1. ALLEDGE TICS applies to whole frame curves only.
2. To determine if on any given edge (a) tic marks will be drawn without values, (b) no tic marks or
values will be drawn, or (c) tic marks with values will be drawn, the following sum must be computed
by the user. Add the tic values of the edge in question to its associated ALLEDGE TICS, TALL
EDGE TICS, or BALL EDGE TICS tic values. If the resulting value is less than zero, tic marks will
be drawn without values. If the resulting value is zero, no tic marks or values will be drawn. If the
resulting value is greater than zero, tic marks with values will be drawn. The user should be careful in
the use of the ALLEDGE TICS, TALL EDGE TICS, or BALL EDGE TICS commands. For
example, the use of only the ALLEDGE TICS = -1 command will result in no tic marks or values
being drawn, since the default values for individual edges is +1. Tic values input may only be -1, 0,
or 1.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 623
Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Lower Half
BALL EDGE TICS Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Lower Half
Specifies how to draw tic marks on lower half of frame.
Format:
BALL EDGE TICS tic
Example:
BALL EDGE TICS -1
Describer Meaning
tic Specifies how to draw tic marks (Integer, Default = 0).
Remarks:
1. BALL EDGE TICS applies to lower frame curves only.
2. See Remark 2 under ALLEDGE TICS, 622.
Main Index
Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Left Edge
BLEFT TICS Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Left Edge
Specifies how to draw tic marks on left edge of lower half of frame.
Format:
BLEFT TICS tic
Example:
BLEFT TICS -1
Describer Meaning
tic Specifies how to draw tic marks (Integer; Default= 1).
0 Do not draw tic marks or associated values.
1 Draw tic marks and associated values (Default).
Remarks:
1. BLEFT TICS applies to lower frame curves only.
3. See related command BRIGHT TICS, 625.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 625
Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Right Edge
BRIGHT TICS Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Right Edge
Specifies how to draw tic marks on right edge of lower half of frame.
Format:
BRIGHT TICS tic
Example:
BRIGHT TICS -1
Describer Meaning
tic Specifies how to draw tic marks (Integer; Default = 1).
Remarks:
1. BRIGHT TICS applies to lower frame curves only.
Main Index
Plotter Media Selection
CAMERA Plotter Media Selection
Selects plotter media.
Format:
CAMERA ctype
Example:
CAMERA 1
Describer Meaning
ctype Camera type (Integer 1, 2, or 3; Default= 2).
1 Film
2 Paper (Default)
3 Both
Remark:
1. If the CAMERA command is not specified then CAMERA 2 is assumed.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 627
Resets X-Y Plot Commands
CLEAR Resets X-Y Plot Commands
Resets X-Y Plot commands to their default values.
Format
CLEAR
Remark:
1. All commands except XTITLE, YTITLE, YTTITLE, YBTITLE, and TCURVE will revert to their
default values.
Main Index
Character Scale Factor
CSCALE Character Scale Factor
Defines scale factor for characters in the plot frame. See the command CSCALE, 706 in the OUTPUT(PLOT)
Section.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 629
Curve, Line and Symbol Selection
CURVELINESYMBOL Curve, Line and Symbol Selection
Selects lines and/or symbols to be drawn through the x-y points.
Format:
CURVELINESYMBOL symtype
Example:
CURV 4
Describer Meaning
symtype Specifies the symbol drawn at the x-y points. If symtype is 0 then only lines will
be drawn through the points with no symbol. If symtype is less than zero then
only the symbol and not the lines will be drawn. If symtype is greater than zero
then both the symbol and the lines will be drawn (-9< Integer < 9; Default= 0).
symtype Symbol
0 none
1 X
2 *
3 +
4 -
5 .
6 ×
7 []
8 <>
9 /\
Remark:
1. If more than one curve is plotted per frame, then the symbol number is incremented by 1 for each
curve.
Main Index
Microfilm Plotter Line Density
DENSITY Microfilm Plotter Line Density
Selects the line density for microfilm plotters only.
Format
DENSITY d
Example
DENS 3
Describer Meaning
d Specifies line density scale factor for microfilm plotters. A line density of d is d
times heavier than a line density of 1 (Integer > 0; Default = 1).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 631
Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Left Edge
LEFT TICS Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Left Edge
Specifies how to draw tic marks on left edge of whole frame curves.
Format:
LEFT TICS tic
Example:
LEFT -1
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. LEFT TICS applies to whole frame curves only.
3. See related command RIGHT TICS, 636.
Main Index
Summary Print Control
LONG Summary Print Control
Controls amount of curve’s summary printout.
Format:
 
LONG  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
YES One page for each curve’s summary (Default).
NO Condensed curve summary.
Remark:
1. If LONG is not specified, then LONG=NO is assumed.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 633
Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Lower Edge
LOWER TICS Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Lower Edge
Specifies how to draw tic marks on lower edge.
Format:
LOWER TICS tic
Example:
LOWER -1
Describers Meaning
Remarks:
1. LOWER TICS applies to all curves.
Main Index
Pen Selection
PENSIZE Pen Selection
Selects pen number.
Format:
PENSIZE p
Example:
PENS 3
Describer Meaning
p Specifies pen number to be used to generate the plot (Integer > 0; Default =1).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 635
X-Y Plot File Format
PLOTTER X-Y Plot File Format
See the command PLOTTER, 725 in the OUTPUT(PLOT) Section.
Main Index
Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Right Edge
RIGHT TICS Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on Right Edge
Specifies how to draw tic marks on right edge of the frame.
Format:
RIGHT TICS tic
Example:
RIGHT -1
Describers Meaning
Remarks:
1. RIGHT TICS applies to whole frame curves only.
3. See related command LEFT TICS, 631.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 637
Superelement Plot Delimiter
SEPLOT Superelement Plot Delimiter
Assigns the subsequent PLOT or XYPLOT commands to one or more superelements.
Format:
SEPLOT seid1 [ seid2 ... ]
Examples:
SEPLOT 5
SEPLOT 0 3 7 200
Describer Meaning
seidi Superelement identification number (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. See also related command SEUPPLOT.
2. Any PLOT or XYPLOT commands appearing above all SEPLOT (or SEUPPLOT) commands will
apply in all SEPLOT (or SEUPPLOT) packets.
3. For multiple PLOT or XYPLOT commands, there should be a SEPLOT command with each PLOT.
For the special case where the PLOTs or XYPLOTs refer to the same superelements and use the same
FIND, a single SEPLOT followed by a single FIND may be placed above all commands.
Main Index
SEUPPLOT Superelement Plot Delimiter
Assigns the subsequent PLOT or XYPLOT commands to a superelement and all of its upstream
superelements.
Format:
SEUPPLOT seid
Example:
SEUPPLOT 7
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. See also related command SEPLOT.
2. Any PLOT or XYPLOT commands appearing above all SEUPPLOT (or SEPLOT) commands will
apply in all SEUPPLOT (or SEPLOT) packets.
3. For multiple PLOT or XYPLOT commands, there should be a SEUPPLOT command with each
PLOT. For the special case where the PLOTs or XYPLOTs refer to the same superelements and use
the same FIND, a single SEUPPLOT followed by a single FIND may be placed above all the
commands.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 639
TALL EDGE TICS Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on All Edges
Specifies how to draw tic marks on all edges of the upper half of the frame.
Format:
TALL EDGE TICS tic
Example:
TALL -1
Describers Meaning
Remarks:
1. TALL EDGE TICS applies to upper half frame curves only.
Main Index
Curve Title
TCURVE Curve Title
Defines a character string that will appear at the top of the plot frame.
Format:
TCURVE ctitle
Example:
TCUR RIGHT WING -- LOAD CASE 3
Describer Meaning
ctitle Any character string (Character; Default = blank).
Remark:
1. TCURVE may not be continued to the next command line.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 641
TLEFT TICS Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on All Edges
Specifies how to draw tic marks on the left edge of the upper half of the frame.
Format:
TLEFT TICS tic
Example:
TLEFT -1
Describers Meaning
tic Specifies how to draw tic marks (Integer; Default=1).
Remarks:
1. TLEFT TICS applies to upper half frame curves only.
3. See related command TRIGHT TICS, 642.
Main Index
Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on the Right Edge
TRIGHT TICS Controls Drawing of Tic Marks on the Right Edge
Specifies how to draw tic marks on all edges of the upper half of the frame.
Format:
TRIGHT TICS tic
Example:
TRIGHT -1
Describers Meaning
Remarks:
1. TRIGHT TICS applies to upper half frame curves only.
3. See related command TLEFT TICS, 641.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 643
Controls Drawing Of Tic Marks On Upper Edge
UPPER TICS Controls Drawing Of Tic Marks On Upper Edge
Specifies how to draw tic marks on upper edge.
Format:
UPPER TICS tic
Example:
UPPER -1
Describers Meaning
Remarks:
1. UPPER TICS applies to all curves.
3. See related command LOWER TICS, 633.
Main Index
X-Axis Plot Control
XAXIS X-Axis Plot Control
Controls the plotting of the x-axis on whole frame curves only.
Format:
 
XAXIS  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
YES Plot the x-axis.
NO Do not plot the x-axis (Default).
Remarks:
1. XAXIS applies to whole frame curves only.
2. See related command YAXIS, 668.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 645
X-Axis Plot Control
XBAXIS X-Axis Plot Control
Controls the plotting of the x-axis on lower half frame curves only.
Format:
 
XBAXIS  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
Remark:
1. XBAXIS applies to lower half frame curves only.
Main Index
Plot X-Axis Grid Lines
XBGRID LINES Plot X-Axis Grid Lines
Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the x-axis at the y-axis tic marks on lower half frame curves
only.
Format:
 
XBGRID LINES  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
YES Plot the x-axis grid lines.
NO Do not plot the x-axis grid lines (Default).
Remarks:
1. XBGRID applies to lower half frame curves only.
2. See related command YBGRID LINES, 671.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 647
Tic Spacing on Y-Axis
XDIVISIONS Tic Spacing on Y-Axis
Specifies spacing of tic marks on the x-axis for all curves.
Format:
XDIVISIONS xd
Example:
XDIV 10
Describer Meaning
xd Number of spaces between tic marks on x-axis (Integer> 0; Default = 5).
Remarks:
1. XDIVISIONS applies to all curves and to the commands: UPPER TICS, LOWER TICS, and
YINTERCEPT.
2. XDIVISIONS is ignored for a logarithmic x-axes.
Main Index
XGRID LINES Plot X-Axis Grid Lines
Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the x-axis at the y-axis tic marks on whole frame curves only.
Format:
 
XGRID LINES  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
Remarks:
1. XGRID applies to whole frame curves only.
2. See related command YGRID LINES, 679.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 649
Location of X-Axis on Y-Axis
XINTERCEPT Location of X-Axis on Y-Axis
Specifies the location of the x-axis on the y-axis.
Format:
XINTERCEPT xi
Example:
XINT 50.
Describer Meaning
xi Location of x-axis on the y-axis (Real; Default = 0.0).
Main Index
Logarithmic or Linear X-Axis
XLOG Logarithmic or Linear X-Axis
Selects logarithmic or linear x-axis.
Format:
 
XLOG  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
YES Plot a logarithmic x-axis.
NO Plot a linear x-axis (Default).
Remarks:
1. XLOG applies to all curves.
2. The default value for tic division interval depends on the number of log cycles. The default values for
tic divisions are given as follows but will range over whole cycles:
Number of Cycles Intermediate Values

1, 2 2., 3., 4., 5., 6., 7., 8., 9.
3 2., 3., 5., 7., 9.,
4 2., 4., 6., 8.,
5 2., 5., 8.
6, 7 3., 6.
8, 9, 10 3.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 651
Maximum X-Axis Value
XMAX Maximum X-Axis Value
Specifies the maximum value on the x-axis.
Format:
XMAX xmax
Example:
XMAX 100.
Describer Meaning
xmax Maximum value on the x-axis. (Real)
Remarks:
1. If XMAX is not specified, then the maximum value is set to the highest value of x.
2. See related commands XMIN, 652, YMIN, 682, and YMAX, 681.
Main Index
Minimum X-Axis Value
XMIN Minimum X-Axis Value
Specifies the minimum value on the x-axis.
Format:
XMIN xmin
Example:
XMIN 100.
Describer Meaning
xmin Minimum value on the x-axis (Real).
Remarks:
1. XMIN applies to all curves.
2. If XMIN is not specified, then the minimum value is set to the lowest value of x.
3. See related commands XMAX, 651, YMIN, 682, and YMAX, 681.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 653
Paper Size in X-Direction
XPAPER Paper Size in X-Direction
Defines the size of the paper in x-direction.
Format:
XPAPER xsize
Example:
XPAP 10.
Describer Meaning
xsize Size of paper in x-direction and in inches (Real; Default = 20.0).
Remarks:
1. The default paper size is 20 by 20 inches.
2. See related command YPAPER, 683.
Main Index
X-Axis Plot Control
XTAXIS X-Axis Plot Control
XYAXIS applies to upper half frame curves only.
Format:
 
XTAXIS  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 655
XTGRID LINES Plot X-Axis Grid Lines
Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the x-axis at the y-axis tic marks on upper half frame curves
only.
Format:
 
XTGRID LINE  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
Remarks:
1. XTGRID applies to upper half frame curves only.
2. See related command YTGRID LINES, 686
Main Index
X-Axis Title
XTITLE X-Axis Title
Defines a character string that will appear along the x-axis.
Format:
XTITLE xtit
Example:
XTIT RIGHT WING CASE 3 - TIME
Describer Meaning
xtit Any character string (Character; Default = Blank).
Remarks:
1. XTITLE may not be continued to the next command line.
2. XTITLE applies to all curves.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 657
Generate X-Y Plots for a Printer
XYPAPLOT Generate X-Y Plots for a Printer
Generates X-Y plots for a printer.

See XYPLOT, 659 for format, describers, and additional remarks.
Remarks:
1. The x-axis moves vertically along the page and the y-axis moves horizontally along the page.
2. An asterisk (*) identifies the points associated with the first curve of a frame, and then for successive
curves on a frame the points are designated by symbols O, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H.
Main Index
Print Curve Summary
XYPEAK Print Curve Summary
Print only the summary for all curves. The summary output is titled:
“X Y - O U T P U T S U M M A R Y”
and is also printed under XYPLOT, XYPUNCH, XYPRINT, and XYPAPLOT. This output contains the
maximum and minimum values of y for the range of x.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 659
Generate X-Y Plots for a Plotter
XYPLOT Generate X-Y Plots for a Plotter
Generates X-Y Plots for a plotter.
Format:
XYPLOT yvtype ptype [ i1, i2, i3,... ] /
id11 (itemu11 [, iteml11] ) , id12 (itemu12 [, iteml12] ) , ... /
id21 (itemu21 [, iteml21] ) , id22 (itemu22 [, iteml22] ) , ... / ....
Examples:
BEGIN BULK or OUTPUT(PLOT) commands are shown as a reminder to place X-Y output request
packets properly in the Case Control Section; i.e., at the end of the Case Control Section, or just ahead of
any structure plot requests.
Example 1:
OUTPUT (XYPLOT)
CSCALE = 1.8
XYPLOT SDISP/16(T1)
BEGIN BULK
This sequence causes a single whole frame to be plotted for the T1 displacement component of solution set
point 16 using the default parameter values. If 16(T1) is not in the solution set, a warning message will be
printed and no plot will be made. The plot will be generated for the NASTRAN plotter on file PLT, which
must be available.
Example 2:
OUTPUT (XYOUT)
CSCALE = 1.8
XYPLOT, XYPRINT VELO RESPONSE 1,5 /3(R1,), 5(,R1)
OUTPUT (PLOT)
This sequence causes two frame plots (each consisting of an upper half frame and a lower half frame) to be
plotted, one for subcase 1 and one for subcase 5, using the default parameter values. The velocity of the first
rotational component of grid point 3 will be plotted on the upper half frame, and that of grid point 5 will be
plotted on the lower half frame. Tabular printer output will also be generated for both curves.
Example 3:
OUTPUT (XYPLOT)
CSCALE = 1.8
YDIVISIONS = 20
XDIVISIONS = 10
SGRID LINES = YES
YGRID LINES = YES
XYPLOT DISP 2,5/10(T1),10(T3)
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
This sequence causes two whole frame plots to be generated, one for subcase 2 and one for subcase 5. Each
plot contains the T1 and T3 displacement component for grid point 10. The default parameters will be
modified to include grid lines in both the x-direction and y-direction, with 10 spaces in the x-direction and
20 spaces in the y-direction. The plot will be generated for the NASTRAN plotter on file .plt.
Example 4
OUTPUT (XYPLOT)
CSCALE = 1.8
XAXIS = YES
YAXIS = YES
XPAPER = 40.
YPAPER = 20.
XYPLOT STRESS 3/ 15(2)/ 21(7)
OUTPUT (PLOT)
This sequence causes two whole frame plots to be generated using the results from subcase 3. The first plot
is the response of the axial stress for rod element number 15. The second plot is the response of the major
principal stress at Z1 for CTRIA3 element number 21. The default parameters will be modified to include
the x-axis and y-axis drawn through the origin. Each plot will be initially scaled to fit on 40 x 20 inch paper.
The plots will be generated for the NASPLT postprocessor and NASTRAN file .plt2 which must be defined.
NASPLT will redefine the plot to 14 x 7-inch paper (with default options).
Example 5
OUTPUT (XYPLOT)
CURVELINESYMBOL = -1
XYPLOT XYPAPLOT VG / 1(G,F) 2(G,F) 3(G,F) 4(G,F)
OUTPUT (PLOT)
This sequence is an example of plotting in a flutter analysis for which a split frame plot is made; the upper
half is V-g and the lower half is V-f. Data from the first four loops will be plotted. Distinct symbols are used
for data from each loop, and no lines are drawn between points (since the flutter analyst must sometimes
exercise judgement about which points should be connected). The plots will also be printed in the normal
output. These plots will not have all the features of the external plots, but can be very useful in getting a quick
picture of the curves.
Example 5
XTITLE=EXCITATION FREQUENCY FROM 2.5 TO 250 HERTZ SC 200
YTITLE=FLUID MODE PF AT FLUID POINT 204 FOR NATURAL MODE 2
XYPLOT,XYPEAK FMPF(2) MODE 200/204
Example 6
YTITLE=EXCITATION FREQUENCY FROM 2.5 TO 250 HERTZ
YTITLE=PSD MPF FOR FLUID GRID 204 FOR NATURAL MODE 2
XYPLOT,XYPEAK FMPF(2) PSDF /204
Example 7
XYPLOT CSIG PSDF / 4 (2003)
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 661
This is an example of plotting Composite Stress value of stress

quantity given by Item Code 3 for layer with ID 2 of element with ID
4.
This can also be equivalently written as (see Remark 9 for
explanation)
XYPLOT CSIG PSDF / 4 (-2,3)
Describers Meaning
yvtype Type of y-value to be plotted: (Character).
ACCE Acceleration in the physical set.
BOUT Slideline contact output.
DISP Displacement in the physical set.
ELFORCE Element force.
ENTHALPY Enthalpy in the physical set.
FLUX Element heat flux.
FMPF Fluid mode participation factors. See Remark 8.
(mode_id or
frequency_id)
GMPF Panel grid mode participation factors. See Remark 8.
(mode_id or
frequency_id,
panel_name,
panel_grid_id)
HDOT Rate of change of enthalpy in the physical set.
MPCF Multipoint force of constraint.
LMPF Load mode participation factors. See Remark 8.
NONLINEAR Nonlinear applied load.
OLOAD Applied load.
PMPF Panel mode participation factors. See Remark 8.
(mode_id or
frequency_id,
panel_name)
PRESSURE Pressure of fluid-structure body.
SACCE Acceleration in the solution set.
SDISP Displacement in the solution set.
SMPF Structural mode participation factors. See Remark 8.
(mode_id or
frequency_id)
SPCF Single-point force of constraint.
STEMP Temperature in the solution set.
Main Index
Describers Meaning
STRAIN Element strain.
STRESS Element stress.
SVELO Velocity in the solution set.
TEMP Temperature in the physical set.
VECTOR Displacement in the physical set.
VELO Velocity in the physical set.
VG Flutter analysis.
CSIG Composite Stress
CEPS Composite Strain
CFAI Composite Failure Index
CSRS Composite Strength Ratio
ptype Plot type defining the meaning of i1, i2, ... etc., idi, itemui, and itemli (Character,
Default=“RESPONSE”).
AUTO Autocorrelation function on whole frame curves only.
FREQ Frequency—for given excitation frequency plot mode
participation versus natural frequency—Oxx2E tables—
point plot only. See Remark 8.
MODE Mode - for given fluid mode plot mode participation versus
excitation frequency - Oxx2M tables.
PSDF Power spectral density function on whole frame curves only.
RESPONSE Time or frequency in SORT2 format, or grid point
identification numbers in SORT1 format (Default) .
SPECTRAL Response spectrum on whole frame curves only.
i1, i2,... Subcase identification numbers for ptype=RESPONSE. The list must be specified
in ascending order. For ptype=SPECTRAL, the subcase refers to the RECNO in
the DTI,SPSEL Bulk Data entry. The list is ignored for ptype=AUTO and PSDF
(Integer > 0, Default is all subcases).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 663
Describers Meaning
idij Element, grid, scalar, or extra point identification number for y-value for frame i.
For yvtype=VG, idij refers to the loop count of a flutter analysis (Integer > 0).
itemuij, Item code for y-value. itemuij is for upper half or whole itemlij curves on frame i,
and itemlij is for lower half curves only on frame i. If itemlij is not specified, then
whole frame curves will be plotted with itemuij. itemlij is ignored for
ptype=“AUTO”, “PSDF”, and “SPECTRAL” (Character or Integer > 0).
For elements, the code represents a component of the element stress, strain, or force
and is described in Table 7-1 and Table 7-6 of the Guide. For ptype=“AUTO”and
“PSDF”, the complex stress or strain item codes need to be used. Since the output
quantities are real, you can use either the real or the imaginary item code. Both will
give the same result.
For grid points and pty=“RESPONSE”, the code is one of the mnemonics T1, T2,
T3, R1, R2, R3, T1RM, T2RM, T3RM, R1RM, R2RM, R3RM, T1IP, T2IP,
T3IP, R1IP, R2IP, or R3IP, where Ti stands for the i-th translational component, Ri
stands for the i-th rotational component, RM means real or magnitude, and IP
means imaginary or phase. For scalar or extra points, or heat transfer analysis, use
T1, T1RM, or T1IP. The output format of results in PCH file is dictated by the
case control request for DISP, STRESS. For example for SOL111:
DISP (PLOT, phase, SORT2) = 1

OUTPUT (XYOUT)
XYPUNCH DISP RESP /3 (T3RM)
This will punch results in PCH file in Mag/phase format. If the DISP command is
missing results will shift to Real/Imaginary the default format for SOL111
displacement.
For grid points and ptype=“AUTO” or “PSDF”, the code is one of the mnemonics
T1, T2, T3, R1, R2, R3. For scalar or extra points, use T1.
For yvtype=VG, itemui and/or itemli can be “F” for frequency or “G” for damping.
Remarks:
1. Multiple XYPLOT, XYPUNCH, XYPRINT, XYPEAK, and/or XYPAPLOT commands may be
specified in the OUTPUT(XYPLOT) section.
2. Solution set requests are more efficient, because the time-consuming recovery of the dependent
displacements can be avoided.
3. The item codes also appear in printed summaries as “CURVE ID” for grid points as well as element
data.
Main Index
4. The information after each slash ( / ) specifies the curve(s) that are to be plotted on the same frame.
The describer idij identifies the grid point j or element j associated with the frame number i. All plot
requests on one command are sorted on idij to improve the efficiency of the plotting process. Symbols
are assigned in order by idij.
5. If any of the item codes, itemlij or itemuij, are not specified; e.g., (8) or (5), the corresponding half
frame curve is not plotted. If both the comma ( , ) and itemlij not specified; e.g., (8), then whole frame
curves will be plotted. Also, for any single frame, the specifications of “(itemuij,itemlij)” must be
consistently half frame (upper and/or lower) or whole frame. For example on half frame curves, if
iteml11 and the comma is not specified then either iteml12 or itemu12 must not be specified and on
whole frame curves, the commas, iteml11, and iteml12 must not be specified. In other words, the
curves on each plot frame must be all whole or half (upper and/or lower).
6. The XYPLOT command may be continued on the next line as long as “XYPLOT yvtype ptype [ i1,
i2, i3,... ] /” is specified on the first line.
7. Specifying a nonexistent grid point may cause the program to exit in the XYTRAN module and
missing plots to occur.
8. mode_id is used for natural frequency selection of Oxx2m participation versus excitation frequency
output.
frequency_id is used for excitation frequency selection of Oxx2E participation versus natural
frequency output. frequency_id is an integer value; e.g., (2) would represent the second frequency
calculated.
9. For yvtype = CSIG, CEPS, CFAI and CSRS, we can have (itemuij, itemlij) or (itemuij) formats. For
the (itemuij, itemlij) format, itemuij will be a negative integer and its absolute value indicates the Ply
ID; itemlij indicates the composite stress item code. For the (itemuij) format, itemuij will be an
integer I = PLYID*1000 + ITEM_CODE.
10. Printout in the f06 file coming from X-Y plot commands is not supported by the POST TOCASE
command.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 665
Generate Table of X-Y Pairs for a Printer
XYPRINT Generate Table of X-Y Pairs for a Printer
Generates tabular printer output of the X-Y pairs.

Main Index
Generate Table of X-Y Pairs for the PUNCH File
XYPUNCH Generate Table of X-Y Pairs for the PUNCH File
Generates tabular punch output of the X-Y pairs. Same as XYPRINT except the output is written to the
PUNCH file.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 667
Print Values on X-Axis Tic Marks
XVALUE PRINT SKIP Print Values on X-Axis Tic Marks
Specifies how often to print the x-values alongside the x-axis tic marks.
Format:
XVALUE PRINT SKIP xvps
Example:
XVAL 5
Describer Meaning
xvps Number of tic marks to be skipped between labeled tic marks with their
corresponding values (Integer > 0).
Remark:
1. XVALUE applies to all curves.
Main Index
Y Axis Plot Control
YAXIS Y Axis Plot Control
Controls the plotting of the y-axis on all curves.
Format:
 
YAXIS  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
YES Plot the y-axis.
NO Do not plot the y-axis (Default).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 669
Tic Spacing on Y-Axis
YBDIVISIONS Tic Spacing on Y-Axis
Specifies spacing of tic marks on the y-axis for lower half frame curves only.
Format:
YBDIVISIONS ybd
Example:
YBDI 10
Describer Meaning
ybd Number of spaces between tic marks on y-axis (Integer > 0; Default = 5).
Remarks:
1. YBDIVISIONS applies to lower half frame curves only.
2. YBDIVISIONS is ignored for a logarithmic y-axis.
Main Index
Location of Y Axis on X Axis
YBINTERCEPT Location of Y Axis on X Axis
Specifies the location of the y-axis on the x-axis for lower half frame curves only.
Format:
YBINTERCEPT ybi
Example:
YBINT 50
Describer Meaning
ybi Location of y-axis on the x-axis (Real; Default = 0.0).
Remark:
1. YBINTERCEPT applies to lower half frame curves only.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 671
Plot Y Axis Grid Lines
YBGRID LINES Plot Y Axis Grid Lines
Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the y-axis at the x-axis tic marks on lower half frame curves
only.
Format:
 
YBGRID LINES  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
YES Plot the y-axis grid lines.
NO Do not plot the y-axis grid lines (Default).
Remarks:
1. YBGRID applies to lower half frame curves only.
2. See related command XBGRID LINES, 646
Main Index
Logarithmic or Linear Y Axis
YBLOG Logarithmic or Linear Y Axis
Selects logarithmic or linear y-axis for lower half frame curves only.
Format:
 
YBLOG  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
YES Plot a logarithmic y-axis.
NO Plot a linear y-axis (Default).
Remarks:
1. YBLOG applies to lower half frame curves only.
2. See Remark 2 under XLOG, 650.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 673
Maximum Y Axis Value
YBMAX Maximum Y Axis Value
Specifies the maximum value on the y-axis for lower half frame curves only.
Format:
YBMAX ymax
Example:
YBMAX 100
Describer Meaning
ymax Maximum value on the y-axis (Real).
Remarks:
1. YBMAX applies to lower half frame curves only.
2. If YBMAX is not specified, then the maximum value is set to the highest value of y.
3. See related command YBMIN, 674.
Main Index
Minimum Y Axis Value
YBMIN Minimum Y Axis Value
Specifies the minimum value on the y-axis for lower half frame curves only.
Format:
YBMIN ymin
Example:
YBMIN 100
Describer Meaning
ymin Minimum value on the y-axis (Real).
Remarks:
1. YBMIN applies to lower half frame curves only.
2. If YBMIN is not specified then the minimum value is set to the lowest value of y.
3. See related command YBMAX, 673.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 675
Y-Axis Title
YBTITLE Y-Axis Title
Defines a character string that will appear along the y-axis for lower half frame curves only.
Format:
YBTITLE ytit
Example:
YBTIT RIGHT WING LOADS - CASE 3
Describer Meaning
ytit Any character string (Character; Default= Blank).
Remarks:
1. YBTITLE may not be continued to the next command line.
2. YBTITLE applies to lower half frame curves only.
Main Index
Print Values on Y Axis Tic Marks
YBVALUE PRINT SKIP Print Values on Y Axis Tic Marks
Specifies how often to print the y-values alongside the y-axis tic marks applies on lower half frame curves only.
Format:
YBVALUE PRINT SKIP yvps
Example:
YBVAL 5
Describer Meaning
yvps Number of tic marks to be skipped between labeled tic marks with their
Remark:
1. YBVALUE applies to lower half frame curves only.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 677
Tic Spacing on Y Axis
YDIVISIONS Tic Spacing on Y Axis
Specifies spacing of tic marks on the y-axis for whole frame curves only.
Format:
YDIVISIONS yd
Example:
YDIV 10
Describer Meaning
yd Number of spaces between tic marks on y-axis (Integer> 0; Default=5).
Remarks:
1. YDIVISIONS applies to whole frame curves only and to the commands: LEFT TICS, RIGHT
TICS, and XINTERCEPT.
2. YDIVISIONS is ignored for a logarithmic y-axis.
Main Index
YINTERCEPT Location of Y Axis on X Axis
Specifies the location of the y-axis on the x-axis for whole frame curves only.
Format:
YINTERCEPT yi
Example:
YINT 50
Describer Meaning
yi Location of y-axis on the x-axis. (Real; Default = 0.0)
Remark:
1. YINTERCEPT applies to lower half frame curves only.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 679
YGRID LINES Plot Y Axis Grid Lines
Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the y-axis at the x-axis tic marks on whole frame curves only.
Format:
 
YGRID LINES  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
Remarks:
1. YGRID applies to whole frame curves only.
2. See related command XGRID LINES, 648
Main Index
YLOG Logarithmic or Linear Y Axis
Selects logarithmic or linear y-axis for whole frame curves only.
Format:
 
YLOG  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
Remarks:
1. YLOG applies to whole frame curves only.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 681
YMAX Maximum Y Axis Value
Specifies the maximum value on the y-axis.
Format:
YMAX ymax
Example:
YMAX 100
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. If YMAX is not specified, then the maximum value is set to the highest value of y.
2. See related command YMIN, 682.
Main Index
YMIN Minimum Y Axis Value
Specifies the minimum value on the y-axis.
Format:
YMIN ymin
Example:
YMIN 100
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. YMIN applies to all curves.
2. If YMIN is not specified, then the minimum value is set to the lowest value of y.
3. See related command YMAX, 681.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 683
Paper Size in Y-Direction
YPAPER Paper Size in Y-Direction
Defines the size of the paper in y-direction.
Format:
YPAPER ysize
Example:
YPAP 10
Describer Meaning
ysize Size of paper in y-direction and in inches (Real; Default = 20.0).
Remarks:
1. The default paper size is 20 by 20 inches.
2. See related command XPAPER, 653.
Main Index
Y Axis Plot Control
YTAXIS Y Axis Plot Control
Controls the plotting of the y-axis on upper half frame curves only.
Format:
 
YTAXIS  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
Remark:
1. YTAXIS applies to upper half frame curves only.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 685
The Spacing on Y Axis
YTDIVISIONS The Spacing on Y Axis
Specifies spacing of tic marks on the y-axis for upper half frame curves only.
Format:
YTDIVISIONS ytd
Example:
YTDI 10
Describer Meaning
ytd Number of spaces between tic marks on y-axis (Integer > 0; Default = 5).
Remarks:
1. YTDIVISIONS applies to upper half frame curves only.
2. YTDIVISIONS is ignored for a logarithmic y-axis.
Main Index
YTGRID LINES Plot Y Axis Grid Lines
Controls the drawing of the grid lines parallel to the y-axis at the x-axis tic marks on upper half frame curves
only.
Format:
 
TYGRID LINES  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
Remarks:
1. YTGRID applies to upper half frame curves only.
2. See related command XTGRID LINES, 655
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 687
YTINTERCEPT Location of Y Axis on X Axis
Specifies the location of the y-axis on the x-axis for upper half frame curves only.
Format:
YTINTERCEPT yti
Example:
YTINT 50
Describer Meaning
yti Location of y-axis on the x-axis (Real; Default= 0.0).
Remark:
1. YTINTERCEPT applies to upper half frame curves only.
Main Index
Y Axis Title
YTITLE Y Axis Title
Defines a character string that will appear along the y-axis for whole frame curves only.
Format:
YTITLE ytit
Example:
YTIT RIGHT WING LOADS - CASE 3
Describer Meaning
ytit Any character string (Character; Default = Blank).
Remarks:
1. YTITLE may not be continued to the next command line.
2. YTITLE applies to whole frame curves only.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 689
YTLOG Logarithmic or Linear Y Axis
Selects logarithmic or linear y-axis for upper half frame curves only.
Format:
 
YT(LOG)  YES 
 NO 
Describers Meaning
Remarks:
1. YTLOG applies to upper half frame curves only.
Main Index
YTMAX Maximum Y Axis Value
Specifies the maximum value on the y-axis for upper half frame curves only.
Format:
YTMAX ymax
Example:
YTMAX 100
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. YTMAX applies to upper half frame curves only.
2. If YTMAX is not specified, then the maximum value is set to the highest value of y.
3. See related command YTMIN, 691.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 691
YTMIN Minimum Y Axis Value
Specifies the minimum value on the y-axis for upper half frame curves only.
Format:
YTMIN ymin
Example:
YTMIN 100
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. YTMIN applies to upper half frame curves only.
2. If YTMIN is not specified then the minimum value is set to the lowest value of y.
3. See related command YTMAX, 690.
Main Index
Y-Axis Title
YTTITLE Y-Axis Title
Defines a character string that will appear along the y-axis for upper half frame curves only.
Format:
YTTITLE ytit
Example:
YTTIT RIGHT WING LOADS - CASE 3
Describer Meaning
ytit Any character string (Character; Default = Blank).
Remarks:
1. YTTITLE may not be continued to the next command line.
2. YTTITLE applies to upper half frame curves only.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 693
YTVALUE PRINT SKIP Print Values on Y Axis Tic Marks
Specifies how often to print the y-values alongside the y-axis tic marks applies on upper half frame curves only.
Format:
YTVALUE PRINT SKIP yvps
Example:
YTVAL 5
Describer Meaning
Remark:
1. YTVALUE applies to upper half frame curves only.
Main Index
YVALUE PRINT SKIP Print Values on Y Axis Tic Marks
Specifies how often to print the y-values alongside the y-axis tic marks applies on whole frame curves only.
Format:
YVALUE PRINT SKIP yvps
Example:
YVAL 5
Describer Meaning
Remark:
1. YVALUE applies to whole frame curves only.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 695
OUTPUT(POST) Commands
OUTPUT(POST) Commands
SURFACE Surface Definition
Defines a surface for the calculation of grid point stresses, strains, or mesh stress discontinuities.
Format:
 
 ALL 
SURFACE id SET sid, FIBRE  Z1  ,

 Z2 
 MID 
 
 
 ELEMENT   X1   R 
     X1 
SYSTEM  BASIC  , AXIS  X2  , NORMAL [ M ]   ,
     X2 
 CORD cid   X3   X3 
 
TOPOLOGICAL [ TOLERANCE { THETA } ], BRANCH  MESSAGE  BREAK

  ,
GEOMETRIC  NOMESSAGE  NOBREAK
Example:
SURFACE 10 SET 9 NORMAL X3
Describer Meaning
id Surface identification number (Required).
SET References a SET command that defines the elements in the surface (required).
Either form of the SET command may be used.
sid Set identification number.
FIBRE Specifies the fiber location at which stresses will be calculated.
ALL Requests output at all fiber locations; i.e., z=Z1, Z2, and MID.
Z1 Requests output z = Z1 only.
Z2 Requests output z = Z2 only.
MID Requests output z = (Z1+Z2)/2 only.
SYSTEM Specifies the coordinate system to be used as the output coordinate system.
ELEMENT Specifies the element coordinate system for output.
CORD cid Specifies the coordinate system defined on a CORDij Bulk Data entry for output.
BASIC Specifies the basic coordinate system for output.
AXIS Specifies the axis of the coordinate system to be used as the x output axis and the
local x-axis when geometric interpolation is used.
Main Index
Surface Definition
Describer Meaning
X1, X2, X3 Specifies the direction of the axis or the normal. X, Y, and Z may be substituted
for X1, X2, and X3, respectively.
NORMAL Specifies the reference direction for positive fiber and shear stress output, but has
no effect when ELEMENT is specified.
M Specifies the reverse of the direction given by R, X1, X2, or X3 and must be
entered as MR, MX1, MX2, or MX3 with no space between the M and the
following letter.
R Specifies the radius vector from the origin of reference coordinate system to the
grid point.
TOPOLOGICAL Specifies the method to calculate the average grid point stress or strain. The
GEOMETRIC default is TOPOLOGICAL.
theta Specifies the interelement slope difference tolerance (in degrees) to detect stress
discontinuity between elements (not used with TOPOLOGICAL) (Real; Default
= 0.0).
BRANCH Selects whether multiple element intersections (BREAK/NOBREAK) are to be
treated as discontinuities, and if warning messages (MESSAGE/NOMESSAGE)
are to be issued.
BREAK Multiple element intersections are (or are not) to be treated as stress
NOBREAK discontinuities.
MESSAGE A warning message will (or will not) be issued when multiple element
NOMESSAGE intersections are encountered.
Remarks:
1. SURFACE commands must be specified after OUTPUT(POST).
2. The surface identification number must be referenced on a SET command appearing after
OUTPUT(POST). The SET identification number may then be referenced on GPSTRESS,
GPSTRAIN, STRFIELD, ELSDCON, and GPSDCON commands. The seid on the surface entry
must reference a SET defined after OUTPUT(POST).
3. The surface normal is also used in the definition of the local reference surface for geometric
interpolation. Two options are available. In the first option, the radius vector (R) from the origin of
the reference coordinate system to the grid point is used. In the second option, one axis (X1, X2, or
X3) of the coordinate system is used. The direction can be reversed using the modification parameter
M. The positive side of an element is defined as a side from which the NORMAL direction emerges,
rather than the side determined by the connection specified on the element connection entries.
4. When the parameter ELEMENT is present, the element stresses or strains are used unmodified
(defaults to output stresses in output system). The CORD keyword references a CORDij Bulk Data
entry with coordinate system identification number cid.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 697
Surface Definition
5. When theta = 0, no testing is made. When theta is negative, grid point stresses will be calculated for
each element connected to an exception point; otherwise, the best estimation of the grid point stress
will be output.
6. BREAK is the default if theta is nonzero.
7. For all elements defined in SET 9 of the preceding example,
• All fiber locations are output;
• The basic output system is used;
• The x-axis is x-axis of the basic system;
• The surface normal direction point is z-axis of the basic system;
• The topological interpolation method is used;
• No tolerance test is made; and
• No branch test is made.
The example illustrates a good choice for regular two-dimensional problems in the x-y plane.
Main Index
Volume Definition
VOLUME Volume Definition
Defines a volume for the calculation of grid point stresses, strains, or mesh stress discontinuities.
Format:
 ELEMENT 
 
VOLUME id SET sid, [ PRINCIPAL, DIRECT STRESS ], SYSTEM  CORD cid 
 
 BASIC 
Example:
VOLUME 21 SET 2
Describer Meaning
id Volume identification number.
sid Set identification number of a SET command that defines the elements in the
volume. Either form of the SET command may be used. The default is all
elements.
PRINCIPAL Requests principal stresses or strains, direction cosines, mean pressure, and von
Mises equivalent stresses or strains to be calculated. If neither PRINCIPAL nor
DIRECT is specified, then the default is to output both.
DIRECT Requests direct stress or strains, mean pressure stress, and von Mises equivalent
stress to be calculated. If neither PRINCIPAL nor DIRECT is specified, then the
default is to output both.
SYSTEM Used to specify the reference coordinate system used to define the output stress
orientation coordinate system.
ELEMENT Specifies the element coordinate system.
CORD cid Specifies the coordinate system defined on a CORDij entry.
BASIC Specifies the basic coordinate system.
Remarks:
1. VOLUME commands must be specified after OUTPUT(POST).
2. The volume identification number must be referenced on a SET command appearing after
OUTPUT(POST). The SET identification number may then be referenced on GPSTRESS,
GPSTRAIN, STRFIELD, ELSDCON, and GPSDCON Case Control commands.
3. If ELEMENT is specified, element stresses or strains are not transformed.
4. In the preceding example, for all elements in SET 2:
• Both PRINCIPAL and DIRECT stress are output.
• The BASIC output system is used.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 699
OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands
The PLOT command requests the generation of undeformed, deformed, or contour plots. All other
commands specify how the model will be plotted, type of projection, view angles, scales, etc. All commands
have default actions if not specified by the user. The FIND command may be used to calculate an optimal
SCALE, ORIGIN, and/or VANTAGE POINT to allow the construction of a plot in a user-specified region
of the paper or film. All the commands used in the generation of the various plots will be printed out as part
of the output, whether they are directly specified, defaulted or established using the FIND command.
Initialization of commands to default values occurs only once. Subsequently, these values remain until altered
by direct command input. The only exceptions are the view angles, scale factors, vantage points, and the
origins. Whenever the plotter or the method of projection is changed, the view angles are reset to the default
values, unless they are respecified by the user. In addition, the scale factors, vantage points, and the origin
must be respecified by the user.
The commands are listed here in a logical sequence; however, they need not be so specified. Any order may
be used, but if a command is specified more than once, the value or choice stated last will be used.
PLOTTER Selects format of plot file for interpretation by plotter postprocessor.

ORTHOGRAPHIC, etc. Selects orthographic projection.
PERSPECTIVE Selects perspective projection.
STEREOSCOPIC Selects stereoscopic projection.
AXES Assigns axes of the basic coordinate system to the observer’s coordinate
system.
VIEW Defines the angular relationship between the observer’s coordinate system
(r, s, and t axes specified on the AXES command) and the basic coordinate
system.
MAXIMUM DEFORM Defines the magnification of the maximum displacement.
SCALE Defines reduction, as a scale factor, of the model’s dimensions so that the
model fits on a plot frame.
DISTORTION Specifies the distortion scale factors of axes in the basic coordinate system.
CSCALE Defines scale factor for characters in the plot frame.
ORIGIN Defines the origin of the plot frame with respect to the origin of the (r, s,
t) coordinate system defined on the AXES command.
VANTAGE POINT Defines the location of the observer with respect to the model in the (r, s,
t) coordinate system defined on the AXES command for perspective and
stereoscopic projections only.
PROJECTION Defines the separation, along the r-axis, between the observer and the
projection plane if not already specified on the VANTAGE POINT
command. Used by stereoscopic projections only.
OCULAR SEPARATION Defines the separation of the left and right eye vantage points along the
s-axis for stereoscopic projections.
CAMERA Specifies microfilm plotter options.
Main Index
PAPER SIZE Defines the size and type of the paper.

PEN Generates a message on the printed output to inform the plotter operator
as to what size and color pen point to mount in the various pen holders.
PTITLE Defines a character string that will appear at the top of the plot frame on
the line below the sequence number.
SET Defines a set of elements and/or grid points to be plotted.
FIND Requests the plotter to optimally compute any of the parameters that can
be specified on the SCALE, ORIGIN i, and/or VANTAGE POINT
commands.
CONTOUR Specifies contour plot options for stress, displacement, or temperature.
PLOT Generates an undeformed plot or a deformed plot per subcase, mode
number, frequency, or time step. A contour plot may also be requested with
an undeformed or deformed plot.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 701
Orientation of Observer’s Coordinate System
AXES Orientation of Observer’s Coordinate System
Assigns axes of the basic coordinate system to the observer’s coordinate system.
Format:
AXES r s t SYMMETRIC
ANTISYMMETRIC
Example 1: View toward negative x-axis of model.

AXES MX, Y, MZ
Example 2: Mirror image of model.

AXES Y X Z
.
Describers Meaning
r,s,t Assigns axes of basic coordinate system to axes of observer’s coordinate
system (Default=X, Y, Z).
X X-direction of basic coordinate system (Default for r).
Y Y-direction of basic coordinate system (Default for s).
Z Z-direction of basic coordinate system (Default for t).
MX Negative X-direction of basic coordinate system.
MY Negative Y-direction of basic coordinate system.
MZ Negative Z-direction of basic coordinate system.
SYMMETRIC Specifies a symmetric orientation of the view. See Remark 5. (Default).
ANTISYMMETRIC Specifies an antisymmetric orientation of the view. See Remark 5.
Remarks:
1. If no AXES command is specified, then AXES X, Y, Z is the default.
2. The direction of view is in the negative r-direction; i.e., the projection plane is parallel to the s-t plane.
3. The VIEW command depends on the AXES command specification and defines the angular
relationship between observer’s coordinate system and the basic coordinate system.
4. The AXES command can be used to preposition the object in 90° increments in such a manner that
only rotations less than 90° are required by the VIEW command to obtain the desired orientation.
MX, MY, MZ can be used to define left-handed coordinate systems. Note that the default system is
right-handed.
5. An undeformed or deformed plot of the symmetric portion of an object can be obtained by reversing
the sign of the axis that is normal to the plane of symmetry. In the case of multiple planes of
symmetry, the signs of all associated planes should be reversed. The ANTISYMMETRIC option
should be specified when a symmetric model is loaded in an unsymmetric manner. This will cause
Main Index
Orientation of Observer’s Coordinate System
the deformations to be plotted antisymmetrically with respect to the specified plane or planes. Since
the AXES command applies to all parts (SETs) of a single frame, symmetric and antisymmetric
combinations cannot be made with this command (see the symmetry option on the PLOT, 717
command in this section).
6. To avoid a mirror image, ensure that the r, s, and t axes obey the right-hand rule.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 703
Microfilm Plotter Options
CAMERA Microfilm Plotter Options
Specifies microfilm plotter options.
Format:
PAPER
CAMERA FILM BLANK FRAME n
BOTH
Example:
CAMERA FILM
Describers Meaning
FILM Requests 35 mm or 16 mm film and positive or negative images.
PAPER Requests positive prints.
BOTH Requests positive prints and 35 mm or 16 mm film.
Remarks:
1. If the CAMERA command is not specified, then CAMERA PAPER BLANK FRAMES 0 is assumed.
2. If FILM or BOTH is specified, then these options must be communicated to the plotter operator
through normal means of communications at the installation.
3. If FILM or BOTH are specified and if n is greater than 0 then n blank frames will be inserted between
plots. The plotter must be operated in the manual mode in order to have blank frames inserted
between positive prints. If blank frames are desired only on film, and not on paper, the plotter must
be operated in the automatic mode.
Main Index
Contour Plot Options
CONTOUR Contour Plot Options
Specifies contour plot options for stress, displacement, or temperature.
Format:
 
 Z1 
 EVEN n   Z2   COMMON 
CONTOUR component    
 LIST a, b, ...   MAX   LOCAL 
 MID 
 
Example:
CONTOUR MAGNIT LIST 2., 4., 6., 8., 10.
Describers Meaning
component Name of stress, displacement or temperature component (Character,
Default=“MAJPRIN”).
MAJPRIN Major principal stress. Not available for nonlinear elements
(Default).
MINPRIN Minor principal stress. Not available for nonlinear elements.
EQUIVAL von Mises stress. When STRESS(MAXS) is requested in the
Case Control Section, von Mises stress is used for plotting. For
nonlinear analysis, Mohr-Coulomb or Drucker-Prager stress
may also be plotted in conjunction with the MATS1
command.
XNORMAL X component of normal stress.
YNORMAL Y component of normal stress.
ZNORMAL Z component of normal stress.
XYSHEAR XY component of shear stress.
XZSHEAR XZ component of shear stress.
YZSHEAR YZ component of shear stress.
XDISP T1 component of displacement in global coordinate system.
YDISP T2 component of displacement in global coordinate system.
ZDISP T3 component of displacement in global coordinate system.
MAGNIT Magnitude of displacement or temperature.
EVEN n Number of contours (50 > Integer > 0, Default is EVEN 10).
LIST a, b, ... List of stresses, displacements or temperatures which define the contours (Real).
Z1 Stresses at Z1 from neutral plane (Default).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 705
Contour Plot Options
Describers Meaning
Z2 Stresses at Z2 from neutral plane.
MAX Maximum of stress at Z1 and Z2.
MID Average of stress (membrane stress) at Z1 and Z2.
COMMON Plot stress contours in basic coordinate system (Default).
LOCAL Plot stress contours in element coordinate system. This is the coordinate system
used in printed output.
Remarks:
1. The CONTOUR command should be specified immediately before its associated PLOT command.
2. A STRESS command must appear in the Case Control Section for all elements included in a
CONTOUR request. If printed output is not desired, then STRESS(PLOT)=sid should be specified.
3. In linear analysis, stress contour plots are available for the following elements: CTRIA3, CQUAD4,
CSHEAR, and CTRlAX6. In nonlinear analysis, stress contour plots are available for CQUAD4 and
CTRlA3 elements. The Bulk Data element connection entries for all elements must list the grid
points in either clockwise or counterclockwise order. Mixing the order will result in meaningless or
confusing plots.
4. When selecting contour options, note that
• MAJPRIN, MINPRIN, EQUIVAL are the same in COMMON and LOCAL.
• ZNORMAL, XZSHEAR, YZSHEAR, if selected in LOCAL, will be changed to COMMON.
• CSHEAR elements only have the MAXSHEAR value.
5. The CTRIAX6 element stress contour plots are different in that they must be selected as COMMON.
Also, the following equivalences apply:
XNORMAL is radial
YNORMAL is azimuthal
ZNORMAL is axial
XYSHEAR is shear
XZSHEAR is maximum principal
YZSHEAR is von Mises
EQUIVAL is octahedra
Main Index
Character Scale Factor
CSCALE Character Scale Factor
Defines scale factor for characters in the plot frame.
Format:
CSCALE cs
Example:
CSCA 2.0
Describer Meaning
cs Scale factor applied to characters in the plot frame (Default = .5).
Remarks:
1. CSCALE is used to control the spacing of characters when plots are made with the NASTRAN plotter
and postprocessed with the MSC/NASPLOT routine. For example, if the SCALE FACTOR on the
NASPLOT data command is 2.0, a value for cs of 0.5 will result in characters of default size (.07
inches) at the regular spacing. A value of 1.8 produces good spacing when using the postprocessing
plotter programs NASTPLT, TEKPLT, and NEUPS. On the other hand, to double the size of both
the plot and the characters, the SCALE FACTOR and the CSCALE FACTOR on the NASPLOT
data command should both be set equal to 2.0.
2. The CSCALE command must immediately precede the PLOTTER command. If a second CSCALE
command is specified, then a second PLOTTER command must also be specified.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 707
Distortion Scale Factors
DISTORTION Distortion Scale Factors
Specifies the distortion scale factors of the axes in the basic coordinate system.
Format:
DISTORTION dx dy dz
Example:
DIST 0.5 1.0 1.0
Describers Meaning
dx Distortion scale factor of the basic coordinate system’s x-axis (Default=1.0).
dy Distortion scale factor of the basic coordinate system’s y-axis (Default=1.0).
dz Distortion scale factor of the basic coordinate system’s z-axis (Default=1.0).
Remarks:
1. If no DISTORTION command is specified, then no distortion is applied.
2. If DISTORTION is specified, then all three values for dx, dy, and dz must be specified even though
one or two will use the default.
3. The distortion factors are applied prior to any other scaling commands: SCALE, MAXIMUM
DEFORMATION, CSCALE, etc.
Main Index
Automatic Calculation of Scale, Origin, and Vantage Point
FIND Automatic Calculation of Scale, Origin, and Vantage Point
Requests the plotter to optimally compute any of the parameters that can be specified on the SCALE,
ORIGIN i, and/or VANTAGE POINT commands.
Format:
FIND [ SCALE ORIGIN oid VANTAGE POINT SET setid ,
REGION { le be re te } ]
Example:
FIND SCALE ORIGIN 5 SET 2
Describers Meaning
oid Origin identification number (Integer>0).
setid Set identification number etc. (Integer>0).
le Fractional distance of left edge of plot region from the lower left corner of the
image area (Real, Default=0.0).
be Fractional distance of bottom edge of plot region from the lower left corner of the
re Fractional distance of right edge of plot region from the lower left corner of the
te Fractional distance of top edge of plot region from the lower left corner of the
Remarks:
1. The FIND command is recommended over the specification of SCALE, ORIGIN, and VANTAGE
POINT commands, and should be specified prior to its associated PLOT or CONTOUR command.
2. The FIND command requests the plotter to optimally compute any of the parameters that can be
specified on the SCALE, ORIGIN, and/or VANTAGE POINT commands and based on the
specification of the
• PLOTTER command;
• PROJECTION PLANE command;
• SET and REGION specifications on the FIND command;
• VIEW and/or AXES commands;
• MAXIMUM DEFORMATION command; and
• PAPER SIZE command. All of these commands must precede the associated FIND command.
3. The FIND command can be used to compute any or all of SCALE, ORIGIN, or VANTAGE
POINT as long as they have not been previously specified.
4. If SET is not specified, then the first defined SET will be used.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 709
Automatic Calculation of Scale, Origin, and Vantage Point
5. If no options are specified on the FIND command, a SCALE and VANTAGE POINT are selected
and an ORIGIN is located, using the first defined SET, so that the plotter object is located within the
image area.
6. The plot region is defined as some fraction of the image area (image area = 0.0, 0.0, 1.0, 1.0 and first
quadrant = 0.5, 0.5, 1.0, 1.0). The image area is located inside the margins on the paper.
Main Index
Length of Maximum Displacement
MAXIMUM DEFORM Length of Maximum Displacement
Defines the magnification of the maximum displacement. All other displacements are scaled accordingly.
Format:
MAXIMUM DEFORMATION d
Example:
Magnify the displacements such that the maximum displacement is equal to two units of length of the model.
MAXI DEFO 2.
Describer Meaning
d Specifies the length, in units of the model and not of the plot frame, to which
the maximum displacement is scaled. (Default=5% of the largest dimension of
the model represented by the elements in the SET specification on the PLOT
command.)
Remarks:
1. If no MAXIMUM DEFORMATION command is specified, then the previously described default
is assumed.
2. If you wish the FIND command to use the d value, a MAXIMUM DEFORMATION command
should precede the FIND command.
3. If you wish the plot deformation scaling to be different then the FIND scaling, a different
MAXIMUM DEFORMATION command can appear first before the PLOT command.
4. For nonlinear plotting, MAXIMUM DEFORMATION d and the MAXIMUM DEFORMATION
field on the PLOT command should have the same value.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 711
Separation of the Vantage Points
OCULAR SEPARATION Separation of the Vantage Points
Defines the separation of the left and right eye vantage points along the s-axis for stereoscopic projections.
Format:
OCULAR SEPARATION os
Example:
OCULAR SEPARATION 2.0
Describer Meaning
os Separation, in inches, of the two vantage points along the s-axis (Real,
Default=2.756 inches).
Remark:
1. The default value is the separation used in the standard stereoscopic cameras and viewers (70 mm).
The default value is recommended.
Main Index
Origin of Plot Frame
ORIGIN Origin of Plot Frame
Defines the origin of the plot frame with respect to the origin of the (r, s, t) coordinate system defined on the
AXES command.
Format:
ORIGIN oid u v
Example:
ORIG 3 -1. -2.
Describers Meaning
oid Origin identification number which may be specified after the ORIGIN describer
on the PLOT command (Integer > 0).
u Horizontal displacement of plot frame origin from the rst origin (Real, Default =
0.0).
v Vertical displacement of paper origin from the rst origin (Real, Default = 0.0).
Remarks:
1. In the transformation performed for any of the three projections, the origins of both the basic
coordinate system and the observer’s coordinate system are coincident. The ORIGIN command may
be used to locate the plot frame origin (lower left hand corner) from the rst origin. The units are
inches, and are not subject to the scaling of the plotted object.
2. The ORIGIN command is not recommended for general use. See the FIND, 708 command to have the
origin optimally located so as to place the plotted object in the center of the plot frame.
3. Ten origins may be specified at one time. However, any one can be redefined at any time. An eleventh
origin is also provided if more than ten origins are erroneously defined; i.e., only the last of these
surplus origins will be retained.
4. If a projection; e.g., ORTHOGRAPHIC, STEREOSCOPIC, or PERSPECTIVE, is changed in the
plot packet, or the PLOTTER command is changed, then all previously defined origins are deleted.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 713
Type of Projection
ORTHOGRAPHIC, etc. Type of Projection
Selects type of projection.
Format:
ORTHOGRAPHIC
PERSPECTIVE
STEROSCOPIC
Describers Meaning
ORTHOGRAPHIC Selects orthographic projection (Default).
PERSPECTIVE Selects perspective projection.
STEREOSCOPIC Selects stereoscopic projection.
Remark:
1. If none of the preceding projections are specified, then ORTHOGRAPHIC is used.
Main Index
Paper Dimensions
PAPER SIZE Paper Dimensions
Defines the size and type of the paper.
Format:
PAPER SIZE h X or BY v [ TYPE ptype ]
Example:
PAPER SIZE 10. BY 10.
Describers Meaning
h Horizontal size of paper in inches (Real, Default = 20.0).
v Vertical size of paper in inches (Real, Default= 20.0).
ptype Paper type (Character, Default = “VELLUM”).
Remarks:
1. The default paper size for the PLOTTER NAST is 20 by 20 inches which is converted to a 7 by 7
inch plot frame by the NASPLOT postprocessor.
2. PAPER SIZE can be specified along with the NASPLOT postprocessor to create rectangular plots.
For example, the command will result in a 14 by 7 inch plot frame if the default value of 1.0 is used
for the SCALE FACTOR on the NASPLOT command. The SCALE FACTOR on the NASPLOT
data command can be used to make larger plots having the shape defined with PAPER SIZE.
3. PAPER SIZE also affects the raster count for the NASTRAN plotter. The default raster count is 1000
for a paper size of 20 by 20. Doubling the paper size to 40 by 40 will double the raster count to 2000.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 715
Pen Color and Size Assignments
PEN Pen Color and Size Assignments
Generates a message on the printed output which may be used to inform the plotter operator as to what size
and color pen point to mount in the various pen holders.
Format:
PEN pn [ COLOR cname ]
Example:
PEN 2 COLOR RED
Describers Meaning
pn Pen identification number (Integer> 0).
COLOR Flag indicating the next word is a color name.
cname Pen color (Character).
Remarks:
1. The actual number of pens available will depend on the plotter hardware configuration at each
installation.
2. The PEN command does not control the pen used in generating the plot. See the PEN describer on
the PLOT, 717 command.
3. The PEN command is optional and is not appropriate for microfilm plotters.
Main Index
Selects Perspective Projection
PERSPECTIVE Selects Perspective Projection
See the description of the ORTHOGRAPHIC, etc., 713.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 717
Undeformed or Deformed Plot Request
PLOT Undeformed or Deformed Plot Request
Generates an undeformed plot of the model or a deformed plot for a subcase, mode number or time step.
Format:
 
PLOT [ analysis ] [ dtype ] [ CONTOUR ] [ i1, i2 THRU i3, i4, etc. ]  RANGE f1, f2  ,
 TIME t1, t2 
 PHASE LAG φ 
  [ MAXIMUM DEFORMATION d ] ,
 MAGNITUDE 
   PEN 
[ SET sid1 ] [ ORIGIN oid1 ]  SYMMETRY w   p [ SYMBOLS m [ ,n ] ] ,
 ANTISYMMETRY   DENSITY 
[ LABEL label ] SHAPE [ VECTOR v ] , [ PRINT ] ,

OUTLINE
[ SHRINK t, o ] [ NORMALS ] ,
[ SET sid2 ] [ ORIGIN oid2] etc.
Examples:
See after Remarks Section.
Describers Meaning
analysis Type of analysis results (Character, default results in an undeformed plot
or undeformed underlay for contour plots).
STATIC Plot static deformations.
MODAL Plot mode shapes or eigenvectors.
CMODAL Plot complex mode shapes or eigenvectors.
TRANSIENT Plot transient solutions.
FREQUENCY Plot frequency solutions.
SENOMOVE Plot undeformed superelements in their original
position; i.e., ignore SELOC Bulk Data entry.
dtype Specifies plot quantity (Character, Default = “DEFORMATION”).
DEFORMATI Plot displacements or temperatures in the Z
ON direction (Default).
VELOCITY Plot velocities.
ACCELERATI Plot accelerations.
ON
Main Index
Describers Meaning
CONTOUR Request for contour plot.
i1, i2,... Subcase identification numbers. See SHAPE and VECTOR for use of
“0" (underlay) command. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0, Default is all
subcases).
RANGE f1 f2 Specifies range of natural frequencies, eigenvalues, excitation
TIME t1,t2 frequencies, time steps, or load factors. Used to minimize the amount
of plotted data. See Remark 4. (Real).
PHASE LAG φ Specified phase lag, in degrees, for plotting complex quantities. See
Remark 5. (Real, Default = 0.0).
MAGNITUDE Requests magnitude of complex quantities.
MAXIMUM Specifies the magnification of the maximum displacement. See Remark
DEFORMATION d 6. (Real).
SET sid Set identification number which defines the set of elements or grid
points to be plotted (Default is first SET command).
ORIGIN oid Origin identification number (Default is first origin defined by the
ORIGIN or FIND command).
SYMMETRY w Request plot of the symmetric portion of the symmetrically or
ANTISYMMETRY w antisymmetrically loaded model. This symmetric portion will be
located in the space adjacent to the region originally defined by
ORIGIN oid, and will appear as a reflection of the antisymmetrically
deformed model about the plane whose normal is oriented parallel to
the coordinate direction w. See Remark 7. (Default is no action).
PEN p Specifies pen number that is used to generate the plot (Integer > 0).
DENSITY d Specifies line density scale factor for film plotters which is d times
heavier than a line density of 1 (Integer > 0).
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 719
Describers Meaning
SYMBOLS m[,n] All the grid points associated with the specified set will have symbol m
overprinted with symbol n printed at its location. If n is not specified,
only symbol m will be printed. See Remark 8.
m or n Symbol
0 none
1 X
2 *
3 +
4 -
5 .
6 ×
7 []
8 <>
9 /\
LABEL label Specifies labeling options at elements and grid points:

GRID All the grid points included in the specified set have
their identification number printed to the right of
the undeformed or deformed location (undeformed
location in the case of superimposed plots)
(Default).
ELEMENTS All the elements included in the specified set are
identified by the element identification number and
type at the center of each element (undeformed
location in the case of superimposed plots). See
Remarks 11. and 12.
BOTH Both GRID and ELEMENT options.
GSPC Label those degrees-of-freedom that are constrained
to zero through permanent single point constraints
on GRID and GRDSET Bulk Data entries, or are
constrained through SPC and SPC1 Bulk Data
entries. The label consists of the grid point ID
number and the constrained degrees-of-freedom.
EPID Label elements with their respective property
identification (PID) numbers. The label consists of
the standard element labels and element PID.
Main Index
Describers Meaning
SHAPE All the elements included in the specified set are shown by connecting
the associated grid points in a predetermined manner. See Remark 9.
OUTLINE Only the outline of all the elements in the specified set is shown.
Elements not supported by contour plots are ignored. Outlines are
always drawn with PEN 1. See Remark 9.
VECTOR v A line will be plotted at the grid points of the set representing by length
and direction the deformation of the point. See Remark 10. Possible
values of v are:
X, Y, or Z Requesting individual components.
XY, XZ, or YZ Requesting two specified components.
XYZ Requesting all three components.
RXY, RXZ, or Requesting vector sum of two components.
RYZ
R Requesting total vector deformation.
N Used with any of the preceding combinations to
request no underlay shape be drawn.
PRINT List of the average stresses at the interior grid points in the set will be
printed for contour stress plots.
SHRINK t,o t is the ratio of the reduction to the original dimensions of all
two-dimensional elements except the CQUAD8 and CTRIA6 (0.0 < t
< 1.0) (Real, Default = 0.1 which results in a 10% reduction).
o is the ratio of the reduction in length to the original length for

one-dimensional elements. There is no default value for o. t must be
specified to shrink one-dimensional elements.
NORMALS Plot vector normal to CHBDYP and CHBDYG elements.
Remarks:
1. If PLOT is specified with no describers, then a picture of the undeformed model will be prepared
using the first defined set and the first defined origin.
2. Describers analysis through PHASE LAG must be specified in the order shown above.
3. The following should be noted when using subcase numbers for plotting eigenvectors.
a. If subcase numbers are specified, then the convention for displacement vectors is that the list of
subcases must refer to subcase IDs whenever the number of modes recovered is equal to or less
than the number of subcases defined. If the number of modes recovered is more than the subcases
defined, the plot request for those modes associated with the subcases must refer to subcase IDs.
After the mode associated with the last defined subcase, higher modes will be identified by
incrementing the last defined subcase ID by one for each such higher mode.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 721
b. For the display of element quantities in contour plots, the automatic incrementing beyond the
last defined subcase does not occur. All subcase numbers to be plotted must be defined. A
MODES command in the Case Control Section may be used for this purpose.
c. In problems using cyclic symmetry solution sequences, the plot requests for segments of the model
must refer to the coded subcase identification numbers (see Theory (p. 708) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual). All eigenvectors recovered for the segment will be plotted. The RANGE
option can be used to select a subset of all eigenvectors for plotting without use of coded subcase
IDs.
d. RANGE does not require the use of subcase numbers.
4. RANGE specifies the range of values using requested subcases for which plots will be prepared. If only
one number is input, it is used as the lower bound and the upper bound is set to the highest value
computed. Unless otherwise noted, the default range is all values computed.
a. In real eigenvalue analysis, the values are natural frequencies, in units of cycles per unit time.
b. In buckling analysis, the values are eigenvalues.
c. In frequency response, the values are excitation frequencies in units of cycles per unit time.
d. In transient response, the values are in units of time.
e. In static nonlinear analysis (SOLs 106 and 153), the values are load factors. The default range is
the highest load factor of each subcase.
f. In transient nonlinear analysis (SOLs 129 and 159), the values are in units of time. The default
range is the last time step for each subcase.
5. PHASE LAG φ is used in the equation:
u R cos φ – u I sin φ
where u R an u I are the real and imaginary parts of the response quantity, respectively. The printed
output for magnitude and phase uses the convention of a phase lead.
6. MAX DEFO is not recommended for general use. Each subcase is separately scaled according to its
own maximum if this item is absent. If d is omitted, the set will be scaled to the maximum within the
set being plotted.
7. w specifies the basic coordinates X, Y, or Z, or any combination thereof. This option allows the
plotting of symmetric and/or antisymmetric combinations, provided that an origin is selected for the
portion of the model defined in the Bulk Data Section that allows sufficient room for the complete
plot. This does not permit the combination of symmetric and antisymmetric subcases, as each plot
must represent a single subcase. In the case of a double reflection, the figure will appear as one
reflected about the plane whose normal is parallel to the first of the coordinates w, followed by a
reflection about the plane whose normal is oriented parallel to the second of the coordinates w. This
capability is primarily used in the plotting of models that are loaded in a symmetric or an
antisymmetric manner. The plane of symmetry must be one of the basic coordinate planes.
8. Grid points excluded from the set will not have a symbol. Grid points in an undeformed underlay
will be identified with symbol 2.
Main Index
9. In order to get a deformed shape, either SHAPE or OUTLINE must be present in the PLOT
command. Both deformed and undeformed shapes or outlines may be specified. All the deformed
shapes relating to the subcases listed may be underlaid on each of their plots by including “0" with
the subcase string on the PLOT command. The undeformed plot will be drawn using PEN 1 or
DENSITY 1 and symbol 2 (if SYMBOLS is specified).
10. All plots requesting the VECTOR option will have an underlay generated of the undeformed shape
using the same sets, PEN 1 or DENSITY 1, and symbol 2 (if SYMBOLS is specified). If SHAPE and
VECTOR are specified, the underlay will depend on whether “0" is used along with the subcases with
DEFORMATION. It will be the deformed shape when not used, and will be both deformed and
undeformed shapes when it is used. The part of the vector at the grid point will be the tail when the
underlay is undeformed, and the head when it is deformed. If v=“N” then no shape will be drawn,
but other options such as SYMBOLS will still be valid.
11. Element type labels are: (Plot labels QH and TH indicate hyperelastic elements)
Element Plot Element Plot

Type Label Type Label
CAERO1 AE PLOTEL PL
CAXIF2 A2 CQUAD QH
CAXIF3 A3 CQUAD4 Q4 or QH
CAXIF4 A4 CQUAD8 Q8 or QH
CBAR BR CQUADR QR
CBEAM BM CQUADX QH
CBEND BD CROD RD
CBUSH BU CSHEAR SH
CONEAX CN CSLOT3 S3
CONROD CR CSLOT4 S4
CDUMI Di CTETRA TE
CFLUID2 F2 CTRIAX6 D1
CFLUID3 F3 CTRIA3 T3 or TH
CFLUID4 F4 CTRIA6 T6 or TH
CHBDYG HB CTRIAR TR
CHBDYP HB CTRIAX TH
CHEXA HA CTUBE TU
CPENTA HA CVISC VS
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 723
12. The heat transfer boundary condition elements CHBDYG and CHBDYP can be plotted for
undeformed plots. There are several types of CHBDYi elements, as follows:
Type No. of Primary Grid Points Normals Available

POINT 1 yes
LINE 2 yes
AREA3 3 yes
AREA4 4 yes
REV 2 no
ELCYL 2 no
TUBE 2 yes
FTUBE 2 yes
AREA6 6 yes
AREA6 8 yes
The secondary grid points are used for ambient conditions and are ignored by the plotter. Type
POINT must have a nonzero associated area (see AF on the associated PHBDY entry) and a defined
normal direction (see V1, V2, V3 on the CHBDYP entry) to be plotted. It is plotted as a hexagon
with approximately the correct area. Type LINE must have a nonzero width (see AF on the associated
PHBDY entry) and a defined normal in order to plot.
13. To assign PLOT command to superelements it requires an SEUPPLOT or a SEPLOT command.
Examples:
1. Undeformed SHAPE using first defined SET, first defined ORIGIN and PEN 1 (or DENSITY 1).
PLOT
2. Undeformed SHAPE using SET 3, ORIGIN 4, PEN 2 (or DENSITY 2) with each grid point of the
set having a + placed at its location, and its identification number printed adjacent to it.
PLOT SET 3 ORIGIN 4 PEN 2 SHAPE SYMBOLS 3 LABEL
3. Modal deformations as defined in subcase 5 using first defined SET, first defined ORIGIN, and PEN
1 (or DENSITY 1).
PLOT MODAL DEFORMATION 5 SHAPE
4. STATIC deformations as defined in subcases 3, 4, 5, and 8 deformed SHAPE; drawn with PEN 4,
using first defined SET and ORIGIN, underlaid with undeformed SHAPE drawn with PEN 1. This
command will cause four plots to be generated.
PLOT STATIC DEFORMATION 0, 3 THRU 5, 8 PEN 4, SHAPE
Main Index
5. Deformations as defined in⋅ subcases 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 undeformed underlay with PEN 1, consisting
of SET 2 at ORIGIN 3, SET 2 at ORIGIN 4 (with a < placed at each grid point location), and SET
35 at ORIGIN 4. Deformed data as follows: SHAPE using SET 2 at ORIGIN 3 (PEN 3) and SET
35 at ORIGIN 4 (PEN 4); 3 VECTORS (X, Y and Z) drawn at each grid point of SET 2 at ORIGIN
4 (PEN 4) (less any excluded grid points), with o placed at the end of each vector.
PLOT STATIC DEFORMATION 0 THRU 5,
SET 2 ORIGIN 3 PEN 3 SHAPE,
SET 2 ORIGIN 4 PEN 4 VECTORS XYZ SYMBOLS 0,
SET 35 SHAPE
6. Static deformations as defined in subcases 3 and 4, both halves of a problem solved by symmetry using
the X-Y principal plane as the plane of symmetry. SET 1 at ORIGIN 2 and SET 2 at ORIGIN 3,
with the deformed shape plotted using DENSITY 3 and the undeformed model plotted using
DENSITY 1. The deformations of the “opposite” half will be plotted to correspond to symmetric
loading. This command will cause two plots to be generated.
PLOT STATIC DEFORMATIONS 0, 3, 4,
SET 1 ORIGIN 2 DENSITY 3 SHAPE,
SET 1 SYMMETRY Z SHAPE,
SET 2 ORIGIN 3 SHAPE,
SET 2 SYMMETRY Z SHAPE
7. Transient deformations as defined in subcase 1 for time = 0.1 to time = 0.2, using SET 1 at ORIGIN
1. The undeformed SHAPE using PEN or DENSITY 1 with an * at each grid point location will be
drawn as an underlay for the resultant deformation vectors using PEN or DENSITY 2 with an <
typed at the end of each vector drawn. In addition, a plotted value of 2.0 will be used for the single
maximum deformation occurring on any of the plots produced. All other deformations on all other
plots will be scaled relative to this single maximum deformation. This command will cause a plot to
be generated for each output time step which lies between 0.1 and 0.2.
PLOT TRANSIENT DEFORMATION, TIME 0.1, 0.2,
MAXIMUM DEFORMATION 2.0, SET 1, ORIGIN 1, PEN 2, SYMBOLS 2,
VECTOR R
8. Contour plot of x-component of normal stress for elements in SET 2 in basic coordinate system at a
distance Z1 from neutral plane with 10 contour lines, an outline of elements in SET 2, and using
ORIGIN 4.
CONTOUR XNORMAL
PLOT CONTOUR, SET 2, ORIGIN 4, OUTLINE
Contour plot of magnitude of displacements at grid points associated with elements in SET 5 with 5
contours having values of 2., 4., 6., 8., 10., and an outline of the elements in SET 5 using
ORIGIN 4.
CONTOUR MAGNIT, LIST 2., 4., 6., 8., 10.
PLOT CONTOUR, SET 5, OUTLINE
9. Plot the imaginary part of the complex eigenvector in SET 1.
PLOT CMODAL DEFORMATION PHASE LAG 90. SET 1 VECTOR R
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 725
Plot File Format
PLOTTER Plot File Format
Selects format of plot file for interpretation by plotter postprocessor.
Format:
 
PLOTTER  NAST 
 SC 
Example:
PLOTTER NAST
Describers Meaning
NAST Specifies format suitable for Postscript plotters (Default).
SC Specifies Stromberg-Carlson microfilm plotter format.
Remark:
1. If no PLOTTER command is specified, then PLOTTER NAST is the default.
2. If “PLOTTER NAST” is specified (or taken by default) and if the format of the PLOT file has been
changed to formatted through the use of an ASSIGN statement, plot data will be generated in
PostScript mode directly instead of being generated in binary mode. PostScript plot control
information may be specified using the SYS= describer on the ASSIGN statement or by using the
SYSFIELD= command-line keyword, specifying the control information using the
PLOT(keyword=value,...) options. The valid keywords are the same as those that can be
specified for the PLOTPS or MSCPLOTPS utility programs except that the “begin”, “debug”,
“dump”, “end”, “format” and “output” keywords are not allowed.
Main Index
Separation Between Projection Plane and Observer
PROJECTION Separation Between Projection Plane and Observer
Defines the separation along the r-axis, and between the observer and the projection plane, if not already
specified on the VANTAGE POINT command. Used by stereoscopic projections only.
Format:
PROJECTION PLANE SEPARATION do
Example:
PROJ PLAN SEPA 1.5
Describer Meaning
do Separation of the observer and the projection plane on the r-axis in model units.
The VANTAGE POINT command may also specify the separation (Real, Default
= 2.0).
Remarks:
1. The PROJECTION PLANE SEPARATION command is not recommended. The FIND command
is recommended because it automatically calculates the optimum separation.
2. A theoretical description of projection plane separation is contained in Plotting (p. 427) in the MSC
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 727
Plot Frame Title
PTITLE Plot Frame Title
Defines a character string that will appear at the top of the plot frame on the line below the sequence number.
Format:
PTITLE ptitle
Example:
PTITLE RIGHT WING -- LOAD CASE 3
Describer Meaning
ptitle Any character string (Character, Default= blank).
Remarks:
1. PTITLE may not be continued to the next command line.
2. Up to four lines of title information will be printed in the lower left-hand corner of each plot. The
text for the top three lines is taken from the TITLE, SUBTITLE, and LABEL commands in the Case
Control Section. (See the Case Control Commands, 177 for a description of the TITLE, SUBTITLE, and
LABEL commands). The text for the bottom line may be of two forms depending on the type plot
requested. One form contains the word UNDEFORMED SHAPE. The other form contains the type
of plot (statics, modal, etc.) subcase number, load set or mode number, frequency or eigenvalue or
time, and (for complex quantities) the phase lag or magnitude. The sequence number for each plot is
printed in the upper corners of each frame. The sequence number is determined by the relative
position of each PLOT execution command in the plot package. The information on the PTITLE
command will be printed on the line below the sequence number. The date and (for deformed plots)
the maximum deformation are also printed at the top of each frame.
Main Index
Scale Factor
SCALE Scale Factor
Defines reduction, as a scale factor, of model’s dimensions so that model fits on a plot frame.
Format:
SCALE a [ b ]
Example:
SCALE 0.5
Describers Meaning
a Scale factor (Default=1.0).
b Ratio of model size/real object size for stereoscopic projection only.
Remarks:
1. The SCALE command is not recommended. The FIND command is recommended because it
automatically calculates the optimum scale factor.
2. For orthographic or perspective projections, a is the ratio of the plotted object, in inches, to the real
object in the units of model; i.e., one inch of paper equals one unit of model.
3. For stereoscopic projections, the stereoscopic effect is enhanced by first reducing the real object to a
smaller model according to b, and then applying a. The ratio of plotted/real object is then the product
of a and b.
4. If the NASTRAN general purpose plotter is used in combination with the PLOTPS postprocessing
routine, a scale factor can computed as follows:
20
a = p ⋅ ------ ⋅ K
7
where:
p = ratio of plot size to object size. For instance, if the model is 100 inches long and the plot
size is 7 inches, then
7
p = --------- = .007
100
20
------ = ratio of default PAPER SIZE to default PLOTPS frame size.
7
K = SCALE value on PLOTPS command (Default=1.0). See Using the Utility Programs (p. 171)
in the MSC Nastran 2016 Installation and Operations Guide.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 729
SEPLOT Superelement Plot Delimiter
Assigns the subsequent PLOT or XYPLOT commands to one or more superelements.
Format:
SEPLOT seid1 [ seid2 ... ]
Examples:
SEPLOT 5
SEPLOT 0 3 7 200
Describer Meaning
seidi Superelement identification number (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. See also related command SEUPPLOT.
2. Any PLOT or XYPLOT commands appearing above all SEPLOT (or SEUPPLOT) commands will
apply in all SEPLOT (or SEUPPLOT) packets.
3. For multiple PLOT or XYPLOT commands, there should be a SEPLOT command with each PLOT.
For the special case where the PLOTs or XYPLOTs refer to the same superelements and use the same
FIND, a single SEPLOT followed by a single FIND may be placed above all commands.
Main Index
Set Definition Under OUTPUT(PLOT)
SET Set Definition Under OUTPUT(PLOT)
Defines a set of elements or grid point numbers to be plotted.

The SET command specifies sets of elements or grid points, corresponding to portions of the model, which
may be referenced by PLOT and FIND commands. The SET command is required. Each set of elements
defines, by implication, a set of grid points connected by those elements. The set may be modified by deleting
some of its grid points. The elements are used for creating the plot itself and element labeling, while the grid
points are used for labeling, symbol printing, and drawing deformation vectors.
Format:
ELEMENTS EXCEPT  type1 type2 … typej 

SET n = ALL   ,
GRID POINTS  k1 k2 … kj THRU kk BY incj 
INCLUDE ELEMENTS  type1 type2 … typej 

 ,
EXCLUDE GRID POINTS  k1 k2 … kj THRU kk BY incj 
 
EXCEPT  type1 typem … typen 
 k1 km … kn THRU ko BY incn 
Examples:
1. SET 1 consists of elements 1, 5, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 20, 22, 24, and 26.
SET 1=INCLUDE 1, 5, 10 THRU 15 EXCEPT 12, INCLUDE 20 THRU 26 BY 2
2. SET 2 consists of all CTRIA3 and CQUAD4 elements except element 21.
SET 2=QUAD4 TRIA3 EXCEPT 21
3. SET 10 includes all CTRIAR elements plus elements 70 through 80.
SET 10 TRIAR INCLUDE ELEMENTS 70 THRU 80
4. SET 15 includes all elements from 15 to 20 and 26 to 100.
SET 15=15 THRU 100 EXCEPT 21 THRU 25
5. SET 2 includes all elements except CTETRA elements.
SET 2=ALL EXCEPT TETRA
Describer Meaning
n Sets identification number (0<Integer<999999).
ALL Selects all elements or grid points. See typei.
ELEMENTS Specifies that all identification numbers refer to elements.
GRID POINTS Specifies that all identification numbers refer to grid points.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 731
Describer Meaning
INCLUDE Includes specified element or grid point identification numbers or elements in the
set.
EXCLUDE Excludes specified element or grid point identification numbers or element types in
the set.
EXCEPT Modifies a prior ALL, INCLUDE, or EXCLUDE specification.
typei Element types. The allowed element types are (Character):
Element typei on SET Element typei on SET

Type Command Type Command
CAXIF2 AXIF2 CQUAD QUAD
CAXIF3 AXIF3 CQUAD4 QUAD4
CAXIF4 AXIF4 CQUAD8 QUAD8
CBAR BAR CQUADR QUADR
CBEAM BEAM CQUADX QUADX
CBEND BEND CROD ROD
CBUSH BUSH CSHEAR SHEAR
CONEAX CONE CSLOT3 SLOT3
CONROD CONROD CSLOT4 SLOT4
CDUMi DUMi CTETRA TETRA
CFLUID2 FLUID2 CTRIAX6 TRIAX6
CFLUID3 FLUID3 CTRIA3 TRIA3
CFLUID4 FLUID4 CTRIA6 TRIA6
CHBDYG HBDY CTRIAR TRIAR
CHBDYP HBDY CTRIAX TRIAX
CHEXA HEXA CTUBE TUBE
CPENTA PENTA CVISC VISC
PLOTEL PLOTEL
THRU Specifies a range of identification numbers.

BY Specifies an increment for a THRU specification.
inci Increment for THRU range (Integer > 0).
Main Index
Remarks:
1. This form of the SET command can only be specified after an OUTPUT(PLOT) delimiter.
2. The INCLUDE, EXCLUDE, and EXCEPT specifications may be specified more than once in the
same set. See previous examples.
3. Commas or spaces may be used as separators.
4. Not all of the identification numbers in a THRU range have to correspond to elements or grid points.
For example, elements 2, 4, 7, and 9 may be selected with 2 THRU 9, even if elements 3, 5, 6, and
8 do not exist. This is called an open set. Note that large open sets can cause higher computational
costs.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 733
SEUPPLOT Superelement Plot Delimiter
Assigns the subsequent PLOT or XYPLOT commands to a superelement and all of its upstream
superelements.
Format:
SEUPPLOT seid
Example:
SEUPPLOT 7
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. See also related command SEPLOT.
2. Any PLOT or XYPLOT commands appearing above all SEUPPLOT (or SEPLOT) commands will
apply in all SEUPPLOT (or SEPLOT) packets.
3. For multiple PLOT or XYPLOT commands, there should be a SEUPPLOT command with each
PLOT. For the special case where the PLOTs or XYPLOTs refer to the same superelements and use
the same FIND, a single SEUPPLOT followed by a single FIND may be placed above all the
commands.
Main Index
Selects Stereoscopic Projection
STEREOSCOPIC Selects Stereoscopic Projection
See the description of the ORTHOGRAPHIC, etc., 713.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 735
Location of the Observer
VANTAGE POINT Location of the Observer
Defines the location of the observer with respect to the model in the (r, s, t) coordinate system defined on the
AXES command for perspective and stereoscopic projections only.
Format:
VANTAGE POINT ro so to do sor
Example:
VANT 100.
Describers Meaning
ro Location of the observer on the r-axis in model units (Real).
so Location of the observer and left eye of the observer on the s-axis, in model units,
for perspective and stereoscopic projections, respectively (Real).
to Location of the observer on the t-axis in model units (Real).
do Separation of the observer and the projection plane on the r-axis in model units.
The PROJECTION PLANE SEPARATION command may also specify the
separation (Real).
sor Location of the of the observer’s right eye for stereoscopic projections in model
units (Real).
Remarks:
1. VANTAGE POINT or the FIND command must be specified if the PERSPECTIVE or
STEREOSCOPIC command is also specified.
2. The VANTAGE POINT command is not recommended. The FIND command is recommended
because it automatically calculates the optimum vantage point.
3. A theoretical description of the vantage point is contained in Plotting (p. 427) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual.
Main Index
Angular Relationship of Observer’s Coordinate System
VIEW Angular Relationship of Observer’s Coordinate System
Defines the angular relationship between observer’s coordinate system (r, s, and t axes specified on the AXES
command) and basic coordinate system.
Format:
VIEW gamma beta alpha
Example 1:
View the model from the r-axis.
VIEW 0. 0. 0.
Example 2:
View the model midway between the r- and s-axes.
VIEW 45. 0. 0.
Describers Meaning
gamma Angle of rotation, in degrees, of t axis specified on AXES command (Default =
34.27).
beta Angle of rotation, in degrees, of s axis specified on AXES command (Default =
23.17 if ORTHOGRAPHIC or STEREOSCOPIC command is specified and
0.0 if PERSPECTIVE command is specified).
alpha Angle of rotation, in degrees, of r axis specified on AXES command (Default =
0.0).
Remarks:
1. If no VIEW command is specified, then VIEW 34.27 23.17 0.0 is assumed for orthographic and
stereoscopic projections; and VIEW 34.27 0.0 0.0 is assumed for perspective projections. The default
values produce a plot in which unit vectors on the axes of the basic coordinate system have equal
lengths.
2. The angles are rotated in sequence: gamma rotates the t-axes, followed by beta which rotates the
s-axes, followed by alpha which rotates the r-axes.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 737
T,Z
Y
(a) g-rotation about T-axis.
S
R T
X
Z
(b) b-rotation about S-axis.
S
β
X
T
Y
(c) a-rotation about R-axis.

S
R
α
X
3. The VIEW command specifies the position of the model with respect to the s-t plane. Gamma and
beta represent the angles of turn and tilt. Alpha is normally not used since it does not affect the
orientation of the s-t plane, but only it’s orientation on the plot frame.
Main Index
Main Index
Chapter 6: Parameters MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s GuideMSC Nastran Quick
Reference Guide
6 Parameters

Parameter Descriptions 740
 Parameter Applicability Tables 966
Main Index
Parameter Descriptions
Parameters are used extensively in the solution sequences for input of scalar values and for requesting special
features. Parameters values are specified on PARAM Bulk Data entries or PARAM Case Control commands.
The PARAM Bulk Data entry is described in the Bulk Data Entries, 1071. The PARAM Case Control command
is described in the PARAM (Case), 492. PARAMs may also be used in .rc and .ini files as described in Specifying
Parameters, B. in the MSC Nastran Installation and Operations Guide. A complete alphabetical list of
PARAMeter names and their functions is given in this section.
If the Bulk Data involves the use of part superelements or external superelements, the following points should
be noted regarding the use of the PARAM Bulk Data entry:
1. PARAM entries specified in the Main Bulk Data portion of the input data apply only to the residual
and not to the part superelements or external superelements.
2. PARAM entries specified in the BEGIN SUPER portion of the Bulk Data for a part superelement or
an external superelement apply only to that superelement.
3. The most convenient way of ensuring that PARAM entries apply not only to the residual, but also to
all part superelements and external superelements is to specify such PARAM entries in Case Control,
not in the Main Bulk Data. This is particularly relevant for such PARAMs as POST.
ACEXTMTD
ACEXTMTD is used to select a different solver for solving exterior acoustic model. Valid options are ITER
for selecting iterative solver and KRYLOV for selecting Krylov solver.
ACEXTSET
ACEXTSET is used to select ITER bulk data entry for PARAM,ACEXTMTD,ITER.
ACOUT
Default = PEAK
ACOUT specifies the type of output to be used with the FORCE Case Control command in coupled
fluid-structural analysis (see Additional Topics (p. 511) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide. ACOUT=RMS
requests root-mean-square output.
To obtain sound pressure level in units of dB and dBA given by the FORCE command, a peak reference
pressure must be specified with PARAM, PREFDB. The dB level is defined as:
P
dB = 20 ⋅ log  ----------------------
 PREFDB
Instead of ACCELERATION, suffix INT can be utilized to generate INTENSITY. See also the Case Control
command FLSTCNT (Case), 353.
ACOWEAK
Default = NO
ACOWEAK controls the execution of weakly coupled acoustic formulation logic. PARAM,ACOWEAK,YES
will activate weakly coupled acoustic formulation which will solve exterior acoustic model along with
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 741
CACINFx separately using load generated from structural response and coupling matrix. ACOWEAK,YES
is available only in SOL 111 and SOL 200 with ANALYSIS=MFREQ.
In the cases where loading is on exterior acoustic only, PARAM,ACOWEAK,YESR will solve for exterior
acoustic model first and generates loading at coupling nodes for structural and interior acoustic model. In
addition, PARAM, ACOWEAK, YESR can be used to force NASTRAN to solve exterior acoustic model first
if loading is on both structural and exterior acoustic models.
Note that the detailed knowledge on the loading is not required to use ACOWEAK, and with PARAM,
ACOWEAK, yes, the Automated logic will determine which part of FSI to solve first.
The ACOWEAK solution technique supports trim components via TRIMGRP or ACTRIM between
structure and interior cavity only. If there are trim components situated between the structure and exterior
cavity, fully coupled solution techniques should be utilized.
With ACOWEAK solution scheme, the exterior acoustic portion of the model is solved in physical
coordinates. Therefore, acoustic structural modal participation factor will not be possible since acoustic field
eigenvalues and/or eigenvectors are missing or incomplete.
ACSYM
Default = YES
By default, the dynamic equations for coupled fluid-structure analysis in frequency response are symmetrized
for efficiency. PARAM,ACSYM,NO requests the pre-Version 69 formulation which involves no
symmetrization and will require more CPU time. See Formulation of Dynamic Equations in SubDMAP GMA (p. 357)
in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual. See also the Case Control command FLSTCNT (Case), 353.
If the iterative solver is selected (see the Case Control command, SMETHOD (Case), 542) then the external work
diagnostic will be different between ACSYM=YES and ACSYM=NO.
ACTDMP
Default=0
This parameter can be used to specify DMP processors for Actran. By default(ACTDMP=0), it will be set to
DMP of Nastran job submittal.
ACTSMP
Default=0
This parameter can be used to specify SMP processors for Actran. By default(ACTSMP=0), it will be set to
SMP of Nastran job submittal.
ADJMETH
Default = 0
This parameter selects the processing method used in a triple matrix product in module DSADJ. The default
is usually preferred, but ADJMETH=1 can be used when disk space is critical. ADJMETH=2 only holds the
active solution vectors.
Main Index
ADMPOST
Default = 0
This parameter allows the user to bring an ADAMS results file into Nastran for modal data recovery in SOL
111 and SOL 112. A value of 1 brings in the ADAMS results without consideration of rigid body motion in
the display of the results. A value of 2 brings in the ADAMS results with consideration of rigid body motion
in the display of the results. See the Case Control command ADAMSMNF* (Case), 206 footnote and Remark 19.
for more details on restrictions and required file assignments.
ADPCON
Default = 1.0
Initial penalty values used in contact analysis are calculated automatically by the program and are given by
k ⋅ SFAC ⋅ ADPCON where k is a number selected for each slave node based on the diagonal stiffness matrix
coefficients that are in the contact region, and SFAC is the value specified by the user in the SFAC field of
the BCONP Bulk Data entry. The ADPCON value applies to all the contact regions in the model. During
the analysis, if convergence problems are encountered, penalty values are automatically reduced. Still there
may be some problems where convergence can not be achieved with default values. In such cases, analysis
may be restarted with a lower value of ADPCON.
In some cases the default penalty values may be low. In such situations analysis may be restarted with a higher
value of ADPCON.
Generally, penalty values are recalculated every time there is a change in stiffness. However, if ADPCON is
negative, penalty values are calculated only at the beginning of each subcase, and penalty values are not
adjusted during analysis. This is useful if the contact between two elastic bodies is being analyzed.
ADSTAT
Character; Default = YES
In transient analysis (SOLs 101,109 and 112 only), if there is a preload (see Case Control command STATSUB
(Case), 549) and ADSTAT=YES, the static displacements, SPC forces, and MPC forces will be included in the
transient output. There is a limitation that OLOAD is not included. Another limitation is that element stress
and force recover will neglect thermal strains and, hence will be wrong if there is a TEMP(LOAD) request.
For any other value of ADSTAT the preload effects will not be included in the output, hence the output will
be the perturbation displacements, SPC forces and MPC forces.
AERODOF
Default=35
Digits 1 through 6 indicate which k-set degrees of freedom are to be output. This is only for Double Lattice
lifting surfaces that provide output in the plunge (3) and pitch (5) degrees of freedom by default. If additional
digits are specified (e.g. AERODOF=1235), then the k-set aerodynamic matrices are padded with null
columns for the additional degrees of freedom. Nastran will not create aerodynamic data for these added
degrees of freedom. This parameter is only useful to the user that knows how to augment the existing
aerodynamic data from an external source. Degrees of freedom 3 and 5 may not be omitted.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 743
AESDISC
Default = 1.E-8
Tolerance for discarding generalized coordinates in the RITZ method (see Case Control command, AESMETH,
743) which are not linearly independent.
AESMAXIT
Default = 15
Maximum number of iterations for the ITER method (see Case Control command, AESMETH, 743).
AESMETH
Default = SELECT
Solution method for static aeroelastic analysis.
SELECT selects the DIRECT method on models with less than 50000 DOF in the solution set;
otherwise selects AUTO.
AUTO selects the reduced basis method for an approximate solution, which is used as starting
vectors for an ITER solution.
DIRECT selects the direct solution.
RITZ selects the reduced basis approximate solution.
ITER selects the iterative solution.
AESRNDM
Default = 2
Number of random vectors to use as generalized functions in the RITZ method (see Case Control command,
AESMETH, 743).
AESTOL
Default = 1.E-10
Convergence criteria for the iterative solver.
AGGROT
Default = YES
PARAM, AGGROT, YES (Default) produces both translation and rotational terms in the structure-fluid
interface matrix AGG. PARAM, AGGROT, NO produces only translational terms in the structure-fluid
interface matrix AGG. Since fluid elements see no rotational degrees of freedom, AGGROT YES or NO
should have no significant effect on the results of the fluid cavity. Results on the structural side may change
especially near unconstrained boundaries where there may be a reversal in the signs of some acceleration
terms.
Main Index
ALPHA1, ALPHA2
Default = 0.0, 0.0
In frequency and transient response analysis, if PARAM,ALPHA1 and/or ALPHA2 are not equal to zero,
then Rayleigh damping is added to the viscous damping. ALPHA1 is the scale factor applied to the mass
matrix and ALPHA2 to the structural stiffness matrix. In SOL400, ALPHA1 and ALPHA2 are supported for
both the linear and nonlinear elements. In SOL 129, Alpha1 scales the mass matrix, and ALPHA2 is not used.
[ B′ ] = [ B ] + ALPHA1 ⋅ [ M ] + ALPHA2 ⋅ [ K ]
If ξ i is the damping ratio for the i-th mode ω i (radians/unit time), then ALPHA1 ( α 1 ) and ALPHA2 ( α 2 )
may be computed as
  ωj –ωi  
 α1  2ω i ω j  ξi 
  = -------------------
2 2 –1 1  
 α2  ωj – ωi ------ -----  ξ j 
  ωj ωi  
and the damping ratio for any other ξ l mode becomes

ω i ω j  ω j ω l ω ω
ξ l = ------------------- ----- – ----- ξ i –  -----i – -----l ξ j
2 2 ω ω   ω l ω i
ωj – ωi l j
Note: The use of Rayleigh damping with non-zero values of ALPHA1 may not be appropriate for
enforced motion problems involving large mass since the resulting damping matrix may
essentially violate the assumption of large mass in the problem and thus give wrong answers.
Similarly, the use of Rayleigh damping with non-zero values of ALPHA2 may not be
appropriate for enforced motion problems involving large stiffness since the resulting damping
matrix may essentially violate the assumption of large stiffness in the problem and thus give
wrong answers.
Since Version 2005r3, the ALPHA1, ALPHA2 parameters apply only to stationary structural
components. Prior to this version, the parameters applied to both stationary and rotating
structural components. With the introduction of Version 2005r3, new parameters
ALPHAR1, ALPHAR2 are defined on the RSPINR and RSPINT bulk data entry for the
rotating component, see Remark 8. of the DAMPING bulk data description for a comment
on this item.
Rayleigh damping is designed to be applied only at Superelement, Part Superelement, or

External Superelement residual assembly time. It is not applied in individual Parts or External
superelements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 745
ALPHA1FL, ALPHA2FL
Default = 0.0, 0.0
In frequency and transient response analysis, if PARAM,ALPHA1FL and/or ALPHA2FL are not equal to
zero, then Rayleigh damping is added to the viscous damping. ALPHA1FL is the scale factor applied to the
mass matrix and ALPHA2FL to the fluid stiffness matrix.
[ B′ ] = [ B ] + ALPHA1FL ⋅ [ M ] + ALPHA2FL ⋅ [ K ]
If ξ i is the damping ratio for the i-th mode ω i (cycles/unit time), then ALPHA1FL ( α 1 ) and ALPHA2FL
( α 2 ) may be computed as
  ωj –ωi  
 α1  2ω i ω j  ξi 
  = -------------------
2 2 –1 1  
 α2  ωj – ωi ------ -----  ξ j 
  ωj ωi  
and the damping ratio for any other ξ l mode becomes
ω i ω j  ω j ω l ω ω
ξ l = ------------------- ----- – ----- ξ i – -----i – -----l ξ
2    ω l ω i j
ωj – ωi ωl ωj
2
Note: The use of Rayleigh damping with non-zero values of ALPHA1FL may not be appropriate for
enforced motion problems involving large mass since the resulting damping matrix may
essentially violate the assumption of large mass in the problem and thus give wrong answers.
Similarly, the use of Rayleigh damping with non-zero values of ALPHA2FL may not be
appropriate for enforced motion problems involving large stiffness since the resulting damping
matrix may essentially violate the assumption of large stiffness in the problem and thus give
wrong answers.
Rayleigh damping is designed to be applied only at Superelement, Part Superelement, or

External Superelement residual assembly time. It is not applied in individual Parts or External
superelements.
ALTRED
Default = NO
ALTRED=YES requests the alternate stiffness and load reduction technique for superelement analysis in
SOLs 101 and 114. This technique is described in Static Solutions in SubDMAP SEKRRS, 348, Static and Dynamic
Load Generation, 351, and Data Recovery Operations in SubDMAP SEDISP (p. 360) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Manual.
Main Index
ALTSHAPE
Default = 0
ALTSHAPE selects the set of displacement shape functions to be used in p-version analysis.
PARAM,ALTSHAPE,0 selects the MacNeal set. PARAM,ALTSHAPE,1 selects the Full Product Space set.
For ALTSHAPE=1, IN=1 and ISOP=1 must be specified on the PSOLID entry.
ARBMASP
Default = 2
ARBMASP defines the maximum aspect ratio of CQUAD4 generated for CP/OP options of PBMSECT if
ARBMSTYP=timoshen. Since the thickness of a ply is usually the small dimension, ARBMASP affects the
size of CQUAD4 lengthwise along a segment.
ARBMFEM
Default = YES
ARBMFEM controls the generation of ‘.bdf ’ file which contains the Finite Element Model of the arbitrary
beam cross section. This parameter is functional for PBRSECT and PBMSECT only. To turn off the
capability, set value of ARBMFEM to ‘NO’.
ARBMNOW
Default = 0
ARBMNOW controls the overwrite of segment property for PBMSECT, arbitrary beam cross section. With
default value of ARBMNOW, segment property overwrite will occur during the process of assigning the
property for each segment. To turn off segment property overwrite, use PARAM,ARBMNOW,1.
ARBMPS
Default = YES
ARBMPS controls the generation of outline plot for arbitrary beam cross section in PostScript format. This
parameter is functional for PBRSECT and PBMSECT only. To turn off capability, set value of ARBMPS to
‘NO’.
ARBMSS
Default = NO
ARBMSS controls the stress recovery for the whole arbitrary beam cross section and the companion ‘screened’
stresses. The stress recovery for the whole cross section is available in ‘OP2’ format and suitable for post-
processing. The ‘screened’ stresses for CBAR and CBEAM elements is available in print file (f06) and can be
utilized for design optimization via RTYPE=ABSTRESS on DRESP1. This parameter is functional for
PBRSECT and PBMSECT only. To turn on the capability, set value of ARBMSS to ‘YES’.
Note: The recovery of ‘screened’ stresses will be turned on automatically if RTYPE=ABSTRESS is in

use on DRESP1.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 747
ARBMSTYP
Default = TIMOSHEN
ARBMSTYP controls the solution algorithm for composite arbitrary beam cross-section. Other valid option
is 'TIMOFORC'. This parameter is functional for PBRSECT and PBMSECT only.
ARF
Default = 0.95
See FLUIDMP, 784.
ARS
Default = 0.95
See FLUIDMP, 784.
ASCOUP
Default = YES
In coupled fluid-structure analysis, by default, the coupling between the fluid and structure is computed.
This interaction will be ignored if PARAM,ASCOUP,NO is specified. See also the Case Control command
FLSTCNT (Case), 353 for alternative selections.
ASING
Default = 0
ASING specifies the action to take when singularities (null rows and columns) exist in the dynamic matrices
(or [ K ll ] in statics). If ASING=-1, then a User Fatal Message will result.
If ASING=0 (the Default), singularities are removed by appropriate techniques depending on the type of
solution being performed. The procedures used are described in Data Recovery Operations in SubDMAP SEDRCVR,
364 and Real Eigenvalue Analysis in SubDMAPs SEMR3 and MODERS (p. 374) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
AUNITS
Default = 1.0
AUNITS is used in SOL 144 to convert accelerations specified in units of gravity on the TRIM Bulk Data
entry to units of distance per time squared. Accelerations are divided by this parameter. To convert
accelerations input in g’s into physical, consistent units, set AUNITS to 1/g.
AUTOADJ
Default = YES
In SOL 200, a value of yes will automatically choose the direct or adjoint sensitivity analysis based on the
performance criteria. Other options for this parameter are:
NO - the adjoint method will not be selected.
Main Index
NOSTAT - the adjoint method will not be selected for static analysis subcases, but may be selected
for frequency response subcases based on the performance criteria.
NOFREQ - the adjoint method will not be selected for frequency responses subcases, but may be
selected for static analysis subcases based on the performance criteria.
The default should be preferred in all cases. However, the other options allow investigation of the alternative
of using direct sensitivity methods.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 749
AUTOGOUT
Default = NO
PARAM,AUTOGOUT,YES simplifies grid point data recovery requests when only a set of elements is
specified. In other words, given a set of elements the program will automatically determine all connected
grid points and honor the data recovery requests for both grid points and elements. See also
PARAM,OELMOPT description.
If PARAM,AUTOGOUT,YES is specified then the program assumes that SET 2 defines the set of desired
elements and SET 1 defines the additional grids not connected to the elements in SET 2. If no additional
grids are desired then the user need only specify SET 1=0. For example, in Case Control,
Param,autogout,yes
Set 2 = 27,35,25,41234,123,thru,134,9701,9901 $ elements
Set 1 = 0 $ additional grids
Displ=1
Gpfor=1
Stres=2
If the user prefers to use different set IDs then user PARAMs OSETELE and OSETGRD may be used to
change the set ids used by this feature. For example:
Param,autogout,yes
Param,osetele,200
Param,osetgrd,100
Displ=100
Gpfor=100
Stres=200
And if the user wants to add more grids that are not connected to the element set:
Param,autogout,yes
Param,osetele,200
Param,osetgrd,100
Displ=100
Gpfor=100
Stres=200
AUTOMSET
Character, Default = NO (Except in SOL 400 with ANALYSIS=STATICS)
The relationship between dependent and independent degrees-of-freedom for rigid elements and MPCs may
be altered from the user’s input specification via PARAM,AUTOMSET,YES or PARAM,
AUTOMSET,LUSOL. For PARAM, AUTOMSET,YES, or PARAM,AUTOMSET, LUSOL, dependent
Main Index
degrees-of-freedom of the model, the M-set are automatically determined by employing a rectangular
decomposition of the RMG matrix.
YES For solutions other than SOL 600, the rectangular decomposition is performed via
UMFPACK, which is used by permission. Copyright (c) 2002 by Timothy A. Davis. All
rights reserved. Availability: http://faculty.cse.tamu.edu/davis/suitesparse.html
LUSOL The rectangular decomposition is performed via LUSOL, which is capable of Rook or full
pivoting during rectangular decomposition. LUSOL option is especially suitable for ill
conditioned RMG matrix or problems with redundant multi-point constraints. Availability:
http://web.stanford.edu/group/SOL/software/lusol/
Notes:  When used in SOL 600, AUTOMSET=Yes maps to Marc’s AUTOMSET. By

default or if PARAM,AUTOMSET,NO is entered, Marc’s AUTOMSET will be
omitted. See Volume C of Marc for further details.
 PARAM,AUTOMSET,YES is not supported for SOL 200.
 RSSCON is not supported with AUTOMSET.
AUTOQSET
Default = NO
AUTOQSET=YES requests the automatic calculation of component modes without the need to define a q-
set (generalized coordinates).
1. The calculation of component modes is attempted on all superelements including the residual
structure.
2. All component modes are treated like SPOINTs which means that all component modes are “brought
down” to and assigned to the q-set in the residual structure. In other words, component modes may
not be assigned interior to a superelement.
3. Selected component modes may not be removed (constrained).
4. Since the generalized coordinates are automatically defined, the following entries may not be
specified: QSETi, SEQSETi, SENQSET, or PARAM,NQSET.
5. This feature is not supported with:
a. Design optimization (SOL 200)
b. Aerodynamic analyses (SOLs 144, 145, 146)
c. Cyclic symmetry analyses (SOLs 114, 115, 116, 118)
d. SECSETi and SEBSETi Bulk Data entries that result in a fixed-free or free-free superelement.
This restriction also applies to BSETi/BNDFIXi and CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1entries in
part (BEGIN SUPER) superelements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 751
PARAM,SQSETID may be used to specify the starting identification number of the automatically generated
q-set degrees-of-freedom except when the EXTSEOUT command is present (see Remark 17. of the
EXTSEOUT Case Control command). The default is 99000001.
AUTOSPC
Default = YES
This parameter is obsolete and replaced by the Case Control command AUTOSPC (Case), 232. It is ignored in
all nonlinear analysis in SOL 400 that only support the AUTOSPC Case Control command. AUTOSPC
and the related parameters EPPRT, EPZERO, PRGPST, and SPCGEN are analogous to and described under
the AUTOSPC Case Control command under the EPSING, EPS, PRINT, and PUNCH keywords,
respectively. The specification of the AUTOSPC Case Control command overrides the specification of
PARAM,AUTOSPC and its related parameters EPPRT, EPZERO, PRGPST, and SPCGEN.
AUTOSPCR
Default = NO (SOLs 106 and 153 only)
In nonlinear static analysis only, AUTOSPCR specifies the action to take when singularities exist in linear
stiffness matrix of the residual structure after multipoint constraints are processed. AUTOSPCR=YES means
that singularities will be constrained and AUTOSPCR=NO means they will not be constrained. It is
recommended that all degrees-of-freedom attached to nonlinear elements be specified on ASETi entries.
Parameters EPPRT, EPZERO, PRGPST, and SPCGEN may be used with AUTOSPCR.
AUTOSPRT
Default = YES
By default, free-free models will be automatically constrained for calculation of residual vectors (RESVEC
Case Control command) as long as F1 < 0.0 on the EIGR (or EIGRL) Bulk Data entry. The auto-SUPORT
method may be deactivated by specifying a SUPORTi entry, PARAM,AUTOSPRT,NO, or F1 > 0.0.
FZERO is the maximum frequency assumed for a rigid body mode. FZERO is used by the auto-SUPORT
method to extract the rigid body frequencies. The default is 1.0.
BAILOUT
Default = 0
See MAXRATIO, 847.
BEAMBEA
Real, Default = 1000.0
Value Equivalent radius to be used for beam-beam contact problems. For tubes or round bars, use
the outer radius. If the radii are different enter the largest outer radius. For beams, enter an
equivalent radius calculated as follows:
I=0.5*(Ix+Iy)
R=sqrt(A/pi2+2*I/A)
where A, Ix, Iy are the cross-section properties and pi2 = Π2 .
Main Index
BEIGRED
Default = YES
PARAM,BEIGRED,YES requests a more efficient method to reduce viscous damping matrices. CPU and
disk space savings may be significant if there is a small number of viscous damping elements. BEIGRED is
automatically disabled if the number of DOF connected to viscous dampers exceeds the value specified by
PARAM,MAXDAMP.
MAXDAMP (default=1000) specifies the maximum number of DOF connected to viscous damping
elements, such that an alternate reduction method is employed. When there are relatively few viscous
dampers, an alternate reduction method is chosen automatically for efficiency. The efficiency is lost however
if the number of viscous damping DOF exceeds about 1000. If the number of viscous damper DOF exceeds
MAXDAMP, User Warning Message 9166 is printed and the alternate damping reduction logic is disabled.
Also note that if MAXDAMP is exceeded, FASTFR is disabled.
BIGER, BIGER1, BIGER2, BIGER3

Default = 0.0
See S1.
BUCKLE
Default = -1
BUCKLE=1 requests a nonlinear buckling analysis in a restart run of SOLs 106 or 153. See the MSC Nastran
Handbook for Nonlinear Analysis. (Not supported for SOL 600.)
BUCKLE=2 requests buckling in a SOL 106 cold start run. (Must be in Bulk Data for SOL 600.)
CASIEMA
Default = NO, SOL 400 CASI Solver only
When the CASI element-based iterative solver is specified (see the Case Control command SMETHOD (Case),
542) SOL 400 skips various processes associated with the global structure stiffness matrix. The absence of a
complete assembled stiffness matrix and its sub-sets can lead to a termination of the solution process in the
NLSOLV module if the CASI solver detects a singularity. If the parameter is set to YES, SOL 400 performs
all assembly and displacement set reduction operations involving the complete stiffness matrix allowing the
NLSOLV module to select either the matrix-based iterative solver or the sparse direct solver to continue in
the event CASI detects a singularity.
Use a value of YES with caution as it adversely affects run-time performance. Substantial additional disk space
could be required as well as longer run times. Keep in mind that invocation of the sparse direct solver for large
solid element models may degrade performance even further.
This parameter only applies to SOL 400 usage of the CASI solver.
CASPIV
Default = 1.0e-10
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 753
Input DMAP parameter to the SOLVIT and NLSOLV modules for the CASI iterative solver. It is the pivot
threshold for the CASI PCG (Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient) factorization. Pivot value less than
CASPIV will exit with an error message.
CB1, CB2
Default = (1.0, 0.0)
CB1 and CB2 specify factors for the total damping matrix. The total damping matrix is:
x 2
[ B jj ] = CB1 ⋅ [ B jj ] + CB2 ⋅ [ B jj ]
where [ B 2jj ] is selected via the Case Control command B2GG and [ B xjj ] comes from CDAMPi or CVlSC
element Bulk Data entries. These parameters are effective only if B2GG is selected in the Case Control
Section.
CDIF
Default = YES for shape optimization with or without property optimization.
Default = NO for property optimization only.
CDIF may be used to override the default finite difference scheme used in the calculation of pseudo loads in
SOL 200. PARAM,CDIF,YES forces the selection of the central difference scheme used in the semianalytic
approach regardless of the type of optimization requested. PARAM,CDIF,NO forces the selection of the
forward difference scheme.
CDITER
Default = 0
If CDITER > 0, perform constrained displacement iterations in SOL 101. The value is the maximum
number of iterations. If CDPRT=YES, print those negative displacements and tension forces which do not
satisfy constraints. If CDPCH=YES, punch DMIG CDSHUT entries for final state; by default all gaps are
closed. These can be used for initial conditions for restart. Potential contact points must be specified on the
SUPORTi entries. The SUPORTi points must be in the residual structure. Optional DMIG entries to
define the initial shut vector may be specified. Degrees-of-freedom that are specified on the SUPORT entry
and have a value of 1.0 defined on the DMIG,CDSHUT entry will be considered closed initially.
If the DMIG,CDSHUT entry is not supplied, then all degrees-of-freedom specified on the SUPORT entries
will be considered shut initially. A fatal message will be issued if this parameter is used and PARAM,INREL
is specified.
CDPCH
Default = NO
See CDITER, 753.
CDPRT
Default = YES
See CDITER, 753.
Main Index
CFDIAGP
Default = NO
If YES, randomly deleted CFAST elements will be printed. (See CFRANDEL)
CFRANDEL
Default = 0.
Represents a percent, expressed as a decimal fraction, of the number of CFAST elements to be randomly
deleted.
CHECKOUT
Default = NO
CHECKOUT=YES requests a model checkout in SOLs 101 through 200. See Geometry Processing in SubDMAP
PHASE0 (p. 335) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual. The run will terminate prior to phase 1 of
superelement analysis. The PARAM,POST options are also available with PARAM,CHECKOUT,YES. The
following options and their user parameters are also available with PARAM,CHECKOUT,YES:
1. PARAM,PRTGPL,YES
Prints a list of external grid and scalar point numbers in internal sort. It also lists external grid and
scalar point numbers along with the corresponding sequence numbers in internal sort. The sequence
numbers are defined as (1000*external number) and will reflect any user-requested resequencing.
2. PARAM,PRTEQXIN,YES
Prints a list of external and internal grid and scalar numbers in external sort. It also lists external grid
and scalar numbers with the corresponding coded SIL number in external sort. The coded SIL
numbers are defined as:
 1 for grid point

10 ⋅ SIL +  (1)
 2 for scalar point
The SIL numbers correspond to degrees-of-freedom, i.e., one SIL number for scalar point and six SIL
numbers for a grid point.
3. PARAM,PRTGPDT,YES
Prints, for each grid and scalar point, the following information in internal sort:
• Coordinate system ID in which grid point geometry is defined (ID=-1 for scalar points).
• Spatial location of grid points in the “CP” coordinate system. For scalar points, all entries are
zero.
• Coordinate system ID for grid point displacements, forces, and constraints (ID=0 for scalar
points).
• Permanent single-point constraints defined on GRID Bulk Data entries. A zero is entered for
scalar points.
4. PARAM,PRTCSTM,YES
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 755
Prints for each coordinate system type the transformation matrix from the global to the basic
coordinate system, and the origin of the indicated coordinate system in the basic coordinate system.
Coordinate system types are: 1 = rectangular; 2 = cylindrical; 3 = spherical.
5. PARAM,PRTBGPDT,YES
Prints all grid and scalar points listed in internal sort with their x, y, and z coordinates in the basic
coordinate system. In addition, the coordinate system ID for grid point displacements, forces, and
constraints is indicated for each grid point (ID=-1 for scalar points). The x, y, and z coordinates of
scalar points are zero.
6. PARAM,PRTGPTT,YES
Prints, for each temperature load set, information on element and grid point temperatures.
7. PARAM,PRTMGG,YES
Prints the g-size mass matrix labeled by grid point/degree-of-freedom.
8. PARAM,PRTPG,YES
Prints the g-size load vectors labeled by grid point/degree-of-freedom.
9. The summation of forces and moments of applied loads in the basic coordinate system is
automatically output for each loading condition requested in the Case Control Section. Related to
parameters GPECT and PROUT, and Case Control command ELSUM.
CK1, CK2
Default = (1.0, 0.0)
CK1 and CK2 specify factors for the total stiffness matrix. The total stiffness matrix (exclusive of GENEL
entries) is
x z 2
[ K jj ] = CK1 ⋅ [ K jj ] + CK2 ⋅ [ K jj ]
where [ K 2jj ] is selected via the Case Control command K2GG and [ K zjj ] is generated from structural element
(e.g., CBAR) entries in the Bulk Data. These are effective only if K2GG is selected in Case Control. A related
parameter is CK3.
Note: Stresses and element forces are not factored by CK1, and must be adjusted manually.
CK3
Default = (1.0, 0.0)
CK3 specifies a factor for the stiffness derived from GENEL Bulk Data entries. The total stiffness matrix is
x y
[ K jj ] = [ K jj ] + CK3 ⋅ [ K jj ]
where [ K yjj ] comes from the GENEL Bulk Data entries and [ K xjj ] is derived using PARAMs CK1 and CK2.
CK3 is effective only if GENEL entries are defined. Related parameters include CK1 and CK2.
Main Index
CLOSE
Default = (1.0)
A value of 1.05 will set natural frequencies within 5% of each other as close. See SCRSPEC.
CM1, CM2
Default = (1.0, 0.0)
CM1 and CM2 specify factors for the total mass matrix. The total mass matrix is
x 2
[ M jj ] = CM1 ⋅ [ M jj ] + CM2 ⋅ [ M jj ]
where [ M 2jj ] is selected via the Case Control command M2GG and [ M xjj ] is derived from the mass element
entries in the Bulk Data Section. These are effective only if M2GG is selected in the Case Control Section.
COMPMATT
Default = NO, SOL 106 and SOL 400 only
In nonlinear statics (SOLs 106, 400 ANALYSIS=NLSTAT), composite materials compute temperature-
dependent properties for the plies only at the reference temperature given on the PCOMP Bulk Data entry.
The ply properties are smeared and used for all load steps, regardless of whether the temperature is changing
through application of thermal loads.
If the parameter is set to YES, the temperature-dependent properties for the plies are updated and smeared
at the current temperature for each load step. For CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 elements with offsets, the large
rotation offset method specified by “MDLPRM,OFFDEF,LROFF” in SOL 400 must be used.
If the parameter is set to NONSMEAR, the temperature-dependent properties for the plies are updated at
the current temperature for each load step. This option, only available for the CQUADR and CTRIAR
elements, is an alternative to the smeared approach.
This parameter only applies to SOLs 106 and 400 ANALYSIS=NLSTAT, and only applies to composite
CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUADR and CTRIAR elements that are not associated with the enhanced nonlinear
materials (PSHLN1).
Prior to Nastran version 2019, when COMPMATT was set to YES, material nonlinear was assumed even
when no composite plies had temperature-dependent materials or when there was no MATTi type entries
associated with temperature dependent plies. This has caused confusion as to when SOL106 or SOL400 is
doing linear or nonlinear material solutions. Starting in V2019, PARAM, COMPMATT, YES will only turn
on material nonlinear if there are active MATTi entries as well.
Additionally, prior to Nastran version 2019, when PARAM, COMPMATT, YES was used in conjunction
with TEMPP1 entries, ply stress computation used only the reference plane temperature. Starting in V2019,
ply stress computation will use reference plane temperature plus the thermal gradient term applied at the
center of each ply. (To revert to the old method, NASTRAN SDRCMPTP=1 may be added to the Nastran
section.) The enhanced nonlinear materials (PSHLN1) do not support the TEMPP1 entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 757
CONFAC
Default = 1.E-5
In superelement analysis, CONFAC specifies the tolerance factor used in checking the congruence of the
location and displacement coordinate systems of the boundary points between image superelements and their
primaries (see the Bulk Data entry, CSUPER, 1593). Specification of this parameter is recommended instead of
DIAG 37 (DIAG 37 ignores User Fatal Messages 4277 and 4278).
COSUBCYC
Default = 1, SOL 700 only
Controls the growth of the subcycling interval in the coupling surface.
Example:
PARAM,COSUBCYC,2
Remarks:
1. The subcycling algorithm automatically estimates the number of subcycles to be used. This is updated
throughout the calculation. This parameter controls how much the number of subcycles can grow.
For example, COSUBCYC is set to 1, and the current number of time steps between updates of the
coupling geometry is 4. If the solver estimates that the subcycling interval should be 7, the subcycling
interval is increased by 1 until a value of 7 is reached.
2. There is no control on the amount by which the subcycling interval can decrease.
COSUBMAX
Defines the maximum number of subcycles that can occur in Euler/Lagrange coupling. During a subcycle,
the geometry of the coupling surface is not updated.
Example:
PARAM,COSUBMAX,10
Remarks:
1. Updating the coupling geometry takes a lot of CPU time. Subcycling gives substantial savings in CPU
time for coupled calculations.
2. The smaller the value of this parameter, the greater the accuracy of the analysis and the greater the
cost. Conversely, larger values offer significant CPU savings, but very large values give incorrect
results.
3. If the geometry of the coupling surface is changing rapidly, smaller values of PARAM,COSUBMAX
should be used.
Main Index
COUPMASS
Default = -1
COUPMASS > 0 Requests the generation of coupled rather than lumped mass matrices for elements
with coupled mass capability, as listed in Table 3-1 in the MSC Nastran Reference
Guide. This option applies to both structural and nonstructural mass for the
following elements: CBAR, CBEAM, CONROD, CQUAD4, CHEXA, CPENTA,
CPYRAM, CQUAD8, CROD, CTETRA, CTRIA3, CTRlA6, CTRIAX6,
CTUBE.
COUPMASS < 0 (Default) causes the generation of lumped mass matrices (which may include torsion
inertia for beam elements, and some coupling if there are beam offsets) for all of the
above elements. However, if SYSTEM(414) is greater than zero, (Default = 0) then
the lumped mass matrices will contain translational components only for the CBAR
and CBEAM elements.
P-elements are always generated with coupled mass and are not affected by COUPMASS.
CP1, CP2
Default = (1.0, 0.0)
The load vectors are generated from the equation
x 2
{ P j } = CP1 ⋅ { P j } + CP2 ⋅ { P j }
where { P 2j } is selected via the Case Control command P2G, and { P xj } comes from Bulk Data static load
entries. These parameters are effective only if P2G is selected in the case control section.
CQC
Default = -1
See SCRSPEC, 942.
CURV
Default = -1
PARAM,CURV,1 requests that the CTRIA3 and CQUAD4 element stress and/or strain output be computed
in a material coordinate system (normal output is in the element or basic coordinate system) and/or to
interpolate it to grid points. (CQUAD4 element corner stress output is not supported.)
The integer parameter OG controls the calculation of stress and/or strain data at grid points. If OG is set to
-1, the calculation for stresses and/or strain data at grid points is not performed. The default value of zero
provides the calculation of these quantities at those grid points to which the selected elements connect.
User parameters S1G, S1M, S1AG, and S1AM, set to 1, request the printout of stresses at grid points, stresses
in the material coordinate system, strains at grid points and strains in the material coordinate system,
respectively.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 759
The integer parameter OUTOPT may be set in accordance with the below options to select print, punch,
and/or plotter output for stress and/or strain data that are computed in user-defined material coordinate
systems.
OUTOPT Value Description

0 Default-standard MSC Nastran device codes are used.
1 Print only
2 Plot only
4 Punch only
The above values may be combined additively to select two or more forms of output. For example,
OUTOPT=6 requests both plot and punch output. Related parameters include BIGER, CURVPLOT,
DOPT, NUMOUT, NINTPTS, S1G, S1M.
For stress and/or strain/curvature output in a user-defined material coordinate system MCSID must be
defined on MAT1 and MAT2 Bulk Data entries. The values of MCSID reference CORDiR, CORDiC, and
CORDiS Bulk Data entries. A value of zero for MCSID does not imply the basic coordinate and will
eliminate all elements which reference the MATi from the subject calculations.
1. If these data are requested at the element centers, the program will compute the unit vector i m along
the T1 or x-axis of the material coordinate system, and compare
n ⋅ im
for each element that references the material coordinate system, where n is the normal to the surface
of the element. If
2
n ⋅ im ≥ .4
the projection of the y-axis on the surface of element is taken as the reference axis. Otherwise, the
projection of the x-axis on the surface of the element is taken as the reference axis. The angle between
the x-axis of the element coordinate system and the projection of the selected reference axis of the
material coordinate system is used to transform the stress and/or strain data into the material
coordinate system at the element centers.
2. If, on the other hand, the user requests these data at the grid points to which the elements connect
the program will interpolate the results from (a) to the grid points to which the elements connect.
The parameter NlNTPTS=N, the stress and/or strain data at the N closest element centers to the grid
point in question will be used in the interpolation. The program may include more that N points in
the interpolation if the distance of other element centers is not more than 10% greater than the closest
N element centers.
The following specifies the output headings for stresses and/or strains in the material coordinate system.
Main Index
Element stresses (PARAM,S1M,1)

1. Available in CQUAD4 and CTRlA3 elements
2. Page headings:
STRESSES IN QUADRILATERAL ELEMENTS (CQUAD4)
STRESSES IN TRIANGULAR ELEMENTS (CTRlA3)
3. Under the column FIBER DISTANCE:
Z1 is replaced by MCSID.
Z2 is replaced by 1.0 if the x-axis of the material coordinate system is selected as the reference axis,
and by 2.0 if the y-axis of the material coordinate system is selected as the reference axis.
Grid point stresses (PARAM,S1G,1 and PARAM,OG,1)

1. Available for CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 elements
2. Page heading:
STRESSES AT GRID POINTS
3. Under the column are:
 MAT1 – COORD1 – ID 
 
 PROJ-CODE 
Z2=A+10*N where A is 1.0, 2.0, or 3.0, depending on whether the x-, y-, or z-axis of the material
coordinate system is most nearly normal to the projected plane of the field of elements involved in
the calculation.
Element strains (PARAM,S1AM,1)

1. Available for CQUAD4 and CTRlA3 elements
2. Page headings:
STRAINS IN QUADRILATERAL ELEMENTS (CQUAD4)
STRAINS IN TRIANGULAR ELEMENTS (CTRIA3)
3. Under the column FIBER DISTANCE:
Z2 is replaced by 1.0 if the x-axis of the material coordinate system is selected as the reference axis,
and by 2.0 if the y-axis of the material coordinate system is selected as the reference axis.
Grid point strains (PARAM,S1AG,1 and PARAM,OG,1)

1. Available for CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 elements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 761
2. Page heading:
Z2=A+10*N where A is 1.0, 2.0, or 3.0, depending on whether the x-, y-, or z-axis of the material
coordinate system is most nearly normal to the projected plane of the field of elements involved in
the calculation.
STRAINS AND CURVATURES AT GRID POINTS
3. Under the column are:
 MAT1 – COORD1 – ID 
 
 PROJ-CODE 
CURVPLOT
Default = -1
PARAM,CURVPLOT,1 requests that x-y (or curve) plots whose abscissas are a sequence of grid points and
whose ordinates may be displacements, loads, SPC forces, or grid point stresses. To obtain stress plots, set
the CURV parameter to +1. The default for DOPT is the length between grid points.
Specify the XYOUTPUT Case Control command in the usual manner, replacing the point ID with the SID
of SET1 Bulk Data entries.
The SET1 Bulk Data entries must contain unique SIDs for each set of grid points to be plotted.
User requests for xy-plots of output quantities appear in the Case Control Section in the standard form. For
example,
.
.
.
OUTPUT(XYOUT)
.
.
XYPLOT DISP 1/4(T3)
.
.
XYPLOT SPCF 2/5(T1)
.
.
BEGIN BULK
The first XYPLOT command will produce an xy-plot from the displacement output of subcase 1. The
abscissa of the curve will reflect the grid point IDs listed on the SET1 entry with an SID of 4, and the ordinate
will reflect the T3 component of displacement at these grid points. The second XYPLOT command will
produce an xy-plot whose ordinates are the T1 components of the forces of constraint in subcase 2 at the grid
points listed on the SET1 entry with an SlD of 5.
The user has some degree of control over the scaling of the abscissas on these xy-plots. This control is
exercised through the parameter DOPT on a PARAM Bulk Data entry. The legal values of this parameter
provide the following scaling options for the abscissas.
Main Index
Value of DOPT Scaling for Abscissa

0 gj – gi
(Default)
1 xj – xi
2 yj – yi
3 zj – zi
4 1.
Thus, the default value of DOPT will place the first grid point listed on the referenced SET1 entry at the
origin, and subsequent grid points will be located along the abscissa at intervals proportional to the distance
between that grid point and its predecessor. Values of DOPT equal to 1, 2, or 3 will scale the abscissa so that
the interval between adjacent grid points is proportional to the difference in the X, the Y, and the Z
components of the subject grid points respectively. DOPT=4 will space the grid points equally along the
abscissa.
CWDIAGP
Default = NO
For CWELD element: prints elements randomly deleted if set to yes.
CWRANDEL
Default = 0.0
For CWELD element: if not zero, then it specifies as a decimal percent for the number of fasteners to
randomly delete.
DBALL
Default = DBALL
By default, all data to be stored on the database for restart purposes will be located on the DBALL database
set DBset). These parameters permit the storage of some data blocks on DBsets other than DBALL, which
are defined by the user and specified on the INIT File Management statement. Any or all of these parameters
may be set to SCRATCH in order to reduce overall disk space usage; e.g., PARAM,DBUP,SCRATCH or
PARAM,DBALL,SCRATCH. However, automatic restarts will be less efficient because data normally
assigned to a permanent DBset will have to be recomputed.
A unique value for each superelement may be specified in the Case Control Section for the parameters
DBALL, DBDN, DBRCV, and DBUP. Certain DBsets may be taken offline depending on which phase (see
Summary of Solution Sequence Operations (p. 365) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual) of superelement
analysis is being performed. PARAM,DBALL specifies the default value for parameters DBDN, DBUP, and
DBRCV.
The DBDN DBset contains data blocks necessary for “downstream” processing. For example, the stiffness,
mass, damping, and static loads matrices that have been reduced to the boundary of the superelement are
stored in this DBset.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 763
The DBRCV DBset contains data blocks that must be online during the first pass through data recovery
(Phase 3). These data blocks are used to recover the total displacement vector ug of the superelement. This
operation is performed by the SSG3 and SDR1 modules. On subsequent data recovery restarts, this DBset
may be taken offline. Its default is determined from the value of DBUP.
The DBUP DBset contains data blocks necessary for “upstream” processing. For example, the geometry and
property tables along with the stiffness, mass, damping, and static loads matrices related to the interior grid
points of the superelement are stored in this DBset. These matrices and tables must be online during the
reduction (Phase 1) and data recovery (Phase 3) of the superelement.
The IFP DBset contains data blocks that are required for all phases of the analysis. These data blocks are
related to the entire model; examples are Bulk Data, superelement map, IFP module outputs, and
resequenced grid points. This DBset must be online for all runs.
PARAM,DBALL also specifies the default value for PARAMs DBEXT and DSO described below.
DBCCONV
Default = XL
See POST=0.
DBCDIAG
Default = 0
See POST=0.
DBCOVWRT
Default = YES
See POST.
DBDICT
Default = -1
Controls the printout of the database directory at the beginning and end of the run. See DBDICT FMS
statement description in Section 2. If DBDICT=0, then the database directory will be printed at the start
of the run. If DBDICT=1, then the directory will be printed at the end of the run. If DBDICT>2, then it
will be printed at the beginning and end of the run. If DBDICT=-1 (the default), the directory is not printed
at the beginning or end of the run.
If multiple versions and/or projects exist on the database, then the parameters DBDRPRJ and DBDRVER
allow the user to select the desired project and version, respectively. The appropriate values may be found in
the Project/Version Table that is printed upon restart. If DBDRVER=0 (or DBDRPRJ=0), then the current
version (or project) is selected. If DBDRPRJ=-1 (or DBDRVER=-1), then all projects (or versions) are
selected.
DBDN
Default = value of PARAM,DBALL.
See DBALL.
Main Index
DBDRPRJ
Default = 0
Specifies the desired project-identification number. See DBDICT.
DBDRVER
Default = 0
Specifies the desired version-identification number. See DBDICT.
DBEXT
Default = value of PARAM,DBALL
Specifies the DBset location to store the external superelement information. External superelement
information is generated by the EXTSEOUT Case Control command and the user PARAMeter EXTOUT.
DBRCV
Default = value of PARAM,DBUP.
See DBALL.
DBUP
See DBALL.
DDRMM
Default = 0
DDRMM is only recognized if PARAM,SPARSEDR,NO is specified.
By default, the matrix method of data recovery is used in the modal transient and frequency response
solutions. DDRMM=-1 will force calculation of complete g-set solution vectors by the mode displacement
method and is required for FATIGUE analysis using SOL 108 or SOL 111 if PARAM,SPARSEDR,no is also
specified.
DELCLUMP
Default = 0.5, SOL 700 only
Format:
PARAM,DELCLUMP,VALUE
Example:
PARAM,DELCLUMP,0.1
Prevents small clumps in the Euler mesh from determining the time step and prevents the leakage of small
masses to isolated regions.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 765
VALUE Value of DELCLUMP. See Remark 1. (Real > 0.0)
Remarks:
1. Material in Eulerian elements of a clump with:
fvunc < DELCLUMP ⋅ fblend
is eliminated
2. See also parameter FBLEND.
DESPCH
Default = 0
For sizing and shape topography optimization, DESPCH specifies in SOL 200 when the optimized
(updated) bulk data entries are written to the PUNCH file. Currently, all the property entries, material
entries, and connectivity entries that can be designed and DESVAR, DRESP1, and GRID entries can be
written. Notice that the DRESP1 entries will be written if only when a mode tracking is performed and the
DRESP1 responses have type FREQ or EIGN.
For topology/topometry optimization, DESPCH specifies when the topology optimized element density
values (or topometry optimized values) are written to the element result file jobname.des. This file can be
directly read in PATRAN or third party post-processor to displace and animate the topology/topometry
optimization results.
<0 Never
=0 at the last design cycle only (Default)
>0 at every design cycle that is a multiple of DESPCH and the last design cycle. For example, if
n=2 and the maximum number of design cycles is 5 (DESMAX=5 on the DOPTPRM entry),
then, DESVAR and GRID entries at design cycle 2, 4, and 5 are written in the punch file.
DESPCH1
Default = 6
DESPCH1 specifies in SOL 200 the amount of data to be written to the .pch and .des file. A positive
DESPCH1 value request large field formats while a negative value requests small field formats. For a shape
optimization job, if DESPCH1<>0, the updated GRID entries of the whole model will be written in the .pch
file.
Descriptions of various DESPCH1 values are given below:
0 Write no data.
+1 Write the property entries that are designed.
+2 Write all the property entries of a given type when one or more property of that type is
designed.
+4 Write DESVAR and DRESP1 entries.
Main Index
+n Write combine quantities by summing the DESPCH1 values. For example, n=1+4=5
requests writing all the designed property entries, DESVAR and DRESP1 entries to the .pch
file for normal modes analysis.
>0 Write all (topology designed and non-designed) element density values to the topology
element density history file jobname, des.
<0 Write topological designed element density values to the topology element density history
file jobname.des.
DFREQ
Default = 10-5
DFREQ specifies the threshold for the elimination of duplicate frequencies on all FREQi Bulk Data entries.
Two frequencies, f 1 and f 2 , are considered duplicated if
f 1 – f 2 < DFREQ ⋅ f MAX – f MIN
where f MAX and f MIN are the maximum and minimum excitation frequencies of the combined FREQi entries.
DIROUT
Default = NO
See CQC under SCRSPEC, 942.
DOPT
Default = 0
See CURVPLOT.
DPEPS
Default = 1.0E-4
In SOL 200, if any difference between the property value on the property entries and the value calculated
from the design variable values on the DESVAR entry (through DVCRELi, DVMRELi, DVPRELi relations)
is greater than DPEPS, the design model values override the analysis values. If all the differences are less than
DPEPS, analysis results from a previous run are accepted in a subsequent sensitivity/optimization task,
thereby avoiding a reanalysis. The PTOL parameter on the DOPTPRM entry is a related parameter that
checks the maximum difference.
DPHFLG
Integer > 0; Default = 0
Select the method for performing eigenvector sensitivity analysis. Unless repeated eigenvalues are anticipated,
the default value is recommended.
DPHFLG 0 Nelson’s method (Default)

1 Subspace iteration method. Recommended when there are repeated roots.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 767
2 High’s method, # of modes for iteration = min(2n, n+8, m)

n: the highest constrained mode
m: the number of modes request by EIGR
3 High’s method will all modes requested by EIGR used in the iterator.
DPHFLG = 2 and 3 have further control parameters
ITERATE yes Do iteration, for improved sensitivity value. (Default)
no No iteration, equivalent to Fox’s method and provides the most efficient method,
but not the most accurate.
ITMAX Maximum number of iteration. (Default = 10)
TOL Tolerance for convergence in iteration. (Default = 1.0e-4)
LAMBDAS Shift factor. (Default = 0.0)
KORTHO no Use mass for Gram Schmidt orthogonalization. (Default)
yes Use stiffness K for Gram Schmidt orthogonalization.
ITRPRNT no Do not print sensitivity for each iteration. (Default)
yes Print sensitivity for each iteration.
ITFPRNT no Do not print final sensitivity, leave print to SOL 200.
yes Print final sensitivity inside High’s method computation
MDOF no Do not reduce DPHI to USET ‘U6’ DOF. (Default)
yes Reduce DPHI to USET ‘U6’ DOF.
DSNOKD
Default = 0.0
DSNOKD specifies a scale factor to the differential stiffness matrix in buckling design sensitivity analysis. If
DSNOKD > 0.0, the effect of the differential stiffness matrix is included in buckling the design sensitivity
analysis.
If PARAM,DSNOKD,1.0 is specified in SOL 200, the differential stiffness sensitivity calculation is
performed more accurately; i.e., the change in the stiffness matrix due to the changes in the displacements
are computed. However, the calculation is more expensive than with PARAM,DSNOKD,0.0.
Non-zero values of PARAM,DSNOKD cannot be used in SOL 200 with multiple buckling design subcases
less each subcase contains the same STATSUB command.
DSO
Default = value of PARAM,DBALL
Specifies the DBset location to store datablocks created for design sensitivity and optimization in SOL 200.
Main Index
DSZERO
Default = 0.0
DSZERO specifies the minimum absolute value for the printout of design sensitivities.
DV3PASS
Integer, Default = 1 for SOL 200 with nonlinear property sensitivity evaluation.
DV3PASS controls the number of optimizer internal cycles must pass before the re-evaluation of sensitivity
of nonlinear properties, such as I1/I2/J of PBARL/PBEAML/PBRSECT/PBMSECT. With default value of
1, the sensitivity of nonlinear properties is computed for every internal cycle of optimizer. Setting DV3PASS
to 10 causes the sensitivity to be evaluated at optimizer internal cycles of 1, 11, 21 and etc. The sensitivity
of nonlinear properties is considered as invariants if a sufficiently large number, such as 100, is assigned to
DV3PASS.
DYNSPCF
Default = NEW
PARAM,DYNSPCF,NEW requests that mass and damping coupled to ground be included in the SPCForce
calculations for the linear dynamic solutions: SOLs 103, 107 through 112, 115, 118, 145, 146, and 200.
OLD neglects these effects and gives the same SPCForce results obtained in versions prior to Version 68.
Note: Some versions of Dytran have trouble with permanent constraints and issue a bogus error
message in the d3hsp file. This is the case for MSC Nastran 2005 r2.
EIGFILT
Default=1.0E-13
Threshold for zero-frequency eigenvalue for ACMS VERSION=NEW (module ACMS1).
ENFMETH
Default = TOTAL or ABS
This parameter controls the solution method when dynamic enforced motion analysis via SPC/SPCD is used
in SOLs 108, 109, 111, 112, 146 and 200.
The total solution of a dynamic enforced motion analysis using SPC/SPCD can be regarded as a combination
of a static enforced motion solution (similar to what is done in SOL 101) and a dynamic enforced motion
solution that is relative to this static-based solution. The default value of TOTAL/ABS implies that the
program solves directly, in one step, for the TOTAL solution of the dynamic analysis which includes both the
static-based solution and the dynamic solution that is relative to the static-based solution. If the value is
specified as REL, then the program obtains the total solution of the dynamic analysis in two steps, by first
solving for the static-based solution and then solving separately for the dynamic solution RELATIVE to the
static-based solution. In general, the TOTAL/ABS and REL solution methods both yield essentially the same
results.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 769
The TOTAL/ABS solution method is computationally more efficient. This is also the only method that is
meaningful and that should be employed when a problem involves the use of NOLINi or NLRGAP entries.
An important point to note regarding this method is that, for modal dynamic analysis, residual vectors are
absolutely critical in order for this method to get correct answers.
The REL solution method, though less efficient, may be more accurate for transient solutions and for modal
frequency response solutions at very low forcing frequencies. Also, for modal dynamic analysis, this method
is not as critically dependent on residual vectors as the TOTAL/ABS solution method. In addition, the
current implementation of the REL solution method does not support fluid DOFs with enforced motion.
So, if fluid DOF are among the DOFs with enforced motion, the job will be switched to the ABS solution
method automatically.
It should be emphasized here that PARAM,ENFMETH and PARAM,ENFMOTN are completely separate,
distinct and independent of each other and should not to be confused with each other. The former controls
the solution method when dynamic enforced motion analysis via SPC/SPCD is used while the latter controls
how the results of such an analysis are output.
ENFMOTN
Default = TOTAL or ABS
This parameter controls how the results of the analysis are output when dynamic enforced motion analysis
via SPC/SPCD is used in SOLs 108, 109, 111, 112, 146 and 200.
The total solution of a dynamic enforced motion analysis using SPC/SPCD can be regarded as a combination
of a static enforced motion solution (similar to what is done in SOL 101) and a dynamic enforced motion
solution that is relative to this static solution. The default value of TOTAL/ABS implies that the output
results of the analysis represent the TOTAL solution of the dynamic analysis which includes both the static
solution and the dynamic solution that is relative to this static solution. If the value is specified as REL, then
the output results represent the dynamic solution RELATIVE to the static solution.
It should be noted that, in general, the static solution mentioned above may not be a stress-free solution.
Therefore, in general, the usage of PARAM,ENFMOTN,TOTAL (or ABS) and PARAM,ENFMOTN,REL
in an SPC/SPCD enforced motion analysis may give different results not only for displacements, but also
for stresses.
In general, it is not easy to identify all cases wherein the static solution represents a stress-free solution.
However, one can give examples of such cases.
Thus, for instance, if the SPC/SPCD enforced motion is specified at a single grid point and there are no
constraints at any other grid point, then the static solution will be a stress-free solution.
Similarly, if the SPC/SPCD enforced motion is specified at more than one grid point for a specific grid point
component, but the magnitude and direction of the enforced motion is the same for all of the enforced
motion points and there are no other constraints in the model, then all of the enforced motion points will
move in unison and the static solution will be a stress-free solution.
In contrast to the above, consider the situation in which the SPC/SPCD enforced motion is specified at more
than one grid point for a specific grid point component, but the magnitude and direction of the specified
enforced motion is different for the various enforced motion points. In this case, the static solution will not
be a stress-free solution.
Main Index
If the static solution represents a stress-free solution, then it can be regarded as the base motion of the model.
In such cases, the usage of PARAM,ENFMOTN,TOTAL (or ABS) and PARAM,ENFMOTN,REL will give
different displacements, but the same stresses. Further, in modal dynamic analysis for such cases, the results
using PARAM,ENFMOTN,TOTAL (or ABS) will give the same results as those obtained by using the large
mass approach with all zero (or nearly zero) frequency modes included and the results using
PARAM,ENFMOTN,REL will give the same results as those obtained by using the large mass approach with
all zero (or nearly zero) frequency modes excluded.
If the static solution does not represent a stress-free solution, , the usage of PARAM,ENFMOTN,TOTAL
(or ABS) and PARAM,ENFMOTN,REL will give different results not only for displacements, but also for
stresses. In this case, the results from the usage of PARAM,ENFMOTN,REL do not have the same
significance as in the case of the stress-free static solution except for the fact that these results represent the
dynamic solution RELATIVE to the static solution.
Note: Currently, the usage of PARAM,ENFMOTN,REL is not supported when

PARAM,ENFMETH,ABS is specified (or implied). If this usage is employed, the program
terminates the execution with an appropriate fatal message.
EPPRT
Default = 1.E-8
EPPRT is analogous to and described under the EPSSING keyword on the AUTOSPC Case Control
command. The specification of the AUTOSPC command overrides the specification of PARAM,EPPRT.
EPSILONT
Default = SECANT
In nonlinear statics (SOL 106 and SOL 400), thermal loads are computed using the secant method:
ε T = α load ( T load – T ref ) – α init ( T init – T ref )
If the parameter is set to INTEGRAL, thermal loads are computed using the integral method:
T load
εT =  α ( T ) dT
T init
This parameter only applies to SOLs 106 and 400 ANALYSIS=NLSTAT, and only applies to CQUAD4,
CTRIA3, CQUADR, and CTRIAR elements that are not associated with the enhanced nonlinear materials
(PSHLN1).
EPZERO
Default = 1.E-8
EPZERO is analogous to and described under the EPS keyword on the AUTOSPC Case Control command.
The specification of the AUTOSPC command overrides the specification of PARAM,EPZERO.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 771
ERPC
Default = 1.0
This parameter represents the phase speed of the fluid for Equivalent Radiated Power (ERP) analysis. This
parameter may alternatively be set using the ERP Case Control command.
ERPREFDB
Default = 1.0
This parameter represents a peak reference ERP value used in the computation of ERP in units of dB. The
dB level is defined as:
ERP
ERPdB = 10log  RHOCP ⋅ ------------------------------
 ERPREFDB
This parameter may alternatively be set using the ERP Case Control command.
ERPRHO
Default = 1.0
This parameter represents the fluid density for Equivalent Radiated Power (ERP) analysis. This parameter
may alternatively be set using the ERP Case Control command.
ERPRLF
Default = 1.0
This parameter represents a Radiation Loss Factor scale factor for the Equivalent Radiated Power (ERP)
analysis. This parameter may alternatively be set using the ERP Case Control command.
ERROR
Default = -1
For SOLs 111-112, when the constraint modes have non-zero generalized force the parameter ERROR set
to 0 causes the fatal error exit to be branched over and the dynamic response is computed and output. This
option is intended for model checkout work, where bad results are better for diagnostic work than no results
at all. This parameter is a traditional feature also used in other, similar circumstances.
ESLFSAV
Character, Default = NO
ESLFSAV = YES requests that all the intermediate files from an ESLNRO job be saved on disk. The
destination of these files can be directed with the ‘sdir=’ option on a Nastran submittal command line.
ESLMOVE
Integer, Default = 0
ESLMOVE = 0 selects a move limit scheme that poses restrict lower and upper bounds on design variables
during the linear response optimization. The range of the bounds is determined by
L L
X k = max ( X o , X k – 1 – MOVE )
Main Index
U U
X k = min ( X o , X k – 1 + MOVE )
MOVE = max ( DXMIN, abs ( X k – 1 ) ⋅ DELXESL )
ESLMOVE = 1 selects a move limit scheme that scales back the design move proposed from a linear response
optimization. The amount of scaling back is determined by
* 1
X k = X k – 1 + ( X k – 1 – X k – 1 ) ⋅ DELXESL
where X *k is the scaled design variable for the k-th design cycle, X k – 1 is the design variable at (k-1)th design
cycle, X 1k – 1 is the proposed design from the linear optimization solution at (k-1)th design cycle.
Parameters DXMIN and DELXESL can be specified on the DOPTPRM entry.
ESLLCOMP
Default = No
ESLLCOMP selects types of compliance response to be included in the design task. The nonlinear
compliance response is defined using a DRESP1 entry with RTYPE=COMP for the ESLNRO topology
optimization tasks. As the default, it is computed by the product of the applied nonlinear loads and
corresponding nonlinear displacement components. Alternatively, ESLLCOMP=YES selects a linear
compliance response that computed as the total work done by the equivalent static loads on the linear system.
ESLMPC1
Default = 0
This parameter applies only to the ESLNRO jobs with 3D contact. Its default has different meanings
depending on the type of contact applications. As the default, for a glued contact ESLNRO job, a linear
response optimization task will include a set of MPC entries that are created from the nonlinear analysis. For
a touching contact ESLNRO job, the linear response optimization task will not include the MPC entries by
default. Setting ESLMPC1 to a positive number will turn on the MPC inclusion.
1 uses the MPC entries created from the nonlinear analysis at the converged nonlinear analysis.
2 uses the MPC entries created at the beginning of the very first nonlinear analysis.
ESLOPTEX
Default = 0
This parameter allows the user to perform an ESLNRO job at a targeted exit point. The allowable values of
ESLOPTX are listed below with their description.
0 Do not exit. Proceed with ESLNRO nonlinear response optimization.

1 Exit after the initialization of the analysis and design model but before nonlinear FE analysis
begins.
2 Exit after nonlinear FE analysis ends.
3 Exit after design constraint evaluation and screening.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 773
ESLPRT
Default = 0
ESLPRT specifies how often the ESLNRO results are printed in the .f06 file and saved in the .xdb file. By
default, the program will print the results to the .f06 file at the first and the last design cycles and save the
results to .xdb (or .op2) at the first and last design cycles on the disk. (See ESLPRT1 for selection of result
contents.)
>0 then the results are printed at the first design cycle; at every design cycle that is a multiplier of
ESLPRT; and the last design cycle.
<0 the no results are printed and saved.
ESLPRT1
Default = 7
ESLPRT1 specifies what type of results to be written to the .f06 and to .xdb (or .op2). It may take any of the
following base values or a combination of these base values:
0 write no data
1 write the nonlinear analysis results to the .f06 file.
2 write the optimization data controlled by P1 and P2 to the .f06 file.
4 save the nonlinear analysis results to the .xdb (or .op2) file.
8 save the linear response optimization results to the .xdb (or .op2) file.
For example, by default, results from the nonlinear analysis, the optimization data will be written to the .f06
file and result data will be written to .xdb or .op2.
ESLRCF,user_rc_file
Character*8, must be lower case. Default = blank
ESLRCF, user_rc_file allows a user to define a custom RC file for the internally spawned jobs.
Example:
PARAM,ESLRCF,myrc
The contents of the myrc file are:
mem=200m
exe=~local_path/MSCNASTRAN
del=~local_path/SSS
The example shows the user-defined RC file, myrc, specifies its own memory allocation and its local Nastran
executable and local DMAP database.
Main Index
ESLTOPCV
Default = 80
ESLTOPCV specifies an alternate convergence tolerance for an ESLNRO’s topology optimization job. An
ESLNRO’s topology optimization job will be terminated when the percentage of design variables whose
changes are less than a given value, CONVDV specified on the DOPTPRM Bulk Data entry is greater than
ESLTOPCV.
ESLUNT2
Default = 54
ESLUNT2 is a file unit number used by the nonlinear analysis and the linear response optimization runs in
an ESLNRO’s topology optimization job for the access of design variables and designed properties. It only
needs to be changed if there is a conflict with the default.
ESLUNT1
Default = 53
ESLUNT1 is a file unit number used by the linear response optimization run in an ESLNRO’s topology
optimization job for the storage of design variables and designed properties. It only needs to be changed if
there is a conflict with the default.
EST
Replaced by the ELSUM Case Control command.
EULBND
Default = ELEMENT, SOL 700 only
Defines boundary treatment for Euler boundaries.
Format:
PARAM,EULBND,option
EXTRAPOL The pressure that a wall or coupling surface exerts on the adjacent Euler element is
obtained from extrapolating the element pressure toward this boundary. (Character)
ELEMENT The pressure that a wall or coupling surface exerts on the adjacent Euler element equals
the pressure inside this element. (Character)
Remarks:
1. The finite volume representation in general assumes that element values are constant within each
element. While this assumption is adequate for the large majority of applications, fluid models
involving hydrostatic pressure gradients require that the pressure gradient be also recognized to exist
within the element. When element-internal hydrostatic gradients are not accounted for, the
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 775
calculation will be less accurate and will suffer from numerical symptoms like pair forming of element
pressures. By activating the option EXTRAPOL hydrostatic gradients inside the element are taken
into account. For meshes without bias, option EXTRAPOL only modifies the numerical schemes
along the boundary.
2. When coupling surfaces are used DYPARAM,FASTCOUP has to be activated as well.
EULSTRES
Default = VOLUME, SOL 700 only
Defines the update logic for stresses when material is transported in Euler elements.
Format:
PARAM,EULSTRES,option
VOLUME The pressure that a wall or coupling surface exerts on the adjacent Euler element is obtained
from extrapolating the element pressure toward this boundary. (Character)
MASS The pressure that a wall or coupling surface exerts on the adjacent Euler element equals the
pressure inside this element.
Remarks:
1. Only used for the MMSTREN solver.
2. Stresses are a material property and when material flows in or out an element the stress state in the
element is changed. This is analogous to temperature and energy. Not the temperature is transported,
but energy. After transporting energy the temperature is re-computed by dividing the energy by
element mass and specific heat. In case of stress the “energy” is given by mass times stress. After
transporting this “energy” the new stress follows by dividing it by mass. As shown in Chapter 6 of
the Theory Manual this gives a correct updating procedure for stresses. There it also proven that stress
times mass is conserved during transport.
3. In most simulations variations in density are small and the multiplication by mass can be replaced by
a multiplication by volume. This method is activated by option VOLUME which is the default
option. Using the MASS option may have some influence on simulations with large density
variations. The option MASS will give the most accurate results.
4. The transport logic of the effective plastic strain is identical to that of stresses. When using option
MASS the plastic strain is computed more accurately when material is compressed.
5. The (single material) Euler with strength solver makes use of the multiplication by mass. The
multiplication by volume is not implemented for this solver.
Main Index
EUSUBCYC
Controls the maximum growth of the subcycling interval in Euler computations.
Example:
PARAM,EUSUBCYC,2
Remarks:
For example, EUSUBCYC is set to 1, and the current number of time steps between updates of the
Euler variables. If the solver estimates that the subcycling interval should be 7, the subcycling interval
is increased by 1 until a value of 7 is reached.
EXCLUDE
Default = 0.
PARAM, EXCLUDE, Integer. Add PARAM, EXCLUDE, n in the buckling subcase(s) to activate linear
buckling with local exclusion of differential stiffness. If n is positive, it selects the SET1 entry ID in the bulk
data that defines the list of GRID points for which differential stiffness will be ignored. If n is negative, the
absolute value selects the SET1 entry ID in the bulk data that defines the list of GRID points for which
differential stiffness will be retained.
To select the GRID points care must be exercised by the user which follow natural mesh lines as much as
possible, otherwise an element may be connected to some GRID points that have differential stiffness and
some GRID points that do not. Sometimes this is impossible to ensure, and so the transition zone between
retained-excluded differential stiffness should not be in, or close to, a region of interest. Selecting stiff
(unlikely to buckle) zones for the transition zones is also advised.
Multiple buckling subcases with different exclude values are allowed. For example:
DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Static Load
SPC = 2
LOAD = 2
analysis=statics
subcase 2
SUBTITLE = Buckling Subcase
SPC=2
statsub=1
analysis=buck
METHOD=105
param,exclude,-1
subcase 3
SUBTITLE = Buckling Subcase
SPC=2
analysis=buck
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 777
statsub=1
METHOD=105
param,exclude,-2
BEGIN BULK
EXTDR
EXTDR Default = NO. See EXTOUT.
EXTDROUT
EXTDROUT Default = NO.
EXTDRUNT
EXTDRUNT Default = 31. See EXTOUT.
EXTOUT
When inputting the matrices for a reduced external superelement (SEBULK, CSUPER), there are four
options that can be selected using the parameter EXTOUT. EXTOUT must be placed in the Case Control
Section above any subcase or in the main Bulk Data Section. The options for Step 1 (see the table at the end
of this discussion) are as follows:
If EXTOUT is set to MATRIXDB, the reduced structural matrices and loading are stored on the database.
If EXTOUT is set to DMIGDB, the reduced structural matrices and loading are stored on the database in a
format which allows automatic connection to the analysis model if the identification numbers of the
reduction grid points and scalar points are the same as the grid points and scalar points used in the analysis
model.
If EXTOUT is set to DMIGOP2, the reduced structural matrices and loading are written in OUTPUT2
format to a tape unit specified by the parameter EXTUNIT (Default is 31). The storage format is the same
as the DMIGDB option and allows automatic connection to the analysis model if the identification numbers
of the reduction grid points and scalar points are the same as the grid points and scalar points used in the
analysis model. The output unit can be assigned to a specific file by using an ASSIGN command in the File
Management Section.
If EXTOUT is set to DMIGPCH, the reduced structural matrices and loading are output on the punch file
(.pch) in DMIG format.
The procedure for accessing the external superelement information depends on the option used to output the
external superelement in Step 1. The methods are as follows:
1. If EXTOUT was MATRIXDB or DMIGDB in Step 1, use the following commands in the File
Management Section:
ASSIGN SEXXX=’step1.MASTER’
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB)CONVERT(SEID=xxx),
LOGICAL=SEXXX
where:
step1.MASTER is the database from the Step 1.
xxx is the superelement identification number given to the partitioned Bulk Data Section for the
external superelement.
Main Index
2. If EXTOUT was DMIGOP2 in Step 1, then use the following commands in the File Management
Section:
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’step1_output2_file’,UNIT=extunit
where:
step1_output2_file is the OUTPUT2 file from Step 1.
extunit is the unit number specified by the parameter EXTUNIT (Default=30).
3. If EXTOUT was DMIGPCH in Step 1, then include the punch file from step one in the partitioned
Bulk Data Section. In addition, add the following Case Control commands in the subcase for the
external superelement:
K2GG=KAAX
P2G=PAX
The SEBULK entry defining the superelement as an external superelement and the EXTRN entry in
the partitioned Bulk Data Section should not be specified.
If data recovery is desired for the external component in SOLs 101, 103, and 107 through 112, there are three
methods to transmit the displacements of the reduced model to the external full model. The method is
selected by the parameter EXTDROUT in the partitioned Bulk Data Section. The options are as follows:
1. EXTDROUT set to MATRIXDB. The displacements of the reduced component model are stored
directly on the database. The sequencing of the displacement degrees-of-freedom corresponds to the
sequencing in the reduced model.
2. EXTDROUT set to DMIGDB. The displacements of the reduced model are stored on the database
in a format which allows automatic connection to the reduced component model if the reduction grid
points and scalar points are the same grid points and scalar points used in the analysis model. This
option can only be used if EXTOUT was set to DMIGDB or DMIGOP2.
3. EXTDROUT set to DMIGOP2. The same as EXTDROUT set to DMIGDB except that the
parameter EXTDRUNT (Default=31). The output unit can be assigned to a specific file by using an
ASSIGN command in the File Management Section. This option can only be used if EXTOUT was
set to DMIGDB or DMIGOP2.
Data recovery for the external component is limited to SOLs 101 and 103 and 107 through 112 and 400.
Data recovery is accomplished using a restart procedure from the data base created in step one and setting
parameter EXTDR to YES. The method on inputting the reduced displacements into the component model
depends on the method used to output the external component in Step 2. The input methods are as follows:
1. If EXTDROUT was MATRIXDB or DMIGDB in Step 2, then add the following commands in the
File Management Section:
ASSIGN SEXX=’step1.MASTER’
RESTART LOGICAL=SEXX
ASSIGN SEYYY=’step2.MASTER’
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) WHERE(SEID=yyy),
LOGICAL=SEYYY
where:
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 779

yyy is the superelement identification number given to the partitioned Bulk Data Section for the
external superelement in Step 2.
2. If EXTDROUT was DMIGOP2 in Step 2, then add the following commands in the File
Management Section:
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’step2_output2_file’,UNIT=extdrunt
where:
step2_output2_file is the OUTPUT2 file from Step 2.
extdrunt is the unit number specified by the parameter EXTDRUNT (Default=31).
For SOL 101, the Case Control structure must match the system model subcase structure in the numbers of
loading conditions. The loading used in step one to generate the loads transmitted to the analysis model must
also be specified in this step. If the analysis model had more loading conditions than the component model,
then the loadings defined in Step 1 must be specified first.
For SOL 103 and 107 through 112, the Case Control structure must match the analysis model subcase
structure in the number of eigenvalue extractions, FREQ/DLOAD or TSTEP/DLOAD subcases.
Step 1 - Create Step 2 - Step 3 -

External SE Perform Analysis Data Recovery for External SE
PARAM,EXTOUT, a. ASSIGN SEXX=’step1.MASTER’ a. ASSIGN SEXX=’step1.MASTER’
MATRIXDB DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB), RESTART LOGICAL=SEXX
CONVERT (SEID=xxx), ASSIGN SEYYY=’step2.MASTER’
LOGICAL=SEXX DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB),
WHERE(SEID=YYY),
b. PARAM,EXTDROUT,MATRIXDB LOGICAL=SEYYY
b. PARAM,EXTDR,YES
Main Index
Step 1 - Create Step 2 - Step 3 -

External SE Perform Analysis Data Recovery for External SE
PARAM,EXTOUT, a. ASSIGN SEXX=’step1.MASTER’ a. ASSIGN SEXX=’step1.MASTER’
DMIGDB DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB), RESTART LOGICAL=SEXX
CONVERT (SEID=xxx), ASSIGN SEYYY=’step2.MASTER’
LOGICAL=SEXX DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB)
WHERE(SEID=YYY)
b. PARAM,EXTDROUT,MATRIXDB or LOGICAL=SEYYY
PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGDB or
ASSIGN INPUTT2= ’step2_output_file’,
PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGOP2 UNIT=Extdrunt
b. PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,EXTOUT, a. ASSIGN INPUTT2=’step1_output2_file’, a. ASSIGN SEXX=’step1.MASTER’
DMIGOP2 Unit = extunit RESTART LOGICAL=SEXX
ASSIGN SEYY=’step2.MASTER’
b. PARAM,EXTDROUT,MATRIXDB or DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB),
PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGDB or WHERE(SEID=YYY),
LOGICAL=SEYYY
PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGOP2
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’step2_output_file’,
UNIT=Exdrunt
b. PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,EXTOUT, Include the .PCH file in partitioned Bulk Data
DMIGPCH Section and for external SE subcase
a. K2GG=KAAX
PG=PAX
EXTRCV
Default = 0
EXTRCV > 0 indicates that data recovery is to be performed on an external superelement. In this type of
run, the database for the external superelement must be attached as the primary database (Database Concepts
(p. 421) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual), and the database that contains the solution vectors,
superelement map, and external/internal grid point equivalence table for its downstream superelement must
be attached via the DBLOCATE statements. The value of EXTRCV must also be specified in the
CONVERT clause of the DBLOCATE statement for the EMAP data block.
The following example shows the DBLOCATE statements for external superelement data recovery in SOL
101.
EXTUNIT
Default = 31. See EXTOUT.
FACTOR
Default = 10000
See OLDSEQ.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 781
FASTFR
Default = AUTO
In MSC Nastran 2004, the FASTFR method was introduced for modal frequency response analysis. It can
be selected via the Bulk Data entry, PARAM,FASTFR,YES and shows significant performance improvement
for certain models in the mid-frequency range. PARAM,FASTFR,NO deselects the FASTFR method causing
the program to use the standard method for modal frequency analysis.
By default, the program will decide automatically which solution method will be most efficient for the
frequency response part in a SOL 111 analysis. Based on the size of the modal space and some other heuristic
criteria, either the FASTFR solution method will be run, or the FRRD1 module with or without the iterative
solver will be used.
Limitations for the FASTFR method
1. The FASTFR method works only for SOL 111 and for SOL 200 with ANALYSIS=MFREQ.
2. SESDAMP and FASTFR are not allowed in the same run.
3. To force the iterative solver in FRRD1, FASTFR=yes is required.
FBATOLR
Default = 1.0E-05
This is the tolerance that is applied to grid point coordinates in order to determine connections between
potential connection grid points of various FRF components in the FBA process.
The default tolerance should be satisfactory for most situations. A looser tolerance may be needed in certain
situations. An example is the case where the potential connection points of an FRF component are associated
with the shell elements of RSSCON solid-to-shell element connectors. In this case, a looser tolerance may
need to be specified in order to achieve proper connections between FRF components in the FBA process.
FBLEND
Eulerian elements with uncovered fractions smaller than FBLEND are blended with adjacent elements to
form a clump so that they do not control the time step.
Format:
PARAM,FBLEND,VALUE
Example:
PARAM,FBLEND,0.5
VALUE The uncovered fraction below which blending occurs. (0.0 < Real < 1.0)
Remarks:
1. The default value is satisfactory for virtually all calculations.
Main Index
2. Elements are blended only if they would have controlled the time step otherwise.
3. Elements with uncovered fractions greater than FBLEND are not blended and are allowed to control
the time step.
4. Large values of FBLEND produce a larger time step but many blends. Small values produce a smaller
time step and fewer blends.
5. In a calculation with a coupling surface, STEPFCT is smaller or equal FBLEND to avoid instabilities
(see PARAM,STEPFCT).
FDRLDS
Default = YES
PARAM, FDRLDS, YES turns on the logic to generate additional residual vectors for SOL 111 based on the
differences of structural and structural damping matrices. For free-free models, a SUPORT entry may
improve the free-free modes and yield additional augmented eigenvalues (PARAM, BAILOUT, -1 may
occasionally be needed even for a good static SUPORT set). PARAM, FDRLDS, NO can be used to turn off
the generation of frequency dependent residual vectors.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 783
FIXEDB
Default = 0
FIXEDB is used to reduce the cost of superelement checkout.
-2 (SOL 101 only) is used on the initial runs when the user suspects that the superelement may
contain errors and that only operations necessary for fixed-boundary solutions need be
performed. In particular, the generation of the [ G o a ] matrix is branched over in the SEKR
operation and [ P a ] is not generated in the SELR operation. These operations typically result in
50% of the reduction cost and are not needed in the fixed-boundary data recovery operations
described in the next paragraph. After this operation has been completed, the keyword
SELANG will appear in the database dictionary, indicating that the [ P a ] stored there is
incomplete, and should not be summed into the downstream superelement, because System
Fatal Message 4252 will be issued.
< -1 (SOLs 101 and 103 only) allows uncoupled solutions for any superelement with conventional
output requests. This output may be obtained as soon as the superelement is successfully
generated and reduced and does not require that the entire model be assembled. In
superelement statics, the solution is the component due to the { u oo } vector, i.e., a
fixed-boundary solution. In superelement modes, the solution is the uncoupled eigenvectors of
the component. If PARAM,FIXEDB,-1 is specified in the Bulk Data or in the residual structure
subcase, the modes of the residual structure will not be computed. For a printout or plotting of
the component mode eigenvectors it is recommended that PARAM,FIXEDB,-1 be specified in
the Bulk Data Section or above the subcase level in Case Control. If the modes of the residual
structure are desired, then PARAM,FlXEDB,0 should be specified in the residual structure
subcase. Exterior degrees-of-freedom listed on SECSETi and SESUP entries are free, and those
on SEBSETi degrees-of-freedom are fixed. Data recovery for the residual structure should not
be requested for this option.
+1 (SOL 101 only) is used after the superelement has been proven valid. In the SEKR and SELR
operations, it provides a branch over all operations already completed in the SEKR and SELR
phases and completes the generation of the [ G o a ] matrix and the boundary stiffness and load
matrices. It is also a method to recover the factor of the [ K oo ] matrix if the run aborted while
computing [ G oa ] .
FKSYMFAC
Default = 0.024
Follower force stiffness is typically unsymmetric, but in some cases making it symmetric may improve
convergence in nonlinear problems, whereas in other cases it may hinder it.
FKSYMFAC controls the symmetrization of the follower force stiffness in SOL 106 and SOL 400. If
FKSYMFAC = 1.0 is specified, the follower force stiffness K f is symmetrized as:
1 T
K fs = --- ( K f + K f )
2
Main Index
and the symmetric part K fs is used for efficiency. If FKSYMFAC= 0. is specified, the original follower force
stiffness K f is used. If a value of 0. < FKSYMFAC < 1. is specified, the non-symmetric part of the follower
force stiffness is calculated as:
K fn = K f – K fs
and the ratio of unsymmetry:

K fn
r = -------------
Kf
is compared with the user specified value of FKSYMFAC. The norm . is the absolute maximum number
of the matrix.
If r < FKSYMFAC, the symmetric stiffness K fs is used.
If r > FKSYMFAC, the original unsymmetric stiffness K f is used.
The default value for FKSYMFAC was determined by a parametric study and for most cases this will make
the follower force stiffness symmetric, which will give sufficiently accurate answers. The asymmetry ratio(r)
increases as geometric nonlinearity intensifies so when it becomes greater than FKSYMFAC, the
unsymmetric follower force stiffness is used.
It is considered important to retain the full unsymmetric follower force stiffness, set FKSYMFAC to zero.
The parameter FKSYMFAC is applicable to SOL 106 and SOL 400 only, all other solution sequences
symmetrize the follower force stiffness. See parameter FOLLOWK for a list of solution sequences which
calculate the follower force stiffness.
FLEXINCR
Default = NO
In SOL 144, a value of YES will cause the TRIM subcases to be ignored. Instead, the TRIM Bulk Data will
be used to obtain the set of Mach, Dynamic pressure and symmetry values for Unit Solutions (Flexible
Increments). These data can be archived in the aeroelastic database for subsequent reuse. (Flexible Increments
are always computed. This param merely avoids the TRIM subcase if these increments are all that is required.)
FLUIDMP
Replaced by options on the Case Control command FLSPOUT (Case), 350.
FLUIDNE
Default = 500
The Householder method of eigenvalue extraction is more reliable and is automatically selected for the fluid’s
system modes if the acoustic cavity is defined in a superelement and there exists fluid boundary points. The
switch to Householder occurs if the number of estimated fluid modes is less than or equal to the value
specified by PARAMeter FLUIDNE.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 785
FLUIDSE
Default = 0
PARAM,FLUIDSE,seidf specifies a special superelement reserved for fluid elements. Frequency dependent
fluid elements must still be in the residual. The newer partitioned superelements are not supported.
FMULTI
Default = .10, SOL 700 only
Defines the dimension of the multimaterial element array.
Format:
PARAM,FMULTI,VALUE
Example:
PARAM,FMULTI,.25
VALUE The relative amount of multimaterial elements. (0.0 < Real < 1.0)
Remark:
The multimaterial Eulerian elements use an overflow array in which to store material data. This array can
hold FMULTI times the total number of Eulerian elements. In a problem where more than 10% of the
elements have more than one material, the default value of FMULTI must be increased.
FOLLOWK
Default = YES
In SOLs 101,103, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 115, 116, and SOL 400, FOLLOWK=YES
(Default) requests the inclusion of follower force stiffness in the differential stiffness. FOLLOWK=NO
requests that the follower force stiffness not be included. For FOLLOWK=YES in SOLs 101,103, 105, 107,
108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 115, and 116, a separate static subcase is required and the STATSUB command is
also required in the eigenvalue subcase. In nonlinear analysis (SOL 106 and 400), the follower force is
included if PARAM,LGDISP,1 is specified. FOLLOWK is ignored in SOL 106 and SOL 400 if LGDISP is
not specified.
FRQDEPO
Default = NO
By default, frequency-dependent elements cannot be connected to o-set degrees-of-freedom.
PARAM,FRQDEPO,YES allows frequency-dependent elements to be connected to o-set
degrees-of-freedom. However, results may not be reliable.
Main Index
FULLSEDR
Default = NO
In a run with superelements, PARAM,FULLSEDR,YES will merge results (DISPL, STRESS, etc.) from all
of superelements into a single result as if the run contained no superelements. This is not supported for
BEGIN BULK superelements (parts) unless the element and grid identification numbers are unique across
all part superelements and the residual structure.
FZERO
Default = 1.0
See AUTOSPRT.
G, GFL
Default = 0.0
G and GFL specify the uniform structural and fluid-damping coefficient in the formulation of dynamics
problems. In coupled fluid-structure analysis, G is applied to the structural portion of the model and GFL
to the fluid portion of the model. To obtain the value for the parameter G or GFL, multiply the critical
damping ratio, C/Co, by 2.0. PARAM,G and GFL are not recommended for use in hydroelastic or
heat-transfer problems. If PARAM,G (or GFL) is used in transient analysis, PARAM,W3 (or W3FL) must
be greater than zero or PARAM,G (or GFL) will be ignored. See Formulation of Dynamic Equations in SubDMAP
GMA (p. 357) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
In frequency response and complex eigenvalue analyses, the use of G or GFL will cause the stiffness matrix
corresponding to the structural or fluid portion of the model to become complex. The user should be aware
that this will, in general, require more memory and resources for the calculations.
GEOMU
Default = 40
See POST=0.
GPECT
Default = -1
GPECT controls the printout of all elements connected to each grid point. GPECT=+1 requests the
printout. In superelement analysis, the list is printed if PARAM,CHECKOUT,YES is specified or the SEMG
or SEALL Case Control command selects the superelement. GPECT=-1 suppresses the printout.
GRADMESH
Default = OFF, SOL 700 only
Glues fine meshes to coarse meshes. See the section on Graded meshes in the user manual for further
information.
Format:
PARAM,GRADMESH,OPTION
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 787
Example:
PARAM,GRADMESH,MINVOL
OPTION OFF Graded mesh gluing is not used (Character)

MINVOL If an element of one mesh is covered by an element of another mesh the
element with the largest volume will be inactivated. It will also be removed
from the output request for Eulerian archives.
ELNUM If an element of one mesh is covered by an element of another mesh the
element with the smallest element number will be inactivated. It will also be
removed from the output request for Eulerian archives.
Remarks:
1. This parameter can be used to build block-structured meshes.
2. All Euler elements have to be either orthogonal or axial symmetric.
3. To get meaningful physical results, the change in mesh size going from one element to the next should
not be larger than 1.4 or smaller than 0.7.
GRAVSET
Default = 0
A PARAM, GRAVSET, n where n is a Bulk Data SET1 entry, allows the user to apply gravity loading
(GRAV) to just a portion of the structure. GRAVSET like GRAV loading is global and is computed once at
the beginning of the analysis. The Bulk Data SET1 n defines the GRIDS to which the gravity loading is to
be applied. GRAVSET can appear in either the Bulk Data or ABOVE or IN the 1st Subcase. A GRAVSET
appearing in any other Subcase will be ignored and may cause incorrect results. A GRAVSET appearing in
or above the first subcase takes precedence over a GRAVSET appearing in Bulk Data. See also the companion
RFORSET entry. If there is no GRAV loading called out, then PARAM, GRAVSET, n needs to be removed
from the run
GRDPNT
Default = -1
GRDPNT > -1 will cause the grid point weight generator to be executed. The default value (GRDPNT = -
1) suppresses the computation and output of this data. GRDPNT specifies the identification number of the
grid point to be used as a reference point. If GRDPNT = 0 or is not a defined grid point, the reference point
is taken as the origin of the basic coordinate system. All fluid-related masses and masses on scalar points are
ignored. The following weight and balance information is automatically printed following the execution of
the grid point weight generator.
 Reference point.
 Rigid body mass matrix [MO] relative to the reference point in the basic coordinate system.
 Transformation matrix [S] from the basic coordinate system to principal mass axes.
 Principal masses (mass) and associated centers of gravity (X-C.G., Y-C.G., Z-C.G.).
Main Index
 Inertia matrix I(S) about the center of gravity relative to the principal mass axes. Note: Change the
signs of the off-diagonal terms to produce the “inertia tensor.”
 Principal inertias I(Q) about the center of gravity.
 Transformation matrix [Q] between S-axes and Q-axes. The columns of [Q] are the unit direction
vectors for the corresponding principal inertias.
In superelement static or geometric nonlinear analysis, GRDPNT > -1 also specifies the grid point to be used
in computing resultants, in the basic coordinate system, of external loads and single point constraint forces
applied to each superelement. If GRDPNT is not a grid point (including the default value of -1), then the
resultants are computed about the origin of the basic coordinate system. In superelement analysis, weights
and resultants are computed for each superelement without the effects of its upstream superelements.
For axisymmetric elements, the GRDPNT output may be misleading as the algorithm is designed for 3D
elements. For the TRIAX6 element, the mass is for the entire model and the center of gravity and inertias
are for the cross section in the x-z plane. For the hyperelastic TRIAX and QUADX elements, the mass is for
one radian and the center of gravity and inertias are for the cross section in the x-y plane. For the harmonic
TRIAX and QUADX elements, the mass is for the entire model and the center of gravity and inertias are for
the cross section in the element coordinate system x-y plane.
GUSTAERO
Default = 1
If gust loads are to be computed, for example on restart, set GUSTAERO to -1. The default is recommended
if no gust loads are to be computed after the flutter analysis.
GYROAVG
Default = 0
Used to specify one of two formulations for frequency response analysis using the rotor dynamic capability.
The default is to determine any frequency-dependent terms for each frequency. This option activates the
frequency-dependent looping option. Setting the value < 0 uses an ‘average’ frequency formulation. This
option avoids using the frequency-dependent looping and results in a shorter execution time. For this option,
PARAM,WR3 and PARAM,WR4 must be specified to include rotor damping.
HEATCMD
Character*16, Default=nastran
Name of a command to run SOL 600 thermal contact runs. Nastran first sets up an Marc run to determine
the thermal contact conditions which are output in a file named jid.nthcnt. Next, Nastran converts these to
standard Nastran thermal elements, and finally spawns a second Nastran job from the primary Nastran job.
The command to run the second Nastran job is provided using this parameter. For example, if nast2005t1 is
desired, enter CMD=nast2005t1. If the command “Nastran” is desired, either leave the parameter out or
enter “nastran”. The MSC Nastran run to be spawned will have the form:
CMD jid.nast.dat rcf=RCF
Where file RCF depends on PARAM,MARHEATM.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 789
Remarks:
1. See PARAM,MRSPAWN2 for structural analysis.
2. CMD will be converted to lower case regardless of the case entered.
HEATSTAT
Default = NO
In SOL 101, if PARAM,HEATSTAT,YES is entered, then temperatures are computed in a linear steady state
heat transfer and then applied as thermal loads in a subsequent thermal stress analysis. Two subcases are
required. The first defines the temperature loads, boundary conditions, and output requests for the heat
transfer analysis and the second subcase defines the thermal loads, boundary conditions, and output requests
for the thermal stress analysis. Thermal loads in the second subcase are requested through the command
TEMP(LOAD) = Heat Transfer Subcase ID
If this default is not acceptable, then in heat transfer subcase add the Case Control word TSTRU=SID and
in structures subcase here
TEMP(LOAD) = SID
See the Case Control command, TSTRU (Case), 590. PARAM,NESET is no longer used. HEATSTAT not
supported for p-elements.
HFREQ, HFREQFL
Default = 1.+30
The parameters LFREQ, HFREQ, LFREQFL, and HFREQFL specify the frequency range in cycles per unit
time of the modes to be used in the modal formulations. (LFREQ and LFREQFL are the lower limits and
HFREQ and HFREQFL are the upper limits.) In coupled fluid-structure analysis, HFREQ and LFREQ are
applied to the structural portion of the model and HFREQFL and LFREQFL are applied to fluid portion of
the model. The default for HFREQ and HFREQFL will usually include all vectors computed. Related
parameters are LMODES and LMODESFL.
Note: If the MODESELECT Case Control command is used, it takes precedence over the
parameters LMODES, LFREQ and HFREQ (or LMODESFL, LFREQFL and HFREQFL if
MODESELECT refers to fluid modes). For the hierarchy of usage when the MODESELECT
Case Control command is used in conjunction with these parameters, refer to the Remarks in
the description of the MODESELECT Case Control command. See also the FLSFSEL Case
Control command for an alternative selection.
HTOCITS
Default = 20 (SOL 106 only)
HTOCITS sets the maximum allowable iterations in a hot-to-cold analysis. (See the
ANALYSIS=HOT2COLD Case Control command).
Main Index
HTOCPRT
Default = NO (SOL 106 only)
PARAM,HTOCPRT,YES requests the printout of the final cold shape’s grid locations in a hot-to-cold
analysis. (See the ANALYSIS=HOT2COLD Case Control command).
HTOCTOL
Default = 1.E-2 (SOL 106 only)
HTOCTOL is used to determine convergence of cold shape in hot-to-cold analysis. (See the
ANALYSIS=HOT2COLD Case Control command). The parameter is used to compare the geometries as
the model deforms from its “hot” to “cold” shape.
HTSYM
Default = 0
This parameter controls the decomposition method for SOL 400 thermal analysis.
=0 Use symmetric decomposition solver
=1 Use unsymmetric decomposition solver
ICOPT
Default = 1, SOL 400 Only
Parameter ICOPT works together with the NLIC Case Control Command. The user input loads may or may
not be in equilibrium with the initial condition. If ICOPT=0, MSC Nastran will compute the initial
acceleration based on user’s inputs. Otherwise, it will be assumed that the initial acceleration is null. In other
words, when ICOPT=1 (the default), it is assumed the whole structure is in equilibrium automatically.
Theoretically, ICOPT=0 gives better solution. However, due to that the matrix is highly singular, a large
amount CPU time may be required and the accuracy of the result may be in doubt for the solution with
ICOPT=0.
IFP
See DBALL.
INREL
Default = 0
INREL controls the calculation of inertia relief or enforced acceleration in linear static analysis and buckling.
INREL = -1 or -2 requests that inertia relief or enforced acceleration be performed.
Enforced accelerations, if desired, are input on the DMIG,UACCEL Bulk Data entry. (See Section 7.2 of the
MSC Nastran Reference Manual for the theoretical basis.)
Inertia Relief is not currently supported with external superelements and in the contact analysis.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 791
-1 SUPORT or SUPORT1 entries are required on one or more grid points in the Bulk Data Section
which restrain rigid body motion. The total number of degrees-of-freedom specified on
SUPORT and SUPORT1 entries must be less than or equal to six.
In SOL 105, SUPORT1, not SUPORT, Bulk Data entries must be used to define the supported
degrees-of-freedom and the SUPORT1 Case Control command may only be specified in a
separate static subcase.
Loads due to unit rigid body accelerations at the point referenced by PARAM,GRDPNT are
computed and then appended to the external loads. If PARAM,GRDPNT is specified in
superelement analysis, then the point must be interior to the residual structure and exterior to all
superelements.
-2 The value of PARAM,INREL,-2 will provide an inertia relief analysis without the use of
SUPORTi entries. To use this capability the structure must contain six and only six rigid body
degrees of freedom. SUPORTi entries must not be present when using this option. If the
structure has either more or less then six rigid body degrees of freedom, the analysis will either fail
or give incorrect results.
INRLM
Replaced by the INRLOD keyword on the RESVEC Case Control command.
IRES
Default = -1
IRES=1 requests that the residual load vectors RULV and RUOV be output in all solution sequences. In
superelement analysis, the parameters PRPA and PRPJ may also be used to request output of the partial load
vectors { P a } and { P j } , respectively. In geometric nonlinear analysis, PARAM,IRES,1 will cause the printing
of the residual vector
n+1
{ ΔP f } = [ K ff ] { u f – uf } + { Ff } – { Pf }
ITAPE
Default = -1
ITAPE specifies the output status of the DSCMR matrix in SOLs 101, 103, and 105; and the DSCMCOL
table and the DSCM2 matrix in SOL 200. (See the OUTPUT2 and OUTPUT4 module descriptions in the
MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide<$paranum[h1].)
IUNIT
Default = 11
IUNIT specifies the FORTRAN unit number on which the DSCMR matrix in Design Sensitivity SOLs 101,
103, and 105 and the DSCMCOL table and the DSCM2 matrix in SOL 200 will be written. (See the
OUTPUT2 and OUTPUT4 module descriptions in the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide<$paranum[h1].)
JWLDET
Default=NOLINK
Main Index
With the default multiple denotations with EOSJWL are NOT LINKED: the detonation wave of one
explosive cannot ignite another explosive. When the option is LINK, multiple denotations with EOSJWL
are LINKED: the detonation wave of one explosive can ignite another explosive. For option NOLINK:
TDET is set to -1 for elements that have no JWL material. The "NOLINK" option is only valid with true
JWL materials - not valid for the "Static Detonation/Ideal Gas" model. Setting this parameter as "NOLINK"
will prevent "sympathetic ignition". Each charge will ignite at the specified "TDET" in its own DETSPH
card.
KDAMP, KDAMPFL
Default = 1
If KDAMP or KDAMPFL is set to -1, viscous modal damping is entered into the complex stiffness matrix as
structural damping. In coupled fluid-structure analysis, KDAMP is applied to the structural portion of the
model and KDAMPFL to the fluid portion of the model. See Superelement Analysis (p. 388) in the MSC
KDIAG
Default = -1.0 (SOLs 106, 153, and SOL 400 with non-contact analysis), or 0.0 ( SOL 400 with contact
analysis)
In SOLs 106 (nonlinear static analysis), 153 (steady state heat transfer), and SOL 400 (nonlinear static and
transient analysis), KDIAG may be used to eliminate spurious mechanisms and singularities in the nonlinear
stiffness matrix. The absolute value of KDIAG will be added to some or all of the diagonal terms in the
nonlinear stiffness matrix as follows:
< 0.0 Then add the absolute value of KDIAG to the null diagonal terms only (SOLs 106 and 143).
For SOL 400, the absolute value of KDIAG is added to the diagonal term of null columns
only.
= 0.0 Then no action is taken.
> 0.0 Then add the value of KDIAG to all diagonal terms.
K6ROT
Default = 100.
K6ROT specifies the scaling factor of the penalty stiffness to be added to the normal rotation for CQUAD4
and CTRIA3 elements. The contribution of the penalty term to the strain energy functional is
1 2 ∂u ∂u
–6
Π p = 10 K6ROT --- G  ( Θ z – Ω z ) tdA with Ω z = 1---  --------y – --------x
2 2 ∂x ∂y
A
where A is the area of the shell element, t is the shell thickness, G is the in plane shear modulus, see the
MID1 material identification number on the PSHELL Bulk Data entry. The in plane displacements u x, u y and
the normal rotation Θ z are shown in Figure 6-1. The normal rotation has no physical meaning and should be
ignored. The penalty stiffness removes the singularity in the normal rotation. A higher value than
K6ROT=100. is not recommended because unwanted stiffening effects may occur. If you use only the
MID1field, Nastran automatically sets K6ROT=0.0
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 793
θz 4 3
uy
z
y
1
x
ux
2
Figure 6-1 In plane displacements u x, u y and normal rotation Θ z
LANGLE
Default = 1
LANGLE specifies the method for processing large rotations in nonlinear analysis. By default, large rotations
are computed with the gimbal angle method in nonlinear analyses SOLs 106, 129, 153, and 159 with
geometric nonlinearity (PARAM,LGDlSP,1). If PARAM,LANGLE,2 is specified, then they are computed
with the Rotation Vector method. The value of LANGLE cannot be changed in a subsequent restart. For
SOL 400, users should not use LANGLE. SOL 400 will use the appropriate method depending on type of
element or type of analysis.
LDSUM
Default = 0
Dictates what information is to be stored on a CSV (comma separated values) file in a SOL 144 (static
aeroelasticity) task. The unit the CSV file is stored to is specified by param XYUNIT. LDSUM has the
following options:
0 (Default) – Do not create a CSV file for static aeroelasticity

1 Create a CSV file that contains for each static aeroelastic subcase:
 Subcase ID
 Mach number
 Dynamic Pressure
 Trim Values
 Mass and CG information (mass, xcg,ycg,zcg, IXX,IYY,IZZ,IXY,IXZ and IYZ)
2 Same as 1 plus net structural monitor point (MONPNT1, MONDSP1, MONPNT2,
MONPNT3) results.
3 Same as 2 plus the output of RIGID AIR, ELASTIC RESTRAINED, and INERTIAL, RIGID
APPLIED and ELASTIC APPLIED components for the structural MONPNT1 results.
4 Same as 3 plus the output of RIGID AIR and ELASTIC RESTRAINED components for
aerodynamic MONPNT1 results.
Main Index
LFREQ, LFREQFL
Default = 0.0
See HFREQ, HFREQFL
If the MODESELECT Case Control command is used, it takes precedence over the parameters LMODES,
LFREQ and HFREQ (or LMODESFL, LFREQFL and HFREQFL if MODESELECT refers to fluid
modes). For the hierarchy of usage when the MODESELECT Case Control command is used in
conjunction with these parameters, refer to the Remarks in the description of the MODESELECT Case
Control command. See also the FLSFSEL Case Control command for an alternative selection.
LGDISP
LGDISP is a global parameter. For the case with multiple LGDISP definitions, Nastran will use the first
definition for all the subcases and steps. Default = -1
>0 The differential stiffness for structural elements is computed for the linear elements and added
to the differential stiffness of the nonlinear elements.
1 All the nonlinear structural element types that have a large displacement capability in SOLs 106,
129, 153, 159, 600 and SOL 400 (see Table 3-1, under “Geometric Nonlinear” in the MSC
Nastran Reference Manual) will be assumed to have large displacement effects (updated element
coordinates and follower forces). For simultaneous multi-physics coupling analysis defined
through the SUBSTEP Case Control option in SOL 400, nonlinear heat transfer element types
will be treated the same as LGDISP = -1 (i.e., original geometry for thermal stiffness, element
fluxes and external loads).
-1 No large displacement effects will be considered.
2 Follower force for structural elements effects will be ignored but large displacement effects will
be considered. For simultaneous multi-physics coupling analysis defined through the SUBSTEP
Case Control option in SOL 400, nonlinear heat transfer element types will be treated the same
as LGDISP = -1 (i.e., original geometry for thermal stiffness, element fluxes and external loads).
11 Nonlinear structural elements will be treated the same as LGDISP = 1 in all supporting solution
sequences.For simultaneous multi-physics coupling analysis defined through the SUBSTEP
Case Control option in SOL 400, nonlinear heat transfer element types will be based on the
current updated geometry (updated element coordinates for the thermal stiffness, element fluxes
and external loads).
12 Nonlinear structural elements will be treated the same as LGDISP = 2 in all supporting solution
sequences. For simultaneous multi-physics coupling analysis defined through the SUBSTEP
Case Control option in SOL 400, nonlinear heat transfer element types will be based on updated
current geometry (updated element coordinates for the thermal stiffness and element fluxes,
original geometry for external loads).
LMFACT
LMFACT and PENFN are the scale factor and penalty function for the Lagrange rigid elements and the
contact analysis. For Lagrange rigid elements, please see Case Control command, RIGID. The purpose of
LMFACT and PENFN is to make the values of stiffness matrix of the Lagrange rigid elements and/or the
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 795
contact components about the same relative magnitude as those of the other elements in the model. Too
small a value will produce inaccurate results and too large a value will produce numerical difficulties. The
same value is usually assigned to both LMFACT and PENFN. Under special requirement, user may assign
different values for LMFACT and PENFN. For example, if PENFN=0.0 and LMFACT ≠ 0.0 , then the
solution method for the rigid elements becomes the pure Lagrange multiplier method instead of the
augmented Lagrangian method. However, user must exercise caution if different values are assigned to
LMFACT and PENFN. MSC Nastran will compute the appropriate default values for LMFACT and
PENFN. The default value is 1.0e+5 for all solution sequences except SOL 400 and SOL 101 linear contact.
For SOL 400 and SOL 101 linear contact, MSC Nastran will compute the appropriate default values for
LMFACT and PENFN. These defaults are currently calculated as 0.05% of the average stiffness of the
diagonal terms of the stiffness matrix. This computed default is good in general. But when the
material/element stiffnesses (e.g., Young’s Modulus, Spring Stiffnesses) used in the model vary in a wide
range, users may have to adjust the computed LMFACT and PENFN. Note that the computed LMFACT,
PENFN are printed out in a .f06 file. It is generally recommended that for these cases, the LMFACT and
PENFN should be reduced by several orders of magnitude to avoid numerical difficulty.
If in a coupled multi-physics analysis distinct values for LMFACT and PENFN are desired for each physics
pass, the parameter definitions must be made inside the SUBSTEP Case Control command. If no values are
entered each physics pass computes its own defaults.
LMODES, LMODESFL
Default = 0
LMODES and LMODESFL are the number of lowest modes to use in a modal formulation. In coupled
fluid-structure analysis, LMODES specifies the lowest modes of the structural portion of the model and
LMODESFL the modes of the fluid portion of the model. If LMODES (or LMODESFL) = 0, the retained
modes are determined by the parameters LFREQ and HFREQ (or LFREQFL and HFREQFL).
In SOL 103, LMODES may be used to reduce the number of eigenvectors to be processed in data recovery
which may significantly reduce the CPU and storage costs.
Note: If the MODESELECT Case Control command is used, it takes precedence over the
parameters LMODES, LFREQ and HFREQ (or LMODESFL, LFREQFL and HFREQFL if
MODESELECT refers to fluid modes). For the hierarchy of usage when the MODESELECT
Case Control command is used in conjunction with these parameters, refer to the Remarks in
the description of the MODESELECT Case Control command. See also the FLSFSEL Case
Control command for an alternative selection.
LOADU
Default = -1
See POST=0.
LOOPID
Default = 0
Main Index
LOOPID defines the desired loop number for initial conditions in a restart of SOLs 106, 129, 153, and 159.
By default in SOLs 106 and 153 the restart proceeds from the last loop ID of the subcase defined by
SUBCASID or SUBID. In SOLs 106, and 153 PARAM,SUBID or SUBCASID may also be specified.
LSTRN
Replaced by the STRAIN Case Control command.
MACH
Default = 0.0
Mach number. If more than one Mach number was used to compute aerodynamic matrices, the one closest
to MACH will be used in dynamic aeroelastic response analysis. The default causes the matrices computed
at the lowest MACH number to be used.
MARALPHA
Default = 10, SOL 600 only.
Determines what type of coefficient of thermal expansion (CTE) is entered in the Nastran input file when
CTE varies with temperature. For most Nastran solution sequences, such as SOL 106 and SOL 400, if CTE’s
vary with temperature, secant values need to be entered. This parameter specifics whether secant or actual
values are entered at each temperature on curves using the TABLEM1 entry. In addition, it offers methods
to convert the secant CTE’s instantaneous values required by Marc. Please read MAT1 Remark 10 and
MATHE Remark 8 for further details.
-1 CTE’s (vs temperature) are entered in the Nastran input as instantaneous values – no
conversion is required (Warning if this option is used, the CTE’s should only be used in SOL
600 and will produce incorrect results if used in SOL 106 or SOL 400).
0 CTE’s (vs temperature) are secant values (as required by SOL 106, 129 and 400). They will
be converted to instantaneous values using the formula immediately below for use in the Marc
portion of SOL 600.
Ai – Ai – 1
α i = A i +  ------------------------ ( T i – T ref )
 Ti – Ti – 1
1 CTE’s (vs temperature) are secant values and are converted to instantaneous values using the
formula immediately below for use in the Marc portion of SOL 600.
A i ( T i – T ref ) – A i – 1 ( T i – 1 – T ref )
α i = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ti – Ti – 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 797
2 CTE’s (vs temperature) are secant values and are converted to instantaneous values using the
average of the values computed by options 0 and 1.
N Same as option 1 except N intermediate points are placed between each original CTE vs
temperature value to increase accuracy. N must be 3 or greater. Testing has shown that for
CTE’s that change appreciably over the temperature range, N should be 10 or larger. The total
number of points must not exceed 8000.
Remarks:
1. α is the actual (instantaneous) CTE
2. T is temperature T ref is specified on MAT1 and other MAT entries.
3. At T ( 1 )α 1 = A 1
4. The above equations are applied at mid temperatures. The first temperature is retained. Starting with
the second temperature T iN = 0.5 ⋅ ( T i + T i – 1 ) original. Since the new final temperature will be smaller
than the original the user should ensure that the final average temperature is large enough to cover
the applied temperature range of the analysis.
5. If the CTE’s entered in the Nastran input file are secant values, it is recommended that
MARALPHA=N with N set to a value of 20 or larger but less than 8000 divided by the number of
points in the largest CTE vs temperature TABLEM1 entry.
6. Only option -1 was available prior to MD Nastran 2010 and MSC Nastran 2009.
MARAUTOC
Determines whether NLAUTO entries for SOL 600,129 will override the default or not.
0 Do not override the default. (Default)

1 NLAUTO initial time step and final time will override the defaults.
Remark:
The default for the initial time step is to use the DT value from the entry or the first non-zero time value on
the TABLED1 entry divided by 100.0 whichever is smaller. The default for the final time is NDT*DT from
the entry or the last time point from the TABLED1 entry whichever is smaller.
MARBATCH
Specifies whether Marc will be spawned from Nastran in the “batch” mode or not.
0 Marc will be spawned using batch=no. (Default)

1 Marc will be spawned using batch=yes.
Main Index
Note: PARAM,MARBATCH,0 requires PARAM,MARCTEMP,1 (which is the default). This

combination of parameters will place the Marc log file in the Nastran log file.
MARBK105
This parameter controls whether linear buckling or nonlinear buckling eigenvalues are calculated for SOL
600,105.
-1 Nonlinear eigenvalues are found. In other words, all loads are placed after Marc’s END
OPTION and default values are used for CONTROL and AUTOSTEP. This option simulates
what happens with SOL 106 or SOL 400.
1 Linear eigenvalues are found. In other words, all loads are placed before Marc’s END OPTION,
a linear analysis is used to obtain the differential stiffness and eigenvalues are then calculated.
This option simulates what happens with SOL 105. (Default)
MARBK106
Controls whether linear buckling or nonlinear buckling eigenvalues are calculated for SOL 600,106.
-1 Nonlinear eigenvalues are found. In other words, all loads are placed after Marc’s END
OPTION and default values are used for CONTROL and AUTO STEP. This option stimulates
what happens with SOL 106 or SOL 400.
1 Linear eigenvalues are found. In other words, all loads are placed before Marc’s END OPTION,
a linear analysis is used to obtain the differential stiffness and eigenvalues are then calculated.
This option simulates what happens with SOL 106.
MARC4401
Determines whether recycling due to body to body contact occurs.
0 Recycling due to body to body contact can occur

1 Recycling due to body to body contact is prevented - will add feature,4401 to the Marc input
MARC7601
Determines whether large deformation RBE3 element will be used.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 799
0 Use small deformation RBE3

1 Use large deformation RBE3
Remarks:
1. MARC7601=0 sets FEATURE,7601 in Marc.
2. MARC7601=1 will not set FEATURE,7601.
MARCASUM
Default is -1 for nonlinear analysis and 1 for linear analysis. SOL 600 only.
Marc’s assumed strain formulation is used for plane stress, plane strain and solid elements (Marc types 3,
11 and 7). The assumed strain formulation improves the bending behavior of these elements and uses an
enriched set of interpolation functions. Assumed strain should be off for analyses with a significant amount
of plasticity. In determining the type of analysis (linear or nonlinear) for defaults of this parameter, the SOL
600,ID Executive statement is used. If ID is 106 or 129, the analysis is considered to be nonlinear and the
default is -1. If ID is any other value, the analysis is considered to be linear and the default is 1. For nonlinear
analyses without plasticity, this parameter should be turned on for models with solid elements.
-1 Assumed strain is not used.
1 Assumed strain is used.
MARCAUTO
Default = leave out parameter, SOL 600 only.
Determines which Marc’s increment option is used.
1 NLPARM entries will be translated to Marc’s AUTO STEP option. If contact is present, the
number of steps (NINC) is less than 100, it will be reset to 100. Marc will adaptively reduce
the number of steps if possible, however, this option forces the first step to be 1% of the total
time. If the first step is too large, experience has shown that convergence problems may result.
To start with a different initial time step, see options 999 or -999.
-1 NLPARM entries will be translated to Marc’s AUTO INCREMENT option. If contact is
present, the number of steps is automatically set to 100. It has been found that certain difficult
contact problems which fail using the AUTO STEP option run successfully using AUTO
INCREMENT. This option is not available if the only “loading” is rigid contact or velocity
control.
-2 NLPARM entries will be translated to Marc’s AUTO LOAD option with no adjustment in the
number of steps. Use of the option is not recommended. This option is not available if the only
“loading” is rigid contact or velocity control.
Main Index
999 Marc’s AUTO STEP option will be used with no adjustment in the number of steps whether or
not contact is present. This option is not available if the only “loading” is rigid contact or
velocity control.
-999 Marc’s AUTO INCREMENT option will be used with no adjustment in the number of steps
whether or not contact is present. This option is not available if the only “loading” is rigid
contact or velocity control.
See PARAM,MARCITER for a similar option. Do not use both MARCAUTO and MARCITER parameters.
MARCAXEL
Allows a combination of axisymmetric and plane stress elements for 2D analyses. This analysis technique is
sometimes used for approximate turbine disk/blade analysis.
0 The combination, if present in the input data will cause a Severe Warning and Marc will not be
spawned.
1 Combination is allowed and all CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CTRIAR elements will be considered to be plane stress and mate with CTRIAX6 elements.
MARCBEAM
Default = -1, SOL 600 only.
-1 All CBEAM elements which reference PBEAML will be mapped to Marc element type 14 for all
cross if any CBEAM elements in the model reference MATS1 or MATEP entries. Full plasticity
is available for all such cross section shapes with this option. CBEAM cross sections specified using
PBEAM (where only A, I, J are available) will be mapped to Marc element 98 and remain elastic
even though they might reference MATS1 or MATEP.
0 CBEAM will be mapped to Marc element type 14 for all cross sections specified with PBEAML.
Full plasticity is available for all such cross section shapes with this option. CBEAM cross sections
specified using PBEAM will be mapped to Marc element 98 and remain elastic even though they
might reference MATS1 or MATEP.
1 All CBEAM elements will be mapped to Marc element type 98 and remain elastic regardless of
whether the cross section is specified using PBEAM or PBEAML or whether they reference
MATS1 or MATEP.
Remark:
If PBMARB6 or PBMNUM6 beam properties are used, MACRBEAM must be set to zero which
automatically activates the new forms of Marc element 98 that can include plasticity.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 801
MARCBODY
Default=0, SOL 600 only.
Control the logic when the specified value of NBODIES entry on BCPARA bulk data card does not match
the actual number of contact bodies in the model.
0 Analysis continuing with number of bodies actually in the model

1 Analysis continuing with number of bodies specified on NBODIES entry on BCPARA bulk data
card. (This may produce exit 13 in Marc)
MARCBUSH
Default = -1.0 if parameter is not entered, no “small” stiffness will replace zero stiffness terms, SOL 600 only.
Determines whether “small” stiffness values will be used instead of zero for the stiffness values in various
directions of CBUSHi elements.
-1.0 No “small” stiffness terms will replace zero stiffness values in any direction.
0.0 Stiffness values of 0.01*Kmax will be added for any direction that is zero Marc input (apples
to both translational and rotational directions)
Value The value entered will be used to calculate stiffness=Value*Kmax to replace any zero stiffness
values (applies to both translational and rotational directions)
MARCCBAR
Specifies whether CBAR will be replaced by CBEAM for SOL 600.
0 CBAR is not replaced by CBEAM.

1 CBAR is replaced by CBEAM (PBAR is replaced by PBEAM, PBARL is replaced by PBEAML).
Note: Use of this parameter is not usually required but might be beneficial in combination with
PARAM,MSPEEDSE,1 to speed up translation of models with a large number of CBAR
elements particularly when a there are large number of PBAR entries or PBARL entries.
Main Index
MARCCENT
Controls where the element output is generated.
0 Element output from Marc will be generated for each integration point.
1 Element output from Marc will be generated at the center of each element only. This option
saves disk space and computer time, but may not catch the maximum stresses or strains.
Because the residual load calculation is not accurate, this should not be used in a nonlinear
analysis.
MARCCON2
Default = Program determines value, SOL 600 only.
Value If entered, the integer value entered is the second value on Marc’s CONTACT second entry
representing the maximum number of entities to be created for any contact surface.
MARCCON3
Value If entered, the integer value entered is the third value on Marc’s CONTACT second entry
representing the maximum number of nodes that lie on the periphery of any deformable
contact surface.
MARCCPY
If MARCCPY is specified, Marc files will be copied to Nastran output files and/or deleted according to the
option (0, 1, or 2) shown below.
Copy Marc Output Files to Nastran Delete Marc Input &

MARCCPY Option Output Files Output Files
0 (Default) No No
1 Yes Yes
2 Yes No
3 No Yes
If MARCCPY is 1 or 2, the out and log files will be copied as produced by Marc. If MARCCPY is -1 or -2
the actions as shown above for +1 or +2 will occur, and Marc-type test will be converted to Nastran-type text
using and ASCII file named marcfilt.txt which must be located in the same directory where the Nastran input
resides or in the same directory where the Nastran executable resides.
The following Marc files are potentially affected by the MARCCPY option:
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 803
Marc Output File Nastran Output Copied to MARCCPY

name.marc.out name.f06 1, 2, -1, -2
name.marc.log name.log 1, 2, -1, -2
name.marc.t16 not copied, will remain if produced
name.op2, fort.11, or ftn11 not copied, will remain if produced
MARCDEF
0 SOL 600 default options for Marc will be set to values determined to be best for Nastran-type
problems (for MARCDEF=0, Marc’s SHELL SECT parameter will be set to 11 if the value of
MARCDEF is zero.
1 Default values will be set to current Marc standard (Mentat) values.
2 Default values will be set to “improved” Marc default values agreed on by the Marc and
Nastran development groups.
Default values affect the following Marc input data entries and fields:
MARCDEF Value MARC Implicit Entry Type Field Value

0 control 2 10
0 Auto Step 5 0.01*max time
0 Auto Step 8 10
0 Auto Step 10 1
1 control 2 3
1 Auto Step 5 1.0E-5*max time
1 Auto Step 8 5
1 Auto Step 10 0
2 control 2 10
2 Auto Step 5 1.0E-3*max time
2 Auto Step 8 5
2 Auto Step 10 1
Main Index
Note: For MARCDEF=0, the first three values were found to provide better convergence and the last
(auto step 10) allows snap-through solution to converge correctly without having to use arc-
length methods. This parameter can be set in the system-wide rc file as well as the user’s rc file
or the local rc file (same directory as the Nastran input data to provide the selected set of
defaults for all runs if so desired. If the parameter is entered in the Nastran input data file, it
will override any parameters set in any of the rc files.
MARCDILT
If omitted, SOL 600 determines the value.
0 Constant dilatation is not used.

1 Constant dilatation formulation is used for solids, axisymmetric, and plane strain elements
(advance nonlinear element types 7, 10, 11, 19 and 20) if the model includes any of these
element types. For elastic-plastic and creep analysis this formulation is usually too stiff when
constant dilatation is not used. MARCDILT=1 and MARCASUM=1 should not both be used.
MARCDIS2
Value If entered, this integer value entered here is the second value on Marc’s DIST LOADS
(“parameter” Section 2 of Marc’s Volume C Program Input) entry representing the maximum
number of different lists of distributed loads.
MARCDIS3
Value If entered, the integer value entered here is the third value on Marc’s DIST LOADS
number of elements in any particular distributed loads list.
MARCDIS4
Value If entered, the integer value entered here is the fourth value on Marc’s DIST LOADS
number of nodes with point loads applied.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 805
MARCDMIG,N
If matrices or loads are entered using K2GG, M2GG, B2GG, K2PP, M2PP, B2PP, P2G in the Nastran Case
Control Section, they will be translated to Marc as follows depending on the value of N:
N=0 All DMIG’s in the Nastran file (and include files) will be placed in the Marc input file
whether used or not.
N>0 All DMIG’s in the Nastran file (and include files) will be placed on a new file named
dmigxxxx.dmi where xxxx is the value of N. This new file will be “included” in Marc using
a Marc include statement. For example, if N=100 the file name will be dmig100.dmi if
N=25765 the file is dmig25765.dmi. N must not exceed a value of 999999.
Note: This parameter is ignored for External Superelements (if the MESUPER Bulk Data entry is
present).
MARCDUPE
SOL 600 only.
Controls whether SOL 600 will check for duplicate entries for most every type of bulk data entry. SOL 600
does not allow duplicate entries, but the portion of IFP that runs prior to spawning Marc does not usually
check for duplicate entries.
1 Duplicate entries will be checked and exact duplicates are found, the job will fatal out.
2 In addition to option 1, entries will be checked and if duplicate ID’s (field 2 for most entries or
field 3 for loads) are found, the job will fatal out.
-1 Duplicate entries and ID’s will not be checked (this is desirable for certain models)
MARCDYND
Determines whether dynamic loads with “advanced table input” will be used in SOL 600.
0 Do not use advanced table input for dynamic loads

1 Use advanced table input for dynamic loads
If MARCDYND=1, PARAM,MARCTOTD,1 and PARAM,MARCTOTT,1 must also be set.
Main Index
MARCEKND
ID Selects the type of strain results to be placed in a Nastran op2 file (if a request for an op2 file
is made). ID can take the following values:
MARCEKND=0, Total strains will be processed

MARCEKND=1, Plastic strains will be processed
MARCEKND=2, Elastic strains will be processed
For creep analyses, creep strain is output if a request for strain output is made.
MARCEXIT
0 If one of the COPYR options on the SOL 600 statement is specified, Nastran will process
these options and then a DMAP exit will occur.
1 The COPYR options will be processes and Nastran will not exit.
MARCFEAT,N
SOL 600 only.
If entered will add FEATURE,N to the Marc input file in the Parameters Section.
N Feature to be added, for example PARAM,MARCFEAT,5102 will generate a heat transfer

thermal contact file jid.marc.nthcnt
Only one PARAM,MARCFEAT may be entered.

MARCFILi
No Default, SOL 600 only.
Name Name a file name limited to 8 characters (16 characters if param* is used) used in
conjunction with one of the CONTINUE options on the SOL 600 statement. For example,
if CONTINUE=1 on the SOL 600 statement and PARAM,MARCFIL1,DMIG44 is
entered, friction stiffness and possibly damping) matrices are created in DMIG format by
Marc and placed on file DMIG44. The various CONTINUE options use the following
MARCFILi entries:
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 807
Continue Option MARCFILi SOL Executed K2GG/K2PP

1. MARCFIL1 107 K2GG
3. MARCFIL3 111 K2PP
4. MARCFIL1 112 K2PP
5. MARCFIL1 * *
Remarks:
1. For most continue options other than brake squeal models, the Marc portion of SOL 600 will
produce files with very long names such as jid.marc.conmpc_0007 These file names are too long for
a Nastran parameter field even if PARAM* is used. The solution is to specify a short name such as
PARAM,MARCFIL1,ABCD.TXT
Inside ABCD.TXT place an include line for the actual file desired, such as
INCLUDE ‘myjob.marc.conmpc_0007’
Where myjob would be replaced by the actual JID of the primary Nastran run without the bdf or dat
extension.
2. If INITCON=4 on the BCPARA entry is specified contact MPC’s for each increment will be out on
a file named jid.marc.conmpc_incr (if the increment is 7 it would be jid.marc.conmpc_0007).
3. If the DMIGOUT Bulk Data entry is used, DMIG’s will be produced in the form
jid.marc_cglsti_incr. See the description of DMIGOUT for further details.
4. For most cases, the difference between jid.marc.conmpc_last and jid.marc.conmpc.0001 is not large
enough to affect the subsequent analysis significantly. To be sure that the last jid.marc.conmpc_xxxx
is used specify the following
param,marcfil1,lastt
Nastran will search for all jid.marc.conmpc_* files and choose the one with the largest _xxxx. If no
jid.marc.conmpc_* files exist, the job will terminate with an fatal error message.
MARCFRIC
Default = 0.0, SOL 600 only.
When the Case Control command, BCONTACT = ALL is specified, no other 3D contact data is required
in the input file, except that the Coulomb coefficient of friction may be entered using the value of this
parameter. Do not enter this entry if contact surfaces are specified in the Bulk Data.
MARCGAPD, D
Default is U0 of the PGAP, 2752 entry, SOL 600 only.
Main Index
D Depending on the value of PARAM,MARCGAPP, enter the gap closure distance for fixed
direction gaps or the minimum distance between end points for the true distance gap. If d > 0,
the two end points are never closer than a distance d apart. If d < 0, the two end points are
never farther apart than d .
MARCGAPN, ID
ID ID of gap element for which the immediately following PARAM,MARCGAPP and

PARAM,MARCGAPD apply. Unlike most other parameters, several sequences of parameters
MARCGAPN, MARCGAPP and MARCGAPD may be entered to specify values for all gap
elements. If no MARCGFAPN is entered, the values entered for MARCGAPP and
MARCGAPD will be used for all gaps in the model.
MARCGAPP
0 Nastran gap elements will be translated to Marc fixed gap elements.
1 Nastran gap elements will be translated to Marc True Distance gaps.
MARCGAUS
Default if parameter is not entered = 1, SOL 600 only.
1 SOL 600 output stresses and strains will be at the Gauss points for solid elements and
extrapolated to the corner points for plates/shells elements. Strains are handled the same way as
stresses.
2 SOL 600output stresses and strains will be at the center and at the grid points for solid elements
(the maximum stress from any Gauss point is determined and compatible stresses for that Gauss
point are placed at the center and at each of the grid points). Shell/plate stresses are at the center
(top and bottom surfaces). The maximum Gauss point stress at each surface is found and a
compatible set of stresses at that Gauss point are placed in the center of the surface. Strains are
handled the same way as stresses.
3 Solid stresses/and strains are the same as option 1 and shell/plate stresses and strains are the same
as option 2.
If this parameter is entered with values of zero or less or values greater than 3, it will be reset to 1.
MARCGLUE
Default = 0 if parameter is not entered, SOL 600 only.
If MARCGLUE is set to 1, all contact surfaces will be glued whether or not IGLUE=1 is specified on the
BCTABLE entry or not.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 809
0 IGLUE on BCTABLE entries specifies whether or not glued contact is used

1 IGLUE on BCTABLE entries will be ignored and glued contact will be used for all contact
surfaces.
Remark:
For this parameter to function BCTABLE entries must be entered (do not set BCONTACT=ALL).
MARCGRAV
Determines whether PARAM,MNASTLDS,777 will automatically be set if multiple GRAV entries are
present in any subcase. This is determined in a simplified fashion by comparing the number of GRAV entries
to the number of subcases to save computer time.
0 Set PARAM,MNASTLDS,777 for multiple GRAV entries.

1 Do not set PARAM,MNASTLDS,777 regardless of the number of GRAV and SUBCASE
entries.
MARCHOST
Determines the name of a hostfile to be used with SOL 600 parallel runs. If this parameter is missing, no host
file is used and the parallel run will run on one machine. That machine may have several processors and as
many processors as specified on the PARAMARC Bulk Data entry will be used. If
PARAM,MARCHOST,Name is specified, the hostfile must be generated by the user in a format acceptable
to Marc (see the Marc and Marc Mentat Installation and Operations Guide). Each line of the hostfile normally
lists how many processors are used on each machine. If PARAM*,MARCHOST is entered, the name is
limited to 16 characters (all lower case).
MARCIAMN
0 Nastran is directed to spawn Marc (as specified by the SOL 600 Executive Control statement
or PARAM,MARCRUN), using a full version of Marc. Standard Marc licensing is required.
1 A special version of Marc is spawned by Nastran. This version of Marc may have certain
features that are not available in the full version. Marc will be spawned from Nastran with the
additional command line switch - iam nanl. The licensing for both Nastran and Marc reflect
this situation. This option applies only to Marc version 2003 or later. If PARAM,MARCVERS
points to a Marc version earlier than 2003, MARCIAMN will be set to zero and a full version
of Marc is required.
The parameter may be set in the system-wide rc, the user rc file or as an environmental variable using
NASM_IAMN=0 or 1 (similar to the way values on the SOL 600 statement are set).
Main Index
MARCINTC
Default = 2.
Option to ignore or fatal SOL 600 if any CINTC Bulk Data entries are found This option will also ignore
or issue a warning for GMBNDC entries.
0 Fatal job if any CINTC entries are found (also issue warning messages if any GMBNDC entries
are found).
1 Ignore all CINTC and GMBNDC entries in SOL 600.
2 Generate the MPC’s for CINTC/GMBNDC and combine them with standard MCP entries (if
they exist), then use them in the SOL 600 analysis (SOL 600 only).
Remark:
MARCINTC=2 spawns a secondary SOL 100 Nastran job to generate MPC’s for the CINTC’s. Licenses
from the primary job are released, then reclaimed after the secondary job terminates. The secondary job stops
prior to decomp and uses the standard SOL 101 licenses.
MARCINTF
Default = 1.0D-6.
Threshold value below which MPC coefficients generated by CINTC/GMBNDC are not considered. This
parameter is ignored unless PARAM,MARCINTC,2 has been entered.
MARCITER
Used to control fixed time stepping in SOL 600.
0 Fixed time steps or auto time steps will be controlled by PARAM,MARCAUTO.

N Allows fixed time steps to be used without needing to set the maximum and minimum times
to nearly the same value (using Marc’s AUTO STEP option). This parameter triggers true
fixed time stepping with the other advantages AUTO STEP has over methods such as
AUTO LOAD. For example, it uses better numerical damping. If this parameter is entered
with a positive integer (N), a value of 2 is placed in the AUTO STEP field 9 and N is placed
in field 7.
-1 This option is similar to PARAM,MARCITER,N (fixed time stepping will be used) except
that the time comes from the NLPARAM or entry. This option is not available if the only
“loading” is rigid contact or velocity control. See PARAM,MARCAUTO for a similar
option. Do not use both MARCAUTO and MARCITER parameters.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 811
MARCL001
Determines whether Marc’s POINT LOAD (without tables) 2nd datablock, 3rd field will be honored or not.
If this value is set to 1 multiple loads at the same dof in the same subcase will usually be summed (however,
see item d.).
-1 The 2nd datablock 3rd field will be set to 1 (see Remark)

1 The 2nd datablock 3rd field will not be set to 1. If it is necessary to sum the loads, this must
be accomplished in one of several ways:
a. Summed in the GUI or other method of data input
b. By setting PARAM,MNASTLDS,1
b. By setting PARAM,MARCTOTT,1
d. For certain simple multiple force/moment cases, SOL 600 can sum them and
PARAM,MNASTLDS,1 must be specified to prevent loads from being specified
multiple times. However, it may be difficult to determine whether the loads are complex
or not, so the use of either option c or b is recommended.
Remarks:
1. For releases prior to MD Nastran 2010 and MSC Nastran 2009, this field was set to 1 to
automatically sum any forces or moments that might have been entered more than once by the GUI
(see PARAM,MNASTLDS for a discussion of ways this can happen). This field, when set to one,
allows loads entered more than once at the same grid ID in the same subcase to be summed.
However, experience shows that this field does not work in certain circumstances, particularly when
“total loads” using PARAM,MARCTOTL are requested. PARAM,NASTLDS has been added
beginning with MD Nastran 2010 and MSC Nastran 2009 to handle the cases where the 2nd
datablock 3rd field does not work as expected.
2. To maintain backward compatibility with previous runs, set the following parameters:
PARAM,MARCL001,1
PARAM,MNASTLDS,0
PARAM,MARCTOTL,0
PARAM,MARCTOTT,0
3. If PARAM,MARCTOTL,1 is entered, PARAM,MARCL001,1 will be set unless
PARAM,MARCL001,-1 is entered.
4. This parameter may be set in RC files.
Main Index
MARCLOWE
Used in conjunction with superelement matrices created by Marc.
0 Standard modulus values for all materials will be used.
1 All modulus of elasticity values will be changed to 1.0E-9 for the second Nastran run (when
Nastran spawns another Nastran run using the SOL 600 continue option. This option is
sometimes necessary for cases where Marc creates a superelement or substructure stiffness
matrix but does not create a mass matrix. In this case, the second Nastran run will create the
mass matrix using standard elements, density and other concentrated and distributed masses
but the stiffness created by Nastran will be very low. Essentially the entire stiffness of the
model will come from the stiffness matrices created by Marc.
MARCLUMP
0 Consistent mass will be used for SOL 600 transient dynamics or eigenvalue problems with
rotational masses (if applicable). (Default)
1 Lumped mass will be used for SOL 600 transient dynamics or eigenvalue problems with
rotational masses (if applicable).
2 Consistent mass will be used for SOL 600 transient dynamics or eigenvalue problems without
rotational masses.
3 Lumped mass will be used for SOL 600 transient dynamics or eigenvalue problems without
rotational masses.
Remark:
This parameter is only used with dynamic analysis.
MARCMAT2
Default = -1.0, SOL 600 only.
Used if g33 = 0.0 on MAT2 entries. Marc will diverge if g33 = 0.0 for MAT2 entries. If the value entered is
positive, the value is a multiplier of g11 and g22 to calculate g33 as follows:
g33 = marcmat2*(g11 + g22)
MARCMAT3
Used if Nastran has generated MAT2 from PCOMP and the MID of MAT2 is 30000001 is greater
corresponding to MID3 for PSHELL.
If the value entered is 0, this entry is ignored regardless of the MAT2 MID value.
If the value entered is 1 the MAT2 entry will be mapped to Marc’s ANISOTROPIC entry such that all Cij
are zero except the following:
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 813
C55=g11
C56=g12
C66=g22
C44=g11
C45=g12
C55=g22
C66=g22
C55=g11
C56=g12
C66=g22
C44=g11
C45=g12
C55=g22
C66=g22
Note: This entry is ignored unless the MAT2 MID is greater than 30000000.
MARCMATT
Default = -1 if parameter is not entered, SOL 600 only.
Determines if Marc input file will be created with materials using the table-driven formats or not.
)
-1 Table-driven formats for materials will not be used. (Default)

1 Table-driven formats for materials will be used
Remark:
This parameter can be set in RC files.
MARCMEM, Value
Value If entered, the integer value entered here is the second field on Marc’s SIZING entry
(MAXALL) and is the main memory specification for memory in Marc. This value is entered
in MW (the program multiplies it by 1,000,000). For example, if a value of 350 is entered,
the number of 350000000 will be placed in the second field of the SIZING entry.
Main Index
MARCMID3
Controls whether MID3 will be set to the same value as MID2 when the Marc PSHELL option is used
(designated by PARAM,MRPSHELL,1 or when the SMEAR option is used on the SOL 600 Executive
Control statement.)
0 MID3 will not be changed (if zero or blank, it will remain zero or blank). (Default)
1 MID3 will be set to MID2. This improves the singularity ratio in some problems without
appreciably changing the results particularly when orthotropic material properties are used. It is
not necessary if PARAM,MMAT2ANI,11 or a similar option is used to specify anisotropic
material properties.
MARCMNF
Controls creation of an Adams MNF file by Marc for eigenvalue analysis when Marc is spawned from SOL
600.
0 MNF file will not be created. (Default)

1 MNF file will be created (for Marc 2003, the MNF file is located in the .t19 file, so
PARAM,MARCT19,1 must also be specified).
Note: It is not necessary to use this parameter if the MDMIOUT Bulk Data entry is used to request
an MSC Adams MNF file.
MARCMPCC
Determines whether SOL 600 converts MPCs to stiff beams or not.
0 MPC’s are not converted to stiff beams. (Default)

1 MPC’s are converted to stiff beams.
Note: PARAM,MARCMPCC,1 should not be used if RBE’s are converted to MPC’s using
PARAM,MARCRBE2 or PARAM,MARCRBE3.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 815
MARCMPII
Integer, Default = 2 for DDM parallel executions, SOL 600 only.
Determines whether the MPI service on PC systems will remain running after the job finishes.
-1 The MPI service will remain running after SOL 600 finishes
1 The Intel MPI service, ismpd.exe will be uninstalled before SOL 600 terminates.
2 The Intel MPI service, ismpd.exe will be started before each Marc execution and terminated at
the end of each Marc execution from within the Nastran portion of SOL 600.
771 MSMPI rather than Intel MPI is requested (starting and/or stopping of the ismpd.exe Intel MPI
service is ignored)
Remarks:
1. If SOL 600 terminates abnormally the service may remain running regardless of the value of this
parameter.
2. Leaving the MPI service running will speed up the execution of multiple jobs.
3. This parameter may be entered in RC files.
4. Although ismpd.exe is started by the Marc script, it sometimes fails to start properly unless started
outside the script. The user can either do this in his own script or set MARCMPII=2 to have Nastran
do it. Either of these options improves reliability of the Intel MPI starting.
MARCND99
Default-see below. SOL 600 only.
Determines whether a set in the Marc input file to output all nodal quantities will be generated or not. If
MARCND99=1, all Case Control nodal output requests must have the PLOT qualifier or the job may fail.
-1 A set named ND999999 will be generated to output all nodes for at least one type of nodal
output. This is the default of all Case Control nodal requests do not have (plot).
1 The set will not be generated. If all nodal Case Control requests have (plot) such as
DISP(PLOT)=ALL, ACCEL(PLOT)=ALL, etc. the default is 1 even if the parameter is not
entered.
MARCNOER
Determines action to take when unsupported features are encountered.
0 The internal Marc translator will stop and generate FATAL ERRORs if unsupported features in
Marc or in the internal translator are encountered.
1 If unsupported features are encountered, they are ignored, no FATAL ERROR messages are
issued and if requested, Marc will be executed.
Main Index
MARCOFFT
Controls whether Nodal Temperatures are specified at the original or offset grid point or both grid points for
beams and shells with offsets or connected by RBE2’s (see note 2) when PARAM,MAROFSET is set to 0,2,3.
For the default MAROFSET=1 where Marc handles the offsets and RBE2’s are not added, this parameter is
not applicable and will be reset to -1 internally. Applies only if MAROFSET=0.
0 Temperatures are applied both at the original grid point and at the offset grid point.
1 Temperatures are applied at the original grid point only.
2 Temperatures are applied at the offset grid point only.
-1 Temperature loading is not altered in any way from the Nastran input.
Note: 1. Processing time can increase significantly if beam or shell offsets are present and
param,marcoftt is zero or greater unless PARAM,MOFFCORE,1 is used.
2. If nodes are connected by RBE2’s and a temperature is applied at an independent node,
the temperature will be applied at the independent node and the first dependent node
of the rbe2 if MARCOFFT=0.
3. If MAROFSET is 0, 2 or 3 and a node has applied temperature and is also a part of a
standard RBE2 with many grids, the job may abort or the results can be wrong.
MARCONTF
Name Name of a file name limited to 8 characters (16 characters if param* is used) used in
conjunction with one of the CONTINUE options on the SOL 600 statement. If entered this
file will be used as the input file for the second Nastran execution (after Marc has finished).
If specified, this file will be used instead of automatically creating a file named jid.nast.dat
from the original jid.dat input. This option allows more versatility in achieving exactly what
is desired in the Nastran continuation run input at the expense of additional input data
preparation.
MARCOOCC
0 Standard Marc memory management will be used. If the memory is sufficient the
decomposition will be in core. If the memory requirements are too large, an out of core
solution will take place.
1 An out of core solution will be forced if solvers 0, 2, 4 or 8 are used. This option triggers
Marc parameter, OOC (without any other characters).
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 817
2 An out of core solution will be forced if solver 0, 2, 4 or 8 are used - available starting with
Marc 2005 r2. This option generates Marc parameter OOC,0,1.
3 Same as option2 except Marc parameter version,4902 will be added. This option triggers
Marc parameter OOC,0,1 plus version,4902.
MARCOPT
Determines which bandwidth optimizer is to be used.
0 Marc does not optimize the bandwidth.

2 Cuthill-McKee bandwidth optimization is used
5 External user-supplied bandwidth optimization is used
9 Sloan bandwidth optimization is used. (Default)
10 Minimum degree bandwidth optimization is used (only available with the sparse solver)
11 Metis nested dissection algorithm (only available with multifrontal direct sparse solver)
-9999 Set MARCOPT to -9999 if the OPTIMIZE entry is not wanted in the Marc file for
example with use by the iterative solver.
MARCOSET
Determines whether SOL 600 set names will be standard sets or “open sets” for nodes and elements. The
standard Marc sets are:
DEFINE, ELEMENT, SET, PR00001
DEFINE, NODE, SET, ND001
The Marc open sets (OSET) are:
DEFINE, ELEMENT, OSET, PR00001
DEFINE, NODE, OSET, ND001
-1 Standard sets are defined.

0 Standard sets are defined for small models and open sets are defined for large models.
1 Open sets are defined.
Note: For Parallel (DDM) analyses, it is sometimes necessary to set MARCOSET=1.
Main Index
MARCOTIM
Default = 0, (SOL 600 only and is mapped to Marc’s POST 2nd line 9th field.
Determines if Marc is to be processed at selective or at all output times.
0 or 1 Marc output data will be processed by Nastran at all converged output times. This option is
similar to INTOUT=YES on the NLPARM entry.
2 Marc output data will be processed by Marc only at times near 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, etc. For this
option, no additional output times will be available in the Marc .t16 and/or .t19 output files.
This option is similar to INTOUT=NO on the NLPARM entry.
N Marc output data will be processed by Marc every Nth increment for the .t16 and/or .t19
output files. (N > 2)
MARCOUTR
Default = 1 if Marc single file parallel input is used, Default = 0 if Marc multiple file inputs are used, see Note,
SOL 600 only.
Determines how Marc t16 file results will be handled for SOL 600 parallel processing.
0 Multiple t16 files, one for each domain will be produced.

1 A single t16 file will be produced by Marc. This option requires Marc 2005 or later versions and
the parallel run made using the “single file” input (PARAMARC KIND=0). (Default)
Note: Whether single file or multiple Marc inputs are used for parallel processing is determined by
the PARAMARC Bulk Data entry.
MARCPARR
Controls options for splitting an Marc file into parts for DDM.
0 All Marc files will be created during this run. (Default)
1 Nastran will be stopped after the single-processor file has been created and before DDM files are
created. If desired, all files may be copied to a backup directory for use with MARCPARR=2.
2 The parallel files will be created starting with the single processor file created using the
MARCPARR=1 option.
3 Same as MARCPARR=2 except the debug option MARCBUG=1 is turned on.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 819
MARCPENT
Option to specify if CPENTA is mapped to Marc brick element with degenerate nodes or actual penta
elements (see Remarks).
0 Map CPENTA to Marc brick elements with degenerate nodes. (Default)

1 Marc CPENTA to actual Marc penta elements.
Remarks:
1. Option zero is the default to maintain backwards compatibility.
2. The t16 to op2 version is not available for option 1. That means no op2, xdb, f06 or punch file is
available for option 1. Postprocessing must occur using the t16 or t19 file if option 1 is used.
3. Speed options such as invoked using param,mspeedse are available using option 1 only.
MARCPINN
0 Pin flags will be included by created new nodes and appropriate MPC’s by the translator in
Nastran. (Default)
1 Pin flags will be ignored and the translator will continue.
2 A severe warning will be issued and Marc will not run.
3 The new Marc PIN CODE option will be used. feature,6901 will also be used so that extra nodes
are not introduced.
Remark:
MARCPLAS, n
Default = 3 if there is plasticity in the model. SOL 600 only.
This parameter effects the value of Marc’s PLASTICITY parameter. The value of n can range from 0 to 6 (0
is the same as 3).
1 Additive decomposition using the mean normal method; small strain formulation
2 Additive decomposition using the radial return method; small strain formulation.
3 Additive decomposition using the mean normal method; large strain formulation using the
updated Lagrange procedure.
4 Additive decomposition using the radial return method; large strain formulation during the
5 Multiplicative decomposition (FeFp) using the radial return method and the three field
variational principle; large strain formulation using the updated Lagrange procedure.
Main Index
6 Advance nonlinear elements type 3 and 26 (plane stress), 18 and 30 (membrane) using
multiplicative decomposition with the radial return method; large strain formulation using the
-1 Ensures that the Marc PLASTICITY parameter will not be used.
MARCPOS
SOL 600 only.
Determines whether to terminate Marc if a non-positive definite matrix is attempted.
0 The run will terminate if a non-positive definite matrix decomposition is encountered.

1 Non-positive definite matrices will be solved.
MARCPOST
Default, SOL 600 only.
Determines the format for the .t16 and .t19 files.
-1 The .t16 and .t19 files will be created using the Marc default for the version of Marc that is
executed.
0 Same as MARCPOST=9.
1 The .t16 and .t19 files will be created using Marc K2 formats.
9 The .t16 and .t19 files will be created using Marc 2000 formats.
13 The .t16 and .t19 files will be created using Marc 2005 r3 formats.
Note: It is suggested that a small test case be executed and tested with your postprocessor to
determine what version is necessary for your postprocessor.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 821
MARCPR99
Default-see below. SOL 600 only.
Determines whether a set in the Marc input file to output all elemental quantities will be generated or not.
If MARCPR99=1, all Case Control element output requests must have the PLOT qualifier or the job may
fail.
-1 A set named PR999999 will be generated to output all elements for at least one type of element
output. This is the default if all elemental Case Control requests do not have (plot).
1 The set will not be generated. If all elemental Case Control requests have (plot) such as
STRESS(PLOT)=ALL, STRAIN(PLOT)=ALL, etc. The default is 1 even if the parameter is not
entered.
MARCPRN
SOL 600 only.
Controls the amount of contact information printed.
0 Detailed contact information is not printed.
1 Detailed contact information is printed (this is equivalent to Marc parameter PRINT,2,8).
2 Somewhat less detailed contact information is printed (this is equivalent to Marc parameter
PRINT,2). Print constraint matrices associated with MPC’s, RBAR, RBE2, RBE3 and the
formable to deformable contact.
5 Marc print option. PRINT,5 will be used. Prints messages when changes in contact status occur.
25 Marc print options. PRINT,2,5 will be used.
258 Marc print options. PRINT,2,5,8 will be used. In addition to 2 and 5, also prints the
displacement and reaction forces in the local coordinate system associated with formable to rigid
contact.
For other print options, use the MARCIN Bulk Data entry.
MARCPRNG
Determines whether geometry is printed in the Marc .out file.
0 Most geometry printing is suppressed.

1 All geometry is printed.
MARCPRNR
Determines whether nodal stress and strain output is printed in the Marc .out file.
Main Index
0 Nodal, stress and strain printing is suppressed.

1 Nodal, stress and strain printing will occur if Case Control options request it specifically or by
default.
MARCPROG
prg “prg” is the name of a program to be executed instead of Marc. The program may be any program
desired and must already be fully compiled on the computer system being run. prg is limited to
8 characters, however 16 characters can be used if PARAM* is entered. “prg” must be a compiled
program, not a script or batch file. The name of the program must be in lower case (if not, it will
be converted to lower case).
MARCRACC
SOL 600 does not normally support RACC on the RFORCE entry. The default is to fatal a job when RACC
is zero or blank. This parameter may be used to set it to zero or to obtain approximate results.
0 If MARCRACC is zero and RACC is nonzero, the job will terminate with an appropriate
message (Default).
1 If MARCRACC is one and RACC is nonzero, RACC will be set to zero internally and the job
will continue.
2 If MARCRACC is two and RACC is nonzero, the following will occur:
for brake squeal, coriolis loading and values (C1, C2, C3) will be placed in Marc ROTATION
A 3rd datablock fields 4-6 as follows:
RR=SQRT(R1**2+R2**2+R3**2)
C1=RACC*R1/RR
C2=RACC*R3/RR
C3=RACC*R3/RR
Where RACC, R1, R2, R3 are described on the RFORCE entry.
For standard structural analysis if MARCRACC=2, the value of A in RFORCE field 5 will be altered using
the following equation:
Anew=sqrt(A**2+RACC)
Marc’s ROTATION A entry will be the same as if RACC=0.0 was entered unless A is zero, in which case the
third line will have all zero entries. Results should be considered as an approximation.
Remarks:
1. See PARAM,MARCRCID for related SOL 600 RFORCE uses.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 823
2. MARCRACC=2 only applies for brake squeal and only if the BRKSQL entry is used for releases prior
to MD Nastran R2.1 and MSC Nastran 2007.
MARCRBAL
This parameter is used only for eigenvalue analysis in the Nastran-Marc interface where natural frequencies
or buckling modes need to be calculated using the deformed geometry from a nonlinear analysis. The
parameter is only necessary if the last nonlinear increment created a non-positive definite matrix. When
MARCRBAL=1 is set, the system will be rebalanced and a positive-definite matrix is assured. Do not use this
parameter unless it is known that a non-positive definite system occurs just prior to eigenvalue analysis.
MARCRBAR
Determines how RBAR is treated.
0 RBARs will be simulated using Marc’s Servo Link. This option is best only for small
incremental deformation and rotations. (Default)
1 RBARs will be converted to RBE2 with GN=GA, CM=123456, GM1=GB. The
MARCRBE2 option specified will then be used to translate the converted RBARs to Marc.
MARCRBE2
ID Determines the type of RBE2 used. The default should be used (parameter not entered) with
models comprised of solid elements or a mixture of solid elements and other types of
elements.
0 RBE2s will be simulated using Marc’s Servo Link. This option is best only for small
incremental deformations and rotations.
1 RBE2s will be simulated using Marc’s TYING type 80 for translation and Servo Link for
rotations. This option is capable of larger incremental deformations but requires small
rotational increments. The MARCRBE2=1 option is only available if all 6 DOF’s are
specified in the CM field (4) of the RBE2 entry.
2 RBE2s will be simulated using the new RBE2 element introduced into Marc Version 2003
for a 2D analysis.
3 RBE2s will be simulated using the new RBE2 element introduced into Marc Version 2003
for a 3D analysis.
Main Index
Note: If RBAR, RROD or RTRPLT elements are found in the model and if MARCRBE2=2 or 3,
these elements will be converted to equivalent RBE2’s and used with the new Marc RBE2
element during the Marc execution (thus providing higher accuracy for large deformations
and/or rotations).
The default should be used (parameter not entered) with models comprised of solid elements
or a mixture of solid elements and other types of elements.
MARCRBE3
Default = 3 SOL 600 only.
Determines the type of RBE3 used.
0 RBE3s will be simulated using Marc’s Servo Link. This option is best only for small
incremental deformations and rotations (see option 4 for a similar alternative).
2 RBE3s will be simulated using the new Marc RBE3 element introduced into Marc Version
2003 for a 2D analysis.
3 RBE3s will be simulated using the new Marc RBE3 element introduced into Marc Version
2003 for a 3D analysis. (Default)
4 Same as MARCRBE3=0 except that all MPC’s due to RBE3 will be placed ahead of all other
MPC’s. This option might improve the Marc solution for versions where Marc has not
implemented AUTOMSET logic (those versions prior to MSC Nastran 2005 r3).
MARCREVR
Default = 0
Specifies that all rigid surfaces need to be modified.
0 Rigid contact surfaces are correct as entered and no changes are made by the translator. (Default)
1 All rigid surfaces are entered backwards and will be reversed.
MARCREVRX
SOL 600 only.
Determines whether coordinates for NURBS2D (BCBODY) will be reversed or not if CQUADX, CTRIAX,
and/or CTRIAX6 elements exist.
0 Reverse the coordinates (Y becomes X, X becomes Y).

1 In addition to reversing the coordinates (option 0) all points are also reversed. For example, if
there are 4 points (1,2,3,4) they are reversed to (4,3,2,1). (Default)
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 825
-1 Do not reverse the coordinates.

-2 Reverse the coordinates for CQUADX and CTRIAX abut not for CTRIAX6.
MARCRIGD
The parameter should only be entered if PARAM,MARMPCHK and/or PARAM,AUTOMSET options fail
during a Marc execution.
0 All RBEi will not be converted to stiff beams or plates. (Default)

1 All RBEi will be converted to stiff beams or plates for the Marc input file using a stiffness scale
factor from parameter MARCRSCL. This parameter allows such elements to have large
rotations for versions of Marc which do not include large rotations of rigid elements.
Remarks:
1. This option may not be used if RBAR, RROD or RTRPLT elements are in the model. See
PARAM,MSTFBEAM for an alternative.
2. See PARAM,MARCSCLR to specify a scale factor for the “default” properties of these stiff beams.
MARCSAME
Determines whether SOL 600 runs with multiple subcase having the same LOAD ID or loads (see note
below) in more than one subcase will be processed or not. SOL 600 will usually run under such circumstances
but may get the wrong results.
Important: Do not use this parameter if the loading contains enforced displacements or the results may
be incorrect.
0 The job will be aborted before Marc is spawned with a “Severe Warning” message. (Default)
1 The job will run to completion (if there are no other errors) and a standard Warning message
will be issued.
It is recommended that if the same loads are to be used in multiple subcases that each subcase have a different
LOAD ID. A typical file setup for SOL 600 should be setup in the following manner:
SOL 600,NLSTATIC PATH=1 STOP=1
CEND
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
SPC=123
TEMP(INIT)=33
PARAM,MARCSAME,1
SUBCASE 1
LOAD=100
Main Index
SUBCASE 2
LOAD=200
TEMP(LOAD)=300
BEGIN BULK
LOAD, 100, 1., 1.0, 1000, 1.0, 2000
LOAD, 200, 1., 1.0, 1000, 1.0, 2000
PLOAD4, 1000, 10, 20.0
PLOAD4, 2000, 20, 25.0
(Other Bulk Data entries)
ENDDATA
Note: In the above example if the Bulk Data LOAD entries are changed to:
LOAD,100,1.,1.0,1000,1.0,2000
LOAD, 200,0.9,1.0,1000,1.0,2000
The loads are the same before the overall scale factor (1.0 and 0.9, respectively) are applied and
PARAM,MARCSAME,1 is needed. However if the entries were as follows, it is not needed
because the loads before the overall scale factor is applied are different.
LOAD,100,1.,1.0,1000,1.0,2000
LOAD,200,1.0,0.9,1000,1.0,2000
MARCSCLR
SOL 600 only.
Sets property values for stiff beams when PARAM,MARCRIGD or PARAM,MSTFBEAM are used in SOL
600.
The value of this parameter scales the “default” properties of stiff beams or plates if parameter
MARCRIGD=1. The “default” (unscaled) values for the stiff beams are A = 10, I = 100 (both directions) J
= 200, shear area = 5 and plate thickness of 1.5. Linear scaling is used for all areas and thickness, all inertia
terms are multiplied by the square of the Value entered.
MARCSETS
Integer, Default = 0, SOL 600 only.
Controls the type of sets used for the Marc input file element and node sets.
0 Sets will have the format DEFINE, ELEMENT, ... or DEFINE, NODE, ...
1 Sets will have the format DEFINE, ELSQ, ... or DEFINE, NDSQ, ...
Remarks:
1. PARAM,MARCSETS,1 can speed up certain large Marc jobs by a considerable amount.
2. The parameter may be set in RC files.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 827
MARCSETT
0 The current environment is not printed. (Default)
1 The current environment is printed in the .f06 file. A user program named eodenv.f must be
compiled, linked and placed in the input file directory. The contents of eodevn.f resembles
the following:
Program eodenv
call system(“set”)
stop
end
MARCSINC
This parameter controls how often a spline file is written if the spline option (analytical contact for
deformable bodies) is requested. If this parameter is not entered or if it is 0 or -1, then a file is not written. If
N is greater or equal to 1, then every nth time step is written. Spline files have the extension *.mfd which may
be processed by MSC Mentat.
MARCSIZ3, Value
Value If entered, the integer value entered here is the third value on Marc’s SIZING entry
representing the maximum number of elements.
MARCSIZ4, Value
Value If entered, the integer value entered here is the fourth value on Marc’s SIZING entry
representing the maximum number of grid points.
MARCSIZ5, Value
Value If entered, the integer value entered here is the fifth value on Marc’s SIZING entry
representing the maximum number of constrained degrees-of-freedom.
Main Index
MARCSIZ6, Value
Value If entered, the integer value entered here is the sixth value on Marc’s SIZING entry
representing the maximum number of elements in the largest list of distributed loads (the
internal Marc to Nastran translator generates these one at a time, so this value is normally 1).
MARCSLHT
Number of layers through the shell thickness used to integrate shell and beam elements. For linear behavior,
N=1 is sufficient. For most plasticity problems, N=5 is adequate. For extremely nonlinear plasticity problems
N=11 should be used. SOL 600 requires that N be 5 or larger. If N is entered with a positive value less than
5, SOL 600 will set it to 5. To use values smaller than 5, enter N as a negative number. The absolute value
will be used, however the job may fail or results may be incorrect if the model has plasticity.
Note: Use of PARAM,MARCDEF can effect the value of Marc’s SHELL SECT parameter if
PARAM,MARCSLHT is not entered. To eliminate SHELL SECT from the Marc file set N to
-9999.
MARCSOLV
Determines the solver to use for Marc.
0 The profile solver will be used (solver 8 should normally be used instead)
2 The Sparse Iterative Solver will be used.
4 The Direct Sparse Solver will be used.
6 A hardware-provided solver will be used.
8 A sparse solver similar to the one used by Nastran will be used (Default)
9 The CASI element based iterative solver will be used.
10 The mixed direct/iterative solver will be used.
11 Pardiso direct solver (see param,mrthread)
12 MUMPS parallel direct solver (see param,mrthread)
Note: If any NLSTRAT entries are entered, the solver type must be specified using the IOLSVER
option of NLSTRAT rather than this parameter.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 829
MARCSPCC
Default = 0 if no SPCD’s are entered or 2 if there are SPCD’s in the input.
Determines how SOL 600 will proceed if non-zero value enforced displacements are found in SPC entries
for multiple subcase models.
0 A fatal error will be issued and the user will be requested to change all non-zero value enforced
displacements to SPCD’s.
1 The job will continue without any changes (wrong results could be produced).
2 All displacements on SPC entries will be set to blank and the job will continue (will usually
produce the correct results if SPCD’s with the correct values are specified).
Remark:
Non-zero enforced displacements should always be specified using SPCD (not SPC) for SOL 600. It is not
necessary to specify SPC’s for degrees of freedom where SPCD’s are applied for SOL 600, but it will not do
not harm unless non-zero enforced displacements are specified on the SPC entries (either in addition to being
specified on SPCD’s or without having any SPCD’s). If there is only one subcases, the non-zero enforced
displacements may be specified on SPCD’s and/or SPC’s, however for multiple subcases wrong results can
result even if the displacements specified on the SPC’s and SPCD’s are the same. The results will be even
further off if the displacements are different. The remedy is to ensure that the SPCD’s reflect the correct
applied displacements, and then either remove the applied displacements from all SPC’s or to set
MARCSPCC=2.
MARCSTIFF, Time
Time This parameter specifies what time matrices entered using PARAM,MARCFILi will be used
in a Nastran solution. The file may contain matrices at several times, but only the matrices
specified by the parameter will be used. This parameter is not usually used,
MRMTXNAM,NAME is used instead.
MARCSTOP
SOL 600 only.
0 Normal Marc execution when spawned from Nastran.

1 Marc will exit (with exit code 7) after phase 0 (corresponds to Marc parameter stop).
MARCSUMY
Determines if the summary of maximum values is to be printed.
Main Index
0 A summary of maximum displacements, stresses and strains will be printed in the Marc
output file. (Default)
-1 The summary of maximum values is not output.
MARCT16
Controls generation of a Marc t16 file. MARCT16=0, Marc does not generate a .t16 output file.
-1 or 0 Does not generate a t16 file.
Parameter omitted generates a t16 file. All entries are controlled by the MARCOUT Bulk
Data entry, or if MARCOUT is not specified, by the default shown in option 2 below.
1 Generates a .t16 output file with the following post codes:
11 11,1 11,N 12 12,1 12,N 13 13,1 13,N 14 14,1 14,N
15, 15,1 15,N 16 16,1 16,N 17 17,1 17,N 18 18,1 18,N
7 7,1 7,N 27 27,1 27,N 301 301,1 301,N 321 321,1 321,N
341 341,1 341,N 401 401,1 401,N
Nodal: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 46, 48, 51, 52
2 Generates a .t16 output file with the following post codes. (Default)
301, 301,1 301,N 341 341,1 341,N 47
Nodal: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 46, 48
3 Generates a .t16 output file with the following post codes (op2, xdb, f06, punch results
cannot be made using this option):
301, 341 47
Nodal: 1, 2, 5, 6, 34, 35, 36, ,37, 38, 39
4 Generates a .t16 output file with the following post codes (op2, xdb, f06, punch results
cannot be made using this option):
301 341 47
Nodal: 1
Remarks:
1. This entry is used as an easy way to control which results are placed on Marc’s op2 file. All entries can
be overridden using the MARCOUT Bulk Data entry. For MARCOUT values of 1 and larger,
MARCOUT should be omitted for the input file. MARCOUT should not be used if
PARAM,MARCT16 is entered.
2. The frequency of output is controlled by the NLPARM or Bulk Data entries (variables INTOUT
and NO respectively).
3. Items such as 341,1 and 341,N designate stresses at the bottom and top surfaces (for applicable
elements). Items such as 341 designate stress at mid-thickness.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 831
4. When stress 341 is specified for models with composite elements, the value will be changed to 391 to
obtain stresses in the fiber (layer) direction.
5. Consult Marc Volume C documentation for the meaning of the above blocks. Option 1 provides
most of the structural output anyone might want, option 2 provides total strain, Cauchy stress,
displacement and contact information at the top, center and bottom of surfaces. Option 3 provides
the information of option 2 but only at the center (not at the top and bottom).
6. It is necessary to generate a t16 file in order to produce op2, xdb, f06 or punch results.
7. Op2, xdb, punch and f06 results can only be created using option 1 and 2 although option 0 can also
be used if the selected outputs are the same as option 1 or 2.
8. If a Bulk Data VCCT entry is included in the model, nodal post codes 57-64 and 74 will be added
to any of the previous defaults if MARCOUT is not entered in the model.
MARCT19
0 Marc does not generate a .t19 output file. (Default)
1 Generates a .t19 output file.
MARCTABL
Determines if contact table is to be generated.
0 Contact tables will be generated for the main Marc input (phase 0) and for each subcase if
specified by the user (Default). When MARCTABL=0, each subcase may have a BCONTACT
Case Control command and a matching BCTABLE ID entry. In addition, Marc’s “Phase 0”
entry is supported by entering a BCTABLE with an ID of zero (or 1,000,000). Each separate
BCTABLE will reference the BCBODY entries defined which, in turn, reference BSURF
entries. (Default)
1 No contact tables will be generated and all contact bodies (if any) will be placed in the main
input data section. Contact will thus be the same for all subcases. When MARCTABL=1, there
must only be one BCTABLE entry in the file. There must only be one BCONTACT command
in the Case Control and it must be above all subcases. The BCONTACT and BCTABLE entry
must have the same ID. The BCTABLE entry can reference several BCBODY entries which,
in turn, reference BSURF entries.
MARCTEDF
Character*8, no Default, SOL 600 only.
Enter the Marc nthcnt file name without extension. Use this option only if PARAM,MARCTEDN,1 is
entered (the file name without extension is limited to 8 characters). The characters “.nthcnt” will
automatically be appended to the name specified.
Main Index
MARCTEDN
Determines whether a thermal contact analysis will use the Marc jid.nthcnt file generated by this run or use
one input by the user.
0 Analysis uses the Marc jid.marc.nthcnt file generated in this run. (Default)
1 Analysis uses a Marc nthcnt file generated by the user or in a previous run.
Note: If MARCTEDN=1, PARAM,MARCTEDF below must be entered to specify the file name.
MARCTEMP
0 The scratch files produced by Marc will be in the same directory as the Nastran input file.
1 The scratch files produced by Marc will be in the same directory as the Nastran scratch files.
(Default)
Note: The Marc scratch files cannot be split.
MARCTETT
Determines how CTETRA elements will be mapped to marc.
0 4-node or 10-node Nastran CTETRA elements will be mapped to the Marc tet-4 or tet-10
elements.
11 4-node or 10-node Nastran CTETRA elements will be mapped to Marc solid element type 7.
for tet-10 elements, the mid-side nodes are neglected. the 4 CTETRA nodes (N1,N2,N3,N4)
are mapped to the 8 solid shell nodes as follows N1,N2,N3,N4,N4,N4,N4.
12 Same as MARCTETT=11 except debug is turned on (for the tetra conversion only)
Remark:
MARTETT should not be greater than zero for heat transfer or Herrmann elements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 833
MARCTIEC
1 Transient Time Integration Error Check for Marc’s AUTO STEP method. A value of 1 turns
the check on. (Default)
0 A value of 0 turns the check off. Turn the check off to match Marc results for version prior to
Marc 2003 r1.
MARCTOL
Determines the method of convergence tolerance.
If parameter MARCTOL=0, convergence tolerances are based on residuals (loads). If parameters MARCTOL
and MARCTVL are not entered, the tolerances are determined by and/or NLPARM Bulk Data entries.
However, parameters MARCTOL and MARCTVL provide extra control over these convergence tolerances
particularly in the case where or NLPARM specify more than one convergence type (such as load and
energy).
1 Convergence tolerances are based on displacement.

2 Convergence tolerances are based on strain energy.
4 Convergence is achieved when either residual or displacement satisfies the criteria.
5 Convergence is achieved when both residual and displacement satisfies the criteria.
MARCTOTD
Determines whether for SOL 600 dynamic analyses will use full table association.
0 Full table vs time association is not used. (Default)

1 Full table vs time association will be used
Remarks:
1. param,marctott,1 must also be set if MARCTOTD=1
MARCTOTL
Determines whether total or incremental loads are used in a SOL 600 static nonlinear analysis.
0 Incremental loads are used. (Default)

1 Total loads are used
Main Index
Remarks:
1. Warning - If MARCTOTL=1, MRFOLOW3=1 will be set if possible (see PARAM,MRFOLOW3)
MARCTOTT
Determines whether total loads, including pressures, gravity, spcd, etc., with associated tables are used in a
SOL 600 static or dynamic analysis (Remark 3.)
.
0 Total loads with tables are not used. (Default)

1 Total loads with tables are used
Remarks:
1. Warning - If MARCTOTT=1, MRFOLOW3=1 will be set if possible (see PARAM,MRFOLOW3)
3. For full table association, dynamic analyses require PARAM,MARCTOTD,1 to also be set.
MARCTUBE
Determines whether CTUBE maps to Marc element 31 or 98 (Default = 0 if this parameter is omitted).
0 CTUBE elements map to Marc tube element 31 (see Remark) (Default)

1 CTUBE elements map to Marc element 98 (elastic beam)
Remarks:
Marc element 31 does not support thermal loading or creep. If the model contains thermal Loading or creep
(even if not applicable to the CTUBE elements, option 1 is always used.
MARCTVL, Value
SOL 600 only.
Value If parameter MARCTVL is entered, it must have a real value. The value entered is the
convergence tolerance used by Marc (see PARAM,MARCTOL). If parameters MARCTOL and
MARCTVL are not entered, the tolerances are determined by and/or NLPARM Bulk Data
entries. However, parameters MARCTOL and MARCTVL provide extra control over these
convergence tolerances particularly in the case where or NLPARM specify more than one
convergence type (such as load and energy).
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 835
MARCUSUB, chr
chr chr is the name of a “user subroutine” to be included in the Marc run. chr is limited to 8
characters without the .f extension. This file must be located in the same directory as the
Nastran input data. The subroutine name must have all lowercase letters. chr should be in
lower case to prevent confusion. (Nastran will convert the file name to uppercase, but it will
be reconverted to lower case when Marc is spawned.) Any user subroutine available to Marc
may be specified. Multiple user subroutines must be combined into one file.
Restriction: The computer must have a Fortran compiler and Linker and the Fortran compiler must be the
same as used to create the original Marc executable (see the Marc installation manual). The Marc input file
does not as yet call out user subroutines, so manual editing of the Marc input file may be necessary in some
cases to invoke them. Existing regular Marc subroutines can be modified and handled in the same manner if
available to you.
Note: If more than one user subroutine is required, all should be combined into one file before
execution.
MARCVERS
SOL 600 only.
This parameter has been replaced by the following parameters:
param,mrconver
param,mrcontab
param,mrsprver
MARCWDIS
Determines whether Marc parameter section DIST LOADS Is written or not. If any of the three values for
DIST LOADS are entered (see PARAM,MARCDIS2 PARAM,MARCDIS3 PARAM,MARCDIS4) it will
be written. If PARAM,MARCWDIS,1 is entered, it will be written. If PARAM,MARCWDIS,-1 is entered,
it will not be written.
Caution: Nastran cannot estimate these values very well and produces overly conservative numbers that
sometimes leads to failure of the Marc run due to lack of memory. We suggest that the user
should use this parameter sparingly and enter the MARCDIS2, MARCDIS3 and MARCDIS4
values for best Marc memory usage.
Main Index
MARCWELD
Default = 0 if this parameter is omitted, SOL 600 only.
Determines how CWELD/PWELD elements will be translated to Marc.
0 Add extra nodes and elements to simulate the weld.

1 Use Marc CWELD/PWELD formulation (available starting with MD Nastran R2 and MSC
Nastran 2007).
This parameter may be set in RC files.

MARELSTO
Determines whether Marc’s parameter ELSTO will be created.
-1 ELSTO will not be created.

0 ELSTO will be created only for large models as determined by Nastran. The value of ELSTO
will be 40960 except for parallel runs (where a PARAMARC entry exists in the input file) in
which case ELSTO will not be created. (Default)
>0 ELSTO will be created with the value specified used as the Marc ELSTO parameter whether or
not the run uses parallel processing.
MARGPFEL
Used to determine if Marc GRID FORCE output will occur by element, by node, or both ways.
-1 Output is by element only.

0 Output is by node only. (Default)
1 Output is by both element and node.
Notes: 1. This parameter effects the contents of the Marc jid.marc.grd file. Option 0 or 1 is
required for GPFORCE output in op2, xdb, punch, and/or f06 files.
2. This parameter can be set in RC files.
MARGPFOR
Used to determine whether GPFORCE is active for SOL 600. A Case Control request GPFORCE must be
specified to obtain grid point forces (see note 4). The grid point forces are output from Marc on a file named
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 837
jid.marc.grd. The t16op2 program reads this file, puts the data on the f11 file along with displacements,
stresses, etc. After t16op2 finishes, the f11 file is brought into DBALL, from which DMAP generated on the
fly can produce op2, xdb, punch, or f06 output.
-1 GPFORCE is ignored (Default).

0 GPFORCE is output for the last time in the last subcase only.
1 GPFORCE is output at all times given in the .sts file.
N GPFORCE is output for times 1, 1+N, 1+2N, etc.
Notes: 1. This parameter can be set in RC files.

2. Output is available only in the new Marc jid.marc.gid file.
3. The Case Control GPFORCE request must be above all subcases, or the same within
all subcases.
4. The jid.marc.grd file can become very large if option 0 or N is not used.
MARFACEA
Face number for “A” side of weld if welds are made of solid elements. Not used if welds involve plates or shells.
MARFACEB
Face number for “B” side of weld if welds are made of solid elements. Not used if welds involve plates or shells.
MARFATAL
Determines whether non-existent grid id’s for BCBODY entries will cause fatal errors or not.
0 Non-existent grid ID in BCBODY entries will only cause warning messages. The grid ID will
be reset to zero and the job will continue. The results should be checked carefully. In some
cases this could results in an entire contact body being skipped.
1 Non-existent grid ID in BCBODY entries will cause FATAL ERRORS. (Default)
MARHEATM
Determines whether a file named heatm.rc is necessary to run the second phase of SOL 600 heat transfer
initial contact job.
Main Index
0 heatm.rc is not required. Defaults will be used. The defaults are scr=yes batch=no
mem=80mw
1 A heatm.rc file will be supplied by the user in the same directory as the original Nastran input
file. The heatm.rc can contain any information used by other rc files except that batch=no. If the
original Nastran input file is named jid.dat (or jid.bdf ) and out=jid is specified, the final output
will be in files such as jid.f06, jid.op2, jid.xdb. If out=jid is not specified the final output will be
in files such as jid.nast.f06, jid.nast.op2, jid.nast.xdb.
MARHTPRT
SOL 600 only.
Controls heat transfer output in the Marc .out file.
0 Do not print any output except for summary table.

1 Print the nodal temperatures.
2 Print all possible nodal heat transfer output.
MARIBOOC
0 Incremental backup data will be stored in memory. (Default)
1 For large problems, incremental backup data will be stored on disk. This option triggers
Marc’s parameter IBOOC.
MARIPROJ
Flag to determine if auxiliary nodes of a CWELD will be projected on the model or not. (If this parameter is
not entered)
0 Nodes are not projected on to the model.

1 Nodes are projected on to the model.
MARLDCMB
Determines whether extraneous loads in the input file will be filtered out at an early stage to save computer
time. This applies only to SOL 600,ID where ID=1, 3, 6, 101, 105, 106.
-1 Extra loads will not be filtered out.

2 Extra Bulk Data LOAD entries will be filtered out early in SOL 600 to save computer time.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 839
Note: If PARAM,MARLDRMV,-1 is not entered, extra FORCE, MOMENT and PLOAD4 entries
not used in the present analysis will also be filtered out early in SOL 600. Computer time
saving can be appreciable for certain models with many extra loads.
MARLDRMV
Determines whether extraneous FORCE, MOMENT, and/or PLOAD4 entries in the input file will be
filtered out at an early stage to save computer time. This applies only to SOL 600,ID where ID=1, 3, 6, 101,
103, 105, 106.
-1 Extra loads will not be filtered out.

1 Extra Bulk Data FORCE, MOMENT, and/or PLOAD4 entries will be filtered out early in SOL
600 to save computer time. (Default)
Note: This option will be ignored (same as PARAM,MARLDRMV,-1) if PARAM,MARLDCMB,-

1 is entered.
MARMPCHK
Determines whether Marc parameter MPC-CHECK is written.
-1 MPC-CHECK is not written. (Default)

1 Apply the MPCs in the default order:
1. MPCs obtained from SERVO LINK option.
2. MPCs obtained from INSET option.
3. MPCs obtained from TYING, RBE2, or RBE3 options (the actual order follows from the
order of these options in the model definition block of the data file.)
4. MPCs obtained from CYCLIC SYMMETRY option.
5. MPCs obtained from CONTACT option.
Print a warning message if a tied degree of freedom is being used by a subsequent MPC.
2 Same as 1, but instead of warning, a fatal error message is printed and the analysis will stop with
exit 2001.
Main Index
3 Try to rearrange the MPCs in such a way that a tied degree of freedom will not be used in a
subsequent MPC. If this reordering cannot successfully be completed, print a fatal error message
and stop the analysis with exit 2011.
-999 Skip MPC-CHECK entirely, prevent Marc’s error message “Exceed the max trial to order
RBE2/3”. This option should be used in conjunction with PARAM,AUTOMSET,YES only.
(Marc feature,3901 is set)
Note: This parameter can be set in RC files.
MARMPCID
Integer, Default = 1, SOL 600 only
Determines the ID of the MPC Case Control command for SOL 600 jobs using a CONTINUE=101 to
CONTINUE=159 (see SOL 600 Executive Control statement, CONTINUE option).
0 or 1 A line MPC=1 will be inserted in the Case Control (remark)
N A line MPC=N will be inserted in the Case Control (N must be between 2 and 9999)
Remark:
When models with contact and if BCPARA,INITCON,4 is specified, MPC’s for each increment will be
produced and placed in files named jid.marc.conmpc_xxxx where xxxx ranges from 0001 to the number of
increments in the solution. The ID of these MPC’s is usually equal to one. If for some reason it is not one,
the actual value may be specified by this parameter.
MARMTLCK
Determines whether a check of various property-material combinations for SOL 600 will be made or not.
0 The checks will not be made. (Default)

1 Check will be made. These take extra computer processing time and for most models are not
required. The user should turn on these check if he is in doubt if any property-type of material
combinations entered into the model may be in error. Current check made are for the following
illegal combination.
PSOLID/MATHE (model should be PLSOLID/MATHE)
PSOLID/MATHP (model should be PLSOLID/MATHP)
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 841
MARNOCID
SOL 600 does not support MCID defined by cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems. This parameter
determines whether MCID defined by cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems will be ignored or “fataled
out” for shell and solid elements.
0 The run will be “fataled out” if MCID defined by cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems are
found for shell or solid elements. (Default)
1 MCID defined by cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems for shell or solid elements will be
ignored.
MARNOSET, Name
Name Character. If entered, this parameter will not write out a set with the specified name. This is
useful, when portion of the model specify sets that are not actually used in the present
analysis. Up to 20 of these can be specified.
MAROFSET
Determines how beam and shell offsets are applied.
0 Extra grids and rigid elements will be created to model the offsets.
1 Marc will automatically handle offsets for beam and shell elements. No extra grids or elements
will be created. The offsets will be found in Marc’s GEOMETRY data. (Default)
2 Marc will automatically handle offsets for beam elements only.
3 Marc will automatically handle offsets for shell elements only.
Note: If MAROFSET is 1 or 2, the beam orientation can be specified using the CBAR/CBEAM
“BIT” flag. It is suggested that only combinations, GGG or BGG be used.
MARPLANE
For composite structures described using PCOMP, together with CQUAD4, CQUADR, etc., it is not
possible to tell whether a standard 3D shell or a plane strain shell has been modeled. If MARPLANE is set
to 1, such composite models will be assumed to be plane strain (as if a PLPLANE property had been entered
rather than PCOMP).
Main Index
MARPROCS
Determines the number of domains to be used in a DDM parallel execution.
.
1 Use 1 processor.
2 Use 2 processors.
N Use N processors.
Remarks:
1. This parameter is not intended to be used by parallel jobs using several different machines.
2. This parameter and PARAMARC may not both be entered in the same run.
3. This parameter and PARAM,MRTHREAD may both be used in the same job.
4. The parameter may be used with most of the solver types except for the MUMPS solver (type 12).
MARRBAR2
If MARCRBAR is set to 1, all CMA fields will be changed to 123456.
0 CMA field will remain as coded by user, Marc run may fail.
1 CMA field will be set to 123456. (Default)
MARROUTT
Determines whether an inconsistent set of outputs between the Marc t16 file (selected using MARCOUT)
and standard Nastran output selected using Case Control requests (and param,post) is allowed or not.
.
-1 Inconsistent output is not allowed, if the outputs are inconsistent, the job will fatal early
before spawning Marc. (Default)
1 Inconsistent output is allowed. However, if the output requests are inconsistent, the job may
fail during the t16op2 conversion after Marc has finished.
Remark:
Nastran outputs in the op2, xdb, punch or f06 files are obtained by converting the Marc output from the t16
file. If output is not available in the t16 file, or if it is in the wrong form, errors will occur during the t16op2
conversion. For most problems, if op2, xdb, f06 and/or punch output is required, it is best not to enter
MARCOUT. In most cases MARCOUT should only be used if post-processing using the Marc t16 file is to
be done.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 843
MARSHRII
Integer > 0, Default = 0, SOL 600 only.
Controls how the properties of bars added to the edges of CSHEAR elements when f1 or f2 of PSHEAR is
nonzero.
.
0 CBAR elements at the edges of CSHEAR elements (if any) will only have area (I1, I2, J are
all 0.0). See PSHEAR Remark 2 as to how the area of these bars is calculated.
>0 The value specified will be used to calculate I1, I2 and J from the area as
I1=I2=A/MARSHRII. J = 2.0 * I1
Remark:
This parameter must be entered in the Case Control above any subcases.
MARTET10
Controls how to treat badly shaped 10-node tetra elements in SOL 600 if renumbering the element does not
correct problems.
-1 Stop the analysis if all possible re-numbering options doe not correct the bad element. See
Remark 4.
0 Continue the analysis with the best re-numbering option and let Marc possibly fail with inside
out messages.
1 If all possible re-numbering options fail, change the bad tet 10 element to tet 4. See Remarks
1 and 5.
2 If all possible renumbering options fail, deactivate the bad tet 10 element. (See Remarks 2., 3.,
and 5.)
3 Change the coordinates of bad tet 10 midside nodes to line at the midpoints of the vertices.
(See Remark 6.)
Remarks:
1. Changing bad tet 10 elements to tet 4 may ignore continuity on the edges of adjacent tet 10 elements
unless they also get changed to tet 4 elements. If many tet 10 elements are changed to tet 4 elements,
the accuracy of the stresses could be inaccurate. In addition, if the elements are used in contact, the
same contact body can’t have mixed elements with midside and without midside nodes.
2. Deactivating bad tet 10 elements creates holes in the model. If only a few bad elements are deactivated
in a fine-grid model, the overall behavior will usually be nearly the same as if the elements were good
and remained in the model, however the stresses near the deactivated elements may be too large. If
many bad elements are deactivated, all analysis results will probably be inaccurate.
3. Setting PARAM,MARTET10,2 will deactivate all types of elements for which Marc gets inside out
elements (not just tet 10 elements). This option maps to Marc’s 10-DEACT parameter.
Main Index
4. This parameter is available starting with MD Nastran 2010. Prior to this release, only option 0 was
available.
5. Use options 1 or 2 with extreme care and only when all other alternatives including remeshing using
the gui have been exhausted.
6. If martet10=3, any midside nodes whose coordinates are changed and lie on the boundary of the
structure will redefine the exterior of the structure by a small amount. Also, if the element is used in
contact and the stress-free option is invoked, the coordinates may be changed again and the elements
may become badly shaped again.
MARTETIN
Controls whether additional information messages are output to the .f06 file or not when param,martet10 is
set to a positive value.
0 Do not output additional tet10 information messages.

1 Output additional tot10 information messages regarding checking of all tet10 elements. (The
.f06 file could be very large using this option.)
MARUPDAT
If this parameter is omitted, the Updated Lagrange method will be used if plasticity is involved. Ensure that
all elements in the analysis are capable of using the Updated Lagrange method. If not, enter
PARAM,MARUPDAT,-1. The Updated Lagrange Method is more accurate for many problems and also runs
faster for some problems.
-1 The Total Lagrange solution procedure will be used when Marc is executed from Nastran.
1 The Updated Lagrange solution procedure will be used when Marc is executed from Nastran.
This corresponds to Marc parameter update. (Default)
2 The updated Lagrange solution with large rotations for beam elements. This corresponds to
Marc parameter (see Marc VOL C documentation for details): update,0,2
3 The following Marc parameter will be set, in which LARGE DISP need not be specified
elsewhere (see Marc VOL C documentation for details): update,0,2,1
4 The following Marc VOL C parameter will be set, in which case LARGE DISP need not be
specified elsewhere. (see Marc documentation for details): update,0,,1
5 The following Marc parameter will be set (see Marc VOL C documentation for details):
update,0,1
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 845
MARVFCUT
Controls the fraction of the maximum view factor that is to be used as a cutoff. View factors calculated below
this cutoff are ignored. (Used in SOL 600 radiation heat transfer only.)
MAUTOSPC
Determines whether Marc AUTOSPC will be added.
-1 Do not add AUTOSPC. (Default)

1 Add AUTOSPC to Marc’s parameter’s section. It will remain throughout the run.
2000 Turn on AUTOSPC by adding the integer 1 to Marc’s model definition SOLVER option
2001 Turn on AUTOSPC by adding the integer 1 to Marc’s SOLVER option in subcase 1
...
3000 Turn off AUTOSPC by adding the integer 1 to Marc’s model definition SOLVER option.
3001 Turn off AUTOSPC by adding the integer 1 to Marc’s SOLVER option in subcase 1.
...
MAXAPL
Default = 1000
MAXAPL specifies the maximum number of applied loads to be used as a basis for residual vector
calculations. If the number of applied loads exceeds MAXAPL, User Warning Message 9166 is issued, and
residual vector augmentation is disabled. Note that the computing requirements for a large number of
residual vectors can be prohibitive. See also, the RESVEC Case Control command.
MAXDAMP
Default = 1000
See BEIGRED.
Main Index
MAXIREVV
Determines whether to reverse axisymmetric coordinates (x y y x) and reorder nodes in the elements or
not.
-1 Do not reverse coordinates and renumber elements
1 Reverse coordinates and renumber grid ID’s for each element. (Default)
Remark:
Experience has demonstrated that certain models require the -1 option and others require the +1 option. The
majority require the +1 option. If one of the options produces inside out messages in the first increment or
other error messages, switch to the other option.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 847
MAXLP
Default = 5
MAXLP specifies the maximum number of iterations for element relaxation and material point subincrement
processes in SOLs 129 and 159. MAXLP is 10 in SOLs 106 and 153 and cannot be changed by the user.
MAXRATIO
Default = 1.E7
The ratios of terms on the diagonal of the stiffness matrix to the corresponding terms on the diagonal of the
triangular factor are computed. If, for any row, this ratio is greater than MAXRATIO, the matrix will be
considered to be nearly singular (having mechanisms). If any diagonal terms of the factor are negative, the
stiffness matrix is considered implausible (non-positive definite). The ratios greater than MAXRATIO and
less than zero and their associated external grid identities will be printed out. The program will then take
appropriate action as directed by the parameter BAILOUT.
By default, in the superelement solution sequences the program will terminate processing for that
superelement. A negative value for BAILOUT directs the program to continue processing the superelement.
Although forcing the program to continue with near-singularities is a useful modeling checkout technique,
it may lead to solutions of poor quality or fatal messages later in the run. It is recommended that the default
values be used for production runs. A related parameter is ERROR.
The value -1 of BAILOUT causes the program to continue processing with near singularities and a zero value
will cause the program to exit if near singularities are detected.
In SOLs 101 through 200 when PARAM,CHECKOUT,YES is specified, PARAM,MAXRATIO sets the
tolerance for detecting multipoint constraint equations with poor linear independence. (See Superelement
Analysis (p. 388) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.)
BAILOUT and MAXRATIO may be specified in the Case Control Section in order to provide different
values between superelements but not between different boundary conditions.
MBENDCAP
Determines how PBEND internal pressure will be treated.
-1 Stress stiffening and axial loading due to pressure is ignored

0 Stress stiffening and axial loading occurs (this usually happens with end caps)
1 Only stress stiffening occurs. (Default)
2 Stress stiffening and axial loading occurs for CBEND elements with any nodes having SPC or
SPC1 and stress stiffening occurs for all other CBEND elements regardless whether the
SPC/SPC1 is referenced above the subcase level or within a subcase.
Main Index
MCNLPARM
Determines whether to make all field 5 (KMETHOD) consistent if more than one NLPARM entry occurs
in the input stream. If mixed KMETHOD fields are provided for different NLPARM entries, SOL 600 can
sometimes encounter difficulties.
-1 KMETHOD will not be changed to be consistent.
1 KMETHOD will be changed to be consistent with that used with the NLPARM entry with
the lowest ID. (Default)
Remark:
This parameter may be set in RC files.
MCON2D3D
Integer, Default = -1, SOL 600 only.
Controls whether a mixture of 2D and 3D contact will be allowed in a SOL 600 model. For most models a
mixture of 2D and 3D contact will fail but there are a few cases where it will run properly. The default will
stop the run should a mixture of 2D and 3D contact as specified in field 3 of the first BCBODY line is found.
PARAM,MCONF2D3D,1 will allow the job to continue but the job may fail later in the run.
.
0 Stop job with a FATAL ERRO if a mixture of 2D and 3D contact is found.

1 Allow job to continue if a mixture of 2D and 3D contact is found.
MCORDUPD
Determines if the coordinates will be updated if one of the CONTINUE options is specified on the SOL 600
Executive Control statement.
0 Original coordinates are used for the continue option. (Default)

1 Coordinates are revised to reflect the final position after the nonlinear analysis. These
updated coordinates are used in the continue option.
Remark:
If mcordupd=1, parampmarct19,1 is automatically set and jid.marc.t19 will be generated (jid.marc.t16 may
also be generated if desired).
MCSSHLCK
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 849
Case Control parameter that determines whether to check that the thickness direction of CSSHL elements
is in the direction pointing from grids 1-2-3-4 to 5-6-7-8 or not.
-1 Do not make the check.
1 Make the check. (Default)
2 Make the check only for 6-sided elements (looking like chexa) and ignore for 5-sided elements
(looking like cpenta).
Remark:
This parameter must be set in the Case Control above the first subcase.
MCSSHORR
Case Control parameter that sets the orientation of the thickness direction of CEHXA converted to solid
shells.
-1 The smallest CEHXA direction will be determined and the element will be renumbered such
that the thickness of the renumbered elements points from grids 1-2-3-4 to 5-6-7-8
1 The thickness direction will be in the grid 1 to 5 direction (thickness points from grids 1-2-
3-4 to 5-6-7-8). (Default)
2 The thickness direction will be in the grid 1 to 2 direction (grid numbering that originally
was 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 will be changed to 1,5,6,2,4,8,7,3)
3 The thickness direction will be in the grid 1 to 4 direction (grid numbering that originally
was 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 will be changed to 1,4,8,5,2,3,7,6)
11 The thickness direction will be along the side closest to the basic X-direction
12 The thickness direction will be along the side closest to the basic Y direction
13 The thickness direction will be along the side closest to the basic Z direction.
Remarks:
1. This parameter must be set in the Case Control above the first subcase.
2. This entry is only used in conjunction with the CSSHLM entry only.
3. This entry should only be used if all elements converted to solid shells are CHEXA, none should be
CPENTA.
4. See the CSSHL entry for a description of grids 1 to 8.
5. For options other than mcsshorr=1 the material properties and material orientation direction must be
orientated properly.
Main Index
MDAREAMD
Option to modify or not modify all DAREA entries which are not associated with any other loads (DAREA
entries that supply the actual load).
-1 Do not modify any DAREA entries.

1 Modify all DAREA entries that are not associated with any other load entries and supply the
actual loading. (Default)
MDEFSEPP
Integer, Default = see below
This SOL 600 parameter allows an easy way to set the defaults for contact separation control. Since this
parameter may be placed in RC files, the user can set default separation controls appropriate to the type of
problems normally run and apply the same values to all models without having to enter them in the bulk data
for each run. These values are normally entered on the BCPARA entry. The form of MDEFSEPP is as
follows:
PARAM,MDEFSEPP,AABBBBCD
where AABBBBCD is a packed integer field comprised of the following 4 controls:
Standard Values that can

Variable Default be Entered Max Digits Min Digits
AA NODSEP 5 0 to 99 2 0
BBBB MAXSEP 9999 0 to 9999 4 4
C ICSEP 0 0 to 3 1 1
D IBSEP 0 0 to 4 1 1
Remarks:
1. All values of AA, BBBB, C, D override the standard defaults.
2. NODSEP, MAXSEP, ICSEP, IBSEP entered on BCPARA override values on this parameter.
4. Max digits is the maximum number of digits that can be entered.
Min digits is the minimum number of digits that must be entered if this parameter is used.
5. A common setting for moderately difficult separation problems is MDEFSEPP=5001004
AA=NODSEP=5
BBBB=MAXSEP=10
C=ICSEP=0
D=IBSEP=4
6. A common setting for more difficult separation problems is MDEFSEPP=2999934
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 851
AA=NODSEP=5
BBBB=MAXSEP=9999
C=ICSEP=3
D=IBSEP=4
MDK4OPT
Default = 1
Performance parameter used in MDACMS for the calculation of K4. If MDK4OPT>0 the most common
value of GE for structure elements will be internally applied to PARAM,G to speed up the calculation of K4.
Set MDK4OPT to 0 to disable this feature. The traditional K4 calculation will be used instead.
MDOPT14
Default = NO
Option 14 of the MDENZO functional module modifies degree of freedom (DOF) based domain
decomposition such that DOF belonging to any one grid point are retained in a single domain. This action
(PARAM,MDOPT14,YES) lends stability to the resulting solution at the possible expense of some efficiency.
Setting MDOPT14 to NO bypasses this operation so that DOF may be distributed to any domain without
restriction. This parameter applies to Matrix Domain ACMS.
MDOTM
Default = AUTO
The default selects the most efficient method for data recovery in DOMAINSOLVER ACMS
(PARTOPT=DOF). There are two methods: (1) Output transformation matrix (OTM) method is selected
if the number of modes multiplied by PARAM,MDOTMFAC (Default = 20) exceeds the number of degrees-
of-freedom at which displacements are required in order to complete data recovery (DISP, STRESS, etc.)
This method also requires PARAM,SPARSEPH,YES which is the default. This method may be forced with
PARAM,MDOTM,YES. (2) If the number of modes multiplied by PARAM,MDOTMFAC (Default = 20)
does not exceed the number of degrees-of-freedom at which displacements are required in order to complete
data recovery condition is not satisfied then the non-OTM method is selected. This method may be forced
with PARAM,MDOTM,NO.
MDOTMFAC
Default = 20
See MDOTM.
MDREDOPT
Default = -1
This parameter is used in ACMS for matrix reduction operations. It affects the way in which matrices are
reduced to modal coordinates. Quantities affected are damping, loads, and acoustic coupling. By default, the
ACMS-generated Q-size matrices are reduced to H-size (modal coordinates). This is the most efficient
method. If MDREDOPT=1, a triple matrix multiplication is used.
Main Index
MDUMLOAD
0 For subcases with no applied loads and enforced displacement or velocity of rigid contact
bodies, a small magnitude dummy load will be created. Without these dummy loads, Nastran
becomes confused and does not produce the correct contact information. If there is only one
subcase, the dummy loads are not necessary. (Default)
1 Dummy loads will not be produced for any subcase and rigid contact with enforced motion
may be incorrectly described.
MECHFIL
Default = 1.E-6
Criterion for discarding massless mechanism modes with small generalized mass. A smaller value will result
in more marginal constraint modes being retained.
MECHFIX
Default = AUTO
Control for fixing the massless mechanism problem. The new capability is provided automatically for the
default of this parameter, listed above. The new capability is executed only when the eigensolution does not
provide answers because of symptoms consistent with the presence of massless mechanisms. If MECHFIX
is set to YES, the constraint modes are removed before attempting an eigensolution. When set to NO, the
new capability is blocked, and the eigensolution uses the pre MSC Nastran 2001 rules, i.e., three failed shifts
and a fatal exit. See also MMFIL, 862.
MECHPRT
Default = NO
For SOL 103 only, if massless mechanisms are found the constraint modes are printed with a format similar
to eigenvectors when this parameter is set to YES. They are labeled CONSTRAINT MODES, and are
numbered sequentially. Grid points with only zero values in a mode are not printed. This parameter should
be used when performing initial checkout of a model and a goal is to remove all massless mechanisms before
starting production analysis. The number of each “mode” matches the corresponding GID,C pair in the high
ratio message. If there are many (thousands) of such modes the output file will be large. There is no method
to plot these shapes at present.
MESH
Default = NO
If MESH=YES is specified, then a summary of the shading status and the subelement mesh for each CHBDYi
element referencing a VIEW Bulk Data entry is printed.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 853
METHCMRS
Default = 0
In dynamic analysis (SOLs 103, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 145, 146, and 200), METHCMRS specifies
the set identification number of an EIGR or EIGRL entry to be used in the calculation of the normal modes
on the v-set of the residual structure.
By default, the residual structure v-set normal modes will be computed based on the METHOD Case
Control command selection as long as q-set is present.
MEXTRNOD
Determines whether extra grids will be added to SOL 600 parallel analyses.
0 Extra grids will not be added. (Default)

1 Extra grids will be added so that all grids from 1 to the highest grid are defined this was necessary
for certain version of Marc prior to the 2005 version. All extra grids that are added have
coordinates of 0.0 in all three directions.
MEXTSEE,N
Default = 0, SOL 600 only, Case Control Parameter
Determines whether SOL 600 external superelement residual runs contain loads in the main input file or not.
0 External Superelement residual runs will not contain any loads. (Default)
1 External Superelement residual runs will contain all loads.
MFASTCMP
Determines default composite shell integration method.
1 Standard integration method is used. Failure, plasticity, thermal loads, etc. are all allowed.
(Default)
2 A “fast integration” through the thickness technique is used which ignores thermal strains,
plasticity, and temperature-dependent material properties (which should not be entered in the
model).
3 A “fast integration” through the thickness technique is used which only ignores plasticity.
Thermal strains and temperature-dependent materials are allowed.
Remarks:
1. To override the default integration method, use Bulk Data entry PCOMPF.
Main Index
2. If option 2 is used and temperature loading is present in the model, the option will automatically be
re-set to 3.
MFEA5701
Determines whether feature 5701 is written to the Marc file. When this feature is set to 1, it disables default
rotation checking set to 0.001, which was initially set for early versions of Marc when RBE2 and similar
elements were added because the 0.001 value proved to be responsible for convergence problems. For models
that need rotation checking, you can enter the value using the NLSTRAT variable RLROTT. We
recommend always using MFEA5701,1 to turn off the default 0.001 checking value in Marc whether or not
the value is entered using NLSTRAT RLROTT.
0 Rigid rotation checking of 0.001 is turned on.

1 Rigid rotation checking of 0.001 is turned off. (Default)
MFORCOR1
Option to correct forces entered twice (at the same node) in multiple subcases. This is not commonly found
in the input files.
0 Do not correct the forces.

1 Correct the forces. (Default)
Remark:
MFORDUPE
Controls how duplicate forces encountered for the same load case are handled in SOL 600.
0 Forces will be translated to Marc as encountered even if duplicates are present. In the case of
duplicates (more than one set of forces for the same node in the same subcase), all forces found
will be translated directly to the Marc input. (Default)
1 If duplicates exist, only the last set of forces will be translated.
Note: To prevent confusion, it is suggested that duplicate forces not be used.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 855
MFSKIPPP
Controls memory near the end of SOL 600 translations will be freed or not.
0 Memory is freed.
1 Memory is not freed (can save computer time, and, in some cases may be necessary for some
models.)
MGAPINIT
Controls whether CGAP elements are initially open or closed (during Marc increment zero).
0 Gaps are initially open.

1 Gaps are initially closed.
MGLUETOL
Real, Default = 1.0E-6, SOL 600 only
Determines the tolerance for the PERMGLUP option of the SOL 600 Executive Control statement for
situation where the primary method (same as SOL 101 with permanent glue) fails to find any glued contact
possibilities (for example, for edge contact will usually find no glued contact using SOL 101). If not glued
contact is found using the primary method a secondary method, which can sometimes take a significant
amount of computer time for large models is used. The second method evaluates all grids that have the same
coordinates as the grids within the tolerance specified by this parameter. They will be tied together unless they
have SPC’s, MPC’s or are grids attached to rigid elements.
MHEATSHL
Determines whether a membrane or thick shell element formulation is used for heat transfer. This parameter
can be overridden by individual PSHELL entries. In the current release, the membrane elements should not
be used for thermal contact analysis.
-1 All “quad” elements in the model will have membrane capability regardless of MIDi values on
the PSHELL entries.
0 All “quad” elements in the model will have membrane capability. (Default)
1 All “quad” elements in the model will have thick shell capability (shell sect, 1).
2 Shells use 2 dof per node, linear variation of temperature through thickness (shell sect, 2).
3 Shells use 3 dof per node, quadratic variation of temperature through thickness (shell sect, 3).
>3 Shells use 2*n+1 dof per node (where ni is the value of MHEATSHL specified). (shell sect, 2*(n-
2)+1)
Main Index
Notes: 1. Membrane capability in heat transfer means that the temperature is constant
throughout the thickness, The MHEATSHL=0 option can be overridden by entering
a non-blank value for MID2, MID3 and/or MID4 on an applicable PSHELL entry in
which case the MHEATSHL=1 option will be used if no MHEATSHL parameter is
entered.
2. Post options will be added to be the same as the value for Marc’s shell sect. For
example, if shell sect, 3 is generated, post codes 9,1 9,2 and 9,3 will also be generated.
MHEATUNT
Specifies the units for heat transfer using SOL 600.
0 SI mm units used
1 SI m units used
2 US units used. (Default)
Note: This parameter is used by Marc’s ISOTROPIC (heat transfer) third datablock, fourth field.
MHEMIPIX
Controls the number of pixels used in radiation heat transfer for SOL 600 using the hemi-cube method.
MHOUBOLT
0 SOL 600 transient dynamics will use the single step Houbolt numerical integration method.
(Default)
1 SOL 600 transient dynamics will use the Newmark Beta numerical integration method.
2 SOL 600 transient dynamics will use the standard Houbolt numerical integration method.
7 SOL 600 transient dynamics will use the generalized alpha (Hilber-Hughes Taylor) numerical
integration method.
MHRED
Default = NO
MHRED=YES, selects the c-set and r-set component mode reduction method suggested by Dr. Arya Majed
and Ed Henkel. See the MSC Nastran V2004 Release Guide for details.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 857
MICRO
Defines the accuracy of the initial conditions in Eulerian elements, when using the geometrical shape
definition.
Format:
PARAM,MICRO,VALUE
Example:
PARAM,MICRO,15
VALUE Micro-zoning parameter. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. MICRO is the number of micro zones into which an element is subdivided during initial condition
generation.
2. The default MICRO = 10 results in material fractions as accurate as 0.001. If a higher accuracy is
required, a greater value for MICRO can be used, but the CPU time for the generation increases
rapidly.
3. Micro zoning is only used when the initial conditions of the Eulerian material are specified on a
TICEUL1 entry.
MINCLDSB
Determines whether the SB value in field 4 of MATF will be included or not in the stiffness formulation of
the model (Marc COMPOSITE datablock 3 field 4):
0 SB will not be included.
1 SB will be included.
Remarks:
1. For releases prior to MD Nastran 2010, SB was not included.
2. If SB is included, Marc parameter TSHEAR will also be included.
MINIGOA
Default = NO
Allows for the reduction in the amount of disk space used when using superelements. When this parameter
is set to YES, the transformation matrix GOA will contain terms only for the degrees-of-freedom in the U5
(USET, USET1, SEUSET, SEUSET1) set. This can allow for a significant reduction in the amount of disk
Main Index
space used by the database. The limitation of using this approach is that data recovery will be available only
for these degrees-of-freedom and elements connected to them.
MINRECCC, N
N Integer. Minimum number of iterations per load step. This is the same as MINREC on the
NLSTRAT entry. If no other NLSTRAT values are entered, it is easier to enter this
parameter. The value can range from 0 to 9. For certain problems, the value should be 2 or
greater or accuracy will be poor.
Minimum number of iterations per load step. This is the same as MINREC on the NLSTRAT entry. If no
other NLSTRAT values are entered, it is easier to enter this parameter. The value can range from 0 to 9. For
certain problems, the value should be 2 or greater or accuracy will be poor.
MINSOUTT
Determines elements that deform so much that they go inside-out in an analysis will be deactivated.
0 Issue an error message and terminate the job if an element goes inside-out. (Default)
1 Deactivate any element that goes inside-out and continue the analysis. This option is
particularly useful for models which allow failure (for example those using MATF).
Remark:
param,minsoutt,1 maps to Marc’s parameter IO-DEACT.
MINVASHF
Inverse Power “auto shift” value. A new shift point (in frequency squared) is determined as the highest
frequency squared plus this entry times the difference between the highest and next highest distinct frequency
squared.
MINVCITR
Inverse Power method, number of iterations.
MINVCSHF
Inverse Power shift frequency in Hz.)
MINVCTOL
Default = 1.0E-5, SOL 600 only
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 859
Inverse Power convergence tolerance.

MINVFMAX
no Default, use MINVNMOD, SOL 600 only
Real. Inverse Power max frequency to extract in Hz.
MINVNMOD
Integer. Inverse Power max number of modes to extract.
MLDALLOW
Determines whether forces (FORCE, MOMENT, PLOAD4, etc.) are allowed in SOL 600 if their ID is the
same as the value N of any Case Control LOAD=N entry.
0 Forces with the same ID are not allowed.

1 Forces with the same ID are allowed.
Remarks:
1. MLDALLOW=0 is the only option available for most other Nastran solution sequences.
2. MLDALLOW=1 was the only option available in SOL 600 prior to MD Nastran 2010.
3. MLDALLOW=1 cannot be used with PARAM,MNASTLDS if MNASTLDS>0.
MLSTRAIN
Corresponds to Marc’s “LARGE STRAIN” parameter and optionally allows large rotation of beams and
shells.
-1 Small strain, small rotation analysis is used. (Default)

1 Large strain and large rotation analysis of beams and shells is implemented in a way to
automatically select the best options for a large strain analysis based upon the element type
(see the following table).
2 Use large strain and large rotation analyses of beams and shells for hyperelasticity and
multiplicative plasticity with radial return mapping
11 Same as option 1 except beams and shells are limited to small rotations (see Remark 1.)
12 Same as option 2except beams and shells are limited to small rotations (see Remark 1.)
Main Index
Element Type/ 1-Dimensional Plane Stress or Plane Strain or Plane Strain or

Material Model Membranes or Shell Axisymmetric, or 3- Axisymmetric, or 3-
Elements Dimensional Dimensional Hermann
Displacement Form Form
Conventional Updated Lagrange Updated Lagrange Updated Lagrange Updated Lagrange
elastic-plastic additive plasticity; additive plasticity; additive plasticity; multiplicative plasticity;
no finite strain includes finite strain includes finite strain includes finite strain
utilized constant
strain
Mooney, Ogden, Total Lagrange Total Lagrange Updated Lagrange Updated Lagrange
Gent, or Arruda-
Boyce
Foam Total Lagrange Total Lagrange Updated Lagrange Updated Lagrange;
incompressibility
neglected
Remarks:
1. Starting with MD Nastran 2010, if MLSTRAIN=1 or 2, feature,2103 will also be added to provide
the best large rotation solution of beam and shell models using updated Lagrange. To prevent
feature,2103 from being used MLSTRAIN can be set to 11 or 12 instead of 1 or 2 respectively if large
strain small rotation is desired.
2. Starting with MD Nastran 2010, if hyperelastic materials are found in the model,
PARAM,MLSTRAIN,12 will be set automatically unless a different value of MLSTRAIN has been
set by the user.
MLSTRAN2
Determines how the LARGE STRAIN option is written in the Marc input file for SOL 600.
0 LARGE STRAIN, (other options if applicable)
1 LARGE STRA, (other options if applicable)
Remark:
Since SOL 600 writes the Marc input file using large-field free-format input either option will work properly.
If the input file is modified by hand and this entry is changed to fixed-format, the LARGE STRA option
must be used.
MMAT2ANI
Determines how MAT2 will be mapped to Marc.
0 MAT2 will be mapped to Marc’s ORTHOTROPIC option.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 861
1 MAT2 will be mapped to Marc’s ANISOTROPIC option.

2 MAT2 will be mapped as explained in the following note. (Default)
Note: The default, MMAT2ANI=2, maps MAT2 to Marc’s ORTHOTROPIC option if G13 and
G23 are both zero or blank and to Marc’s ANISOTROPIC option if G13 and/or G23 are non-
zero.
MMBOLTUS
Integer, Default = -1, SOL 600 only
Controls how the top and bottom nodes are placed in the Marc “tying 69” input when MBOLTUS is used
in a SOL 600 model.
-1 Same as pre-MD Nastran 2010 versions tying 69 node order is top, bottom, control
1 Reversed - tying 69 node order is bottom, top control
Remarks:
1. If it appears that a bolt preload may be backwards for bolts modeled using MBOLTUS, this
parameter may be entered to reverse the mpc equations internally generated in Marc by tying 69
instead of reversing the loads.
2. For the MBOLTUS entry to be consistent with the SOL 400 BOLT entry PARAM,MMBOLTUS,1
is usually required.
MMEMDETT
Determines the Nastran portion of SOL 600 determines how much usable memory is available just before
spawning Marc and informs Marc through the –ml flag. If Marc needs more memory than this value, it will
go out of core.
-1 Do not determine the amount of usable memory. (Default)
1 Determine the amount of usable memory and set the –ml Marc command line option to that
value
Remarks:
1. Marc can determine this memory, however the computations determine the amount of installed
memory and do not take into account memory used by the operating system or by other user
processes.
2. This parameter may be entered in RC files.
Main Index
MMFIL
Default = 1.e-10
Filter value used to distinguish between massless mechanism modes and rigid body modes. A smaller value
may discard rigid body modes. The default value has been effective on all problems solved to date.
MNASTLDS
Integer, Default = See Remark 1., SOL 600 only.
Option to determine complex forces using OLOADS datablock or the foes, moments, pressures, etc. in the
Nastran input file. Positive values of MNASTLDS may also significantly speed up the SOL 600 translation
and, in the case of RFORCE, the marc portion of the run will also usually be faster.
-1 or 0 Loads for Marc are translated or calculated directly from the forces, moments, pressures, etc.
in the Nastran input file. (Remark 1.)
1 Complex loads and moments are obtained from the OLOADS datablock, pressures, rforce
and other distributed loads are translated from the values found in the Nastran input.
(Remark 3.)
4 Same as MNASTLDS=1 if the model has Bulk Data LOAD entries with more than one term
(L2, L3, … on the Bulk Data LOAD entry is defined), otherwise same as mnastlds=0.
99 Same as MNASTLDS=1 regardless of whether complex loads or Bulk Data LOAD entries
with more than one term exist in the mode.
777 Same as MNASTLDS=99 except that all type of distributed loads (pressures, rforce, etc.) will
be converted to force and obtain from the OLOADS datablock. (Remark 5.)
Remarks:
1. Default=99 if any GRID entry has field 7 defined. Default=777 if there are multiple subcases and
RFORCE or PLOAD4 with continuation lines exist in the model or if any FORCE entry with
nonzero (or blank) field 4 is defined, otherwise the default is 4.
2. MNASTLDS=-1 (or 0) was the only option prior to MD Nastran 2010.
3. Complex loads are defined as those forces or moments whose grid appears more than once when the
Case Control and Bulk Data LOAD entries are evaluated. For example consider the following
situation:
….
SUBCASE 1
LOAD = 10
SUBCASE 2
LOAD = 20
BEGIN BULK
LOAD, 10, 1.0, 2.0, 1, 3.0,2
LOAD, 20, 1.0, 4.0, 1, 5.0,2
FORCE,1,51, ,1.0,0.0,0.0,100.0
FORCE,2,51, ,1.0,0.0,0.0,200.0
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 863
Although the force at grid 51 occurs for different load ID’s when combined using the LOAD entries
it actually occurs twice in each subcase. This is the simplest form of a complex load and can be
handled by either MNASTLDS option. However, some models will have much more complex
situation, even having different entries for the Fx, Fy and Fz directions. In such circumstances,
particularly if multiple subcases are involved MNASTLDS > 0 is recommended.
5. When MNASTLDS=777 pressures (and other forms of distributed loads) are converted to nodal
forces and the follower force effects will be lost. However, for multiple subcases the follower force
effects are not available in SOL 600 unless the loading is the same between subcases except for a scale
factor.
MODACC
Default = -1
0 Selects the mode acceleration method for data recovery in dynamic analysis. See Formulation
of Dynamic Equations in SubDMAP GMA (p. 357) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual for further
discussion. If PARAM,SPARSEDR,NO is specified, then PARAM,DDRMM,-1 must also
be specified.
1 Is the same as MODACC = 0 except if SUPORTi entries are present then the displacements
are corrected for rigid body motion and the local flexibility at the SUPORTi degrees-of-
freedom.
>0 Is not recommended for use in hydroelastic problems.
MODEL
Default = 0
This parameter also allows several models to be stored in the same graphics database created by
PARAM,POST,0.
MOFFCORE
Determines how memory for PARAM,MARCOFFT above is to be allocated (for increased speed).
-1 Additional memory is not allocated.

1 Additional memory is allocated if available. (Default)
Main Index
MOP2TITL
Determines how titles are placed on the 146 word record for op2 output records generated by SOL 600.
1 Standard titles will not be placed, however titles of the form “CQUAD4 STRESS FROM
MARC”, and similar titles for other element types, strains, displacements, etc. will be written.
This option is useful for certain postprocessors.
-1 Standard Nastran title, subtitles will be placed on op2 files generated by SOL 600. This option
is useful for postprocessors that require SOL 600 op2 data to be exactly in the same format as
that generated by other Nastran solution sequences. (Default)
Note: The SOL 600 op2 file follows that of SOL 109 as closely as possible.
MOUTRCOR
Determines whether SOL 600 OUTR options are disabled or not if any CORD2i references another
coordinate system.
0 Disable OUTR options
1 Do not disable OUTR options
Remarks:
1. In some cases, OUTR results are inaccurate if a CORD2i references another CORD.
2. CORD2i entries are not checked to see if they are actually used in the model.
MP1SET
Character "F" or "G" (default, see below)
Controls the integration set used in the calculation of MONPNT1 results. For the value of "F", the
integrated values will reflect any redistribution of loads caused by rigid elements and MPCs. This is
particularly useful in the static aeroelastic solution sequences (SOL 144) when RBE3s are used to distribute
mass, applied loads and splining. For the value of "G", no redistribution occurs. The default is a function of
the solution sequence.
SOL 144 - Default = "F"
All other sequences - Default = "G"
MPCX
Default = 0
See OLDSEQ.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 865
MPERMPRT
SOL 600 only.
Determines whether to print permanent glue MPC’s in the f06 file.
0 Do not print permanent glue MPC’s

1 Print permanent glue MPC’s
MPTUNIT
Default=0
MPTUNIT is used in conjunction with an FMS ASSIGN statement to specify the unit number for the
storage of monitor points results in OUTPUT2 format in SOL 146. Default=0 indicates that no monitor
point data are to be stored
MQUATERN
Controls whether quaternions will be used for SOL 600 models with large rotation.
-1 Do not use quaternion “feature” for large rotation

1 Use quaternion feature,2103 which allows large rotations for total Lagrange or updated
Lagrange
2 Use quaternion feature,2105 which allows large rotations only if updated Lagrange is used
Remarks:
1. The use of MQUATERN = -1 allows backwards compatibility such that most models will obtain the
same results using MD Nastran R3 as were obtained using MD Nastran R3.
2. The use of MQUATERN = 1 is believed to yield the most accurate large rotation results for most
models.
3. With PARAM,MQUATERN,1 large rotation may be used both with updated Lagrange and total
Lagrange.
4. mquatern = -1 does not set Marc feature 2103 (feature 2105 is not set).
5. mquatern = 1 sets Marc feature 2103
MRADUNIT
SOL 600 only.
Controls the units used in radiation heat transfer for SOL 600.
1 Degrees Celsius
2 Degrees Kelvin (default if parameter not entered)
3 Degrees Fahrenheit
Main Index
Note: Degrees Rankin are not available.
MRAFFLOR, N
Default = N0, SOL 600 only.
N Integer. If N=0, a new AF_flowmat file containing temperature-dependent stress-strain

curves will be generated during the current Nastran execution and also used in the spawned
Marc run. If N=1, an existing AF_flowmat file will be used. The name of the file is always
determined by the value of PARAM,MRAFFLOW, but PARAM,MRAFFLOT determines
if other characters are added.
MRAFFLOT, N
Default = N0, SOL 600 only.
N Integer. If N=0, the file name as specified using PARAM,MRAFFLOW,Name will be used
with no changes except that all characters will be in lower case and the extension “.mat” will
be added. If N=1, the characters “asm_” will be added at the beginning of Name, the first
character of Name will be upper case (the other characters of Name will be lower case) and
the extension “.mat” will be added. This will make the AF_flowmat file name compatible
with many names in Marc’s AF_flowmat directory.
MRAFFLOW, Name
Name Character. Name of a file containing temperature dependent stress versus plastic strain
curves in Marc’s AF_flowmat format. This file can be generated from the current Nastran
run using TABLEST and TABLES1 entries or a pre-existing file can be used depending on
the value of PARAM,MRAFFLOR. The extension “.mat” will be added to Name. If this is
a new file, it will be saved in the directory from which the Nastran execution is submitted.
If a pre-existing file is to be used, it can either be located in the directory where the Nastran
execution is submitted or in the Marc AF_flowmat directory.
MRALIAS ID (MALIAS02, MALIAS03, etc.)

No Default, SOL 600 only. This parameter is not usually used.
The purpose of the parameter is to map the advance nonlinear element type selected by the internal Marc
translator in Nastran to a different type. For example, if the element type 75 for CQUAD4 is normally used,
a mapping to advance nonlinear element type 139 could be made. ID is a 6 digit number. The left 3 digits
are the element type normally selected by the translator and the right 3 digits are the element type to be
mapped. In the above example, element type 75 is to be mapped to 139. The user would enter ID=075139.
If element type 165 is to be mapped to element type 1 (which is not a real case), ID=165001. Consult Marc
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 867
Volume B for a list of elements and their meaning. The user is responsible for ensuring that the mapping
selected is proper. There is a limit of 18 aliases that may be entered in any model. Since Nastran can only
accept one parameter with a given name, the second alias should be named PARAM,MALIAS02 and the
third PARAM,MALIAS03, etc. All original element types mapped must actually exist in the model.
Remark:
These entries should only be used if the Marc GEOMETRY entries are identical for the original and new
element types.
Note: If you use one of the MRALIAS parameters, certain “parameters” in the Marc file may no
longer be correct. For example, an element originally capable of using the updated Lagrange
method may be aliased to one that must use the total Lagrange method. Such conditions are
not checked by the translator when you use alias and you will need to make modifications to
the Marc input file yourself to reflect them. To resolve this use PARAM,MLSTRAIN.
The Bulk Data entry, ALIASM, is available and subsequent version are more powerful.
MRALLOCG
Integer. The value entered here is the amount of memory (MB) allocated for general Marc memory when
Marc is spawned from Nastran. It specifies the initial allocation of “general memory”. This is used for storing
element stiffness matrices and part or all of the matrix solver workspace among other things. Please note that
element data like stresses and strains are not part of the general memory. Solvers 6, 8, and 9 use the main part
of the workspace in separate memory. Initial allocation of the general memory can be used for avoiding
reallocation (increase of the workspace). For parallel processing the amount specified is the total for the job.
It is divided by the number of domains used.
MRALLOCS
Integer. The value entered here is the amount of memory (MB) allocated for Marc solver memory when Marc
is spawned from Nastran. It specifies the initial allocation of memory for solver 8. By giving a value that is
more than the maximum used during the run, one avoids that the solver workspace is increased (reallocated).
This can be particularly useful for large contact jobs, where additional memory may be allocated due to
contact. If the given workspace is less than what is needed, it is automatically increased. This option is only
for use with solver type 8. No check is done to see if solver type 8 is used in the job. For parallel processing
the amount specified is the total for the job. It is divided by the number of domains used.
MRBE3SNG
SOL 600 only.
Option to check the singularity of RBE3’s in SOL 600. The real value entered is the singularity threshold
allowed. If MRBE3SNG is entered as a positive value, all RBE3’s with poor singularity values above the value
entered will be output in the jid.marc.out file as warning messages. If MRBE3SNG is entered as a negative
Main Index
value, all RBE3’s with poor singularity values above the absolute value entered will be output in the
jid.marc.out file as error messages and the job will abort if they are found in increment zero, but if they are
found after increment zero the messages are warning messages and the job will continue.
Note: A “good” RBE3 element using the original geometry in increment zero could become singular
as the structure deforms in subsequent increments.
MRBEAMB
0 Write equivalent radius for all beams (see PARAM,BEAMBEA) whether beam-beam contact
is anticipated or not. The equivalent radius is the 7th field of Marc’s GEOMETRY values
for beam type elements. (Default)
-1 Do not write equivalent radius (7th field is blank). This might be necessary for versions of
Marc earlier than 2003.
MRBEPARM, IJK
IJK provides settings for Marc’s RBE parameter. If PARAM,MRBEPARM parameter is entered, Marc’s RBE
parameter will be set using this IJK If PARAM<MRBEAMPM is not entered, PARAM,MARCRBE2 or
PARAM,MARCRBE3 can be used to set Marc’s RBE parameter.
IJK is a combination of three variables. For example 311. Descriptions for individual entries are as follows:
I Enter 3 or 6 to control the number of degrees-of-freedom. For the dependent grid (reference
grid) of each rbe2 or rbe3. The independent grids can have 3 or 6 dof and can be different
than what is specified by I.
J Enter 1 to use large displacement formulation of rbe2. Enter 3 to deactivate automatic
convergence test for rbe2.
K Enter 1 to use large displacement formulation of rbe3. Enter 2 to activate non-normalized
rotation constraint coefficient for rbe3.
Note: If IJK values other than specified above are entered, IJK will be set to zero and the parameter
will not be used. This parameter should not be entered unless there are rbe2’s or rbe3’s in the
model and they are to be used as such in Marc (rather than mpc or stiff beams).
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 869
MRBDYCVT
Determines if CHBDYG is converted to CHBDYE for SOL 600 heat transfer.
0 Do not convert. (Default)

1 Attempt to convert CHBDYG to CHBDYE. All grids specified by all CHBDYG entries must
reference actual conduction elements (CQUAD4, CHEXE, CTETRA, etc.) If even one
CHBDYG does not reference an existing conduction element, this parameter will be re-set to
zero.
Note: If MRBDYCVT=0, CHBDYG will normally result in point heat transfer loads rather than
distributed heat transfer loads.
MRBIGMEM
N If N=0, memory allocations during loads translation phases are sized for computers with
limited memory and swap space (paging space). Some large problems and/or unusual
problems may not run. If this happens, use a newer modern computer with lots of memory
and disk space (and lots of swap space) and set N=1. Larger memory allocations will then be
available. This parameter is not usually required unless the available memory is extremely
small.
MRBUKMTH
.
1 Buckling modes will be computed using the Inverse Power method.

2 Buckling modes will be computed using the Lanczos method. Matrices must be positive-
definite for this option. (Default)
3 Use Lanczos if EIGRL is specified, Inverse Power if EIGB is specified.
Note: MRBUKMTH should be specified if EIGR or EIGRL is used for buckling unless
SOL 600,105 is the solution sequence. An alternative is to use ANALYSIS=BUCK. In SOL
600, it is not possible to compute natural frequencies and buckling modes in the same run. If
ANALYSIS=BUCK is specified anywhere in the Case Control and if PARAM,MRBUKMTH
is omitted, param,mrbukmth=3 will be set automatically.
Main Index
MRC2DADD
Allows an offset to be added to all coordinates for 2D analyses so that X and Y will always be positive.
0 Offsets will not be added. (Default)

1 Offsets will be determined so that all Marc X and Y coordinates are positive (will exceed 0.1).
MRCKBODY
Determines whether each BCBODY will be checked to see if the 2nd line is present when more than 2 lines
exist. If the 2nd line is missing for BCBODY entries with more than 2 lines, errors can occur.
-1 BCBODY entries are not checked.

1 BCBODY entries are checked. If the 2nd line is not present for BCBODY entries having more
than 2 lines, a 2nd line will be added internally.
Remark:
MRCKLOAD
Controls whether each subcase has LOAD or DLOAD specified. SOL 600 will usually not run correctly
unless each subcase has some type of load (dummy or real). If a subcase only has a change in SPC, MPC, or
contact to obtain the correct results a dummy load is usually required.
0 No check is made to see if each subcase has a Case Control LOAD or DLOAD entry.
1 A check is made to see if each subcase has a Case Control LOAD or DLOAD entry and if any
subcase does not have such entry, a fatal error will be issued.
Remarks:
1. This parameter must be entered in the Case Control above any subcases.
MRCONADD
Controls whether PARAM,MRCONVER,11 will be added automatically if any BCTABLE with FBSH,
BKGL and/or SEGS sub-headers is found. Also controls whether a BCTABLE with ID=0 will be added if
one is not present in the input file.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 871
-1 Do not change value of PARAM,MRCONVER and do not add a BCTABLE with ID=0 if
it is missing.
1 Change PARAM,MRCONVER to 11 if any sub-headers FBSH, BKGL and/or SEGS are
found. Also add BCTABLE=0 if there are other BCTABLEs and non with ID=0 exists.
2 Change PARAM,MRCONVER to 11 if any sub-headers FBSH, BKGL and/or SEGS are
found but do not add BCTABLE=0 if there are other BCTABLEs and none with ID=0 exists.
3 Do not change PARAM,MRCONVER to 11 if any sub-headers FBSH, BKGL and/or SEGS
are found. Add BCTABLE=0 if there are other BCTABLEs and none with ID=0 exists.
Remarks:
1. PARAM,MRCONVER,11 is necessary if BCTABLE sub-headers FBSH, BKGL and/or SEGS exist
in the model.
2. BCTABLE with ID=0 is sometimes necessary for certain contact problems. It never hurts to have one
as it will be ignored for those contact problems where it is not needed.
3. This parameter may be used in MD Nastran 2010 and subsequent versions. The behavior of previous
versions was the same as PARAM,MRCONADD,-1.
5. This parameter, if used, must be placed in the Case Control above any subcases.
MRCONRES
For restart runs, Marc will produce “continuous” results files (t16/t19) which contain the results of the
original run(s) as well as the results of the restart run. If Nastran postprocessing is requested to generate op2,
xdb, etc. files, they will also contain the results from prior runs as well as the restart run.
MRCONRES=1, output results files will contain the results of the restart run only.
MRCONTAB
Determines whether CONTACT and CONTACT TABLE for SOL 600 use table-driven form or not.
0 Do not use table-driven form. (Default)

11 Use table-driven from of CONTACT and CONTACT TABLE
Remarks:
1. If MRCONTAB=11 then MRCONVER must also be set to 11
2. This parameter should is not necessary for SOL 600 heat transfer analysis and should not be set
Main Index
MRCONUSE
Determines which increment for which contact MPC’s will be used for SOL 600 jobs using a
CONTINUE=101 to CONTINUE=159 (see the SOL 600 Executive Control statement, CONTINUE
option).
0 The last increment will be used (remark).

N Increment N will be used.
Remark:
When models with contact and if BCPARA<INITCON,4 is specified, MPC’s for each increment will be
produced and placed in files named jid.marc.conmpc_xxxx where xxxx ranges from 0001 to the number of
increments in the solution. This parameter allows the user to specify which increment will be used in the
continuation run spawned by the primary Nastran run after Marc finished. N must be less than or equal to
the number of actual increments.
MRCONVER
Determines version of Marc to use for CONTACT and CONTACT TABLE for structural analysis.
0 Uses enhanced Marc version 9 (Marc 2001 with added fields).

11 Users Marc version 11 (Marc 2005).
Remarks:
1. This parameter only affects contact and only options 0 and 11 are available. It is not needed unless
BCTABLE with FBSH and/or BKGL is entered.
3. If PARAM,MRCONVER,11 is entered it is usually also necessary to enter PARAM,MRSPRVER,11.
MRCOORDS
Determines whether Marc COORD SYSTEM will be added if any CORD1i or CORD2i entries are in the
model and if CBUSH elements, orientation vectors or other items requiring coordinate system
transformation are present in the model or if PARAM,MRPLOAD4,2 is entered which signifies that
PLOAD4 with continuation entries with CID, N1, N2, N3 are to be taken into account in the model.
0 Add Marc COORD SYSTEM. (Default)

1 Do not add MARC COORD SYSTEM
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 873
MRCQUAD4
Controls the “Default” advance nonlinear element type for CQUAD4 elements in SOL 600.
75 Advance nonlinear element type 75 is used. (Default)

139 Advance nonlinear element type 139 is used.
Note: Element 75 is capable of thick shell behavior and element type 139 is applicable to thin shells.
MRCTRIA3
Controls the “Default” advance nonlinear element type for CTRIA3 elements in SOL 600.
75 Advance nonlinear element type 75 with a duplicate node is used. (Default)

138 Advance nonlinear element type 138 with 3 nodes is used.
Note: Element 75 is capable of thick shell behavior and compatible with the default element 75 used
for CQUAD4, but since one node is degenerate (repeated) stresses may not be accurate.
Element 138 is accurate for thin shell behavior but may not be accurate for thick shell behavior.
Currently there is no triangle thick shell in Marc.
MRCWANGL
Angle in degrees over which to rotate the cross-section about the beam axis to obtain its final orientation.
MRDELTTT
Determines how delta time is set for each “step” of a SOL 600 transient nonlinear analysis.
0 DTI=Ti/N
1 DTI=Ttot/N
2 DTi=min(Ttot/N, Ti/2.0)
3 DTi=min(Ttot/N, Ti/10.0) (Default)
4 DTi=min(Ttot/N, Ti/100.0)
5 DTi=min(Ti/N, Ti/2.0)
Main Index
1. SOL 600 transient dynamics is run by taking each pair of points on the applicable TABLED1 entry
for the applied forcing function as a step. For example, if the following TABLED1 is given, the time
steps will be as shown below:
TABLED1, 1
+, 0.0, 0.0, 1.0E-3, .2 4.0E-3, .3, 6.0e-3, -.3
+,1.0E-2, 0.0
Step Final Time Delta Step Time (Ti)

1 1.0E-3 1.0E-3
2 4.0E-3 3.0E-3
3 6.0E-3 2.0E-3
4 1.0E-2 4.0E-3
If the entry for this model is (N=100, Ttot=1.0E-2)

DTi is the initial delta time (AUTO STEP (2,1) for the particular step, the six selections of
MRDELTTT would give for the DTi values shown in the table below. Note that option 3 gives at
least 10 points per step and the old option 0 is probably too conservative.
Time DTi for MRDELTTT

Final Step
Step Time (Ti) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 1.0E-3 1.0E-3 1.0E-5 1.0E-4 1.0E-4 1.0E-4 1.0E-5 1.0E-5 1.0E-5 1.0E-5
2 4.0E-3 3.0E-3 3.0E-5 1.0E-4 1.0E-4 1.0E-4 3.0E-5 3.0E-5 3.0E-5 3.0E-5
3 6.0E-3 2.0E-3 2.0E-5 1.0E-4 1.0E-4 1.0E-4 2.0E-5 2.0E-5 2.0E-5 2.0E-5
4 1.0E-2 4.0E-3 4.0E-5 1.0E-4 1.0E-4 1.0E-4 4.0E-5 4.0E-5 4.0E-5 4.0E-5
2. If Dti is set using NLAUTO variable TINIT, this parameter will be ignored.
MRDISCMB
Default = 0 without gravity, =1 with gravity, SOL 600 only.
Determines whether distributed loads, such as pressure, are combined in the Marc input file into one list if
the magnitude of the distributed loads are the same. This parameter applies to MSC Nastran 2005 only. For
previous MSC Nastran versions, MRDISCMB was 1. Option 0 save Marc memory and processing time.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 875
0 Distributed loads with the same magnitude are combined.

1 All distributed loads are input individually. Must be used if multiple subcases with the same
loadings are present in the model.
Caution: This parameter should be used with caution. For multiple load cases, MRDISCMB=0 may
produce the wrong results particularly if gravity loading is present. MRDISCMB=1 must be
used if multiple subcases with the same loadings are present in the model.
MRDUPMAT
Default = 1 without gravity loading and -1 with gravity loading, SOL 600 only.
Controls whether to create duplicate materials for elements used by both the Marc pshell
(PARAM,MRPSHELL,1 or the smear option on the SOL 600, ID statement) or not. If the user knows in
advance that no materials are used by shells and any other types of elements, this step can be skipped to same
considerable computer time.
1 Check for materials used by shells and other types of elements and create duplicate materials if
any are used by both.
-1 Do not check or create duplicate materials.
MRDYNOLD
Determines whether dynamic loads created by SOL 600 are the same as in MD Nastran R3 (and MSC
Nastran 2008) and prior releases or uses a new calculation method.
-1 Dynamic loads are the same as in MD Nastran R3 (and MSC Nastran 2008) and prior releases.
1 Dynamic loads are “total loads” and may be more accurate for multiple subcases. (Default)
MREIGMTH
1 Eigenvalue analysis will be done in Marc using the Lanczos method. (Default)
0 Eigenvalue analysis will be done in Marc using the inverse power sweep with double
eigenvalue extraction.
3 Eigenvalue analysis will be done in Marc using the inverse power sweep with single eigenvalue
extraction.
Main Index
MREL1103
0 Maps CQUAD4 to Marc’s element type 11 for plane strain problems. (Default)
3 Maps CQUAD4 to Marc’s element type 3 for plane stress problems.
MRELRB
0 If BCMOVE with the release option is specified, IDRBODY (see the BCMOVE entry) will refer
to the actual IDs of BCBODY entries. (Default)
1 The release option of BCMOVE is used, IRDBODY (see the BCMOVE entry) will be in the
order of occurrence of the BCBODY entries in the sorted Nastran Bulk Data file. For example,
if there are two BCBODY entries with ID 12 and 22, the MRELRB=1 option means that you
should specify IRDBODY on the BCMOVE entry using values of 1 and 2. If MRELRB=0, the
IRDBODY values should be 12 and 22.
MRELSPCD
Integer, Default = 0, SOL 600.
Controls whether SPCD for the second or subsequent subcase represents total (absolute) displacements or
incremental displacements (relative to the displacement at the end of the previous subcase). SPCD for the
first subcase is always total (absolute).
0 SPCD represents relative displacements (same as SPCR) for subcases 2 and above unless
PARAM,MARCTOTT,1 has been set, in which case the SPCD’s represent absolute
displacements.
1 SPCD represents absolute displacements for subcases 2 and above (relative displacements
for subcases 2 and above must be entered using SPCR).
Remarks:
2. PARAM,MRELSPCD,1 will automatically set PARAM,MARCTOTT,1 which means total loads
using table-driven input will be used in the analysis. This is the only way total (absolute)
displacements for subcases 2 and above can be used in Marc.
3. The behavior of SPCD prior to the MD Nastran 2010 release was to consider SPCD as relative
displacements for subcases 2 and above.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 877
MRENUELE
Default = -1 if parameter is not entered and MRENUELE is not entered on the SOL 600 statement,
SOL 600 only.
It is best if MRENUELE is specified in the SOL statement. Some models will not have memory allocated
properly if this parameter is placed in the bulk data.
-1 No renumbering will occur (suggested for models with largest element number less than
approximately 20000). (Default)
1 All elements will be renumbered and the new numbers will be used in the Marc analysis (see
Remark 4.)
2 All elements will be renumbered, the new numbers are used internally during translation however
the original element numbers will be used in the Marc input file and Marc analysis.
Remarks:
1. This parameter can be set in RC files or on the SOL 600 statement.
2. To use models where the maximum element number is greater than 9,999,999 this parameter must
be set on the SOL 600 statement (see MRENUELE on the SOL 600 statement).
3. MRENUELE should not be set both on the SOL 600 statement and as a parameter.
4. For MRENUELE=1 an equivalence list of original and re-numbered element numbers is output on
file elenum.txt.
MRENUGRD
Default = -1 if parameter is not entered and MRENUGRD is not entered on the SOL 600 statement,
SOL 600 only.
It is best if MRENUGRD is specified in the SOL statement. Some models will not have memory allocated
properly if this parameter is placed in the bulk data.
-1 No renumbering will occur (suggested for models with grid IDs less than approximately 20000).
(Default)
1 All grid IDs will be renumbered and the new numbers will be used in the Marc analysis (see
Remark 4.)
2 All grid IDs will be renumbered, the new numbers are used internally during translation however
the original element numbers will be used in the Marc input file and Marc analysis.
Remarks:
2. To use models where the grid ID is greater than 9,999,999 this parameter must be set on the SOL 600
statement (see MRENUGRD on the SOL 600 entry).
3. MRENUGRD should not be set both on the SOL 600 statement and as a parameter.
Main Index
4. For MRENUGRD=1 an equivalence list of original and re-numbered grid IDs is output on file
gridnum.txt.
MRENUMBR
Determines if both grid and element IDs for SOL 600 will be renumbered or not.
)
20000). (Default)
1 All grid and element IDs will be renumbered and the new numbers will be used in the Marc
analysis. An equivalence list will be output on file grdid.txt
2 All grid and element IDs will be renumbered internally during translation, however the original
element numbers will be used in the Marc input file and Marc analysis.
Remarks:
2. To use models where the grid ID is greater than 9,999,999 this parameter must be set on the SOL 600
entry (see MRENUMBR on the SOL 600 statement).
3. MRENUMBR should not be set both on the SOL 600 statement and as a parameter.
4. For MRENUMBR=1 an equivalence list of original and re-numbered grid IDs is output on file
gridnum.txt.
MRESTALL
Controls rotational restraints for solid element-only models.
0 SPCs for DOFs 4-6 will be ignored if entered in the Nastran file
1 SPCs for DOFs 4-6 will be included if entered in the Nastran file. (Default)
Note: This option might produce an input-data error in the Marc run but is sometimes required if
RBEs or other special items are included in the model.
MRESULTS
If MRESULTS is set to 3, postprocessing of a previously-generated Marc t16 file to a results-only op2 file
(normally called an f11 file) will be accomplished. OUTR=f11 and STOP=3 should also be set on the SOL
600 command line. This capability is available starting with MSC Nastran 2004.1.0. If MRESULTS=0 the
t16 file from the current job will be processed if requested by OUTR options on the SOL 600 statement.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 879
MREVPLST
Determines whether 2D plain stress triangular element node numbers will be reversed or not.
-1 or 0 Do not reverse the node numbers

1 Reverse the node numbers
MRFINITE
Controls Marc’s FINITE parameter. If entered, with an integer value of 1, Marc’s FINITE option will be
employed. If this option is entered, parameters MRFOLOW1, MRFOLOW3 and MARUPDAT should also
be entered. Other parameters to be considered are MARCDILT, MARCASUM and LGDISP.
MRFOLLOW
0 FORCE1, FORCE2, MOMENT1, MOMENT2 will act as non-follower forces. (Default)
1 Follower forces entered using FORCE1, FORCE2, MOMENT1, MOMENT2 will be
mapped to Marc’s new follower force option.
-1 Follower forces will be turned off even if requested to be on using other options. This is
sometimes necessary for multiple load cases where pressures are applied to different elements
in the different load cases.
MRFOLLO2
Controls whether Marc’s follow for, 2 is used when multiple subcases are present.
0 Marc’s follow for, 2 will not be used when multiple subcases are present. (Default)
1 Marc’s follow for, 2 will be used when multiple subcases are present
MRFOLOW1
Controls the second field of Marc’s follow for, N, M, L parameter (in this case, value N). If entered, options
1, 2, 3 and -1 are currently available. Enter:
0 If follower force due to distributed loads (pressure) is not to be considered.

1 If follower force stiffness due to distributed loads is not required.
2 If follower force stiffness due to distributed loads is to be included.
Main Index
3 If the follower force for distributed loads is based upon the displacement at the beginning of
the increment, as opposed to the last iteration.
-1 If the undeformed geometry is required but total values of distributed loads are to be used (not
presently available)
MRFOLOW3
Default = 0 for statics and 1 for dynamics.
Controls the 3rd field of Marc’s follow for, N, M, L parameter (in this case, value M). This parameter is
normally set internally by SOL 600 and should not normally be set by users, please see the following remarks.
Remarks:
1. Starting with MD Nastran 2010 and MSC Nastran 2009, MRFOLOW3 must be 1 for SOL 600
dynamics and if entered as zero for dynamics will be reset to 1. If the user enters dynamic loads using
MARCIN they should be in the form of total loads rather than incremental loads.
2. Starting with MD Nastran 2010 and MSC Nastran 2009, MRFOLOW3 must be 1 for SOL 600
statics if PARAM,MARCTOTL,1 is entered. IF PARAM,MRFOLOW3 is entered as zero when
PARAM,MARCTOTL,1 is entered, it will be reset to 1 if possible.
3. Starting with MD Nastran 2010 and MSC Nastran 2009, MRFOLOW3 must be 1 for SOL 600 if
PARAM,MARCTOTT,1 is entered. If PARAM,MRFOLOW3 is entered as zero when
PARAM,MARCTOTT,1 is entered, it will be reset to 1 if possible.
MRFOLOW4
SOL 600 only.
Controls the 4th field of Marc’s follow for N, M, L parameter (in this case, value L). This parameter is
normally set internally by SOL 600 and should not normally be set by users, please see the following remark.
0 If follower force for point loads is not required. (Default)

1 If follower force for point loads is to be considered.
Remark:
To activate follower forces (concentrated loads) PARAM,MRFOLOW,1 must be entered as well as the forces
using FORCE1, FORCE2, MOMENT1 and/or MOMENT2. PARAM,MRFOLOW4 should also be set to
one.
MRGAPUSE
Determines whether Nastran CGAP elements will be approximated as Marc gap elements. The default is to
fatal SOL 600 analyses if CGAP elements are found in the model.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 881
0 Do not translate Nastran models using Nastran CGAP elements.

1 Translate Nastran models using CGAP elements. Marc gap elements are quite different than
Nastran elements and usually can’t be translated. In a few limited cases the Nastran and Marc
gap elements are equivalent. It is up to the user to determine whether the gap Nastran elements
can be used with SOL 600 or not. It is suggested that the user read Marc Volume A and C and
run small test models to access each particular use of gaps. If gaps can be used, set
PARAM,MRGAPUSE,1 and re-run the analysis. See also MARCGAPP, MARCGAPN, and
MARCGAPD,.
MRHERRMN
This entry controls whether extra grid created for such items as hyperelastic Herrmann elements, CWELD,
et.c are output or not in the op2, f06, punch and/or xdb files. When Herrmann grids are output, the
displacement value is actually pressure which might be confusing when looking at an f06 file.
-1 Nodal output for extra grids is not provided.

1 Nodal output for extra grids is provided when the above files are requested. (Default)
MRHYPMID
0 Hyperelastic models with mid-side nodes will be translated to Marc including the mid-side
nodes. Such models might run quite slowly. (Default)
1 Hyperelastic models with mid-side nodes will be translated to Marc leaving out the mid-side
nodes. These models will normally run faster, but the displacements of the mid-side nodes will
be zero and thus plots might look strange unless the model without mid-side nodes is read into
the postprocessor using the .marc.dat or .t16 files.
MRITTYPE,
Type of “constraint” used to connect the auxiliary nodes in all CWELDs.
0 RBE3 constraints will be used. (Default)

44 Kirchhoff constraints will be used
80 Combined RBE2 and RBE3 constraints will be used.
Main Index
MRMAT8A3, Value
Value If solid composites are modeled using MAT8, the third coefficient of thermal expansion,
ALPHA3 is not defined. ALPHA3 is calculated as ALPHA3=value * ALPHA1.
MRMAT8E3, Value
Value If solid composites are modeled using MAT8, the third modulus, E3 is not defined. E3 is
calculated as E3=value * E1.
MRMAT8N1, Value
Value If solid composites are modeled using MAT8, NU31 is not defined. NU31 will be calculated
as NU31=value * NU12.
MRMAT8N3, Value
Value If solid composites are modeled using MAT8, the NU23 is not defined. NU23 is calculated
as NU23=value * NU12.
MRMAXISZ
Default = Value in Marc include file in tools directory. SOL 600 only.
If this value is entered, the integer value will be used on the command line to run Marc as -maxsize N where
N is the integer entered.
MRMAXNUM
Default = Value in Marc include file in tools directory. SOL 600 only.
If this value is entered, the integer value will be used on the command line to run Marc as -maxnum N where
N is the integer entered.
MRMEMSUM
If MRMEMSUM=1, a summary of memory used by the internal Nastran-to-Marc translator will be printed
in the f06 file. Each line will contain four numbers (all are in 4-byte words). The first number is the current
memory request, the second the current memory (in addition to standard MD Nastran open core), the third
is the memory limit with zero meaning no memory limit, and the fourth is the high water memory used so
far by the Nastran-to-Marc translator and/or the t160p2 results conversion.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 883
This parameter must be entered in the Case Control.

MRMTXKGG, Name
Name Character. The NAME will be used for K2GG entries if entered. This parameter is similar
to MRMTXNAM. Either MRMTXKGG or MRMTXNAM can usually be entered. The
proper Case Control K2GG=NAME or K2PP=NAME will be selected automatically by
SOL 600 as follows: If the continue option involves dynamic response analysis, K2PP will
be used. If the continue option involves eigenvalue extraction or static analysis, K2GG will
be used.
MRMTXNAM, Name
Name Character. The NAME (field 2 of the DMIG entry) that will be used for DMIG values in a
spawned Nastran execution. For example, a common name used frequently is K2XX. The
Case Control command K2PP=Name will be added (in this example K2PP=K2XX will be
added) at the end of the Case Control of the spawned job. DMIG entries with other names
may exist on the file, but only those with NAME will be used in the spawned execution.
Either MRMTXKGG or MRMTXNAM can usually be entered. The proper Case Control
K2GG=NAME or K2PP=NAME will be selected automatically by SOL 600 as follows: If
the continue option involves dynamic response analysis, K2PP will be used. If the continue
option involves eigenvalue extraction or static analysis, K2GG will be used.
MRNOCOMP
Determines whether n-layer composite will be created if CORDM is defined on the PSOLID entry. This
allows output in material coordinate systems.
-1 Composite are not created (automatically activated for brake squeal). (Default)
1 1-layer composites are created.
N N-layer composites are created.
Main Index
MRNOCOR
0 Marc parameters ELASTICITY, PLASTICITY, UPDATE, LARGE DISP, CONSTANT

DILATATION will be automatically adjusted as recommended by the Marc developers.
1 the above parameters will be adjusted as determined to be the most consistent in correlation
between Nastran and Marc results for similar problems. This parameter should be entered for
buckling problems without plasticity. PARAM,LGDISP,1 should also be entered.
MRNOECHO
Determines whether various outputs are placed in the Marc file.
0 Output is not suppressed (unless other entries are made to suppress it). (Default)
1 Suppress echo of nodes and element lists
2 Suppress echo of boundary conditions
3 Suppress echo of nurbs data
Note: Enter any combination to suppress whatever is desired. To suppress all items, enter 123.
MRORINTS
Controls orientation type for all solid elements in model (see Marc Volume C documentation,
ORIENTATION option).
1 Edge 1-2
2 Edge 2-3
3 Edge 3-4
4 Edge 3-1
5 Edge 4-1
6 XY Plane
7 YZ Plane
8 ZX Plane
9 XU Plane
10 YU Plane
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 885
11 ZU Plane
12 UU Plane
13 UORIENT Define transformation matrix with orient.f user subroutine
14 3D ANIO
91 Composite orientations will be Edge 1-2 for shells and 3D ANSO for solids and all non-
composites will use option 99. This option provides compatibility with earlier versions and
requires that all referenced coordinate systems by composite elements by rectangular.
99 All orientations are specified by coordinate systems (CORD2R, CORD2C, etc.). (Default)
101-112 Shell elements will have options 1-12, solid element will have option 14. (See Note 2)
Notes: 1. For solid composites, it is necessary to use the PSOLID entry as well as the PCOMP
entry. The PSOLID entry should normally have an entry in field 4 which specifies a
CORDi entry to use for the material alignment direction.
2. If option 101 is picked, shells will have edge 1-2 and solids will have 3D ANISO. If
option 102 is picked, shells will have edge 2-3 and solids will have 3D ANISO, etc.
MROUTLAY
Indicates which shell or composite layers are to be output using the MARCOUT Bulk Data entry or by
default. Options are as follows:
-9999 All layers will be output. (Default)

-N Layers 1 and abs(N) will be output. (N must not be -1.)
-1 If the number of layers is less than 21, same as -N option. If the number of layers is greater than
21, layers 1, 11, 21, 31, ..., N will be output.
0 Top and Bottom layers only will be output.
N Layers 1 through N will be output.
9999 Stresses at the element center only will be output (top and bottom are not output). This option
produces output with the assumption that the element has constant stress and strain
throughout the element.
Remarks:
1. Options -9999, -N, -1 and N also produce output at the element center.
2. MROUTLAY = 0 is the same as MROUTLAY = -1.
3. Do not enter this parameter if Bulk Data entry MLAYOUT is used.
Main Index
MRPARALL
Determines whether parallel processing for SOL 600 will be forced even if Nastran detects that it might fail
prior to spawning Marc.
0 Spawn Marc in single-processor mode if Nastran detects Marc may fail in DDM mode.
(Default)
1 Spawn Marc in DDM mode even if Nastran detects Marc may fail. Leave any COORD SYS
entries in the Marc input file. If COORD SYS occur in the input file a DDM Marc job may
fail depending on the version of Marc being used. Please read the following remark carefully
before using this option.
2 Spawn Marc in DDM mode even if Nastran detects Marc may fail. Remove all COORD SYS
entries from the Marc input file. Please read the following remark carefully before using this
option.
Remark:
Known situations where Marc does not presently work in parallel are as follows:
When local coordinate systems are specified for the following:

Field 7 of any GRID entry.
Material coordinate systems (for example field 8 of CQUAD4).
If CBUSH uses coordinate systems.
For the following cases, this situation can be avoided and PARAM,MRPARALL does not need to be entered:
If coordinate systems are used only for input (field 3 of the GRID entry) or just entered in the Nastran input
but not actually used, enter PARAM,MRCOORDS,1 to allow parallel processing to proceed.
If coordinate systems are only used for shell orientation (such as field 8 of CQUAD4) and if all such
coordinate systems are rectangular the following two parameters may be used to allow parallel processing.
PARAM,MRCOORDS,1
PARAM,MRORINTS,1
MRPBUSHT
Determines whether the requirement that when PBUSHT and contact occur in the same model, BCTABLE
must be specified for each subcase.
)
0 This requirement is enforced and the job will abort if BCTABLE’s are not entered
1 This requirement will be ignored and the job will proceed. Wrong results may occur and/or
the job may terminate later in the run.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 887
MRPIDCHK
Controls whether a check for duplicate PIDs (property IDs) will be made in SOL 600.
-1 Do not make a check for duplicate PIDs.

1 Check for duplicate PIDs for structural elements - if any are found fatal the job.
Remarks:
2. This parameter may be used in the MD Nastran 2010 and subsequent versions.
3. Duplicate PIDs will usually cause SOL 600 to fail or obtain the wrong results if the duplicates occur
for structural elements. It is usually acceptable to have a duplicate PID for a spring or damper and for
a structural element.
4. For versions prior to MD Nastran 2010, SOL 600 behaved as if PARAM,MRPIDCHK,-1 was set.
MRPELAST
Determines whether PELAST will be skipped or cause the job to abort for SOL 600. SOL 600 does not
support PELAST. PBUSHT along with CBUSH and PBUSH should be used instead.
-1 SOL 600 jobs with PELAST that are referenced by any CELAS will abort.
1 PELAST entries will be skipped (ignored).
MRPLOAD4
Determines whether continuation entry for PLOAD4 will cause the run to stop or if the continuation line(s)
are to be ignored.
0 The job will stop and a “Severe Warning” message will be issued.
1 The job will continue and the continuation lines will be ignored. A warning message will be
issued for the first few such entries.
2 CID, N1, N2, N3 and SOLR will be used. If SORL=LINE, the direction must be specified
using the CID, N1, N2, N3 fields for SOL 600. LDIR is ignored. (Default)
3 If any CSSHL elements are used, the pressures at the corners will be averaged and applied to the
entire element for all element types in the model.
Main Index
Remarks:
1. MRPLOAD4 should not be set to 2 for axisymmetric or plain strain analyses or if parallel processing
is used unless the “single file Marc input file” option is used. In some cases, but not all, if
MRPLOAD4=2 is set it will automatically be changed to zero one of these conditions exist.
2. See parameter MRPLOD4R for a companion control.
3. If any CSSHL elements are used, the pressures at the corners will be averaged and applied to the entire
element for all element types in the model.
MRPLOD4R
Determines how PLOAD4 pressures are treated in Marc when PARAM,MRPLOAD4,2 is set.
0 Pressures are treated as constant over the element if the pressure over the element varies, the
average is applied.
1 The Marc PLOAD4 style of loads is used which allows the pressures at the four corners of a
quad surface to be different.
Remark:
Versions of Marc including MDR3 and Marc 2008R1 and versions previous to these versions produce
incorrect results for some models using MRPLOD4R=1 if total loads (specified by PARAM,MARCTOTL,1
or MARCTOTT,1) are used even if the pressure is the same at the four corners of each quad element.
MRPLSUPD
Determines whether Marc’s PLASTICITY,3 will be used or not for fast integrated composites or smeared
composites. Wrong results may be obtained if PLASTICITY,3 is used for these types of analyses even if the
plasticity is in non-composite portions of the model (Default = 1 if this parameter is omitted).
-1 Use PLASTICITY,3 if it is necessary for non-composite regions of the model
1 Replace PLASTICITY,3 with UPDATE (FINITE and CONSTATN DIALITATION are not
used. (Default)
Remark:
SOL 600 determines if smeared composites are used by the presence or lack of the SMEAR word on the SOL
600,ID entry. Fast composites are determine if PARAM,MFASTCMP is set to 2 or 3 or if any PCOMPF
Bulk Data entries are present in the model.
MRPOISCK
Controls whether to check if a “bad” Poisson ratio has been entered in SOL 600 for MAT1 entries.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 889
0 Do not check or correct “bad” Poisson ratios.

1 Check if Poisson ratio is negative or > 0.5, if so change it to 0.333.
2 Check if Poisson ratio is negative or > 0.5, if so change MAT1 to MATORT with all three E
values, the same as E for MAT1, all three G values the same as G for MAT1 and
v12=v223=v31=0.333
Remarks:
1. Current Marc versions do not allow isotropic materials with Poisson ratios having negative values or
values greater than 0.5. Previous Marc versions may have allowed this.
2. “Bad” Poisson ratios may occur if the user specifies E and G and leaves the Poisson field on MAT1
blank.
3. If mrposick=1, the value of G will change. The value of E remains as originally specified.
4. If mrposick=0, the job will error out in the Marc phase of SOL 600.
5. This parameter is available starting the MD Nastran 2010.
MRPREFER
Determines to output SOL 600 stresses on the t16 file in the standard Marc coordinate system for the element
or the “preferred” (layer) coordinate system when the model contains composite elements.
0 Stresses are output in the standard coordinate for the element

1 Stresses are output in the “preferred” (layer) coordinate system. (Default)
Remarks:
1. The standard coordinate system for solids is usually the basic coordinate system. The standard
coordinate system for shells and beams is usually the element coordinate. See Marc documentation
volumes A and B for further details.
2. Some versions of Patran cannot plot stresses for MRPREFER=1.
MRPRSFAC
This parameter is primarily used by Versions of SOL 600 prior to MD Nastran R2 and MSC Nastran 2007
which could not support different pressures at the different corners, pressures applied in directions that are
not normal to a surface or edge loads. This parameter is not necessary starting with the MD Nastran R2 and
MSC Nastran 2007 Version 5 if PARAM,MRPLOAD4,2 is set.
Factor by which pressure loads are scaled for SOL 600. Prior to MD Nastran 2006 R1 and MSC Nastran
2006, Marc was not capable of handling different pressure applied to different corners of a surface. In other
words, different values of p1, p2, p3, p4 on the PLOAD4 entry could not be handled. Approximations can
be made by assuming the pressure is uniform over the surface if the surface is small enough. For SOL 600,
the pressure (P) used by Marc is calculated using the following:
Main Index
If p1 is not blank (or zero) regardless of the value of mrprsfac

P = p1
If mrprsfac is positive and p1 is blank or zero and one or more of p2, p3, or p4 are not zero or blank,
P=mrprsfac*(p1+p2+p3+p4) (This default if p2 or p3 or p4 are not zero or blank)
If mrprsfac is zero or negative,
If none of p1, p2, p3, p4 are blank or zero P=0.25*(p1+p2+p3+p4)
Otherwise,
p=(+/-)pp where pp is the value largest absolute value of p1, p2, p3, p4 and P will have the proper associated
sign.
Remarks:
1. If MRPLOAD4=2, MRPRSFAC is ignored and p1,p2,p3,p4 are used as entered.
2. If MRPLOAD4 is not 2, the default for mrprsfac varies from element to element. For each element
it is 1.0 divided by the number of Pi defined. For example, if only one of p1,p2,p3,p4 is defined, the
default mrprsfac is 1.0. If two of p1,p2,p3,p4 are defined, the default for mrprsfac is 0.5. If three are
defined the default is 0.33333 and if all four are defined the default is 0.25. When
PARAM,MRPRSFAC is entered, the value is the same for all elements with pressure specified by
PLOAD4.
Note: The default for mrpsfac varies from element to element. For each element it is 1.0 divided by
the number of Pi defined. For example, if only one of p1,p2,p3,p4 is defined, the default
mrprsfac is 1.0. If two of p1,p2,p3,p4 are defined, the default for mrpsfac is 0.5. If three are
defined the default is 0.33333 and if all four are defined the default is 0.25. When
PARAM,MRPRSFAC is entered, the value is the same for all elements with pressure specified
by pload4.
MRPSHCMP
If MRPSHELL=1 and there is a Marc PSHELL and composite for the same elements, this option controls
which will be used.
0 Use Marc composite and ignore Marc pshell. (Default)

1 Use Marc pshell and ignore Marc composite.
2 Do not make any corrections (this works for some models and fails for others)
MRPSHELL
Used to control shell property specifications for Marc in SOL 600.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 891
0 Classical GEOMETRY options will be used for all shell elements. (Default)
1 The Marc PSHELL option will be used, (can only be used with CQUAD4, CQUAD8,
CTRIA3, and CTRIA6).
Important: If MRPSHELL=1, shell elements will use Marc’s new PSHELL option. No materials used by
PSHELL may be referenced by other types of elements that this option has used. For
commonly used elements, duplicate materials will automatically be created by SOL 600 to
satisfy this criteria, however this can take considerable computer time. If the user knows that
no materials are used by both PSHELL and other properties, he can set
PARAM,MRDUPMAT,-1 to bypass the checking and creation for duplicate materials. To
speed up this process, set PARAM,MSPEEDPS,1. The Marc PSHELL formulation is more
stable if MID3=MID2. To set MID3=MID2, set PARAM,MARCMID3,1.
MRRBE3TR
Controls whether all translations or all translation and rotations will be used for the reference degrees of
freedom or whether fewer than 3 are allowed.
0 Fewer then 3 reference degrees-of-freedom may be used. (Default)

3 All RBE3’s with REF C (field 5 of the RBE3 entry) not having 123 will have all translations for
the Marc REFC (field 5 of the Marc RBE3 entry) set to 123.
6 All RBE3’s with REF C (field 5 of the Nastran RBE3 entry) not having 123456 will have all
translations and rotationf or the Marc REFC (field 5 of the Marc RBE3 entry) set to 123456.
Remarks:
1. Marc frequently gives a singular tying message if there are not at least degrees of freedom 123 for
REFC. This sometimes results in poor singularity ratios and incorrect results for nonlinear analyses.
It also can prevent eigenvalues from being calculated.
2. It is recommended that option 3 or 6 be used for all SOL 600 analyses unless the user is certain that
REFC can have fewer then three dof’s for the particular analysis.
MRRCFILE, RCF
RCF Character. Name of RCF file name (limited to 8 characters) used in conjunction with
another MSC Nastran run spawned from an original MSC Nastran run as specified by the
CONTINUE option on the SOL 600 command. The RCF file may contain any
information required (such as scratch=yes, exe=, etc.) as discussed in Executing MSC Nastran, 2
of this guide. This rcf file does not have to use the same options as the primary rcf file and
should normally set batch=no as one of the options.
Main Index
MRRELNOD
Controls enforced displacements using SPCD.
0 For multiple subcases with SPCDs, the SPCDs from the previous subcase will be released at
the start of the current subcase.
1 SPC’s and SPCD’s from the previous subcase, not specified again in the current subcase, will
be released gradually during the current subcase.
-1 SPC’s and SPCD’s from the previous subcase, not specified again in the current subcase, will
be subtracted out. For example, if the previous subcase applied a SPCD of 0.1 to a particular
dof, the current subcase will apply -1.0. This will bring the displacement of that dof to zero
for the current subcase.
MRRSTOP2
Integer, Normally op2, xdb, punch and f06 output is not available for SOL 600 restart analyses. Setting this
parameter to 1 will allow the program to attempt to create one or more of these files. Only in limited cases
will the job be successful.
0 Do not attempt to create .0p2, xdb, punch, f06 output for restart runs (default if parameter is
not entered). (Default)
1 Attempt to create .op2, xdb, punch, f06 output as specified by other options.
MRSCMOD
Solution scaling factor for linear buckling analysis (SOLs 600, 105) using the Lanczos method. If the applied
load in the first subcase is too large, the Lanczos procedure may fail. This number may be used to scale the
solution for numerical reasons. The collapse load will be output based upon the total load applied.
Remark:
This parameter applies to rigid surfaces described using 4-node patches only.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 893
MRSETNA1, N
Default = Program calculated, SOL 600 only.
N If this parameter is entered with N>0, the integer value entered will be used in Marc’s
SETNAME parameter section as the first value of SETNAME,N,M which is an
undocumented Marc option. N is the number of sets and M is the largest number of items
in any set. This entry is sometimes necessary if large lists of elements or nodes are used to
describe materials, properties or contact. Both MRSETNA1 and MRSETNA2 must be
included for either to take effect. This option is no longer required for MSC Nastran 2005
r2 and subsequent releases.
MRSETNA2, M
Default = Program calculated, SOL 600 only.
M If this parameter is entered with M>0, the integer value entered will be used in Marc’s
SETNAME parameter section as the second value of SETNAME,N,M which is an
undocumented Marc option. N is the number of sets and M is the largest number of items
in any set. This entry is sometimes necessary if large lists of elements or nodes are used to
describe materials, properties or contact. Both MRSETNA1 and MRSETNA2 must be
included for either to take effect. This option is no longer required for MSC Nastran 2005
r2 and subsequent releases.
MRSETNAM, N
Integer, Default = Program calculated, SOL 600 only.
N If this parameter is entered with N>0, the value entered will be used in Marc’s SETNAME
parameter section. This entry is sometimes necessary if large lists of elements or nodes are
used to describe materials, properties or contact. To get around a Marc bug, if a computed
setname value is large, Nastran will normally use the undocumented form (see
MRSETNA1). To prevent this, set N to -1.
Main Index
MRSPAWN2, CMD
Default = Nastran, SOL 600 only.
CMD Character. Name a command to run D Nastran (limited to 8 characters single field or 16 for
large field) used in conjunction with the CONTINUE options on the SOL 600 command.
The Nastran run to be spawned will have the form:
CMD jid.nast.dat rcf=RCF

where file RCF is provided by PARAM,MRRCFILE,RCF. As an example, if CMD is
nastran, jid is myjob (original file myjob.dat) and RCF=nast.rc, the spawned run will execute
using:
nastran myjob.nast.dat rcf=nast.rc
Notes: 1. See PARAM*,HEATCMD for SOL 600 thermal contact heat transfer analysis.
2. CMD will be converted to lower case regardless of the case entered.
MRSPLINE
Determines whether RSPLINE will be converted to CBAR or to MPC’s.
-1 RSPLINE will ignored (this option should only be used for model checkout)
1 RSPLINE will be converted to stiff CBAR elements
2 RSPLINE will be converted to MPC’s (Marc’s servo link) using the same equations used by
other Nastran solutions, except that the MPC’s are capable of large rotation. This option
requires somewhat longer translation times than the others but can save computer time
during the Marc execution phase. (Default)
MRSPRING
Specifies a stiffness value to be added to the main diagonal of each translational term of the stiffness matrix.
This option is useful in nonlinear static analysis with 3D contact of two or more separate structures. Some
of the pieces may not be grounded until contact occurs. By adding a small spring to ground, such as K=1.0,
these pieces are stabilized until contact occurs. This option applies to SOL 600 only and generates SPRINGS
in the Marc input file for all nodes in the model and all three translational degrees-of-freedom. IF K is entered
as a negative number, the absolute value of K will be added to all 6 degrees of freedom of each grid in the
model.
If the run is for heat transfer and K is positive, the spring will only be added to DOF 1.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 895
MRSPRVER
Integer, Default = -1, SOL 600 only
Controls how CELAS and all other items map to the Marc input data.
0 Non-table form is used which generally means the Marc input file version is less than 11.
11 The table form for SPRINGS is used which requires two lines, the first with spring rates and
the second with table ID’s. PARAM,MRSPRVER,11 is usually required if
PARAM,MRCONVER,11 is entered.
MRSTEADY
Controls the solution method for SOL 600 steady state heat transfer.
1 Marc STEADY STATE is used with TIME STEP of 1.0. (Default)

2 AUTO STEP is used.
MRT16STP, N
Enter in Case Control at the subcase level.
N Number of load increments to put on the t16/t19 files for each subcase when the AUTO
STEP method is used. The default of 0 puts all adaptive increments on the t16/t19 file. If
a value of N is entered, load steps for times=tmax/N will always be introduced into the auto
stepping process and the t16/t19 files will have outputs only at zero and those times. This
corresponds to field 1 of Marc’s AUTO STEP 2nd option and can also be set using the
NLAUTO option. If this is the only non-default NLAUTO variable to set, it is more easily
accomplished using this parameter. It is suggested that this parameter always be used for
large models and that N be 10 or greater, otherwise the size of the t16/t19 files may become
very large. This is especially important for Windows systems, which presently has a 4GB
limit in converting t16 to op2 files due to compiler limitations.
MRTABLIM
Determines the maximum number or points in any TABLES1 used when tables are specified or MATHE
input.
-1 Unlimited, not recommended - If used could lead to numerical errors or program aborts
0 The limit is 500 points.
N The limit is set to N points. It is recommended that N does not exceed 500.
Main Index
Remark:
If more than about 500 points are used for the tables, the curve filling processes used to determine the
material constants may encounter numerical errors and the program could abort. If a table with more than
the number points specified by this parameter is entered, the number of points will be reduced to the specified
limit so that numerical errors are unlikely to occur.
MRTABLS1
TABLES1 stress-strain curves are converted to Marc WORK HARD stress-plastic strain curves according to
the following formulas for the value entered for MRTABLS1. In the formulas s is the stress entered for
TABLES1, e is the strain entered in TABLES1, S is the Marc WORK HARD stress and E is the Marc WORK
HARD Plastic strain. ey is the yield strain (sy/E) where EE is Young’s modulus, sy is the yield stress. The
first point of the Nastran curve will be skipped unless MRTABLS2 is set to 1.
0 (Default) S=s
E=e - ey
1 S=s(1+e)
E=ln(e+1)
2 S=s
E=e - s/E
3 S=s(1+e)
E=ln(1+e) - s/EE
4 S=s
E=e
5 S=s
E=ln(1+e)
6 S=s
E=ln(1+e-s/E)
7 S=s(1+e)
E=1n(1+e)-S/EE
8 S=s(1+E)
E=In(1+e)
9 S=s(1+E)
E=In(1+e)-In(1+ey)
Note: This parameter (like any other parameter) can only be entered once in an input file.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 897
MRTABLS2
0 TABLES1 stress-strain curves are converted to Marc WORK HARD stress-plastic strain
curves starting with the yield point. The first point will be skipped. (Default)
1 All points in TABLES1 will be connected to WORK HARD, however, the first plastic strain
will be set to zero if entered as non-zero.
Note: This parameter (like any other parameter) can only be entered once in an input file.
MRTABPRC
Determines the precision of stress-strain curves when translated from Nastran to Marc using SOL 600.
0 Standard precision (8 significant figures) is used.
1 Maximum precision (14 significant figures) is used.
Remarks:
1. This parameter is available starting with the 2010 entry. For MD Nastran 2010 it only applies to
stress-strain curves entered in conjunction with MATEP.
2. Prior to MD Nastran 2010, only option zero was available.
3. In most cases, the stress-strain values are not known to even 8 significant figures. However, if the
stress-strain is calculated from other data the extra precision might be useful.
MRTFINAL
SOL 600 only.
Real. In some dynamic problems, due to numerical roundoff an extra time step with very small initial and
final times is generated. If these times are too small, Marc sometimes will diverge even though the “final time”
actually desired by the user has been reached within reasonable accuracy. MRTFINAL is a value below which
this extra step will be eliminated to prevent excess computations and/or possible divergence. If this parameter
is not entered, the default value is 1.0E-8. This parameter is only used with the AUTO STEP procedure. The
‘extra’ step will also be eliminated if the initial time step is less then MRTFINAL/100.0.
MRTHREAD
Determines the number of threads to be used by the run. For multi-core processors speed can frequently be
gained by specifying a number of threads equal to the number of cores assuming the job has exclusive use of
the machine.
Main Index
1 Use 1 thread.
2 Use 2 threads.
N Use N threads.
Remarks:
1. This parameter may only be used by solver types 8 (multifrontal direct sparse) and 11 (Pardiso).
2. This parameter may be combined with PARAM,MARPROCS to use several processors each using
several threads.
MRTIMING
If MRTIMING is 1, timing summaries for various portions of the internal Marc translator will be provided
in the f06 and log files.
MRTSHEAR
By default, parabolic shear deformation is not included in the formulation of beam and shell elements if there
are no composite elements. If composite shell elements are present, parabolic shear deformation is included
by default. This parameter can be used to override these defaults.
1 Parabolic shear deformation is included in the formulation of beam and shell elements.
-1 or 0 Parabolic shear deformation is not included even if composite elements are present.
(Default)
Remark:
This parameter maps to Marc TSHEAR parameter.
MRUSDATA
Determines whether user subroutine USDATA will be activated and if so the size of data.
0 User subroutine USDATA is not active in the current run. (Default)
N User subroutine USDATA will be active the in the current run and N is the number or real*4
words needed for the data stored in common block /usdam/
Remark:
In addition to adding this parameter, the user must enter USDATA on Bulk Data entry USRSUB6.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 899
MRVFIMPL
Controls the fraction of the maximum view factor that is to be treated implicitly (contribute to operator
matrix). View factor values smaller than this cutoff are treated explicitly.
MRV09V11
Determines whether certain Marc “features” which are default in Marc “version 11” are added for SOL 600-
generated models that use “version 9”.
-1 Do not add the features.

1 Add the following features:
feature,4703 to speed up DDM jobs for one-processor jobs, it has no effect)
feature,5701 to disable old rigid rotation checking which was too stringent
feature,601 to improve contact
feature,5301 to improve deformable-deformable contact
feature,3201 to improve contact friction types 6 and 7‘
feature,5601 to improve thickness updating when the updated Lagrange method is used
feature5801 to improve in-plane bending of advance nonlinear element type 140
feature,6001 to improve concrete cracking analysis
Note: The above features are only used for certain problems, even though all are included with the
default option, they have no effect on models that do not use advance nonlinear element type
140, feature 601 has no effect on models that do not have contact, etc.
MSIZOVRD
Default = -1, for small models and +1 for large models, SOL 600 only.
Determines whether Marc SIZING values for large models will be updated or not. Nastran includes Marc
directories with a file named “include” in the tools directory which includes a line MAXNUM=N, where N
is some value like 1000000. If the maximum number of nodes or elements in the model exceeds N, memory
overwrites or job aborts are possible unless either N is set larger than the actual max node or element number
in the model or the values are specified on the SIZING entry (field 3 for max element and field 4 for max
node).
-1 The sizing entry will not be updated (either the model is not large, MAXNUM in the include
file has been updated or parameters such as MARCSIZ3 and/or MARCSIZ4 have been entered
into the run to provide values that are large enough. (Default)
1 If the number of nodes or elements in the model exceeds 1,000,000 the sizing entry will be
updated to the max number of nodes and elements actually in the model. Extra nodes and or
elements to account for welds, pinned members, Herrmann elements, etc. will be included.
Main Index
Note: For PARAM,MSIZOVRD large models are considered to be those with more than 1,000,000
nodes and/or elements.
MSOLMEM, MBYTE
Default = Program determined value, SOL 600 only.
MBYTE If entered, the integer value entered here is the 8th field of Marc’s SOLVER option, and is
the maximum memory in Mega Bytes that can be used by Marc’s solver types 6 (hardware
provided direct) and 8 (multi-frontal direct, which is the default solver for SOL 600) before
going out of core. This parameter is the same as the MBYTE field on the NLSTRAT entry
any may be easier to enter as a parameter if no other NLSTRAT values are needed.
Note: This parameter should only be entered if NLSTRAT entries are not required. If any
NLSTRAT entries are made, use the MBYTE field instead of this parameter.
MSPCCCHK
Effects multiple subcases where SPCD’s are applied and SPC’s potentially change between the subcases..
0 A comprehensive check is made to ensure that all SPC changes are accounted for all subcases.
1 The check is not made. The check can take significant computer time and in most cases it is not
actually needed. If the user knows it is not needed, computer time can be saved by turning it off.
Remarks:
1. This parameter is available starting with MD Nastran 2010.
2. This parameter may be set in rc files.
MSPCKEEP
Determines which SPC’s entered in the bdf file are retained in the Marc input file for 2D models.
0 Only retain those dof ’s that are normally associated with the type of 2D analysis (normally 2
translations) (Default)
1 Retain all dof entered in the bdf file in the Marc input file.
Remark:
Some types of Marc 2D analyses support one rotation in addition to two translations and it is important to
restrain this rotation.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 901
MSPEEDCB
Determines whether CBEAM increased speed options are to be applied. This option may be necessary for
models with a large number of beams whose element IDs are large.
-1 No increased speed options are used for CBEAM. (Default)

1 cbeam.prp file will be standard unformatted rather than direct access. A small table to provide
the location of each entry is saved in memory.
2 The entire cbeam.prp file is saved in memory
Note: See param,marccbar,1 to change CBAR to CBEAM.
MSPEEDCW
Determines whether CWELD elements will be translated to Marc in core (for increased speed) or out of core.
This parameter is needed if many CWELD elements are present in the model to avoid large translation times.
0 Processed out of core. (Default)

1 Process in core.
MSPEEDOU
Determines whether speed enhancements are activated for the t16op2 conversion.
0 Speed enhancements are not activated.

1 Speed enhancements are activated which will place certain scratch data in memory. For large
models make sure enough memory is available (if PARAM,MSPEEDSE and/or
PARAM,MSPEEDP4 are used, there is probably sufficient memory unless there is a large
number of output “time” points. (Default)
MSPEEDP4
Determines whether PLOAD4 entries will be translated to Marc in core (for increased speed) or out of core.
1 PLOAD4 will be processed in core.

-1 PLOAD4 will be processed out of core. (Default)
Main Index
Note: The MSPEEDP4=1 option may require more memory than is available on certain computers
for large models. Do not use if CWELD elements are present.
MSPEEDPS
Determines whether additional memory will be used if the Marc PSHELL option is invoked
(PARAM,MRPSHELL,1) or smear option on SOL 600,ID in order to speed up processing. This will be
beneficial if there are many materials and properties in the model and not very beneficial if all elements use
just a few properties and materials.
-1 No additional memory will be used. (Default)

1 Additional memory will be used if available.
MSPEEDSE
Determines whether speed enhancements are activated using extra memory and/or special low level I/O
routines.
-1 No speed enhancements will be activated. (Default)

1 Solid elements 2D elements data will be processed in core.
2 All elements will be processed in core.
3 2D and 3D elements will be processed in core, 1D elements will be processed using bioxxx (low
level direct access routines used by gino).
Note: The MSPEEDSE=1 option may require more memory than is available on certain computers
for large models. MSPEEDSE > 0 should not be used for 64-bit integer versions of Nastran or
DEC Alpha computer systems.
MSPEEDS2
Determines whether additional memory will be used when PARAM,MSPEEDSE with options 1, 2, 3 is
entered to obtain additional speed.
-1 Additional memory will not be used. (Default)

1 Additional memory will be used and additional speed will usually be obtained.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 903
MSPEEDSH
Determines whether additional speed enhancements will be used to process shell/plate elements (CQUAD4,
CTRIA3, etc.) using incore memory.
-1 No additional speed enhancements are used. (Default)

1 Additional speed in-core enhancements will be used. Sufficient memory must be available. If not,
the job will abort with an appropriate message.
Note: This parameter should only be used if shell speed enhancements are selected with one of the
PARAM,MSPEEDSE options.
MSPLINC0
Integer, Default = 0, SOL 600. For SOL 400, MSPLINC0 =1 is always used.
This parameter controls whether to enforce C0 continuity for all spline options if any are requested by setting
IDSPL=1 on any BCBODY entry.
0 C0 continuity is not enforced.

1 C0 continuity is enforced.
MSTFBEAM
Determines if all rigid elements (RBE2, RBE3, RBAR, RTRPLT) will be converted to stiff beams. This
parameter should only be used if PARAM,MARMPCHK and/or PARAM,AUTOMSET options fail during
a Marc execution.
1 All rigid elements will be converted to stiff beams or plates after they have initially been formed
in the Marc file as RBE2 or RBE3 elements. All 6 dof ’s at each end of the rigid beam will be used.
2 All rigid elements will be converted to stiff beams or plates after they have initially been formed
in the Marc file as RBE2 or RBE3 elements. Pin codes specified by the original Nastran rigid
elements will be used when possible.
Remark:
See PARAM,MARCSCLR to specify a scale factor for the “Default” properties of these stiff beams.
MSTRFREE
Main Index
Determines whether the nodal coordinates in the GEOM1 datablock of SOL 600 OOP2 files will have the
original coordinates or revised stress-free coordinates.
0 GEOM1 will have the original coordinates (same as defined on GRId entries)
1 GEOM1 will have modified coordinates to enforce stress-free conditions if applicable
Remarks:
1. ICOORD on the BCTABLE with ID=0 entry must be set to 1 or 3 for at least one slave-master
combination.
2. The parameter only addresses op2 files (t16 and t19 files automatically use MSTRFREE=1)
3. This capability is available starting with MD Nastran 2010. Prior version always used
MSTRFREE=0.
MSTTDYNE
Controls whether SOL 600 may have static and dynamic load cases in the same analysis.
0 All subcases must either be static or dynamic

1 Mixed static and dynamic load cases are allowed.
Remarks:
1. Use of this entry requires SOL 600,106 or SOL 600,NLSTATIC (not SOL 600,NLTRAN).
2. Do not enter , DLOAD, LOADSET, LSEQ, TLOADi in the Case Control or Bulk Data.
3. Each subcase must have NLAUTO entries. Whether the subcase is static or dynamic is controlled by
IFLAG on each NLAUTO entry. For static subcases IFLAG=3 and for dynamic subcases IFLAG=0.
4. All loads in each subcase build up from an initial value at the end of the previous subcase to the full
value entered on the various load-type entries (such as FORCE, PLOAD4, SPCD, etc.) at the end of
the subcase. Time histories for individual load cases are not allowed with this parameter. If all loads
for a particular subcase use the same time history, this subcase may be divided into N-1 smaller
subcases where N is the number of points on the time history curve. For this situation, the loads for
each smaller subcase should be scaled by the amplitude of each point on the time history curve. This
technique may also be used to simulate force vs. time for an analysis with all static subcases.
5. When MSTTDYNE=1, the following will automatically be added to the Bulk Data:
marcin,-1,0,dynamic,6
param,marcauov,0
These two entries may be added by the user in place of PARAM,MSTTDYNE,1 however both
should not be done.
MTABIGNR
Determines whether tables for VCCT analyses will be ignored or used.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 905
-1 VCCT tables are not used

0 VCCT tables are used. (Default)
Remark:
Use of tables for VCCT SOL 600 2D analyses with contact is not supported. If the table variation is not
important, this parameter may be used to obtain an approximate solution.
MTABLD1M
Option to modify or not modify all TABLED1 entries which do not start with the first point of (0.0, 0.0).
-1 Do not modify any TABLED1 entries

1 Modify all TABLD1 entries that do not start with (0.0, 0.0). (Default)
Remark:
See PARAM,MTABLD1T.
MTABLD1T
Specifies the second time value of all TABLED1 entries that do not start with the first point being (0.0, 0.0)
if PARAM,MTABLD1M=1. Modified tables will start with the first point of (0.0, 0.0), the second point will
be at the time specified by this parameter with an amplitude of the original first amplitude. The 3rd point
will be at time 2*MTABLD1T and amplitude of the original first amplitude.
Remark:
The proper value of MTABLD1T to enter to analyze a step input depends on the fundamental natural
frequency of the model. If MTABLD1T is too small, the response will not fully build up and if it is too large,
it will act like a ramp input rather than a step. The best value to use is approximately 0.1/fn, where fn is the
first linear natural frequency in Hz.
MTEMPCHK
Controls how temperature-dependent properties are checked in the Marc portion of SOL 600.
0 Check at zero degrees only. (Marc feature 9601)

1 Check at all temperatures, stop checking and fatal the job when the first problem is found.
(Marc feature 9600)
2 Check at all temperatures and report all problems, then fatal the job if any problems were
found. (Marc feature 9602)
Main Index
Remarks:
1. This parameter is available starting with MD Nastran 2010.
2. The default in Marc previously was feature 9601.
3. The default in SOL 600 is different than in Marc. The default in Marc is 9600.
4. Checking in Marc will occur from the lowest temperature of any curve to the highest of any curve.
Thus, to ensure that all curves pass, define all curves from the lowest temperature of any curve to the
highest temperature of any curve (even though one particular curve can never reach the lowest or
highest temperature specified on another curve).
5. features,960i will be entered if any TABLEMi or TABL3Di are found.
MTEMPDWN
Option to automatically choose the FeFp multiplicative decomposition plasticity model
(PARAM,MARCPLAS,5) for plasticity problems with thermal loading when the temperature decreases (see
PARAM,MARCPLAS).
-1 Use the standard mean normal with large strain method unless PARAM,MARCPLAS is entered.
(Default)
1 Attempt to determine whether the temperature at the start of the run is lower than the initial
temperature, and if so choose the FeFp method.
Remarks:
1. For some problems with very soft materials, the FeFp method is required to achieve convergence for
plasticity cases where the temperature decreases during the early stages of the run. Since most users
would not know this, PARAM,MTEMPDWN is offered to automatically let Nastran decide to
invoke this method or not.
2. The FeFp method takes substantially more computer time than the default mean normal method.
3. This parameter can be entered in RC files if it is desired to be used for a large number of runs.
MTET4HYP
Controls settings for TET4 elements with hyperelasticity.
0 Use Marc element 157 which uses the Herrmann formulation.

1 Use Marc element 134 and automatically set PARAM,MARUPDAT,1
Remarks:
1. MTET4HYP=1 should normally only be set if any tet4 elements use MATHE or MATHP and if one
or more of the grids in such tet4 have field 7 set to a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system.
2. If Remark 1 does not apply, MTET4HYP=0 is more accurate, although it is highly recommended
that tet10 elements be used for all SOL 600 models which will be even more accurate.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 907
MTLD1SID
Integer, Default = -1 for SOL 600
Determines whether the SID of TLOAD1s entered in the input will be changed or not. (SOL 600 only)
-1 Do not change the SID of any TLOAD1 entry

0 Change the SID of all TLOAD1s to match the lowest SID of any TLOAD1 found in the original
input.
N Change the SID of all TLOAD1s to the value N.
Remark:
This parameter may only be set in the input file.
MUALLUDS
Controls how material, contact and element-related user subroutines are specified in SOL 600.
0 User subroutines are entered using the MATUSR entry (material), contact-related (BCBODY,
BCTABLE, etc.) or element entries as well as the USRSUB6 entry.
1 User subroutines are entered using the MATUDS, BCONDUDS and/or ELEMUDS. They
should not be specified on MATUSR. BCxxx, element entries or by using the USRSUB6 entry.
Remark:
For version prior to MD Nastran 2010 only option 0 was available.
MULRFORC
Option to activate multiple RFORCE entries for different portions of The model in the same subcase.
-1 Do not allow this capability (only one RFORCE entry for subcase can be entered). (Default)
1 Allow multiple RFORCE entries for each subcase
MUMPSOLV
This can also be set by the Bulk Data entry PARAMARC.
1 Use 1 processor.
2 Use 2 processor.
N Use N processor.
Main Index
Remarks:
1. This parameter may only be used by solver the MUMPS solver (solver type 12).
2. The PARAMARC Bulk Data entry cannot specify this type of parallel processing.
MUSBKEEP
0 If user subroutines are included, they are compiled and linked to form a new version of Marc
if MUSBKEEP=0, the new version of Marc will be deleted at the end of the run. (Default)
1 The new Marc executable will be saved on disk in the same directory as the Nastran input file.
Its name will be the name used in PARAM,MARCUSUB with the extension marc.
MVERMOON
Controls whether 5-term Mooney series or 5-constant Mooney will be used in the Marc portion of SOL 600.
0 5-constant Mooney formulation will be used.

1 5-term series Mooney formulation will be used.
Remark:
Prior to MD Nastran 2010, the Marc only allowed a 5-constant Mooney formulation with no volumetric
terms. Now Marc allows a full 5-term series for both distortional and volumetric behavior for both MATHP
and MATHE entries. If a version of Marc prior to this is to be used, set param,mvermoon,0 or use the default.
MWINQUOT
Determines whether SOL 600 run on Windows will attempt to place quote strings in the command to
execute Marc when PATH is not specified on the SOL 600 Executive Control statement.
0 Attempt to place quote strings around various fields.
1 Do not place any quote strings.
Remarks:
1. Quotes are normally only required if spaces are needed in the file names or directory names.
2. This parameter may be placed in rc files.
3. Depending on the complexity of the command to execute Marc, quote strings may sometimes be
incorrect. If the command is complex, it is suggested that PATH=1 be placed on the SOL 600
Executive statement and the statement to execute Marc be placed in the marcrun.pth file.
MWLDGSGA
Integer, Default = 1, SOL 600.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 909
Controls CWELD type ELEMID GS, GA, GB usage in SOL 600.
0 When GS, GA and GB are all greater than zero for CWELD type ELEMID, Marc ignores GS
and uses GA and GB to determine if a connection is possible. MWLDGSA=0 retains this
default behavior, however experience shows that some models will fail with a message that the
weld connection could not be achieved.
1 This option will re-set GA and GB to zero so that GS will be used to achieve the connection.
Experience shows that this option may be more reliable for many models with CWELD type
ELEMID.
MXICODE0
Default = 5
In nonlinear harmonic response analysis, if the solution fails to converge more than MXICODE0 times in
succession, a new trial displacement vector is calculated.
MXLAGM1
Default = 0.0
MXLAGM1 is to override the maximum Lagrange Multiplier that is used by the merit function in Trust
Region.
NASPRT
Default = 0
NASPRT specifies how often data recovery is performed and printed in SOL 200. By default, SOL 200, in
addition to performing an analysis and optimization, will perform full data recovery operations at the first
design cycle and upon completion of the last design cycle.
If NASPRT > 0, then data recovery operations are performed at the first design cycle; at every design cycle
that is a multiple of NASPRT; and the last design cycle. For example, if PARAM,NASPRT,2 and the
maximum number of design iterations requested is 5, then data recovery is obtained at design iterations 1, 2,
4, and 5.
If NASPRT < 0, then no data recovery operations are performed.
Main Index
NDAMP, NDAMPM
NDAMP:
Default = 0.01 for SOLs 129 and 159, -0.05 for SOL 400 heat transfer and mechanical non-contact analysis,
0.0 for SOL 400 contact.
NDAMPM:
Default = 0.0 for SOL 400 non-contact, 1.0 for SOL 400 contact. Not used for SOL 400 heat transfer.
NDAMP/NDAMPM:
In SOLs 129 and 159, numerical damping may be specified for the METHODS =“ADAPT” on the entry
through the NDAMP entry in order to achieve numerical stability. A value of zero for NDAMP requests no
numerical damping. The recommended range of NDAMP values is from 0.0 to 0.1.
SOL 400 Mechanical: In SOL 400, numerical damping may be specified for all METHODS (ADAPT, FNT,
etc. on the entry. NDAMP and NDAMPM are two parameters that control the damping scheme and thee
associated dynamic operator. The equilibrium equation for the most general operator (the Generalized- α
operator) is given by
int ext
Mu··n + 1 + α + Cu· n + 1 + α + F n + 1 + α = F n + 1 + α
m f f f
where α m is NDAMPM and α f is NDAMP. In the previous equation, a typical quantity F n + 1 + α is given by
the expanded form
F n + 1 + α = ( 1 + α )F n + 1 – αF n
Depending on the values of NDAMP and NDAMPM, the equilibrium equations can reduce to the HHT-
α scheme (NDAMPM = 0) or the WBZ- α scheme (NDAMP = 0) or the Generalized- α scheme
( NDAMPM ≠ 0 , NDAMP ≠ 0 ). For the HHT- α scheme, NDAMP can vary in the range of
– 0.33 ≤ NDAMP ≤ 0.0 . For the WBZ- α scheme, NDAMPM can vary in the range of 0.0 ≤ NDAMPM ≤ 1.0 . For
the Generalized- α scheme, NDAMP can vary in the range of – 0.5 ≤ NDAMP ≤ 0.0 and NDAMPM in the
range of – 0.5 ≤ NDAMPM ≤ 1.0 .
For problems involving no contact, the HHT- α is used in SOL 400 with default NDAMP = -0.05 and
NDAMPM = 0.0 except that the model is linear, or no mass and no damping matrix. In this case, the defaults
are NDAMP = 0.0 and NDAMPM = 0.0. For problems involving contact, the WBZ- α scheme is used in
SOL 400 with default NDAMPM = 1.0 and NDAMP = 0.0
SOL 400 Heat Transfer: Numerical damping may be specified through the value of NDAMP only.
NDAMPM is not used. NDAMP can be varied in the range of (-2.414,0.414). At these outer limits, the
transient scheme reduces to the Backward-Euler method. Any value that is outside this range is automatically
reset to the closest outer limit. For NDAMP = 0.0, the transient scheme reduces to the Crank-Nicholson
scheme. The default value of NDAMP is -0.05.
SOL 400 Thermo-Mechanical Coupled Analysis: If NDAMP and NDAMPM are unspecified, then the
default that is appropriate for the particular sub-step is used. For e.g., for a coupled transient contact problem,
NDMAP = -0.05 during the heat transfer sub-step and NDAMP = 0.0, NDAMPM = 1.0 during the
mechanical sub-step. If the values of NDAMP and NDAMPM are specified by the user in the Bulk Data
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 911
Section, then these values would be applicable for both the thermal and mechanical sub-steps. To make the
values of the NDAMP/NDAMPM physics-dependent, the user can define the values under each sub-step of
the Case Control Section. E.g.,
SUBSTEP 1
ANALYSIS=HTRAN
PARAM,NDAMP,-2.414
SUBSTEP 2
ANALYSIS=NLTRAN
PARAM,NDAMP,-0.05
PARAM,NDAMPM,0.0
NEWMARK
Default = NO
NFDOPTS
Default = 2
PARAM, NFDOPTS, 2 computes frequency dependent matrices at master frequencies. In general, master
frequencies via MFREQ in case control section of input deck is less than the number of forcing frequencies.
Hence, PARAM, NFDOPTS, 2 can improve performance as well as reduce disk space requirement for large
frequency response jobs. With PARAM, NFDOPTS, 1, frequency dependent matrices are computed at
forcing frequencies.
NHPLUS
Default = 20
In nonlinear harmonic response analysis, in order to avoid aliasing in the calculation of the Fourier
coefficients, a certain number of extra evaluation points are used. NHPLUS allows the number of extra points
to be defined.
NINTPTS
Default = 10
N1NTPTS requests interpolation over the NlNTPTS elements closest to each grid point. NlNTPTS=0
requests interpolation over all elements, which can be computationally intensive. Related parameters include
BlGER, CURV, NUMOUT, OG, OUTOPT, S1G, S1M, S1AG and S1AM.
NLAYERS
Default = 5 for CQUAD4 and CTRIAR, 7 for CQUADR and CTRIAR, 3 for CAXISYM (minimum=1,
maximum=11) (SOLs 106, 129, 153, 159, and 400)
NLAYERS is used in material nonlinear analysis only and is the number of layers used to integrate through
the thickness of CQUAD4, CTRlA3 CQUADR, CTRIAR and CAXISYM elements with isotropic material
properties. Set NLAYERS=1 for efficiency if no bending is selected (MID2=0 or -1 on all PSHELL entries).
Do not specify NLAYERS=1 if MID2 is greater than zero. A larger value of NLAYERS will give greater
Main Index
accuracy at the cost of computing time and storage requirements. For CQUADR and CTRIAR, the
maximum is 11.
NLHTLS
Default = 0
See Remarks under Case Control command, TSTRU (Case), 590.
NLHTOL
Default = 1.0E-5
During the iteration procedure of nonlinear harmonic response, the norm of the residual load vector for the
current step is divided by the norm of the residual load vector for the previously converged step; this value is
then compared with NLHTOL. If the value is smaller than NLHTOL, the system is assumed to have
converged.
NLHTWK
Default = 1.0E-5
In nonlinear harmonic response analysis, if convergence is not obtained, a line search procedure is initiated
to calculate a scaling factor for the displacement vector from which updated nonlinear loads are subsequently
calculated. If the solution fails to converge more than 5 times in succession a new trial displacement vector is
calculated using a push off factor the size of which is defined by NLHTWK. See also parameter MXICODE0,
909.
NLMAX
Default = 60
The number of suspected mm’s is determined from the number of high ratio messages. If this number exceeds
NLMAX the number of trial mm’s is reduced to NLMAX. This is a means to avoid an expensive debug run
when there may be thousands of mm’s due to systematic modeling error, such as having CONM2 elements
on many grid points for which structural elements have been left out through oversight. The value of this
parameter may be increased on initial debug runs where it is possible that there are many high ratio DOFs,
and you’d rather see them all at once rather than on successive runs where you remove only a part of them at
one time.
NLMIN
Default = 10
If there are only one or a few high ratio DOFs there may be more mm’s present. More trial mm vectors are
used, and those that do not indicate true problems are discarded. A smaller value could be considered on a
stable model undergoing small modeling changes.
NLPACK
Default=100
NLPACK is used in the nonlinear solution sequence SOL 400 only. The SOL 400 will pack output data for
NLPACK output time steps and restart data for the last time step as a single data package. For example, if
NLPACK=100 (the default), then one data package have output data for 100 output time steps and restart
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 913
data for the last time step. Later usage such as restart or initial condition for later step can be performed only
at data package boundaries. If NLPACK= -1, all output data for a STEP and restart data for end of the STEP
are grouped into a single package. In this case, the restart can be performed only at STEP boundaries.
NLPACK=0 is illegal. If NLPACK=1, each package of data on the database includes output data for one
output time step and restart data. In this case, restart can be performed at every output time step. Please note
that the output time step is controlled by the NO field on the Bulk Data entry, or NO filed of FIXED time
step control as well INTOUT field of ADAPT time step control in NLSTEP Bulk Data entry. NLPACK also
influences the intermediate output selected by NLOPRM.
Please note that NLPACK is based on the number of the output load steps (concerning INTOUT in
NLSTEP, and so on), but not the number of the calculated load steps. For example, one NLTRAN analysis
has NLSTEP as:
NLSTEP,900,0.2
,fixed,2000,20
,mech,u
It has total 2000 increments, and asks output every 20 increments. Therefore, total output is 100 time step.
In NASTRAN, default value of NLPACK for NLTRAN is 100, in this model, therefore, NASTRAN will
write the results to OP2 after collecting 100 output, i.e., this model will write results to OP2 only one time.
With intermediate output request, only one OP2 file will be created.
If NLPACK=1, NASTRAN will write results to OP2 for every output request. In this model, NASTRAN
will write results to OP2 for every output request, i.e., writing 100 times in this model. With “intermediate
output request, 100 OP2 files will be created.
NASTRAN will write results to OP2 for every two output request, i.e., writing 50 times in this model. With
"intermediate output request, 50 OP2 files will be created.
NLTOL
 2 (SOL 106 and MD Nastran SOL 400)
Default = 
 0 (SOL 153, nonlinear heat transfer)
NLTOL establishes defaults for the CONV, EPSU, EPSP and EPSW fields of NLPARM Bulk Data entry for
nonlinear static and heat transfer analysis according to the following table:
NLTOL Level of Accuracy

0 Very high
1 High
2 Engineering Design
3 Preliminary Design
See Remark 16. of the NLPARM entry for further details and corresponding default NLPARM field values.
Main Index
NMLOOP
Default = 0
In SOL 106 nonlinear static analysis, normal modes will be computed with the updated nonlinear stiffness
if PARAM,NMLOOP is requested in the subcase section, it must be for all subcases. The nonlinear normal
modes will be computed at the last iteration loop of each subcase in which a METHOD command appears.
NMNLFRQ
Default = 0.0
PARAM, NMNLFRQ, Real_Value allows users to select material or property values for frequency dependent
materials or properties at a desired frequency other than the “nominal” values specified on the MATi or
PBUSH, PCOMP, PCOMPG, PDAMP, or PELAS entries.
NOCOMPS
Default = +1
NOCOMPS controls the computation and printout of composite element ply stresses, strains and failure
indices. If NOCOMPS = 1, composite element ply stresses, strains and failure indices are printed. If
NOCOMPS = 0, the same quantities plus element stresses and strains for the equivalent homogeneous
element are printed. If NOCOMPS=-1, only element stresses and strains are printed. MAT1, MAT2, or
MAT8 entries with MIDs>99999999 run the risk of conflicting with internally generated MAT2 entries
when composites are present and should be avoided. Even if no composites are present, MIDs>99999999
signal to shell element stress computations that no STRESS is to be computed. In the case of
MIDs>99999999 if the user desires stress calculations for shell elements, even if no composites are present,
then PARAM, NOCOMPS, -1 is required.
Homogenous stresses are based upon a smeared representation of the laminate’s properties and in general will
be incorrect. Element strains are correct however.
NOCOMPS only supports conventional elements, not advanced elements. For advanced nonlinear element,
only ply stress/strain will be output.
NODCMP
Default = 0
For some type of nonlinear transient problems, including heat transfer, the decomposition of the solution
matrix is not required. In order to increase efficiency, NODCMP is created to determine whether the solution
matrix will be decomposed. If NODCMP=0, the solution matrix will be decomposed. If NODCMP=1, the
solution matrix will NOT be decomposed. In this case, MAXBIS and DJUST on the Bulk Data entry,
NLPARM, must be set zero on the Bulk Data entry. NODCMP is available for SOL 129 and 159 only.
NOELOF
Default = -1
If NOELOF > 0, then the grid point forces (GPFORCE Case Control command) are computed along the
edges of the two-dimensional elements. The default value will suppress this output.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 915
NOELOP
Default = -1
If NOELOP > 0, then the sum of the grid point forces (GPFORCE Case Control command) are computed
parallel to the edges of adjacent elements. The effect of CBAR element offsets is not considered in the
calculation of the forces. The default value will suppress this output.
NOGPF
Default = 1
NOGPF controls the printout of grid point forces (GPFORCE Case Control command). NOGPF > 0
specifies that the grid point forces are to be printed. NOGPF < 0 suppresses the printing of the grid point
forces.
NOMSGSTR
Default = 0
If NOMSGSTR = -1, the MSGSTRES module will be skipped even though Bulk Data entries provided for
it. See Part III of the MSGMESH Analyst Guide for a discussion of MSGSTRESS.
NONCUP
Default = -1
In SOLs 111 and 112, NONCUP selects either a coupled or uncoupled solution algorithm in the modal
dynamic response analysis. This parameter has the following meanings in both solution sequences:
NONCUP = -1 Use the uncoupled solution algorithm if there are no off-diagonal terms in any of
(Default) the modal matrices (MHH, BHH and KHH); otherwise use the coupled solution
algorithm. However, in order to ensure correct results, the coupled solution
algorithm is used when large mass enforced displacement, large mass enforced
velocity or SPC/SPCD enforced motion is employed in SOL 112, regardless of the
existence of off-diagonal terms in the modal matrices.
NONCUP > -1 Use the coupled solution algorithm unconditionally
NONCUP = -2 Use the uncoupled solution algorithm unconditionally
User Information Message 5222 indicates which solution algorithm is used in the analysis.
NQSET
Default = 0
If NQSET > 0, and the PARAM entry is in Case Control, all part superelements that do not contain QSET
entries, or are not referenced by SENQSET entries in the main Bulk Data Section, have NQSET generalized
coordinates assigned to them. These QSET variables are functionally equivalent to those generated by
SENQSET entries.
NUMOUT, NUMOUT1, NUMOUT2, NUMOUT3
See S1, S1G, S1M.
Main Index
OELMOPT
Integer; Default=3.
PARAM,OELMOPT selects the class of elements to include in the search for grid points:
0 All regular elements but not PLOTEL and rigid elements.
1 All regular elements and PLOTEL.
2 All regular elements and rigid elements.
3 Both 1 and 2 (default).
OELMSET
Integer; Default = 0
Identification number of a Case Control command SET definition. The members of the specified SET
represent the identification numbers of the finite elements that are to be retained in the “reduced” op2 file
element connection data block.
OG
Default=0
See CURV.
OGEOM
Default = YES
See POST < 0.
OGRDOPT
Selects the method used to create the set of grid points retained in the reduced grid point geometry data block.
The default simply uses the set of grid point IDs listed in the OGRDSET Case Control SET. Set consistency
is checked. OGRDOPT=2 uses the list of grid point IDs that are connected to elements in the OELMSET
Case Control SET. OGRDOPT=3 merges the contents of the OGRDSET Case Control SET with the
contents of the grid point list connected to the elements in the OELMSET Case Control SET. There is no
consistency check for OGRDOPT=2 or OGRDOPT=3. OGRDOPT=0 turns the SET consistency check
off altogether. For this case, the grid points retained are those specified in the OGRDSET SET and the
elements retained are those specified in the OELMSET SET. See also PARAM,OELMOPT description.
OGRDSET
Identification number of a case control command SET definition. The members of the specified SET
represent the identification numbers of the grid points that are to be retained in the “reduced” op2 file grid
geometry data block.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 917
OLDSEQ
 -1 for non-iterative-distributed-parallel solutions

 5 for iterative solutions using distributed parallel methods
Default = 
 (NASTRAN ITER=1 and system(231)>0)
 6 if SUPER=2

OLDSEQ selects from the following options for resequencing:
-1 No resequencing is performed.
1 Use the active/passive option.
2 Use the band option.
3 For the active/passive and the band option select the option giving the lowest RMS value of the
active columns for each group of grid points.
4 Use the wavefront (Levy) option.
5 Use the Gibbs-King option even if the CPU estimate is higher than for nonsequencing.
6 Use the automatic nested dissection option even if the CPU estimate is higher than for no
resequencing. See the following SUPER=2 description.
8 Semiautomatic selection. The program will compute estimates for two options that are suitable
for the decomposition method selected by the PARALLEL and SPARSE keywords on the
NASTRAN statement and select the option with the lowest estimate. The following table
shows the suitable options for each decomposition method.
Decomposition Method Suitable Options

regular 1 and 4
parallel 2 and 5
sparse 6 and 7
9 The extreme partitioning method is used to partition the model into domains.
10 The METIS partitioning method is used to partition the model into domains.
11 The MSCMLV partitioning method is used to partition the model into domains.
Main Index
Notes: 1. The model partitioning options make sense only when running with the
DOMAINSOLVER command in the Executive Control Section. For
DOMAINSOLVER (PARTOPT=GRID), param,oldseq,9 is the default. For all
other DOMAINSOLVER options, the default is param,oldseq,11.
2. The wavefront option does not support superelement resequencing or starting nodes.
Also note that the automatic nested dissection option uses starting nodes only to
establish the root of the initial connectivity tree.
If the value of OLDSEQ is changed in superelement analysis, an SEALL=ALL restart is required.

PARAM,FACTOR is used to generate the sequenced identification number (SEQlD) on the SEQGP entry
as follows:
SEQID=FACTOR*GRP+SEQ
where:
SEQ = generated sequence number
GRP = group sequence number
If GRP=0, use GRP(MAX)+1 where GRP(MAX) is the largest group sequence number in the database.
PARAM,MPCX controls whether the grid point connectivity created by the MPC, MPCADD, and MPCAX
entries and/or the rigid element entries (e.g., RBAR) is considered during resequencing:
-1 Do not consider the connectivity of the MPC, MPCADD, MPCAX, or rigid element entries.
0 Consider the connectivity of the rigid element entries only. (Default).
>0 Consider the connectivity of the rigid element entries and the MPC, MPCADD, and MPCAX
entries with the set identification number set to the value of this parameter.
PARAM,SEQOUT controls the output options as follows:
0 Do not generate any printed or punched output for the new sequence (Default).
1 Print a table of the internal/external sequence in internal order.
2 Write the SEQGP entries to the PUNCH file.
3 Perform SEQOUT=1 and 2.
PARAM,START specifies the number of the grid points at the beginning of the input sequence. The input
sequence will be the sorted order of the grid point numbers including the effect of any SEQGP entries input
by the user. A single SEQGP entry can be input to select the starting point for the new sequence. Otherwise,
the first point of lowest connectivity will be used as the starting point.
If PARAM,SUPER<0, all grid points from the connection table that are not part of the group currently being
processed are deleted. This option provides for sequencing only the interior points of a superelement. If any
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 919
superelements are present, the residual structure is not resequenced. If all of the grid points are in the residual
structure, they are resequenced.
If PARAM,SUPER=0 or 1, all grid points in the connection table are considered. This option provides for
the recognition of passive columns.
If PARAM,SUPER=2, then all points that are connected to multipoint constraints (via MPC entries) or rigid
elements (e.g., the RBAR entry) are placed in a special group at the end of the sequence. This option also
forces OLDSEQ=6 and may not be selected with other values of OLDSEQ. This option is intended
primarily for models that have many active columns due to MPCs or rigid elements; e.g., a model with
disjoint structures connected only by MPCs or rigid elements.
OLDWELD
Default = NO
By default, the program uses new formulations for connector elements (CFAST, CSEAM and CWELD). To
acquire identical connector results as those from previous versions before v2017.1, specify OLDWELD=YES.
OMACHPR
Default = NO
See POST < 0.
OMAXR
Default = 2 ⋅ BUFFSIZE
OMAXR specifies the maximum record length of data written by the OUTPUT2 module under
PARAM,POST,<0 and PARAM,OPTEXIT,-4. BUFFSIZE is a machine-dependent value defined in the
MSC Nastran Configuration and Operations Guide. For further information, see the OMAXR parameter
description under the OUTPUT2 module description in MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide<$paranum[h1].
OMID
Default = NO
To print or punch the results in the material coordinate system, set the parameter OMID to yes. Applicable
to forces, strains, and stresses for TRIA3, QUAD4, TRIAR6, and QUAD8. This is available for linear
analysis only. Other elements and outputs are not supported. This capability is not supported by post-
processors (xdb and op2 output are not changed), by grid point stress output that assumes output is in
element coordinate system, random response analysis, heat transfer analysis, stress sorting, MAXMIN Case
Control, composite elements, MONPNT3 Bulk Data and external superelement data recovery in the
assembly run.
OMSGLVL
Set consistency check error message severity flag. The default causes FATAL messages to be generated if the
grid set is not consistent with the element-related grid point set and the job is terminated. If OMSGLVL=1,
the FATAL messages are reduced to WARNINGS and the job is allowed to continue.
Main Index
OPCHSET
SET punch request flag. If OPCHSET=1, then the list of grid points used to reduce the grid point geometry
data block will be punched in case control SET definition format.
OPGEOM
Default = -1
OPGEOM > -1 prints the aerodynamic set definitions for all degrees-of-freedom. To print structural degree-
of-freedom sets, please see USETPRT.
OP2GM34
Default = TRUE
By default, the GEOM3 and GEOM4 are written in OP2 file. To avoid GEOM3 and GEOM4 output, set
PARAM, OP2GM34, FALSE.
OPGTKG
Default = -1
OPGTKG > -1 prints the matrix for the interpolation between the structural and aerodynamic degrees-of-
freedom.
OPPHIB
Default = -1
In the flutter (SOLs 145 and 200) and aeroelastic (SOLs 146 and 200) solution sequences, OPPHIB > -1
and a DISPLACEMENT request in the Case Control Section will output the real vibration modes with the
structural displacement components transformed to the basic coordinate system.
OPPHIPA
Default = -1
In the flutter (SOLs 145 and 200) and the dynamic aeroelastic (SOL 146) solution sequences, OPPHIPA > -
1 and a DISPLACEMENT command in the Case Control Section will output the real vibration modes at all
degrees-of-freedom, including the aerodynamic degrees-of-freedom in the global coordinate system. Use
PARAM,OPPHIPB to output in the basic system.
OPTEXIT
Default = 0
In SOL 200, especially during the checkout of the analysis model and the design optimization input data
(design model), it may be desirable to exit the solution sequence at certain points before proceeding with full
optimization. OPTEXIT may be set to values of 1 through 7 and -4. The DSAPRT Case Control command
overrides the specification of PARAM,OPTEXIT,4, -4, or 7. The description of OPTEXlT values follow.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 921
OPTEXIT
Value Description
0 Do not exit. Proceed with optimization.
1 Exit after the initialization of the analysis and design model but before finite element
analysis begins.
2 Exit after finite element analysis and initial design response and shape basis vector
processing.
3 Exit after design constraint evaluation and screening.
4 Exit after design sensitivity analysis and print the matrix of design sensitivity coefficients
(DSCM2). This is equivalent to the DSAPRT (UNFORM,END=SENS) Case Control
command.
-4 Exit after design sensitivity analysis and write the data blocks related to sensitivity
coefficients (DSCM2 and DSCMCOL) to an external file using the OUTPUT2 and
OUTPUT4 modules. This is equivalent to the DSAPRT (NOPRINT,EXPORT
END=SENS) Case Control command. See related parameters ITAPE, IUNIT, and
OMAXR.
5 Exit after the first approximate optimization of the design model.
6 Exit after the first update of the analysis model based on the first approximate
optimization of the design model.
7 Compute and output design sensitivity coefficients at the end of normal program
termination: hard convergence, soft convergence, or maximum design cycles. This is
equivalent to the DSAPRT (UNFORM,START=LAST) Case Control command. If the
final design is a discrete design optimization, no sensitivity is performed and the
OPTEXIT=7 request is not honored.
OPTION
Default = ABS
See SCRSPEC.
OSETELE
Default = 2
See AUTOGOUT, 749.
OSETGRD
Default = 1
See AUTOGOUT, 749.
Main Index
OSWELM
Default = -1
Offset for identification numbers of internally generated RBE3 rigid body elements (generated by all formats
of CFAST and CSEAM as well as CWELD with formats ELEMID, GRIDID, ELPAT and PARTPAT). By
default, OSWELM=-1, the numbering starts with SYSTEM(182) + 1. The default of system cell 182 is
SYSTEM(182)=100,001,001. If the user defines OSWELM > 0, then the numbering starts with OSWELM
+ 1.
Active ONLY for "PARAM,OLDWELD,YES", for each CWELD element, a pair of RWELD constraint
elements is generated if MSET=ON is specified, see the entry PWELD, 3329 for an explanation.
Active ONLY for "PARAM,OLDWELD,YES", in an SOL 400 nonlinear analysis this defines the offset for
identification numbers of internally generated RBE3 rigid body elements (generated by CWELD and
CFAST, all formats) and CONM2 mass elements (generated by CFAST when it has nonzero mass). The
default behavior in SOL 400 is the same as in the linear solution sequences.
OSWPPT
Integer, Default = -1
Offset for internally generated grid identification numbers for connector elements (GA and GB for CWELD
and CFAST if these are not specified and all auxiliary grids for CWELD, CFAST and CSEAM). By default,
OSWPPT=-1, the numbering starts with SYSTEM(178) + 1. The default of system cell 178 is
SYSTEM(178)=101,000,000. If the user provides OSWPPT > 0, then the numbering starts with OSWPPT
+ 1.
Active ONLY for "PARAM,OLDWELD,YES", for each CWELD or CFAST element, a pair of grid points
GA and GB is generated internally if the formats ELEMID, GRIDID, ELPAT or PARTPAT are used and if
no identification numbers for GA and GB are specified, see the entry CWELD, 1696 and CFAST, 1505 for
a definition of the formats.
Active ONLY for "PARAM,OLDWELD,YES", in an SOL 400 nonlinear analysis this defines the offset for
identification numbers of internally generated grids of connector elements CWELD and CFAST (GA and
GB if these are not specified in the bulk data input and all auxiliary grids). The default behavior in SOL 400
is the same as in the linear solution sequences.
OUGCORD
See POST.
OUGSPLIT
Default=YES
By default, displacements, velocities, and accelerations are written to separate tables.
PARAM,OUGSPLIT,NO will combine these tables into a single table and is intended for third-party post-
processors which are not able to read the separate tables. The value of OUGSPLIT does not affect the results
in the f06 file.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 923
OUNIT1
Default = Value of OUNIT2
For PARAM,POST,-1 and -2 defines the unit that geometry data blocks are output to. See PARAM,POST.
This parameter should not be specified after BEGIN SUPER.
OUNIT2
Default = 12
For PARAM,POST,-1 and -2 defines the unit that results data blocks are output to. See PARAM,POST. This
parameter should not be specified after BEGIN SUPER.
OUTOPT
Default = 0
See CURV.
PACINFID
Integer, no default.
This parameter is used only in data recovery operations for elements in acoustic field point mesh bulk data.
PACINFID is the ID of the PACINF entry that contains the location of the pole used to determine element
orientation. Data recovery operations require that the element surface normal vector point away from the
pole location. This parameter is required only if the acoustic model references multiple PACINF bulk data
entries and the pole locations on the PACINF entries are not coincidental.
PANELMP
Replaced by a keyword on the FLSPOUT Case Control command.
PATPLUS
Default = NO
PARAM,PATPLUS,YES may be used with PARAM,POST,0 to allow the user to also write data blocks
GPFORCE, ESE, EKE, EDE, WETSENS, and ESE-(with PARAM,XFLAG,2) to a Fortran unit as is done
under PARAM,POST,-1.
PATVER
Default = 3.0
See POST = -1.
PCOMPRM
Default = 0
PCOMPRM controls the computation and printout of composite element extreme ply stresses, strains,
failure Indices and strength ratios. Note that extreme ply output encompasses ply stresses, ply strains, ply
failure indices and ply strength ratios together. Punch output is not available for extreme ply results.
PCOMPRM = 0 (default) , STANDARD composite ply responses are output.
Main Index
PCOMPRM = 1 STANDARD & EXTREME composite ply responses are output

PCOMPRM = 2 ONLY EXTREME composite ply responses are output
PDRMSG
Default = 1
PDRMSG controls the printout of messages associated with deformed plots, including error messages.
PDRMSG = 0 suppresses the printout. Contour values will not be displayed unless the default value is used.
PEDGEP
Default = 0
Cubic edges of p-elements can be created with the FEEDGE Bulk Data entry by defining two vertex grids
and two points in between. By default, the two points on an edge are moved to the parametric 1/3 and 2/3
locations of the edge. For PEDGEP = 1 the points are not moved. MSC Patran V7 generates points so that
adjacent edges are C1 continuous. These points should not be moved. Therefore, MSC Patran generates a
Bulk Data Section with PARAM,PEDGEP,1 if p-elements are in the model.
PEMMAPC
PEMMAPC is used to generate lists of GRD IDs of the coupling surfaces. 'PARAM,PEMMAPC,1' (default
is 0) will produce following files in 'mapping_control' subdirectory of job submit directory.
For SET ID Generic File name

Structure GID coupled 100000 <deckname>.<job
with all TRMCs seq>.x_nas.structure_component1.set
Fluid GID coupled with 200000 <deckname>.<job
all TRMCs seq>.x_nas.fluid_component2.set
Structure GID coupled y00018xxxx for GLUED or <deckname>.<job seq
with TRIMID=xxxx only z00018xxxx for SLIDING >.x_nas.structure_component1.trim_coupli
ng.<xxxx>.<y or z>.set
Fluid GID coupled with Y00028xxxx for OPEN or <deckname>.<job
TRIMID=xxxx only Z00028xxxx for IMPER seq>.x_nas.fluid_component2.trim_coupli
ng.<xxxx>.<Y or Z>.set
TRIMID=xxxx GID xxxx90001 <deckname>.<job seq
coupled with structure >.x_nas.interface<xxxx>.surface.1.set
TRIMID=xxxx GID xxxx90002 <deckname>.<job seq
coupled with fluid >.x_nas.interface<xxxx>.surface.2.set
Guidelines for PARAM,PEMMAPC,1

1. PARAM,PEMMAPC,1' must be placed in the main bulk data section or under 'BEGIN BULK' to
be effective.
2. Without 'PARAM,PEMNPART,n', PEMMAPC logic has a TRIM ID limit of less than 10000.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 925
3. With 'PARAM,PEMNPART,n', PEMMAPC login has a TRIM ID limit of less than 100.
PEMNPART
PEMNPART can be utilized to partition a large trim component. The default value for PEMNPART is 1.
'PARAM,PEMNPART,n' will partition a large trim component into 'n' parts. The guidelines are:
1. PARAM,PEMNPART,n' must be placed under 'BEGIN TRMC=xx' to be effective for trim
component 'xx'.
2. Each trim component can have its own 'PARAM,PEMNPART,n'
3. When value of 'n' for PEMNPART is greater than 1, new trim components are generated with ID
equal to 'xx'*100+<seq no> where <seq no> goes from 0 to n-1.
4. For no loss of accuracy, setting 'n' to a value equal to the number of disconnected parts of a large trim
component.
5. For accepting loss of accuracy to run on a machine with limited memory, setting 'n' to a value larger
than the number of disconnected parts of a large trim component.
6. 'PARAM,PEMNPART,n' with n>1 should be utilized only as an alternative for running PEM jobs
with large trim component and insufficient memory on the computer. Other alternatives for running
PEM job with large trim component and insufficient memory are:
a. Split large trim component into smaller trim components and/or
b. Acquire more memory for the computer
7. For a trim component with 'PARAM,PEMNPART,n' where n>1 and 'PARAM,TRMBIM,physical',
data recovery will be skipped for all partitioned trim components.
PEMSKIN
‘PARAM,PEMSKIN,1’ is used for Actran to couple the trim bodies only to the surface of the cavity and will
not search any node inside the cavities. The default value for PEMSKIN is 0 which allows Actran to target
both surface and interior nodes of the cavities for trim bodies coupling.
PENFN
Default = 1.0e+5 (See LMFACT)
PERCENT
Default = 40
PH2OUT
For nonlinear solution sequence, SOL 400, in addition to the regular phase III output, the user can also
request the phase II output. This is useful when the run is terminated abnormally before the phase III outputs
are formatted and printed. The phase II output consists of all outputs requested by the Case Control
commands in the input file and prints in sort1 format. If there’s no PH2OUT, MSC Nastran outputs phase
III outputs only. This is the regular output. If PH2OUT=1, MSC Nastran outputs phase II outputs only.
In this case, there will be no output for the upstream superelements. If PH2OUT=3, MSC Nastran outputs
Main Index
both phase II and phase III outputs. In this case, some of the outputs for the residual structure may be
redundant.
Case Control command, NLOPRM OUTCTRL, takes precedence over PH2OUT. In other words, when
NLOPRM OUTCTRL is present, PH2OUT is no longer functional. NLOPRM OUTCTRL=SOLUTION
is equivalent to PH2OUT=1 and NLOPRM OUTCTRL=(STD,SOLUTION) to PH2OUT=3.
PKRSP
Default = -1
If PKRSP=0, the magnitude of the output quantities at the time of peak acceleration of the modal variables
is output. The SRSS technique that is used for response spectra is described in Additional Topics (p. 511) in the
MSC Nastran Reference Guide. This option is available only for modal transient analysis.
PLTMSG
Default = 1
PARAM,PLTMSG,0 suppresses messages associated with undeformed plot requests, including error
messages.
POST
Default = 9999999
If PARAM,POST,0, then the following parameters and discussion apply (not support in SOL 400):
The data blocks often used for pre- and postprocessing will be stored in the database and also converted, by
the DBC module (see MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide<$paranum[h1]), to a format suitable for processing
by MSC Patran. These data blocks include input data related to geometry, connectivity, element and material
properties, and static loads; they also include output data requested through the Case Control commands
OLOAD, SPCF, DISP, VELO, ACCE, THERMAL, ELSTRESS, ELFORCE, FLUX, GPSTRESS,
GPFORCE, ESE, GPSDCON, and ELSDCON.
The converted data is written to logical FORTRAN units, which may be assigned to physical files in the File
Management Section. The FORTRAN unit numbers are specified by the parameters GEOMU, POSTU,
and LOADU. By default, all data is written to the logical FORTRAN unit indicated by GEOMU. If
LOADU > 0, static load data may be diverted to another unit indicated by LOADU. If POSTU > 0, then
output data requested with the Case Control commands listed above will be diverted to the logical unit
indicated by POSTU. See Database Concepts (p. 421) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual for the procedure
for assigning physical files.
By default, if converted data already exists on the files indicated by GEOMU, POSTU, and LOADU, then
the DBC module will overwrite the old data. If this is not desirable, then PARAM,DBCOVWRT,NO must
be entered. The parameters MODEL and SOLID may be used to store more than one model and solution
in the graphics database. These parameters are not supported by MSC Patran.
PARAM,DBCDIAG > 0 requests the printing of various diagnostic messages from the DBC module (see MSC
Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide<$paranum[h1]) during the data conversion. By default, no messages are
printed.
If PARAM,PATPLUS,YES is specified along with PARAM,POST,0 then the PARAM,POST,-1, operation
will also be performed.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 927
If PARAM,POST,< 0 or 1, then the following parameters and discussion apply:

 PARAM,POST,1 outputs the appropriate files for the SimXpert and Patran programs and should be
used to obtain results from the latest result data blocks from SOL 400 and other recent MSC
Nastran developments such as NEF.
 PARAM,POST,-1 outputs the appropriate files for the Patran program (PARAM,POST,1 should be
used for more recent versions of MSC Nastran > 2012).
 PARAM,POST,-2 outputs the appropriate files for the Siemens I-deas program.
 PARAM,POST,-4 outputs the files indicated below along with OPHIG for the MSC_NF interface
by LMS International.
 PARAM,POST,-5 outputs the files indicated in the table below along with LAMA and OPHG1 for
the FEMtools interface by Dynamic Design Solutions.
 POST=-4 and -5 are intended for SOL 103 only.
 PARAM,POST,-6 outputs the files indicated below for Siemens Unigraphics.
 PARAM,POST,-7 outputs the files for Free Field Technologies.
An OUTPUT2 file for FORTRAN unit 12 in binary format is automatically created in the same directory
and with the same name as the input file and with the extension “.op2”. For example, if the input file is
fender.dat then the OUTPUT2 file will be called fender.op2.
An ASSIGN statement is required in the FMS Section only if neutral file format is desired as follows:
ASSIGN OP2=‘filename of FORTRAN file’ FORM
Geometry data blocks are output with PARAM,OGEOM,YES (Default) and are written to a FORTRAN
unit specified by PARAM,OUNIT1 (Default = OUNIT2) for POST = -1, -2, -4, and -6.
PARAM,OUNIT2K (Default = 91) specifies the unit number for KELM and KDICT with
PARAM,POST,-5. PARAM,OUNIT2M (Default = 92) specifies the unit number for MELM and MDICT
with PARAM,POST,-5. Note that PARAM,POST,-5 is not supported with DMP. See the following table for
the specific geometry data blocks written for different values for POST.
See also the PARAM,POSTEXT description for additional data blocks written to the .op2 file.
POST
Geometry Data
-1,1 or -7 -2 -4 -5 -6 Block Description
YES NO NO NO NO GEOM1S, Grid Point Definitions (Superelement)
GEOM1VU
NO YES YES NO YES CSTM Coordinate System
Transformations
NO YES YES NO YES GPL Grid Point List
NO YES YES NO YES GPDT Grid Point Definitions
NO YES YES NO NO EPT Element Properties
NO YES YES NO NO MPT Material Properties
YES YES YES NO NO GEOM2 Element Definitions
Main Index
POST
Geometry Data
-1,1 or -7 -2 -4 -5 -6 Block Description
YES* YES NO NO NO GEOM3 Load Definitions
YES* YES NO NO NO GEOM4 Constraint Definitions
YES NO NO NO NO DIT Dynamic Table Input
YES NO NO NO NO DYNAMICS Dynamic Loads Definition
NO NO YES YES NO KDICT Element Stiffness Dictionary
NO NO YES YES NO KELM Element Stiffness Matrices
NO NO YES YES NO MDICT Element Mass Dictionary
NO NO YES YES NO MELM Element Mass Matrices
NO NO NO NO YES ECTS Element Connections
YES NO NO NO NO VIEWTB View Element Table
YES NO NO NO NO EDOM Design Model Input
YES NO NO NO NO GEOM2S, Same as GEOM2 for superelements
GEOM2VU
YES NO NO NO NO CSTMS Same as CSTM for superelements
YES NO NO NO NO EPTS Same as EPT for superelements
YES NO NO NO NO MPTS Same as MPT for superelements
* To avoid having GEOM3 and GEOM4 written if POST=-1, set PARAM,OP2GM34,FALSE.

PARAM,OMACHPR,NO selects the single precision format for GPDT, CSTM, and GEOM1.
PARAM,OMACHPR,YES selects the machine precision format. With PARAM,POST,< 0,
PARAM,OMACHPR,NO is the default. With PARAM,POST,1, PARAM,OMACHPR,YES is the default.
For PARAM,POST = -1 and -2, results data blocks are output to a FORTRAN unit specified by
PARAM,OUNlT2 (Default = 12). This parameter is allowed to vary between superelements. In buckling
solution sequence (SOL 105), a unique value of OUNIT2 should be specified for the buckling subcase. For
all other solution sequences or within a given analysis type, changes to PARAM,OUNIT2 between subcases
is not supported. See the POST Case Control command to change the unit number between subcases. See
also the related parameter OMAXR.
By default the displacements are output in the global coordinate system. To output in the basic coordinate
system, specify PARAM,OUGCORD,BASIC.
PARAM,POST,-1 or 1: Results Data Blocks for Patran and SimXpert
By default, the following data blocks are output under PARAM,POST,-1. The following parameters may be
used to disable the output of data blocks to the OUTPUT2 file. For example, if PARAM,OQG,NO is
specified, then the SPCFORCE output is not written to the OUTPUT2 file. It is recommended when
processing large post files in Patran and SimXpert that the following environment variable setting is used
when starting the session: DRANAS_NAST_MEM=2048MB.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 929
PARAM,PATVER
Parameter Case Data Block
< 3.0 > 3.0 Name Control Name Description
YES YES OQG SPCFORCE OQG1 Forces of single-point constraint
YES NO OUG DISP OUGV1PAT Displacements in the basic coordinate
system
YES YES OUG DISP OUGV1 Displacements in the global coordinate
system
YES NO OES STRESS OES1 Element stresses (linear elements only)
YES NO OEF FORCE OEF1 Element forces or heat flux (linear
elements only)
YES YES OEE STRAIN OSTR1 Element strains
YES YES OGPS GPSTRESS OGS1 Grid point stresses
YES YES OESE ESE ONRGY1 Element strain energy
YES YES OGPF GPFORCE OGPFB1 Grid point force balance table
NO YES OEFX FORCE OEF1X Element forces with intermediate (CBAR
and CBEAM) station forces and forces on
nonlinear elements
NO YES OESX STRESS OES1X Element stresses with intermediate
(CBAR and CBEAM) station stresses and
stresses on nonlinear elements
NO YES OPG OLOAD OPG1 Applied static loads
NO YES OCMP STRESS OES1C Ply stresses
NO YES OCMP STRAIN OSTR1C Ply strains
NO YES none DISP OUPV1 Scaled Response Spectra
SPCFORCE OQP1
FORCE DOEF1
STRESS DOES1
STRAIN DOSTR1
none LAMA Nonlinear Buckling
NO YES none DISP OCRUG
OLOAD OCRPG
NO YES none NLSTRESS OESNLXR Nonlinear static stresses
NO YES none BOUTPUT OESNLBR Slideline stresses
NO YES none NLLOAD OPNL1 Nonlinear loads
NO YES none STRESS OESNLXD Nonlinear transient stresses
NO YES none none ERRORN p-element error summary table
PARAM,POST,-2: Results Data Blocks for Siemens I-deas

By default, the following data blocks are output under PARAM,POST,-2. By default, the displacements are
output in the basic coordinate system. To output in the global coordinate system, specify
Main Index
PARAM,OUGCORD,GLOBAL. The following parameters may be used to disable the output of data blocks
to the OUTPUT2 file. For example, if PARAM,OQG,NO is specified, then the SPCFORCE output is not
written to the OUTPUT2 file.
Results Data
PARAMeter Name Case Control Block Name Description
OQG SPCFORCE OQG1 Forces of single-point constraint
OUG DISPLACE BOUGV1 Displacements in the basic coordinate
system
BOPHIG Eigenvectors in the basic coordinate system
OUGV1 Displacements in the global coordinate
system
TOUGV1 Grid point temperatures
OES STRESS OES1 Element stresses (linear elements only)
OEF FORCE OEF1 Element forces (linear elements only)
FLUX HOEF1 Element heat flux
OEE STRAIN OSTR1 Element strains
OESE ESE ONRGY1 Element strain energy
OCMP STRESS OEFIT Failure indices
STRESS OES1C Ply stresses
STRAIN OSTR1C Ply strains
OUMU ESE LAMA Eigenvalue summary
ONRGY2 Element strain energy
OEFX FORCE OEF1X Element forces (nonlinear elements only)
OESX STRESS OES1X Element stresses (nonlinear elements only)
none none ODELBGPD Shape optimization geometry changes
PARAM, POST, -4: Results Data blocks for LMS International/MSC_NF

used to disable the output of data blocks to the OUTPUT2 file. For example, PARAM,OUG,NO requests
that eigenvectors not be written to the OUTPUT2 file.
PARAMeter Name Case Control Data Block Name Description

OUG DISPLAC OPHIG Eigenvectors in the global coordinate
system.
PARAM, POST, -5: Results Data blocks for Dynamic Design Solutions/FEMtools
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 931
that eigenvectors not be written to the OUTPUT2 file. PARAM,OUNIT2O (Default51) specifies the unit
number of the OUTPUT2 file.
Data Block
PARAMeter name Case Control Name Descriptions
OUG DISPLAC OUGV1 Eigenvectors in the global coordinate system.
LAMA Eigenvalue summary.
PARAM, POST, -6: Results Data Blocks for Siemens Unigraphics

that displacements not be written to the OUTPUT2 file.
Data Block
PARAMeter Name Case Control Name Description
OQG SPCFORCE OQG1 Forces of single-point constraints
OUG DISPLAC OUGV1 Displacements
OES STRESS OES1 Element stresses
OEF STRESS OEF1 Element forces
OEE STRAIN OSTR1 Element strains
OESX STRESS OES1X Element stresses with intermediate station stresses
and stresses on nonlinear elements
OEFX STRESS OEF1X Element forces with intermediate station forces
and forces on nonlinear elements
OPG OLOAD OPG1 Applied static loads
none none DVPTAB Designed property table
none none OPTPRMG Optimization parameters
none none PROPO Final element properties
none none DBCOPT Optimization summary data
PARAM,POST,-7
PARAM,POST,-7 Results Data Blocks for Free Field Technologies.
Except eigenvectors, all other output data blocks are the same as PARAM,POST,-1. For eigenvectors, the
matrix form is written to the OUTPUT2 file.
Main Index
POSTEXT
Default = NO
Under PARAM,POST,-1 and -2, and if PARAM,POSTEXT,YES is specified, then the following data blocks
are also written to the .op2 file specified by PARAM,OUNIT2.
Data Block Name PARAM POST Description

FRL -1, -2 Frequency response list (modal frequency response only).
BHH -1, -2 Modal damping matrix (modal frequency response only).
KHH -1, -2 Modal stiffness matrix (modal frequency response only).
BGPDT -1 Basic grid point definition table.
PVT0 -1, -2 User parameter value table
CASECC -1 Case Control table
EQEXIN(S) -1 Equivalence external to internal grid ID table
CLAMA -1, -2 Complex eigenvalue table
OEDE1 -1, -2 Element energy loss output table
OEKE1 -1, -2 Element kinetic energy output table
OUGV2 -1, -2 Displacement output table in SORT2
PSDF -1, -2 Power spectral density table
OGPWG -1, -2 Grid point weight generator output table
TOL -1, -2 Time output list
OPHSA -1, -2 Solution set eigenvectors (modal frequency response only)
LAMA -1 Eigenvalue summary table
ONRGY2 -1 Element kinetic energy (obsolete)
PSDFH -1, -2 Power spectral density table for modal coordinates
DSCM2 -1, -2 Design sensitivity coefficient matrix
DSCMCOL -1, -2 Design sensitivity parameters table
POSTADF
Default = NO
This parameter is used to export the results of frequency analysis responses and participation factors by
PFMODE, PFPANEL, and PFGRID in ADF format file. This exportation is requested by setting this
parameter to YES. The unit information of the exported functions should be defined by DTI, UNITS
statement for this function (see ADAMSMNF statement). If not defined, SI unit will be assumed with the
warning message. The ADF file is defined as input data name with the extension “afu” automatically.
Alternatively the name can be defined with ASSIGN ADFFILE= statement in FMS section. For the
participation factor output, FILTER=0. option should be applied in PFMODE and PFPANEL.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 933
POSTU
Default = -1
See POST=0.
PREFDB
Default = 1.0
See ACOUT.
PRGPST
Default = NO
PRGPST is replaced by the PRINT keyword on the AUTOSPC Case Control command. The specification
of the AUTOSPC command overrides the specification of PARAM,PRGPST.
PRINT
Default = YES
PARAM,PRINT,NO suppresses the automatic printing of the flutter summary in flutter analysis.
PROUT
Default = -1
PARAM,PROUT,-1 suppresses execution and printout from the ELTPRT module. PARAM,PROUT,-1
prints a list of all elements sorted on EID and summary tables giving the range of element identification
numbers for each element type.
ELTPRT will provide an information message when it detects any duplicate element ID. For the case of
CONV and CHYBDi elements, duplicate element IDs are by design. The information message provided by
ELTPRT can be safely ignored for these elements.
PRPA
Default = 1.0E37
PRPJ
PRPA and PRPJ control the printout of intermediate load matrices for diagnostic purposes during
superelement assembly. If the value of PRPA (or PRPJ) is positive, all terms larger in magnitude than the
value are printed. If the value of PRPA (or PRPJ) is negative, all terms smaller in magnitude than the value
are printed. The default value requests no printout. PARAM,IRES,1 must be present for these parameters
to be effective. The PA matrix contains the internal loads transmitted to the downstream superelement. The
PJ matrix contains external loads applied on the superelement; that is, it has the same content as the data
produced by the Case Control command OLOAD. All of this data may be obtained on restart using the
SELR Case Control command option. A related parameter is IRES.
PRPHIVZ
Main Index
Default = 1.0E37
PRPHIVZ controls the printout of the PHlVZ matrix that contains the component mode eigenvectors of the
model. It includes all degrees-of-freedom with motion except the m-set, eliminated for multipoint
constraints. The FAPPROX matrix contains the square root of the diagonal terms of the generalized stiffness
matrix divided by 2π. For fixed-boundary solutions, it is a good approximation for the natural frequencies
of the component. For free- or mixed-boundary solutions, it is of a lower value than the natural frequencies.
All terms larger than PRPHlVZ in both matrices will be printed (i.e., PARAM,PRPHIVZ,0.0 causes all terms
to be printed).
PRTMAXIM
Default = NO
PRTMAXIM controls the printout of the maximums of applied loads, single-point forces of constraint,
multipoint forces of constraint, and displacements. The printouts are titled “MAXIMUM APPLIED
LOADS”, “MAXIMUM SPCFORCES”, “MAXIMUM MPCFORCES”, and “MAXIMUM
DISPLACEMENTS”.
PRTRESLT
Default = YES
PRTRESLT controls the printout of the resultants of applied loads, single-point forces of constraint, and
multipoint forces of constraint. The printouts are titled “OLOAD RESULTANTS”, “SPCFORCE
RESULTANTS”, and “MPCFORCE RESULTANTS”.
PSENPCH
Default = NO, for SOL 200 job with PART SEs only.
Setting PSENPCH to YES causes updated Bulk Data entries of a PART SE for a design cycle punched to a
separate file named as follows
JOBNAME_psexx_yy.pch – where xx is the PART SE ID and yy is the design cycle.
PVALINIT
Default = 1
Starting p-value in a p-adaptive analysis restart.
Q
Default = 0.0
Q specifies the dynamic pressure. Q must be specified in aeroelastic response analysis (SOLs 146), and the
default value will cause a User Fatal Message.
RADMOD
Default = YES
This parameter only applies to heat transfer solution sequences for SOLs 153, 159 and 400. The parameter,
RADMOD, only affects radiation heat transfer problems. The radiation matrix is modified to avoid the
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 935
temperature overshoot with a coarse mesh. If the user wants the program to skip this operation (modify the
radiation matrix) then insert PARAM,RADMOD,NO.
Main Index
RBSETPRT
Default=0
This parameter controls the printout of rigid element IDs that are included in the analysis. Setting
PARAM,RBSETPRT to a value not equal to zero activates the printing of rigid element IDs. Note that this
function works in conjunction with the rigid element selection via MPC=n in case control and SET3,n,RBxx
in bulk data.
RESLTOPT
Default = 8
RESLTOPT’s default value provides component-level force summary output for model checkout (PARAM,
CHECKOUT, YES), loads generation (OLOAD output), and SPC and MPC forces. Setting RESLTOPT to
a value of 1 produces abbreviated output formats only.
RESVEC
This parameter and the related parameters RESVINER, RESVSO, RESVSE, and RESVSLI are obsolete or
replaced by options on the RESVEC Case Control command.
RFORSET
Default = 0
A PARAM, RFORSET, n where n is a Bulk Data SET1 entry, allows the user to apply rotational force loading
(RFORCE) to just a portion of the structure. RFORSET like RFORCE loading is global and is computed
once at the beginning of the analysis. The Bulk Data SET1 n defines the GRIDS to which the rotational force
loading is to be applied. RFORSET can appear in either the Bulk Data or ABOVE or IN the 1st Subcase.
A RFORSET appearing in any other Subcase will be ignored and may cause incorrect results. A RFORSET
appearing in or above the first subcase takes precedence over a RFORSET appearing in Bulk Data. See also
the companion GRAVSET entry. If there is no RFORCE loading called out, then PARAM, RFORSET, n
needs to be removed from the run.
RHOCP
Default = 1.0
This parameter represents a scale factor used in the computation of ERP in units of dB. See the ERPREFDB
parameter. This parameter may alternatively be set using the ERP Case Control command.
RIMINTP
RIMINTP can be used to select the interpolation method for Reduced Impedance Matrix(RIM) for PEM
and ACTRIM. The input options for RIMINTP are LINEAR and LOG10. The default is LINEAR.
RKSCHEME
Default = Remark 1., SOL 700 only
Defines the type of time-integration scheme used in the Riemann solution-based Euler solvers.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 937
Format:
PARAM,RKSCHEME,NUMBER
Example:
PARAM,RKSCHEME,3
NUMBER Number of Runge-Kutta stages. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. This parameter can be used in combination with the original Roe solver and the improved full 2nd
order fluid- and gas Euler solver. The default number of stages depends on the spatial accuracy of the
solution scheme. One stage is used for first order spatial accuracy, and three stages for second order
spatial accuracy.
2. It is recommended that the user leave the setting to the default values as defined depending on the
selected spatial accuracy of the solution.
3. It has been found that in some cases with fluid flows, it may be necessary to manually limit the time
step to a fixed and lower value than the scheme determines. These occasions are noticeable when you
view a contour plot of the pressure. The user may find that the pressure field looks like a
checkerboard. This is then caused by a numerical instability due to a time step that is too large for the
fluid flow. The face fluxes are always correct but the element values get decoupled due to the time
integration instability. Lowering the time step to about half the maximum value the scheme
determines solves this problem. Please note that this significantly slows down the computation! Since
this problem rarely occurs we have chosen not to automatically limit the time step to a lower value
for performance reasons. However, the user needs to be aware that the analysis may exhibit the
aforementioned behavior.
RMSINT
Default = LINEAR for the trapezoidal approximation.
RMSINT specifies the interpolation method for numerical integration when computing both RMS (Root
Mean Square) and N0 (Number of Zero Crossings or Mean Frequency) from PSDF (Power Spectral Density
Function). RMSINT = LINEAR requests the trapezoidal approximation, which is the existing Nastran
approach. RMSINT = LOGLOG requests the Log-Log interpolation.
ROHYDRO
Defines the minimum density for hydrodynamic, single-material Eulerian elements.
Format:
PARAM,ROHYDRO,VALUE
Main Index
Example:
PARAM,ROHYDRO,1.E-6
VALUE Density cutoff. (Real > 0.0)
Remarks:
1. Hydrodynamic, single-material Eulerian elements with a density less than ROHYDRO are
considered to be empty. All of the variables are set to zero, and the equation of state is bypassed.
2. In the Eulerian transport calculation, if the material is flowing from element A to element B, and
a. If the density of element B after transport is less than ROHYDRO, then no transport is done.
b. If the density of element A after transport is less than ROHYDRO, then all of the mass is
transported to element B.
3. By default, the cutoff density for hydrodynamic Eulerian elements is set to 1.E–5 times the material
reference density. For the Riemann solution-based solvers, the default is set to 1.E-6 times the
reference density.
4. Please note that this parameter has a different effect in the Riemann-solution based Euler solvers. The
elements are never viewed as empty, but a small amount of mass (equal to the element’s volume times
the cut-off density value) remains in the element. All other state variables (velocity, energy and
pressure are reset to zero for these types of elements). For fluid flows where you wish to model
cavitation, use Tait’s equation of state with a critical density at which the pressure remains constant
and the fluid cavitates.
ROMULTI
Defines the minimum density for multimaterial Eulerian elements.
Format:
PARAM,ROMULTI,VALUE
Example:
PARAM,ROMULTI,1.E-6
Remarks:
1. Multimaterial Eulerian elements with a density less than ROMULTI are considered to be empty. All
of the variables are set to zero, and the equation of state is bypassed.
a. If the density of a specific material in element B after transport is less than ROMULTI, no
transport is done.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 939
b. If the density of a specific material in element A after transport is less than ROMULTI, all of the
mass of that material is transported to element B.
3. By default, the cut-off density is set for each material separately as 1.E–5 times the material reference
density.
ROSTR
Defines the minimum density for single-material Eulerian elements with shear strength.
Format:
PARAM,ROSTR,VALUE
Example:
PARAM,ROSTR,1.E-6
Remarks:
1. Single-material Eulerian elements with shear strength with a density less than ROSTR are considered
to be empty. All of the variables are set to zero, and the equation of state is bypassed.
a. If the density of element B after transport is less than ROSTR, then no transport is done.
b. If the density of element A after transport is less than ROSTR, then all of the mass is transported
to element B.
3. By default the cut-off density for Eulerian elements with shear strength is set to 1.E–5 times the
material reference density.
ROTSEKE
Default = -1
Controls the printout of rotor energies in the .f06 file. For a model with only one rotor, the strain and kinetic
energy percentages will always be 100%.
-1 Rotor energies are printed in the .f06 file. (Default)

0 Rotor energies are not printed in the .f06 file.
RSPECTRA
Default = -1
RSPECTRA = 0 requests that response spectra be calculated for transient analysis. See Additional Topics
(p. 511) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide for a discussion of this capability. Response spectra will be
calculated for any superelements or the residual structure for which other output requests are present in the
Main Index
same run. The requirements for the other output requests are also in Additional Topics (p. 511) in the MSC
Nastran Reference Guide. Any punch data produced is sent to the standard Nastran PUNCH file. Related
parameters are TABID and RSPRINT.
RSPRINT
Default = 0
RSPRINT controls the printout of tabulated values of response spectra. RSPRINT = -1 suppresses the
printout. The related parameter is RSPECTRA.
RSTTEMP
Default = NO
In SOL 106, PARAM,RSTTEMP,YES will cause the automatic restart to ignore changes to or additions of
TEMPij Bulk Data entries. This is applicable to SOL 106 restart runs in which the temperature changes are
only intended to affect the loading and not the material properties. The restart run also requires the use of
the DBLOCATE FMS statement instead of the RESTART statement to reference the data base; e.g.,
assign run1=plate-run1.MASTER
dbloc logical=run1
S1, S1G, S1M
Default = -1
The MAXMIN Case Control command offers more features with much greater efficiency. PARAM,S1i,+1
requests the sorting and/or filtering of the element stresses selected on the DTI,INDTA entry. Stresses in the
element coordinate systems (S1), at grid points (S1G), and/or in material coordinate systems (S1M) based
on the parameters BIGER, NUMOUT, SRTOPT, and SRTELTYP may be requested. The S1G and S1M
options also require the presence of PARAM,CURV,1.
Coordinate
Parameter Quantity System Location Elements
S1 > 0 Stresses Element Element centers CQUAD4,
CQUAD8,
CTRIA3,
CTRIA6
S1M > 0 Stresses Material Element centers CQUAD4,
CTRIA3
S1G > 0 Stresses Material Grid points to which elements CQUAD4,
connect CTRIA3
NUMOUT, in conjunction with BIGER, controls the amount of stress output.

NUMOUT2 and BIGER2 serve the same function as NUMOUT and BIGER except that they apply only
to composite element failure indices and do not require PARAM,S1i,+1. Similarly, NUMOUT3 and
BIGER3 are used for composite strength ratio.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 941
1. NUMOUT = +N requests that N element stresses be printed (or punched) for each element type.
2. NUMOUT=0 outputs all elements in a group when one or more exceeds BIGER. Some of the
elements will have stresses small than BIGER. This is conceptually the same as describing an element
set in case control, and limiting output in this manner. Stress files obtained with element group
filtering may be used for xy plotting and other postprocessor options with DMAP alters. By contrast,
the stress file when NUMOUT = -2 is more discontinuous, and may not be used for xy plotting.
3. NUMOUT = 0 does not sort but filters according to BIGER by element group. In static analysis an
element group is defined as all case control selected elements for a given load case for SORT1 output.
For SORT2 output an element group is defined as the data for a given element type for all load cases.
In transient analysis an element group is defined as all case control selected elements at a given time
for SORT1 output. For SORT2 output an element group is defined as the data for a given element
at all time steps. The element group option applies only to output types described above for
PARAM,S1. This option is not available with output types selected by PARAMs S1G and S1M.
4. NUMOUT = -1 requests that stresses be sorted and only those stresses with an absolute value that is
greater than BIGER will be output.
5. NUMOUT = -2 (the Default) does not sort but filters according to BIGER. Related parameters
include BIGER, NOELOF, NOELOP, and NOGPF.
6. NUMOUT2 = -3 outputs the maximum value of Failure Index for each element.
BIGER controls the elements for which stresses will be printed. Elements with stresses that are smaller in
absolute value than BIGER will not be output. The quantity tested is element type dependent. Related
parameters include CURV, NUMOUT, S1, S1G, and S1M. SRTOPT controls the scanning option to be
performed.
SRTOPT Value Description

0 Filter/sort on maximum magnitude.
1 Filter/sort on minimum magnitude.
2 Filter/sort on maximum algebraic value.
3 Filter/sort on minimum algebraic value.
SRTELTYP controls the element type to be processed, as described in the following table.
SRTELTYP Value Description

>0 All element types will be processed.
>0 Only element type SRTELTYP will be processed.
NUMOUT1 and BlGER1 serve the same function as NUMOUT and BIGER except that they apply only
to composite element stresses and do not require PARAM,S1i,+1.
NUMOUT2 and BIGER2 serve the same function as NUMOUT and BIGER except that they apply only
to composite element failure indices and do not require PARAM,S1i,+1.
Main Index
S1AG,S1AM
Default = -1
See CURV.
SCALEMAS
No Default, SOL 700 only
DTMIN Real. Option to scale all element masses (generated by density times volume) such that its
time step never becomes less than:
dt=STEPFCT*DTMIN
where
DT = timestep originally calculated by Dytran a this particular time
STEPFCT = timestep safety factor (see PARAM,STEPFCT)
DTMIN = value specified on this parameter
Note: The amount of mass scaling varies with time. Added mass does contribute to total (kinetic)
energies in the model and should be used carefully. Generally, a 5-8% mass increase at each
component level (not global level) is usually acceptable.
SCRSPEC
Default = -1 (SOLs 103 and 115 only)
SCRSPEC=0 requests that structural response be calculated for response spectra input in normal modes
analysis. See Response Spectrum Analysis (Ch. 9) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide for a
discussion of this capability. The scaled response calculations are made for elements and grid points of the
residual structure only. There exist two basic methods which are controlled by PARAM,CQC. The default
(CQC=0) selects the traditional method. CQC > 0 selects a more recent method called the complete
quadratic method of peak response combination—also called the CQC method. In both methods, the
responses are summed with the ABS, SRSS, NRL, or NRLO convention, depending on the value of
PARAM,OPTION. If the SRSS, NRL, or NRLO options are used, close natural frequencies will be summed
by the ABS convention, where close natural frequencies meet the inequality f i + 1 < CLOSE ⋅ f i . Both
PARAM,OPTION and PARAM,CLOSE may be set in any subcase, allowing summation by several
conventions in a single run.
In Version 70, the NRL option has been modified slightly to correspond to the NAVSEA-0908-LP-000-3010
specification. NRLO provides the V69 NRL.
PARAM,CQC,1 or 2 selects the complete quadratic method of peak response combination; also called the
CQC method. PARAM,CQC,1 selects CQC method of response combination for sum across modes.
PARAM,CQC,2 is same PARAM,CQC,1, but outputs the CQC coefficients for each mode ij pair and
frequency and damping for each mode. The default is to consider all modes in the calculation but if only a
subset of modes are of interest then a DTI,CQC,1,... Bulk Data entry may be used to specify a list of modes
(by mode number) to retain for the CQC solution. When multiple excitation directions are specified,
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 943
PARAM,CQC,1 or 2 specifies the summation across the modes and PARAM,OPTION specifies the
summation across excitation directions. As with PARAM,OPTION and PARAM,CLOSE, when
PARAM,CQC is used at the subcase level, each subcase can have a different value specified for OPTION,
CLOSE and CQC. This allows comparisons to be made in the same run among summation across directions
using ABS and SRSS methods while using the CQC method to sum across modes.
For the CQC method, PARAM,DIROUT,YES (Default = NO) outputs the responses combined across the
modes for each separate excitation direction as well as the responses combined across modes and directions.
This allows results to be assessed per excitation direction and for the total combined response.
PARAM,POST,-1 will write the additional directional responses to the op2 file for post processing with
Patran. In this case, the directional responses will be labeled in the Patran Results menu with a TIME value
corresponding to the excitation sequence number. For example, if the SUPORT entry specifies the following
degrees of freedom to be excited: SUPORT,1,123 then direction 1 will be labeled with TIME value 1,
direction 2 with TIME value 2, etc. PARAM,POST,-1 will also write the additional maximum response to
the op2 file for post processing. In this case, the maximum response will be labeled in the Patran Results menu
with a TIME value 4.
For the CQC method, PARAM,NEWMARK,YES (Default = NO) may be used in the case where 3
simultaneous excitation directions are defined and calculate the Newmark combinations across the
excitations directions using the 40% rule. PARAM,PERCENT (Default = 40) may be used to specify a
different percentage for Newmark combinations.
SDRPOPT
Default = SDRP
SDPROPT controls the storage of the principal stresses and strains in the stress and strain tables (OES1 and
OSTR1 data blocks) in p-version analysis. By default, the principal stresses and strains are stored in the stress
and strain tables to support postprocessing. PARAM,SDRPOPT,OFP requests that the principal stresses and
strains are not stored in the tables. This can result in a significant reduction in disk space usage.
SEKD
Default = RSONLY
Controls the calculation of the upstream superelement differential stiffness matrix in SOL 106.
RSONLY Calculate the differential stiffness for the residual structure only.
ALL Calculate and reduce the differential stiffness for all superelements and the residual
structure.
SEMAP, SEMAPOPT, SEMAPPRT

SEMAP Default = SEMAP
SEMAPOPT Default = 42
SEMAPPRT Default = 3
The superelement map (SEMAP table) contains several lists useful for determining how the program has
partitioned superelement models. It is printed automatically each time this table is generated. It consists of
three major parts:
Main Index
GPM The Grid Point Map contains a list of each grid point, its interior superelement placement,
and the SElD of all grid points connected directly to it by elements. Three tables follow that
summarize the connectivity between superelements, sorted on grid point sequence, SElD,
and the number of connections.
ISM The Individual Superelement Map lists the interior grid points, exterior grid and scalar
points, elements, and time and storage space estimates for each superelement.
SDT The Superelement Definition Table contains the SEID of every superelement in the model,
the processing order, and a pictorial representation of the superelement tree.
SEMAP, SEMAPOPT, and SEMAPPRT are used to control the amount of output that is printed and other
special features. The possible values for SEMAP are shown in the following table.
SEMAP Value Output and Application

SEMAP (Default) ISM, SDT. The lengthy GPM is suppressed. This is the appropriate value for use
after the model is stable and only minor changes are to be made.
SEMAPALL GPM, ISM, SDT. All tables are printed. This value is useful on the initial debug
run of a model and when making extensive modeling changes.
SEMAPCON Only the summary tables of the GPM and the estimation data is output. This is
a useful value when iterating to an economic partitioning scheme for large, complex
models.
SEMAPEST Only the estimation data is printed. This is useful when evaluating several
alternative partitioning schemes.
SEMAPPUN No output is printed. The exterior grid points of the superelement with a SEID
that is input on SEMAPOPT are placed on a CSUPER entry image on the
PUNCH file, allowing the superelement to be used as an external superelement. If
SEMAPOPT > 0, the superelement entry is given an SSID of SEMAPOPT. If
SEMAPOPT < 0, the exterior points listed are those of the residual structure, but
the CSUPER entry is given an SSID of |SEMAPOPT|.
Other special features are available with parameters SEMAPOPT and SEMAPPRT. They are fully described
under parameters OPT1 and OPT2 in the description of the TABPRT module in the MSC Nastran DMAP
Programmer’s Guide<$paranum[h1].
If the default value of SEMAP is used, the other two parameters may be used to further refine this output, as
described in MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide<$paranum[h1] under the TABPRT module description. The
printing of the SEMAP table can be avoided by the use of PARAM,SEMAPPRT,-1.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 945
SENSUOO
Default = NO
By default, in dynamic sensitivity analysis in SOL 200, displacements at the o-set due to pseudo-loads do not
include any effect due to inertia and damping. If PARAM,SENSUOO,YES is specified then these effects will
be computed in a quasi-static manner and included in the sensitivity analysis.
SEP1XOVR
Default = 0
The old and new location of moved shell grid points are printed if SEP1XOVR = 16. When the RSSCON
shell-to-solid element connector is used. By default, the moved shell grid points are not printed,
SEP1XOVR = 0. See the description of PARAM,TOLRSC for more details.
SEQOUT
Default = 0
See OLDSEQ.
SERST
Default = AUTO
By default, all restarts are considered automatic (see Restart Procedures (p. 334) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Manual). If none of the following Case Control commands are entered, then SEALL=ALL is the default
action: SEMG, SELG, SEKR, SELR, SELA, SEMA, SEMR, and SEALL.
These commands may be used to partition the analysis into several runs. By default, the restart will proceed
in automatic fashion for each command, regenerating only that data that is affected by modifications in the
Bulk Data and Case Control or changes in upstream superelements. If the user wishes to overwrite the data,
even if it is not affected by modifications to the data, then PARAM,SERST,MANUAL must be entered.
With PARAM,SERST,AUTO or MANUAL, all superelements will be processed through Phase 0 (see
Superelement Analysis (p. 388) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual). This phase includes execution of the
sequencer module (SEQP), initial superelement processing (SEP1), and initial geometry processing (GP1
and GP2) modules, which can result in significant CPU overhead. If this overhead is not desired, then
PARAM,SERST,SEMI will limit Phase 0 and Phase 1 to only those superelements specified on the SEMG,
SELG, SEKR, SELR, SELA, SEMA, SEMR, and SEALL Case Control commands. If none of these
commands is entered, then execution will skip Phase 0 and 1.
In the modal solution sequences (SOLs 110, 111, 112, 145, 146, and 200), the modes of the residual
structure are automatically computed in Phase 2 if any SE-type command (e.g., SEMG=n) is requested for
the residual structure. If PARAM,SERST,SEMI and no SE-type command is specified for the residual
structure, then, by default, its modes will not be recomputed. This logic is intended for restarts from SOL
103 into one of the modal solutions. If, however, the modes have not already been computed or need to be
recomputed, then PARAM,SERST,RSMDS must be specified to force the calculation of the residual
structure modes.
If PARAM,SERST,SEDR is specified, then Phases 0, 1, and 2 will be skipped. This option is intended for
data recovery (Phase 3) runs only.
Main Index
The options of SEMI, RSMDS, and SEDR are intended for models that are defined on more than one
database; i.e., superelements are defined on separate databases (multiple MASTER DBsets) and processed in
separate runs. Also, with this technique, databases are attached with the DBLOCATE File Management
statement rather than the RESTART File Management statement. In general, these options are not
recommended because they disable the automatic restart capability, which compromises the database
integrity.
SESDAMP
Default = NO
PARAM,SESDAMP,YES
Modal damping is calculated for superelements if PARAM,SESDAMP,YES is specified. An SDAMPING
Case Control command that selects a TABDMP1 Bulk Data entry must also be specified in the desired
superelement’s subcase. By default, modal damping is added to viscous damping (B). If you insert
PARAM,KDAMP,-1 (or PARAM,KDAMPFL,-1 for fluid superelements) then modal damping will be added
to structural damping (K4). The SESDAMP parameter needs to be specified as NO for an assembly run.
PARAM,SESDAMP,AUG
By its nature, classical modal damping in superelements is computed only for the component modes. If fixed
boundary or mixed boundary (some fixed, some free) methods are used to compute the component modes,
no damping is computed for the constraint modes, which can lead to answer differences when comparing the
same model with and without superelements. An enhanced modal damping method has been developed to
account for damping on the constraint modes. To use the enhanced damping method instead of the classical
method, define “PARAM,SESDAMP,AUG”. When this enhanced damping method is defined, the user may
choose how the damping factor for the constraint modes is determined via the parameter TDAMP.
SESEF
Default = -1 (SOLs 103 and 115 only)
If SESEF = 0 in superelement normal modes analysis, the fraction of total strain energy for a superelement
in each of the system’s modes is output in the vector SESEFA for tip superelements and in SESEFG for nontip
superelements. If SESEF = 1, strain energy fractions are output, and expansion of the eigenvectors from a-set
size to g-set is branched over for tip superelements. If SESEF = -1 (the default value), no strain energy
fractions are computed.
Output requests must be present in order for strain energy fractions to be calculated. If SESEF = 1, no other
output results for tip superelements.
SHIFT1
Default = -1.234
The negative shift used when computing massless mechanism constraint modes. For very stiff model (1000.
hz for the first flexible mode), consider using a larger value.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 947
SHLDAMP
Default = SAME
If SAME, then structural damping is obtained from MID1 material of PSHELL. If DIFF or any value not
equal to SAME, each MIDi field of the PSHELL will have its own structural damping. See Remark 5. of the
PSHELL.
SIGMA
Default = 0.0
The radiant heat flux is proportional to
4
SIGMA ⋅ ( T grid + T ABS )
where SIGMA is the Stefan-Boltzmann constant, T grid is the temperature at a grid point, and T ABS is the
scale factor for absolute temperature and may be specified by PARAM,TABS. These parameters must be
given in units consistent with the rest of the data in the model. The value for SIGMA in SI units is
–8 2 4
5.67 × 10 watts/m K
The default value causes radiant heat effects to be discarded.

SKINOUT
Default = NONE
Request that sets of grid and element lists be output for both the fluid and structure at the fluid-structure
interface.
NONE Requests no output of sets.

PUNCH Requests set output to .pch only.
PRINT Requests set output to .f06 only.
ALL Requests set output to both .pch and .f06.
See the Case Control command FLSPOUT as an alternative selection.

SKPAMP
Default = 0
For SOLs 145, 146, and 200, SKPAMP = -1 suppresses all unsteady aerodynamic calculations. The
automatic restart performs a similar function without this parameter. Specifying it ensures suppression of the
calculations, regardless of the determination of the automatic restart.
SLOOPID
Default = 0 (SOL 129 and 159 only)
Main Index
In a nonlinear transient analysis (SOLs 129 and 159) restart, SLOOPID identifies the initial conditioning
previous nonlinear analysis run (SOLs 106 and 153 respectively). Setting SLOOPID greater than 0 will cause
SOLs 129 and 159 to start from the static deformed position.
SMALLQ
Default = 0.0
By default Nastran removes unused superelement q-set degrees-of-freedom from the residual structure
solution set. Set this parameter to a small value (e.g., 1.0E-10) if you do not want unused superelement q-set
degrees-of-freedom removed.
SNORM
Default = 20.0
SNORM > 0.0 requests the generation of unique grid point normals for adjacent shell elements (see
Figure 6-2). Unique grid point normals are generated for the CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUADR, and CTRIAR
elements. The grid point normal is the average of the local normals from all adjacent shell elements including
CQUAD8 and CTRIA6 elements. If grid point normals are present, they are used in all element calculations
of the CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUADR, and CTRIAR elements.
SNORM Tolerance in Degrees

> 0.0 Unique grid point normals are generated if each angle between the grid point normal and
each local normal of the adjacent shell elements is smaller than SNORM. SNORM Bulk
Data entries overwrite a generated normal.
= 0.0 The generation of grid point normals is turned off. The user can define normals with the
SNORM Bulk Data entry.
< 0.0 Grid point normals are not generated. SNORM Bulk Data entries are ignored.
Caution: If the grid shown in Figure 6-2 is located on a symmetric half model boundary and, hence, Shell
2 is not present, you may attain the same result as a full model by specifying the normal
direction with the SNORM Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 949
Grid Point
Normal
Local Normal of Shell 1 Local Normal of Shell 2
SNORM SNORM
Shell 1 Shell 2
Figure 6-2 Unique Grid Point Normal for Adjacent Shell Elements
SNORMPRT
Default = -1
PARAM,SNORMPRT,>0 writes the grid point normals of the model in the basic coordinate system to the
.f06 and/or .pch files.
SNORMPRT Switch to Print Out Normals

<0 No output
1 Print out to the punch file (.pch)
2 Print out to the print file (.f06)
3 Print out to the punch (.pch) and print file (.f06)
SOFTEXIT
Default = NO
In SOL 200, if soft convergence is achieved during optimization, before completing the maximum number
of design iterations, the user may request an exit with PARAM,SOFTEXIT,YES.
SOLADJC
Default = 0
PARAM SOLADJC indicates if adjoint solution vectors are to be calculated during the analysis:
Main Index
-1 Do not calculate adjoint solution vectors during the analysis. Any required adjoint solution
vectors will be computed during sensitivity analysis.
>0 For ANALYSIS=DFREQ, the adjoint vectors will be computed during the solution if:
1. All frequency response DRESP1 entries are grid responses.

2. Each subcase has the same set of excitation frequencies.
3. The number of degrees-of-freedom referenced on DRESP1 entries < (number of
independent design variables + number of type-2 properties + number of spawned
nonlinear beam library properties) x (number of subcases.)
4. PARAM AUTOADJ=YES (Default)
999999 For ANALYSIS=MFREQ, the adjoint vectors will be computed during the solution if the four
items above are satisfied and SOLADJC=999999. SOLADJC=999999 cannot be used in
conjunction with FREQ3, FREQ4 or FREQ5 entries to specify excitation frequencies.
SOLID
Default = 0
SOLID also allows several models to be stored in the same graphics database created by PARAM,POST,0.
SPARSEDM
Default = YES
See SPARSEDR.
SPARSEDR
Default = YES
SPARSEDR=YES limits the data recovery matrix calculations to recover only those grid points specified on
SET commands referenced by grid point output requests (DISP, SPCF, etc.) or those points connected to
elements specified on element output requests (STRESS, FORCE, etc.). In SOL 200, the design model and
design responses are also taken into consideration for determining which grid points are needed for data
recovery.
SPARSEDM=YES is for SOL 200 and takes further advantage of small design models/responses during the
adjoint or pseudo-load sensitivity calculations.
These methods take advantage of very small output requests, and/or small design models in SOL 200, for
large models resulting in significant CPU and disk space savings.
If, however, the output requests and/or the size of the design model in SOL 200 require the calculation of the
solution over a large enough percentage of degrees-of-freedom, then it is more efficient to compute the
solution at all grid points. The user PARAMeter SPDRRAT (Default75) and SPDMRAT (Default60)
specifies this percentage.
The sparse data recovery method is not supported in Aeroelastic (SOL 146), Flutter (SOLs 145 and 200),
Complex Eigenvalue (SOLs 107, 110, 145, and 200), Nonlinear (SOLs 106, 129, 153, 159, and 400) and
Cyclic Symmetry Analysis (SOLs 114, 115, and 118).
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 951
The sparse data recovery method is deactivated when the following Case Control commands are specified:
EKE, ESE, EDE, and CMSENRGY.
PARAM,DDRMM is ignored under PARAM,SPARSEDR,YES. To restore the data recovery solution process
to pre-V2004 methods insert PARAM,SPARSEDR,NO.
SPARSEPH
Default = YES
The default selects the very efficient sparse data recovery method during eigenvector data recovery in
DOMAINSOLVER ACMS (PARTOPT=DOF). This method uses the same process for eigenvector data
recovery as is requested by PARAM,SPARSEDR,YES in other dynamic solution sequences like SOLs 107
through 112.
SPARSEPH will be automatically changed to NO if ACPOWER or INTENSITY calculations are requested.
These calculations require all eigenvector DOF to be computed.
PARAM,SPARSEPH,NO forces full data recovery on all degrees-of-freedom and can be significantly less
efficient if data recovery is required at only a few degrees-of-freedom. See related user parameters MDOTM,
851 and SPARSEDR, 950.
SPDRRAT
Default = 75
See SPARSEDR.
SPCGEN
Default = NO
SPCGEN is analogous to and described by the PUNCH keyword on the AUTOSPC Case Control
command. The specification of the AUTOSPC command overrides the specification of PARAM,SPCGEN.
SPDMRAT
Default = 60
See SPARSEDR.
SQSETID
Default = 99000001
See AUTOQSET, 750.
SRCOMPS
Default = NO
SRCOMPS controls the computation and printout of ply strength ratios. If SRCOMPS=YES, ply strength
ratios are output for composite elements that have failure indices requested.
Main Index
SRTELTYP
Default = 0
See S1, S1G, S1M.
SRTOPT
Default = 0
See S1, S1G, S1M.
START
Default = 0
See OLDSEQ.
STEPFCT
Real, Default = 0.9 for Lagrangian elements and 0.666 for Euler elements, SOL 700 only. The scale factor
has an effect on the time step computation of Lagrangian and Euler elements.
STEPFCTL
Real > 0, Default = 0.9, SOL 700 only.
Defines a scale factor to be used on the internally calculated time step. When both of STEPFCT and
STEPFCTL are defined, STEPFCTL will be used for Lagrangian elements and STEPFCT will be used for
Euler elements.
STIME
Default = 0.0 (SOLs 109, 112, 129 and 159 only)
In restarts from previous transient analysis runs, the user provides STIME = t N where t N is the last time step
of the subcase to be continued with a new or changed subcase in the new run. Thus, the loading and printout
will start from t N as though the original run contained the new subcase data.
In SOLs 109 and 112 restarts from previous SOLs 109 and 112 runs, STIME is used to specify the proper
starting time of the restart run. If STIME exceeds the last output time of the previous run, the starting time
is assumed to be the last output time. Otherwise, the starting time is assumed to be the output time of the
previous run (not necessarily the last output time) that is closest to STIME. In other words, the starting time
of the restart run need not be the last output time of the previous run, but may be any time earlier than that.
The program informs the user that it is a restart run and indicates the starting time (determined as above)
that is used for the restart run.
In SOLs 109 and 112 restarts, the user must ensure that the model and the constraints as well as the subcase
setup in the restart run are the same as those in the previous run. The user may, however, specify different
TSTEP and DLOAD requests in Case Control and also different TSTEP and dynamic loading entries in the
Bulk Data compared to the previous run. The loading and the results output from the restart run will start
from the new starting time.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 953
Notes: 1. The responsibility for ensuring that the model and the constraints as well as the subcase
setup in the restart run are the same as those in the previous run is left to the user; the
program does not check for this condition. If this condition is not met, the program
may terminate the execution with a fatal error or give erroneous results.
2. Restarts in SOLs 109 and 112 using STIME > 0.0 are supported only for applied loads,
not for SPC/SPCD enforced motion. If this usage is violated, the program terminates
the execution with an appropriate fatal message.
STRUCTMP
Replaced by a keyword on the FLSPOUT Case Control command.
SUBCASID
Default = 0
PARAM,SUBCASID,n where n is greater than zero, specifies that the restart proceeds from SUBCASE n in
nonlinear static analysis, SOL 106. SUBCASID is an alternative to SUBID and is recommended over
SUBID which indicates the subcase sequence number.
SUBID
Default = 1
In SOL 106 by default, the restart proceeds from the last LOOPID in the last subcase. SUBID may be used
to specify an earlier subcase by specifying the sequential number (for SElD = 0) of the subcase. In SOLs 106
and 153, PARAM,LOOPID may also be specified for an earlier LOOPID. SUBCASID is an alternative to
SUBID and is recommended over SUBID. See Additional Topics (p. 511) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide
for further discussion.
SUPAERO
Default = ZONA
If SUPAERO=ZONA, then the ZONA51 code is used for supersonic aerodynamic calculations. If
SUPAERO=CPM, then the CPM method is used. If ZONA51 is not available at a particular installation,
PARAM,SUPAERO,CPM must be specified to avoid a fatal error when performing supersonic aerodynamic
analyses. Only one supersonic aerodynamics method can be selected in a given run.
Note: CPM is only supported for planar configurations.
SUPDOF
Default = 0
Digits 1 through 6 indicate which of the six rigid body degrees of freedom are supported for a Solution 144
run. For example, SUPDOF=35 indicates that the plunge (3) and pitch (5) degrees of freedom are supported.
This parameter is optional. If omitted, Nastran will compute these data using a numerical method.
Main Index
SUPER

Default =  0 (nonsuperelement sequences)
 – 1 (superelement sequences)
See OLDSEQ.
TABID
Default = 2
TABID controls the punch output for response spectra. See Additional Topics (p. 511) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Guide. A related parameter is RSPECTRA.
TABS
Default = 0.0
TABS is used to convert units of the temperature input (°F or °C) to the absolute temperature (°R or °K).
Specify:
PARAM,TABS,273.16 When Celsius is used.

PARAM,TABS,459.69 When Fahrenheit is used.
Refer to the Bulk Data entry, CREEP, 1562 for a creep analysis with SOLs 106 or 153. Refer to
PARAM,SlGMA for heat transfer analysis.
TDAMP
PARAM,TDAMP,Real
When using enhanced modal damping for superelements (see PARAM,SESDAMP,AUG ), the user may
choose how the damping factor for the constraint modes is determined.
If TDAMP=0.0 (the default), the damping factor is averaged over all the damping coefficients defined on
TABDMP1.
If TDAMP is less than 0.0, the damping factor from TABDMP1 associated with the lowest natural frequency
is used.
If TDAMP is positive, the damping factor defined by TDAMP is used directly.
TESTNEG

 -2 for Newtons method

Default =  -1 for Arc-length method and SOLs 101-112,115,118,187, and

 200

In nonlinear static analysis (SOLs 106 and 153), and differential stiffness generation with preload (SOLs 101-
112, 115, 118, 187, and 200 with STATSUB) this parameter specifies the action to take when negative terms
are encountered on the factor diagonal of matrix decomposition. Negative terms indicate that the differential
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 955
stiffness has introduced a structural instability. The instability may be real (structural buckling) or
mathematical (the current iteration appears unstable, but a stable solution exists).
TESTNEG Results
-1 Stop if negative terms occur.
1 or 0 Continue if negative terms occur.
-2 If negative terms exist, do not use differential stiffness.
2 Do not use differential stiffness.
3 Use differential stiffness with preload even if negative terms exist (SOLs 101-112,
115, 118, 187, and 200 with STATSUB only)
TFSYMFAC
Default = 1.D-08
TFSYMFAC specifies the tolerance at which matrices generated via the TFL Case Control command are
treated as anti-symmetric in the solution process. The default will not symmetrize the matrix even if the
tolerance is not exceeded. Whereas, if TFSYMFAC is negative then the absolute values is used as the
tolerance and the matrix will be symmetrized if the tolerance is exceeded. If TFSYMFAC is 0.D0 then the
symmetry is not checked.
TINY
Default = 1.E-3
Any elements with strain energy that is less than a TINY percentage of the total strain energy for any
superelement will not be printed or made available for postprocessing by MSC Patran or other programs.
TINY may also be used to suppress the printing of small numbers in the constraint check matrix [ E mh ]
described in Geometry Processing in SubDMAP PHASE0 (p. 335) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
TOLRSC
Default = 0.05
When the RSSCON shell-to-solid element connector is used, the connecting grid points of the shell element
are moved on to the solid face if the grid points are close enough. The tolerable distance of the shell grid
point to the solid edge or face is ε ⋅ h where h is the height of the solid edge; see the sample figure below. The
relative tolerance is user modifiable using the parameter.
PARAM,TOLRSC, ε
The default for the relative tolerance is ε = 0.05 . Rigid body invariance is satisfied with double-precision
accuracy if the shell grid points are adjusted.
Main Index
TOPOCONV
Default = 80
Parameter TOPOCONV is applicable only to ESLNRO topology optimization tasks. It sets a lower bound
for the percentage of the design variables whose maximum relative changes are within the tolerance specified
by CONVDV on the DOPTPRM entry.
By default, when more then 80% of the design variables show their maximum relative changes are within
CONVDV, the job will be terminated.
TRMBIM
TRMBIM is used to define the formulation used for reduced impedance matrix, RIM, for all trim
components requested under TRIMGRP case control commands. It is default to 'PHYSICAL' which will
generate RIM in physical coordinates. The other valid option for TRMBIM are:
1. 'MODAL' which will produce RIM in modal coordinates.
2. 'DATACHK' which perform dry run without producing Reduce Impedance Matrix or results. Job
will be terminated afterwards.
It is important to note that data recovery for trim components are supported only under
'PARAM,TRMBIM,PHYSICAL' and 'PARAM,PEMNPART,1 (default)' for all trim components. In
addition, SOL 200 supports for trim components is limited to following conditions,
1. Design model on structure and/or fluid model only (not the trim/PEM material).
2. Design responses/constraints on responses of structure and/or fluid only (not the trim/PEM
material).
TSTATIC
Default = -1 (SOLs 129, 159, 400 and 600 only)
If TSTATlC = 1, a static solution may be obtained while ignoring inertial and damping forces. For SOLs 129
and 159, this option is available only with the adaptive time-stepping method (see METHOD = “ADAPT”
on the Bulk Data entry, TSTEPNL, 3191). For SOL 600, TSTATIC=1 may only be used for the default auto
step iteration procedure.
UGASC
SOL 700 only,
Real. Defines a value for the universal gas constant.
1. Must be used if the molar weight is used on a GAS option of the AIRBAG entry, or if molar gas
fractions are given on an INFLFRAC entry.
2. Specify only one universal gas constant per problem.
3. In IS units, R equals 8.3145 J mol –1 K – 1 .
Using the tonne, mm, system of units R has a value of 8314.5 tonne mm 2 s – 2 mol –1 K – 1 .
In imperial units, R equals 1.9859 Btu lbmol –1 °R – 1 or 1545.3 ft lbf lbmol –1 °R – 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 957
UNSYMF
Default = NO
In SOL 106, nonlinear statics, PARAM,UNSYMF,YES is required to include damping effects in the
calculation of complex eigenvalues. See PARAM,NMLOOP.
UNSYMKB
Character, default = 'NO'
In modal solutions or real eigenvalue solutions, if the stiffness or damping matrix is not symmetric, the run
will normally terminate with a FATAL error message. Setting UNSYMKB to 'YES' will allow the run to
continue.
UPDTBSH
Default = NO
UPDTBSH controls the update of boundary shapes generated by auxiliary boundary model analysis in SOL
200. By default, the auxiliary boundary models and shapes are generated only once at the initial design cycle
and will not be updated in subsequent cycles even if the shape of the primary model is changing.
PARAM,UPDTBSH,YES requests that the auxiliary models and shapes are updated and reanalyzed at every
cycle.
USETPRT
Default = -1
USETPRT controls the tabular printout of the structural degree-of-freedom sets. See Degree-of-Freedom Sets,
1065. To print aerodynamic degree-of-freedom sets, please see OPGEOM.
Sequence Print USETPRT

None None (Default) -1
Row sort only 0
Internal Column sort only 1
Row and Column sort 2
Row sort only 10
External Column sort only 11
Row and Column sort 12
The degrees-of-freedom can be listed in ascending order according to their internal or external sequence
number, but not both. The external sequence number is the grid, scalar, or extra point identification number.
The internal sequence number is the number assigned after resequencing (see PARAM,OLDSEQ).
The row sort is not recommended in p-version analysis because large integers are generated for hierarchical
grid point identification numbers and they will be truncated.
Main Index
For a given sequence there are two types of tables that may be printed: row sort and column sort. For row
sort, a table is printed for each set selected by USETSEL. Here is an example of row sort (USETPRT = 0 or
10):
U S E T D E F I N I T I O N T A B L E ( I N T E R N A L S E Q U E N C E , R O W S O R T )
A DISPLACEMENT SET
-1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-
1= 2-1 2-2
For column sort, a single table is printed for the following sets: SB, SG, L, A, F, N, G, R, O, S, M, E. Here
is an example of column sort (USETPRT=1 or 11):
U S E T D E F I N I T I O N T A B L E ( I N T E R N A L S E Q U E N C E , C O L U M N S O R T )
EXT GP. DOF INT DOF INT GP. SB SG L A F N G R O S M E

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 - 1 1- 1 G 1 1 1 1
- 2 2- 2 2 2 2
- 3 3- 1 3 3 3
- 4 4- 2 4 4 4
- 5 5- 3 5 5 5
- 6 6- 4 6 6 6
USETSEL
Default = 0
USETSEL specifies the sets which will be printed in the row sort (USETPRT = 0 or 10). In order to select
specific sets to be printed, you must sum their corresponding decimal equivalent numbers. For example, sets
A, L, and R are selected with USETSEL=128+256+8=392.
USETSEL Sets Printed

-1 All sets as defined in Degree-of-Freedom Sets, 1065.
0 Mutually exclusive sets only; i.e., sets M, SB, SG, O, Q, R, C, B, E, and A.
USETSTRi
Input-character-Default’ ‘
USETSTR1 through USETSTR4 specifies the sets that will be printed by the specification of parameters
USETPRT and USETSEL. Any set in Degree-of-Freedom Sets, 1065 may be specified. A “:” is used as a
separator. In the following example, the m-set (degrees-of-freedom eliminated by multipoint constraints) and
s-set (degrees-of-freedom eliminated by single point constraints) are specified.
Example:
PARAM,USETSTR1,M:S
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 959
VARPHI
Default = π /4 (0.78539816)
Feature angle for detection of singular geometric features (sharp edges or corners) in the mesh during adaptive
mesh refinement.
When adaptive meshing is requested (see Case Control command, HADAPT (Case), 388 and Bulk Data entry,
HADAPTL, 2059), singular geometric features such as sharp edges or sharp corners must be detected. To this end
the face outward normals N 1, N 2 of each pair of adjacent mesh faces and the edge oriented tangents T 1, T 2 of
each pair of adjacent mesh edges are computed (see Figure 6-3). If the angle between N 1 and N 2 for mesh faces,
or between T 1 and T 2 for mesh edges is bigger than the feature angle ϕ , then the common edge or vertex
will be considered a splitting edge or vertex where surfaces or lines are broken and a singular geometric feature
is defined.
Edge Vertex
N1
N2
T2
T1
Faces Edge
Figure 6-3
Mesh faces and elements are preprocessed to ensure consistent orientation and that the appropriate sign of
face normals and edge tangents will be accounted for during the computation of their mutual angle.
VELCUT
Default = 1.E-6, SOL 700 only
Defines the minimum velocity in Eulerian meshes.
Format:
PARAM,VELCUT,VALUE
Example:
PARAM,VELCUT,1.0E-6
VALUE Minimum velocity. (Real > 0.0)
Main Index
Remark:
Any velocity less than VELCUT is set to zero. It is mainly used to eliminate harmless but annoying small
values of velocity caused by round-off error and numerical dispersion.
VMOPT
Default = 0
By default (VMOPT=0), virtual mass is included after the component modes are computed. Virtual mass is
not taken into consideration when using GRAV, RFORCE, or ACCEL loading.
If VMOPT=1, then the virtual mass will be included in the mass matrix at the same time as all other mass
elements. In other words, the component modes will reflect the virtual mass. Virtual mass is taken into
consideration when using GRAV, RFORCE, or ACCEL loading.
If VMOPT=2, the modes of the structure or component without the fluid are computed first (“dry” modes).
The fluid effects are added to the modal basis during the residual flexibility computation to produce the “wet”
modes for the component. Both eigenvalue tables are printed, allowing comparison of the dry and wet modes.
The wet modes are used in modal dynamic analysis. Cost savings result from the dense Virtual Mass (VM)
matrix being kept out when computing dry modes in the physical basis. Its presence can increase memory
and computation times by an order of magnitude. The VM is added only to the smaller generalized basis used
in Residual Flexibility Computations. The approximations introduced by this approach are generally small
due to the homogeneous nature of the fluid. It is the preferred method when the number of wetted elements
exceeds several hundred, for reasons of efficiency. It is to be noted that MAX normalization for eigenvectors
with PARAM,VMOPT,2 may produce incorrect results. Therefore, MAX normalization is not
recommended when using PARAM,VMOPT,2.
If VMOPT is not equal to 0, 1 or 2, then no virtual mass is computed.
For SOL 400, VMOPT=2 is not supported, and, if entered, the virtual mass will be included with the mass
matrix.
VREF
Default = 1.0
In modal flutter analysis, the velocities are divided by VREF to convert units or to compute flutter indices.
VUELJUMP, VUGJUMP
Default = 1000
Specifies the separation in identification numbers for display elements and grid points generated in p-version
analysis. The defaults are sufficient for a 9 9 9 display element mesh.
Identification numbers for display elements and grid points start with 10001001 and 201001001,
respectively. For example, by default the identification numbers for the display elements of the first p-element
will be numbered 100001001 through 100002000 and the second p-element 100002001 through
100003000, etc.
VUBEAM, VUHEXA, VUPENTA, VUQUAD4, VUTETRA, VUTRIA3
Default = VUBEAM
Default = VUHEXA
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 961
Default = VUPENTA
Default = VUQUAD4
Default = VUTETRA
These parameters are used in p-version analysis to specify the names of the display elements in the data
recovery output tables; such as those created by the VUGRID Case Control command and PARAM,POST.
They should be used if your postprocessor does not recognize display elements. For example,
PARAM,VUHEXA,CHEXA renames the display element VUHEXA to “CHEXA” in the output files.
WHIRLOPT
Default = FWD
Control forward whirl or backward whirl analysis for SYNC option in SOL 107 and SOL 108 for analysis in
rotating reference frame using the ROTOR entry.
Usage:
PARAM, WHIRLOPT, FWD: For forward whirl analysis
PARAM, WHIRLOPT, BWD: For backward analysis
WMODAL
Default = NO
In Modal Transient analysis (SOL 112), PARAM, WMODAL, YES will automatically produce accurate
conversion at all frequencies using the modal frequencies based on the eigenvalues as shown below. This
relieves the user of trying to determine the “best” value for (PARAM, W3 and W4). Note, use of WMODAL
does not suppress user specified values of W3 and W4.
1⁄ ω1 0 … 0 1⁄ ω1 0 … 0
0 1⁄ ω2 … 0 0 1⁄ ω2 … 0
·· ·· · ·· [ Φ dτ q ] ( G [ K d1d ] + [ K dd
4 ])[Φ ]
dq ·· ·· · ··
· · ·
·
· · · ·
·
·
0 0 … 1⁄ ωq 0 0 … 1⁄ ωq
Note the CBUSH, CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3, and CFAST elements when computing the element forces
for data recovery do not currently take into account the WMODAL conversion in SOL112.
WRBEAMB
0 Write equivalent radius for all beams (see PARAM, BEAMBEA) whether beam-beam contact is
anticipated or not. The equivalent radius is the 7th field of Marc’s GEOMETRY values for beam
type elements.
-1 Do not write equivalent radius (7th field is blank). This might be necessary for versions of Marc
earlier than 2003.
Main Index
WTMAS600
Determines whether GRAV entries will be scaled by WTMASS or not for SOL 600 only.
0 The value of A (4th field) on the GRAV entry will not be scaled by WTMASS.
1 The value of A (4th field) on the GRAV entry will be scaled by WTMASS.
Remarks:
1. This parameter is available starting with the MD Nastran 2010.
2. Prior to MD Nastran 2010, WTMAS600=1 for all analyses.
WTMASS
Default = 1.0
The terms of the structural mass matrix are multiplied by the value of WTMASS when they are generated.
In coupled fluid-structure analysis WTMASS is applied to the structural portion of the model only.
WTMASS applies to MFLUID entries but it is not recommended for use in hydroelastic problems.
W3, W4, W3FL, W4FL
Default = 0.0
The damping matrix for transient analysis is assembled from the equation:
1 2 G 1 1 4
[ B dd ] = [ B dd ] + [ B dd ] + -------- [ K dd ] + -------- [ K dd ]
W3 W4
In coupled fluid-structure analysis, W3 and W4 are applied to structural portion of the model and W3FL
and W4FL to the fluid portion of the model. The default values of 0.0 for W3, W4, W3FL, and W4FL cause
the [ K 1dd ] and [ K 4dd ] items to be ignored in the damping matrix, regardless of the presence of the PARAM, G
or GFL or [ K 4dd ] . [ K 1dd ] is the stiffness.
4
[ K dd ] is the structural damping and is created when GE is specified on the MATi entries.
1
[ K dd ] is the stiffness. The units of W3, W4, W3FL, and W4FL are radians per unit time. (See Real Eigenvalue
Analysis in SubDMAPs SEMR3 and MODERS (p. 374) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual for further discussion.)
In SOLs 129 and 159, W4 may vary between subcases. However, the linear portion of the model uses only the
W4 value from the first subcase and the values in the subsequent subcases are applied to the nonlinear portion of
the model.
Parameters G, W3, W4 are case control selectable by either the PARAM entries in Case Control, or
RSDAMP or SEDAMP appearing in Case Control pointing to a bulk data DAMPING entry. If both
DAMPING type entries and PARAM entries occur in a subcase, the DAMPING entries take precedence.
When there is no Parameters G, W3, W4 or DMAPING reference in the first Case Control, the Bulk Data
specification (if any) will be used. Subsequent Case Control specification will override the Bulk Data
specification and Case Control rules apply to subsequent specifications.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 963
The CBUSH, CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3, and CFAST elements when computing the element forces for
data recovery take into account W3 and W4 in SOL109 and SOL112.
Linear CBUSH, CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3, and CFAST elements when computing the element forces for
data recovery take into account W3 and W4 in SOL400 with ANALYSIS=NLTRAN. These elements behave
in SOL400 with ANALYSIS=NLTRAN in a linear fashion when PARAM, LGDISP, -1 (Default) and there
are no PBUSHT referring to the CBUSH or PELAST entries referring to the CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3.
For linear CBUSH, CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3, and CFAST elements in SOL400 with
ANALYSIS=NLTRAN, SOL400 considers Case Control specification of G, W3, or W4 as a data recovery
boundary condition change and each STEPi for the linear elements will pick up the appropriate G, W3, and
W4 values.
Any of these elements in SOL400 with ANALYSIS=NLTRAN that are nonlinear only use the standard force
output data recovery F=Ku(t) since nonlinear elements compute only the unbalanced stiffness force.
In SOL129 or SOL159 linear CBUSH, CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3, and CFAST elements (determined as
in SOL400 above) should never have G, W3, or W4 selected in the Case Control as the linear force recovery
will be incorrect as only the G, W3, and W4 of the first subcase is used.
In SOL129, the FUSE option of the CBUSH should never be used if GE or B is specified for the fusing
CBUSH. This is because, unlike SOL400, SOL129 does not update the B or K4 matrix after the CBUSH
fuses. Thus remnant CBUSH forces due to damping will be present.
WR3, WR4, WRH
Default = 0.0, no rotor damping or circulation terms.
Specifies “average” excitation frequency for calculation of rotor damping and circulation terms. See
“Equations Used in Analyses” on page 192 of the MSC Nastran 2004 Release Guide for equations.
XFACT
Default=1.0
Additional factor to determine upper bound for Q-set reorthogonalization subspace, for ACMS
VERSION=NEW (module ACMS1).
XFACTX
Default=2.0
Multiplier applied to user's maximum frequency to determine maximum frequency for reorthogonalization
for ACMS VERSION=NEW (module ACMS1).
XFLAG
Default = 0
By default (XFLAG = 0), when temperature loads and element deformations are present, the element strain
energy for the linear elements is calculated using the following equation:
1 T T
E = --- u K e u – u P et
2
Main Index
where u is the deformation, K e is the element stiffness and P et is the element load vector for temperature
differences and element deformations. If XFLAG is set to 2, the element strain energy for linear elements is
calculated using the following equation:
1 T 1 T
E = --- u K e u – --- u P et
2 2
The latter formula is the same strain energy calculation used for nonlinear elements.
When requesting Case Control commands ESE or EDE and executing SOL 108 or SOL 111, if Nastran
detects frequency dependent elements (CBUSH if referred to by PBUSH/PBUSHT; CELAS1, CELAS3 if
referred to by PELAS/PELAST; CDAMP1, CDAMP3 if referred to by PDAMP/PDAMPT), Nastran will
automatically remove the entire class of CBUSH, or CELAS1, or CELAS3, or CDAMP1, or CDAMP3
elements, whether or not all of a class are frequency dependent, from the residual (SE0) energy calculations
because frequency dependent elements are not fully implemented in the ESE/EDE calculations and may
result in wrong answers. USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5245 will be issued for each class removed. If
the user wishes to override this removal, set XFLAG to 32. If the user wants XFLAG=2 and XFLAG=33, then
set XFLAG=34.
XYMPCH
Default = NO
The XYPLOT/XYPUNCH commands do not support SOL103 type mode shapes. XYMPCH when set to
a value PARAM, XYMPCH, YES allows the XYPUNCH command XYPUNCH, DISP, RESPONSE / …
to punch without selective selection SOL103 mode shapes as SOL101 type displacements. For example:
$
METHOD = 10
SET 100 = 6, 7, 13
PARAM, XYMPCH, YES
DISP=100
MODES=20 $
…
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XYPUNCH DISP RESPONSE / 6(T3) $
A more modern solution is to include in a standard SOL103 run the Nastran entry
NASTRAN HDF5=0
With for example DISP(PLOT)=ALL
And extract the resulting mode shapes from the resulting HDF5 Data Base.
Then the PARAM, XYMPCH, and MODES=n is not needed nor is any of the OUTPU(XYPLOT)
commands.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 965
XYUNIT, n
n XYUNIT is used in conjunction with an FMS ASSIGN statement to specify the unit number for
the storage of design optimization results and design sensitivity data in comma separated value
format for use in a spreadsheet in SOL 200 or the‘ storage of trim results in SOL 144.
ZROCMAS
Default = NO
When performing component modal synthesis with free or mixed boundary conditions, the c-set mass is
normally included during the calculation of the component modes. If the component has large masses on the
c-set degrees-of-freedom, or if the user requests too many modes for the component, the c-set residual
flexibility will become singular. This causes a failure of the component reduction. The singularity may be
avoided by setting ZROCMAS to YES, which will exclude the c-set mass when calculating the component
modes.
ZROVEC
Default=1.E-06
ZROVEC specifies the tolerance at which a residual vector is not linearly independent and subsequently
removed from the residual vector computation process.
Main Index
Parameter Applicability Tables

Table 6-1, Table 6-2, Table 6-3, Table 6-4, and Table 6-5 list parameter applicability to the solution sequences
(SOLs 101 through 112).
Table 6-6, Table 6-7, Table 6-8, Table 6-9, Table 6-10, Table 6-11, Table 6-12, Table 6-13, Table 6-14, Table 6-15, and
Table 6-16 list parameter applicability to the solution sequences (SOLs 114 through 700).
B Must be specified in the Bulk Data Section only.

E May be specified in either the Bulk Data and/or Case Control Section.
C Must be specified in the Case Control Section only.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 967
Table 6-1 PARAMeter Names in SOLs 101 Through 114 Part 1

Solution Sequence Numbers (101 through 114)
PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
ACEXTMTD B
ACEXTSET B
ACOUT B E E E E E E
ACOWEAK B
ACSYM B B
ADJMETH
ADMPOST E E
ADPCON E
ADSTAT B B
AERODOF
AESDISC
AESMAXIT
AESMETH
AESRNDM
AESTOL
ALPHA1 B B B B B B
ALPHA2 B B B B B B
ALPHA1FL
ALPHA2FL
ALTRED B B B
ALTSHAPE B B B B B B B B
ARBMASP
ARBMFEM
ARBMPS
ARBMSS
ARBMSTYP
ARF
ARS
ASCOUP B B B B B B B B B B B
ASING E E E E E E E E E E E
AUNITS
AUTOADJ
Main Index
Table 6-1 PARAMeter Names in SOLs 101 Through 114 Part 1 (continued)
PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
AUTOGOUT E E E E E E E E E E E
AUTOMSET E E E E E E E E E E
AUTOQSET E E E E E E E E E E E
AUTOSPC E E E E E E E E E E E
AUTOSPCR E
AUTOSPRT E E E E E E E E
BAILOUT E E E E E E E E E E E
BEAMBEA
BEIGRED E E E E E E E
BETA
BIGER E E E E
BIGER1 E E E E
BIGER2 E E E E
BUCKLE E
E
CASPIV E
CB1, CB2 E E E E E E E E E E E
CDIF
CFDIAGP E E E E E E E E E E E
CFRANDEL E E E E E E E E E E E
CHECKOUT E E E E E E E E E E E
CK1, CK2, CK3 E E E E E E E E E E E
CLOSE B
CM1, CM2 E E E E E E E E E E E
CONFAC B B B B B B B B B B B
COUPMASS E E E E E E E E E E E
CP1, CP2 E E E E E E E E
CQC B
CURV E E E E
CURVPLOT E E E E E
CWDIAGP E E E E E E E E E E E
CWRANDEL E E E E E E E E E E E
DBALL E E E E E E E E E E E
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 969
PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
DBCCONV E E E E E E E E E E E
DBCDIAG E E E E E E E E E E E
DBCOVWRT E E E E E E E E E E E
DBDICT B B B B B B B B B B B
DBDN E E E E E E E E E E E

PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
DBDRPRJ B B B B B B B B B B B
DBDRVER B B B B B B B B B B B
DBEXT E E E E E E E E E E E
DBRCV E E E E E E E E E E E
DBUP E E E E E E E E E E E
DDRMM B B
DESPCH
DESPCH1
DFREQ B B
DOPT E E E E
DPEPS
DSNOKD B
DSZERO B B B
DYNSPCF E E E E E E E
EIGFILT B B
ENFMETH E E E E
ENFMOTN E E E E
ERPC
ERPREFDB
ERPRHO
ERPRLF
ERROR E E E E E E E E E E E
ESLFSAV
Main Index
PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
ESLMOVE
ESLRCF
EST E E E E E E E E E E E
EXTDR B B B B B B B B
EXTDROUT B B B B B B B B
EXTDRUNT B B B B B B B B
EXTOUT B B B B B B B B B B B
EXTRCV E E E E E E E E E E E
EXTUNIT B B B B B B B B B B B
FACTOR B B B B B B B B B B B
FBATOLR E E
FBLEND
FIXEDB E E
FKSYMFAC E
FLUIDSE B B B B B B B
FOLLOWK E E E E E E E E E
FRQDEPO B B
FULLSEDR E E E E E E E E E E E
FZERO E E E E E E E E
G B B B B B B
GEOMU E E E E E E E E E E E
GFL B B B B B B
GPECT E E E E E E E E E E E
GRDPNT E E E E E E E E E E E
GUSTAERO
GYROAVG E E
HEATSTAT B
HFREQ B B B
HFREQFL B B B
HTOCITS E
HTOCPRT E
HTOCTOL E
IFP E E E E E E E E E E E
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 971
PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
INREL E E
IRES E E E E E E E E
ITAPE B B B
IUNIT B B B
KDAMP B B B
KDAMPFL B B B
KDIAG E
K6ROT E E E E E E E E E E E
LANGLE B
LFREQ B B B
LFREQFL B B B

PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
LGDISP E
LMFACT B B B
LMODES E B B B
LMODESFL B B B
LOADU E E E E E E E E E E E
LOOPID E
MACH
MAXLP
MAXRATIO E E E E E E E E E E E
MDK4OPT B B B B
MDOPT14 B B B B
MDOTM B B B B
MDOTMFAC B B B B
MDREDOPT B B B B
MESH B
METHCMRS E E E E E E E
MHRED E E E E E E E
Main Index
PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
MINIGOA B B B B B B B B B B B
MODACC B B B
MODEL B B B B B B B B B B B
MPCX B B B B B B B B B B B
MPTUNIT
MXICODE0
NASPRT
NDAMP
NEWSET B
NHPLUS
NINTPTS E E E E
NLAYERS E
NLHTLS E
NLHTOL
NLHTWK
NLMAX E E E E E E E E
NLMIN E E E E E E E E
NMLOOP E
NOCOMPS E E E E E
NOELOF E E E E
NOELOP E E E E
NOGPF E E E E
NOMSGSTR E E E E
NONCUP B
NQSET E E E E E E E
NLTOL B
NUMOUT E E E E
NUMOUT1 E E E E
NUMOUT2 E E E E
OCMP E E E E E
OEE E E E E E
OEF E E E E E E E E E E E
OEFX E E E E E E E E E E E
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 973
PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
OELMOPT E E E E E E E E E E E
OELMSET E E E E E E E E E E E
OES E E E E E E E E E E E
OESE E E E E E E E E E E E
OESX E E E E E E E E E E E
OG E E E E E
OGEOM E E E E E E E E E E E
OGPF E E E E E
OGPS E E E E E E
OGRDOPT E E E E E E E E E E E
OGRDSET E E E E E E E E E E E
OLDSEQ B B B B B B B B B B B
OMAXR E E E E E E E E E E E
OMID E E E E E E E E E
OMSGLVL E E E E E E E E E E E
OPCHSET E E E E E E E E E E E
OPG E E E E E E E E
OPGEOM

PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
OPGTKG
OPPHIB
OPPHIPA
OPTEXIT
OPTION B
OQG E E E E E E E E E E E
OSETELE E E E E E E E E E E E
OSETGRD E E E E E E E E E E E
OSWELM B B B B B B B B B B B
OSWPPT B B B B B B B B B B B
Main Index
PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
OUG E E E E E E E E E E E
OUGCORD E E E E E E E E E E E
OUGSPLIT E E E E E
OUMU E
OUNIT1 E E E E E E E E E E E
OUNIT2 E E E E E E E E E E E
OUTOPT E E E E E
PACINFID B B
PATPLUS E E E E E E E E E E E
PATVER E E E E E E E E E E E
PCOMPRM B B B B B
PDRMSG E E E E E E E E E E E
PEDGEP E E E E E E E E
PENFN B B B
PLTMSG E E E E E E E E E E E
POST E E E E E E E E E E E
POSTEXT E E E E E E E E E E E
POSTU E E E E E E E E E E E
PREFDB E E E E
PRINT
PROUT E E E E E E E E E E E
PRPA E E
PRPHIVZ E E E E E E E E
PRPJ E E E E E E E
PRTBGPDT E E E E E E E E E E E
PRTCSTM E E E E E E E E E E E
PRTEQXIN E E E E E E E E E E E
PRTGPDT E E E E E E E E E E E
PRTGPL E E E E E E E E E E E
PRTGPTT E E E E E E E E E E E
PRTMAXIM E E E
PRTMGG E E E E E E E E E E E
PRTPG E E E E E E E E E E E
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 975
PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
PRTRESLT E E E E E E E E E E E
PVALINIT B B B B B B B B
Q
RBSETPRT E E E E E E E E E E E
RESLTOPT E E E E E E E E E E E
RHOCP
ROTSEKE E E
RSPECTRA E E
RSPRINT E E
RSTTEMP E
S1 E E E E E E E
S1A E E E E E
S1AG E E E E E
S1AM E E E E E
S1G E E E E E
S1M E E E E E
SCRSPEC B
SEMAP B B B B B B B B B B B
SEMAPOPT B B B B B B B B B B B
SEMAPPRT B B B B B B B B B B B
SENSUOO
SEP1XOVR B B B B B B B B B B B
SEQOUT B B B B B B B B B B B
SERST B B B B B B B B B B B
SESDAMP E E E E E E E
SESEF E
Main Index

PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
SHLDAMP E
SIGMA
SKINOUT E E E E E E E
SKPAMP
SLOOPID
SMALLQ B B B B B B B B B B B
SNORM B B B B B B B B B B B
SNORMPRT B B B B B B B B B B B
SOFTEXIT
SOLADJC
SOLID B B B B B B B B B B B
SPARSEDM E E E E E E E
SPARSEDR E E E E E E E
SPARSEPH E E E E
SPDDMAT
SPDRRAT E E E E E E E
SQSETID E E E E E E E E E E E
SRTELTYP E E E E
SRTOPT E E E E
START B B B B B B B B B B B
STIME E E
SUBCASID E
SUBID E
SUPAERO
SUPER B B B B B B B B B B B
TABID E E
TABS
TESTNEG E
TFSYMFAC E E E E E E
TINY E E E E
TOLRSC B B B B B B B B B B B
TSTATIC
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 977
PARAMeter
Name 101 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114
UNSYMF B
UNSYMKB B B B B B B B
UPDTBSH
USETPRT E E E E E E E E E E E
USETSEL E E E E E E E E E E E
VARPHI C
VMOPT E E E E E E E E E E
VREF B B
VUBEAM E E E E E E E E
VUELJUMP E E E E E E E E
VUGJUMP E E E E E E E E
VUHEXA E E E E E E E E
VUPENTA E E E E E E E E
VUQUAD4 E E E E E E E E
VUTETRA E E E E E E E E
WTMASS E E E E E E E E E E E
W3 E E
W3FL E E
W4 E E
W4FL E E
XFACT B B
XFACTX B B
XFLAG E E E
XYUNIT
ZROCMAS E E E E E E E E
ZROVEC E E E E E E E E
Main Index

PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
ACEXTMTD B
ACEXTSET B
ACOUT E
ACOWEAK B
ACSYM B
ADJMETH B
ADPCON E E E E
ADSTAT
AERODOF E E E E
AESDISC B B
AESMAXIT B B
AESMETH B B
AESRNDM B B
AESTOL B B
ALPHA1 B E B B B B B E
ALPHA2 B E B B B B B E
ALPHA1FL
ALPHA2FL
ALTRED
ARBMASP
ARBMFEM
ARBMPS
ARBMSS
ARBMSTYP
ARF
ARS
ASCOUP
ASING
AUNITS
AUTOADJ
AUTOGOUT E E E E E E E E E E E
AUTOMSET E E E E E E E E
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 979
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
AUTOQSET E E E E E E E E E E
AUTOSPC
AUTOSPCR E
AUTOSPRT E E E E E E E E
BAILOUT E E E E E E E E E E E
BEAMBEA
BEIGRED E E E E E E
BETA E E
BIGER E E E E E
BIGER1 E E E E E
BIGER2 E E E E E
BUCKLE
CASIEMA E
CASPIV E E
CB1, CB2 E E E E E E E E E E E
CDIF E
CFDIAGP E E E E E E E E E E E
CFRANDEL E E E E E E E E E E E
CHECKOUT E E E E E E E E E E E E
CK1, CK2, CK3 E E E E E E E E E E E E
CLOSE B
CM1, CM2 E E E E E E E E E E E
CONFAC B B B B B B B B B B B
COUPMASS E E E E E E E E E E E
CP1, CP2 E E E E E E E E
CQC E
CURV E E E E E
CURVPLOT E E E E E
CWDIAGP E E E E E E E E E E E
CWRANDEL E E E E E E E E E E E
DBALL E E E E E E E E E E
DBCCONV E E E E E E E E E E
Main Index

PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
DBCDIAG E E E E E E E E E E
DBCOVWRT E E E E E E E E E E
DBDICT B B B B B B B B B B
DBDRPRJ B B B B B B B B B B
DBDRVER B B B B B B B B B B
DBDN E E E E E E E E E E
DBEXT E E E E E E E E E E E
DBRCV E E E E E E E E E E
DBUP E E E E E E E E E E
DDRMM B E
DEACTEL E
DECLUMP B
DESPCH E
DESPCH1 E
DFREQ B B B
DOPT E E E E
DPEPS B
DPHFLG
DSNOKD B
DSZERO
DV3PASS B
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 981

PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
DYNSPCF E E E E E
ENFMETH E E
ENFMOTN E E
EPPRT
EPSILONT
EPZERO
ERPC
ERPREFDB
ERPRHO
ERPRLF
ERROR E E E E E E E E E E E
ESLFSAV E
ESLLCOMP E
ESLMOVE E
ESLMPC1 E
ESLOPTEX E
ESLPRT E
ESLPRT1 E
ESLRCF E
EULBND B
EULSTRES B
EXTOUT B B B B B B B B B B
EXTRCV E E E E E E E E E E
EXTUNIT B B B B B B B B B B
FACTOR B B B B B B B B B B
FBATOLR
FBLEND B
FIXEDB E
FKSYMFAC E
FLEXINCR
FLUIDMP
FLUIDSE B
Main Index
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
FMULTI B
FOLLOWK E E E E B
FRQDEPO B B
FULLSEDR E E E E E E E E E E E
FZERO E
G B E B B B B B
GFL
GEOMU E E E E E E E E E E
GFL B B
GPECT E E E E E E E E E E
GRADMESH B
GRDPNT E E E E E E E E E E E
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 983

PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
GUSTAERO B B B
GYROAVG
HEATCMD B
HEATSTAT
HFREQ B B B
HFREQFL B B
HTOCITS
HTOCPRT
HTOCTOL
IFP E E E E E E E E E
INREL E
INRLM
IRES E E E E E E E E E
ITAPE B
IUNIT B
KDAMP B B
KDAMPFL B B
KDIAG E E
K6ROT E E E E E E E E E E
LANGLE B B B B
LDSUM X X
LFREQ B B B
LFREQFL B B
LGDISP E E E E B
LMFACT B
LMODES B B B
LMODESFL B B
LOADU E E E E E E E
LOOPID E E E E
MACH B
MALIAS02 B
MALIAS03 B
Main Index
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
MARALPHA B
MARAUTOC B
MARBK105 B
MARBK106 B
MARC3901 B
MARC3D C
MARC4401 B
MARCASUM B
MARCAUTO B
MARCAXEL B
MARCBEAM B
MARCBUG C
MARCBUSK B
MARCCBAR B
MARCCENT B
MARCCON2 B
MARCCON3 B
MARCCPY B
MARCDEF B
MARCDILT B
MARCDIS2 B
MARCDIS3 B
MARCDIS4 B
MARCDMIG B
MARCEKND B
MARCEXIT B
MARCFEAT,N B
MARCFIL B
MARCFRIC B
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 985

PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
MARCGAPP B
MARCGLUE B
MARCHOST B
MARCIAMN B
MARCITER B
MARCL001 B
MARCLOWE B
MARCLUMP B
MARCMATT B
MARCMEM B
MARCMNF B
MARCMPII B
MARCND99 B
MARCNOER B
MARCOFFT B
MARCONLY B
MARCONTF B
MARCOOCC B
MARCOPT B
MARCOTIM B
MARCPARR B
MARCPENT B
MARCPINN B
MARCPOS B
MARCPOST B
MARCPR99 B
MARCPRES B
MARCPRN B
MARCPRNG B
MARCPRNR B
MARCPROG B
MARCPTH B
Main Index
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
MARCRBAL B
MARCRBAR B
MARCRBE2 B
MARCRBE3 B
MARCREVR B
MARCRIGD B
MARCRUN B
MARCSAME C
MARCSCLR B
MARCSETS B
MARCSETT B
MARCSINC B
MARCSIZ3 B
MARCSIZ4 B
MARCSIZ5 B
MARCSIZ6 B
MARCSLHT B
MARCSOLV B
MARCSPCC B
MARCSTIFF B
MARCSUMY B
MARCT16 B
MARCT19 B
MARCTABL B
MARCTEDF B
MARCTEDN B
MARCTEMP B
MARCTETT B
MARCTIEC B
MARCTOL B
MARCTOTD B
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 987

PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
MARCTOTL B
MARCTOTT B
MARCTUBE B
MARCTVL B
MARCUSUB B
MARCVERS B
MARCWDIS B
MARCWELD B
MARCWIND B
MARELSTO B
MARFACEA B
MARFACEB B
MARFATAL B
MARGPFOR B
MARIBOOC B
MARIPROJ B
MARMPCHK B
MARMPCID C
MARNOSET B
MARNOT16 B
MARPLANE B
MARPROCS
MARRBAR2 B
MARROUTT B
MARSHRII B
MARUPDAT B
MAXIREVV B
MAXLP E E
MAXRATIO E E E E E E E E E E E
MBENDCAP B
MCNLPARM B
MCON2D3D B
Main Index
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
MCORDUPD B
MCSSHLCK C
MCSSHORR C
MDAREAMD B
MDK4OPT B
MDOPT14 B
MDOTM B
MDOTMFAC B
MDREDOPT B
MDUMLOAD B
MESH B B B
METHCMRS E E E E E E
MEXTRNOD B
MEXTSEE C
MFASTCMP B
MFORCOR1 B
MFSKIPPP B
MGAPINIT B
MGLUETOL B
MHEATSHL B
MHEATUNT B
MHOUBOLT B
MHRED E E E E E E E
MICRO B
MINCLDSB B
MINIGOA B B B B B B B B B B B
MINRECCC B
MINSOUTT B
MINVASHF B
MINVCITR B
MINVCSHF B
MINVCTOL B
MINFMAX B
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 989
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
MINVNMOD B
MLSTRAIN B
MLSTRAN2 B
MMEMDETT B

PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
MNASTLDS B
MODACC B B
MODEL B B B B B B B B B B B
MOFFCORE B
MOP2TITL B
MOUTRCOR B
MPCX B B B B B B B B B B B
MPERMPRT B
MPTUNIT E
MRAFFLOR B
MRAFFLOT B
MRAFFLOW B
MRALIAS B
MRBE2SNG B
MRBEAMB B
MRBEPARAM B
MRBIGMEM B
MRBUKMTH B
MRC2DADD B
MRCKBODY B
MRCKLOAD B
MRCONADD B
MRCONTAB B
MRCONUSE C
Main Index
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
MRCONRES B
MRCONVER B
MRCOORDS B
MRCWANGL B
MRCWELD B
MRDELTTT B
MRDISCMB B
MRDYNOLD B
MREIGMTH B
MREL1103 B
MRELRB B
MRELSPCD B
MRENUELE B
MRENUGRD B
MRENUMBR B
MRENUMMT B
MRESTALL B
MRESULTS B
MREVPLST B
MRFINITE B
MRFOLLO2 B
MRFOLLOW B
MRFOLOW1 B
MRFOLOW3 B
MRFOLOW4 B
MRGAPUSE B
MRHYPMID B
MRITTYPE B
MRMAT8A3 B
MRMAT8E3 B
MRMAT8N1 B
MRMAT8N3 B
MRMAXISZ B
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 991
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
MRMAXNUM B
MRMEMSUM B
MRMTXKGG B
MRNOCOR B
MRORINTS B
MRPARALL B
MRPELAST B
MRPBUSHT B

PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
MRPIDCHK B
MRPLOAD4 B
MRPLOAD4R B
MRPLSUPD B
MRPREFER B
MRPSHCMP B
MRPSHELL B
MRRELNOD B
MRRCFILE B
MRSETNAM B
MRSPAWN2 B
MRSPLINE B
MRSPRING B
MRT16STP B
MRTABLIM B
MRTABLS1 B
MRTABLS2 B
MRTABPRC B
MRTFINAL B
MRTIMING B
Main Index
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
MRTHREAD B
MRTSHEAR B
MRUSDATA B
MSOLMEM B
MSPCCCHK B
MSPCKEEP B
MSPEEDCB B
MSPEEDCW B
MSPEEDOU B
MSPEEDP4 B
MSPEEDSE B
MSOLMEM, MBYTE B
MSTFBEAM B
MTABINGNR B
MTABLD1M B
MTABLD1T B
MTEMPDWN B
MTLD1SID B
MULRFORC B
MUMPSOLV B
MUSBKEEP B
MWINQUOT B
MWLDGSGA B
MXLAGM1 B
NASPRT B
NDAMP E E E
NDAMPM E
NEWSET
NINTPTS E E E E
NLAYERS E E
NLHTLS E E
NLMAX E
NLMIN E E
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 993
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
NMLOOP
NOCOMPS E E E E E
NOELOF E E E E
NOELOP E E E E
NOGPF E E E E
NOMSGSTR E E E E
NONCUP B
NQSET E E E E E E E
NLTOL E B
NUMOUT E E E E
NUMOUT1 E E E E

PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
NUMOUT2 E E E E
OCMP E E E
OEE E E E E
OEF E E E E E E E E E E E
OEFX E E E E E E E E E E E
OELMOPT E E E E E E E E E E E
OELMSET E E E E E E E E E E E
OES E E E E E E E E E E E
OESE E E E E E E E E E E E
OESX E E E E E E E E E E E
OG E E E E E E
OGEOM E E E E E E E E E E E
OGPF E E E E E
OGPS E E E
OGRDOPT E E E E E E E E E E E
OGRDSET E E E E E E E E E E E
OLDSEQ B B B B B B B B B B B
Main Index
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
OMAXR E E E E E E E E E E E
OMID E E E E E E E E E E
OMSGLVL E E E E E E E E E E E
OPCHSET E E E E E E E E E E E
OPG E E E E E E E E
OPGEOM B B B B
OPGTKG B B B B
OPPHIB B B B
OPPHIPA B B B
OPTEXIT B
OPTION B
OQG E E E E E E E E E E E
OSETELE E E E E E E E E E E E
OSETGRD E E E E E E E E E E E
OSWELM B B B B B B B B B B
OSWPPT B B B B B B B B B B
OUG E E E E E E E E E E E
OUGCORD E E E E E E E E E E
OUGSPLIT E E E E E E
OUMU E E
OUNIT1 E E E E E E E E E E
OUNIT2 E E E E E E E E E E
OUTOPT E E E E E
PARTMEM
PATPLUS E E E E E E E E E E
PATVER E E E E E E E E E E
PDRMSG E E E E E E E E E E
PEDGEP
PENFN B
PH2OUT B
PLTMSG E E E E E E E E E E
POST E E E E E E E E E E E*
POSTEXT E E E E E E E E E E E
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 995
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
POSTU E E E E E E E E E E
PREFDB E
PRINT B B
PROUT E E E E E E E E E E
PRPA E E E
PRPHIVZ E E E E E E E E
PRPJ E E E E E E
PRTCSTM E E E E E E E E E E
PRTEQXIN E E E E E E E E E E
PRTGPDT E E E E E E E E E E
PRTGPL E E E E E E E E E E
PRTGPTT E E E E E E E E E E
PRTMAXIM E E E E E E E E E
PRTMGG E E E E E E E E E E
PRTPG E E E E E E E E E E
PSENPCH B

PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
PVALINIT B
Q B
RADMOD B B B
RBSETPRT E E E
RCONTACT B
RESLTOPT E E E E E E E E E E E
RHOCP
RKSCHEME B
RMSINT
ROHYDRO B
ROMULTI B
ROSTR B
Main Index
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
RSPECTRA
RSPRINT
RSTTEMP
S1 E E E E E
S1A E E E E E
S1AG E E E E E
S1AM E E E E E
S1G E E E E E
S1M E E E E E
SCALEMAS B
SCRSPEC B
SEMAP B B B B B B B B B B
SEMAPOPT B B B B B B B B B B
SEMAPPRT B B B B B B B B B B
SENSUOO B
SEP1XOVR B B B B B B B B B B
SEQOUT B B B B B B B B B B
SERST B B B B B B B B B B
SESDAMP E E E E E
SESEF E
SHLDAMP E
SIGMA B
SKINOUT E
SKPAMP B B B
SLOOPID E
SMALLQ B B B B B B B B B B
SNORM B B B B B B B B B B
SNORMPRT B B B B B B B B B B
SOFTEXIT B
SOLADJC B
SOLID B B B B B B B B B B
SPARSEDM E E
SPARSEDR E E
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 997
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
SPARSEPH E E E
SPDMRAT E
SPDRRAT E E
SQSETID E E E E E E E E E E E
STEPFCT B
STEPFCTL B
SRTELTYP E E E E
SRTOPT E E E E
START B B B B B B B B B
STIME E E
STRUCTMP E
SUBCASID E
SUBID E E
SUPAERO E E E E
SUPDOF B
SUPER B B B B B B B B B B
TABID
TABS E E E
TESTNEG E E
TFSYMFAC E E E E E E E E

PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
TINY E E E E
TOLRSC B B B B B B B B B B
TOPOCONV E
TSTATIC E E E E
UNSYMF B
UNSYMKB B B B B B B B
UPDTBSH E
USETPRT E E E E E E E E E E
Main Index
PARAMeter Name 115 116 118 129 144 145 146 153 159 200 400 600 700
VARPHI C
VELCUT B
VMOPT E E E E E E E E E E
VREF B B
VUBEAM
VUELJUMP
VUGJUMP
VUHEXA
VUPENTA
VUQUAD4
VUTETRA
WTMASS E E E E E E E E E E B
W3 B E B E B
W3FL B
W4 B E B B
W4FL B
XFLAG E E
XYUNIT E E
ZROCMAS E E E E E E E E
ZROVEC E E E E E E E E
Main Index
Chapter 7: Item Codes
Guide
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
7 Item Codes

Item Code Description
 Element Stress (or Strain) Item Codes

Element Force Item Codes

Fluid Virtual Mass Pressure Item Codes
 2D Slideline and 3D Surface Contact Item Codes

Element Strain Energy Item Codes
 Fatigue Item Codes for LOC=ELEM on FTGPARM
 Fatigue Item Codes for LOC=NODE or NODA on FTGPARM
 Item Codes for Fatigue Analysis of Spot Welds

Item Codes for Fatigue Analysis of Seam Welds
 Equivalent Radiated Power (ERP) Item Codes
Main Index

Item codes are integer numbers assigned to specific output quantities; such as, the third translational
component of displacement, the major principal stress at Z1 in a CQUAD4 element, or the torque in a
CBAR element. Item codes are specified on the following input statements:
 DRESP1 entry for Design Sensitivity and Optimization (SOL 200).
 X-Y Plotting commands. See Plotting (p. 427) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
 DTI,INDTA entry for stress sorting.
The following tables provide item codes for:
 Table 7-1. Element Stress or Strain.
 Table 7-6. Element Force.
 Table 7-8. Fluid Virtual Mass Pressure.
 Table 7-9. Heat Transfer Flux.
 Table 7-10. Slideline Contact Output.
 Table 7-13. Element Strain Energy Item Codes.
 Table 7-14. Fatigue Item Codes (LOC=ELEM)
 Table 7-15 Fatigue Item Codes (LOC=NODE or NODA)
The following superscripts appear in the tables and indicate:
1. Data for components marked with the symbol (1) are included in the data block MES and MEF
outputs from modules DRMH1/DRMH3 and DRMS1. DRMH1/DRMH3 are used in
EXTSEOUT Case Control processing. (See MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide<$paranum[h1].)
2. Composite Element Stresses and Failure Indices.
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1001
Element Stress (or Strain) Item Codes

All item codes refer to stresses (or strains) unless otherwise denoted.
If output is magnitude/phase, the magnitude replaces the real part, and the phase replaces the imaginary part.
Strain item codes are equivalent to stress item codes. However, strain is computed for only some elements.
See Table 3-1 in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.
Main Index
Table 7-1 Element Stress-Strain Item Codes

Real Stresses or Strains Complex Stresses or Strains
Item Item Real/Mag. or
Element Name (Code) Code Item Code Item Imag./Phase
CAXIF2 (47) 21 Radial axis 21 Radial axis RM
1 1
3 Axial axis 3 Axial axis RM
1 1
4 Tangential edge 4 Tangential edge RM
51 Circumferential edge 51 Circumferential edge RM
1
6 Radial axis IP
1
7 Axial axis IP
1
8 Tangential edge IP
91 Circumferential edge IP
CAXlF3 (48) 21 Radial centroid 21 Radial centroid RM
31 Circumferential centroid 31 Circumferential centroid RM
41 Axial centroid 41 Axial centroid RM
51 Tangential edge 1 51 Tangential edge 1 RM
61 Circumferential edge 1 61 Circumferential edge 1 RM
111 Radial centroid IP
121 Circumferential centroid IP
131 Axial centroid IP
141 Tangential edge 1 IP
151 Circumferential edge 1 IP
CAXIF4 (49) 21 Radial centroid 21 Radial centroid RM
31 Circumferential centroid 31 Circumferential centroid RM
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1003
Table 7-1 Element Stress-Strain Item Codes (continued)

1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
14 Circumferential centroid IP
15 Axialcentroid IP
CAXISYM (241) 2 Z1-Fiber distance 1
Nonlinear 3 Stress-X
4 Stress-Y
5 Stress-XY
6 Strain-X
7 Strain-Y
8 Strain XY
9-15 Item 9 through 15 repeated for
fiber distance Z2
CBAR (34) 21 End A-Point C 21 End A-Point C RM
1 1
Linear 3 End A-Point D 3 End A-Point D RM
1 1
4 End A-Point E 4 End A-Point E RM
1 1
5 End A-Point F 5 End A-Point F RM
1 1
6 Axial 6 Axial RM
7 End A maximum 71 End A-Point C IP
8 End A minimum 81 End A-Point D IP
Main Index

9 Safety margin in tension 91 End A-Point E IP
1 1
10 End B-Point C 10 End A-Point F IP
111 End B-Point D 111 Axial IP
1 1
12 End B-Point E 12 End B-Point C RM
1 1
13 End B-Point F 13 End B-Point D RM
1
14 End B maximum 14 End B-Point E RM
15 End B minimum 151 End B-Point F RM
1
16 Safety margin in compression 16 End B-Point C IP
1
17 End B-Point D IP
181 End B-Point E IP
191 End B-Point F IP
CBAR (100) 2 Station Distance/Length 2 Station Distance/Length RM
Intermediate 3 Point C 3 Point C RM
Stations
4 Point D 4 Point D RM
5 Point E 5 Point E RM
6 Point F 6 Point F RM
7 Axial 7 Axial RM
8 Maximum 8 Maximum RM
9 Minimum 9 Minimum RM
10 Margin of Safety 10 Point C IP
(Item codes above are given for End A. 11 Point D IP
For codes 2 through 10 at intermediate
stations add (K-1)*9 where K is the 12 Point E IP
station number, and for codes at End B,
K=number of stations plus 1.) 13 Point F IP
14 Axial IP
15 Maximum IP
16 Minimum
(Item codes above are given for End A.
For codes 2 through 16 at intermediate
stations add (K-1)*15 where K is the
station number, and for codes at End B,
K=number of stations plus 1.)
CBAR (238) 2 Station Distance/Length

Arbitrary Cross 3 Max Axial Stress
Section 4 Min Axial Stress
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1005

5 Max Shear Stress in xy
6 Min Shear Stress in xy
7 Max Shear Stress in zx
8 Min Shear Stress in zx
9 Max vonMises Stress (Not Supported)
CBEAM (2) 2 External grid point ID 2 External grid point ID
Linear 3 Station distance/length 3 Station distance/length
1 1
4 Long. Stress at Point C 4 Long. Stress at Point C RM
1 1
5 Long. Stress at Point D 5 Long. Stress at Point D RM
61 Long. Stress at Point E 61 Long. Stress at Point E RM
71 Long. Stress at Point F 71 Long. Stress at Point F RM
8 Maximum stress 81 Long. Stress at Point C IP
9 Minimum stress 91 Long. Stress at Point D IP
10 Safety margin in tension 101 Long. Stress at Point E IP
11 Safety margin in compression 111 Long. Stress at Point F IP
(Item codes are given for end A. (Item codes are given for end A.
Addition of the quantity (K-1)10 to the Addition of the quantity (K-1)10 to the
item code points to the same item code points to the same information
information for other stations, where K for other stations, where K is the station
is the station number. K=11 for end B number. K=11 for end B and 2 through
and 2 through10 for intermediate 10 for intermediate stations.)
stations.)
CBEAM (94) 2 External grid point ID Not applicable

Nonlinear 3 C (Character)
4 Long. Stress at point C
5 Equivalent stress
6 Total strain
7 Effective plastic strain
8 Effective creep strain
(Item codes 3 through 8 are repeated for
points D, E, and F. Then the entire
record (from 2 through N) is repeated for
end B of the element.)
CBEAM (239) 2 Station Distance/Length

Arbitrary Cross Section 3 Max Axial Stress
4 Min Axial Stress
5 Max Shear Stress in xy
Main Index

6 Min Shear Stress in xy
7 Max Shear Stress in xz
8 Min Shear Stress in xz
9 Max von Mises Stress (Not supported)
CBEAM3 (184) 2 External grid point ID 2 External grid point ID
Linear 3 Normal stress at point C 3 Normal stress at point C RM
4 Normal stress at point D 4 Normal stress at point D RM
5 Normal stress at point E 5 Normal stress at point E RM
6 Normal stress at point F 6 Normal stress at point F RM
7 Maximum stress 7 Normal stress at point C IP
8 Minimum stress 8 Normal stress at point D IP
9 Safety margin in tension 9 Normal stress at point E IP
10 Safety margin in compression 10 Normal stress at point F IP
11 Shear stress in y-direction at 11 Shear stress in y-direction at RM
point C point C
point D point D
point E point E
point F point F
15 Maximum shear stress in y- 15 Shear stress in y-direction at IP
direction point C
16 Minimum shear stress in y- 16 Shear stress in y-direction at IP
direction point D
17 (Not applicable) 17 Shear stress in y-direction at IP
point E
18 (Not applicable) 18 Shear stress in y-direction at IP
point F
19 Shear stress in z-direction at 19 Shear stress in z-direction at RM
point C point C
point D point D
point E point E
point F point F
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1007

23 Maximum shear stress in z- 23 Shear stress in z-direction at IP
direction point C
24 Minimum shear stress in z- 24 Shear stress in z-direction at IP
direction point D
25 (Not applicable) 25 Shear stress in z-direction at IP
point Z
26 (Not applicable) 26 Shear stress in z-direction at IP
point F
(Item codes are given for end A. they are
repeated for end B and mid-node C, (Item codes are given for end A. They are
respectively) repeated for end B and mid-node C,
respectively)
CBEND (69) 2 External grid point ID 2 External grid point ID

3 Circumferential angle 3 Circumferential angle
41 Long. Stress at Point C 41 Long. Stress at Point C RM
51 Long. Stress at Point D 51 Long. Stress at Point D RM
61 Long. Stress at Point E 61 Long. Stress at Point E RM
71 Long. Stress at Point F 71 Long. Stress at Point F RM
8 Maximum stress 81 Long. Stress at Point C IP
9 Minimum stress 91 Long. Stress at Point D IP
10 Safety margin in tension 101 Long. Stress at Point E IP
11 Safety margin in compression 111 Long. Stress at Point F IP
(Item codes are given for end A. Item (Item codes are given for end A. Item
codes 12 through 21 point to the same codes 12 through 21 point to the same
information for end B.) information for end B.)
CBUSH (102) 21 Translation-x 21 Translation-x R

31 Translation-y 31 Translation-y R
41 Translation-z 41 Translation-z R
51 Rotation-x 51 Rotation-x R
61 Rotation-y 61 Rotation-y R
71 Rotation-z 71 Rotation-z R
81 Translation-x I
91 Translation-y I
101 Translation-z I
111 Rotation-x I
121 Rotation-y I
131 Rotation-z I
Main Index

CBUSH1D (40) 1 Element ID
2 Axial force
3 Axial displacement
4 Axial velocity Not applicable
5 Axial stress
6 Axial strain
7
8
Table 7-2 Element Stress-Strain Item Codes Part 2

CCONEAX (35) 2 Harmonic or point angle Not applicable
3 Z1=Fiber Distance 1
41 Normal v at Z1
51 Normal u at Z1
61 Shear uv at Z1
7 Shear angle at Z1
8 Major principal at Z1
9 Minor principal at Z1
10 Maximum shear at Z1
11 Z2= Fiber Distance 2
121 Normal v at Z2
131 Normal u at Z2
141 Shear uv at Z2
15 Shear angle at Z2
16 Major principal at Z2
18 Maximum shear at Z2
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1009
Table 7-2 Element Stress-Strain Item Codes Part 2 (continued)

CDUM3 21 S1 21 S1 RM
1 1
thru 3 S2 3 S2 RM
CDUM9 (55-61) 41 S3 41 S3 RM
1 1
5 S4 5 S4 RM
1 1
6 S5 6 S5 RM
1 1
7 S6 7 S6 RM
81 S7 81 S7 RM
1 1
CELAS1 (11) 2 Stress 2 Stress RM
1
3 Stress IP
31 Stress IP
31 Stress IP
CGAP (86) 2 Normal x Not applicable
3 Shear y
4 Shear z
5 Axial u
6 Shear v
7 Shear w
8 Slip v
9 Slip w
CHEXA (67) 2 Stress coordinate system 2 Stress coordinate system
Linear 3 Coordinate type (Character) 3 Coordinate type (Character)
4 Number of active points 4 Number of active points
5 External grid ID (0=center) 5 External grid ID (0=center)
1 1
6 Normal x 6 Normal x RM
71 Shear xy 71 Normal y RM
1
8 First principal 8 Normal z RM
1
9 First principal x cosine 9 Shear xy RM
1
10 Second principal x cosine 10 Shear yz RM
11 Third principal x cosine 111 Shear zx RM
12 Mean pressure 121 Normal x IP
Main Index

13 von Mises or octahedral shear 131 Normal y IP
stress
141 Normal y 141 Normal z IP
1 1
15 Shear yz 15 Shear xy IP
16 Second principal 161 Shear yz IP
1
17 First principal y cosine 17 Shear zx IP
18 Second principal y cosine 18- Items 5 through 17 repeated for
121 8 corners
19 Third principal y cosine
1
20 Normal z
211 Shear zx
22 Third principal
23 First principal z cosine
24 Second principal z cosine
25 Third principal z cosine
26-193 Items 5 through 25 repeated for
8 corners
CHEXA (93) 2 Stress coordinate system
Nonlinear 3 Grid/Gauss
4 Number of active points
5 External grid ID
(0=center)
6 Stress-X
7 Stress-Y
8 Stress-Z
9 Stress-XY
10 Stress-YZ
11 Stress-ZX
12 Equivalent stress
13 Effective plastic strain Not applicable
15 Strain-X
16 Strain-Y
17 Strain-Z
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1011

18 Strain-XY
19 Strain-YZ
20 Strain-ZX
21-148 Items 3 through 18
Repeated for 8 corners
CHEXAFD (202) 2 Grid/Gauss
Nonlinear Finite 3 Grid/Gauss ID (0=center)
Deformation with 8 grid
points 4 Cauchy stress-X
5 Cauchy stress-Y
6 Cauchy stress-Z
7 Cauchy stress-XY
8 Cauchy stress-YZ
9 Cauchy stress-ZX
1
10 Pressure p = --- ( σ x + σ y + σ z ) Not applicable
3
11 Volumetric strain J-1
12 Logarithmic strain-X
13 Logarithmic strain-Y
14 Logarithmic strain-Z
15 Logarithmic strain-XY
16 Logarithmic strain-YZ
17 Logarithmic strain-ZX
7 Gauss/grid points
CHEXAFD (207) 2-17 Same as CHEXAFD (202)
Nonlinear Finite 18-407 Items 3 through 17 repeated for Not applicable
Deformation with 20 26 Gauss points
grid points
CIFHEX (65) 2 Grid/Gauss
Nonlinear 3 External Grid ID (0 = Center)
4 Normal Stress
5 Shear Stress 1
6 Shear Stress 2
7 Normal Strain
8 Shear Strain 1
Main Index

9 Shear Strain 2
10 Damage Value
6 Corners
CIFPENT (66) 2 Grid/Gauss
4 Normal Stress
5 Shear Stress 1
6 Shear Stress 2
7 Normal Strain
8 Shear Strain 1
9 Shear Strain 2
10 Damage Value
6 Corners
CIFQDX (73) 2 Grid/Gauss
4 Normal Stress
5 Shear Stress
6 Normal Strain
7 Shear Strain
8 Damage Value
4 Corners
CIFQUAD (63) 2 Grid/Gauss
4 Normal Stress
5 Shear Stress
6 Normal Strain
7 Shear Strain
8 Damage Value
4 Corners
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1013

CONROD (10) 21 Axial stress 21 Axial stress RM
1
Linear 3 Axial safety margin 3 Axial stress IP
41 Torsional stress 41 Torsional stress RM
5 Torsional safety margin 51 Torsional stress IP
CONROD (92) 2 Axial stress
Nonlinear 3 Equivalent stress
4 Total strain
7 Linear torsional stress
CPENTA (68) 2 Stress coordinate system 2 Stress coordinate system
5 External grid ID 5 External grid ID
(0=center) (0=center)
13 von Mises or Octahedral shear 131 Normal y IP
stress
1 1
1
1
18 Second principal y cosine 18-95 Items 5 through 17 repeated for
6 corners
201 Normal z
211 Shear zx
Main Index

22 Third principal
6 corners
CPENTA (91) 2 Stress coordinate system
5 External grid ID
(0=center)
6 Normal x stress
7 Normal y stress
8 Normal z stress
9 Shear xy stress
10 Shear yz stress
11 Shear zx stress
12 Equivalent stress Not applicable
15 Normal x strain
16 Normal y strain
17 Normal z strain
18 Shear xy strain
19 Shear yz strain
20 Shear zx strain
Repeated for 6 corners
CPENTAFD (204) 2-17 Same as CHEXAFD (201)
Deformation with 6 grid 5 Gauss points
points
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1015

CPENTAFD (209) 2-17 Same as CHEXAFD (201)
Deformation with 15 20 Gauss points
grid points
CPYRAM (242) 2 Stress coordinate system 2 Stress coordinate system
Linear 3 Coordinate Type (Character) 3 Coordinate Type (Character)
5 External grid ID (0=centre) 5 External grid ID (0=centre)
6 Normal x 6 Normal x
7 Shear xy 7 Normal y
8 First principal 8 Normal z
9 First principal x cosine 9 Shear xy
10 Second principal x cosine 10 Shear yz
11 Third principal x cosine 11 Shear zx
12 Mean pressure 12 Normal x
13 von Mises or octahedral shear 13 Normal y
stress
14 Normal y 14 Normal z
15 Shear yz 15 Shear xy
16 Second principal 16 Shear yz
17 First principal y cosine 17 Shear zx
5 corners
20 Normal z
21 Shear zx
22 Third Principal
5 corners
Main Index

CPYRAM (242) 2 Stress coordinate system Not Applicable
Non Linear 3 Grid/Gauss
5 External grid ID (0=centre)
6 Stress X
7 Stress Y
8 Stress Z
9 Stress XY
10 Stress YZ
11 Stress ZX
12 Equivalent Stress
15 Strain X
16 Strain Y
17 Strain Z
18 Strain XY
19 Strain YZ
20 Strain ZX
5 corners

CQUAD4 (33) 2 Z1=Fiber distance 1 2 Z1=Fiber distance 1
Linear 31 Normal x at Z1 31 Normal x at Z1 RM
1 1
4 Normal y at Z1 4 Normal x at Z1 IP
51 Shear xy at Z1 51 Normal y at Z1 RM
6 Shear angle at Z1 61 Normal y at Z1 IP
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1017

7 Major principal at Z1 71 Shear xy at Z1 RM
1
8 Minor principal at Z1 8 Shear xy at Z1 IP
9 von Mises or 9 Z2=Fiber distance 2
maximum shear at Z1
10 Z2=Fiber distance 2 101 Normal x at Z2 RM
1 1
11 NormaI x at Z2 11 NormaI x at Z2 IP
1 1
12 Normal y at Z2 12 Normal y at Z2 RM
1 1
13 Shear xy at Z2 13 Normal y at Z2 IP
14 Shear angle at Z2 14 Shear xy at Z2 RM
15 Major principal at Z2 15 Shear xy at Z2 IP
17 von Mises or
maximum shear at Z2
CQUAD4 (90) 2 Z1=Fiber distance 1 (plane
stress only)
Nonlinear
3 Stress-X (at Z1, if plane stress)
4 Stress-Y (at Z1, if plane stress)
5 Stress-Z (plane strain only)
6 Stress-XY (at Z1, if plane stress)
7 Equivalent stress (at Z1, if plane
stress)
8 Plastic strain (at Z1, if plane
stress)
9 Creep strain (at Z1, if plane Not applicable
stress)
10 Strain-X (at Z1, if plane stress)
11 Strain-Y (at Z1, if plane stress)
12 Strain-Z (plane strain only)
13 Strain-XY (at Z1, if plane stress)
fiber distance Z2 (plane stress
only)
CQUAD42 (95) 2 Lamina Number 2 Lamina Number

Composite 3 Normal-1 3 Normal-1 RM
4 Normal-2 4 Normal-2 RM
5 Shear-12 5 Shear-12 RM
Main Index

6 Shear-1Z 6 Shear-1Z RM
7 Shear-2Z 7 Shear-2Z RM
8 Shear angle 8 Normal-1 IP
9 Major principal 9 Normal-1 IP
10 Minor principal 10 Shear-12 IP
11 Maximum shear 11 Shear-1Z IP
12 12 Shear-2Z IP
CQUAD4 (144) 1 EID 1 EID
CORNER Output 2 CEN/ 2 CEN/
3 4 3 4
4 Z1-Fiber distance 4 Z1-Fiber distance
5 Normal x at Z1 5 Normal x at Z1 RM
8 Shear angle at Z1 8 Normal y at Z1 IP
11 von Mises or maximum shear at 11 Z2-Fiber distance
Z1
12 Z2-Fiber distance 12 Normal x at Z2 RM
13 Normal x at Z2 13 Normal x at Z2 IP
16 Shear angle at Z2 16 Shear xy at Z2 RM
18 Minor principal at Z2 18 Grid 1
19 von Mises or maximum shear at 19-32 Same as 4 through 17 for corner
Z2 1
20 Grid 1 33 Grid 2
21-36 Same as 4 through19 for corner 34-47 Same as 4 through 17 for corner
1 2
37 Grid 2 48 Grid 3
38-53 Same as 4 through19 for corner 49-62 Same as 4 through 17 for corner
2 3
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1019

54 Grid 3 63 Grid 4
55-70 Same as 4 through 19 for corner 64-77 Same as 4 through 17 for corner
3 4
71 Grid 4
72-87 Same as 4 through 19 for corner
4
CQUAD8 (64) 51 Normal x at Z1 51 Normal x at Z1 RM
1 1
1 1
1
8 O Shear angle at Z1 8 Normal y at Z1 IP
11 von Mises or 121 Normal x at Z2 RM
maximum shear at Z1
131 NormaI x at Z2 131 NormaI x at Z2 IP
16 Q Shear angle at Z2 161 Shear xy at Z2 RM
18 Minor principal at Z2 20-32 Same as items 5 through 17 for
corner 1
19 von Mises or 35-47 Same as items 5 through 17 for
maximum shear at Z2 corner 2
22-36 Same as items 5 through 19 for 50-62 Same as items 5 through 17 for
corner 1 corner 3
corner 2 corner 4
56-70 Same as items 5 through 19 for
corner 3
corner 4
CQUAD82 (96) Same as CQUAD4(95) Same as CQUAD4(95)

Composite
Main Index

CQUADFD (201) 2 Grid/Gauss
Nonlinear Finite 3 Grid/Gauss ID (0=center)
Deformation with
4 grid points 4 Cauchy stress-X
5 Cauchy stress-Y
6 Cauchy stress-Z
7 Cauchy stress-XY
1
3
9 Volumetric strain J-1
10 Logarithmic strain-X
11 Logarithmic strain-Y
3 Gauss points
CQUADFD (208) 2-13 Same as CQUADFD (201)
Deformation with 8 or 9 8 Gauss points
grid points
CQUADR (82) Same as CQUAD4(144) Same as CQUAD4(144)
Linear CORNER output
CQUADR (172) Same as CQUAD4(90) Not applicable
Nonlinear
Composite
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1021

CQUADX(18) 1 (Elem ID) 1 (Elem ID)
Harmonic 2 Harmonic 2 Harmonic
3 CEN/grid 3 CEN/grid
4 Stress_xx 4 Stress_xx RM
5 Stress_yy 5 Stress_yy RM
6 Stress_tt 6 Stress_tt RM
7 Stress_xy 7 Stress_xy RM
8 Stress_yt 8 Stress_yt RM
9 Stress_tx 9 Stress_tx RM
10 VON MISES* 10 Stress_xx IP
11-18 1st corner 11 Stress_yy IP
19-26 2nd corner 12 Stress_tt IP
27-34 3rd corner 13 Stress_xy IP
35-42 4th corner 14 Stress_yt IP
15 Stress_tx IP
16-28 1st corner
29-41 2nd corner
42-54 3rd corner
55-67 4th corner
CQUADXFD (214) 2 Grid/Gauss
Nonlinear Finite 3 Gauss ID
points 4 Cauchy stress-X (radial)
5 Cauchy stress-Y (axial)
6 Cauchy stress-Z
(circumferential)
7 Cauchy stress-XY
1
3
9 Volumetric strain
J-1
10 Logarithmic strain-X (radial)
11 Logarithmic strain-Y (axial)
12 Logarithmic strain-Z
(circumferential)
Main Index

remaining 3 Gauss points
CQUADXFD (215) 2-13 Same as QUADXFD (214) Not applicable
Nonlinear Finite 14-101 Items 3 through 13 repeated for
Deformation with 8 or 9 remaining 8 Gauss points
grid points
CROD (1) Same as CONROD(10) Same as CONROD(10)
Linear
CROD (89) Same as CONROD(92) Not applicable
Nonlinear
CSHEAR (4) 2 Maximum shear 2 Maximum shear RM
31 Average shear 3 Maximum shear IP
4 Safety margin 41 Average shear RM
51 Average shear IP
CSLOT3 (50) 2 Radial centroid 2 Radial centroid RM
8 Axialcentroid IP
CSLOT4 (51) 2 Radial centroid 2 Radial centroid RM
9 Axial centroid IP
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1023

CTETRA (39) 2 Stress coordinate system 2 Stress coordinate system
5 External grid ID 5 External grid ID
(0=center) (0=center)
1 1
1 1
13 von Mises or octahedral shear 131 Normal y IP
stress
four corners
201 Normal z
211 Shear zx
22 Third principal
26-109 Items 5 through 25 repeated
for four corners
Main Index

CTETRA (85) 2 Stress coordinate system
5 External grid ID
(0=center)
6 Stress-X
7 Stress-Y
8 Stress-Z
9 Stress-XY
10 Stress-YZ
11 Stress-ZX
12 Equivalent stress
15 Strain-X
16 Strain-Y
17 Strain-Z
18 Strain-XY
19 Strain-YZ
20 Strain-ZX
Repeated for four corners
CTETRAFD (205) 2-17 Same as CHEXAFD (202) Not applicable
Nonlinear Finite
points
CTETRAFD (210) 2-17 Same as CHEXAFD (202)
Deformation witn 10 4 Gauss points
grid points
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1025

CTRIA3 (74) Same as CQUAD4(33) Same as CQUAD4(33)

Composite
CTRIA3 (88) Same as CQUAD4(90) Not applicable
Nonlinear
CTRIA6 (75) 51 Normal x at Z1 51 Normal x at Z1 RM
Linear 61 Normal y at Z1 61 Normal x at Z1 IP
8 Q shear angle at Z1 81 Normal y at Z1 IP
11 von Mises or 121 Normal x at Z2 RM
maximum shear at Z1
131 NormaI x at Z2 131 Normal x at Z2 IP
16 Q shear angle at Z2 161 Shear xy at Z2 RM
18 Minor principal at Z2 20-32 Same as items 5 through 17 for
corner 1
19 von Mises or 35-47 Same as items 5 through 17 for
maximum shear at Z2 corner 2
corner 1 corner 3
corner 2
corner 3
CTRIAFD (206) 2-13 Same as CQUADFD(201) Not applicable

Nonlinear Deformation
with 3 grid points
Main Index

CTRIAFD (211) 2-13 Same as CQUADFD (201)
Deformation with 6 grid 2 Gauss points
points
CTRlAR (70) Same as CTRlA6(75) Same as CTRlA6(75)
Linear
CTRIAR (173) Same as CQUAD4(90) Not applicable
Nonlinear
CTRIAR (233) Same as CQUAD4(95) Same as CQUAD4(95)
Composite
CTRIAX(17) 1 (Elem ID) 1 (Elem ID)

Harmonic 2 Harmonic 2 Harmonic
3 CEN/grid 3 CEN/grid
4 Stress_xx 4 Stress_xx RM
5 Stress_yy 5 Stress_yy RM
6 Stress_tt 6 Stress_tt RM
7 Stress_xy 7 Stress_xy RM
8 Stress_yt 8 Stress_yt RM
9 Stress_tx 9 Stress_tx RM
10 VON MISES* 10 Stress_xx IP
11-18 1st corner 11 Stress_yy IP
19-26 2nd corner 12 Stress_tt IP
27-34 3rd corner 13 Stress_xy IP
14 Stress_yt IP
15 Stress_tx IP
16-28 1st corner
29-41 2nd corner
42-54 3rd corner
CTRIAX6 (53) 31 Radial 31 Radial RM
41 Azimuthal 41 Radial IP
51 Axial 51 Azimuthal RM
61 Shear stress 61 Azimuthal IP
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1027

7 Maximum principal 7 Axial RM
8 Maximum shear 8 Axial IP
9 von Mises or octahedral 9 Shear RM
10 Shear IP
corner 1 corner 1
19-25 Same as Items 3 through 9 for 21-28 Same as items 3 through 10 for
corner 2 corner 2
corner 3 corner 3
CTRIAXFD (212) 2-13 Same as CQUADXFD (214) Not applicable
Nonlinear Finite
points
CTRIAXFD (213) 2-13 Same as CQUADXFD (214)
Deformation with 2 Gauss points
6 grid points
CTUBE (3) Same as CONROD (10) Same as CONROD(10)
Linear
CTUBE (87) Same as CONROD(92) Not applicable
Nonlinear
Main Index

CWELDP 2 Axial 2 Axial RM
(118) 3 Maximum End A 3 Maximum End A RM
if PARTPAT 4 Minimum End A 4 Minimum End A RM
or ELPAT 5 Maximum End B 5 Maximum End B RM
6 Minimum End B 6 Minimum End B RM
CWELDC
7 Maximum Shear 7 Maximum Shear RM
(117)
8 Bearing Stress 8 Bearing Stress RM
if (Not applicable to Strain) (Not applicable to Strain)
MSET=OFF and
9 Axial IP
oldweld=yes
10 Maximum End A IP
CWELD 11 Minimum End A IP
(200) 12 Maximum End B IP
if 13 Minimum End B IP
MSET=ON or 14 Maximum Shear IP
olddweld=no 15 Bearing Stress IP
(Not applicable to Strain)
VUHEXA (145) 1 VU element ID * 10 + device
code
VUPENTA (146)
2 Parent p-element ID
VUTETRA (147)
3 VU grid ID for corner 1
for HEXAp, PENTAp,
TETRAp if 4 Normal x 4 Normal x RM
SDRPOPT=SDRP
(with principals) 5 Normal y 5 Normal y RM
6 Normal z 6 Normal z RM
7 Shear xy 7 Shear xy RM
8 Shear yz 8 Shear yz RM
9 Shear zx 9 Shear zx RM
10 First principal 10 Normal x IP
11 Second principal 11 Normal y IP
12 Third principal 12 Normal z IP
13 Mean pressure 13 Shear xy IP
14 von Mises/ Octahedral 14 Shear yz IP
15-26 Repeat items 3-14 for corner 2 15 Shear zx IP
27-38 Repeat items 3-14 for corner 3 16-28 Repeat items 3-15 for corner 2
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1029

(VUPENTA, VUHEXA)
(VUPENTA, VUHEXA) (VUPENTA, VUHEXA)
(VUHEXA) (VUPENTA, VUHEXA)
(VUHEXA) (VUHEXA)
94- Repeat items 3-15 for corner 8
106 (VUHEXA)
VUHEXA (145) 1 VU element ID * 10 + device
code
VUPENTA (146)
VUTETRA (147)
for HEXAp, PENTAp,
TETRAp if 4 Normal x 4 Normal x RM
SDRPOPT=OFP
(no principals) 5 Normal y 5 Normal y RM
6 Normal z 6 Normal z RM
7 Shear xy 7 Shear xy RM
10-16 Repeat items 3-9 for corner 2 10 Normal x IP
17-23 Repeat items 3-9 for corner 3 11 Normal y IP
24-30 Repeat items 3-9 for corner 4 12 Normal z IP
31-37 Repeat items 3-9 for corner 5 13 Shear xy IP
(VUPENTA, VUHEXA)
38-44 Repeat items 3-9 for corner 6 14 Shear yz IP
(VUPENTA, VUHEXA)
45-51 Repeat items 3-9 for corner 7 15 Shear zx IP
(VUHEXA)
(VUHEXA)
29-41 Repeat items 3-15 for corner 3
Main Index

(VUPENTA, VUHEXA)
(VUPENTA, VUHEXA)
(VUHEXA)
94- Repeat items 3-15 for corner 8
106 (VUHEXA)

VUQUAD (189) 1 VU element ID * 10 + device
VUTRIA (190) code
for QUADp
and TRIAp if 3 CID coordinate system ID
STRAIN= FIBER; 4th 4 ICORD flat/curved etc.

char. of ICORD= 5 THETA material angle
X Y, Z (local coordinate
system); and SDRPORT 6 ITYPE strcur=0, fiber=1
=SDRP (with principals)
8 Z1 fiber distance
9 Z2 fiber distance
12 Shear xy at Z1 12 Shear xy at Z1 RM
13 Shear Angle at Z1 13 0.0 RM
14 Major principal at Z1 14 0.0 RM
15 Minor principal at Z1 15 0.0 RM
16 vonMises/Max.Shear at Z1 16 Normal x at Z2 RM
17 NormaI x at Z2 17 Normal y at Z2 RM
18 Normal y at Z2 18 Shear xy at Z2 RM
19 Shear xy at Z2 19 0.0 RM
20 Shear Angle at Z2 20 0.0 RM
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1031

21 Major principal at Z2 21 0.0 RM
22 Minor principal at Z2 22 Normal x at Z1 IP
23 vonMises/Max.Shear at Z2 23 Normal y at Z1 IP
24 Shear xy at Z1 IP
25 0.0 IP
26 0.0 IP
27 0.0 IP
28 Normal x at Z2 IP
29 Normal y at Z2 IP
31 0.0 IP
32 0.0 IP
33 0.0 IP
58-74 Repeat items 7-23 for corner 4 88- Repeat items 7-33 for corner 4
(VUQUAD) 104 (VUQUAD)
VUTRIA (190) code
for QUADp and TRIAp 2 Parent p-element ID

if STRAIN= FIBER; if 3 CID coordinate system ID
4th char. of ICORD=X Y,
Z (local coordinate 4 ICORD flat/curved etc.
system); and SDRPOPT
=OFP (no principals) 5 THETA material angle
6 ITYPE strcur=0, fiber=1
8 Z1 fiber distance
9 Z2 fiber distance
13 0.0 13 0.0 RM
14 0.0 14 0.0 RM
15 0.0 15 0.0 RM
Main Index

16 0.0 16 Normal x at Z2 RM
17 Normal x at Z2 17 Normal y at Z2 RM
18 Normal y at Z2 18 Shear xy at Z2 RM
19 Shear xy at Z2 19 0.0 RM
20 0.0 20 0.0 RM
21 0.0 21 0.0 RM
22 0.0 22 Normal x at Z1 IP
23 0.0 23 Normal y at Z1 IP
25 0.0 IP
26 0.0 IP
27 0.0 IP
31 0.0 IP
32 0.0 IP
33 0.0 IP
VUTRIA (190) code
for QUADp and
TRIAp if 3 CID coordinate system ID
STRAIN= FIBER and 4 ICORD flat/curved etc.

4th char. of ICORD=F 5 THETA material angle
(fixed coordinate system)
8 Z1 fiber distance
9 Z2 fiber distance
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1033

13 Shear yz at Z1 13 Shear yz at Z1 RM
14 Shear zx at Z1 14 Shear zx at Z1 RM
15 Normal z at Z1 15 Normal z at Z1 RM
16 NormaI x at Z2 16 Normal x at Z2 RM
17 NormaI y at Z2 17 Normal y at Z2 RM
19 Shear yz at Z2 19 Shear yz at Z2 RM
20 Shear zx at Z2 20 Shear zx at Z2 RM
21 Normal z at Z2 21 Normal z at Z2 RM
22 0.0 22 Normal x at Z1 IP
23 0.0 23 Normal y at Z1 IP
25 Shear yz at Z1 IP
26 Shear zx at Z1 IP
27 Normal z at Z1 IP
31 Shear yz at Z2 IP
32 Shear zx at Z2 IP
33 Normal z at Z2 IP
Main Index

VUTRIA (190) code

if 3 CID coordinate system ID
STRAIN= STRCUR and
4th char. of ICORD=X Y, 4 ICORD flat/curved etc.
Z (local coordinate
system) 5 THETA material angle
8 0.0
9 0.0
10 Membrane Strain x 10 Membrane Strain x RM
11 Membrane Strain y 11 Membrane Strain y RM
12 Membrane Strain xy 12 Membrane Strain xy RM
13 0.0 13 0.0 RM
14 0.0 14 0.0 RM
15 0.0 15 0.0 RM
16 Bending Curvature x 16 Bending Curvature x RM
17 Bending Curvature y 17 Bending Curvature y RM
18 Bending Curvature xy 18 Bending Curvature xy RM
21 0.0 21 0.0 RM
22 0.0 22 Membrane Strain x IP
23 0.0 23 Membrane Strain y IP
24 Membrane Strain xy IP
25 0.0 IP
26 0.0 IP
27 0.0 IP
28 Bending Curvature x IP
29 Bending Curvature y IP
30 Bending Curvature xy IP
31 Shear yz IP
32 Shear zx IP
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1035

33 0.0 IP
VUQUAD (189) 1 VU element ID *10 + device
VUTRIA (190) code

if STRAIN= STRCUR 3 CID coordinate system ID
and 4th char. of
ICORD=F 4 ICORD flat/curved etc.
(fixed coordinate system)
5 THETA material angle
8 0.0
9 0.0
10 Membrane Strain x 10 Membrane Strain x RM
11 Membrane Strain y 11 Membrane Strain y RM
12 Membrane Strain xy 12 Membrane Strain xy RM
13 Membrane Strain yz 13 Membrane Strain yz RM
14 Membrane Strain zx 14 Membrane Strain zx RM
15 Membrane Strain z 15 Membrane Strain z RM
16 Bending Curvature x 16 Bending Curvature x RM
17 Bending Curvature y 17 Bending Curvature y RM
18 Bending Curvature xy 18 Bending Curvature xy RM
19 Bending Curvature yz 19 Bending Curvature yz RM
20 Bending Curvature zx 20 Bending Curvature zx RM
21 Bending Curvature z 21 Bending Curvature z RM
22 0.0 22 Membrane Strain x IP
23 0.0 23 Membrane Strain y IP
24 Membrane Strain xy IP
25 Membrane Strain yz IP
26 Membrane Strain zx IP
27 Membrane Strain z IP
Main Index

28 Bending Curvature x IP
29 Bending Curvature y IP
30 Bending Curvature xy IP
31 Bending Curvature yz IP
32 Bending Curvature zx IP
33 Bending Curvature z IP
VUBEAM (191) 1 VU element ID * 10 + device
code
for
BEAMp 2 Parent p-element ID
3 CID coordinate system ID
4 ICORD (not used)
5 VU grid ID for end 1
6 x/L position
7 Y-coordinate of output point C
8 Z-coordinate of output point C
9 W-coordinate of output point
C
10 Normal x at C 10 Normal x at C RM
11 Shear xy at C 11 Shear xy at C RM
12 Shear zx at C 12 Shear zx at C RM
13 Normal x at C IP
14 Shear xy at C IP
15 Shear zx at C IP
13-18 Repeat items 7-12 for output 16-24 Repeat items 7-15 for output
point D point D
point E point E
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1037

point F point F
31 Max longitudinal
32 Min longitudinal
33-60 Repeat items 5-32 for end 2 43-80 Repeat items 5-42 for end 2
Main Index

All items are element forces (or moments) unless otherwise indicated.
Table 7-6 Element Force Item Codes Part 1

Real Element Forces Complex Element Forces
Element Name Item Item Real/Mag. or
Code Code Item Code Item Imag/Phase
CBAR (34) 21 Bending End A plane 1 21 Bending End A plane 1 RM
1 1
Linear 3 Bending End A plane 2 3 Bending End A plane 2 RM
1 1
4 Bending End B plane 1 4 Bending End B plane 1 RM
1 1
5 Bending End B plane 2 5 Bending End B plane 2 RM
1 1
6 Shear plane 1 6 Shear plane 1 RM
81 Axial force 81 Axial force RM
91 Torque 91 Torque RM
101 Bending End A plane 1 IP
111 Bending End A plane 2 IP
121 Bending End B plane 1 IP
131 Bending End B plane 2 IP
141 Shear plane 1 IP
161 Axial force IP
171 Torque IP
CBAR (100) 2 Station Distance/Length 2 Station Distance/Length
Intermediate 3 Bending Moment Plane 1 3 Bending Moment Plane 1 RM
Stations 4 Bending Moment Plane 2 4 Bending Moment Plane 2 RM
5 Shear Force Plane 1 5 Shear Force Plane 1 RM
6 Shear Force Plane 2 6 Shear Force Plane 2 RM
7 Axial 7 Axial RM
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1039
Table 7-6 Element Force Item Codes Part 1 (continued)

Item codes are given for end A. Addition 9 Bending Moment Plane 1 IP
of the quantity (K-1) * 8 to the item
code points to the same information for 10 Bending Moment Plane 2 IP
other stations, where K is the station
number. K=8 for end B and 2 through 7 11 Shear Force Plane 1 IP
for intermediate stations.
12 Shear Force Plane 2 IP
13 Axial IP
14 Torque IP
(Item codes above are given for
End A. For codes 2 through 14 at
intermediate stations add (K-
1) * 13 where K is the station
number, and for codes at End B,
K+number of stations plus 1.)
CBEAM (2) 2 External grid point ID 2 External grid point ID

Linear 3 Station distance/length 3 Station distance/length
41 Bending moment plane 1 41 Bending moment plane 1 RM

61 Web shear plane 1 61 Web shear plane 1 RM
71 Web shear plane 2 71 Web shear plane 2 RM
91 Total torque 91 Total torque RM
101 Warping torque 101 Warping torque RM
(Item codes are given for end A. 111 Bending moment plane 1 IP
Addition of the quantity (K-1) 9 to the
item code points to the same 121 Bending moment plane 2 IP
information for other stations, where K
is the station number. K=11 for end B 131 Web shear plane 1 IP
and 2 through 10 for intermediate
stations.) 141 Web shear plane 2 IP
151 Axial force IP
161 Total torque IP
1
17 Warping torque IP
(Item codes are given for end A.
Addition of the quantity (K-1) 16
to the item code points to the same
information for other stations,
where K is the station number.
K=11 for end B and 2 through 10
for intermediate stations.)
CBEAM3 (184) 2 External grid point ID 2 External grid point ID

Linear 3 Bending moment in y- 3 Bending moment in y- RM
direction direction
Main Index

4 Bending moment in z-direction 4 Bending moment in z- RM
direction
5 Shear force in y-direction 5 Shear force in y-direction RM
6 Shear force in z-direction 6 Shear force in z-direction RM
8 Total torque 8 Total torque RM
9 Bi-shear force 9 Bi-shear force RM
10 Bi-moment 10 Bi-moment RM
(Item codes are given for end A. They are
repeated for end B and mid-node C,
respectively)
11 Bending moment in y- IP
direction
12 Bending moment in z- IP
direction
13 Shear force in y-direction IP
14 Shear force in z-direction IP
15 Axial force IP
16 Total torque IP
17 Bi-shear force IP
18 Bi-moment IP
They are repeated for end B and
mid-node C, respectively)
CBEND (69) 2 External grid point ID 2 External grid point ID

1 1
1 1
1
(Item codes are given for end A. Item 9 Bending moment plane 1 IP
codes 9 through 15 point to the same 1
information for end B.) 10 Bending moment plane 2 IP
1
11 Shear plane 1 IP
131 Axial force IP
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1041

141 Torque IP
Item codes 15 through 27 point to
the same information for end B.)
CBUSH (102) 21 Force-x 21 Force-x RM

1 1
3 Force-y 3 Force-y RM
1 1
4 Force-z 4 Force-z RM
51 Moment-x 51 Moment-x RM
1 1
6 Moment-y 6 Moment-y RM
1 1
7 Moment-z 7 Moment-z RM
81 Force-x IP
91 Force-y IP
101 Force-z IP
111 Moment-x IP
121 Moment-y IP
131 Moment-z IP
CCONEAX 2 Harmonic or point angle Not applicable
(35) 3 Bending moment v
4 Bending moment u
5 Twist moment
6 Shear v
7 Shear u
CDAMP1 (20) Same as CELAS1 Same as CELAS1
CDUM3 thru 21 F1 21 F1 RM
CDUM9 (55 - 61) 31 F2 31 F2 RM
41 F3 41 F3 RM
51 F4 51 F4 RM
61 F5 61 F5 RM
71 F6 71 F6 RM
81 F7 81 F7 RM
Main Index

91 F8 91 F8 RM
1 1
10 F9 10 F9 RM
111 F1 IP
1
12 F2 IP
1
13 F3 IP
1
14 F4 IP
151 F5 IP
1
16 F6 IP
1
17 F7 IP
181 F8 IP
191 F9 IP
CELAS1 (11) 21 Force 21 Force RM
3 Force 3 Force IP
CELAS2 (12) Same as CELAS1 Same as CELAS1
CGAP (38) 2 Normal x Not applicable
3 Shear y
4 Shear z
5 Axial u
6 Shear v
7 Shear w
8 Slip v
9 Slip w
CONROD (10) 21 Axial force 21 Axial force RM
31 Torque 31 Axial force IP
41 Torque RM
51 Torque IP
CQUAD4 (33) 21 Membrane force x 21 Membrane force x RM
Linear 31 Membrane force y 31 Membrane force y RM
41 Membrane force xy 41 Membrane force xy RM
51 Bending moment x 51 Bending moment x RM
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1043

61 Bending moment y 61 Bending moment y RM
1 1
7 Bending moment xy 7 Bending moment xy RM
81 Shear x 81 Shear x RM
1 1
9 Shear y 9 Shear y RM
1
10 Membrane force x IP
1
11 Membrane force y IP
121 Membrane force xy IP
1
13 Bending moment x IP
1
14 Bending moment y IP
151 Bending moment xy IP
161 Shear x IP
171 Shear y IP
CQUAD4 (95) 2-3 Theory or blank Not applicable
Composite 4 Lamina number
5 FP (failure index)
/SP (strength ratio)
for direct stresses
6 Failure mode for
Maximum strain theory
7 FB (failure index)
/SB (strength ratio) or -1 for
interlaminar shear-stress
8 MAX of FP, FB or -1
or
MIN of SP, SB or -1
9 Failure flag
Corner Output 2 CEN/ 2 CEN/
3 4 3 4
4 Membrane x 4 Membrane x RM
5 Membrane y 5 Membrane y RM
6 Membrane xy 6 Membrane xy RM
7 Bending x 7 Bending x RM
8 Bending y 8 Bending y RM
9 Bending xy 9 Bending xy RM
Main Index

12 Grid 1 12 Membrane x IP
13-20 Same as 4 through 11 for 13 Membrane y IP
corner 1
21 Grid 2 14 Membrane xy IP
22-29 Same as 4 through 11 for 15 Bending x IP
corner 2
30 Grid 3 16 Bending y IP
31-38 Same as 4 through 11 for 17 Bending xy IP
corner 3
39 Grid 4 18 Shear x IP
40-47 Same as 4 through 11 for 19 Shear y IP
corner 4
20 Grid 1
21-36 Same as 4 through 19 for
corner 1
37 Grid 2
corner 2
54 Grid 3
corner 3
71 Grid 4
corner 4
Linear 2 CEN/ 2 CEN/
3 4 3 4
1 1
4 Membrane force x 4 Membrane force x RM
51 Membrane force y 51 Membrane force y RM
1 1
1 1
1 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1045

1
12 Grid1 12 Membrane force x IP
13-20 Same as items 4 through 11 for 131 Membrane force y IP
corner 1
21 Grid2 141 Membrane force xy IP
1
22-29 Same as items 4 through 11 for 15 Bending moment x IP
corner 2
30 Grid3 161 Bending moment y IP
1
31-38 Same as items 4 through 11 for 17 Bending moment xy IP
corner 3
39 Grid4 181 Shear x IP
40-47 Same as items 4 through 11 for 191 Shear y IP
corner 4
20 Grid1
21-36 Same as items 4 through
19 for corner 1
37 37 Grid2
19 for corner 2
54 Grid3
19 for corner 3
71 Grid4
19 for corner 4
CQUAD82 (96) Same as CQUAD4(95) Same as CQUAD4(95)

Composite
Center
Main Index
Table 7-7 Element Force Item Codes Part 2

CROD (1) Same as CONROD(10) Same as CONROD(10)
1 1
CSHEAR (4) 2 Force 4 to 1 2 Force 4 to 1 RM
1 1
3 Force 2 to 1 3 Force 2 to 1 RM
1 1
1 1
1 1
101 Kick force on 1 101 Force 4 to 1 IP
111 Shear 12 111 Force 2 to 1 IP
181 Kick force on 1 RM
191 Shear 12 RM
211 Shear 23 RM
231 Shear 34 RM
251 Shear 41 RM
261 Kick force on 1 IP
271 Shear 12 IP
291 Shear 23 IP
311 Shear 34 IP
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1047

1
33 Shear 41 IP
Linear

Composite
CTRlA6 (75) 41 Membrane force x 41 Membrane force x RM
Linear 51 Membrane force y 51 Membrane force y RM
13-20 Same as items 4 through 11 for 121 Membrane force x IP
corner 1
22-29 Same as items 4 through 11 for 131 Membrane force y IP
corner 2
31-38 Same as items 4 through 11 for 141 Membrane force xy IP
corner 3
151 Bending moment x IP
161 Bending moment y IP
171 Bending moment xy IP
181 Shear x IP
191 Shear y IP
19 for corner 1
19 for corner 2
19 for corner 3
CTRlA62 (98) Same as CQUAD4(95) Same as CQUAD4(95)

Composite
CTRIAR (70) Same as CTRIA6(75) Same as CTRIA6(75)
Main Index

CTRIAR (236) Same as CQUAD4(33) Same as CQUAD4(33)
Center
CTUBE (3) Same as CONROD(10) Same as CONROD(10)
CVlSC (24) Not applicable Same as CONROD(10)
CWELDP (118) 2 mz bending end A plane 1 2 mz bending end A plane 1 RM
if PARTPAT or 3 my bending end A plane 2 3 my bending end A plane 2 RM
ELPAT
4 mz bending end B plane 1 4 mz bending end B plane 1 RM
5 my bending end B plane 2 5 my bending end B plane 2 RM
6 fy shear force plane 1 6 fy shear force plane 1 RM
7 fz shear force plane 2 7 fz shear force plane 2 RM
8 fx axial force 8 fx axial force RM
CWELDC (117) 9 mx torque 9 mx torque RM
if MSET = OFF 10 mz bending end A plane 1 IP
11 my bending end A plane 2 IP
CWELD (200) 12 mz bending end B plane 1 IP
if MSET = ON 13 my bending end B plane 2 IP
14 fy shear force plane 1 IP
15 fz shear force plane 2 IP
16 fx axial force IP
17 mx torque IP
VUTRIA (190) code
for QUADp and 2 Parent p-element ID

TRIAp if 4th char. 3 CID coordinate system ID
of ICORD=X Y, Z
(local coordinate 4 ICORD flat/curved etc.
system)
6 0.0
8 Membrane Force x 8 Membrane Force x RM
9 Membrane Force y 9 Membrane Force y RM
10 Membrane Force xy 10 Membrane Force xy RM
11 0.0 11 0.0 RM
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1049

12 0.0 12 0.0 RM
13 0.0 13 0.0 RM
14 Bending Moment x 14 Bending Moment x RM
15 Bending Moment y 15 Bending Moment y RM
16 Bending Moment xy 16 Bending Moment xy RM
19 0.0 19 0.0 RM
20 Membrane Force x IP
21 Membrane Force y IP
22 Membrane Force xy IP
23 0.0 IP
24 0.0 IP
25 0.0 IP
26 Bending Moment x IP
27 Bending Moment y IP
28 Bending Moment xy IP
29 Shear zx IP
30 Shear yz IP
31 0.0 IP
20-32 Repeat items 7-19 for corner 2 32-56 Repeat items 7-31 for
corner 2
corner 3
(VUQUAD) corner 4 (VUQUAD)
VUQUAD (189) 1 VU element ID *10 + device
VUTRIA (190) code
for QUADp and 2 Parent p-element ID

TRIAp if 4th char. 3 CID coordinate system ID
of ICORD=F (fixed
coordinate system) 4 ICORD flat/curved etc.
6 0.0
Main Index

8 Membrane Force x 8 Membrane Force x RM
9 Membrane Force y 9 Membrane Force y RM
10 Membrane Force xy 10 Membrane Force xy RM
11 Membrane Force yz 11 Membrane Force yz RM
12 Membrane Force zx 12 Membrane Force zx RM
13 Membrane Force z 13 Membrane Force z RM
14 Bending Moment x 14 Bending Moment x RM
16 Bending Moment xy 16 Bending Moment xy RM
17 Bending Moment yz 17 Bending Moment yz RM
18 Bending Moment zx 18 Bending Moment zx RM
19 Bending Moment z 19 Bending Moment z RM
20 Membrane Force x IP
21 Membrane Force y IP
22 Membrane Force xy IP
23 Membrane Force yz IP
24 Membrane Force zx IP
25 Membrane Force z IP
26 Bending Moment x IP
28 Bending Moment xy IP
29 Bending Moment yz IP
30 Bending Moment zx IP
31 Bending Moment z IP
corner 2
corner 3
(VUQUAD) corner 4 (VUQUAD)
VUBEAM (191) 1 VU element ID * 10 + device
code
for BEAMp
3 CID coordinate system ID
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1051

4 ICORD (not used)
5 VU grid ID for end 1
6 x/L position
7 Force x 7 Force x RM
8 Shear Force y 8 Shear Force y RM
9 Shear Force z 9 Shear Force z RM
10 Torsional Moment x 10 Torsional Moment x RM
12 Bending Moment z 12 Bending Moment z RM
13 Force x IP
14 Shear Force y IP
15 Shear Force z IP
16 Torsional Moment x IP
18 Bending Moment z IP
13-20 Repeat items 5-12 for end 2 19-32 Repeat items 5-18 for end
2
Main Index

Table 7-8 Fluid Virtual Mass Pressure Item Codes
Real Fluid Pressure Complex Fluid Pressure
Element Real/Mag. or
Name Code Item Code Item Imag./Phase
Plate 2 Fluid pressure 2 Pressure RM
Family 3 Pressure IP
Table 7-9 Heat Transfer Item Codes (Curve type is FLUX.)

Element Name (Code) Code Item
Heat Transfer Elements 2 Element type
31
41 x gradient
51 y gradient
61 z gradient
7 x flux
8 y flux
9 z flux
CHBDYE 4 Applied load
(107) 5 Free convection
6 Forced convection
7 Radiation
8 Total
CHBDYG Same as Same as CHBDYE
(108) CHBDYE
CHBDYP Same as Same as CHBDYE
(109) CHBDYE
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1053
2D Slideline and 3D Surface Contact Item Codes
Table 7-10 Contact Item Codes

Real Element Data
Element Name Item
(Code) Code Slideline Item 3D Surface Item (SOL 600)
CSLIFID (116) 1 Slave grid point GRID ID
2 Contact region identification number (39) Contact Touched Body
3 Master grid 1
4 Master grid 2
5 Surface coordinate (38) Contact Status
6 Normal force (35) Normal Force
7 Shear force (37) Friction Force
8 Normal stress (34) Normal Stress
9 Shear stress (36) Friction Stress
10 Normal gap
11 Slip
12 Slip ratio (Shear force/u*normal force)
13-14 Slip code (Character)
1. Numbers in parenthesis refer to MARCOUT nodal post codes.

2. 3D Surface contact is available in SOL 600 only.
Table 7-11 Contact Item Code for Nodal Data (SOL 400 only)
Real Nodal Data
Element Code Item 3D Surface Item (SOL 400 only)
203 1 Grid point ID
2 First touched body
3 Second touched body
4 Third touched body
5 Contact status (Remark 7)
6 Normal contact force magnitude
7 Friction contact force magnitude
8 Normal stress
9 Friction stress 1
Main Index
Table 7-11 Contact Item Code for Nodal Data (SOL 400 only)
Real Nodal Data
Element Code Item 3D Surface Item (SOL 400 only)
10 Friction stress 2
11 Contact normal force component F nx
12 Contact normal force component F ny
13 Contact normal force component F nz
14 Contact friction force component F fx
15 Contact friction force component F fy
16 Contact friction force component F fz
Table 7-12 Contact Item Code for Body Data (SOL 400 only)
Rigid Body Data
Element Code Item 3D Surface Item (SOL 400 Only)
203 1 BCBODY ID
2-17 [ XMAT ] 4x4
18 Contact force component RF x
19 Contact force component RF y
20 Contact force component RF z
21 Contact moment component RM x
22 Contact moment component RM y
23 Contact moment component RM z
Remarks:
1. F nx, F ny, F nz are normal force components in the global coordinate system.
2. F fx, F fy, F fz are friction force components in the global coordinate system.
3. Normal force magnitude is square root of sum of squares of F nx, F ny, F nz .
4. Friction force magnitude is square root of sum of squares of F fx, F fy, F fz with sign of largest absolute
of these values.
5. Contact touched body applies to slave grids (touching node) only.
6. A slave grid may not contact more than 3 bodies.
7. Only slave grids have non-zero contact status or touched bodies.
8. RF x, RF y, RF z, RM x, RM y, RM z are the contact force and moment in the global coordinate system that
applied on the centroid of the corresponding rigid body.
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1055
9. [XMAT] is the translation matrix to compute the new location of the rigid body.
10. These contact outputs, both Table 7-11 and Table 7-12 are saved in datablock OFCON3D.
Main Index
Table 7-13 Element Strain Energy Item Codes

Real Element Data
Element Name Item Code Item
Element groups A and B 2 Element strain energy
Element groups A and B 3 Percent of total energy
Element group A 4 Element strain energy density
Remark:
1. Element group A includes elements of CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND, CONROD, CHEXA, CPENTA,
CPYRAM, CQUAD4, CQUADR, CROD, CSHEAR, CTETRA, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR,
and CTUBE. Element group B includes elements of CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3, AND CGAP.
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1057
Fatigue Item Codes
Fatigue Item Codes
Table 7-14 Fatigue Item Codes for LOC=ELEM on FTGPARM

Element Name Item Code Real Element Data Item
Element Group A and 4 Fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
Element Group B (-4) See remark 4.
(for Z1 layer - bottom) 5 (-5) Log of fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
6 (-6) Fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
7 (-7) Log of fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
8 (-8) Fatigue damage
9 (-9) Log of fatigue damage
12 (-12) Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
Element Group B 15 Fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
(for Z2 layer - top) 16 Log of fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
17 Fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
18 Log of fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
19 Fatigue damage
20 Log of fatigue damage
23 Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
Remark:
1. Element Group A consists of elements: CHEXA, CPENTA, CPYRAM, CTETRA, CTRIA3,
CSHEAR
2. Element Group B consists of elements: CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CTRIA6, CTRIAR
3. For CTRIA3 and CSHEAR elements, LOC=ELEM and LOC=NODE or NODA options on
FTGPARM use the same item codes in Table 7-14.
Main Index
Fatigue Item Codes
4. For Element Group B (shell elements), if the item code is negative (e.g., -4) for layer Z1, this flags
Nastran to automatically (and internally) create a DRESP1 with the corresponding item code for
layer Z2. This is a convenient method to include responses from both top and bottom by defining
only a single DRESP1 entry for any particular set of elements or property sets.
Table 7-15 Fatigue Item Codes for LOC=NODE or NODA on FTGPARM

Element Name Item Codes Real Element Data Item
CTETRA 4,16,28,40 Life in Repeats of the loading sequence
5,17,29,41 Log of life in Repeats of the loading sequence
6,18,30,42 Life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
7,19,31,43 Log of life in user defined equivalent units
8,20,32,44 Fatigue damage
9,21,33,45 Log of fatigue damage
12,24,36,48 Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
CQUAD4 4,27,50,73 Life in Repeats of the loading sequence
CQUAD8 (-4,-27,-50,-73) See remark 8.
CQUADR 5,28,51,74 Log of life in Repeats of the loading sequence
(for Z1 layer - bottom) (-5,-28,-51,-74)
(-6,-29,-52,-75)
(-7,-30,-53,-76)
(-8,-31,-54,-77)
(-9,-32,-55,-78)
(-12,-35,-58,-81)
(for Z2 layer - top) 15,38,61,84 Life in Repeats of the loading sequence
16,39,62,85 Log of life in Repeats of the loading sequence
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1059
Fatigue Item Codes

CTRIA6 4,27,50 Life in Repeats of the loading sequence
CTRIAR (-4,-27,-50) See remark 8.
(for Z1 layer - bottom) 5,28,51 Log of life in Repeats of the loading sequence
(-5,-28,-51)
6,29,52 Life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
(-6,-29,-52)
7,30,53 Log of life in user defined equivalent units
(-7,-30,-53)
8,31,54 Fatigue damage
(-8,-31,-54)
9,32,55 Log of fatigue damage
(-9,-32,-55)
12,35,58 Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
(-12,-35,-58)
(for Z2 layer - top) 15,38,61 Life in Repeats of the loading sequence
16,39,62 Log of life in Repeats of the loading sequence
17,40,63 Life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
18,41,64 Log of life in user defined equivalent units
19,42,65 Fatigue damage
20,43,66 Log of fatigue damage
23,46,69 Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
CPENTA 4,16,28,40,52,64 Life in Repeats of the loading sequence
5,17,29,41,53,65 Log of life in Repeats of the loading sequence
6,18,30,42,54,66 Life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
7,19,31,43,55,67 Log of life in user defined equivalent units
8,20,32,44,56,68 Fatigue damage
9,21,33,45,57,69 Log of fatigue damage
12,24,36,48,60,72 Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
Main Index
Fatigue Item Codes

CPYRAM 4,16,28,40,52 Life in Repeats of the loading sequence
5,17,29,41,53 Log of life in Repeats of the loading sequence
6,18,30,42,54 Life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
7,19,31,43,55 Log of life in user defined equivalent units
8,20,32,44,56 Fatigue damage
9,21,33,45,57 Log of fatigue damage
12,24,36,48,60 Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
CHEXA 4,16,28,40,52,64,76,88 Life in Repeats of the loading sequence
5,17,29,41,53,65,77,89 Log of life in Repeats of the loading sequence
6,18,30,42,54,66,78,90 Life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
7,19,31,43,55,67,79,91 Log of life in user defined equivalent units
8,20,32,44,56,68,80,92 Fatigue damage
9,21,33,45,57,69,81,93 Log of fatigue damage
12,24,36,48,60,72,84,96 Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
Remarks:
1. CTRIA6 and CTRIAR item codes are listed for Grids 1-3, respectively.
2. CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CTETRA item codes are listed for Grids 1-4, respectively.
3. CPYRAM item codes are listed for Grids 1-5, respectively.
4. CPENTA item codes are listed for Grids 1-6, respectively.
5. CHEXA item codes are listed for Grids 1-8, respectively.
6. For CTRIA3 and CSHEAR elements, LOC=ELEM and LOC=NODE or NODA options on
FTGPARM use the same item codes in Table 7-14.
7. If it is desired to use a life response (or other item) for all nodes (using LOC=NODE or NODA on
FTGPARM), all item codes for the particular item are required, e.g., 4, 16, 27, and 38 for CTETRA
(one DRESP1 entry for each item code).
8. For shell elements with bottom (Z1) and top (Z2) layers, if the item code is negative (e.g., -4) for layer
Z1, this flags Nastran to automatically (and internally) create a DRESP1 with the corresponding item
code for layer Z2. This is a convenient method to include responses from both top and bottom by
defining only a single DRESP1 entry for any particular response for a set of elements or property sets.
So as an example, to specify the bottom and top response (Life in Repeats) for all the grids of the
specified element or property set for a CQUAD4 element, use items codes: -4,-27,-50,-73
9. These item codes are used for LOC=NODE or NODA and all other element nodal values of
RECOVER on the FTGPARM entry, namely, “SGAGE”, “CORNER”, “BILIN”, and “CUBIC”
also.
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1061
Fatigue Item Codes
Table 7-16 Item Codes for Fatigue Analysis of Spot Welds

CBAR 4 Fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
CBEAM (-4) (-1004) See remarks 2. and 3.
CWELD 5 ( -5)(-1005) Log of fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
CHEXA
(For Top Sheet at 6 (-6)(-1006) Fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
Angle = 0.0 7 (-7)(-1007) Log of fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
degrees) 8 (-8)(-1008) Fatigue damage
9 (-9)(-1009) Log of fatigue damage
13 (-13)(-1013) Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
CBAR 4+12*NANGLE Fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
CBEAM 5+12*NANGLE Log of fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
CWELD
CHEXA 6+12*NANGLE Fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
(For Weld Nugget 7+12*NANGLE Log of fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
at Angle = 0.0 8+12*NANGLE Fatigue damage
degrees)
9+12*NANGLE Log of fatigue damage
13+12*NANGLE Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
CBAR 4+24*NANGLE Fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
CBEAM 5+24*NANGLE Log of fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
CWELD
CHEXA 6+24*NANGLE Fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
(For Bottom 7+24*NANGLE Log of fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
Sheet at Angle = 8+24*NANGLE Fatigue damage
0.0 degrees)
9+24*NANGLE Log of fatigue damage
13+24*NANGLE Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
Remarks:
1. Spot weld fatigue item code is related to NANGLE, the number of calculation angles around the weld
circumference as defined on the FTGPARM entry. Item codes listed above are for the first angle at
zero (0) degrees. For each subsequent angle, the item code should be increased by 12. For example,
item code =16 is for “Fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence” at the Top Sheet for the second
angle.
Main Index
Fatigue Item Codes
2. If item codes 4-9 or 13 are negative (e.g., -4), this flags Nastran to automatically (and internally)
create a DRESP1 with the corresponding item code for the nugget and bottom sheet as well and for
all specified angles. This is a convenient method to include responses from all locations and angles by
defining only a single DRESP1 entry for any particular response for a set of spot weld elements or
property sets. So as an example, to specify the response (Life in Repeats) for all the locations and angles,
use a single DRESP1 entry with item code: -4.
3. In conjunction with the above remark, if the item code is negative and multiplied by 1000
(e.g., -1004), then the nugget responses are not generated. Only the top and bottom sheet responses
are internally generated.
Table 7-17 Item Codes for Fatigue Analysis of Seam Welds

CQUAD4 4, 16, 28, 40 Fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
CQUAD8 5, 17, 29, 41 Log of fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
CQUADR
6, 18, 30, 42 Fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
7, 19, 31, 43 Log of fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
8, 20, 32, 44 Fatigue damage
9, 21, 33, 45 Log of fatigue damage
12, 24, 36, 48 Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
CTRIA6 4, 16, 28 Fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
CTRIAR 5, 17, 29 Log of fatigue life in Repeats of the loading sequence
6, 18, 30 Fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
7, 19, 31 Log of fatigue life in user defined fatigue equivalent units
8, 20, 32 Fatigue damage
9, 21, 33 Log of fatigue damage
12, 24, 36 Scale factor from Factor of Safety analysis
Remarks:
1. CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR item codes are listed for Grids 1-4, respectively.
2. CTRIA6 and CTRIAR item codes are listed for Grids 1-3, respectively.
3. Note that FTGDEF has a keyword “SEAMW” that may have the field NDSIDi, which lists seam line
grids. If this is used, it means that some grids of the elements will not have fatigue life associated with
them and are excluded from the analysis.
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 1063
Equivalent Radiated Power (ERP) Item Codes
Table 7-18 Equivalent Radiated Power (ERP) Item Codes

Element Name
Item Code Item
QUAD4, CQUADR, CTRIA3,CTRIAR 2 ERP value
QUAD4, CQUADR, CTRIA3,CTRIAR 3 ERP Fraction
QUAD4, CQUADR, CTRIA3,CTRIAR 4 ERP(DB)
Main Index
Main Index
Chapter 8: Degree-of-Freedom Sets MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s GuideMSC
Nastran Quick Reference Guide
8 Degree-of-Freedom Sets
 Degree-of-Freedom Set Definitions


Degree-of-Freedom Set Bulk Data Entries
Main Index
Degree-of-Freedom Set Definitions

Each degree-of-freedom is a member of one mutually exclusive set. Set names have the following definitions:
Set Name Definition

mp Degrees-of-freedom eliminated by multipoint constraints.
mr
Degrees-of-freedom eliminated by multipoint constraints created by the rigid elements
using the LGELIM method on the Case Control command RIGID.
sb* Degrees-of-freedom eliminated by single-point constraints that are included in boundary
condition changes and by the AUTOSPC feature. (See the sz set)
sg* Degrees-of-freedom eliminated by single-point constraints that are specified on the PS field
on GRID Bulk Data entries.
sz Degrees-of-freedom eliminated by the AUTOSPC feature.
o Degrees-of-freedom omitted by structural matrix partitioning.
q Generalized degrees-of-freedom assigned to component modes and residual vectors.
r reference degrees-of-freedom used to determine free body motion.
c Degrees-of-freedom that are free during component mode synthesis or dynamic reduction.
b Degrees-of-freedom fixed during component mode analysis or dynamic reduction.
Lagrange multiplier degrees-of-freedom created by the rigid elements using the LAGR
lm method on the Case Control command, RIGID.
e extra degrees-of-freedom introduced in dynamic analysis.
sa Permanently constrained aerodynamic degrees-of-freedom.
k Aerodynamic mesh point set for forces and displacements on the aero mesh.
j Aerodynamic mesh collocation point set (exact physical interpretation is dependent on the
aerodynamic theory).
*Strictly speaking, sb and sg are not exclusive with respect to one another. Degrees-of-freedom may exist in
both sets simultaneously. Since these sets are not used explicitly in the solution sequences, this need not
concern the user. However, those who use these sets in their own DMAPs should avoid redundant
specifications when using these sets for partitioning or merging operations. That is, a degree-of-freedom
should not be specified on both a PS field of a GRID entry (sg set) and on a selected SPC entry (sb set).
Redundant specifications will cause UFM 2120 in the VEC module and behavior listed in MSC Nastran
DMAP Programmer’s Guide<$paranum[h1] for the UPARTN module. These sets are exclusive, however, from
the other mutually exclusive sets.
Main Index
Chapter 8: Degree-of-Freedom Sets 1067
Each degree-of-freedom is also a member of one or more combined sets called “supersets.” Supersets have the
following definitions:
sets supersets
mp
m
mr
sb
sg s
o
g
q p
r n ne
c a d f
t fe
b l
lm
e
k
ks
sa
js
j
Set Name Meaning (+ indicates union of two sets)

s = sb + sg all degrees-of-freedom eliminated by single point constraints
l = b + c + lm the degrees-of-freedom remaining after the reference degrees-of-freedom are removed
(degrees-of-freedom left over)
t = l+r the total set of physical boundary degrees-of-freedom for superelements
a = t+q the analysis set used in eigensolution
d = a+e the set used in dynamic analysis by the direct method
f = a+o unconstrained (free) structural degrees-of-freedom
fe = f + e free degrees-of-freedom plus extra degrees-of-freedom
n = f+s all degrees-of-freedom not constrained by multipoint constraints
ne = n + e all degrees-of-freedom not constrained by multipoint constraints plus extra degrees-of-
freedom
m = mp + mr all degrees-of-freedom eliminated by multipoint constraints
g = n+m all degrees-of-freedom including scalar degrees-of-freedom
p = g+e all physical degrees-of-freedom including extra point degree-of-freedom
ks = k + sa the union of k and the re-used s-set (6 dof per grid)
js = j + sa the union of j and the re-used s-set (6 dof per grid)
table continued on the next page
Main Index
Set Name Meaning (+ indicates union of two sets)

fr = o + l statically independent set minus the statically determinate supports ( fr = f – q – r )
v = o+c+r the set free to vibrate in dynamic reduction and component mode synthesis
al = a – lm a-set without Lagrange multiplier degree-of-freedoms.
dl = d – lm d-set without Lagrange multiplier degree-of-freedoms.
gl = g – lm g-set without Lagrange multiplier degree-of-freedoms.
ll = l – lm l-set without Lagrange multiplier degree-of-freedoms.
nf = ne – lm ne-set without Lagrange multiplier degree-of-freedoms.
pl = p – lm p-set without Lagrange multiplier degree-of-freedoms.
tl = t – lm t-set without Lagrange multiplier degree-of-freedoms.
nl = n – lm n-set without Lagrange multiplier degree-of-freedoms.
fl = f – lm f-set without Lagrange multiplier degree-of-freedoms.
ff = fe – lm fe-set without Lagrange multiplier degree-of-freedoms.
The a-set and o-set are created in the following ways:

1. If only OMITi entries are present, then the o-set consists of degrees-of-freedom listed explicitly on
OMITi entries. The remaining f-set degrees-of-freedom are placed in the b-set, which is a subset of
the a-set.
2. If ASETi or QSETi entries are present, then the a-set consists of all degrees-of-freedom listed on
ASETi entries and any entries listing its subsets, such as QSETi, SUPORTi, CSETi, and BSETi
entries. Any OMITi entries are redundant. The remaining f-set degrees-of-freedom are placed in the
o-set.
3. If there are no ASETi, QSETi, or OMITi entries present but there are SUPORTi, BSETi, or CSETi
entries present, then the entire f-set is placed in the a-set and the o-set is not created.
4. There must be at least one explicitly ASETi, QSETi, or OMITi entry for the o-set to exist, even if the
ASETi, QSETi, or OMITi entry is redundant.
In dynamic analysis, additional vector sets are obtained by a modal transformation derived from real
eigenvalue analysis of the a-set. These sets are as follows:
ξo = rigid body (zero frequency) modal degrees-of-freedom

ξf = finite frequency modal degrees-of-freedom
ξi = ξ o + ξ f , the set of all modal degrees-of-freedom
One vector set is defined that combines physical and modal degrees-of-freedom:
uh = ξ i + u e , the set of all modal degrees-of-freedom
Main Index
Chapter 8: Degree-of-Freedom Sets 1069
The membership of each degree-of-freedom can be printed by use of the Bulk Data entries
PARAM,USETPRT and PARAM,USETSEL.
Main Index

Degrees-of-freedom are placed in sets as specified by the user on the following Bulk Data entries:
Name Bulk Data Entry Name

m MPC, MPCADD, MPCAX, POINTAX, RBAR, RBAR1, RBE1, RBE2, RBE3, RJOINT,
RROD, RSPLINE, RSSCON, RTRPLT, RTRPLT1, GMBC, GMSPC*
sb SPC, SPC1, SPCADD, SPCAX, FLSYM, GMSPC*, BNDGRID, PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES
sz PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES
sg GRID, GRIDB, GRDSET (PS field)
o OMIT, OMIT1, OMlTAX, GRID (SEID field), SESET
q QSET, QSET1
r SUPORT, SUPORT1, SUPAX
c CSET, CSET1, BNDFREE, BNDFRE1
b BSET, BSET1, BNDFIX, BNDFIX1
e EPOINT
sa CAEROi
k CAEROi
a ASET, ASET1, Superelement exterior degrees-of-freedom, CSUPEXT
ap ACCSPT
rv RVDOF and RVDOF1
u1 - u6 USET, USET1, SEUSET, and SEUSET1
*Placed in set only if constraints are not specified in the basic coordinate system.
In superelement analysis, the appropriate entry names are preceded by the letters SE, and have a field reserved
for the superelement identification number. This identification is used because a boundary (exterior) grid
point may be in one mutually exclusive set in one superelement and in a different set in the adjoining
superelement. The SE-type entries are internally translated to the following types of entry for the referenced
superelement:
Entry Type Equivalent Type

SEQSETi QSETi
SESUP SUPORT
SECSETi CSETi, BNDFREE, DNBDRE1
SEBSETi BSETi, BNDFIXi
Main Index
Chapter 9: Bulk Data Entries MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s GuideMSC Nastran
Quick Reference Guide
9 Bulk Data Entries

Key to Descriptions
 Bulk Data Entry Descriptions
Main Index
Key to Descriptions
Key to Descriptions
The field names in fields 2 through 9
The name of are for reference only. Names
the entry. Must enclosed in quotation marks A brief sentence
be entered as represent character constants; e.g., about the function
shown. “THRU” on ASET1 entry. of the entry is
ACMODL Fluid-Structure Interface Modeling Parameters

If a box in fields 2 through
9 is shaded, then the field
must be left blank.
Defines modeling parameters for the interface between the fluid and the structure.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACMODL INTER INFOR FSET SSET FSTO
Example:
If the box in field 10 is
ACMODL 0.002 shaded, then no continuation
entries may follow.
FieldContents
INTERType of interface between the fluid and the structure. See Remark 1. (Character = “IDENT” or “DIFF”;
Default = “DIFF”). Each of the fields is briefly described. Further
details may be discussed under Remarks.
INFORIndicates whether FSET and SSET are to be used to define the fluid-structure interface. (Character =
Character constants
“ALL” areDefault
or “NONE”, enclosed in
= “NONE”).
quotation marks to distinguish them from
FSETIdentification number of a SET1 entry that contains a list of fluid grid points on the interface. See Remark
field names. Do not
> 0 orinput these quotation
marks.
2. (Integer blank). Under contents, “blank” usually means that
this
SSETIdentification number of a SET1 entry that contains a listfeature can
of structural gridbe optionally
points selected
on the interface. See by the
Remark 2. (Integer > 0 or blank). user. It may also mean the default action or
value is described under Remarks. When
FSTOLTolerance, in units of length, used in determining the fluid-structure interface. (Real > 0.0; Default =
0.001).
content item is listed as, for example,
(Integer>0 or blank) a value of 0 entered in
the field is equivalent to "blank".
Remarks:
The
1. Only one ACMODL entry is allowed. field’s
If this entrytype
is not(Integer, Real,
present, then or Character),
the program will
assume INTER = “DIFF” and FSTOL allowable
= .001. range, and default value are enclosed
in parentheses. If no default value is given, then
2. If INFOR = “ALL”, then both FSETaand SSETmust
value must be
be specified
specified andby
matching is
the user.
checked at only those grid points referenced by FSET and SSET.
3. See the MSC Nastran Reference Manual, 15 for a description of the methods used in
determining the fluid-structure interface.
4. The points referenced by FSET and SSET must lie exactly on the fluid-structure
interface.
TheAremarks
fatal message
are isgenerally
issued if: (a) INTER =in
arranged “IDENT”
order ofand a point in SSET or
FSET importance
does not have aand
corresponding and coincident
indicate such things aspoint
thein FSET or SSET,
respectively,
entry’sor relationship
(b) INTER = “DIFF” andentries
to other any pointor
in SSET or FSET does not lie on the
interface.
commands, restrictions, and recommendations
on usage, or further details regarding the fields.
Main Index
Chapter 9: Bulk Data Entries 1073
Key to Descriptions
The Bulk Data Section

The Bulk Data Section contains entries that specify model geometry, element connectivity, element and
material properties, constraints (boundary conditions), and loads. Some entries, such as loads and constraints,
are selected by an appropriate Case Control command.
Entries are prepared in either fixed or free field format. The descriptions in this section show only the fixed
format. Entries that are used by the MSGMESH program are not included in this guide. For a description
of the various format options and the MSGMESH entries, see the Use of Parameters (p. 31) in the .
New Bulk Data Entries added after the MSC Nastran 2011 version are only valid with the default option
IFPSTAR=YES.
Main Index
Bulk Data Entry Descriptions

Each Bulk Data entry is described as follows:
Description
A brief sentence about the function of the entry is given.
Format
The name of the entry is given in the first field. The subsequent fields are described under the Field and
Contents Section. Shaded fields must be left blank. If field 10 is shaded, then no continuation entries are
permitted. Character strings enclosed in quotation marks must be specified without the quotation marks as
shown in the example.
Example
Field and Contents

Each of the fields 2 through 9 that are named in the Format section is briefly described under Contents. The
field’s type (e.g., Integer, Real, or Character), allowable range, and default value are enclosed in parentheses.
The field must be specified by the user if no default value is given.
Remarks
The remarks in the Remarks Section are generally arranged in order of importance and indicate such things
as how the Bulk Data entry is selected in the Case Control Section, its relationship to other entries,
restrictions and recommendations on its use, and further descriptions of the fields.
Main Index
Format of Bulk Data Entries

Real, Integer, and Character Input Data
Nastran is quite particular about the input requirements for data entry. The three possible types of data entries
are Integer, Real, and Character (sometimes called literal, or BCD-binary coded decimal). The three types of
data are described as follows:
Integer Cannot contain a decimal point.

Real Must contain a decimal point. If however, system cell 444 is set to 9 and the only possible
value format is real, then an integer representation (less decimal point) will be converted
to real. A single decimal point is not be considered a real zero value. Either 0 or 0. (a digit)
must be supplied.
Character Can be alphanumeric, and with exceptions (listed on specific bulk data entries) should
always start with an alpha character. Legal alpha characters are the English: A-Z and a-z.
Legal numeric characters are 0-9, and in special circumstances in fields that allow user
naming the dash (-) and the underscore (_). In user naming fields use of $, &, *, =, +,
period (.), comma (,) should be avoided as they often have special meaning to the nastran
bulk data interpreter. Misspelled required words such as the name of an entry will result
in a fatal message. Substitution of non English alphabetic characters will cause a fatal
message to be issued.
Real numbers may be entered in a variety of ways. For example, the following are all acceptable versions of
the real number seven:
7.0 .7E1 0.7+1

.70+1 7.E+0 70.-1
Free, Small, and Large Field Formats

Nastran has three different field formats for input data:
Free Field Format Input data fields are separated by commas.

Small Field Format Ten fields of eight characters each.
Large Field Format Ten fields-eight fields containing actual data are sixteen characters each (fields 2-
5 and 6-9). Large fields are used when greater numerical accuracy is required. See
the Large Field Format, 1080 for additional information.
The NASTRAN statement, File Management Section, Executive Control Section, and Case Control Section
use free field format. The Bulk Data Section allows the use of any of the three formats.
Nastran Bulk Data contains ten fields per input data entry. The first field contains the character name of the
Bulk Data item (e.g., GRID, CBAR, MAT1, etc.). Fields two through nine contain data input information
Main Index
for the Bulk Data entry. The tenth field never contains data-it is reserved for entry continuation information,
if applicable.
Consider the format of a typical MSC Nastran Bulk Data entry, the GRID entry, which is used in Nastran
to describe the geometry of the structural model.
Field Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GRID ID CP X1 X2 X3 CD PS SEID
Fields containing input

data for the GRID entry. Field 10 is used only for
optional continuation
Character name of information when applicable.
this Bulk Data entry This shaded box means that a
data continuation is not used
for the GRID entry.
Example:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GRID 2 1.0 -2.0 3.0 136
We will now represent this example in free field, small field, and large field formats.
Free Field Format

In free field format, data fields are separated by commas or blanks (commas are strongly recommended). The
following shows the GRID Bulk Data entry example in free field format:
GRID,2,,1.0,-2.0,3.0,,136
Two consecutive commas
indicate an empty field
The rules for free field format are as follows:
 Free field data entries must start in column 1.
 To skip one field, use two commas in succession. To skip two fields, use three commas in succession
(and so on).
 Integer or character fields with more than eight characters cause a fatal error.
 Real numbers with more than eight characters are rounded off and lose some precision. For example,
an entry of 1.2345678+2 becomes 123.4568. If more significant digits are needed, use the large field
format. If however, NASTRAN IFPSTAR=YES is used, then the entry will automatically be
converted to large field format.
Main Index
 Free field data cannot contain embedded blanks to skip fields. An example of a free field embedded
blank is shown:
GRID,2,,1 0,-2.0,3.0,,136
Embedded blank
not allowed
In a continuation line, if a comma is the first character and in the first 12 columns, this line is free
format.
 A dollar sign $ can be used within a line. All data following the $ on the line will be for comments.
An example of a comment is shown:
DISP(PUNCH)=ALL $ request punched displacement output for all grids
The free field data entry capability in Nastran have been enhanced to support easy to use data input formats.
The following examples illustrate the possible forms of the free field data input and the resulting translation
to the fixed-field format.
Entry with or without user continuation mnemonics.
MATT9,1101,2 ,3 ,4 ,,,,8 ,+P101
+P101,9 ,,,,13
Translates to:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MATT9 1101 2 3 4 8 +P101
+P101 9 13
GRID,100,,1.0,0.0,0.0,,456
Translates to:
GRID 100 1.0 0.0 0.0 456
The continuation mnemonics are not included because they are not required. This is illustrated by the entry
with automatic continuation:
SPC1,100,12456,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
Translates to:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPC1 100 12456 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10
If more than 80 characters of data are required, the free field may be continued in the next line provided that
the next entry starts with a comma in the first column. The next entry will be a logical continuation of the
first. For example, the free-field entry:
Main Index
MATT9,1151,2 ,3 ,4 ,,,,8
,9 ,,,,13
Translates to:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MATT9 1151 2 3 4 8
9 13
Which is equivalent to:
MATT9,1151,2 ,3 ,4 ,,,,8 ,+
+,9 ,,,,13
Translates to:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MATT9 1151 2 3 4 8 +
+ 9 13
The free field data entry can be used to input mixed Small Field, Large Field continuations. Note that the
plus (+) and asterisk (*) characters are used to indicate Small Field and Large Field input form respectively
when free field data entry is used. For example, the entries:
MATT9*,1302,2 ,,4 ,+
+,,,,,13
Translates to:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MATT9* 1302 2 4 +
+ 13
MATT9,1303,2 ,3 ,4 ,,,,8 ,+
*,9 ,,,,+
*,13
Translates to:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MATT9 1303 2 3 4 8 +
* 9
* 13
MATT9,1355,2 ,3 ,,5 ,,,8 ,+
*,,10 ,,,+
+,17
Main Index
Translates to:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MATT9 1355 2 3 5 8 +
* 10 +
+ 17
System cell 363 must be set to 1 (i.e., system(363)=1, or STRICTUAI=1) if more than 80 characters of data
are required, then the free-field entry is continued by terminating the parent with a comma. The next entry
will be a logical continuation of the first. It is not required to end the first entry at any specific point. This is
illustrated by the entry:
CHEXA,200, 200, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
17, 18, 19, 20
Translates to:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHEXA 200 200 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20
Because of the feature allowing more than 10 fields of data to be entered on one free field entry, IT IS NOT
ALLOWED to terminate a single free field entry with a comma. For example:
CHEXA,200, 200, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
Small Field Format

Small field format separates a Bulk Data entry into ten equal fields of eight characters each:
8 character field
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
80 characters
The following is an example of the GRID entry in small field format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GRID 2 1.0 -2.0 3.0 136
The rules for small field format are as follows:
 Fields 1 and 10 must be left justified.
 Fields 2 through 9 do not need to be either right or left justified, although aligning the data fields is
good practice.
Main Index
 Small field input data cannot contain any embedded blanks. An example of a small field embedded
blank is shown:
8 character field
7 . 6 5
Embedded blank
not allowed
Large Field Format

A high degree of numerical accuracy is required in some Nastran applications. Large field format is used when
small field format does not provide enough significant digits (recall that a minus sign, decimal point, and the
“E” in scientific notation count as characters).
Large field format requires (at least) two lines for each entry: the first and last field of each line contains eight
columns, and the fields in between contain 16 columns. Short field becomes two lines. Large field entries are
denoted by an asterisk (*) immediately following the character string in field 1A of the first line and
immediately preceding the character string in field 1B of the second line.
The following is an example of the GRID Bulk Data entry example in large field format:
First Line: (Left half of single field)

Field 1A 2 3 4 5 6
GRID* 2 1.0 -2.0 *GRID10
8 16 16 16 16 8
columns
Second Line: (Right half of single field)

Field 1B 6 7 8 9 10B
*GRID10 3.0 136
8 16 16 16 16 8
columns
Continuations
Some Bulk Data entries require more than eight fields (72 columns) of data. Continuations are required in
such cases. To do this, a parent entry (the first line) is followed by one or more continuation entries on
subsequent lines. For example, consider the following PBAR simple beam property entry (do not worry about
what each field represents-this will be explained later):
Main Index
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PBAR PID MID A I1 I2 J NSM
C1 C2 D1 D2 El E2 F1 F2
K1 K2 I12
Continuation Example:
PBAR 39 6 2.9 1.86 2.92 .48 +PB1
+PB1 0. 0. 0. 1. 1. 1. 1. 0. +PB2
+PB2 .86 .86
+PB1 in field 10 of the parent entry is an arbitrary (and unique) user-defined pointer to field 1 of the second
line. +PB2 in the second line points the third line, and so on.
Continuation fields can also be generated automatically by Nastran (this approach is the recommended
practice). To automatically generate a continuation, the continuation line (or lines) must immediately follow
the parent Bulk Data entry. In addition, fields 1 and 10 of the continuation line (or lines) must be left blank.
In the case of double-width generated continuations are not blank in field 1, but have an “*” in column 1.
Nastran will then generate unique continuations for you. This process is illustrated in the following example:
Input (.DAT) file:
CHEXA, 1, 10, 3, 5, 7, 1, 15, 17,
, 19, 13, 4, 6, 8, 2, 10, 11,
, 12, 9, 16, 18, 20, 14
Output (.F06) file:
GEAR TOOTH EXAMPLESEPTEMBER 29, 1993 MSC.Nastran 9/ 4/91 PAGE 3
S O R T E D B U L K D A T A E C H O
CARD
COUNT. 1 .. 2 .. 3 .. 4 .. 5 .. 6 .. 7 .. 8 .. 9 .. 10 .
1- CHEXA 1 103 5 7115 17 +000001
2-++00000119 134 6 8210 11 +000002
3-++00000212 916 18 2014 +000003
Blank lines are allowed if they are in between entries but not allowed if they are in an entry and further continuations are
followed if ifpstar is yes, for example, the blank line in below entry is not allowed. To ignore those blank lines, set
system(767) to 1.
CHEXA, 1, 10, 3, 5, 7, 1, 15, 17,
, 19, 13, 4, 6, 8, 2, 10, 11,

, 12, 9, 16, 18, 20, 14
Nastran Continuation fields (fields one and ten) are replicated using the following conventions:
1. Only letters of the alphabet and integers may be used. They are coded into a base 36 number. That
is, the sequence of numbers is 0,1, 2, ..., 8, 9, A, B, ...
2. The first character in field one or ten is not incremented.
3. The continuation fields are incremented by +1 regardless of the value specified by the user.
Main Index
4. The number of characters in an incremented field will not be increased. For example, if the first field
is “0", the thirty-seventh field will also be “0", resulting in an illegal entry. A method to solve this
problem would be to start with a first field of “00". This will provide thirty-six squared unique fields.
5. At least one field in fields 2 through 8 of continuation entries must be non-blank.
Replication
Replication is a limited data generation capability which may be used in a fixed or free-field format and is not
currently fully supported with NASTRAN SYSTEM(444)=1 and its use, therefore, is not recommended.
Also replication is not at all currently supported with SimX reading a user-generated input file and strange
models may be displayed.
1. Duplication of fields from the preceding entry is accomplished by coding the symbol =.
2. Duplication of all trailing fields from the preceding entry is accomplished by coding the symbol ==.
3. Incrementing a value from the previous entry is indicated by coding *x or *(x), where x is the value
of the increment. “x” should be a real number for real fields or an integer for integer fields.
4. Repeated replication is indicated by coding =n or =(n), where n is the number of images to be
generated using the values of the increments on the preceding entry.
5. Data items may be enclosed with parentheses or the parentheses may be deleted.
6. The MSGMESH capability includes the capabilities described here, plus the following capabilities as
long as NASTRAN MESH is specified in the File Management Section.
• Continuation entry fields may be incremented or decremented.
• Repeated replication is indicated by coding =(n) in field 1, where n is number of entry images to
be generated using the values of increments from the current or preceding replication entry.
Entered entries:
GRID, 101, 17, 1 .0, 10.5,,17,3456
= , *1, =, *0.2, ==
=3
Generated entries:
GRID 101 17 1.0 10.5 17 3456

GRID 102 17 1.2 10.5 17 3456
GRID 103 17 1.4 10.5 17 3456
GRID 104 17 1.6 10.5 17 3456
GRID 105 17 1.8 10.5 17 3456
• A blank in field 1 indicates immediate continuation entry replication. The default continuation
entry increment is 1. Example:
BSET1,123,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
,,*7,*7,*7,*7,*7,*7,*7
=(3)
Main Index
Generated entries:
BSET1 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 +00001
++00001 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 +00002
++00002 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 +00003
++00003 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 +00004
++00004 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 +00005
• A “=(D)” in field 1 indicates delayed continuation entry replication. A maximum of 9 entries may
be replicated as a group. The default continuation entry increment is 10. Example:
Entered entries:
CTRIA3,10,1,1,10,11/+C1
=(D),*(1),=,=,*(1),*(1)/*(20)
+C1,,,2.0,1.0,1.0
=(2),==
Generated entries:
CTRIA3 10 1 1 10 11 +C1
+C1 2.0 1.0 1.0
CTRIA3 11 1 1 11 12 +C21
+C21 2.0 1.0 1.0
CTRIA3 12 1 1 12 13 +C41
+C41 2.0 1.0 1.0
• Parentheses are optional on replication entries and an equal sign may replace an asterisk.
The following is an example of the use of replication, automatic continuation field generation,
and the free field format:
GRID, 101, 17, 1.0, 10.5,,17,3456
=,*1,=,*0.2, *(0.1), == $ COMMENTS MAY APPEAR AFTER $
=3
EIGR,13,GIV,,30.
,MASS
CBAR,1 ,1 ,101 ,102,0.,0.,1.,,+0
=,*1,=,*1,*1====*1
+0,56
*1,=$
The above free-field entries will generate the following Bulk Data in the 8-column format, as seen
in the SORTED BULK DATA ECHO:
Note: A “,” should always be used after the “*1” for the continuation increment even if fixed field
format is being used.
Main Index
CBAR 1 1 101 102 0. 0. 1. +0

+0 56
CBAR 2 1 102 103 0. 0. 1. +1
+1 56
EIGR 13 GIV 30. +000001
++000001 MASS
GRID 101 17 1.0 10.5 17 3456
GRID 102 17 1.2 10.6 17 3456
GRID 103 17 1.4 10.7 17 3456
GRID 104 17 1.6 10.8 17 3456
GRID 105 17 1.8 10.9 17 3456
The automatically generated continuation entries start with the number 1, are incremented by 1, and are
padded with zeros and plus signs as shown above. If this feature is used, it is the user’s responsibility not to
enter continuation entries that also use this convention. In particular, data generated on another run and then
written to the PUNCH file with the ECHO=PUNCH, will cause problems when introduced into other data
with blank continuation fields.
Identifiers
MSC Nastran is designed to use Identifiers for many quantities, the most common include:
ID Grid Identification number
EID Element Identification number
PID Property Identification number
MID Material Identification number
CID Coordinate System number
When these identifications are given they must be unique in their class. All IDs defined on GRID, GRIDB,
GRIDF, GRIDS, SPOINT and EPOINT must be unique.
In the case of Element Identification (EID), elements are generally given by "C" entries, such as CBAR,
CBEAM, CQUAD, CHEXA, but rigid elements such as RBAR, RBE1, RBE2 are also treated as elements
with respect to the EID, and should also be part of this class. All EID must be unique.
All Identification numbers must be greater than zero ( example EID > 0)
Furthermore Element Identification and Grid Identification must be less than 100,000,000 to insure data
integrity.
There are two types of Property entries, primary ones and secondary ones. The property id on the primary
property entries must be unique. These property identifier numbers are referenced on either "C" options
defining element connectivity or "G" options for p-element technology. The correspondence between these
options is given below.
Main Index
Referenced by Primary Property Names

CHBDYP BDYOR
CHBDYG BDYOR
CHBDYE BDYOR
CAABSF PAABSF
CACINF3 PACINF
CACINF4 PACINF
CAERO1 PAERO1
CAERO2 PAERO2
CAERO3 PAERO3
CAERO4 PAERO4
CAERO5 PAERO5
CAXISYM PAXISYM
CBAR PBAR,PBARL, PBRSECT
CBEAM PBEAM, PBCOMP, PBEAML, PBMSECT,PDISCR,
PBMARB6,PMMNUM6
CBEAM3 PBEAM3, PBMSECT
CBELT PBELTD
CBEND PBEND
CBUSH PBUSH, PBUSHT
CBUSH1D PBUSH1D
CBUSH2D PBUSH2D
CCONEAX PCONEAX
CDAMP1 PDAMP
CDAMP1D PDAMP
CDAMP3 PDAMP
CDAMP5 PDAMP5
CDUMi PDUMi
CELAS1 PELAS1
CELAS1D PELAS1
CELAS3 PELAS
CFAST PFAST
CGAP PGAP
Main Index

CHACAB PACABS
CHACBR PACBAR
CHBDYP PHBDY
CHEXA PSOLID, PLSOLID, PCOMPLS
CIFHEX PCOHE
CIFPENT PCOHE
CIFQDT PCOHE
CIFQUAD PCOHE
CMARKB2 PMARKER
CMARKN1 PMARKER
CMASS1 PMASS
CMASS3 PMASS
CMREBAI PMREBAI
CMREBAR PMREBAR
CONSPOT PBSPOT
CPENTA PSOLID, PLSOLID
CQUAD PLPLANE,PLCOMP
CQUAD4 PSHELL,PCOMP,PCOMPG, PLPLANE,PSHELL1,PSHELLD,PLCOMP
CQUAD8 PSHELL,PCOMP,PCOMPG,PLPLANE,PLCOMP
CQUADR PSHELL,PCOMP,PCOMPG,PLPLANE
CQUADX PAXSYMH, PLPLANE,PLCOMP
CRAC2D PRAC2D
CRAC3D PRAC3D
CROD PROD,PBELTD
CSEAM PSEAM
CSHEAR PSHEAR
CSPH PSPH
CSPR PSPRMAT
CSSHL PSSHL
CSSHLH PSSHL
CSSHLP PSSHL
CTETRA PSOLID, PLSOLID
CTQUAD PTSHELL
Main Index

CTRIA3 PSHELL,PCOMP,PCOMPG, PLPLANE, PSHELL1
CTRIA6 PSHELL,PCOMP,PCOMPG,PLPLANE
CTRIAR PSHELL,PCOMP,PCOMPG, PLPLANE
CTRIAX PAXSYMH
CTTRIA PTSHELL
CTUBE PTUBE
CVISC PVISC
CWELD PWELD
GMINTC PINTC
GMINTS PINTS
The secondary Property entries use the same property id as the primary property id. The relationship between
these two is shown below.
Primary Secondary
PSOLID PSLDN1
PLPLANE PSHLN2
PCOMP PCOMPA
PBAR PBARN1
PBEAM PBEAM71
PBEAM PBEMN1
PBEAML PBEMN1
PCOMP PCOMPF
PCOMPG PCOMPF
PDAMP PDAMPT
PELAS PELAST
PROD PROND1
PSHEAR PSHEARN
PSHELL PSHLN1
PCOMP PSHLN1
There are two types of Material entries, primary ones and secondary ones. The material id on the primary
material entries must be unique. The material id on the secondary Material entry must agree with the material
Main Index
id on the associated primary Material entry. The correlation between primary and secondary Material entries
is given below.
Material
Model Primary Secondary
Isotropic MAT1 MATT1 MATS1 MATVP MATEP MATTEP MATF MATTF MATF1 MATFTG MATVE MATTVE
Shell MAT2 MATT2 MATVP MATEP MATTEP MATF MATTF
Anisotropic
Planar MAT3 MATT3 MATS3 MATVP MATEP MATTEP MATF MATTF
Orthotropic
Hypoelastic MATUSR MATTUSR
User Sub.
General MATORT MATTOR MATSORT MATF MATTF
Orthotropic T
Shell MAT8 MATT8 MATS8 MATF MATTF
Orthotropic
General MAT9 MATT9
Anisotropic
Geneal MATHE MATTHE MATVE MATTVE
Hyperelastic
Gasket MATG MATTG
5th order MATHP
Mooney-
Rivlin
Advanced MATNLE
NLELAST
Shape Memory MATSMA
Isotropic MATPE1
Poroelastic
CZM Material MCOHE
SOL 400
CZM Material MDELAM
SOL 600
Composite MIXTURE
Mixture
NLELAST MATNLE
Digimat MATDIGI
Composite
Isotropic Heat MAT4 MATT4
Transfer
Anisotropic MAT5 MATT5
Heat Transfer
Bulk Data Entry Summary

This section contains a summary of all Bulk Data entries. The entries are categorized as Geometry, Elements,
Material Properties, Constraints, Loads, Solution Control, and Miscellaneous. Entries that are exclusive to
SOL 600 have been grouped together at the end of the summary. Entries that are exclusive to Explicit
Nonlinear analysis (SOL 700) have also been grouped together at the end of the summary.
Main Index
Constraints and Partitioning

Component Mode Boundary Conditions
BNDFIX Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be fixed (b-set) during generalized
dynamic reduction or component mode synthesis calculations.
BNDFIX1 Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be fixed (b-set) during generalized
dynamic reduction or component mode synthesis calculations.
BNDFREE Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during generalized
dynamic reduction or component modes calculations.
BNDFRE1 Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during generalized
dynamic reduction or component modes calculations.
BSET Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be fixed (b-set) during component mode
synthesis calculations.
BSET1 Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be fixed (b-set) during component mode
CSET Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during component modes
calculations.
CSET1 Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during component modes
calculations.
QSET Defines generalized degrees-of-freedom (q-set) to be used for component mode synthesis.
QSET1 Defines generalized degrees-of-freedom (q-set) to be used for component mode synthesis.
SEBSET Defines boundary degrees-of-freedom to be fixed (b-set) during component mode
SEBSET1 Defines fixed boundary points for superelement.
SECSET Defines boundary degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during component mode
SECSET1 Defines boundary degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during component mode
SENQSET Defines number of internally generated scalar points for superelement dynamic
reduction.
SEQSET Defines the generalized degrees-of-freedom of the superelement to be used in component
mode synthesis.
SEQSET1 Defines the generalized degrees-of-freedom of the superelement to be used in component
mode synthesis.
SESUP Defines determinate reaction superelement degrees-of-freedom in a free-body analysis.
Main Index
Free Body Supports

CYSUP Defines fictitious supports for cyclic symmetry analysis.
SUPAX Defines determinate reaction degrees-of-freedom in free bodies for conical shell analysis.
SUPORTi Defines degrees-of-freedom for determinate reactions.
Multipoint Constraints
MONSUM Defines a new monitor result that is the weighted sum of existing monitor results.
MPC Defines a linear relationship for two or more degrees-of-freedom.
MPCADD Defines a multipoint constraint set as a union of multipoint constraint sets defined via
MPC entries.
MPCD Defines a load selectable value for nonhomogeneous multi-point constraint.
MPCY Defines a linear nonhomogeneous relationship for two or more degrees-of-freedom.
MPCAX Defines multipoint constraints for conical shell problems.
POINTAX Defines multipoint constraints for point on conical shell.
RBAR Defines multipoint constraints for rigid bar.
RBEi Defines multipoint constraints for RBE1, RBE2, RBE3.
RROD Defines multipoint constraints for rigid rod.
RSPLINE Defines multipoint constraints for spline element.
RTRPLT Defines multipoint constraints for rigid triangular plate.
p-element Geometry Constraints

GMBC Defines enforced displacements for GRID, FEEDGE, FEFACE, GMCURV, and
GMSURF entries.
GMSPC Defines constraints for entries.
Partitioning
ASET Defines degrees-of-freedom in the analysis set (a-set).
ASET1 Defines degrees-of-freedom in the analysis set (a-set).
CSUPEXT Assigns exterior points to a superelement.
GRID Defines interior points for a superelement.
OMIT Defines degrees-of-freedom to be excluded (o-set) from the analysis set (a-set).
OMIT1 Defines degrees-of-freedom to be excluded (o-set) from the analysis set (a-set).
OMITAX Defines degrees-of-freedom to be excluded (o-set) from the analysis set (a-set).
RELEASE Defines degrees-of-freedom for superelement exterior grid points that are not connected
to the superelement.
Main Index
SEELT Reassigns superelement boundary elements to an upstream superelement.

SESET Defines interior grid points for a superelement.
Single Point Constraints

FLSYM Symmetry control for boundary in axisymmetric fluid problem.
GRID Includes single point constraint definition.
GRIDB Includes single point constraint definition.
GRDSET Includes default for single point constraints.
SPC Defines a set of single-point constraints and enforced motion (enforced displacements in
static analysis and enforced displacements, velocities or acceleration in dynamic analysis).
SPC1 Defines a set of single point constraints.
SPCADD Defines a single-point constraint set as a union of single-point constraint sets defined on
SPC or SPC1 entries.
SPCAX Defines a set of single-point constraints or enforced displacements for conical shell
coordinates.
SPCOFF Defines degrees-of-freedom to be excluded from the AUTOSPC operation.
SPCOFF Defines a set of degrees-of-freedom to be excluded from the AUTOSPC operation.
User Sets
DEFUSET Defines new names for degree-of-freedom sets.
SEUSET Defines a degree-of-freedom set for a superelement.
SEUSET1 Defines a degree-of-freedom set for a superelement.
USET Defines a degree-of-freedom set.
USET1 Defines a degrees-of-freedom set.
Elements
A summary of the capabilities and characteristics of the small strain elements is available in Element Summary
-- Conventional MSC Nastran Elements (p. 43) in the .
Aerodynamic Elements
AEFACT Defines real numbers for aeroelastic analysis.
AELINK Defines relationships between or among AESTAT and AESURF entries.
AELIST Defines a list of aerodynamic elements to undergo the motion prescribed with the
AESURF Bulk Data entry for static aeroelasticity. Also defines server specific integer data
for external spline methods.
AEQUAD4 Defines the connectivity of a quadrilateral aerodynamic element.
Main Index
AESTAT Specifies rigid body motions to be used as trim variables in static aeroelasticity.
AESURF Specifies an aerodynamic control surface as a member of the set of aerodynamic extra
points.
AESURFS Optional specification of the structural nodes associated with an aerodynamic control
surface that has been defined on an AESURF entry.
AETRIA3 Defines the connectivity of a triangular aerodynamic element.
CAERO1 Defines an aerodynamic macro element (panel) in terms of two leading edge locations
and side chords.
CAERO2 Defines aerodynamic slender body and interference elements for Doublet-Lattice
aerodynamics.
CAERO3 Defines the aerodynamic edges of a Mach Box lifting surface. If no cranks are present,
this entry defines the aerodynamic Mach Box lifting surface.
CAERO4 Defines an aerodynamic macro element for Strip theory.
CAERO5 Defines an aerodynamic macro element for Piston theory.
CSSCHD Defines a scheduled control surface deflection as a function of Mach number and angle
of attack.
PAERO1 Defines associated bodies for the panels in the Doublet-Lattice method.
PAERO2 Defines the cross-sectional properties of aerodynamic bodies.
PAERO3 Defines the number of Mach boxes in the flow direction and the location of cranks and
control surfaces of a Mach box lifting surface.
PAERO4 Defines properties of each strip element for Strip theory.
PAERO5 Defines properties of each strip element for Piston theory.
Aerodynamic to Structure Interconnection

AELISTC Defines a list of 8-character strings.
SET1 Defines a list of structural grid points.
SET2 Defines a list of structural grid points in terms of aerodynamic macro elements.
SET3 Defines a list of grids, elements or points.
SPBLND1 Defines a strip based blending of two splines.
SPBLND2 Defines a curve based blending of two splines.
SPLINE1 Defines a surface spline for interpolating motion and/or forces for aeroelastic problems
on aerodynamic geometries defined by regular arrays of aerodynamic points.
SPLINE2 Defines a beam spline for interpolating motion and/or forces for aeroelastic problems on
aerodynamic geometries defined by regular arrays of aerodynamic points.
SPLINE3 Defines a constraint equation for aeroelastic problems. Useful for control surface
constraints.
Main Index
SPLINE4 Defines a curved surface spline for interpolating motion and/or forces for aeroelastic
problems on general aerodynamic geometries using either the Infinite Plate, Thin Plate
or Finite Plate splining method.
SPLINE5 Defines a 1D beam spline for interpolating motion and/or forces for aeroelastic problems
on aerodynamic geometries defined by irregular arrays of aerodynamic points.
SPLINE6 Defines a 6DOF or 3DOF finite surface spline for interpolating motion and/or forces
between two meshes.
SPLINE7 Defines a 6DOF finite beam spline for interpolating motion and/or forces between two
meshes.
SPLINEX Defines the input for a spline that will be evaluated with a user-supplied procedure.
SPLINRB Defines a rigid body spline for interpolating motion or forces for aeroelastic problems on
general aerodynamic geometries.
SPRELAX Defines relaxation of a spline based on an adjacent spline.
Axisymmetric Elements
CAXISYM Defines an axisymmetric shell.
CCONEAX Defines a conical shell element.
CQUADX Defines an axisymmetric quadrilateral element with up to nine grid points for use in fully
nonlinear (i.e., large strain and large rotations) hyperelastic analysis.
CTRIAX Defines an axisymmetric triangular element with up to 6 grid points for use in fully
nonlinear (i.e., large strain and large rotations) hyperelastic analysis.
CTRIAX6 Defines an isoparametric and axisymmetric triangular cross section ring element with
midside grid points.
MREVERS Defines which elements, if any, required node numbering to be reversed in SOL 600.
PCONEAX Defines the properties of a conical shell element described on a CCONEAX entry.
Cohesive Zone Modeling Elements

CIFHEX Defines a solid interface cohesive zone modeling element in SOL 400.
CIFPENT Defines a solid interface cohesive zone modeling element in SOL 400.
CIFQDX Defines an axisymmetric interface cohesive zone modeling element in SOL 400.
CIFQUAD Defines a planar interface element for cohesive zone modeling element in SOL 400.
MCOHE Defines damage and cohesive energy for interface zone modeling elements in SOL 400.
PCOHE Defines the properties of a cohesive interface zone modeling elements in SOL 400.
Connector Elements
CFAST Defines a fastener with material orientation connecting two surface patches.
CSEAM Defines a seam-line connecting two surfaces.
Main Index
CSLOT3 Defines an element connecting three points that solve the wave equation in two
dimensions.
CSLOT4 Defines an element connecting four points that solve the wave equation in two
dimensions.
CWELD Defines a weld or fastener connecting two surface patches or points.
PFAST Defines the CFAST fastener property values.
PSEAM Defines the CSEAM fastener property values.
PWELD Defines the property of connector (CWELD) elements.
SWLDPRM Overrides default values of parameters for connector search.
Slidelines Contact (SOL 106, 129)

BCONP Defines the parameters for a contact region and its properties.
BFRlC Defines frictional properties between two bodies in contact.
BLSEG Defines a curve that consists of a number of line segments via grid numbers that may
come in contact with another body.
BWIDTH Defines widths or thicknesses for line segments in 3-D or 2-D slideline contact defined
in the corresponding BLSEG Bulk Data entry.
Gap Elements
CGAP Defines a gap or friction element.
PGAP Defines the properties of the gap element (CGAP entry).
Crack Tip Elements

CRAC2D Defines a two-dimensional crack tip element.
CRAC3D Defines a three-dimensional crack tip element.
PRAC2D Defines the properties and stress evaluation techniques to be used with the CRAC2D
structural element.
PRAC3D Defines the properties of the CRAC3D structural element.
Damping Elements
CBUSH1D See line elements.
CDAMP1 Defines a scalar damper element.
CVISC Defines a viscous damper element.
DAMPING Specifies the values for parameter damping and/or selects optional HYBRID damping.
HYBDAMP Specifies hybrid damping parameters.
PBUSH1D See line elements.
Main Index
PDAMP Specifies the damping value of a scalar damper element using defined CDAMP1 or
CDAMP3 entries.
PDAMP5 Defines the damping multiplier and references the material properties for damping.
CDAMP5 is intended for heat transfer analysis only.
PDAMPT Defines the frequency-dependent properties for a PDAMP Bulk Data entry.
PVISC Defines properties of a one-dimensional viscous damping element (CVISC entry).
ROTHYBD Defines Hybrid damping for rotordynamics.
Dummy Elements
ADUMi Defines attributes of the dummy elements (1 < i < 9)
CDUMi Defines a dummy element (1 < i < 9)
PDUMi Defines the properties of a dummy element (1 < i < 9). Referenced by the CDUMi
entry.
PLOTEL Defines a one-dimensional dummy element for use in plotting.
Fluid and Acoustic Elements

CAABSF Defines a frequency-dependent acoustic absorber element in coupled fluid-structural
analysis.
CACINFi Defines few types of acoustic infinite elements.
CAXIFi Defines an axisymmetric fluid element that connects i = 2, 3, or 4 fluid points.
CAXISYM Defines two or three node axisymmetric thick shell elements.
CFLUIDi Defines three types of fluid elements for an axisymmetric fluid model.
CHACAB Defines the acoustic absorber element in coupled fluid-structural analysis.
CHACBR Defines the acoustic barrier element.
CHEXA Connection definition for a pentahedron element in coupled fluid-structural analysis.
CPENTA Connection definition for a tetrahedron element in coupled fluid-structural analysis.
CSLOTi Defines slot element for acoustic cavity analysis.
CTETRA Defines the connections of the four-sided solid element with four to ten grid points.
ELIST Defines a list of structural elements for virtual fluid mass.
MAT10 Fluid Material Property Definition.
PAABSF Defines the properties of a frequency-dependent acoustic absorber element.
PACABS Defines the properties of the acoustic absorber element.
PACBAR Defines the properties of the acoustic barrier element.
PACINF Defines the properties of acoustic infinite elements.
PANEL Selects the set of structural grid points that define one or more panels.
Main Index
PSOLID Defines the fluid properties of solid elements (CHEXA, CPENTA, and CTETRA
entries).
SET1 Defines a list of structural grid points for aerodynamic analysis, XY-plots for SORT1
output, and the PANEL entry.
Equivalent Radiated Power

ERPPNL Equivalent Radiated Power Definition
Poroelasticity (PEM)
ACTRIM ACTRAN Trimmed Material Matrices for SOL 108/111
ACLOAD ACTRAN Acoustic Pressure Load Matrices for SOL 108/111
MATPE1 Isotropic Poroelastic Material Property definition
MATF1 Frequency Dependent Isotropic Material Definition
Heat Transfer Elements

BDYOR Defines default values for the CHBDYP, CHBDYG, and CHBDYE entries.
CHBDYi Connection definition for surface element (CHBDYE, CHBDYG, CHBDYP).
CONTRLT Thermal control element for heat transfer analysis.
PHBDY A property entry referenced by CHBDYP entries to give auxiliary geometric information
for boundary condition surface elements.
The PRODN1, PSHLN1, PSHLN2, PSLDN1, PSHEARN, PLCOMP, and PCOMPLS may be used to
extend the nonlinear capabilities of heat transfer elements in SOL 400.
The following elastic elements may also be used as heat conduction elements:
Linear: CBAR, CROD, CONROD, CTUBE, CBEAM, CBEND.

Membrane: CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, CQUAD8.
Axisymmetric: CTRIAX6.
Solid: CTETRA, CHEXA, CPENTA.
Line Elements
BAROR Default for orientation and property for CBAR.
BEAMOR Defines default vlaues for field 3 and fields 6 through 8 of the CBEAM entry.
CBAR Defines a simple beam element.
CBEAM Defines a beam element.
CBEAM3 Defines a three-node beam element.
Main Index
CBEND Defines a curved beam, curved pipe, or elbow element.

CBUSH1D Defines the connectivity of a one-dimensional spring and viscous damper element.
CFAST Defines a fastener with material orientation connecting two surface patches.
CINTC Defines a line interface element with specified boundaries.
CMREBAI Defines Rebar elements and matching “Matrix” solid element using the Marc REBAR
with INSERT Method. (SOL 600)
CMREBAR Defines Rebar elements with matching “Matrix” solid elements using the Marc REBAR
without INSERT Method. (SOL 600)
CONROD Defines a rod element without reference to a property entry.
CROD Defines a tension-compression-torsion element.
CTUBE Defines a tension-compression-torsion tube element.
CWELD Defines a weld or fastener connecting two surface patches or points.
PBAR Defines the properties of a simple beam element (CBAR entry).
PBARL Defines the properties of a simple beam element (CBAR entry) by cross-sectional
dimensions.
PBARN1 Specifies additional nonlinear properties for elements that point to a PBAR or PBARL
entry.
PBCOMP Alternate form of the PBEAM entry to define properties of a uniform cross-sectional
beam referenced by a CBEAM entry.
PBEAM Defines the properties of a beam element (CBEAM entry). This element may be used to
model tapered beams.
PBEAM3 Defines the properties of a three-node beam element (CBEAM3 entry).
PBEAML Defines the properties of a beam element by cross-sectional dimensions.
PBEMN1 Specifies additional nonlinear properties for elements that point to a PBEAM or
PBEAML entry.
PBEND Defines the properties of a curved beam, curved pipe, or elbow element (CBEND entry).
PFAST Defines the CFAST fastener property values.
PBMSECT Defines the shape of arbitrary cross-section for CBEAM element.
PBRSECT Defines the shape of arbitrary cross-section for CBAR element.
PBUSH1D Defines linear and nonlinear properties of a one-dimensional spring and damper element
(CBUSH1D entry).
PBUSH2D Defines linear and nonlinear properties of a two-dimensional element (CBUSH2D
entry).
PMREBAI Defines Rebar property information for CMREBAI elements. (SOL 600)
PMREBAR Defines Rebar property information for CMREBAR elements. (SOL 600)
PROD Defines the properties of a rod element (CROD entry).
Main Index
PRODN1 Defines nonlinear property extensions for the PROD in SOL 400.
PTUBE Defines the properties of a thin-walled cylindrical tube element (CTUBE entry).
PWELD Defines the properties of connector (CWELD) elements.
Mass Elements
CMASSi Connection definition for scalar mass, also property definition for i=2 or 4.
CONM1 Defines a 6 x 6 symmetric mass matrix at a geometric grid point.
CONM2 Defines concentrated mass at a grid point.
PMASS Specifies the mass value of a scalar mass element (CMASS1 or CMASS3 entries).
NSM Non Structural Mass by ID.
NSM1 Non Structural Mass (alternate form).
NSMADD Non Structural Mass Set Combination.
NSML Lumped Non Structural Mass by ID.
NSML1 Lumped Non Structural Mass (alternate form).
p-element Interface Elements

GMINTC Defines a p-interface element along a curve.
GMINTS Defines a p-interface element along a surface.
PINTC Property definition for GMINTC.
PINTS Property definition for GMINTS.
Rigid Elements
RBAR Defines a rigid bar with six degrees-of-freedom at each end.
RBAR1 Alternative format for RBAR.
RBE1 Defines a rigid body connected to an arbitrary number of grid points.
RBE2 Defines a rigid body with independent degrees-of-freedom that are specified at a single
grid point and with dependent degrees-of-freedom that are specified at an arbitrary
number of grid points.
RBE3 Defines the motion at a reference grid point as the weighted average of the motions at a
set of other grid points.
RJOINT Defines a rigid joint element connecting two coinciding grid points.
RROD Defines a pin-ended element that is rigid in translation.
RSPLINE Defines multipoint constraints for the interpolation of displacements at grid points.
RSSCON Defines multipoint constraints to model clamped connections of shell-to-solid elements.
Main Index
RTRPLT Defines a rigid triangular plate.

RTRPLT1 Defines a rigid triangular plate (alternate).
Scalar and Bushing Elements

CBUSH Defines a generalized spring-and-damper structural element that may be nonlinear or
frequency dependent.
CBUSH1D Defines the connectivity of a one-dimensional spring and viscous damper element.
CBUSH2D Defines the connectivity of a two-dimensional Linear-Nonlinear element.
CELASi Connection definition for scalar spring, also property definition for i=2 or 4.
GENEL Defines a general element.
MGRSPR Defines grids to add soft spring to ground. (SOL 600)
PBUSH Defines the nominal property values for a generalized spring-and-damper structural
element.
PBUSHT Defines the frequency dependent properties or the stress dependent properties for a
generalized spring and damper structural element.
PBUSH1D Defines linear and nonlinear properties of a one-dimensional spring and damper element
(CBUSH1D entry).
PELAS Specifies the stiffness, damping coefficient, and stress coefficient of a scalar elastic (spring)
element (CELAS1 or CELAS3 entry).
PELAST Defines the frequency dependent properties for a PELAS Bulk Data entry.
Solid Elements
CHEXA Defines the connections of the six-sided solid element with eight to twenty grid points.
CPENTA Defines the connections of a five-sided solid element with six to fifteen grid points.
CTETRA Defines the connections of the four-sided solid element with four to ten grid points.
PCOMPLS Defines the linear/nonlinear properties of an n-ply composite material laminate for a
layered solid (CHEXA) element in SOL 400.
PLSOLID Defines a fully nonlinear (i.e., large strain and large rotation) hyperelastic solid element.
PSLDN1 Defines the nonlinear property extensions for a PSOLID entry in SOL 400.
PSOLID Defines the properties of solid elements (CHEXA, CPENTA, and CTETRA entries).
Surface Elements
CQUAD Defines a plane strain quadrilateral element with up to nine grid points for use in fully
nonlinear (i.e., large strain and large rotation) hyperelastic analysis.
CQUAD4 Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending or plane strain quadrilateral plate element.
CQUAD8 Defines a curved quadrilateral shell or plane strain element with eight grid points.
Main Index
CQUADR Defines an isoparametric membrane and bending quadrilateral plate element.

CSHEAR Defines the properties of a shear panel (CSHEAR entry).
CTRIA3 Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending or plane strain triangular plate element.
CTRIA6 Defines a curved triangular shell element or plane strain with six grid points.
CTRIAR Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending triangular plate element. However, this
element does not include membrane-bending coupling. It is a companion to the
CQUADR element.
PCOMP Defines the properties of an n-ply composite material laminate.
PCOMPF Defines the integration procedure for through the thickness integration of composite
shells. (SOLs 400/600 only)
PCOMPG Defines global (external) ply IDs and properties for a composite material laminate.
PLCOMP Defines the linear/nonlinear properties of an n-ply composite material laminate of a plane
stress, plane strain, or axisymmetric (CQUAD or CQUADX entry) element in SOL 400.
PLPLANE Defines the properties of a fully nonlinear (i.e., large strain and large rotation) hyperelastic
plane strain or axisymmetric element.
PSHELL Defines the membrane, bending, transverse shear, and coupling properties of thin shell
elements.
PSHLN1 Defines nonlinear property extensions for a PSHELL or PCOMP or PCOMPG entry in
SOL 400.
PSHLN2 Defines nonlinear property extensions for a PLPLANE entry in SOL 400.
PSHEAR Defines the properties of a shear panel (CSHEAR entry).
PSHEARN Defines nonlinear property extensions for a PSHEAR in SOL 400.
SNORM Defines a surface normal vector at a grid point for CQUAD4, CQUADR, CTRIA3, and
CTRIAR shell elements.
Geometry
Adaptive Meshing
HADACRI Specifies Mesh adaptivity criterion and corresponding parameters.
HADAPTL Specifies local adaptive Mesh refinement control parameters.
Axisymmetry
AXIC Defines the existence of an axisymmetric conical shell problem.
AXIF Defines basic parameters and the existence of an axisymmetric fluid analysis.
AXSLOT Defines the harmonic index and the default values for acoustic analysis entries.
Main Index
FLSYM Defines the relationship between the axisymmetric fluid and a structural boundary having
symmetric constraints. The purpose is to allow fluid boundary matrices to conform to
structural symmetry definitions.
POINTAX Defines the location of a point on an axisymmetric shell ring at which loads may be applied
via the FORCE or MOMENT entries and at which displacements may be requested. These
points are not subject to constraints via MPCAX, SPCAX, or OMITAX entries.
RINGAX Defines a ring for conical shell problem.
SECTAX Defines a sector of a conical shell.
Coordinate Systems
BAROR Defines default values for field 3 and fields 6 through 8 of the CBAR entry.
BEAMOR Defines default values for field 3 and fields 6 through 8 of the CBEAM entry.
CORD1C Cylindrical coordinate system definition.
CORD1R Rectangular coordinate system definition.
CORD1S Spherical coordinate system definition.
CORD3G Defines a general coordinate system using three rotational angles as functions of coordinate
values in the reference coordinate system.
Cyclic Symmetry
CYAX Lists grid points that lie on the axis of symmetry in cyclic symmetry analysis.
CYJOIN Defines the boundary points of a segment in cyclic symmetry problems.
NLCYSYM Defines information to perform nonlinear cyclic symmtry analysis using SOL 600
Fluid Points
ACMODL Defines modeling parameters for the Fluid-Structure Interface.
FREEPT Defines the location of points on the surface of a fluid for recovery of surface displacements
in a gravity field.
FSLIST Defines the fluid points (RINGFL entry) that lie on a free surface boundary.
GRID Defines fluid points in coupled fluid-structural analysis.
GRIDB Grid point location on RINGFL.
GRIDF Defines a scalar degree-of-freedom for harmonic analysis of a fluid.
GRIDS Defines a scalar degree-of-freedom with a two-dimensional location. Used in defining
pressure in slotted acoustic cavities.
PRESPT Defines the location of pressure points in the fluid for recovery of pressure data.
Main Index
RINGFL Defines a circle (fluid point) in an axisymmetric fluid model.

SLBDY Defines a list of slot points that lie on an interface between an axisymmetric fluid and a set
of evenly spaced radial slots.
Grid Points
AEGRID Defines the location of an aerodynamic grid point.
GRID Defines the location of a geometric grid point, the directions of its displacement, and its
permanent single-point constraints.
GRIDB Defines the location of a geometric grid point on a fluid point (RINGFL entry) for an
axisymmetric fluid model and/or axisymmetric structure. Also defines the boundary of the
fluid.
GRDSET Defines default options for fields 3, 7, 8, and 9 of all GRID entries.
SEQGP Used to manually order the grid points and scalar points of the problem. This entry is used
to redefine the sequence of grid and scalar points to optimize bandwidth.
p-Element and p-Adaptivity Analysis

FEEDGE Defines a finite element edge and associates it with a curve.
FEFACE Defines geometric information that will be used in elements, surface definition, load
definition, and boundary condition definition.
GMBNDC Defines a geometric boundary consisting of p-element edges along a curve interface. The
boundary may consist of edges of shell, beam, or p-solid elements.
GMBNDS Defines a geometric boundary consisting of p-element faces along a surface interface. The
boundary may consist of faces of p-solid or p-shell elements.
GMCORD Defines a convective/follower coordinate system on an FEEDGE, GMCURV, FEFACE, or
GMSURF entry.
GMCURV Defines geometric curve that will be used in element geometry, load definition, and
boundary condition definition.
GMINTC Defines curve interface elements to connect dissimilar meshes.
GMINTS Defines an interface element along a surface interface between boundaries of multiple
subdomains.
GMSURF Defines geometric information that will be used in elements, surface definition, load
definition, and boundary condition definition.
PINTC Defines properties for curve interface elements (see GMINTC).
PINTS Defines the properties for interface elements along surface interfaces between boundaries of
multiple subdomains of p-elements.
POINT Define edge point for FEEDGE entry.
Main Index
Scalar Points
EPOINT Defines extra points for use in dynamic problems.
SEQGP Grid and scalar point number resequencing.
SPOINT Defines scalar points.
Superelement Analysis
CSUPER Defines the grid or scalar point connections for identical or mirror image superelements or
superelements from an external source. These are all known as secondary superelements.
CSUPEXT Assigns exterior points to a superelement.
EXTRN Defines a boundary connection for an external superelement.
GRID Defines interior points for a superelement.
RELEASE Defines degrees-of-freedom for superelement exterior grid points that are not connected to
the superelement.
SEBNDRY Defines a list of grid points in a partitioned superelement for the automatic boundary search
between a specified superelement or between all other superelements in the model.
SEBULK Defines superelement boundary search options and a repeated, mirrored, or collector
superelement.
SECONCT Explicitly defines grid and scalar point connection procedures for a partitioned
superelement.
SEDLINK Relates one design variable of a PART SE to one or more other design variables from other
PART SEs.
SEDRSP2 Defines equation responses that are used in the design, either as constraints or as an
objective with quantities from multiple PART SEs.
SEDRSP3 Defines constituents from multiple PART SE for an external response using user-supplied
routine(s).
SEELT Reassigns superelement boundary elements to an upstream superelement.
SEEXCLD Defines grid points that will be excluded during the attachment of a partitioned
superelement.
SELABEL Defines a label or name to be printed in the superelement output headings.
SELOC Defines a partitioned superelement relocation by listing three noncolinear points in the
superelement and three corresponding points not belonging to the superelement.
SEMPLN Defines a mirror plane for mirroring a partitioned superelement.
SEQSEP Used with the CSUPER entry to define the correspondence of the exterior grid points
between an identical or mirror-image superelement and its primary superelement.
SESET Defines interior grid points for a superelement.
SETREE Specifies superelement reduction order.
Main Index
Module Analysis
EXCLUDE Specifies Bulk Data entries in the primary Module to be ignored in the secondary (or
copied) Module.
MDBCNCT Defines the Touching and Touched Contact Bodies in Different Modules.
MDBCTB1 Defines a Contact Table for Bodies in Different Modules.
MDBNDRY Module to Module Boundary Point Definitions.
MDBOLT Defines the Multi-Point Constraints for a Bolt Between Two Modules.
MDBULK Module Type Definitions.
MDCONCT Module Boundary Point Connections.
MDDMIG Direct Matrix Input at Points Defined in Two or More Modules.
MDEXCLD Module to Module Excluded Boundary Point Definitions.
MDFAST A Shell Patch Fastener Connection Between Two Modules.
MDLABEL Module Output Label.
MDLOC Module Reposition by Translation and/or Rotation.
MDMIR1 Defines a Module mirror by three non-collinear points on the mirror plane.
MDMIR2 Defines a Module mirror by specifying a pair of coordinate system axes on the mirror
plane.
MDMOVE Defines a Module repositioning sequence. References MDMIRi, MDROTi, and
MDTRAN entries.
MDMPC Multipoint Constraint Between Two or More Modules.
MDMPLN Module Reposition by Mirroring.
MDRBE3 Rigid Body Element Between Two or More Modules, Form 2.
MDRBE3 Interpolation Constraint Element Between Two or More Modules.
MDRJNT Rigid Joint Between Two Modules.
MDROT1 Defines a Module rotation by specifying a rotation vector and reference point.
MDROT2 Defines a Module rotation by specifying a coordinate system axis for the rotation vector.
MDRROD Rigid Pin-Ended Element Connection Between Two Modules.
MDSEAM A Shell Patch SEAM Connection Between Two Modules.
MDTRAN Defines a Module translation by specifying a vector.
MDWELD Weld or Fastener Element Connection Between Two Modules.
Loads
Dynamic Loads
Main Index
ACSRCE Defines acoustic source as a function of power vs. frequency.

DAREA Defines scale (area) factors for static and dynamic loads. In dynamic analysis, DAREA
is used in conjunction with RLOADi and TLOADi entries.
DELAY Defines the time delay term τ in the equations of the dynamic loading function.
DLOAD Defines a dynamic loading condition for frequency response or transient response
problems as a linear combination of load sets defined via RLOAD1 or RLOAD2 entries
for frequency response or TLOAD1 or TLOAD2 entries for transient response.
DPHASE Defines the phase lead term θ in the equation of the dynamic loading function.
LOADCYH Defines the harmonic coefficients of a static or dynamic load for use in cyclic symmetry
analysis.
LOADCYN Defines a physical static or dynamic load for use in cyclic symmetry analysis.
LSEQ Defines a sequence of static load sets.
NOLIN1 Nonlinear transient load definition.
NLRGAP Defines a nonlinear transient radial (circular) gap.
RBE3U Defines methods to distribute applied loads to a surface. (SOL 600)
RLOAD1 Frequency dependent excitation definition.
TABLED1 Tabular functions for generating dynamic loads.
TLOAD1 Time dependent excitation definition.
Heat Transfer Loads

CONV Specifies a free convection boundary condition for heat transfer analysis through
connection to a surface element (CHBDYi entry).
CONVM Specifies a forced convection boundary condition for heat transfer analysis through
connection to a surface element (CHBDYi entry).
PCONV Specifies the free convection boundary condition properties of a boundary condition
surface element used for heat transfer analysis.
PCONVM Specifies the forced convection boundary condition properties of a boundary condition
surface element used for heat transfer analysis.
QBDY1 Defines a uniform heat flux into CHBDYj elements.
QBDY2 Defines grid point heat flux into CHBDYj elements.
QBDY3 Defines a uniform heat flux load for a boundary surface.
QHBDY Defines a uniform heat flux into a set of grid points.
QVECT Defines thermal vector flux from a distant source into a face of one or more CHBDYi
boundary condition surface elements.
QVOL Defines a rate of volumetric heat addition in a conduction element.
RADBC Specifies an CHBDYi element face for application of radiation boundary conditions.
Main Index
RADBND Specifies Planck’s second radiation constant and the wavelength breakpoints used for
radiation exchange problems.
RADCAV Identifies the characteristics of each radiant enclosure.
RADLST Identifies the individual CHBDYi surface elements that comprise the entire radiation
enclosure.
RADMTX Provides the F ji = A j f ji exchange factors for all the faces of a radiation enclosure
specified in the corresponding RADLST entry.
RADSET Specifies which radiation cavities are to be included for radiation enclosure analysis.
SLOAD Defines concentrated static loads on scalar or grid points.
SLOADN1 Describes TOP/BOT/MID Scalar Load for Heat Shell Element in SOL 400
TEMP Defines temperature at grid points for determination of thermal loading,
temperature-dependent material properties, or stress recovery.
TEMPB3 Defines a temperature field for the three-node beam element (CBEAM3 entry).
TEMPBC Defines the temperature boundary conditions for heat transfer analysis. Applies to
steady-state and transient conditions.
TEMPD Specifies default initial temperature at grid points.
TEMPN1 TOP/BOT/MID Grid Point Temperature Field for Heat Shell Element in SOL 400
VIEW Defines radiation cavity and shadowing for radiation view factor calculations.
VIEW3D Defines parameters to control and/or request the Gaussian Integration method of view
factor calculation for a specified cavity.
p-element Loads
GMBC Defines enforced displacements for GRID, FEEDGE, GMCURV, FEFACE, and
GMSURF entries.
GMCONV Defines convection boundary conditions.
GMLOAD Defines the forces and moments to be applied to a FEEDGE, GMCURV, FEFACE, or
GMSURF entry.
GMQVOL Defines volumetric heat loads.
TEMPF Defines the thermal loading to be applied to a group of elements.
Static Loads
ACCEL Defines static acceleration loads, which may vary over a region of the structural model.
The load variation is based upon the tabular input defined on this Bulk Data entry.
ACCEL1 Defines static acceleration loads at individual GRID points.
CLOAD Defines a static load as a linear combination of previously calculated superelement loads
defined by the LSEQ entry in nonlinear static analysis (SOL 106 or 153).
Main Index
DEFORM Defines enforced axial deformation for one-dimensional elements for use in statics
problems.
FORCE Defines a static concentrated force at a grid point by specifying a vector.
FORCE1 Defines a static concentrated force at a grid point by specification of a magnitude and
two grid points that determine the direction.
FORCE2 Defines a static concentrated force at a grid point by specification of a magnitude and
four grid points that determine the direction.
FORCEAX Defines a concentrated force on a conical shell ring.
FORCEi Defines concentrated load at grid point.
GRAV Defines acceleration vectors for gravity or other acceleration loading.
GRIDA Defines an associative GRID point to be used in the COMBINE step of PAA.
LOAD Defines a static load as a linear combination of load sets defined via FORCE,
MOMENT, FORCE1, MOMENT1, FORCE2, MOMENT2, PLOAD, PLOAD1,
PLOAD2, PLOAD4, PLOADB3, PLOADX1, SLOAD, RFORCE, and GRAV,
ACCEL and ACCEL1 entries.
LOADCLID Defines a loading combination in PAA using the Load ID from SUBCASEs of the Parts
LOADCNAM Used only in PAA to define a loading combination using the LOADNAMEs used in
Case Control for Parts
LOADCSUB Defines a loading combination in PAA using the SUBCASE IDs from the Parts
LOADCYH Defines the harmonic coefficients of a static or dynamic load for use in cyclic symmetry
analysis.
LOADCYN Defines a physical static or dynamic load for use in cyclic symmetry analysis.
LOADCYT Specifies loads as a function of azimuth angle by references to tables that define scale
factors of loads versus azimuth angles. This entry is used only when STYPE = “AXI” on
the CYSYM entry.
LOADOF Specifies table IDs for individual degrees of freedom for the static loads with tables
described using LOADT entries for SOL 600 only.
LOADT Specifies static loads that will use a table to describe their variation with pseudo-time.
LSEQ Defines a sequence of static load sets.
MOMAX Defines a static concentrated moment load on a ring of a conical shell.
MOMENT Defines a static concentrated moment at a grid point by specifying a scale factor and a
vector that determines the direction.
MOMENTi Defines moment at grid point.
PLOAD Defines a uniform static pressure load on a triangular or quadrilateral surface comprised
of surface elements and/or the faces of solid elements.
PLOAD1 Defines concentrated, uniformly distributed, or linearly distributed applied loads to the
CBAR or CBEAM elements at user-chosen points along the axis. For the CBEND
element, only distributed loads over an entire length may be defined.
Main Index
PLOAD2 Defines a uniform static pressure load applied to CQUAD4, CSHEAR, or CTRIA3
two-dimensional elements.
PLOAD4 Defines a pressure load on a face of a CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA, CTRIA3,
CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, or CQUADR element.
PLOADB3 Defines a distributed load to a CBEAM3 element over entire length of the beam axis.
PLOADX1 Defines surface traction to be used with the CQUADX, CTRIAX, and CTRIAX6
axisymmetric element.
PRESAX Defines the static pressure loading on a conical shell element.
RBE3U Defines methods to distribute applied loads to a surface. (SOL 600)
RFORCE Defines a static loading condition due to an angular velocity and/or acceleration.
SLOAD Defines concentrated static loads on scalar or grid points.
SPCD Defines an enforced displacement value for static analysis and an enforced motion value
(displacement, velocity or acceleration) in dynamic analysis.
SPCR Defines an enforced relative displacement value for a load step in SOL 400.
TEMPD Defines a temperature value for all grid points of the structural model that have not
been given a temperature on a TEMP entry.
TEMPP1 Defines temperature field for surface elements.
TEMPRB Defines a temperature field for the CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND, CROD, CTUBE, and
CONROD elements for determination of thermal loading, temperature-dependent
material properties, or stress recovery.
TEMPAX Defines temperature sets for conical shell problems.
Materials
Anisotropic
MAT2 Defines the material properties for linear anisotropic materials for two-dimensional
elements.
MAT3 Defines the material properties for linear orthotropic materials used by the CTRIAX6
element entry. It also is allowed with orthotropic materials on the PSHLN2 and
PLCOMP entries.
MAT5 Defines the thermal material properties for anisotropic materials.
MAT8 Defines the material property for an orthotropic material for isoparametric shell
elements.
Main Index
MAT9 Defines the material properties for linear, temperature-independent, anisotropic

materials for solid isoparametric elements (see PSOLID entry description).
MATORT Define elastic 3D Orthotropic Material (SOL 400, 600)
Fatigue
MATFTG Defines cyclic material properties (S-N + ε -N) for use in fatigue analysis.
Fluid
AXIF Includes default values for mass density and bulk modulus.
AXSLOT Includes default values for mass density and bulk modulus.
CFLUIDi Includes mass density and bulk modulus.
FSLIST Includes mass density at free surface.
MAT10 Defines material properties for fluid elements in coupled fluid-structural analysis.
MFLUID Defines the properties of an incompressible fluid volume for the purpose of generating a
virtual mass matrix.
SLBDY Includes mass density at interface between fluid and radial slots.
Isotropic
MATBV Defines the material properties for linear isotropic materials.
MAT4 Defines the constant or temperature-dependent thermal material properties for
conductivity, heat capacity, density, dynamic viscosity, heat generation, reference
enthalpy, and latent heat associated with a single-phase change.
MATHP Specifies material properties for use in fully nonlinear (i.e., large strain and large rotation)
hyperelastic analysis of rubber-like materials (elastomers).
RADM Defines the radiation properties of a boundary element for heat transfer analysis.
Stress Dependent
CREEP Defines creep characteristics based on experimental data or known empirical creep law.
MATS1 Specifies stress-dependent material properties for use in applications involving nonlinear
materials.
NLMOPTS Defines nonlinear material option control for SOL 400.
TABLES1 Defines a tabular function for stress-dependent material properties such as the
stress-strain curve (MATS1 entry), creep parameters (CREEP entry) and hyperelastic
material parameters (MATHP entry).
Main Index
Temperature Dependent
MATTi Table references for temperature-dependent MATi materials.
RADMT Specifies table references for temperature dependent RADM entry radiation boundary
properties.
TABLEM1 Tabular functions for generating temperature-dependent material properties.
TABLEST Table references for temperature dependent MATS1 materials.
TEMPAX Defines temperature sets for conical shell problems.
TEMPD Defines a temperature value for all grid points of the structural model that have not been
given a temperature on a TEMP entry.
TEMPP1 Defines temperature field for surface elements.
TEMPRB Defines a temperature field for the CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND, CROD, CTUBE, and
CONROD elements for determination of thermal loading, temperature-dependent
material properties, or stress recovery.
Miscellaneous
Brake Squeal (SOL 400)
BSQUEAL Specifies data for brake squeal analysis using Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400).
Comments
$ Used to insert comments into the input file. Comment statements may appear anywhere
within the input file.
Delete
/ Control Input Stream
Direct Matrix Input

CONM1 Defines a 6x6 mass matrix at a geometric grid point.
DMI Defines matrix data blocks.
DMIG Defines direct input matrices related to grid, extra, and/or scalar points.
DMIG,UACCEL Defines rigid body accelerations in the basic coordinate system.
DMIAX Defines axisymmetric (fluid or structure) related direct input matrix terms.
TF Defines a dynamic transfer function.
Main Index
Direct Matrix Input for Aeroelasticity

DMIJ Defines direct input matrices related to collation degrees-of-freedom (js-set) of
aerodynamic mesh points for CAERO1, CAERO3, CAERO4 and CAERO5 and for
the slender body elements of CAERO2. These include W2GJ, FA2J and input
pressures and downwashes associated with AEPRESS and AEDW entries.
DMIJI Defines direct input matrices related to collation degrees-of-freedom (js-set) of
aerodynamic mesh points for the interference elements of CAERO2.
DMIK Defines direct input matrices related to physical (displacement) degrees-of-freedom
(ks-set) of aerodynamic grid points.
End of Input
ENDDATA Designates the end of the Bulk Data Section.
Include File
INCLUDE Inserts an external file into the input file. The INCLUDE statement may appear
anywhere within the input data file.
VCCT Virtual Crack Closure Technique - SOL 400, SOL 600
LORENZI Contour Integral Approach for stress intensity calculation - SOL 600
Materials (SOLs 400/600)

COHESIV Defines data for cohesive materials. (SOL 600)
MATDIGI e-XstreamDigimat material interface (SOL 400)
MATEP Elasto-plastic material properties.
MATF Specifies material failure model.
MATG Gasket material properties.
MATHE Hyperelastic material properties.
MATHED Damage model properties for hyperelastic materials. (SOL 600)
MATNLE The MATNLEx entries specify advanced forms of nonlinear elastic materials. (SOL 600)
MATORT Elastic 3D orthotropic material properties.
MATTEP Thermoelastic-Plastic material properties.
MATTF Material Failure Model Temperature Variation
MATTG Temperature variation of interlaminar materials.
MATTHE Thermo hyperelastic material.
MATTORT Thermoelastic orthotropic material
MATS3 Specifies NLELAST option for advanced orthotropic, nonlinear elastic materials at
axisymmetric conditions. SOL 400 only.
Main Index
MATS8 Specifies NLELAST option for advanced orthotropic, nonlinear elastic material for
plane stress and shell elements SOL 400 only.
MATSMA Material properties for shape memory alloys.
MATSORT Specifies NLELAST option for advanced 3D orthotropic, nonlinear elastic materials.
SOL 400)
MATTVE Thermo-visco-elastic material properties
MATVE Viscoelastic material properties
MATVP Viscoplastic or creep material properties
MCOHE Cohesive materials (SOL 400)
MDELAM Defines materials for which delamination may occur.
Non-Structural Mass Distribution Selection

NSM Non Structural Mass entry by id,value.
NSM1 Non Structural Mass entry by value,id.
NSMADD Non Structural Mass as sum of listed sets.
NSML Lumped non structural mass entry by id,value.
NSML1 Lumped non structural mass entry by value,id.
OpenFSI (SOL 400)

FSICTRL Defines the analysis type for OpenFSI fluid structure analysis simulations.
WETELME Defines a wetted element used in OpenFSI fluid structure interaction simulations.
WETELMG Defines a wetted element used in OpenFSI fluid structure interaction simulations.
WETLOAD Defines the load set and associated wetted surface for OpenFSI fluid structure
interaction simulations.
WETSURF Defines a wetted surface used in OpenFSI fluid structure interaction simulations.
Output Control
BOUTPUT Defines slave nodes at which output is requested.
CBARAO Defines a series of points along the axis of a bar element (CBAR entry) for stress and
force recovery output.
ECHOOFF Marks the point or points in the input file to deactivate printed echo of the Bulk Data.
ECHOON Marks the point or points in the input file to activate printed echo of the Bulk Data.
FREEPT Surface point location for data recovery in hydroelastic problems.
MARPRN Defines “print” options for SOL 600.
MLAYOUT Selects layered composite shell output to be placed in Marc’s t16 and/or t19 files and
(if requested) to be transferred from Marc to the Nastran Database. (SOL 600)
Main Index
PLOTEL Defines a one-dimensional dummy element for use in plotting.

POINTAX Defines the location of a point on an axisymmetric shell ring at which loads may be
applied via the FORCE or MOMENT entries and at which displacements may be
requested.
PRESPT Defines the location of pressure points in the fluid for recovery of pressure data in
hydroelastic problems.
SET1 Defines a set of grid points.
TSTEP Specifies time step intervals for data recovery in transient response.
TSTEPNL Specifies time step intervals for data recovery in nonlinear transient response.
Monitor Points
AECOMP Defines a component for use in aeroelastic monitor point definition or external splines.
AECOMPL Defines a component for use in aeroelastic monitor point definition or external splines as a
union of other components.
MONPNT1 Defines an integrated load monitor point at a point (x,y,z) in a user defined coordinate
system.
MONPNT2 Element Monitor Output Results Item.
MONPNT3 Sums select Grid Point Forces to a user chosen monitor point.
MONCNC Stripwise aerodynamic lift and pitching moment coefficients.
M
MONSUM Linear combination of monitor point components.
MONSUM1 Linear combination of two or more monitor points.
MONSUMT Linear combination of two or more monitor points with moment transfer.
p-element Output Control

OUTPUT Output control for p-adaptive analysis.
OUTRCV Defines options for the output of displacements, stresses, and strains of p-elements.
Parameters
CAMPBLL Specifies the parameters for Campbell diagram generation.
PARAM Specifies values for parameters used in solution sequences or user-written DMAP
programs.
MDLPRM Specifies parameters which affect the solution of the structural model.
Main Index
Solution Control
ITER Defines options for the iterative solver in SOLs 101, 106, 108, 111 and 153.
RVDOF Degrees-of-freedom specification for residual vector computations.
RVDOF1 Degrees-of-freedom specification for residual vector computations (alternate form).
Tabular Input
DTI Defines table data blocks.
DTI,ESTDATA Provides override data for time and space estimation for superelement processing
operations.
DTI,INDTA Specifies or overrides default item codes for the sorting and filtering of element stresses,
strains, and forces.
DTI,SETREE Defines a superelement tree that determines the superelement processing order.
DTI,SPECSEL Correlates spectra lines specified on TABLED1 entries with damping values.
DTI,SPSEL Correlates output requests with frequency and damping ranges.
DTI,UNITS Define model units for non-unitless operations.
TABDMP1 Defines modal damping as a tabular function of natural frequency.
TABLED1 Tabular functions for generating dynamic loads.
TABLEL1 Specifies a table of amplitude vs pseudo-time for static loads specified in LDTABL
entries SOL 600 only.
TABLEM1 Tabular functions for generating temperature-dependent material properties.
TABLES1 Defines a tabular function for stress-dependent material properties such as the
stress-strain curve (MATS1 entry), creep parameters (CREEP entry) and hyperelastic
material parameters (MATHP entry).
TABL3D Specifies a table where an entry can be a function of up to 4 variables such as strain,
temperature, strain rate, etc. (SOLs 400/600)
TABLE3D Specify a function of three variables for the GMBC, GMLOAD, and TEMPF entries
only.
TABLFTG Defines cyclic load variation for use in fatigue analysis.
TABRND1 Defines power spectral density as a tabular function of frequency for use in random
analysis. Referenced by the RANDPS entry.
3D Contact Region
BCBMRAD Allows the equivalent radius in beam-to-beam contact to be different for each beam cross
section. (SOLs 400/600)
BCBOX Defines a 3D contact region.
BCHANGE Changes definitions of contact bodies.
BCMATL Defines a 3D contact region by element material.
Main Index
BCMOVE Defines movement of bodies in contact.

BCPARA Defines contact parameters.
BCPROP Defines a 3D contact region by element properties.
BSURF Defines a contact body or surface by element IDs.
GMNURB 3D contact region made up of NURBS.
Old Contact Format
BCTABLE Defines a contact table.
BCBODY Defines a flexible rigid contact body in 2D or 3D.
New Contact Format
BCTABL1 Defines a contact table.
BCONECT Defines the Touching and Touched Contact Bodies
BCONPRG Geometric Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies
BCONPRP Physical Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOL 101 and 400
BCBODY1 Flexible or Rigid Contact Body in 2D and 3D
BCBDPRP Contact Body Parameters in SOLs 101 and 400
BCRIGID Defines a Rigid Contact Body in SOLs 101 and 400
BCRGSRF Rigid Contact Surface List in SOLs 101 and 400
BCPATCH Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of Quadrilateral Patches in SOLs 101 and 400
BCBZIER Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of Bezier Surfaces in SOLs 101 and 400
BCNURB2 Defines a 2D Rigid Contact Body Made up of NURBS in SOLs 101 and 400
BCNURBS Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of NURBS in SOLs 101 and 400
BCTRIM Defines the Geometry of a Trimming Curve
User-Defined Subroutines and Services

BCONUDS Allows the user to provide contact routines for use with enhanced MSC Nastran contact
analysis. (SOL 600 and SOL 400)
GENUDS User Data for Notify User Defined Service or Subroutine
MATUDS Allows the user to provide material routines for use with enhanced MSC Nastran
material models. (SOL 600 and SOL 400)
MATTUSR Specifies table variation of user defined generic materials in SOL 600 and SOL 400 only.
MATUSR Specifies user-defined, generic material properties for hypoelastic material models in
SOL 600 and user defined material models in SOL 400 only.
UDSESV Define the number and names of user state variables for material user subroutines (SOL
400)
Main Index
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)

3D Contact Region (SOL 600)
BCBMRAD Allows the equivalent radius in beam-to-beam contact to be different for each beam cross
section. (SOL 600)
SANGLE Defines automatic analytical contact threshold angle for multiple subcases.
UNGLUE Defines grids that should be eliminated from glued contact for SOL 600 and SOL 400.
WEAR Specifies values for modeling mechanical wear in deformable contact bodies for SOL 600
only.
Analysis Termination Options (SOL 600)

TERMIN Control to terminate a SOL 600 analysis under certain conditions
Bolts (SOL 600)

MBOLT Defines a bolt for use in countries outside the USA.
MBOLTUS Defines a bolt for use in the USA and all other countries.
Brake Squeal (SOL 600)

BRKSQL Specifies data for brake squeal calculations using SOL 600.
Composite Integration Options (SOL 600)

MIXTURE Defines constituents of “composite” material on original and potentionally damaged
state.
PCOMPF Defines the integration procedure for through the thickness integration of composite
shells.
Creep Analysis (SOL 600)

MACREEP Controls a transient creep analysis.
MPCREEP Specifies input values for Marc’s creep parameter when creep analysis is performed using
SOL 600.
MTCREEP Controls a transient thermal creep analysis. This entry or the MACREEP entry is
required if ITYPE is not zero on the MPCREEP entry.
Element Birth and Death (SOL 600)

ACTIVAT This entry allows the user to re-activate certain elements that were previously deactivated
in a previous subcase.
DEACTEL This entry allows the user to deactivate elements that have failed or are no longer
necessary in a particular subcase.
Main Index
Elements (SOL 600)

ALIASM Allows selected elements which normally use a default formulation to be aliased to a
different formulation.
CSSHL Defines a connection for a Solid Shell with 6 or 8 grid points.
CSSHLH Defines conversion of CHEXA elements to Solid Shell elements.
CSSHLM Defines conversion of CHEXA or CPENTA elements described by material ID to Solid
Shell elements.
CSSHLP Defines conversion of CPENTA elements to Solid Shell elements.
MISLAND Defines an island of connected elements that will be completely removed if the number
of elements within the island becomes smaller than a specified value.
Element Properties (SOL 600)

NTHICK Defines nodal thickness values for beams, plates, and/or shells.
PSSHL Defines the properties for Solid Shell (CSSHL) elements.
Fatigue, Fracture and Crack Propagation (SOL 600)

LORENZI This option gives an estimation of the J-Integral for a crack configuration using the
domain integration method.
VCCT Virtual crack closure technique
General Tables (SOL 600)

MTABRV Defines a list of tables to reverse positive and negative values and/or add points at the
lower and upper end of tables.
TABD1MD Defines how TABLED1 entries are internally modified in SOL 600.
TABL3D Specifies a table where an entry can be a function of up to 4 variables such as strain,
temperature, strain rate, etc.
Heat Transfer (SOL 600)

MPHEAT Maps to Marc’s HEAT parameter for SOL 600 heat transfer analysis.
MTHERM Iteration control for automatic thermal loading for structural analysis following a heat
transfer analysis.
NLHEATC Defines numerical analysis parameters for SOL 600 heat transfer analysis
Inertia Relief (SOL 600)

SUPORT6 Inertia relief used in Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600 only).
Main Index
Initial Conditions (SOL 600)

IPSTRN Defines initial plastic strain values.
ISTRESS Defines initial stress values.
Input/Output (SOL 600)

MARCIN Inserts a text string in Marc.
MARCOUT Selects data recovery output.
Matrix Input/Output (SOL 600)

DMIGOUT Defines DMIG matrices to be output from the Marc Portion of SOL 600.
DMIGROT Defines large rotation and other characteristics of a matrix entered using DMIG..
MDMIAUX Specifies the DOMAINSOLVER command to be used in conjunction with secondary
spawned jobs when MDMIOUT is used. SOL 600 only.
MDMIOUT Defines full or reduced stiffness and mass matrices to be output from the Marc portion
of SOL 600.
MESUPER Defines external superelement DMIG input for SOL 600 residual analyses
MNF600 Defines auxiliary data for MSC Adams MNF files.
Solid Composites (SOL 600)

MSTACK Defines the direction in which 3D solid composites are stacked.
Solution Control (SOL 600)

MPROCS Provides additional control for parallel processing
NLAUTO Parameters for automatic load/time stepping.
NLHEATC Defines damping constants.
NLSTRAT Strategy parameters for nonlinear structural analysis.
PARAMARC Parallel domain decomposition.
RESTART Restart data.
Structural Analysis Following a Heat Transfer Analysis (SOL 600)

MINSTAT This option is used to enter initial (stress free) temperatures calculated from a previous
heat transfer analysis and saved on a t16 or t19 file.
Main Index
t16 Output Control (SOL 600)

MT16SEL Limits elements and/or grid results to selected elements or grids for t16 and t19 file
results.
MT16SPL Determines how to split a Marc t16 file into one or more smaller t16 files.
User Subroutine Control (SOL 600)

USRSUB6 Defines user subroutines used in SOL 600 only.
Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)

Air Bags (SOL 700)
GBAG Defines the pressure within an enclosed volume.
ATB Models (SOL 700)

ATBACC Defines an acceleration field that will be applied to ATB segments.
ATBJNT This entry can only be used together with the ATBSEG entries that this joint
connects. The ATBSEG entries overwrite the position and orientation of the ATB
segments as specified in the ATB input file. The ATBJNT entry can be used to create
a Bulk Data file containing elements and grid points to visualize the ATB segment
together with its joints. This visualization of the joints makes it possible to position
the ATB model in any available preprocessor.
ATBSEG Defines the position and orientation of the ATB segments.
RELEX Defines a rigid ellipsoid whose properties and motion are defined by either ATB.
Contact (SOL 700)

BCBODY Defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D.
BCBODY1 Defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D.
BCBOX Defines a 3D contact region - all elements within the region define a contact body.
BCELIPS Defines a list of ellipsoid names (character strings) for use of contact analysis.
BCGRID Grids to be included in contact analyses.
BCMATL Defines a 3D contact region by element material. All elements with the specified
materials define a contact body.
BCONECT Defines the touching and touched contact bodies used for general contact.
BCONPRG-700 Defines geometric contact parameters of touching bodies.
BCONPRP-700 Defines physical contact parameters of touching bodies.
BCSEG Grids which are part of an element to be used in contact analyses.
BCTABLE Defines a contact table (old format).
Main Index
BCTABL1 Defines a contact table (new format).

BSURF Defines a contact body or surface by Element IDs.
Coordinate Systems (SOL 700)

CORD3R Defines a moving rectangular coordinate system using three points (SOL 700 only).
Dampers/Springs (SOL 700)

CDAMP1D Defines a scalar damper connection for use in SOL 700 only.
CDAMP2D Defines a scalar damper connection for use in SOL 700 only.
CELAS1D Defines a scalar spring connection for use in SOL 700 only.
CELAS2D Defines a scalar spring connection for use in SOL 700 only.
Direct Text Input (SOL 700)

ENDDYNA Defines the end of direct text to Dytran.
TODYNA Defines the start of direct text to Dytran.
Element Properties (SOL 700)

PBELT Defines the properties of a belt element referenced by a CROD entry.
PELAS1 Defines a spring property designated by a force-deflection curve for SOL 700.
PSHELL1 Defines the properties of SOL 700 shell elements that are much more complicated
than the shell elements defined using the PSHELL entry.
PVISC1 Defines the properties of a nonlinear damper where the damping constant varies
with the velocity.
Eulerian Boundary (SOL 700)

BARRIER Defines a barrier for transport in a Eulerian mesh.
FLOW Defines the properties of a material for the boundaries of an Eulerian mesh.
FLOWC Defines the properties of a material for the boundaries of a Eulerian mesh.
FLOWDEF Definition of default Eulerian flow boundary condition.
FLOWT Defines the material properties for the in- or outflow of material trough the
boundary of an Euler mesh.
HYDSTAT Initializes the Euler element densities in accordance to a hydrostatic pressure profile.
Eulerian Initial Conditions (SOL 700)

CYLINDR Cylindrical shape used in the initial condition definition on the TICEUL entry.
SPHERE Spherical shape used in the initial condition definition on the TICEUL entry.
Main Index
SURFINI Defines a surface that is used for initialization of regions of an Eulerian mesh.
TICEL Defines the initial values of element variables at the beginning of the analysis.
TICEUL1 Defines the initial values sets for Eulerian regions. The Eulerian regions are defined
by geometric shapes.
TICREG Defines the initial values sets for Eulerian regions. The Eulerian regions are defined
by geometric shapes.
TICVAL Defines the initial values of an Eulerian geometric region.
Eulerian Materials (SOL 700)

EOSDEF EOSDEF defines the properties of the deflagration equation of state, and the
reaction rate to model the burning of solid propellants. The burning of the solid
propellant produces hot gas.
EOSGAM Defines the properties of a Gamma Law equation of state where the pressure p is
defined.
EOSGRUN Used in Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) only.
EOSIG Defines the properties of Ignition and Growth equation of state and the reaction
rate equation used to model high explosives.
EOSJWL Defines the properties of a JWL equation of state commonly used to calculate the
pressure of the detonation products of high explosives.
EOSMG Defines the properties of a Mie-Gruneisen equation of state commonly used to
calculate the pressure p in high strain rate processes.
EOSNA Defines the properties of Noble-Abel equation of state.
EOSPOL Defines the properties of a polynomial equation of state where the pressure p is
defined.
FAILJC Defines the properties of the Johnson-Cook failure model.
FAILMPS Defines the properties of a failure model where failure occurs when the equivalent
plastic strain exceeds the specified value.
MATDEUL Defines a complete constitutive model as a combination of an equation of state, a
shear model, a yield model, a failure model, a spall model (PMIN), and
corotational frame.
PMINC Defines a spallation model where the minimum pressure is constant.
SHREL Defines an elastic shear model with a constant shear modulus.
SHRPOL Defines an elastic shear model with a polynomial shear modulus.
YLDHY Defines a yield model with zero yield stress.
YLDJC Defines a Johnson-Cook yield model where the yield stress is a function of effective
plastic strain, strain rate, and temperature.
Main Index
YLDMSS Defines the yield model for snow material. This entry must be used in combination
with MATDEUL, EOSPOL and SHREL.
YLDPOL Defines a polynomial yield model where the yield stress is a function of effective
plastic strain.
YLDRPL Defines a rate power law yield model where the yield stress is a function of effective
plastic strain and strain rate.
YLDSG Defines the Steinberg-Guinan yield model where the yield stress is a function of
effective plastic strain, pressure and temperature.
YLDTM Defines the Tanimura-Mimura yield model where the yield stress is a function of
effective plastic strain, strain rate and temperature.
YLDVM Defines a bilinear or piecewise-linear yield model with isotropic hardening, using
the von Mises yield criterion.
YLDZA Defines the Zerilli-Armstrong yield model where the yield stress is a function of
effective plastic strain, strain rate and temperature.
Eulerian Solid Elements (SOL 700)

PEULER Defines the properties of Eulerian element.
PEULER1 Eulerian element properties.
Euler/Lagrange Coupling (SOL 700)

ABINFL Defines an inflator model suited for airbag analyses.
COUCOHF Defines a cohesive friction model suited for Euler Coupled analyses. The friction
model is defined as part of the coupling surface.
COHFRIC Allows friction and sticking during tensile conditions at the coupling surface.
COUOPT Defines the interaction factor and a pressure load from the covered side acting on
a BSURF.
COUP1FL Defines the surrounding variables when a segment of a coupling surface fails.
COUPINT Defines the surrounding variables when a segment of a coupling surface fails.
COUPLE Defines a coupling surface that acts as the interface between an Eulerian (finite
volume) and a Lagrangian (finite element) domain.
INFLCG Defines the cold gas-inflator characteristics of a COUPLE and/or GBAG
subsurface.
INFLFRC Defines the gas fractions as a function of time for hybrid inflators.
INFLGAS Defines a thermically ideal gas to be used with a standard or hybrid inflator.
INFLHB Defines the hybrid-inflator characteristics of a COUPLE and/or GBAG
subsurface.
Main Index
INFLTNK Defines the Tanktest-inflator characteristics of a COUPLE and/or GBAG

subsurface.
INFLTR Defines the inflator characteristics of a COUPLE and/or GBAG subsurface.
INITGAS Specifies the initial gas composition inside a gasbag or Euler coupling surface.
LEAKAGE Defines the porosity model to be used with GBAG or COUPLE.
PERMEAB Defines the permeability of a COUPLE and/or GBAG (sub)surface.
PERMGBG Defines a permeable area of a COUPLE and/or GBAG surface, connected to
another GBAG.
PORFCPL Defines an interaction between two coupling surfaces through a hole.
PORFLOW Defines the material properties for the in- or outflow of an Eulerian mesh through
a porous area of the couple surface.
PORFLWT Defines a time dependent flow trough a porous area of the couple surface.
PORFGBG Defines a hole in a couple and/or GBAG (sub)surface, connected to another
GBAG.
PORHOLE Defines a hole in a COUPLE and/or GBAG surface.
PORHYDS Prescribes a hydrostatic pressure profile on a porous BSURF.
Hourglass Control (SOL 700)

HGSUPPR Defines the hourglass suppression method and the corresponding hourglass
damping coefficients.
Initial Conditions (SOL 700)

TIC3 Allows for the definition of a velocity field of grid points consisting of a rotation and
a translation specification. Used in Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) only.
Materials (SOL 700)

MAT1 Defines the material properties for linear isotropic materials.
MAT2 Defines the material properties for linear anisotropic materials for two-dimensional
elements.
MAT8 Defines the material property for an orthotropic material for isoparametric shell
elements.
MATBV Defines the bulk viscosity for materials.
MATEP Elasto-plastic material properties for SOL 700 only.
MATF Specifies failure model properties.
MATFAB Defines the properties of a bi-directional woven fabric material for shell elements.
MATHE Specifies hyperelastic (rubber-like) material properties for nonlinear analysis.
Main Index
MATORT Specifies elastic orthotropic material properties for 3-dimensional and plane strain
and shell behavior for linear and nonlinear analyses.
MATRIG Defines the properties of a rigid body.
MATVE Specifies isotropic visco-elastic material properties to be used for quasi-static or
dynamic analysis
Miscellaneous (SOL 700)

BIAS Specifies a variation of the mesh-size in one direction for use in the MESH entry.
CMARKB2 Defines a 2-noded marker beam element by means of connecting two grid points.
CMARKN1 Defines a 1-noded marker element on a grid point.
DETSPH Defines the ignition point from which a spherical detonation wave travels, causing
the reaction of high explosive materials.
DYFSISW Allows activating or deactivating Fluid Structure Interaction and Eulerian solver.
EULFOR Defines a body force loading (acceleration) on Euler elements per unit mass.
EULFOR1 Alternative way to define an acceleration within a geometric region of the Euler
model regions are defined by geometric shapes which are defined by EULFREG
entries.
EULFREG Defines the acceleration field for sets of Eulerian regions, The Eulerian regions are
defined by geometric shapes. For each coordinate direction a time-depended
acceleration can be defined.
FFCONTR Defines the pressure within a closed volume. Intended for the use in (partially)
filled containers, where dynamic fluid effects are negligible, e.g. top loading and
hot filling.
MESH Defines a mesh.
PMARKER Defines the behavior of the marker element in the FV domain.
Multi-Variable Parameters (SOL 700)

DYPARAM, ATBAOUT Defines the frequency at which output is written to the main
output file of ATB.
DYPARAM, ATBHOUT A time-history file is created containing the output as requested
in the ATB input file on cards H.1 to H.11.
DYPARAM, ATBTOUT Defines the frequency at which output is written to the time-
history files of ATB.
DYPARAM,AUTOCOUP Defines the automatic coupling algorithm.
DYPARAM,AXIALSYM Axial symmetric analysis.
DYPARAM,AXREMAP Allows import of a 2D axial symmetric Euler archive into a 3D
simulation.
Main Index
DYPARAM,BULKL Defines the default value of the linear bulk viscosity coefficient.
DYPARAM,BULKQ Defines the default value of the quadratic bulk viscosity
coefficient.
DYPARAM,BULKTYP Defines the default type of bulk viscosity.
DYPARAM,CFULLRIG Converts all 123456 constraints to the FULLRIG option on all
entries.
DYPARAM,CLUFLIM This DYPARAM activates a limiter that scales down the volume
strain rate for clumps with a small average uncovered fraction. It
can keep an instable airbag run stable, just like PARAM,
VELMAX can keep runs stable.
DYPARAM,CLUMPENR Sets the definition of the kinetic energy calculation method for
Eulerian blended clumps.
DYPARAM,COHESION Cohesion for Coulomb Friction
DYPARAM,CONM2OUT Determines if a summary of concentrated masses and their
energy and momentum is written to the output file.
DYPARAM,CONTACT Defines certain defaults for the contact definitions.
DYPARAM,COSUBMXT Defines the maximum number of subcycles that can occur in
Euler/Lagrange coupling. During a subcycle, the geometry of
the coupling surface is not updated. This number can vary in
time and is given by a table.
DYPARAM,COUFRIC Defines the Coulomb friction scheme.
DYPARAM,ELDLTH Print initial time step sizes for elements in the first cycle.
DYPARAM,EULERCB Divides a Euler domain into several cubes.
DYPARAM,EULTRAN Sets the definition of the face velocity used in the transport
scheme of the Multi-material solver and the single material
strength solver.
DYPARAM,EUSUBCYC Controls the growth of the subcycling interval in Euler
computations.
DYPARAM,EUSUBMAX Defines the maximum number of subcycles that can occur in the
Euler solver. During a subcycle, the Euler computations are
skipped.
DYPARAM,FAILDT Defines the property of a failure model where element failure
occurs when the element’s time step falls below the specified
limit.
DYPARAM,FAILOUT Defines whether failed elements are written to the output file
(ARCHIVES).
DYPARAM,FASTCOUP Defines the fast coupling algorithm.
DYPARAM,FLOWMETH Defines the method for simulating material flow between two
Euler domains across open areas in coupling surfaces.
Main Index
DYPARAM,GEOCHECK This parameter forces a check of the geometry for consistent

connectivity of the defined hexagonal elements and correction if
needed.
DYPARAM,HGCMEM Defines the default membrane damping coefficient for shell
elements.
DYPARAM,HGCOEFF Defines the global default hourglass damping coefficient.
DYPARAM,HGCSOL Define the default damping coefficient for solid elements.
DYPARAM,HGCTWS Defines the default twisting damping coefficient for shell
elements.
DYPARAM,HGCWRP Defines the default warping damping coefficient for shell
elements.
DYPARAM,HGSHELL Defines the default hourglass suppression method for shell
elements.
DYPARAM,HGSOLID Defines the default hourglass suppression method for solid
elements.
DYPARAM,HGTYPE Defines the default type of hourglass suppression method.
DYPARAM,HICGRAV Defines the value of the gravity to be used by the HIC
calculations.
DYPARAM,HVLFAIL Defines element failure on the hydrodynamic volume limit
DYPARAM,HYDROBOD Defines a body force for single hydro material in Euler.
DYPARAM,IMM The option allows to specify the IMM method to be used.
DYPARAM,INFOBJ Additional information about the BJOIN and spotweld
connectivity will be listed in the output file.
DYPARAM,INISTEP Defines the time step used at the start of the analysis.
DYPARAM,JWLDET Specifies whether the blast wave of one explosive can ignite
another explosive. Here it assumed that the explosives are
modeled by a combination of EOSJWL and DETSPH entries.
DYPARAM,LIMCUB Defines the maximum number of cubes used to sort the grid
points in a contact definition.
DYPARAM,LIMITER Defines the type and the spatial accuracy of scheme used in the
Euler solver based on the ideas of Prof. Philip Roe.
DYPARAM,MATRMERG Merges MATRIG and/or RBE2-FULLRIG rigid bodies into a
new FULLRIG assembly.
DYPARAM,MATRMRG1 Merges MATRIG and/or RBE2-FULLRIG rigid bodies into
one existing MATRIG or RBE2-FULLRIG assembly with
predefined properties.
DYPARAM,MAXSTEP Defines the maximum allowable time step.
DYPARAM,MESHPLN Defines Mesh density for covering rigid planes.
Main Index
DYPARAM,MINSTEP Defines the minimum time step that causes the analysis to
terminate.
DYPARAM,MIXGAS Specifies whether the gas constants of the Euler material or of gas
bags are updated based on the gas composition and temperature.
DYPARAM,NZEROVEL Set the velocity of a node to zero in case all attached elements
have failed.
DYPARAM,OLDLAGT Activate the collapsed hexahedron scheme as default for
lagrangian CTETRA elements.
DYPARAM,PARALLEL The option allows you to gather information on the parallel
section.
DYPARAM,PLCOVCUT Defines time when PLCOVER is cut off.
DYPARAM,PMINFAIL Defines Lagrangian solid element failure on reaching the spall
limit.
DYPARAM,RBE2INFO The grid points attached to MATRIG and RBE2assemblies are
listed to the output file.
DYPARAM,RHOCUT Defines the minimum density for all Eulerian elements.
DYPARAM,RJSTIFF Defines the stiffness of a rigid joint.
DYPARAM,SHELLFRM Sets the default for the shell formulation for quadrilateral
elements.
DYPARAM,SHELMSYS Defines the shell element system for the BLT shells.
DYPARAM,SHPLAST Specifies the type of calculation used to determine the plane
stress plasticity method for shells.
DYPARAM,SHSTRDEF Specifies the default coordinate system for the stress and strain
output of composite shells.
DYPARAM,SHTHICK Specifies whether or not the thickness of the shell changes with
membrane straining.
DYPARAM,SLELM Defines whether shell sublayer variables are to be stored in the
element arrays.
DYPARAM,SMP,BATCHSIZ Define batch size and number of CPU loops, per entity type.
DYPARAM,SMP,CPUINFO Define the CPU information per entity type.
DYPARAM,SNDLIM Defines the minimum value for the speed of sound.
DYPARAM,SPHERSYM Enables an efficient and accurate 1D spherical symmetric
solution for Euleran materials
DYPARAM,STRNOUT Saves the total strains and equivalent effective stress (von Mises
stress) at shell sublayers for output.
Main Index
DYPARAM,TOLCHK To check the direction of an Euler face, the face normal vector is
projected onto the closest coordinate direction. If this projection
is 1, the normal is exactly in the coordinate direction. When this
projection is within a sufficient small tolerance of 1, the face can
be handled by fast coupling. The tolerance used is TOLCHK. If
the projection is smaller than 1-TOLCHK, the face cannot be
handled by fast coupling and the analysis terminates. Options
are then to slightly increase TOLCHK, write out double
precision format in PATRAN, use general coupling, or use the
MESH entry. Increasing TOLCHK too much can make the
coupling surface computation less accurate. To keep the
computation accurate, the maximal allowed value of TOLCHK
is 1e-6. If DYPARAM,TOLCHK is not used, the tolerance used
is 1e-14.
DYPARAM,VDAMP Controls the global damping in the dynamic relaxation.
DYPARAM,VELMAX Defines the maximum velocity in Eulerian meshes.
DYPARAM,VELMAX1 Defines the maximum translational and angular velocity in
Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes
DYPARAM,VISCPLAS Activate the overstress formula to update strain-rate dependent
plasticity. This formula is normally used for viscous-plastic
material.
Rigid Elements (SOL 700)

BJOIN Defines (multiple) pairs of grid points of one-dimensional and/or shell elements to
be joined during the analysis.
RBJOINT Defines a joint between two rigid bodies.
WALL Defines a rigid plane through which specified Lagrangian grid points
cannot penetrate. Used in Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) only.
Time Step Control (SOL 700)

TSTEPNL Defines parametric controls and data for nonlinear transient structural or heat
transfer analysis.
Main Index
User Defined Subroutines (SOL 700)
COMPUDS Defines an orthotropic failure model for shell composites specified by a user
subroutine.
EOSUDS Defines the frequency dependent properties for an isotropic poroelastic
material.
FAILUDS User defined simple failure of Eulerian materials.
FLOWUDS Defines a flow boundary on an Eulerian mesh specified by a user subroutine.
FORCUDS Defines enforced motion at grid points specified by a user subroutine.
NLOUTUD User defined output requests for elements or Lagrangian grid points.
PORUDS Defines a porosity model of a COUPLE surface through a user-written

subroutine.
SHRUDS Specifies that a user subroutine is being used to define the shear modulus.
TABLUDS Specifies that a user routine is being used to define an arbitrary function.
TICEUDS User defined simple failure of Eulerian materials.
YLDUDS Specifies that a user subroutine is being used to define a simple yield model.
Solution Control
Aerodynamic Matrix Generation
MKAERO1 Provides a table of Mach numbers (m) and reduced frequencies (k) for aerodynamic
matrix calculation.
MKAERO2 Provides a list of Mach numbers (m) and reduced frequencies (k) for aerodynamic
matrix calculation.
Aerodynamic Parameters
AERO Gives basic aerodynamic parameters for unsteady aerodynamics.
AEROS Defines basic parameters for static aeroelasticity.
Aeroelastic Response Analysis

AEDW Defines a downwash vector associated with a particular control vector of the associated
aerodynamic configuration (AECONFIG).
AEFORCE Defines a vector of absolute or “per unit dynamic pressure” forces associated with a
particular control vector.
Main Index
AEPARM Defines a general aerodynamic trim variable degree-of-freedom (aerodynamic extra

point).
AEPRESS Defines a vector of pressure/unit dynamic pressure associated with a particular control
vector.
AESCALE Defines reference lengths to scale aerodynamic grid points.
GUST Defines a stationary vertical gust for use in aeroelastic response analysis.
TABRNDG Defines the power spectral density (PSD) of a gust for aeroelastic response analysis.
TRIM Specifies constraints for aeroelastic trim variables. The SPLINE1 and SPLINE4 entries
need to be here for the finite plate spline.
UXVEC Specification of a vector of aerodynamic control point values.
Aeroelastic Stability Analysis

DIVERG Defines Mach numbers (m) for a static aeroelastic divergence analysis.
FLFACT Used to specify density ratios, Mach numbers, reduced frequencies, and velocities for
flutter analysis.
FLUTTER Defines data needed to perform flutter analysis.
Buckling Analysis
EIGB Defines data needed to perform buckling analysis.
EIGRL Defines data needed to perform real eigenvalue (vibration or buckling) analysis with the
Lanczos method.
Cyclic Symmetry
CYSYM Defines parameters for cyclic symmetry analysis.
Eigenvalue Analysis
EIGC Defines data needed to perform complex eigenvalue analysis.
EIGR Defines data needed to perform real eigenvalue analysis.
EIGRL Defines data needed to perform real eigenvalue (vibration or buckling) analysis
with the Lanczos method.
EIGP Defines poles that are used in complex eigenvalue extraction by the Determinant
method.
RVDOF, Degrees-of-freedom specification for residual vector calculation.
RVDOF1
Main Index
Monte-Carlo simulation
MONCARL Defines the parameters for Monte-Carlo simulations.
Fatigue Analysis
DTI,UNITS Defines units necessary for conversion during the analysis for the Nastran/ADAMS
interface and Nastran fatigue analysis.
FTGDEF Defines elements and their associated fatigue properties to be considered for fatigue
analysis.
FTGPARM Defines parameters for a fatigue analysis
FTGSEQ Defines the loading sequence for pseudo-static fatigue analysis using SOL 101 or
modal transient fatigue analysis using SOL 103 or SOL 112 or random vibration
fatigue analysis using SOL 108 or SOL 111.
FTGEVNT Groups simultaneously applied loads into loading events for pseudo-static fatigue
analysis using SOL 101 or modal transient fatigue analysis using SOL 103 or
random vibration fatigue analysis using SOL 108 or SOL 111 by referencing
FTGLOAD entries.
FTGLOAD Defines cyclic loading variation for pseudo-static fatigue analysis using SOL 101 or
modal transient fatigue analysis using SOL 103 or random vibration fatigue
analysis using SOL 108 or SOL 111.
MATFTG Defines fatigue material properties.
PFTG Defines fatigue elemental properties.
RANDPS Defines PSDs and cross PSDs for frequency domain fatigue (random vibration)
analysis using SOL 108 or SOL 111.
TABLFTG Defines tabular data for specifying fatigue cyclic loading variation for time domain
TABRND1 Defines tabular data for specifying PSD random vibration loading for frequency
domain fatigue (random vibration) analysis using SOL 108 or SOL 111.
TIM2PSD Defines parameters and triggers conversion of time history channel data into
corresponding Power Spectral Density (PSD) functions for use in random vibration
UDNAME Provides the name of a file that can be referenced from other bulk data entries such
as FTGLOAD.
Frequency Response
FREQ Defines a set of frequencies to be used in the solution of frequency response problems.
FREQ1 Defines a set of frequencies for problem solution.
TABDMP1 Defines modal damping as a tabular function of natural frequency.
Main Index
Nonlinear Static Analysis

ITER Defines options for the iterative solver in SOLs 101, 106, 108, 111 and 153.
NLADAPT Defines additional parameters for automatic load or time stepping used with enhanced
nonlinear in SOL 400.
NLPARM Defines a set of parameters for nonlinear static analysis iteration strategy.
NLPCI Defines a set of parameters for the arc-length incremental solution strategies in nonlinear
static analysis (SOL 106).
Optimization (SOL 200 Only)

BEADVAR Defines design region for topography (bead or stamp) optimization.
BNDGRID Specifies a list of grid point identification numbers on design boundaries or surfaces for
shape optimization (SOL 200).
DCONADD Defines the design constraints for a subcase as a union of DCONSTR entries.
DCONSTR Defines design constraints.
DDVAL Define real, discrete design variable values for discrete variable optimization.
DEQATN Defines a design variable for design optimization.
DESVAR Defines a design variable for design optimization.
DLINK Relates one design variable to one or more other design variables.
DOPTPRM Overrides default values of parameters used in design optimization.
DRESP1 Defines a set of structural responses that is used in the design either as constraints or as
an objective.
DRESP2 Defines equation responses that are used in the design, either as constraints or as an
objective.
DRESP3 Defines an external response using user-supplied routine.
DSCREEN Defines screening data for constraint deletion.
DTABLE Defines a table of real constants that are used in equations (see DEQATN entry).
DTABLE2 Defines real constants from a field of property, material or connections bulk data entries
which can then be invoked by a DVxREL2, DRESP2, or DRESP3 entry.
DVBSHAP Associates a design variable identification number to a linear combination of boundary
shape vectors from a particular auxiliary model.
DVCREL1 Defines the relation between a connectivity property and design variables.
DVCREL2 Defines the relation between a connectivity property and design variables with a user-
supplied equation.
DVGRID Defines the relationship between design variables and grid point locations.
DVLREL1 Defines the linear relation between analysis model loading and design variables
DVMREL1 Defines the relation between a material property and design variables.
Main Index
DVMREL2 Defines the relation between a material property and design variables with a user-
supplied equation.
DVPREL1 Defines the relation between an analysis model property and design variables.
DVPREL2 Defines the relation between an analysis model property and design variables with a
user-supplied equation.
DVPSURF Design Variable to Control Surface Setting Relation
DVSHAP Defines a shape basis vector by relating a design variable identification number (DVID)
to columns of a displacement matrix.
MODTRAK Specifies parameters for mode tracking in design optimization (SOL 200).
SEDLINK Multiple Design Variable Linking Across PART SE Boundary
SEDRSP2 Design Sensitivity Equation Response Quantities for PART SE
SEDRSP3 Defines External Response with User-Supplied Routines
STOCHAS Randomization of Model Parameters
TOMVAR Defines a design region for topometry optimization (element-by-element
optimization).
TOPVAR Defines a topology design region for topology optimization.
p-element and p-Adaptivity Analysis

ADAPT Defines controls for p-version adaptive analysis.
PSET Describes polynomial order distribution and is selected by the ADAPT Case Control
command.
PVAL Describes polynomial order distribution and is selected by the ADAPT Bulk Data entry.
Random Response
RANDPS Defines load set power spectral density factors for use in random analysis.
RANDT1 Defines time lag constants for use in random analysis autocorrelation function
calculation.
RCROSS Cross-power spectral density and cross-correlation function output.
TABRND1 Defines power spectral density as a tabular function of frequency for use in random
analysis. Referenced by the RANDPS entry.
Rotordynamics
RGYRO Specifies synchronous or asynchronous analysis, reference rotor, and rotation speed of the
reference rotor.
ROTHYBD Hybrid damping for rotors
ROTOR Rotor Model Definition
Main Index
ROTORAX Axisymmetric Model Rotor Definition

ROTORG Specifies grids that compose the rotor line model.
ROTORSE Specifies grids that compose the rotor line model.
RSPINR Specifies the relative spin rates between rotors for complex eigenvalue, frequency response,
and static analysis.
RSPINT Specifies rotor spin rates for nonlinear transient analysis.
UNBALNC Specifies an unbalanced load for transient analysis in terms of a cylindrical system with the
rotor rotation axis as the z-axis.
Transient Response
TIC Defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural transient analysis.
TSTEP Defines time step intervals at which a solution will be generated and output in transient
analysis.
TSTEPNL Defines parametric controls and data for nonlinear transient structural or heat transfer
analysis. is intended for SOLs 129, 159, and 99.
Main Index
$ 1135
Comment
Entries A - B
$ Comment
Format:
Example:
Remarks:
3. For free field entries (See Format of Bulk Data Entries above), a $ can be used to terminate the field
entries and any required remaining fields will be modulo replicated as blank.
4. For the default NASTRAN SYSTEM (IFPSTAR) = YES, input using FIXED field, a $ can be used
to terminate the field entries and any required remaining fields will be modulo replicated as blank.
The OLD IFP (NASTRAN SYSTEM (IFPSTAR) = NO) will fail with this option.
Main Index
1136 /
Control Input Stream
/ Control Input Stream
Allows the user control over field width, and on restart entry deletion, insert and update, and process control.
(This entry’s execution is dependent on whether NASTRAN SYSTEM(444)= 0 or 1.)
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/ Alpha numeric text as described below
Examples:
/ 0 12
/delete all
/ Delete FORCE1,PARAM MATVP
Describer Meaning
/ Must be first character and occur somewhere in fields one through 8. (Character)
If NASTRAN SYSTEM(444)=0, then the n1, n2 directive below is the only valid form:
n1,n2 Two integers indicating following number of lines of previous input are to be deleted.
(Integer. n1 > 10, n2 > n1). /, n1,n2 directive must be entered before any new data is
added to the input stream.
If NASTRAN SYSTEM(444)=1, then the above n1, n2 directive will not work and only the following
forms are valid:
DELETE Keyword indicating following listed items are to be deleted. (Character) /DELETE
directive must be entered before any new data is added to the input stream.
ALL Keyword indicating following a /DELETE directive. All previous input items will be
deleted on RESTART. (Character)
List of names A list of Bulk Data names to be deleted following a /DELETE directive. All previous
input Bulk entries with the names indicated will be deleted on RESTART. (Character)
SFW A Keyword that is used for fixed field entries and allows the user to define the field
width of single field entries for Field 2 thru Field 9. See Remark 1. (Character)
n Single Field Width value n used with SFW. This is used for fixed field entries and
allows the user to define the field width of single field entries for Field 2 thru Field 9
to the value n.(Integer 8 < n < 14, Default = 8). If double field is selected by use of the
* option, then Field 2 thru Field 9 are of 2n width. (Field 1 and Field 10 always remain
of width 8). See Remark 1.
Main Index
/ 1137
Describer Meaning
SKIPON Input data following this keyword would not be processed in the current execution.
(Character). This command is terminated by one of three methods: 1) The occurrence
of a SKIPOFF. 2) The occurrence of a BEGIN (Such as BEGIN SUPER=10) 3) The
occurrence of an ENDDATA.
SKIPOFF Keyword turning off the SKIPON command. (Character)
INSERT Keyword that implies that entries when placed into the input stream must not be
previously present. See Remark 1. (Character; Default for INITIAL runs.)
UPDATE Keyword that implies that entries when placed into the input stream are new or are to
replace existing entries. See Remark 1. (Character; Default for RESTART runs.)
DUPMETH Keyword that allows reversion to the original IFP, DUPTOL tolerance selection.
/DUPMETH=OLD selects original IFP tolerance selection. See the
DPBLKTOL(402) system cell description and Remark 1. (Character; Default NEW
for IFPSTAR tolerance selection).
DUPTOL Keyword that allows a closeness tolerance value when searching for removal of
duplicate entries. (Character)
v Tolerance value, used with DUPTOL, when searching for removal of duplicate entries.
See Remark 1. (Real > 0.; Default 1.0-5.)
LISTON Keyword to indicate a "list of data to follow" See Remark 10. (Character)
LISTOFF Keyword to indicate a "list of data is terminated" See Remark 10. (Character)
Remarks:
1. If the SFW, INSERT, UPDATE, DUPMETH, DUPTOL Keywords and any associated value (n, v)
occur in the first BEGIN BULK Section the values set will carry forward to any other BEGIN section
included. If a user wishes to have some later BEGIN have different control values, then the BEGIN
BULK values can be overridden for that particular BEGIN Section by the inclusion of / entries
particular to that specific BEGIN Section. The DUPMETH must come before the DUPTOL entry.
Currently IFPSTAR will not recognize the settings from the command line or RC file due to default
usage issues at the application state and real value passing through the component level. When
DUPMETH is OLD and DPBLKTOL or DUPTOL is zero or positive, remove grids with duplicated
id without checking CP, CD, PS ,SE fields and distance tolerance.
Example:
/DUPMETH=OLD
/DUPTOL=0.1
With the following NASTRAN entry required:
NASTRAN SYSTEM(402)=0.1
Main Index
1138 /
2. The input stream into Nastran is now part of a Common Data Model component and entries are
committed to a data base as soon as they are interpreted in a single unsorted pass. When the user
requests a sorted ECHO, the ECHO represents a binary value converted back into a column character
location. It does not represent the actual binary entry value! Unsorted ECHO respects the request list
of the ECHO command.
3. If an improperly formatted bulk data entry is encountered, the true file line number of the error is
printed along with reference to the Parent entry. If the offending entry is in an include file the file is
identified.
4. Usage of the continuation mnemonic is no longer needed and its usage is not recommended.
5. Default Fixed Fields are 80 characters (see SFW). Free field supports 128 characters.
6. Because the Common Data Model component entries are committed to a data base as soon as they
are interpreted in a single unsorted pass, the /DELETE syntax is now required to be used on restart.
7. If an /INSERT is present on RESTART the Common Data Model component will signal an error
condition EXCEPT when certain objects such as GRID entries have been classified as Remove
Duplicate or when objects such as SPC that allow superposition are encountered.
8. Entries that allow superposition are always in /INSERT.
9. If NASTRAN SYSTEM(444)=1, then the Nastran Replication feature is not recommended.
10. For convenience in entering an ordered list of elements (tuples) data or, such as table value inputs,
the following is allowed for example:
tabled1,111
/liston
1.0 1.0
2.0 1.0
3.0 2.0
4.0 2.0
5.0 1.0
6.0 1.0
/listoff
,endt
or for example if user likes commas:
tabled1,112
/liston
1.0, 1.0
2.0, 1.0
3.0, 2.0
4.0, 2.0
Main Index
/ 1139
5.0, 1.0
6.0, 1.0
/listoff
,endt
Main Index
1140 ABINFL
Inflator Model to be Used With GBAG or COUPLE Entries
ABINFL Inflator Model to be Used With GBAG or COUPLE Entries
Defines an inflator model suited for airbag analyses. The inflator model is defined as part of the GBAG or
COUPLE surface. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ABINFL CID INFID SUBID INFTYPE INFTYPID COEFF COEFFV
Example:
ABINFL 201 1 120 INFLHB 11 0.012
Describer Meaning
CID Unique number of a ABINFL entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
INFID Number of a set of ABINFL entries NFID must be referenced from a GBAG or COUPLE
entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
SUBID Number of a BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP, BCMATL or BCSEG, which must be a part of
the as defined on the GBAG or COUPLE entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
INFTYPE Defines the type of inflator. (Character; Required)

INFLTR The INFLTR logic is used to model inflators in an air bag.
INFLHB The INFLHB logic is used to model hybrid inflators in an air bag.
INFLCG The INFLCG logic models a cold gas inflator.
INFLTNK The INFLTNK logic models the inflator properties (mass flow rate and
inflator gas temperature) calculated from the empirical results.
INFTYPID Number of the entry selected under INFTYPE, for example, INFLTR,INFTYPID.
COEFF Method of defining the area coefficient. (Character, CONSTANT)
CONSTANT The area coefficient is constant and specified on COEFFV.
TABLE The area coefficient varies with time. COEFFV is the number of a
TABLED1 entry giving the variation with time.
COEFFV The area coefficient or the number of a TABLED1 entry depending on the COEFF entry.
(0.0 < Real < 1.0 or 1 > 0)
Remarks:
1. The INFLTR or INFLHB inflator geometry and location is defined by a BSURF, BCBOX,
BCPROP, BCMATL or BCSEG. The area of the hole through which the gas enters is equal to the
area of the subsurface multiplied by COEFFV. A value of COEFFV = 1.0 will open up the complete
subsurface area, while a value of COEFFV = 0.0 will result in a closed inflator area with no inflow.
Main Index
ABINFL 1141
Inflator Model to be Used With GBAG or COUPLE Entries
2. This allows for setting up the exact same model for either a uniform pressure model or an Euler
Coupled model. This makes it possible to set up the model using the switch from full gas dynamics
to uniform pressure (GBAGCOU).
ACC
Main Index
1142 ACCEL
Acceleration Load
ACCEL Acceleration Load
Defines static acceleration loads, which may vary over a region of the structural model. The load variation is
based upon the tabular input defined on this Bulk Data entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACCEL SID CID N1 N2 N3 DIR
LOC1 VAL1 LOC2 VAL2 Continues in Groups of 2
Example(s):
ACCEL 100 2 0.0 1.0 2.0 X
0.0 1.0 1000.0 3.0
Describer Meaning
SID Load set identification number (Integer > 0)
CID Coordinate system identification number. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
Ni Components of the acceleration vector measured in coordinate system CID. (Real; at least
one Ni ≠ 0.0 )
DIR Component direction of acceleration variation. (Character; one of X, Y, and Z)
LOCi Location along direction DIR in coordinate system CID for specification of a load scale
factor. (Real)
VALi The load scale factor associated with location LOCi. (Real)
Remarks:
1. For all grids of the model, the acceleration vector is defined by a = VAL ⋅ N , where N is the vector
defined by (N1, N2, N3). The magnitude of a is equal to VAL times the magnitude of N . The scale
factor VAL for each grid is found linearly interpolating the DIR coordinate of the grid between table
values LOCi/VALi. If the GRID point coordinate in coordinate system CID is outside the range of
the table, VAL is determined either from VAL1 or VALn (the last value, see the following figure).
2. This type of acceleration load may be combined with other loads, such as FORCE, MOMENT,
GRAV, and ACCEL1 loads, by specification on a LOAD entry. The SID on an ACCEL entry may
not be the same as that of any other load entry.
3. This acceleration load does not include effects due to mass on scalar points.
4. A CID of zero references the basic coordinate system.
5. The DIR field must contain one of the characters X, Y, or Z. The DIR direction defines the direction
of acceleration load variation along direction 1, 2, or 3 respectively of coordinate system CID.
Main Index
ACCEL 1143
Acceleration Load
6. A minimum of two pairs of {LOCi, VALi} data must be specified.
VAL
VAL2
VAL3
VALn
VAL1
DIR
LOC1 LOC2 LOC3 LOCn
Definition of Load Scale Factor vs Location

7. If Modules are present then this entry may only be specified in the main Bulk Data section.
Main Index
1144 ACCEL1
Acceleration Load
ACCEL1 Acceleration Load
Defines static acceleration loads at individual GRID points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACCEL1 SID CID A N1 N2 N3
GRIDID1 GRIDID2 -etc.-
Example(s):
ACCEL1 100 2 10.0 1.0 2.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 THRU 10 BY 2
20 21 THRU 30 40 52 69 70
82 90 100
Describer Meaning
SID Load set identification number (Integer > 0)
A Acceleration vector scale factor. (Real)
Ni Components of the acceleration vector measured in coordinate system CID. (Real; at
least one Ni ≠ 0.0 )
GRIDIDi LIST List of one or more GRID point identification numbers. Key words “THRU” and
“BY” can be used to assist the listing. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. The acceleration vector is defined by a = A ⋅ N , where N is the vector defined by (N1, N2, N3). The
magnitude of a is equal to A times the magnitude of N .
2. This type of acceleration load may be combined with other loads, such as FORCE, MOMENT,
GRAV, and ACCEL loads, by specification on a LOAD entry. The SID on an ACCEL1 entry may
not be the same as that of any other load entry.
3. This acceleration load does not include effects due to mass on scalar points.
4. A CID of zero references the basic coordinate system.
5. ACCEL1 loads are not supported with super elements.
Main Index
ACCSSPT 1145
Access Point Definition
ACCSSPT Access Point Definition
Defines a grid interior to an external superelement whose motion will be retained in the residual structure of
the assembled superelement model. This entry is used during the external superelement creation run and is
valid only in external superelements.TR
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACCSSPT GID1 GID2 GIDi etc
Example:
ACCSSPT 117 119
Describer Meaning
GIDi Identification number of a grid point designated as an access point (Integer>0)
Remarks:
1. An access point may only be defined in an external superelement.
2. Access point IDs must be unique across all external superelements.
3. Access points must be interior points in the external superelement.
4. Access points will be automatically placed in the m-set of the residual structure of the assembly and
will have the same displacements in the residual structure as it does in the external superelement.
5. If the user needs the access points to be in the a-set, or if user needs to connect access points from
different superelements via MPCs, the following two parameters are required:
PARAM, SEP1XOVR, 128
PARAM, AUTOMSET, YES
Main Index
1146 ACLOAD
ACTRAN Acoustic Pressure Load Matrices for SOL 108/111
ACLOAD ACTRAN Acoustic Pressure Load Matrices for SOL 108/111

Defines ACTRAN acoustic pressure load matrices.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACLOAD SID UNIT1 UNIT2 SCLR SCLI LSQID
Example(s):
ACLOAD 101 41 42 1.5
Field Contests
SID Set identification number. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0)
UNIT1 Fortran unit number of mapped data from ACTRAN. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0)
UNIT2 Fortran unit number of property matrices from ACTRAN. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0)
SCLR The real part of complex scale factor to be multiplied to ACTRAN matrices. (Real; Default
= 1.0)
SCLI The imaginary part of complex scale factor to be multiplied to ACTRAN matrices. (Real;
Default = 0.0)
LSQID Load SeQuence IDentification number on an ACTRAN file with multiple load cases.
(Integer > 0, default=1).
Remarks:
1. Dynamic excitation sets must be selected with the Case Control command DLOAD = SID for
frequency response analysis.
2. The following type of ASSIGN should be specified in the FMS section with the vacant unit number
(see ASSIGN statements). The unit number cannot be selected doubly.
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’ACTRAN_pressure.f70’ UNIT=41
ASSIGN INPUTT4=’ACTRAN_pressure.op4’ UNIT=42
3. SID must be unique for all RLOAD1, RLOAD2, ACSRCE and ACLOAD entries.
4. Refer the ACTRAN manual for the details of exportation of the acoustic pressure load matrix data
for Nastran.
5. The residual vectors for ACLOAD will not be computed.
6. Value of LSQID that is greater than the actual load cases in the ACTRAN file is a fatal error.
Main Index
ACMODL 1147
Fluid-Structure Interface Parameters
ACMODL Fluid-Structure Interface Parameters
Optional entry to define modeling parameters for Fluid-Structure Interface.
Format:
(If METHOD=“BW”)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACMODL INTER INFOR FSET SSET NORMAL METHOD SKNEPS DSKNEPS
INTOL ALLSSET SRCHUNIT
(If METHOD=“CP”)
ACMODL INTER INFOR FSET SSET NORMAL METHOD
Example(s):
ACMODL IDENT NORMAL
Describer Meaning
INTER Type of structure-fluid interface. (Character = “IDENT” or “DIFF”;
Default = “DIFF”)
INFOR For METHOD = “BW” and INTER = “DIFF”, indicates if FSET and SSET are used
to define the fluid-structure interface, “NONE” if not used, and whether they contain
grids or elements. (Character = “GRIDS”, “ELEMENTS”, “ALL”, or “NONE”,
Default = “NONE”)
For METHOD = “CP” and INTER = “DIFF”, indicates if FSET and SSET are used
to define the fluid-structure interface, “NONE” if not used. See Remark 10.
(Character = “ALL”, or “NONE”, Default = “NONE”)
FSET Optional identification of a SET1 entry that contains a list of fluid elements or grids
on the fluid “skin”. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0 or blank)
SSET Optional identification of a SET1 entry that contains a list of structural elements or
grids on the structure-fluid interface. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0 or blank)
NORMAL Fluid normal tolerance. See Remark 5. (Real; Default = 1.0 (Real; .001 for IDENT)
METHOD Default = “BW”
“BW” = Body in White method
“CP” = Closed Pressure Vessel Method
See Remarks 10. and 11.
SKNEPS Fluid skin growth tolerance. (Real; Default 0.5)
DSKNEPS Secondary fluid skin growth tolerance (Real; Default .75)
INTOL Tolerance of inward normal. (Real; Default .5)
Main Index
1148 ACMODL
Describer Meaning
ALLSSET If “NO” then SSET structure is searched and coupled if found. If ‘YES’ then all the
structure given by SSET is coupled. (Character = ‘YES’, or ‘NO’; Default = ‘NO’)
SRCHUNIT Search units. (Character=‘ABS’ for absolute model units or ‘REL’ for relative model
units based on element size; Default = ‘REL’)
Remarks:
1. Only one ACMODL entry is allowed. In general, for large irregular models, it is recommended that,
initially, this entry not be used, so the defaults will be applied.
2. For METHOD = “BW” and INTER = “DIFF” (Default), FSET and SSET refer to either grids or
elements as selected below. For INTER = “IDENT”, FSET and SSET refer to grids.
a. For INTER = “DIFF”, INFOR = “ELEMENTS”, for FSET, the search algorithm is restricted to
elements referenced by FSET. For SSET, the search algorithm is restricted to elements referenced
by SSET. This allows the user to de-select specific structural faces of a solid structural element.
Both these sets are optional and the user can have one without the other.
b. For INTER = “DIFF”, INFOR = “GRIDS”, for FSET, the search algorithm is restricted to grids
referenced by FSET. This allows the user to deselect fluid grids. Fluid grid selection is the only
way to deselect specific fluid faces. For SSET, the search algorithm is restricted to grids referenced
by SSET. This allows the user to de-select structural grids. Both these sets are optional and the
user can have one without the other.
c. For INTER = “IDENT”, INFOR = “ALL”, the points referenced by FSET and SSET must lie
exactly on the fluid-structure interface. These sets are optional, but if used, both must be present
or no fluid interface is calculated.
3. For INTER = “DIFF”, a .PCH file is created with a SET1 representing the fluid “skin” and a SET1
representing the structure interface. This file is useful for graphic post-processing for viewing the
interface. It also produces the sets that can be used as FSET and SSET.
4. For ALLSSET = ‘NO’ (default) the elements and grids determined by the couplings algorithm are
written to the .PCH file. The user can then deselect elements or grids as defined by the .PCH file by
editing them out of the SET1 entries defined in the file and referencing the edited SET1 with the
SSET. To add structural elements that the coupling algorithm did not include in the .PCH file, it is
not sufficient to just include them on the SET1 entry referenced by SSET. In addition,
ALLSSET = ‘YES’ must be specified.
5. NORMAL determines the height of the fluid box in the outward normal direction to the fluid
surface. The fluid box is used to locate the structural elements used in defining the fluid-structure
coupling matrix. If L is the smallest edge of the fluid element surface, then the height of the box is L
x NORMAL.
For INTER = “IDENT”, NORMAL = .001 is the default and represents a tolerance, in units of
length, used in determining the fluid-structure interface.
6. SKNEPS represents the enlargement of the plane of the fluid surface used to define the search box.
The diagonal distance from the center of the fluid surface to each surface grid is pushed out (diagonal
x (1. + SKNEPS)).
Main Index
ACMODL 1149
Search Box
NORMAL*L
INTOL*L
SKNEPS*D
7. DSKNEPS represents a secondary enlargement of the plane of the fluid surface used to define the
search box if SKNEPS fails to find ANY structural elements. The diagonal distance from the center
of the fluid surface to each surface grid is pushed out (diagonal x (1. + DSKNEPS)).
8. INTOL represents a normal direction into the fluid for the case when the fluid protrudes past the
structural interface. It is defined as L x INTOL where L is the smallest edge of the fluid element
surface.
9. The BW method is summarized in the following table:
Table of Fluid/Structure Search Control and Override METHOD=BW

INFOR Indicates the types of FSET and SSET entered
ELEMENTS Element sets are used to select element fluid and structure faces.
GRIDS Grid sets are used to select element fluid and structure faces.
FSET Fluid Set ID to delete or add fluid faces to fluid/structure interface
ALLSET=NO Delete fluid element faces
ALLSET=YES Add fluid element faces
SSET Structure Set ID to delete or add structure faces to fluid/structure interface
Main Index
1150 ACMODL

ALLSET=NO Delete structural element faces
ALLSET=YES Add structural element faces
A SET specification will for the specified set given override any search parameters.
Caution: When deleting items from a set, especially structural element sets an element ID
may occur more than once and ALL must be removed.
SRCHUNIT REL Units are in the units of smallest fluid edge of current fluid face being searched.
L = smallest fluid surface edge of element being searched.
D = Diagonal from center of fluid surface to each grid
NORMAL = Value_input * L, Height of box +normal to plane of fluid.
SKNEPS = D * (1.0 + Value_input), Search plane diagonals.
DSKNEPS = D * (1.0 + Value_input) Secondary search plane diagonals
DSKNEPS is only used when SKNEPS < DSKNEPS
INTOL = Value_input * L, Height of box -normal to plane of fluid.
ABS Normal units are in the UNITS of the STRUCTURE. Use when distance
between the structure interface and the fluid interface is same constant
everywhere.
NORMAL = Value_input
SKNEPS = As defined above but projected using ABS normal units
DSKNEPS = As defined above but projected using ABS normal units
INTOL = Value_input
ALLSSET NO Designed to take a modified PARAM SKINOUT PUNCH set and
DELETE elements from either the FLUID element set or the
STRUCTURE element set or BOTH. Note if the FLUID set has some
deleted elements and the STRUCTURE set has added elements this
option may result in some change of structure elements in the set and not
keep the structural set UNMODIFIED or vice versa. This is because not
all of the UNMODIFIED structure elements of the set project with the
reduced set of Fluid elements or vice versa.
Recommended for DELETE only.

YES Designed to take a modified PARAM SKINOUT PUNCH set and
ADD elements to either the FLUID element set or the STRUCTURE
element set or BOTH. If some previously found FLUID and
STRUCTURE are also deleted the algorithm keeps all the added set
elements but will of course recomputed the interface for the deleted
boundary so that a sensible set intersection is computed.
Recommended for DELETE ADD.
Main Index
ACMODL 1151

Do NOT use ALLSET =YES when no SETs are specified or one SET is
specified and the search algorithm is being used for the other unspecified
SET as ALLSET means USE ALL and all of the elements of the
unspecified SET may be used.
Coupling 1. Use the search box algorithm to locate the fluid free faces and the corresponding
Algorithm structural element faces.
2. For a fluid free face and its list of structural element faces (that were determined by
boxing normal to the fluid element) do as follows:
a. For each fluid free face establish a face coordinate system.
b. Determine the resultant pressure force for each grid on the fluid element.
c. Resolve this resultant pressure force for a unit grid pressure to the grids of the
fluid element. (Determined by principal virtual work).
d. Using the origin of the free fluid face, determine the center of pressure.
e. Using rigid body motion consider only a unit motion normal to the fluid face
with the appropriate moment relationships, determine the resulting load
distribution at the grids of each of the structural elements. The area of each
structural element projected normal to the fluid element is used as a weighting
function.
f. Loop over each grid of the fluid element and accumulate the forces at the
structural grids.
g. The algorithm always maintains of rigid body equilibrium.
3. Repeat for the next fluid element and its associated group of structural elements.
Accumulate the forces at the structural grids.
Guidelines 1. Run default ACMODL with PARAM , SKINOUT, PUNCH
2. View SETS both FLUID and STRUCTURE.
3. Adjust ACMODL search parameters until close to desired interface is obtained.
4. Modify the FSET, or SSET, or both to include and exclude Girds or Elements as
seems appropriate to get final coupling elements.
Main Index
1152 ACMODL

5. Run acoustic analysis with ACMODL using final FSET, SSET sets with
ALLSET=YES if sets contain both deleted and added elements. Or ALLSET=NO
(default) if sets only delete.
6. The ABS option IS NOT RECOMMENDED for complex acoustic models such as
body in white models with multi contouring surfaces.
Parallel When there are "parallel" over lapping structural meshes, the search algorithm will pick an
Structural element of the closest mesh to the fluid face. All elements connected to this first element are
Element then checked to see if they are in the search box. Once and element, such as the elements of
Meshes in the outer parallel mesh, are found not to connect to the inner patch it is eliminated from the
the Search search. Thus outer patch elements tend to be excluded from the search unless some
Box connectivity to the inner patch is detected. The ALLSET=YES is to force an interface
between the listed structural elements and the nearest fluid faces.
10. The default METHOD is the new “BW” searching algorithm that requires a special license.
The pre-Version 2004 method is selected with METHOD = “CP” in which:
• The search box is not used so the SKNEPS, DSKNEPS, INTOL, ALLSET, SRCHUNIT fields
are ignored.
• If INFOR = ‘ALL’ (METH = ‘CP’ only), then both FSET and SSET must be specified and
matching is checked at only those grid points referenced by FSET and SSET.
• FSET and SSET refer to grids.
• NORMAL = blank is the default (recommended), 1. < NORMAL < 10. gets acceptable results.
In this case, NORMAL represents a maximum cutoff value measured in physical units. When
NORMAL = ‘blank’, Nastran will compute the cutoff value.
This field replaces the pre-Version 2004 FSTOL field. Different units are also used so pre-Version
2004 FSTOL values may need to be changed to obtain the same results.
11. METH = ‘CP’ is not recommended when complex acoustic cavities (such as body in white
automotive models) exist in the model.
Main Index
ACPEMCP 1153
Trim Component Interface Coupling and Constraints Definition
ACPEMCP Trim Component Interface Coupling and Constraints Definition
Defines the interface coupling conditions and constraints of a trim component.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACPEMCP TID SGLUED SSLIDE SOPEN SIMPER OOC SPM
SCUX SCUY SCUZ SCRX SCRY SCRZ SCFP
Example:
ACPEMCP 1 1002 1004
Describer Meaning
TID Identification number of trim component. (Integer>0; Required)
SGLUED Identification number of SET1/SET3 entry of grids belonging to the solid-phase
and/or structure volume elements in the trim component, which are glued to a
structure; see Remark 2. (Integer≥0 or Blank)
SSLIDE Identification number of SET1/SET3 entry with grids belonging to the solid-phase
and/or structure volume elements in the trim component, which are in the sliding-
contact to a structure; see Remark 3. (Integer0 or Blank)
SOPEN Identification number of SET1/SET3 entry of grids belonging to the fluid-phase
elements in the trim component, which has an open interface with the cavities; see
Remark 4. (Integer≥0 or Blank)
SIMPER Identification number of SET1/SET3 entry of grids of the solid-phase and/or structure
volume elements in the trim component, which has an impervious interface with the
cavities; see Remark 5. (Integer≥0 or Blank)
OOC Number of blocks for Out-Of-Core solver, see remark 8. (Integer>1, Default=1)'
SPM Flag for selecting single precision MUMPS for computing reduced impedance matrix,
see Remark 9. (Integer>=0, default=0)
SCUX ID of SET1/SET3 with which grid IDs in the trim component TID is zero-
constrained in translation X direction of output coordinate system.
SCUY ID of SET1/SET3 with which grid IDs in the trim component TID is zero-
constrained in translation Y direction of output coordinate system.
SCUZ ID of SET1/SET3 with which grid IDs in the trim component TID is zero-
constrained in translation Z direction of output coordinate system.
SCRX ID of SET1/SET3 with which grid IDs in the trim component TID is zero-
constrained in rotation X direction of output coordinate system.
SCRY ID of SET1/SET3 with which grid IDs in the trim component TID is zero-
constrained in rotation Y direction of output coordinate system.
Main Index
1154 ACPEMCP
Trim Component Interface Coupling and Constraints Definition
Describer Meaning
SCRZ ID of SET1/SET3 with which grid IDs in the trim component TID is zero-
constrained in rotation Z direction of output coordinate system.
SCFP ID of SET1/SET3 with which grid IDs in the trim component TID is zero-
constrained in fluid pressure.
Remarks:
1. ACPEMCP is a required entry for each trim component that is referenced by TRIMGRP. It must
be put in the main Bulk Data section or BEGIN BULK. It specifies the boundary coupling conditions
as well as the coupling degrees of freedom for computing the reduced boundary impedance matrices
of the trim component.
2. A glued interface means that the trim component is completely constrained on to the structure, such
as a car body. There is no relative movement between the trim component and the structure at the
interface.
3. A sliding interface means that the trim component is laid on the surface of structure, such as a car
body. There is no relative movement in the normal direction of the interface between the trim
component and the structure. Relative sliding movement is allowed in the contact surface.
4. An open interface means that the free flow of fluid between the fluid-phase and cavities occurs at the
interface.
5. An impervious or closed interface means that the fluid flow between the trim component and cavities
is prohibited at the interface. This can happen when the porous material is covered by a thin film
which stops the fluid flow or the cavity is in touch with a structure part of the trim component.
6. The SET1/SET3 entries must reside in the Bulk Data section introduced by Case Control, BEGIN
BULK TRMC.
7. Under current PEM implementation, only 3D elements are allowed for trim components. Hence,
SCRX, SCRY and SCRZ fields of ACPEMCP are not processed.
8. OOC is intended for large trim component. The number of OOC field defines the number of blocks
to be used for the Schur complement evaluation which reduces the memory requirement.
9. SPM is a flag for selecting single precision MUMPS in ACTRAN. With default value of 0, double
precision MUMPS is utilized. Single precision MUMPS will be used with SPM field having value
greater 0. Single precision MUMPS has the benefits of reduced memory requirement and better
performance. However, single precision MUMPS may suffer minor degradation on accuracy.
Main Index
ACSRCE 1155
Acoustic Source Specification
ACSRCE Acoustic Source Specification
Defines acoustic source as a function of power vs. frequency.

1 ( f ) e i ( θ + 2πfτ )
Source Strength = { A } ⋅ --------- 8πCP
----------------------
2πf ρ
C = B⁄ρ
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACSRCE SID EXCITEID DELAYI/ DPHASEI/ TP/RP RHO B
DELAYR DPHASER
Example:
ACSRCE 103 11 20 5.0 12 1.0 15.0
Describer Meaning
SID Load set identification number. See Remarks 1. and 3. (Integer > 0)
EXCITEID Identification number of DAREA, FBALOAD (in FRF Based Assembly or FBA
process) or SLOAD entry set the defines { A } . See Remark 6. (Integer > 0)
DELAYI Identification number of DELAY or FBADLAY (in FRF Based Assembly or FBA
process) Bulk Data entry that defines time delay τ . See Remarks 4. and 5. (Integer > 0
or blank)
DELAYR Value of time delay τ that will be used for all fluid degrees-of-freedom that are excited
by this dynamic load entry. See Remark 5. (Real or blank)
DPHASEI Identification number of DPHASE or FBAPHAS (in FRF Based Assembly or FBA
process) Bulk Data entry that defines phase angle θ . (See Remarks 4. and 5.
(Integer > 0 or blank)
DPHASER Value of phase angle θ (in degrees) that will be used for all fluid degrees-of-freedom
that are excited by this dynamic load entry. See Remark 5. (Real or blank)
TP Identification number of a TABLEDi entry that defines power versus frequency, P ( f ) .
(Integer > 0)
RP Value of power P to be used for all frequencies (Real, non-zero)
RHO Density of the fluid. (Real > 0.0)
B Bulk modulus of the fluid. (Real > 0.0)
Remarks:
1. Acoustic sources must be selected in the Case Control Section with DLOAD = SID.
2. For additional remarks, see the RLOAD1 entry description.
Main Index
1156 ACSRCE
Acoustic Source Specification
3. SID need not be unique for all ACSRCE, RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1 and TLOAD2 dynamic
load entries. The DLOAD = SID Case Control command will select all dynamic load entries with
the set identification of SID.
4. The referenced EXCITEID, DELAY, and DPHASE entries must specify fluid points only.
5. If any of the DELAYI/DELAYR or DPHASEI/DPHASER fields are blank or zero, the corresponding
τ or θ will be zero.
6. If there is no LOADSET Case Control command, then EXCITEID may reference DAREA and
SLOAD entries. If there is a LOADSET Case Control command, then EXCITEID may reference
DAREA entries as well as SLOAD entries specified by the LID field in the selected LSEQ entry
corresponding to EXCITEID.
Main Index
ACTIVAT 1157
Defines Elements That Were Previously Deactivated and Should Be Reactivated for a Particular Subcase in SOL 600
ACTIVAT Defines Elements That Were Previously Deactivated and Should Be Reactivated for a Particular
Subcase in SOL 600
This entry allows the user to re-activate certain elements that were previously deactivated in a previous
subcase in SOL 600.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACTIVAT ID IGEOM ISET
Example:
ACTIVAT 3 0 300
Describer Meaning
ID Identification number of a matching Case Control ACTIVAT command defining the
subcase to which these elements should be activated. (Integer; no Default)
IGEOM Flag to control whether to update the geometry on the post file. (Integer; Default = 0)
0 Update the geometry.
1 Do not update the geometry.
ISET ID of a list of elements described by SET3 is ID=ISET to be activated. (Integer; no
Default)
Remark:
1. This entry maps to Marc's ACTIVATE History definition option.
Main Index
1158 ACTRIM
ACTRAN Trimmed Material Matrices for SOL 108/111
ACTRIM ACTRAN Trimmed Material Matrices for SOL 108/111

Defines ACTRAN trimmed material matrices.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACTRIM NAME UNIT1 UNIT2 SCLR SCLI
Example(s):
ACTRIM FLOOR 31 32 2.0 0.5
Field Context
NAME Name of the ACTRAN trimmed material matrices. See Remark 1. (One to eight
alphanumeric characters, the first of which is alphabetic)
UNIT1 Fortran unit number of mapped data from ACTRAN. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0)
UNIT2 Fortran unit number of property matrices from ACTRAN. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0)
SCLR The real part of complex scale factor to be multiplied to ACTRAN matrices. (Real; Default
= 1.0)
SCLI The imaginary part of complex scale factor to be multiplied to ACTRAN matrices. (Real;
Default = 0.0)
Remarks:
1. ACTRAN trimmed material matrices defined by this entry will be used for frequency response
analysis if it is selected via the Case Control ACTRIM = NAME.
2. The following type of ASSIGN should be specified in the FMS section with the vacant unit number
(see ASSIGN statements). The unit number cannot be selected doubly.
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’ACTRAN_trimmed.f70’ UNIT=31
ASSIGN INPUTT4=’ACTRAN_trimmed.op4’ UNIT=32
3. Refer the ACTRAN manual for the details of exportation of the trimmed material matrix data for
Nastran.
Main Index
ADAPT 1159
Version Adaptivity Control
ADAPT Version Adaptivity Control
Defines controls for p-version adaptive analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ADAPT SID ADGEN MAXITER PSTRTID PMINID PMAXID
PART=name1, option1=value1, option2=value2, etc., PART=name2
option1=value1, option2=value2, etc., PART=name3, etc.
Example:
ADAPT 127 3 23 45
PART=LOWSTR, ELSET=11, TYPE=UNIP, SIGTOL=22
PART=HISTR, ELSET=111, ERREST=2, EPSTOL=.002
Describer Meaning Type Default

SID Adapt entry ID selected in Case Control by Integer > 0 None
ADAPT command.
ADGEN ID of the first PVAL entry generated in the Integer > 1000
adaptive process. See Remark 14. PSTRTID,
PMINID,
PMAXID
MAXITER Number of analyses performed before adaptive Integer > 0 3
process is stopped.
PSTRTID ID of PVAL entry describing the starting p-order Integer > 0 None
distribution.
PMINID ID of PVAL entry describing the minimum Integer > 0 PSTRTID
p-order distribution. See Remark 10.
PMAXID ID of PVAL entry describing the maximum Integer > 0 PSTRTID
p-order distribution. See Remark 10.
optioni = Assigns a value to an option described later. See
valuei Remark 16.
PART Part name of the elements defined in ELSET and Character PART = MODEL
controlled by TYPE, ERREST, ERRTOL,
SIGTOL, and EPSTOL.
ELSET ID of the SET command under the SETS Integer > 0 ELSET = 999999
DEFINITION command. See Remark 7.
TYPE p-order adjustment. See Remark 3. Character or TYPE = EBEP
Integer > 0
Main Index
1160 ADAPT

ERREST Error estimator activation flag. See Remark 2. Integer > 0 ERREST = 1
ERRTOL Error tolerance. Required if MAXITER is not 0.0<Real<1.0 ERRTOL=0.01
specified.
SIGTOL Stress tolerance. If the von Mises stress at the Real > 0.0 SIGTOL = 0.0
center of the element is below this value, the
element will not participate in the error analysis.
EPSTOL Strain tolerance. If the von Mises strain at the Real > 0.0 EPSTOL = 1.0E-8
center of the element is below this value, the
element will not participate in the error analysis.
Remarks:
1. Only one ADAPT entry may be specified. On the continuation entries, no commas can appear in
columns 1 through 8 and the data in fields 2 through 9 must be specified in columns 9 through 72.
2. The error estimator is activated by ERREST = 1 and is based on strain energy density sensitivity and
stress discontinuity in neighboring elements. ERREST = 0 means no error estimation will be
performed on the PART.
3. The types of p-order adjustment are:
Type Description
EBEP The p-order will increase only in the elements that are required by the error
analysis.
UNIP If any element in the group has an error larger than the tolerance, all
elements will be increased by one order in each direction.
NOCH The p-order of the group does not change during the iterations.
LIST The PVAL distribution specified as PSTRTID is used for the first iteration.
The user is required to provide PVAL entries with IDs starting with
ADGEN, and these p-distributions will be used in the following iterations
4. If a PVAL ID is not specified for PSTRTID, PMINID, or PMAXID, then this is equivalent to no
change at the last PVAL ID found for the element.
5. The elements specified in the SET could overlap. In this case, the highest p 1 , highest p 2 , highest p 3
(the polynomial order of the elements in three directions) determined by the error estimator will be
used.
6. n restart, PMINID and PMAXID must not refer to any PVAL identification number that was
generated in the previous run(s). Also, PARAM,PVALINIT must specify the desired PVAL
identification number from which to restart.
7. If an element in the SET does not have a PVAL for PSTRTID or PMINID or PMAXID, it will be
excluded from the adaptivity process.
Main Index
ADAPT 1161
8. SET = 999999 is a reserved set that includes all elements.

9. The user can specify as many PARTs as needed.
10. Each finite element has to have a unique PVAL for PSTRTID, PMINID, PMAXID. Any overlap of
the PVAL specification will result in a warning message and the use of the PVAL with the highest pi
field (highest p 2 if same p 1 and highest p 3 if same p 1 and p 2 ) and the lowest CID value.
11. The p-distribution for an element specified by the PVAL entry referenced by PMAXID must be larger
than the distribution specified by the PSTRTID, which must be larger than the distribution specified
by the PMINID. A warning message will be issued if these conditions are not met, and the data is
reset.
12. The solution vector of all the elements listed in the SET entries for all loads and boundary conditions
will be used in the error estimation. New p values are generated for all the elements.
13. When ERREST = 0, no error analysis is performed. The p-value of the elements in the set are
increased uniformly starting from p-values specified on the PVAL entry referenced by PSTRTID up
to values specified on the PVAL entry referenced by PMAXID.
14. The intermediate PVAL entries generated will have an ID starting with ADGEN; thus, ADGEN
must be larger than PSTRTID, PMINID, and PMAXID.
15. The displacement and stress output can be requested by a DATAREC Case Control command.
16. Each optioni = valuei must be specified on the same entry. In other words, optioni and valuei may
not be specified on two separate continuation entries.
Main Index
1162 ADUMi
Dummy Element Attributes
ADUMi Dummy Element Attributes
Defines attributes of the dummy elements (3 < i < 9).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ADUMi NG NC NP ND ELNM
Example:
ADUM8 18 0 5 0 CRAC2D
Describer Meaning
NG Maximum number of grid points that may be connected by DUMi dummy element
(Integer>0.)
NC Number of additional fields (Ai) on the CDUMi connection entry. (Integer > 0)
NP Number of additional fields (Ai) on the PDUMi property entry. (24 > Integer > 0)
ND Number of displacement components at each grid point used in generation of the
differential stiffness matrix. Zero implies no differential stiffness. (Integer 3 or 6)
ELNM The name of the element connection and property entry. In the example above, the
connection entry is named “CRAC2D” and the property entry is named “PRAC2D”.
Remarks:
ADUM8 and ADUM9 are used exclusively for the CRAC2D and CRAC3D entries respectively.
Main Index
AECOMP 1163
Component for an Integrated Load Monitor Point
AECOMP Component for an Integrated Load Monitor Point
Defines a component for use in monitor point definition or external splines.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AECOMP NAME LISTTYPE LISTID1 LISTID2 LISTID3 LISTID4 LISTID5 LISTID6
LISTID7 -etc.-
Example:
AECOMP WING AELIST 1001 1002
Describer Meaning
NAME A character string of up to eight characters identifying the component. (Character)
LISTTYPE One of CAERO, AELIST or CMPID for aerodynamic components and SET1 for
structural components. Aerodynamic components are defined on the aerodynamic
ks-set mesh while the structural components are defined on the g-set mesh. See
Remarks 2. and 4.
LISTIDi The identification number of either SET1, AELIST or CAEROi entries that define
the set of grid points that comprise the component. See Remarks 2. and 4.
Remarks:
1. The Identification name must be unique among all AECOMP and AECOMPL entries.
2. If the component is defined on the structure, LISTIDs must refer to SET1 entry(ies) that define the
list of associated GRID points. For the AELIST or CAERO option, the LISTIDs must refer to
AELIST or CAERO i entries, respectively. Note that, for DLM models (CAERO1/2), the set of
points defined by the AELIST are the box identification numbers. For example, if the control
surface’s grids are desired, the same AELIST used for the AESURF can be referred to here. An
AECOMP component must be defined as either an aerodynamic mesh component or a structural
component. The two mesh classes cannot be combined into a single component.
3. The AECOMPL entry can be used to combine AECOMP entries into new components. When
combining components, the structural and aerodynamic classes must be kept separate.
4. If LISTTYPE = CMPID, LISTID1 identifies the associated set of AEQUAD4, AETRIA3 elements
that define the aero component.
Main Index
1164 AECOMPL
Component for an Integrated Load Monitor Point
AECOMPL Component for an Integrated Load Monitor Point
Defines a component for use in aeroelastic monitor point definition or external splines as a union of other
components.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AECOMPL NAME LABEL1 LABEL2 LABEL3 LABEL4 LABEL5 LABEL6 LABEL7
LABEL8 -etc.-
Example:
AECOMPL HORIZ STAB ELEV BALANCE
Describer Meaning
NAME A character string of up to eight characters Identifying the component. (Character)
LABELi A string of 8 characters referring to the names of other components defined by either
AECOMP or other AECOMPL entries.
Remarks:
1. The Identification name must be unique among all AECOMP and AECOMPL entries.
2. The AECOMPL entry can be used to combine AECOMP entries into new components. When
combining components, the structural and aerodynamic classes must be kept separate.
Main Index
AEDW 1165
Parametric Normal Wash Loading for Aerodynamics
AEDW Parametric Normal Wash Loading for Aerodynamics
Defines a downwash vector associated with a particular control vector of the associated aerodynamic
configuration (AECONFIG). From this downwash vector, a force vector on the aerodynamic grids will be
defined for use in nonlinear static aeroelastic trim.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AEDW MACH SYMXZ SYMXY UXID DMIJ DMIJI
Example:
AEDW 0.90 SYMM ASYMM 101 ALP1
Describer Meaning
MACH The Mach number for this force, see Remark 2. (Real ≥ 0.0, ≠ 1.0)
SYMXZ,SYMXY The symmetry of this force vector. One of SYMM, ASYMM or ANTI (Character).
UXID The identification number of a UXVEC entry that defines the control parameter
vector associated with this downwash vector.
DMIJ The name of a DMI or DMIJ entry that defines the downwash.
DMIJI The name of a DMIJI entry that defines the CAERO2 interference element
“downwashes”.
Remarks:
1. The AEDW, AEFORCE and AEPRESS are associated with the current AECONFIG using either
Case Control (if in the main Bulk Data Section) or using the BEGIN AECONFIG=<config> if in a
partition of the Bulk Data.
2. The DMIJ field refers to either a DMI or a DMIJ entry. The DMIJI is only applicable to CAERO2
and is only required if nonzero “downwash” (j-set) input is needed on the interference body elements.
3. Mach numbers > 1.0 require that the supersonic aerodynamic option be available.
Main Index
1166 AEFACT
Aerodynamic Lists
AEFACT Aerodynamic Lists
Defines real numbers for aeroelastic analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AEFACT SID D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
D8 D9 -etc.-
Example:
AEFACT 97 .3 .7 1.0
Describer Meaning
SID Set identification number. (Unique Integer > 0)
Di Number. (Real)
Remarks:
1. AEFACT entries must be selected by a CAEROi, PAEROi or SPLINEX entry.
2. Embedded blank fields are not allowed.
3. To specify division points, there must be one more division point than the number of divisions.
4. When referenced by the CAERO3 entry, AEFACT defines the aerodynamic grid points. The ID
number of the first point defined by each AEFACT entry is the value of the CAERO3 ID that selected
the AEFACT entry. The ID of each following point defined on the AEFACT is incremented by 1.
Main Index
AEFORCE 1167
Parametric Force for Aerodynamics
AEFORCE Parametric Force for Aerodynamics
Defines a vector of absolute or “per unit dynamic pressure” forces associated with a particular control vector.
This force vector may be defined on either the aerodynamic mesh (ks-set) or the structural mesh (g-set). The
force vector will be used in static aeroelastic trim.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AEFORCE MACH SYMXZ SYMXY UXID MESH LSET DMIK PERQ
Example:
AEFORCE 0.90 SYMM ASYMM 101 AERO BETA
Describer Meaning
MACH The Mach number for this force. (Real ≥ 0.0, ≠ 1.0)
SYMXZ,SYMXY The symmetry conditions for this force vector. One of SYMM, ASYMM or ANTI.
(Character)
UXID The identification number of a UXVEC entry that defines the control parameter
vector associated with this force vector.
MESH One of AERO or STRUCT that declares whether the force vector is defined on the
aerodynamic ks-set mesh or the structural g-set mesh.
LSET SID of a load set that defines the vector. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0 if
MESH=STRUCT)
DMIK The name of a DMIK entry that defines the aerodynamic force vector. See Remark
3. (Character; Required if MESH=AERO)
PERQ The string PERQ or blank. If PERQ and MESH=STRUCT, the input FORCE set
is multiplied by the dynamic pressure. (Default = blank; see Remark 4.)
Remarks:
1. The AEFORCE is associated with the current AECONFIG and must be entered for the appropriate
Mach numbers and aerodynamic symmetries.
2. For the STRUCT mesh option, the LSET can refer to any existing load type (e.g., FORCE1,
PLOAD4 or LOAD) that is available to define static loads.
3. For the AERO mesh option, the DMIK Bulk Data are used. Any forces associated with the
aerodynamic model’s permanently SPC’d degrees-of-freedom (which are dependent on the type of
aerodynamic model being used) will be ignored.
4. For the AERO mesh option, the PERQ field is not used. The FORCE data input on the DMIK entry
is always multiplied by dynamic pressure.
Main Index
1168 AEGRID
Aerodynamic Grid Point
AEGRID Aerodynamic Grid Point
Defines the location of an aerodynamic grid point.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AEGRID GID CP X1 X2 X3 CD ASID
Example:
AEGRID 1 1 2.1 3.2 2.0 3 4
Describer Meaning
GID Grid Point Identification Number (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
CP Identification number of a coordinate system in which the location of the grid point is
defined. (Integer > 0 or blank)
X1, X2, X3 Location of the grid point in the coordinate system CP.
CD Identification number of coordinate system in which the degrees-of-freedom of the grid
point are defined. (Integer > 0 or blank)
ASID Identification number of an AESCALE Bulk Data entry. (Integer > 0 or blank)
Remarks:
1. All grid point identification numbers must be unique with respect to all other aerodynamic grid point
identification numbers.
2. If both CP and ASID are defined, coordinates are first scaled and subsequently transformed to the
basic coordinate system.
3. The meaning of X1, X2 and X3 depends on the type of coordinate system CP. (See Remark 2 of the
GRID entry).
4. A zero or blank in the CP and CD fields refers to the basic coordinate system.
5. The AEGRID, AETRIA3, AEQUAD4, and AESCALE entries provide an aerodynamic mesh in a
readable, portable format. There are no internal aerodynamics created on this mesh.
Main Index
AELINK 1169
Links Aeroelastic Variables
AELINK Links Aeroelastic Variables
Defines relationships between or among AESTAT and AESURF entries, such that:
n
D I
u +  Ci u i = 0.0
i =1
Where:
D
u = dependent variable
I
ui = independent variable
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AELINK ID LABLD LABL1 C1 LABL2 C2 LABL3 C3
LABL4 C4 -etc.-
Example:
AELINK 10 INBDA OTBDA -2.0
Describer Meaning
ID If an integer > 0 is specified, this is the TRIM set ID selected in Case Control and the
AELINK only applies to that subcase. If an integer value of 0 or the character string
“ALWAYS” is specified, this AELINK is applicable to all subcases. (Integer > 0 or the
“ALWAYS” character string.)
LABLD Character string to identify the dependent aerodynamic variable. (Character)
LABLi Character string to identify the i-th independent aerodynamic variable. (Character)
Ci Linking coefficient for the i-th variable. (Real)
Remarks:
1. If the ID is a positive integer, the AELINK entry (or entries) is selected by the TRIM=ID in Case
Control.
2. If the ID is 0 or the character string ALWAYs, the linking relationship applies to all subcases.
3. The entry constrains the dependent variable to be a linear combination of the independent variables.
4. LABLD data must be unique for a given ID or if ID=0 or AWAYS is being used (i.e., the variable
cannot be constrained more than once).
5. LABLD and LABLi refer to AEPARM, AESTAT or AESURF Bulk Data entries.
Main Index
1170 AELIST
Aerodynamic List
AELIST Aerodynamic List
Defines a list of aerodynamic elements or grid ID’s.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AELIST SID E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7
E8 -etc.-
Example:
AELIST 75 1001 THRU 1075 1101 THRU 1109 1201
1202
Describer Meaning
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ei List of aerodynamic box ID's or aerodynamic grid ID's (Integer>0 or "THRU")
Remarks:
1. The AELIST entry can be referenced by AESURF, AECOMP, SPLINEi, SPLINRB, SPBLND2 and
SPRELAX entries. Refer to these entries for the meaning of the data provided.
2. When the “THRU” option is used, all intermediate grid points must exist. The word “THRU” may
not appear in field 3 or 9 (2 or 9 for continuations).
3. Intervening blank fields are not allowed.
Main Index
AELISTC 1171
Character Item List
AELISTC Character Item List
Defines a list of 8-character strings.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AELISTC SID C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
C8 -etc.-
Example:
AELISTC 101 FBS STRING12
Describer Meaning
Ci List of 8-character strings.
Remark:
1. Intervening blank fields are not allowed.
Main Index
1172 AEPARM
General Controller for Use in Trim
AEPARM General Controller for Use in Trim
Defines a general aerodynamic trim variable degree-of-freedom (aerodynamic extra point). The forces
associated with this controller will be derived from AEDW, AEFORCE and AEPRESS input data.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AEPARM ID LABEL UNITS
Example:
AEPARM 5 THRUST LBS
Describer Meaning
ID Controller identification number. (Integer > 0)
LABEL Controller name. See Remark 1. (Character)
UNITS Label used to describe the units of the controller values. (Character)
Remarks:
1. Controller LABELs that comprise the unique set relative to all the AESURF, AESTAT and AEPARM
entries will define the set of trim variable degrees-of-freedom for the aeroelastic model.
2. Unit labels are optional and are only used to label outputs. No units will be associated with the
controller if left blank.
Main Index
AEPRESS 1173
Parametric Pressure Loading for Aerodynamics
AEPRESS Parametric Pressure Loading for Aerodynamics
Defines a vector of pressure/unit dynamic pressure associated with a particular control vector. From this
pressure vector, a force vector on the aerodynamic grids will be defined for use in nonlinear static aeroelastic
trim.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AEPRESS MACH SYMXZ SYMXY UXID DMIJ DMIJI
Example:
AEPRESS 0.90 SYMM ASYMM 101 ALP1
Describer Meaning
MACH The Mach number for this force, see Remark 2. (Real ≥ 0.0, ≠ 1.0)
SYMXZ,SYMXY The symmetry of this force vector. One of SYMM, ASYMM or ANTI.
(Character)
UXID The identification number of a UXVEC entry that defines the control
parameter vector associated with this pressure vector.
DMIJ The name of a DMI or DMIJ entry that defines the pressure per unit dynamic
pressure.
DMIJI The name of a DMIJI entry that defines the CAERO2 interference element
“downwashes”.
Remarks:
1. The AEDW, AEFORCE, and AEPRESS are associated with the current AECONFIG using Case
Control.
2. Mach numbers > 1.0 require that the supersonic aerodynamic option be available.
3. The DMIJ field refers to either a DMI or a DMIJ entry. The DMIJI is only applicable to CAERO2
and is only required if nonzero “downwash” (j-set) input is needed on the interference body elements.
Main Index
1174 AEQUAD4
Quadrilateral Aerodynamic Element Connection
AEQUAD4 Quadrilateral Aerodynamic Element Connection
Defines the connectivity of a quadrilateral aerodynamic element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AEQUAD4 EID CMPID G1 G2 G3 G4
Example:
AEQUAD4 100 2 12 32 41 50
Describer Meaning
EID Element Identification Number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
CMPID Aerodynamic Component Identification Number. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid Point Identification Numbers of Connection Points. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. The geometry of a quadrilateral aerodynamic element may collapse to a triangle, i.e., two connection
points may have the same geometric location. However, all four grid point identification numbers
must be different.
Main Index
AERO 1175
Aerodynamic Physical Data
AERO Aerodynamic Physical Data
Gives basic aerodynamic parameters for unsteady aerodynamics.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AERO ACSID VELOCITY REFC RHOREF SYMXZ SYMXY
Example:
AERO 3 1.3+4 100. 1.-5 1 -1
Describer Meaning
ACSID Aerodynamic coordinate system identification. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0; Default is
the basic coordinate system)
VELOCITY Velocity for aerodynamic force data recovery and to calculate the BOV parameter. See
Remark 5. (Real>0.0 or blank)
REFC Reference length for reduced frequency. (Real > 0.0)
RHOREF Reference density. (Real > 0.0)
SYMXZ Symmetry key for the aero coordinate x-z plane. See Remark 6. (Integer = +1 for
symmetry, 0 for no symmetry, and -1 for antisymmetry; Default = 0)
SYMXY The symmetry key for the aero coordinate x-y plane can be used to simulate ground
effect. (Integer = -1 for symmetry, 0 for no symmetry, and +1 for antisymmetry;
Default = 0)
Remarks:
1. This entry is required for aerodynamic problems. Only one AERO entry is allowed.
2. The ACSID must be a rectangular coordinate system. Flow is in the positive x-direction.
3. Set SYMXY = -1 to simulate ground effect.
4. PARAM,WTMASS does not affect aerodynamic matrices. RHOREF must be input in mass units.
5. VELOCITY is used only in aeroelastic response analysis, and it must be equal to V on the GUST
Bulk Data entry.
6. The symmetry fields on this entry are only used if neither of the Case Control commands
(AESYMXY, AESYMXZ) are supplied. If either Case Control command is supplied, even the defaults
from Case will override these Bulk Data entries. The Case Control symmetry is the preferred means
of declaring the flow and geometric symmetry for aeroelastic analysis.
Main Index
1176 AEROS
Static Aeroelasticity Physical Data
AEROS Static Aeroelasticity Physical Data
Defines basic parameters for static aeroelasticity.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AEROS ACSID RCSID REFC REFB REFS SYMXZ SYMXY
Example:
AEROS 10 20 10. 100. 1000. 1
Describer Meaning
ACSID Aerodynamic coordinate system identification. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0; Default is
the basic coordinate system)
RCSID Reference coordinate system identification for rigid body motions. (Integer > 0;
Default is the basic coordinate system)
REFC Reference chord length. (Real > 0.0)
REFB Reference span. (Real > 0.0)
REFS Reference wing area. (Real > 0.0)
SYMXZ Symmetry key for the aero coordinate x-z plane. See Remark 6. (Integer = +1 for
symmetry, 0 for no symmetry, and -1 for antisymmetry; Default = 0)
SYMXY The symmetry key for the aero coordinate x-y plane can be used to simulate ground
effects. (Integer = +1 for antisymmetry, 0 for no symmetry, and -1 for symmetry;
Default = 0)
Remarks:
1. This entry is required for static aeroelasticity problems. Only one AEROS entry is allowed.
2. The ACSID must be a rectangular coordinate system. Flow is in the positive x-direction (T1).
3. The RCSID must be a rectangular coordinate system. All AESTAT degrees-of-freedom defining trim
variables will be defined in this coordinate system.
4. REFB should be full span, even on half-span models.
5. REFS should be half area on half-span models.
6. The symmetry fields on this entry are only used if neither of the Case Control commands
(AESYMXY, AESYMXZ) are supplied. If either Case Control command is supplied, even the defaults
from Case will override these Bulk Data entries. The Case Control symmetry is the preferred means
of declaring the flow and geometric symmetry for aeroelastic analysis.
Main Index
AESCALE 1177
Aerodynamic Grid Point Scaling
AESCALE Aerodynamic Grid Point Scaling
Defines reference lengths to scale aerodynamic grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AESCALE ASID X1REF X2REF X3REF
Example:
AESCALE 100 1 1 1
Describer Meaning
ASID Identification Number called out on an AEGRID entry. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
X1REF Reference length to scale X1. (Real or blank; Default = 1.0)
Remark:
1. The scaled coordinates are computed from XiS = Xi ⋅ XiREF .
Main Index
1178 AESTAT
Static Aeroelasticity Trim Variables
AESTAT Static Aeroelasticity Trim Variables
Specifies rigid body motions to be used as trim variables in static aeroelasticity.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AESTAT ID LABEL
Example:
AESTAT 5001 ANGLEA
Describer Meaning
ID Identification number of an aerodynamic trim variable degree-of-freedom. See Remark
1. (Integer > 0)
LABEL An alphanumeric string of up to eight characters used to identify the degree-of-
freedom. See Remark 1. (Character)
Remarks:
1. The degrees-of-freedom defined with this entry represent rigid body motion in the reference
coordinate system defined on the AEROS entry. The standard labels that define the various rigid
body motions are as follows:
Table 1 Standard Labels Defining Rigid Body Motions

Degree-of-Freedom
LABEL Motion Description
ANGLEA u r (R2) Angle of Attack
SIDES u r (R3) Angle of Sideslip
ROLL u· r (R1) Roll Rate = pb/2V
PITCH u· r (R2) Pitch Rate = qc/2V
YAW u· r (R3) Yaw Rate = rb/2V
URDD1 u··r (T1) Longitudinal (See Remark 3.)
URDD2 u··r (T2) Lateral
URDD3 u··r (T3) Vertical
URDD4 u··r (R1) Roll
URDD5 u··r (R2) Pitch
URDD6 u··r (R3) Yaw
Main Index
AESTAT 1179
Static Aeroelasticity Trim Variables
These reserved names may be defined on the AEPARM entry instead, in which case the incremental
load due to the unit perturbation of the rigid body degree-of-freedom (as it will with AESTAT). See
the AEPARM, AEPRESS, and AEFORCE entries.
2. The degrees-of-freedom defined with this entry are variables in the static aeroelastic trim solution,
unless they are constrained by referencing them with a TRIM Bulk Data entry.
3. If a label other than those above is specified, then the user must either generate the corresponding
forces with an AELINK or via a DMI Bulk Data entry along with a DMAP alter that includes the
DMIIN module and additional statements to merge into the appropriate matrices. Or, using
AEPARM and the AEDW, AEPRESS, and/or AEFORCE, you can accomplish this purpose without
the need for any alters.
Main Index
1180 AESURF
Aerodynamic Control Surface
AESURF Aerodynamic Control Surface
Specifies an aerodynamic control surface as a member of the set of aerodynamic extra points. The forces
associated with this controller will be derived from rigid rotation of the aerodynamic model about the hinge
line(s) and from AEDW, AEFORCE and AEPRESS input data. The mass properties of the control surface
can be specified using an AESURFS entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AESURF ID LABEL CID1 ALID1 CID2 ALID2 EFF LDW
CREFC CREFS PLLIM PULIM HMLLIM HMULIM TQLLIM TQULIM
Example:
AESURF 6001 ELEV 100 100 200 200
10.0 180.0 -1.4E4 1.2E4 20 30
Describer Meaning
ID Controller identification number. (Integer > 0)
LABEL Controller name. (Character)
CIDi Identification number of a rectangular coordinate system with a y-axis that defines
the hinge line of the control surface component. (Integer > 0)
ALIDi Identification of an AELIST Bulk Data entry that identifies all aerodynamic
elements that make up the control surface component. (Integer > 0)
EFF Control surface effectiveness. See Remark 4. (Real ≠ 0.0; Default = 1.0)
LDW Linear downwash flag. See Remark 2. (Character, one of LDW or NOLDW;
Default = LDW).
CREFC Reference chord length for the control surface. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)
CREFS Reference surface area for the control surface. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)
PLLIM,PULIM Lower and upper deflection limits for the control surface in radians. (Real, Default
= ± π/2)
HMLLIM,HMULI Lower and upper hinge moment limits for the control surface in force-length units.
M (Real; Default = no limit)
TQLLIM,TQULIM Set identification numbers of TABLEDi entries that provide the lower and upper
deflection limits for the control surface as a function of the dynamic pressure.
(Integer > 0; Default = no limit)
Main Index
AESURF 1181
Aerodynamic Control Surface
Remarks:
1. The ID on AESURF, AESTAT, and AEPARM entries are ignored. AESURFS can be used to define
mass properties of the control surface.
2. The degrees-of-freedom defined on this entry represent a rigid body rotation of the control surface
components about their hinge lines. In the default LDW (Linear DownWash) case, the downwash
due to a unit perturbation of the control surface will be computed as part of the database. In the
NOLDW case, the user must prescribe the controller’s effects by direct definition of the induced
forces using the AEPRESS, AEDW and/or AEFORCE entries.
3. Either one or two control surface components may be defined.
4. If EFF is specified, then the forces produced by this surface are modified by EFF (e.g., to achieve a
40% reduction, specify EFF=0.60).
5. The continuation is not required.
6. The CREFC and CREFS values are only used in computing the nondimensional hinge moment
coefficients.
7. Position limits may be specified using either PiLIM or TQiLIM, but not both.
8. Position and hinge moment limits are not required.
Main Index
1182 AESURFS
Structural Grids on an Aerodynamic Control Surface
AESURFS Structural Grids on an Aerodynamic Control Surface
Optional specification of the structural nodes associated with an aerodynamic control surface that has been
defined on an AESURF entry. The mass associated with these structural nodes define the control surface
moment(s) of inertia about the hinge line(s).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AESURFS ID LABEL LIST1 LIST2
Example:
AESURFS 6001 ELEV 6002 6003
Describer Meaning
ID Controller identification number, see Remark 1. (Integer > 0)
LABEL Controller name, see Remark 1. (Character)
LISTi Identification number of a SET1 entry that lists the structural grid points that are
associated with this component of this control surface. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. The LABEL on the AESURFS entry must match one on an AESURF entry. The ID is ignored.
2. The mass of the GRID points listed on the SETi entries is used to compute the mass moment of
inertia of the control surface about its i-th hinge line. The presence of these data will allow the hinge
moments to include the inertial forces in the computations. These data are optional, and, if omitted,
result in hinge moments which include only the applied, aeroelastically corrected, forces.
3. These data will be associated to a structural superelement by grid list or partitioned SUPER=<seid>
if the AESURFS is defined in the main bulk data section.
Main Index
AETRIA3 1183
Triangular Aerodynamic Element Connection
AETRIA3 Triangular Aerodynamic Element Connection
Defines the connectivity of a triangular aerodynamic element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AETRIA3 EID CMPID G1 G2 G3
Example:
AETRIA3 3768 8 368 872 999
Describer Meaning
CMPID Aerodynamic Component Identification Number. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid Point Identification Numbers of Connection Points. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
Main Index
1184 ALIASM
Alias Element Formulation in SOL 600
ALIASM Alias Element Formulation in SOL 600
Allows selected elements which normally use a default formulation to be aliased to a different formulation in
SOL 600.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ALIASM TYPE ID1 THRU ID2 BY ID
Example:
ALIASM 139 101 THRU 300 BY 2
138 501 THRU 600
Describer Meaning
ITYPE Desired element formulation type. (Integer; no Default.) See Marc Vol B for a list of
element types in the example, type 139 is a bilinear 3-node thin shell. ITYPE = -1
means to use the companion reduced integration element formulation (if it exists)
default full integration formulation. (See Note 4)
ID1 Starting element number to be aliased. (Integer; no Default)
THRU Enter “THRU” if a range of elements is to be specified. (Character; no Default)
ID2 Ending element number to be aliased. (Integer; no Default)
BY Enter “BY” if the range of elements is not to be incremented by one.
ID3 Element “increment by” value. (Integer; Default = 1; must be positive)
Remarks:
1. This entry should only be used if the Marc GEOMETRY entries are identical for the original and
new element types.
2. This entry may be repeated as often as desired to identify all elements requiring aliases.
3. ITYPE and ID1 are required fields. All other data fields may be blank.
4. This entry may not be combined with parameters MRALIAS, MALIAS02, MALIAS03, etc.
5. If all elements of a particular type should have alias values, it may be easier to use parameters
MRALIAS, MALIAS02, MALIAS03, etc. than this entry.
6. For ITYPE = -1, the following reduced integration element types will be used:
Main Index
ALIASM 1185
Alias Element Formulation in SOL 600
Original Reduced Integration

Type Type Description
26 53 Plane stress 8-node quad
27 54 Plane strain 8-node quad
28 55 Axisymmetric 8-node quad
29 56 Generalized plane strain 8+2 node quad
21 57 20-node brick
32 58 Plane strain Herrmann quad
33 59 Axisymmetric Herrmann 8-node quad
34 60 Plane strain Herrmann 8+2 node quad
35 61 Herrmann 20-node brick
62 73 Axisymmetric 8-node quad, arbitrary
63 74 Axisymmetric Herrman 8-node quad
3 114 Plane stress quad
11 115 Plane strain quad
10, 20 116 Axisymmetric ring (quad)
7 117 8-node brick
80 118 Plane strain incompressible quad
82, 83 119 Axisymmetric incompressible ring
84 120 8-node incompressible brick
75 140 4-node quad
Main Index
1186 ASET
Degrees-of-Freedom for the a-set
ASET Degrees-of-Freedom for the a-set
Defines degrees-of-freedom in the analysis set (a-set).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ASET ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3 ID4 C4
Example:
ASET 16 2 23 3516 1 4
Describer Meaning
IDi Grid or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component numbers. (Integer zero or blank for scalar points, or any unique
combinations of the Integers 1 through 6 for grid points with no embedded blanks.)
Remarks:
1. Degrees-of-freedom specified on this entry form members of the mutually exclusive a-set. They may
not be specified on other entries that define mutually exclusive sets. See Degree-of-Freedom Sets,
1065 for a list of these entries.
2. When ASET, ASET1, QSET, and/or QSET1 entries are present, all degrees-of-freedom not
otherwise constrained (e.g., SPCi or MPC entries) will be placed in the omitted set (o-set).
3. In nonlinear analysis, all degrees-of-freedom attached to nonlinear elements must be placed in the
a-set. In other words, if the ASET or ASET1 entry is specified then all nonlinear degrees-of-freedom
must be specified on the ASET or ASET1 entry.
Main Index
ASET1 1187
Degrees-of-Freedom For the a-set, Alternate Form of ASET Entry
ASET1 Degrees-of-Freedom For the a-set, Alternate Form of ASET Entry
Defines degrees-of-freedom in the analysis set (a-set).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ASET1 C ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7
ID8 ID9 ID10 -etc.-
Example:
ASET1 345 2 1 3 10 9 6 5
7 8
Alternate Format and Example:

ASET1 C ID1 “THRU” ID2
ASET1 123456 7 THRU 109
Describer Meaning
C Component number. (Integer zero or blank for scalar points, or any unique
IDi Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; for THRU option,
ID1 < ID2)
Remarks:
1. Degrees-of-freedom specified on this entry form members of the a-set that is exclusive from other sets
defined by Bulk Data entries. See Degree-of-Freedom Sets, 1065 for a list of these entries.
2. When ASET, ASET1, QSET, and/or QSET1 entries are present, all degrees-of-freedom not
otherwise constrained (e.g., SPCi or MPC entries) will be placed in the omitted set (o-set).
3. If the alternate format is used, all points in the sequence ID1 through ID2 are not required to exist,
but there must be at least one degree-of-freedom in the a-set for the model, or a fatal error will result.
Any points implied in the THRU that do not exist will collectively produce a warning message but
will otherwise be ignored.
4. In nonlinear analysis, all degrees-of-freedom attached to nonlinear elements must be placed in the
a-set. In other words, if the ASET or ASET1 entry is specified then all nonlinear degrees-of-freedom
must be specified on the ASET or ASET1 entry.
Main Index
1188 ATBACC
Acceleration Field applied to ATB Segments- SOL 700
ATBACC Acceleration Field applied to ATB Segments- SOL 700
Defines an acceleration field that will be applied to ATB segments. Used in SOL700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ATBACC LID SCALE NX NY NZ
+ NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAMEi
Example:
ATBACC 32 386.088 1.0 0.0 0.0 0 0
+ LT MT UT N H RUL RLL
Field Content
LID Number of a set of loads. (Integer > 0; required)
SCALE ATBACC scale factor. (Real ≥ 0.0; default=1.0)
NX, NY, NZ Components of gravity vector. At least one component must be nonzero. (Real;
default=0.0)
NAMEi Name of an ATB segment as given in the first field of a B.2 entry in the ATB input
file. (Character; required)
Remarks:
1. The acceleration is defined as:
α ( t ) = T ( t ).SCALE. N
where SCALE is the acceleration scale factor; is the vector defined by NX, NY, and NZ; is the value
interpolated at time from the table referenced by the TLOADn entry.
2. LID must be referenced by a TLOADn entry.
3. The type field on the TLOADn entry must be set to zero.
4. More than one ATBACC acceleration field can be defined per problem.
5. This acceleration field is intended to apply a crash pulse to ATB segments that define a crash dummy.
The acceleration is multiplied by the mass of the segment and the resulting force is added as an
external force.
6. To compare the accelerations of the ATB segments to experiments, the crash pulse needs to be
subtracted from the total acceleration. The acceleration of the segments as defined on the H1 entries
in the ATB input file are automatically corrected.
Main Index
ATBJNT 1189
Interface to ATB Joints- SOL 700
ATBJNT Interface to ATB Joints- SOL 700
This entry can only be used together with the ATBSEG entries that this joint connects. The ATBSEG entries
overwrite the position and orientation of the ATB segments as specified in the ATB input file. The ATBJNT
entry can be used to create a Bulk Data file containing elements and grid points to visualize the ATB segment
together with its joints. This visualization of the joints makes it possible to position the ATB model in any
available preprocessor. Used in SOL700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ATBJNT ID NAME
+ G0 G1 G2 G3 EID1 EID2 EID3
+ G4 G5 G6 G7 EID4 EID5 EID6
Example:
ATBJNT 1 HN
+ 1010 1011 1012 1013 1004 1005 1006
+ 2010 2011 2012 2013 2004 2005 2006
Field Content
LID Unique ATBJNT number. (Integer > 0; required)
NAME Name of an ATB joint as given in the first field of a B.3 entry in the ATB input file.
(Character; required)
G0~G7 An ATB joint connects two segments. A local joint coordinate system is attached to
each of these two segments. The position and orientation of these two coordinate
systems relative to the segment coordinate systems is given on entry B.3 in the ATB
input file. For each joint (J = 1, NJNT) a B.3 entry is defined in the ATB input file.
The joint J connects the segment JNT(J) as given on the B.3 entry and the segment J
+ 1. SOL700 finds the two segments that are connected by the joint with name =
NAME. The grid points G0-G3 and G4-G7 define the joint coordinate systems for
the segments JNT(J) and J + 1, respectively. (Integer > 0; required)
G0 located at the origin of the joint coordinate system for the ATB segment
JNT (J)
G1 located on the local x-axis.
G2 located on the local y-axis.
G3 located on the local z-axis.
G4 located at the origin of the joint coordinate system for the ATB segment J
+ 1.
Main Index
1190 ATBJNT
Interface to ATB Joints- SOL 700
Field Content
Remarks:
All elements related to an ATB segment refer to the same material number. This material number is defined
on the ATBSEG entry. If the material is defined to be rigid by means of a MATRIG entry, all elements can
be easily connected to the contact ellipsoid of the ATB segment by means of METHOD=RELLIPS in
BCTABLE or BCONPRG entry referencing the MATRIG entry. In this way, all elements related to an ATB
segment move together with the ATB segment during the analyses and can be postprocessed.
Main Index
ATBSEG 1191
Interface to ATB Segments- SOL 700
ATBSEG Interface to ATB Segments- SOL 700
Defines the position and orientation of the ATB segments. The position and orientation as specified on the
G.2 and G.3 entries in the ATB input file will be overruled by the definitions given here.
This entry can be used to create a Bulk Data file containing elements and grid points to visualize the ATB
segment, together with the contact ellipsoid and the joints it is connected by. See also ATBJNT and
DYPARAM, ATBSEG. Used in SOL700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ATBSEG ID NAME COVER NUMELM GSTART ESTART MID PIDCOV
+ G0 G1 G2 G3 EID1 EID2 EID3 PIDCG
Example:
ATBSEG 1 HEAD YES 100 1000 1000 1000
+ 1010 1011 1012 1013 1001 1002 1003 1001
Field Content
ID Unique ATBSEG number. (Integer > 0; required)
NAME Name of an ATB segment as given in the first field of a B.2 entry in the ATB input
file. (Character; required)
G0~G3 The grid points span the local coordinate system of the ATB segment. G0~G3 are used
by SOL700 to overwrite the initial position and orientation of the segments as
specified in the ATB input file. EID1-EID3 are about how to generate the grid points
for an existing ATB input file. (Integer > 0; required)
G0 located at the origin of the ATB segment.
Main Index
1192 AXIC
Conical Shell Problem Flag
AXIC Conical Shell Problem Flag
Defines the existence of an axisymmetric conical shell problem.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AXIC H
Example:
AXIC 15
Describer Meaning
H Highest harmonic defined for the problem. (0 ≤ Integer < 998)
Remarks:
1. Only one AXIC entry is allowed. When the AXIC entry is present, most other entries are not allowed.
The types that are allowed with the AXIC entry are listed below:
CCONEAX MATT1 SPCADD

DAREA MOMAX SPCAX
DELAY MOMENT SUPAX
DLOAD MPCADD TABDMP1
DMI MPCAX TABLED1
DMIG NOLIN1 TABLED2
DPHASE NOLIN2 TABLED3
EIGB NOLIN3 TABLED4
EIGC NOLIN4 TABLE11
EIGP NSM TABLEM2
EIGR NSM1 TABLEM3
EIGRL NSMADD TABLEM4
EPOINT OMITAX TEMPAX
FORCE PARAM TF
FORCEAX PCONEAX TIC
FREQ POINTAX TLOAD1
FREQ1 PRESAX TLOAD2
FREQ2 RINGAX TSTEP
Main Index
AXIC 1193
Conical Shell Problem Flag
GRAV RFORCE
LOAD RLOAD1
MAT1 RLOAD2
MAT2 SECTAX
2. For a discussion of the conical shell element, see the Conical Shell Element (RINGAX) (p. 132) in the .
Main Index
1194 AXIF
Fluid Related Axisymmetric Parameters
AXIF Fluid Related Axisymmetric Parameters
Defines basic parameters and the existence of an axisymmetric fluid analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AXIF CID G DRHO DB NOSYM F
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 -etc.-
Example:
AXIF 2 32.2 0.12 2.4+5 YES
1 2 3 4 7 10
Alternate Formats and Examples of Continuation Data:

N1 “THRU” Ni
0 THRU 10
N1 “THRU” Ni “STEP” NS
0 THRU 9 STEP 3
AXIF 100 -386.0 0.0 NO

0 THRU 50 STEP 5
52
54 THRU 57
61 THRU 65
68 71 72 75
81 92
Describer Meaning
CID Fluid coordinate system identification number. (Integer > 0)
G Value of gravity for fluid elements in the axial direction. (Real)
DRHO Default mass density for fluid elements. (Real > 0.0 or blank)
DB Default bulk modulus for fluid elements. (Real)
NOSYM Request for nonsymmetric (sine) terms of series. (Character: “YES” or “NO”)
F Flag specifying harmonics. (Blank if harmonic is specified, or Character: “NONE”)
Main Index
AXIF 1195
Fluid Related Axisymmetric Parameters
Describer Meaning
Ni Harmonic numbers for the solution, represented by an increasing sequence of integers.
On continuation entries, without the “THRU” option, blank fields are ignored.
“THRU” implies all numbers including upper and lower harmonics.
(0 < Integer < 100, or Character: “THRU”, “STEP” or blank)
NS Every NSth step of the harmonic numbers specified in the “THRU” range is used for
solution. If field 5 is “STEP”, Ni = i*NS+N1 where i is the number of harmonics.
(Integer)
Remarks:
1. Only one AXIF entry is allowed.
2. CID must reference a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system.
3. Positive gravity (+G) implies that the direction of free fall is in the -Z direction of the fluid coordinate
system.
4. The DRHO value replaces blank values of RHO on the FSLIST, BDYLIST and CFLUIDi entries.
5. The DB value replaces blank values of B on the CFLUIDi entries. If the CFLUIDi entry is blank and
DB is zero or blank, the fluid is incompressible.
6. If NOSYM = “YES”, both sine and cosine terms are specified. If NOSYM = “NO”, only cosine terms
are specified.
7. If F = “NONE”, no harmonics are specified, no fluid elements are necessary, and no continuations
may be present. In this case, AXIS = “FLUID” should not be specified in the Case Control Section.
8. Superelements cannot be used.
Main Index
1196 AXSLOT
Axisymmetric Slot Analysis Parameters
AXSLOT Axisymmetric Slot Analysis Parameters
Defines the harmonic index and the default values for acoustic analysis entries.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AXSLOT RHOD BD N WD MD
Example:
AXSLOT 0.003 1.5+2 3 0.75 6
Describer Meaning
RHOD Default density of fluid in units of mass/volume. (Real > 0.0 or blank)
BD Default bulk modulus of fluid in units of force/volume ratio change. (Real ≥ 0.0 or
blank)
N Harmonic index number. (Integer > 0 or blank)
WD Default slot width. (Real > 0.0 or blank)
MD Default number of slots. (Integer > 0 or blank)
Remarks:
1. Only one AXSLOT entry is allowed.
2. If any of the RHO, B, W, and M fields on the GRID, SLBDY, CAXIFi, and CSLOTi entries are
blank, then values must be specified for the RHOD, BD and MD fields.
3. If the number of slots (M) is different in different regions of the cavity, this fact may be indicated on
the CSLOTi and SLBDY entries. If the number of slots is zero, no matrices for CSLOTi elements
are generated.
4. BD= 0.0 implies the fluid is incompressible.
Main Index
BAROR 1197
CBAR Entry Default Values
BAROR CBAR Entry Default Values
Defines default values for field 3 and fields 6 through 8 of the CBAR entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BAROR PID X1 X2 X3 OFFT
Example:
BAROR 39 0.6 2.9 -5.87 GOG

BAROR PID G0 OFFT
BAROR 39 18 GOG
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of the PBAR entry. (Integer > 0 or blank)
X1, X2, X3 Components of orientation vector v , from GA, in the displacement coordinate system
at GA (default), or in the basic coordinate system. See Remark 5. (Real)
G0 Alternate method to supply the orientation vector v , using grid point G0. The
direction of v is from GA to G0. v is then translated to End A. (Integer > 0; G0 ≠ GA
or GB on CBAR entry)
OFFT Offset vector interpretation flag. See Remark 5. (Character or blank)
Remarks:
1. The contents of fields on this entry will be assumed for any CBAR entry whose corresponding fields
are blank.
2. Only one BAROR entry is allowed.
3. For an explanation of bar element geometry, see the Three-Node Beam Element (CBEAM3) (p. 57) in the .
4. If field 6 is an integer, then G0 is used to define the orientation vector and X2 and X3 must be blank.
If field 6 is real or blank, then X1, X2, and X3 are used.
5. OFFT is a character string code that describes how the offset and orientation vector components are
to be interpreted. By default (string input is GGG or blank), the offset vectors are measured in the
displacement coordinate systems at grid points A and B and the orientation vector is measured in the
displacement coordinate system of grid point A. At user option, the offset vectors can be measured in
an offset coordinate system relative to grid points A and B, and the orientation vector can be measured
in the basic system as indicated in the following table:
Main Index
1198 BAROR
CBAR Entry Default Values
String Orientation Vector End A Offset End B Offset

GGG Global Global Global
BGG Basic Global Global
GGO Global Global Offset
BGO Basic Global Offset
GOG Global Offset Global
BOG Basic Offset Global
GOO Global Offset Offset
BOO Basic Offset Offset
Any attempt to specify invalid combinations results in a bulk data entry input error message. For
example, a value of OOO (indicating offset and orientation vectors are specified in an offset reference
system) results in a fatal error since the orientation vector cannot be specified in an offset system. The
offset system x-axis is defined from GA to GB. The orientation vector v and the offset system x-axis
are then used to define the z and y axes of the offset system. (Note: The character “O” in the table
replaces the obsolete character “E”.)
Main Index
BARRIER 1199
Barrier for Eulerian Transport
BARRIER Barrier for Eulerian Transport
Defines a barrier for transport in a Eulerian mesh. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BARRIER BID BCID MESH DIR SKFRIC
XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX ZMIN ZMAX
Example:
BARRIER 100 20
Describer Meaning
BID Unique barrier number. (Integer > 0; Required)
BCID Number of a set of BCSEG entries that define the element faces that are barriers to
Eulerian transport. See Remark 4. (Integer > 0)
MESH Denotes the ID of the Euler mesh to which the boundary condition has to be applied.
See Remark 5. (Integer > 0)
DIR Allowed values are NEGX, POSX, NEGY, POSY, NEGZ and POSZ. See Remark 6.
(Character)
SKFRIC Skin friction value. See Remark 8. (Real ≥ 0.0, 0.0)
XMIN-ZMAX Defines a square by specifying the ranges of the x,y,z coordinates. For a square in for
example the x-plane it is required that either XMIN = XMAX or that XMAX is left
blank. See Remark 7. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Material cannot pass through any of the faces referenced.
2. Barriers can be modeled on the edge as well as the inside of an Eulerian mesh.
3. BARRIER overrules FLOW and FLOWT definition.
4. BCID is optional. If used, all other inputs are ignored. If not used, the barrier can be defined by either
using DIR or by using XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, etc.
5. The MESH-ID is only used when multiple Euler domains have been defined and when BCID is
blank. If multiple Euler domains have been defined but if the MESH-ID is blank all Euler domains
will be considered in assigning the boundary condition.
6. DIR is optional. It will only be used when BCID is blank. When DIR is used XMIN, XMAX, YMIN
etc. are ignored.
Main Index
1200 BARRIER
Barrier for Eulerian Transport
7. XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, etc are only used when both BCID and DIR are blank. The XMIN,YMIN
option defines an area on the MESH BOX boundary as shown in Figure 9-1. If neither the MIN nor
MAX value has been set the default value is respectively -1E+20 and 1e+20 for the MIN and MAX
value. If the MIN value has been set the default value of the MAX value is the MIN value.
8. The skin friction is defined as:
τw
C f = ---------------------2
0.5 ⋅ ρu
Here τ w denotes the shear friction in an Euler element adjacent to a couple surface segment where ρ
is the density and u is the tangential relative velocity in the Euler element that is adjacent to a couple
surface segment. SKFRIC will only be used when VISC has been set on either an EOSGAM or an
EOSPOL entry. If VISC has been set and if SKFRIC has not been set then a no slip condition will
be prescribed at the interface between fluid and structure.
9. Internal barriers can only be defined on existing Euler element faces using the BCID option. They
cannot be defined by using the XMIN,YMIN option.
Figure 9-1 MESH BOX boundary
Main Index
BCAUTOP 1201
Automatic contact generation property.
BCAUTOP Automatic contact generation property.
Specifies parameters for automatic contact generation (ACG). With ACG, the code automatically generates
the contact bodies based on the grids and elements given, then establishes the contact pairs in which two
contact bodies are in contact or may come into contact potentially based on the DISTANCE tolerance. Please
refer to the section of Chapter 9: Contact, SOL 400 User’s Guide for details.
Format:
etc
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCAUTOP PID Param1 Value1 Param2 Value2 Param3 Value3
Param4 Value4 etc
Example:
BCAUTOP CTYPE PGLUE DISTANCE 0.1
Describer Meaning
PID Reserved for future use (integer >=0, default is 0)
Param(i) Name of a parameter. Allowable names are given below (Character).
Value(i) Value of the parameter. See below (Real, Integer or character). See Remark 3.
Remarks:
1. Only one entry of BCAUTOP is allowed in V2019.0
2. This entry does not have effect if BCONTACT=AUTO is not present in case control section.
3. The parameters in this entry may be divided into two types – primary parameters and secondary
parameters. The primary parameters are the most important parameters for build of contact bodies,
match of contact pairs. The secondary parameters are helpful for user to provide the more detail and
further requirement for contact model establishment and contact analysis with automatic contact
generation. The primary and secondary parameters are listed in the tables as follows.
Main Index
1202 BCAUTOP
Table 9-1 Primary Parameters in BCAUTOP
Describer Meaning
CTYPE Characters, can be one of TOUCH(default), PGLUE, SGLUE and GGLUE. If it is
specified in both sides of this entry and case control BCONTACT=AUTO, this will
be used.
DISTANCE Distance tolerance of contact pair. If the distance between any two points which are
belonging to two different contact bodies is less than this value, these two contact
bodies are recognized to be a contact pair. Default value of DISTANCE is 100 times
of contact ERROR tolerance. ERROR may be defined in either BCAUTOP or left
blank.
With default of ERROR, the code calculates ERROR as the smallest one of the
following values:
1. 1/20 of the smallest nonzero element dimension (plates or solids) in the contact
body;
2. 1/4 of the thinnest shell thickness in the contact body.
Please see BCPARA for ERROR definition in detail.
ESET ID of SET1 to specify element ids consisting contact bodies. If it is not specified, all
elements in the model will be used. Only one of ESET, SeedESet, SeedGSet and
PropSet can be specified in the same entry.
SeedESet ID of SET1 to specify element ids as seeds of contact bodies. The program searches
elements as contact bodies from the seed elements. Only one of ESET,SeedESet,
SeedGSet and PropSet can be specified.
SeedGSet ID of SET1 to specify grids ids as seeds of contact bodies. The program searches
elements as contact bodies from the elements connecting to the seed grid ids. Only one
of ESET,SeedESet, SeedGSet and PropSet can be specified.
PropSet ID of SET1 to specify property ids to construct contact bodies. Only one of
ESET,SeedESet, SeedGSet and PropSet can be specified.
RigidSet ID of SET1 to specify IDs of rigid bodies to be in contact
Main Index
BCAUTOP 1203
Table 9-2 Secondary Parameters in BCAUTOP
Describer Meaning
BEAMCNT Characters, YES or NO (default). If YES, set the option of considering beam contact
C in the formula of COPTS/COPTM in BCONPRG will be 10. If EDGECNT is yes
also, C will be 11. If NO, above values will be default in BCONPRG and BCPARA.
BEAMB in BCAPRA is set to 1 regardless of this option.
BEAMCAP Characters, FREEEND(default) or NO. If set to FREEEND(default), BCSCAP
entries will be added to free end of beam elements, if NO, no BCSCAP will be added.
It is mainly used for contact pair detection where the contact occurs at free beam end.
DIMENS Characters, 2D or 3D (default), dimension of contact bodies.
EDGECNT Characters, YES or NO (default). If YES, set the option of considering edge contact.
If YES, C in the formula of COPTS/COPTM in BCONPRG will be 10, and BEAMB
in BCPARA will be 1. If BEAMCNT is YES also, C will be 11. If NO, above values
are default in BCONPRG and BCPARA. BEAMB in BCAPRA is set to 1 regardless
of this option.
FTYPE Characters, BLCOUL/BLSHEAR; or Integer, 6 / 7. BLCOUL or 6 is Bilinear
Coulomb friction. BLSHEAR or 7 is Bilinear Shear friction. Default is No Friction.
FRIC Friction coefficient. If the value is an integer, it represents the ID of a TABLEM1,
TABLEM2 or TABL3D, i.e., a temperature-dependent or multi-dimensional table.
(Real ≥ 0.0 or Integer > 0; Default = 0.0)
IGNTHK Character, YES or NO (default), Ignore thickness of shell. If YES, the B in the formula
of COPTS/COPTM in BCONPRG will be set to 6, see remark 2 of BCONPRG. If
NO, B is the default in COPTS/COPTM.
INISTF Character, YES or NO (default). Set the option of initial stress free contact. If yes,
IGLUE of BCONPRG will be set to 1.
SelfCont Characters, YES or NO (default). Option of self-contact.
Note: Please note that all the parameters in BCPARA, BCONPRP, BCONPRG and
BCBDPRP entries may be used in BCAUTOP directly. For the detailed list of these
parameters, please refer to BCPARA, BCONPRP, BCONPRG and BCBDPRP.
Main Index
1204 BCBDPRP
Contact Body Parameters in SOLs 101 and 400
BCBDPRP Contact Body Parameters in SOLs 101 and 400
Defines contact body parameters used in SOLs 101 and 400 only. The parameters defined here are referenced
by the BCBODY1 entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCBDPRP PID PARAM1 VAL1 PARAM2 VAL2 PARAM3 VAL3
PARAM4 VAL4 PARAM5 VAL5 -etc.-
Example:
BCBDPRP 90 FRIC 0.05 ISTYP 0
Describer Meaning
PID Parameter identification number (Integer > 0).
PARAMi Name of a parameter. Allowable names are given in Table 9-3 (Character).
VALi Value of a parameter. See Table 9-3 (Real or Integer).
Main Index
BCBDPRP 1205
Table 9-3 Contact Body Parameters in SOLs 101 and 400
Name Description, Type and Value (Default is 0 for integer, 0.0 for Real Unless
Otherwise Indicated)
BNC Exponent associated with the natural convective heat flow for near field behavior. (Real or
Integer; Default = 1.0). If Real, the value entered is the exponent associated with the near
field nonlinear convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1
OR TABLEM2 entry specifying the exponent associated with the near field nonlinear
convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the exponent associated
with the near field nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature and possibly other
variables.
BNCE Exponent associated with natural convection heat flow to the environment. (Real or Integer;
Default = 1.0). If Real, the value entered is the exponent associated with the environment
natural convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or
TABLEM2 entry specifying the exponent associated with the environment natural
convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the exponent associated
with the environment natural convection coefficient vs temperature and possibly other
variables.
BNL Exponent associated with the natural convective heat flow for near field behavior. (Real or
Integer; Default = 1.0) If Real, the value entered is the exponent associated with the near field
nonlinear convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 OR
TABLEM2 entry specifying the exponent associated with the near field nonlinear convection
coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the exponent associated with the
near field nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature and possibly other variables.
BNLE Exponent associated with the natural convective heat flow to the environment. (Real or
Integer; Default = 1.0) If Real, the value entered is the exponent associated with the
environment nonlinear convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a
TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the exponent associated with the environment
nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the exponent
associated with the environment nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature and
possibly other variables.
CFILM Heat transfer coefficient (film) to environment. (Real or Integer, Default = 0.0) If Real, the
value entered is the film coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or
TABLEM2 entry specifying the heat transfer coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry
specifying the film coefficient vs temperature and possibly other variables.
CMB Heat capacity of the rigid body, when entered as a geometric entity with an associated scalar
point. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0) For nonzero values, a grounded CDAMP4 element with
the scalar point on its first side is generated internally which obtains this capacity.
CMS Heat capacity of the environment, when associated with a scalar point. (Real > 0.0;
Default = 0.0) For nonzero values a grounded CDAMP4 element with the scalar point on its
first side is generated internally which obtains this capacity.
COPTB Flag to indicate how body surfaces may contact. See Remark 2. on the BCONPRG entry.
(Integer; Default = 0)
Main Index
1206 BCBDPRP
EMISS Emissivity for radiation to the environment or near thermal radiation. (Real or Integer;
Default = 0.0) If real, the value entered is the emissivity. If Integer, the value entered is the ID
of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the emissivity vs temperature or a TABL3D
entry specifying the emissivity vs temperature and possibly other variables.
FRIC Friction coefficient. If the value is an integer, it represents the ID of a TABLEM1, TABLEM2
or TABL3D, i.e., a temperature-dependent or multi-dimensional table. (Real ≥ 0.0 or Integer
> 0; Default = 0.0)
When a grid point contacts a rigid body, the coefficient of friction associated with the rigid
body is used. When a grid point contacts a deformable body, the average of the coefficients
for the two bodies are used.
In general, entering the friction coefficient for a contact body pair via a BCTABLE and
BCONECT/BCONPRP is strongly recommended.
HBL Separation distance dependent thermal convection coefficient. (Real or Integer; Default =
0.0) If Real, the value entered is the separation distance dependent thermal convection
coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry
specifying the convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the
convection coefficient vs temperature and possibly other variables.
HCT Contact heat transfer coefficient. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0) If Real, the value entered is
the contact heat transfer coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or
TABLEM2 entry specifying the contact heat transfer coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D
entry specifying the contact heat transfer coefficient vs temperature and possibly other
variables. See Remark 3.
HCV Convection coefficient for near field behavior. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0) If Real, the
value entered is the near field convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of
a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the near field convection coefficient vs
temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the near field convection coefficient vs
temperature and possibly other variables.
HNC Natural convection coefficient for near field behavior. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0) If Real,
the value entered is the near field natural convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered
is the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the near field natural convection
coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the near field natural convection
coefficient vs temperature and possibly other variables.
HNCE Natural convection coefficient for heat flow to the environment. (Real or Integer,
Default = 0.0) If Real, the value entered is the environment natural convection coefficient. If
Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the
environment natural convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the
environment natural convection coefficient vs temperature and possibly other variables.
HNL Heat transfer coefficient for nonlinear convective heat flow for near field behavior. (Real or
Integer; Default = 0.0) If Real, the value entered is the near field nonlinear convection
specifying the near field nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry
specifying the near field nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature and possibly other
variables.
Main Index
BCBDPRP 1207
HNLE Heat transfer coefficient for nonlinear convective heat flow to the environment. (Real > 0.0
or Integer; Default = 0.0) If Real, the value entered is the environment nonlinear convection
specifying the environment nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D
entry specifying the environment nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature and
IDSPL Controls geometric smoothing of boundary of deformable body option. (Integer; Default =
0)
=0 or blank, discrete geometric representation.
>0 the surface of the body is smoothed out with splines (2D) or Coons surfaces (3D) and
discontinuity edges/corners are being defined by using abs (IDSPL) as the ID of the BLSEG
entries. If BLSEG with ID=abs(IDSPL) does not exist, the whole body is smoothed and there
are no user-defined discontinuity corners(2D) or edges(3D). (See Remark 1.
<0 Same as IDSPL>0. Furthermore, additional discontinuity edges are being generated
automatically if the difference in patch normals exceeds the value of SANGLE.
ISTYP Check of contact conditions. (Integer > 0; Default = 0 for all solutions)
ISTYP is not necessary in segment-to-segment contact.
For a deformable body:
=0 check each body, versus the other.
=2 double-sided contact with automatic optimization of contact constraint equations (this
option is known as “optimized contact”).
Note that ISTYP is supported with ISEARCH=0 in BCTABLE or BCONPRG only.

ITYPE An option entry for heat transfer only (Integer; no Default)
1 - Heat sink (rigid body)
2 - Deformable body (with heat conduction)
4 - Heat conduction body (heat-rigid body) (Not supported in SOL 400 coupled thermal-
mechanical analysis, i.e. the same contact body with ITYPE=4 cannot be used in mechanical
analysis of SOL 400.)
Main Index
1208 BCBDPRP
MIDNOD Mid-side node projection flag. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)

When MIDNOD > 0 and IDSPL ≠ 0, the mid-side grid of quadratic elements are projected
onto the selected spline surfaces. This operation is performed before the contact process starts
and it may change the location of grids in contact bodies. It may operate in combination with
the initial stress-free contact. Only used if IDSPL is not zero.
SANGLE Threshold for automatic discontinuity detection in degrees. (Real; Default = 60.0) Used for
geometric smoothing option in SOL 400 only. SANGLE is not used and is always set to 0.0
when IDSPL= 0.
TBODY Body temperature. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0) If Real, the value entered is the body
temperature. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLED1 or TABLED2 entry
specifying the body temperature vs time or a TABL3D entry specifying the body temperature
vs time and possibly other variables. When entered as a negative integer, its absolute value is
a scalar point identification number. If a scalar point is specified on this entry, it need not be
defined on an SPOINT entry. See Remark 8.
TSINK Environment sink temperature. (Real or Integer, Default = 0.0) If Real, the value entered is
the sink temperature. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLED1 or TABLED2
entry specifying temperature vs time or a TABL3D entry specifying the sink temperature vs
time and possibly other variables. When entered as a negative integer its absolute value is a
scalar point identification number. If a scalar point is specified on this entry, it need not be
defined on an SPOINT entry. See Remark 8.
Remarks:
1. When IDSPL is greater than 1, these nodes are entered in pairs. For a quad surface (for example,
CQUAD4 or edge of a CHEXA) usually 4 sets of nodal pairs are needed to describe the surface. For
example, a CQUAD4 with grid numbering 1,2,4,3 would need pairs of nodes, 1,2 2,4 4,3 3,1. The
nodal pairs may be entered in any order. See MSC Nastran Nonlinear User’s Guide, Chapter 9,
Contact for more details.
2. For hard contact, with HGLUE=1 (see BCONPRP for the meaning of HGLUE):
a. The temperature of the contacting grid is tied to the temperatures of the contacted element face
or the temperature of the rigid geometry when it has a scalar point associated with it.
b. The temperature of the contacting grid is set to the rigid geometry temperature when it has no
scalar point associated with it.
Note: “Glued” thermal contact can result in overshoot of the temperatures at the interface, in
particular, if two bodies that have non-uniform initial temperatures are placed in contact. The
overshoot effect may be damped somewhat if one uses a near contact distance with some
convective heat transfer.
3. For hard contact, with HGLUE=0:

The convective heat flow per unit area over the two interfaces is given by:
Main Index
BCBDPRP 1209
q = HCT ⋅ ( T A – T B )
where TA is the contacting grid temperature and TB is the face temperature in the contact point in
case of a meshed body or the TBODY temperature in case of a rigid geometry.
It is recommended to enter the HCT value on the BCONPRP Bulk Data entry, since it generally
applies to body pairs and is not a property of a single body.
4. For near contact:
q = HCV ⋅ ( T A – T B )+
BNC
HNC ⋅ ( T A – T B ) +
BNL BNL
HNL ⋅ ( T A – TB )+
4 4
σ ⋅ EMISS ⋅ ( T A – T B )+
dist dist
HCT ⋅  1 – -------------------------- + HBL ⋅ -------------------------- ( T A – T B )
 DQNEAR DQNEAR
where the last term is only activated when HBL ≠ 0, TA is the contacting grid temperature and TB is
the face temperature in the contact point in case of a meshed body or the TBODY temperature in case
of a rigid geometry.
It is recommended to enter the near contact heat transfer coefficients and the corresponding
exponents on the BCONPRP Bulk Data entry, since they generally apply to body pairs and are not
properties of a single body.
5. For no contact:
q = CFILM ⋅ ( T A – T SINK )+
BNCE
HNCE ⋅ ( T A – T SINK ) +
BNLE BNLE
HNLE ⋅ ( T A – T SINK )+
4 4
σ ⋅ EMISS ⋅ ( T A – T SINK )
6. The heat transfer coefficients and associated exponents can all be temperature dependent, when they
are entered as an integer value. This integer value is the table ID of a TABLEM1, TABLEM2 or
TABL3D entry (formulas are not supported on TABL3D).
7. The TSINK and TBODY temperatures can be time dependent when they are entered as a positive
integer value. This integer value is the table ID of a TABLED1, TABLED2 or TABL3D entry
(formulas are not supported on TABL3D).
8. TBODY entries only apply to rigid bodies (i.e., RIGID as the BEHAV value in BCBODY1 entry).
TSINK entries only apply to deformable bodies (meshed regions with DEFORM or HEAT as the
BEHAV value in BCBODY1 entry).
Main Index
1210 BCBMRAD
Modify Equivalent Radius for Beam-to-Beam Contact
BCBMRAD Modify Equivalent Radius for Beam-to-Beam Contact
Allows the equivalent radius in beam-to-beam contact to be different for each beam cross section in SOL 101,
SOL 400 and SOL 600. The BCBMRAD entry is only used for node-to-segment beam-to-beam contact. For
segment-to-segment beam contact, the beam cross section geometry is defined via PBARL or PBEAML
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCBMRAD RADIUS TYPE ID1 ID2 THRU ID3 BY N
ID4 THRU ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8 ID9
Example 1:
BCBMRAD 2.5 EID 100 20 THRU 300 BY 2
200 3457 8456 4712 1000 THRU 2000
3.0 4112 THRU 4700
2.8 BODY 502 517 3459
Example 2:
BCBMRAD 2.5 ALL
2.8 EID 2567 1240 THRU 1760
Describer Meaning
RADIUS Equivalent radius to be used for beam-beam contact problems. See Remark 6. (Real; no
Default)
TYPE The attribute of all following ID’s. (Character; Default = “EID”)
EID Defines all the following entries are the IDs of beam-type elements.
BODY Defines all the following entries are the IDs of BCBODYs.
ALL Defines the default RADIUS for all beam-type elements.
IDi ID of a beam-type element, CROD, CBAR, CBEAM and CBEAM3, or a BCBODY
with the specified radius. (Integer; no Default)
Remarks:
1. Multiple BCBMRAD Bulk Data entries, which are open-ended are allowed in one file.
2. In each entry of BCBMRAD, there is only one RADIUS input allows, on the field 2. From the field
4 to the rest fields, including all continuation entries, user can input all ID's in any combination of
the following 3 basic formats
• ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ...
• ID1 THRU ID2
Main Index
BCBMRAD 1211
Modify Equivalent Radius for Beam-to-Beam Contact
• ID1 THRU ID2 BY N

Note that blank fields are allowed for readability.
3. When all beam contact radii are the same, user can put “ALL” on the filed 3 following a RADIUS
value on the BCBMRAD Bulk Data entry. This value of RADIUS will be applied to all beam-type
elements (See the previous Example 2). User can also use this way to give default radius of all beam-
type elements.
4. The RADIUS value of the other BCBMRAD's (TYPE=BODY or EID) can override the default value
(TYPE=ALL) in the following order:
a. When any BCBODY is selected on BCBMRAD with TYPE=BODY, the specified RADIUS will
be applied to all beam-type elements in this BCBODY. This value always overrides the default
(TYPE=ALL).
b. The RADIUS with TYPE=EID always overrides the value from TYPE=BODY and ALL.
5. When TYPE=ALL, then all IDi must be blank.
6. For tubes or round bars, enter the outer radius. For beam, enter an equivalent radius calculated as
follows:
I = 0.5 ⋅ ( I x + I y )
A I
R =  ----2- + 2 ⋅ ---
 pi A 
7. SOL 600 does not support the TYPE=ALL option.

8. This is only used for node-to-segment contact.
Main Index
1212 BCBODY
Flexible or Rigid Contact Body in 2D and 3D
BCBODY Flexible or Rigid Contact Body in 2D and 3D
Defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D used in SOLs 101, 400, and 700 only. The BCBODY1
option is the preferred method to defining contact bodies for SOL 400.
Use only as many forms (i.e. HEAT, PATCH3D, BEZIER, POLY, CYLIND, SPHERE, NURBS2, or
NURBS) as necessary to describe the body (if rigid). Deformable bodies are described using as many standard
elements as necessary and are specified by the BSID field with BEHAV=DEFORM (only the first line should
be entered for deformable bodies). Unless shrink fit its being analyzed, deformable bodies should not be
inside other deformable bodies when the thickness of each body is taken into account.
The “RIGID” header may be used with any of the other rigid entries but only once per body. Also, only one
of the character entries after RIGID (HEAT, PATCH3D, NURBS, etc.) should be entered for any particular
body. See Remark 4. for an important note regarding how to define the outward direction of rigid bodies
(which must point towards a flexible body for contact to occur).
Format: (SOLs 101 and 400 only)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCBODY BID DIM BEHAV BSID ISTYP FRIC IDSPL CONTROL
NLOAD ANGVEL DCOS1 DCOS2 DCOS3 VELRB1 VELRB2 VELRB3

“ADVANCE” SANGLE COPTB MIDNO
D
“RIGID” CGID NENT --- Rigid Body Name ---
“APPROV” A N1 N2 N3 V1 V2 V3
“GROW” GF1 GF2 GF3 TAB-GF1 TAB-GF2 TAB-GF3
“HEAT” CFILM TSINK CHEAT TBODY HCV HNC ITYPE
BNC EMISS HBL HNL BNL HNLE BNLE
HNCE BNCE CMB CMS

“PATCH3D” NPATCH
IDP G1 G2 G3 G4
IDP G1 G2 G3 G4
etc. (npatch
entries)
“BEZIER” NP1 NP2 NSUB1 NSUB2
G1 G2 G3 G4 etc (np1*np2
values)
“NURBS2D” NPTU NORU NSUB (2D
Contact)
G1 or X1 G2 or Y1 G3 G4 or X2 G5 or Y2 G6 [abs(nptu) See
grids or x, Remark 8
y,z, values]
Main Index
BCBODY 1213
Homo1 Homo2 Homo3 Homo4 etc. (nptu

values)
Knot1 Knot2 Knot3 Knot4 Knot5 etc. (nptu+nor
u values)
“NURBS” NPTU NPTV NORU NORV NSUBU NSUBV NTRIM
G1 or X1 G2 or Y1 G3 or Z1 G4 or X2 G5 or Y2 G6 or Z2 G7 See
Remark 8
G8 or X3 G9 or Y3 G10 or Z3 etc. [abs(nptu) See
*nptv Remark 8
values]
Homo1 Homo2 Homo3 Homo4 Homo5 Homo6 Homo7
Homo8 Homo9 etc. (nptu*npt
v vales)
Knot1 Knot2 Knot3 Knot4 Knot5 Knot6 Knot7 `
Knot8 Knot9 etc. (nptu+nor
u+ntpv+n
orv values)
IDtrim NPTUtrim NORUtrim NSUBtrim (repeat
this and all
following
lines
NTRIM
times)
Xisoparam Yisoparam (NPTUtri
m entries)
Homo1 Homo2 Homo3 etc (NPTUtri
m entries)
Knot1 Knot2 Knot3 etc. (NPTUtri
m+
NORUtri
m entries)
Format: (SOL 700 only)

BCBODY BID DIM BEHAV BSID
Examples (of Deformable and Rigid Contact):
Example 1 -- Typical deformable body

BCBODY 1 DEFORM 101 0 .05
Example 2 -- Simple 4-node rigid patch (see Remark 4. for rigid bodies)
BCBODY 2 RIGID 102 0 .08
PATCH3D 1
1 101 102 103 104
Main Index
1214 BCBODY
Describer Meaning
BID Contact body identification number referenced by BCTABLE, BCHANGE, or

BCMOVE. (Integer > 0; Required)
DIM Dimension of body. (Character; Default= 3D) (Ignored by SOL 700)
DIM=2D planar body in x-y plane of the basic coordinate system, composed of 2D
elements or curves.
DIM=3D any 3D body composed of rigid surfaces, shell elements or solid elements.
BEHAV Behavior of curve or surface (Character; Default = DEFORM) (Ignored by SOL 700)
DEFORM body is deformable, RIGID body is rigid, SYMM body is a symmetry body,
HEAT indicates body is a heat-rigid body. See Remark 4. for Rigid Bodies.
BSID Identification number of a BSURF or BCPROP entry if BEHAV=DEFORM. For SOL
700 the BSID may also be the identification number of a BCBOX, BCMATL, BCSEG,
BCGRID or BCELIPS entry. (Integer > 0)
ISTYP Check of contact conditions. (Integer > 0; Default = 0 for all solutions)
ISTYP is not necessary in segment-to-segment contact.
=0 check each body, versus the other .
=2 double-sided contact with automatic optimization of contact constraint equations
(this option is known as “optimized contact”).
Note that ISTYP is supported with ISEARCH=0 in BCTABLE or BCONPRG only.

When a grid point contacts a rigid body, the coefficient of friction associated with the
rigid body is used. When a grid point contacts a deformable body, the average of the
coefficients for the two bodies are used.
In general, entering the friction coefficient for a contact body pair via a BCTABLE and
BCONECT/BCONPRP is strongly recommended.
IDSPL Controls geometric smoothing of boundary of deformable body. (Integer; Default = 0)
=0 or blank, discrete geometric representation
>0 the surface of the body is smoothed out with splines (2D) or Coons surfaces (3D)
and discontinuity edges/corners are being defined by using abs (IDSPL) as the ID of
the BLSEG entries. If BLSEG with ID=abs(IDSPL) does not exist, the whole body is
smoothed and there are no user-defined discontinuity corners(2D) or edges(3D). (See
Remark 7.)
<0 Same as IDSPL>0. Furthermore, additional discontinuity edges are being generated
automatically if the difference in patch normals exceeds the value of SANGLE.
Main Index
BCBODY 1215
Describer Meaning
CONTROL = -1 for position control. The coordinates of the final position of GRID Point defined
in CGID is given in VELRBi in the following line.
= 0 for velocity control (default).
= positive number for "load control". The positive number entered is the grid number
defined in CGID at which translational forces or SPCD are applied. (Note: The
rotation in this case is defined by NLOAD in the following line.)
NLOAD Enter a positive number if "load controlled" and rotations are allowed (Integer). The
positive number is the grid number where the moments or rotations are applied. The
rotations are specified using SPCD at grid ID NLOAD and can be specified using dof's
1-3 (for rotation about x, y, z respectively), or by dof's 4-6 (for rotation about x, y, z
respectively).
Note: This rotation takes the position of the grid point defined in CGID field as the
center of rotation.
ANGVEL Angular velocity or angular position about local axis through center of rotation. If the
value is an integer it represents the ID of a TABLED1, TABLED2 or TABL3D, i.e., a
time-dependent or multi-dimensional table; however, no log scales, only linear scales.
(Real or Integer; Default = 0.0)
DCOSi Components of direction cosine of local axis if ANGVEL is nonzero. If the value is an
integer, it represents the ID of a TABLED1, TABLED2 or TABL3D, i.e., a time-
dependent or multi-dimensional table; however, no log scales, only linear scales. (Real
or Integer; Default=0.0) In 2D contact only DCOS3 is used and the Default is 1.0.
VELRBi Translation velocity or final position (depending on the value of CONTROL) of rigid
body at the grid point defined in CGID filed. For velocity control only, if the value is
an integer, it represents the ID of TABLED1, TABLED2 or TABL3D, i.e., a time-
dependent or multi-dimensional table; however, no log scales, only linear scales. Only
VELRB1 and VELRB2 are used in 2D contact. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0)
“ADVANCE” The entries for this continuation line are for advanced options starting with
MD Nastran R2.
SANGLE Threshold for automatic discontinuity detection in degrees. (Real; Default = 60.0)
Used for SPLINE option in SOL 400 only. SANGLE is not used when IDSPL ≥ 0.
COPTB Flag to indicate how body surfaces may contact. See Remark 9. on the BCTABLE entry.
MIDNOD Mid-side node projection flag. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
When MIDNOD > 0 and IDSPL ≠ 0, the mid-side grid of quadratic elements are
projected onto the selected spline surfaces. This operation is performed before the
contact process starts and it may change the location of grids in contact bodies. It may
operate in combination with the initial stress-free contact.
“RIGID” The entries of this continuation line are for the rigid body description. See Remark 4.
Main Index
1216 BCBODY
Describer Meaning
CGID Grid point identification number defining the initial position of the reference point of
(5,i) i=1,2,3 the rigid body or the point where a concentrated force or moment is applied
NENT Number of geometric entities to describe this rigid surface. A rigid surface can be
described by multiple sets of patches, nurbs, etc. For example, if it takes 3 sets of
PATCH3D entries to describe a rigid surface, then set NENT=3. (Integer > 0; Default
= 1)
Rigid Body Name associated with the rigid body. (Default is blank, 24-characters maximum)
Name
“APPROV” The entries of this continuation line are for approaching velocity to establish initial
contact.
A Angular velocity about local axis through center of rotation. (Real, Default = 0.0)
Ni Components of direction cosines of local axis of the angular velocity. The N1, N2, N3
define the axis through the point defined in the “RIGID”, CGID entry. Only N1 and
N2 are used in 2D contact. (Real, Default = 0.0)
Vi V1, V2 and V3 define the three components of the approaching velocity. Only V1 and
V2 are used in 2D contact. (Real; Default = 0.0)
“GROW” The entries of this continuation line are for rigid body growth. If tables are used for
growth, they should either be TABLED1, TABLED2(growth vs time) or TABL3D
(growth vs one or more variables).
GFi Components of Growth factor of rigid body in the coordinate system of the “RIGID”,
CGID entry. (Real, Default = 1.0)
TAB-GFi Tabled IDs for growth factor of rigid body in the coordinate system of the “RIGID”,
CGID entry. (Integer > 0 or blank, Default is blank)
“HEAT” The entries of this continuation line(s) are for contact in heat transfer in a pure thermal
analysis or in a coupled thermal/structural analysis. In a pure structural analysis they are
ignored.
CFILM Heat transfer coefficient (film) to environment. (Real or Integer, Default = 0.0) If Real,
(9,1)/(10,1) the value entered is the film coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a
TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the heat transfer coefficient vs temperature
or a TABL3D entry specifying the film coefficient vs temperature and possibly other
variables.
TSINK Environment sink temperature. (Real or Integer, Default = 0.0). If Real, the value
(9,2)/(10,2) entered is the sink temperature. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLED1
or TABLED2 entry specifying temperature vs time or a TABL3D entry specifying the
sink temperature vs time and possibly other variables. When entered as a negative
integer its absolute value is a scalar point identification number. If a scalar point is
specified on this entry it need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
Main Index
BCBODY 1217
Describer Meaning
CHEAT Contact heat transfer coefficient. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0). If Real, the value
(9,3)/(10,3) entered is the contact heat transfer coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of
a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the contact heat transfer coefficient vs
temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the contact heat transfer coefficient vs
temperature and possibly other variables.
TBODY Body temperature. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0). If Real, the value entered is the body
(9,4)/(10,4) temperature. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLED1 or TABLED2 entry
specifying the body temperature vs time or a TABL3D entry specifying the body
temperature vs time and possibly other variables. When entered as a negative integer its
absolute value is a scalar point identification number. If a scalar point is specified on
this entry it need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
HCV Convection coefficient for near field behavior (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0). If Real
(9,5)/(10,5) the value entered is the near field convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is
the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the near field convection
coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the near field convection
HNC Natural convection coefficient for near field behavior (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0).
(9,6)/(10,6) If Real, the value entered is the near field natural convection coefficient. If Integer, the
value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the near field
natural convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the near
field natural convection coefficient vs temperature and possibly other variables.
[4,8] 1 - Heat sink (rigid body)
2 - Deformable body (with heat conduction)
4 - Heat conduction body (heat-rigid body) (Not supported in SOL 400 coupled
thermal-mechanical analysis)
BNC Exponent associated with the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior
(9,7)/(10,7) (Real or Integer; Default = 1.0). If Real, the value entered is the exponent associated
with the near field natural convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID
of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the exponent associated with the near
field natural convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the
exponent associated with the near field natural convection coefficient vs temperature
and possibly other variables.
EMISS Emissivity for radiation to the environment or near thermal radiation (Real or Integer;
(9,8)/(10,8) Default = 0.0). If real, the value entered is the emissivity. If Integer, the value entered is
the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the emissivity vs temperature or
a TABL3D entry specifying the emissivity vs temperature and possibly other variables.
Main Index
1218 BCBODY
Describer Meaning
HBL Separation distance dependent thermal convection coefficient (Real or Integer; Default
(7,6)/(8,6) = 0.0). If Real, the value entered is the separation distance dependent thermal a
convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 entry
specifying the convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the
convection coefficient vs temperature and possibly other variables.
HNL Heat transfer coefficient for nonlinear convective heat flow for near field behavior. (Real
or Integer; Default = 0.0). If Real, the value entered is the near field nonlinear
convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or
TABLEM2 entry specifying the near field nonlinear convection coefficient vs
temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the near field nonlinear convection
BNL Exponent associated with the nonlinear convective heat flow for near field behavior.
(Real or Integer; Default = 1.0). If Real, the value entered is the exponent associated
with the near field nonlinear convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the
ID of a TABLEM1 OR TABLEM2 entry specifying the exponent associated with the
near field nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry
specifying the exponent associated with the near field nonlinear convection coefficient
vs temperature and possibly other variables.
HNLE Heat transfer coefficient for nonlinear convective heat flow to the environment.
(Real > 0.0 or Integer; Default = 0.0). If Real, the value entered is the environment
nonlinear convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1
or TABLEM2 entry specifying the environment nonlinear convection coefficient vs
temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the environment nonlinear convection
BNLE Exponent associated with the nonlinear convective heat flow to the environment (Real
or Integer; Default = 1.0). If Real, the value entered is the exponent associated with the
environment nonlinear convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of
a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the exponent associated with the
environment nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry
specifying the exponent associated with the environment nonlinear convection
HNCE Natural convection coefficient for heat flow to the environment. (Real or Integer,
Default = 0.0). If Real the value entered is the environment natural convection
specifying the environment natural convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D
entry specifying the environment natural convection coefficient vs temperature and
Main Index
BCBODY 1219
Describer Meaning
BNCE Exponent associated with natural convection heat flow to the environment. (Real or
Integer; Default = 1.0). If Real, the value entered is the exponent associated with the
environment natural convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a
TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the exponent associated with the
environment natural convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry
specifying the exponent associated with the environment natural convection coefficient
vs temperature and possibly other variables.
CMB Heat capacity of the rigid body, when entered as a geometric entity with an associated
scalar point. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0). For nonzero values a grounded CDAMP4
element with the scalar point on its first side is generated internally which obtains this
capacity.
CMS Heat capacity of the environment, when associated with a scalar point. (Real > 0.0;
Default = 0.0). For nonzero values a grounded CDAMP4 element with the scalar point
on its first side is generated internally which obtains this capacity.
“PATCH3D” Entries for this continuation line describe a rigid body made up of as many 4-node
patches as desired. (Triangular patches are not available.)
IDP ID of the patch (Integer number 1 through highest value).
G1, G2, G3, G4 Grid numbers for each of the 4 nodes of the patch (see Note 5).
“BEZIER” Entries for this continuation line describe a rigid body made up of Bezier Surfaces.
NP1 Number of points in 1st direction. (Integer > 0)
NP2 Number of points in 2nd direction. (Integer > 0)
NSUB1 Number of subdivisions in 1st direction. (Integer > 0)
NSUB2 Number of subdivisions in 2nd direction. (Integer > 0)
G1, G2, G3, etc Grid numbers of each point (must be in order). There must be NP1*NP2 grid points
defined. Enter NP1 points for NP2=1, then NP2 points for NP2=2, etc. (Integer)
“NURBS2D” Entries for this continuation line describe a 2D rigid body made up of nurmbs.
NPTU Number of control points. If the control points are entered as coordinates rather than
grid IDs NPTU may be set to a negative value whose absolute value is the number of
xyz coordinates, but that is not required. (Integer, no Default)
NORU Order
NSUB Number of subdivisions
G1, G2, G3, G4 Grid numbers for each of the NPTU control points
X1, Y1, X2, Y2, Alternate method to define control points without using GRID points. There must be
etc. abs(NPTU)*NPTV (x,y,z) entries.
Homo1, Homogeneous coordinates (0.0 to 1.0) (Real). There must be NPTU entries.
Homo2,
Homo3, etc.
Main Index
1220 BCBODY
Describer Meaning
Knot1, Knot2, Knot vectors (0.0 to 1.0) (Real). There must be (NPTU+NORU) entries.
Knot3, etc.
“NURBS” Entries for this continuation line describe a rigid body made up of nurbs.
NPTU Number of control points in U direction. If the control points are entered as
coordinates rather than grid IDs NPTU may be set to a negative value whose absolute
value is the number of xyz coordinates, but that is not required. (Integer > 0; Required)
NPTV Number of control points in V direction. (Integer > 0; Required)
NORU Order along U direction. (Integer > 0; Required)
NORV Order along V direction (Integer > 0; Required)
NSUBU Number of subdivisions in U direction (Integer > 0; Required)
NSUBV Number of subdivisions in V direction (Integer > 0; Required)
NTRIM Number of trimming curves (Integer > 0 or blank)
G1, G2, G3, Grid point IDs defining control points (Integer > 0). There must be NPTU*NPTV
etc. entries.
X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Alternate method to define control points without using GRID points. There must be
Y2, Z2, etc. abs(NPTU)*NPTV (x,y,z) entries.
Homo1, Homogeneous coordinates (0.0 to 1.0). There must be NPTU*NPTV entries. (Real)
Homo2,
Homo3, etc
Knot1, Knot2, Knot vectors (0.0 to 1.0). There must be (NPTU+NORU)+(NPTV+NORV) entries.
Knot3, etc (Real)
IDtrim ID of trimming vector. There must NTRIM of these entries and those entries that
follow. (Integer > 0)
NPUTtrim Number of control points for this trimming vector. (Integer > 0)
NORUtrim Order for this trimming vector. (Integer > 0)
NSUBtrim Number of subdivisions for this trimming vector. (Integer > 0)
Xisoparam First coordinate of point in isoparametric space. (Real)
Ysoparam Second coordinate of point in isoparametric space. (Real)
Homo1, Homogeneous coordinates (0.0 to 1.0) of this trimming vector. There must be
Homo2, NPTUtrim entries. (Real)
Homo3, etc
Knot1, Knot2, Knot vectors (0.0 to 1.0) of this trimming vector. There must be
Knot3, etc NPTUtrim+NORUtrim entries. (Real)
Main Index
BCBODY 1221
Remarks:
1. Named continuation entries are ignored for a deformable curve or surface (BEHAV=DEFO), except
for “HEAT”.
2. The grid CGID is the reference grid for the rigid body motion. Loads and enforced motion must be
defined in the global coordinate system of CGID.
3. All continuation lines may be omitted if not required.
4. WARNING: For rigid contact, the right hand rule determines the interior side of the rigid surface.
A deformable surface which contacts a rigid surface must be on the exterior side of the rigid surface
(i.e., in the direction opposite to the right hand rule). If a rigid surface is described backwards, contact
will not occur because the deformable body is already inside the rigid body at the start of the analysis.
For 3D patches, if all need to be reversed, the parameter PARAM,MARCREVR,1 may be entered to
automatically reverse all 3D patches.
5. For BEZIER surfaces, enter np1*np2 points in the order shown below:
Mesh Normal Order Reversed Order

2x2 1,2,3,4 2,1,4,3
3x2 1,2,3,4,5,6 3,2,1,6,5,4
3x3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 3,2,1,6,5,4,9,8,7
3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4
1 2 5 6
1 2 3
6. For NURBS, enter NPTU grid points G1, G2, G3, etc. (set NPTU to a positive value equal to the
number of grid points or enter X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2, etc. coordinates for abs(NPTU) points and
set NPTU to a negative value.
nodal pairs may be entered in any order. See Marc Volume C SPLINE (SOL 400 chapter 9) option
documentation for more details.
8. For hard contact, with HGLUE=1 (see BCTABLE for the meaning of HGLUE):
Main Index
1222 BCBODY

q = CHEAT ⋅ ( T A – T B )
where T A is the contacting grid temperature and T B is the face temperature in the contact point in
case of a meshed body or the T BODY temperature in case of a rigid geometry. It is recommended to
enter the CHEAT value on the BCTABLE Bulk Data input, since it generally applies to body pairs
and is not a property of a single body.
q = HCV ⋅ ( T A – T B ) +
BNC
HNC ⋅ ( T A – T B ) +
BNL BNL
HNL ⋅ ( TA – TB ) +
4 4
σ ⋅ EMISS ⋅ ( T A – T B ) +
dist dist
CHEAT ⋅  1 – -------------------------- + HBL ⋅ -------------------------- ⋅ ( T A ⋅ T B )
where the last term is only activated when HBL ≠ 0 , T A is the contacting grid temperature and T B is
the face temperature in the contact point in case of a meshed body or the T BODY temperature in case
of a rigid geometry. It is recommended to enter the near contact heat transfer coefficients and the
corresponding exponents on the BCTABLE Bulk Data input, since they generally apply to body pairs
and are not properties of a single body.
11. For no contact:
q = CFILM ⋅ ( T A – T SINK ) +
BNCE
HNCE ⋅ ( T A – T SINK ) +
BNLE BNLE
HNLE ⋅ ( TA – T SINK ) +
4 4
σ ⋅ EMISS ⋅ ( TA – T SINK )
Main Index
BCBODY 1223
13. The T SINK and T BODY temperatures can be time dependent when they are entered as a positive integer
value. This integer value is the table ID of a TABLED1, TABLED2 or TABL3D entry (formulas are
not supported on TABL3D).
14. Table IDs of tables used on the BCBODY and the BCTABLE entry must be unique.
15. TBODY entries only apply to rigid bodies (i.e., RIGID as the BEHAV value). TSINK entries only
apply to deformable bodies (meshed regions with DEFORM or HEAT as the BEHAV value).
Main Index
1224 BCBODY
Flexible or Rigid Contact Body in 2D and 3D in SOL 600
BCBODY Flexible or Rigid Contact Body in 2D and 3D in SOL 600
Defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D used in SOL 600 only.
Important Notes for SOL 600:

1. The 2nd line is required if any of the subsequent lines are to be entered (if this line is blank, enter a
“+” in column 1 or Nastran will ignore the entire line).
2. PARAM,MRCONVER,11 is required if CTYPE, APPROV, or GROW headers are entered.
3. PARAM,MRCONTAB,11 is required if any of the variables are described by tables.
Use only as many forms (i.e., HEAT, PATCH3D, BEZIER, POLY, CYLIND, SPHERE, NURBS2, or
NURBS) as necessary to describe the body (if rigid). Deformable bodies are described using as many standard
elements as necessary and are specified by the BSID field with BEHAV=DEFORM (only the first line should
be entered for deformable bodies). Unless shrink fit its being analyzed, deformable bodies should not be
inside other deformable bodies when the thickness of each body is taken into account.
The “RIGID” header may be used with any of the other rigid entries but only once per body. Also, only one
of the character entries after RIGID (HEAT, PATCH3D, NURBS, etc.) should be entered for any particular
body. See Remark 4. for an important note regarding how to define the outward direction of rigid bodies
(which must point towards a flexible body for contact to occur).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCBODY BID DIM BEHAV BSID ISTYP FRIC IDSPL CONTROL
“ADVANCE” SANGLE COPTB USER
“CTYPE” ISMALL ITYPE IAUG PENALT AUGDIST
“RIGID” CGID NENT --- Rigid Body Name ---
“RTEMP” G(temp) Tempr T(Tempr)
“SINK” G(sink) Tsink T(Tsink)
“HEAT” CFILM TSINK CHEAT TBODY HCV HNC ITYPE
BNC EMISS HBL
“PATCH3D” NPATCH
IDP G1 G2 G3 G4
IDP G1 G2 G3 G4
etc. (npatch
entries)
“BEZIER” NP1 NP2 NSUB1 NSUB2
values)
“POLY” NP1 NP2
values)
Main Index
BCBODY 1225
“CYLIND” NSUB
Gtop Rtop Gbottom Rbottom
“SPHERE” NSUB
Gcenter Radius
“LINE” NPTS Ix Iy Rx Ry (2D Contact)
G1 G2 G3 G4 etc. (npts values)
“ARC” NPTS MethArc Ix Iy Rx Ry (2D Contact)
“SPLINE” NPTS Ix Iy Rx Ry (2D Contact)
“NURBS2D” NPTU NORU NSUB Rx Ry (2D Contact)
G1 or X1 G2 or Y1 G3 G4 or X2 G5 or Y2 G6 [abs(nptu) See Remark
grids or x, y,z, 8
values]
Homo1 Homo2 Homo3 Homo4 etc. (nptu values)
Knot1 Knot2 Knot3 Knot4 Knot5 etc. (nptu+noru
values)
“NURBS2” IDN
“NURBS” NPTU NPTV NORU NORV NSUBU NSUBV NTRIM
G1 or X1 G2 or Y1 G3 or Z1 G4 or X2 G5 or Y2 G6 or Z2 G7 See Remark
8
G8 or X3 G9 or Y3 G10 or Z3 etc. [abs(nptu)*n See Remark 8
ptv values]
Homo1 Homo2 Homo3 Homo4 Homo5 Homo6 Homo7
Homo8 Homo9 etc. (nptu*nptv
vales)
Knot1 Knot2 Knot3 Knot4 Knot5 Knot6 Knot7 `
Knot8 Knot9 etc. (nptu+noru+
ntpv+norv
values)
IDtrim NPTUtrim NORUtrim NSUBtrim (repeat this
and all
following
lines NTRIM
times)
Xisoparam Yisoparam (NPTUtrim
entries)
Homo1 Homo2 Homo3 etc (NPTUtrim
entries)
Knot1 Knot2 Knot3 etc. (NPTUtrim
+ NORUtrim
entries)
Examples (of Deformable and Rigid Contact):

BCBODY 1 DEFOR 101 0 .05
M
Main Index
1226 BCBODY
Example 2 -- Simple 4-node rigid patch (see Remark 5 for rigid bodies)
BCBODY 2 RIGID 0
PATCH3D 1
1 101 102 103 104
Example 3-- Same as Example 2 except that a user subroutine named motion.f will be
employed to specify the rigid body motion.
BCBODY 2 RIGID 0
ADVANCE M
PATCH3D 1
1 101 102 103 104
Describer Meaning
BID Contact body identification number referenced by BCTABLE, BCHANGE, or

(4,1) BCMOVE. (Integer > 0; Required)
DIM Dimension of body. (Character; Default = 3D)
DIM=2D planar body in x-y plane of the basic coordinate system, composed of 2D
elements or curves.
DIM=3D any 3D body composed of rigid surfaces, shell elements or solid
elements.
BEHAV Behavior of curve or surface (Character; Default = DEFORM) DEFORM body is
(4,8) deformable, RIGID body is rigid, SYMM body is a symmetry body, ACOUS
indicates an acoustic body, WORK indicates body is a workpiece, HEAT indicates
body is a heat-rigid body. See Remark 3. for Rigid Bodies..
BSID Identification number of a BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP or BCMATL entry if
BEHAV=DEFORM. (Integer > 0)
Main Index
BCBODY 1227
Describer Meaning
ISTYP Check of contact conditions. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)

(4,3) ISTYP is not supported in segment-to-segment contact.
=0 symmetric penetration, double sided contact.
=1 unsymmetric penetration, single sided contact. (Integer > 0)
=2 double-sided contact with automatic optimization of contact constraint
equations (this option is known as “optimized contact”).
Notes: single-sided contact (ISTYP=1) with the contact bodies arranged properly
using the contact table frequently runs much faster than ISTYP=2.
For a rigid body:
=0 no symmetry condition on rigid body.
=1 rigid body is a symmetry plane.
FRIC Friction coefficient. (Real > 0 or integer; Default = 0)
(6,7) If the value is an integer it represents the ID of a TABL3Di.
IDSPL Set IDSPL=1 to activate the SPLINE (analytical contact) option for a deformable
(4,5) body and for a rigid contact surface. Set it to zero or leave blank to not have
analytical contact. (Integer; Default = 0)
SOL 600 Options:
=0 or blank, SPLINE option is turned off.
=1, The body is smoothed out with splines (2D) or Coons surfaces (3D). If
SANGLE is not entered, the default 60.0 degrees is used. IDSPL=1 triggers the
Marc SPLINE option with the 3rd field of the 3rd datablock set to 1. If analytical
contact changes between increment zero and any subcase, the SANGLE Bulk Data
entry is required (see the following SANGLE). SANGLE is placed in the 4th field
of the 3rd Mac SPLINE datablock and a value of 1 is placed in the 3rd field of the
3rd datablock.
>1, Identification number of a BLSEG entry that lists nodes on edges of the body
which are excluded from the SPLINE option. (See Remark 10.)
This option may be used for deformable or rigid contact surfaces. See
PARAM,MSPLINC0 to enforce C0 continuity.
CONTROL Indicates the type of control for the body.
(4,6) Integer:
= -1 for position control, = 0 for velocity control.
= positive number for “load control” (the positive number is the grid number
which has translational forces or SDCP’s are applied. The position of this grid is at
the center of rotation given in the CGID field. For velocity controlled surfaces, the
velocity of the body must be specified by the VELRBi fields. For displacement
controlled surfaces the final displacement can be specified using SPCD at the grid
ID specified by CONTROL. CONTROL > 0 is not available for enforced motion
using SPCD’s for 2D contact using SOL 600.
Main Index
1228 BCBODY
Describer Meaning
NLOAD Enter a positive number if “load controlled” and rotations are allowed (Integer).
(4,7) The positive number is the grid number where the moments or rotations are
applied. The position of this grid is at the center of rotation given in the CGID
field. The rotations are specified using SPCD at grid ID NLOAD and can be
specified using dof ’s 1-3 (for rotation about x, y, z respectively), or starting with the
MSC Nastran 2007 release by dof ’s 4-6 (for rotation about x, y, z respectively). For
versions prior to MSC Nastran 2007 only dof ’s 1-3 could be used.
ANGVEL Angular velocity or angular position about local axis through center of rotation.
(6,1) (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0) If the value is an integer it represents the ID of a
TABL3Di.
DCOS1 3D - First component direction cosine of local axis if ANGVEL is nonzero. (Real)
(6,4)
2D - First coordinate of initial position of rotation of rigid body.
DCOS2 3D - Second component direction cosine of local axis if ANGVEL is nonzero.
(6,5) (Real)
2D - Second coordinate of initial position of rotation of rigid body
DCOS3 3D - Third component direction cosine of local axis if ANGVEL is nonzero. (Real)
(6,6)
2D - Not used.
VELRB1 2D & 3D - Velocity or final position (depending on the value of CONTROL) of
(5,4) rigid body in 1st direction. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0) If the value is an integer
it represents the ID of a TABL3Di.
VELRB2 2D & 3D - Velocity or final position (depending on the value of CONTROL) of
(5,5) rigid body in 2nd direction. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0) If the value is an
integer it represents the ID of a TABL3Di.
VELRB3 3D - Velocity or final position (depending on the value of CONTROL) of rigid
(5,6) body in 3rd direction. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0) If the value is an integer it
represents the ID of a TABL3Di.
2D - Not used.
ADVANCE The entries for this continuation line are for advanced options starting with
MSC Nastran 2007.
SANGLE Threshold for automatic discontinuity detection in degrees. (Real, Default = 60.0)
SANGLE values on the BCBODY entry can be overridden using the SANGLE
Bulk Data entry. This allows SANGLE to change for different subcases. It also
allows analytical contact for this body to be “on” or “off ” for different subcases (see
the SANGLE Bulk Data entry). [Marc Spline option (3,4)]
COPTB Flag to indicate how body surfaces may contact. See Remark 9. on the BCTABLE
entry. (Integer; Default = 0)
Main Index
BCBODY 1229
Describer Meaning
USER A series of character flags to indicate which (if any) user subroutines are required
for this contact body. Enter as many characters as necessary to specify the user
subroutines desired, for example to use MOTION and UFIRC enter MF.
(Character; Default = blank meaning no user subroutines are required) (SOL 600
Only)
M = The MOTION user subroutine is required to describe complex motion of a

rigid contact body.
F = The UFRIC or UFRICBBC user subroutine is required to describe complex

friction behavior of the contact body.
C = Film coefficient and sink temperature user subroutine UHTCON is required

(coupled structural/heat analysis only)
P = 4-Node patch user subroutine DIGEOM is required (the coordinates of the

patch are entered in the user subroutine rather than on the BCBODY entry).
S = The SEPSTR or SEPFOR user subroutine is required depending on whether

stress-based or force-based friction has been specified using BCPARA IBSEP.
“CTYPE” The entries of this continuation line define whether the original node-to-segment
or segment-to-segment contact algorithm is used. Also the selection of general or
small sliding contact and associated values when segment-to-segment contact is
selected are entered here. These options may be placed on BCPARA instead of
BCBODY (which is the recommended option. BCBODY entries override
BCPARA entries). For MSC Nastran 2012, these items should be considered beta-
test capabilities.
ISMALL Enter 0 for general contact or 1 for small sliding, small displacement contact. See
[3,1] Remarks 15 and 16. (Integer; Default = 0)
ICTYPE Enter 0 for node-to-segment contact or 1 for segment-to-segment contact. See
[3,2] Remarks 15 and 16. (Integer; Default = 0)
IAUG This entry applies only if segment-to-segment contact is selected. See Remarks 15
[3,3] and 16. (Integer; Default = 0)
0 = No augmentation
1 = Augmentation is based on a constant Lagrange multiplier field for linear
elements and on a bilinear Lagrange multiplier field for quadratic elements.
2 = Augmentation is based on a constant Lagrange multiplier field.
3 = Augmentation is based on a bilinear Lagrange multiplier field.
Main Index
1230 BCBODY
Describer Meaning
PENALT Augmented Lagrange penalty factor, used by segment-to-segment contact only.

[5,1] The default is derived from the contact tolerance distance and the stiffness of the
deformable contact bodies or average stiffness if two deformable bodies are in
contact. See Remark 18. (Real; Default = leave blank)
AUGDIST Penetration distance beyond which an augmentation will be applied, used by
[5,2] segment-to-segment contact only. this default is 1% of the contact tolerance
distance. See Remark 18. (Real; Default = leave blank)
“RIGID” The entries of this continuation line are for the rigid body description. See Remark
3.
CGID Grid point identification number defining the initial position of the center of
(5,i) i=1,2,3 rotation for the rigid body or the point where a concentrated force or moment is
(4,6) applied.
NENT Number of geometric entities to describe this rigid surface. A rigid surface can be
(4,2) described by multiple sets of patches, nurbs, etc. For example, if it takes 3 sets of
PATCH3D entries to describe a rigid surface, then set NENT=3. (Integer > 0;
Default = 1)
Rigid Body Name Name associated with the rigid body. (Default is blank, 24-characters maximum)
(4,9)
“APPROV” The entries for this continuation line are used for rigid contact body approach
velocity and angular velocity. (For SOL 600, APPVEL may be used instead of
APPROV if desired.)
A Angular velocity about local axis through center of rotation. The local axis is
defined by DCOS1, DCOS2, DCOS3. (Real; Default = 0.0)
Ni Not used by SOL 600. The direction cosines for approach velocity in SOL 600 are
DCOS1, DCOS2, DCOS3 on the second BCBODY line. (Real; Default = 0.0; Ni
values entered on this line are ignored for SOL 600)
Vi V1, V2 and V3 define the three components of approach velocity. For 2D contact
only two should be entered as defined by Rx or Ry (see each 2D rigid contact body
description for the meaning of Rx and Ry). (Real; Default = 0.0)
“RTEMP” The entries of this continuation line describe rigid contact surface temperature
variations.
G(Temp) Grid point identification number defining the location of the temperature.
(Integer; no Default)
Tempr Temperature at the start of the run. (Real; no Default)
T(Tempr) Identification number of a TABL3Di describing the variation of the rigid body
temperature during the analysis. (Integer; Default = 0 which means a constant
value Ttempr is used during the entire analysis)
Main Index
BCBODY 1231
Describer Meaning
“SINK” The entries of this continuation line describe sink temperatures and their variation
for flexible or heat transfer bodies.
G(sink) Grid point identification number of defining the location of the sink temperature.
Tsink Sink temperature at the start of the run. (Real; no Default)
T(Tsink) Identification number of a TABL3Di describing the variation of the sink
temperature during the analysis. (Integer; Default = 0 which means a constant
value Tsink is used during the entire analysis)
“GROW” The entries for this continuation line are for rigid body growth - This line is rarely
used. If entered PARAM,MRCONVER,11 must be used. If tables are used for
growth, they should either be TABLED1 (growth vs time) or TABL3Di (growth
vs one or more variables) and PARAM,MRCONTAB,11 must be entered.
GF1 Growth factor of rigid body in first coordinate direction. (Real; Default = 1.0)
(7,5)
GF2 Growth factor of rigid body in second coordinate direction. (Real; Default = 1.0)
(7,6)
GF3 Growth factor of rigid body in third coordinate direction. (Real; Default = 1.0)
(7,7)
TAB-GF1 Table for growth factor of rigid body in first coordinate direction. (Integer or
(8,5) blank; Default is blank which means no table and growth factor varies from 0.0 to
1.0 over the subcase being analyzed.)
TAB-GF2 Table for growth factor of rigid body in second coordinate direction. (Integer or
TAB-GF3 Table for growth factor of rigid body in third coordinate direction. (Integer or
“HEAT” The entries of this continuation line(s) are for contact in heat transfer. Do not enter
these line(s) for structural analyses.
CFILM Heat transfer coefficient (film) to environment. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0 for
(9,1)/(10,1) a heat transfer problem, omit for a structural problem) If Real, the value entered is
the film coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 entry
specifying the heat transfer coefficient vs temperature. This is usually called HCVE
in the Marc documentation.
Main Index
1232 BCBODY
Describer Meaning
TSINK Environment sink temperature. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0 for a heat transfer
(9,2)/(10,2) problem, omit for a structural problem). If Real, the value entered is the sink
temperature. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 entry specifying
temperature vs time. At present, this variable should not be a function of
temperature.
CHEAT Contact heat transfer coefficient. (Real or Integer; Default = 1.0 for a heat transfer
(9,3)/(10,3) problem, omit for a structural problem). If Real, the value entered is the contact
heat transfer coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1
entry specifying the contact heat transfer coefficient vs temperature.
TBODY Body temperature. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0 for a heat transfer problem, omit
(9,4)/(10,4) for a structural problem). If Real, the value entered is the body temperature. If
Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 entry specifying the body
temperature vs time. At present, this variable should not be a function of
temperature.
HCV Convection coefficient for near field behavior (Real or Integer; Default = 1.0 for a
(9,5)/(10,5) heat transfer problem, omit for a structural problem). If Real the value entered is
the near field convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a
TABLEM1 entry specifying the near field convection coefficient vs temperature.
HNC Natural convection coefficient for near field behavior (Real or Integer; Default =
(9,6)/(10,6) 1.0 for a heat transfer problem, omit for a structural problem). If Real, the value
entered is the near field natural convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered
is the ID of a TABLEM1 entry specifying the near field natural convection
coefficient vs temperature.
[4,8] 1 - Heat sink
4 - Heat conduction body
BNC Exponent associated with the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior
(9,7)/(10,7) (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0 for a heat transfer problem, omit for a structural
problem). If Real, the value entered is the exponent associated with the near field
natural convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a
TABLEM1 entry specifying the exponent associated with the near field natural
convection coefficient vs temperature. At present, this variable should not be a
function of temperature.
EMISS Emissivity for radiation to the environment or near thermal radiation (Real or
(9,8)/(10,8) Integer; Default = 0.0 for a heat transfer problem, omit for a structural problem).
If real, the value entered is the emissivity. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of
a TABLEM1 entry specifying the emissivity vs temperature.
Main Index
BCBODY 1233
Describer Meaning
HBL Separation distance dependent thermal convection coefficient (Real or Integer;

(11,1)[12,1] Default = 0.0 for a heat transfer problem, omit for a structural problem). If Real,
the value entered is a convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID
of a TABLEM1 entry specifying the convection coefficient vs temperature.
“PATCH3D” Entries for this continuation line describe a rigid body made up of as many 4-node
patches as desired. (Triangular patches are not available.)
G1, G2, G3, G4 Grid numbers for each of the 4 nodes of the patch (see Note 5).
“BEZIER” Entries for this continuation line describe a rigid body made up of Bezier Surfaces.
G1, G2, G3, etc Grid numbers of each point (must be in order). There must be NP1*NP2 grid
points defined. Enter NP1 points for NP2=1, then NP2 points for NP2=2, etc.
(Integer)
“POLY” Entries for this continuation line describe a rigid body made up of Poly Surfaces.
NP1 Number of points in the 1st direction. (Integer > 0)
NP2 Number of points in the 2nd direction. (Integer > 0)
G1, G2, G3, etc Grid numbers of each point (must be in order). There must be NP1*NP2 grid
points defined. Enter NP1 points for NP2=1, then NP2 points for NP2=2, etc.
(Integer)
“CYLIND” Entries for this continuation line describe a cylindrical rigid body.
NSUB Number of subdivisions. (Integer > 0)
Gtop Grid point ID of a grid in the center of the top of the cylinder. (Integer > 0)
Rtop Radius of the top of the cylinder. (Real > 0.0)
Gbottom Grid point ID of a grid in the center of the bottom of the cylinder. (Integer > 0)
Rbottom Radius of the bottom of the cylinder. (Real > 0.0)
“SPHERE” Entries for this continuation line describe a spherical rigid body.
Gcenter Grid point ID of a grid in the center of the sphere. (Integer > 0)
Radius Radius of the sphere. (Real > 0.0)
“LINE” Entries for this continuation line describe a 2D rigid body made up of as many line
segments as desired.
Main Index
1234 BCBODY
Describer Meaning
NPTS Number of points in the line segment.

Ix Grid direction (1, 2, or 3) of the G1, G2, ... list to be used as the first coordinate
in Marc’s 2D line description. See Remark 12. (Integer; Default = 1).
Iy Grid direction (1, 2, or 3) of the G1, G2, ... list to be used as the second coordinate
Rx Direction (1, 2, or 3) used as the first VELRBi in Marc’s 2D contact description.
Ry Direction (1, 2, or 3) used as the second VELRBi in Marc’s 2D contact description.
G1, G2, G3, G4 Grid numbers for each of the NPTS points on the line segment.
“ARC” Entries for this continuation line describe a 2D rigid body made up of as many
segments as desired describing an arc.
NPTS Number of points in the arc. NPTS must be 4 for an ARC.
MethArc Method to generate arc (Integer 0 to 4) (see Marc volume C Contact description
(SOL 400 chapter 9) Figures 3-3 and 3-4).
G1, G2, G3, G4 Grid numbers for each of the 4 points as described by method.
“SPLINE” Entries for this continuation line describe a 2D rigid body made up of as many
spline segments as desired.
NPTS Number of points for the spline.
G1, G2, G3, G4 Grid numbers for each of the NPTS points on the spline.
Main Index
BCBODY 1235
Describer Meaning
“NURBS2D” Entries for this continuation line describe a 2D rigid body made up of nurmbs.
NPTU Number of control points. If the control points are entered as coordinates rather
than grid IDs NPTU may be set to a negative value whose absolute value is the
number of xyz coordinates, but that is not required. (Integer; no Default)
NORU Order
NSUB Number of subdivisions
G1, G2, G3, G4 Grid numbers for each of the NPTU control points
X1, Y1, X2, Y2, etc. Alternate method to define control points without using GRID points. There must
be abs(NPTU)*NPTV (x,y,z) entries.
Homo1, Homo2, Homogeneous coordinates (0.0 to 1.0) (Real). There must be NPTU entries.
Homo3, etc.
Knot1, Knot2, Knot vectors (0.0 to 1.0) (Real). There must be (NPTU+NORU) entries.
Knot3, etc.
“NURBS2” Entries for this continuation line describe a rigid body made up of nurbs.
IDN ID of a matching GMNURB entry. The GMNURB is an entry that contains the
same information as at shown for the NURBS option. (Integer > 0)
“NURBS” Entries for this continuation line describe a rigid body made up of nurbs.
NPTU Number of control points. If the control points are entered as coordinates rather
than grid IDs NPTU may be set to a negative value whose absolute value is the
number of xyz coordinates, but that is not required. (Integer; no Default)
NPTV Number of control points in V direction. (Integer > 0; Required)
NORV Order along V direction (Integer > 0; Required)
NSUBU Number of subdivisions in U direction (Integer > 0; Required)
NSUBV Number of subdivisions in V direction (Integer > 0; Required)
NTRIM Number of trimming curves (Integer > 0 or blank)
G1, G2, G3, etc. Grid point IDs defining control points (Integer > 0). There must be
NPTU*NPTV entries.
X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Alternate method to define control points without using GRID points. There must
Z2, etc. be abs(NPTU)*NPTV (x,y,z) entries.
Main Index
1236 BCBODY
Describer Meaning
Homo1, Homo2, Homogeneous coordinates (0.0 to 1.0). There must be NPTU*NPTV entries.
Homo3, etc (Real)
Knot1, Knot2, Knot vectors (0.0 to 1.0). There must be (NPTU+NORU)+(NPTV+NORV)
Knot3, etc entries. (Real)
IDtrim ID of trimming vector. There must NTRIM of these entries and those entries that
follow. (Integer > 0)
NPUTtrim Number of control points for this trimming vector. (Integer > 0)
Xisoparam First coordinate of point in isoparametric space. (Real)
Ysoparam Second coordinate of point in isoparametric space. (Real)
Homo1, Homo2, Homogeneous coordinates (0.0 to 1.0) of this trimming vector. There must be
Homo3, etc NPTUtrim entries. (Real)
Knot1, Knot2, Knot vectors (0.0 to 1.0) of this trimming vector. There must be
Knot3, etc NPTUtrim+NORUtrim entries. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Named continuation entries are ignored for a deformable curve or surface (BEHAV=DEFO), except
for “HEAT”.
defined in the global coordinate system of CGID.
automatically reverse all 3D patches.
4. (i,j) refers to data block i and field j of Marc’s CONTACT model definition entry. IDSPL covers the
SPLINE history definition in Marc. For structural analysis (i,j) refers to contact without tables. For
heat transfer (i,j) refers to contact with tables.
5. For BEZIER surfaces, enter np1*np2 points in the order shown:

2x2 1,2,3,4 2,1,4,3
3x2 1,2,3,4,5,6 3,2,1,6,5,4
3x3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 3,2,1,6,5,4,9,8,7
Main Index
BCBODY 1237
3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 3 4
1 2 1 5 6
1 2 3
6. For NURBS, enter NPTU grid points G1, G2, G3, etc. (set NPTU to a positive value equal to the
number of grid points or enter X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2, etc. coordinates for abs(NPTU) points and
set NPTU to a negative value.
7. The heat transfer options are available for SOL 600 starting with MSC Nastran 2005 r2 and must
use Marc 2005 or later.
8. For heat transfer items described using a TABLEM1 ID, the smallest value in the table will be entered
into Marc’s 9th contact (with tables) datablock. The table ID will be translated directly to Marc’s
10th contact (with tables) datablock.
9. All flexible surfaces must have smaller BID values then the rigid surfaces so that in the Marc file all
flexible surfaces are defined prior to all rigid surfaces. This is a Marc limitation.
nodal pairs may be entered in any order. See Marc Volume C SPLINE (SOL 400 chapter 9) option
documentation for more details.
11. With NURBS2D, the coordinates x1, x2, y1, y2 etc. or those given by G1, G2, etc. will be reversed
(Y becomes X and X becomes Y) if any CQUADX, CTRIAX or CTRIAX6 entries are found in the
bulk data. It is up to the user to ensure that the rigid contact surface is orientated in the correct
direction after this reversal. If the user does not want the reversal to happen, enter
PARAM,MARCREVX,-1 in the bulk data.
12. Ix and Iy for LINE, ARC, SPLINE and NURBS2D must be the same for all entries in the model. An
example would be if CTRIAX6 is defined in the Z-X plane, set Ix = 3 and Iy = 1 for all 2D rigid
surfaces in the model. For CTRIAX and CQUADX, normally Ix=2 and Iy=1.
13. Rx and Ry for LINE, ARC, SPLINE and NURBS2D must be the same for all entries in the model.
An example would be if CTRIAX6 is defined in the Z-X plane, set Ix = 3 and Iy = 1 for all 2D rigid
surfaces in the model. For CTRIAX and CQUADX, normally Ix=2 and Iy=1.
14. For SOL 600, tables using integers for ANGVEL, VELRB1, VELRB2 and/or VELRB3 require
PARAM,MRCONVER,11 and PARAM,MARCTOTT,1 to be set. the TABLE3D’s used must
define the entire motion/velocity desired.
15. If any CTYPE entries are used, PARAM,MRCONVER,11 and PARAM,MRCONVER,11 are
required.
Main Index
1238 BCBODY
16. ISMALL, ITYPE, IAUG should be the same for all BCTABLE entries. The first entry “CTYPE”
entry will be used for all bodies. PENALT and AUGDIST may vary from body to body.
17. 2D and 3D rigid bodies may not be mixed in the same input file.
18. The entries on the CTYPE header may optionally be specified on the BCPARA entry.
Correlation between BCBODY “CTYPE” entries and equivalent BCPARA entries:
BCPARA BCPARA CTYPE value(s)

METHOD NODESURF ictype=0, ismall=0
METHOD NODSMALL* ictype=0, ismall=1
METHOD SEGSMALL ictype=1, ismall=1
METHOD SEGMENT* ictype=1, ismall=1
METHOD SEGLARGE* ictype=1, ismall=0
AUTMENT Integer Value IAUG=Integer Value
PENALT Real Value PENALT=Real Value
AUGDIST Real Value AUTDIST=Real Value
* Not available in SOL 600.
19. Most continuation lines may be omitted if not required except that the second line is required if the
third or subsequent lines are to be entered.
Main Index
BCBODY1 1239
Flexible or Rigid Contact Body in 2D and 3D (New Form)
BCBODY1 Flexible or Rigid Contact Body in 2D and 3D (New Form)
Defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D used in SOLs 101, 400, and 700 only.
If the body is rigid, this entry may refer to BCRIGID entry by the BCRGID field to describe the body. See
Remark 1. for an important note regarding how to define the outward direction of rigid bodies (which must
point towards a flexible body for contact to occur).
Deformable bodies are described using as many standard elements as necessary and are specified by the BSID
field with BEHAV=DEFORM. Unless shrink fit or interference fit is being analyzed, deformable bodies
should not be inside other deformable bodies when the thickness of each body is taken into account.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCBODY1 BID BPID DIM BEHAV BSID BCRGID

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCBODY1 BID BSID
Examples of Deformable and Rigid Contact:

BCBODY1 94 3001 DEFORM 103
Example 2 -- Simple rigid patch (see Remark 1. for rigid bodies)

BCBODY1 6 3001 RIGID 206 115
Describer Meaning
BID Unique contact body identification number referenced by BCONECT, BCHANGE,
or BCMOVE. (Integer > 0; Required)
BPID Parameter identification number of a BCBDPRP entry. (Integer > 0 or blank) Ignored
in SOL 700. See Remark 2.
DIM Dimension of body. (Character; Default= 3D) Ignored in SOL 700.
DIM=2D: planar body in x-y plane of the basic coordinate system, composed of 2D
elements or curves.
DIM=3D: any 3D body composed of rigid surfaces, shell elements or solid elements.
BEHAV Behavior of curve or surface (Character; Default = DEFORM) Ignored in SOL 700.
DEFORM body is deformable; RIGID body is rigid (See Remark 1.); SYMM body is
a symmetry rigid body; HEAT indicates body is a heat-rigid body (See Remark 3..).
Main Index
1240 BCBODY1
Flexible or Rigid Contact Body in 2D and 3D (New Form)
BSID For SOLs 101 and 400: Identification number of a BSURF or BCPROP entry if
BEHAV=DEFORM or HEAT, or identification number of a BCRGSRF, BCPATCH,
BCBZIER, BCNURB2, or BCNURBS entry if BEHAV=RIGID or SYMM (See
Remark 4.).
For SOL 700: Identification number (RBID) of a BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP,

BCMATL, BCSEG, BCGRID or BCELIPS entry. (Integer > 0).
BCRGID For SOLs 101 and 400: Identification number of a BCRIGID entry if
BEHAV=RIGID or SYMM. Ignored in SOL 700. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
automatically reverse all 3D patches
2. If BPID field is blank, then default values are set for the parameters defined in BCBDPRP entry.
3. For pure thermal analysis, BEHAV=DEFORM and BEHAV=HEAT are identical. However, in
coupled thermal-mechanical analysis, BEHAV=DEFORM specifies a deformable in mechanical
analysis part, while BEHAV=HEAT defines a rigid meshed body in mechanical analysis part.
4. If BCRGSRF entry does not exist, BCBODY1 entry can refer to one of the identification number of
BCPATCH, BCBZIER, BCNURB2, or BCNURBS entry directly (RBID).
Main Index
BCBOX 1241
3D Contact Region
BCBOX 3D Contact Region
Defines a 3D contact region - all elements within the region define a contact body in SOL 600 and 700.
Format (Form 1):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCBOX ID HOW
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8
Form 2:
BCBOX ID COORD HOW
X1 Y1 Z1 X2 Y2 Z2
X3 Y3 Z3 X4 Y4 Z4
X5 Y5 Z5 X6 Y6 Z6
X7 Y7 Z7 X8 Y8 Z8
Example (for Form 1):

BCBOX 101 0
1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008
R
Describer Meaning
ID Identification of a deformable surface corresponding to a BSID value on the BCBODY

entry if the Case Control BCONTACT=BCBOX is specified. All elements
corresponding to the designated box may potentially come into contact. See Remark 1.
(Integer > 0)
COORD Enter COORD in field 3 if x,y,z coordinates of the box are to be specified rather than
grid IDs. (Character)
HOW A flag indicating whether an element is in the defined box or not. (Integer; Default = 0)
0 If only one grid point of an element is in the box, the entire element is
considered to be in the box.
1 All grid points comprising the element must be within the box,
otherwise the element is considered outside of the box.
N1-N8 Enter 8 Grid IDs defining a box (hexa-like region) if the third field is blank. (Integer;
Required if COORD is blank)
Xi, Yi, Zi Enter eight x,y,z values in the basic coordinate system if the third field is COORD. See
Remark 6. (Real; Required if “COORD” is entered in field 3 of line 1)
Main Index
1242 BCBOX
3D Contact Region
Remarks:
1. ID must be unique with respect to all other BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP, and BCMATL entries.
2. The deformable surface may alternately be defined using BSURF, BCPROP, or BCMATL entries.
3. Only one kind of entry (BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP, or BCMATL) may be used to define a
particular deformable surface.
4. All elements corresponding to the IDs entered will be used to define the deformable surface.
5. The model is searched to determine whether each element lies within the specified box region as
specified by the HOW criteria option.
6. For SOL 700, the BCBOX allows a general box and edges do not need to be aligned with the
coordinates axis. The eight grid points define the box identical to the CHEXA grid point numbering.
7. BCBOX is not supported in SOLs 101 and 400.
Main Index
BCBZIER 1243
Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of Bezier Surfaces in SOLs 101 and 400
BCBZIER Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of Bezier Surfaces in SOLs 101 and 400
Defines a rigid contact body made up of Bezier surfaces used in SOLs 101 and 400 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCBZIER RBID NP1 NP2 NSUB1 NSUB2
G1 G2 G3 G4 -etc.-
Example:
BCBZIER 98 3 3 25 15
21 11 1 84 74 64 147 137
127
Describer Meaning
RBID Unique identification number referenced by a BCRGSRF or BCBODY1 entry. (Integer >
0) See Remark 1.
G1, G2, Grid numbers of each point (must be in order). There must be NP1*NP2 grid points
G3, etc. defined. Enter NP1 points for NP2=1, then NP1 points for NP2=2, etc. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. If BCRGSRF entry does not exist, BCBZIER entry will be referenced by the BCBODY1 entry
directly.
2. For BEZIER surfaces, enter np1*np2 points in the order shown below

2x2 1,2,3,4 2,1,4,3
3x2 1,2,3,4,5,6 3,2,1,6,5,4
3x3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 3,2,1,6,5,4,9,8,7
Main Index
1244 BCBZIER
Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of Bezier Surfaces in SOLs 101 and 400
Main Index
BCELIPS 1245
Contact Ellipsoid List- SOL 700
BCELIPS Contact Ellipsoid List- SOL 700
Defines a list of ellipsoid names (character strings) for use of contact analysis. Used in SOL700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCELIPS CID NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAMEi etc
Example:
BCELIPS 1 HUB RIM HEAD CHEST
Field Content
CID Unique identification number of ellipsoid names which can be used for contact.
(Integer > 0; required)
NAME Name of an ellipsoid. (Character; required)
Remarks:
Use as many continuations as required to define the complete list of names. A blank field terminates the list..
Main Index
1246 BCGRID
Contact Node Region
BCGRID Contact Node Region
Grids to be included in contact analyses in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCGRID CID GID1 GID2 GID3 GID4 GID5 GID6 GID7
GID8 GID9 GID10 GID11 GID12 GID13 -etc.-
Example:
BCGRID 100 12 14 17 121 234 235 270
309 1001 THRU 2000 BY 2
Describer Meaning
ID Unique identification number of a “cloud” of gridpoints which can be used for contact
or RCONN, BJOIN or WALL. (Integer > 0; Required)
GID1, Gridpoint ID. THRU indicates a range to be used. BY is the increment to be used
GID2,… within this range. (Integer > 0; Required)
Remarks:
1. ID must be unique with respect to all other BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP, BCMATL, or BCSEG
entries.
2. BCGRID may only be used for SLAVE body definitions on the BCTABLE entry.
3. As many continuation lines as necessary may be used to define all GRID points used in the definition.
Main Index
BCHANGE 1247
Changes Definitions of Contact Bodies
BCHANGE Changes Definitions of Contact Bodies
Changes definitions of contact bodies used in SOL 101 and SOL 400.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCHANGE ID TYPE IDBOD1 N1 N2 INC
IDBOD2 N1 N2 INC IDBOD3 etc.
Example:
BCHANGE 201 NODE 1 1001 1010 1
2 2001 2021 2
Describer Meaning
ID Identification number referenced by a BCONTACT or BCHANGE Case Control
command within a SUBCASE or STEP. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0; Required)
Type Type of modification (Character; Required)
NODE Defines nodes of a contact body which may come into contact.
EXCLUDE Excludes 2 node segments in 2D or 4 node patches in 3D.
IDBODi Identification number of a contact body, BCBODY or BCBODY1 entry. (Integer > 0)
N1 Starting grid ID. More than one N1-N2-INC range may be entered for each body, see
Remark 7. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
N2 Ending grid ID.
INC Grid ID increment.
Remarks:
1. To place an entry in the loadcase 0, set ID=0, which does not need any corresponding Case Control
command BCONTACT=0 or BCHANGE=0, and it is always executed automatically. To place an
entry in any physical loadcase (SUBCASE or STEP), the ID must be selected by the Case Control
command BCONTACT=ID or BCHANGE=ID. Note that if BCHANGE Case Control command
exists, it always dominates the selection of BCHANGE Bulk Data entries.
2. The BCHANGE entry does not apply to rigid bodies. Multiple BCHANGE entries are allowed. A
body may be entered more than once with different grid IDs.
3. BCHANGE is useful only for saving computer time and is not recommended for general usage.
4. Warning -- For the NODE option, if some nodes in a body are inadvertently omitted, they may
penetrate other bodies.
5. BCHANGE with the NODE option is not supported in Segment-to-segment contact.
Main Index
1248 BCHANGE
Changes Definitions of Contact Bodies
6. NODE and EXCLUDE may not be used simultaneously in the same BCHANGE entry.
7. If TYPE=NODE, the form of N1-N2-INC range has the following rules:
a. The format of INC is either blank or integer (> 0).
b. N1-N2-0 or N1-N2-blank represents 2 nodes (N1,N2) where 0<N1 and 0<N2,
c. N1-N2-INC, INC>0, represent a range input but 0<N1<N2.
8. f TYPE=EXCLUDE, the form of N1-N2-INC range has the following rules:
a. For node segment, N1-N2-INC is used. If 0<N1<N2 and INC>0, the range is applied. If INC-
blank or 0, it is 2 nodes (N1,N2) input that can be in any order.
b. For 4 nodes patch, (N1,N2,N3,N4), 2 sets of range, which have to input in sequence, are
required.
(IDBOD1,-N1,N2,INC1) and (IDBOD2,N3,N4,INC2) where IDBOD1=IDBOD2, Ni>0,
INC1 and INC2 are ignored.
The following example is for a 4-node patch (100,110,300,200)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCHANGE 1 EXCLUDE 1 -100 110
1 300 200
c. For 3 nodes patch, (N1,N2,N3), 2 sets of range, which have to input in sequence, are required
(IDBOD1,-N1,N2,INC1) and (IDBOD2,N3,N3,INC2)
where IDBOD1=IDBOD2,Ni>0, INC1 and INC2 are ignored.
The following example is for a 3-noded patch (132,97,95)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCHANGE 1 EXCLUDE 1 -132 97
1 95 95
Main Index
BCHANGE 1249
Changes Definitions of Contact Bodies in SOL 600
BCHANGE Changes Definitions of Contact Bodies in SOL 600
Changes definitions of contact bodies used in SOL 600.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCHANGE ID TYPE NBOD IDBOD1 N1 N2 INC
IDBOD2 N1 N2 INC IDBOD3 etc.
Example:
BCHANGE 201 NODE 2 1 1001 1010 1
2 2001 2021 2
Describer Meaning
ID Identification number referenced by a SUBCASE Case Control command. See Remark
2. (Integer > 0; Required)
Type Type of modification (Character; Required)
NODE Defines nodes of a contact body which may come into contact.
EXCLUDE Excludes 2 node segments in 2D or 4 node patches in 3D.
NBOD Number of bodies to be modified -- must match number of bodies actually entered.
More than one N1-N2-INC range may be entered for each body, see Remark 7. See N1
below. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
IDBODi Identification number of a contact body, BCBODY entry. (Integer > 0)
N1 Starting grid ID.
N2 Ending grid ID.
INC Grid ID increment.
Remarks:
1. To place an entry in Marc’s phase 0, set ID=0. To activate the entry for the first SUBCASE, SET
ID=1, for the 2nd, set ID=2.
2. The BCHANGE entry does not apply to rigid bodies. Multiple BCHANGE entries are allowed. A
body may be entered more than once with different grid IDs.
3. The BCHANGE entry covers Marc’s history definitions CONTACT NODE and EXCLUDE.
4. BCHANGE is useful only for saving computer time and is not recommended for general usage.
5. Warning -- For the NODE option, if some nodes in a body are inadvertently omitted, they may
penetrate other bodies.
Main Index
1250 BCHANGE
Changes Definitions of Contact Bodies in SOL 600
6. If more than one N1-N2-INC range is required for a body, enter N1 as a negative value for all ranges
except for the last range for which N1 is entered as a positive value.
7. If more than one N1-N2-INC range is required, all ranges with IBOD1 must come first, followed by
all with IBOD2, etc.
8. The EXCLUDE option is obsolete. The reasons why it was added in the past have been alleviated by
better improved contact algorithms. If the EXCLUDE option is entered for 3D shapes two N1-N2-
INC ranges are normally required to define all 4 nodes of a patch. If the patch is triangular, the last
two nodes must be repeated. The following are examples of how data are entered for one element
using the exclude option. The first example is for a 4-node patch (nodes 100, 110, 200, 300) and the
second is for a 3-node patch (nodes 132, 97, 95, 95).
BCHANGE 1 EXCLUDE 1 1 -100 110 10

1 200 300 100
BCHANGE 1 EXCLUDE 1 1 -132 132 0

1 -97 97 0 1 -95 95 0
1 95 95 0
Main Index
BCMATL 1251
3D Contact Region by Element Materials
BCMATL 3D Contact Region by Element Materials
Defines a 3D contact region by element material. All elements with the specified materials define a contact
body used in SOL 600 and SOL 700.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCMATL ID IM1 IM2 IM3 IM4 IM5 IM6 IM7
IM8 IM9 etc.
Example:
BCMATL 1001 101 201 301
Describer Meaning
entry if the Case Control command, BCONTACT=BCMATL is specified. All
elements corresponding to the material IDs specified may potentially come into
contact. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0)
IMi Material ID. A minimum of one entry is required. (Integer)
Remarks:
2. The deformable surface may alternately be defined using BSURF, BCBOX, or BCPROP entries.
5. As many continuation lines as necessary may be used to define all material IDs associated with a
particular deformable body.
6. BCMATL may not be used to define contact regions made up of composite elements.
Main Index
1252 BCMOVE
Movement of Bodies in Contact
BCMOVE Movement of Bodies in Contact
Defines movement of bodies in contact used in SOL 101 and SOL 400.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCMOVE ID MTYPE
IDRBOD1 IDRBOD2 IDRBOD3 etc.
Examples:
BCMOVE 33 RELEASE
1 3 5 7
BCMOVE 1 approach
Describer Meaning
ID Identification number referenced by a BCONTACT or BCMOVE Case Control
command within a SUBCASE or STEP. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0; Required)
MTYPE Movement type. (Character; Default = APPROACH)
APPROACH All rigid bodies are moved so that they all make contact with
deformable bodies.
RELEASE The contact condition is released for selected bodies.
SYNCHRON All rigid bodies are moved until the first rigid body makes
contact with a deformable body.
IDRBODi Identification numbers of contact bodies to be released, for option RELEASE only.
Points to BCBODY or BCBODY1 Bulk Data entries.
Remarks:
1. To place an entry in the loadcase 0, set ID=0, which does not need any corresponding Case Control
command BCONTACT=0 or BCMOVE=0, and it is always executed automatically. To place an
entry in any physical loadcase (SUBCASE or STEP), the ID must be selected by the Case Control
command BCONTACT=ID or BCMOVE=ID. Note that if BCMOVE Case Control command
exists, it always dominates the selection of BCMOVE Bulk Data entries. ID must be unique (only
one BCMOVE per SUBCASE).
2. For MTYPE=APPROACH and MTYPE=SYNCHRON leave all following fields blank.
3. The APPROACH and SYNCHRON options apply to rigid contact surfaces only.
4. You may release a deformable body from contact with either a deformable or rigid body.
Main Index
BCMOVE 1253
Movement of Bodies in Contact in SOL 600
BCMOVE Movement of Bodies in Contact in SOL 600
Defines movement of bodies in contact to be used in SOL 600.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCMOVE ID MTYPE IREL
IDRBOD1 IDRBOD2 IDRBOD3 etc.
Examples:
BCMOVE 33 RELEASE 20
1 3 5 7
BCMOVE 1 approach
Describer Meaning
ID Identification number referenced by a SUBCASE or STEP Case Control command.
See Remark 1. (Integer > 0; Required)
MTYPE Movement type. (Character; Default = APPROACH)
APPROACH All rigid bodies are moved so that they all make contact with
deformable bodies.
RELEASE The contact condition is released for selected bodies.
SYNCHRON All rigid bodies are moved until the first rigid body makes contact
with a deformable body.
IREL Flag to indicate how contact forces are removed, for option RELEASE only. (Integer)
=0 Contact forces are immediately removed. (Default)
>0 Contact forces are reduced to zero over the number of increments
specified in this load period. See NLPARM and TSTEP1 for the
number of increments.
IDRBODi Identification numbers of rigid bodies to be released, for option RELEASE only. Points
to BCBODY Bulk Data entries.
Remarks:
1. To place an entry in Marc’s phase 0, set ID=0. To activate the entry for the 1st SUBCASE, SET ID=1,
for the 2nd, set ID=2. ID must be unique (only one BCMOVE per SUBCASE).
2. This entry matches Marc’s history definitions RELEASE, APPROACH, and SYNCHRONIZED.
Note that Marc’s history definition MOTION CHANGE is done in MSC Nastran by describing the
enforced motion for the grid which is defined to be the center of rotation of the rigid body, see CGID
of the BCBODY entry.
Main Index
1254 BCMOVE
Movement of Bodies in Contact in SOL 600
3. For MTYPE=APPROACH and MTYPE=SYNCHRON leave all following fields blank.

4. The APPROACH and SYNCHRON options apply to rigid contact surfaces only.
5. You may release a deformable body from contact with either a deformable or rigid body.
Main Index
BCNURB2 1255
Defines a 2D Rigid Contact Body Made up of NURBS in SOLs 101 and 400
BCNURB2 Defines a 2D Rigid Contact Body Made up of NURBS in SOLs 101 and 400
Defines a 2D rigid contact body made up of NURBS used in SOLs 101 and 400 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCNURB2 RBID NPTU NORU NSUB
“GRID” G1 G2 G3 G4 -etc.-
or or or or or
“COORD” X1 Y1 X2 Y2
“HOMO” Homo1 Homo2 Homo3 Homo4 -etc.-
“KNOT” Knot1 Knot2 Knot3 Knot4 Knot5 -etc.-
Examples:
BCNURB2 102 4 1 1
GRID 237 101 104 235
HOMO 0.0 0.5 0.5 1.0
KNOT 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.8 1.0
BCNURB2 3001 -5 3 50
COORD -.1 .14 -.1 .04 -1.4-16 .04
.1 .04 .1 .14
HOMO 1. .707107 1. .707107 1.
KNOT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0
1.0
Describer Meaning
RBID Unique identification number referenced by a BCRGSRF or BCBODY1 entry.
(Integer > 0) See Remark 1.
NPTU Number of control points. If the control points are entered as coordinates rather than
grid IDs NPTU must be set to a negative value whose absolute value is the number of
xy coordinates. (Integer; no Default)
NORU Order along U direction. (Integer > 0)
“GRID” Indicate the start of the list of grid numbers. See Remark 2.
G1, G2, G3, G4, Grid numbers for each of the NPTU control points. (Integer > 0)
etc.
“COORD” Indicate the start of the list of xy coordinates. See Remark 2.
Main Index
1256 BCNURB2
Defines a 2D Rigid Contact Body Made up of NURBS in SOLs 101 and 400
X1, Y1, X2, Y2, Alternate method to define control points without using GRID points. There must be
etc. abs(NPTU) set of (x,y) entries. (Real)
“HOMO” Indicate the start of the list of homogeneous coordinates.
Homo1, Homo2, Homogeneous coordinates. (Real; 0.0 to 1.0) There must be NPTU entries.
Homo3, etc.
“KNOT” Indicate the start of the list of knot vectors.
Knot1, Knot2, Knot vectors. (Real; 0.0 to 1.0) There must be (NPTU+NORU) entries.
Knot3, etc.
Remarks:
1. If BCRGSRF entry does not exist, BCNURB2 entry will be referenced by the BCBODY1 entry
directly.
2. The list of grid IDs (“GRID”) and the list of xy coordinates (“COORD”) cannot coexist.
Main Index
BCNURBS 1257
Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of NURBS in SOLs 101 and 400
BCNURBS Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of NURBS in SOLs 101 and 400
Defines a rigid contact body made up of NURBS used in SOLs 101 and 400 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCNURBS RBID NPTU NPTV NORU NORV NSUBU NSUBV
“GRID” G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
or or or or or or or -etc.-
“COORD” X1 Y1 Z1 X2 Y2 Z2
“HOMO” Homo1 Homo2 Homo3 Homo4 Homo5 Homo6 Homo7
Homo8 Homo9 -etc.-
“KNOT” Knot1 Knot2 Knot3 Knot4 Knot5 Knot6 Knot7
Knot8 Knot9 -etc.-
“TRIM” IDtrim1 IDtrim2 IDtrim3 -etc.-
Examples:
BCNURBS 48 2 1 2 1 50 50
GRID 3005 102
HOMO 1. .3333
KNOT 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.5 1. 1.
BCNURBS 63 -2 2 2 2 50 50
COORD .3 -.6 0. .3 -.1 0.
HOMO 1. 1. 1. 1.
KNOT 0.0 0.0 1. 1. 0. 0.
1. 1.
TRIM 511 2002 87 704
Describer Meaning
RBID Unique identification number referenced by a BCRGSRF or BCBODY1 entry.
(Integer > 0) See Remark 1.
NPTU Number of control points in U direction. If the control points are entered as
coordinates rather than grid IDs, NPTU must be set to a negative value whose
absolute value is the number of xyz coordinates. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0; Required)
NPTV Number of control points in V directions. (Integer > 0; Required)
Main Index
1258 BCNURBS
Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of NURBS in SOLs 101 and 400
NORV Order along V direction. (Integer > 0; Required)

NSUBU Number of subdivisions in U direction. (Integer > 0; Required)
NSUBV Number of subdivisions in V direction. (Integer > 0; Required)
“GRID” Indicate the start of the list of grid numbers. See Remark 3.
G1, G2, G3, etc. Grid point IDs defining control points. (Integer > 0) There must be NPTU*NPTV
entries.
“COORD” Indicate the start of the list of xyz coordinates. See Remark 3.
X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Alternate method to define control points without using GRID points. There must
Y2, Z2, etc. be abs(NPTU)*NPTV sets of (x,y,z) entries.
“HOMO” Indicate the start of the list of homogeneous coordinates.
Homo1, Homo2, Homogeneous coordinates (0.0 to 1.0). There must be abs(NPTU)*NPTV entries.
Homo3, etc. (Real)
“KNOT” Indicate the start of the list of knot vectors.
Knot1, Knot2, Knot vectors (0.0 to 1.0). There must be (abs(NPTU)+NORU)+(NPTV+NORV)
Knot3, etc. entries. (Real)
“TRIM” Indicate the start of the list of trimming vector IDs.
IDtrimi Trimming vector identification number of a BCTRIM entry. (Integer > 0)
Homot1, Homogeneous coordinates (0.0 to 1.0) of this trimming vector. There must be
Homot2, NPTUtrim entries. (Real)
Homot3, etc.
Knott1, Knott2, Knot vectors (0.0 to 1.0) of this trimming vector. There must be
Knott3, etc. NPTUtrim+NORUtrim entries. (Real)
Remarks:
1. If BCRGSRF entry does not exist, BCNURBS entry will be referenced by the BCBODY1 entry
directly.
2. Enter NPTU grid points G1, G2, G3, etc. (set NPTU to a positive value equal to the number of grid
points) or enter X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2, etc. coordinates for abs(NPTU) points and set NPTU to a
negative value.
3. The list of grid IDs (“GRID”) and the list of xyz coordinates (“COORD”) cannot coexist.
Main Index
BCONECT 1259
Defines a Contact Pair
BCONECT Defines a Contact Pair
Defines a contact pair used in SOLs 101, 103, 105, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 200, 400 and 700. Only
SOL 101, 400 and 700 can support all contact types: touching contact, glued, step glue and permanent glue
(see Chapter 7: Contact Types of Nastran SOL 400 Getting Started Guide). Note that SOL 700 calls it “tie” contact
to glue (also step glue or permanent glue). SOL 103~112 and standard 200 (without calling SOL 400) can
only support permanent glue. When SOL 200 calls SOL 400 (or say SOL 400 optimization), it can support
all contact types.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCONECT ID BCGPID BCPPID IDSLAVE IDMASTER
“SLAVES” IDSL1 IDSL2 IDSL3 IDSL4 IDSL5 IDSL6 IDSL7
IDSL8 IDSL9 -etc.-
“MASTERS IDMA1 IDMA2 IDMA3 IDMA4 IDMA5 IDMA6 IDMA7

”
IDMA8 IDMA9 -etc.-
Examples:
BCONECT 57 306 2 1002
BCONECT 9 108
SLAVES 30 26
MASTERS 294 135 528
Describer Meaning
ID Unique identification number referenced by a BCTABL1 entry (Integer ≥ 0). See Remark
1.
BCGPID Parameter identification number of a BCONPRG entry (Integer ≥ 0 or blank). See
Remark 2.
BCPPID Parameter identification number of a BCONPRP entry (Integer ≥ 0 or blank). See
Remark 2.
IDSLAVE Identification number of BCBODY1 entry defining the touching body (Integer ≥ 0 or
blank). See Remarks 3. and 4.
IDMASTER Identification number of BCBODY1 entry defining the touched body (Integer ≥ 0 or
blank). See Remarks 5. and 6.
“SLAVES” Indicates the start of the list of the touching bodies. See Remark 4.
Main Index
1260 BCONECT
Defines a Contact Pair
IDSLi Identification number of BCBODY1 entry defining the touching bodies (Integer ≥ 0 or
blank).
For SOL 700, leaving IDSL1 blank will result in contact for all elements in the model.
In this case, you are allowed to use ADAPT=YES.
“MASTERS” Indicates the start of the list of bodies touched by touching bodies. See Remark 6.
IDMAi Identification number of BCBODY1 entry defining touched bodies (Integer ≥ 0 or
blank).
Remarks:
1. BCONECT can be selected by the Case Control command BCONTACT=ID to define surface
contact if BCTABL1 entry does not exist. See Remarks 2.. and 3.. of BCTABL1 entry.
2. If BCGPID or BCPPID field is blank, then default values are set for the parameters of touching
bodies.
3. A short input to define a single touching body exists if the user provides IDSLAVE. On the other
hand, if the user leaves IDSLAVE blank, then “SLAVES” descriptor is required and IDSL1 must be
specified. Exceptions are for SOL 700 self-contact, which may use a slave IDSL1 of zero and no
“MATERS” entry.
4. “SLAVES” and IDSLi fields will be ignored if IDSLAVE exists. If IDSLAVE field is blank, then
“SLAVES” and IDSLi must be specified. In this case, each IDSLi will be processed separately.
5. A short input to define a single touched body exists if the user provides IDMASTER. On the other
hand, if the user leaves IDMASTER blank, then “MASTERS” descriptor is required and IDMA1
must be specified.
6. “MASTERS” and IDMAi fields will be ignored if IDMASTER exists. If IDMASTER field is blank,
then “MASTERS” and IDMAi must be specified.
7. The concept of Slave and Master relation is important to the node-to-segment contact but not
relevant for segment-to-segment contact. In segment-to-segment contact, they are mainly used to
define the contact pair(s).
8. If all the BCONPRG that are referenced by a BCONECT (which is referenced by BCTABL1) have
a value of IGLUE > 0, and this BCONECT is referenced in the 1st Loadcase (SOL 100*) or the 1st
Step (SOL 400) then the connections are considered to be permanent and do not change (unless a
BCPARA is used to deactivate the permanent glue).
Main Index
BCONP 1261
Contact Parameters
BCONP Contact Parameters
Defines the parameters for a contact region and its properties for slideline contact in SOL 106 or SOL 129.
SOL 400 is the preferred method for contact analysis, see BCBODY1, BCONECT, BCONPRG,
BCONPRP, BCPARA and BCTABL1.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCONP ID SLAVE MASTER SFAC FRICID PTYPE CID
Example:
BCONP 95 10 15 1.0 33 1
Describer Meaning
ID Contact region identification number. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0)
SLAVE Slave region identification number. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0)
MASTER Master region identification number. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0)
SFAC Stiffness scaling factor. SFAC is used to scale the penalty values automatically
calculated by the program. See Remark 4. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)
FRICID Contact friction identification number. See Remark 5. (Integer > 0 or blank)
PTYPE Penetration type. See Remark 6. (Integer 1 or 2; Default = 1)
1 Unsymmetrical (slave penetration only--Default)
2 Symmetrical
CID Coordinate system identification number to define the slideline plane vector and the
slideline plane of contact. See Remark 7. (Integer > 0; Default = 0, which means the
basic coordinate system)
Remarks:
1. ID field must be unique with respect to all other BCONP identification numbers.
2. The referenced SLAVE is the identification number in the BLSEG Bulk Data entry. This is the slave
line. The width of each slave segment must also be defined to get proper contact stresses. See the
Bulk Data entry, BWIDTH, 1381 for the details of specifying widths.
3. The referenced MASTER is the identification number in the BLSEG Bulk Data entry. This is the
master line. For symmetrical penetration, the width of each master segment must also be defined.
See the Bulk Data entry, BWIDTH, 1381 for the details of specifying widths.
Main Index
1262 BCONP
Contact Parameters
4. SFAC may be used to scale the penalty values automatically calculated by the program. The program
calculates the penalty value as a function of the diagonal stiffness matrix coefficients that are in the
contact region. In addition to SFAC, penalty values calculated by the program may be further scaled
by the ADPCON parameter (see description of ADPCON parameter for more details). The penalty
value is then equal to k*SFAC*|ADPCON|, where k is a function of the local stiffness. It should be
noted that the value in SFAC applies to only one contact region, whereas the ADPCON parameter
applies to all the contact regions in the model.
5. The referenced FRICID is the identification number of the BFRIC Bulk Data entry. The BFRLC
defines the frictional properties for the contact region.
6. In an unsymmetrical contact algorithm only slave nodes are checked for penetration into master
segments. This may result in master nodes penetrating the slave line. However, the error depends
only on the mesh discretization. In symmetric penetration both slave and master nodes are checked
for penetration. Thus, no distinction is made between slave and master. Symmetric penetration may
be up to thirty percent more expensive than the unsymmetric penetration.
7. In Figure 9-2, the unit vector in the Z-axis of the coordinate system defines the slideline plane vector.
The slideline plane vector is normal to the slideline plane. Relative motions outside the slideline plane
are ignored, and therefore must be small compared to a typical master segment. For a master segment
the direction from master node 1 to master node 2 gives the tangential direction (t). The normal
direction for a master segment is obtained by the cross product of the slideline plane vector with the
unit tangent vector (i.e., n=z x t). The definition of the coordinate system should be such that the
normal direction must point toward the slave region. For symmetric, penetration, the normals of
master segments and slave segments must face each other. This is generally accomplished by
traversing from master line to slave line in a counterclockwise or clockwise fashion depending on
whether the slideline plane vector forms a right-hand or left-hand coordinate system with the slideline
plane.
k-th Slave Segment
k+1 k k-1 Slave Line  X-Y plane is the slideline

plane. Unit normal in the
l-1 Z-direction is the slideline
l+1 plane vector.
Master Line
 Arrows show positive
direction for ordering
nodes. Counterclockwise
l-th Master from master line to slave
Y Segment
line.
 Slave and master segment
X normals must face each
Slideline Plane Vector other.
Z Direction
Figure 9-2 A Typical Finite Element Slideline Contact Region
Main Index
BCONPRG 1263
Geometric Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies
BCONPRG Geometric Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies
Defines geometric contact parameters used to determine if contact occurs between bodies. For segment-to-
segment contact it also defines additional numerical parameters used to apply the constraints. The parameters
defined here are referenced by the BCONECT entry. This entry is used in conjunction with the BCONPRP
entry.
Geometric Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOLs 101 and 400 for General Contact or in SOLs
101, 103, 105, 107 - 112, 200 and 400 for the Permanently Glued or Tied Contact.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCONPRG BCGPID PARAM1 VAL1 PARAM2 VAL2 PARAM3 VAL3
Example:
BCONPRG 90 ICOORD 1 IGLUE 1
Describer Meaning
BCGPID Identification number for geometric contact parameters (Integer > 0).
Main Index
1264 BCONPRG
Table 9-4 Geometric Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOLs 101, 103, 105, 107-112, 200 and 400
AUGDIST Penetration distance beyond which an augmentation will be applied; used by the segment-
to-segment contact algorithm only. (Real ≥ 0.0, see Remark 6. for default)
BIAS Contact tolerance bias factor. If this field is left blank, the default is the BIAS of the
BCPARA entry. A nonblank entry will override the BIAS entered on the BCPARA entry.
Note 0.0 is not default, and will override the BIAS on BCPARA. SYSTEM(758)=1 will set
0.0 same as blank. (0.0<=Real<=1.0)
CINTERF The definition varies depending on OPINTRF. (Real; Default = 0.0)
When OPINTRF is set to 0 (default), Interference closure amount, normal to the contact
surface. For CINTERF > 0.0, overlap between bodies. For CINTERF < 0.0, gap between
bodies.
When OPINTRF is set to 1, interference closure magnitude. To clear penetration, set a
negative value.
When OPINTRF is set to 2, magnitude of translation vector defining in VXINTRF,
VYINTRF and VZINTRF.
When OPINTRF is set to 3, not used.
When OPINTRF is set to 4, not used.
COPTS, Flag to indicate how slave and master surfaces may contact. See Remark 2. (Integer; Default
COPTM = 1011) COPTS and COPTM apply to all slave and master surfaces on the associated
BCONECT.
ERROR Distance below which a node is considered touching a body. Default = blank, automatic
calculation. See BCPARA Bulk Data entry for more details. (Real)
HARDS Hard-soft ratio. This entry is only used if double-sided contact with automatic constraint
optimization is used, i.e. ISTYP=2 on the BCBDPRP entry. The hard-soft ratio can be used
by the program if there is a significant difference in the average stiffness of the contact
bodies (expressed by the trace of the initial stress-strain law). If the ratio of the stiffnesses is
larger than the hard-soft ratio, the nodes of the softest body are the preferred slave nodes.
(Real; Default = 2.0) This parameter is ignored for the permanently glued contact.
FGCFLG Flag to activate Cohesive (Flexible) Glued Contact: (See Remark 12.)
0 – no Cohesive (Flexible) Glued Contact
1 – activate Cohesive (Flexible) Glued Contact
FGCNST Equivalent normal contact stiffness of connector for Cohesive (Flexible) Glued Contact
FGCTST Equivalent tangential contact stiffness of connector for Cohesive (Flexible) Glued Contact
FGCNSTR ID of table for define contact normal stress versus relative displacement for Cohesive
(Flexible) Glued Contact. Only TABL3D allowable.
FGCTSTR ID of table for define contact tangential stress versus relative displacement for Cohesive
FGCNSTI ID of table for define contact normal stiffness versus relative displacement or temperature
for Cohesive (Flexible) Glued Contact. Only TABL3D allowable.
Main Index
BCONPRG 1265
FGCTSTI ID of table for define contact tangential stiffness versus relative displacement or
temperature for Cohesive (Flexible) Glued Contact. Only TABL3D allowable.
FGCRCEN ID of grid on which the resultant contact and moment are based.
ICOORD Enter 1 to modify the coordinates of a node in contact with a deformable body so that
stress-free initial contact can be obtained. Enter 2 to extend the tangential error tolerance
at sharp corners of deformable bodies to delay sliding off a contacted segment. Enter 3 to
have both 1 and 2 active. (Integer; Default = 0)
IGLUE Flag to activate glue options (Integer ≥ 0). Default is 0, no glue option. See JGLUE option
for controlling a glue contact type in details. This field must be specified for the
permanently glued contact. See Remarks 4. and 5. A negative value of IGLUE indicates that
this method of glue will be used for the entire Step in SOL 400. See Remark 9.
1 or -1 Activates the glue option. In the glue option, all degrees-of- freedom of the contact nodes
are tied in case of deformable-deformable contact once the node comes in contact. The
relative tangential motion of a contact node is zero in case of deformable-rigid contact. The
node will be projected onto the contact body. For the permanently glued contact, this
option is recommended when there is no gap or overlap between contact surfaces or initial
stress free contact is specified.
2 or -2 Activates a special glue option to insure that there is no relative tangential and normal
displacement when a node comes into contact. An existing initial gap or overlap between
the node and the contacted body will not be removed, as the node will not be projected onto
the contacted body. To maintain an initial gap, ERROR should be set to a value slightly
larger than the physical gap.
3 or -3 Insures full moment carrying glue when shells contact. The node will be projected onto the
contacted body. For the permanently glued contact, this option is recommended when
moments are important and there is no gap or overlap between contact surfaces or initial
stress free contact is specified.
4 or -4 Insures full moment carrying glue when shells contact. The node will not be projected onto
the contact body and an existing initial gap or overlap between the node and the contacted
body will not be removed, as the node will not be projected onto the contacted body.
ISEARCH Option for contact searching order, from Slave to Master or from Master to Slave, for
deformable contact bodies. ISEARCH is not necessary in segment-to-segment contact.
0 (Double orders search) the search order is from lower BCBODY1 ID's to higher ones
first. Then it searches the opposite order. See Remark 3.
1 (Single order search) the searching order is from Slave to Master.
2 (Single order search) let the program decide which search order. See Remark 3.
Note that ISTYP in BCBDPRP or BCBODY is supported with ISEARCH=0 only.
Main Index
1266 BCONPRG
JGLUE This option is only relevant if the glue option is invoked (IGLUE > 0). Enter 0 if a node
should not separate (default). Enter 1 to invoke the standard separation behavior based on
the maximum residual force (related to FNTOL parameter of BCPARA or BCONPRP
entry). Enter 2 to activate breaking glue (related to BGM, BGN, BGSN and BGST
parameters of BCONPRP entry). (Integer; Default = 0) This parameter is ignored for the
permanently glued contact or step glued contact, see Remark 9.
PENALT Augmented Lagrange penalty factor; used by the segment-to-segment contact algorithm
only. (Real ≥ 0.0; see Remark 7. for default)
SLIDE Delayed slide off distance. This entry should not be made unless ICOORD ≥ 2 (see above).
When using the delayed slide off option, a node sliding on a segment will slide off this
segment only if it passes the node (2-D) or edge (3-D) at a sharp corner over a distance
larger than the delayed slide off distance. By default, the delayed slide off distance is related
to the dimensions of the contacted segment by a 20 percent increase of its isoparametric
domain. (Real; Default=0.0)
STKSLP Maximum allowable slip distance for sticking, beyond it there is no sticking, only sliding
exists, used by the segment-to-segment contact algorithm only. (Real ≥ 0.0; Default = 0.0)
See Remark 8.
TPENALT Augmented Lagrange penalty factor for sticking part of friction, used by the segment-to-
segment contact algorithm only. (Real > 0.0) The default is PENALT/1000, where
PENALT parameter is the Augmented Lagrange penalty factor for normal contact.
OPINTRF The method for interference fit. (Integer≥0; Default=0) See Remark 10.
0 small interference fit (solved in one increment)
1 interference fit varying with time; resolved in the normal direction
2 interference fit varying with time in a user specified direction
3 interference fit varying with time using scale factor
4 automatic interference fit varying with time and node location
TBINTRF TABLED1 id used by interference fit. (Integer>0; Required only when OPINTRF > 0)
When OPINTRF=1, TABLED1 id giving variation of interference closure with respect to
time
When OPINTRF=2, TABLED1 id giving variation of magnitude of translation vector with
respect to time
When OPINTRF=3, TABLED1 id giving variation of magnitude of scale factor with
respect to time
When OPINTRF=4, TABLED1 id giving variation of magnitude of penetration vector
projected node position on the master segment with respect to time
CBINTRF Contact body selection for interference fit. Only required when OPINTRF=2, 3 or 4.
(Integer≥0; Default=0)
When OPINTRF=2, Contact body ID for which translation vector to be used
When OPINTRF=3, Contact body ID for which scale factors to be used.
When OPINTRF=4, Contact body ID of which penetrations to be determined.
0 slave body
1 master body
Main Index
BCONPRG 1267
CDINTRF Coordinate system ID of VXINTRF, VYINTRF and VZINTRF for interference fit. Only
required when OPINTRF=2, 3. (Integer≥0; Default=0)
When OPINTRF=2, Coordinate system for direction cosines for the translation vector.
When OPINTRF=3, Coordinate system for scale factor vector.
VXINTRF X component of vector for interference fit. Only required when OPINTRF=2, 3. (Real;
default=0.0)
When OPINTRF=2, Direction cosines for the translation vector.
When OPINTRF=3, scale factor vector
VYINTRF Y component of vector for interference fit. Only required when OPINTRF=2, 3. (Real;
default=0.0)
When OPINTRF=3, scale factor vector.
VZINTRF Z component of vector for interference fit. Only required when OPINTRF=2, 3. (Real;
default=0.0)
When OPINTRF=3, scale factor vector.
PTINTRF Penetration search tolerance for interference fit. Only required when OPINTRF=4.
(Real≥0.0; default=error tolerance*100)
XCINTRF X component of center of scaling. Only required when OPINTRF=3. (Real; default=0.0)
Center is described in global coordinate (Coord0).
YCINTRF Y component of center of scaling. Only required when OPINTRF=3. (Real; default=0.0)
ZCINTRF Z component of center of scaling. Only required when OPINTRF=3. (Real; default=0.0)
OPINGP Initial gap or overlap option. See Remark 1. (Integer ≥0; default=0)
0 not used
1 initial gap or overlap
TOLINGP Search tolerance of initial gap. See Remark 14.. (Real ≥0.0; default= average edge length of
all contact segments, required only when OPINGP =1)
TOLING1 Search tolerance of initial overlap. See Remark 14. (Real ≥0.0; default=average edge length
of all contact segments, required only when OPINGP =1)
Main Index
1268 BCONPRG
CDINGP Contact body to be adjusted. (Integer ≥0; default=0, required only when OPINGP =1)
0 slave body
1 master body
MGINGP Gap or overlap magnitude. (Real ; default=0.0, required only when OPINGP =1)
> 0 gap
=0 Preserve initial clearance distance. See Remark 11.
< 0 overlap
SFNPNLT Scale factor of augmented Lagrange penalty factor along contact normal direction; used by
segment-to-segment contact method only. (Real>0.0;Default=1.0) SFNPNLT*PENALT is
used in analysis.
If this field is left default, value of SFNPNLT entered in BCPARA will be used. A nonblank
value entered in SFNPNLT will override the value of SFNPNLT in BCPARA.
SFTPNLT Scale factor of augmented Lagrange penalty factor along contact tangential direction; used
by segment-to-segment contact method only. (Real>0.0;Default=1.0)
SFTPNLT*TPENALT is used in analysis.
If this field is left default, value of SFTPNLT entered in BCPARA will be used. A nonblank
value entered in SFTPNLT will override the value of SFTPNLT in BCPARA.
Remarks:
1. The multipoint constraint equations (MPC equations) internally created from general contact or
glued contact can be printed out in standard Nastran punch file by using Case Control command,
NLOPRM MPCPCH.
2. COPTS and COPTM are packed numbers designating how the surfaces may contact using the
formula
COPTx=A+10*B+1000*C
where the following codes apply:
A: the outside of the solid elements in the body.
• = 1: the outside will be in the contact description (Default).
B: (flexible bodies): the outside of the shell elements in the body.
• = 1: both top and bottom faces will be in the contact description, thickness offset will be included
(Default).
• = 2: only bottom faces will be in the contact description, thickness offset will be included.
• = 3: only bottom faces will be in the contact description, shell thickness will be ignored.
• = 4: only top faces will be in the contact description, thickness offset will be included.
• = 5: only top faces will be in the contact description, shell thickness will be ignored.
• = 6: both top and bottom faces will be in the contact description, shell thickness will be ignored.
Note: The choice B = 6 for both bodies in a contact combination is only meaningful for glued
contact. If in such cases separation is allowed, separated nodes will not come into contact
anymore, unless a new CONTACT TABLE is defined to reset the value of B.
Main Index
BCONPRG 1269
Note: for segment-to-segment contact only use B=1 or B-6.

B: (rigid bodies): the rigid surface.
• = 1: the rigid surface should be in the contact description (Default).
C: (flexible bodies): the edges of the body.
• = 1: only the beam/bar edges are included in the contact description (Default).
• = 10: only the free and hard shell edges are included in the contact description.
• = 11: both the beam/bar edges and the free and hard shell edges are included in the contact
description.
Note that C has no effect if beam-to-beam contact is not switched on. (BEAMB ≠ 1 on BCPARA).
Note that C has no effect if segment-to-segment contact is used.
3. When ISEARCH=0 (and ISTYP=0 in default on BCBDPRP), the search order is from lower
BCBODOY1 ID to higher one to create the first set of contact constraints and then add the
constraints in the search order from higher BCBODY1 ID to lower one as long as they are not in
conflict with the first set.
When ISEARCH=2, the program looks into the smallest element edge at the outer boundary (and
the smallest thickness in case of shell elements) of each BCBODY1. Then, the search order of the two
deformable contact bodies is determined by the following rule when ID1 < ID2.
CB1= Min(1/20 of the smallest edge,1/4 of the smallest thickness) of BCBODY1 ID1
CB2= Min(1/20 of the smallest edge,1/4 of the smallest thickness) of BCBODY1 ID2
The search order is from lower BCBODY1 ID1 to higher BCBODY1 ID2 if CB1≤1.05*CB2.
Otherwise, if CB1>1.05*CB2 the search order is from BCBODY1 ID2 to BCBODY1 ID1.
4. For the permanently glued contact, IGLUE = ±2 or ±4 is favorable to pass the GROUNDCHECK.
The initial stress free contact is also available to preserve the six rigid body modes with IGLUE = ±1
or ±3.
5. A permanently glued contact for small rotation cannot be used to glue a deformable body to a rigid
one. If it is a SOL 101 or SOL 400 job, the permanently glued contact for large deformation and
rotation (IGLUE <0) or general contact (IGLUE > 0) with glued option must be performed.
6. By default, the threshold value of this penetration distance is 0.05 times the default contact
characteristic distance.
AUGDIST=0.05 L
7. The penalty factor used in the augmented Lagrange method is by default derived from the contact
characteristic distance and the stiffness of the deformable contact bodies involved (note that the
dimension of the penalty factor is force per cubic length).
0.5 ( S i + Sj )
PENALT = -----------------------------
L
The body stiffness (Si and Sj), are either defined by the average trace of the initial stress-strain law of
the elements defining the two contact bodies or by the average bulk modulus for (nearly)
incompressible rubber materials, whichever of the two is the largest.
Main Index
1270 BCONPRG
For continuum elements, the characteristic length ( L ) is given by one half of the average length of
all the edges being part of the contact boundary. For shell elements, the characteristic length is given
by half of the average thickness of all the shell elements being part of a contact body. When there is
contact between a solid and a shell element, then the characteristic length is defined by the shell
element.
In case of contact with a rigid body, since there is no body stiffness associated with a rigid body, the
default value is related to the deformation body only and is given by
1000S i
PENALT = -----------------
L
8. If STKSLP is set to 0.0 (Default), the sticking stiffness K1 is equal to the maximum friction force
(μ·Fnormal, where μ is the friction coefficient) divided by the maximum sticking displacement.
Otherwise, K1 is equal to the maximum friction force divided by the value of STKSLP.
9. A negative value of IGLUE enforces the gluing of the pair of bodies in the BCONECT that reference
this BCONPRG is based upon the geometric conditions at the beginning of the step and will not
change over this step. IGLUE will be changed to negative automatically if SYSTEM(758)=2 when
Permanently Glued setting is found with large rotation/deformation effect turned on.
10. For interference fit contact, the following options are available.
CINTERF, OPINTRF, TBINTRF, CBINTRF, CDINTRF, VXINTRF, VYINTRF, VZINTRF,
PTINTRF, XCINTRF, YCINTRF and ZCINTRF
11. For setting the initial gap or overlap, the following options are available. OPINGP, TOLINGP,
CDINGP and MGINGP.
When OPINGP is 1 in means that there it will try to preserve a distance between the two bodies often
called the clearance distance.
When MGINGP is zero, the clearance is not changed from the distance between the original
coordinate positions of the nodes. This is call the distance D0
When MGINGP is > 0 it means the distance between the bodies can shrink (i.e. the bodies can get
closer together), but when the distance reaches D0 - MGINGP. The clearance condition is satisfied
and this clearance distance (D0 - MGINGP ) is preserved.
When MGINGP is < 0 in means that it considers the bodies to be overlapping, so it first tries to
separate them by a distance = |MGINGP|; then it imposes the clearance condition such that the
clearance distance is D0 + |MGINGP|
12. Please note that
• Cohesive Contact is supported for only for S2S contact.
• All limitations of S2S contact is applicable for cohesive contact feature also.
• Breaking Glue feature is not supported with Cohesive contact.
13. When the initial stress-free(ICOORD=1), Node-to-Seg updates model geometry to close the gap,
nodes are projected onto the contact body; but Seg-to-Seg treats initial stress-free as pre-stress in the
equation without geometry update, no node projection is considered.
14. TOLINGP and TOLING1 follows the rules below.
Main Index
BCONPRG 1271
a. When both of TOLINGP and TOLING1 are not defined, the default value of average edge
length of all contact segments will be used for both.
b. When TOLINGP is only defined, TOLINGP value will be used for both of TOLINGP and
TOLING1.
c. When TOLING1 is only defined, TOLINGP1 value will be used for TOLING1 and the default
value of average edge length of all contact segments will be used for TOLINGP.
d. When both of TOLINGP and TOLING1 are defined, each values are used for each case
Main Index
1272 BCONPRG-700
Geometric Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOL 700
BCONPRG-700 Geometric Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOL 700
Defines geometric contact parameters of touching bodies used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
BCONPRP PID PARAM1 VAL1 PARAM2 VAL2 PARAM3 VAL3
Example:
BCONPRP 90 IGLUE 1
Describer Meaning
Main Index
BCONPRG-700 1273
Table 9-5 Geometric Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOL 700
IGLUE Flag to activate glue option (Integer = 0 or 1). Default is 0, no glue option. JGLUE option
controls a glue contact type in details. Without assigning IGLUE and JGLUE options, tied
contact methods (METHOD=TIEDxxx) can assign glue contact types as well.
0. No glue contact.
1. Activates the glue option. In the glue option, all degrees-of- freedom of the
contact nodes are tied in case of deformable-deformable contact once the node
comes in contact. The relative tangential motion of a contact node is zero in case
of deformable-rigid contact. The node will be projected onto the contact body.
JGLUE This option is only relevant if the glue option is invoked (IGLUE > 0). See
METHOD=TIEDxxx. (Integer ≥ 0; Default = 0) The following options are available:
0 Slave nodes in contact and which come into contact will permanently stick.
Tangential motion is inhibited. This option is only available with
METHOD=SS1WAY or SS2WAY and AUTO=YES.
METHOD Character, Influences the contact type used. See Remark 18. (Character, Default = FULL)
Options are:
FULL: Regular Contact

AIRBAG: Single Surface Contact
SS1WAY: Surface To Surface One Way
SS2WAY: Surface To Surface Two Way
RB1WAY: Rigid Body One Way To Rigid Body
RB2WAY: Rigid Body Two Way To Rigid Body
RNRB: Rigid Nodes To Rigid Body
TIEDNS: Tied Nodes to Surface
TIEDNSO: Tied Nodes to Surface with Offset
ADAPT Character, influences the contact type used. (Character, Default = NO)
Options are NO or YES.
When ADAPT=YES, the BCBODY1 entries IDMAi must be defined as:
behav=DEFORM
bsid references a BCPROP
THICK Shell thickness scale factor. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)
THICKOF Artificial contact thickness offset. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
Main Index
1274 BCONPRG-700
PENV Overwrites the default maximum penetration distance factor. (Real > 0.0;Default = 1.E20)
MAXPAR Maximum parametric coordinate in segment. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.025), search (values
1.025 and 1.20 recommended). Larger values can increase cost. If zero, the default is set to
1.025. This factor allows an increase in the size of the segments. May be useful at sharp
corners.
SOFT Soft constraint option: (Integer ≥ 0; Default = 1)
1 Soft constraint formulation (same as original Dytran method).

In the soft constraint option, the interface stiffness is based on the nodal mass and the global
time step size. This method is more suited for contact between two materials where the
elastic moduli vary greatly.
IGNORE Ignore initial penetrations. (Integer, Default = 1)
0 Take default from PARAM,DYCONIGNORE*,<value> (Default)

1 Allow initial penetrations to exist by tracking it
2 Move nodes to eliminate initial penetrations
AUTO Activation of automatic contact (Character, Default = Yes.)
Options are:
YES Automatic Contacts Activated

NO Non-Automatic Contact Activated. This option is not recommended when
Distributed Memory Parallel is activated.
SIDE Defines which side will be the monitoring side of a master face. The opposite side of the
master face will be the penetration side. See Remark 1. (Characters; default=BOTH)
BOTH: The side from which a slave node approaches the master face will become the
monitoring side.
TOP:The monitoring side will always be on the side of the master face that its normal is
pointing at.
BOTTOM: The monitoring side is always on the opposite side of the master face that its
normal is pointing at
Main Index
BCONPRG-700 1275
WEIGHT The contact force is multiplied by a mass-weighting factor. The following options are
available. See Remark 25. (Character; default=BOTH)
BOTH:M_scale=(M_slave M_master)/(M_slave+M_master )
SLAVE: M_scale=M_slave
MASTER: M_scale=M_master
NONE:M_scale=1.0
MONDIS Defines the fixed part of the monitoring distance. When the normal distance of a slave node
to a master face becomes smaller than the monitoring distance the slave node will tag itself
to the master face. The side from which the slave node is moving towards the master face
becomes the monitoring region. (Character; default=FACTOR)
FACTOR: The monitoring distance is equal to a factor times a characteristic length of the
master faces. The factor is specified in MONDISV.
DISTANCE: The monitoring distance is specified in MONDISV.

MONDISV Value of the monitoring distance or value of the FACTOR to calculate the monitoring
distance. (Real; default=2.0)
INITMON Fixed part of the monitoring distance used during the initialization. If not specified, the
value of MONDIS is used. (Real > 0.0; default=MONDIS)
Remarks:
1. When METHOD=RELLIPS is used, BCGRID or BCMATL are only available for SLAVE body and
BCELIPS is only available for MASTER body. When BCMATL is used, the MATRIG id or RBE2
id are only acceptable. When Euler solver is deactivated, no output will be generated for the Eulerian
elements.
2. The options TOP/BOTTOM are useful in the following cases:
a. When a slave node initially is located on the master face (see the picture below), the contact
situation is uniquely defined, only if the TOP or BOTTOM side of the master surface is defined:
SIDE=TOP case:
b. When hooking of slave nodes on the wrong side of a master face might occur. This often is the
case when the master face is at the edge of a shell element structure:
Main Index
1276 BCONPRG-700
SIDE=BOTTOM case: penetration of node 1 (SIDE=BOTH: no penetration of node 1)
3. Recommended usage of WEIGHT:
SLAVE MASTER WEIGHT

Deformable Deformable BOTH
Deformable Rigid SLAVE
Rigid Deformable MASTER
Rigid Rigid NONE
Default setting when BCELIPS is used in SLAVE or MASTER:
SLAVE MASTER WEIGHT

Non-BCELIPS Non-BCELIPS NONE
BCELIPS
Main Index
BCONPRP 1277
Physical Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOLs 101 and 400
BCONPRP Physical Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOLs 101 and 400
Defines physical contact parameters of touching bodies used in SOLs 101 and 400 only. The parameters
defined here are referenced by the BCONECT entry. This entry is used in conjunction with the BCONPRG
entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCONPRP PID PARAM1 VAL1 PARAM2 VAL2 PARAM3 VAL3
Example:
BCONPRP 90 FRIC 0.3
Describer Meaning
PARAMi Name of a parameter. Allowabe names are given in Table 9-6 (Character).
Main Index
1278 BCONPRP
Table 9-6 Physical Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOLs 101 and 400
BGM Exponent for the tangential stress term in deciding if a glue-contact will break. See Remark
1. (Real; Default = 2.0)
BGN Exponent for the normal stress term in deciding if a glue-contact will break. See Remark 1.
(Real; Default = 2.0)
BGSN Maximum normal stress for breaking glue. See Remark 1. (Real; Default = 0.0)
BGST Maximum tangential stress for breaking glue. See Remark 1. (Real; Default = 0.0)
BNC Exponent associated with the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior. If Real,
the value entered is the exponent associated with near field natural convection coefficient.
If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the
exponent associated with the near field natural convection coefficient vs. temperature or a
TABL3D entry specifying the exponent associated with the near field natural convection
coefficient vs. temperature and possibly other variables. Ignored in a pure structural analysis.
See Remark 5. (Real or Integer; Default = 1.0.)
BNL Exponent associated with the nonlinear convective heat flow for near field behavior. If Real,
the value entered is the exponent associated with the near field nonlinear convection
coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 OR TABLEM2 entry
specifying the exponent associated with the near field nonlinear convection coefficient vs
temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the exponent associated with the near field
nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature and possibly other variables. Ignored in a
pure structural analysis. See Remark 5. (Real or Integer; Default = 1.0)
DQNEAR Distance below which near thermal contact behavior occurs. Used in heat transfer analysis
only. See Remark 2. (Real; Default = 0.0; which means near contact does not occur)
EMISS Emissivity for radiation to the environment or near thermal radiation. If Real, the value
entered is the emissivity. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2
entry specifying the emissivity vs. temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the emissivity
vs. temperature and possibly other variables. Ignored in a pure structural analysis. See
Remark 5. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0)
FNTOL Separation force, stress, or fraction above which a node separates from a body. FNTOL is
closely related to IBSEP. Its default value is dependent on the IBSEP value. (Real)
FRLIM Friction stress limit. This entry is only used for friction type 6 (Coulomb friction using the
bilinear model). If the shear stress due to friction reaches this limit value, then the applied
friction force will be reduced so that the maximum friction stress is given by min(μ?n,
?limit), with μ the friction coefficient and ?n the contact normal stress. (Real; Default =
1.0E20)
Main Index
BCONPRP 1279
HBL Separation distance dependent thermal convection coefficient. If Real, the value entered is
the convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or
TABLEM2 entry specifying the convection coefficient vs. temperature or a TABL3D entry
specifying the convection coefficient vs. temperature and possibly other variables. Ignored
in a pure structural analysis. See Remark 5. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0)
HCT Contact heat transfer coefficient. If Real, the value entered is the contact heat transfer
specifying the contact heat transfer coefficient vs. temperature or a TABL3D entry
specifying the contact heat transfer coefficient vs. temperature and possibly other variables.
Ignored in a pure structural analysis. See Remark 5. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0; In a
thermal/mechanical coupled analysis a default value of 1.0E6 is used when the mechanical
glue option is activated, i.e., when IGLUE > 0.)
HCV Convection coefficient for near field behavior. If Real, the value entered is the near field
convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2
entry specifying the near field convection coefficient vs. temperature or a TABL3D entry
specifying the near field convection coefficient vs. temperature and possibly other variables.
Ignored in a pure structural analysis. See Remark 5. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0)
HGLUE Flag to activate the thermal glue option. When left blank or set to zero, thermal contact
conditions will be treated by convective heat transfer between the bodies. When set to 1, the
temperature fields of the bodies are tied as soon as they come in contact and there will be
no convective heat transfer over the body interfaces. Ignored in a pure structural analysis.
See Remarks 3. , 4. and 5. (0 < Integer < 1; Default = 0)
HNC Natural convection coefficient for near field behavior. If Real, the value entered is the near
field natural convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1
or TABLEM2 entry specifying the near field natural convection coefficient vs. temperature
or a TABL3D entry specifying the near field natural convection coefficient vs. temperature
and possibly other variables. Ignored in a pure structural analysis. See Remark 5. (Real or
Integer; Default = 0.0).
HNL Heat transfer coefficient for nonlinear convective heat flow for near field behavior. If Real,
the value entered is the near field nonlinear convection coefficient. If Integer, the value
entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the near field nonlinear
convection coefficient vs. temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the near field
nonlinear convection coefficient vs. temperature and possibly other variables. Ignored in a
pure structural analysis. See Remark 5. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0)
Remarks:
1. Breaking Glue provides glued contact to all GRID's at their very 1st contact. This kind of glued-
contact will break if
(sigma_n/BGSN)**bgn + (sigma_t/BGST)**bgm > 1.0
Main Index
1280 BCONPRP
When a contact node breaks due to the above criterion, standard contact is activated if it comes into
contact again. If BGSN = 0.0 the first term is ignored. Similarly, the second term is ignored if BGST
= 0.0. For SOL 400, parameters BGSN, BGST, BGM and BGN are only required if JGLUE = 2. If
both BGSN and BGST are equal to 0.0, JGLUE will be set to 0 internally. If Step Glue is used, then
Breaking Glue is inactive in this step. If Permanent Glue is active, then Breaking Glue is inactive.
q = HCV ⋅ ( T A – T B )+
BNC
HNC ⋅ ( T A – T B ) +
BNL BNL
HNL ⋅ ( TA – TB )+
4 4
σ ⋅ EMISS ⋅ ( T A –T B )+
dist dist
HCT ⋅  1 – -------------------------- + HBL ⋅ -------------------------- ⋅ ( T A – T B )+
4 4
where the last term is only activated when HBL ≠ 0, TA is the contacting grid temperature and TB is
the face temperature in the contact point in case of a meshed body or the TBODY temperature in case

q = HCT ⋅ ( T A – T B )
where TA is the contacting grid temperature and TB is the face temperature in the contact point in
case of a meshed body or the TBODY temperature in case of a rigid geometry.
TABL3D entry (formulas are not supported on TABL3D). Table IDs of tables used on the
BCBDPRP entry and the BCONPRP entry must be unique.
Main Index
BCONPRP 1281
6. Parameters BGM, BGN, BGSN, BGST and DQNEAR are not supported in segment to segment
contact analysis.
Main Index
1282 BCONPRP-700
Physical Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOL 700
BCONPRP-700 Physical Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOL 700
Defines physical contact parameters of touching bodies used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCONPRP PID PARAM1 VAL1 PARAM2 VAL2 PARAM VAL3
3
Example:
BCONPRP 90 FRIC 0.3
Describer Meaning
Table 9-7 Physical Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies in SOL 700
FRIC Static friction coefficient. When it is set to -1.0, different static friction coefficients on
properties can be assigned using BCPROP1. (Real ≥ -1.0; Default=0.0 for SOL700)
FK Kinetic coefficient of friction. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
EXP Exponential decay coefficient. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
FACT Scale factor for the contact forces. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.1)
TSTART Time at which the contact is activated. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
TEND Time at which the contact is deactivated. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.e20)
IADJ Adjacent material treatment option for solid elements. (Integer ≥ 0; Default =1)
0 Solid element faces are included only for free boundaries.

1 Solid element faces are included if they are on the boundary of the material
subset. This option also allows the erosion within a body and the subsequent
treatment of contact.
Main Index
BCONUDS 1283
Contact Body User Defined Service
BCONUDS Contact Body User Defined Service
Allows the user to provide contact routines for use with enhanced SOL 400 contact analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCONUDS BID BTYPE GROUP UNAME
“INT” IDATA1 IDATA2 IDATA3 IDATA4 IDATA5 IDATA6 IDATA7
IDATA8 IDATA9 ... ... IDATAn
“REAL” RDATA1 RDATA2 RDATA3 RDATA4 RDATA5 RDATA6 RDATA7
RDATA8 RDATA9 ... ... RDATAn
“CHAR” CDATA1 CDATA2 ... ... CDATAn
Example:
In FMS Section of MSC Nastran input stream:
CONNECT SERVICE CONTACT ‘SCA.MDSolver.Util.Ums’
In Bulk Data:
BCONUDS 17 BCBODY CONTACT UFRIC
BCONUDS 17 BCBODY CONTACT SEPFOR
REAL .00134 1.467+4 .03
BCONUDS 17 BCBODY CONTACT MOTION
REAL .00134 1.467+4 .03
INT 8 3
Describer Meaning
BID Contact body identification number defined by BCBODY or BCBODY1. (Integer
> 0; Required)
BTYPE The name of the contact entry. BCBODY/BCBODY1 (Character; no Default)
GROUP The group name used for the FMS Section CONNECT SERVICE statement.
(Character; no Default)
UNAME User subroutine name associated with the entry. See Remark 6. and 7. (Character)
“INT” Keyword indicating that the following data is integer. (Character)
IDATAi Additional user supplied Integer data not already existing on the specified contact
property entry. (Integer, no Default)
“REAL” Keyword indicating that the following data is real. (Character)
Main Index
1284 BCONUDS
Contact Body User Defined Service
Describer Meaning
RDATAi Additional user supplied Real data not already existing on the specified contact
property entry. (Real; no Defaults)
“CHAR” Keyword indicating that the following data is Character. (Character)
CDATAi Additional user supplied Character data not already existing on the specified contact
property entry. (Character; no Default)
Remarks:
1. This entry triggers the call to a user contact subroutine for advanced nonlinear materials. The
GROUP must match the GROUP field of the CONNECT SERVICE FMS statement.
2. On the FMS CONNECT statement, only the CONNECT SERVICE can be used with this entry.
3. The BID must match an existing BID.
4. A CDATAi entry cannot be the Character “REAL”, “INT”, or “CHAR”.
5. Certain user subroutines may require integer or real data input as specified in the User Defined
Services manual.
6. UNAME must be truncated to 8 characters in the bulk data field
7. The following user subroutines are currently available for user convenience. See the User Defined
Services manual for details.
Type Uname SOL 400

BCBODY motion x
BCBODY ufric x
BCBODY sepfor x
BCBODY sepstr x
BCBODY ubsqueal x
Main Index
BCONUDS 1285
Contact Body User Subroutines in SOL 600
BCONUDS Contact Body User Subroutines in SOL 600
Allows the user to provide contact routines for use with SOL 600 contact analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCONUDS BID BTYPE UNAME
Example:
BCONUDS 17 BCBODY RTN1
REAL .00134 1.467+4 .03
REAL .00134 1.467+4 .03
INT 8 3
Describer Meaning
BID Contact body identification number defined by BCBODY. (Integer > 0; Required)
BTYPE The name of the contact entry. BCBODY (Character; no Default)
UNAME The Marc user subroutine name. See Remarks 2. and 5. (Character; Required)
IDATAi Additional user supplied Integer data not already existing on the specified MAT
entry. See Remark 6. (Integer; no Default)
RDATAi Additional user supplied Real data. See Remark 6. (Real; no Defaults)
Remarks:
1. The BID must match an existing BID.
2. Certain user subroutines may require integer or real data input as specified in the UserSubroutine
interface document.
3. The following user subroutines are currently available for user convenience. See the User Subroutine
interface document for details.
Main Index
1286 BCONUDS
Contact Body User Subroutines in SOL 600
UNAME Purpose
MOTION Define velocity of rigid surfaces
UFRIC Define friction coefficients
DIGEOM Define rigid surfaces
SEPFOR Define separation forces
SEPFORBBC Define separation forces for beam-beam contact
SEPSTR Define separations stresses
UFRICBBC Define thermal near contact file coefficients
UHTNRC Define thermal near contact file coefficients
UMDCOE Define variable mass and diffusion coefficients and sink pressures on a free
surface
UMDCON Define variable mass diffusion coefficients on surfaces in contact with other
surfaces
UMDNRC Define mass diffusion coefficients of surfaces in contact with other surfaces
UNDRST Define normal stresses for elements in contact
4. The BCONUDS entry may be used instead of the USRSUB6 entry. Both entries should not be used
in the same run. EVAL will be stored as a character*16 name in common block /userch/
5. UNAME identifies the user subroutine name to be called.
6. IDATA and RDATA are not normally required. They are available should additional arguments
beyond those described in Marc Vol D be required. Normally only the first line is entered.
Main Index
BCPARA 1287
Contact Parameters -SOLs 101 and 400
BCPARA Contact Parameters -SOLs 101 and 400
Defines contact parameters used in SOL 101 and SOL 400. This entry is not available in SOL 700.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCPARA ID Param1 Value1 Param2 Value2 Param3 Value3
Param4 Value4 Param5 Value5 etc.
Example:
BCPARA ERROR 0.1 BIAS 0.5
Describer Meaning
ID Subcase to which the defined parameters belong. If ID is zero, the parameters belong
to all subcases. (Integer > 0; no Default)
Param(i) Name of a parameter. Allowable names are given in Table 9-7. (Character)
Value(i) Value of the parameter. See Table 9-7. (Real or Integer)
Main Index
1288 BCPARA
Table 9-8 Contact Parameters -SOLs 101 and 400
Description, Type and Value (Default is 0 for Integer, 0.0 for Real Unless
Name Otherwise Indicated)
ERROR Distance below which a node is considered touching a body. (Real; Default = blank).
Automatically calculated if left blank. If left blank, the code calculates ERROR as the
smallest value resulting from: Either dividing the smallest nonzero element
dimension (plates or solids) in the contact body by 20. Or dividing the thinnest shell
thickness in the contact body by 4. This value is then used for all contact pairs.
BIAS Contact tolerance bias factor. (0.0 ≤ Real ≤ 1.0.;
Default = 0.9 for IGLUE=0, if field left blank or 0.0 (to obtain a near zero value,
enter 1.0E-16).
Default = 0.0 for IGLUE <>0. Note that when IGLUE<>0, BIAS can only be given
by the BCTABLE or BCONPRG.
Default = 0.0 for BEHAVE=SYMM on BCBODY, if field left blank or 0.0.
FGCFLG Flag to activate Cohesive (Flexible) Glued Contact: (See Remark 12. )
0 No Cohesive (Flexible) Glued Contact
1 Activate Cohesive (Flexible) Glued Contact
FGCNST Equivalent normal contact stiffness of connector for Cohesive (Flexible) Glued
Contact
FGCTST Equivalent tangential contact stiffness of connector for Cohesive (Flexible) Glued
Contact
FGCNSTR ID of table for define contact normal stress versus relative displacement for Cohesive
FGCTSTR ID of table for define contact tangential stress versus relative displacement for
Cohesive (Flexible) Glued Contact. Only TABL3D allowable.
FGCNSTI ID of table for define contact normal stiffness versus relative displacement or
FGCTSTI ID of table for define contact tangential stiffness versus relative displacement or
FGCRCEN ID of grid on which the resultant contact and moment are based.
FNTOL Separation force (or stress if separation is controlled by stress as determined by
IBSEP) above which a node separates from a body. Automatically calculated if left
blank. (Real; Default = blank)
MAXSEP Maximum number of separations allowed in each increment. After MAXSEP
separations have occurred, if the standard convergence tolerance conditions are
achieved, the step will converge. (Integer > 0; Default = 9999)
Main Index
BCPARA 1289
ICSEP Flag to control separation. Not used for segment-to-segment contact. (Integer > 0;
Default = 0)
0 The node separates and an iteration occurs if the force on the node is
greater than the separation force.
1 If a node which was in contact at the end of the previous increment
has a force greater than the separation force, the node does NOT
separate in this increment, but separates at the beginning of the next
increment.
2 If a new node comes into contact during this increment, it is not
allowed to separate during this increment, prevents chattering.
3 Both 1 and 2 are in effect.
IBSEP Flag for separation based on stresses or forces. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
0 Separation based on forces.
1 Separation based on absolute stresses (force/area)
2 Separation based on absolute stress (extrapolating integration point
stresses)
3 Relative nodal stress (force/area)
4 Separation based on relative stress (extrapolating integration point
stresses)
Only option 2 and 4 can be used with mid-side node elements where the mid-side
nodes contact (LINQUAD=-1). For segment to segment contact, the program will
set IBSEP to 2 internally. See Remarks 6. and 10.
FTYPE Friction type. See Remark 5. (Integer)
0 No friction. (Default)
6 Bilinear Coulomb friction.
7 Bilinear Shear friction.
BEAMB Beam-Beam contact flag. See Remark 7. (Integer 0 or 1)
0 No beam-beam contact. (Default for SOLs 101/400)
1 Activate beam-beam contact options. (Default for SOL 700)
NLGLUE If all slave's for the BCTABLE or BCONPRG corresponding to the first loadcase
(SOLs 101 and (first subcase and first step) contain IGLUE >0, permanent glued contact with small
400 only) rotation condition will be used for all SLAVE entries in all subcases and all steps
unless BCPARA,0,NLGLUE,1 is specified. If IGLUE < 0 exists, permanent glued
contact for large deformation and large rotation is activated. (Integer; Default = 0)
Main Index
1290 BCPARA
NODSEP Skip separation check in contact for any grid already touched and separated.
NODSEP times within the current increment. (Integer; Default = 5)
>0 Keep grid contact status

<0 Separate grid from contact
METHOD Flag to select Contact methods. (Character)
NODESURF Node to segment contact. (Default)
SEGTOSEG Segment to segment contact.
AUGMENT Augmentation method used in a segment-to-segment contact analysis. (Integer)
0 No augmentation (Default)
1 Augmentation based on a constant Lagrange multiplier field for linear
elements and on a (bi)linear Lagrange multiplier field for quadratic
elements
2 Augmentation based on a constant Lagrange multiplier field
3 Augmentation based on a (bi)linear Lagrange multiplier field
PENALT Augmented Lagrange penalty factor; used by the segment-to-segment contact
algorithm only. (Real > 0.0; see BCTABLE or BCONPRG entries for default)
AUGDIST Penetration distance beyond which an augmentation will be applied; used by the
segment-to-segment contact algorithm only. (Real > 0; see BCTABLE entry for
default)
SLDLMT Maximum allowed sliding distance, beyond it the contact segments are redefined, for
segment to segment contact analysis with large deformation. (Real ≥ 0.0; Default =
0.0) See remark 9.
SEGSYM Specify symmetric or non-symmetric friction matrix in segment to segment contact
analysis. (Integer 0 = symmetric matrix or 1 = non-symmetric matrix; Default = 0)
ERRBAS Error computation option. (Integer 0 = compute error globally or 1 = calculate error
based on each pair of slave-master; Default = 0)
DDULMT Maximum value of DDU in a Newton-Raphson cycle. (Real ≥ 0.0; Default = 0.0,
no limitation)
TAUGMNT Augmentation for the sticking part of friction in a segment-to-segment contact
analysis. (Integer 0 = no augmentation or 1 = use augmentation; Default = 0)
TPENALT Augmented Lagrange penalty factor for sticking part of friction, used by the
segment-to-segment contact algorithm only. (Real > 0.0) The default is
PENALT/1000, where PENALT parameter is the Augmented Lagrange penalty
factor for normal contact.
Main Index
BCPARA 1291
STKSLP Maximum allowable slip distance for sticking, beyond it there is no sticking, only
sliding exists, used by the segment-to-segment contact algorithm only. (Real ≥ 0.0;
Default = 0.0) See Remark 11..
THKOFF Ignore thickness from the tolerance used by ISEARCH=2 in node-to-surface contact
or from the characteristic length (for PENALT and AUGDIST) in segment-to-
segment contact. (Integer 0 = do not ignore thickness or 1 = remove thickness;
Default = 0)
LINCNT Flag for small sliding with small deformation and rotation
0 - (Default) general contact
1 - activating infinitesimal sliding, the contact force is distributed based on
undeformed geometry. Only available for node-to-segment contact.
SFNPNLT Scale factor of augmented Lagrange penalty factor along contact normal direction;
used by segment-to-segment contact method only. (Real>0.0;Default=1.0)
SFNPNLT*PENALT is used in analysis.
A nonblank value of SFNPNLT entered in BCONPRG will override it.
SFTPNLT Scale factor of augmented Lagrange penalty factor along contact tangential direction;
used by segment-to-segment contact method only. (Real>0.0;Default=1.0)
SFTPNLT*TPENALT is used in analysis.
A nonblank value of SFTPNLT entered in BCONPRG will override it.
SEGANGL Minimum angle between segment normal vectors allowing the segments to come
into contact; used by segment-to-segment contact only. (Real>90.0 <180.0;
Default=120.0).
Remarks:
1. The ID of BCPARA should be left blank or a value of zero. Blank is treated as zero.
2. Only one BCPARA entry should be made. Multiple BCPARA entries with ID=0 cause a Fatal Error.
3. All SOLs only support ID=0, this entry is applied to all the subcases, except the corresponding ones
are assigned in BCTABLE or BCONPRG.
4. Refer to the Case Control command BCONTACT (Case), to see the lists of parameters in BCPARA that
are not supported by SOLs 101 and 400.
5. In SOLs 101/400, FTYPE only supports options 0, 6, and 7. Friction with segment-to-segment
contact is a pre-release capability in the 2012 release. In the 2012.2 version and later, it is fully
supported.
6. In SOLs 101/400, LINQUAD is not supported and it is set to -1 in order that the mid-side nodes
are considered in Contact.
a. If IBSEP is set to 1, then for bodies consisting of mid-side node elements, IBSEP will
automatically be set to 2. This allows for using IBSEP=1 for elements without mid-side nodes and
IBSEP=2 for elements with mid-side nodes in one analysis.
Main Index
1292 BCPARA
b. If IBSEP is set to 3, then for bodies consisting of mid-side nodes elements, IBSEP will
automatically be set to 4. This allows for using IBSEP=3 for elements without mid-side nodes and
IBSEP=4 for elements with mid-side nodes in one analysis.
This rule is always applied to the solid elements with mid-side nodes. However, the mid-side nodes
of CQUAD8 and CTRIA6 shell elements are ignored in node-to-segment contact with separation
because there is no normal stress to shell elements, and the contact normal forces for these elements
do not give a good estimation of the nodal contact stress. This means that is not recommended to use
CQUAD8 and CTRIA6 shell elements in a node-to-segment contact analysis with separation. If
users still want to use these elements, they should set IBSEP=0, IBSEP=1 or IBSEP=3. If IBSEP is
set to 2 or 4 in this case, IBSEP will automatically be set to 1 or 3, respectively. This limitation is not
applied to the segment-to-segment contact.
7. For SOLs 101/400 if BEAMB=1, Bulk Data entry BCBMRAD must be entered. Those entries are
not required in the beam contact of segment-to-segment contact.
8. Parameters MAXSEP, ICSEP, IBSEP, RVCNST and BEAMB are not supported in segment to
segment contact analysis.
9. The default of SLDLMT parameter is 5 times the default error tolerance. See the description of
ERROR parameter for the definition of default error tolerance.
10. IBSEP and FNTOL are related to each other. The Default value of FNTOL is dependent on IBSEP
value.
a. IBSEP=0 : Separation is based on forces. A contact node will separate if the contact pulling force
exceeds FNTOL. If FNTOL is zero it will be taken as the absolute value of the largest component
in the residual force vector.
b. IBSEP=1 : Separation is based on nominal contact stresses (force/area). A contact node will
separate if the nominal contact pulling stress exceeds FNTOL. If FNTOL is zero, it will be 0.1
times of the maximum nominal contact pushing stress of any node of any contact body.
c. IBSEP=2 : Separation is based on nodal stress (extrapolating integration point stresses). A contact
node will separate if the nodal pulling stress exceeds FNTOL. If FNTOL is zero it will be 0.1
times of the maximum nodal pushing stress of any node of any contact body
d. IBSEP=3 : Separation is based on relative nominal contact stress (force/area). A contact node will
separate if the nominal contact pulling stress exceeds FNTOL times of maximum nominal contact
pushing stress of any node of any contact body. If FNTOL is zero, it will be taken as 0.1
e. IBSEP=4 : Separation is based on relative nodal stress (extrapolating integration point stresses). A
contact node will separate if the nodal pulling stress exceeds FNTOL times of maximum nodal
pushing stress of any node of any contact body. If FNTOL is zero, it will be taken as 0.1
( μ ⋅ F NORMAL , where μ is the friction coefficient) divided by the maximum sticking displacement.
12. The parameters of cohesive contact defined in BCPARA will be applied to all the contact pairs unless:
• The contact pair has its own definition for cohesive contact in BCONPRG; or
• Its IGLUE=0, i.e., general touching contact.
Main Index
BCPARA 1293
Cohesive contact is only applied to glued contact, but not touching contact.
Main Index
1294 BCPARA
Contact Parameters in SOL 600
BCPARA Contact Parameters in SOL 600
Defines contact parameters used in SOL 600.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCPARA ID Param1 Value1 Param2 Value2 Param3 Value3
Param4 Value4 Param5 Value5 etc
Example:
BCPARA NBODIES 4 BIAS 0.5
Describer Meaning
ID ID is not used and should be set to zero. Only one BCPARA should be entered and
it applies to all subcases. (Integer)
Param(i) Name of a parameter. Allowable names are given in Table 9-7. (Character)
Value(i) Value of the parameter. See the Table 9-7. (Real or Integer)
NBODIES (2,1) Number of contact bodies defined in the analysis. (Integer > 0 or blank)
MAXENT (2,2) Maximum number of entities created for any contact body. (Integer > 0 or blank;
default is max element number or 1.5 times the number of nodes whichever is
smaller)
MAXNOD (2,3) Maximum number of nodes that lie on the periphery of any deformable contact
body. (Integer > 0 or blank; default is the number of nodes)
ERROR (3,2) Distance below which a node is considered touching a body. Automatically
calculated if left blank. If left blank, the code calculates ERROR as the smallest
nonzero element dimension divided by 20 or the shell thickness divided by 4. (Real;
Default = blank)
BIAS (3,6) Contact tolerance bias factor. (Real, 0 < BIAS < 1, Default = 0.9 if field left blank
or not entered in the file. To obtain a near zero value, enter 1.0E-16)
ISPLIT (2,7) Flag for increment splitting procedure. (Integer > 0; Default = 3 for statics and 0
for dynamics)
0 Uses increment splitting procedures for the fixed time step procedures.
Main Index
BCPARA 1295
1 Suppresses splitting for the fixed time step procedures. Any
penetration that occurred in the previous increment is adjusted for
equilibrium at the start of the next increment. This method may
require smaller time steps then the other methods
2 Suppresses splitting for adaptive time step procedures. Any
penetration that occurred in the previous increment is adjusted for
equilibrium at the start of the next increment. This method may
require smaller time steps then the other methods.
3 Uses contact procedure which does not require increment splitting (3
is not available for dynamics). If a run does not converge due to an
excessive number of “iterative penetration checking” messages,
ISPLIT=2 may help, however the time steps may need to be set to
smaller values.
FNTOL (3,5) Separation force (or stress if separation is controlled by stress as determined by
IBSEP) above which a node separates from a body. Automatically calculated if left
blank. (Real; Default = blank)
MAXSEP (2,6) Maximum number of separations allowed in each increment. After MAXSEP
separations have occurred, if the standard convergence tolerance conditions are
achieved, the step will converge. (Integer > 0; Default = 9999)
ICHECK (2,8) Flag for interference kinematic check and bounding box check. (Integer > 0)
1 Activates interference kinematic check.
2 Suppress bounding box checking.
3 No reset of NCYCLE to zero.
4 Check for separation only when solution has converged, for analytical
surfaces only.
ICSEP (2,9) Flag to control separation. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
0 The node separates and an iteration occurs if the force on the node is
greater than the separation force.
1 If a node which was in contact at the end of the previous increment
has a force greater than the separation force, the node does NOT
separate in this increment, but separates at the beginning of the next
increment.
2 If a new node comes into contact during this increment, it is not
allowed to separate during this increment, prevents chattering.
3 Both 1 and 2 are in effect.
IBSEP (2,12) Flag for separation based on stresses or forces. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
0 Separation based on forces.
Main Index
1296 BCPARA
1 Separation based on absolute stresses (force/area).
2 Separation based on absolute stress (extrapolating integration point
stresses).
3 Relative nodal stress (force/area).
4 Separation based on relative stress (extrapolating integration point
stresses).
Only option 2 and 4 can be used with mid-side node elements where the mid-side
nodes contact (LINQUAD=-1).
ISHELL (2,10) Parameter governing normal direction and thickness contribution of shells. (Integer
> 0; Default = 0)
0 Check node contact with top and bottom surface.
1 Nodes only come into contact with bottom layer.
2 Nodes only come into contact with bottom layer and shell thickness is
ignored.
-1 Nodes only come into contact with top layer.
-2 Nodes only come into contact with top layer and shell thickness is
ignored.
IPRINT (2,11) Flag to reduce print out of surface definition. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
0 Full print out.
1 Reduced print out.
RVCNST Relative sliding velocity between bodies below which sticking is simulated. If
(3,1) FTYPE=5, then the value of RVCNST is the stick-slip transition region.
FTYPE Friction type. (Integer)
(2,4)
0 No friction. (Default)
1 Shear friction.
2 Coulomb Friction.
3 Shear friction for rolling.
4 Coulomb friction for rolling.
5 Stick-slip Coulomb friction.
6 Bilinear Coulomb friction. (Default if friction is present and FTYPE
is not entered.)
7 Bilinear Shear friction.
FKIND Friction kind. (Integer 0 or 1)
(2,5)
Main Index
BCPARA 1297
0 Friction based on nodal stress.
1 Default if friction is present and FKIND is not entered. Friction based
on nodal force.
BEAMB Beam-Beam contact flag. (Integer 0 or 1)
(2,13)
0 No beam-beam contact. (Default)
1 Activate beam-beam contact options.
FSSMULT Stick-slip friction coefficient multiplier. Applicable only to stick-slip friction. (The
(3,7) friction coefficient is multiplied by this value for the sticking condition.) (Real > 0;
Required; Default = 1.05)
FSSTOL Stick-slip friction force tolerance. Applicable only to stick-slip friction. (Real;
(3,8) Default = 0.05)
LINQUAD (2,14) Higher order element contact flag (Integer; Default = 1).
1 The outer boundary of a contact body is described by the corner nodes
only and mid-side nodes can’t come into contact.
-1 The outer boundary is described by a quadratic field and both corner
and mid-side nodes are considered in contact. If this flag is set to -1
and IBSEP is blank, IBSEP will be re-set to 2. This option is only
available with Marc 2003 and subsequent releases.
INITCON If INITCON is set, tying relations (MPC’s) for surfaces initially in contact will be
(2,16) saved. This option maybe used to model dissimilar meshes. See
CONTINUE=101+ on the SOL 600 entry to use these items in the same MSC
Nastran execution. The following options are available:
1 MPC’s in Marc format are saved for initial contact (if any) in file
jid.marc.t01.
3 MPC’s for each increment are saved in Marc format in file
jid.marc.conmpc_xxxx where xxxx is the increment number.
4 MPC’s for each increment are saved in Nastran MPC format in file
jidd.marc.conmpc_xxxx where xxxx is the increment number.
When initcon=1, the job will stop at the end of increment zero. When initcon=3
initcon=4, the job will run to completion and the information in
jid.marc.conmpc_0000 for increment zero will usually not be useful, but the
information for increments one and above will contain the proper contact tying
relations or mpc’s.
NVSURF Rigid contact surface ID (BCBODY ID) for which the next 4 approach velocity
values apply. Leave this entry and the next 4 out if not applicable. This entry and
the next 4 may be repeated as many times as necessary to define all rigid contact
surfaces with approach velocity values. (Integer; Default = 0)
Main Index
1298 BCPARA
VELAPP1 Approach velocity in direction 1 of rigid contact surface - used only in increment
(6,1) zero. Requires PARAM,MRCONVER,11 (Real; Default = 0.0)
VELAPAN (6,3) Approach angular velocity about local axis through center of rotation of rigid
contact surface - used only in increment zero. Requires PARAM,MRCONVER,1
(Real; Default = 0.0)
NODSEP If NODSEP is positive, ignore separation of any node that has touched and
separated NODSEP times (corresponds to feature, 31xx where xx=nodsep).
If NODSEP is negative, NODSEP is the number of separations of a particular
node allowed. If more separations of that node actually occur, the node is assumed
to be separated (corresponds to feature, -31xx where xx-nodsep).
(Integer between 0 and 99; Default if not entered is 2, corresponds to feature,3102)
METHOD Flag to select Contact Methods (Character)
NODES Regular 3D contact (Default: node to surface contact)
URF
SEGSMA Segment to segment contact with small sliding
LL
AUGMENT Augmentation method used in a segment to segment contact analysis. (Integer)
0 No augmentation (Default)
1 Augmentation based on a constant Lagrange multiplier field for linear
elements and on a bilinear Lagrange multiplier field for quadratic
elements.
2 Augmentation based on a constant Lagrange multiplier field.
3 Augmentation based on a bilinear Lagrange multiplier field.
PENALT Augmented Lagrange penalty factor used by the segment to segment contact
algorithm only. (Real > 0; set BCBODY for Default)
AUGDIST Penetration distance beyond which an augmentation will be applied. Used by the
segment to segment contact algorithm only. (Real > 0.0; set BCBODY for Default)
Remarks:
1. (i,j) refers to data block i and field j of the CONTACT model definition option in Marc.
2. Field 2 of the primary line should be left blank or a value of zero should be entered.
3. Only one BCPARA entry should be made. If multiple entries are made, the last will be used.
Main Index
BCPARA 1299
4. For FTYPE, SOLs 400 and 600 differ as follows. For SOL 400, if friction is entered but FTYPE is
blank, friction is ignored. For SOL 600, if friction is entered but FTYPE is blank COULOMB
friction is used. (FTYPE is reset internally to 2). In addition SOL 400 can only use friction types 0,
6 and 7.
Main Index
1300 BCPATCH
Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of Quadrilateral Patches in SOLs 101 and 400
BCPATCH Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of Quadrilateral Patches in SOLs 101 and 400
Defines a rigid contact body made up of quadrilateral patches used in SOLs 101 and 400 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCPATCH RBID
IDP G1 G2 G3 G4
IDP G1 G2 G3 G4
-etc.-
Example:
BCPATCH 12
1 101 102 103 104
Describer Meaning
RBID Unique identification number referenced by a BCRGSRF or BCBODY1 entry (Integer
> 0). See Remark 1.
G1, G2, G3, Grid numbers for each of the 4 nodes of the patch.
G4
Remarks:
1. If BCRGSRF entry does not exist, BCPATCH entry will be referenced by the BCBODY1 entry
directly.
Main Index
BCPFLG 1301
Defines a beam section segment flag
BCPFLG Defines a beam section segment flag
Defines a beam section branch and segment for segment to segment beam contact used in SOL 101 and 400
for general contact or in SOLs 101, 103, 105, 107 - 112, 200 and 400 for the permanently glued Contact.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCPFLG PID IBRNCH1 IOUTIN IBRNCH2 IOUTIN2 IBRNCHi IOUTINi
1
Example:
BCPLAG 2 1 2 3 13
Describer Meaning
PID Beam property/section identification number of PBEAML/PBARL. (Integer > 0;
Required)
IBRNCHi Branch selection flag for segment generation. Only required for thin wall sections. See
Remark 1, 2, 3 and 4. (Integer; default=0).
0 select all branches for thin wall sections

IOUTINi Beam segment location. See Remark 4, 5, 6 and 7. (Integer; default=0; up to three
unique integers may be placed in the field with no embedded blanks.)
0 all segments
1 location 1 of thin wall section or only outer of solid or tube sections
2 location 2 of thin wall section or only inner of tube section
3 location 3 of thin wall section (thickness direction of branch)
4 segment not including thickness
Remarks:
1. If the card is not defined but the beam property is included in segment to segment contact, all
segments will be generated and used. This card is only useful when a user needs to define the specific
beam segments for segment to segment contact. It will help the performance of calculation because
only selected segments will be considered in the contact calculation.
2. IBRANCHi fields are only required for thin wall beam sections. Solid beam sections such as
rectangular, rod, etc or tube sections require only IOUTIN1.
3. Each branch of thin wall beam section has four segments.
4. Segment locations of thin wall beam sections are listed below. TYPE is defined by PBEAML/PBARL.
The number circled is the branch number of each shape and the number without circle is the segment
number which is used in IOUTINi. Segment 1 and 2 of each branch are the segments in the branch
direction and segment 3's are the segment in the thickness direction of the branch.
Main Index
1302 BCPFLG
Main Index
BCPFLG 1303
5. If there is not thickness, one segment will be generated in the branch.

6. "3" cannot be used alone and "4" must be used only with "1" or "2". IOUTINi must be one of "0",
"1", "2", "12", "13", "14", "23", "24" and "123".
7. "14" and "24" generate the identical segment since the thickness is ignored but segment normal
direction will be different.
Main Index
1304 BCPROP
3D Contact Region by Element Properties
BCPROP 3D Contact Region by Element Properties
Defines a 3D contact region by element properties. All elements with the specified properties define a contact
body used in SOL 101 and SOLs 400 and 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCPROP ID IP1 IP2 IP3 IP4 IP5 IP6 IP7
IP8 IP9 etc.
Example:
BCPROP 1 101 201 301
Alternate Format:
BCPROP ID IP1 THRU IP2 IP3 IP4 IP5 IP6
IP7 IP8 IP9 etc.
Alternate Example:
BCPROP 1 101 THRU 102 105 THRU 109 110
Describer Meaning
entry. All elements corresponding to the property IDs specified that may potentially come
into contact. Do not specify mixed property types (use all shell, all solid or all beam
properties only). See Remark 1. (Integer > 0)
IPi Property ID. A minimum of one entry is required. (Integer; no Default)
Remarks:
2. The deformable surface may alternately be defined using BSURF, BCBOX, or BCMATL entries.
5. As many continuation lines as necessary may be used to define all property IDs associated with a
6. The alternate format is triggered if field 4 contains THRU. The THRU keyword may appear in fields
4 thru 8.
7. BCBOX and BCMATL are not available for SOL 101 or SOL 400
Main Index
BCPROP 1305
3D Contact Region by Element Properties in SOL 600
BCPROP 3D Contact Region by Element Properties in SOL 600
Defines a 3D contact region by element properties. All elements with the specified properties define a contact
body used in SOL 600.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCPROP ID IP1 IP2 IP3 IP4 IP5 IP6 IP7
IP8 IP9 etc.
Example:
BCPROP 1 101 201 301
Alternate Format:
BCPROP ID IP1 THRU IP2
Example for Alternate Format:

BCPROP 25 101 THRU 102
Describer Meaning
entry or if the Case Control BCONTACT = BCPROP is specified. All elements
corresponding to the property IDs specified that may potentially come into contact. Do
not specify mixed property types (use all shell, all solid or all beam properties only). See
Remark 1. (Integer > 0)
IPi Property ID. A minimum of one entry is required. (Integer; no Default)
Remarks:
2. The deformable surface may alternately be defined using BSURF, BCBOX, or BCMATL entries.
5. As many continuation lines as necessary may be used to define all property IDs associated with a
6. The alternate format is triggered if field 4 contains THRU.
Main Index
1306 BCRIGID
Defines a Rigid Contact Body in SOLs 101 and 400
BCRIGID Defines a Rigid Contact Body in SOLs 101 and 400
Defines a rigid contact body used in SOLs 101 and 400 only.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCRIGID BCRGID CGID CONTROL
Example:
BCRIGID 1001 1 1
0 0. 0. 0. 1. 1. 1. 1.
Describer Meaning
BCRGID Unique identification number referenced by a BCBODY1 entry. (Integer > 0)
CGID Grid point identification number defining the initial position of the reference point of the
rigid body or the point where a concentrated force or moment is applied. (Integer > 0) See
Remark 1.
CONTROL Indicates the type of control for the body.
Integer:
= -1 for position control. The coordinates of the final position of GRID Point defined in
CGID is given in VELRBi in the following line.
= 0 for velocity control. (default)

= positive number for “load control”. The positive number is the grid number defined in
CGID at which translational forces or SPCD are applied. (Note: The rotation in this case is
defined by NLOAD in the following line.)
NLOAD Enter a positive number if “load controlled” and rotations are allowed. (Integer) The positive
number is the grid number where the moments or rotations are applied. The rotations are
specified using SPCD at grid ID NLOAD and can be specified using dof ’s 1-3 (for
translation about x, y, z respectively), or by dof ’s 4-6 (for rotation about x, y, z respectively).
Note: This rotation takes the position of the grid point defined in CGID field as the center
of rotation.
ANGVEL Angular velocity or angular position about local axis through center of rotation. If the value
is an integer it represents the ID of a TABLED1, TABLED2 or TABL3D, i.e., a time-
dependent or multi-dimensional table; however, no log scales, only linear scales. (Real or
Integer; Default = 0.0)
Main Index
BCRIGID 1307
Defines a Rigid Contact Body in SOLs 101 and 400
DCOSi Components of direction cosine of local axis if ANGVEL is nonzero. If the value is an
integer, it represents the ID of a TABLED1, TABLED2 or TABL3D, i.e., a time-dependent
or multi-dimensional table; however, no log scales, only linear scales. (Real or Integer;
Default=0.0) In 2D contact only DCOS3 is used and the Default is 1.0.
VELRBi Tranlational velocity or final position (depending on the value of CONTROL) of rigid body
at the grid point defined in CGID filed. For velocity control only, if the value is an integer,
it represents the ID of TABLED1, TABLED2 or TABL3D, i.e., a time-dependent or multi-
dimensional table; however, no log scales, only linear scales. Only VELRB1 and VELRB2
are used in 2D contact. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0)
“APPROV” The entries of this continuation line are for approaching velocity to establish initial contact.
A Angular velocity about local axis through center of rotation. (Real, Default = 0.0)
Ni Components of direction cosines of local axis of the angular velocity. The N1, N2, N3
define the axis through the point defined in the CGID field. Only N1 and N2 are used in
2D contact. (Real, Default = 0.0)
Vi V1, V2 and V3 define the three components of the approaching velocity. Only V1 and V2
are used in 2D contact. (Real; Default = 0.0)
“GROW” The entries of this continuation line are for rigid body growth. If tables are used for growth,
they should either be TABLED1, TABLED2 (growth vs time) or TABL3D (growth vs one
or more variables).
GFi Components of growth factor of rigid body in the coordinate system of the CGID field.
(Real, Default = 1.0)
TAB-GFi Table IDs for growth factor of rigid body in the coordinate system of the CGID field.
(Integer > 0 or blank, Default is blank)
Remarks:
defined in the global coordinate system of CGID. If CGID is not specified, basic coordinate will be
used.
2. All continuation lines may be omitted if not required.
Main Index
1308 BCRGSRF
Rigid Contact Surface List in SOLs 101 and 400
BCRGSRF Rigid Contact Surface List in SOLs 101 and 400
Defines a list of rigid contact surfaces used in SOLs 101 and 400 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCRGSRF BSID RBID1 RBID2 RBID3 RBID4 RBID5 RBID6 RBID7
RBID9 -etc.-
Example:
BCRGSRF 1008 35 2
Describer Meaning
BSID Unique identification number referenced by a BCBODY1 entry. (Integer > 0) See Remark
1.
RBIDi Identification number of BCPATCH, BCBZIER, BCNURB2 or BCNURBS entry.
(Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. If BCRGSRF entry does not exist, BCBODY1 entry can refer to one of the identification number of
BCPATCH, BCBZIER, BCNURB2 or BCNURBS entry directly.
Main Index
BCSCAP 1309
Defines a cap and number of segments
BCSCAP Defines a cap and number of segments
Defines whether a cap is added to a beam section and/or defines the number of segments used to model rod
and tube sections for segment to segment beam contact in in SOL 101 and 400 for general contact or in SOLs
101, 103, 105, 107 - 112, 200 and 400 for the permanently glued contact
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCSCAP EID IESCAP NSEG
Example:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCSCAP 2 1 20
Describer Meaning
EID Beam element identification number. (Integer > 0; Required)
IESCAP End and side cap flag (Integer ≥ 0; default=0).
0 no end or side cap

1 end cap only
2 side cap only
3 averaged side cap only
4 end cap and side cap
5 end cap and averaged side cap
NSEG Number of segments for circular sections TYPE=ROD, TUBE or TUBE2 beam
sections defined on PBARL or PBEAML. See remarks 2. (Integer ≥ 3; default=32)
Remarks:
1. If the card is not defined but the beam is included in segment to segment contact, all caps will be
ignored. This card is only useful when a user needs to define the cap of beams for segment to segment
contact.
Main Index
1310 BCSCAP
Defines a cap and number of segments
2. The segments for circular cross sections will be generated as the figure below.
Main Index
BCSEG 1311
Contact Segment Defined Using Grids
BCSEG Contact Segment Defined Using Grids
Grids which are part of an element to be used in contact analyses in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCSEG ID IBODY G1 G2 G3 G4
Example:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCSEG 100 1005 11 12 13 14
Describer Meaning
ID Unique identification number for this BCSEG entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
IBODY Identification number of a surface that is called out on the 5th field of a BCBODY
G1,G2,G3,G4 GRID point identification numbers of an element on this surface. For quad plates
and quad surfaces of solids, enter four grid id’s. For triangular plates or triangular
faces of solids, leave G4 blank. (Integer > 0; Required)
Remarks:
1. This entry is used as shown in the example below:
BCBODY, 201,,,1005
BCSEG,1,1005,11,12,13,14
BCSEG,2,1005,21,22,23,24
BCSEG,3,1005,31,32,33,34
(In the above 11-14, 21-24 and 31-34 are GRID ID’s)
Main Index
1312 BCTABLE
Defines a Contact Table for General Contact
BCTABLE Defines a Contact Table for General Contact
Defines a contact table used in SOL 101, 400 and 700. SOL 200 (without calling SOL 400) can only support
permanent glue. When SOL 200 calls SOL 400 (or say SOL 400 optimization), it can support all contact
types. The BCTABL1 option is the preferred method to define a contact table.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCTABLE ID IDSLAVE IDMAST NGROU COPTS COPTM
P
“SLAVE” IDSLA1 ERROR FNTOL FRIC CINTERF IGLUE
ISEARCH ICOORD JGLUE DQNEAR
“FBSH” FRLIM BIAS SLIDE HARDS COPTS1 COPTM1

“BKGL” BGSN BGST BGM BGN
“SEGS” PENALT AUGDIST TPENALT STKSLP
“HHHB” HCT HCV HNC BNC EMISS HBL

HNL BNL HGLUE
“MASTERS” IDMA1 IDMA2 IDMA3 IDMA4 IDMA5 IDMA6 IDMA7
IDMA8 IDMA9 ...

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCTABLE ID IDSLAVE IDMAST NGROUP
“SLAVE” IDSLA1 FRIC IGLUE

JGLUE
FK EXP METHOD ADAPT THICK THICKOF PENV
FACT TSTART TEND MAXPAR
IADJ
IGNORE
AUTO
Main Index
BCTABLE 1313
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SIDE WEIGHT MONDIS MONDISV INITMON
MASTERS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
"MASTERS" IDMA1 IDMA2 IDMA3 IDMA4 IDMA5 IDMA6 IDMA7
IDMA8 IDMA9 ...
Examples:
BCTABLE 2 3
SLAVE 10 0.2
MASTERS 20 30
SLAVE 20 0.3
MASTERS 10
SLAVE 30 0.2
MASTERS 10
BCTABLE 0 1 2 0
Describer Meaning
ID Identification number referenced by a BCONTACT Case Control command. See

Remark 5. (Integer; Required)
IDSLAVE Identification number of a BCBODY entry defining the touching body. (Integer >
0 or blank)
IDMAST Identification number of a BCBODY Bulk Data entry defining the touched body.
(Integer > 0 or blank)
NGROUP Flag to indicate that the continuation entries “SLAVE” and “MASTERS” are entered
or not. Zero means no continuation entries are entered. Any positive integer means
one or more sets of slave/master entries are entered. (Integer; Default = 1).
COPTS, COPTM, Flag to indicate how slave and master surfaces may contact. See Remark 9. (Integer;
COPTS1, Default = 0) COPTS and COPTM apply to all slave and master surfaces on this
COMPTM1 BCTABLE. To set individual slave/master combination differently, use COPTS1
and/or COPTM1. Ignored by SOL 700.
“SLAVE” Indicates that this line defines the touching body and its parameters.
Main Index
1314 BCTABLE
Describer Meaning
IDSLA1 Identification number of a BCBODY Bulk Data entry defining the touching body.
(Integer > 0)
For SOL 700, leaving IDSLA1 blank will result in contact for all elements in the
model. In this case, you are allowed to use ADAPT=YES.
ERROR Distance below which a node is considered touching a body. Default = blank
automatic calculation. See the Bulk Data entry BCPARA, 1287 for more details.
Ignored by SOL 700. (Real)
FNTOL Separation force, stress, or fraction above which a node separates from a body.
FNTOL is closely related to IBSEP. It’s default value is dependent on the IBSEP
value. See remark 10. Ignored by SOL 700. (Real)
TABLEM2 or TABL3D, i.e., a temperature-dependent or multidimensional table.
SOL700 does not support the table definition and allows -1.0 to assign different
static friction coefficients on properties. See Remark 2. of BCPROP1. (Real > 0.0 or
Integer > 0; Default = 0.0 for SOL400, Real >-1.0; Default=0.0 for SOL700)
CINTERF Interference closure amount, normal to the contact surface. Default = 0. For
CINTERF > 0, overlap between bodies. For CINTERF < 0., gap between bodies.
Ignored by SOL 700. (Real)
IGLUE Flag to activate glue option (Integer ≠ 0). Default is 0, no glue option. For SOL 700,
IGLUE=1 is only acceptable. JGLUE option controls a glue contact type in details.
Without assigning IGLUE and JGLUE options, general contact methods
(METHOD=TIEDxxx) can assign glue contact types as well. (See Remarks 8.
through 16.)
±1 Activates the glue option. In the glue option, all degrees-of- freedom
of the contact nodes are tied in case of deformable-deformable
contact once the node comes in contact. The relative tangential
motion of a contact node is zero in case of deformable-rigid contact.
The node will be projected onto the contact body.
±2 Activates a special glue option to insure that there is no relative
tangential and normal displacement when a node comes into contact.
An existing initial gap or overlap between the node and the contacted
body will not be removed, as the node will not be projected onto the
contacted body. To maintain an initial gap, ERROR should be set to
a value slightly larger than the physical gap.
±3 Insures full moment carrying glue when shells contact. The node will
be projected onto the contacted body.
±4 Insures full moment carrying glue when shells contact. The node will
not be projected onto the contact body and an existing initial gap or
overlap between the node and the contacted body will not be
removed, as the node will not be projected onto the contacted body.
Main Index
BCTABLE 1315
Describer Meaning
ISEARCH Option for contact searching order, from Slave to Master or from Master to Slave,
for deformable contact bodies. Ignored by SOL 700. ISEARCH is not necessary in
segment-to-segment contact. (Integer; Default = 0)
0 (Double orders search) ) the search order is from lower BCBODOY
ID's to higher ones first. Then it searches the opposite order. See
Remark 19.
1 (Single order search) the searching order is from Slave to Master
2 (Single order search) let the program decide which search order. See
Remark 19.
Note that ISTYP in BCBDPRP or BCBODY is supported with ISEARCH=0 only.
ICOORD Enter 1 to modify the coordinates of a node in contact with a deformable body so
that stress-free initial contact can be obtained. Enter 2 to extend the tangential error
tolerance at sharp corners of deformable bodies to delay sliding off a contacted
segment. Enter 3 to have both 1 and 2 active. Ignored by SOL 700. (Integer; Default
= 0)
JGLUE This option is only relevant if the general glue option is invoked (IGLUE > 0 and
=1). Enter 0 if a node should not separate (default). Enter 1 to invoke the standard
separation behavior based on the maximum residual force. For SOLs 101 and 400,
enter 2 to activate breaking glue. (Integer; Default = 0)
For SOL 700 the following options are available:
0 Slave nodes in contact and which come into contact will permanently
stick. Tangential motion is inhibited. This option is only available
with METHOD=SS1WAY or SS2WAY and AUTO=YES.
DQNEAR Distance below which near thermal contact behavior occurs. Used in heat transfer
analysis only. Ignored by SOL 700. (Real; Default = 0; which means near contact
does not occur)
“FBSH” Enter character string FBSH if the line with items FRLIM, BIAS, SLIDE, HARDS
is required to change the defaults of any of these values. (SOLs 101 and 400)
FRLIM Friction stress limit. This entry is only used for friction type 6 (Coulomb friction
using the bilinear model). If the shear stress due to friction reaches this limit value,
then the applied friction force will be reduced so that the maximum friction stress is
given by min ( μσ n, σ limit ) , with μ the friction coefficient and σ n the contact normal
stress. (Real; Default = 1.0E20)
BIAS Contact tolerance bias factor. If this field is left blank, the default is the BIAS of the
BCPARA entry. A nonblank entry will override the BIAS entered on the BCPARA
entry. Note 0.0 is not default, and will override the BIAS on BCPARA.
SYSTEM(758)=1 will set 0.0 same as blank. (0.0<=Real<=1.0)
Main Index
1316 BCTABLE
Describer Meaning
SLIDE Delayed slide off distance. This entry should not be made unless ICOORD ≥ 2 (see
above). When using the delayed slide off option, a node sliding on a segment will
slide off this segment only if it passes the node (2-D) or edge (3-D) at a sharp corner
over a distance larger than the delayed slide off distance. By default, the delayed slide
off distance is related to the dimensions of the contacted segment by a 20 percent
increase of its isoparametric domain. (Real; Default)
HARDS Hard-soft ratio. This entry is only used if double-sided contact with automatic
constraint optimization is used, (ISTYP=2 on the BCBODY entry). The hard-soft
ratio can be used by the program if there is a significant difference in the (average)
stiffness of the contact bodies (expressed by the trace of the initial stress-strain law).
If the ratio of the stiffnesses is larger then the hard-soft ratio, the nodes o the softest
body are the preferred slave nodes. (Real; Default = 2.0)
“BKGL” Enter the character string BKGL if the line with items BGST, BGSN, BGM, BGN
is required. (SOLs 101 and 400)
BGSN Maximum normal stress for breaking glue. See Remark 10. (Real; Default = 0.0)
BGST Maximum tangential stress for breaking glue. See Remark 10. (Real; Default = 0.0)
BGM Exponent for the tangential stress term in deciding if a glue-contact will break. See
Remark 10. (Real; Default = 2.0)
BGN Exponent for the normal stress term in deciding if a glue-contact will break. See
“SEGS” Enter the character string SEGS if the line with items PENALT and AUGDIST,
TPENALT and STKSLP is required for the segment-to-segment contact.
PENALT Augmented Lagrange penalty factor; used by the segment-to-segment contact
algorithm only. (Real > 0.0; see Remark 16. for default)
AUGDIST Penetration distance beyond which an augmentation will be applied; used by the
segment-to-segment contact algorithm only. (Real > 0, see Remark 17. for default)
“HHHB” Enter the character string HHHB if the line with items HCT, HCV, HNC, ..., up
to HGLUE is required in a pure thermal analysis or in a coupled thermal/structural
analysis. In a pure structural analysis they are ignored.
HCT Contact heat transfer coefficient. If Real, the value entered is the contact heat transfer
coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2
entry specifying the contact heat transfer coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D
entry specifying the contact heat transfer coefficient vs temperature and possibly
other variables. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0; In a thermal/mechanical coupled
analysis a default value of 1.0E6 is used when the mechanical glue option is activated,
i.w., when IGLUE > 0.)
Main Index
BCTABLE 1317
Describer Meaning
HCV Convection coefficient for near field behavior. If Real, the value entered is the near
field convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1
or TABLEM2 entry specifying the near field convection coefficient vs temperature
or a TABL3D entry specifying the near field convection coefficient vs temperature
and possibly other variables. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0).
HNC Natural convection coefficient for near field behavior. If Real, the value entered is the
near field natural convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a
TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the near field natural convection
coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the near field natural
convection coefficient vs temperature and possibly other variables. (Real or Integer;
Default = 0.0).
BNC Exponent associated with the natural convection coefficient for near field behavior.
If Real, the value entered is the exponent associated with near field natural
convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or
TABLEM2 entry specifying the exponent associated with the near field natural
convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the exponent
associated with the near field natural convection coefficient vs temperature and
possibly other variables. (Real or Integer; Default = 1.0.)
EMISS Emissivity for radiation to the environment or near thermal radiation. If Real, the
value entered is the emissivity. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1
or TABLEM2 entry specifying the emissivity vs temperature or a TABL3D entry
specifying the emissivity vs temperature and possibly other variables. (Real or
HBL Separation distance dependent thermal convection coefficient. If Real, the value
entered is the convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a
TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the convection coefficient vs temperature
or a TABL3D entry specifying the convection coefficient vs temperature and
possibly other variables. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0).
HNL Heat transfer coefficient for nonlinear convective heat flow for near field behavior..
If Real, the value entered is the near field nonlinear convection coefficient. If Integer,
the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 or TABLEM2 entry specifying the near
field nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying
the near field nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature and possibly other
variables. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0)
BNL Exponent associated with the nonlinear convective heat flow for near field behavior.
If Real, the value entered is the exponent associated with the near field nonlinear
convection coefficient. If Integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEM1 OR
TABLEM2 entry specifying the exponent associated with the near field nonlinear
convection coefficient vs temperature or a TABL3D entry specifying the exponent
associated with the near field nonlinear convection coefficient vs temperature and
possibly other variables. (Real or Integer; Default = 1.0)
Main Index
1318 BCTABLE
Describer Meaning
HGLUE Flag to activate the thermal glue option. When left blank or set to zero, thermal
contact conditions will be treated by convective heat transfer between the bodies.
When set to 1, the temperature fields of the bodies are tied as soon as they come in
contact and there will be no convective heat transfer over the body interfaces. (0 <
Integer < 1; Default = 0)
FK Kinetic coefficient of friction. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
(SOL 700 only)
EXP Exponential decay coefficient. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
(SOL 700 only)
METHOD Character, Influences the contact type used. See Remark 19. Options are:
(SOL 700 only) FULL: Regular Contact (Default)
AIRBAG: Single Surface Contact
SS1WAY: Surface To Surface One Way
SS2WAY: Surface To Surface Two Way
RB1WAY: Rigid Body One Way To Rigid Body
RB2WAY: Rigid Body Two Way To Rigid Body
RNRB: Rigid Nodes To Rigid Body
TIEDNS: Tied Nodes to Surface
TIEDNSO: Tied Nodes to Surface with Offset
RELLIPS: Tied contact between grid points or rigid materials to ATB dummies. See
Remark 23.
BELT: Suited for modeling contact between a belt element and a rigid structure.
Master slave contact only. The contact logic doesn't apply a contact force, but applies
an enforced displacement and velocity that keeps the slave nodes exactly on top of
the master face. The slave node does not slide relative to the master face when the
friction coefficient (FS) is set to 1E20
BELT1: Identical to BELT algorithm, except that the slave nodes are initially
repositioned on top of the closest master face. All slave nodes initially penetrated or
within a distance of INITMON from a master face, are repositioned.
ADAPT Character, influences the contact type used.
(SOL 700 only) Options are NO or YES.
Default = NO
When ADAPT=YES, the BCBODY entries IDMAi must be defined as:
behav=DEFORM
bsid references a BCPROP
THICK Shell thickness scale factor. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)
(SOL 700 only)
THICKOF Artificial contact thickness offset. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
(SOL 700 only)
Main Index
BCTABLE 1319
Describer Meaning
PENV Overwrites the default maximum penetration distance factor. (Real > 0.0; Default =
(SOL 700 only) 1.E20)
FACT Scale factor for the contact forces. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.1)
(SOL 700 only)
TSTART Time at which the contact is activated. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
(SOL 700 only)
TEND Time at which the contact is deactivated. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.e20)
(SOL 700 only)
MAXPAR Maximum parametric coordinate in segment. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.025), search
(SOL 700 only) (values 1.025 and 1.20 recommended). Larger values can increase cost. If zero, the
default is set to 1.025. This factor allows an increase in the size of the segments. May
be useful at sharp corners.
IADJ Adjacent material treatment option for solid elements. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
(SOL 700 only)
0 Solid element faces are included only for free boundaries.
1 Solid element faces are included if they are on the boundary of the
material subset. This option also allows the erosion within a body and
the subsequent treatment of contact.
IGNORE Ignore initial penetrations. (Integer > 1)
(SOL 700 only)
1 Allow initial penetrations to exist by tracking it
2 Move nodes to eliminate initial penetrations
AUTO (Character)
(SOL 700 only) Options are:
YES Automatic Contacts Activated (Default)
NO Non-Automatic Contact Activated. This option is not
recommended when Distributed Memory Parallel is activated.
“MASTERS” Indicates the start of the list of bodies touched by touching body IDSLA1.
IDMAi Identification numbers of BCBODY Bulk Data entries defining touched bodies.
(Integer > 0)
SIDE Defines which side will be the monitoring side of a master face. The opposite side of
(SOL 700 only) the master face will be the penetration side. See Remark 24. (Characters;
default=BOTH)
BOTH: The side from which a slave node approaches the master face will
become the monitoring side.
Main Index
1320 BCTABLE
Describer Meaning
TOP: The monitoring side will always be on the side of the master face that
its normal is pointing at.
BOTTOM: The monitoring side is always on the opposite side of the master face
that its normal is pointing at.
WEIGHT The contact force is multiplied by a mass-weighting factor. The following options
(SOL 700 only) are available. See Remark 25. (Character; default=BOTH)
M slave M ma ster
BOTH: M s cale = ------------------------------------------
M slave + M master
SLAVE: M s cale = M slave
MASTER: M s cale = M master

NONE: M s cale = 1.0
MONDIS Defines the fixed part of the monitoring distance. When the normal distance of a
(SOL 700 only) slave node to a master face becomes smaller than the monitoring distance the slave
node will tag itself to the master face. The side from which the slave node is moving
towards the master face becomes the monitoring region. (Character;
default=FACTOR)
FACTOR: The monitoring distance is equal to a factor times a characteristic
length of the master faces. The factor is specified in MONDISV.
DISTANCE The monitoring distance is specified in MONDISV.
:
MONDISV Value of the monitoring distance or value of the FACTOR to calculate the
(SOL 700 only) monitoring distance. (Real; default=2.0)
INITMON Fixed part of the monitoring distance used during the initialization. If not specified,
(SOL 700 only) the value of MONDIS is used. (Real > 0.0; default=MONDIS)
Remarks:
1. BCTABLE defines surface contact.
2. If BCTABLE is not given, the default for contact analysis is assumed if BCONTACT=ALLBODY
in Case Control Section, and, every body detects the possibility of contact relative to all other bodies
and itself if it is a deformable body. If BCTABLE is given, the default for every body is overwritten.
The touching body does not contact itself unless requested. When the touched body is deformable,
double-sided contact is applied by default. BCTABLE is useful for deactivating or activating bodies
to reduce computational effort and to change contact conditions between subcases.
3. A short input to define two contact bodies exits if the user provides IDSLAVE and IDMAST. Then
it is assumed that there are only two contact bodies, NGROUP is ignored and continuation entries
are not allowed. Default values are set for the parameters on the continuation entry.
Main Index
BCTABLE 1321
4. If the user leaves IDSLAVE and IDMAST blank, then NGROUP is normally required and
continuation entries are usually expected for NGROUP SLAVE/MASTER combinations.
Exceptions are for SOL 700 self-contact may be designated using a slave IDSLA1 of zero and no
MASTER entry.
5. For SOLs 101 and 400, the BCTABLE with ID=0 will be used in loadcase 0 automatically that does
not need a corresponding Case Control command BCONTACT=0. The loadcase 0 is purely elastic
and it can also be used to (1) move rigid contact bodies so that they just touch flexible contact bodies,
and/or (2) remove any prestressed condition by adjusting the coordinates of the active nodes, which
are the Grid Points on the surface of all deformable BCBODY’s. BCTABLE, 0 is not used to define
the contact relationship for any loadcases. ONLY BCTABLE, n(n>0), will dominate the contact
analysis for each loadcase. To place an entry in any physical loadcase (SUBCASE or STEP), the ID
must be selected by the Case Control command BCONTACT=ID. When
BCONTACT=ALLBODY, there is no ID of BCTABLE specified; therefore, the default values of all
entries of BCTABLE are assumed.
6. The line starting with “HHHB” is used for heat transfer or thermal contact analyses only. Also, see
Remark 17.
7. It is not necessary to enter all continuation lines between SLAVE and MASTERS. For example, if
an entry is required on the 4th SLAVE line, the first 3 must be entered with some being blank and
those after the 4th may be omitted. All continuation lines prior to the last needed must be entered.
8. Many slave/masters may be entered up to the number specified in Remark 5. A new slave entry may
not begin until the masters from the previous entry are finished (as shown in the example). The
number of master surfaces for any given slave surface is limited by the number specified in Remark
5., however most GUI’s produce one slave surface and one master surface per slave/masters pairs.
9. COPTS, COPTM COPTS1 and COPTM1 are packed numbers designating how the surfaces may
contact using the formula
COPxxx=A+10*B+1000*C
A: the outside of the solid elements in the body
• = 1: the outside will be in the contact description (Default)
B (flexible bodies): the outside of the shell elements in the body
(Default)
• = 2: only bottom faces will be in the contact description, thickness offset will be included
• = 3: only bottom faces will be in the contact description, shell thickness will be ignored
• = 4: only top faces will be in the contact description, thickness offset will be included
• = 5: only top faces will be in the contact description, shell thickness will be ignored
• = 6: both top and bottom faces will be in the contact description, shell thickness will be ignored
Main Index
1322 BCTABLE
B (rigid bodies): the rigid surface
• = 1: the rigid surface should be in the contact description (Default)
C (flexible bodies): the edges of the body
• = 1: only the beam/bar edges are included in the contact description (Default)
• = 10: only the free and hard shell edges are included in the contact description
description
Note that C has no effect if beam-to-beam contact is not switched on ( BEAMB ≠ 1 on BCPARA).
Note that C has no effect if segment-to-segment contact is used.
contact again. If BGSN = 0.0 the first term is ignored.

q = HCT ⋅ ( T A – T B )
where T A is the contacting grid temperature and T B is the face temperature in the contact point in
case of a meshed body or the T BODY temperature in case of a rigid geometry.
Main Index
BCTABLE 1323
q = HCV ⋅ ( T A – T B ) +
BNC
HNC ⋅ ( T A – T B ) +
BNL BNL
HNL ⋅ ( TA – TB ) +
4 4
σ ⋅ EMISS ⋅ ( T A – T B ) +
dist dist
HCT ⋅  1 – -------------------------- + HBL ⋅ -------------------------- ⋅ ( T A ⋅ T B )
where the last term is only activated when HBL ≠ 0 , T A is the contacting grid temperature and T B is
the face temperature in the contact point in case of a meshed body or the T BODY temperature in case
15. Table IDs of tables used on the BCTABLE and the BCBODY entry must be unique.
16. The penalty factor used in the augmented Lagrange method is by default derived from the contact
characteristic distance and the stiffness of the deformable contact bodies involved (note that the
dimension of the penalty factor is force per cubic length).
0.5 ( S i + S j )
PENALT = -----------------------------
L
The body stiffness ( S i and S j ), are either defined by the average trace of the initial stress-strain law of
the elements defining the two contact bodies or by the average bulk modulus for (nearly)
incompressible rubber materials, whichever of the two is the largest.
For continuum elements, the characteristic length ( L ) is given by one half of the average length of all
the edges being part of the contact boundary. For shell elements, the characteristic length is given by
half of the average thickness of all the shell elements being part of a contact body. When there is
contact between a solid and a shell element, then the characteristic length is defined by the shell
element.
In case of contact with a rigid body, since there is no body stiffness associated with a rigid body, the
default value is related to the deformation body only and given by:
1000S i
PENALT = -----------------
L
17. By default, the threshold value of this penetration distance is 0.05 times the default contact
characteristic distance.
AUGDIST = 0.05L
Main Index
1324 BCTABLE
18. The multipoint constraint equations (MPC equations) internally created from body contact can be
printed out in standard Nastran punch file by using Case Control command, NLOPRM MPCPCH.
This capability is good for all solutions except SOL 700.
19. When ISEARCH=0 (and ISTYP=0 in default on BCBODY), the search order is from lower
BCBODOY ID to higher one to create the first set of contact constraints and then add the constraints
in the search order from higher BCBODY ID to lower one as long as they are not in conflict with the
first set.
When ISEARCH=2, the program looks into the smallest element edge at the outer boundary (and
the smallest thickness in case of shell elements) of each BCBODY. Then, the search order of the two
deformable contact bodies is determined by the following rule when ID1 < ID2
CB1= Min(1/20 of the smallest edge,1/4 of the smallest thickness) of BCBODY ID1
CB2= Min(1/20 of the smallest edge,1/4 of the smallest thickness) of BCBODY ID2
The search order is from lower BCBODY ID1 to higher BCBODY ID2 if CB1<=1.05*CB2.
Otherwise, if CB1>1.05*CB2 the search order is from BCBODY ID2 to BCBODY ID1.
20. Fields ISEARCH, DQNEAR and "BKGL" are not supported in segment to segment contact analysis.
( μ ⋅ F NORMAL , where μ is the friction coefficient) divided by the maximum sticking displacement.
22. When the initial stress-free(ICOORD=1), Node-to-Seg updates model geometry to close the gap,
nodes are projected onto the contact body; but Seg-to-Seg treats initial stress-free as pre-stress in the
equation without geometry update, no node projection is considered.
23. When METHOD=RELLIPS is used, BCGRID or BCMATL are only available for SLAVE body and
BCELIPS is only available for MASTER body. When BCMATL is used, the MATRIG id or RBE2
id are only acceptable.
24. The options TOP/BOTTOM are useful in the following cases:
a. When a slave node initially is located on the master face (see the picture below), the contact
situation is uniquely defined, only if the TOP or BOTTOM side of the master surface is defined:
SIDE=TOP case:
b. When hooking of slave nodes on the wrong side of a master face might occur. This often is the
case when the master face is at the edge of a shell element structure:
Main Index
BCTABLE 1325
SIDE=BOTTOM case: penetration of node 1 (SIDE=BOTH: no penetration of node 1)
25. Recommended usage of WEIGHT:
SLAVE MASTER WEIGHT

Deformable Deformable BOTH
Deformable Rigid SLAVE
Rigid Deformable MASTER
Rigid Rigid NONE
Default setting when BCELIPS is used in SLAVE or MASTER:
SLAVE MASTER WEIGHT

Non-BCELIPS BCELIPS SLAVE
BCELIPS Non-BCELIPS NONE
BCELIPS
Main Index
1326 BCTABLE - Glued Option
Defines a Contact Table for Permanently Glued Contact
BCTABLE - Glued Option Defines a Contact Table for Permanently Glued Contact
Defines a glued contact used in SOLs 101, 103, 105, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 200 and SOL 400 for
the permanently-glued or general contact.
Format: (SOLs 101, 103, 105, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 200 and 400 only)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCTABLE ID NGROUP COPTS COPTM
“SLAVE” IDSLA1 ERROR CINTER IGLUE
F
ISEARCH ICOORD
“FBSH” BIAS SLIDE COPTS1 COPTM1
IDMA8 IDMA9 ...
Examples:
BCTABLE 101 2 61 61
SLAVE 20 0.002 0.2 1
1
FBSH 0.01 60 60
MASTERS 31 32 33
SLAVE 40 1
MASTERS 51 52 53 54
Describer Meaning
ID Identification number of a BCTABLE entry to be selected by BCONTACT Case

Control command. See Remark 5. for the general contact. Case Control,
BCONTACT=ALLBODY, cannot be used for the permanently glued contact. See
Remark 1. (Integer > 0; Required)
NGROUP Flag to indicate the number of pairs of “SLAVE” and “MASTERS” entries in the
continuation lines. (Integer > 0; Required)
COPTS1, COPTM Flag to indicate how slave and master surfaces may contact. See Remark 6. for the
general contact.
“SLAVE” Indicates that this line defines the slave or touching body and its parameters.
IDSLA1 Identification number of a BCBODY Bulk Data entry defining the touching
body. (Integer > 0; Required)
Main Index
BCTABLE - Glued Option 1327
Describer Meaning
ERROR Distance below which a node is considered touching a body. When this field is left
blank or 0.0, the value is taken from BCPARA = 0, ERROR, if it is specified.
Otherwise, Nastran automatically calculates the value. See the Bulk Data entry
BCPARA, 1287 for more details. (Real)
CINTERF Interference closure amount, normal to the contact surface. For CINTERF > 0.0,
overlap between bodies, CINTERF < 0.0, gap between bodies. (Real; Default =
0.0)
IGLUE Flag to activate the glue options. See the descriptions of various options in
BCTABLE for the general contact. This field must be specified for the glued
contact. See Remark 4. (Integer > 0; Required).
contact nodes are tied in case of deformable-deformable contact once the
node comes in contact. The relative tangential motion of a contact node is
zero in case of deformable-rigid contact. This option is recommended
when there is no gap or overlap between contact surfaces or initial stress
free contact is specified.
2. Activates a special glue option to insure that there is no relative tangential
and normal displacement when a node comes into contact. An existing
initial gap or overlap between the node and the contacted body will not be
removed, as the node will not be projected onto the contacted body. To
maintain an initial gap, ERROR should be set to a value slightly larger
than the physical gap.
3. Insures full moment carrying glue when shells contact. This option is
recommended when moments are important and there is no gap or overlap
between contact surfaces or initial stress free contact is specified.
4. Insures full moment carrying glue when shells contact. The node will not
be projected onto the contact body and an existing initial gap or overlap
between the node and the contacted body will not be removed, as the node
will not be projected onto the contacted body.
ISEARCH Option for contact searching order, from a slave (touching) to a master (touched)
body or visca versa, for deformable contact. See the options in BCTABLE for the
general contact. (Integer; Default = 0)
0 (Double orders search) 0(Double orders search) the search order is from
lower BCBODOY ID's to higher ones first. Then it searches the
opposite order. See Remark 19. in BCTABLE.
Remark 19. in BCTABLE.
Main Index
1328 BCTABLE - Glued Option
Describer Meaning
that stress-free initial contact can be obtained. Enter 2 to extend the tangential
error tolerance at sharp corners of deformable bodies to delay sliding off a
contacted segment. Enter 3 to have both 1 and 2 active. (Integer; Default = 0)
“FBSH” Character string used to introduce BIAS, COPTS1, and COPTM1.
BIAS Contact tolerance bias factor. If this field is left blank, the default is the BIAS of
the BCPARA entry. A nonblank entry will override the BIAS entered on the
BCPARA entry. Note 0.0 is not default, and will override the BIAS on BCPARA.
SYSTEM(758)=1 will set 0.0 same as blank. (0.0<=Real<=1.0)
Slide Delayed slide off distance. This entry should not be made unless ICOORD ≥ 2
(see above). When using the delayed slide off option, a node sliding on a segment
will slide off this segment only if it passes the node (2-D) or edge (3- D) at a sharp
corner over a distance larger than the delayed slide off distance. By default, the
delayed slide off distance is related to the dimensions of the contacted segment by
a 20 percent increase of its isoparametric domain. (Real; Default)
COPTS1, COPTM1 Flag to indicate how individual pair of slave and master contact surfaces may
contact. These two fields override COPTS and COPTM. See Remark 6.
Remarks:
1. This BCTABLE entry is tailored specifically for what we called the permanently-glued contact (or
tied contact), from the entry of BCTABLE for the general contact, where the glued is an option in
the approaching-and-touched contact. Most of the descriptions and remarks on the fields in this entry
can be found in the BCTABLE for the general contact.
2. Permanent glued contact for small rotation condition is defined when all IGLUE fields of BCTABLE,
reference by the very first loadcase, (the 1st STEP of the 1st SUBCASE in SOL 400 or the 1st
SUBCASE in others) is set to larger than 0, IGLUE(>0). In BCPARA,0,, the value of may not be 1.
For large deformation and large rotation condition, permanent glued contact is activated by negative
IGLUE (<0) and works in corresponding subcase or step in the corresponding subcase or step where
it is defined, no matter what is set (1 or 0). This type of permanent glued contact with large
deformation and large rotation may be applied together with combination of general glued contact
and touching contact. IGLUE will be changed to negative automatically if SYSTEM(758)=2 when
Permanently Glued setting is found with large rotation/deformation effect turned on.
3. The MPC equations internally created for the glued contact can be printed out in Nastran standard
punch file by using Case Control command, NLOPRM MPCPCH=BEGN.
4. IGLUE=±2 or ±4 is favorable to passing the GROUNDCHECK. The initial stress-free contact is also
available to preserve the six rigid-body modes with IGLUE = 1 or 3.
Main Index
BCTABLE - Glued Option 1329
5. For SOLs 101 and 400, the BCTABLE with ID=0 will be used in loadcase automatically that does
not need a corresponding Case Control command BCONTACT=0. The loadcase 0 is purely elastic
and it can also be used to (1) move rigid contact bodies so that they just touch flexible contact bodies,
and/or (2) remove any prestressed condition by adjusting the coordinates of the active nodes, which
are the Grid Points on the surface of all deformable BCBODY’s. To place an entry in any physical
loadcase (SUBCASE or STEP), the ID must be selected by the Case Control command
BCONTACT=ID. When BCONTACT=ALLBODY, there is no ID of BCTABLE specified;
therefore, the default values of all entries of BCTABLE are assumed.
(Default)
B (rigid bodies): the rigid surface
description
Note that C has no effect if beam-to-beam contact is not switched on ( BEAMB ≠ 1 on BCPARA)
7. It is not supported that a permanently-glued contact is used to glue a deformable body to a rigid one.
If it is a SOL 101 or SOL 400 job, the general contact with glued option must be performed.
Main Index
1330 BCTABLE
Defines a Contact Table in SOL 600
BCTABLE Defines a Contact Table in SOL 600
Defines a contact table in SOL 600.

For heat transfer or thermal contact do not enter parameter PARAM,MRCONVER,11 in the bulk data. For
structural analysis, enter PARAM,MRCONVER,11 if SLAVE lines “FBSH” or beyond are used.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCTABLE ID IDSLAVE IDMAST NGROU
P
“SLAVE” IDSLA1 ERROR FNTOL FRIC CINTERF IGLUE
ISEARCH ICOORD JGLUE TOLID DQNEAR DISTID
“FBSH” FRLIM BIAS SLIDE HARDS COPTS1 COPTM1
“BKGL” BGSN BGST BGM BGN
“HHHB” HCT HCV HNC BNC EMISS HBL
“SEGS” PENALT AUGDIST

IDMA8 IDMA9 ...
Examples:
BCTABLE 2 3
SLAVE 10 0.2
MASTERS 20 30
SLAVE 20 0.3
MASTERS 10
SLAVE 30 0.2
MASTERS 10
BCTABLE 0 1 2 0
Describer Meaning
ID Identification number referenced by a BCONTACT Case Control command. See

Remark 6. (Integer; Required)
IDSLAVE Identification number of a BCBODY entry defining the touching body. (Integer
(3,1) [3,1] > 0 or blank)
IDMAST Identification number of a BCBODY Bulk Data entry defining the touched body.
(5,1) [15,1] (Integer > 0 or blank)
Main Index
BCTABLE 1331
Describer Meaning
NGROUP Flag to indicate that the continuation entries “SLAVE” and “MASTERS” are
(2,1) [2,1] entered or not. Zero means no continuation entries are entered. Any positive
integer means one or more sets of slave/master entries are entered. (Integer;
Default = 1).
COPTS1, Flag to indicate how slave and master surfaces may contact. See Remark 10.
COMPTM1 (Integer; Default = 0).
“SLAVE” Indicates that this line defines the touching body and its parameters.
IDSLA1 Identification number of a BCBODY Bulk Data entry defining the touching
(3,1) [3,1] body. (Integer > 0)
ERROR Distance below which a node is considered touching a body. (Real for BCTABLE
(3,2) [3,2] with ID = 0, Real or Integer for BCTABLE with ID > 0). If the value is an Integer,
it is the ID of a TABLED1 or TABL3Di providing error vs time or other variables.
Default = blank automatic calculation of ERROR without any table dependence.
See the Bulk Data entry BCPARA, 1294 for more details.
FNTOL Separation force or stress (depending BCPARA IBSEP) on above which a node
(3,3) [5,1] separates from a body. Default is maximum residual force. (Real)
FRIC Friction coefficient. If the value is an integer, it is the ID of a TABLED1 or
(3,4) [5,2] TABL3Di providing friction vs time or friction vs other variables. (Real > 0.0 or
CINTERF Interference closure amount, normal to the contact surface. CINTERF > 0,
(3,5) [5,3] designates an overlap between bodies, CINTERF < 0 designates a gap between
bodies. If the value is an integer, it is the ID of a TABLED1 or TABL3Di
providing interference closure vs time or friction vs other variables. (Real or
Main Index
1332 BCTABLE
Describer Meaning
IGLUE Flag to activate glue option (Integer > 0). Default is 0, no glue option,
(3,7) [3,7]
contact nodes are tied in case of deformable-deformable contact once the
node comes in contact. The relative tangential motion of a contact node is
zero in case of deformable-rigid contact. The node will be projected onto
the contact body.
2. Activates a special glue option to insure that there is no relative tangential
and normal displacement when a node comes into contact. An existing
initial gap or overlap between the node and the contacted body will not be
removed, as the node will not be projected onto the contacted body. To
maintain an initial gap, ERROR should be set to a value slightly larger
than the physical gap.
3. Insures full moment carrying glue when shells contact. The node will be
projected onto the contacted body.
4. Insures full moment carrying glue when shells contact. The node will not
be projected onto the contact body and an existing initial gap or overlap
between the node and the contacted body will not be removed, as the node
will not be projected onto the contacted body.
ISEARCH Option for contact searching order, from Slave to Master or from Master to Slave,
(3,8) [3,8] for deformable contact bodies. ISEARCH is not supported in segment-to-segment
contact. (Integer; Default = 0)
0 Double orders search) the search order is from lower BCBODOY ID's
to higher ones first. Then it searches the opposite order. See Remark 19.
in BCTABLE.
Remark 19. in BCTABLE.
(3,9) [3,9] that stress-free initial contact can be obtained. Enter 2 to extend the tangential
error tolerance at sharp corners of deformable bodies to delay sliding off a
contacted segment. Enter 3 to have both 1 and 2 active. (Integer; Default = 0)
JGLUE This option is only relevant if the glue option is invoked (IGLUE > 0). Enter 0 if
(3,10) [3,10] a node should not separate (Default). Enter 1 to invoke the standard separation
behavior based on the maximum residual force. (Integer; Default = 0)
Enter 2 to activate breaking glue.

TOLID Contact tolerance table ID of a TABLEDi. Used in heat transfer analysis only.
(4,2) [4,2] (Integer; Default = 0 which means no table ID)
Main Index
BCTABLE 1333
Describer Meaning
DQNEAR Distance below which near thermal contact behavior occurs. Used in heat transfer
(3,3) [3,3] analysis only. Used in heat transfer analysis only. If the value is an integer, it is the
ID of a TABLED1 or TABL3Di providing friction vs time or friction vs other
variables. (Real; or integer; Default = 0.0; which means near contact does not
occur)
DISTID Contact near distance table ID of a TABLEDi. Used in heat transfer only. (Integer;
(4,3) [4,3] Default = 0 which means near contact does not occur) (Integer; Default = 0 which
means no table ID)
“FBSH” Enter character string FBSH if the line with items FRLIM, BAIS, SLIDE,
HARDS is required to change the defaults of any of these values.
FRLIM Friction stress limit. This entry is only used for friction type 6 (Coulomb friction
[5,4] using the bilinear model). If the shear stress due to friction reaches this limit value,
then the applied friction force will be reduced so that the maximum friction stress
is given by min ( μσ n, σ limit ) , with μ the friction coefficient and σ n the contact
normal stress. If the value is an integer, it is the ID of a TABLED1 or TABL3Di
providing friction vs time or friction vs other variables. (Real or integer; Default =
1.0E20)
BIAS Contact tolerance bias. A non-blank entry will override the BIAS entered on the
[5,5] BCBODY entry. (Real value between 1.0E-10 and 1.0; Default = 0.9)
SLIDE Delayed slide off distance. This entry should not be made unless ICOORD ≥ 2
[5,6] (see above). When using the delayed slide off option, a node sliding on a segment
will slide off this segment only if it passes the node (2-D) or edge (3-D) at a sharp
corner over a distance larger than the delayed slide off distance. By default, the
delayed slide off distance is related to the dimensions of the contacted segment by
a 20 percent increase of its isoparametric domain. (Real; Default)
HARDS Hard-soft ratio. This entry is only used if double-sided contact with automatic
[5,7] constraint optimization is used, (ISTYP=2 on the BCBODY entry). The hard-soft
ratio can be used by the program if there is a significant difference in the (average)
stiffness of the contact bodies (expressed by the trace of the initial stress-strain
law). If the ratio of the stiffnesses is larger then the hard-soft ratio, the nodes o the
softest body are the preferred slave nodes. (Real; Default = 2.0)
“BKGL” Enter the character string BKGL if the line with items BGST, BGSN, BGM, BGN
is required.
BGSN Maximum normal stress for breaking glue. If the value is an integer, it is the ID of
a TABLED1 or TABL3Di providing friction vs time or friction vs other variables.
See Remark 10. (Real or integer; Default = 0.0)
BGST Maximum tangential stress for breaking glue. If the value is an integer, it is the ID
of a TABLED1 or TABL3Di providing friction vs time or friction vs other
variables. See Remark 10. (Real or integer; Default = 0.0)
Main Index
1334 BCTABLE
Describer Meaning
BGM First exponent for breaking glue. If the value is an integer, it is the ID of a
TABLED1 or TABL3Di providing friction vs time or friction vs other variables.
BGN Second exponent stress for breaking glue. If the value is an integer, it is the ID of
a TABLED1 or TABL3Di providing friction vs time or friction vs other variables.
“HHHB” Enter the character string HHHB if the line with items HCT, HCV, HNC, etc. is
required.
HCT Contact heat transfer coefficient. If real, the value entered is the contact heat
[7,1]/[8,1] transfer coefficient. If integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEMi entry
specifying the contact heat transfer coefficient vs temperature. (Real or Integer;
Default = 0.0 for a heat transfer problem, omit for a structural problem.)
HCV Convection coefficient for near field behavior. If real, the value entered is the near
[7,2]/[8,2] field convection coefficient. If integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEMi
entry specifying the near field convection coefficient vs temperature. (Real or
Integer; Default = 0.0 for a heat transfer problem, omit for a structural problem).
HNC Natural convection coefficient for near field behavior. If real, the value entered is
[7,3]/[8,3] the near field natural convection coefficient. If integer, the value entered is the ID
of a TABLEMi entry specifying the near field natural convection coefficient vs
temperature. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0 for a heat transfer problem, omit for
a structural problem).
BNC Exponent associated with the natural convection coefficient for near field
[7,4]/[8,4] behavior. If real, the value entered is the exponent associated with near field
natural convection coefficient. If integer, the value entered is the ID of a
TABLEMi entry specifying the exponent associated with the near field natural
convection coefficient vs temperature. (Real or Integer; Default = 1.0 for a heat
transfer problem, omit for a structural problem.)
EMISS Emissivity for radiation to the environment or near thermal radiation. If real, the
[7,5]/[8,5] value entered is the emissivity. If integer, the value entered is the ID of a
TABLEMi entry specifying the emissivity vs temperature. (Real or Integer;
Default = 1.0 for a heat transfer problem, omit for a structural problem.)
HBL Separation distance dependent thermal convection coefficient. If real, the value
[7,6]/[8,6] entered is the separation distance dependent thermal convection coefficient. If
integer, the value entered is the ID of a TABLEMi entry specifying the separation
distance dependent thermal convection coefficient. (Real or Integer; Default = 0.0
for a heat transfer problem, omit for a structural problem).
“SEGS” Enter the character string SEGS if segment-to-segment contact is desired (note
that for MSC Nastran 2012 segment-to-segment contact cannot include friction.)
Main Index
BCTABLE 1335
Describer Meaning
PENALT Penalty factor (stiffness) used for segment-to-segment contact analysis. (Real;
Default = leave blank, meaning the program will calculate the value)
AUGDIST Penetration distance above which additional penalty stiffness will be added. (Real;
Default = leave blank, meaning the program will calculate the value)
(4,i) [15,1] (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. BCTABLE defines surface contact.
2. If BCTABLE is not given, the default for contact analysis is assumed, every body detects the
possibility of contact relative to all other bodies and itself if it is a deformable body. If BCTABLE is
given, the default for every body is overwritten. The touching body does not contact itself unless
requested. When the touched body is deformable, double-sided contact is applied by default.
BCTABLE is useful for deactivating or activating bodies to reduce computational effort and to change
contact conditions between subcases.
3. A short input to define two contact bodies exits if the user provides IDSLAVE and IDMAST. Then
it is assumed that there are only two contact bodies, NGROUP is ignored and continuation entries
are not allowed. Default values are set for the parameters on the continuation entry.
4. If the user leaves IDSLAVE and IDMAST blank, then NGROUP is normally required and
continuation entries are usually expected for NGROUP SLAVE/MASTER combinations. An
exception if no contact is desired in increment zero or a particular subcase, fields 1 and 2 of the
primary BCTABLE entry for that subcase are entered, all other fields left blank and no continuation
lines are entered. The no contact condition may be achieved in either of two ways - set Case Control
BCONTACT=ID and enter a matching BCTABLE with that ID in field 2 and all other fields blank
or set BCONTACT=NONE and do not enter BCTABLE for that subcase.
5. The maximum number of slave-master combinations is 99 for versions prior to MSC Nastran 2005
and 999 for current versions. For MSC Nastran 2005 r3 and subsequent versions, the limit is 999.
6. The BCTABLE with ID=0 will be used in “increment 0”. This phase of Marc is purely elastic and is
sometimes used to move rigid contact bodies so that they just touch flexible contact bodies. If no
BCTABLE entries are desired in “increment 0”, do not enter any BCTABLEs with ID=0. In the
examples shown, the first BCTABLE is used in subcase 2 and the second BCTABLE is used in phase
0.
7. The BCTABLE formats (primary or alternate) shown in the MSC Nastran 2005 r3 Quick Reference
Guide may still be used in which case PARAM,MRCONVER,11 should not be entered if the
“primary” format shown is used.
Main Index
1336 BCTABLE
8. Many slave/masters may be entered up to the number specified in Remark 5. A new slave entry may
not begin until the masters from the previous entry are finished (as shown in the example). The
number of master surfaces for any given slave surface is limited by the number specified in Remark
5., however most GUI’s produce one slave surface and one master surface per slave/masters pairs.
9. (i,j) indicates the ith datablock jth field of MARC’s CONTACT TABLE (without tables) history
definition. [i,j] indicates Marc’s Contact Table (with Tables).
(Default)
• Note: For flexible bodies, B=6 for both bodies in a contact combination can only be used for glued
contact. If the contact bodies are not glued and both bodies specify B=6, a FATAL ERROR will
be issued. Should this fatal error occur, please choose a different B option and re-run the analysis.
description
Note that C has no effect if beam-to-beam contact is not switched on ( BEAMB ≠ 1 on BCPARA)
contact again. If BSGN = 0.0 the first term is ignored. If BGST is zero, the second term is ignored.
12. If the “SEGS” entry is used, “CTYPE” on BCBODY must also be entered and parameters
PARAM,MRCONVER,11 and PARAM,MRCONTAB,11 must be entered.
Main Index
BCTABL1 1337
Defines a Contact Table
BCTABL1 Defines a Contact Table
BCTABL1 specifies a list of contact pairs through the BCONECT option for SOLs 101, 103, 105, 107, 108,
109, 110, 111, 112, 200, 400 and 700. Only SOL 101, 400 and 700 can support all contact types: touching
contact, glued, step glue and permanent glue (see Chapter 7: Contact Types of Nastran SOL 400 Getting Started
Guide). Note that SOL 700 calls it “tie” contact to glue (also step glue or permanent glue). SOL 103~112 and
standard 200 (without calling SOL 400) can only support permanent glue. When SOL 200 calls SOL 400
(or say SOL 400 optimization), it can support all contact types. This contact table is activated in the
BCONTACT Case Control command.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCTABL1 BCID ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7
ID8 ID9 -etc.-
Examples:
BCTABL1 2 198 62 75 8 159 31 82
17
BCTABL1 0 23 56
BCTABL1 5 31 35 THRU 40 163 THRU 169

1077 1088
Describer Meaning
BCID Unique identification number referenced by a BCONTACT Case Control command.
See Remark 3. (Integer ≥ 0; default=0)

IDi Identification number of BCONECT entry (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; ID1 is required).
See Remark 4. and 5.
Remarks:
1. BCTABL1 defines surface contact. If BCTABL1 does not exist, the Case Control command
BCONTACT=BCID may refer to the BCONECT Bulk Data entry directly.
2. If neither BCTABL1 nor BCONECT is given, the default for contact analysis is assumed, every body
detects the possibility of contact relative to all other bodies and itself if it is a deformable body. If
BCTABL1 or BCONECT is given, the default for every body is overwritten. The touching body does
not contact itself unless requested. When the touched body is deformable, double-sided contact is
applied by default. BCTABL1 or BCONECT is useful for deactivating or activating bodies to reduce
computational effort and to change contact conditions between subcases.
Main Index
1338 BCTABL1
Defines a Contact Table
3. For SOLs 101 and 400, the BCTABL1 or BCONECT with ID=0 will be used in loadcase 0
automatically that does not need a corresponding Case Control command BCONTACT=0. The
loadcase 0 is purely elastic and it can also be used to (1) move rigid contact bodies so that they just
touch flexible contact bodies, and/or (2) remove any prestressed condition by adjusting the
coordinates of the active nodes, which are the Grid Points on the surface of all deformable
BCBODY1’s. To place an entry in any physical loadcase (SUBCASE or STEP), the BCID must be
selected by the Case Control command BCONTACT=BCID or BCONECT=BCID. When
BCONTACT=ALLBODY, there is no BCID of BCTABL1 or BCONECT specified; therefore, the
default values of all entries of BCONPRG and BCONPRP are assumed. Case Control command
BCONTACT=ALLBODY cannot be used for permanently glued contact.
4. When the “THRU” option is used, all BCONECT entries associated with intermediate BCONECT
IDs must exist. The word “THRU” may not appear in field 3 or 9 (2 or 9 for continuations).
Main Index
BCTRIM 1339
Defines the Geometry of a Trimming Curve
BCTRIM Defines the Geometry of a Trimming Curve
Defines the geometry of a trimming curve used to specify a NURBS for a rigid contact body.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BCTRIM IDtrim NPTUtrim NORUtrim NSUBtrim
“COORD” Xisoparam1 Yisoparam1 Xisoparam2 Yisoparam2 -etc.-
“HOMO” Homot1 Homot2 Homot3 -etc.-
“KNOT” Knott1 Knott2 Knott3 -etc.-
Examples:
BCTRIM 202 2 2 50
COORD 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0
HOMO 1. 1.
KNOT 0.0 0.0 1. 1.
Describer Meaning
IDtrim Unique trimming vector identification number referenced by a BCNURBS entry.
(Integer > 0)
NPTUtrim Number of control points for this trimming vector. (Integer > 0)
“COORD” Indicate the start of the list of isoparametric coordinates of points.
Xisoparam1, First and second coordinates of point in isoparametric space. There must be
Yisoparam1, NPTUtrim set of (Xisoparam, Yisoparam) entries. (Real)
Xisoparam2,
Yisoparam2, etc.
“HOMO” Indicate the start of the list of homogeneous coordinates of this trimming vector.
Homot1, Homot2, Homogeneous coordinatesof this trimming vector. There must be NPTUtrim
Homot3, etc. entrie. (Real; 0.0 to 1.0)
“KNOT” Indicate the start of the list of knot vectors of this trimming vector.
Knot1, Knot2, Knot vectors of this trimming vector. There must be (NPTUtrim+NORUtrim)
Knot3, etc. entries. (Real; 0.0 to 1.0)
Remarks:
1. BCTRIM is referenced by a BCNURBS entry to define the trimming curve of a NURBS for a rigid
contact body.
Main Index
1340 BDYLIST
Fluid Boundary List
BDYLIST Fluid Boundary List
Defines the boundary between a fluid and a structure.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BDYLIST RHO IDF1 lDF2 IDF3 IDF4 IDF5 IDF6 IDF7
IDF8 -etc.-
Example:
BDYLIST .037 AXIS 432 325 416 203 256 175
Describer Meaning
RHO Fluid mass density at boundary. (Real > 0.0 or blank; Default is DRHO on the AXIF
entry)
IDF1 Identification number of a RINGFL entry. (Integer > 0 or Character = “AXIS” or
“LAXIS”) See Remark 7.
IDF2-IDFi Identification number of additional RINGFL entries. (Unique Integers > 0)
Remarks:
1. This entry is allowed only if an AXIF entry is also present.
2. Each entry defines a boundary if RHO ≠ 0.0. The order of the points must be sequential with the
fluid on the right with respect to the direction of travel.
3. The word “AXIS” defines an intersection with the polar axis of the fluid coordinate system.
4. There is no limit to the number of BDYLIST entries specified. If the fluid density varies along the
boundary, there must be one BDYLIST entry for each interval between fluid points.
5. The BDYLIST entry is not required and should not be used to specify a rigid boundary where
structural points are not defined. Such a boundary is automatically implied by the omission of a
BDYLIST.
6. If RHO=0.0, no boundary matrix terms will be generated to connect the GRIDB points to the fluid.
See Additional Topics (p. 511) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual. This option is a convenience for
structural plotting purposes. GRIDB points may be located on a fluid ring (RINGFL entry) only if
the rings are included in a BDYLIST.
7. If the polar axis of the fluid coordinate system is to occur at the first point use AXIS. If the polar axis
of the fluid coordinate system is to occur at the last point use LAXIS. See Remark 2.
Main Index
BDYOR 1341
CHBDYi Entry Default Values
BDYOR CHBDYi Entry Default Values
Defines default values for the CHBDYP, CHBDYG, and CHBDYE entries.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BDYOR TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB PID GO
CE E1 E2 E3
Example:
BDYOR AREA4 2 2 3 3 10
Describer Meaning
TYPE Default surface type. See Remark 2. (Character)
IVIEWF Default identification number of front VIEW entry. (Integer > 0 or blank)
IVIEWB Default identification number of back VIEW entry. (Integer > 0 or blank)
RADMIDF Default identification number of a RADM entry for front face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
RADMIDB Default identification number of a RADM entry for back face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
PID Default PHBDY property entry identification number. (Integer > 0 or blank)
GO Default orientation grid point. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
CE Default coordinate system for defining the orientation vector. (Integer > 0 or blank)
E1, E2, E3 Default components of the orientation vector in coordinate system CE. The origin of
this vector is grid point G1 on a CHBDYP entry. (Real or blank)
Remarks:
1. Only one BDYOR entry may be specified in the Bulk Data Section.
2. TYPE specifies the type of CHBDYi element surface; allowable values are: POINT, LINE, REV,
AREA3, AREA4, ELCYL, FTUBE, AREA6, AREA8, and TUBE.
3. IVIEWF and IVIEWB are specified for view factor calculations only (see VIEW entry).
4. GO is only used from BDYOR if neither GO nor the orientation vector is defined on the CHBDYP
entry and GO is > 0.
5. E1, E2, E3 is not used if GO is defined on either the BDYOR entry or the CHBDYP entry.
Main Index
1342 BEADVAR
Topography Design Variable
BEADVAR Topography Design Variable
Defines design region for topography (bead or stamp) optimization.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BEADVAR ID PTYPE PID MW MH ANG BF SKIP
“DESVAR” NORM/XD YD ZD CID XLB XUB DELXV
“GRID” NGSET DGSET
Example using NORM:

BEADVAR 10 PSHELL 101 10.0 20.0 70
Example using “DESVAR” and “GRID”:

BEADVAR 10 PSHELL 101 10.0 20.0 70.0 NONE
DESVAR 2.0 3.0 4.0 -1.0 1.0
GRID 100
Describer Meaning
ID Unique topography design region identification number. (Integer > 0)
PTYPE Property entry type. Used with PID to identify the element nodes to be
designed. (Character: “PSHELL”, “PSHEAR”, “PCOMP”, or “PCOMPG”.)
PID Property entry identifier. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0)
MW Minimum bead width. This parameter controls the width of the beads. The
recommended value is between 1.5 and 2.5 times the average element width.
See Remark 2. (Real > 0.0)
MH Maximum bead height (Real > 0.0). This parameter sets the maximum height
of the beads when XUB=1.0 (as Default). See Remark 2.
ANG Draw angle in degrees (0.0 < Real < 90.0). This parameter controls the angle
of the sides of the beads. The recommended value is between 60 and 75
degrees.
BF Buffer zone ('yes' or 'no'; Default='yes'). This parameter creates a buffer zone
between elements in the topography design region and elements outside the
design region when BF='yes'. See Remark 3.
Main Index
BEADVAR 1343
Describer Meaning
SKIP Boundary skip (“bc”, “load”, “both”, or “none”; Default = “both”). This
parameter indicates which element nodes are excluded from the design region.
“bc” indicates all nodes referenced by “SPC” and “SPC1” are omitted from the
design region. “load” indicates all nodes referenced by “FORCE”, “FORCE1”,
“FORCE2”, “MOMENT”, “MOMENT1”, “MOMENT2”, and “SPCD”
are omitted from the design region. “both” indicates nodes with either “bc” or
“load” are omitted from the design region. “none” indicates all nodes
associated with elements referencing PID specified in field 4 are in the design
region.
“DESVAR” Indicates that this line defines bead design variables that are automatically
generated.
NORM/XD, YD, ZD Bead vector (draw direction). Norm indicates the shape variables are created in
the normal directions to the elements. If XD, YD, and ZD are provided, the
shape variables are created in the direction specified by the xyz vector defied by
XD/YD/ZD that is given in the basic coordinate system or CID. See Remark
4. (Character or Real; Default = blank = norm).
CID Coordinate system ID used for specifying draw direction (Blank or Integer >
0; Default = blank = basic coordinate system)
XLB Lower bound. (Real < XUB or blank; Default = blank=0.0). This ensures the
lower bound on grid movement equal to XLB*MH. See Remark 5.
XUB Upper bound. (Real > XLB or blank; Default = 1.0). This sets the upper bound
of the beads equal to XUB*MH. See Remark 5.
DELXV Fractional change allowed for the design variable during approximate
optimization. See Remark 3. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.2)
“GRID” Indicates this line defines what element nodes can be added and/or removed
from topography design regions.
NGSET All grids listed on a Bulk Data entry SET1 = NGSET are removed from
topography design regions.
DGSET All grids listed on a Bulk Data entry SET1 = DGSET are added to topography
design regions.
Remarks:
1. Multiple BEADVAR’s are allowed in a single file. Combined topometry, topology, topography,
sizing, and shape optimization is supported in a single file.
Main Index
1344 BEADVAR
2. The user can provide allowable bead dimensions.
MW
MH
ANG
Bead Dimensions
3. It is recommended to set buffer zone = yes to maintain a good quality of mesh during topography
optimization.
Design elements
Buffer zone No buffer zone
Nondesign elements Nondesign elements
4. The grids moves in the normal direction. All element grids referenced by one BEADVAR entry must
follow the right hand rule.
Element normal vectors
Baseline surface
Optimized
surface
Element Normal
Main Index
BEADVAR 1345
User defined draw vector
Baseline surface
Optimized
surface
User’s Provided Draw Direction

5. To force the grids to move only in the positive bead vector direction (one side of the surface), use XLB
= 0.0. To force the grids to move only in the negative bead vector direction (another side of the
surface), use XUB = 0.0. To allow grids to move in both positive and negative bead vector directions,
use XLB < 0.0 and XUB > 0.0. For example,
Bead Vector
Bead Vector
Base Surface
Optimized Surface Optimized Surface
(a) XLB = 0.0 and XUB = 1.0 (b) XLB = -1.0 and XUB = 0.0 (c) XLB = -1.0 and XUB = 1.0
6. The jobname.op2 (with setting PARAM, POST, -1) has topography results (shape change) that can
be viewed by Patran. The text file jobname.pch also has updated grid coordinates that can be copied
to the original file, replace the original grids, and imported to Patran and other post-processors to view
topography optimization results.
7. The BEADVAR entry cannot be used with thermal loads.
Main Index
1346 BEAMOR
CBEAM Entry Default Values
BEAMOR CBEAM Entry Default Values
Defines default values for field 3 and fields 6 through 8 of the CBEAM entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BEAMOR PID X1 X2 X3 OFFT
Example:
BEAMOR 39 0.6 2.9 -5.87 GOG

BEAMOR PID G0 OFFT
BEAMOR 39 86 GOG
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of the PBEAM or PBCOMP entry. (Integer > 0 or
blank)
at GA (default), or in the basic coordinate system. See Remark 5. (Real)
G0 Alternate method to supply the orientation vector v , using grid point G0. Direction
of v is from GA to G0. v is then translated to End A. (Integer > 0; G0 ≠ GA or GB
on CBEAM entry)
Remarks:
1. The contents of fields on this entry will be assumed for any CBEAM entry with corresponding fields
that are blank.
2. Only one BEAMOR entry is allowed.
3. For an explanation of beam element geometry, see the CBEAM entry description.
4. If X1 or G0 is integer, G0 is used. If X1 or G0 is blank or real, then X1, X2, X3 is used.
5. For p-version CBEAM elements, field 9 contains the value of the built-in twist measured in radians.
The OFFT option cannot be used for p-elements. Otherwise, OFFT in field 9 is a character string
code that describes how the offset and orientation vector components are to be interpreted. By default
(string input is GGG or blank), the offset vectors are measured in the displacement coordinate
Main Index
BEAMOR 1347
CBEAM Entry Default Values
systems at grid points A and B and the orientation vector is measured in the displacement coordinate
system of grid point A. At user option, the offset vectors can be measured in an offset system relative
to grid points A and B, and the orientation vector can be measured in the basic system as indicated
in the following table:

are then used to define the z and y axes of the offset system. (Note: The character “O” in the table
replaces the obsolete character “E”.)
Main Index
1348 BFRlC
Contact Friction
BFRlC Contact Friction
Defines frictional properties between two bodies in contact using the slideline contact in SOL 106 and SOL
129. SOL 400 is the recommended approach for contact analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BFRIC FID FSTIF MU1
Example:
BFRIC 33 0.3
Describer Meaning
FID Friction identification number. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0)
FSTlF Frictional stiffness in stick. See Remarks 2. and 3. (Real > 0.0; Default = automatically
selected by the program)
MU1 Coefficient of static friction. (Real > 0.0)
Remarks:
1. This identification number must be unique with respect to all other friction identification numbers.
This is used in the FRICID field of BCONP Bulk Data entry.
2. The value of frictional stiffness requires care. A method of choosing its value is to divide the expected
frictional strength (MU1*expected normal force) by a reasonable value of the relative displacement
that may be allowed before slip occurs. The relative value of displacement before slip occurs must be
small compared to expected relative displacements during slip. A large stiffness value may cause poor
convergence, while too small a value may cause poor accuracy.
Frictional stiffness specified by the user is selected as the initial value. If convergence difficulties are
encountered during the analysis, the frictional stiffness may be reduced automatically to improve
convergence.
3. The stiffness matrix for frictional slip is unsymmetric. However, the program does not use the true
unsymmetric matrix. Instead the program uses only the symmetric terms. This is to avoid using the
unsymmetric solver to reduce CPU time.
Main Index
BIAS 1349
MESH Bias Definition
BIAS MESH Bias Definition
Specifies a variation of the mesh-size in one direction for use in the MESH entry in SOL 700. The MESH
entry can create a biased or non-uniform mesh. A uniform mesh consists of a number of planes separated by
a fixed distance, but for a biased mesh the distance between subsequent planes can differ. The BIAS definition
allows specifying the locations of planes in one direction. For a number of intervals the density of planes can
be specified.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BIAS BID
X0 GROWTH0 N0 DXS0 DXE0
X1 GROWTH1 N1 DXS1 DXE1
Xi GROWTHi Ni DXSi DXEi
Example:
BIAS 100
-4.5 0.2 15
-1 1 20
1 0.1 0.46
Describer Meaning
BID Unique bias number. Must be referenced from MESH entry. (Integer; Required)
Xi Begin coordinate of an interval. The interval ends at the X i + 1 entry. (Real;
Default = 0.0)
GROWTHi GROWTHi is the ratio between the step size at the beginning of the interval and at the
end of the interval. If it is smaller than 1.0 then the mesh refines when going from the
beginning of the interval to the end of the interval. (Real>0)
See Remarks 1.- 3.
Ni Ni is the number of elements inside the interval. (Integer>0) See Remarks 1.- 3.
DXSi DXSi is the start element size of the interval. (Real>0) See Remarks 1.- 3.
DXEi DXEi is the end element size of the interval. (Real>0) See Remarks 1.- 3.
Remarks:
1. The begin point of the first interval has to be equal to the X0 field of the MESH entry and may be
left unspecified. The end point of the last interval is given by X0 + DX as specified by the MESH
entry. In the example above, the first interval is given by [-4.5,-1], the second one by [-1,1] and the
last one by [1,4.5], assuming that X0 + DX = 4.5 on the MESH entry that references the bias
definition from IBIDX.
Main Index
1350 BIAS
2. To define the bias in an interval four fields are available. These are GROWTHi, Ni, DXSi and DXEi.
To specify the bias inside an interval two of these four variables have to specified. The other two
variables have to left blank. In addition the mesh size can be chosen constant by defining Ni and
leaving GROWTHi, DXSi an DXEi blank.
This gives seven methods of specifying a bias;
1. Define GROWTHi and Ni. DXSi and DXEi have to be left blank.
2. Define DXSi and DXEi. GROWTHi and Ni have to be left blank.
3. Define DXSi and Ni. GROWTHi and DXEi have to be left blank.
4. Define DXEi and Ni. GROWTHi and DXSi have to be left blank.
5. Define GROWTHi and DXSi. Ni and DXEi have to be left blank.
6. Define GROWTHi and DXEi. Ni and DXSi have to be left blank.
7. Only define Ni and leave GROWTHi, DXSi an DXEi blank.
For method 2 it can happen that the biased elements do not exactly fit into the interval.
To get a good fit a small change to defined start and end step sizes is made. These changes in general
amount to a few percents.
For method 5 and 6 a small change to the specified growth factor can be made so that the biased
elements fit into the interval.
3. The algorithm for each method first determines an appropriate growth factor so that the biased
elements fit into the interval. In addition the number of planes is determined. For method 2, 3 and
4 this is done by using bisection. The location of the planes is given by:
X ( i ) = X ( i – 1 ) + ΔX ( i – 1 )
ΔX ( i ) = GROWFAC × Δ X ( i – 1 )
N–1
GROWTHi = GROWFAC
Here X(i) denotes the location of the Euler plane, ΔXi denotes the step size of the interval and N
denotes the number of Euler planes. The index i runs across the Euler planes. The variable
GROWFAC denotes the grow factor between planes within the interval. The locations of the planes
X(i) are written to the OUT file as part of MESH output. In addition, the growth of the element sizes
is written out in the next column. This is given as the ratio in element size between the layer of
elements to the right of the plane and to the left of the plane. Let x0, x1 and x2 denote three
subsequent planes, then the element size to the left of the x1-plane is given x1-x0 and to the right it
is given by x2-x1. The ratio by which the element size grows if one goes across the x1-plane is:
X2 – X1
---------------------
X1 – X0
To get physically meaningful results, this value should not exceed 1.3 or be smaller than 0.7 .
Within each interval the ratio in element size equals GROWFAC. But the element size between two
adjacent elements that are in two different intervals can differ from GROWFAC. Here each interval
has a distinct GROWFAC variable.
Main Index
BIAS 1351
For both method 2, 5 and 6 The growth factor GROWFAC and start and end step sizes that are
actually used can be obtained from this plane summary in the OUT file. In this summary for each
plane a growth factor and step size is specified.
Also the total number of elements is written out.
Main Index
1352 BJOIN
BJOIN
Defines (multiple) pairs of grid points of one-dimensional and/or shell elements to be joined during the
analysis in SOL 700. When the failure criterion for a grid-point pair is satisfied, the grid-point pair is removed
from the join and the grid-point motion is computed for the separate grid points. The join ceases to exist
when all pairs of the join have failed, after which all of the grid points of the join are treated as separate grid
points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BJOIN BID SID TOL TYPE SN SS
MULTI
TF
Example:
BJOIN 1 2 SPOTWELD 1.E3 1.E3

BID BJOIN number. Integer > 0 Required
SID BCGRID ID of set of grid points. Integer > 0 Required
TOL Tolerance used in matching grid point pairs. Real > 0.0 1.E-4
TYPE Type of failure criterion. C SPOTWELD
SPOTWELD Spotweld-type failure.
SN Failure force in tension. Real > 0.0 No failure
SS Failure force in shear. Real > 0.0 No failure
MULTI Multiple breakable joins, where the grid points must be C YES
entered as a sequence of BJOIN pairs.
YES The grid points are entered on the BCGRID entry
as a sequence of BJOIN pairs.
NO The code creates BJOIN pairs for every two grid
points entered on the BCGRID entry when the grid
point positions fall within the tolerance (TOL).
TF Failure time for nodal constraint set. Real 1.0E20
Main Index
BJOIN 1353
Remarks:
1. Nodes connected by a spot weld cannot be members of another constraint set that constrain the same
degrees-of-freedom, a tied interface, or a rigid body, i.e., nodes cannot be subjected to multiple,
independent, and possibly conflicting constraints. Also, care must be taken to ensure that single point
constraints applied to nodes in a constraint set do not conflict with the constraint sets constrained
degrees-of-freedom.
2. When the failure time, TF, is reached the spot weld becomes inactive and the constrained nodes may
move freely.
3. Note that the shell elements do not have rotary stiffness in the normal direction and, therefore, this
component cannot be transmitted.
4. For MULTI=YES, a spotweld or rivet will always be created, regardless if their distance is larger than
the value of TOL. TOL will only be used for MULTI=NO.
Main Index
1354 BLSEG
Boundary Line Segments
BLSEG Boundary Line Segments
Defines a curve that consists of a number of line segments via grid numbers that may come in contact with
another body.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BLSEG ID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7
Alternate Format:
BLSEG ID G1 “THRU” G2 “BY” INC
The Continuation Entry formats may be used more than once and in any order. They may also be used with
either format above.
Continuation Entry Format 1:

G8 G9 G10 G11 -etc.-

G8 “THRU” G9 “BY” INC
Example:
BLSEG 15 5 THRU 21 BY 4
27 30 32 33
35 THRU 44
67 68 72 75 84 93
Describer Meaning
ID Line segments identification number. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid point identification numbers on a curve in a continuous topological order so that
the normal to the segment points toward the other curve. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0)
INC Grid point identification number increment. See Remark 3. (Integer or blank)
Remarks:
1. A line segment is defined between every two consecutive grid points. Thus, the number of line
segments defined is equal to the number of grid points specified minus 1. A corresponding BWlDTH
Bulk Data entry may be required to define the width/thickness of each line segment. If the
corresponding BWlDTH is not present, the width/thickness for each line segment is assumed to be
unity.
Main Index
BLSEG 1355
Boundary Line Segments
2. ID must be unique with respect to all other BLSEG entries. Each line segment has a width in 3-D
sideline and a thickness in a 2-D slideline contact to calculate contact stresses. The width/thickness
of each line segment is defined via BWIDTH Bulk Data entry. The ID in BLSEG must be same as
the ID specified in the BWlDTH. That is, there must be a one to one correspondence between
BLSEG and BWlDTH. BWlDTH Bulk Data entry may be omitted only if the width/thickness of
each segment is unity.
3. For automatic generation of grid numbers, the default increment value is 1 if grid numbers are
increasing or -1 if grid numbers are decreasing (i.e., the user need not specify BY and the increment
value).
4. The normal to the segment is determined by the cross product of the slideline plane vector (i.e., the
Z direction of the coordinate system defined in the ‘ClD’ field of BCONP Bulk Data entry) and the
tangential direction of the segment. The tangential direction is the direction from node 1 to node 2
of the line segment.
5. A curve may be closed or open. A closed curve is specified by having the last grid point identification
number the same as the first grid number.
6. See BCBODY for use of BLSEG in 3D contact.
Main Index
1356 BNDFIX
Fixed Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom
BNDFIX Fixed Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom
Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be fixed (b-set) during generalized dynamic reduction or
component mode synthesis calculations.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BNDFIX ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3 ID4 C4
Example:
BNDFIX 2 135 14 6
Describer Meaning
Ci Component number. (Integer zero or blank for scalar points, or any unique
combinations of the Integers 1 through 6 for grid points. No embedded blanks.)
Remarks:
1. BNDFIX and BSET entries are equivalent to each other. Either one of them or any combination of
them may be employed.
2. If there are no BSETi/BNDFIXi or CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries present, all a-set points
are considered fixed during component mode analysis. If there are only BSETi/BNDFIXi entries
present, any a-set degrees-of-freedom not listed are placed in the free boundary set (c-set). If there are
only CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries present or both BSETi/BNDFIXi and
CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries present, the c-set degrees-of-freedom are defined by the
CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries, and any remaining a-set points are placed in the b-set.
3. Degrees-of-freedom specified on BSETi/BNDFIXi entries form members of the mutually exclusive
b-set. They may not be specified on other entries that define mutually exclusive sets. See the Degree-
of-Freedom Sets, 1065 for a list of these entries.
4. If PARAM,AUTOSPC is YES, then singular b-set and c-set degrees-of-freedom will be reassigned as
follows:
• If there are no o-set (omitted) degrees-of-freedom, then singular b-set and c-set degrees-of-
freedom are reassigned to the s-set.
• If there are o-set (omitted) degrees-of-freedom, then singular c-set degrees-of-freedom are
reassigned to the b-set. Singular b-set degrees-of-freedom are not reassigned.
Main Index
BNDFIX1 1357
Fixed Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of BNDFIX Entry
BNDFIX1 Fixed Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of BNDFIX Entry
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BNDFIX1 C ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7
ID8 ID9 ID10 -etc.-
Example:
BNDFIX1 2 135 14 6 23 24 25 26
122 127

BNDFIX1 C ID1 “THRU” ID2
BNDFIX1 3 6 THRU 32
Describer Meaning
C Component numbers. (Integer zero or blank for scalar points, or any unique
IDi Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; For “THRU” option,
ID1< ID2)
Remarks:
1. BNDFIX1 and BSET1 entries are equivalent to each other. Either one of them or any combination
of them may be employed.
Main Index
1358 BNDFIX1
Fixed Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of BNDFIX Entry
follows:
Main Index
BNDFREE 1359
Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom
BNDFREE Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom
Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during generalized dynamic reduction or
component modes calculations.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BNDFREE ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3 ID4 C4
Example:
BNDFREE 124 1 5 23 6 16
Describer Meaning
Ci Component numbers. (Integer zero or blank for scalar points, or any unique
combination of the Integers 1 through 6 for grid points with no embedded blanks.)
Remarks:
1. BNDFREE and CSET entries are equivalent to each other. Either one of them or any combination
3. Degrees-of-freedom specified on CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries form members of the
mutually exclusive c-set. They may not be specified on other entries that define mutually exclusive
sets. See Degree-of-Freedom Sets, 1065 for a list of these entries.
follows:
Main Index
1360 BNDFRE1
Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of BNDFREE Entry
BNDFRE1 Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of BNDFREE Entry
component modes calculations.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BNDFRE1 C ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7
ID8 ID9 -etc.-
Example:
BNDFRE1 124 1 5 7 6 9 12 122
127
Alternate Formats and Examples:

BNDFRE1 C ID1 “THRU” ID2
BNDFRE1 3 6 THRU 32
BNDFRE1 “ALL”
BNDFRE1 ALL
Describer Meaning
C Component number. (Integer zero or blank for scalar points, or any unique
combination of the Integers 1 through 6 for grid points with no embedded blanks)
IDi Grid or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0; For THRU option,
ID1 < ID2)
Remarks:
1. BNDFRE1 and CSET1 entries are equivalent to each other. Either one of them or any combination
sets. See Degree-of-Freedom Sets, 1065 for a list of these entries.
Main Index
BNDFRE1 1361
Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of BNDFREE Entry
follows:
Main Index
1362 BNDGRID
Boundary Grid Points
BNDGRID Boundary Grid Points
Specifies a list of grid point identification numbers on design boundaries or surfaces for shape optimization
(SOL 200).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BNDGRID C GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 GP6 GP7
GP8 -etc.-
Example:
BNDGRID 123 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
49

BNDGRID C GP1 “THRU” GP2
BNDGRID 123 41 THRU 49
Describer Meaning
C Component number (any unique combination of integers 1 through 6 with no
embedded blanks). See Remark 1.
GPi Shape boundary grid point identification number. (0 < Integer < 1000000; For
THRU option, GP1 < GP2)
Remarks:
1. C specifies the components for the listed grid points for which boundary motion is prescribed.
2. Multiple BNDGRID entries may be used to specify the shape boundary grid point identification
numbers.
3. Both fixed and free shape boundary grid point identification numbers are listed on this entry.
4. The degrees-of-freedom specified on BNDGRID entries must be sufficient to statically constrain the
model.
5. Degrees-of-freedom specified on this entry form members of the mutually exclusive s-set. They may
not be specified on other entries that define mutually exclusive sets. See Degree-of-Freedom Sets, 1065
for a list of these entries.
Main Index
BOLT 1363
Defines the Multi-Point Constraints for a Bolt
BOLT Defines the Multi-Point Constraints for a Bolt
Defines a rigid bolt by a set of MPC constraints.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BOLT ID GRIDC
TOP GT1 GT2 GT3 GT4 GT5 GT6 GT7
GT8 GT9 etc.
BOTTOM GB1 GB2 GB3 GB4 GB5 GB6 GB7
GB8 GB9 etc.
Example:
BOLT 100 1025
TOP 101 102 103 104 105
BOTTOM 1 2 3 4 5
Describer Meaning
ID Element ID of the bolt. (Integer; Required; no Default)
GRIDC Control GRID ID where forces or displacements are applied. (Integer; no Default;
Required)
TOP Enter the character string TOP to define the start of the entry that defines all of the
grids at the “top” of the bolt intersection with the structure. (Integer; no Default)
GT1, GT2, etc. Grid IDs of the grid points at the top of the bolt intersection. (Integer; no Default)
BOTTOM Enter the character string BOTTOM to define the start of the entry that defines all of
the grids at the “bottom” of the bolt intersection with the structure (do not enter the
ID for GRIDC). (Integer; no Default)
GB1, GB2, etc. Grid IDs of the grid points at the bottom of the bolt intersection. (Integer; no Default)
Remarks:
1. The GRIDS entries of the TOP and BOTTOM keywords are open-ended.
2. GRIDC is the control grid point and usually not connected to any element.
3. (GTi, GBi) are pairs of grid on top and bottom.
4. To each pair of (GTi, GBi) and GRIDC, MPCs are created internally to all 6 DOFs. Since the GBs
always belong to dependent-DOFs, they cannot be applied to any SPC, SPC1, SPCD and SPCR.
5. Same number of grid points in TOP and BOTTOM. They should be coincident but it is not
required. Users who do otherwise do so at their own risk since the current design does not consider
the initial offset between them.
Main Index
1364 BOLT
Defines the Multi-Point Constraints for a Bolt
6. Bolt loads, including enforced motion, are usually prescribed on GRIDC to represent the pre-tension,
overlap or loading of the bolt. BOLT relative displacements are given in the global coordinate system
of the control node.
7. Global Coordinate System may have to be defined at the Control Node if the bolt direction is not a
Basic Coordinate direction and the user wants to apply the loads along the shaft of the bolt.
8. Loads in directions other than the shaft of the bolt direction are possible.
9. The internally written MPC relationship is of the form:
u GB = u GT + u GC
10. In 3D Contact analysis, it replaces GBi (Bottom bolt segment) by GTi (Top bolt segment) on the
internally generated contact surface, which makes contact surface continuous across the mesh split
between them.
11. Force output is obtained through Case Control MPCFORCE.
12. The internal MPCs generated by the BOLT entry are valid for small rotations only.
13. The BOLT entry must be defined in the residual structure only.
14. Sufficient boundary conditions must be placed on the BOLT to prevent mechanisms.
15. In contact analysis, care should be taken that the preload displacement does not exceed the local
element width.
16. Pretension of a BOLT is a three step process in SOL 400:
SUBCASE 1
STEP 1
LOAD=n Applies a pretension load to the bolt on the control grid.
SPC=m If any required to prevent motion of structure do not include the
control grid.
STEP 2
LOAD=p1 Load entry pointing to a SPCR (relative value of 0.0) and any other
desired type of loading.
SPC=q1 SPC or SPC1 includes control grid and any other desired SPC
requirements.
STEP 3
LOAD=p2 Load entry pointing to a SPCR and any other additional desired type of
loading.
SPC=q2 SPC or SPC1 includes control grid and any other additional desired
SPC requirements.
17. The BOLT may also be used in SOL101 and SOL103. In this case PARAM, AUTOMSET, YES is
recommended.
Main Index
BOUTPUT 1365
Output for Slideline Contact
BOUTPUT Output for Slideline Contact
Defines slave nodes at which output is requested.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BOUTPUT ID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7
Alternate Format:
BOUTPUT ID G1 “THRU” G2 “BY” INC

G8 G9 G10 G11 -etc.-

G8 “THRU” G9 “BY” INC
Example:
BOUTPUT 15 5 THRU 21 BY 4
27 30 32 33
35 THRU 44
67 68 72 75 84 93
Format and Example Using “ALL” (No continuation entry is allowed):

BOUTPUT ID ALL
BOUTPUT 15 ALL
Describer Meaning
ID Contact region identification number of a BCONP entry for which output is desired,
or the contact Grid ID, in 3D contact. (Integer > 0)
Gi Slave node numbers for which output is desired. (Integer > 0)
INC Grid point identification number increment. See Remark 1. (Integer or blank)
Main Index
1366 BOUTPUT
Output for Slideline Contact
Remark:
1. For automatic generation of grid numbers, the default increment value is 1 if grid numbers are
increasing or -1 if grid numbers are decreasing (i.e., the user need not specify BY and the increment
value).
Main Index
BRKSQL 1367
Specifies Data for Brake Squeal Calculations In SOL 600
BRKSQL Specifies Data for Brake Squeal Calculations In SOL 600
Specifies data for brake squeal calculations in SOL 600 only. Obsolete, please see BSQUEAL, 1373 for an
enhanced version.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BRKSQL METH AVSTIF GLUE ICORD
R1 R2 R3 X Y Z
NASCMD
RCFILE
Example:
BRKSQL 1 5.34E6
0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
tran
nastb
Describer Meaning
METH Method flag corresponding to the type of brake squeal calculations to be performed.
0 = Performs brake squeal calculations before any nonlinear analysis has taken place
(corresponds to Marc feature, 4302).
1 = Performs brake squeal calculations after all nonlinear load cases (corresponds to
Marc feature, 4304).
-1 = Same as ID=0 except it corresponds to Marc feature, 4301 (not recommended).

AVSTIF Approximate average stiffness per unit area between the pads and disk. Corresponds to
Marc’s PARAMETERS fifth datablock, field 1. This value is also known as the initial
friction stiffness in Marc Volume C documentation. AVSTIF is used as a penalty
contact stiffness for brake squeal, it needs to be a large value but not so large that
numerical instabilities result. If AVSTIF is large enough, increasing it by a few orders
of magnitude will not appreciably affect the squeal modes. (Real; no Default. Required
field)
GLUE Flag specifying whether MPC for non-pad/disk surfaces with glued contact are used or
ignored. A value of 0 means ignore the MPC; a value of 1 means include the MPCs.
See Remark 6. (Integer; Default = 1)
Main Index
1368 BRKSQL
Describer Meaning
ICORD Flag indicating whether coordinates are updated or not. A value of 0 means coordinates
are not updated. A value of 1 means coordinates are updated using the formula
Cnew=Corig+Defl where Cnew are updated coordinates, Corig are original
coordinates, and Defl are the final displacements from last Marc increment. (Integer;
Default = 0)
R1 X direction cosine (basic coord system) of axis of rotation; corresponds to Marc
ROTATION A second datablock. (Real; no Default. Required field)
R2 Y direction cosine (basic coord system) of axis of rotation; corresponds to Marc
ROTATION A second datablock
R3 Z direction cosine (basic coord system); corresponds to Marc ROTATION A second
datablock. (Real; no Default. Required field)
X X coordinate in basic coord system of a point on the axis of rotation; corresponds to
Marc ROTATION A third datablock. (Real; no Default. Required field)
Y Y coordinate in basic coord system of a point on the axis of rotation; corresponds to
Z Z coordinate in basic coord system of a point on the axis of rotation; corresponds to
NASCMD Name of a command to run Nastran (limited to 64 characters) -- used in conjunction
with the CONTINUE options on the SOL 600 entry. The full path of the command
to execute Nastran should be entered. Enter the string entirely in lower case. The string
will be converted to lower case. See Remark 2. (Character; Default=nastran)
RCFILE Name of an RC file to be used with a secondary Nastran job (limited to 8 characters)
-- used in conjunction with the CONTINUE options on the SOL 600 entry. An
extension of “.rc” will automatically be added. Enter the string entirely in lower case.
See Remark 2. (Character; Default=nastb.rc)
Remarks:
1. This entry is used to calculate complex eigenvalues for brake squeal using unsymmetric stiffness
friction matrices calculated by Marc. Options exist to obtain the unsymmetric stiffness matrices using
the undeformed geometry (initial contact) or after all specified nonlinear subcases.
2. SOL 600 performs brake squeal calculations, using the following approach. The main (original)
Nastran job with input file jid.dat or jid.bdf spawns Marc just as it does for any other SOL 600 job.
Marc calculates unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices that are saved on a file (jid.marc.bde with
associated file jid.marc.ccc). The primary Nastran job then creates input data for a second Nastran
job (jid.nast.dat) to use the unsymmetric stiffness matrices in an complex eigenvalue extraction. The
primary Nastran job spawns a second Nastran job to calculate the complex eigenvalues. The complex
eigenvalues and eigenvectors are found in jid.nast.f06, jid.nast.op2, etc.
NASCMD is the name of the command to execute the secondary Nastran job. NASCMD can be up
to 64 characters long and must be left justified in field 2. The sting as entered will be used as is -
except that it will be converted to lower case regardless of whether it is entered in upper or lower case.
Main Index
BRKSQL 1369
RCFILE is the name of an RC file to be used for the secondary Nastran job. Normally it should be
similar to the RC file used for the primary run except that additional memory will normally be
necessary to calculate the complex eigenvalues and batch=no should also be specified for Linux
systems. RCFILE is limited to 8 characters and an extension of “.rc” will be added automatically.
This entry will be converted to upper case in Nastran but will be converted to lower case before
spawning the complex eigenvalue run. This RC file must be located in the same directory as the
Nastran input file. This entry is the same as specifying PARAM,MRRCFILE. Only one or the other
should be used.
3. MPCs are produced for contact surfaces with glued contact. DMIGs are produced for contact
surfaces without glued contact. The brakes and drums should not use glued contact; other regions of
the structure can used glued contact.
4. The continuation lines may be omitted if defaults are appropriate.
5. When a BRKSQL entry is used, PARAM,MRMTXNAM and PARAM,MARCFIL1 should not be
entered.
6. When brake squeal matrices are output by Marc, unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices are output
for non-glued contact surfaces. For surfaces with glued contact, MPCs are output. The GLUE flag
signals SOL 600 to look for these MPCs and combine them with other MPCs that might be in the
model using MPCADD, or if no MPCs were originally used to add the MCPs due to glued contact.
Glued contact surfaces may not be used for the disk-rotor interface. If IGLUE is zero or blank, the
MPCs for glued contact in the Marc brake squeal bde file (if any) will be ignored. Sometimes, Marc
puts out MPCs with only one degree-of-freedom defined. Such MPCs will be ignored; otherwise
Nastran will generate a fatal error.
7. If METH=1, a Marc t19 file will be produced.
8. The names NASCMD and RCFILE must be entered in small fixed field and start in column 9 (i.e.,
left justified in the field).
9. The Nastran input file name used for a brake squeal analysis may only contain lower case letters and
the underscore and/or dash characters.
10. Brake squeal is not available with DDM (parallel processing). Do not enter a PARAMARC when
using the BRKSQL entry.
Main Index
1370 BSET
Fixed Analysis Degrees-of-Freedom
BSET Fixed Analysis Degrees-of-Freedom
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BSET ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3 ID4 C4
Example:
BSET 2 135 14 6
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. BSET and BNDFIX entries are equivalent to each other. Either one of them or any combination of
them may be employed.
follows:
Main Index
BSET1 1371
Fixed Analysis Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of BSET Entry
BSET1 Fixed Analysis Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of BSET Entry
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BSET1 C ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7
ID8 ID9 ID10 -etc.-
Example:
BSET1 2 135 14 6 23 24 25 26
122 127

BSET1 C ID1 “THRU” ID2
BSET1 3 6 THRU 32
Describer Meaning
ID1< ID2)
Remarks:
1. BSET1 and BNDFIX1 entries are equivalent to each other. Either one of them or any combination
Main Index
1372 BSET1
Fixed Analysis Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of BSET Entry
follows:
Main Index
BSQUEAL 1373
Specifies Data for Brake Squeal Analysis Using SOLs 400 and 600
BSQUEAL Specifies Data for Brake Squeal Analysis Using SOLs 400 and 600
Defines data for brake squeal calculations involving one wheel (Primary Format) or multiple wheels
(Alternate Format) as well as other rotating or stationary sliding objects used in SOLs 400 and 600.
Primary Format (One Wheel, SOL 400 and SOL 600):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BSQUEAL ID OMETH AVSTIF BSONLY IGLUE ICORD
RX RY RZ X Y Z
NASCMD
RCFILE
Alternate Format (Multiple Wheels, SOL 600 Only):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BSQUEAL ID OMETH NGROUP ICORD ITYPE BSONLY
“BODY” ID1 ID2 AVSTIF T(AVSTIF)
IVEC IDRF1 IDRF2 IGLUE

RX1 RY1 RZ1 X1 Y1 Z1
“BODY” ID1 ID2 AVSTIF T(AVSTIF)
IVEC IDRF1 IDRF2 IGLUE

NASCMD
RCFILE
Example, Primary Format (SOL 400):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BSQUEAL 100 0.2 5.34E6 NO
0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Example, Primary Format (SOL 600):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BSQUEAL 1.0 5.34E6
0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
nastran
nastb.rc
Main Index
1374 BSQUEAL
Example, Alternate Format (SOL 600):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BSQUEAL 1.0 2 1 1
BODY 2 3 60000. 0
0 1
0.0 0.0 1.0 10.0 10.0 25.0
0.0 0.0 -1.0 10.0 10.0 30.0
BODY 6 8 1.0 5
0 110 120 1
nastran
nastb.rc
Describer Meaning
ID Identification number of a corresponding BSQUEAL Case Control command
(Integer > 0). Ignored by SOL 600.
OMETH Specifies the corresponding load factor (or time step) where the brake squeal analysis
is to be performed. (Real; Default = 0.0 in SOL 400, see Remark 5., for SOL 600 the
value must be 0.0 or 1.0, Remark 11.)
NGROUP Number of pairs of contact bodies (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
ICORD Flag indicating whether coordinates are updated or not. A value of 0 means coordinates
(SOL 600 Only) are not updated. A value of 1 means coordinates are updated using the formula
Cnew=Corig+Defl where Cnew are updated coordinates, Corig are original coordinates,
Defl are the final displacements from last Marc increment. (Integer; Default = 0)
ITYPE Flag determining type of analysis. See Figure 9-3 and Figure 9-4 (Integer; Default = 1)
(SOL 600 Only) 1 Brake squeal
2 Complex engenvalue analysis following general sliding contact analysis.
BSONLY Brake-Squeal-Only flag to control whether or not to continue nonlinear iterations after
(SOL 400 Only) brake squeal analysis is performed. BSONLY=YES means to perform brake squeal
analysis only and exit nonlinear iteration immediately; BSONLY=NO means to
continue nonlinear analysis. (Character; Default = YES)
“BODY” Character string that signals the start of a pair of contact bodies for which instability
calculations are to be made (Character; Required)
ID1 BCBODY ID of the first contact body. (Integer > 0; no Default; bcbody id1 must exist)
ID2 BCBODY ID of the second contact body. (Integer > 0; no Default; bcbody id2 must
exist)
Main Index
BSQUEAL 1375
Describer Meaning
AVSTIF Approximate average stiffness per unit area between the two surfaces. AVSTIF is used a
penalty contact stiffness, it needs to be a large value but not so large that numerical
instabilities result. If AVSTIF is large enough, increasing it by a few orders of magnitude
will not appreciably affect the squeal modes. (Real; no Default; Required field)
T(AVSTIF) Table ID of a TABL3Di providing temperature or spatial variation of the average
stiffness (Integer; Default = 0 which means FC is constant)
IVEC Flag specifying whether friction vector at center of master contact body is in the same
direction as that of the slave nodes. (Integer; Default = 0)
0 In same direction
1 Slave vector is in tangential direction
IDRFi ID of a matching RFORCE entry (if any) for body 1 or 2. (Integer; Default = 0, which
(SOL 600 Only) means this body is not rotating)
IGLUE Flag specifying whether MPC’s for non-pad/disk surfaces with glued contact are used or
(SOL 600 Only) ignored. A value of 0 means ignore the MPC’s, a value of 1 means include the MPC’s.
See Remarks 12. and 14. (Integer; Default = 1)
RXi X direction cosine (basic coord system) of axis of rotation for body i if IDRFi is zero or
blank (Real; or blank)
RYi Y direction cosine (basic coord system) of axis of rotation for body i if IDRFi is zero or
RZi Z direction cosine (basic coord system) of axis of rotation for body i if IDRFi is zero or
Xi X coordinate in basic coord system of a point on the axis of rotation for body i if IDRFi
is zero or blank (Real; or blank)
Yi Y coordinate in basic coord system of a point on the axis of rotation for body i if IDRFi
Zi Z coordinate in basic coord system of a point on the axis of rotation for body i if IDRFi
NASCMD Name of a command to run Nastran (limited to 64 characters) - used in conjunction
(SOL 600 Only) with the CONTINUE options on the SOL 600 statement. The full path of the
command to execute Nastran should be entered. Enter the string entirely in lower case.
(Character; Default = nastran) If the string exceeds 8 characters, do not enter this string
using free-field also see Remark 9.
RCFILE Name of a RC file to be used with a secondary Nastran job (limited to 8 characters) -
(SOL 600 Only) used in conjunction with the CONTINUE options on the SOL 600 statement. An
extension of “.rc” will automatically be added. Enter the string entirely in lower case.
(Character; Default=nastb.rc) If the string exceeds 8 characters, do not enter this string
using free-field also see Remark 9.
Main Index
1376 BSQUEAL
Retained node
Tied node
Tied node
Tangential vector
Vector at retained node is the same as at tied node
rotation circle
Figure 9-3 Vectors of frictional stiffness at tied and retained node.
BODY 1
BODY 2
Sliding Vector User Defines

Figure 9-4 Sliding model
Remarks:
1. This entry is used to perform multiple-body brake squeal analysis or other contact with friction sets
of bodies using unsymmetric stiffness friction matrices.
Main Index
BSQUEAL 1377
2. One or more pairs of bodies may be specified. Each pair of bodies is described by the four lines
beginning with the header “BODY”. For example, there may be one rotating body, such as brake
disk or rotor, and one contact body or bodies, such as brake pad under each “BODY” keyword. There
may be other bodies or parts in the assembly.
3. The disks should not be glued with pads. When bodies are intended to be glued, turn on BCTABLE
/ IGLUE or BCONPRG/IGLUE for those contact bodies.
4. Entries ICORD, ITYPE, IDBFi, IGLUE, NASCMD and RCFILE are used by SOL 600 only.
5. Entry BSONLY is used by SOL 400 only.
6. Brake squeal is not available with segment-to-segment contact.
SOL 400 Only

7. For nonlinear static analysis, 0.0 < OMETH < 1.0, OMETH is overridden by the load factor from
Case Control command, NLIC or its default, when a brake squeal analysis is performed in a separate
SUBCASE-STEP other than ANALYSIS = NLSTATIC.
8. User subroutine UBSQUEAL is available using the BCONUDS entry.
SOL 600 Only

9. SOL 600 performs brake squeal calculations as follows. The main (original) Nastran job with input
deck jid.dat or jid.bdf spawns Marc just as done for any other SOL 600 job. Marc calculates
unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices which are saved on a file (jid.marc.bde with associated file
jid.marc.ccc). The primary Nastran job then creates input data for a second Nastran job (jid.nast.dat)
to use the unsymmetric stiffness matrices in an complex eigenvalue extraction. The primary Nastran
job spawns a second Nastran job to calculate the complex eigenvalues. The complex eigenvalues and
eigenvectors are found in jid.nast.f06, jid.nast.op2, etc.
NASCMD is the name of the command to execute the secondary Nastran job. NASCMD can be up
to 64 characters long and must be left justified in field 2. The sting as entered will be used as is -
except that it will be converted to lower case regardless of whether it is entered in upper or lower case.
RCFILE is the name of an RC file to be used for the secondary Nastran job. Normally it should be
similar to the RC file used for the primary run except that additional memory will normally be
necessary to calculate the complex eigenvalues and batch=no should also be specified. RCFILE is
limited to 8 characters and an extension of “.rc” will be added automatically. This entry will be
converted to upper case in Nastran but will be converted to lower case before spawning the complex
eigenvalue run. This RC file must be located in the same directory as the Nastran input file. This
entry is the same as specifying PARAM,MRRCFILE. Only one or the other should be used.
10. OMETH can only be one of the following two values in SOL 600.
0.0=Perform brake squeal calculations before any nonlinear analysis has taken place
1.0=Perform brake squeal calculations after all nonlinear load cases
11. Options exist to obtain the unsymmetric stiffness matrices using the undeformed geometry (initial
contact) or after all specified nonlinear subcases.
12. MPC’s are produced for contact surfaces with glued contact. DMIG’s are produced for contact
surfaces without glued contact. The brakes and drums may not use glued contact, other regions of
the structure can used glued contact.
Main Index
1378 BSQUEAL
13. When the BSQUEAL entry is used, PARAM,MRMTXNAM and PARAM,MARCFIL1 should not
be entered.
14. When brake squeal matrices are output by Marc, unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices are output
for non-glued contact surfaces. For surfaces with glued contact, MPC’s are output. The GLUE flag
signals SOL 600 to look for these MPC’s and combine them with other MPC’s that might be in the
model using MPCADD, or if no MPC’s were originally used to add the MCP’s. due to glued contact.
Glued contact surfaces may not be used for the disk-rotor interface. If IGLUE is zero or blank, the
MPC’s for glued contact in the Marc brake squeal bde file (if any) will be ignored. Sometimes, Marc
puts out MPC’s with only one degree-of-freedom defined. Such MPC’s will be ignored otherwise
Nastran will generate a fatal error.
15. The names NASCMD and RCFILE must be entered in small fixed field and start in column 9 (i.e.
left justified in the field).
16. The Nastran input file name used for a brake squeal analysis may only contain lower case letters and
the underscore and/or dash characters.
17. Brake squeal is not available with DDM (parallel processing). Do not enter a PARAMARC when
using the BSQUEAL entry.
18. The Bulk Data entry BRKSQL is the alternate format in SOL 600 when there is only one body.
Main Index
BSURF 1379
Contact Body or Surface
BSURF Contact Body or Surface
Defines a contact body or surface by Element IDs.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BSURF ID ELID1 ELID2 ELID3 ELID4 ELID5 ELID6 ELID7
ELID8 ELID9 etc.
Alternate Format:
BSURF ID ELID1 THRU ELID2 BY INC
ELID3 THRU ELID4 BY INC2
Example:
BSURF 15 5 THRU 21 BY 4
27 30 32 33
35 THRU 44
67 68 72 75 84 93
Describer Meaning
entry. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0)
ELIDi Element identification numbers. If the curve or surface is defined with element ids
only, the direction of the normal depends on the grid point numbering. Keywords
THRU and BY can be used to assist the listing. For SOL 600 and SOL 700 the
Alternate Format must be used with Remarks 6. and 7.
INC Identification number increment. See Remark 3. (Integer or blank)
Remarks:
1. BSURF can be used in SOL101, 103, 105, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 400, 600, and 700.
3. For automatic generation of element IDs, the default increment value is 1 if element numbers are
increasing or -1 if element numbers are decreasing (i.e., the user need not specify BY and the
increment value).
4. The deformable surface may alternately be defined using BCBOX, BCPROP, or BCMATL entries.
Main Index
1380 BSURF
Contact Body or Surface
6. For SOLs 600 and 700, Format 1 and the Alternate Format cannot be mixed for a particular BSURF
entry.
7. For SOLs 600 and 700 if the Alternate Format is used, THRU must be in column 4 for entries with
the BSURF header and in column 3 for continuation entries. If BY is not used, columns 6-9 of the
BSURF entry and columns 5-9 of continuation entries must be blank.
Main Index
BWIDTH 1381
Boundary Line Segment Width or Thickness
BWIDTH Boundary Line Segment Width or Thickness
Defines widths or thicknesses for line segments in 3-D or 2-D slideline contact defined in the corresponding
BLSEG Bulk Data entry for SOL 106 or SOL 129. SOL 400 general contact capability, defined with
BCONTACT, BCTABL1, etc. is the recommended approach for contact analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BWIDTH ID W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7
Alternate Format:
BWIDTH ID W1 “THRU” W2 “BY” INC
The continuation entry formats may be used more than once and in any order. They may also be used with

W8 W9 W10 W11 -etc.-

W8 “THRU” W9 “BY” INC
Example:
BWIDTH 15 2.0 THRU 5.0 BY 1.0
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
35. THRU 44.
1.5 3.4 7.6 0.4 0.7
Describer Meaning
ID BLSEG entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
Wi Width values for the corresponding line segments defined in the BLSEG entry. See
Remark 1. (Real > 0.0)
INC Width value increment. See Remark 2. (Real or blank)
Remarks:
1. BWIDTH may be omitted if the width of each segment defined in the BLSEG entry is unity. The
number of widths to be specified is equal to the number of segments defined in the corresponding
BLSEG entry.
Main Index
1382 BWIDTH
Boundary Line Segment Width or Thickness
2. The default value for INC is 1.0 if the width is increasing or -1.0 if the width is decreasing. That is,
the user need not specify BY and the increment value. If the number of widths specified is less than
the number of segments defined in the corresponding BLSEG entry, the width for the remaining
segments is assumed to be equal to the last width specified.
3. If there is only one grid point in the corresponding BLSEG entry, there is no contributory area
associated with the grid point. To compute correct contact stresses an area may be associated with the
single grid point by specifying the area in field W1.
Main Index
CAABSF 1383
Frequency-Dependent Acoustic Absorber Element
Entries CA - CM
CAABSF Frequency-Dependent Acoustic Absorber Element
Defines a frequency-dependent acoustic absorber element in coupled fluid-structural analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CAABSF EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4
Example:
CAABSF 44 38 1 10 20
Describer Meaning
EID Element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Property identification number that matches a PAABSF entry. (Integer > 0;
Default = EID)
Gi Grid point identification number of fluid connection points. (Integer > 0 or blank)
Remarks:
1. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element identification
numbers.
2. If only G1 is specified then a point impedance is assumed. If G1 and G2 are specified then a line
impedance is assumed. If G1, G2, and G3 are specified, then an impedance is associated with the area
of the triangular face. If G1 through G4 are specified, then an impedance is associated with the
quadrilateral face. See Figure 9-5.
3. The CAABSF element must connect entirely to fluid points on the fluid-structure boundary.
4. This element is used only in frequency response and is ignored in all other solutions.
Main Index
1384 CAABSF
Frequency-Dependent Acoustic Absorber Element
G2 G3
G1
G2
G1 G4
G1
G1
G3
G2
Figure 9-5 Four Types of CAABSF Elements
Main Index
CACINF3 1385
Acoustic Conjugate Infinite Element Base Connection
CACINF3 Acoustic Conjugate Infinite Element Base Connection
Defines an acoustic conjugate infinite element with triangular base.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CACINF3 EID PID G1 G2 G3
Example:
CACINF3 111 10 1004 1008 1011
Describer Meaning
PID Property Identification Number of a PACINF entry. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid Point Identification Numbers of Element Base Connection Points. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
numbers.
2. The element must be connected to acoustic grid points.
3. The element normal is defined by the right-hand rule. If the normal does not point into the exterior
domain, the element orientation will be changed automatically, and an information message will be
written to the .f06 file.
Main Index
1386 CACINF4
Acoustic Conjugate Infinite Element Base Connection
CACINF4 Acoustic Conjugate Infinite Element Base Connection
Defines an acoustic conjugate infinite element with quadrilateral base.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CACINF4 EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4
Example:
CACINF4 275 10 1027 1032 1056 1021
Describer Meaning

PID Property Identification Number of a PACINF entry. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid Point Identification Numbers of Element Base Connection Points. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
numbers.
2. The element must be connected to acoustic grid points.
3. The element normal is defined by the right-hand rule. If the normal does not point into the exterior
domain, the element orientation will be changed automatically, and an information message will be
written to the .f06 file.
Main Index
CAERO1 1387
Aerodynamic Panel Element Connection
CAERO1 Aerodynamic Panel Element Connection
Defines an aerodynamic macro element (panel) in terms of two leading edge locations and side chords. This
is used for Doublet-Lattice theory for subsonic aerodynamics and the ZONA51 theory for supersonic
aerodynamics.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CAERO1 EID PID CP NSPAN NCHORD LSPAN LCHORD IGID
X1 Y1 Z1 X12 X4 Y4 Z4 X43
Example:
CAERO1 1000 1 3 2 1
0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.2 1.0 0.0 0.8
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PAERO1 entry; used to specify associated bodies.
Required even if there are no associated bodies. (Integer > 0)
CP Coordinate system for locating points 1 and 4. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
NSPAN Number of spanwise boxes; if a positive value is given NSPAN, equal divisions are
assumed; if zero or blank, a list of division points is given at LSPAN, field 7.
(Integer > 0)
NCHORD Number of chordwise boxes; if a positive value is given NCHORD, equal divisions are
assumed; if zero or blank, a list of division points is given at LCHORD, field 8.
(Integer > 0)
LSPAN ID of an AEFACT entry containing a list of division points for spanwise boxes. Used
only if NSPAN, field 5 is zero or blank. (Integer > 0)
LCHORD ID of an AEFACT data entry containing a list of division points for chordwise boxes.
Used only if NCHORD, field 6 is zero or blank. (Integer > 0)
IGID Interference group identification; aerodynamic elements with different IGIDs are
uncoupled. (Integer > 0)
X1, Y1, Z1 Location of points 1 and 4, in coordinate system CP. (Real)

X4, Y4, Z4
X12, X43 Edge chord lengths in aerodynamic coordinate system. (Real > 0.0, but not both zero.)
Main Index
1388 CAERO1
Aerodynamic Panel Element Connection
Remarks:
1. The boxes and corner point nodes are numbered sequentially, beginning with EID. The user should
be careful to ensure that all box and corner point node numbers are unique. There can be overlapping
IDs between the structural and aerodynamic model, but MSC Patran will not then be able to display
any results. Also, non-unique corner IDs are allowed, but results cannot be visualized in MSC Patran.
2. The number of division points is one greater than the number of boxes. Thus, if NSPAN=3, the
division points are 0.0, 0.333, 0.667, 1.000. If the user supplies division points, the first and last
points need not be 0. and 1. (In which case the corners of the panel would not be at the reference
points.)
3. A triangular element is formed if X12 or X43=0.0
4. The element coordinate system is right-handed as shown in Figure 9-6.
5. The continuation is required.
6. It is recommended that NCHORD or LCHORD be chosen so that the typical box chord length Δx
satisfies the conditio Δx < 0.08 V ⁄ f (recent studies indicate that .02 V ⁄ f is needed to get converged
stability derivatives) where V is the minimum velocity and f, in hertz, is the maximum frequency to
be analyzed (see the MSC Nastran Aeroelastic Analysis User’s Guide).
Zelem
1 Yelem
1000
1003
4
1001 1006
1004
1007
1002 1005 1008
2
3
Xaero = Xelem
Figure 9-6 Element Coordinate System for Aerodynamic Panel
7. This entry can be used for two different aerodynamic theories: Doublet-Lattice for subsonic and
ZONA51 for supersonic. The proper theory is selected based on the specification of Mach number
on the MKAEROi or TRIM entry.
Main Index
CAERO2 1389
Aerodynamic Body Connection
CAERO2 Aerodynamic Body Connection
Defines aerodynamic slender body and interference elements for Doublet-Lattice aerodynamics.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CAERO2 EID PID CP NSB NINT LSB LINT IGID
X1 Y1 Z1 X12
Example:
CAERO2 1500 2 100 4 99 1
-1.0 100. -30. 175.
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PAERO2 entry. (Integer > 0)
CP Coordinate system for locating point 1. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
NSB Number of slender body elements. If NSB > 0, then NSB equal divisions are assumed;
if zero or blank, specify a list of divisions in LSB. (Integer > 0)
NINT Number of interference elements. If NINT > 0, then NINT equal divisions are
assumed; if zero or blank, specify a list of divisions in LINT. (Integer > 0)
LSB ID of an AEFACT Bulk Data entry for slender body division points; used only if NSB
is zero or blank. (Integer > 0)
LINT ID of an AEFACT data entry containing a list of division points for interference
elements; used only if NINT is zero or blank. (Integer > 0)
IGID Interference group identification. Aerodynamic elements with different IGIDs are
uncoupled. (Integer > 0)
X1, Y1, Z1 Location of point 1 in coordinate system CP. (Real)
X12 Length of body in the x-direction of the aerodynamic coordinate system. (Real > 0.0)
Remarks:
1. Point 1 is the leading point of the body.
2. All CAERO1 (panels) and CAERO2 (bodies) in the same group (IGID) will have aerodynamic
interaction.
3. At least one interference element is required for the aerodynamic body specified by this entry.
Main Index
1390 CAERO2
Aerodynamic Body Connection
4. The beams and connection points are numbered sequentially beginning with EID. The user should
be careful to ensure that all aero elements and connection point IDs are unique. Overlapping IDs
between structure and aerodynamic models are allowed, but will prevent results visualization in
Patran.
Old rules regarding numbering among Z, ZY, Y bodies and CAERO1 no longer apply: arbitrary
ordering is allowed.
5. At least two slender body elements are required for each aerodynamic body.
6. Interference elements are only intended for use with panels.
7. Determining the size of the j-set (i.e., the number of aerodynamic elements) is essential to input D1JE
and D2JE matrices. Use the following expressions for locating the proper row in the two matrices:
J=Number of boxes+ Number of I-elements, z

+ 2*(Number of I-elements, zy)
+ Number of I-elements, y
+ Number of S-elements, z
+ 2*(Number of S-elements, zy)
+ Number of S-elements, y
where I-elements denote interference and S-elements denote slender body.
Main Index
CAERO3 1391
Aerodynamic Panel Element Configuration
CAERO3 Aerodynamic Panel Element Configuration
Defines the aerodynamic edges of a Mach Box lifting surface. If no cranks are present, this entry defines the
aerodynamic Mach Box lifting surface.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CAERO3 EID PID CP LISTW LISTC1 LISTC2
X1 Y1 Z1 X12 X4 Y4 Z4 X43
Example:
CAERO3 2000 2001 0 22 33
1.0 0.0 0.0 100. 17. 130. 0. 100.
Describer Meaning
LISTW Identification number of an AEFACT entry that lists (x,y) pairs for structural
interpolation of the wing. (Integer > 0)
LISTC1, Identification number of AEFACT entries that list (x,y) pairs for control surfaces, if they
LISTC2 exist. (Integer > 0)
X1, Y1, Z1 Location of points 1 and 4 in coordinate system CP. (Real)

X4, Y4, Z4
X12, X43 Edge chord lengths in the aerodynamic coordinate system. (Real > 0, X12 ≠ 0 )
Remarks:
1. EID must be unique with respect to all other element identification numbers.
2. The (x,y) pairs on LISTW, LISTC1 and LISTC2 AEFACT entries are in the aero element coordinate
system (see Figure 9-7). The (x,y) pairs define a set of aerodynamic grid points that are independent
of Mach number and are selected by the user to be representative of the planform and motions of
interest. The (x,y) pairs must be sufficient in number and distribution such that: the surface spline
provides an accurate interpolation between them and the Mach Box centers that are variously located
on the planform as a function of Mach number (a complete description of the Mach Box Method is
given in the MSC Nastran Aeroelastic Analysis User’s Guide).
Main Index
1392 CAERO3
3. The (x,y) pairs are numbered sequentially, beginning with EID for LISTW, then LISTC1, and finally
for LISTC2. On SPLINEi entries, the box numbers (BOX1 and BOX2 on SPLINE1, ID1 and ID2
on SPLINE2, and UKID on SPLINE3) refer to the (x,y) pair sequence number appropriate for the
surface (primary, or first or second control) being splined.
4. If cranks and/or control surfaces exist, their locations are given on the PAERO3 entry.
5. The numbering system and coordinate system are shown below:
zelem yelem
1 5
4
+ +
LISTW
+ grid points
+
7 +
9 11
2 8 +
+ + + 3
+ 10 + +
12
6
xaero = xelem
LISTC1 grid points
Figure 9-7 CAERO3 Element Configuration
Planform Corners Control

1 Leading edge, inboard 7 Hinge line, inboard
2 Trailing edge, inboard 8 On inboard edge (usually at trailing edge)
3 Trailing edge, outboard 9 Hinge line, outboard
4 Leading edge, outboard 10 On outboard edge (usually at trailing edge)
Cranks Control (if two)
5 Leading edge 9 Hinge line, inboard
6 Trailing edge 10 On inboard edge (usually at trailing edge)
11 Hinge line, outboard
12 On outboard edge (usually at trailing edge)
6. The CAERO3 entry is only supported in SOL 145, SOL 200 with ANALYSIS=FLUT and in
SOL 146 with mechanical loads. Gust response in SOL 146 is not supported for the CAERO3.
Main Index
CAERO4 1393
Aerodynamic Macro-Strip Element Connection
CAERO4 Aerodynamic Macro-Strip Element Connection
Defines an aerodynamic macro element for Strip theory.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CAERO4 EID PID CP NSPAN LSPAN
X1 Y1 Z1 X12 X4 Y4 Z4 X43
Example:
CAERO4 6000 6001 100 315
0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.2 1.0 0.0 0.8
Describer Meaning
NSPAN Number of strips; if a positive value is given, NSPAN equal strips are assumed. If zero
or blank, LSPAN must be specified. (Integer > 0)
LSPAN ID of an AEFACT entry containing a list of division points for strips. Used only if
NSPAN is zero or blank. (Integer > 0)
X1, Y1, Z1 Location of points 1 and 4 in coordinate system CP. (Real)

X4, Y4, Z4
X12, X43 Edge chord lengths in aerodynamic coordinate system. (Real > 0.0, and not both zero.)
Remarks:
1. The strips are numbered sequentially, beginning with EID. The user must ensure that all strip
numbers are unique and greater than structural grid, scalar, and extra point IDs.
2. The number of division points is one greater than the number of boxes. Thus, if NSPAN = 3, the
division points are 0.0, 0.333, 0.667, and 1.000. If the user supplies division points, the first and last
points need not be 0.0 and 1.0 (in which case the corners of the panel would not be at the reference
points).
3. A triangular element is formed if X12 or X43 = 0.
Main Index
1394 CAERO4
Aerodynamic Macro-Strip Element Connection
zelem
1 yelem
xaero = xelem
Figure 9-8 CAERO4 Element Connection
Main Index
CAERO5 1395
CAERO5 Aerodynamic Panel Element Configuration
Defines an aerodynamic macro element for Piston theory.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CAERO5 EID PID CP NSPAN LSPAN NTHRY NTHICK
X1 Y1 Z1 X12 X4 Y4 Z4 X43
Example:
CAERO5 6000 6001 100 315 0 0
0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.2 1.0 0. 0.8
Describer Meaning
NSPAN Number of strips. (Integer. If a positive value is given, equal strips are assumed. If zero
or blank, then LSPAN must be specified.)
LSPAN ID of an AEFACT entry containing a list of division points for strips. Used only if
NSPAN is zero or blank. (Integer > 0)
NTHRY Parameter to select Piston or van Dyke’s theory. (Integer = 0, 1, or 2; Default = 0)
Blank or 0 Piston theory is used to compute C 1 and C 2
1 van Dyke’s theory is used to compute C 1 and C 2 with no sweep correction
(secΛ = 1.0).
2 van Dyke’s theory is used to compute C 1 and C 2 with a sweep correction
based on the actual Λ.
NTHICK Parameter to select thickness integrals input. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
Blank or 0 Thickness integrals are computed internally.
>0 Thickness integrals are input directly and are the ID number of an
AEFACT entry that lists the I and/or J integrals.
X1,Y1, Z1 Location of points 1 and 4 in coordinate system CP. (Real)
X4,Y4, Z4
X12, X43 Edge chord lengths in aerodynamic coordinate system. (Real > 0; X12 and X43 cannot
both be zero.)
Main Index
1396 CAERO5
zelem
1 yelem
Λ
4
3
2
xaero = xelem
Figure 9-9 CAERO5 Element Configuration
Remarks:
1. The strips are numbered sequentially, beginning with EID. The user must ensure that all strip
numbers are unique and different from structural grid IDs.
2. The number of division points is one greater than the number of boxes. Thus, if NSPAN=3, the
division points are 0.0, 0.333, 0.667, 1.000. If the user supplies division points, the first and last
points need not be 0.0 and 1.0 (in which case the corners of the panel would not be at the reference
points).
3. A triangular element is formed if X12 or X43 = 0.0.
2 2 1⁄2
C 1 = m ⁄ ( m – sec Λ )
4. 2
4 2 2 2 2 2
C 2 = [ m ( γ + 1 ) – 4 sec Λ ( m – sec Λ ) ] ⁄ [ 4 ( m – sec Λ ) ]
where:
m = Mach number
γ = Specific heat ratio
Λ = Leading edge sweep angle
Main Index
CAERO5 1397
When sec Λ = 0.0 , Piston theory coefficients are obtained (NTHRY = 1)

When sec Λ = 1.0 , van Dyke’s coefficients are obtained (NTHRY = blank or 0)
When sec Λ ≠ 0.0 or ≠ 1.0, sweep corrections are included (NTHRY = 2)
5. I and J thickness integral definitions:
τ⁄2
gξ τ⁄2 τh ⁄ 2 Hinge Line
ξ
ξ
τt ⁄ 2
ξm
ξh
ξ = 1
dg
g ξ ≡ ------ = slope of airfoil semithickness
dξ
1 1
I1 =  gξ d ξ J1 =  gξ d ξ
0 ξh
1 1
I2 =  ξgξ d ξ J2 =  ξg ξ d ξ
0 ξh
1 1
2 2
I3 = ξ gξ d ξ J3 = ξ gξ d ξ
0 ξh
1 1
2 2
I4 =  gξ d ξ J4 = g ξd ξ
0 ξh
1 1
2 2
I5 =  ξgξ d ξ J5 =  ξg ξd ξ
0 ξh
1 1
2 2 2 2
I6 = ξ gξ d ξ J6 = ξ gξ d ξ
0 ξh
Main Index
1398 CAERO5
Figure 9-10 CAERO5 I and J Thickness Integral Definitions
Main Index
CAMPBLL 1399
CAMPBLL Campbell Diagram Parameters
Specifies the parameters for Campbell Diagram generation and mode tracking analysis.
Formats:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CAMPBLL CID VPARM DDVALID TYPE
MODTRK CORU SWITR NUMMOD PRTCOR
Examples:
CAMPBLL 15 SPEED 22 RPM
1 0.75 1 1
Describer Meaning
CID Identification number of entry (Integer > 0; Required).
VPARM Variable parameter, allowable entry is: ‘SPEED’.
‘SPEED’, reference rotor speed will be varied (rotordynamic option only).
DDVALID Identification number of DDVAL entry that specifies the values for the variable
parameter (Integer > 0; Required).
TYPE Allowable entries are: ‘FREQ’ and ‘RPM’.
MODTRK Perform mode tracking using either numerical approach (default) or eigenvector based
approach or both. (Default = 0). See remark 4.
CORU Threshold for mode correlation.
SWITR Option to use updated mode for mode tracking in case of failure. See remark 7.
NUMMODE Number of modes to track (Should be less than 0.5*Neig, where Neig is the number
of eigenvalues extracted in EIGC). See remark 4.
PRTCOR Option to print correlation matrix at each rotor speed (Default = 0). See remark 9.
Remarks:
1. CAMPBLL option is supported for both SOL 107 and SOL 110 analysis.
2. CAMPBLL option is not supported in SOL 200 and SOL 400 for ANALYSIS = DCEIG/MCEIG.
3. Only the modes with positive imaginary part are used for mode tracking (to avoid repeated
eigenvalues.)
4. Following methods are available in MSC Nastran for mode tracking:
a. Numerical Mode tracking based on second derivative.
Obtain second derivative for the variation of eigenvalue with rotor speed and determine the
eigenfrequency with minimum slope.
Main Index
1400 CAMPBLL
b. Mode tracking based on orthogonality of left and right eigenvectors.

This feature is available for analysis in fixed reference frame only.
MODTRK = 0: Perform numerical mode tracking only. (Default)
MODTRK = 1: Perform BOTH numerical and eigenvector based mode tracking.
MODTRK = 2: Perform eigenvector based mode tracking only.
5. The variables specified in the second row are relevant for eigenvector-based mode tracking only.
6. Ideally, for tracked pair of modes, the value of Normalized Cross Complex Orthogonality (NC2O)
parameter is very close to 1. However, for complex models involving large stator component and
dynamic reduction, this value can be significantly lower. Thus, the default value for CORU is set to
0.7. Based on the model complexity and NC2O matrix obtained for two rotor speeds, user may
change this value.
7. In case of mode tracking failure at a particular rotor speed, user has the option to continue mode
tracking for rest of the rotors speed by:
SWITR = 1: Updating modes corresponding to rotor speed with failed mode tracking, or
SWITR = 0: Using the modes from last rotor speed with successful mode tracking. (Default)
In case the Campbell diagram includes multiple mode switching and there are new modes entering
the analysis, use of SWITR=1 is recommended.
8. Only the complex eigenvalues with positive imaginary part are considered for mode tracking analysis.
As a result, the number of eigenvalues available for mode tracking may not be same at all the rotor
speeds considered in the analysis. This may lead to mode tracking failure. One way to avoid this issue
is to pick NUMMODE to be less than half of the number of complex eigenvalues extracted using
EIGC bulk data entry. Thus, the analysis uses only the first NUMMODE frequencies with positive
imaginary part for mode tracking at each rotor speed.
9. When PRTCOR parameter is turned to 1, the code prints NC2O matrix corresponding to each rotor
speed in the F06 file. This information can be very useful in identifying reasons for mode tracking
failure.
10. For both approaches, damping ratio is also tracked while tracking eigenfrequencies. The results
produced from mode tracking can be extracted in OP4 using following assign statements:
$ Extract results for numerical mode tracking
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='freq_nmt.op4',UNIT=71,FORM=FORMATTED,DELETE $ MODE FREQS
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='rot_nmt.op4',UNIT=72,FORM=FORMATTED,DELETE $ ROTOR SPEED
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='dmp_nmt.op4',UNIT=73,FORM=FORMATTED,DELETE $ DAMPING RATIO
$ Extract results for eigenvector based mode tracking
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='freq_evmt.op4',UNIT=81,FORM=FORMATTED,DELETE $ MODE FREQS
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='rot_evmt.op4',UNIT=82,FORM=FORMATTED,DELETE $ ROTOR SPEED
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='dmp_evmt.op4',UNIT=83,FORM=FORMATTED,DELETE $ DAMPING RATIO
These OP4 files can be imported in MSC PATRAN to produce Campbell Diagram.
11. DMP>1 is not supported for SOL 110 for generating Campbell diagram when ACMS option is not
used.
Main Index
CAXIFi 1401
Fluid Element Connections
CAXIFi Fluid Element Connections
Defines an axisymmetric fluid element that connects i = 2, 3, or 4 fluid points.
Formats:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CAXIF2 EID IDF1 IDF2 RHO B
CAXIF3 EID IDF1 IDF2 IDF3 RHO B
CAXIF4 EID IDF1 IDF2 IDF3 IDF4 RHO B
Examples:
CAXIF2 11 23 25 0.25E-3
CAXIF3 105 31 32 33 6.47E-3
CAXIF4 524 421 425 424 422 0.5E-3 2.5+3
Describer Meaning
IDFi Identification numbers of connected GRIDF points. (Integer > 0)
RHO Fluid density in mass units. (Real > 0.0 or blank)
B Fluid bulk modulus. (Real > 0.0 or blank)
Remarks:
1. CAXIFi is allowed only if an AXSLOT entry is also present.
2. The element identification number (EID) must be unique with respect to all other fluid or structural
elements.
3. If RHO or B is blank, then the corresponding RHOD and BD fields must be specified on the
AXSLOT entry.
4. Plot elements are generated for these elements. Because each plot element connects two points, one
is generated for the CAXIF2 element, three are generated for the CAXIF3 element, and four plot
elements are generated for the CAXIF4 element. In the last case the elements connect the pairs of
points (1-2), (2-3), (3-4), and (4-1).
5. If B = 0.0, the fluid is incompressible.
Main Index
1402 CAXISYM
Axisymmetric Line Elements Connection - SOL 400
CAXISYM Axisymmetric Line Elements Connection - SOL 400
Defines two or three node axisymmetric thick shell elements.
Formats:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CAXISYM EID PID G1 G2 G3 NOFF
Example:
CAXISYM 22 98 8 16
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of PAXISYM entry. (Integers > 0)
G1, G2 Identification numbers at the two end grid points. Required data.
(Unique; Integers > 0)
G3 Identification number of the one grid in between G1 and G2. See Remark 2. (Unique
Integer > 0 or blank). If G3=0; this is a straight two node element.
NOFF Offset from the surface of the grid points to the element reference plane. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other identification numbers.
2. It is recommended that G3 be located within the middle third of the element.
3. The element must lie in the x-y plane of the basic system and is oriented as shown below.
Z-element
Y-basic
G2
n
G3
G1
X-basic
θ -element R-element
Main Index
CBAR 1403
Simple Beam Element Connection
CBAR Simple Beam Element Connection
Defines a simple beam element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CBAR EID PID GA GB X1 X2 X3 OFFT
PA PB W1A W2A W3A W1B W2B W3B
Example:
CBAR 2 39 7 3 0.6 18. 26. GOG
513

CBAR EID PID GA GB G0 OFFT
CBAR 2 39 7 6 105 GOG

513
Describer Meaning
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Property identification number of a PBAR, PBARL or PBRSECT entry.
(Integer > 0 or blank*; Default = EID unless BAROR entry has nonzero entry in
field 3.)
GA, GB Grid point identification numbers of connection points. (Integer > 0; GA ≠ GB )
X1, X2, X3 Components of orientation vector v , from GA, in the displacement coordinate
system at GA (Default), or in the basic coordinate system. See Remark 8. (Real)
G0 Alternate method to supply the orientation vector v using grid point G0. The
direction of v is from GA to G0. v is then translated to End A. (Integer > 0;
G0 ≠ GA or GB)
OFFT Offset vector interpretation flag. (character or blank) See Remark 8.
Main Index
1404 CBAR
Describer Meaning
PA, PB Pin flags for bar ends A and B, respectively. Used to remove connections between
the grid point and selected degrees-of-freedom of the bar. The degrees-of-
freedom are defined in the element’s coordinate system (see Figure 9-11). The bar
must have stiffness associated with the PA and PB degrees-of-freedom to be
released by the pin flags. For example, if PA = 4 is specified, the PBAR entry
must have a value for J, the torsional stiffness. (Up to 5 of the unique Integers 1
through 6 anywhere in the field with no embedded blanks; Integer > 0.) Pin flags
combined with offsets are not allowed for SOL 600. Pin flags are not allowed in
SOL 700.
Components of offset vectors w a and w b , respectively (see Figure 9-11) in
W1A,W2A,W3A displacement coordinate systems (or in element system depending upon the
W1B,W2B,W3B content of the OFFT field), at points GA and GB, respectively. See Remark 7.
and 8. (Real; Default = 0.0) Offsets are not allowed in SOL 700.
*See the BAROR entry for default options for field 3 and fields 6 through 9.
Remarks:
numbers.
2. Figure 9-11 and Figure 9-12 define bar element geometry with and without offsets:
x elem
v
Plane 1
y elem End b
v wb
Grid Point GB
Plane 2
End a
z elem
wa
Grid Point GA
Figure 9-11 CBAR Element Geometry with Offsets
Main Index
CBAR 1405
v x elem
Plane 1
y elem End b
GB
Plane 2
End a
GA z elem
Figure 9-12 CBAR Element Geometry without Offsets
3. Figure 9-13 and Figure 9-14 define the elemental force and moment sign convention.
y v1
M 1a M 1b
T
x
Fx T
a Plane 1 b
v1
Figure 9-13 CBAR Element Internal Forces and Moments (x-y Plane)
z v2
M 2a M2 b
Plane 2
v2
Figure 9-14 CBAR Element Internal Forces and Moments (x-z Plane)
4. The continuation may be omitted if there are no pin flags or offsets.

5. For the case where field 9 is blank and not provided by the BAROR entry, if an integer is specified in
field 6, then G0 is used; if field 6 is blank or real, then X1, X2, X3 is used.
Main Index
1406 CBAR
6. See Grid Point and Coordinate System Definition (p. 34) in the for a definition of coordinate system
terminology.
7. Offset vectors are treated like rigid elements.
• Two methods are available for the computation of offsets: original and enhanced. The default
method is the original method. The enhanced method is requested by the Bulk Data entry
MDLPRM,OFFDEF,LROFF. For options of offsets, please refer to the Bulk Data entry
MDLPRM,OFFDEF,option.
• The length of offset vectors is not affected by thermal loads. But the thermal load changes due to
location changes by offsets are correctly computed if the enhanced method is used.
• BAR elements with offsets will give correct buckling results if the enhanced method is used.
• Masses are correctly transformed for offset effects if the enhanced method is used.
• In nonlinear solution sequences, such as SOL 106 or SOL 400, BAR is treated as linear element.
If geometric nonlinear effects are required, please use Bulk Data entry MDLPRM,BRTOBM,1
to convert BAR to BEAM.
8. OFFT is a character string code that describes how the offset and orientation vector components are
to be interpreted. By default (string input is GGG or blank), the offset vectors are measured in the
displacement coordinate systems at grid points A and B and the orientation vector is measured in the
displacement coordinate system of grid point A. At user option, the offset vectors can be measured in
an offset coordinate system relative to grid points A and B, and the orientation vector can be measured
in the basic system as indicated in the following table:

are then used to define the z and y axes of the offset system. A vector is formed from a cross product
Main Index
CBAR 1407
of a vector going from Grid A to Grid B and the orientation vector to create the offset coordinate z-
direction. To obtain a nonzero cross product the orientation vector must not be parallel to both
vectors from Grid A to Grid B for the offset coordinate system and End A and End B for the element
coordinate system. (Note: The character “O” in the table replaces the obsolete character “E”.)
9. For SOL 600, the BIT field is ignored unless param,MAROFSET is 1 or 2. An extra flag
10. For SOL 700, the BIT field is ignored and a warning is issued.
11. For RC network solver in thermal analysis, the G0, OFFT, PA, PB, W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B
and W3B are ignored.
Main Index
1408 CBARAO
Auxiliary Output Points Along Bar Element Axis (CBAR Entry)
CBARAO Auxiliary Output Points Along Bar Element Axis (CBAR Entry)
Defines a series of points along the axis of a bar element (CBAR entry) for stress and force recovery output.
This entry is applicable in static and normal modes analysis only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CBARAO EID SCALE X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
Example:
CBARAO 1065 FR 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

CBARAO EID SCALE NPTS X1 DELTAX
CBARAO 1065 FR 4 0.2 0.2
Describer Meaning
EID Element identification of a CBAR entry. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
SCALE Defines scale of Xi values. (Character = “LE” or “FR”)
Xi Series of locations along element axis for stress and force data recovery. (Real > 0.0)
DELTAX Incremental distance along element axis. (Real)
NPTS Number of stress recovery points, not including the end points. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. This entry defines intermediate locations on the axis of selected CBAR elements for additional data
recovery. The values of Xi are actual distances along the length if SCALE = “LE”. If SCALE = “FR”,
the values of Xi are ratios of actual distances to the bar length. A PLOAD1 Bulk Data entry for the
CBAR element in question must be present to obtain intermediate data recovery.
2. When the alternate format is used, a series of locations Xi = X[i-1]+DELTAX, i = 1, 2, ..., NPTS is
generated.
3. If a CBARAO or PLOAD1 entry is specified and stress and/or force output is requested, then the
stresses and/or forces will be calculated at each location Xi and output as a separate line. The force
and stress values at the end points of the beam will always be output. This output format will be used
for all beam and bar elements.
4. Intermediate loads on the element defined by the PLOAD1 entry will be accounted for in the
calculation of element stresses and forces. If no PLOAD1 entry is defined for the element, the shear
forces are constant, the moments are linear, and it is not necessary that the user define additional
points.
Main Index
CBARAO 1409
Auxiliary Output Points Along Bar Element Axis (CBAR Entry)
5. For each bar element, either the basic format or the alternate format, but not both, may be used. A
maximum of six internal points can be specified with the basic form. The end points must not be
listed because data will be generated for them, as explained in Remark 3. If more than six unequally
spaced internal points are desired, it is advisable to subdivide the bar into two or more elements.
Main Index
1410 CBEAM
Beam Element Connection
CBEAM Beam Element Connection
Defines a beam element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CBEAM EID PID GA GB X1 X2 X3 OFFT/BIT
SA SB
Example:
CBEAM 2 39 7 13 8.2 6.1 -5.6 GOG
513 3.0
8 5

CBEAM EID PID GA GB G0 OFFT/BIT
SA SB
CBEAM 2 39 7 13 105 GOG

513
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of PBEAM, PBCOMP, PBEAML or PBMSECT
entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)*
X1, X2, X3 Components of orientation vector v , from GA, in the displacement coordinate
system at GA (Default), or in the basic coordinate system. See Remark 9. (Real)
G0 Alternate method to supply the orientation vector v using grid point G0.
Direction of v is from GA to G0. v is then transferred to End A. (Integer > 0;
G0 ≠ GA or GB)

BIT Built-in twist of the cross-sectional axes about the beam axis at end B relative to
end A. For beam p-elements only. (Real; Default = 0.0)
Main Index
CBEAM 1411
Describer Meaning
PA, PB Pin flags for beam ends A and B, respectively; used to remove connections between
the grid point and selected degrees-of-freedom of the beam. The degrees-of-
freedom are defined in the element’s coordinate system and the pin flags are
applied at the offset ends of the beam (see Figure 9-15). The beam must have
stiffness associated with the PA and PB degrees-of-freedom to be released by the
pin flags. For example, if PA = 4, the PBEAM entry must have a nonzero value
for J, the torsional stiffness. (Up to five of the unique Integers 1 through 6 with
no embedded blanks.) Pin flags are not allowed for beam p-elements. Pin flags
combined with offsets are not allowed for SOL 600. Pin flags are not presently
allowed in SOL 700. Also, Pig flags should not be used in nonlinear analysis when
there is large displacement.
W1A, W2A, W3A Components of offset vectors from the grid points to the end points of the axis of
W1B, W2B, W3B the shear center. See Remarks 7., 8. and 9. (Real; Default = 0.0)
SA, SB Scalar or grid point identification numbers for the ends A and B, respectively. The
degrees-of-freedom at these points are the warping variables dθ ⁄ dx . SA and SB
cannot be specified for beam p-elements. (Integers ≥ 0 or blank)
*See the BEAMOR entry for default options for field 3 and fields 6 through 9.
Remarks:
numbers.
2. For an additional explanation of the beam element, see the Beam Element (CBEAM) (p. 49) in the .
Figure 9-15 defines beam element geometry:
yma
zelem
yna Nonstructural Mass
zma
zna Center of Gravity
yelem
Plane 2
Plane 1 v
End A (0, 0, 0)
Neutral Axis
w a offset xelem v
ymb
Grid Point GA Shear Center ynb zmb
znb
End B (xb, 0, 0)
w b offset
Grid Point GB
Figure 9-15 CBEAM Element Geometry System (Non p-adaptive)
Main Index
1412 CBEAM
As
FEEDGE Bs
ZA
V
YA
WB
WA A XA
YB GB
YA
V BIT
ZB XB
GA B
Figure 9-16 CBEAM Element Geometry System (p-adaptive)
zelem yelem
Plane 1
Plane 2
M1
V2 M2
Neutral Axis
V1
Fx
xelem
Shear Center
Tx
Figure 9-17 CBEAM Internal Element Forces and Moments
3. If field 6 is an integer, then G0 is used. If field 6 is blank or real, then X1, X2, X3 is used.
4. G0 cannot be located at GA or GB.
5. The rules for the continuations entries are:
• Both continuations may be omitted if there are no pin flags, offsets, or warping variables.
Main Index
CBEAM 1413
• If the second continuation is used, then the first continuation must be included, even if all fields
are blank.
• If the second continuation is omitted, torsional stiffness due to warping of the cross section will
not be considered.
6. If warping is allowed (SA and SB > 0), then SA and SB must be defined with SPOINT or GRID
entries. If GRID entries are used, the warping degree-of-freedom is attached to the first (T1)
component. In addition, SPOINT ID is recommended for SA and SB if GROUNDCHECK is
requested in case control.
7. Offset vectors are treated like rigid elements. Two methods are available for the computation of
offsets: original and enhanced. The default method is the original method. The enhanced method is
requested by the Bulk Data entry MDLPRM,OFFDEF,LROFF. For options of offsets, please refer
to the Bulk Data entry MDLPRM,OFFDEF,option.
For SOLs 106, 129, 153, and 159 the differential stiffness for offset vectors will give incorrect results
with PARAM, LGDISP, 1.
8. If the CBEAM element is referenced by a PSET or PVAL entry, then a p-version formulation is used
and the element can have curved edges.
• By default, the edge of the element is considered straight unless the element is a p-element and
the edge is associated to curved geometry with a FEEDGE entry.
• If a curved edge of a p-element is shared by an h-element without midside nodes, the geometry of
the edge is ignored and considered to be straight. Edges with midside nodes cannot be shared by
p-elements.
• For the beam p-element, components of the offset vectors parallel to the beam axis (FEEDGE)
will be ignored.
• For the beam p-element, offset vectors can only be specified in the displacement coordinate
systems at the grid points.
9. If the element is a p-version element, BIT in field 9 contains the value of the built-in-twist measured
in radians. Otherwise, OFFT in field 9 is a character string code that describes how the offset and
orientation vector components are to be interpreted. By default (string input is GGG or blank), the
offset vectors are measured in the displacement coordinate systems at grid points A and B and the
orientation vector is measured in the displacement coordinate system of grid point A. At user option,
the offset vectors can be measured in an offset system relative to grid points A and B, and the
orientation vector can be measured in the basic system as indicated in the following table:

Main Index
1414 CBEAM

are then used to define the z and y axes of the offset system. A vector is formed from a cross product
of a vector going from Grid A to Grid B and the orientation vector to create the offset coordinate z-
direction. To obtain a nonzero cross product the orientation vector must not be parallel to both
vectors from Grid A to Grid B for the offset coordinate system and End A and End B for the element
coordinate system. (Note: The character “O” in the table replaces the obsolete character “E”.)
10. For RC network solver in thermal analysis, the X1, X2, X3, OFFT, PA, PB, W1A, W2A, W3A,W1B,
W2B, W3B, SA and SB are ignored.
Main Index
CBEAM3 1415
Three-Node Beam Element Connection
CBEAM3 Three-Node Beam Element Connection
Defines a three-node beam element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CBEAM3 EID PID GA GB GC X1 X2 X3
W1A W2A W3A W1B W2B W3B W1C W2C
W3C TWA TWB TWC SA SB SC
Example:
CBEAM3 101 2 201 332 1000 1.0 3.5 -2.0
3.0 3.0 2.2 -1.0
2.5 10. 15. 20.0 206 301 312

CBEAM3 EID PID GA GB GC G0
W1A W2A W3A W1B W2B W3B W1C W2C
W3C TWA TWB TWC SA SB SC
CBEAM3 101 2 201 332 1000 105

3.0 2.2 1.0
2.5 10. 15. 20.0 206 301 312
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of PBEAM3 or PBMSECT entries. (Integer
> 0; Required)
GA, GB, GC Grid point identification numbers of connection points. GA and GB are grid
point identification numbers at the two ends of the beam element while GC
is the one at the grid point in between. (Integer > 0 or blank; GA, GB and
GC must be distinct from each other. See Remark 6.)
X1, X2, X3 Components of orientation vector v , from GA, in the displacement
coordinate system at GA. (Real)
G0 Alternate method to supply the orientation vector v using grid point G0.
The direction of v is from GA to G0. v is then transferred to End A.
(Integer > 0; G0 ≠ GA or GB or GC)
Main Index
1416 CBEAM3
Describer Meaning
WiA, WiB, WiC Components of offsets vectors, measured in the displacement coordinate
systems at grid points A, B, and C, from the grid points to the points on the
axis of shear center. See Remark 9. (Real; Default = 0.0)
TWA, TWB, TWC Pretwist angles in degrees at A, B, and C, respectively. (Real; Default = 0.0)
SA, SB, SC Scalar or grid point identification numbers for A, B, and C, respectively. The
degrees of freedom at these points are warping variables. (Integer > 0 or
blank)
Remarks:
numbers.
2. If field 7 is an integer, then G0 is used. If field 7 is blank or real, then X1, X2, X3 are used.
3. G0 cannot be located at GA or GB or GC.
4. If warping effect is included in the analysis (SA, SB and SC > 0), then SA, SB, and SC must be defined
with either SPOINT or GRID entries. If GRID entries are used, the warping degree of freedom is
attached to the first (T1) component. In addition, SPOINT ID is recommended for SA, SB and SC
if GROUNDCHECK is requested in case control.
5. BEAMOR cannot be used to set up default options for field 3 and fields 6 through 8 for CBEAM3
entries.
6. If GC is left blank, then the element degenerates to a formulation similar to the two-node straight
beam element. The two-node straight beam formulation is not the CBEAM formulation and will
result in overly stiff results with warping and shear center offset. This is because the CBEAM3 is a
Variational Asymptotic Beam Section that generalizes Timoshenko beam theory and requires the mid
node for accuracy.
7. This entry is not available in SOL 600.
8. For CBEAM3 referencing composite PBMSECT which has CORE/LAYER keywords, it is
recommended that CBEAM3 has 3 nodes and 3 warping DOFs.
Main Index
CBEAM3 1417
Locus of Shear
Center
C eb
Z elem Y elem
et
V Wc
A en
X elem
Wa B
GC
GA Wb
GB
Figure 9-18 CBEAM3 Element Geometry System
eb
ez
ey
Shear
Center en
Figure 9-19 Local Coordinate System on Beam Cross-Section
9. Offset vectors are treated like rigid elements. Two methods are available for the computation of
offsets: original and enhanced. The default method is the original method. The enhanced method is
requested by the Bulk Data entry MDLPRM,OFFDEF,LROFF. For options of offsets, please refer
to the Bulk Data entry MDLPRM,OFFDEF,option.
Main Index
1418 CBEND
Curved Beam or Pipe Element Connection
CBEND Curved Beam or Pipe Element Connection
Defines a curved beam, curved pipe, or elbow element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CBEND EID PID GA GB X1 X2 X3 GEOM
Example:
CBEND 32 39 17 19 6.2 5.1 -1.2 3

CBEND EID PID GA GB G0 GEOM
CBEND 32 39 17 19 106 3
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PBEND entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
at GA. (Real)
G0 Alternate method to supply the orientation vector v using grid point G0. Direction of
v is from GA to G0. v is then translated to End A. (Integer > 0; G0 ≠ GA or GB)
GEOM Flag to select specification of the bend element. See Remark 3. (1 ≤ Integer ≤ 4; No
Default)
Remarks:
1. Element identification numbers must be unique with respect to all other element identification
numbers.
Main Index
CBEND 1419
2. For an additional explanation of the CBEND element, see the PBEND entry description. Figure 9-20
and Figure 9-21 define the element coordinate system and internal forces and moments.
Arc of the
Geometric Centroid
Center of
Curvature
zelem Arc of the

Neutral Axis
θB
Plane 2
End A GA
GB
Relem
v
θelem ΔN
Plane 1 ZC
End B RC RB
(Note that Plane 1 is parallel to the

plane defined by GA, GB, and v.)
Figure 9-20 CBEND Element Coordinate System
zelem
Plane 2
GA
M1
GB
Relem V2
v
θelem
Plane 1 V1
M2 Fθ Mθ
Figure 9-21 CBEND Element Internal Forces and Moments
Main Index
1420 CBEND
3. The options for element connection to GA, GB using GEOM are the following.
Table 2 GEOM Options
Configuration GEOM Description

O 1 The center of curvature lies on the line AO (or its
extension) or vector v .
A B
2 The tangent of centroid arc at end A is parallel to line

A B AO or vector v . Point O (or vector v ) and the arc AB
must be on the same side of the chord AB .
O
3 The bend radius (RB) is specified on the PBEND
RB entry: Points A, B, and O (or vector v ) define a plane
parallel or coincident with the plane of the element arc.
A B Point O (or vector v ) lies on the opposite side of line
AB from the center of the curvature.
O
4 THETAB is specified on the PBEND entry. Points A,
B, and O (or vector v ) define a plane parallel or
coincident with the plane of the element arc. Point O
THETAB
(or vector v ) lies on the opposite side of line AB from
A B the center of curvature.
4. For RC network solver in thermal analysis, the X1, X2, X3 and GEOM are ignored.
Main Index
CBUSH 1421
Generalized Spring-and-Damper Connection
CBUSH Generalized Spring-and-Damper Connection
Defines a generalized spring-and-damper structural element that may be nonlinear or frequency dependent.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CBUSH EID PID GA GB GO/X1 X2 X3 CID
S OCID S1 S2 S3
Example 1: Noncoincident grid points.

CBUSH 39 6 1 100 75
Example 2: GB not specified.

CBUSH 39 6 1 0
Example 3: Coincident grid points ( GA ≠ GB ).

CBUSH 39 6 1 6
Example 4: Noncoincident grid points with fields 6 through 9 blank and a spring-damper offset.
CBUSH 39 6 1 600
0.25 10 0. 10. 10.
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PBUSH entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
GA, GB Grid point identification number of connection points. See Remark 6. (GA > 0,
GB ≥ 0 or blank)
Xi Components of orientation vector v , from GA, in the displacement coordinate system
at GA. (Real)
GO Alternate method to supply vector v using grid point GO. Direction of v is from GA
to GO. v is then transferred to End A. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0)
CID Element coordinate system identification. A 0 value means the basic coordinate system
will be used. If CID is blank, then the element coordinate system is determined from
GO or Xi. See Figure 9-22 and Remark 3. (Integer > 0 or blank)
S Location of spring damper. See Figure 9-21. (Real; Default = 0.5)
Main Index
1422 CBUSH
Describer Meaning
OCID Coordinate system identification of spring-damper offset. See Remark 9. (Integer > -1;
Default = -1, which means the offset point lies on the line between GA and GB
according to Figure 9-22)
S1, S2, S3 Components of spring-damper offset in the OCID coordinate system if OCID > 0. See
Figure 9-23 and Remark 9. (Real)
Remarks:
numbers.
2. Figure 9-22 shows the bush element geometry.
3. CID > 0 overrides GO and Xi. Then the element x-axis is along T1, the element y-axis is along T2,
and the element z-axis is along T3 of the CID coordinate system. If the CID refers to a cylindrical
coordinate system or a spherical coordinate system, then grid GA is used to locate the system. If for
cylindrical or spherical coordinate, GA falls on the z-axis used to define them, it is recommended that
another CID be selected to define the element x-axis. Nastran does not convect user specified
coordinate systems, thus with this option, in nonlinear analysis the element stiffness direction does
not change with deformation.
4. For noncoincident grids ( GA ≠ GB ), when GO or (X1, X2, X3) is given and no CID is specified, the
line AB is the element x-axis and the orientation vector v lies in the x-y plane (similar to the CBEAM
element).
5. For noncoincident grids ( GA ≠ GB ), if neither GO or (X1, X2, X3) is specified and no CID is
specified, then the line AB is the element x-axis. This option is valid only when K1 (or B1) or K4 (or
B4) or both on the PBUSH entry are specified (but K2, K3, K5, K6 or B2, B3, B5, B6 are not
specified). If K2, K3, K5, or K6 (or B2, B3, B5, or B6) are specified, a fatal message will be issued.
6. If the distance between GA and GB is less than .0001, or if GB is blank, then CID must be specified.
GB blank implies that B is a grounded terminal, a gounded terminal is a point with a displacement
that is constrained to zero.
7. If PID references a PBUSHT entry, then the CBUSH element may only be defined in the residual
structure and cannot be attached to any omitted degrees-of-freedom.
8. Element impedance output is computed in the CID coordinate system. The impedances in this
system are uncoupled.
9. If OCID = -1 or blank (default) then S is used and S1, S2, S3 are ignored. If OCID > 0, then S is
ignored and S1, S2, S3 are used.
Main Index
CBUSH 1423
z elem
GA v
y elem
S•l
(1 – S) ⋅ l
Bush location
GB
x elem
Figure 9-22 CBUSH Element
z elem
y elem
Bush location
CID
x elem
( S1, S2, S3 ) OCID
GB
GA
The material stiffness and damping properties of
the elastomer are located at (S1, S2, S3).
Figure 9-23 Definition of Offset S1, S2, S3
10. When CID > 0, the element x-axis is set as in Remark 3. This means that the element force is always
computed as Ke ⋅ ( UB – UA ) ; if UA > UB , a compressive force will result. This is unlike the GO or Xi
options, where relative positive elongation in tension and relative negative elongation is compression.
11. The CBUSH element is designed to satisfy rigid body equilibrium requirements. For noncoincident
grids, internal rigid links connect the bush location to the grid locations. This results in coupling
between translational and rotational degrees-of-freedom at the grids even when no rotational springs
or dampers are specified on the PBUSH.
Main Index
1424 CBUSH
12. For SOL 600, if G0, X1, X2, X3, CID or OCID are entered, a Severe Warning will be issued and
Marc will not run. SOL 600 translates the spring and damping terms in global coordinates of GA and
GB and will use K1 to K6 and B1 to B6 whether or not GA and GB are coincident or not. S, S1, S2,
S3 are ignored. CID is ignored unless it is zero, in which case K1 and B1 are along the axis of GA to
GB and K2-K6 and B2-B6 are ignored if entered.
Main Index
CBUSH1D 1425
Rod Type Spring-and-Damper Connection
CBUSH1D Rod Type Spring-and-Damper Connection
Defines the connectivity of a one-dimensional spring and viscous damper element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CBUSH1D EID PID GA GB CID
Example:
CBUSH1D 35 102 108 112
Describer Meaning Default Values

EID Element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) Required
PID Property identification number of a PBUSH1D entry. (Integer > EID
0)
GA Grid point id of first grid. Required
GB Grid point id of second grid blank
CID Coordinate system id. (Integer > 0) blank
Remarks:
1. For noncoincident grids GA ≠ GB and if CID is blank, the line GA to GB is the element axis. In
geometric nonlinear analysis, the element axis (line GA to GB) follows the deformation of grids GA
and GB. See Figure 9-24.
2. If CID > 0 is specified, the x-axis of the CID coordinate system is the element axis. In geometric
nonlinear analysis, the element axis (x-axis of CID) remains fixed.
3. If GA and GB are coincident or if GB is blank, then CID > 0 must be specified and the element axis
is the x-axis of CID.
GB
GA
Figure 9-24 Spring and Damper Element
Main Index
1426 CBUSH2D
2-D Linear-Nonlinear Connection
CBUSH2D 2-D Linear-Nonlinear Connection
Defines the connectivity of a two-dimensional Linear-Nonlinear element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CBUSH2D EID PID GA GB CID PLANE
Example:
CBUSH2D 100 101 1001 2001 0 XY
Describer Meaning
EID Element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000; Required)
PID Property identification number of a PBUSH2D. (Integer > 0; Required)
GA Inner grid. (Integer > 0; Required)
GB Outer grid. (Integer > 0; Required)
CID Coordinate system used to define 2-D plane. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
PLANE Orientation plane in CID: XY, YZ, ZX, see Remark 1. (Character; Default = ‘XY’)
Remarks:
1. The XY, YZ, and ZX planes are relative to the displacements coordinates of GA and GB. The planes
correspond to directions 1 and 2. GA and GB should be coincident grids with parallel displacement
coordinate systems. The coordinate systems are not checked. Wrong answers will be produced if this
rule is not followed.
Main Index
CCONEAX 1427
Axisymmetric Shell Element Connection
CCONEAX Axisymmetric Shell Element Connection
Defines a conical shell element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CCONEAX EID PID RA RB
Example:
CCONEAX 1 2 3 4
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PCONEAX entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
RA Identification number of a RINGAX entry. (Integer > 0; RA ≠ RB )
RB Identification number of a RINGAX entry. (Integer > 0; RA ≠ RB )
Remarks:
1. This element has limited capabilities. See the MSC Nastran Reference Manual, Section 5.3.3.
2. This entry is allowed only if an AXIC entry is also present.
3. In order to reference this entry on a SET Case Control command, the ID must be modified by
IDn = ID ⋅ 1000 + n
where n is the harmonic number plus one and IDn is the value specified on the SET entry.
Main Index
1428 CDAMP1
Scalar Damper Connection
CDAMP1 Scalar Damper Connection
Defines a scalar damper element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP1 EID PID G1 C1 G2 C2
Example:
CDAMP1 19 6 0 23 2
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PDAMP property entry. (Integer > 0;
Default = EID)
G1, G2 Geometric grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 ≤ Integer ≤ 6; blank or zero if scalar point.)
Remarks:
1. Scalar points may be used for G1 and/or G2, in which case the corresponding C1 and/or C2 must be
zero or blank. Zero or blank may be used to indicate a grounded terminal G1 or G2 with a
corresponding blank or zero C1 or C2. A grounded terminal is a point with a displacement that is
constrained to zero.
numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2), must be distinct.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 159) in the .
5. When CDAMP1 is used in heat transfer analysis, it generates a lumped heat capacity.
6. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
7. If Gi refers to a grid point then Ci refers to degrees-of-freedom(s) in the displacement coordinate
system specified by CD on the GRID entry.
Main Index
CDAMP1D 1429
Scalar Damper Connection for SOL 700 Only
CDAMP1D Scalar Damper Connection for SOL 700 Only
Defines a scalar damper connection for use in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP1D EID PID G1 C1 G2 C2
CORD FOLLOW
Example:
CDAMP1D 1001 101 55 1
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PDAMPn entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; 0 or up to six unique integers, 1 through 6 may
be specified in the field with no embedded blanks. 0 applies to scalar points and 1
through 6 applies to grid points.)
CORD Number of a coordinate system in which the degree-of-freedom (C1,C2) is defined.
(Integer > 0)
FOLLOW Method to update the direction vector in which the damper acts: FOLLOW=CORD:
direction vector follows the motion of the coordinate system as specified under CORD.
Remark:
numbers.
system specified by CD on the GRID entry.Available in SOL 700 only.
Main Index
1430 CDAMP2
Scalar Damper Property and Connection
CDAMP2 Scalar Damper Property and Connection
Defines a scalar damper element without reference to a material or property entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP2 EID B G1 C1 G2 C2
Example:
CDAMP2 16 2.98 32 1
Describer Meaning
B Value of the scalar damper. (Real)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 ≤ Integer ≤ 6; blank or zero if scalar point.)
Remarks:
numbers.
8. RC network solver does not support CDAMP2 for thermal analysis.
Main Index
CDAMP2D 1431
Scalar Damper Connection for SOL 700 Only
CDAMP2D Scalar Damper Connection for SOL 700 Only
Defines a scalar damper connection for use in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP2D EID B G1 C1 G2 C2
CORD FOLLOW
Example:
CDAMP2D 1001 101 55 1
Describer Meaning
B Value of the scalar damper. (Real)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; 0 or up to six unique integers, 1 through 6 may
be specified in the field with no embedded blanks. 0 applies to scalar points and 1
through 6 applies to grid points.)
(Integer > 0)
FOLLOW Method to update the direction vector in which the damper acts: FOLLOW=CORD:
direction vector follows the motion of the coordinate system as specified under CORD.
Remark:
numbers.
system specified by CD on the GRID entry. Available in SOL 700 only.
Main Index
1432 CDAMP3
Scalar Damper Connection to Scalar Points Only
CDAMP3 Scalar Damper Connection to Scalar Points Only
Defines a scalar damper element that is connected only to scalar points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP3 EID PID S1 S2
Example:
CDAMP3 16 978 24 36
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PDAMP entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
S1, S2 Scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; S1 ≠ S2 )
Remarks:
1. S1 or S2 may be blank or zero, indicating a constrained coordinate.
numbers.
3. Only one scalar damper element may be defined on a single entry.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Guide.
Main Index
CDAMP4 1433
Scalar Damper Property and Connection to Scalar Points Only
CDAMP4 Scalar Damper Property and Connection to Scalar Points Only
Defines a scalar damper element that connected only to scalar points and without reference to a material or
property entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP4 EID B S1 S2
Example:
CDAMP4 16 -2.6 4 9
Describer Meaning
B Scalar damper value. (Real)
Remarks:
numbers.
3. Only one scalar damper element may be defined on a single entry.
Reference Guide.
5. If this entry is used in heat transfer analysis, it generates a lumped heat capacity.
Main Index
1434 CDAMP5
Scalar Damper with Material Property
CDAMP5 Scalar Damper with Material Property
Defines a damping element that refers to a material property entry and connection to grid or scalar points.
This element is intended for heat transfer analysis only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP5 EID PID G1 G2
Example:
CDAMP5 1 4 10 20
Describer Meaning
PID Identification number of a PDAMP5 property entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
G1, G2 Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0 and G1 ≠ G2 )
Remarks:
1. G1 or G2 may be blank or zero indicating a constraint.
numbers.
3. CDAMP5 generates a lumped heat capacity in heat transfer analysis.
4. A scalar point specified on CDAMP5 need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
5. This entry is not supported in SOL 600.
Main Index
CDUMi 1435
Dummy Element Connection
CDUMi Dummy Element Connection
Defines a dummy element (3 < i <7).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDUMi EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 -etc.-
A1 A2 -etc.-
Example:
CDUM3 114 108 2 5 6 8 11
2.4 3.E4 2 50
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PDUMi entry. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid point identification numbers of connection points. (Integer > 0; G1 ≠ G2
… ≠ GN )
Ai Additional fields. (Real or Integer)
Remarks:
1. The user must write the associated element subroutines for matrix generation, stress recovery, etc.,
and perform a link edit to replace the dummy routines. See the MSC Nastran Programmer’s Manual.
2. If no property entry is required, PID may contain the material identification number.
3. Additional entries are defined in the user-written element routines.
4. The fields on this entry are required to be defined on the corresponding ADUMi entry. This entry
requires a license for "USER MODIFIABLE Nastran" Other than the EID field, all field checking
is the responsibility of the user supplied code.
Main Index
1436 CELAS1
Scalar Spring Connection
CELAS1 Scalar Spring Connection
Defines a scalar spring element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS1 EID PID G1 C1 G2 C2
Example:
CELAS1 2 6 8 1
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PELAS entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if scalar point.)
Remarks:
constrained to zero. If only scalar points and/or ground are involved, it is more efficient to use the
CELAS3 entry.
numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2) must be distinct.
7. It is recommended that for most applications the grids connected by CELAS1 entries be coincident
and the displacement coordinate systems of each grid be conguent. Connecting non-ocincident grids
and/or non-congruent coordinate systems can lead to models that do not pass strain energy checks
(see the GROUNDCHECK (Case)Case Control command).
Main Index
CELAS1D 1437
Scalar Spring Connection for SOL 700 Only
CELAS1D Scalar Spring Connection for SOL 700 Only
Defines a scalar spring connection for use in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS1D EID PID G1 C1 G2 C2
CORD FOLLOW
Example:
CELAS1D 1001 101 55 1 8 1
Describer Meaning
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; 0 or up to six unique, 1 through 6 may be
specified in the field with no embedded blanks. 0 applies to scalar points and 1 through
6 applies to grid points.)
(Integer > 0) (SOL 700 only)
FOLLOW Method to update the direction vector in which the spring acts:
For SOL 700:
FOLLOW=CORD: Direction vector follows the motion of the coordinate system as
specified under CORD.
Remarks:
CELAS3 entry.
numbers.
Reference Guide.
Main Index
1438 CELAS1D

7. Available in SOL 700 only.
8. It is recommended that for most applications the grids connected by CELAS1D entries be coincident
Main Index
CELAS2 1439
Scalar Spring Property and Connection
CELAS2 Scalar Spring Property and Connection
Defines a scalar spring element without reference to a property entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS2 EID K G1 C1 G2 C2 GE S
Example:
CELAS2 28 6.2+3 32 19 4
Describer Meaning
K Stiffness of the scalar spring. (Real)
G1, G2 Geometric grid point or scalar identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; 0 blank or zero if scalar point.)
GE Damping coefficient. See Remarks 6. and 8. (Real)
S Stress coefficient. (Real)
Remarks:
CELAS4 entry.
numbers.
Reference Guide.
6. If PARAM,W4 is not specified, GE is ignored in transient analysis. See Parameters, 739.
7. If Gi refers to a grid point then Ci refers to degrees-of-freedom in the displacement coordinate system
specified by CD on the GRID entry.
8. To obtain the damping coefficient GE, multiply the critical damping ratio C ⁄ C 0 by 2.0.
Main Index
1440 CELAS2D
CELAS2D Scalar Spring Connection for SOL 700 Only
Defines a scalar spring connection for use in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS2D EID K G1 C1 G2 C2
CORD FOLLOW
Example:
CELASD2 1001 101 55 1 8 1
Describer Meaning
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; 0 or up to six unique, 1 through 6 may be
specified in the field with no embedded blanks. 0 applies to scalar points and 1 through
6 applies to grid points.)
(Integer > 0)
FOLLOW Method to update the direction vector in which the spring acts:
FOLLOW=CORD: Direction vector follows the motion of the coordinate system as
specified under CORD.
Remarks:
CELAS4 entry.
numbers.
Reference Guide.
6. If Gi refers to a grid point then Ci refers to degrees-of-freedom in the displacement coordinate system
specified by CD on the GRID entry.
Main Index
CELAS2D 1441
7. It is recommended that for most applications the grids connected by CELAS2D entries be coincident
Main Index
1442 CELAS3
Scalar Spring Connection to Scalar Points Only
CELAS3 Scalar Spring Connection to Scalar Points Only
Defines a scalar spring element that connects only to scalar points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS3 EID PID S1 S2
Example:
CELAS3 19 2 14 15
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
numbers.
3. Only one scalar spring element may be defined on a single entry.
Reference Guide.
Main Index
CELAS4 1443
Scalar Spring Property and Connection to Scalar Points Only
CELAS4 Scalar Spring Property and Connection to Scalar Points Only
Defines a scalar spring element that is connected only to scalar points, without reference to a property entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS4 EID K S1 S2
Example:
CELAS4 42 6.2-3 2
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. S1 or S2, but not both, may be blank or zero indicating a constrained coordinate.
numbers.
3. A structural damping coefficient is not available with CELAS4. The value of g is assumed to be 0.0.
4. No stress coefficient is available with CELAS4.
5. Only one scalar spring element may be defined on a single entry.
Reference Guide.
Main Index
1444 CFAST
A Shell Patch Fastener Connection
CFAST A Shell Patch Fastener Connection
Defines a fastener with material orientation connecting two surface patches. Large displacement and large
rotational effects are supported when in SOL 600 and SOL 400.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CFAST EID PID TYPE IDA IDB GS GA GB
XS YS ZS
Example using PROP:

CFAST 3 20 PROP 21 24 206
Example using ELEM:

CFAST 7 70 ELEM 27 74 707
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PFAST entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
TYPE Specifies the surface patch definition: (Character)
If TYPE = ‘PROP’, the surface patch connectivity between patch A and patch B is
defined with two PSHELL (or PCOMP) properties with property ids given by IDA and
IDB. See Remark 1. and Figure 9-25.
If TYPE = ‘ELEM’, the surface patch connectivity between patch A and patch B is
defined with two shell element ids given by IDA and IDB. See Remark 1. and
Figure 9-25.
IDA,IDB Property id (for PROP option) or Element id (for ELEM option) defining patches A
and B. IDA ≠ IDB (Integer > 0)
GS Grid point defining the location of the fastener. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0 or blank)
GA,GB Grid ids of piercing points on patches A and B. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0 or blank)
XS,YS,ZS Location of the fastener in basic. Required if neither GS nor GA is defined. See Remark
2. (Real or blank)
Remarks:
1. The CFAST defines a flexible connection between two surface patches. The number of unique
physical grids connected depends on the location for the piercing points GA and GB and the size of
the diameter D (see PFAST, 2742).
Main Index
CFAST 1445
A Shell Patch Fastener Connection
GS
PIDB
GB
PIDA
L
SHIDB GA
D SHIDA
Figure 9-25 Patches Defined with TYPE= ‘PROP’ or TYPE = ‘ELEM’
2. GS defines the approximate location of the fastener in space. GS is projected onto the surface patches
A and B. The resulting piercing points GA and GB define the axis of the fastener. GS does not have
to lie on the surfaces of the patches. GS must be able to project normals to the two patches. GA can
be specified in lieu of GS, in which case GS will be ignored. If neither GS nor GA is specified, then
(XS, YS, ZS) in basic must be specified.
If both GA and GB are specified, they must lie on or at least have projections onto surface patches A
and B respectively. If GA and GB are both specified, GS is ignored. By default, the locations of user
specified GA and GB will not be changed. If the user specifies "SWLDPRM, MOVGAB, 1,", then
the locations will be corrected so that they lie on the surface patches A and B within machine
precision. The length of the fastener is the final distance between GA and GB. If the length is zero,
the normal to patch A is used to define the axis of the fastener.
Diagnostic printouts, checkout runs and control of search and projection parameters are requested on
the SWLDPRM Bulk Data entry.
3. The use of param,cfdiagp,yes and param,cfrandel,real_fraction_value allows for the random removal
of a percentage of CFAST elements for failure studies.
5. If used in a multi-physics coupled problem using SUBSTEP, they participate in the mechanical
substep but are ignored in the heat transfer subsstep through automatic deactivation. For more
information on deactivation, see the DEACTEL keyword under the NLMOPTS Bulk Data entry and
the associated Remark 9 for that entry.
6. In SOL400, the behavior of this element in regard to large rotation is affected by the Case Control
Command Rigid.
7. If partitioned superelements are present, then CFAST is supported in the main Bulk Data section
only.
Main Index
1446 CFLUIDi
CFLUIDi Fluid Element Connections
Defines three types of fluid elements for an axisymmetric fluid model.
Formats:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CFLUID2 EID IDF1 IDF2 RHO B
CFLUID3 EID IDF1 IDF2 IDF3 RHO B
CFLUID4 EID IDF1 IDF2 IDF3 IDF4 RHO B
Examples:
CFLUID2 100 11 14 .025 0.0
CFLUID3 110 15 13 12 1.2
CFLUID4 120 11 15 12 14
Describer Meaning
IDFi Identification number of a RINGFL entry. (Integer > 0; IDF1 ≠ IDF2 ≠ IDF3 ≠ IDF4 ; all
IDFi < 500000)
RHO Mass density. (Real > 0.0; Default is the value of DRHO on the AXIF entry)
B Bulk modulus, pressure per volume ratio. (Real; Default is the value of DB on the AXIF
entry)
Remarks:
1. CFLUIDi is allowed only if an AXIF entry is also present.
2. Element identification number must be unique with respect to all other fluid, scalar, and structural
elements.
Main Index
CFLUIDi 1447
3. The volume defined by IDFi is a body of revolution about the polar axis of the fluid coordinate system
defined by AXIF. CFLUID2 defines a thick disk with IDF1 and IDF2 defining the outer corners as
shown in Figure 9-26:
15
Polar
Axis
14
φ = 0.0
Element Element Element

100, 120, 110,
CFLUID2 CFLUID4 CFLUID3
11 12 13
Radius
Figure 9-26 CFLUIDi Examples
4. All interior angles must be less than 180°.

5. The order of connected RINGFL points is arbitrary.
6. If B = 0.0, the fluid is incompressible.
Main Index
1448 CGAP
Gap Element Connection
CGAP Gap Element Connection
Defines a gap or friction element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CGAP EID PID GA GB X1 X2 X3 CID
Example:
CGAP 17 2 110 112 5.2 0.3 -6.1

CGAP EID PID GA GB GO CID
CGAP 17 2 110 112 13
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PGAP entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
GA, GB Connected grid points at ends A and B. (Integers > 0; GA ≠ GB )
X1, X2, X3 Components of the orientation vector v , from GA, in the displacement coordinate
system at GA. (Real)
GO Alternate method to supply the orientation vector v using grid point GO. Direction of
v is from GA to GO. (Integer > 0)
CID Element coordinate system identification number. CID must be specified if GA and GB
are coincident (distance from GA to GB < 10 –4 ). See Remark 6. (Integer > 0 or blank)
Remarks:
1. The CGAP element is intended for the nonlinear solution sequences 106, 129, 153, 159, and 400.
However, it will produce a linear stiffness matrix for the other solutions, but remains linear with the
initial stiffness. The stiffness used depends on the value for the initial gap opening (U0 field in the
PGAP entry).
2. The gap element coordinate system is defined by one of two following methods:
• If the coordinate system (CID field) is specified, the element coordinate system is established
using that coordinate system, in which the element x-axis is in the T1 direction and the y-axis in
the T2 direction. The orientation vector v will be ignored in this case.
• If the CID field is blank and the grid points GA and GB are not coincident (distance from A to
–4
B ≥ 10 ), then the line AB is the element x-axis and the orientation vector v lies in the x-y plane
(like the CBEAM element).
Main Index
CGAP 1449
Gap Element Connection
3. The element coordinate system does not rotate as a result of deflections.

4. Initial gap openings are specified on the PGAP entry and not derived from the separation distance
between GA and GB.
5. Forces are requested with the FORCE or NLSTRESS Case Control command. The NLSTRESS
command is only for nonlinear solutions, and the output also includes the gap STATUS. Forces are
output in the element coordinate system. The force F x is positive for compression.
6. If CID is being used to define the element coordinate system and the CID refers to either a cylindrical
or spherical coordinate system then grid GA will be used to locate the system. If grid GA lies on the
z-axis of the cylindrical or spherical coordinate system it is recommended that a different coordinate
system be used for this element.
7. See PARAM,CDITER for an alternative approach.
zelem
yelem
KA and KB in this
figure are from the
PGAP entry.
GA
xelem v
KB KA - KB
GB
Figure 9-27 CGAP Element Coordinate System
8. Since a large stiffness is used for KA (the closed GAP stiffness), param,g damping should be avoided.
Instead damping should be specified on the MATi entries and PARAM,W4 set.
Main Index
1450 CHACAB
Acoustic Absorber Element Connection
CHACAB Acoustic Absorber Element Connection
Defines the acoustic absorber element in coupled fluid-structural analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHACAB EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12
G17 G18 G19 G20
Example:
CHACAB 95 12 1 2 5 7 8 9
24 23
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PACABS entry. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid point identification numbers of connection points. (Integer > 0 or blank)
Remarks:
numbers.
2. Grid points G1 through G4 must be given in consecutive order about one quadrilateral face. G5
through G8 must be on the opposite face with G5 opposite G1, G6 opposite G2, etc.
3. The edge points, G9 to G20, are optional. Any or all of them may be deleted. If the ID of any edge
connection point is left blank or set to zero (as for G9 and G10 in the example), the equations of the
element are adjusted to give correct results for the reduced number of connections. Corner grid
points cannot be deleted.
4. The second continuation is optional.
5. It is recommended that the edge points be located within the middle third of the edge.
6. The face consisting of grid points G1 through G4 and G9 through G12 is assumed to be in contact
with the structure.
Main Index
CHACAB 1451
Acoustic Absorber Element Connection
G18
G7
G6
G19
G17
G20
G8
G2
G10 G5
G3
G11 G9
G4 G12
G1
Figure 9-28 CHACAB Element Connection
7. The mass is lumped to the face formed by grid points G5 through G8 and G17 through G20 and
defined to be in contact with the fluid. The opposite face has no mass contribution due to the
absorber element. Also, the face in contact with the fluid has only translational stiffness in the
direction normal to the face.
Main Index
1452 CHACBR
Acoustic Barrier Element Connection
CHACBR Acoustic Barrier Element Connection
Defines the acoustic barrier element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHACBR EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12
G17 G18 G19 G20
Example:
CHACBR 95 12 1 2 5 7 8 9
24 23
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PACBAR entry. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid point identification numbers of connection points. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
numbers.
3. The edge points, G9 to G20, are optional. Any or all of them may be deleted. If the ID of any edge
connection point is left blank or set to zero (as for G9 and G10 in the example), the equations of the
element are adjusted to give correct results for the reduced number of connections. Corner grid
points cannot be deleted.
6. The face consisting of grids G1 through G4 and G9 through G12 is assumed to be the backing that
corresponds to MBACK on the PACBAR entry.
7. The face consisting of grid points G5 through G8 and G17 through G20 is assumed to be the septum
that corresponds to MSEPTM on the PACBAR entry.
Main Index
CHACBR 1453
Acoustic Barrier Element Connection
G18
G7
G6
G19
G17
G20
G8
G2
G10 G5
G3
G11 G9
G4 G12
G1
Figure 9-29 CHACBR Element Connection
8. The face in contact with the fluid is defined to be the face formed by grid points G5 through G8 and
G17 through G20 and has only translational stiffness in the direction normal to the face.
Main Index
1454 CHBDYE
Geometric Surface Element Definition (Element Form)
CHBDYE Geometric Surface Element Definition (Element Form)
Defines a boundary condition surface element with reference to a heat conduction element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYE EID EID2 SIDE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB
Example:
CHBDYE 2 10 1 3 3 2 2
Describer Meaning
EID Surface element identification number for a specific side of a particular element. See
Remarks 1. and 9. (Unique (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) among all elements.)
EID2 A heat conduction element identification number. (Integer > 0)
SIDE A consistent element side identification number. See Remark 6. (1 < Integer < 6)
IVIEWF A VIEW entry identification number for the front face of surface element. See Remark
2. for default. (Integer > 0)
IVIEWB A VIEW entry identification number for the back face of surface element. See Remark
2. for default. (Integer > 0)
RADMIDF RADM identification number for front face of surface element. See Remark 2. for
default. (Integer > 0)
RADMIDB RADM identification number for back face of surface element. See Remark 2. for
Remarks:
1. EID is a unique elemental ID associated with a particular surface element. EID2 identifies the general
heat conduction element being considered for this surface element.
2. The defaults for IVIEWF, IVIEWB, RADMIDF, and RADMIDB may be specified on the BDYOR
entry. If a particular field is blank both on the CHBDYE entry and the BDYOR entry, then the
default is zero.
3. For the front face of shell elements, the right-hand rule is used as one progresses around the element
surface from G1 to G2 to ... Gn. For the edges of shell elements or the ends of line elements, an
outward normal is used to define the front surface.
4. If the surface element is to be used in the calculation of view factors, it must have an associated VIEW
entry.
5. All conduction elements to which any boundary condition is to be applied must be individually
identified with the application of one of the surface element entries: CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or
CHBDYP.
Main Index
CHBDYE 1455
6. Side conventions for solid elements.

The sides of the solid elements are numbered consecutively according to the order of the grid point
numbers on the solid element entry. The sides of solid elements are either quadrilaterals or triangles.
For each element type, tabulate the grid points (gp) at the corners of each side.
8-node or 20-node CHEXA
side gp gp gp gp
1 4 3 2 1
2 1 2 6 5
3 2 3 7 6
4 3 4 8 7
5 4 1 5 8
6 5 6 7 8
CPENTA
side gp gp gp gp
1 3 2 1
2 1 2 5 4
3 2 3 6 5
4 3 1 4 6
5 4 5 6
CTETRA
side gp gp gp
1 3 2 1
2 1 2 4
3 2 3 4
4 3 1 4
CPYRAM
Main Index
1456 CHBDYE
side gp gp gp gp
1 3 2 5
2 1 4 5
3 2 1 5
4 3 5 4
5 4 1 2 3
7. Side conventions for shell elements.

Side 1 of shell elements (top) are of an AREA type, and additional sides (2 through a maximum of 5
for a QUAD) are of LINE type. (See CHBDYG, 1458 for surface type definition.)
Area Type Sides -- The first side is that given by the right-hand rule on the shell elements grid points.
Line Type Sides -- The second side (first line) proceeds from grid point 1 to grid point 2 of the shell
element, and the remaining lines are numbered consecutively. The thickness of the line is that of the
shell element, and the normal to the line is outward from the shell element in the plane of the shell.
Note that any midside nodes are ignored in this specification.
For 3-D heat shell elements when used in combination with linear or quadratic nodal temperature
(see option TEMPP of the NLMOPTS entry), SIDE=6 refers to BOT surface. SIDE=1 refers to TOP
surface. The IVIEW and RADM should be filled in consistently in relation with the SIDE entry. E.g.,
when SIDE=1 or 6 then only IVIEWF makes sense.
8. Side conventions for line elements.
LINE elements have one linear side (side 1) with geometry that is the same as that of the element and
two POINT-type sides corresponding to the two points bounding the linear element (first grid point-
side 2; second grid point-side 3).
The TUBE-type element has two linear sides of type TUBE. The first side represents the outside with
diameters equal to that of the outside of the tube. The second side represents the inside with
diameters equal to that of the inside of the tube.
Point Sides -- Point sides may be used with any linear element. The direction of the outward normals
of these points is in line with the element axis, but pointing away from the element. The area assigned
to these POINT-type sides is consistent with the element geometry.
Rev Sides -- The CTRIAX6 element has associated with it three REV sides. The first side is associated
with Grid Points G1, G2, and G3. The positive face identification normals point away from the
element.
Main Index
CHBDYE 1457
9. Application of boundary conditions to CHBDYE is referenced through the EID. Boundary

conditions can reference either the front or back face of the CHBDYE by specifying +EID or -EID
respectively. Correspondingly, the back face is minus the normal vector of the front face. Similarly,
IVIEWF and RADMIDF are associated with +EID and IVIEWB and RADMIDB with -EID. For
radiation problems, if the RADMIDF or RADMIDB is zero, default radiant properties assume
perfect black body behavior.
10. Starting with MSC Nastran 2004, axisymmetric view factors are supported CHBDYG of
TYPE=REV, but not supported CHBDYE. If CHBDYE is used for this, axisymmetric view factors
are not calculated.
Main Index
1458 CHBDYG
Geometric Surface Element Definition (Grid Form)
CHBDYG Geometric Surface Element Definition (Grid Form)
Defines a boundary condition surface element without reference to a property entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYG EID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8
Example:
CHBDYG 2 AREA4 3 3 2 2
100 103 102 101
Describer Meaning
EID Surface element identification number. (Unique (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) among
all elemental entries)
TYPE Surface type. See Remark 3. (Character)
IVIEWF A VIEW entry identification number for the front face. See Remark 2. for default.
(Integer > 0)
IVIEWB A VIEW entry identification number for the back face. See Remark 2. for default.
(Integer > 0)
RADMIDF RADM identification number for front face of surface element. See Remark 2. for
RADMIDB RADM identification number for back face of surface element. See Remark 2. for
Gi Grid point IDs of grids bounding the surface. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. EID is a unique ID associated with a particular surface element as defined by the grid points.
2. The defaults for TYPE, IVIEWF, IVIEWB, RADMIDF, and RADMIDB may be specified on the
BDYOR entry. If a particular field is blank on both the CHBDYG entry and the BDYOR entry,
then the default is zero.
3. TYPE specifies the kind of element surface; allowed types are: REV, REV1, AREA3, AREA4,
AREA6, and AREA8. See Figure 9-30, Figure 9-31, and Figure 9-32.
• TYPE = REV
Main Index
CHBDYG 1459
The “REV” type has two primary grid points that must lie in the x-z plane of the basic coordinate
system with x>0. A midside grid point G3 is optional and supports convection or heat flux from
the edge of the six-noded CTRIAX6 element. The defined area is a conical section with z as the
axis of symmetry. A property entry is required for convection, radiation, or thermal vector flux.
z
G2 n
T
G3
G1
x
y
Figure 9-30 Normal Vector for CHBDYG Element of Type “REV”

.
The unit normal lies in the x-z plane, and is given by
n = ( ey × T ) ⁄ ey × T .
ey is the unit vector in the y direction.

• TYPE = AREA3, AREA4, AREA6, or AREA8
These types have three and four primary grid points, respectively, that define a triangular or
quadrilateral surface and must be ordered to go around the boundary. A property entry is required
for convection, radiation, or thermal vector flux.
Main Index
1460 CHBDYG
G3 G4 G3
G1 G2 G1 G2
AREA3 AREA4
G3 G4 G7 G3
G6 G5 G8 G6
G1 G4 G2 G1 G5 G2
AREA6 AREA8
(Grid points G4 through G6 optional) (Grid points G5 through G8 optional)
Figure 9-31 TYPE Examples
G3 or G4
n
T 1x
G2
G1 T 12
Figure 9-32 Normal Vector for CHBDYG Element of Types “AREAi”
The unit normal vector is given by
( T 12 × T 1x )
n = ----------------------------
T 12 × T 1x
(G3 is used for triangles, and G4 is used for quadrilaterals.)

4. For defining the front face, the right-hand rule is used on the sequence G1 to G2 to ... Gn of grid
points.
Main Index
CHBDYG 1461
entry.
identified with one of the surface element entries: CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or CHBDYP.
7. See Remark 9. of CHBDYE for application of boundary conditions using CHBDYG entries and a
discussion of front and back faces.
8. TYPE = REV1. The “REV1” type has two primary grid points that must lie in the x-y plane of the
basic coordinate system with x > 0. A midside grid point G3 is optional and supports convection or
heat flux from the edge of the CQUADX (4 or 8 node) and CTRIAX (3 or 6 node) element. The
defined are is a conical section with y as the axis of symmetry. A property entry is required for
convection, radiation, or thermal vector flux.
Main Index
1462 CHBDYP
Geometric Surface Element Definition (Property Form)
CHBDYP Geometric Surface Element Definition (Property Form)
Defines a boundary condition surface element with reference to a PHBDY entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYP EID PID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB G1 G2 G0
RADMIDF RADMIDB GMID CE E1 E2 E3
Example:
CHBDYP 2 5 POINT 2 2 101 500
3 3 0.0 0.0 1.0
Describer Meaning
EID Surface element identification number. (Unique (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) among
all element identification numbers.)
PID PHBDY property entry identification numbers. (Integer > 0)
TYPE Surface type. See Remark 3. (Character)
IVIEWF VIEW entry identification number for the front face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
IVIEWB VIEW entry identification number for the back face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
G1, G2 Grid point identification numbers of grids bounding the surface. (Integer > 0)
GO Orientation grid point. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
RADMIDF RADM entry identification number for front face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
RADMIDB RADM entry identification number for back face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
GMID Grid point identification number of a midside node if it is used with the line type
surface element.
CE Coordinate system for defining orientation vector. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
Ei Components of the orientation vector in coordinate system CE. The origin of the
orientation vector is grid point G1. (Real or blank)
Remarks:
1. EID is a unique ID associated with a particular surface element as defined by the grid point(s).
2. The defaults for PID, TYPE, IVIEWF, IVIEWB, GO, RADMIDF, RADMIDB, CE, and Ei may be
specified on the BDYOR entry. If a particular field is blank on both the CHBDYP entry and the
BDYOR entry, then the default is zero.
Main Index
CHBDYP 1463
3. TYPE specifies the kind of element surface; the allowed types are: “POINT,” “LINE,” “ELCYL,”
“FTUBE,” and “TUBE.” For TYPE = “FTUBE” and TYPE = “TUBE,” the geometric orientation
is completely determined by G1 and G2; the GO, CE, E1, E2, and E3 fields are ignored.
• TYPE = “POINT”
TYPE = “POINT” has one primary grid point, requires a property entry, and the normal vector
Vi must be specified if thermal flux is to be used.
G1
Figure 9-33 Normal Vector for CHBDYP Element of Type “POINT”

(See Remarks 4. and 5.)
The unit normal vector is given by n = V ⁄ V where V is specified in the Ei field and given in
the basic system at the referenced grid point. See Remarks 4. and 5. for the determination of V .
• TYPE = “LINE,” “FTUBE,” or “TUBE”
The TYPE = “LINE” type has two primary grid points, requires a property entry, and the vector
is required. TYPE = “FTUBE” and TYPE = “TUBE” are similar to TYPE = “LINE” except they
can have linear taper with no automatic view factor calculations. GMID is an option for the
TYPE = “LINE” surface element only and is ignored for TYPE = “FTUBE” and “TUBE”.
G2
GMID
V
n T
G1
Figure 9-34 Normal Vector for CHBDYP Element with TYPE=”LINE”,

TYPE=“FTUBE”, or TYPE=“TUBE” (See Remarks 4. and 5.)
The unit normal lies in the plane V and T , is perpendicular to T , and is given by:
T × (V × T)
n = --------------------------------
T × (V × T)
• TYPE = “ELCYL”
TYPE = “ELCYL” (elliptic cylinder) has two connected primary grid points and requires a
property entry. The vector must be nonzero.
Main Index
1464 CHBDYP
R1
R2
Figure 9-35 Normal Vector for CHBDYP Element of TYPE=“ELCYL”

(See Remarks 4. and 5.)
The same logic is used to determine n as for TYPE = LINE. The “radius” R1 is in the n
direction, and R2 is the perpendicular to n and T (see fields 7 and 8 of PHBDY entry).
4. For TYPE = “POINT,” TYPE = “LINE,” and TYPE = “ELCYL,” geometric orientation is required.
The required information is sought in the following order:
• If GO > 0 is found on the CHBDYP entry, it is used.
• Otherwise, if a nonblank CE is found on the CHBDYP continuation entry, this CE and the
corresponding vectors E1, E2, and E3 are used.
• If neither of the above, the same information is sought in the same way from the BDYOR entry.
• If none of the above apply, a warning message is issued.
5. The geometric orientation can be defined by either GO or the vector E1, E2, E3.
• If GO > zero:
For a TYPE = “POINT” surface, the normal to the front face is the vector from G1 to GO. For
the TYPE = “LINE” surface, the plane passes through G1, G2, GO and the right-hand rule is
used on this sequence to get the normal to the front face. For TYPE = “ELCYL” surface the first
axis of the ellipse lies on the G1, G2, GO plane, and the second axis is normal to this plane. For
TYPE = “FTUBE” or “TUBE” surface, no orientation is required, and GO is superfluous.
• If GO is zero:
For a TYPE = “POINT” surface, the normal to the front face is the orientation vector. For the
TYPE = “LINE” surface, the plane passes through G1, G2, and the orientation vector; the front
face is based on the right-hand rule for the vectors G2-G1 and the orientation vector. For
TYPE = “ELCYL” surface, the first axis of the ellipse lies on the G1, G2, orientation vector plane,
and the second axis is normal to this plane.
6. The continuation entry is optional.
entry.
Main Index
CHBDYP 1465
identified with the application of one of the surface element entries: CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or
CHBDYP entries.
9. For RC network solver in thermal analysis, the G0, GMID, CE, E1, C2 and E3 are ignored.
Main Index
1466 CHEXA
Six-Sided Solid Element Connection
CHEXA Six-Sided Solid Element Connection
Defines the connections of the six-sided solid element with eight to twenty grid points or the six-sided solid
shell element with eight grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHEXA EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14
G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20
Example:
CHEXA 71 4 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 0 0 30 31 53 54
55 56 57 58 59 60

EID Element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) Required
PID Property identification number of a PSOLID, Integer > 0 Required
PLSOLID or PCOMPLS entry.
Gi Grid point identification numbers of Integer > 0 or blank Required
connection points.
G18
G7
G6
G19
G15 G17
G14
G20
G8
G2
G10 G5
G16 G3
G11 G13 G9
G4 G12
G1
Figure 9-36 CHEXA Element Connection
Main Index
CHEXA 1467
Remarks:
numbers.
3. For Nastran conventional element, the edge points, G9 to G20, are optional. Any or all of them may
be deleted. If the ID of any edge connection point is left blank or set to zero (as for G9 and G10 in
the input example), the equations of the element are adjusted to give correct results for the reduced
number of connections. Corner grid points cannot be deleted. The element is an isoparametric
element (with shear correction) in all cases.
Note that for advanced nonlinear elements, partial specification of mid-points is not allowed. i.e.
Either none of the mid-points should be specified or all of the mid points should be specified.
4. Components of stress are output in the material coordinate system except for hyperelastic elements,
which are output in the basic coordinate system. The material coordinate system is defined on the
PSOLID entry.
6. For nonhyperelastic elements, the element coordinate system for the CHEXA element is defined in
terms of the three vectors R, S, and T, which join the centroids of opposite faces.
R vector joins the centroids of faces G4-G1-G5-G8 and G3-G2-G6-G7.
S vector joins the centroids of faces G1-G2-G6-G5 and G4-G3-G7-G8.
T vector joins the centroids of faces G1-G2-G3-G4 and G5-G6-G7-G8.
The origin of the coordinate system is located at the intersection of these vectors. The X, Y, and Z
axes of the element coordinate system are chosen as close as possible to the R, S, and T vectors and
point in the same general direction. (Mathematically speaking, the coordinate system is computed in
such a way that if the R, S, and T vectors are described in the element coordinate system a 3 x 3
positive-definite symmetric matrix would be produced.)
Solid elements have both a material and an element coordinate system. Both systems are defined for
the initial geometry, and for geometric nonlinear analysis they will rotate with the element. The
material coordinate system is used to input anisotropic material properties and for stress output. The
material coordinate system is defined by the CORDM field of the PSOLID entry. The element
coordinate system is used for element stiffness integration (reduced shear for example) and optionally
to define the material coordinate system (only if PSOLID,CORDM=-1).
Main Index
1468 CHEXA
T
G7
G6
G8 G5 R
S
G3
G4
G2
G1
Figure 9-37 CHEXA Element R, S, and T Vectors
8. For hyperelastic elements, the plot codes are specified under the CHEXAFD element name in Item
Codes, 999.
9. If a CHEXA element is referenced by a PSET or PVAL entry, then a p-version formulation is used
the edge is ignored and set straight.
• Elements with midside nodes cannot be p-elements and edges with midside nodes cannot be
shared by p-elements.
10. By default, all of the twelve edges of the element are considered straight unless:
• For p-elements there is an FEEDGE or FEFACE entry that contains the two grids of any edge of
this element. In this case, the geometry of the edge is used in the element.
• For h-elements, any of G9 through G20 are specified.
11. This element may be used as a three-dimensional eight-node solid shell element when PSLDN1entry
with BEH8 = SLCOMP (INT8 = ASTN) (SOL 400 only).
12. When this element is used as a three-dimensional eight-node solid shell element, the user should keep
in mind that the layer orientation is required to be in the element T-direction, when specifying grid
order.
13. The internal coordinate system of the element is used internally and is based on eigenvalue techniques
to insure non bias in the element formulation. For stress/strain output this internal coordinate system
(CORDM=-1 on PSOLID entry) is hard to visualize. Thus a CORDM=-2 on the PSOLID is
available as shown in Figure 9-38.
Main Index
CHEXA 1469
Figure 9-38 PSOLID for CHEXA
Main Index
1470 CIFHEX
Solid InterFace Cohesive Zone Modeling Element
CIFHEX Solid InterFace Cohesive Zone Modeling Element
Linear/Quadratic, twenty-node, three-dimensional interface element used to simulate the onset and progress
of delamination in SOL 400 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CIFHEX EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14
G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20
Example:
CIFHEX 700 701 456 357 882 889 443 447
162 911
Describer Meaning
PID Property number of a PCOHE entry. (Integer > 0)
G1-G8 Identification number of connected corner grid points. Required data for all eight
corner grid points. (Unique Integer > 0)
G9-G12 Identification number of connected edge grid points. Optional data for bottom and top
G17-G20 edge grid points. (Unique Integer > 0)
G13-G16 Identification number of connected midside grid points. Optional data for midside grid
points used only to make the element compatible with twenty-noded hexahedral
elements. (Unique Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element ID’s of any kind.
2. Grid points Gi must be numbered as shown in the following figure. Specify either G1-G8, or all G1-
G20.
3. The element is typically used to model the interface between different materials, where G1, G9, G2,
G10, G3, G11, G4 and G12 correspond to one side (called the bottom) and G5, G17, G6, G18, G7,
G19, and G20 correspond to the other side (called the top). The stress components are one normal
and two shear tractions. When only G1-G8 are specified, the element is linear. When in addition to
G1-G8, G9-G12, G17-G20 are specified, the element is quadratic.
4. The corresponding deformations are relative displacements between the top and bottom edge of the
element.
Main Index
CIFHEX 1471
5. The element is allowed to be infinitesimally thin; in which case edges defined by grids G1-G4 and
G5-G8 may coincide.
8
16
4 19
20
v1 11
12 7
˜ 15
v3
˜ 3
5 18
13 v2
17 ˜ 10
y 1
9 6
14
2
x
z
6. This element does not support thermal load. No thermal strain will be generated.
Main Index
1472 CIFPENT
CIFPENT Solid InterFace Cohesive Zone Modeling Element
Linear/Quadratic, fifteen-node, three-dimensional interface elelement used to simulate the onset and
progress of delamination in SOL 400 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CIFPENT EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14
G15
Example:
CIFPENT 700 701 456 357 882 889 443 447
Describer Meaning
G1-G6 Identification number of connected corner grid points. Required data for all four corner
grid points. (Unique Integer > 0)
G7-G9 Identification number of connected edge grid points. Optional data for bottom and top
G13-G15 edge grid points. (Unique Integer > 0)
G10-G12 Identification number of connected midside grid points. Optional data for midside grid
points used only to make the element compatible with fifteen-noded pentahedral
Remarks:
2. Grid points Gi must be numbered as shown in the following figure. Specify either G1-G6 or all G1-
G15.
3. The element is typically used to model the interface between different materials, where G1, G7, G2,
G8, G3 and G9 correspond to one side (called the bottom) and G4, G13, G5, G14, G6, and G15
correspond to the other side (called the top). The stress components are one normal and one shear
tractions. When only G1-G6 are specified, the element is linear. When in addition to G1-G6, G7-
G9, G13-G15 are specified, the element is quadratic.
4. The corresponding deformations are relative displacements between the top and bottom edge of the
element.
Main Index
CIFPENT 1473
5. The element is allowed to be infinitesimally thin; in which case edges defined by grids G1-G3 and
G4-G6 may coincide.
v1 6
˜ v3 15 12
˜ 3
4 9 14
10
1 13 v2 8
y ˜
7 5
11
2
x
z
Main Index
1474 CIFQDX
Axisymmetric InterFace Cohesive Zone Modeling Element
CIFQDX Axisymmetric InterFace Cohesive Zone Modeling Element
Linear/Quadratic, eight-node, axisymmetric interface element used to simulate the onset and progress of
delamination in SOL 400.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CIFQDX EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8
Example:
CIFQDX 700 701 456 357 882 889 443 447
1612 911
Describer Meaning
G5, G7 Identification number of connected edge grid points. Optional data for bottom and top
edge grid points. (Unique Integer > 0)
G6, G8 Identification number of connected edge grid points. Optional data for side grid points
used only to make the element compatible with eight-noded quadrilateral axisymmetric
Remarks:
2. Grid points Gi must be numbered as shown in the following figure.
3. The element is typically used to model the interface between different materials, where G1, G5, and
G2 correspond to one side (called the bottom) and G3, G7, and G4 correspond to the other side
(called the top). The stress components are one normal and one shear traction. Then only G1-G4 are
specified, the element is linear. When in addition to G1-G4, G5 and G7 are specified, the element is
quadratic.
4. The corresponding deformation are relative displacements between the top and bottom edge of the
element.
5. The element is allowed to be infinitesimally thin; in which case edges G1-G5-G2 and G3-G7-G4
may coincide.
6. The element must lie in the x-y plane of the basic system. Coordinate r is parallel to the x-basic and
coordinate z is parallel to y-basic.
Main Index
CIFQDX 1475
Axisymmetric InterFace Cohesive Zone Modeling Element
Main Index
1476 CIFQUAD
Planar InterFace Cohesive Zone Modeling Element
CIFQUAD Planar InterFace Cohesive Zone Modeling Element
Linear/Quadratic, eight-noded planar interface element used to simulate the onset and progress of
delamination in SOL 400 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CIFQUAD EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8
Example:
CIFQUAD 700 701 456 357 882 889 443 447
1612 911
Describer Meaning
G5, G7 Identification number of connected edge grid points. Optional data for bottom and top
edge grid points. (Unique Integer > 0)
G6, G8 Identification number of connected edge grid points. Optional data for side grid points
used only to make the element compatible with eight-noded quadrilateral elements.
(Unique Integer > 0)
Remarks:
2. Grid points Gi must be numbered as shown in the following figure.
3. The element is typically used to model the interface between different materials, where G1, G5, and
G2 correspond to one side (called the bottom) and G3, G7, and G4 correspond to the other side
(called the top). The stress components are one normal and one shear traction. Then only G1-G4 are
specified, the element is linear. When in addition to G1-G4, G5 and G7 are specified, the element is
quadratic.
4. The corresponding deformation are relative displacements between the top and bottom edge of the
element.
5. The element is allowed to be infinitesimally thin; in which case edges G1-G5-G2 and G3-G7-G4
may coincide.
Main Index
CIFQUAD 1477
Planar InterFace Cohesive Zone Modeling Element
6. The element must lie in the x-y plane of the basic system.
Main Index
1478 CINTC
Line Interface Element Connection
CINTC Line Interface Element Connection
Defines a line interface element with specified boundaries.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CINTC EID TYPE
LIST = (BID1(INTP1), BID2(INTP2),...,BIDn(INTPn))
Example:
CINTC 1001 GRDLIS
T
LIST=(101,102(Q),-103(Q),104(L))
Describer Meaning
TYPE Connectivity. If TYPE = “GRDLIST” or blank (Default), the user will specify the
boundaries via Bulk Data entry, GMBNDC. See Remark 2. (Character; Default =
“GRDLIST”)
BIDi Boundary curve identification number, referenced to Bulk Data entry, GMBNDC. See
Remark 2. ( Integer ≠ 0 )
INTPi Interpolation scheme. (Character; Default = “L”)
INTP = “L”: Linear interpolation;
INTP = “Q”: Quadratic interpolation.
Remarks:
1. Line interface element identification numbers must be unique with respect to all other line interface
elements.
2. There must be at least two BIDi specified. If all BIDi are positive, by default, the degrees of freedom
associated with the grids on the boundary represented by the first BID will be taken as the
independent (n-set), and the degrees of freedom with the grids on the rest of boundaries are taken as
the dependent (m-set). If there is a single negative BID, the degrees of freedom associated with the
grids on the boundary represented by this BID will be taken as the independent (n-set), and the rest
of the degrees of freedom with other boundaries are used as the dependent (m-set). If there are two
or more negative BIDs, the degrees of freedom with the first negative one will be taken as the
independent.
3. Forces of multipoint constraints may be recovered with the MPCFORCE Case Control command.
4. The m-set degrees of freedom specified on the boundary grids by this entry may not be specified by
other entries that define mutually exclusive sets.
Main Index
CLOAD 1479
Static Load Combination for Superelement Loads (Superposition)
CLOAD Static Load Combination for Superelement Loads (Superposition)
Defines a static load as a linear combination of previously calculated superelement loads defined by the LSEQ
entry in nonlinear static analysis (SOLs 106 or 153).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CLOAD CID S S1 IDV1 S2 IDV2 S3 IDV3
S4 IDV4 -etc.-
Example:
CLOAD 25 1.0 25.0 10 -1.0 101 2.2-1 604
-62.0 62
Describer Meaning
CID Combination identification number. (Integer > 0)
S Scale factor. (Real)
Si Scale factors. (Real)
IDVi Identification numbers of load vectors (EXCITEID of a selected LSEQ entry)
calculated for a superelement loads entry. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. The CLOAD entry must be selected in the residual solution subcases of the Case Control with
CLOAD = CID and must be used if loads are applied to upstream superelements in SOL 106 or 153.
2. The load vector defined is given by { P } = S  Si { P IDVi }

i
3. The IDVi field refers to a previously calculated load vector for the superelement via the LSEQ
approach. That is, a LOADSET keyword must have been selected in Case Control that in turn refers
to one or more LSEQ entries in the Bulk Data Section. The IDVi refers to the EXCITEID of such
LSEQ entries. For more details, see the Case Control commands LSEQ, 2110 Bulk Data entry and the
LOADSET (Case), 409.
4. In the CID or IDV fields, a CLOAD entry may not reference an identification number defined by
another CLOAD entry.
Main Index
1480 CMARKB2
Two-Noded Marker Connectivity Definition
CMARKB2 Two-Noded Marker Connectivity Definition
Defines a 2-noded marker beam element by means of connecting two grid points. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CMARKB2 ID PID G1 G2
Example:
CMARKB2 7 1 9 10
Describer Meaning
ID Unique element number. (Integer > 0; Required)
PID Property ID referring to a PMARKER entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
G1 Grid point number connectivity 1. (Integer > 0; Required)
G2 Grid point number connectivity 2. (Integer > 0; Required)
Remarks:
1. A CMARKB2 element may refer to two types of grid points:
a. Structural grid points, thus grid points that are part of the connectivity of an element
b. Free grid points in space. These grid points do not have mass associated with them. The motion
of these grid points is specified by the PMARKER property
2. The ID must be unique in the model and may not be used as structural element ID.
Main Index
CMARKN1 1481
One-Noded Marker Connectivity Definition
CMARKN1 One-Noded Marker Connectivity Definition
Defines a 1-noded marker element on a grid point. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CMARKN1 ID PID G1
Example:
CMARKN1 7 1 9
Describer Meaning
ID Unique element number. (Integer > 0; Required)
PID Property ID referring to a PMARKER entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
G Grid point number. (Integer > 0; Required)
Remarks:
1. A CMARKB2 element may refer to two types of grid points:
a. Structural grid points, thus grid points that are part of the connectivity of an element
b. Free grid points in space. These grid points do not have mass associated with them. The motion
of these grid points is specified by the PMARKER property
2. The ID must be unique in the model and may not be used as structural element ID.
Main Index
1482 CMASS1
Scalar Mass Connection
CMASS1 Scalar Mass Connection
Defines a scalar mass element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CMASS1 EID PID G1 C1 G2 C2
Example:
CMASS1 32 6 2 1
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PMASS entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
G1, G2 Geometric grid or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if scalar point)
Remarks:
CMASS3 entry.
numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2) must not be coincident.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see the MSC Nastran Reference Manual, Section 5.6.
7. Scalar elements input coupled mass matrices when the second pair of fields is entered. When
uncoupled point masses are desired input only the first pair of fields. When a coupled mass matrix is
requested the submatrix added has M on the diagonal, and -M on the off-diagonal. The element is
not checked for internal constraints, which is the user’s responsibility if desired. There are instances
where elements with internal constraints are desired, although not frequently. To identify the
presence of internal constraints caused by coupled mass, inspect GPWG output, OLOAD output due
to GRAV loads, and rigid body modes of free structures. Some forms of coupled mass will cause
coupling of rigid body translational mass terms in GPWG output, and poor rigid body modes in
modal analysis.
Main Index
CMASS2 1483
Scalar Mass Property and Connection
CMASS2 Scalar Mass Property and Connection
Defines a scalar mass element without reference to a property entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CMASS2 EID M G1 C1 G2 C2
Example:
CMASS2 32 9.25 6 1
Describer Meaning
M Value of the scalar mass. (Real)
G1, G2 Geometric grid or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if scalar point)
Remarks:
CMASS4 entry.
numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2) must be distinct. Except in unusual
circumstances, one of them will be a grounded terminal with blank entries for Gi and Ci.
Reference Guide.
7. See Remark 7 for CMASS1, 1482.
Main Index
1484 CMASS3
Scalar Mass Connection to Scalar Points Only
CMASS3 Scalar Mass Connection to Scalar Points Only
Defines a scalar mass element that is connected only to scalar points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CMASS3 EID PID S1 S2
Example:
CMASS3 13 42 62
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PMASS entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
Remarks:
numbers.
3. Only one scalar mass element may be defined on a single entry.
Reference Guide.
Main Index
CMASS4 1485
Scalar Mass Property and Connection to Scalar Points Only
CMASS4 Scalar Mass Property and Connection to Scalar Points Only
Defines a scalar mass element that is connected only to scalar points, without reference to a property entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CMASS4 EID M S1 S2
Example:
CMASS4 23 14.92 23
Describer Meaning
M Scalar mass value. (Real)
Remarks:
1. S1 or S2 may be blank or zero, indicating a constrained coordinate. This is the usual case.
numbers.
3. Only one scalar mass element may be defined on a single entry.
Reference Guide.
Main Index
1486 CMREBAI
Defines Rebar Elements and Matching “Matrix” Solid Elements using the Marc REBAR with INSERT Method in SOL 600
CMREBAI Defines Rebar Elements and Matching “Matrix” Solid Elements using the Marc REBAR with
INSERT Method in SOL 600
In some cases, particularly for modeling of concrete or tires, it is beneficial to add rebar or cord material to a
matrix. The resulting combined material is similar to a composite but it is sometimes easier to postprocess
the stresses of the rebar and matrix separately to determine failure conditions. Unlike the CMREBAR
element, this element can span multiple matrix CHEXA elements (for example, could be allied to all elements
on the bottom of a flat surface modeled with several layers of CHEXA matrix elements through the
thickness).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CMREBAI ID IP G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8
Example:
CMREBAI 100 2 31 32 88 87
CMREBAI 250 8 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
Describer Meaning
ID Rebar element ID should be distinct between all element ID’s. (Integer; Required; no
Default)
IP Property identification of a matching PMRBAR entry. (Integer; Required; no Default)
G1-G4 Grid point identification numbers of the four corner points. (Integer > 0; all unique)
G5-G8 Grid point identification numbers of the four mid-side nodes similar to G5-G8 for the
CQUAD8 element. (Integer > 0, or blank. If any of G5-G8 are not blank, all nodes in
the range G5 to G8 must be defined and must be unique among the range G1-G8.)
Remarks:
1. This entry makes use of Marc’s REBAR and INSERT capabilities for membrane element types 147
and 148. If G5-G8 are blank, Marc element 147 with 4 nodes is used. If G5-G8 are not blank, Marc
element 148 with 4 corner nodes and 4 mid-side nodes is used. Entry CMREBAR makes use of
Marc’s REBAR capability (without INSERT) and uses rebar elements 23 and 146.
2. The grid ID’s do not have to correspond to those of any matrix CHEXA element. The PMREABI
entry is used to describe the matrix CHEXA elements that these rebar elements will be inserted into.
3. Cord-reinforced composites are characterized by a group of reinforcing cords with arbitrary spatial
orientations embedded in various matrix materials. The different constituents may have different
mechanical properties. Two typical examples of the cord-reinforces composites are tires and cord-
reinforced concretes. In modeling such materials, the rebar technique is very useful. The basic idea
Main Index
CMREBAI 1487
Defines Rebar Elements and Matching “Matrix” Solid Elements using the Marc REBAR with INSERT Method in SOL 600
of rebar layer concept contains (1) the reinforcing cords and the matrix materials of the composites
are represented independently by different types of elements along with different constitutive models,
(2) the reinforcing cords within the elements modeling these cords (the so-called rebar elements) are
assumed to be in the form of layers, and (3) the rebar elements are then embedded into the matrix
elements. The compatibility between the cord elements and the matrix elements is enforced by
embedding membrane rebar elements into solid matrix elements using Marc’s INSERT option.
Membrane rebar elements types 147 and 148 are available with this option. They are empty 4-node
or 8-node quadrilaterals. You can place reinforcing cord layers within these empty elements. These
elements are then embedded into their corresponding solid elements representing the matrix
materials. Independent meshes can be used for the rebar membrane elements and the matrix elements.
Marc’s INSERT option is automatically invoked by the CMREBAI elements and used to enforce the
compatibility between two different meshes.
4. The major difference between the CMREBAR and CMREBAI elements is that CMREBAR elements
share the same grids as the matrix CHEXA elements while CMREBAI elements typically have
different grid ID’s than the matrix CHEXA elements. Marc’s INSERT option automatically adds
tyings (MPC’s) between the CMREBAI grids and the CHEXA grids.
5. CMREBAI elements are preferred over the CMREBAR elements when re-meshing is involved.
6. See MPREBAI for additional information and figures defining these rebar elements.
7. Only CHEXA elements may be used for the matrix elements.
Main Index
1488 CMREBAR
Defines Rebar Elements and Matching “Matrix” Solid Elements using the Marc REBAR without INSERT Method in SOL 600
CMREBAR Defines Rebar Elements and Matching “Matrix” Solid Elements using the Marc REBAR
without INSERT Method in SOL 600
In some cases, particularly for modeling of concrete or tires, it is beneficial to add rebar or cord material to a
matrix. The resulting combined material is similar to a composite but it is sometimes easier to postprocess
the stresses of the rebar and matrix separately to determine failure conditions. CMREBAR elements require
that the rebar be placed in matching CHEXA matrix elements on a one-to-one basis. For a similar capability
where the rebar can span multiple CEHXA matrix elements, see the CMREBAI entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CMREBAR ID IP ID2 IDD ID22
Example:
CMREBAR 100 2 1
CMREBAR 1001 50 101 1100 200
Describer Meaning
EID Rebar element ID should be distinct between all element ID’s. (Integer; Required; no
Default)
IP Property identification of a matching PMRBAR entry. (Integer; Required; no Default)
ID2 CHEXA (8 node or 20 node) “matrix” element that the rebar will be added to. (Integer;
Required; no Default)
IDD If more than one rebar element in a continuous range is to be added to a continuous
range of rebar elements, IDD represents the first rebar element identification number
in the range. (Integer; Required; Default = 0, IDD must be larger than ID)
ID22 If more then one rebar element in a continuous range is to be added to a continuous
range of “matrix” elements, ID22 represents the last CHEXA matrix element
identification number in the range. (Integer; Required; Default = 0, ID22 must be
larger then ID2)
Remarks:
1. This entry makes use of Marc’s REBAR capability for element types 23 and 146. Entry CMREBAI
makes use of Marc’s REBAR and INSERT capabilities and uses membrane rebar elements 147 and
148.
2. If IDD is entered, IDD2 must also be entered and the difference IDD-ID must match the difference
IDD2-ID2.
Main Index
CMREBAR 1489
Defines Rebar Elements and Matching “Matrix” Solid Elements using the Marc REBAR without INSERT Method in SOL 600
3. The same grid ID’s are used to define element ID and ID2. Similarly the same grid ID’s define the
other elements if a range of elements are used. Element ID is an “empty shell element” and up to 5
rebar layers (each containing multiple rebar) are placed in the empty shell as specified by the
PMREBAR property entries.
4. Cord-reinforced composites are characterized by a group of reinforcing cords with arbitrary spatial
orientations embedded in various matrix materials. The different constituents may have different
mechanical properties. Two typical examples of the cord-reinforces composites are tires and cord-
reinforced concretes. In modeling such materials, the rebar technique is very useful. The basic idea
of rebar layer concept contains that (1) the reinforcing cords and the matrix materials of the
composites are represented independently by different types of elements along with different
constitutive models, (2) the reinforcing cords within the elements modeling these cords (the so-called
rebar elements) are assumed to be in the form of layers, and (3) the rebar elements are then embedded
into the matrix elements. The compatibility between the cord elements and the matrix elements is
enforced by superimposing solid rebar elements on corresponding solid matrix elements using the
same element connectivity. The rebar elements are empty 8-node or 20-node CHEXA elements
derived from the matching matrix elements. The reinforcing cord layers are placed within the
elements. Each solid rebar element is then superimposed on a solid matrix element. The two elements
share the same space with the same element connectivity (therefore, the same element nodes). The
compatibility condition between the reinforcements and the matrix materials is then automatically
enforced.
5. The major difference between the CMREBAR and CMREBAI elements is that CMREBAR elements
share the same grids as the matrix CHEXA elements while CMREBAI elements typically have
different grid ID’s than the matrix CHEXA elements. Marc’s INSER T option automatically adds
tyings (MPC’s) between the CMREBAI grids and the CHEXA grids.
6. CMREBAI elements are preferred over the CMREBAR elements when re-meshing is involved.
7. See PMREBAR for additional information and figures defining these rebar elements.
8. Only CHEXA elements may be used for the matrix elements.
Main Index
1490 COHESIV
Defines Data for Cohesive Materials in SOL 600
Entries CO - CY
COHESIV Defines Data for Cohesive Materials in SOL 600
This option allows you to define material properties for interface elements, that may be used to simulate the
onset or progress of delamination, and to associate these material properties with a list of element numbers.
The cohesive material is defined using the cohesive energy (also called critical energy release rate), that equals
the area below the equivalent traction versus equivalent relative displacement curve. The shape of this curve
can be bilinear, exponential, or combined linear-exponential. Mixed mode delamination is incorporated by
converting the normal and shear components of the relative displacements into an equivalent using the
normal shear weighting factor.
As an alternative to the standard linear, exponential, and liner-exponential model, the user can also utilize this
option to trigger the call to the UCOHESIVE user-subroutine. Used in SOL 600 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
COHESIV MID ITYPE IACT NAME
EN COD MOD NSW SNW DECAY ‘
VISC RATE STIFF
ISET
Example:
COHESIV 101 1 1 material number10 1
2000. .01 .015 23. 24. 1.
.05 0.0 1.0
101
Describer Meaning
MID (3,1) Material ID - Must match a MATXXX entry. (Integer; no Default)
ITYPE (3,2) Type of cohesive model. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
1 Bilinear model (Default)
2 Exponential modes
3 Combined linear-exponential model
-1 User-defined using user-subroutine UCOHESIVE
IACT (3,3) Option to deactivate elements and output to t16 file. (Integer; Default = 0)
0 Elements remain active regardless of the damage level.
1 Deactivate the elements if the maximum damage in all the element integration
points has been reached. Do not remove the elements from the t16 file.
Main Index
COHESIV 1491
Defines Data for Cohesive Materials in SOL 600
Describer Meaning
2 Deactivate the elements if the maximum damage in all the element integration
points has been reached. Remove the elements from the t16 file.
NAME (3,5) Name of the material. (Character up to 40 characters; no Default; optional entry)
EN (4,1) Cohesive energy. (Real; no Default; Required value)
COD (4,2) Critical opening displacement. (Real; no Default; Required value)
MOD (4,3) Maximum opening displacement (Bilinear model only). (Real; no Default)
NSW (4,4) Normal-shear weighting factor, beta. (Real; no Default; Required value)
SNW (4,5) Shear-normal weighting factor. (Real; Default = 1.0)
DECAY (4,6) Exponential decay factor. (Linear-Exponential model only).(Real; Default = 1.0)
VISC (4,7) Viscous energy dissipation factor (zero implies no viscous energy dissipation). (Real;
Default = 0.0)
RATE (4,8) Relative displacement reference rate. Only sued if viscous energy dissipation is by setting
VISC to a non-zero value. (Real; Default = 0.0)
STIFF (4,9) Stiffening factor in compression. (Real; Default = 1.0)
ISET (5) ID of a SET3 entry defining the elements associated with this cohesive material. (Integer,
no Default, Required value)
Remarks:
1. Values in parenthesis (i,j) refer to Marc’s COHESIVE entry. (Datablock, field)
2. For solid elements, this entry may be used to add a “layer” or interface between the solid elements
(CHEXA, CTETRA or CPENTA). This interface can fail or delaminate depending on the properties
entered. It is used in conjunction with Marc element types 188, 192 and 193 and provides the
material properties for these element types.
3. For shell elements (CQUADi, CTRIAi) this entry may be used to add a layer between the edges of
adjacent shells. It is used in conjunction with Marc element types 186 and 187 and provides the
material properties for these element types.
4. Solid or shell elements with a COHESIV MID will automatically be assigned Marc element types
186, 187, 188, 189, 192, 193 as appropriate to the type and number of grids defined for that element.
These solid elements must either only have corner nodes or have the full parabolic number of nodes
(for example, CHEXA must either have 8 nodes or 20 nodes).
5. For SOL 600, cohesive behavior is not available for axisymmetric or plane strain analyses.
6. MID must not be used by any other material such as MAT1, MAT2, etc.
7. All continuation lines are required.
Main Index
1492 COHFRIC
Cohesive Friction
COHFRIC Cohesive Friction
Allows friction and sticking during tensile conditions at the coupling surface. Use SOL700 only.
Format:
COHFRIC CID MAXSTRS FRIC REFVEL
Example:
COHFRIC 112 8e+10 8e+5 2
Describer Meaning
CID Unique number of a COHFRIC entry. (Integer>0; required)
MAXSTRS Maximal normal stress. Allows tensile stresses at the coupling surface as long as the
normal stress does not exceed MAXSTRS. (Real ≥ 0.0; default=0.0)
FRIC Friction stress under tensile conditions. (Real ≥ 0.0; default=0.0)
REFVEL Reference value for velocity. (Real ≥ 0.0; default=0.0)
Remarks:
1. If the cohesive friction parameters is uniform across the coupling surface then DYPARAM,
COHESION can be used instead.
2. During tension any relative tangential velocity between coupling surface and Eulerian material will
V
yield a shear stress whose magnitude equals Fric × min  1, ------------------------------------
REL, tan gential

. This is a viscous-like friction
REFVEL
law.
3. This shear force opposes the relative tangential movement along the coupling surface.
Main Index
COMPUDS 1493
Orthotropic Failure Model that allows to model Property Degradation
COMPUDS Orthotropic Failure Model that allows to model Property Degradation
Defines an orthotropic failure model for shell composites specified by a user subroutine. Used in SOL700
only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
COMPUDS MID GROUP UNAME +
+ E1 E2 N12 G12 G1,Z G2,Z RHO +
+ NV S ALPHA TRSFAIL F12 +
+ XT XT YT YC PFD VALUE PFDST +
+ FBTEN FBCOM MXTEN MXCOM MXSHR +
+ PRDFT PRDFC PRDMT PRDMC PRDSH +
Example:
In FMS Section of the MSC Nastran input stream:
CONNECT SERVICE excomp1 ' SCA.MDSolver.Obj.Uds.Dytran.Materials '
In Bulk Data:
COMPUD 1 EXCOMP1 +
S
+ 30E6 1.0E6 0.3 2.0E6 3.0E6 1.5E6 0.056 +
+ 5 100
+ 200 150 100 110
Field Contents
MID Unique material identification number. (Integer > 0; equired)
GROUP The group name used for the FMS section CONNECT SERVICE statement.
(Character; required).
UNAME User subroutine name associated with the entry. (Character; default=blank).
E1 Modulus of elasticity in longitudinal direction (also defined as fiber direction or one-
direction). (Real > 0.0; required)
E2 Modulus of elasticity in lateral direction (also defined as matrix direction or two-
direction). (Real > 0.0; required)
Main Index
1494 COMPUDS
Field Contents
N12 Poisson's ratio ( 2/ 1 for uniaxial loading in one-direction). Note that 21 = 1/ 2 for
uniaxial loading in two-direction is related to 12, E1, E2 by the relation 12 E2 = 21 E1.
(Real > 0.0; required)
G12 In-plane shear modulus R. (Real > 0.0; required)
G1,Z Transverse shear modulus for shear in 1-Z plane. (Real > 0.0; default= G12)
RHO Mass density. (R > 0.0; required)
NV Number of additional history variables for a user model. See Remark 8. (0 < Integer < 10;
default=0)
S Failure stress for in-plane shear. (Real ≥ 0.0; default=0.0)
ALPHA Nonlinear shear coefficient. (Real ≥ 0.0; default=0.0)
TRSFAIL Transverse shear failure. (Character; default=SUBL)
ELEM: Failure if element fails
SUBL: Failure if sublayer fails

F12 Interaction term in Tsai-Wu theory. (Real; default=0.0)
XT, XC Tensile compressive failure stress in the large structural direction. (Real > 0.0; required)
YT, YC Tensile compressive failure stress in the lateral direction. (Real > 0.0; required)
PFD Post-failure degradation model. (Character; default=STEPS)
STEPS: Degrade stresses by time steps
TIME: Degrade stresses by time
VELOC: Degrade stresses by velocity
VALUE Depending on PFD, VALUE gives the number of time steps, time interval, or
propagation velocity. (Integer or Real; default=100)
PFDST Post-failure degradation start. (Character; default=INDV)
INDV Stresses are degraded per distinct failure mode.
ALL Stresses are degraded if all elastic constants are zero.
FBTEN,FBCO Failure modes in fiber, matrix direction, and theory failure. (Character; default=blank)
N,MXTEN,M
XCOM,MXS
HR
Main Index
COMPUDS 1495
Field Contents
PRDFT Property degradation due to fiber-tension failure. (Integer; default=1111)
PRDFC Property degradation due to fiber-compression failure. (Integer; default=1010)
PRDMT Property degradation due to matrix-tension failure. (Integer; default=0110)
PRDMC Property degradation due to matrix-compression failure. (Integer; default=0110)
PRDSH Property degradation due to in-plane shear failure. (Integer; default=0001)
Remarks:
11. Please check MAT8 and MAT8A cards about the details of each field. The field definition is identical
as MAT8 and MAT8A.
12. UNAME can be:
Subroutine Name Function
EXCOMP User defined orthotropic material models for shell composite
Main Index
1496 CONCTL
Parameter SWLDPRM override for CFAST, CSEAM, and CWELD Connector Elements
CONCTL Parameter SWLDPRM override for CFAST, CSEAM, and CWELD Connector
Elements
This entry provides local connector search algorithm control to override SWLDPRM values.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONCTL SET3ID PARAM1 VALUE1 PARAM2 VALUE2 PARAM3 VALUE3
PARAM4 VALUE5 PARAM4 VALUE5 -etc.-
Example:
CONCTL 75 PROJTOL 0.2 PRTSW 1 GSMOVE 3
NREDIA 2
CONCTL 83 MOVGAB 1
Describer Meaning
SET3ID The ID of a SET3 entry using (DES= ELEM) to identify a group of connector elements.
(Integer>0)
PARAMi Name of the connector parameter. Allowable names are listed in Table 8-62 of
SWLDPRM. (Character)
VALUEi Value of the parameter. See Table 8-62 of SWLDPRM (Real or Integer)
Remarks:
1. Multiple CONCTL entries are allowed and ALL appearing will be used. If the user supplies a
PARAMi, VALUEi that refers to specific Element on one CONCTL entry and a same PARAMi with
VALUEj that refers to the same specific Element on another CONCTL, a fatal message will be issued.
2. For a given connector element ID, this entry will override the global default set by the SWLDPRM
entry.
3. The parameter CHKRUN can only be set on SWLDPARM and will be ignored on CONCTL
entries.
4. A user fatal will be issued if DES on the SET3 entry is not "ELEM".
Main Index
CONM1 1497
Concentrated Mass Element Connection, General Form
CONM1 Concentrated Mass Element Connection, General Form
Defines a 6 x 6 symmetric mass matrix at a geometric grid point.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONM1 EID G CID M11 M21 M22 M31 M32
M33 M41 M42 M43 M44 M51 M52 M53
M54 M55 M61 M62 M63 M64 M65 M66
Example:
CONM1 2 22 2 2.9 6.3
4.8 28.6
28.6 28.6
Describer Meaning
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000). See Remark 2.
G Grid point identification number. (Integer > 0). See Remark 3.
CID Coordinate system identification number for the mass matrix. (Integer > 0)
Mij Mass matrix values. (Real)
Remarks:
1. For a less general means of defining concentrated mass at grid points, see the CONM2 entry
description.
numbers.
3. Unlike the CONM2 entry, the CONM1 entry does not allow for the specification of concentrated
mass at harmonic structural grid points. Therefore, grid point G must necessarily be a non-harmonic
structural grid point.
Main Index
1498 CONM2
Concentrated Mass Element Connection, Rigid Body Form
CONM2 Concentrated Mass Element Connection, Rigid Body Form
Defines a concentrated mass at a grid point.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONM2 EID G CID M X1 X2 X3
I11 I21 I22 I31 I32 I33
Example:
CONM2 2 15 6 49.7
16.2 16.2 7.8
Describer Meaning
EID Element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000). See Remark 1.
G Grid point identification number. (Integer > 0). See Remark 7.
CID Coordinate system identification number. For CID of -1; see X1, X2, X3 below.
(Integer > -1; Default = 0). See Remarks 4., 6. and 7.
M Mass value. (Real). See Remarks 5. and 7.
X1, X2, X3 Offset distances from the grid point to the center of gravity of the mass in the
coordinate system defined in field 4, unless CID = -1, in which case X1, X2, X3 are the
coordinates, not offsets, of the center of gravity of the mass in the basic coordinate
system. (Real). See Remarks 4., 5., 6. and 7.
Iij Mass moments of inertia measured at the mass center of gravity in the coordinate
system defined by field 4. If CID = -1, the basic coordinate system is implied. (Real).
See Remarks 4., 5. and 7.
Remarks:
numbers.
2. For a more general means of defining concentrated mass at grid points, see the CONM1 entry
description.
3. The continuation is optional.
4. If CID = -1, offsets are internally computed as the difference between the grid point location and X1,
X2, X3. The grid point locations may be defined in a nonbasic coordinate system. In this case, the
values of Iij must be in a coordinate system that parallels the basic coordinate system.
Main Index
CONM2 1499
Concentrated Mass Element Connection, Rigid Body Form
5. The form of the inertia matrix about its center of gravity is taken as:
M
M symmetric
M
I11
– I21 I22
– I31 – I32 I33
where
M =  ρ dV
2 2
I11 =  ρ ( x2 + x 3 ) dV
2 2
I22 =  ρ ( x1 + x 3 ) dV
2 2
I33 =  ρ ( x1 + x 2 ) dV
I21 =  ρx1 x2 dV
I31 =  ρx1 x3 dV
I32 =  ρx2 x3 dV
and x 1, x 2, x 3 are components of distance from the center of gravity in the coordinate system defined
in field 4. The negative signs for the off-diagonal terms are supplied automatically. A warning
message is issued if the inertia matrix is nonpositive definite, since this may cause fatal errors in
dynamic analysis modules.
6. If CID > 0, then X1, X2, and X3 are defined by a local Cartesian system, even if CID references a
spherical or cylindrical coordinate system. This is similar to the manner in which displacement
coordinate systems are defined.
7. MSC Nastran contains two kinds of structural grid points, namely, non-harmonic structural grid
points and harmonic structural grid points. The former have the standard three translational and
three rotational degrees of freedom while the latter have three symmetric components and three anti-
symmetric components dependent on the harmonic value.
Harmonic grid points are identified automatically as the grid points listed on CQUADX and
CTRIAX element entries that are associated with PAXSYMH entries.
For a harmonic grid point, the mass value M is the total mass. This value is not to be multiplied by
2π. The mass matrix computed for harmonic grids is dependent on the harmonic value associated
with the PAXSYMH entry and will be automatically determined by the code. Only harmonic values
of 0 and 1 have contributions to grid point weight generator type calculations.
Any values specified in the CID, X1, X2, X3, I11, I21, I22, I31, I32, or I33 fields are ignored for a
harmonic grid.
Main Index
1500 CONROD
Rod Element Property and Connection
CONROD Rod Element Property and Connection
Defines a rod element without reference to a property entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONROD EID G1 G2 MID A J C NSM
Example:
CONROD 2 16 17 4 2.69
Describer Meaning
G1, G2 Grid point identification numbers of connection points. (Integer > 0; G1 ≠ G2 )
MID Material identification number. (Integer > 0)
A Area of the rod. (Real)
J Torsional constant. (Real)
C Coefficient for torsional stress determination. (Real)
NSM Nonstructural mass per unit length. (Real)
Remarks:
numbers.
2. For structural problems, MID must reference a MAT1 material entry.
3. For heat transfer problems, MID must reference a MAT4 or MAT5 material entry.
4. For RC network solver in thermal analysis, the J, C and NSM are ignored.
Main Index
CONROD 1501
Rod Element Property and Connection
P
G2
G1
T
Figure 9-39 CONROD Element Forces and Moments
Main Index
1502 CONTRLT
Thermal Control Element for Heat Transfer Analysis
CONTRLT Thermal Control Element for Heat Transfer Analysis
Defines the control mechanism for QVECT, QVOL, QBDY3, RADBC, CONV, and CONVM in heat
transfer analysis (SOL 159 and SOL 400 with analysis=htran).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONTRLT ID SENSOR SFORM CTYPE PL PH PTYPE PZERO
DT DELAY TAUC FCTMIN FCTMAX
GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3
Example:
CONTRLT 100 20 T TSTAT 68. 73. 7 1.
0.1 0.01 0. 0. 1.
0. 0. 0.
Describer Meaning
ID Controller identification node. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0; Required)
SENSOR Grid or scalar point ID of sensor. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0; Required)
SFORM Sensor output form. See Remark 3. (Character, T; Default = T)
CTYPE Control type. See Remark 4. (Character, Default TSTAT)
PL Minimum temperature. For PTYPE 9 through 11, set temperature. See Remark 5.
(Real; Required)
PH Maximum temperature. For PTYPE 9 through 11, unused. See Remark 5. (Real;
Required)
PTYPE Process type. See Remark 5. (Integer 1 through 11, 1 through 6 already defined;
no Default)
7 Bang-bang (a thermostat that is either on or off, a special case of a bang-
bang controller)
8 Proportional
9 Steady-state (special routine for steady state models)
10 Classical PID (proportional-integral-differential) and does not include
the time derivative of the set point )
11 Standard PID (Includes the time derivative of the set point)
PZERO Initial controller value. See Remark 4. (0. < Real < 1.; Default = 0)
DT Monitoring time interval or sampling period. (Real > 0.; Default = 0)
Main Index
CONTRLT 1503
Describer Meaning
DELAY Time delay after the switch is triggered or time for delayed control action in PID
control. (Real > 0.; Default = 0.0)
TAUC Decay time constant for actuator response. (Real > 0.; Default = 0.0)
FCTMIN/MAX Minimum factor/Maximum factor on load to apply. (Real; Default = 0.0)
GAINx Gain variables for heat controller. Use GAIN1 for P value, GAIN2 for I value, and
GAIN3 for D value. (Real; Default = 0.0)
Remarks:
1. The CONTRLT ID is referenced by CNTRLND entry identified on any of the CONV, CONVM,
RADBC, QVECT, QVOL, and QBDY3 Bulk Data entries. If any grid or scalar point ID is the same
as the CONTRLT ID, then the combined logic associated with the controller and the control node
will be in force for the LBC referenced. Any number of CONTRLT statements may exist in a single
model.
2. Sensor point, where a feedback temperature or rate of change of temperature is measured. May be a
dependent DOF in a MPC relationship.
3. Sensor output may only be temperature (T)
4. Control type can only be TSTAT. The PZERO field cannot have any other value but 0.0 or 1.0.
5. The upper and lower limit values (PL and PH) define a dead band for a thermostat. The available
thermostat controller (TSTAT) formats are (PTYPE = 1 through 6).
6. RC network solver only supports PTYPE=1 and PTYPE=2 thermostat controller, SFORM, CTYPE,
PZERO, DT, DELAY, TAUC and TA8 are ignored.
Main Index
1504 CONTRLT
On
On Off Off
1 Classical Heating
Thermostat
Sensor
PL PH Value
On
Off Off On
2 Classical Cooling
Thermostat
Sensor
PL PH Value
On
Off Off On
3
Sensor
PL PH Value
Main Index
CONTRLT 1505
On
On Off Off
4
Sensor
PL PH Value
On Off On
5
Sensor
PL PH Value
Off On Off
6
Sensor
PL PH Value
7. The last 5 parameters are for RC Network solver only.

8. RC Network solver only supports controllers (thermostats) on source data. This entry can be used in
either steady-state (static) or transient state (dynamic). For more details about these parameters, please
reference the MSC SINDA User’s Guide and Library Reference.
Main Index
1506 CONV
Heat Boundary Element Free Convection Entry
CONV Heat Boundary Element Free Convection Entry
Specifies a free convection boundary condition for heat transfer analysis through connection to a surface
element (CHBDYi entry).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONV EID PCONID FLMND CNTRLND TA1 TA2 TA3 TA4
TA5 TA6 TA7 TA8
Example:
CONV 2 101 3 201 301
Describer Meaning
EID CHBDYG, CHBDYE, or CHBDYP surface element identification number.
(0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PCONID Convection property identification number of a PCONV entry. (Integer > 0)
FLMND Point for film convection fluid property temperature. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
CNTRLND Control point for free convection boundary condition. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
TAi Ambient points used for convection. (Integer > 0 for TA1 and Integer > 0 for TA2
through TA8; Default for TA2 through TA8 is TA1.)
Remarks:
1. The basic exchange relationship can be expressed in one of the following forms:
• q = H ⋅ ( T – TAMB ) EXPF ( T – TAMB ) , CNTRLND = 0
• q = ( H ⋅ u CNTRLND ) ( T – TAMB ) EXPF ( T – TAMB ) , CNTRLND ≠ 0
• q = H ( T EXPF – TAMB EXPF ) , CNTRLND = 0
• q = ( H ⋅ u CNTRLND ) ( T EXPF – TAMB EXPF ) , CNTRLND ≠ 0
EXPF is specified on the PCONV entry.
(See PCONV, 2714 entry for additional clarification of forms.)
2. The continuation entry is not required.
3. CONV is used with an CHBDYi (CHBDYG, CHBDYE, or CHBDYP) entry having the same EID.
4. The temperature of the film convection point provides the look up temperature to determine the
convection film coefficient. If FLMND=0, the reference temperature has several options. It can be
the average of surface and ambient temperatures, the surface temperature, or the ambient
temperature, as defined in the FORM field of the PCONV Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
CONV 1507
Heat Boundary Element Free Convection Entry
5. If only one ambient point is specified then all the ambient points are assumed to have the same
temperature. If midside ambient points are missing, the temperature of these points is assumed to be
the average of the connecting corner points.
6. See the Bulk Data entry, PCONV, 2714, for an explanation of the mathematical relationships involved
in free convection and the reference temperature for convection film coefficient.
7. RC network solver only supports CNTRLND node defined by SPC or SPCD entries, FLMND is
ignored.
Main Index
1508 CONVM
Heat Boundary Element Forced Convection Entry
CONVM Heat Boundary Element Forced Convection Entry
Specifies a forced convection boundary condition for heat transfer analysis through connection to a surface
element (CHBDYi entry).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONVM EID PCONID FLMND CNTMDOT TA1 TA2 Mdot
Example:
CONVM 101 1 201 301 20 21
Describer Meaning
EID CHBDYP element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PCONID Convection property identification number of a PCONVM entry. (Integer > 0)
FLMND Point used for fluid film temperature. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
CNTMDOT Control point used for controlling mass flow. (Integer ≥ 0 or Blank). Blank or zero is
only allowed when Mdot > 0.0. See Remark 3.
TA1, TA2 Ambient points used for convection. (Integer > 0 for TA1 and Integer > 0 for TA2;
Default for TA2 is TA1.)
Mdot A multiplier for mass flow rate in case there is no point associated with the CNTRLND
field. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0 if CNTMDOT > 0). See Remark 3.)
Remarks:
1. CONVM is used with an CHBDYP entry of type FTUBE having the same EID.
2. The temperature of the fluid film point may be specified to determine the material properties for the
fluid. If FLMND=0, the reference temperature has several options. It can be the average of surface
and ambient temperatures, the surface temperatures, or the ambient temperature, as defined in the
FORM field of the PCONVM Bulk Data entry.
3. The CNTMDOT has a dual function. It can reference the ID of the CONTRLT Bulk Data entry to
activate a thermostat controlled flux transfer. It can also reference a GRID or a scalar point which is
set to the desired mass flow rate (mdot) to effect the advection of energy downstream at an mdot ·
Cp · T rate. If CNTMDOT is zero or is not specified (blank field), then the mass flow rate must be
specified on the Mdot field (8th field).
Case 1: Define a thermostat controller using the CONTRLT Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
CONVM 1509
Total mass flow rate = CONTRLT · Mdot · CNTMDOT

where CONTRLT is the grid ID on the 2nd field of the CONTRLT Bulk Data entry that ties the
mass flow rate through this sensor grid.
Mdot is the 8th field of the CONVM Bulk Data entry.
CNTMDOT is the grid ID that has a mass flow rate associated with it.
Example: The thermostat controller controls GRID 5 (sensor grid) from 250 degrees to 300 degrees. If the
temperature exceeds 300 degrees, then the mass flow is turned ON. If the temperature is below 250 degrees,
then the mass flow is turned OFF.
CONTRLT,5,2,T,TSTAT,250.0,300.0,1,1.0 +
+,0.0,0.0,0.0
CONVM,100001,1,,5,4
Note that GRID 5 is also specified on the 5th field of the CONVM Bulk Data entry.
Case 2: There is no CONTRLT Bulk Data entry (more general case).
Total mass flow rate = Mdot · CNTMDOT
If the CNTMDOT (the 5th field of the CONVM Bulk Data entry) is specified, then the default Mdot value
is 1.0 and the mass flow rate is defined through CNTMDOT.
Example: Define a constant mass flow rate of 0.5 through CNTMDOT.
CONVM,100001,1,,5,4
SPC,1,5,1,0.5
To specify a time-varying mass flow rate, replace the SPC Bulk Data entry by TEMPBC,TRAN for SOL 159
or by SPC1 and SPCD for SOL 400.
For SOL 159:
TEMPBC,2,TRAN,1.0,5
DLOAD,700,1.0,1.0,9
TLOAD1,9,2,,,121
TABLED1,121
,0.0,0.3,100.0,0.5,endt
For SOL 400:
SPC = 111 (Case Control command)
SPC1,111,,5
SPCD,2,5,,1.0
DLOAD,700,1.0,1.0,9
TLOAD1,9,2,,1,121
TABLED1,121
,0.0,0.3,100.0,0.5,endt
If the CNTMDOT is not specified (zero or blank), then the mass flow rate must be constant and must be
defined on Mdot (the 8th field of the CONVM Bulk Data entry).
Example: Define a mass flow rate of 0.5 directly on Mdot without specifying CNTMDOT.
Main Index
1510 CONVM
CONVM,100001,1,,,99,,0.5
4. If only the first ambient point is specified then, the second ambient point is assumed to have the same
temperature.
5. See the Bulk Data entry, PCONVM, 2717, for an explanation of the mathematical relationships available
for forced convection and the reference temperature for fluid material properties.
6. RC network solver does not support CONVM for thermal analysis, it uses PRJCON for forced
convection.
Main Index
CORD1C 1511
Cylindrical Coordinate System Definition, Form 1
CORD1C Cylindrical Coordinate System Definition, Form 1
Defines a cylindrical coordinate system using three grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CORD1C CIDA G1A G2A G3A CIDB G1B G2B G3B
Example:
CORD1C 3 16 32 19
Describer Meaning
CIDA, CIDB Coordinate system identification number. (Integer > 0)
GiA, GiB Grid point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; G1A ≠ G2A ≠ G3A ; G1B ≠ G2B ≠ G3B )
Remarks:
1. Coordinate system identification numbers on all CORD1R, CORD1C, CORD1S, CORD2R,
CORD2C, CORD2S and CORD3G entries must be unique.
2. One or two coordinate systems may be defined on a single entry.
3. GiA and GiB must be defined in coordinate systems with definitions that do not involve the
coordinate system being defined. The first point is the origin, the second lies on the z-axis, and the
third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The three grid points GiA (or GiB) must be noncolinear
and not coincident.
4. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 9-40) in this coordinate system is given by (R, θ, Z) where θ
is measured in degrees.
z
uz
G2
G3
uθ
G1 P
Z
θ ur
x R y
Figure 9-40 CORD1C Definition
Main Index
1512 CORD1C
5. The displacement coordinate directions at P are dependent on the location of P as shown above by
( u r, u θ, u z ) .
6. It is recommended that points on the z-axis not have their displacement directions defined in this
coordinate system. See the discussion of cylindrical coordinate systems in Grid Point and Coordinate
System Definition (p. 34) in the SOL 700 Reference Manual.
If CYLINDRICAL and point exactly on z-axis (r = 0.0 exactly) then R, θ , Z triad coordinates are
exactly aligned with the local defining system triad. User caution: if r ≈ 0.0 but not exactly 0.0 should
be avoided as unexpected direction cosine matrix may result.
Main Index
CORD1R 1513
Rectangular Coordinate System Definition, Form 1
CORD1R Rectangular Coordinate System Definition, Form 1
Defines a rectangular coordinate system using three grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CORD1R CIDA G1A G2A G3A CIDB G1B G2B G3B
Example:
CORD1R 3 16 32 19
Describer Meaning
CIDA, CIDB Coordinate system identification number. (Integer > 0)
GiA, GiB Grid point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; G1A ≠ G2A ≠ G3A and G1B ≠ G2B ≠ G3B )
Remarks:
3. GiA and GiB must be defined in coordinate systems with definitions that do not involve the
third lies in the x-z plane. The three grid points GiA (or GiB) must be noncolinear and not
coincident.
4. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 9-41) in this coordinate system is given by (X, Y, Z).
z
uz
G2
P
G3 uy
ux Z
G1 y
Y
x
Figure 9-41 CORD1R Definition
Main Index
1514 CORD1R
5. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown above by ( u x, u u, u z ) .
Main Index
CORD1S 1515
Spherical Coordinate System Definition, Form 1
CORD1S Spherical Coordinate System Definition, Form 1
Defines a spherical coordinate system by reference to three grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CORD1S CIDA G1A G2A G3A CIDB G1B G2B G3B
Example:
CORD1S 3 16 32 19
Describer Meaning
CIDA, CIDB Coordinate system identification numbers. (Integer > 0)
GiA, GiB Grid point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; G1A ≠ G2A ≠ G3A and G1B ≠ G2B ≠ G3B )
Remarks:
3. GiA and GiB must be defined in coordinate systems with a definition that does not involve the
third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The three grid points GiA (or GiB) must be noncolinear
and not coincident.
4. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 9-42) in this coordinate system is given by (R, θ, φ) where θ
and φ are measured in degrees.
G2
uφ
θ
ur
G3 P
G R
φ uθ
x
y
Figure 9-42 CORD1S Definition
Main Index
1516 CORD1S
( u r, u θ, u φ ) .
coordinate system. See the discussion of spherical coordinate systems in Grid Point and Coordinate System
Definition (p. 34) in the SOL 700 Reference Manual.
If SPHERICAL and R = 0.0 (point at origin) then R, θ , ϕ triad coordinates are exactly aligned with
the local defining system triad. User caution: if R ≈ 0.0 but not exactly 0.0 should be avoided as
unexpected direction cosine matrix may result.
If SPHERICAL and r in azimuth plane is r = 0.0 and z ≠ 0.0 then the coordinate system is defined as
R global along ± Z- local defining system triad according if z > 0. or z < 0., θ -global along X-local
defining system triad and ϕ -global along Y-local defining system triad. User caution: if r ≈ 0.0 but
not exactly 0.0 should be avoided as unexpected direction cosine matrix may result.
Main Index
CORD2C 1517
CORD2C Cylindrical Coordinate System Definition, Form 2
Defines a cylindrical coordinate system using the coordinates of three points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CORD2C CID RID A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
Example:
CORD2C 3 17 -2.9 1.0 0.0 3.6 0.0 1.0
5.2 1.0 -2.9
Describer Meaning
CID Coordinate system identification number. (Integer > 0)
RID Identification number of a coordinate system that is defined independently from this
coordinate system. (Integer > 0; Default = 0 is the basic coordinate system.)
Ai, Bi, Ci Coordinates of three points given with respect to the coordinate system defined by
RID. (Real)
Remarks:
2. The three points [(A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), (C1, C2, C3)] must be unique and noncolinear.
Noncolinearity is checked by the geometry processor. The first point defines the origin. The second
point defines the direction of the z-axis. The third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The
reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
3. The continuation entry is required.
4. If RID is zero or blank, the basic coordinate system is used.
Main Index
1518 CORD2C
5. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 9-43) in this coordinate system is given by (R, θ, Z), where θ
is measured in degrees.
z
uz
B
uθ
P
C
A
Z
ur
x R
y
Figure 9-43 CORD2C Definition
( u r, u θ, u z ) .
coordinate system. See the discussion of cylindrical coordinate systems in Grid Point and Coordinate
System Definition (p. 34) in the SOL 700 Reference Manual. If CYLINDRICAL and point exactly on z-
axis (r = 0.0 exactly) then R, θ , Z triad coordinates are exactly aligned with the local defining system
triad. User caution: if r ≈ 0.0 but not exactly 0.0 should be avoided as unexpected direction cosine
matrix may result.
8. If any CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S entry is changed or added on restart, then a complete
re-analysis is performed. Therefore, CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S changes or additions are not
recommended on restart.
9. An example of defining a coordinate system with respect to another coordinate system (RID) may be
found in the Linear Static Analysis manual Example (Ch. 3).
Main Index
CORD2R 1519
CORD2R Rectangular Coordinate System Definition, Form 2
Defines a rectangular coordinate system using the coordinates of three points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CORD2R CID RID A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
Example:
CORD2R 3 17 -2.9 1.0 0.0 3.6 0.0 1.0
5.2 1.0 -2.9
Describer Meaning
coordinate system. (Integer > 0; Default = 0; which is the basic coordinate system.)
Ai, Bi, Ci Coordinates of three points given with respect to the coordinate system defined by RID.
(Real)
Remarks:
CORD2C, CORD2S, and CORD3G entries must be unique.
defines the direction of the z-axis. The third point defines a vector which, with the z-axis, defines the
x-z plane. The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
Main Index
1520 CORD2R
6. The location of a grid point (P in the Figure 9-44) in this coordinate system is given by (X, Y, Z).
z
uz
B
P
C uy
ux Z
A
y
Y
x
Figure 9-44 CORD2R Definition
7. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown by ( u x, u y, u z ) .

Main Index
CORD2S 1521
CORD2S Spherical Coordinate System Definition, Form 2
Defines a spherical coordinate system using the coordinates of three points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CORD2S CID RID A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
Example:
CORD2S 3 17 -2.9 1.0 0.0 3.6 0.0 1.0
5.2 1.0 -2.9
Describer Meaning
coordinate system. (Integer > 0; Default = 0 is the basic coordinate system.)
Ai, Bi, Ci Coordinates of three points given with respect to the coordinate system defined by
RID. (Real)
Remarks:
CORD2C, CORD2S, and CORD3G entries must all be unique.
point defines the direction of the z-axis. The third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The
reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
Main Index
1522 CORD2S
6. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 9-45) in this coordinate system is given by (R, θ, φ), where θ
and φ are measured in degrees.
z
B
uφ
θ
ur
C P
A R
uθ
φ
x
Figure 9-45 CORD2S Definition
7. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown above by ( u r, u θ, u φ ) .

coordinate system. See the discussion of spherical coordinate systems in Grid Point and Coordinate System
Definition (p. 34) in the SOL 700 Reference Manual.
If SPHERICAL and R = 0.0 (point at origin) then R, θ , ϕ triad coordinates are exactly aligned with
the local defining system triad. User caution: if R ≈ 0.0 but not exactly 0.0 should be avoided as
unexpected direction cosine matrix may result.
If SPHERICAL and r in azimuth plane is r = 0.0 and z ≠ 0.0 then the coordinate system is defined as
R global along ± Z- local defining system triad according if z > 0. or z < 0., θ -global along X-local
defining system triad and ϕ -global along Y-local defining system triad. User caution: if r ≈ 0.0 but
not exactly 0.0 should be avoided as unexpected direction cosine matrix may result.
Main Index
CORD3G 1523
General Coordinate System
CORD3G General Coordinate System
Defines a general coordinate system using three rotational angles as functions of coordinate values in the
reference coordinate system. The CORD3G entry is used with the MAT9 entry to orient material principal
axes for 3-D composite analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CORD3G CID METHOD FORM THETAID1 THETAID2 THETAID3 CIDREF
Example:
CORD3G 100 E313 EQN 110 111 112 0
Describer Meaning
CID Coordinate system identification number. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0)
METHOD E313 or S321 for Euler angle rotation in 313 sequence or space-fixed rotation in 321
sequence. See Remark 2. (Character; Default = “E313”)
FORM Specifies the Bulk Data entry which defines angles. FORM = “EQN” for DEQATN
entry or FORM = “TABLE” for TABLE3D entry. (Character; Default = “EQN”)
THETAID Identification number for DEQATN or TABLE3D Bulk Data entry which defines the
three angles (in radians) measured from reference coordinates to the general material
coordinate system. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0)
CIDREF Identification number for the coordinate system from which the orientation of the
general coordinate system is defined. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
Remarks:
1. CID must be unique with respect to all other coordinate systems. CID cannot be referenced on
GRID entries.
2. Three Euler angles specify the rotation of the CORD3G coordinate axes (xyz) with respect to the local
Cartesian coordinate axes (XYZ) in CIDREF as follows: first rotate about Z-axis by θ 1 , next rotate
about rotated x-axis by θ 2 , and then rotate about rotated z-axis by θ 3 . On the other hand, the
space-fixed rotations in 321 sequence specify all the rotations about the fixed coordinate axes: first
rotate about Z by θ 1 , next about Y by θ 2 , then about X by θ 3 .
3. The three rotations define a coordinate transformation which transforms position vectors in the
reference coordinate system into the general coordinate system.
4. The DEQATN option must have three arguments representing the three axes of CIDREF, although
not all arguments are necessarily needed in the equation.
Main Index
1524 CORD3G
General Coordinate System
5. If FORM = EQN is used with CIDREF pointing to any CORD1k or CORD2k, k = C,S, and a
spatial relationship is required, then the equations are written using R, θ , ϕ as input variables. Non
spatial fixed values such as THETA1 (A,B,C)=PI(1.) may of course be entered for any type of
coordinate defined by the CIDREF.
If FORM = TABLE3D is used with CIDREF pointing to any CORD1k or CORD2k, k = C,S, and
a spatial relationship is required then the equations are written using the variables X,Y, Z defined at
the origin of the CIDREF as input values and not the variables R, θ ,Z or R, θ , ϕ input values. For
example, if a CORD1S is used then the table input value is X internally computed as R ⋅ SINθ ⋅ COSϕ .
Whether the EQN or TABLE3D FORM is used, the equation must return an angle measure in
radians to have any meaning.
Main Index
CORD3R 1525
Moving Rectangular Coordinate System
CORD3R Moving Rectangular Coordinate System
Defines a moving rectangular coordinate system using three points in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CORD3R CID N1 N2 N3 CID N1 N2 N3
Example:
CORD3R 1001 1 144 300
Describer Meaning
CID Unique coordinate system number. (Integer > 0)
N1, N2, N3 Grid point numbers (must be unique). (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. Available in SOL 700 only.
2. Two different coordinate systems may be defined on one entry.
3. The grid points must be defined in an independent coordinate system.
4. The first grid point is the origin, the second lies on the z-axis and the third lies in the x-z plane.
5. The position and orientation of the coordinate system is updated as the grid points move.
6. The three grid points must not be colinear.
Main Index
1526 COUCOHF
Cohesive Friction Model To Be Used For a COUPLE Entry
COUCOHF Cohesive Friction Model To Be Used For a COUPLE Entry
Defines a cohesive friction model suited for Euler Coupled analyses. The friction model is defined as part of
the coupling surface. Use SOL700 only.
Format:
COUCOHF CID COHFRID SUBID COHFRICID
Example:
COUCOHF 112 14 12 12
Describer Meaning
CID Unique number of a COUCOHF entry. (Integer ≥0; required)
COHFRID Number of a set of COUCOHF entries. COUCOHF must be referenced from a
COUPLE entry. (Integer ≥0; required)
SUBID BSURF, BCSEG or BCPROP id, which must be a part of the BSID field of the
COUPLE entry. See Remark 2. (Integer ≥0; default=blank)
COHFRICID Cohesive friction ID (Integer ≥0; required)
Remarks:
1. One couple entry can reference more than one COUCOHF entry. This allows a cohesive friction that
varies along the coupling surface.
2. When SUBID is left blank, then the cohesive friction applies to the whole coupling surface.
3. A coupling surface segment can only have one porosity or one cohesive friction definition assigned.
Main Index
COUOPT 1527
Coupling Surface Pressure Definition
COUOPT Coupling Surface Pressure Definition
Defines the interaction factor and a pressure load from the covered side acting on a BSURF, BCPROP,
BCMATL, BCSEG, BCBOX. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
COUOPT CID OPTID SUBID FACTOR FACTORV
PLCOVER PLCOVERV
Example:
COUOPT 1 80 42 CONSTANT
CONSTANT 1.E5
Describer Meaning
CID Unique number of a COUOPT entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
OPTID Number of a set of COUOPT entries. OPTID must be referenced from a COUPLE
SUBID >0 Number of a BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP, BCMATL or BCSEG,
which must be part of the surface as defined in the COUPLE entry.
(Integer > 0, 0)
=0 COUOPT definitions used for the entire surface as defined in the
COUPLE entry.
FACTOR Method of defining the interaction FACTORV with which the Eulerian pressure acting
on the surface is multiplied. (Character, CONSTANT)
CONSTANT The FACTOR is constant and specified in FACTORV
FACTORV The interaction factor. (Real, 1.)
PLCOVER Method of defining the pressure load exerted on the faces of the surface from the covered
side. The pressure load is applied only when the Eulerian pressure is greater than zero.
(Character, CONSTANT)
CONSTANT The PLCOVER is constant and specified in PLCOVERV.
TABLE The PLCOVER varies with time. PLCOVERV is the number of a
TABLED1 entry giving the variation of the PLCOVER (y-value) with
time (x-value).
PLCOVERV The pressure load or the number of a TABLED1 entry depending on the PLCOVER
entry. (Real > 0, 0.)
Main Index
1528 COUOPT
Coupling Surface Pressure Definition
Remarks:
1. The effect of specifying an interaction FACTOR is similar to specifying a porosity coefficient on a
COUPOR entry. The difference is that in this case the surface still acts as a wall boundary for the
Eulerian material.
2. Applying a PLCOVER instead of applying a pressure load on the faces through either a PLOAD,
PLOAD4, or DAREA entry gives the following differences:
a. PLCOVER is applied only when there is a balancing Eulerian pressure greater than zero.
b. Possible porosity as defined on a COUPOR entry is taken into account when applying the
PLCOVER.
c. With PARAM,PLCOVCUT you can define a cut-off time that is applied to PLCOVER.
3. The covered side of a surface lies on the side where there is no Eulerian material.
Main Index
COUP1FL 1529
Coupling Surface Failure
COUP1FL Coupling Surface Failure
Defines the surrounding variables when a segment of a coupling surface fails. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
COUP1FL CFID RHO SIE XVEL YVEL ZVEL PRESSURE MATERIAL
Example:
COUP1FL 3 1.225 204082. 900.
Describer Meaning
CFID Unique ID of a COUP1FL entry referenced from the COUPLE entry. (Integer > 0;
Required)
RHO Surrounding density. See Remark 2. (Real > 0)
SIE Surrounding specific internal energy. See Remark 2. (Real)
XVEL Surrounding x-velocity. See Remark 2. (Real)
YVEL Surrounding y-velocity. See Remark 2. (Real)
ZVEL Surrounding x-velocity. See Remark 2. (Real)
PRESSURE Surrounding pressure. See Remark 4. (Real)
MATERIAL MATDEUL ID. Only used when the multi-material Euler solver is active. (Blank)
Remarks:
1. This entry can only be used in combination with DYPARAM,FASTCOUP, ,FAIL and with either
the HYDRO, MMHYDRO or MMSTREN Euler Solver. For restrictions on the use of COUP1FL
refer to param,flow-method. The coupling surface failure is associated with the element failure of the
structure to which the surface is connected. Therefore, you have to define a failure model for the
structure for the entry to take effect in the analysis.
2. For the first order Euler solvers no restriction apply to the values of the surrounding variables. For the
Roe solver at least one of the surrounding variables should be defined. The default value of the density
(RHO) will be set equal to the reference density as defined on the MATDEUL entry. By default, the
other variables (SIE, XVEL, YVEL and ZVEL) are set equal to zero.
3. The coupling surface must only consist of CQUAD and/or CTRIA elements.
4. The field PRESSURE has to be left blank in combination with the Roe solver.
5. In combination with multi-material Euler only outflow of material is allowed. Each material in an
outflow Euler element is transported. The materials are transported in proportion to their relative
volume fractions.
Main Index
1530 COUPINT
Coupling Surface Interaction
COUPINT Coupling Surface Interaction
Defines the surrounding variables when a segment of a coupling surface fails. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
COUPINT CID CID1 CID2
Example:
COUPINT 33 2
Describer Meaning
CIID Unique number of a COUPINT entry.
CID1 Number of COUPLE entry 1.
CID2 Number of COUPLE entry 2.
Remarks:
1. This entry can only be used in combination with DYPARAM,FASTCOUP, ,FAIL and with either
the HYDRO, MMHYDRO or MMSTREN Euler Solver. The interaction will be activated when
failure of a Lagrangian structure with which the coupling surface is associated occurs. Therefore, you
have to define a failure model for the material of the structure.
2. The coupling surface must consist of CQUAD and/or CTRIA elements.
Main Index
COUPLE 1531
General Euler-Lagrange Coupling Surface
COUPLE General Euler-Lagrange Coupling Surface
Defines a coupling surface that acts as the interface between an Eulerian (finite volume) and a Lagrangian
(finite element) domain. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
COUPLE CID BSID COVER REVERSE CHECK PORID OPTID CTYPE
INFID HTRID FS FK EXP INTID
SET1ID MESHID TDEAC COUP1FL HYDSTAT SKFRIC COHFRID
Example:
COUPLE 100 37 INSIDE ON ON
0.3 0.0
Describer Meaning
CID Unique number of a COUPLE entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
BSID Number of a BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP, BCMATL or BCSEG entry defining the
coupling surface. (Integer > 0; Required)
COVER The processing strategy for Eulerian elements inside and outside of the coupling surface.
(Character, INSIDE)
INSIDE The Eulerian elements inside the closed volume of the coupling surface
are not processed.
OUTSIDE The Eulerian elements outside the closed volume of the coupling
surface are not processed
NONE The Eulerian elements on both sides of the coupling surface are
processed.
REVERSE Auto-reverse switch for the coupling surface segments. (Character, ON)
ON If required, the normals of the coupling surface segments are
automatically reversed so that they all point in the same general
direction as to give a positive closed volume.
OFF The segments are not automatically reversed. The user is responsible
for defining the correct general direction of the segment normals.
CHECK Check switch for coupling surface segments. (Character, ON)
ON The normals of the segments are checked to verify that they all point in
the same general direction and yield a positive closed volume.
OFF The segments are not checked. It the responsibility of the user to ensure
that the direction of the segment normals yield a positive closed
volume.
Main Index
1532 COUPLE
Describer Meaning
When “REVERSE” is set to “ON”, the “CHECK” option will be automatically
activated.
PORID Number of a set of “LEAKAGE” entries that define the porosity for the BSURF entries.
(Integer > 0, 0 (no porosity))
OPTID Not available for the Roe solver
Number of a set of “COUOPT” entries that define special options for the BSURF
entries (Integer > 0, 0 (no special options))
CTYPE Not available for the Roe solver
Coupling surface type definition. (Character, STANDARD)
STANDARD Standard Euler-Lagrange interaction.
AIRBAG Coupling for airbag applications.
It is equivalent to the standard coupling algorithm with the following
exceptions that tailor the solution for airbag applications:
Inflow through a porous (sub)-surface will only occur when there is
already some material (gas) in the Eulerian element.
Almost empty Eulerian elements will be automatically eliminated. The
standard algorithm redistributes the small mass to the must suitable
neighbor elements.
INFID Number of a set of “ABINFL” entries that define the inflator(s) on the subsurface(s) of
the coupling surface. Not available for the Roe solver. (Integer > 0, 0 (no inflators))
HTRID Number of a set of “HEATLOS” entries that define the heat transfer definition(s) on the
subsurface(s) of the coupling surface. Not available for the Roe solver. (Integer > 0, 0 (no
heat transfer))
FS Static friction coefficient. See Remark 6. Not available for the Roe solver. (Real > 0.0,
0.0)
FK Kinetic friction coefficient. See Remark 6. Not available for the Roe solver. (Real > 0.0,
0.0)
EXP Exponential decay coefficient. See Remark 6. Not available for the Roe solver. (Real >
0.0, 0.0)
INTID ID of an INITGAS entry specifying initial gas composition for the Euler mesh. See
Remark 7. (Integer > 0, 0 (no initial gas composition))
SET1ID The number of a SET1 entry, which defines the Eulerian elements associated with this
coupling surface. See Remark 8. (Integer > 0; Default = blank)
MESHID ID of a MESH entry, which defines the Eulerian mesh associated with this coupling
surface. See Remark 8. (Integer > 0; Default = blank)
TDEAC Time of deactivation of the coupling surface and the associated Eulerian mesh. (Real >
0.0, 1.E20)
Main Index
COUPLE 1533
Describer Meaning
COUP1FL The number of a COUP1FL entry, which defines the surrounding variables for the
coupling surface when its segments fail. See Remark 9. (Integer > 0; Default = blank)
HYDSTAT The number of a HYDSTAT entry, which specifies a hydrostatic preset. The preset is
applied to all Euler element specified by the SET1ID and MESHID. See Remark 11.
(Integer > 0, 0 (no hydrostatic preset)
SKFRIC Skin friction value. See Remark 13. (Real > 0.0, 0.0)
COHFRID Number of a set of COUCOHF entries that define the cohesive friction on the
subsurface(s) of the coupling surface.(I> 0 Default = blank)
Remarks:
1. All coupling surfaces must form a multi-faceted closed volume. If necessary, additional segments must
be defined to achieve the closed volume. The closed volume must intersect at least one Euler element
initially.
2. All segments must de attached to the face of an element. Dummy elements can be used to define any
additional segments that are required to create the closed volume.
3. The normals of all segments that from the coupling surface must point in the same general direction
and result in a positive closed volume. Setting the “REVERSE” option to “ON” ensures that this
condition is satisfied, regardless of the initial definition of the segments.
4. The “COVER” field determines how Eulerian elements that are inside and outside of the coupling
surface are processed. The default setting of INSIDE is appropriate for most of the problems. In the
majority of analyses, the Eulerian material flows around the outside of the coupling surface.
Therefore, the Eulerian elements that fall within the coupling surface do not contain material. For
some specific applications, such as airbag inflation, the Eulerian material (gas) is completed contained
within the coupling surface. In these cases, the “COVER” definition should be set to OUTSIDE.
5. By default the fast coupling algorithm is used. The algorithm then used is substantially faster than the
general coupling. The restriction is that you cannot use an arbitrarily shaped Euler mesh with the fast
coupling algorithm. All element faces of the Euler mesh must have their normal pointing in any of
the three basic coordinate directions. If you want to use the general coupling algorithm, you can
define the parameter “DYPARAM,FASTCOUP,NO” in the input file.
6. The friction model implemented for the coupling algorithm is a simple Coulomb friction definition.
The friction coefficient μ is defined as:
–( β ⋅ ν )
μ = μk + ( μs – μk ) ⋅ e
where μ s is the static friction coefficient, μ k is the kinetic friction coefficient, β the exponential decay
coefficient and ν the relative sliding at the point of contact.
7. An initial gas composition is for use with the single-material hydrodynamic Euler solver and an ideal-
gas equation of state (EOSGAM) only.
Main Index
1534 COUPLE
8. Multiple coupling surfaces are available when you associate one Eulerian domain with a single
coupling surface by either using the SET1ID or the MESHID option. Note that only one of the two
options may be set and will work only in combination with the fast coupling algorithm.
9. The COUP1FL option is available and valid only in combination with the fast coupling algorithm
with the failure option (DYPARAM,FASTCOUP, ,FAIL). If no number is given, the default values
of the surrounding variables will be used; the density (RHO) is set equal to the reference density as
defined on the MATDEUL entry. By default, the other variables (SIE, XVEL, YVEL and ZVEL) are
set equal to zero.
10. If an ACTIVE entry is present, its definition is ignored in case the TDEAC value is defined in
combination with the fast coupling algorithm.
11. If there is only one coupling surface and no adaptive meshing is used, the HYDSTAT field can be left
blank. To impose a boundary condition that matches the hydrostatic initialization, the PORHYDS
entry can be used.
12. A mixture of BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP, BCMATL or BCSEG with the same BSID is allowed.
However multiple BSID of the same type is not allowed. When using this option, special care must
be taken to assure the same element is not part of multiple BSID definitions.
13. The skin friction is defined as:
τw
C f = ---------------------2
0.5 ⋅ ρu
Here, τ w denotes the shear friction in an Euler element adjacent to a couple surface segment where
ρ is the density and u is the tangential relative velocity in the Euler element that is adjacent to a couple
surface segment.
SKFRIC will only be used when VISC has been set on either an EOSGAM or an EOSPOL entry. If
VISC has been set and if SKFRIC has not been set then a no slip condition will be prescribed at the
interface between fluid and structure.
14. If the coupling surface is a structural solid then Sol700 can automatically create a coupling surface for
the solid. This coupling surface consists of the boundary faces of the solid. To activate this, a
BCPROP has to be created for the solid and the BCPROP has to be used for the BSID of the
COUPLE entry.
15. Option NONE requires the use of DYPARAM, AUTCOUP. For details refer to this DYPARAM.
Main Index
CPENTA 1535
Five-Sided Solid Element Connection
CPENTA Five-Sided Solid Element Connection
Defines the connections of a five-sided solid element with six to fifteen grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CPENTA EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14
G15
Example:
CPENTA 112 2 3 15 14 4 103 115
5 16 8 120 125
130

EID Element identification number. 0 < Integer < 100,000,000 Required
PID Property identification number of a PSOLID or Integer > 0 Required
PLSOLID entry.
Gi Identification numbers of connected grid Integer > 0 or blank Required
points.
G6
G15 G14
G12
G13
G4 G5
G10 G3
G11
G9 G8
G7
G1
G2
Figure 9-46 CPENTA Element Connection
Main Index
1536 CPENTA
Remarks:
1. Element ID numbers must be unique with respect to all other element ID numbers.
2. The topology of the diagram must be preserved; i.e., G1, G2, and G3 define a triangular face, G1,
G10, and G4 are on the same edge, etc.
3. For Nastran conventional element, the edge grid points, G7 to G15, are optional. Any or all of them
may be deleted. In the example shown, G10, G11, and G12 have been deleted. The continuations
are not required if all edge grid points are deleted.
either none of the mid-points should be specified or all of the mid points should be specified.
4. Components of stress are output in the material coordinate system except for hyperelastic elements,
which are output in the basic coordinate system.
5. For nonhyperelastic elements the element coordinate system for the CPENTA element is derived
accordingly. The origin of the coordinate system is located at the midpoint of the straight line
connecting the points G1 and G4. The Z axis points toward the triangle G4-G5-G6 and is oriented
somewhere between the line joining the centroids of the triangular faces and a line perpendicular to
the midplane. The midplane contains the midpoints of the straight lines between the triangular faces.
The X and Y axes are perpendicular to the Z axis and point in a direction toward, but not necessarily
intersecting, the edges G2 through G5 and G3 through G6, respectively.
Main Index
CPENTA 1537
G6
z
G15
G14
G4 y
G13
G5
G12
G11
G10 x
G3 G8
G9
G7 G2
G1
Figure 9-47 CPENTA Element Coordinate System
6. We recommend that the edge grid points be located within the middle third of the edge.
7. For hyperelastic elements, the plot codes are specified under the CPENTAFD element name in Item
Codes, 999.
8. If a CPENTA element is referenced on a PSET or PVAL entry, then a p-version formulation is used
9. By default, all of the nine edges of the element are considered straight unless:
• For p-elements there is an FEEDGE or FEFACE entry that contains the two grids of any edge of
this element. In this case, the geometry of the edge is used in the element.
• For h-elements any of G7 through G15 are specified.
Main Index
1538 CPENTA
Figure 9-48 PSOLID for CPENTA
Main Index
CPYRAM 1539
CPYRAM Five-Sided Solid Element Connection
Defines the connections of the five-sided solid element with five or thirteen grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CPYRAM EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13
Example:
CPYRAM 7 4 15 16 17 18 40 21
22 23 24 31 32 33 34

PID Property identification number of a PSOLID Integer > 0 Required
entry.
points.
Figure 9-49 CPYRAM Element Connection
Main Index
1540 CPYRAM
Remarks:
2. The topology of the diagram must be preserved, that is, G1, G2, G3, G4 define the quadrilateral base,
G5 defines the apex, G1, G5, G10 are on the same edge, etc.
3. For a 5 noded CPYRAM element, only G1 - G5 should be provided. For a 13 noded CPYRAM
element, all the corner and mid-side nodes (G1 - G13) should be provided. Note that partial
specification of mid-points is not allowed. i.e. either none of the mid-points should be specified or all
of the mid points should be specified.
4. The pyramid elements use the basic coordinate system as the element coordinate system. They can
use a material coordinate system defined by the CORDM field of the corresponding PSOLID entry.
CORDM = 0, -1, -2 or blank is the same as the basic coordinate system.
5. For CORDM > 0, the material coordinate system is defined with respect to the initial geometry and
is used to input orthotropic or anisotropic material properties and for stress output. For geometric
nonlinear analysis, the material coordinate system rotates with the element. Component of stresses
are output in the material coordinate system referenced by the CORDM field of PSOLID entry
(CORDM > 0).
Main Index
CQUAD 1541
Fully Nonlinear Plane Strain Element
CQUAD Fully Nonlinear Plane Strain Element
Defines a plane strain quadrilateral element with up to nine grid points for use in fully nonlinear (i.e., large
strain and large rotation) hyperelastic analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CQUAD EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 THETA or
MCID
Example:
CQUAD 111 203 31 74 75 32
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PLPLANE or PLCOMP entry. (Integer > 0)
G1, G2, Identification numbers of connected corner grid points. Required data for all four grid
G3, G4 points. (Unique Integers > 0)
G5, G6, Identification numbers of connected edge grid points. Optional data for any or all four
G7, G8 grid points. (Integer > 0 or blank)
G9 Identification number of center grid point. Optional. (Integer > 0 or blank)
THETA Material property orientation angle in degrees. THETA is only applicable if PLCOMP
referenced, or the PLPLANE entry has an associated PSHLN2 entry which is honored
only in SOL 400. For PSHLN2 BEHi=PSTRS or PLSTRN codes, THETA is measured
relative to the line defined from G1-G2. For PSHLN2 or PLCOMP BEHi=COMPS
code the THETA value on the element connection entry will be ignored. (Real; Default
= 0.0)
MCID Material coordinate system identification number MCID is only applicable if the
PLPLANE entry has an associated PSHLN2 entry which is honored only in SOL 400.
The x-axis of the material coordinate system is determined by projecting the T1-axis of
the MCID coordinate system onto the surface of the shell element as follows:
CORD1R, x -axis of MCID the coordinate is projected onto shell surface and the
CORD2R material angle is measured from the G1-G2 line to the to the projected x-
axis
Main Index
1542 CQUAD
Fully Nonlinear Plane Strain Element
Describer Meaning
CORD1C, r-axis of MCID the coordinate is projected onto shell surface through the
CORD2C element center and the material angle is measured from the G1-G2 line to
CORD1S, the to the projected r-axis
CORD2S
For PSHLN2 (or PLCOMP) BEHi=COMPS code the MCID value on the element
connection entry will be ignored. (Integer > 0; if blank, then THETA = 0.0 is assumed.)
Remarks:
1. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element IDs of any kind.
2. Grid points G1 to G9 must be numbered as shown and must lie on a plane. G5 - G9 are Optional
data for any or all four grid points for Nastran conventional element only.
4. The plot codes are specified under the CQUADFD element name in Item Codes, 999.
5. Stresses and strains are output in the coordinate system identified by the CID field of the PLPLANE
entry.
η = 1 G7
G4
G3
η = constant
Lines of
ξ = –1 ξ = 1 Constant η or ξ
ξ = 0
η = 0 ξ = constant
G8 G9
G6
η = –1
G2
G5
G1
Figure 9-50 CQUAD Element Coordinate System
Main Index
CQUAD4 1543
Quadrilateral Plate Element Connection
CQUAD4 Quadrilateral Plate Element Connection
Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending or plane strain quadrilateral plate element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CQUAD4 EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 THETA or ZOFFS
MCID
TFLAG T1 T2 T3 T4
Example:
CQUAD4 111 203 31 74 75 32 2.6 0.3
1.77 2.04 2.09 1.80
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PSHELL, PCOMP, PCOMPG or PLPLANE or
PLCOMP entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
Gi Grid point identification numbers of connection points.
(Integers > 0, all unique.)
THETA Material property orientation angle in degrees. THETA is ignored for hyperelastic
elements. See Figure 9-52. See Remark 10. (Real; Default = 0.0)
MCID Material coordinate system identification number. The x-axis of the material coordinate
system is determined by projecting the T1-axis of the MCID coordinate system onto the
surface of the shell element as follows:
axis
CORD2C element center and the material angle is measured from the G1-G2 line
CORD1S, to the to the projected r-axis
CORD2S
Use DIAG 38 to print the computed THETA values. MCID is ignored for hyperelastic
elements. For SOL 600, only CORD2R is allowed. See Remark 10. (Integer > 0; If
blank, then THETA = 0.0 is assumed.)
Main Index
1544 CQUAD4
x
MCID
Coordinate
System
z
G2
y G3
ymaterial
xmaterial
G4
G1
Figure 9-51 MCID Coordinate System Definition
ZOFFS Offset from the surface of grid points to the element reference plane. ZOFFS is
ignored for hyperelastic elements. See Remark 6. (Real)
TFLAG An integer flag, signifying the meaning of the Ti values. (Integer 0, 1, or blank)
Ti Membrane thickness of element at grid points G1 through G4. If “TFLAG” is zero or
blank, then Ti are actual user specified thicknesses. See Remark 4. for default. (Real
> 0.0 or blank, not all zero.) If “TFLAG” is one, then the Ti are fractions relative to the
T value of the PSHELL. (Real > 0.0 or blank, not all zero. Default = 1.0) Ti are ignored
for hyperelastic elements.
Remarks:
numbers.
2. Grid points G1 through G4 must be ordered consecutively around the perimeter of the element.
4. The continuation is optional. If it is not supplied, then T1 through T4 will be set equal to the value
of T on the PSHELL entry.
Main Index
CQUAD4 1545
yelement
G3
G4
β+γ xelement
α = ------------
2
α
xmaterial
zelement
β
THETA γ
G1 G2
Figure 9-52 CQUAD4 Element Geometry and Coordinate Systems
5. The reference coordinate system for the output of stress, strain and element force depends on the
element type.
• For CQUAD4 elements which are not p-elements and not hyperelastic, the reference coordinate
system is the default for output is the element coordinate system. See PARAM,OMID for output
in the material system.
• For CQUAD4 elements referenced by a PSET or PVAL entry, the stresses, strains and element
forces are output in the local tangent plane of the element. The local tangents are oriented in a
user defined direction which is uniform across a set of elements. By default, the local tangent
x-direction is oriented in the positive x-direction of the basic coordinate system. See the Bulk
Data entry, OUTRCV, 2580 for user defined output coordinate systems.
• For hyperelastic elements the stress and strain are output according to CID on the PLPLANE
entry.
6. Elements may be offset from the connection points by means of ZOFFS. Other data, such as material
matrices and stress fiber locations, are given relative to the reference plane. A positive value of ZOFFS
implies that the element reference plane is offset a distance of ZOFFS along the positive Z-axis of the
element coordinate system. If the ZOFFS field is used, then the MID1 and MID2 fields must be
specified on the PSHELL entry referenced both by PID.
Two methods are available for the computation of offsets: original and enhanced. The default method
is the original method. The enhanced method is requested by the Bulk Data entry
with PARAM, LGDISP, 1. In addition in SOLs 106 and 129 offset vectors will produce incorrect
results with thermal loading.
Main Index
1546 CQUAD4
7. For finite deformation hyperelastic analysis, the plot codes are given by the CQUADFD element
name in Item Codes, 999.
8. If a CQUAD4 element is referenced by a PSET or PVAL entry, then a p-version formulation is used
• If a curved edge of a p-element is shared by an h-element CQUAD4, the geometry of the edge is
ignored and set straight.
9. By default, all of the four edges of the element are considered straight unless the element is a
p-element and the edge is associated to curved geometry with a FEEDGE or FEFACE entry.
10. If element has an associated PSHLN2 or PLCOMP entry with BEHi=COMPS code, the
THETA/MCID value on the element connection entry will be ignored.
11. For RC network solver in thermal analysis, the ZOFFS is ignored.
12. In SOL 600, when PCOMP is used, one must define the material property with orientation,
MCID>0.
Main Index
CQUAD8 1547
Curved Quadrilateral Shell Element Connection
CQUAD8 Curved Quadrilateral Shell Element Connection
Defines a curved quadrilateral shell or plane strain element with eight grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CQUAD8 EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 T1 T2 T3 T4 THETA or ZOFFS
MCID
TFLAG
Example:
CQUAD8 207 3 31 33 73 71 32 51
53 72 0.125 0.025 0.030 .025 30. .03
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PSHELL, PCOMP, PCOMPG or PLPLANE or
PLCOMP entry. (Integer > 0)
G1, G2, G3, G4 Identification numbers of connected corner grid points. Required data for all four grid
points. (Unique Integers > 0)
G5, G6, G7, G8 Identification numbers of connected edge grid points. Optional data for any or all four
grid points for Nastran conventional element only. (Integer > 0 or blank).
Note that for advanced nonlinear elements, partial specification of mid-points is not
allowed. i.e. either none of the mid-points should be specified or all of the mid points
should be specified.
Ti Membrane thickness of element at grid points G1 through G4. If “TFLAG” zero or
blank, then Ti are actual user specified thickness. See Remark 4. for default. (Real > 0.0
or blank, not all zero.) If “TFLAG” one, then the Ti are fraction relative to the T value
of the PSHELL. (Real > 0.0 or blank, not all zero. Default = 1.0) Ti are ignored for
hyperelastic elements.
THETA Material property orientation angle in degrees. See Figure 9-53. THETA is ignored for
hyperelastic elements. See Remark 10. (Real; Default = 0.0)
CORD2R material angle is measured from the G1-G2 line to the to the projected
x-axis
Main Index
1548 CQUAD8
Describer Meaning
CORD2S
(see Remark 3.) MCID is ignored for hyperelastic elements. For SOL 600, only
CORD2R is allowed. See Remark 10. (Integer > 0; if blank, then THETA = 0.0 is
assumed.)
ZOFFS Offset from the surface of grid points to the element reference plane. See Remark 6.
ZOFFS is ignored for hyperelastic elements. (Real)
Remarks:
2. Grid points G1 to G8 must be numbered as shown in Figure 9-53.
3. The orientation of the material property coordinate system is defined locally at each interior
integration point by THETA, which is the angle between xmaterial and the line of constant η.
The definition of the material coordinate system by projection is used to calculate an angle THETA.
Please note that since xi changes directions throughout the element based on element shape, the
material coordinate system varies similarly. Because of this an orthotropic or anisotropic material will
cause the CQUAD8’s stiffness to be biased by both it’s shape and grid ordering. Use the QUAD4
element if a constant material coordinate system direction is desired with orthotropic and anisotropic
materials.
4. T1, T2, T3 and T4 are optional. If they are not supplied and no TFLAG, then T1 through T4 will
be set to the value of T on the PSHELL entry.
5. It is recommended that the midside grid points be located within the middle third of the edge. If the
edge point is located at the quarter point, the program may fail with a divide-by-zero error or the
calculated stresses will be meaningless.
6. Elements may be offset from the connection points by means of the ZOFFS field. Other data, such
as material matrices and stress fiber locations, are given relative to the reference plane. A positive value
of ZOFFS implies that the element reference plane is offset a distance of ZOFFS along the positive
z-axis of the element coordinate system. If the ZOFFS field is used, then both the MID1 and MID2
fields must be specified on the PSHELL entry referenced by PID.
Main Index
CQUAD8 1549
7. If all midside grid points are deleted, then the element will be excessively stiff and the transverse shear
forces incorrect. A User Warning Message is printed, and a CQUAD4 element is recommended
instead. If the element is hyperelastic, then it is processed identically to the hyperelastic CQUAD4
element.
8. For a description of the element coordinate system, see Shell Elements (CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CQUAD4,
CQUAD8, CQUADR) (p. 112) in the . Stresses and strains are output in the local coordinate system
identified by x l and y l in Figure 9-53. However, for hyperelastic elements the stress and strain are
output in the coordinate system identified by the CID field on the PLPLANE entry.
9. For hyperelastic elements the plot codes are specified under the CQUADFD element name in Item
Codes, 999.
yl yl
G7 yl
G3 xmaterial
η
G4 xl
yl
ξ
xl ( β + THETA )
4 xl β
 Gi/4
i =1 xl
Center
G8
G6
yl yl
xl
G5
THETA G2 xl
G1
Stress output at each
Gi local system
eη
yl
η
α
B eξ
A
α⁄2 ξ
α
β = 45° – ---
2
β 45°
Gi
xl
where
Main Index
1550 CQUAD8
eη is tangent to η at Gi
eξ is tangent to ξ at Gi
A is formed by bisection of e η and e ξ
B and A are perpendicular
yl is formed by bisection of A and B
xl is perpendicular to y l
Figure 9-53 CQUAD8 Element Geometry and Coordinate Systems
10. If element has an associated PSHLN2 or PLCOMP entry with BEHi=COMPS code, the
THETA/MCID value on the element connection entry will be ignored.
MCID>0.
Main Index
CQUADR 1551
CQUADR Quadrilateral Plate Element Connection
Defines an isoparametric membrane and bending quadrilateral plate element. This element has a normal
rotational (drilling) degrees-of-freedom. It is a companion to the CTRIAR element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CQUADR EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 THETA or ZOFFS
MCID
TFLAG T1 T2 T3 T4
Example:
CQUADR 82 203 31 74 75 32 2.6
1.77 2.04 2.09 1.80
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PSHELL, PCOMP or PCOMPGentry.
(Integer > 0; Default = EID)
Gi Grid point identification numbers of connection points.
(Integers > 0, all unique)
THETA Material property orientation angle in degrees. See Figure 9-55. (Real; Default = 0)
x-axis
CORD2S
Use DIAG 38 to print the computed THETA values. For SOL 600, only CORD2R is
allowed. (Integer > 0; If blank, then THETA = 0.0 is assumed.)
ZOFFS Offset from the surface of grid point to the element plane. See Remark 8.
Main Index
1552 CQUADR
x
MCID
Coordinate
System
z
G2
y G3
ymaterial
xmaterial
G4
G1
blank, then Ti are actual user specified thickness. (Real > 0.0 or blank, not all zero.
See Remark 4. for default.) If “TFLAG” one, then the Ti are fraction relative to the T
value of the PSHELL. (Real > 0.0 or blank, not all zero. Default = 1.0) Ti are ignored
for hyperelastic elements.
Remarks:
numbers.
3. All the interior angles must be less than 180°.
5. Stresses and strains are output in the element coordinate system at the centroid and grid points G1
through G4.
6. Inaccurate results will be obtained if interior grids have the rotation normal (drilling) to the element
constrained. At the boundary of a model, the drilling degrees-of-freedom must be constrained if the
user wants a fixed boundary. Also, for this element it is critical that consistent membrane (in plane)
edge loads be applied. Reference the PLOAD4entry (SORL option) and the Consistent Surface and Edge
Loads (Ch. 1) in the MD Nastran Reference ManualSOL 700 Reference Manual for additional
information.
Main Index
CQUADR 1553
7. The CTRIAR element is the triangular companion to the CQUADR element and should be used
instead of CTRlA3 or CTRlA6.
yelement
G3
G4
β+γ xelement
α = ------------
2
α
xmaterial
zelement
β
THETA γ
G1 G2
Figure 9-55 CQUADR Element Geometry and Coordinate Systems
8. Elements may be offset from the connection points by means of ZOFFS. Other data, such as material
matrices and stress fiber locations, are given relative to the reference plane. A positive value of ZOFFS
implies that the element reference plane is offset a distance of ZOFFS along the positive Z-axis of the
element coordinate system. If the ZOFFS field is used, then the MID1 and MID2 fields must be
specified on the PSHELL entry referenced both by PID.
MCID>0.
Main Index
1554 CQUADX
Axisymmetric Quadrilateral Element (Fully Nonlinear or Linear Harmonic)
CQUADX Axisymmetric Quadrilateral Element (Fully Nonlinear or Linear Harmonic)
Defines an axisymmetric quadrilateral element with up to nine grid points for use in fully nonlinear (i.e., large
strain and large rotations) analysis or a linear harmonic or rotordynamic analysis. The element has between
four and eight grid points
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CQUADX EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 THETA or
MCID
Example:
CQUADX 111 203 31 74 75 32
Describer Meaning
EID Element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000). See Remark 1.
PID Property identification number of a PLPLANE or PAXSYMH or PLCOMP entry.
(Integer > 0). See Remark 2.
G1, G2 Identification numbers of connected corner grid points. Required data for all four grid
G3, G4 points. (Unique Integers > 0). See Remark 3., 6., 7.
G5, G6 Identification numbers of connected edge grid points. Optional data for any or all four
G7, G8 grid points. (Integer > 0 or blank). See Remark 3., 4., 6., 7.
G9 Identification number of center grid point. Optional. (Integer > 0 or blank). Not used
for linear harmonic elements. See Remark 3., 6., 7.
THETA Material property orientation angle in degrees. THETA is only applicable if PLCOMP
referenced, or the PLPLANE entry has an associated PSHLN2 entry which is honored
only in SOL 400. For PSHLN2 BEHi=AXSOLID code, THETA is measured relative
to the R axis of the element. For PSHLN2 or PLCOMP BEHi=AXCOMP code the
THETA value on the element connection entry will be ignored. (Real; Default = 0.0).
THETA is ignored if PID refers to a PAXSYMH entry.
MCID Material coordinate system identification number, MCID is only applicable if
PLCOMP referenced, or the PLPLANE entry has an associated PSHLN2 entry which
is honored only in SOL 400. The x-axis of the material coordinate system is determined
by projecting the x-axis of the MCID coordinate system onto the surface of the
element. For PSHLN2 BEHi=AXSOLID the resulting angle is measured relative to the
R axis of the element. For PSHLN2 (or PLCOMP) BEHi=AXCOMP code the MCID
value on the element connection entry will be ignored. (Integer > 0; If blank, then
THETA = 0.0 is assumed.)
Main Index
CQUADX 1555
Axisymmetric Quadrilateral Element (Fully Nonlinear or Linear Harmonic)
Remarks:
2. If PID refers to a PLPLANE or PLCOMP entry, CQUADX defines an element for use in fully
nonlinear analysis. If PID refers to a PAXSYMH entry, CQUADX defines a linear harmonic element
for use in rotordynamic or harmonic analysis.
3. Gi must be numbered as shown in Figure 9-56.
5. The plot codes are specified under the CQUADXFD element name in Item Codes, 999.
6. All Gi must lie on the x-y plane of the basic coordinate system. Stress and strain are output in the
basic coordinate system.
7. A concentrated load (e.g., FORCE entry) at Gi is multiplied by the radius to Gi and then applied as
a force per unit circumferential length. For example, in order to apply a load of 100 N/m on the
circumference at G1, which is located at a radius of 0.5 m, then the magnitude specified on the static
load entry must result in:
( 100 N/m ) ⋅ ( 0.5 m ) = 50 N
z = ybasic
η = 1 G7
G4
G3
η = constant
Lines of
ξ = –1 ξ = 0 Constant η or ξ
ξ = 1
η = 0 ξ = constant
G8 G9 G6
η = –1
G5 G2
G1
r = xbasic
Figure 9-56 CQUADX Element Coordinate System
Main Index
1556 CRAC2D
Two-Dimensional Crack Tip Element
CRAC2D Two-Dimensional Crack Tip Element
Defines a two-dimensional crack tip element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CRAC2D EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14
G15 G16 G17 G18
Example:
CRAC2D 114 108 2 5 6 8 7 11
12 14 16 17 20 22
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PRAC2D entry. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid point identification numbers of connection points. (Integer > 0; G11 through
G18 may be blank.)
Remarks:
1. CRAC2D is a dummy element and requires the presence of this Bulk Data entry:
2. The element should be planar. Significant deviations will produce fatal errors.
3. Grid points G1 through G10 are required while grid points G11 through G18 are optional for the
quadrilateral form of the element.
4. The stresses and stress intensity factors are calculated assuming that G2 and G10 are coincident.
Deviations from this will produce erroneous results.
5. For the symmetric half-crack option, grid points G1 through G7 are required while grid points G11
through G14 are optional. Grid points G8 through G10 and G15 through G18 must not be present
for this option.
6. The ordering conventions for the full-crack and half-crack options are shown in Figure 9-57.
7. The ratio of the element dimensions in the y to x axis shown for the element coordinate system in
Figure 9-57 should be in the range 2.0 to 0.5.
8. The stress output is interpreted as shown in Crack Tip Elements (CRAC2D, CRAC3D) (p. 162) in the .
Main Index
CRAC2D 1557
Two-Dimensional Crack Tip Element
G3 G12 G4 G13 G5
G11 G14
G2 G1 G6
x
G10
G18 G15
G9 G17 G8 G16 G7
(a) Full Crack Option
G3 G12 G4 G13 G5
G11 G14
x
G2 G1 G7 G6
(b) Symmetric Half-Crack Option
Figure 9-57 CRAC2D Element Connection for Full and Symmetric Options
Main Index
1558 CRAC3D
Three-Dimensional Crack Tip Element
CRAC3D Three-Dimensional Crack Tip Element
Defines a three-dimensional crack tip element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CRAC3D EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14
G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22
G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30
G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38
G39 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G45 G46
G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 G52 G53 G54
G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G60 G61 G62
G63 G64
Example:
CRAC3D 113 101 2 5 7 8 4 10
11 14 15 17 3 6 9
12 16 102 105 107 108
104 110 111 114 115 117 103
106 109 112 116 202 205
207 208 204 210 211 214 215 217
225 226
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PRAC3D entry. (Integer < 0)
Gi Grid point identification numbers of connection points. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. CRAC3D is a dummy element and requires the presence of this Bulk Data entry:
numbers.
Main Index
CRAC3D 1559
3. This element, including grid point numbering conventions, is shown in Figure 9-58 and Figure 9-59.
Grid points G1 through G10, and G19 through G28 are required; midside and surface grid points
G11 through G18, G29 through G36, and G37 through G64 are optional. Either all or none of grid
points G37 through G46 should be present. A fatal error message will be issued for partial
connectivity.
4. The ratio of the element dimensions in the y to x axis shown for the element coordinate system in
Figure 9-58 should be in the range 2.0 to 0.5.
5. For the symmetric half-crack option Grid Points G1 through G7, and G19 through G25 are
required, whereas grid points G11 through G14, G29 through G32, and G37 through G42 are
optional. Grid points G8 through G10, G15 through G18, G26 through G28, G33 through G36,
G43 through G46, G51 through G55, and G60 through G64 should not be specified to invoke this
option.
6. It is recommended that both the faces (formed by grid points G2 through G18 and grid points G20
through G36) and the midplane (formed by grid points G37 through G46 and grid points G37
through G46) be planar. It is also recommended that midside grid points G37 through G46 be
located within the middle third of the edges.
7. The midside nodes on both the faces should be defined in pairs. For example, if grid point G11 is
not defined, then grid point G29 should not be defined and vice versa.
8. The stresses and stress intensity factors are calculated with the assumptions that grid points G2 and
G10, G20 and G28, and G38 and G46 are coincident. Deviation from this condition will produce
erroneous results.
9. The stress output is interpreted as shown in Crack Tip Elements (CRAC2D, CRAC3D) (p. 162) in the .
10. As depicted in Figure 9-58 and Figure 9-59, the element is a right-handed element. Thus define the
vectors G1G9 and G1G3 , then the cross-product G1G9 × G1G3 points to the face defined by G19,
G20, ...
Main Index
1560 CRAC3D
G21 G22
G23
G20
G19 G24
G28
G27 G26 G25

y
G4 G5
G3
(a) Brick Crack Option with Required
G2 G6 Connection Points Only.
x
G10 G1
G9 G8 G7 G21 G22 G23
G25
G20 G24
G19
G4 G5 (b) Symmetric Half-Crack Option

G3 with Required Connection Points
Only.
x
G2 G1 G7 G6
Figure 9-58 CRAC3D Solid Crack Tip Element with Required Connection Points Only
Main Index
CRAC3D 1561
G21 G30 G22 G31 G23
YB G57 G58 G59

G29 G32
G56
G20 G19 G60
G24
G39 G64
G40 G28
G41 G33
y G36 G63 G61
Y1 X1 G62
G25
G38 G27 G35 G26 G34
XB
G37 G42
G46
G12 G4 G13
G3 G5
G48 G50
G11 G14 G45 G44 G43
G49
G1
G47 G51
G2 x
G10 G55 G6
G54 G52
G18
G53
G15 (a) Brick Crack Option
G9 G17 G8 G16 G7
G21 G30 G22 G31 G23
G29 G57 G58 G59 G32
G20 G19 G25 G24

G56
G40
G39 G41
G38
G37 G42
G3 G12 G4 G13
G5
G48 G50
G11 G14 (b) Symmetric Half-Crack Option
G49
G2 G47 G1 G7 G6
Figure 9-59 CRAC3D Solid Crack Tip Element with All Connection Points
Main Index
1562 CREEP
Creep Characteristics
CREEP Creep Characteristics
Defines creep characteristics based on experimental data or known empirical creep law. This entry will be
activated if a MAT1, MAT2, or MAT9 entry with the same MID is used and the NLPARM entry is prepared
for creep analysis. The creep formulation is principally suited for isotropic materials and, in general, when
used with anisotropic materials may produce incorrect results. However, slightly anisotropic materials may
produce acceptable results.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CREEP MID T0 EXP FORM TIDKP TIDCP TIDCS THRESH
TYPE a b c d e f g
Example:
CREEP 8 1100. CRLAW
121 6.985-6 2.444 7.032-4 0.1072 6.73-9 0.1479 3.0
Describer Meaning
MID Material identification number of a MAT1, MAT2, or MAT9 entry. (Integer > 0)
T0 Reference temperature at which creep characteristics are defined. See Remark 2. (Real;
Default = 0.0)
EXP Temperature-dependent term, e ( –ΔH ⁄ ( R ⋅ T0 ) ) , in the creep rate expression. See Remark
2. (0.0 < Real < 1.0; Default = 1.0E-9)
FORM Form of the input data defining creep characteristics. (Character: “CRLAW” for
empirical creep law, or “TABLE” for tabular input data of creep model parameters.)
TIDKP, Identification number of a TABLES1 entry, which defines the creep model parameters
TIDCP, K p ( σ ) , C p ( σ ) , and C s ( σ ) , respectively. See Remarks 3. through 4. (Integer > 0)
TIDCS
THRESH Threshold limit for creep process. Threshold stress under which creep does not occur
is computed as THRESH multiplied by Young’s modulus. (0.0 < Real < 1.0E-3;
Default = 1.0E-5)
TYPE Identification number of the empirical creep law type. See Remark 1. (Integer: 111,
112, 121, 122, 211, 212, 221, 222, or 300)
a through g Coefficients of the empirical creep law specified in TYPE. Continuation should not be
specified if FORM = “TABLE”. See Remark 1. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Two classes of empirical creep law are available.
Creep Law Class 1
Main Index
CREEP 1563
The first creep law class is expressed as:
c – R ( σ )t
ε ( σ, t ) = A ( σ ) [ 1 – e ] + K ( σ )t (9-3)
Parameters A ( σ ) , R ( σ ) , and K ( σ ) are specified in the following form, as recommended by Oak Ridge
National Laboratory:
Parameter Function 1 Digit Function 2 Digit

b bσ
A(σ) aσ i=1 ae i=2
dσ d
R(σ) ce j=1 cσ j=2
g fσ
K(σ) e ⋅ [ sinh ( fσ ) ] k=1 ee k=2
TYPE=ijk where i, j, and k are digits equal to 1 or 2, according to the desired function in the table
above. For example, TYPE=122 defines A ( σ ) = aσ b , R ( σ ) = cσ d , and K ( σ ) = ee fσ .
Creep Law Class 2

The second creep law class (TYPE=300) is expressed as:
c b d
ε ( σ, t ) = aσ t (9-4)
where the values of b and d must be defined as follows:
The above expression is determined by curve fitting using a Newton-Raphson procedure based on the
expressions:
1⁄d
 εc 
λ = C p ⁄ K pi =  --------- (9-5)
 aσ b
where σ is the effective stress and the nonlinear equation:

2 to ⁄ λ 2
λ (e – 1 ) – λt 0 – t 0 ⁄ d = 0
Then the creep model parameters are determined by:

c
1 e d λ(1 – d)
------ = -------- 1 – ---------------------
Cs t0 σ t0
c
1 λ 2ε t0 εc
------ =  ---- ---- ( 1 – d )d – -----
- + ----
Kp  t 0 σ Cs σ
C p = λK p
To keep the solution of these expressions stable, the values of b and d are recommended to be defined
as follows:
1.0 < b < 8.0
Main Index
1564 CREEP
and
0.2 < d < 2.0
The coefficient g should be blank if TYPE = 112, 122, 222, or 212 and c, e, f, and g should be blank
if TYPE = 300. The coefficients a through g are dependent on the structural units; caution must be
exercised to make these units consistent with the rest of the input data.
2. Creep law coefficients a through g are usually determined by least squares fit of experimental data,
obtained under a constant temperature. This reference temperature at which creep behavior is
characterized must be specified in the T0 field if the temperature of the structure is different from this
reference temperature. The conversion of the temperature input (°F or °C) to °K (degrees Kelvin)
must be specified in the PARAM,TABS entry as follows:
PARAM,TABS,273.16 (If Celsius is used.)
PARAM,TABS,459.69 (If Fahrenheit is used.)
When the correction for the temperature effect is required, the temperature distribution must be
defined in the Bulk Data entries (TEMP, TEMPP1 and/or TEMPRB), which are selected by the Case
Control command TEMP(LOAD) = SID within the subcase.
From the thermodynamic consideration, the creep rate is expressed as:
·C · – ΔH ⁄ RT
ε = εA ( e ) (9-6)
where:
ΔH = energy of activation
R = gas constant (= 1.98 cal/mole °Κ)
T = absolute temperature (°Κ)
·
εA = strain/sec per activation
If the creep characteristics are defined at temperature T0, the creep rate at temperature T is corrected
by a factor
T0
 ------ – 1
·c  T 
ε
----- = EXP (9-7)
· c
εo
where:
·c
ε = corrected creep rate
·c
εo = creep rate at T0
T0
 ------ – 1 = correction factor
 T 
EXP
Main Index
CREEP 1565
3. Creep model parameters Kp, Cp, and Cs represent parameters of the uniaxial rheological model as
shown in Figure 9-60.
Tabular values (Xi, Yi) in the TABLES1 entry correspond to ( σ i, K pi ) , ( σ i, C pi ) , and ( σ i, C si ) for the
input of Kp, Cp, and Cs, respectively. For linear viscoelastic materials, parameters Kp, Cp, and Cs are
constant and two values of σ i must be specified for the same value of Kpi, Cpi, and Csi.
Primary
Elastic Creep Secondary Creep
Kp ( σ )
Cp ( σ ) σ(t)
Ke
Cs ( σ )
Figure 9-60 CREEP Parameter Idealization
Creep model parameters, as shown in Figure 9-61 through Figure 9-63, must have positive values. If the
table look-up results in a negative value, the value will be reset to zero and a warning message (TABLE
LOOK-UP RESULTS IN NEGATIVE VALUE OF CREEP MODEL PARAMETER IN
ELEMENT ID=****) will be issued.
5000
4000
3000
2
K p ( Kips ⁄ in )
2000
1000
0
5 10 15 20 25 30
σ ( ksi )
Figure 9-61 Kp Versus σ Example for CREEP
Main Index
1566 CREEP
6
250 × 10
6
200 × 10
Kips-hours 6
C p -------------------------
- 150 × 10
2
in
6
100 × 10
6
50 × 10
0
5 10 15 20 25 30
σ ( ksi )
Figure 9-62 Cp Versus σ Example for CREEP
6
50,000 × 10
6
40,000 × 10
Kips-hours 6
( C s ) -------------------------
2
- 30,000 × 10
in
6
20,000 × 10
6
10,000 × 10
0
5 10 15 20 25 30
σ ( ksi )
Figure 9-63 Cs Versus σ Example for CREEP
4. Creep analysis requires an initial static solution at t = 0, which can be obtained by specifying a subcase
that requests an NLPARM entry with DT = 0.0.
Main Index
CROD 1567
Rod Element Connection
CROD Rod Element Connection
Defines a tension-compression-torsion element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CROD EID PID G1 G2
Example:
CROD 12 13 21 23
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PROD entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
Remarks:
numbers.
2. See CONROD, 1500 for alternative method of rod definition.
3. Only one element may be defined on a single entry.
Main Index
1568 CROD
Rod Element Connection
P
G2
G1
T
Figure 9-64 CROD Element Internal Forces and Moments
Main Index
CSEAM 1569
A Shell Patch SEAM Connection
CSEAM A Shell Patch SEAM Connection
Defines a SEAM connecting two surface patches.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSEAM EID PID SMLN CTYPE IDAS IDBS IDAE IDBE
GS GE
Alternate Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSEAM EID PID CTYPE IDAS IDBS IDAE IDBE
XS YS ZS XE YE ZE
Example:
CSEAM 552 297 43 48
30422 77987
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PSEAM entry. (Integer > 0)
SMLN SEAM line identification. See Remark 2. (CHAR or blank)
CTYPE Connectivity search type. (Character)
If CTYPE = “PSHELL”, IDAS and IDBS are property identification numbers of
PSHELL’s. (Default)
If CTYPE = “ELEM”, IDAS and IDBS are element identification numbers.
IDAS,IDBS Used to define patch A and B or the start of patch A or B for a tailored blank. See
Remark 4. (Integer > 0)
If CTYPE = “PSHELL”, required property id defining patches A and B. If
CTYPE = “PSHELL” and IDAS = IDBS or IDBS = blank the patch will be considered
as two-sided and the property identification numbers of PSHELL’s will be the same for
both the top and bottom. See Remark 6.
If CTYPE = “ELEM”, required element id defining patches A and B. IDAS ≠ IDBS.
IDAE,IDBE Used to define the end of patch A and the end of patch B for a tailored blank. See
Remark 4. (Integer > 0 or blank)
If CTYPE = “PSHELL”, property id defining patches A and B. If CTYPE = ‘PSHELL’
and IDAE = IDBS or IDBS=blank the patch will be considered as two-sided and the
property identification numbers of PSHELL’s will be the same for both the top and
bottom.
If CTYPE = “ELEM”, element id defining patches A and B. IDAE ≠ IDBE.
Main Index
1570 CSEAM
Describer Meaning
GS, GE Grid ids of piercing points on patches A and B of the Start and End of the SEAM.
(Integer > 0)
XS,YS,ZS Location of the SEAM Start. (Real or blank)
XE,YE,ZE Location of the SEAM End. (Real or blank)
Remarks:
2. With no embedded blanks any combination of up to eight of the acceptable characters in MSC
Nastran may be employed for the SMLN entry.
The seam line will be considered continuous between each connected element and where any two
elements have a common face, the faces of the resulting internal CHEXA’s will be adjusted to a single
common face. If a CSEAM’s GS or GE is not common to the GE or GS of any other CSEAM the
faces will not be adjusted.
A SMLN cannot have a branch.
3. GS and GE define the start and end points of the SEAM element. At these points and using the value
W specified on the PSEAM entry, surface patches A and B are determined. Points are projected onto
the surface patches A and B with the four points at end GS and the four points at end GE then used
to form faces of a CHEXA element.
The auxiliary points forming the faces of the CHEXA element are then connected to the physical
grids of the patches. The number of unique physical grids per patch ranges from a possibility of 6 to
64 grids.
The auxiliary points must have a projection on patches A and B, but they do not have to lie on patch
A or B.
A maximum of three shell elements of patch A and three shell elements of patch B can be connected
with one CSEAM element, see Figure 9-65.
Figure 9-65 Connected Shell Elements for a CSEAM Element
Main Index
CSEAM 1571
4. For CTYPE = ‘PSHELL’

If patch A is uniform in thickness, then only its IDAS is needed to define it.
If patch B is uniform in thickness, then only its IDBS is needed to define it.
If patch A has stepped tapering, then IDAS and IDAE are used to define it.
If patch B has stepped tapering, then IDBS and IDBE are used to define it.
5. Projection Algorithms for the CSEAM Elements
Because of complex geometry, the user supplied start point GS may not have a projection SA and SB,
and the end point GE may not have a projection EA and EB. Even though these four projection
points are found, the program still has to find projections for the eight auxiliary points SA1, SA2, …,
EB2, and EB1 of the HEXA. The default projection strategy can be changed by overwriting the
default values of the flags and parameters in the SWLDPRM Bulk Data entry.
a. Find Projections for SA, SB, EA, and EB
For CTYPE = “PSHELL”, the program finds the closest shell grids to GS and GE. The shell
elements that are connected to these closest grids are defined as the candidate shell elements.
While looping through each candidate shell element to compute the projection of GS and GE
onto that element, the program always tries to get the most accurate projection. Even though a
projection is found with PROJTOL > 0.0, the program still continues the projection calculations
using PROJTOL=0.0. If a projection is found with PROJTOL=0.0, that shell element will be
selected as the connecting element. Otherwise, the shell element that gets projection with
PROJTOL>0.0 is selected as EIDSA, EIDSB, EIDEA, or EIDEB. For CTYPE = “ELEM”, the
above processes are skipped, because EIDSA, EIDSB, EIDEA, and EIDEB have already been
specified by the user.
If GSTOL > 0.0 and the distance GS-SA, GS-SB, GE-EA, or GE-EB is greater than GSTOL, a
UFM 7549 is issued and the CSEAM element is rejected.
If the projection of GS or GE lies outside the shell sheet, or the connected shell elements fail the
geometry check with GMCHK > 0, the program will issue a UFM and the CSEAM element will
be rejected.
If GMCHK > 0, the program checks errors of CSEAM across a cutout or over a corner with
elements in plane. The program also computes the angle between the shell normal vectors of
EIDSA and EIDEA and the angle between the shell normal vectors of EIDSB and EIDEB to
check a corner with elements out of plane.
For CTYPE = “PSHELL”, if there is an error detected, the program loops back to compute the
other possibility of projection until a correct connection is found or all candidate shell elements
are processed. In the latter case, either UFM 7638 (the seam spans a cutout) or UFM 7667 (the
seam spans a corner) will be issued. If GMCHK=2, the program also lists all candidate shell
elements with their projection status for each connecting type after issuing a UFM. This will help
the user to select the correct shell elements for EIDSA, EIDSB, EIDEA, and EIDEB.
For CTYPE=”ELEM”, the program only checks errors and issues UFM 7638 or 7667 for the kind
of error encountered. No looping back will be performed.
Main Index
1572 CSEAM
If GMCHK > 0 and GSPROJ > 0.0, the program also computes the angle between the shell
normal vectors of EIDSA and EIDSB and the angle between the shell normal vectors of EIDEA
and EIDEB. A UFM 7595 is issued if the angle between the shell normal vectors is greater than
GSPROJ. By default, GSPROJ = 20o, that means the shell patches A and B can be tilted relative
to each other by not more than 20o.
b. Find Projections of the Eight Auxiliary Points SA1, SA2, …, EB2, and EB1
After the projections for SA, SB, EA, and EB have been found, eight auxiliary points for an
internal hexagonal polygon are formed. If the GS or GE of a CSEAM element is connected to the
GE or GS of another CSEAM element, then the internal HEXA elements are adjusted to a
common face.
If GSPROJ > 0.0 and the angle between the face vectors parallel to the thickness direction of the
internal HEXA and the normal vector of the shell element that gets projection exceeds GSPROJ,
the program will skip picking this shell element and will proceed to process next candidate shell
element.
The most common error condition occurs when the seam lies on the edge of the shell patches.
Under this situation, half of the seam hangs outside the shell sheets (Figure 9-66). It is required that
each of the eight points has a projection. If at least one point does not have a projection and
GSMOVE > 0, GS will be moved by W/2. Same algorithms apply to end E. The move will be
repeated until either all projections are found or the number of moves reaches GSMOVE.
Shell B
SB1 SB2
S
SA1 SA2
Shell A
W/2 W/2
Figure 9-66 Seam Weld at an Edge
c. Error Checks by GMCHK Parameter

The GMCHK parameter specified in the SWLDPRM Bulk Data entry checks the errors of
CSEAM elements across cutouts or over corners. There are three allowable values of GMCHK.
• GMCHK = 0 (Default) Do not check errors
• GMCHK = 1 Check errors
• GMCHK = 2 Check errors and output all candidate shell elements if there is an error encountered
If GMCHK is turned on, Nastran will perform the following checking while searching for the
projected shell elements. Note that EIDSA is the shell element that gets projection from GS on
shell A; EIDEA is the shell element that gets projection from GE on shell A. Same algorithms are
applied to EIDSB and EIDEB for shell B.
d. Check the CSEAM Across a Cutout or Over a Corner with Elements in Plane
• If EIDSA is equal to EIDEA, the seam lies within one element. No checks are required.
Main Index
CSEAM 1573
• If EIDSA and EIDEA share two corner grids, these elements are adjacent. No checks are required.
• If EIDSA and EIDEA share only one corner grid, the seam is over a corner. There are two
exceptions:
There exists a shell element (EIDMA) that shares two corner grids with EIDSA and EIDEA. Also,
either the angle θ between vector S1S2 and vector E1E4 is greater than CNRAGLI degrees or the
middle point (M) of line segment S2E4 projects to EIDSA, EIDMA, or EIDEA.
S1 ⁄ E1
S2
E4
EIDSA M
EIDMA
EIDEA
S4
S3 E2
E3
θ ( > CNRAGLI).
This model is acceptable - CONVEX
S2 E4
M
θ
S1 ⁄ E1
EIDSA
EIDEA
S3
E3
EIDMA
S4
E2
This model fails - not CONVEX
θ ( < CNRAGLI and point M does not project
to EIDSA, EIDMA or EIDEA.
This shared grid is a shell grid of another two different shell elements.
Main Index
1574 CSEAM
S3 S2
S4
E4
S1 ⁄ E1
E2 E3
• If EIDSA and EIDEA do not share any corner grid, Nastran will check if there is an element
(EIDMA) lying between EIDSA and EIDEA. EIDMA must share two corner grids with EIDSA
and another different one corner grid with EIDEA, or vice versa. The following five examples
demonstrate the acceptable and failed cases.
EIDMA shares one edge with EIDSA and shares one corner grid with EIDEA. This case is
acceptable.
S1 S4
S2 E4
S3 E1
E2 E3
EIDMA shares one edge with IEDEA and shares one corner grid with EIDSA. This case is
acceptable.
E1 E4
S1 E3
S4 E2
S2 S3
EIDMA shares one corner grid with EIDSA and shares another corner grid with EIDEA. An error
is detected because the seam spans a cutout.
Main Index
CSEAM 1575
S1
S4 E1 E4
S2 S3 E2 E3
EIDMA shares one edge with EIDSA and shares another edge with EIDEA. This case is
acceptable.
S1 S4 E1 E4
S2 S3 E2 E3
There does not exist a single element that shares an edge or corner grid with EIDSA or EIDEA.
An error is detected because the length of the seam spans more than three elements.
Main Index
1576 CSEAM
S1 S4 E1 E4
S2 S3 E2 E3
e. Check the CSEAM Over a Corner with Elements Out of Plane
The CNRAGLO parameter is used to check the error of a seam over a corner with EIDSA and
EIDEA not lying on a same plane. An error is detected if the angle ϕ between the shell normal
vectors of EIDSA and EIDEA is greater than CNRAGLO. The default value of CNRAGLO is
20o. No angles will be checked if CNRAGLO = -1.
ϕ
This model fails. ϕ( > CNRAGLO)
EIDSA
EIDEA
f. Modeling Guidelines
When there exist multiple pairs of connections, it is recommended that either the GMCHK and
GSPROJ flags be turned on to filter out tilted connections or the ELEM option be used to specify
the IDs of the connected shell elements directly. For example, if EIDA1 is connected to EIDB2
or EIDA2 is connected to EIDB1, the element tangent vectors will be computed wrong and the
auxiliary points will not be able to find connected shell elements.
EIDB1 EIDA 1
GS EIDA2
EIDB 2
6. The projection algorithm for the two-sided option will be the same as in Remark 5. above once the
two patches A and B have been established. The program will find the closest shell grids to GS and
GE as usual for candidate shell elements for patch A.
Main Index
CSEAM 1577
It will compute the normal for the candidate patch A (similar for GE) and for the candidate patch B.
If the normals are approximately aligned (within a tolerance) the algorithm will proceed as in Remark
5.
If the normals of the candidate patch’s A and B do not align within a specified tolerance, the
algorithm will use another set of pairs of grids for candidate patches to find a new patch A and B. If
their normals align within a specified tolerance it will proceed as in Remark 5. If after processing all
reasonable pairs of patches, no alignment of normals are found or the patches A and B at GE have
different normal alignment from the patches A and B at GB, a user fatal will be issued.
Caution: For the two-sided option, GS and GB must lie between patches A and B. Also, the shell
elements that get projections from GS/GE cannot share a common shell grid. This
option always selects the patch with the shell grids closest to GS/GE as patch A. Avoid
having GS/GE exactly midway between the two patches.
8. The CSEAM contributes to MASS if its PSEAM entry has an associated MATi entry with a non-zero
density. PARAM,COUPMASS effects the mass calculation. In SOL400, the behavior of this element
in regard to large rotation is affected by the Case Control Command Rigid.
9. If partitioned superelements are present, then CSEAM is supported in the main Bulk Data section
only.
Main Index
1578 CSET
Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom
CSET Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSET ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3 ID4 C4
Example:
CSET 124 1 5 23 6 16
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. CSET and BNDFREE entries are equivalent to each other. Either one of them or any combination
sets. See the Degree-of-Freedom Sets, 1065 for a list of these entries.
follows:
Main Index
CSET1 1579
Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of CSET Entry
CSET1 Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of CSET Entry
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSET1 C ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7
ID8 ID9 ID10 -etc.-
Example:
CSET1 124 1 5 7 6 9 12 122
127
Alternate Formats and Examples:

CSET1 C ID1 “THRU” ID2
CSET1 3 6 THRU 32
CSET1 “ALL”
CSET1 ALL
Describer Meaning
ID1< ID2)
Remarks:
1. CSET1 and BNDFRE1 entries are equivalent to each other. Either one of them or any combination
sets. See the Degree-of-Freedom Sets, 1065 for a list of these entries.
Main Index
1580 CSET1
Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom, Alternate Form of CSET Entry
follows:
Main Index
CSHEAR 1581
Shear Panel Element Connection
CSHEAR Shear Panel Element Connection
Defines a shear panel element and effective extensional stiffener rods.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSHEAR EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4
Example:
CSHEAR 3 6 1 5 3 7
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PSHEAR entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
Gi Grid point identification numbers of connection points. (Integer > 0;
G1 ≠ G2 ≠ G3 ≠ G4 )
Remarks:
numbers.
G3
G4
Yelem
Xelem
G1 G2
Figure 9-67 CSHEAR Element Connection and Coordinate System
Main Index
1582 CSHEAR
K4 F41
K3
F32
F43 q3
G4 G3
F34
q4
q2
K2
K1
F21
G2
q1
F12 G1
F23
F14
Figure 9-68 CSHEAR Element Corner Forces and Shear Flows
4. The parameter entry MDLPRM,SHEARP,GARVEY(default) selects the standard Garvey shear

panel. MDLPRM,SHEARP,HARDER selects the Harder shear panel: The Harder panel is based on
the following:
Consider the following quadrilateral shear panel.
The shear stress τ is related to the shear strain by the relationship τ = Gϒ where G is the shear modulus.
Determining the value for shear for the general quadrilateral shown is a heuristic process. For the Harder
element it is determined in the following manner. The strain along a diagonal such as L13 is found from the
expression (or Mohr's circle):
Main Index
CSHEAR 1583
ε 13 = ε x cos 2 α 13 + ε x sin 2 α 13 + ϒ xy cos α 13 sin α 13
With a similar expression for ε 24 , where α 24 = 180 – ( α 13 + θ ) . For shear panels, the direct strains are
negligible compared to the shear strain. For a rectangular shear panel α 24 = α 13 and we have
Δε = ε 13 – ε 24 = ϒ sin θ or ϒ = ( ε13 – ε 24 ) ⁄ ( sin θ ) .
In the above, the subscripts have been dropped from the term for shear strain. The Harder shear panel uses
this definition for the measure of shear strain in the general quadrilateral. For a rectangular panel it is exact.
For a reasonable panel it is within an error of < 1 degree. To insure reasonableness, all the geometry checks
required by the Garvey element are still performed.
Stress Recovery:
The output for either the Garvey or the Harder panel is the same with the following exception:
MAX SHEAR AVG SHEAR SHEARP

MAX( τ 1, τ 2, τ 3, τ 4 ) MAX( τ 1, τ 2, τ 3, τ 4 )/4 GARVEY
MAX( τ 1, τ 2, τ 3, τ 4 ) (q-Equiv) / t HARDER
For both Garvey and Harder panels, q-Equiv is the shear flow on which all stress
calculations are based.
Main Index
1584 CSLOT3
Three Point Slot Element Connection
CSLOT3 Three Point Slot Element Connection
Defines an element connecting three points that solve the wave equation in two dimensions. Used in the
acoustic cavity analysis for the definition of evenly spaced radial slots.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSLOT3 EID IDS1 IDS2 IDS3 RHO B M
Example:
CSLOT3 100 1 3 2 3.0-3 6
Describer Meaning
IDSi Identification number of connected GRIDS points. (Integer > 0)
RHO Fluid density in mass units. (Real > 0.0; Default is the value of RHOD on the AXSLOT
entry)
B Fluid bulk modulus. (Real > 0.0; Default is the value of BD on the AXSLOT entry)
M Number of slots in circumferential direction. (Integer > 0; Default is the value of MD
on the AXSLOT entry)
Remarks:
1. CSLOT3 is allowed only if an AXSLOT entry is also present.
2. This element identification number (EID) must be unique with respect to all other fluid or structural
elements.
3. If RHO, B, or M are blank, then the RHOD, BD, or MD fields on the AXSLOT entry must be
specified.
4. This element generates three plot elements, connecting points IDS1 to IDS2, IDS2 to IDS3, and
IDS3 to IDS1.
5. If B=0.0, then the slot is considered to be an incompressible fluid.
6. If M=0, then no matrices for CSLOT3 elements are generated.
Main Index
CSLOT4 1585
Four Point Slot Element Connection
CSLOT4 Four Point Slot Element Connection
Defines an element connecting four points that solve the wave equation in two dimensions. Used in acoustic
cavity analysis for the definition of evenly spaced radial slots.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSLOT4 EID IDS1 IDS2 IDS3 IDS4 RHO B M
Example:
CSLOT4 101 1 3 2 4 6.2+4 3
Describer Meaning
IDSi Identification number of connected GRIDS points. (Integer > 0)
RHO Fluid density in mass units. (Real > 0.0; Default is the value of RHOD on the
AXSLOT entry.)
B Fluid bulk modulus. (Real > 0.0; Default is the value of BD on the AXSLOT entry.)
M Number of slots in circumferential direction. (Integer > 0; Default is the value of MD
on the AXSLOT entry.)
Remarks:
1. This entry is allowed only if an AXSLOT entry is also present.
2. This element identification number (EID) must be unique with respect to all other fluid or structural
elements.
3. If RHO, B, or M are blank, then the RHOD, BD, or MD fields on the AXSLOT entry must be
specified.
4. This element generates four plot elements connecting points IDS1 to IDS2, IDS2 to IDS3, IDS3 to
IDS4, and IDS4 to IDS1.
5. If B = 0.0, then the slot is considered to be an incompressible fluid.
6. If M = 0, then no matrices for CSLOT4 elements are generated.
Main Index
1586 CSPR
Springs With Offsets
CSPR Springs With Offsets
Springs for use in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSPR EID PID G1 G2
Example:
CSPR 1 22 456 457

EID Element ID. A unique number has to be used. I>0 Required
PID Property ID of PSPRMAT entry I>0 Required
G1 Gridpoint 1 I>0 Required
G2 Gridpoint 2. I>0 Required
Main Index
CSSCHD 1587
Aerodynamic Control Surface Schedule Input
CSSCHD Aerodynamic Control Surface Schedule Input
Defines a scheduled control surface deflection as a function of Mach number and angle of attack.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSSCHD SlD AESID LALPHA LMACH LSCHD
Example:
CSSCHD 5 50 12 15 25
Describer Meaning
AESID ID of an AESURF Bulk Data entry to which the schedule is being attached.
LALPHA ID of an AEFACT Bulk Data entry containing a list of angles of attack (in radians) at
which schedule information is provided. (Integer > 0: Default = no angle information
provided.
LMACH ID of an AEFACT Bulk Data entry containing a list of Mach numbers at which schedule
information is provided. (Integer > 0; Default = no Mach information provided)
LSCHD ID of an AEFACT Bulk Data entry which contains the scheduling information. See
Remarks 4. and 5. (Integer > 0; no Default)
Remarks:
1. Control system schedules must be selected with the Case Control command CSSCHD = SID.
2. The AESID cannot appear on an AELINK or TRIM Bulk Data entry for the same subcase.
3. The control surface deflection is computed using a linear interpolation for the Mach number
provided on the associated TRIM entry and the angle of attack derived as part of the trim calculation.
4. The LSCHD data are provided as a list of deflections (in radians) as a function of Mach numbers and
angles of attack. If there are NMACH Mach numbers and NALPHA angles of attack, the first
NALPHA deflections are for the first Mach number, the next NALPHA are for the second Mach
number, and so on, until the last NALPHA deflections are for the final Mach number.
5. If LALPHA is blank, LSCHD contains NMACH deflections to define the Mach schedule. If
LMACH is blank, LSCHD contains NALPHA deflections to define the angle of attack schedule.
6. LALPHA and LMACH cannot be simultaneously blank. If LALPHA or LMACH are not blank, at
least two values of angle of attack or Mach number must be defined in order to perform interpolation.
7. If the Mach number or angle of attack is outside the range specified by the tabulated values, the value
at the table end is used. That is, data are not extrapolated.
Main Index
1588 CSSHL
Solid Shell Element Connection
CSSHL Solid Shell Element Connection
Defines a connection for a Solid Shell with 6 or 8 grid points in SOL 600 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSSHL EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8
Example:
CSSHL 44 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 quad
7 8
CSSHL 51 22 11 12 13 21 22 tria
23
CSSHL 51 22 11 12 13 13 21 22 tria
23 23
(Note: the 2nd and 3rd examples are equivalent to each other.)
Describer Meaning
EID Element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000; Required)
PID Property identification of a PSSHL entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
Gi Grid point identification number of connection points. (Integer U or blank, for quad
shapes all 8 values are required, for triangle shapes only G4 and G8 may be left blank in
which case G4=G3 and G8=G7.)
Remarks:
1. This element can degenerate to a triangle either by leaving G4 and G8 blank or by entering G4=G3
and G8=G7 (see 2nd and 3rd examples).
2. This element is usually only used when contact on each of the shell is anticipated.
3. Mid-side nodes are not available for this element.
Main Index
CSSHL 1589
Solid Shell Element Connection
4. Grid point ordering is shown in the following figure.
6
ζ
η
ξ
4
1
5. The stiffness of this element is formed using one integration point in the element plane and a user
defined number through the element thickness. In this way the element can capture accurate material
plasticity under bending load. An additional variationally consistent stiffness term is included to
eliminate the hourglass modes that are normally associated with reduced integration.
6. The number of integration points through the thickness is given by PARAM,MARCSLHT
7. This element may be collapsed to a triangular solid shell to attach to a standard shell such as
CQUAD4 as follows:
8. This element is not currently available with Total Lagrange, finite strain plasticity or hyperelastic
materials.
Main Index
1590 CSSHLH
CHEXA to Solid Shell Element Connection
CSSHLH CHEXA to Solid Shell Element Connection
Defines conversion of CHEXA elements to Solid Shell elements in SOL 600 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSSHLH EID1 PID EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5 EID6
Example:
CSSHLH 44 11 54 200 250
Describer Meaning
EIDi CHEXA element identification numbers. See Remark 1. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000; no
Default; EID1 is required)
PID Property identification of a PSSHL entry to be used with all the elements with EIDi.
1. All CHEXA elements in the range EID1 to EID2 will be converted to solid shells. The original
CHEXA elements will be deleted and the solid shell elements will have the same element ID’s as the
original CHEXA elements.
2. All CHEXA elements in the range EID3 to EID4 as well as EID5 to EID6 will be converted to solid
shells if these fields are entered.
3. Mid-side nodes are not allowed.
4. Elements for this entry are mapped to Marc element type 185.
5. Please see the remarks for CSSHL for additional items.
6. The PSSHL entries associated with CSSHLH are not generated automatically. They must be input
using a GUI or with a text editor.
Main Index
CSSHLM 1591
CHEXA or CPENTA to Solid Shell Material Conversion
CSSHLM CHEXA or CPENTA to Solid Shell Material Conversion
Defines conversion of CHEXA or CPENTA elements described by material ID to Solid Shell elements in
SOL 600 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSSHLM MID1 MID2 MID3 MID4 MID5 MID6 MID7
MID8 MID9
Example:
CSSHLM 100 200 700 90250
Describer Meaning
MIDi Material identification numbers. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0; no Default; MID1 is
required)
Remarks:
1. All CHEXA and CPENTA elements with the MID’s specified will be converted to solid shells. The
original CHEXA and CPENTA elements will be deleted and the solid shell elements will have the
same element ID’s as the original elements.
2. All PSOLID entries which reference all MIDi values will automatically be converted to PSSHL
entries retaining the MID and CORDM values. The PSSHL property ID’s will be the same as the
PSOLID ID’s plus IPOFF. The value of IPOFF should not be zero since the original PSOLID entries
are not deleted and all property ID’s should normally be unique.
4. Elements for this entry are mapped to Marc element type 185.
6. If this entry is used, CSSHLH and CSSHLP entries should not be used.
7. See parameters MCSSHLCK and MCSSHORR for additional options for this entry.
Main Index
1592 CSSHLP
CPENTA to Solid Shell Element Connection
CSSHLP CPENTA to Solid Shell Element Connection
Defines conversion of CPENTA elements to Solid Shell elements in SOL 600 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSSHLP EID1 PID EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5 EID6
Example:
CSSHLP 44 11 54 200 250
Describer Meaning
EIDi CPENTA element identification numbers. See Remark 1.
(0 < Integer < 100,000,000; no Default; EID1 is required)
PID Property identification of a PSSHL entry to be used with all the elements with EIDi.
Remarks:
1. All CPENTA elements in the range EID1 to EID2 will be converted to solid shells. The original
CPENTA elements will be deleted and the solid shell elements will have the same element ID’s as the
original CPENTA elements.
2. All CPENTA elements in the range EID3 to EID4 as well as EID5 to EID6 will be converted to solid
shells if these fields are entered.
3. The solid shell elements will be collapsed Marc element 185 type elements with the 3rd and 4th grids
set to G3 of the CPENTA and the 7th and 8th grids set to the 6th grid of the CPENTA.
6. The PSSHL entries associated with CSSHLH are not generated automatically. They must be input
using a GUI or with a text editor.
Main Index
CSUPER 1593
Secondary Superelement Connection
CSUPER Secondary Superelement Connection
Defines the grid or scalar point connections for identical or mirror image superelements or superelements
from an external source. These are all known as secondary superelements.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSUPER SSlD PSID GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 GP6
GP7 GP8 -etc.-
Example:
CSUPER 120003 21 3 6 4 10
Describer Meaning
SSID Coded identification number for secondary superelement. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0)
PSID Identification number for referenced primary superelement. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0
or blank)
GPi Grid or scalar point identification numbers of the exterior points of the secondary
superelement. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. The value of SSID is written in the form XXX0000 + n, where n is the referenced secondary
superelement identification number and n must be less than 10000 and XXX is a displacement
component sign reversal code as follows:
The sign reversal code specifies the displacement component(s) normal to the plane of the mirror
through which the reflection is to be made
Blank or 0 no reversal for identical superelement. If PSID is preceded by a minus sign

and there is no xxx code on SSID, then a z-reversal mirror is generated.
1 x-reversal
2 y-reversal Mirror Images
3 z-reversal
12 x and y-reversal
23 y and z-reversal Identical Images
31 z and x-reversal
123 x, y and z-reversal } Mirror Images
Main Index
1594 CSUPER
Secondary Superelement Connection
2. If PSID = 0 or blank, the superelement boundary matrices are obtained from an external source (such
as a database or external file). See also PARAM, EXTDRUNT, 777.
If PSID ≠ 0 , the secondary superelement is identical to, or is a mirror image of, a primary
superelement.
3. For identical or mirror image superelements, the grid point IDs, GPi, may appear in any order.
However, if they are not in the same order as the external GRIDs of the primary superelement, then
the SEQSEP entry is also required. In case of external superelements, the GRID IDs must be in the
order that the terms in the associated matrices occur in.
4. Image superelements and their primaries must be congruent. The identical or mirror image
superelement must have the same number of exterior grid points as its primary superelement. The
exterior grid points of the image superelement must have the same relative location to each other as
do the corresponding points of the primary superelement. The global coordinate directions of each
exterior grid point of the image superelement must have the same relative alignment as those of the
corresponding grid points of the primary superelement. If congruency is not satisfied because of
round-off, then the tolerance may be adjusted with PARAM,CONFAC or DIAG 37.
5. For superelements from an external source, please refer to PARAMS EXTDR, 777, EXTDRUNT, 777 and
EXTUNIT, 780.
Main Index
CSUPEXT 1595
Superelement Exterior Point Definition
CSUPEXT Superelement Exterior Point Definition
Assigns exterior points to a superelement.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSUPEXT SEID GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 GP6 GP7
Example:
CSUPEXT 2 147 562 937

CSUPEXT SEID GP1 “THRU” GP2
CSUPEXT 5 12006 THRU 12050
Describer Meaning
SEID Identification number of a primary superelement. (Integer > 0)
GPi Grid or scalar point identification number in the downstream superelement or residual
structure. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; for “THRU” option, GP1 < GP2)
Remarks:
1. Grid or scalar points are connected (that is, are exterior) to a superelement only if they are connected
by structural, rigid, or plot elements. MPC entries are not regarded as elements. This entry is a means
of providing connectivity for this purpose.
2. Open sets are allowed with the “THRU” option.
3. Scalar points may be interior to the residual structure (SEID = 0) only.
4. This entry may be applied only to the primary superelements. The CSUPER entry is used for
secondary superelements (identical image, mirror image, and external superelements).
Main Index
1596 CTETRA
Four-Sided Solid Element Connection
CTETRA Four-Sided Solid Element Connection
Defines the connections of the four-sided solid element with four to ten grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTETRA EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 G10
Example:
CTETRA 112 2 3 15 14 4 103 115
5 16 8 27

PID Property identification number of a PSOLID Integer > 0 Required
or PLSOLID entry.
points.
G4
G8
G10
G9
G3
G7
G1
G6
G5
G2
Figure 9-69 CTETRA Element Connection
Main Index
CTETRA 1597
Remarks:
2. The topology of the diagram must be preserved, i.e., G1, G2, G3 define a triangular face; G1, G8,
and G4 are on the same edge, etc.
3. The edge points, G5 to G10, are optional. For Nastran conventional elements, any or all of them may
be deleted. If the ID of any edge connection point is left blank or set to zero, the equations of the
element are adjusted to give correct results for the reduced number of connections. Corner grid points
cannot be deleted. The element is an isoparametric element in all cases.
4. Components of stress are output in the material coordinate system, except hyperelastic elements
which outputs stress in the basic coordinate system.
5. For nonhyperelastic elements, the element coordinate system is derived from the three vectors R, S,
and T, which join the midpoints of opposite edges.
R vector joins midpoints of edges G1-G2 and G3-G4.
S vector joins midpoints of edges G1-G3 and G2-G4.
T vector joins midpoints of edges G1-G4 and G2-G3.
The origin of the coordinate system is located at G1. The element coordinate system is chosen as
close as possible to the R, S, and T vectors and points in the same general direction. (Mathematically
speaking, the coordinate system is computed in such a way that, if the R, S, and T vectors are
described in the element coordinate system, a 3x3 positive definite symmetric matrix would be
produced.)
S
G4
G3
G1
T
G2
Main Index
1598 CTETRA
Figure 9-70 CTETRA Element R, S, and T Vectors
7. For hyperelastic elements, the plot codes are specified under the CTETRAFD element name in Item
Codes, 999.
8. If a CTETRA element is referenced by a PSET or PVAL entry, then p-version formulation is used
9. By default, all of the six edges of the element are considered straight unless:
• For p-elements, there is an FEEDGE or FEFACE entry that contains the two grids of any edge
of this element. In this case, the geometry of the edge is used in the element.
• For h-elements, any of G5 through G10 are specified.
Figure 9-71 PSOLID on CTETRA
Main Index
CTRIA3 1599
Triangular Plate Element Connection
CTRIA3 Triangular Plate Element Connection
Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending or plane strain triangular plate element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTRIA3 EID PID G1 G2 G3 THETA or ZOFFS
MCID
TFLAG T1 T2 T3
Example:
CTRIA3 111 203 31 74 75 3.0 0.98
1.77 2.04 2.09
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PSHELL, PCOMP, PCOMPG or PLPLANE
entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
Gi Grid point identification numbers of connection points. (Integers > 0, all unique)
elements. (Real; Default = 0.0)
system is determined by projecting the T1-axis of the MCID coordinate system onto
the surface of the shell element as follows:
x-axis
CORD1C, r-axis of MCID the coordinate is projected onto shell surface through
CORD2C the element center and the material angle is measured from the G1-G2
CORD1S, line to the to the projected r-axis
CORD2S
Use DIAG 38 to print the computed THETA values. MCID is ignored for hyperelastic
elements. For SOL 600, only CORD2R is allowed. (Integer > 0; if blank, then
THETA = 0.0 is assumed.)
Main Index
1600 CTRIA3
x MCID
Coordinate
System
y z
G3
ymaterial
G1 G2
xmaterial
blank, then Ti are actual user specified thickness. (Real > 0.0 or blank, not all zero. See
Remark 4. for default.) If “TFLAG” one, then the Ti are fraction relative to the T value
of the PSHELL. (Real > 0.0 or blank; not all zero. Default = 1.0) Ti are ignored for
Remarks:
numbers.
Z-axis of the element coordinate system. If the ZOFFS field is used, then both the MID1 and MID2
Main Index
CTRIA3 1601
yelement G3
xmaterial
THETA
xelement
G1 G2
Figure 9-73 CTRIA3 Element Geometry and Coordinate Systems
4. The reference coordinate system for the output of stress, strain and element force depends on the
element type.
• For CTRIA3 elements, which are not p-elements and not hyperelastic, the reference coordinate
system for output is the element coordinate system.
• For CTRIA3 elements referenced by a PSET of PVAL entry, the stresses, strains and element
forces are output in the local tangent plane of the element. The local tangents are oriented in a
user defined direction which is uniform across a set of elements. By default, the local tangent
x-direction is oriented in the positive x-direction of the basic coordinate system.
• For hyperelastic elements the stress and strain are output according to CID on the PLPLANE
entry.
5. For hyperelastic elements, the plot codes are specified under the CTRIAFD element name in Item
Codes, 999.
6. SYSTEM(218), alias T3SKEW, allows the user to control the minimum vertex angle for TRIA3
elements at which USER WARNING MESSAGE 5491 is issued. The default value is 10. degrees.
7. If a CTRIA3 element is referenced by a PSET or PVAL entry, then a p-version formulation is used
• If a curved edge of a p-element is shared by an h-element CTRIA3, the geometry of the edge is
ignored and set straight.
8. By default, all of the three edges of the element are considered straight unless the element is a
p-element and the edges are associated to curved geometry with FEEDGE or FEFACE Bulk Data
entries.
Main Index
1602 CTRIA3
MCID>0.
Main Index
CTRIA6 1603
Curved Triangular Shell Element Connection
CTRIA6 Curved Triangular Shell Element Connection
Defines a curved triangular shell element or plane strain with six grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTRIA6 EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
THETA ZOFFS T1 T2 T3 TFLAG
or MCID
Example:
CTRIA6 302 3 31 33 71 32 51 52
45 .03 .020 .025 .025
Describer Meaning
EID Element Identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Property identification number of PSHELL, PCOMP, PCOMPG or PLPLANE entry.
(Integer > 0)
G1, G2, G3 Identification numbers of connected corner grid points. (Unique Integers > 0)
G4, G5, G6 Identification number of connected edge grid points. Optional data for any or all three
points for Nastran conventional element only. (Integer > 0 or blank)
should be specified.
elements. (Real; Default = 0.0)
axis
CORD2S
MCID is ignored for hyperelastic elements. For SOL 600, only CORD2R is allowed.
(Integer > 0; if blank, then THETA = 0.0 is assumed)
Main Index
1604 CTRIA6
x MCID
Coordinate
System
y z
G3
ymaterial
G1 G2
xmaterial
ZOFFS Offset from the surface of grid points to the element reference plane; see Remark 6.
Remarks:
1. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element IDs.
2. Grid points G1 through G6 must be numbered as shown in Figure 9-75.
3. The orientation of the material property coordinate system is defined locally at each interior
integration point by THETA, which is the angle between xmaterial and the line of constant η.
4. T1, T2, and T3 are optional. If they are not supplied and no TFLAG, then T1 through T3 will be
set equal to the value of T on the PSHELL entry.
5. It is recommended that the midside grid points be located within the middle third of the edge.
Main Index
CTRIA6 1605
z-axis of the element coordinate system. If the ZOFFS field is used, then both the MID1 and MID2
7. If all midside grid points are deleted, then the element will be excessively stiff and the transverse shear
forces will be incorrect. A User Warning Message is printed. A CTRIA3 element entry is
recommended instead. If the element is hyperelastic, then the element is processed identically to the
hyperelastic CTRIA3 element.
8. For a description of the element coordinate system, see Shell Elements (CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CQUAD4,
CQUAD8, CQUADR) (p. 112) in the . Stresses and strains are output in the local coordinate system
identified by x l and y l in Figure 9-75. For hyperelastic elements, stresses and strains are output in the
coordinate system defined by the CID field on the PLPLANE entry.
yl
Lines of Constant η or ξ
G3 xl
η = 1, ξ = 1
ξ = constant
y material
yl
x material
η = 0.5 G5
THETA
G6
xl
yl
yl
η = constant
xl G4 ξ = 0.5
THETA
η = 0
G1
G2
xl
Figure 9-75 CTRIA6 Element Geometry and Coordinate Systems
Main Index
1606 CTRIA6
9. For hyperelastic elements, the plot codes are specified under the CTRIAFD element name in Item
Codes, 999.
MCID>0.
Main Index
CTRIAR 1607
CTRIAR Triangular Plate Element Connection
Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending triangular plate element. This element has a normal rotational
(drilling) degrees-of-freedom. It is a companion to the CQUADR element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTRIAR EID PID G1 G2 G3 THETA or ZOFFS
MCID
TFLAG T1 T2 T3
Example:
CTRIAR 111 203 31 74 75 3.0
1.77 2.04 2.09
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PSHELL, PCOMP or PCOMPG entry.
(Integer > 0; Default = EID)
G1, G2, G3 Grid point identification numbers of connection points. (Integers > 0; all unique)
THETA Material property orientation angle in degrees. (Real; Default = 0.0)
system is determined by projecting the T1-axis of the MCID coordinate system onto
the surface of the shell element as follows:
CORD1 x -axis of MCID the coordinate is projected onto shell surface and the
R, material angle is measured from the G1-G2 line to the to the projected x-
CORD2 axis
R
CORD1 r-axis of MCID the coordinate is projected onto shell surface through the
C, element center and the material angle is measured from the G1-G2 line to
CORD2 the to the projected r-axis
C
CORD1S
,
CORD2S
Use DIAG 38 to print the computed THETA values. For SOL 600, only CORD2R is
allowed. (Integer > 0; if blank, then THETA = 0.0 is assumed)
Main Index
1608 CTRIAR
x MCID
Coordinate
System
y z
G3
ymaterial
G1 G2
xmaterial
Remarks:
numbers.
3. Stresses are output in the element coordinate system at the centroid and grid points G1 through G3.
4. Inaccurate results will be obtained if interior grids have the rotation normal (drilling) to the element
constrained. At the boundary of a model, the drilling degrees-of-freedom must be constrained if the
user wants a fixed boundary. Also, for this element it is critical that consistent membrane (in plane)
edge loads be applied. Reference the PLOAD4entry (SORL option) and the Consistent Surface and Edge
Loads (Ch. 3) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide for additional information.
Main Index
CTRIAR 1609
yelement G3
xmaterial
THETA
xelement
G1 G2
Figure 9-77 CTRIAR Element Geometry and Coordinate Systems
Z-axis of the element coordinate system. If the ZOFFS field is used, then both the MID1 and MID2
MCID>0.
Main Index
1610 CTRIAX
Axisymmetric Triangular Element (Fully Nonlinear or Linear Harmonic)
CTRIAX Axisymmetric Triangular Element (Fully Nonlinear or Linear Harmonic)
Defines an axisymmetric triangular element with up to six grid points for use in fully nonlinear (i.e., large
strain and large rotations)hyperelastic analysis or a linear harmonic or rotordynamic analysis. The element
has between three and six grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTRIAX EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
THETA or
MCID
Example:
CTRIAX 111 203 31 74 75
Describer Meaning
EID Element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) See Remark 1.
PID Property identification number of a PLPLANE or PAXSYMH entry. (Integer > 0). See
Remark 2.
G1, G2, G3 Identification numbers of connected corner grid points. Required data for all three grid
points. (Unique Integers > 0). See Remark 3., 6., 7.
G4, G5, G6 Identification numbers of connected edge grid points. Optional data for any or all four
grid points for Nastran conventional element only. (Integer > 0 or blank). See Remark
3., 4., 6., 7.
should be specified
THETA Material property orientation angle in degrees. THETA is only applicable if the
For PSHLN2 BEHi=AXSOLID code, THETA is measured relative to the R axis of the
element. (Real; Default = 0.0)
MCID Material coordinate system identification number, MCID is only applicable if the
The x-axis of the material coordinate system is determined by projecting the x-axis of
the MCID coordinate system onto the surface of the element. The resulting angle is
measured relative to the R axis of the element. For PSHLN2 BEHi=AXSOLID code,
THETA is measured relative to the R axis of the element. (Integer > 0; if blank, then
THETA = 0.0 is assumed.) THETA is ignored if PID refers to a PAXSYMH entry.
Remarks:
1. Element identification numbers must be unique with respect to all other element IDs of any kind.
Main Index
CTRIAX 1611
Axisymmetric Triangular Element (Fully Nonlinear or Linear Harmonic)
2. If PID refers to a PLPLANE entry, CTRIAX defines an element for use in fully nonlinear analysis. If
PID refers to a PAXSYMH entry, CTRIAX defines a linear harmonic element for use in
rotordynamic or harmonic analysis.
3. Gi must be numbered as shown in Figure 9-78.
5. The plot codes are specified under the CTRIAXFD element name in Item Codes, 999.
6. The grid points of the axisymmetric element must lie on the x-y plane of the basic coordinate system.
Stress and strain are output in the basic coordinate system.
7. A concentrated load (e.g., FORCE entry) at Gi is divided by the radius to Gi and then applied as a
force per unit circumferential length. For example, in order to apply a load of 100 N/m on the
circumference at G1, which is located at a radius of 0.5 m, then the magnitude specified on the static
load entry must result in:
( 100 N/m ) ⋅ ( 0.5m ) = 50N
z = ybasic
G3 Lines of Constant η or ξ
η = 1, ξ = 1
ξ = constant
η = 0.5 G5
G6
η = constant
ξ = 0.5
G4
η = 0
G1
G2
r = xbasic
Figure 9-78 CTRIAX Element Coordinate System
Main Index
1612 CTRIAX6
Axisymmetric Triangular Element Connection
CTRIAX6 Axisymmetric Triangular Element Connection
Defines an isoparametric and axisymmetric triangular cross section ring element with midside grid points.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTRIAX6 EID MID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
TH
Example:
CTRIAX6 22 999 10 11 12 21 22 32
9.0
Describer Meaning
MID Material identification number. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid point identification numbers of connected points (unique Integers > 0, or blank
for deleted nodes.)
TH Material property orientation angle in degrees. (Real; Default = 0.0)
Remarks:
1. The grid points must lie in the x-z plane of the basic coordinate system, with x = r ≥ 0 . The grid
points must be listed consecutively beginning at a vertex and proceeding around the perimeter in
either direction. Corner grid points G1, G3, and G5 must be present. Any or all edge grid points G2,
G4, or G6 may be deleted for Nastran conventional element. Note that the alternate corner-edge grid
point pattern is different from the convention used on the CTRIA6 element.
2. For structural problems, the MID may refer to a MAT1 or MAT3 entry.
4. Material properties (if defined on a MAT3 entry) and stresses are given in the ( r m, z m ) coordinate
system shown in Figure 9-80.
5. A concentrated load (e.g., FORCE entry) at Gi is multiplied by 2π times the radius to Gi and then
applied as a force per unit circumferential length. (which is located at a radius of 0.5 m), the
magnitude of the load specified on the static load entry must result in:
( 100 N/m ) ⋅ 2π ⋅ ( 0.5 m ) = 314.
Main Index
CTRIAX6 1613
Figure 9-79 CTRIAX6 Element Idealization
z = zbasic
zm
rm
G5
axial G4
G3
G6
TH
G2
G1
radial r = xbasic
Figure 9-80 CTRIAX6 Element Geometry and Coordinate Systems
6. For thermal problems, the MID may refer to a MAT4 or MAT5 entry. In order to model the
convection or radiation along the edges the CHBDYG with TYPE=REV must be used.
7. To model axi-symmetric view factor computations using the CTRIAX6 elements, the normal
direction for the CTRIAX6 element must point in the negative Y direction. The reason for this is to
set up PATRAN for the correct nodal specification on the CHBDYG with REV option
Main Index
1614 CTRIAX6
2
2
8
1
1
Z
4
Y 2
X
Figure 9-81 Normal Vectors That Point in a Negative Y Direction.
3 6 4
2
2 5 8 12 15 18
1
11 14 17
7 13 16
1 4 10
Figure 9-82 View Factor Boundary Conditions.
Main Index
CTRIAX6 1615
$ CHBDYG Surface Elements

CHBDYG 100001 REV 1 1
7 9 8
CHBDYG 100002 REV 2 2
12 10 11
Please note that on the CHBDYG, REV option, the nodal connectivity specification is in the
clockwise fashion. In this case the CHBDYG with element ID of 100001 is defined by grids 7,9,8
which means the normal vector of the edge is pointing towards right. On the other hand the edges
define by grid 12,10,11 means the normal vector of the edge is pointing towards left. If you have not
reverse the element direction to a negative Y direction on the CTRIAX6 element, the view factor
computation will result a net view factor of zero.
Main Index
1616 CTUBE
Tube Element Connection
CTUBE Tube Element Connection
Defines a tension-compression-torsion tube element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTUBE EID PID G1 G2
Example:
CTUBE 12 13 21 23
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PTUBE entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
Remarks:
numbers.
2. Only one tube element may be defined on a single entry.
Main Index
CVISC 1617
Viscous Damper Connection
CVISC Viscous Damper Connection
Defines a viscous damper element.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CVISC EID PID G1 G2
Example:
CVISC 21 6327 29 31
Describer Meaning
PID Property identification number of a PVISC entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
Remarks:
numbers.
2. Only one viscous damper element may be defined on a single entry.
3. Grids G1 and G2 must not be coincident. If coincident grids are required, use either the CDAMP or
CBUSH entry.
Main Index
1618 CWELD
Weld or Fastener Element Connection
CWELD Weld or Fastener Element Connection
Defines a weld or fastener connecting two surface patches or points. Large displacement and large rotational
effects are supported when using SOL 600 and SOL 400 only.
Format PARTPAT:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CWELD EWID PWID GS “PARTPAT” GA GB MCID
PIDA PIDB
XS YS ZS
Example:
CWELD 101 8 203 PARTPAT
21 33
Alternate formats and examples:
Format ELPAT:
CWELD EWID PWID GS “ELPAT” GA GB MCID
SHIDA SHIDB
XS YS ZS
Example:
CWELD 103 5 403 ELPAT
309 511
Format ELEMID:
CWELD EWID PWID GS “ELEMID” GA GB MCID
SHIDA SHIDB
Example:
CWELD 103 5 403 ELEMID
309 511
Format GRIDID:
CWELD EWID PWID GS “GRIDID” GA GB SPTYP MCID
GA1 GA2 GA3 GA4 GA5 GA6 GA7 GA8
GB1 GB2 GB3 GB4 GB5 GB6 GB7 GB8
Main Index
CWELD 1619
Example:
CWELD 7 29 233 GRIDID QT
15 28 31 35 46 51 55 60
3 5 8
Format ALIGN:
CWELD EWID PWID “ALIGN” GA GB MCID
Example:
CWELD 7 29 ALIGN 103 259

EWID CWELD element identification number. See Remark 1. 0 < Integer < Required
100,000,000
PWID Property identification number of a PWELD entry. Integer > 0 Required
GS Identification number of a grid point which defines the Integer > 0 or
location of the connector. See Remarks 2. and 3. blank
“PARTPAT” Character string indicating the type of connection. The Character Required
format of the subsequent entries depends on the type.
“PARTPAT”, for example, indicates that the
connectivity of surface patch A to surface patch B is
defined with two property identification numbers of
PSHELL entries, PIDA and PIDB, respectively. The
“PARTPAT” format connects up to 3x3 elements per
patch. See Remark 4.
GA, GB Grid point identification numbers of piercing points on Integer > 0 or blank
surface A and surface B, respectively. See Remark 5. blank
MCID Specifies the element stiffness coordinate system. See Integer > -1 or Default = -1
Remark 15. blank
PIDA, PIDB Property identification numbers of PSHELL entries Integer > 0 Required for
defining surface A and B respectively. “PARTPAT”
XS, YS, ZS Coordinates of spot weld location in basic. See Remark Real Required if
2. GS and GA
are not
defined.
Main Index
1620 CWELD
For the alternate formats, the describer meaning are described below:
“ELPAT” Character string indicating that the connectivity of Character Required
surface patch A to surface patch B is defined with two
shell element identification numbers, SHIDA and
SHIDB, respectively. The “ELPAT” format connects up
to 3x3 elements per patch. See Remark 6.
SHIDA, Shell element identification numbers of elements on Integer > 0 Required for
SHIDB patch A and B, respectively. “ELPAT”
“ELEMID” Character string indicating that the connectivity of Character Required
shell element identification numbers, SHIDA and
SHIDB, respectively. The “ELEMID” format connects
one shell element per patch. See Remark 7.
SHIDA, Shell element identification numbers of elements on Integer > 0 Required for
SHIDB patch A and B, respectively. “ELEMID”
“GRIDID” Character string indicating that the connectivity of Character Required
sequences of grid point identification numbers, GAi and
GBi, respectively. The “GRIDID” format connects the
surface of any element. See Remark 8.
SPTYP Character string indicating types of surface patches A Character Required for
and B. SPTYP = “QQ”, “TT”, “QT”, “TQ”, “Q” or “GRIDID”
“T”. See Remark 9.
GAi Grid identification numbers of surface patch A. GA1 to Integer > 0 Required for
GA3 are required. See Remark 10. “GRIDID”
GBi Grid identification numbers of surface patch B. See Integer > 0
Remark 10.
“ALIGN” Character string indicating that the connectivity of Character Required
surface A to surface B is defined with two shell vertex
grid points GA and GB, respectively. See Remark 11.
GA, GB Vertex grid identification number of shell A and B, Integer > 0 Required for
respectively. “ALIGN”
Remarks:
1. CWELD defines a flexible connection between two surface patches, between a point and a surface
patch, or between two shell vertex grid points. See Figure 9-83 through Figure 9-87.
Main Index
CWELD 1621
2. Grid point GS defines the approximate location of the connector in space. GS is projected on surface
patch A and on surface patch B. The resulting piercing points GA and GB define the axis of the
connector. GS must have a normal projection on surface patch A and B. GS does not have to lie on
the surface patches. GS is ignored for format “ALIGN”. GA is used instead of GS if GS is not
specified. For the formats “ELPAT” and “PARTPAT,” if GS and GA are not specified, then XS, YS,
and ZS will be assumed.
3. The connectivity between grid points on surface patch A and grid points on surface patch B is
generated depending on the location of GS and the cross sectional area of the connector. Diagnostic
print outs, checkout runs and non default settings of search and projection parameters are requested
on the SWLDPRM Bulk Data entry. It is recommended to start with the default settings.
4. The format “PARTPAT” defines a connection of two shell element patches A and B with PSHELL
property identification numbers PIDA and PIDB, respectively. The two property identification
numbers must be different, see Figure 9-83. The number of connected elements depends on the
location of the piercing points GA, GB and the size of the diameter D. The diameter D is defined on
the PWELD property entry. For this option, shell element patches A and B are allowed to share a
common grid.
GS
PIDB
GB
PIDA
L
SHIDB GA
D SHIDA
Figure 9-83 Patch to Patch Connection Defined with the Formats PARTPAT or
ELPAT
5. The definition of the piercing grid points GA and GB is optional for all formats with the exception
of the format “ALIGN”. If GA and GB are given, GS is ignored. If GA and GB are not specified, they
are generated from the normal projection of GS on surface patches A and B and internal identification
numbers are generated for GA and GB starting with 101e+6 by default. The offset number can be
changed with PARAM,OSWPPT. If GA and GB are specified, they must lie on or at least have a
projection on surface patches A and B, respectively. By default, the locations of user specified GA and
Main Index
1622 CWELD
GB will not be changed. If the user specifies "SWLDPRM, MOVGAB, 1," then the locations will be
corrected so that they lie on surface patches A and B within machine precision accuracy. The length
of the connector is the distance of grid point GA to GB, subject to being adjusted to the effective
length defined in PWELD entry.
6. The format “ELPAT” defines a connection of two shell element patches A and B with shell element
identification numbers SHIDA and SHIDB, see Figure 9-83. The connectivity is similar to the format
“PARTPAT”. The number of connected elements depends on the location of the piercing points GA,
GB and the size of the diameter D. For this option, shell element patches A and B are allowed to share
a common grid.
7. The format “ELEMID” defines a connection of two shell element patches A and B with shell element
identification numbers SHIDA and SHIDB, see Figure 9-84. The connectivity is restricted to a single
element per patch regardless of the location of GA, GB and regardless of the size of the diameter of
the connector. In addition, the format “ELEMID” can define a point to patch connection if SHIDB
is left blank, see Figure 9-85. Then grid GS is connected to shell SHIDA.
GS
GB4 SHIDB
GA3
GB3
GB
GB1
GA2
GB2
GA
SHIDA
GA1
Figure 9-84 Patch to Patch Connection Defined with Format ELEMID or GRIDID
Main Index
CWELD 1623
GS
GA4
GA3
GA
GA1
GA2
Figure 9-85 Point to Patch Connection Defined with Format ELEMID or GRID.
8. The format “GRIDID” defines a connection of two surface patches A and B with a sequence of grid
points GAi and GBi, see Figure 9-84. In addition, the format “GRIDID” can define a point to patch
connection if all GBi fields are left blank, see Figure 9-85. Then grid GS is connected to grids GAi. The
grids GAi and GBi do not have to belong to shell elements.
9. SPTYP defines the type of surface patches to be connected. SPTYP is required for the format
“GRIDID” to identify quadrilateral or triangular patches. The combinations are:
SPTYP Description
QQ Connects a quadrilateral surface patch A (Q4 to Q8) with a quadrilateral surface
patch B (Q4 to Q8).
QT Connects a quadrilateral surface patch A (Q4 to Q8) with a triangular surface patch
B (T3 to T6).
TT Connects a triangular surface patch A (T3 to T6) with a triangular surface patch B
(T3 to T6).
TQ Connects a triangular surface patch A (T3 to T6) with a quadrilateral surface patch
B (Q4 to Q8).
Q Connects the shell vertex grid GS with a quadrilateral surface patch A (Q4 to Q8)
if surface patch B is not specified.
T Connects the shell vertex grid GS with a triangular surface patch A (T3 to T6) if
surface patch B is not specified.
Main Index
1624 CWELD
10. GAi are required for the format “GRIDID”. At least 3 and at most 8 grid IDs may be specified for
GAi and GBi, respectively. The rules of the triangular and quadrilateral elements apply for the order
of GAi and GBi, see Figure 9-86. Missing midside nodes are allowed.
GA4 GA7 GA3
GA3
GA6
GA6 GA5
GA8
GA1 GA2 GA1 GA4 GA2

GA5
Figure 9-86 Quadrilateral and Triangular Surface Patches defined with
Format GRIDID
11. The format “ALIGN” defines a point to point connection, see Figure 9-87. GA and GB are required,
they must be existing vertex nodes of shell elements. For the other formats, GA and GB are not
required. Two shell normals in the direction GA-GB are generated at GA and GB, respectively.
GB
GA
Figure 9-87 Point to Point Connection Defined with Format ALIGN
12. Forces and moments are output in the element coordinate system, see Figure 9-88. The element
coordinate system is constructed using the following rules:
The element x-axis points from GA to GB.
xB – xA
e 1 = ----------------------- element x-axis
xB – xA
In case of zero length, the normal of shell A is taken. All vector components are in basic if not noted
otherwise.
Main Index
CWELD 1625
Find the smallest component j of e 1

i i
ce 1 = e 1
j min i
ce 1 = { ce 1 }.
i = 1, 2, 3
Note that cei1 will be set to 10 – 6 if ce i1 < 10 – 6 .

In case of two equal components we take the one with the smaller i . The corresponding basic vector
 0 
 
bj , e.g., for j = 3, b 3 =  0 
 
 1 
provides a good directional choice for e 2 . In addition, the vector e 2 must be orthogonal to e 1 .
e˜2
T
e1 bj
e˜2 = b j – ----------
- e1 e 2 = ---------- element y-axis
T
e1 e1 e˜2
and e 3 is just the cross product
e3 = e1 × e2 element z-axis
The final transformation matrix is
T be = e1 e2 e3
Main Index
1626 CWELD
mx
fx
m zB
xe
fz
GB
fy
m yA m yB
Plane 2
fy
GA
ze
Plane 1 fx Axial force
fy Shear force, plane 1
fz
ye fz Shear force, plane 2
m zA
mx Torque
fx
m yA Bending moment end A, plane 2
m yB Bending moment end B, plane 2
zb
m zA Bending moment end A, plane 1
yb
mx m zB Bending moment end B, plane 1
xb
Basic
Figure 9-88 Element Coordinate System and Sign Convention of
Element Forces
13. If "PARAM, OLDWELD, YES", in a SOL 400 analysis the CWELD element using method
ELEMID, GRIDID, ELPAT or PARTPAT internally gets decomposed in a CBEAM element and a
number of RBE3 elements. For method ALIGN the CWELD element internally gets replaced by a
CBEAM element. The CBEAM element obtains a circular cross section with its diameter and
material properties taken from the PWELD input and its length is determined by the final locations
of the GA and GB grids of the CWELD. The RBE3 elements connect the GA and GB grids to the
plate structures. For methods ELEMID and GRIDID one RBE3 element is used on each side to
establish the connection. For methods ELPAT and PARTPAT five RBE3 elements are used on each
side to establish the connection.
Main Index
CWELD 1627
14. The output format of the forces and moments including the sign convention is identical to the CBAR
element, see Element Force Item Codes, 1038.
16. MCID = -1 or blank (Default), then the coordinate system is as defined in Remark 12.
If MCID > 0, then a “beam” like coordinate system is defined. The x elem axis direction of the
connector defined as
xB – xA
e 1 = -----------------------
xB – xA
The T2 direction defined by MCID will be used to define the orientation vector ν of the connector.
Then the z elem element axis will be defined as
e1 × ν
e 3 = --------------------
e1 × ν
The element y elem axis is defined as
e2 = e3 × e1
18. In SOL400, the behavior of this element in regard to large rotation is affected by the Case Control
Command Rigid.
19. If partitioned superelements are present, then CWELD is supported in the main Bulk Data section
only.
Main Index
1628 CYAX
Grid Points on Axis of Symmetry
CYAX Grid Points on Axis of Symmetry
Lists grid points that lie on the axis of symmetry in cyclic symmetry analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CYAX G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8
G9 G10 -etc.-
Example:
CYAX 27 152 THRU 160 192 11
Describer Meaning
Gi A list of grid points on the axis of symmetry. (Integer > 0 or Character “THRU”)
Remarks:
1. The displacement coordinate system (see CD field on GRID entry) for a grid point lying on the axis
of symmetry must be a rectangular system with the z-component of motion aligned with the axis of
symmetry. The positive axis of symmetry is defined so that the azimuthal angle from positive side 1
to side 2 of a segment is in the same direction as the angle from T1 to T2 for the axis point. This is
consistent with left- or right-hand rule.
2. If the dihedral symmetry option (STYPE = “DIH” on the CYSYM entry) is selected, the y-axis must
be perpendicular to side 1.
3. Grid points lying on the axis of symmetry may be constrained by SPCs but not by MPCs. If the
number of segments is three or more, SPCs must be applied to both components 1 and 2 or to neither,
and SPCs must be applied to both components 4 and 5 or to neither in order to satisfy symmetry. In
addition, the degrees-of-freedom (not constrained by SPCs, if any) at these grid points must be in the
analysis set (a-set). If all degrees-of-freedom of grid points on the axis of symmetry are constrained
by SPCs (including heat transfer, where there is only one degree-of-freedom), the grid point should
not be listed on the CYAX entry.
4. Grid points lying on the axis of symmetry must not be defined on side 1 or on side 2 by means of a
CYJOIN entry.
5. The word “THRU” must not appear in fields 2 or 9.
Main Index
CYJOIN 1629
Cyclic Symmetry Boundary Points
CYJOIN Cyclic Symmetry Boundary Points
Defines the boundary points of a segment in cyclic symmetry problems.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CYJOIN SIDE C G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 -etc.-
Example:
CYJOIN 1 T2 7 9 16 THRU 33 64
72 THRU 89
Describer Meaning
SIDE Side identification. (Integer 1 or 2)
C Type of coordinate system used on boundaries of dihedral or axisymmetry problems.
See Remark 3. (Character: “T1”, “T2”, “T3”, “R”, “C”, “S”)
Gi Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0 or Character “THRU”)
Remarks:
1. CYJOIN entries are used only for cyclic symmetry problems. The CYSYM entry must be used to
specify rotational, dihedral, or axisymmetry.
2. For rotational or axisymmetry problems, there must be one logical entry for SIDE = 1 and one for
SIDE = 2. The two lists specify grid points to be connected; therefore, both lists must have the same
length.
3. For dihedral problems, side 1 refers to the boundary between segments and side 2 refers to the middle
of a segment. For dihedral and/or AXI type of symmetry, the grid point degree-of-freedom that is
normal to the boundary must be specified in field 3 as “T1”, “T2”, or “T3” (“R”, rectangular, and
“C”, cylindrical, are the same as “T2” while “S”, spherical, is the same as “T3”). For scalar and extra
points with one degree-of-freedom, these should be specified as blank, “T2”, or “T3” if they are to
have the same sign, and “T1”, if the two connected points are to be opposite in sign.
4. All components of displacement at boundary points are connected to adjacent segments except those
constrained by SPCi, MPC, or OMITi entries.
5. The points on the axis of symmetry of the model, defined in the CYAX entry must not be defined as
a side 1 or side 2 point by means of this entry.
6. The word “THRU” may not appear in fields 4 or 9 of the parent entry and fields 2 or 9 on the
continuation entries.
7. All grid points that are implicitly or explicitly referenced must be defined.
Main Index
1630 CYJOIN
Cyclic Symmetry Boundary Points
8. For rotational and axisymmetry problems, the displacement coordinate systems must be consistent
between sides 1 and 2. This is best satisfied by the use of a spherical or cylindrical coordinate system.
Main Index
CYLINDR 1631
Defines the Shape of a Cylinder
CYLINDR Defines the Shape of a Cylinder
Cylindrical shape used in the initial condition definition on the TICEUL1 entry. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CYLINDR VID XC1 YC1 ZC1 XC2 YC2 ZC2
RAD
Example:
CYLINDR 4 0. 0. 0. 1. 1. 1.
.5
Describer Meaning
VID Unique cylinder number. (Integer > 0; Required)
XC1, YC1, ZC1 Coordinates of point 1, See Remark 1. (Real; Required)
XC2, YC2, ZC2 Coordinates of point 2. See Remark 1. (Real; Required)
RAD Radius of the cylinder. (Real; Required)
Remarks:
1. A cylinder is defined by the two end points of the cylinder axis and a radius.
2. Initial conditions are defined for the elements that are fully or partially inside the cylinder.
3. See also the TICEUL1 Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
1632 CYSUP
Fictitious Supports for Cyclic Symmetry
CYSUP Fictitious Supports for Cyclic Symmetry
Defines fictitious supports for cyclic symmetry analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CYSUP GID C
Example:
CYSUP 16 1245
Describer Meaning
GID Grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
C Component numbers. (Any unique combination of the Integers 1 through 6 with no
embedded blanks.)
Remarks:
1. Components of motion defined on this entry may not appear on SPC, SPC1, OMIT, OMIT1
entries, or in rigid elements or multipoint constraints as dependent degrees-of-freedom.
2. Supports are applied at the grid point identified in field 2 to prevent rigid body motions in static
analysis, or to define rigid body modes in eigenvalue analysis. All degrees-of-freedom should be at a
single grid point. In other words, there can only be one such supported grid point in the model. The
supports are applied only to the cyclic components of order k=0 or k=1. In order to satisfy conditions
of symmetry, certain restrictions are placed on the location of the grid point and the orientation of its
displacement coordinate system, as shown in the following table:
Symmetry Option (STYPE ROT ROT DIH DIH DIH

on the CYSYM entry)
Number of Segments, N 2 >3 1 2 >3
Location of Grid Point See Note c. See Note d. Side 1 Side 1 Side 1
Special Restrictions on See Notes See Note b. None See Note a. See Note b.
Displacement Coordinate a. and e.
System
Notes:
a. T3 axis must be parallel to axis of symmetry.
b. Displacement coordinate system at the referenced grid point must be cylindrical with z-axis along
the axis of symmetry.
Main Index
CYSUP 1633
Fictitious Supports for Cyclic Symmetry
c. Any location except on side 2.

d. Any location except on the axis of symmetry or on side 2.
e. If the grid point is on the axis of symmetry, the displacement coordinate system must be
rectangular.
3. If the number of segments, N, is 1 (in the case of DIH symmetry) or 2 (in the case of ROT or AXI
symmetry), it is important that the rotational components referenced in field 3 be elastically
connected to the structure. If N > 2 (in the case of DIH symmetry) or N > 3 (in the case of ROT or
AXI symmetry), it is not important, because in this case the supports for rigid body rotation are
actually applied to translational motions.
4. If N > 3, supports will be applied to both the 1 and 2 (inplane-translational) components, if either is
referenced, and to both the 4 and 5 (out-of-plane rotational) components, if either is referenced. If
component 6 is supported, component 2 should not appear on OMIT or OMIT1 entries.
5. The restrictions noted in Remarks 2. and 4. are related to symmetry requirements. For N > 3,
symmetry requires that the supports be symmetrical (or antisymmetrical), with respect to any plane
passing through the axis of symmetry. For the DIH options, N = 1 and N = 2, symmetry requires
that the supports be symmetrical (or antisymmetrical) with respect to the plane(s) of symmetry. For
the ROT option, N = 2, symmetry requires that a support be either parallel or perpendicular to the
axis of symmetry.
6. GID must be a grid point and not a scalar point.
Main Index
1634 CYSYM
Cyclic Symmetry Parameters
CYSYM Cyclic Symmetry Parameters
Defines parameters for cyclic symmetry analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CYSYM NSEG STYPE
Example:
CYSYM 6 ROT
Describer Meaning
NSEG Number of segments. (Integer > 0)
STYPE Symmetry type. (Character: “ROT”, “DIH”, or “AXI”)
Remarks:
1. STYPE = “AXI” is a special case of STYPE = “ROT” used to model axisymmetric structures.
2. If STYPE = “AXI”, then all grid points must lie on side 1, side 2, or the axis. Also, plate elements
with midside grid points may not be defined. See Additional Topics (p. 511) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual.
Main Index
DAMPING 1635
Parameter and Hybrid Damping Specification
Entries D - E
DAMPING Parameter and Hybrid Damping Specification
Specifies the values for parameter damping and/or selects optional HYBRID damping.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DAMPING ID G ALPHA1 ALPHA2 HYBRID GEFACT ROTSEP
W3 W4 WH
Example:
DAMPING 100 .02 NO
Describer Meaning
ID Damping entry identification number. (Integer > 0; no Default)
G Structural damping coefficient, see Remark 1. (Real; Default = 0.0)
ALPHA1 Scale factor for mass portion of Rayleigh damping, see Remark 4. (Real; Default = 0.0)
ALPHA2 Scale factor for stiffness portion of Rayleigh damping, see Remark 4. (Real; Default =
0.0)
HYBRID Identification number of HYBDAMP entry for hybrid damping, see Remarks 5. and 6.
(Integer > 0; Default = 0)
GEFACT Scale factor for material damping. See Remark 1.and Remark 3. (Real; Default = 1.0)
ROTSEP Remove rotor stiffness, mass, and structural damping from the hybrid damping
calculation (Character: YES or NO; Default=YES)
W3 Average frequency for calculation of structural damping in transient response, see
Remark 7. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
W4 Average frequency for calculation of material damping in transient response, see
WH Average frequency for calculation of hybrid ‘structural’ damping in transient response,
see Remark 7. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
Remarks:
1. The DAMPING entry is referenced by the RSDAMP or SEDAMP Case Control commands. If a
DAMPING entry is selected in the Case Control, the DAMPING values, including defaults, will
override parameter inputs.
2. All damping selections are cumulative.
3. Structural damping specified by the G and GEFACT entries will replace any structural damping by:
Main Index
1636 DAMPING
new [ K4 ] = G [ K ] + GEFACT [ K4 ]
The GFACT value used is GEFACT = GE (default=0.0) * GEFACT (default=1.0) where GE is the
structural damping value on the material entry.
4. Rayleigh viscous damping is calculated as:
[ B ] Rayleigh = α 1 [ M ] + α 2 [ K ]
5. Hybrid damping on the residual structure is only active for direct solution sequences. For modal
solution sequences, the SDAMP Case Control request should be used.
6. Hybrid damping for superelements uses modes that are calculated using the superelement mass and
stiffness matrices before upstream superelements are added and before SPC or MPC constriants are
imposed. These matrices are known as the JJ-type matrices.
7. The W3 and W4 values are used in transient response only. A zero value (default) will result in no
damping. The equivalent viscous damping is calculated as:
G GEFACT 1
[ B ] equiv =  --------- [ K ] +  -------------------------- [ K4 ] +  ---------- [ KH ]
 W 3  W4   WH
8. For rotordynamic analyses (RGYRO in the Case Control Section), the DAMPING calculations for
the residual structure (RSDAMP) are performed without any rotor contributions (support structure
only).
9. Rayleigh damping is designed to be applied only at Superelement, Part Superelement, or External
Superelement residual assembly time. It is not applied in individual Parts or External superelements.
Examples:
1. Specify a structural damping coefficient of 0.03 for the residual structure for frequency response.
Case Control:
RSDAMP=100
Bulk Data:
DAMPING, 100, 0.03
2. Specify a structural damping coefficient of 0.03 for the residual structure for transient response (use
a “natural” frequency of 100 Hz)
Case Control:
RSDAMP=100
Bulk Data:
Main Index
DAMPING 1637
DAMPING, 100, 0.03,

, 628.3
3. Specify hybrid damping for superelement 1. Use modal damping of two percent critical for the first
6 modes.
Case Control:
SUBCASE 1
SUPER=1
SEDAMP=100
Bulk Data:
DAMPING, 100, , , , 101
HYBDAMP, 101, 102, 1001
EIGRL, 102, , , 6
TABDMP1, 1001, CRIT,
, 0.0, 0.02, 1000.0, 0.02, ENDT
Main Index
1638 DAREA
Load Scale Factor
DAREA Load Scale Factor
Defines scale (area) factors for static and dynamic loads. In dynamic analysis, DAREA is used in conjunction
with ACSRCE, RLOADi and TLOADi entries.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DAREA SID P1 C1 A1 P2 C2 A2
Example:
DAREA 3 6 2 8.2 15 1 10.1
Describer Meaning
SID Identification number. (Integer > 0)
Pi Grid, extra, or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number. (Integer 1 through 6 for grid point; blank or 0 for extra or scalar
point.)
Ai Scale (area) factor. (Real)
Remarks:
1. One or two scale factors may be defined on a single entry.
2. Refer to RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2, or ACSRCE entries for the formulas that
define the scale factor Ai in dynamic analysis.
3. Component numbers refer to the displacement coordinate system.
4. In dynamic analysis, DAREA entries may be used with LSEQ Bulk Data entries if LOADSET is
specified in Case Control. The LSEQ and static load entries will be used to internally generate
DAREA entries.
5. If DAREA is referenced by a GUST entry, Pi must be defined. However, it is only used if selected
through a DLOAD Case Control command. WG from the GUST entry is used instead of Ai when
requested via a GUST entry.
6. All DAREA entries corresponding to all grid and scalar points are automatically converted internally
by the program to equivalent FORCE/MOMENT/SLOAD entries (as appropriate) if there are no
LSEQ Bulk Data entries.
7. In superelement analysis, DAREA may be used to specify loads not only on the interior points of the
residual, but also on the interior points of upstream superelements if there are no LSEQ Bulk Data
entries.
8. In static analysis, DAREA entries may be used only if there are no LSEQ Bulk Data entries. They are
ignored if there are any LSEQ Bulk Data entries.
Main Index
DCONADD 1639
Design Constraint Set Combination
DCONADD Design Constraint Set Combination
Defines the design constraints for a subcase as a union of DCONSTR entries.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DCONADD DCID DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 DC5 DC6 DC7
DC8 -etc.-
Example:
DCONADD 10 4 12
Describer Meaning
DCID Design constraint set identification number. (Integer > 0)
DCi DCONSTR entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. The DCONADD entry is selected by a DESSUB or DESGLB Case Control command.
2. All DCi must be unique from other DCi.
3. For PART SE, DCi from different PART SEs can be referenced on a single DCONADD and only
DCONADD in the main Bulk Data Section, starts with ‘BEGIN BULK’ or ‘BEGIN SUPER=0’, will
be considered as part of design constraints. Note that DCONADD entries in ‘BEGIN SUPER=seid’
where seid>0 will be ignored.
Main Index
1640 DCONSTR
Design Constraints
DCONSTR Design Constraints
Defines design constraints.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DCONSTR DCID RID LALLOW/LID UALLOW/UID LOWFQ HIGHFQ
Example:
DCONSTR 10 4 1.25
Describer Meaning
DCID Design constraint set identification number. (Integer > 0)
RID DRESPi entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
LALLOW/LID Lower bound on the response quantity or the set identification ID of a number of
a TABLEDi entry that supplies the lower bound as a function of frequency. (Real;
Default = -1.0E20)
UALLOW/UID Upper bound on the response quantity or the set identification ID of a number of
a TABLEDi entry that supplies the upper bound as a function of frequency. (Real;
Default = 1.0E20)
LOWFQ Low end of frequency range in Hertz (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0). See Remark 8.
HIGHFQ High end of frequency range in Hertz (Real > LOWFQ; Default = 1.0E+20). See
Remark 8.
Remarks:
1. The DCONSTR entry may be selected in the Case Control Section by the DESSUB or DESGLB
command.
2. DCID may be referenced by the DCONADD Bulk Data entry.
3. For a given DCID, the associated RID can be referenced only once.
4. The units of LALLOW and UALLOW must be consistent with the referenced response defined on
the DRESPi entry. If RID refers to an “EIGN” response, then the imposed bounds must be expressed
in units of eigenvalue, (radian/time)2. If RID refers to a “FREQ” response, then the imposed bounds
must be expressed in cycles/time.
5. LALLOW and UALLOW are unrelated to the stress limits specified on the MATi entry.
6. Constraints are computed as follows:
LALLOW – r
g = --------------------------------- for lower bound constraints
GNORM
Main Index
DCONSTR 1641
Design Constraints
r – UALLOW
g = ---------------------------------- for upper bound constraints
GNORM
 LALLOW for lower bounds if LALLOW > GSCAL


GNORM =  UALLOW for upper bounds if UALLOW > GSCAL

 GSCAL otherwise
GSCAL is specified on the DOPTPRM entry (Default = 0.001)

7. As Remark 6. indicates, small values of UALLOW and LALLOW require special processing and
should be avoided. Bounds of exactly zero are particularly troublesome. This can be avoided by using
a DRESP2 entry that offsets the constrained response from zero.
8. LOWFQ and HIGHFQ fields are functional only for RTYPE with a 'FR' or a 'PSD' prefix, e.g.,
FRDISP or on DRESP2 or DRESP3 entries that inherit the frequency value from these RTYPES.
The bounds provided in LALLOW and UALLOW are applicable to a response only when the value
of forcing frequency of the response falls between the LOWFQ and HIGHFQ. If the ATTB field of
the DRESP1 entry is not blank and these responses are subsequently referenced on a DRESP2 or
DRESP3, the LOWFQ and HIGHFQ are ignored when the DCONSTR refers to these
DRESP2/DRESP3 responses. LOWFQ/HIGHFQ are not ignored when the DCONSTR refers to
a DRESP1 that has a real number in the ATTB field.
9. LID and UID are optional inputs that identify tabular input to specify the lower and upper bounds
as a function of frequency. They are applicable to the 'FR' and 'PSD' responses of Remark 8. and to
DRESP2 and DRESP3 responses that inherit the frequency value from these RTYPES.
10. For PART SE, DCONSTR entries can reside in each individual PART SE Bulk Data Section starting
with ‘BEGIN SUPER=seid’. If DCID is different from a PART SE to the next, DCONADD in the
residual (or main Bulk Data Section) can be utilized to group DCONSTR entries together for a single
subcase.
Main Index
1642 DDVAL
Discrete Design Variable Values
DDVAL Discrete Design Variable Values
Defines real, discrete design variable values for use in discrete variable optimization, topometry optimization
or rotordynamics.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DDVAL ID DVAL1 DVAL2 DVAL3 DVAL4 DVAL5 DVAL6 DVAL7
Alternate Format:
DDVAL ID DVAL1 THRU DVAL2 BY INC

DVAL8 DVAL9 DVAL10 DVAL11 -etc.-

:
DVAL8 THRU DVAL9 BY INC
Example:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DDVAL 110 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.4
.7 THRU 1.0 BY 0.05
1.5 2.0
Describer Meaning
ID Unique set identification number (Integer > 0) See Remark 1.
DVALi Discrete values (Real, or THRU or BY) See Remarks 2. through 5.
INC Discrete value increment (Real) See Remarks 2., 4., 5.
Remarks:
1. DDAVAL entries may be referenced by a DESVAR entry in its DDVAL field (field 8), a TOMVAR
entry in its DSVID field, a entry in its DDVALID field (field 4) or a RSPINR entry in its SPTID
field (field 6).
Main Index
DDVAL 1643
Discrete Design Variable Values
2. Trailing fields on a DDVAL record can be left blank if the next record is of type DVALi THRU
DVALj BY INC. Also fields 7 - 9 must be blank when the type DVALi THRU DVALj BY INC is
used in fields 2 - 6 and fields
8 - 9 must be blank when the type DVALi “THRU” DVALj “BY” INC is used in fields 3 - 7 for the
first record. Embedded blanks are not permitted in other cases.
3. The DVALi values in a sequence need not be in an ascending or descending order. They can be in
any order.
4. If the format DVALi THRU DVALj BY INC is employed, INC must be a positive real value if
DVALi < DVALj and INC must be a negative real value if DVALi > DVALj. The program
terminates the execution with an appropriate fatal error if this requirement is not satisfied.
5. The format DVALi THRU DVALj BY INC defines a list of discrete values given by DVALi,
DVALi+INC, DVALi+2.0*INC, …., DVALj. The last discrete value of DVALj is always included,
even if the range is not evenly divisible by INC.
Main Index
1644 DEACTEL
Elements To Be Deactivated for SOL 400 Analysis
DEACTEL Elements To Be Deactivated for SOL 400 Analysis
This entry identifies the elements that do not participate in the analysis or do not participate in a particular
physics pass of a coupled analysis. SOL 400 for NLSTATIC, and NLTRAN, as well Perturbation analyses
only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DEACTEL ID ISET
Example:
DEACTEL 2 200
Describer Meaning
ID ID of the DEACTEL entry. This is referenced by a DEACTEL=ID Case Control
command. (Integer; no Default)
ISET SID of a list of elements defined by a SET3 entry. (Integer; no Default)
Remarks:
1. DEACTEL can only be referenced before the first subcase and/or inside the first subcase and/or inside
the first step of the first subcase and/or inside each substep of the first step of the first subcase.
References that are made anywhere else are currently ignored. It is referenced by the Case Control
command DEACTEL=ID.
2. The description field (DES) of the SET3 entry referenced by ISET can only be of type ELEM.
3. Element IDs in the list originating from some set that do not exist are ignored.
Main Index
DEACTEL 1645
Define Elements that Should be Deactivated for a Particular Subcase in SOL 600
DEACTEL Define Elements that Should be Deactivated for a Particular Subcase in SOL 600
This entry allows the user to deactivate elements that have failed or are no longer necessary in a particular
subcase. Some or all of these elements can be re-activated in a subsequent subcase using the ACTIVAT entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DEACTEL ID STRESS STRAIN IGEOM ISET
Example:
DEACTEL 2 1 1 0 200
Describer Meaning
ID Identification number of a matching DEACTEL Case Control command defining the
subcase to which these elements should be deactivated. (Integer; no Default)
STRESS Flag to control output stresses after the elements have been deactivated. (Integer; Default
= 0)
0 Stresses have the same value as just prior to deactivation
1 Stresses are set to zero
STRAIN Flag to control output strains after the elements have been deactivated. (Integer; Default
= 0)
0 Strains have the same value as just prior to deactivation
1 Strains are set to zero
IGEOM Flag to control whether to update the geometry on the post file. (Integer; Default = 0)
0 Update the geometry.
1 Do not update the geometry.
ISET ID of a list of elements described by SET3 is ID=ISET to be deactivated. (Integer; no
Default)
Remarks:
1. This entry maps to Marc's DEACTIVATE (option A) History definition (option B is not supported
in SOL 600).
Main Index
1646 DEFORM
Static Element Deformation
DEFORM Static Element Deformation
Defines enforced axial deformation for one-dimensional elements for use in statics problems.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DEFORM SID EID1 D1 EID2 D2 EID3 D3
Example:
DEFORM 1 535 .05 536 -.10
Describer Meaning
SID Deformation set identification number. (Integer > 0)
EIDi Element number. (Integer > 0)
Di Deformation. (Real; positive value represents elongation.)
Remarks:
1. The referenced element must be one-dimensional (CROD, CONROD, CTUBE, CBAR, CBEAM).
2. Deformation sets must be selected in the Case Control Section with DEFORM = SID.
3. One to three enforced element deformations may be defined on a single entry.
4. The DEFORM entry, when called by the DEFORM Case Control command, is applicable to linear
static, inertia relief, differential stiffness, and buckling (Solutions 101, 105, 114, and 200) and will
produce fatal messages in other solution sequences. Use SPCD to apply enforced displacements in
solution sequences for which DEFORM does not apply.
Main Index
DEFUSET 1647
Degree-of-Freedom Set Name Definition
DEFUSET Degree-of-Freedom Set Name Definition
Defines new names for degree-of-freedom sets.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DEFUSET OLD1 NEW1 OLD2 NEW2 OLD3 NEW3 OLD4 NEW4
Example:
DEFUSET U2 X U4 Y U3 Z
Describer Meaning
OLDi Default set name. (One to four characters)
NEWi New set name. (One to four characters)
Remarks:
1. From one to four set names may be specified on a single entry.
2. OLDi must refer to any of the set names given in Degree-of-Freedom Sets, 1065. It is recommended that
OLDi refer only to the set names U1 through U6. If sets PA or PS are referenced, a user fatal message
is issued.
3. All NEWi names must be unique with respect to all other set names.
4. The DEFUSET entry is optional since default set names exist for all displacement sets.
5. The DEFUSET entry must be present in the Bulk Data Section in all restarts.
Main Index
1648 DELAY
Dynamic Load Time Delay
DELAY Dynamic Load Time Delay
Defines the time delay term τ in the equations of the dynamic loading function.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DELAY SID P1 C1 T1 P2 C2 T2
Example:
DELAY 5 21 6 4.25 7 6 8.1
Describer Meaning
SID Identification number of the DELAY entry. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number. (Integer 1 through 6 for grid point, blank or 0 for extra point or
scalar point.)
Ti Time delay τ for designated point Pi and component Ci. (Real)
Remarks:
1. One or two dynamic load time delays may be defined on a single entry.
2. SID must also be specified on a RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2, or ACSRCE entry. See
those entry descriptions for the formulas that define the manner in which the time delay τ is used.
3. A DAREA, LSEQ or static load entry should be used to define a load at Pi and Ci.
4. In superelement analysis, DELAY entries may only be applied to loads on points in the residual
structure.
Main Index
DEQATN 1649
Equation Definition
DEQATN Equation Definition
Defines one or more equations for use in analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DEQATN EQID EQUATION
EQUATION (Cont.)
Example:
DEQATN 14 F1 ( A, B, C, D, R ) = A + B ⋅ C – ( D ** 3 + 10.0 ) + sin ( PI ( 1 ) ⋅ R )
+ A**2 ⁄ ( B – C ) ; F = A + B – F1 ⋅ D
Describer Meaning
EQID Unique equation identification number. (Integer > 0)
EQUATION Equation(s). See Remarks. (Character)
Remarks:
1. EQUATION is a single equation or a set of nested equations and is specified in fields 3 through 9 on
the first entry and may be continued on fields 2 through 9 on the continuation entries. On the
continuation entries, no commas can appear in columns 1 through 8. All data in fields 2 through 9
must be specified in columns 9 through 72. The large-field format is not allowed.
A single equation has the following format:
variable-1 (x1, x2, ..., xn)=expression-1
A set of nested equations is separated by semicolons and has the format:

variable-1 (x1, x2, ..., xn)=expression-1;
variable-2=expression-2;variable-3=expression-3;
etc.
variable-m=expression-m
Expression-i is a collection of constants, real variables, and real functions, separated by operators, and
must produce a single real value. (x1, x2, ..., xn) is the list of all the variable names (except variable-i)
that appear in all expressions. Variable-i may be used in subsequent expressions. The last equation,
variable-m=expression-m, provides the value that is returned to the Bulk Data entry that references
EQID; e.g., DRESP2. The example above represents the following mathematical equations:
2
3 A
F1 = A + B ⋅ C – ( D + 10 ) + sin ( π ⋅ R ) + --------------
B–C
F = A + B + F1 ⋅ D
Main Index
1650 DEQATN
Equation Definition
where SIN and PI are intrinsic functions. See Remark 4.

2. EQUATION may contain embedded blanks. EQUATION must contain less than 32,000 nonblank
characters. If more characters are required for use with a DRESP2 entry, the DRESP2 can be divided
into two or more DRESP2 entries with a master DRESP2 referencing subsequent DRESP2s.
3. The syntax of the expressions follows FORTRAN language standards. The allowable arithmetic
operations are shown in Table 8 in the order of execution precedence. Parenthesis are used to change
the order of precedence. Operations within parentheses are performed first with the usual order of
precedence being maintained within the parentheses.
Table 8 DEQATN Entry Operators

Sample
Operator Operation Expressions Interpreted As
-, + Negative or Positive immediately X * * -Y X * * (-Y)
preceded by exponentiation
** Exponentiation -X * * Y (-X * * Y)
-, + Negative or Positive -X-Y (-X)-Y
*, / Multiplication or Division X * Y-Z (X * Y)-Z
+, - Addition or Subtraction X+Y X+Y
4. The expressions may contain intrinsic functions. Table 9 contains the format and descriptions of
functions that may appear in the expressions. The use of functions that may be discontinuous must
be used with caution because they can cause discontinuous derivatives. These are ABS, DIM, MAX,
MIN, and MOD. For examples and further details see the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s
Guide<$paranum[h1].
Table 9 DEQATN Entry Functions

Format Description Mathematical Expressions
ABS(x) absolute value x
ACOS(x) arccosine cos-1 x

ACOSH(x) hyperbolic arccosine cosh-1 x
ASIN(x) arcsine sin-1 x
ASINH(x) hyperbolic arcsine sinh-1 x
ATAN(x) arctangent tan-1 x
ATAN2(x,y) arctangent of quotient tan-1 (x/y)
ATANH(x) hyperbolic arctangent tanh-1 x
ATANH2(x,y) hyperbolic arctangent tanh-1 (x/y)
of quotient
Main Index
DEQATN 1651
Equation Definition
Table 9 DEQATN Entry Functions (continued)

AVG(X1, X2, .., Xn) average n
1
---
n  Xi
i= 1
COS(x) cosine cos x

COSH(x) hyperbolic cosine cosh x
DB(P, PREF) sound pressure in P
20.0 ⋅ log  ----------------
decibel  PREF
DBA(P, PREF, F) sound pressure in P

20.0 ⋅ log  ---------------- + 10.0 ⋅ log ( Ta1 ) + 10.0 ⋅ log ( Ta2 )
decibel (perceived)  PREF
DIM(x,y) positive difference x-MIN(x,y)

EXP(x) exponential ex
INVDB(DB, PREF) inverse Db DB-
 --------- 
 20.0 + logPREF
10
INVDBA(DBA, inverse Dba  DBA – 10.0 ⋅ log ( Ta1 ) – 10.0 ⋅ log ( Ta2 -)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 20.0 
PREF, F) 10
LOG(x) natural logarithm loge x

LOG10(x) common logarithm log10 x
LOGX(x,y) base x logarithm logx y
MAX(x1, x2, ...) maximum maximum of x1, etc.
MIN(x1, x2, ...) minimum minimum of x1, etc.
MOD(x,y) remainder (modulo) x – y ⋅ ( INT ( x ⁄ y ) )
PI(x) multiples of pi (π) x⋅π
RSS ( X 1, X 2, …, Xn ) square root of sum of n

2
squares  Xi
i =1
SIN(x) sine sin x

SINH(x) hyperbolic sine sinh x
SQRT(x) square root x
Main Index
1652 DEQATN
Equation Definition
Table 9 DEQATN Entry Functions (continued)

SSQ ( X 1, X 2, …, Xn ) sum of squares n
2
 Xi
i =1
SUM ( X 1, X 2, …, Xn ) summation n
 Xi
i =1
TAN(x) tangent tan x

TANH(x) hyperbolic tangent tanh x
where
X1, X2, .., Xn,P = structure responses or acoustic pressure

PREF = reference pressure
F = forcing frequency
DB = acoustic pressure in Decibel
DBA = perceived acoustic pressure in Decibel
4
K3 ⋅ F
Ta1 = -------------------------------------------------------
2 2 2 2
( F + P2 ) ( F + P3 )
4
K1 ⋅ F
Ta2 = ------------------------------------------------------------
2 2 2 2 2 2
( F + P1 ) ( F + P4 )
K1 = 2.242882e+16
K3 = 1.562339
P1 = 20.598997
P2 = 107.65265
P3 = 737.86223
P4 = 12194.22
5. If the DEQATN entry is referenced by the:

• DVCREL2, DVMREL2, or DVPREL2 entry, then X i represents the DVIDj and LABLk fields.
• DRESP2 entry, then X i represents the DVIDj, LABLk, NRm, Gp, DPIPq, DCICr, DMIMs,
DPI2Pt, DCI2Cu, DMI2Mv, and NRRw fields in that order.
• GMLOAD, GMBC, or TEMPF entries, then
X1 represents x in the basic coordinate system,
X2 represents y in the basic coordinate system, and
X 3 represents z in the basic coordinate system.
Main Index
DEQATN 1653
Equation Definition
• GMCURV entry, then

X1 represents line parameter u.
• GMSURF entry, then
X1 represents surface parameter u and
X2 represents surface parameter v.
6. If the DEQATN entry is referenced by the GMLOAD, GMBC, TEMPF, GMCURV, or GMSURF
entries and your computer has a short word length (e.g., 32 bits/word), then EQUATION is
processed with double precision and constants may be specified in double precision; e.g., 1.2D0. If
your machine has a long word length (e.g., 64 bits/word) then EQUATION is processed in single
precision and constants must be specified in single precision; e.g., 1.2. If the DEQATN entry is
referenced by DRESP2, DVCREL2, DVMREL2 or DVPREL2 entries, constants must be specified
in single precision regardless of your machine’s word length.
7. The DMAP logical operators NOT, AND, OR, XOR, and XQV cannot be used as Xi names.
8. Input errors on the DEQATN entry often result in poor messages. Substituting a “[” for a parenthesis
or violating the restriction against large field format are examples. Known messages are UFM 215,
SFM 233 and UFM 5199. If any of these messages are encountered then review the DEQATN entry
input.
9. Intrinsic functions AVG, MAX, MIN, RSS, SSQ and SUM are limited to <97 arguments. If more
arguments are desired, the functions may be divided up. For example, to perform a sum of squares on
170 items, use:
SSQ(X1,X2,…X95) + SSQ(X96,X97,…X170).
For MAX/MIN, the following concatenation can be used:
MAX1 = MAX(X1,X2,..X95), MAX2=MAX(X96,X97…X170); MAXT=MAX(MAX1,MAX2).
For AVG, an example to average 170 terms is:
AVG1=AVG(X1,X2,…X95);AVG2=AVG(X96,X97..X170); AVGT = (95. * AVG1 + 75. * AVG2) /
170.
10. Arithmetic is carried out using the type of the input data. For example, in the expression:
X = A** ( 1 ⁄ 2 )
both values in the exponent are integers so that the value returned for the exponent is calculated using
integer arithmetic or 1 ⁄ 2 = 0 . In this case 1/2 should be replaced by (.5).
Main Index
1654 DESVAR
Design Variable
DESVAR Design Variable
Defines a design variable for design optimization.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DESVAR ID LABEL XINIT XLB XUB DELXV DDVAL
Example:
DESVAR 2 BARA1 35.0 10. 100. 0.2
Describer Meaning
ID Unique design variable identification number. (Integer > 0)
LABEL User-supplied name for printing purposes. (Character)
XINIT Initial value. (Real; XLB < XINIT < XUB)
XLB Lower bound. (Real; Default = -1.0E+20)
XUB Upper bound. (Real; Default = +1.0E+20)
DELXV Fractional change allowed for the design variable during approximate optimization.
(Real > 0.0; for Default see Remark 2.)
DDVAL ID of a DDVAL entry that provides a set of allowable discrete values. (Blank or Integer
> 0; Default=blank for continuous design variables. See Remark 3.)
Remarks:
1. DELXV can be used to control the change in the design variable during one optimization cycle.
2. If DELXV is blank, the default is taken from the specification of the DELX parameter on the
DOPTPRM entry. If DELX is not specified, then the default is 0.5.
3. If the design variable is to be discrete (Integer > 0 in DDVAL field), and if either of the XLB and/or
XUB bounds are wider than those given by the discrete list of values on the corresponding DDVAL
entry, XLB and/or XUB will be replaced by the minimum and maximum discrete values.
Main Index
DETSPH 1655
Spherical Detonation Wave
DETSPH Spherical Detonation Wave
Defines the ignition point from which a spherical detonation wave travels, causing the reaction of high
explosive materials. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DETSPH DID MID X Y Z VEL TIME
Example:
DETSPH 100 10 96.5 177.6 37.4 2379. 1.7E-6
Describer Meaning
DID Unique detonation number. (Integer > 0; Required)
MID References MATDEUL id of the exploding material. (Integer > 0; Required)
X, Y, Z Coordinates of the ignition point. (Real, 0.0)
VEL Velocity of the detonation wave. (Real > 0.0, 0.0)
TIME Detonation time. (Real > 0.0, 0.0)
Remark:
1. An element detonates when a spherical detonation wave originating from the detonation point at the
specified time reaches the element.
Main Index
1656 DIVERG
Divergence Analysis Data
DIVERG Divergence Analysis Data
Defines Mach numbers (m) for a static aeroelastic divergence analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DIVERG SID NROOT M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
M7 M8 -etc.-
Example:
DIVERG 70 2 .5 .8 .9
Describer Meaning
SID Unique set identifier. (Integer > 0)
NROOT Number of divergence roots that are to be output and their eigenvectors printed.
Mi Mach number. (Real > 0.0)
Remarks:
1. The DIVERG entry is referenced in Case Control by “DIVERG = SID”.
2. The NROOT lowest divergence dynamic pressures are printed. If there are fewer than NROOT
pressures, all available dynamic pressures are printed.
3. Mi values must be distinct.
4. A blank Mach number field terminates the input.
Main Index
DLINK 1657
Multiple Design Variable Linking
DLINK Multiple Design Variable Linking
Relates one design variable to one or more other design variables.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DLINK ID DDVID C0 CMULT IDV1 C1 IDV2 C2
IDV3 C3 -etc.-
Example:
DLINK 10 2 0.1 0.33 4 2.0 6 -1.0
8 7.0
Describer Meaning
ID Unique identification number. (Integer > 0)
DDVID Dependent design variable identification number. (Integer > 0)
C0 Constant term. (Real; Default = 0.0)
CMULT Constant multiplier. (Real; Default = 1.0)
IDVi Independent design variable identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ci Coefficient i corresponding to IDVi. (Real)
Remarks:
1. DLINK defines the relationship
DDVID = C0 + CMULT*  Ci* ⋅ IDVi

i
2. This capability provides a means of linking physical design variables such as element thicknesses to
nonphysical design variables such as the coefficients of interpolating functions.
3. CMULT provides a simple means of scaling the Ci. For example if Ci = 1/7, 2/7, 4/7, etc. is desired,
then CMULT = 1/7 and Ci = 1, 2, 4, etc., may be input.
4. An independent IDVi must not occur on the same DLINK entry more than once.
5. ID is for user reference only.
6. If a design variable is specified as dependent on a DLINK entry, then it cannot be specified as
independent on another DLINK entry.
Main Index
1658 DLOAD
Dynamic Load Combination or Superposition
DLOAD Dynamic Load Combination or Superposition
Defines a dynamic loading condition for frequency response or transient response problems as a linear
combination of load sets defined via RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2 and ACSRCE entries for
frequency response or TLOAD1 or TLOAD2 entries for transient response.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DLOAD SID S S1 L1 S2 L2 S3 L3
S4 L4 -etc.- *
Examples:
DLOAD 17 1.0 2.0 6 -2.0 7 2.0 8
-2.0 9
Describer Meaning
SID Load set identification number. See Remarks 1. and 4. (Integer > 0)
S Scale factor. See Remarks 2. and 8. (Real)
Si Scale factors. See Remarks 2., 7. and 8. (Real)
Li Load set identification numbers of RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2, and
ACSRCE entries. See Remarks 3. and 7. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. Dynamic load sets must be selected in the Case Control Section with DLOAD = SID.
2. The load vector being defined by this entry is given by
{ P } = S  Si { P i }
i
3. Each Li must be unique from any other Li on the same entry.

4. SID must be unique from all ACSRCE, RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1 and TLOAD2 dynamic
load entries.
5. Nonlinear transient load sets (NOLINi entries) may not be specified on DLOAD entries. NOLINi
entries are selected separately in the Case Control Section by the NONLINEAR command.
6. A DLOAD entry may not reference a set identification number defined by another DLOAD entry.
7. The scale factor Si will apply to all dynamic load entries with load set identification number of Li.
8. For RC network solver in thermal analysis, the S and Si factors are always taken as 1.
Main Index
DMI 1659
Direct Matrix Input
DMI Direct Matrix Input
Defines matrix data blocks. Generates a matrix of the following form:
X 11 X 12 … X 1n
X 21 X 22 … X 2n
[ NAME ] =
· · · ·
X m1 … … X mn
where the elements X ij may be real ( X ij = A ij ) or complex ( X ij = A ij + iB ij ) . The matrix is defined by a single
header entry and one or more column entries. Only one header entry is required. A column entry is required
for each column with nonzero elements.
Header Entry Format:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMI NAME “0” FORM TIN TOUT M N
Column Entry Format for Real Matrices:

DMI NAME J I1 A(I1,J) A(I1+1,J) -etc.- I2
A(I2,J) -etc.-
Column Entry Format for Complex Matrices:

DMI NAME J I1 A(I1,J) B(I1,J) A(I1+1,J) B(I1+1,J) -etc.-
I2 A(I2,J) B(I2,J) -etc.-
Example of a Real Matrix:

DMI BBB 0 2 1 1 4 2
DMI BBB 1 1 1. 3. 5.
DMI BBB 2 2 6. 4 8.
1.0 0.0
BBB = 3.0 6.0
5.0 0.0
0.0 8.0
Example of a Complex Matrix:

DMI QQQ 0 2 3 3 4 2
DMI QQQ 1 1 1.0 2.0 3.0 0.0 3
5.0 6.0
DMI QQQ 2 2 6.0 7.0 4 8.0 9.0
Main Index
1660 DMI
Direct Matrix Input
1.0 + 2.0i , 0.0 + 0.0i

[ QQQ ] = 3.0 + 0.0i , 6.0 + 7.0i
5.0 + 6.0i , 0.0 + 0.0i
0.0 + 0.0i , 8.0 + 9.0i
Describer Meaning
NAME Name of the matrix. See Remark 1. Name is used to reference the data block in the
DMAP sequence. (One to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of which must be
alphabetic.)
FORM Form of matrix, as follows: (Integer)
1 Square matrix (not symmetric)
2 General rectangular matrix
3 Diagonal matrix (M=number of rows, N = 1)
4 Lower triangular factor
5 Upper triangular factor
6 Symmetric matrix
8 Identity matrix (M=number of rows, N = M)
TIN Type of matrix being input, as follows: (Integer)
1 Real, single precision (one field used/element)
2 Real, double precision (one field used/element)
3 Complex, single precision (two fields used/element)
4 Complex, double precision (two fields used/element)
Main Index
DMI 1661
Direct Matrix Input
Describer Meaning
TOUT Type of matrix being output, as follows: (Integer)
0 Set by precision cell
1 Real, single precision
2 Real, double precision
3 Complex, single precision
4 Complex, double precision
M Number of rows in NAME. (Integer > 0)
N Number of columns in NAME. Except for FORM 3 and 8. (Integer > 0)
"0" Indicates the header entry.
J Column number of NAME. (Integer > 0)
I1, I2, etc. Row number of NAME, which indicates the beginning of a group of nonzero elements
in the column. See Remark 13. (Integer > 0)
A(Ix,J) Real part of element (see TIN). (Real)
B(Ix,J) Imaginary part of element (see TIN). (Real)
Remarks:
1. In order to use the DMI feature, the user must write a DMAP, or make alterations to a solution
sequence that includes the DMIIN module. See the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s
Guide<$paranum[h1]. All of the rules governing the use of data blocks in DMAP sequences apply.
2. The total number of DMIs and DTIs may not exceed 1000.
3. Field 3 of the header entry must contain an integer of zero (0).
4. For symmetric matrices, the entire matrix must be input.
5. Only nonzero terms need be entered.
6. Leading and trailing zeros in a column do not have to be entered. However, a blank field between
nonzero fields on this entry is not equivalent to a zero. If a zero input is required, the appropriate
type zero must be entered (i.e., 0.0 or 0.0D0).
7. Complex input must have both the real and imaginary parts entered if either part is nonzero; i.e., the
zero component must be input explicitly.
8. If A(Ix,J) is followed by “THRU” in the next field and an integer row number “IX” after the THRU,
then A(lx,J) will be repeated in each row through IX. The “THRU” must follow an element value.
For example, the entries for a real matrix RRR would appear as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMI NAME J I1 A(I1,J) I1 A(I2,J)
DMI RRR 1 2 1.0 THRU 10 12 2.0
Main Index
1662 DMI
Direct Matrix Input
These entries will cause the first column of the matrix RRR to have a zero in row 1, the values 1.0 in
rows 2 through 10, a zero in row 11, and 2.0 in row 12.
9. Each column must be a single logical entry. The terms in each column must be specified in increasing
row number order.
10. The “FORM” options 4, 5, and 8 are nonstandard forms and may be used only in conjunction with
the modules indicated in Table 10.
Table 10 DMI FORM Options

Modules
FORM Matrix Description ADD FBS MATPRN MPYAD
4 Lower Triangular Factor X X
5 Upper Triangular Factor X X
8 Identity X X X X
11. Form 3 matrices are converted to Form 6 matrices, which may be used by any module.
12. Form 7 matrices may not be defined on this entry.
13. I1 must be specified. I2, etc. are not required if their matrix elements follow the preceding element
in the next row of the matrix. For example, in the column entry for column 1 of QQQ, neither I2
nor I3 is specified.
14. The DMIG entry is more convenient for matrices with rows and columns that are referenced by grid
or scalar point degrees-of-freedom.
Main Index
DMIAX 1663
Direct Matrix Input for Axisymmetric Analysis
DMIAX Direct Matrix Input for Axisymmetric Analysis
Defines axisymmetric (fluid or structure) related direct input matrix terms.

The matrix is defined by a single header entry and one or more column entries. Only one header entry is
required. A column entry is required for each column with nonzero elements.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMlAX NAME “0" IFO TIN TOUT
Column Entry Format:

DMlAX NAME GJ CJ NJ
G1 C1 N1 A1 B1
G2 C2 -etc.-
Example:
Remarks:
DMIAX B2PP 0 1 3 4
DMIAX B2PP 32
1027 3 4.25+6 2.27+3
Describer Meaning
NAME Name of the matrix. See Remark 2. (One to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of
which is alphabetic.)
IFO Form of matrix: (Integer)
1 Square matrix
2 General rectangular matrix
6 Symmetric matrix
TIN Type of matrix being input: (Integer)
1 Real, single precision (One field is used per element.)
3 Complex, single precision (Two fields are used per element.)
Main Index
1664 DMIAX
Direct Matrix Input for Axisymmetric Analysis
Describer Meaning
TOUT Type of matrix that will be created: (Integer)
GJ, Gi Grid, scalar, RINGFL fluid point, PRESPT pressure point, FREEPT free surface
displacement, or extra point identification number. (Integer > 0)
CJ, Ci Component number for GJ or Gi grid point (0 < Integer < 6; Blank or zero if GJ or Gi
is a scalar, fluid, or extra point.)
NJ, Ni Harmonic number of RINGFL point. Must be blank if a point type other than
RINGFL is used. A negative number implies the “sine” series; a positive number implies
the “cosine” series. (Integer)
Ai, Bi Real and imaginary parts of matrix element; row (Gi, Ci, Ni) column (GJ, CJ, NJ). If
the matrix is real (TIN = 1), then Bi must be blank.

2. Matrices defined on this entry may be used in dynamics by selection with the Case Control
commands K2PP = NAME, B2PP = NAME, or M2PP = NAME for [ K p2p ] , [ B pp 2 ] , or [ M 2 ] ,
pp
respectively. See Superelement Analysis (p. 388) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
3. Field 3 or the header entry must contain an integer 0.
4. For symmetric matrices, either the upper or the lower triangle terms may be specified, but not both.
6. If any DMIAX entry is changed or added on restart then a complete re-analysis may be performed.
Therefore, DMIAX entry changes or additions are not recommended on restart.
Main Index
DMIG 1665
Direct Matrix Input at Points
DMIG Direct Matrix Input at Points
Defines direct input matrices related to grid, extra, and/or scalar points. The matrix is defined by a single
header entry and one or more column entries. A column entry is required for each column with nonzero
elements.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMIG NAME “0" IFO TIN TOUT POLAR NCOL

DMIG NAME GJ CJ G1 C1 A1 B1
G2 C2 A2 B2 -etc.-
Example:
DMIG STIF 0 1 3 4
DMIG STIF 27 1 2 3 3.+5 3.+3
2 4 2.5+10 0. 50 1.0 0.
Describer Meaning
IFO Form of matrix input. IFO = 6 must be specified for matrices selected by the K2GG,
M2GG, and B2GG Case Control commands. (Integer)
1 Square
2 or 9 Rectangular
6 Symmetric
2 Real, double precision (One field is used per element.)
3 Complex, single precision (Two fields are used per element.)
4 Complex, double precision (Two fields are used per element.
TOUT Type of matrix that will be created: (Integer)
0 Set by precision system cell (Default)
Main Index
1666 DMIG
Describer Meaning
POLAR Input format of Ai, Bi. (Integer=blank or 0 indicates real, imaginary format; Integer > 0
indicates amplitude, phase format.)
NCOL Number of columns in a rectangular matrix. Used only for IFO = 9. See Remarks 5. and
6. (Integer > 0)
GJ Grid, scalar or extra point identification number for column index. (Integer > 0)
CJ Component number for grid point GJ. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GJ is a scalar
or extra point.)
Gi Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number for row index. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number for Gi for a grid point. (0 < CJ < 6; blank or zero if Gi is a scalar
or extra point.)
Ai, Bi Real and imaginary (or amplitude and phase) parts of a matrix element. If the matrix is
real (TIN = 1 or 2), then Bi must be blank. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Matrices defined on this entry may be used in dynamics by selection in the Case Control with
K2PP = NAME, B2PP = NAME, M2PP = NAME for [ K ρ ρ ] , [ B ρρ ] , or [ M ρρ ] , respectively.
Matrices may also be selected for all solution sequences by K2GG = NAME, B2GG = NAME, and
M2GG = NAME. The g-set matrices are added to the structural matrices before constraints are
applied, while p-set matrices are added in dynamics after constraints are applied. Load matrices may
be selected by P2G = NAME for dynamic and superelement analyses.
2. The header entry containing IFO, TIN and TOUT is required. Each nonnull column is started with
a GJ, CJ pair. The entries for each row of that column follows. Only nonzero terms need be entered.
The terms may be input in arbitrary order. A GJ, CJ pair may be entered more than once, but input
of an element of the matrix more than once will produce a fatal message.
3. Field 3 of the header entry must contain an integer 0.
4. For symmetric matrices (IFO = 6), a given off-diagonal element may be input either below or above
the diagonal. While upper and lower triangle terms may be mixed, a fatal message will be issued if an
element is input both below and above the diagonal.
5. The recommended format for rectangular matrices requires the use of NCOL and IFO = 9. The
number of columns in the matrix is NCOL. (The number of rows in all DMIG matrices is always
either p-set or g-set size, depending on the context.) The GJ term is used for the column index. The
CJ term is ignored.
6. If NCOL is not used for rectangular matrices, two different conventions are available:
• If IFO = 9, GJ and CJ will determine the sorted sequence, but will otherwise be ignored; a
rectangular matrix will be generated with the columns submitted being in the 1 to N positions,
where N is the number of logical entries submitted (not counting the header entry).
Main Index
DMIG 1667
• If IFO = 2, the number of columns of the rectangular matrix will be equal to the index of the
highest numbered non-null column (in internal sort). Trailing null columns of the g- or p-size
matrix will be truncated.
7. The matrix names must be unique among all DMIGs.
8. TIN should be set consistent with the number of decimal digits required to read the input data
adequately. For a single-precision specification on a short-word machine, the input will be truncated
after about eight decimal digits, even when more digits are present in a double-field format. If more
digits are needed, a double precision specification should be used instead. However, note that a
double precision specification requires a “D” type exponent even for terms that do not need an
exponent. For example, unity may be input as 1.0 in single precision, but the longer form 1.0D0 is
required for double precision.
9. On long-word machines, almost all matrix calculations are performed in single precision and on
short-word machines, in double precision. It is recommended that DMIG matrices also follow these
conventions for a balance of efficiency and reliability. The recommended value for TOUT is 0, which
instructs the program to inspect the system cell that measures the machine precision at run time and
sets the precision of the matrix to the same value. TOUT = 0 allows the same DMIG input to be
used on any machine. If TOUT is contrary to the machine type specified (for example, a TOUT of
1 on a short-word machine), unreliable results may occur.
10. If any DMIG entry is changed or added on restart then a complete re-analysis is performed.
Therefore, DMIG entry changes or additions are not recommended on restart.
Main Index
1668 DMIG,UACCEL
Direct Matrix Input of Enforced Static Acceleration
DMIG,UACCEL Direct Matrix Input of Enforced Static Acceleration
Defines rigid body accelerations in the basic coordinate system.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMIG UACCEL “0" “9" TIN NCOL
DMIG UACCEL L G1 C1 X1
G2 C2 X2 G3 C3 X3
Example:
DMIG UACCEL 0 9 1 4
DMIG UACCEL 2 2 3 386.4
Describer Meaning
TIN Type of matrix being input. (Integer 1 or 2)
2 Real, double precision (One field is used per element.)
NCOL Number of columns, see Remark 2. Default is the number of columns specified.
(Integer > 0)
L Load sequence number. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid point identification number of a single reference point. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number for Gi in the basic coordinate system. See Remark 4.
(0 < Integer < 6)
Xi Value of enforced acceleration term in the basic coordinate system. (Real)
Remarks:
1. DMIG,UACCEL is an optional entry when PARAM,INREL,-1 is specified in SOLs 101 or 200. If
DMIG,UACCEL is present, the loads applied to the structure are the sum of the conventional
applied loads plus the inertia loads resulting from the rigid body accelerations defined on this entry.
If it is not present, conventional inertia relief calculations are performed.
2. The load sequence number interpretation depends on the value of the NCOL field. The
recommended method is to set it equal to the number of loading conditions. The load sequence
number L is then the sequence number of the subcase to which the applied acceleration will be
applied.
Main Index
DMIG,UACCEL 1669
Direct Matrix Input of Enforced Static Acceleration
3. The grid point identification number listed on Gi defines a single grid point on the model where loads
will be applied to cause the enforced acceleration state. Gi must also appear on a SUPORT Bulk Data
entry. It must also appear on a PARAM,GRDPNT entry. In superelement analysis, it must be a
residual structure point exterior to all superelements.
4. The Xi value is the enforced acceleration at grid point Gi. The translation and rotation components
are in consistent units and will be applied in the basic coordinate system regardless of the
displacement coordinate system specified for Gi (CD field on GRID entry).
6. See Superelement Analysis (p. 388) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual for the theoretical basis of
inertia relief with superelements.
7. If any DMIG entry is changed or added on restart then a complete re-analysis is performed.
Therefore, DMIG entry changes or additions are not recommended on restart.
Main Index
1670 DMIGOUT
DMIG Matrices to be Output from the Marc Portion of SOL 600
DMIGOUT DMIG Matrices to be Output from the Marc Portion of SOL 600
Defines DMIG matrices to be output from the Marc Portion of SOL 600.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMIGOUT ID ISTIFF IDIFF IMASS IDAMP ICOND ISPECIF ISOL
ICTRL IFREQ ICORD KIND AMIN IUSEK IUSEM
IE1 THRU IE2 IE3 THRU IE4
Example:
DMIGOUT 100 1 1 0 0 0 0 103
2 -1 2 2 1.0E-16
Describer Meaning
ID Subcase for which the reduced matrices will be output. ID must correlate to a
SUBCASE Case Control ID, for example if the Case Control contains SUBCASE 20,
ID would be 20. To output matrices in Marc’s phase zero, etc ID=0. (Integer; Default
= 1, see Remark 11.)
ISTIFF Flag to output stiffness matrices. (Normally contains the differential stiffness and all
other stiffness terms.) (Integer; Default = 0)
0 Do not output the matrix
1 Output the matirx
IDIFF Flag to output differential stiffness matrices. (Only available for buckling analysis or
subcases.) (Integer; Default = 0)
1 Output the matrix
IMASS Flag to output mass matrices. (Integer; Default = 0)
1 Output the matrix (must be a dynamic analysis)
IDAMP Flag to output damping matrices. (Integer; Default = 0)
1 Output the matrix (must be a dynamic analysis)
ICOND Flag to output conductivity matrices. (Integer; Default = 0)
1 Output the matrix
ISPECIF Flag to output specific heat matrices. (Integer; Default = 0)
Main Index
DMIGOUT 1671
Describer Meaning
1 Output the matrix
ISOL Solution sequence to run using the DMIG matrices. (Integer absolute value > 100;
Default = 0, which means do not run any solution sequence using the DMIG’s created
by Marc in this execution). To speed up the solution, use DOMAINSOLVER ACMS
(PARTOPT=DOF) for eigenvalues and set ISOL to the negative value of the solution
sequence desired (–103, -111 or –112).
ICTRL Controls type of matrix. (Integer; Default = 2)
1 Element matrices
2 Global matrices
3 Element and global matrices
IFREQ Controls how often the matrices are output (Integer; no Default)
1 Output at every increment
2 Output every other increment, etc.
3 Output every 3rd increment, etc.
-1 Output only at start of the subcase. (See Remark 12.)
ICORD Controls matrix output coordinate system (Integer; no Default)
1 Nastran basic coordinate system
2 Current transformed coordinate system (at the start of the run, this is the
Nastran global coordinate system)
KIND Controls which elements are written (Integer; Default = 2)
1 A list of elements starting with the 3rd entry will be specified
2 All elements will be written
AMIN Values below AMIN will not be written (Real; Default = 1.0E-15). Values below AMIN
will be skipped.
IUSEK Increment to use in SOL 600 CONTINUE option for the stiffness matrix (if
CONTINUE is specified on the SOL 600 entry). (Integer; Default = -1) Increments 0
to 9999 may be specified. If -1 is specified, the last increment output by Marc will be
used. As an example, the Marc DMIG file for the global stiffness matrix for increment
10 will have the name jid.marc_cglsti_0020.
IUSEM Increment to use in SOL 600 CONTINUE option for the mass matrix (If CONTINUE
is specified on the SOL 600 entry). (Integer, Default = -1) Increments 0 to 9999 may be
specified. If -1 is specified, the last increment output by Marc will be used. As an
example, the Marc DMIG file for the global mass matrix for increment 20 will have the
name jid.marc_cglmas_0020.
Main Index
1672 DMIGOUT
Describer Meaning
IE1, IE3 Starting element number of a range of elements (Integer; no Default) Only enter IE1 is
KIND=1
IE2, IE4 Ending element number of a range of elements (Integer; no Default) Only enter IE2 is
KIND=1 (IE2 is required if IE1 is entered).
Remarks:
1. The first continuation line is required.
2. The second continuation line should only be entered if KIND=1 and may be repeated as many times
as necessary to define all applicable elements.
3. ICTRL, IFREQ, ICORD, KIND and AMIN apply to all types of matrices to be written for the
subcase.
4. Only one DMIGOUT entry can be entered per subcase. If more than one is entered, only the first
encountered will be used.
5. DMIGOUT entries may be made for each subcase desired.
6. Marc DMIG element output will be in files named jid.marc_dmigXX_inc where XX is shown below
and inc is the increment number.
ST Stiffness Matrices
DF Differential stiffness matrices
MS Mass matrices
DM Damping
CO Conductivity matrices
SP Specific heat matrices
Global matrices are named jid_marc_cglsti_inc.

7. If the SOL 600 CONTINUE options is invoked, Case Control commands and a Bulk Data include
statement to receive the matrices will be automatically added to the original input data file. A second
Nastran execution will be spawned from the original Nastran execution after completion of the Marc
execution.
8. ID may not be 600 or 700 in the Executive Control statement, SOL 600,ID.
9. The following Bulk Data parameters are usually required in addition to the DMIGOUT entry:
$2345678x234567890123456x34567890123456
param* mrspawn2 nastcmd
pram,mrmtxnam,KAAX
param,marcfile,nastb.rc
where
Main Index
DMIGOUT 1673
a. nastcmd is the name of the command to run the primary and continuation jobs (examples are
nastran, nast2006t1, nast2006t2, etc.)
b. nastb.rc should be changed to the name of the rc file to be used for the continuation run. It
usually will specify mem= with a larger value than that of the primary run and also include a line
bat=no (except for windows systems).
c. PARAM,MARCFILi should not be used.
10. For standard nonlinear static or dynamic analyses the stiffness matrix contains all contributions
including the differential stiffness matrix and it is not possible to obtain the differential stiffness
matrix separately. For a buckling analysis, the differential stiffness matrix may be obtained separately.
11. To obtain stiffness and mass matrices for SOL 600,103, ID in field 2 of this entry must be must be
zero.
12. If IFREQ is 1 or a small number, the number of matrices output for dynamic analyses (SOL 600,109
or SOL 600,120) can be extremely large.
13. If ID=0, IFREQ should be 1.
14. Setting IFREQ to a value larger than the actual number of increments in a subcase will produce no
matrices.
Main Index
1674 DMIGROT
DMIG Matrices for which large rotation in SOL 600
DMIGROT DMIG Matrices for which large rotation in SOL 600
Defines large rotation and other characteristics of a matrix entered using DMIG in SOL 600.
Format for K2GG and K2PP Stiffness DMIG Matrices:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMIGROT Name G1 G2 G3 SCALE ITRAN IACT IDEACT
Format for M2GG and M2PP Mass DMIG Matrices:

DMIGROT Name SCALE IACT
Example:
DMIGROT KAAX 375
DMIGROT KAAY 401 402 403
DMIGROT KAAX 1.25 1 2 5
DMIGROT MAAX 0.001 7 8
Describer Meaning
Name Name of the DMIG matrix for which large rotation is specified. See Remark 1.
(Character; Required field; no Default)
G1 Grid ID specifying the rotation of the matrix. See Remark 2. (Integer; Required field; no
Default)
G2 Grid ID which combined with G1 and G3 specifies a plane whose rotation provides the
rigid body rotation of the matrix. See Remark 2. (Integer; Default = 0; )
G3 Grid ID which combined with G1 and G2 specifies a plane whose rotation provides the
rigid body rotation of the matrix. See Remark 2. (Integer; Default = 0)
SCALE Scale factor. Each term in the DMIG matrix will be scaled by this value. (Real; Default
= 1.0)
ITRAN Flag indicating whether to transform the DMIG’s or not. (Integer, Default = 0)
0 Do not transform the DMIG matrix.
1 Transform the DMIG using G1, G2, G3 to form the transformation matrix.
IACT Subcase ID for which this DMIG matrix will be activated. See Remark 5. (Integer;
Default = 0).
0 The matrix is active for all subcases.
N The matrix is activated starting with subcase N
IDEACT Subcase ID for which this DMIG matrix will be deactivated. See Remark 5. (Integer; no
Default; leave blank if the matrix should be active fro the entire analysis or starting with
subcase IACT)
Main Index
DMIGROT 1675
DMIG Matrices for which large rotation in SOL 600
Remarks:
1. All DMIG matrices with the name specified in field 2 will rotate with grids Gi.
2. If G1 has 6 dof it is not necessary to specify G2 or G3 and the DMIG matrix will rotate with the same
rotation as G1. If G1 has fewer that 6 dof, or if it is desired that the DMIG matrix rotation with a
plane defined by G1, G2 and G3, G2 and G3 must be entered and may not all be collinear.
3. If a transformation is to be applied to the stiffness matrix, the DMIG must contain all of the degrees
of freedom associated with the node to which the transformation is applied.
4. This bulk data entry maps to Marc’s K2GG (and K2PP) model definition entry.
5. IACT and IDEACT are ID’s of the Case Control SUBCASE entry.
6. G1, G2, G3 and ITRAN may not be entered for mass matrices.
Main Index
1676 DMIJ
Direct Matrix Input at js-Set of the Aerodynamic Mesh
DMIJ Direct Matrix Input at js-Set of the Aerodynamic Mesh
Defines direct input matrices related to collation degrees-of-freedom (js-set) of aerodynamic mesh points for
CAERO1, CAERO3, CAERO4 and CAERO5 and for the slender body elements of CAERO2. These
include W2GJ, FA2J and input pressures and downwashes associated with AEPRESS and AEDW entries.
The matrix is described by a single header entry and one or more column entries. A column entry is required
for each column with nonzero elements. For entering data for the interference elements of a CAERO2, use
DMIJI or DMI.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMIJ NAME “0” IFO TIN TOUT POLAR NCOL

DMIJ NAME GJ CJ G1 C1 A1 B1
G2 C2 A2 B2 -etc.-
Example:
DMIJ ALPH1 0 9 2 0 1
DMIJ ALPH1 1 1 1 1 .1
2 1 .1
Describer Meaning
NAME Name of the matrix. See Remark 1. (One to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of which
is alphabetic.)
IFO Form of matrix being input. (Integer)
1 Square
9 or 2 Rectangular
6 Symmetric
1 Real, single precision (One field is used per element)
2 Real, double precision (One field is used per element)
3 Complex, single precision (Two fields are used per element)
4 Complex, double precision (Two fields are used per element)
TOUT Type of matrix being created: (Integer)
Main Index
DMIJ 1677
Describer Meaning
POLAR Input format of Ai, Bi. (Integer = blank or 0 indicates real, imaginary format. Integer > 0
indicated magnitude, phase format.)
NCOL Number of columns in a rectangular matrix. Used only for IFO = 9. (Integer > 0)
CJ Component number for grid point GJ. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GJ is a scalar or
extra point.)
Ci Component number for Gi for a grid point. (0 < CJ < 0; blank or zero if Gi is a scalar or
extra point.)
Ai, Bi Real and imaginary (or amplitude and phase) parts of a matrix element. If the matrix is real
(TIN = 1 or 2), then Bi must be blank. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Matrices defined on this entry are referenced in static aeroelastic analysis by reference on AEDW
and/or AEPRESS entries. In that paradigm, a single column is required. Also, DMIJ may also be used
for the W2GJ and FA2J entries. Again, a single column is required. If both DMI and DMIJ are
specified for W2GJ or FA2J, the DMI entry will be used. DMI may NOT be used for AEDW and
AEPRESS.
2. The js-set DOF’s for each aerodynamic theory are limited to the six-DOF paradigm (3 translations
and 3 rotations). However, particular DOF’s are permanently SPC’d based on the theory’s ability to
support those degrees-of-freedom. Unlike the DMIG entry, DMIJ data will be partitioned to the j-
set, not reduced. No warnings are issued about truncated data.The j-set DOF’s for each aerodynamic
element/grid are highly method dependent. The following data define the known set, but the j-set
definition is somewhat arbitrary in the general (external aerodynamics) paradigm.
COMP
Entry Type 1 2 3 5 6
CAERO1 X
CAERO2-Y X
CAERO2-Z X
CAERO2-ZY X X
Main Index
1678 DMIJ
a GJ, CJ pair. The entries for each row of that column then follow. Only nonzero terms need be
entered. The terms may be input in arbitrary order. A GJ, CJ pair may be entered more than once,
but the input of an element of the matrix more than once results in a fatal message.
5. For symmetric matrices (very rare in the j-set!) (IFO=6), a given off-diagonal element may be input
either below or above the diagonal. While upper and lower triangle terms may be mixed, a fatal
message will be issued if an element is input both above and below the diagonal.
6. The recommended format for rectangular matrices requires the use of NCOL and IFO = 9. the
number of columns in the matrix is NCOL. (The number of rows in all DMIJ matrices is always the
js-set size--the union of the j-set and the permanently SPC’d partition). The GJ term is used for the
column index. the CJ term is ignored.
highest numbered nonnull column (in internal sort). Trailing null columns of the js-size matrix
will be truncated.
8. The matrix names must be unique among all DMIJ.
9. TIN should be consistent with the number of decimal digits required to read the input data
adequately. For a single precision specification on a short word machine, the input will be truncated
after about eight decimal digits, even when more digits are present in a double field format. If more
digits are needed, a double precision specification should be used instead. However, not that a double
precision specification requires a “D” type exponent even for terms that do not need an exponent. For
example, unity may be input as 1.0 in single precision, but the longer form 1.0D0 is required for
double precision.
10. On long word machines, almost all matrix calculations are performed in single precision and, on short
word machines, in double precision. It is recommended that DMIJ matrices also follow these
sets the precision of the matrix to the same value. TOUT = 0 allows the same DMIJ input to be used
on any machine. If TOUT is contrary to the machine type specified, unreliable results may occur.
11. If any DMIJ entry is changed or added on restart then a complete reanalysis is performed. Therefore,
DMIJ entry changes or additions are not recommended on restart.
Main Index
DMIJI 1679
Direct Matrix Input at js-Set of the Interference Body
DMIJI Direct Matrix Input at js-Set of the Interference Body
Defines direct input matrices related to collation degrees-of-freedom (js-set) of aerodynamic mesh points for
the interference elements of CAERO2. These include W2GJ, FA2J and input pressures and downwashes
associated with AEPRESS and AEDW entries. The matrix is described by a single header entry and one or
more column entries. A column entry is required for each column with nonzero elements. For entering data
for the slender elements of a CAERO2, or a CAERO1, 3, 4 or 5 use DMIJ or DMI.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMIJI NAME “0” IFO TIN TOUT POLAR NCOL

DMIJ NAME GJ CJ G1 C1 A1 B1
G2 C2 A2 B2 -etc.-
Example:
DMIJI ALPH1 0 9 2 0 1
DMIJI ALPH1 1 1 1 1 .1
2 1 .1
Describer Meaning
1 Square
9 or 2 Rectangular
6 Symmetric
Main Index
1680 DMIJI
Describer Meaning
extra point.)
extra point.)
Ai, Bi Real and imaginary (or amplitude and phase) parts of a matrix element. If the matrix is
real (TIN = 1 or 2), then Bi must be blank. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Matrices defined on this entry are referenced in static aeroelastic analysis by reference on AEDW
and/or AEPRESS entries. In that paradigm, a single column is required. DMI may NOT be used for
AEDW and AEPRESS.
2. The js-set DOF’s for each aerodynamic theory are limited to the six-DOF paradigm (3 translations
support those degrees-of-freedom. Unlike the DMIG entry, DMIJI data will be partitioned to the j-
set, not reduced. No warnings are issued about truncated data. The j-set DOF’s for each aerodynamic
COMP
CAERO2-Y X
CAERO2-Z X
CAERO2-ZY X X
Main Index
DMIJI 1681
5. For symmetric matrices (very rare in the j-set!) (IFO=6), a given off-diagonal element may be input
either below or above the diagonal. While upper and lower triangle terms may be mixed, a fatal
message will be issued if an element is input both above and below the diagonal.
6. The recommended format for rectangular matrices requires the use of NCOL and IFO = 9. the
number of columns in the matrix is NCOL. (The number of rows in all DMIJI matrices is always the
js-set size--the union of the j-set and the permanently SPC’d partition). The GJ term is used for the
column index. the CJ term is ignored.
will be truncated.
8. The matrix names must be unique among all DMIJI.
double precision.
word machines, in double precision. It is recommended that DMIJ matrices also follow these
sets the precision of the matrix to the same value. TOUT = 0 allows the same DMIJI input to be used
11. If any DMIJ entry is changed or added on restart then a complete reanalysis is performed. Therefore,
DMIJ entry changes or additions are not recommended on restart.
Main Index
1682 DMIK
Direct Matrix Input at ks-Set of the Aerodynamic Mesh
DMIK Direct Matrix Input at ks-Set of the Aerodynamic Mesh
Defines direct input matrices related to physical (displacement) degrees-of-freedom (ks-set) of aerodynamic
grid points. These include WKK, WTFACT and input forces associated with AEFORCE entries. The matrix
is described by a single header entry and one or more column entries. A column entry is required for each
column with nonzero elements.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMIK NAME “0” IFO TIN TOUT POLAR NCOL

DMIK NAME GJ CJ G1 C1 A1 B1
G2 C2 A2 B2 -etc.-
Example:
DMIK ALPH1 0 9 2 0 1
DMIK ALPH1 1 1 1 1 1.0
2 1 1.0
Describer Meaning
1 Square
9 or 2 Rectangular
6 Symmetric
Main Index
DMIK 1683
Describer Meaning
extra point.)
extra point.)
Ai, Bi Real and imaginary (or amplitude and phase) parts of a matrix element. If the matrix is real
(TIN = 1 or 2), then Bi must be blank. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Matrices defined on this entry are referenced in static aeroelastic analysis by reference on AEFORCE
entries. In that paradigm, a single column is required. Also, DMIK may also be used for the WKK
and WTFACT entries. Matrices defined on this entry are referenced in static aeroelastic analysis by
reference on AEFORCE entries. In that paradigm, a single column is required. Also, DMIK may also
be used for the WKK and WTFACT entries. If both DMI and DMIK are specified for WKK or
WTFACT, the DMI entry will be used. DMI may NOT be used for AEFORCE.
2. The ks-set DOF’s for each aerodynamic theory are limited to the six-DOF paradigm (3 translations
support those degrees-of-freedom. Unlike the DMIG entry, DMIK data will be partitioned to the k-
set, not reduced. No warnings are issued about truncated data. The k-set DOF’s for each aerodynamic
COMP
CAERO1 X X
CAERO2-Y X X
CAERO2-Z X X
CAERO2-ZY X X X X
Main Index
1684 DMIK

5. For symmetric matrices (IFO=6), a given off-diagonal element may be input either below or above
the diagonal. While upper and lower triangle terms may be mixed, a fatal message will be issued if an
element is input both above and below the diagonal.
6. The recommended format for rectangular matrices requires the use of NCOL and IFO = 9. The
number of columns in the matrix is NCOL. (The number of rows in all DMIK matrices is always the
ks-set size--the union of the k-set and the permanently SPC’d partition). The GJ term is used for the
column index. The CJ term is ignored.
will be truncated.
8. The matrix names must be unique among all DMIK.
double precision.
word machines, in double precision. It is recommended that DMIK matrices also follow these
sets the precision of the matrix to the same value. TOUT = 0 allows the same DMIK input to be used
11. If any DMIK entry is changed or added on restart then a complete reanalysis is performed. Therefore,
DMIK entry changes or additions are not recommended on restart.
Main Index
DOPTPRM 1685
Design Optimization Parameters
DOPTPRM Design Optimization Parameters
Overrides default values of parameters used in design optimization.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DOPTPRM PARAM1 VAL1 PARAM2 VAL2 PARAM3 VAL3 PARAM4 VAL4
PARAM5 VAL5 -etc.-
Example:
DOPTPRM IPRINT 5 DESMAX 10
Describer Meaning
PARAMi Name of the design optimization parameter. Allowable names are given in Table 11.
(Character)
VALi Value of the parameter. (Real or Integer, see Table 11.)
Table 11 PARAMi Names and Descriptions

Name Description, Type, and Default Value
APRCOD Approximation method to be used. (Integer 1, 2, or 3; Default = 2)
1 Direct Linearization. APRCOD = 1 is recommended for shape,
topology and topography optimization problems.
2 Mixed Method based on response type
3 Convex Linearization
AUTOSE Flag to request an AESO job. AUTOSE = 1 activates an AESO creation run.
CONV1 Relative criterion to detect convergence. If the relative change in objective between
two optimization cycles is less than CONV1, then optimization is terminated.
Topology optimization can be terminated with CONV1<5.00E-3 (Real > 0.0;
Default = 0.001).
CONV2 Absolute criterion to detect convergence. If the absolute change in objective
between two optimization cycles is less than CONV2, then optimization is
terminated. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0E-20)
CONVDV Relative convergence criterion on design variables. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.001 for
non-topology; Default = 0.0001 for topology optimization)
CONVPR Relative convergence criterion on properties. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.001)
Main Index
1686 DOPTPRM
Table 11 PARAMi Names and Descriptions (continued)

CT Constraint tolerance. Constraint is considered active if current value is greater than
CT. (Real < 0.0; Default = -0.03)
CTMIN Constraint is considered violated if current value is greater than CTMIN.
(Real > 0.0; Default = 0.003)
DABOBJ Maximum absolute change in objective between two consecutive iterations to
indicate convergence at optimizer level. F0 is the initial objective function value.
(Real > 0.0; Default = MAX[0.001*ABS(F0), 0.0001])
DELB Relative finite difference move parameter. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0001; 0.001 for
fatigue responses)
DELOBJ Maximum relative change in objective between two consecutive iterations to
indicate convergence at optimizer level. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.001)
DELP Fractional change allowed in each property during any optimization design cycle.
This provides constraints on property moves. (Real, 0.0<DELP<1.0, default=0.2)
DELX Fractional change allowed in each design variable during any optimization cycle.
(Real > 0.0; Default = .5 for sizing/shape/topometry optimization; Default = 0.2 for
topology and topography optimization)
DELXESL Fractional change allowed in each design variable during the ESLNRO loop. (Real
> 0.0, Default = 0.5)
DESMAX Maximum number of design cycles (not including FSD cycle) to be performed.
(Integer > 0; Default = 5 for sizing/shape optimization; Default = 30 for topology,
topography, and topometry optimization
DISCOD Discrete Processing Method: (Integer 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; Default = 1)
0 No Discrete Optimization
1 Design of Experiments
2 Conservative Discrete Design
3 Round up to the nearest design variable
4 Round off to the nearest design variable
DISBEG Design cycle ID for discrete variable processing initiation. Discrete variable
processing analysis is carried out for every design cycle after DISBEG. (Integer > 0;
Default = 0=the last design cycle)
DPMAX Maximum fraction of change on designed property (Default = 0.5), used by Trust
Region Method.
DPMIN Minimum move limit imposed. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.01)
DRATIO Theshold value that can be used to turn off an active AESO job. An AESO job is
terminated if the ratio of the size of a design model to that of an analysis model is
greater than DRATIO. (Real > 0.; Default = 0.1)
Main Index
DOPTPRM 1687

DSMXESL Maximum number of design cycles applied to the ESLNRO loop. (Integer > 0;
Default = 20)
DXMAX Maximum fraction of change on design variable (Default = 1.0), used by Trust
Region Method.
DXMIN Minimum design variable move limit. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.05 for
sizing/shape/topometry optimization; Default = 1.0E-5 for topology and
topography optimization)
ETA1 ( η 1 ) the cutting ratio 1 (Default = 0.01), used by Trust Region Method.
FSDALP Relaxation parameter applied in Fully Stressed Design. (Real, 0.0 < FSDALP < 1.0;
Default = 0.9)
FSDMAX Specifies the number of Fully Stressed Design Cycles that are to be performed.
GMAX Maximum constraint violation allowed at the converged optimum. (Real > 0.0;
Default = 0.005)
GSCAL Constraint normalization factor. See Remarks under the DSCREEN and
DCONSTR entries. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.001)
IGMAX If IGMAX = 0, only gradients of active and violated constraints are calculated. If
IGMAX > 0, up to IGMAX gradients are calculated including active, violated, and
near active constraints. For many constraint problems, a reasonable value of
IGMAX = 2*NDV (number of design variables). A smaller IGMAX has a faster
performance of MSCADS. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
IPRINT Print control during approximate optimization phase. Increasing values represent
increasing levels of optimizer information. (0 < Integer < 7; Default = 0)
0 No output (Default)
1 Internal optimization parameters, initial information, and results
2 Same, plus objective function and design variables at each
iterations
3 Same, plus constraint values and identification of critical
constraints
4 Same, plus gradients
5 Same, plus search direction
6 Same, plus scaling factors and miscellaneous search information
7 Same, plus one dimensional search information
ISCAL Design variables scaling. (Integer > -1; Default = 0) =-1 no scaling; > 0 scaling
Main Index
1688 DOPTPRM

METHOD Optimization Method: (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
0 Automatic selection for a better performance based on number of
design variables, number of constraints, number of active/violated
constraints and computer memory.
1 Modified Method of Feasible Directions for MSCADS.
2 Sequential Linear Programming for MSCADS
3 Sequential Quadratic Programming for MSCADS
4 SUMT method for MSCADS
IJK See Remark 3.
NASPR0 First cycle analysis output control. (Integer 0 or 1)
0 Print analysis output of first cycle. (Default)
1 Do NOT print analysis output of first cycle.
OBJMOD Objective function modification. (Integer; Default = 0)
0 Objective function will not be modified.
1 Objective function will be reset to 0.0. Subsequently, printed
objective function value represents the change of objective
function.
OPTCOD OPTCOD. See Remark 2. (Character; Default = Blank)
Blank Taken from system cell number 413
“MSCADS” MSCADS is used
“IPOPT” IPOPT is used
“External Optimizer SCA Service Identifier”
Must be defined in the CONNECT Service statement (see SOL
700 User Defined Services)
P1 Print control items specified for P2. (Integer > 0; Default = 0) Initial results are
always printed prior to the first approximate optimization. If an optimization task
is performed, final results are always printed for the final analysis unless
PARAM,SOFTEXIT,YES is specified. These two sets of print are not controllable.
n Print at every n-th design cycle.
Main Index
DOPTPRM 1689

P2 Items to be printed according to P1: (Integer; Default = 1)
0 No print.
1 Print objective and design variables. (Default for sizing/shape
optimization)
Print objective. (Default for topology optimization)
P2 > 13 Print design variables for topology, topography, and
topometry optimization
2 Print properties.
4 Print constraints.
8 Print responses.
16 Print weight as a function of a material ID (note that this is not a
design quantity so that only inputs to the approximate design are
available).
n Sum of desired items. For example, P2 = 10 means print
properties and responses.
P2CALL Maximum number of retained constraints of all categories to be printed per
category. This single parameter can be used in place of the individual parameters
P2CBL, P2CC, P2CDDV, P2CM, P2CP and P2CR. If any of these six parameters
are non-zero, the P2CALL value is overridden for that constraint type. (Integer > 0;
default is to print all retained constraints.)
P2CBL Maximum number of constraints on beam library dimensions to be printed.
(Integer > 0; default is to print all beam library constraints.)
P2CC Maximum number of constraints on connectivity properties to be printed.
(Integer > 0; default is to print all connectivity property constraints.)
P2CDDV Maximum number of constraints on dependent design variables to be printed.
(Integer > 0; default is to print all dependent design variable constraints.)
P2CM Maximum number of constraints on material properties to be printed. (Integer > 0;
default is to print all material property constraints.)
P2CP Maximum number of constraints on element properties to be printed. (Integer > 0;
default is to print all element property constraints.)
P2CR Maximum number of constraints on design responses to be printed. (Integer > 0;
default is to print all retained design response constraints.)
P2RSET ID of a SET1 Bulk Data entry to identify the set of retained responses (DRESP1,
DRESP2 and/or DRESP3) to be printed. (Integer; Default is to print all responses
associated with printed constraints. If P2CR is > 0, the set associated P2RSET > 0
will be printed independent of the responses associated with the printed constraint.
If P2CR > 0 and PR2SET = -1, all retained responses will be printed.
Main Index
1690 DOPTPRM

PENAL Penalty parameter used to transform an infeasible approximate optimization task to
a feasible one. Setting this parameter to; e.g., 2.0 may improve optimizer
performance when the starting design is infeasible. (Real; Default = 0.0)
PLVIOL Flag for handling of property limit violation. By default, the job will terminate with
a user fatal message if the property derived from design model (DVPRELi,
DVMRELi, DVCRELi) exceeds the property limits. Setting PLVIOL to a non-zero
number will cause the program to issue a user warning message by ignoring the
property limits violation and proceed with the analysis. (Integer; Default = 0)
PTOL Maximum tolerance on differences allowed between the property values on property
entries and the property values calculated from the design variable values on the
DESVAR entry (through DVPRELi relations). PTOL is provided to trap ill-posed
design models. (The minimum tolerance may be specified on user parameter
DPEPS. See Parameters, 739) (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0E+35)
STPSCL Scaling factor for shape finite difference step sizes, to be applied to all shape design
variables. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)
TCHECK Topology Checkerboarding/minimum member size control option. (Integer > -1)
1 Filtering algorithm
2 Density constraint
0 No control
-1 Automatic selection of filtering or density constraint algorithm for
a better performance. (Default)
TDMIN Minimum diameter of members in topology optimization. This option is applied
on 2 and 3D elements only. (Real > 0.0)
TREGION Flag to invoke Trust Region method.
0 Don’t employ trust regions (Default)
1 Turn Trust Region on
UPDFAC1 Updating factor 1 (Default = 2.0), used by Trust Region Method.
UPDFAC2 Updating factor 2 (Default = 0.5), used by Trust Region Method.
Remarks:
1. Only one DOPTPRM entry is allowed in the Bulk Data Section. All defaults recommended.
2. OPTCOD specifies which optimization code to be used in SOL 200 and METHOD specifies which
optimization method to be used. The default is recommended.
3. METHOD = IJK enables a user selectable optimization strategy as documented in Vanderplaats, G.
N., ADS -- A Fortran Program for Automated Design Synthesis -- Version 1.10, NASA CR 177985,
1985. The default is recommended.
Main Index
DOPTPRM 1691
The I selects one of ten available strategy options:
0 None -- Go directly to the optimizer

1 Sequential unconstrained minimization using the exterior penalty function method
2 Sequential unconstrained minimization using the linear extended interior penalty
function method
3 Sequential unconstrained minimization using the quadratic extended interior penalty
function method
4 Sequential unconstrained minimization using the cubic extended interior penalty function
method
5 Augmented Lagrange multiplier method
6 Sequential linear programming
7 Method of centers
8 Sequential quadratic programming
9 Sequential convex programming
The J selects one of five available optimizer options:
1 Fletcher-Reeves algorithm for unconstrained minimization

2 Davidon-Fletcher-Powell (DFP) variable metric method for unconstrained minimization
3 Broydon-Fletcher-Goldfarb-Shanno (BFGS) variable metric method for unconstrained
minimization
4 Method of feasible directions for constrained minimization
5 Modified method of feasible directions for constrained minimization
And K selects one of eight available one-dimensional search strategies:
1 Find the minimum of an unconstrained function using the Golden Section method
2 Find the minimum of an unconstrained function using the Golden Section method
followed by polynomial interpolation
3 Find the minimum of an unconstrained function by first finding bounds and then using
the Golden Section method followed by polynomial interpolation
4 Find the minimum of an unconstrained function by polynomial
interpolation/extrapolation without first finding bounds on the solution
Main Index
1692 DOPTPRM
5 Find the minimum of a constrained function using the Golden Section method
6 Find the minimum of a constrained function using the Golden Section method followed
by polynomial interpolation
7 Find the minimum of a constrained function by first finding bounds and then using
polynomial interpolation
8 Find the minimum of a constrained function by polynomial interpolation/extrapolation
without first finding bounds on the solution
Main Index
DPHASE 1693
Dynamic Load Phase Lead
DPHASE Dynamic Load Phase Lead
Defines the phase lead term θ in the equation of the dynamic loading function.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DPHASE SID P1 C1 TH1 P2 C2 TH2
Example:
DPHASE 4 21 6 2.1 8 6 7.2
Describer Meaning
SID Identification number of DPHASE entry. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number. (Integers 1 through 6 for grid points; zero or blank for extra or
scalar points)
THi Phase lead θ in degrees. (Real)
Remarks:
1. One or two dynamic load phase lead terms may be defined on a single entry.
2. SID must be referenced on a RLOADi entry. Refer to the RLOAD1 or RLOAD2 entry for the
formulas that define how the phase lead θ is used.
3. A DAREA, LSEQ or static load entry should be used to define a load at Pi and Ci.
4. In superelement analysis, DPHASE entries may only be applied to loads on points in the residual
structure.
5. RC network solver does not support DPHASE for thermal analysis.
Main Index
1694 DRESP1
Design Sensitivity Response Quantities
DRESP1 Design Sensitivity Response Quantities
Defines a set of structural responses that is used in the design either as constraints or as an objective.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DRESP1 ID LABEL RTYPE PTYPE REGION ATTA ATTB ATT1
ATT2 -etc.-
Example:
DRESP1 1 DX1 STRESS PROD 2 3 102
103
DRESP1 10 BMWW WMPID PSHELL 10 10

20 30
Describer Meaning
ID Unique entry identifier. (Integer > 0)
LABEL User-defined label. (Character, no default)
RTYPE Response type. See Table 12. (Character)
PTYPE Element flag (PTYPE = “ELEM”) or property entry name. Used with element type
responses (stress, strain, force, etc.) to identify the property type, since property
entry IDs are not unique across property types. (Character: “ELEM”, “PBAR”,
“PSHELL”, etc.)
REGION Region identifier for constraint screening. See Remark 10. for defaults.
(Integer > 0)
ATTA, ATTB, Response attributes. See Table 12. (Integer > 0 or Real or blank)
ATTi
Main Index
DRESP1 1695
Table 12 Design Sensitivity Response Attributes

Response Attributes
ATTB (Integer > 0 or Real
Response Type (RTYPE) ATTA (Integer > 0) > 0.0) ATTI (Integer > 0)
WEIGHT Row Number Column Number SEIDi or All or blank. See
(1 < ROW < 6) (1 < COL < 6) Remark 12.
See Remark 24.
VOLUME Blank Blank SEIDi or ALL or blank.
See Remark 12.
FRMASS Blank Blank Blank or Property ID
See Remarks 28. & 29. (PID). See Remark 37.
COMP Blank Blank Blank
See Remark 28.
EIGN Normal Modes Mode Approximation Code. See Blank
Number. See Remark 33. Remark 19.
CEIG Complex Eigenvalue Mode ALPHA or OMEGA Blank
Number. (Integer > 0) (Default = ALPHA)
FREQ Normal Modes Mode Approximation Code. See Blank
Number. Remark 19.
LAMA Buckling Mode Number Approximation Code. See Blank
Remark 19.
DISP Displacement Component Blank or Mode Number Grid ID
STRAIN Strain Item Code Blank or Mode Number Property ID (PID) or
Element ID (EID)
ESE Strain Energy Item Code Blank or Mode Number Property ID (PID) or
See Remark 21. Element ID (EID)
STRESS Stress Item Code Blank or Mode Number Property ID (PID) or
Element ID (EID)
FORCE Force Item Code Blank or Mode Number Property ID (PID) or
Element ID (EID)
FATIGUE Fatigue Item Code. ID of a FATIGUE case Property ID (PID) or
(pseudo-static) See Remark 43. control. Element ID (EID)
See Remark 39. See Remark 40.
FRFTG Fatigue Item Code. ID of a FATIGUE case Property ID (PID) or
(frequency response - random See Remark 43. control. Element ID (EID)
vibration fatigue) See Remark 40.
See Remark 39.
Main Index
1696 DRESP1

Response Attributes
SPCFORCE SPC Force Component Blank Grid ID
CSTRAIN Strain Item Code LAMINA Number or Property ID (PID) or
See Remark 2. GPLYIDi Element ID (EID)
CSTRESS Stress Item Code LAMINA Number or Property ID (PID) or
CFAILURE Failure Indices Item Code LAMINA Number or Property ID (PID) or
CSTRAT Composite Strength Ratio LAMINA Number or Property ID (PID) or
See Remark 2. Item Code GPLYIDi Element ID (EID)
TOTSE Blank Blank or Mode Number SEIDi or All or blank. See
(Total Strain Energy) Remark 12.
GPFORCE GPFORCE Component Blank Element ID
Code (1-6; see Remark 25.)
GPFORCP Grid Point (see Remark 26.) Blank Grid ID connected to
ATTA grid to specify
orientation.
ABSTRESS Arbitrary Beam Stress Item Blank Property ID (PID) or
Code (see Remark 30.) Element ID (EID)
FRDISP Displacement Component Frequency Value. (Blank; Grid ID
Real > 0.0 or Character)
PRES Acoustic Pressure Frequency Value. (Blank; Grid ID
Component (= 1 or 7) Real > 0.0 or Character)
FRVELO Velocity Component Frequency Value. (Blank; Grid ID
FRACCL Acceleration Component Frequency Value. (Blank; Grid ID
Main Index
DRESP1 1697

Response Attributes
FRSPCF SPC Force Component Frequency Value. (Blank; Grid ID
FRSTRE Stress Item Code Frequency Value. (Blank; Property ID (PID) or
Real > 0.0 or Character) Element ID (EID)
FRFORC Force Item Code Frequency Value. (Blank; Property ID (PID) or
Real > 0.0 or Character) Element ID (EID)
PSDDISP Displacement Component Frequency Value. (Blank; Grid ID
(see Remarks 27. and 31.) Real > 0.0 or Character).
PSDVELO Velocity Component (see Frequency Value (Blank; Grid ID
Remarks 27. and 31.) Real > 0.0 or Character).
PSDACCL Acceleration Component Frequency Value. (Blank; Grid ID
(see Remarks 27. and 31.) Real > 0.0 or Character).
RMSDISP Displacement Component RANDPS ID Grid ID
(see Remark 31.)
RMSVELO Velocity Component (see RANDPS ID Grid ID
Remark 31.)
RMSACCL Acceleration Component RANDPS ID Grid ID
(see Remark 31.)
ACPWR Blank Frequency value. Blank
(Acoustic Power radiated (Blank for all forcing
through a panel) frequency; Real > 0.0)
See Remark 34.
ACINTS Blank Frequency value. (Blank Grid ID of wetted surface.
(Acoustic Intensity) for all forcing frequency;
Real > 0.0)
AFPRES Acoustic Pressure Frequency value (Blank for Grid ID of AFPMID.
(Acoustic Pressure for AFPM) Component all forcing frequency; Real
See Remark 35. (Integer = 1 or 7) > 0.0)
Main Index
1698 DRESP1

Response Attributes
AFINTS Component Code - Frequency value. (Blank Grid ID of AFPMID.
(Acoustic Intensity for AFPM) 0 - normal to AFPM, for all forcing frequency;
See Remark 35. 1 - x-dir Real > 0.0)
2 - y-dir
3 - z-dir
AFVELO Component Code - Frequency value. (Blank Grid ID of AFPMID.
Velocity for AFPM) 11 - Real/Mag in x-dir for all forcing frequency;
See Remark 35. 12 - Real/Mag in y-dir Real > 0.0)
13 - Real/Mag in z-dir
71 - Img/Ph in x-dir
72 - Img/Ph in y-dir
73 - Img/Ph in z-dir
AFPWR Blank Frequency value. (Blank Blank
(Acoustic Power for AFPM) See for all forcing frequency;
Remark 35. Real > 0.0)
ERP ERP Item Code Frequency Value. (Blank; Set3 ID or Blank
See Remarks 41. and 42. Real > 0.0 or Character)
TDISP Displacement Component Time Value. (Blank; Real; Grid ID
or Character)
TVELO Velocity Component Time Value. (Blank; Real, Grid ID
or Character)
TACCL Acceleration Component Time Value. (Blank; Real, Grid ID
or Character)
TSPCF SPC Force Component Time Value. (Blank; Real, Grid ID
or Character)
TSTRE Stress Item Code Time Value. (Blank; Real, Property ID (PID) or
or Character) Element ID (EID)
TFORC Force Item Code Time Value. (Blank; Real, Property ID (PID) or
or Character) Element ID (EID)
Main Index
DRESP1 1699

Response Attributes
STMONP1 Component Blank Blank
Structural See Remark 36.
MONPNT1
STMOND1 Component Blank Blank
Structural See Remark 36.
MONDSP1
MONPNT3 Component Blank Blank
See Remark 36.
AEMONP1 Component Blank Blank
Aerodynamic See Remark 36.
MONPNT1
AEMOND1 Component Blank Blank
Aerodynamic See Remark 36.
MONDSP1
TRIM AESTAT or AESURF entry Blank Blank
ID
STABDER AESTAT or AESURF entry Restraint Flag. (Integer 0 Component
ID or 1) See Remark 13.
FLUTTER Blank Blank See Remark 14.
DIVERG Divergence Root Number Blank Mach No.
See remark 38.
WMPID MID SEID PID
Remarks:
1. Stress, strain, force, fatigue and ERP item codes can be found in Item Codes, 999. For stress or strain
item codes that have dual meanings, such as von Mises or maximum shear, the option specified in the
Case Control Section will be used; i.e., STRESS(VONM) or STRESS(MAXS).
2. RTYPE = “CSTRESS”, “CSTRAIN”, “CFAILURE”, and “CSTRAT” are used only with the
PCOMP/PCOMPG entry. “CSTRESS” and “CSTRAIN” item codes are described under Table 1
(Element Stress/Strain Item Codes) in Item Codes, 999. “CFAILURE” and “CSTRAT” item codes are
described under Table 2 (Element Force Item Codes) in Item Codes, 999. Only force item codes that
refer to failure indices of direct stress and interlaminar shear stress are valid.
The CFAILURE and CSTRAT response types requires the following specifications on the applicable
entries:
• Failure theory in the FT field on PCOMP/PCOMPG entry.
Main Index
1700 DRESP1
• Allowable bonding shear stress in the SB field on PCOMP/PCOMPG entry.

• Stress limits in the ST, SC, and SS fields on all MATi entries.
• When the PCOMPG is invoked, there is no default for the ATTB field.
3. ATTB can be used for responses of weight, composite laminae, dynamics, real and complex
eigenvalues, WMPID and stability derivatives. For eigenvector responses, such as DISP, the ATTB
identifies the mode of interest. For other responses, this field must be blank.
4. All grids associated with a DRESP1 entry are considered to be in the same region for screening
purposes. Only up to NSTR displacement constraints (see DSCREEN entry) per group per load case
will be retained in the design optimization phase.
5. DRESP1 identification numbers must be unique with respect to DRESP2 identification numbers.
6. If PTYPE = “ELEM”, the ATTi correspond to element identification numbers.
7. If RTYPE = “DISP”, “SPCFORCE”, “GPFORCE”, “TDISP”, “TVELO”, “TACCL” or “TSPCF”,
multiple component numbers (any unique combination of the digits 1 through 6 with no embedded
blanks) may be specified on a single entry. Multiple response components may not be used on any
other response types.
8. If RTYPE = “FRDISP”, “FRVELO”, “FRACCL”, or “FRSPCF” only one component number may
be specified in the ATTA field. Numbers 1 through 6 correspond to real (or magnitude) components
and 7 through 12 imaginary (or phase) components. If more than one component for the same grid
is desired, then a separate entry is required.
9. Real/imaginary representation is the default for complex response types. Magnitude/phase
representation must be requested by the corresponding Case Control command; e.g.,
DlSP(PHASE) = ALL for FRDISP type responses.
10. REGION is used for constraint screening. The NSTR field on DSCREEN entries gives the
maximum number of constraints retained for each region per load case.
IF RTYPE = “WEIGHT”, “VOLUME”, “LAMA”, “EIGN”, “FREQ”, “CEIG”, “TOTSE”,
“RMSDISP”, “RMSVELO”, “RMSACCL”, no REGION identification number should be specified.
If the region field is left blank for a grid response, one region is created for each DRESP1 ID. If the
region field is left blank for an element response, one region is created for each property ID invoked.
Usually, the default value is appropriate.
If the REGION field is not blank, all the responses on this entry as well as all responses on other
DRESP1 entries that have the same RTYPE and REGION identification number will be grouped
into the same region.
11. REGION is valid only among the same type of responses. Responses of different types will never be
grouped into the same region, even if they are assigned the same REGION identification number by
the user.
12. If RTYPE = “WEIGHT”, “VOLUME”, or “TOTSE” field ATTi = “ALL” implies total
weight/volume/total strain energy of all superelements except external superelements, 0 implies
residual only and i implies SEID=i. Default=“ALL”. RTYPE=“TOTSE” is not supported for shape
optimization.
Main Index
DRESP1 1701
13. RTYPE = “STABDER” identifies a stability derivative response. ATTB is the restraint flag for the
stability derivative. ATTB = 0 means unrestrained, and ATTB = 1 means restrained. For example,
ATTA = 4000, ATTB = 0, and ATT1 = 3 reference the unrestrained Cz derivative for the AESTAT
(or AESURF) entry ID = 4000.
14. RTYPE = “FLUTTER” identifies a set of damping responses. The set is specified by ATTi:
ATT1 = Identification number of a SET1 entry that specifies a set of modes.
ATT2 = Identification number of an FLFACT entry that specifies a list of densities.
ATT3 = Identification number of an FLFACT entry that specifies a list of Mach numbers.
ATT4 = Identification number of an FLFACT entry that specifies a list of velocities.
If the flutter analysis is type PKNL, it is necessary to put PKNL in the PTYPE field of this entry.
15. For RTYPE = “FRXXXX”, “PSDXXXX” , “PRES” and “ERP” a real value for ATTB specifies a
frequency value in cycles per unit time. If a real ATTB value is specified, then the responses are
evaluated at the closest excitation frequency. The default for ATTB is all excitation frequencies. See
Remark 20. for additional ATTB options. The OFREQ Case Control command has no effect on the
selection of the frequencies.
16. For RTYPE = “TDISP”, “TVELO”, “TACCL”, “TSPCF”, “TFORC”, and “TSTRE”, ATTB
specifies a time value. If ATTB is specified, then the responses are evaluated at the closest time
selected by the OTIME command. The default for ATTB is all time steps selected by the OTIME
command.
17. Intermediate station responses on CBAR elements due to PLOAD1 and/or CBARAO entries may
not be defined on the DRESP1 entry.
18. RTYPE = “EIGN” refers to normal modes response in terms of eigenvalue (radian/time)**2 while
RTYPE = “FREQ” refers to normal modes response in terms of natural frequency or units of cycles
per unit time.
19. For RTYPE = LAMA, EIGN or FREQ, the response approximation used for optimization can be
individually selected using the ATTB field when APRCOD = 1 is being used.
For RTYPE = LAMA, ATTB = blank or 1 selects direct linearization, ATTB = 2 = inverse
linearization.
For RTYPE = EIGEN or FREQ, ATTB = blank = Rayleigh Quotient Approximation, = 1 = direct
linearization, = 2 = inverse approximation.
The default Rayleigh Quotient Approximation should be preferred in most cases.
20. Character input for ATTB is available for RTYPE of “FRXXXX”, “PSDXXXX”, “TXXXX”, “PRES”
and “ERP”. The character input represents a mathematical function and the options for character
input are SUM, AVG, SSQ, RSS, MAX and MIN. The expression of mathematical function is shown
as follows:
n
SUM ( X 1, X 2, …, Xn ) =  Xi
i= 1
Main Index
1702 DRESP1
AVG ( X 1, X 2, …, Xn ) =  Xi ⁄ n
i= 1
n
2
SSQ ( X 1, X 2, …, Xn ) =  Xi
i= 1
n
2
RSS ( X 1, X 2, …, Xn ) =  Xi
i =1
MAX ( X 1, X 2, …, Xn ) = Maximum value among X i ( i=1 to n )
MIN ( X 1, X 2, …, Xn ) = Minimum value among X i ( i=1 to n )
where X i is the response for a forcing frequency or time step. For example
DRESP1,10,DX1,FRSTRE,ELEM,,3,AVG,10
yields a response which is equal to the average stress for element 10 across all forcing frequencies.
CAUTION! 1. If the ID of a DRESP1 with ATTB character input is referenced by a

DRESP2 using the "DRESP2" flag, the results of the mathematical function
are used to evaluate the DRESP2.
2. If the ID of a DRESP1 with ATTB character input is referenced by a
DRESP2 using the "DRESP1" flag, the individual values of the DRESP1 are
used to compute individual DRESP2 values and the mathematical function
is not used by the DRESP2.
21. Element strain energy item codes can be found under Table 7-13 in Item Codes, 999. Only element strain
energy and element strain energy density can be referenced on a DRESP1 entry. RTYPE=”ESE” is
not supported for shape optimization.
22. For RTYPE=RMSDISP, RMSVELO, or RMSACCL the ATTB specifies the appropriate RANDPS
ID.
23. Input other than 1 or 7 of ATTA field, acoustic pressure component, for PRES response type will be
reset to 1 (if less than 7) or 7 (if greater than 6 and less than 13).
24. Design response weight is obtained from Grid Point Weight Generator for a reference point
GRDPNT (see parameter GRDPNT). If GRDPNT is either not defined, equal to zero, or not a
defined grid point, the reference point is taken as the origin of the basic coordinate system. Fields
ATTA and ATTB refer to the row and column numbers of the rigid body weight matrix, which is
partitioned as follows:
Main Index
DRESP1 1703
W x W 12 W 13 W 14 W 15 W 16
W 21 W y W 23 W 24 W 25 W 26
W 31 W 32 W z W 34 W 35 W 36
[W] =
W 41 W 42 W 43 I x W 45 W 46
W 51 W 52 W 53 W 54 I y W 56
W 61 W 62 W 63 W 64 W 65 Iz
6×6
The default values of ATTA and ATTB are 3, which specifies weight in the Z direction. Field ATT1
= “ALL” implies total weight of all superelements except external superelements. SEIDi refers to a
superelement identification number. SEIDi = “0” refers to the residual superelement. The default of
ATT1 is blank which is equivalent to “ALL”.
25. For RTYPE = GPFORCE, the PTYPE field is used to designate the GRID ID at which the force is
defined. Output that is produced using PARAM NOELOF > 0 is not supported for the DRESP1
entry.
26. For RTYPE = GPFORCP, the PTYPE field is blank. The grid point force is for the sum of all
elements from the GRID ID listed in ATTA to the GRID (orient ID) listed in ATTi. This response
corresponds to that produced with PARAM NOELP > 0. It is not necessary to set PARAM NOELP
> 0 to compute the GPFORCP response.
27. For RTYPE = PSDXXXX, the PTYPE field specifies the RANDPS ID.
28. RTYPE=COMP (compliance of structures = P T u ) and FRMASS (mass fraction of topology designed
elements) entries are used for topology optimization or combined topology, sizing/shape
optimization.
29. RTYPE=FRMASS can be used for topology and topometry optimization. For topology, FRMASS, is
the mass divided by the mass calculated if all topology design variables are 1.0. FRMASS is calculated
for designed elements only. FRMASS = 1.0 if all design variables are 1.0. For topometry, the initial
FRMASS is defined as 1.0 for the initial design specified on the TOMVAR entries. For non-volume
elements like CELAS, an artificial mass = 1.0 is assumed for each element.
30. Response type ABSTRESS is for element type code of 238 (CBAR) and 239 (CBEAM) only.
31. If a PSDxxxx or RMSxxxx response is being applied with RANDPS Bulk Data entries that include
multiple subcases, the DESSUB or DESOBJ Case Control command that invokes the PSDxxxx or
RMSxxxx response must be in the first subcase used by the RANDPS entry.
32. Response types, ESE, TOTSE, GPFORCE and GPFORCP are not supported for shape
optimization.
33. For RTYPE=EIGN or FREQ, PTYPE field can be utilized to identify the source of the mode. Valid
options are ‘STRUC’ or ‘FLUID’. The default is ‘STRUC’.
34. For RTYPE=ACPWR, PTYPE field can be utilized to identify the panel name. The default is ‘total’
which covers the whole interface between structural and fluid field.
35. For RTYPE=AFxxxx, PTYPE field can be utilized to specified the ID of Acoustic Field Point Mesh,
AFPM.
Main Index
1704 DRESP1
36. For monitor point responses (RTYPE = STMONP1, STMOND1, MONPNT3 AEMONP1 or
AEMOND1) the ATTA field specifies the components to be extracted. These can be any subset of
the integers 1 through 6 that appear on the monitor quantity with the NAME provided in the PTYPE
field. All of these responses can be invoked in a static aeroelastic (ANALYSIS=SAERO) subcase.
STMOND1 and MONPNT3 can be invoked from a static (ANALYSIS=STAT) subcase. The
responses are not available in a dynamic response or normal modes subcase. The response types have
the following meaning:
a. STMONP1 – A structural MONPNT1
b. STMOND1 – A structural MONDSP1
c. MONPNT3 – A MONPNT3
d. AEMONP1 – An aerodynamic MONPNT1
e. AEMOND1 – An aerodynamic MONDSP1
For all but the STMONP1, the response is the elastic monitor point value. For the STMONP1, it is
the elastic “minus” inertial “plus” elastic applied load value.
37. For RTYPE-FRMASS, if the PID in the ATTi field is not blank, the PTYPE field must specify the
type of property the PID references.
38. RTYPE=DIVERG is for subcases with ANALYSIS=DIVERG (aeroelastic static divergence). Only a
single Mach number can be specified for this RTYPE.
39. For RTYPE = FATIGUE (pseudo-static fatigue), PTYPE must be set to ELEM or PSOLID,
PSHELL, PBAR, PBEAM, or PWELD. For RTYPE = FRFTG (frequency response fatigue), PTYPE
must be set to ELEM or PSOLID o r PSHELL. ATTB is the FID of a FATIGUE case control and
must be the same FID for all RTYPEs of type FATIGUE or FRFTG. RTYPEs of type FATIGUE
and FRFTG cannot be mixed; either all are RTYPE=FATIGUE or all are RTYPE=FRFTG.
40. If a FATIGUE case control references a SET ID, then ATTB must reference one of the IDs referenced
by the SET. Design optimization using fatigue responses is currently limited to one fatigue analysis,
that is, one loading sequence. Multiple fatigue responses referencing different loading sequences, i.e.,
FATIGUE case control IDs, will result in an error.
41. For the ERP response, the PTYPE field must be ERPPNL.
42. If the ATT1 field is blank for the ERP response, all panels are invoked.
43. Fatigue Item Codes can be found in Fatigue Item Codes, 1057. Item codes that are available as design
responses are 4-9 and 12 for the element centroid or first node/layer/location and the comparable
items for ensuing nodes/layers/locations.
44. For the WMPID (weight as a function of material and property ID), the following conventions apply:
a. ATTA is required, ATTB and ATTi are optional.
b. ATTB specifies the superelement with ATTB=0 indicating the residual, >0, indicates
superelement ATTB and ATTB = ALL or blank means all superelements)
c. The ATTi fields designate the property ID's of interest. If ATTi is specified, the associated
property type (e.g., PSHELL) must be specified by the PTYPE input of field 5 on the DRESP1
entry.
Main Index
DRESP1 1705
d. If there is no ATTi, all material with MID=ATTA will be used to generate the response.
e. If there are multiple ATTi, a single scalar weight is calculated that is the sum of the all the
properties
f. Materials that are supported with this entry are: MAT1,MAT2, MAT3, MAT8, MAT9 and
MAT10
g. Properties that are supported are: PSHELL, PROD, PBEAM, PTUBE, PSHEAR, PBAR,
PSOLID, PBEND,PCOMP, PCOMPG, PBARL, PBEAML, PBRSECT and PBMSECT.
45. Certain restrictions apply for RTYPE=WMPID
a. The density of the material referenced on the ATTA field cannot also be designed using a
DVMRELx entry
b. The property referenced on the ATTI field cannot also be invoked by a TOMVAR entry.
c. The WMPID response is supported for topology optimization or for shape sizing optimization,
but not for both topology and shape sizing optimization.
Main Index
1706 DRESP2
Design Sensitivity Equation Response Quantities
DRESP2 Design Sensitivity Equation Response Quantities
Defines equation responses that are used in the design, either as constraints or as an objective.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DRESP2 ID LABEL EQID or REGION METHOD C1 C2 C3
FUNC
“DESVAR” DVID1 DVID2 DVID3 DVID4 DVID5 DVID6 DVID7
DVID8 -etc.-
“DTABLE” LABL1 LABL2 LABL3 LABL4 LABL5 LABL6 LABL7
LABL8 -etc.-
“DRESP1” NR1 NR2 NR3 NR4 NR5 NR6 NR7
NR8 -etc.-
“DNODE” G1 C1 G2 C2 G3 C3
G4 C4 etc.
“DVPREL1” DPIP1 DPIP2 DPIP3 DPIP4 DPIP5 DPIP6 DPIP7
DPIP8 DPIP9 -etc.-
“DVCREL1” DCIC1 DCIC2 DCIC3 DCIC4 DCIC5 DCIC6 DCIC7
DCIC8 DCIC9 -etc.-
“DVMREL1” DMIM1 DMIM2 DMIM3 DMIM4 DMIM5 DMIM6 DMIM7
DMIM8 DMIM9 -etc.-
“DVPREL2” DPI2P1 DPI2P2 DPI2P3 DPI2P4 DPI2P5 DPI2P6 DPI2P7
DPI2P8 DPI2P9 -etc.-
“DVCREL2” DCI2C1 DCI2C2 DCI2C3 DCI2C4 DCI2C5 DCI2C6 DCI2C7
DCI2C8 DCI2C9 -etc.-
“DVMREL2” DMI2M1 DMI2M2 DMI2M3 DMI2M4 DMI2M5 DMI2M6 DMI2M7
DMI2M8 DMI2M9 -etc.-
“DRESP2” NRR1 NRR2 NRR3 NRR4 NRR5 NRR6 NRR7
NRR8 -etc.-
“DVLREL1” DLIL1 DLIL2 DLIL3 DLIL4 DLIL5 DLIL6 DLIL7
DLIL8 -etc.-
Example:
DRESP2 1 LBUCK 5 3
DESVAR 101 3 4 5 1 205 209
201
DTABLE PI YM L
DRESP1 14 1 4 22 6 33 2
Main Index
DRESP2 1707
DNODE 14 1 4 1 22 3
2 1 43 1
DVPREL1 101 102
DVCREL1 201 202
DVMREL1 301
DVPREL2 401 402
DVCREL2 501
DVMREL2 601 602 603
DRESP2 50 51
Describer Meaning
EQID DEQATN entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
FUNC Function to be applied to the arguments. See Remark 8. (Character)
REGION Region identifier for constraint screening. See Remark 5. (Integer > 0)
METHOD When used with FUNC = BETA, METHOD = MIN indicates a minimization task
while MAX indicates a maximization task. (Default = MIN)
When used with FUNCT = MATCH, METHOD = LS indicated a least squares

while METHOD = BETA indicated minimization of the maximum difference.
(Default = LS)
Ci Constants used when FUNC = BETA or FUNC = MATCH in combination with
METHOD = BETA. See Remark 8. (Real; Defaults: C1 = 1.0., C2 = .005, and
C3=10.0)
“DESVAR” Flag indicating DESVAR entry identification numbers. (Character)
DVIDi DESVAR entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
“DTABLE” DTABLE flag. Indicates that the LABLs for the constants in a DTABLE or
DTABLE2 entry follow. This field may be omitted if there are no constants involved
in this relation. (Character)
LABLi Label for a constant on the DTABLE or DTABLE2 entry. (Character)
“DRESP1” Flag indicating DRESP1 entry identification numbers. (Character). See Remark 13.
NRk DRESP1 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
“DNODE” Flag indicating grid point and component identification numbers. (Character)
Gm Identification number for any grid point in the model. (Integer > 0)
Cm Component number of grid point Gm. (1 < Integer < 3)
“DVPREL1” Flag indicating DVPREL1 entry identification number. (Character)
DPIPi DVPREL1 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
Main Index
1708 DRESP2
Describer Meaning
“DVCREL1” Flag indicating DVCREL1 entry identification number. (Character)
DCICi DVCREL1 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
“DVMREL1” Flag indicating DVREL1 entry identification number. (Character)
DMIMi DVMREL1 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
DPI2Pi DVPREL2 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
DCI2Ci DVCREL2 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
“DVMREL2” Flag indicating DVMREL2 entry identification number. (Character)
DMI2Mi DVMREL2 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
“DRESP2” Flag indicating other DRESP2 entry identification number. (Character). See
Remark 13.
NRRk DRESP2 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
“DVLREL” Flag indicating DVLREL1 identification numbers. (Character)
DLILi DVLREL1 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. DRESP2 entries may only reference DESVAR, DTABLE, DRESP1, DNODE, DVPREL1,
DVCREL1, DVMREL1, DVPREL2, DVCREL2, DVMREL2 and DVLREL1 entries. They may
also reference other DRESP2 entries. However, a DRESP2 entry cannot reference itself directly or
recursively.
2. a) If the referenced DRESP1 entries span subcases, the DRSPAN Case Control command is required
to identify DRESP1 IDs for each subcase. DRESP2 entries that span subcases must be invoked above
the subcase level by DESGLB on DESOBJ commands.
b) Referenced DRESP entries that span superelements are supported automatically.
c) Referenced DRESP2 entries cannot span subcases or superelements.
3. DRESP2 entries must have unique identification numbers with respect to DRESP1 entries.
4. The “DESVAR”, “DTABLE”, "DRESP1", “DNODE”, “DVPREL1”, “DVCREL1” and
“DVMREL1”, “DVPREL2”, “DVCREL2”, “DVMREL2”, “DRESP2” and DVLREL1 flags in field
2 must appear in the order given above. Any of these words, along with the identification numbers
associated with them, may be omitted if they are not involved in this DRESP2 relationship.
However, at least one of these ten types of arguments must exist.
5. The REGION field follows the same rules as for the DRESP1 entries. DRESP1 and DRESP2
responses will never be contained in the same region, even if they are assigned the same REGION
identification number. The default is to put all responses referenced by one DRESP2 entry in the
same region.
Main Index
DRESP2 1709
6. The variables identified by DVIDi, LABLj, NRk, the Gm, CMPM pairs, DPIPi, DCICm, DMIMn,
DPI2Po, DCI2Cp, DMI2Mq, and NRRu are assigned (in that order) to the variable names (x1, x2,
x3, etc.) specified in the left-hand side of the first equation on the DEQATN entry referenced by
EQID. In the example below,
DESVARs 101 and 3 are assigned to arguments A and B.
DTABLEs PI and YM are assigned to arguments C and D.
Grid 14, Component 1 is assigned to argument R.
DRESP2 1 LBUCK 5 3
DESVAR 101 3
DTABLE PI YM
DNODE 14 1
DEQAT 5 F1(A, B, C, D, R)=A+B*C-(D**3+10.0)+sin(C*R)
N
7. (Gm, Cm) can refer to any grid component and is no longer limited to a designed grid component.
8. The FUNC attributes can be used in place of the EQID and supports the functions shown in the
following table:
Function Description
SUM Sum of the arguments
AVG Average of the arguments
SSQ Sum of the squares of the arguments
RSS Square root of the sum of the squares of the arguments
MAX The maximum value of the argument list
MIN The minimum value of the argument list
BETA Minimize the maximum response. See Remark 10.
MATCH Match analysis results with user specified values. See Remark 11.
When EQID has character input, the DEQATN entry is no longer needed. The functions are
applied to all arguments on the DRESP2 regardless of the type. See Remark 20. of the DRESP1 entry
for an explanation of these functions.
9. The number of arguments of a DEQATN can be more than the number of values defined on the
DRESP2 if the DRESP1s referenced have RTYPE with ‘FR’ or ‘PSD’ prefix. Arguments are still
positional. The extra arguments in the DEQATN must appear at the end of the argument list. The
discrepancy is resolved internally with the forcing frequency(ies) associated with DRESP1s. An
example is shown as follows:
DRESP1 10 FDISP1 FRDISP 1 10. 1001

DRESP1 20 FDISP2 FRDISP 1 20. 1001
DRESP2 30 AVGFD 100
Main Index
1710 DRESP2
DRESP1 10 20
DEQAT 100 AVG(D1,D2,F1,F2) = (D1/F1+D2/F2)*0.5
N
In the above example, the DEQATN has two more additional terms than have been defined on the
DRESP2. The first additional term is the forcing frequency (in hertz) of the first DRESP1 ID on the
DRESP2. The second additional term is the forcing frequency of second DRESP1 ID in the list.
When all DRESP1s involved have the same frequency, the user is not required to name all the
additional terms in the argument list of DEQATN.
10. FUNC = BETA facilitates a design task where the objective is to minimize the maximum response.
Only DRESP1 entries can be invoked by DRESP2 and the DRESP’s cannot span subcases. The
BETA function creates the following design task:
Minimize φ = C 1 X β
γX β – r j
Subject to g = -------------------- ≥ 0
C3
where γ is determined from
C 2 = ( r jmax – γ X β ) ⁄ C 3
User input parameters C 1, C 2, C 3 therefore have the following meaning:

C1 (Default = 1.0) weights the spawned design variable, X β , to create the objective. Since X β starts
at 1.0, C 1 is the initial objective.
C 2 sets the initial value of the maximum constraint created by this process. The default values of 0.005
is equal to DOPTPRM parameter GMAX.
C3 (Default = 10.0) is an offset value to avoid dividing by zero when creating constraints.
11. FUNC = MATCH creates a response from the difference between analysis results, r j , that are
associated with DRESP1s and target values, r Tj , that are input using DTABLE data. Only DRESP1
entries and DTABLE entries can be invoked by the DRESP2 entry.
When METHOD = LS, a least square minimization is performed where the response is
m T 2
 rj – rj 
r2 =   --------------
 r Tj 
-
j =1
When METHOD = BETA, the design task becomes one of minimizing an objective that is the
maximum normalized difference between the analysis and target values
T
rj – rj
---------------
T
rj
Main Index
DRESP2 1711
in the same manner as outlined in Remark 10.
12. With FUNC=MATCH, if the DTABLE LABLj invokes an integer VALUi on the DTABLE entry,
the integer points to a TABLEDi entry that provides tabular input as a function of frequency or time.
This is used in conjunction with a single DRESP1 NRk that provides a response across a range of
frequencies or times (i.e., RTYPE=FRxxxx, PSDxxxx, ACxxxx or Txxxx). When the TABLEDi
option is invoked, the response can only be constrained, it cannot be the objective. This further
implies that FUNC=MATCH, METHOD=BETA is not supported with TABLEDi.
13. If the mathematical function from a DRESP1 that has character input in the ATTB field (see remark
20 of the DRESP1) is to be used in the DRESP2 evaluation, the DRESP1 must be referenced under
the "DRESP2" flag, not the "DRESP1" flag. If the "DRESP1" flag is used in this situation, it will
result in a DRESP2 being evaluated for each of the individual values that contribute to the
mathematical function.
Main Index
1712 DRESP3
Design Sensitivity Response using user-supplied routine(s)
DRESP3 Design Sensitivity Response using user-supplied routine(s)
Defines an external response using user-supplied routine(s).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DRESP3 ID LABEL GROUP TYPE REGION
DVID8 etc.
LABL8 etc.
“DRESP1” NR1 NR2 NR3 NR4 NR5 NR6 NR7
NR8 etc.
“DNODE” G1 C1 G2 C2 G3 C3
G4 C4 etc.
“DVPREL1” DPIP1 DPIP2 DPIP3 DPIP4 DPIP5 DPIP6 DPIP7
DPIP8 DPIP9 etc.
“DVCREL1” DCIC1 DCIC2 DCIC3 DCIC4 DCIC5 DCIC6 DCIC7
DCIC8 DCIC9 -etc.-
“DVMREL1 DMIM1 DMIM2 DMIM3 DMIM4 DMIM5 DMIM6 DMIM7
”
DMIM8 DMIM9 -etc.-
“DVPREL2 DPI2P1 DPI2P2 DPI2P3 DPI2P4 DPI2P5 DPI2P6 DPI2P7
DPI2P8 DPI2P9 -etc.-
‘DCREL2” DCI2C1 DCI2C2 DCI2C3 DCI2C4 DCI2C5 DCI2C6 DCI2C7
DCI2C8 DCI2C9 -etc.-
“DVMREL2 DMI2M1 DMI2M2 DMI2M3 DMI2M4 DMI2M5 DMI2M6 DMI2M7
”
DMI2M8 DMI2M9 -etc.-
“DRESP2” NRR1 NRR2 NRR3 NRR4 NRR5 NRR6 NRR7
NRR8 -etc.-
DVLREL1 DLIL1 DLIL2 DLIL3 DLIL4 DLIL5 DLIL6 DLIL7
DLIL8 DLIL9 -etc.-
“USRDATA” String
-etc.-
Example:
DRESP3 1 LBUCK TAILWNG BUCK
DESVAR 101 3 4 5 1 205 209
Main Index
DRESP3 1713
201
DTABLE PI YM L
DRESP1 14 1 4 22 6 33 2
DNODE 14 1 4 1 22 3
2 1 43 1
DVPREL1 101 102
DVCREL1 201 202
DVMREL1 301
DVPREL2 401 402
DVCREL2 501
DVMREL2 601 602 603
DRESP2 50 51
USRDATA Constants: 12345.6 789.0 99.
Describer Meaning
GROUP Group name the external response type belongs to (Character). See Remark 2.
TYPE External response type (Character). See Remark 3.
“DESVAR” Flag indicating DESVAR entry identification numbers. (Character)
DTABLE2 entry follow. This field may be omitted if there are no constants
involved in this relation. (Character)
“DRESP1” Flag indicating DRESP1 entry identification numbers. (Character)
NRk DRESP1 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
“DNODE” Flag signifying that the following fields are grid points.
Gm Grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Cm Degree-of-freedom number of grid point Gm. (1 < Integer < 3)
DPIPi DVPREL1 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
DCICi DVCREL1 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
DMIMi DVMREL1 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
Main Index
1714 DRESP3
Describer Meaning
DPI2Pi DVPREL2 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
DCI2Ci DVCREL2 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
DMI2Mi DVMREL2 entry identification number (Integer > 0)
“DRESP2” Flag indicating other DRESP2 entry identification number. (Character)
NRRk DRESP2 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
“DVLREL1” Flag indicating DVLREL1 identification number (character)
DLILi DVLREL1 entry identification number (integer)
“USRDATA” Flag indicating user input data (Character). See Remark 8.
Remarks:
1. DRESP3 entries may reference DESVAR, DTABLE, DRESP1, DNODE, DVPREL1, DVCREL1,
DVMREL1, DVPREL2, DVCREL2, DVMREL2, DRESP2 and DVLREL1entries. However, a
DRESP3 entry cannot reference another DRESP3 entry.
2. The group name must be referenced by an FMS CONNECT entry.
3. Multiple types of external responses can be defined in one group. Each type name identifies a specific
external response evaluated in the user-supplied routines. See Building and Using the Sample Programs
(p. 231) in the MSC Nastran 2016 Utilities Guide for a discussion of how to incorporate external
responses.
4. a) Referenced DRESP2 entries cannot span subcases or superelements.
b) If referenced DRESP1 entries span subcases, the DRSPAN Case Control command is required to
identify the DRESP1 IDs for each subcase. DRESP3 entries that span subcases must be invoked
above the subcase level by DESGLB or DESOBJ commands.
c) Referenced DRESP1 entries that span superelements are supported automatically.
5. DRESP3 entries must have unique identification numbers with respect to DRESP2 and DRESP1
entries.
6. The “DESVAR”, “DTABLE”, “DNODE”, “DVPREL1”, “DVCREL1” and “DVMREL1”,
“DVPREL2”, DVCREL2”, “DVMREL2”, “DRESP2”, “DVLREL1” and “USRDATA” keywords
on the continuation entries must appear in the order given above. Any of these words, along with the
subsequent data associated with them, may be omitted if they are not involved in this DRESP3
relationship. However, at least one of these types of arguments must exist.
7. The REGION field follows the same rules as for the DRESP1 entries. DRESP1 and DRESP3
responses will never be contained in the same region, even if they are assigned the same REGION
identification number. The default is to put all responses referenced by one DRESP3 entry in the
same region.
Main Index
DRESP3 1715
8. The data in the USRDATA field is character string based. It provides a convenient way to pass
constants to the external response server routines. The maximum number of characters allowed is
32000.
Main Index
1716 DSCREEN
Design Constraint Screening Data
DSCREEN Design Constraint Screening Data
Defines screening data for constraint deletion.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DSCREEN RTYPE TRS NSTR
Example:
DSCREEN STRESS -0.7 2
Describer Meaning
RTYPE Response type for which the screening criteria apply. See Remark 3. (Character)
TRS Truncation threshold. (Real; Default = -0.5)
NSTR Maximum number of constraints to be retained per region per load case. See Remark
3. (Integer > 0; Default = 20)
Remarks:
1. Grid responses associated with one particular load case are grouped by the specification of DRESP1
entries. From each group, a maximum of NSTR constraints are retained per load case.
2. Element responses are grouped by the property; i.e., all element responses for one particular load case
belonging to the set of PIDs specified under ATTi on a DRESPi entry are regarded as belonging to
the same region. In superelement sensitivity analysis, if the property (PID) is defined in more than
one superelement, then separate regions are defined. A particular stress constraint specification may
be applied to many elements in a region generating many stress constraints, but only up to NSTR
constraints per load case will be retained.
3. For aeroelastic responses, that is RTYPE = “TRIM”, “STABDER”, and “FLUTTER”, the NSTR
limit is applied to all DRESP1 IDs that are the same RTYPE and have the same REGION specified.
4. For responses that are not related to grids or elements, that is RTYPE = “WEIGHT”, “VOLUME”,
“EIGN”, “FREQ”, “LAMA”, CEIG”, FRMASS, COMP, and TOTSE”, NSTR is not used. TRS is
still applicable.
5. The RTYPE field is set to EQUA if constraints that are associated with DRESP2 entries are to be
screened. The RTYPE field is set to DRESP3 if constraints that are associated with DRESP3 entries
are to be screened. If the REGION field on the DRESP2 or DRESP3 is blank, one region is
established for each DRESP2/DRESP3 entry.
6. If a certain type of constraint exists but no corresponding DSCREEN entry is specified, all the
screening criteria used for this type of constraint will be furnished by the default values.
7. Constraints can be retained only if they are greater than TRS. See the Remarks under the DCONSTR,
1640 entry for a definition of constraint value.
Main Index
DSCREEN 1717
Design Constraint Screening Data
8. Constraint screening is applied to each superelement.
Main Index
1718 DTABLE
Table Constants
DTABLE Table Constants
Defines a table of real constants that are used in equations (see DEQATN entry).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DTABLE LABL1 VALU1 LABL2 VALU2 LABL3 VALU3 LABL4 VALU4
LABL5 VALU5 LABL6 VALU6 LABL7 VALU7 LABL8 VALU8
-etc.-
Example:
DTABLE PI 3.142 H 10.1 E 1.0E6
G 5.5E5 B 100.
Describer Meaning
LABLi Label for the constant. (Character)
VALUi Value of the constant or TABLEDx ID. (Real or Integer, respectively)
Remarks:
1. Multiple DTABLE entries may be specified in the Bulk Data Section.
2. LABLi are referenced by the LABj on the DRESP2, DRESP3, DVCREL2, DVMREL2, or
DVPREL2 entries.
3. Trailing blank fields are permitted at the end of each line of LABLi/VALUi pairs, but intermediate
blanks are not. (See the example above for permitted trailing blanks.)
4. For PART SE, if LABLi is referenced on SEDRSP2 and/or SEDRSP3, DTABLE entries must be
placed in a PART SE where companion design model entries, such as DESVAR, DRESP1 and etc,
are available.
5. If the VALUi is an integer, this points to the ID of a TABLEDx Bulk Data entry that lists the
constants as a function of frequency or time. See Remark 12. on the DRESP2 entry.
6. LABLi must be unique across all DTABLE and DTABLE2 entries.
Main Index
DTABLE2 1719
Table Constants
DTABLE2 Table Constants
Defines real constants from a field of property, material or connections bulk data entries which then can be
invoked by a DVxREL2, DRESP2, or DRESP3 entry.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DTABLE2 LABL1 PNAME1 PID1 FNAME1 LABL2 PNAME2 PID2 FNAME2
LABL3 PNAME3 PID3 FNAME3
Example:
DTABLE2 PTHK10 PSHELLL 10 T MATIE MT1 38 E
CBARX1 CBAR 3888 X1
Describer Meaning
LABLi Label for the constant. (Character)
PNAMEi Property, material or connection bulk data entry name. (Character)
PIDi ID of PNAMEi entry. (Integer > 0)
FNAMEi Field name of PNAMEi. (Character)
Remarks:
1. LABLi on DTABLE2 and DTABLE must be unique.
2. LABLi on DTABLE2 can be referenced under DTABLE flag of DVxREL2 (where x=P, M or
C)/DRESP2/DRESP3.
3. Values for the FNAMEi field of the PNAMEi Bulk Data entry with the ID of PIDi are taken from
analysis model before updating of analysis values with the designed value. If the updated value is
desired, use the DVxREL2 flag on DRESP2 or DRESP3 entries instead.
4. FNAMEi must be the same as the character string that appears on the PNAMEi Bulk Data entry.
5. DTABLE2 must be utillized along with ‘NASTRAN SYSTEM(444)=1’ in input file or ‘sys444=1’
during job submittal.
Main Index
1720 DTI
Direct Table Input
DTI Direct Table Input
Defines table data blocks.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DTI NAME “0" T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
V01 V02 -etc.-
DTI NAME IREC V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6
V7 V8 V9 V10 -etc.- “ENDREC”
Example: (The first logical entry is the header entry.)

DTI XXX 0 3 4 4096 1 0
1.2 2.3
DTI XXX 1 2.0 -6 ABC 6.000 -1 2
4 -6.2 2.9 1 DEF -1 ENDREC
Describer Meaning
NAME Any character string that will be used in the DMAP sequence to reference the data
block. See Remark 1. (Character; the first character must be alphabetic.)
Ti Trailer values. (Integer > 0; Default = 32767)
IREC Record number. (Integer > 1)
V0i, Vi Value. (Integer, Real, Character or blank)
“ENDREC” Flags the end of the string of values (V0i or Vi) that constitute record IREC.
(Character)
Remarks:
1. The user defines the data block and therefore must write a DMAP (or ALTER a solution sequence),
which includes the DTIIN modules, in order to use the DTI feature. See the MSC Nastran DMAP
Programmer’s Guide<$paranum[h1]. All of the rules governing the use of data blocks in DMAP sequences
apply.
2. All fields following ENDREC must be blank.
3. The entry using IREC = 0 is called the header entry and is an optional entry. The values T1 through
T6 go to a special record called the trailer. Other values on the optional continuation go to the header
record. If the header entry or the trailer is not specified, T1 through T6 = 32767. On this entry,
“ENDREC” may be used only if there is at least one continuation.
4. In addition to the optional header entry, there must be one logical entry for each record in the table.
Null records require no entries.
Main Index
DTI 1721
Direct Table Input
5. “ENDREC” is used to input blank values at the end of a record. If “ENDREC” is not specified, the
string for a record ends with the last nonblank field.
6. The maximum number of DMI and DTI data blocks is 1000.
7. If Ti is not an integer, a machine-dependent error will be issued that may be difficult to interpret.
Main Index
1722 DTI,ESTDATA
Superelement Estimation Data Overrides
DTI,ESTDATA Superelement Estimation Data Overrides
Provides override data for time and space estimation for superelement processing operations.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DTI ESTDATA “0"
kd1 vd1 kd2 vd2 -etc.-
The next entries are repeated for any superelement for which estimate data overrides are desired. IREC must
be incremented by 1.
DTI ESTDATA IREC SEFLAG SEID k1 v1 k2 v2

k3 v3 -etc.-
Example:
DTI ESTDATA 0
NOMASS -1
DTI ESTDATA 1 SE 10 C1 5.5 C3 4.5
C7 7.3
Describer Meaning
kdi Keyword for estimation parameter. (Character from Table 9-9.)
vdi Value assigned to the estimation parameter kdi. (The type given in Table 9-9.)
IREC Record number beginning with 1. (Integer > 0)
SEFLAG SEFLAG = “SE” or “SEID” indicates the next field containing a superelement
identification number. (Character)
SEID Superelement identification number. (Integer > 0)
ki Keyword for override of estimation parameter for indicated superelement. (Character
from Table 9-9.)
vi Value for keyword ki. (Type depends on ki as shown in the Table 9-9.)
Main Index
DTI,ESTDATA 1723
Table 9-9 DTI,ESTDATA Input Parameter Descriptions

Input Parameters
Default Math
Keyword Type Value Symbol Meaning and Comments
CRMS* Real -1.0 C Number of active columns in [Koo].
FCRMS* Real 0.10 If FCRMS < 0.0, FCRMS is used (c/o).
C1 Real 6.0 c1 Average number of degrees-of-freedom per grid
point in o-set.
C3 Real 8.0 c3 Average number of connections per grid point.
C4 Real 0.15 c4 I/O time (seconds) per block transferred.
C5 Real 6.0 c5 Average number of effective degrees-of-freedom
per grid point in a-set.
C6 Real 1.2 c6 Total CPU factor.
C7 Real 6.0 c7 Number of equivalent KGG data blocks for space
estimation.
WF Real -1.0 W If WF < 0.0 then use available working storage in
units of single-precision words.
NOMASS Integer 1 If NOMASS ≠ 1 then exclude mass terms from
estimates.
TSEX Real 0.5 (min) Threshold limit for CPU.
SSEX Real 50.0 Threshold limit for space.
(blocks)
TWALLX Real 5.0 (min) Threshold limit for wall time.
BUFSIZ Integer Machine B Buffsize. See The NASTRAN Statement (Optional)
Buffsize (p. 14) in the .
ML Real Machine M Arithmetic time for the multiply/add loop. See
Loop Time the SOL 700 Explicit Nonlinear User’s Guide.
CONIO Integer Machine l/O count/CPU equivalence
I/O ratio
PREC Integer 1 or 2 Machine Word Length (1 = long, 2 = short). See
The NASTRAN Statement (Optional) (p. 14) in the .
NLOADS Integer 1 NL Number of loading conditions
SETYPE Character “T” Superelement type (T = Tip)
CMAX Real -1.0 Cmax Maximum bandwidth
Main Index
1724 DTI,ESTDATA
Parameters Obtained from SEMAP

NGI Number of interior grid points.
NPE Number of exterior grid points.
NS Number of scalar points
NE Number of elements.
Derived Parameters
O = C1 + NGI Size of o-set.
A = C5 ( NPE – NS ) + NS Size of a-set.
T = BUFFSIZE/PREC Number of matrix terms in a buffer.
Estimation Equations
For each superelement, estimates of CPU time and disk space are made using the following equations.
Table 9-10 Equations Used for CPU Time and Disk Space Estimate
Printout Math
Symbol Symbol Equations
2
TD T1 T1 = 1 ⁄ 2 ⋅ M ⋅ O ⋅ C
TFBS T2 T2 = 2 ⋅ M ⋅ C ⋅ O ⋅ a
2
TMAA T3 T 3 = M ⋅ O ⋅ a (set to 0.0 if NOMASS ≠ +1)
TSE TSE T SE = C 6 ( T 1 + T 2 + T 3 )
PREC
SLOO S1 S 1 = O ⋅ C ⋅ ---------------
b
PREC
SGO S2 S 2 = O ⋅ a ⋅ ---------------
B
PREC
SKGG S3 S 3 = 36 ( NG i + NG e – NS ) ( c 3 + 1.0 )  ---------------
 B 
SSE SSE S SE = S 1 + S 2 + c 7 ⋅ S 3
PREC
PASSES p FBS passes = p = a ⋅ O ⋅ ---------------
WF
BKSTRN BT Blocks Transferred = BT = 2 ⋅ p ⋅ S 1 + S 2 + p ⋅ S 2 . (Last term omitted if
NOMASS ≠ +1 )
TWALL TW Wall Time = T W = T SE + c 4 ⋅ BT
Remarks:
1. In the superelement solution sequences, this data is stored automatically.
2. The header record continuation entries are optional if no global override data is to be specified. In
this case, the complete header entry is optional.
• Active column data can come from one of several places. The value for CRMS is determined as
follows:
Main Index
DTI,ESTDATA 1725
• RMS from the entry when IREC > 0 and field 4 is “SE”.
• RMS from entries with IREC = 0.
• Computed bandwidth when PARAM,OLDSEQ is specified.
• If FCRMS is specified when IREC > 0 and field 4 is “SE”, then CRMS = FCRMS ⋅ O .
• If FCRMS is specified when IREC = 0, then CRMS = FCRMS ⋅ O .
• CRMS = 0.1 ⋅ O .
3. If CMAX is not specified, then it is defaulted to CRMS.
4. In the example above, mass terms are excluded for all superelements and new values are given for
parameters C1, C3, and C7 for Superelement 10 only.
5. The estimates for TSEX, SSEX, and TWALLX are not printed unless at least one estimate exceeds
the threshold.
Main Index
1726 DTI,INDTA
Stress, Strain and/or Force Sort/Filter Item Code Override
DTI,INDTA Stress, Strain and/or Force Sort/Filter Item Code Override
Specifies or overrides default item codes for the sorting and filtering of element stresses, strains, and forces.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DTI INDTA “0"
To specify/override items for a sort of stress quantities:
DTI INDTA “1" B1 C1 B2 C2 “ENDREC”
To specify/override items for a sort of force quantities:
DTI INDTA “2" B1 C1 B2 C2 “ENDREC”
Examples:
DTI INDTA 0
To specify/override items for a sort of stress quantities:
DTI INDTA 1 64 18 75 18 ENDREC
To specify/override items for a sort of force quantities:
DTI INDTA 2 34 2 2 4 ENDREC
Describer Meaning
Bi Element type identification number. See the table in Item Codes, 999 for allowable
values. (Integer > 0)
Ci Item code identification number for the stress, strain, or force quantity on which the
sort or filter is to be performed. See the table in the Item Codes, 999 for allowable values.
(Integer)
Remarks:
1. This table is recognized only in SOLs 101, 103, 105, 106, 108, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, 144, 153,
and for stress quantities only. One or more of the user parameters S1, S1G, or S1M must be specified
with a value greater then or equal to zero in order to request sorting and/or filtering. See user
parameter S1 in Parameters, 739. In order to sort force or strain quantities, a DMAP Alter is required.
2. If the Ci value is -1, the element type will be suppressed on the output file. An example of this feature
could be as follows: If an element type is to be sorted on two different values and output twice, this
can be accomplished by two calls to the STRSORT module with two unique DTI tables. However,
other element types will be printed twice. This additional print can be suppressed by setting their sort
codes to -1.
Main Index
DTI,INDTA 1727
3. Table 13 lists the elements currently that are sortable. In addition, the element type identification
number, the default stress output quantity, and the associated stress code identification numbers are
provided. If this entry is not specified, then the stresses are sorted based on the default quantity given
in Table 13.
The following should be noted:
a. The element type identification number is used internally by the program to differentiate element
types.
b. The stress code identification number is merely the word number in the standard printed output
for the stress quantity of interest. For example, the thirteenth word of stress output for the
CHEXA element is the octahedral shear stress. For this element type, the element identification
number and the grid point ID each count as a separate word. Stress codes for the elements are
tabulated in Item Codes, 999.
c. By default, stress sorting for the membrane and plate elements will be performed on the
Hencky-von Mises stress. For maximum shear stress, the STRESS (MAXS) Case Control
command should be specified.
Main Index
1728 DTI,INDTA
Table 13 Sortable Elements

Default Stress Output
Quantity and Identification Number
Element Type ID Stress Code ID
Element Number Quantity Number
CBAR 34 Maximum stress at end B 14
CBEAM 2 Maximum stress at end B 108
CBEND 69 Maximum stress at end B 20
CONROD 10 Axial stress 2
CELAS1 11 Stress 2
CELAS2 12 Stress 2
CELAS3 13 Stress 2
CHEXA 67 Hencky-von Mises or Octahedral stress 13
CQUAD4 33 Maximum shear or Hencky-von Mises 17
stress at Z2
CQUAD4* 144 Maximum shear or Hencky-von Mises 19
stress at Z2
CQUAD8 64 Maximum shear or Hencky-von Mises 19
stress at Z2
CQUADR 82 Maximum shear or Hencky-von Mises 19
stress at Z2
CPENTA 68 Octahedral stress 13
CROD 1 Axial stress 2
CSHEAR 4 No default ---
CTETRA 39 No default ---
CTRIA3 74 Maximum shear or Hencky-von Mises 17
stress at Z2
CTRIA6 75 Maximum shear or Hencky-von Mises 19
stress at Z2
CTRIAR 70 Maximum shear or Hencky-von Mises 19
stress at Z2
CTRIAX6 53 No default ---
CTUBE 3 Axial stress 2
*CORNER output
Main Index
DTI,SETREE 1729
Superelement Tree Definition
DTI,SETREE Superelement Tree Definition
Defines a superelement tree that determines the superelement processing order.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DTI SETREE “1” SEUP1 SEDOWN1 SEUP2 SEDOWN2 SEUP3 SEDOWN3
SEUP4 SEDOWN4 SEUP5 SEDOWN5 -etc.-
Example:
DTI SETREE 1 1 14 2 14 3 14
4 14 14 0
Describer Meaning
SEUPi Identification number of the superelement upstream from SEDOWNi. (Integer > 0)
SEDOWNi Identification number of the superelement into which SEUPi is assembled.
(Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. SETREE entries or the DTI,SETREE entry are required for multi-level superelement configurations.
2. If an DTI,SETREE entry is provided, then SETREE entries are not required.
3. If both SETREE entries and a DTI,SETREE entry exist, then the DTI,SETREE entry will be
ignored.
4. If a superelement is not referenced on the DTI,SETREE or SETREE entry, then the manner in which
it is handled depends on the type of that superelement. If it is a PART superelement, then the residual
will be regarded as its downstream superelement and the undefined superelement will therefore be
placed immediately above the residual in the tree. If it is a Main Bulk Data superelement, then it will
also be handled like an undefined PART superelement as above if all of its exterior points belong to the
residual. However, if one or more of its exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program
will terminate with a user fatal error complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the
same path.
5. If this entry is not present, the superelement tree and the processing order are determined
automatically.
6. A superelement identification may appear only once in a SEUPi field.
7. On restart, if a superelement identification does not appear in a SEUPi field, its matrices will not be
assembled, even though they may be present in the database.
8. See the MSC Nastran Superelement User’s Guide for a description of user-designated trees.
9. This entry is stored in the database automatically. Once stored, the Bulk Data entry may be removed
from the input file.
Main Index
1730 DTI,SETREE
Superelement Tree Definition
10. In the example above, the following superelement tree is defined:
1 2 3 4
14
Figure 9-89 Sample Superelement Tree
Main Index
DTI,SPECSEL 1731
Response Spectra Input Correlation Table
DTI,SPECSEL Response Spectra Input Correlation Table
Correlates spectra lines specified on TABLED1 entries with damping values.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DTI SPECSEL RECNO TYPE TIDl DAMP1 TID2 DAMP2
TID3 DAMP3 TID4 DAMP4 TID5 DAMP5 -etc.-
Example:
DTI SPECSEL 1 A 1 .02 2 .04
3 .06
DTI SPECSEL 3 V 4 .01
Describer Meaning
RECNO Spectrum number. (Integer > 0)
TYPE Type of spectrum. (Character: “A” for acceleration, “V” for velocity, or “D” for
displacement.)
TIDi TABLED1 entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
DAMPi Damping value assigned to TIDi. (Real)
Remarks:
1. The RECNO is the number of the spectrum defined by this entry. It is referenced on DLOAD Bulk
Data entries.
2. The TIDi, DAMPi pairs list the TABLEDl entry, which defines a line of the spectrum and the
damping value assigned to it. The damping value is in the units of fraction of critical damping.
3. This entry is placed in the database automatically. Once stored, the Bulk Data entry may be removed
from the input file.
Main Index
1732 DTI,SPSEL
Response Spectra Generation Correlation Table
DTI,SPSEL Response Spectra Generation Correlation Table
Correlates output requests with frequency and damping ranges.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DTI SPSEL RECNO DAMPL FREQL G1 G2 G3 G4
G5 G6 G7 -etc.-
Example:
DTI SPSEL 1 2 1 11 12
DTI SPSEL 2 4 3 1 7 11 12
13 14
Describer Meaning
DAMPL Identification number of the FREQ, FREQ1, or FREQ2 Bulk Data entry that specifies
the list of damping values. (Integer > 0)
FREQL Identification number of the FREQi Bulk Data entry that specifies the list of
frequencies. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid point number where response spectra will be calculated. (Integer > 0)
RECNO Record number of spectra to be generated. (Sequential integer beginning with 1.)
Remarks:
1. This table is used in SOLs 109 and 112.
2. Damping values are in the units of fraction of critical damping.
3. Output of response spectra requires the use of the XYPLOT...SPECTRA(RECNO)/Gi... command,
where Gi is restricted to the grid points listed on the (RECNO) record of this entry.
4. See Additional Topics (p. 511) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual for example problems using this
feature.
5. The SPSEL table is stored in the database automatically in SOLs 109 and 112. Once stored, the Bulk
Data entry may be removed from the input file.
6. There must be case control output request for displacements and velocities of the points to be output.
For example you could use case control commands:
DISP(PLOT) = ALL
VELO(PLOT) = ALL
Main Index
DTI,UNITS 1733
Unit Definitions
DTI,UNITS Unit Definitions
Defines units necessary for conversion during the analysis for the Nastran/ADAMS interface or a Nastran
fatigue analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DTI UNITS 1 MASS FORCE LENGTH TIME STRESS
Example:
DTI UNITS 1 KG N M S MPA
Remarks:
1. The DTI,UNITS Bulk Data entry is required for a ADAMSMNF FLEXBODY=YES run. See the
ADAMSMNF* (Case), 206 case control entry. ADAMS is not a unitless code (as is Nastran). Units must
be specified. A DTI Bulk Data entry provides ‘UNITS’ (a unique identifier) input as the above
example illustrates. Once identified, the units will apply to all superelements in the model. Acceptable
character input strings are listed in the table below. MASS, FORCE, LENGTH, and TIME are
required for ADAMS interface.
2. MSC Nastran is a unitless code and it is the user’s responsibility to ensure compatible units. During
a fatigue analysis, stress is converted to SI units of MPa because the fatigue material property stress
parameters as defined on the MATFTG entry are internally converted to standard SI units of MPa.
The stresses from the analysis must match. Thus it is necessary for the user to use DTI,UNITS to
define the stress units to ensure proper conversion. The default units are MPa and this entry is only
necessary if stresses are not in MPa.
Mass Force Length Time Stress*

KG - kilogram N - newton KM - kilometer H - hour MPA -
megapascal
LBM - pound- LBF - pounds-force M - meter MIN - minute PA - pascal
mass
SLUG - slug KGF - kilograms- CM - centimeter S - second PSI - pound per
force square inch
GRAM - gram OZF - ounce-force MM - millimeter MS - millisecond KSI - kilo
pound per
square inch
OZM - ounce- DYNE - dyne MI - mile US - microsecond PSF - pound
mass per square foot
Main Index
1734 DTI,UNITS
Unit Definitions
Mass Force Length Time Stress*

KLBM - kilo KN - kilonewton FT - foot NANOSEC - KSF - kilo
pound-mass (1000 nanosecond pound per
lbm) square foot
MGG - megagram KLBF - kilo pound- IN- inch D - day DYNECM2 -
force (1000 lbf ) dyne per square
centimeter
SLINCH - 12 slugs MN - millinewton UM - micrometer BAR - bar
UG - microgram UN - micronewton NM - nanometer ATM - physical
atmosphere
NG - nanogram NN - nanonewton ANG - angstrom
USTON - US ton YD - yard
MIL - milli-inch
UIN - micro-inch
* For fatigue analysis of spot welds, only MPA, PA, PSI, KSI, PSF, and KSF are supported.
For random vibration fatigue analysis using SOL 108 or 111, only MPA, PA, PSI, and KSI are sup-
ported.
Main Index
DVBSHAP 1735
Design Variable to Boundary Shapes
DVBSHAP Design Variable to Boundary Shapes
Associates a design variable identification number to a linear combination of boundary shape vectors from a
particular auxiliary model.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DVBSHAP DVID AUXMOD COL1 SF1 COL2 SF2 COL3 SF3
Example:
DVBSHAP 4 1 1 1.6
Describer Meaning
DVID Design variable identification number of a DESVAR entry. (Integer > 0)
AUXMOD Auxiliary model identification number. (Integer > 0)
COLi Load sequence identification number from AUXMODEL Case Control command.
(Integer > 0)
SFi Scaling factor for load sequence identification number. (Real; Default = 1.0)
Remarks:
1. Design variable DVID must be defined on a DESVAR entry.
2. Multiple references to the same DVID and/or COLi will result in the vector addition of the
referenced boundary shape vectors.
3. Multiple DVBSHAP entries may be specified.
Main Index
1736 DVCREL1
Design Variable to Connectivity Property Relation
DVCREL1 Design Variable to Connectivity Property Relation
Defines the relation between a connectivity property and design variables.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DVCREL1 ID TYPE EID CPNAME CPMIN CPMAX C0
DVID1 COEF1 DVID2 COEF2 DVID3 COEF3 -etc.-
Example:
DVCREL1 5 CQUAD4 1 ZOFFS 1.0
1 1.0
Describer Meaning
TYPE Name of an element connectivity entry, such as “CBAR”, “CQUAD4”, etc. (Character)
EID Element Identification number. (Integer > 0)
CPNAME Name of connectivity property, such as “X1”, “X2”, “X3”, “ZOFFS”, etc. (Character)
CPMIN Minimum value allowed for this property. If CPNAME references a connectivity property
that can only be positive, then the default value of CPMIN is 1.0E-15. Otherwise, it is -
1.0E35. See Remark 4. (Real)
CPMAX Maximum value allowed for this property. See Remark 4. (Real; Default =1.0E+20)
C0 Constant term of relation. (Real; Default = 0.0)
COEFi Coefficient of linear relation or keyword = “PVAL”. (If i = 1, Real or Character; if i > 1,
Real)
Remarks:
1. The relationship between the connectivity property and design variables is given by:
CP j = C 0 +  COEF i ⋅ X DVIDi
i

3. The fifth field of the entry, CPNAME, only accepts string characters. These string values must be the
same as those given in the connectivity entry descriptions in this Guide. For example, if the plate
offset is to be designed (CQUAD4, CTRIA3, etc), ZOFFS (case insensitive) must be specified on the
CPNAME field.
Main Index
DVCREL1 1737
4. The default values for CPMIN and CPMAX are not applied when the linear property is a function
of a single design variable and C0=0. It is expected that the limits applied on the associated DESVAR
entry will keep the designed property within meaningful bounds.
5. When "PVAL" is used for the COEF1 field, this is a flag to indicate that the COEF1 value is to be
obtained from the connectivity bulk data entry. If a DVCREL1 entry references more than one
design variable with the PVAL option, a User Fatal Message will be issued.
6. If the user inputs CQUAD4/CTRIA3 entries and then uses QRMETH = 5 to convert them to
CQUADR/CTRIAR entries, the design of items on these entries using the DVCREL1 entry should
refer to the converted type (i.e., CQUADR/CTRIAR). Similarly, if QRMETH=2 or 3 is used, the
DVCREL1 entry should refer to CQUAD4/CTRIA3 types.
Main Index
1738 DVCREL2
DVCREL2 Design Variable to Connectivity Property Relation
Defines the relation between a connectivity property and design variables with a user-supplied equation.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DVCREL2 ID TYPE EID CPNAME CPMIN CPMAX EQID
DVID8 -etc.-
LABL8 -etc.-
Example:
DVCREL2 1 CBAR 100 X1 0.05 1.0 100
DESVAR 1001
DTABLE X10
Describer Meaning
TYPE Name of an element connectivity entry, such as “CBAR”, “CQUAD4”, etc. (Character)
EID Element Identification number. (Integer > 0)
CPNAME Name of connectivity property, such as “X1”, “X2”, “X3”, “ZOFFS”, etc. (Character)
CPMIN Minimum value allowed for this property. If CPNAME references a connectivity
property that can only be positive, then the default value of CPMIN is 1.0E-15.
Otherwise, it is -1.0E35. (Real)
CPMAX Maximum value allowed for this property. (Real; Default =1.0E+20)
“DESVAR” DESVAR flag. Indicates that the IDs of DESVAR entries follow. (Character)
“DTABLE” DTABLE flag. Indicates that the LABLs for the constants in a DTABLE or DTABLE2
entry follow. This field may be omitted if there are no constants involved in this
relation. (Character)
Main Index
DVCREL2 1739
Remarks:
1. The variable identified by DVIDi and LABLi correspond to variable names (x1, x2, etc.) listed in the
left-hand side of the first equation on the DEQATN entry identified by EQID. The variable names
x1 through xN (where N = m + n ) are assigned in the order DVID1, DVID2, ..., DVIDm, LABL1,
LABL2, ..., LABLn.
2. If both “DESVAR” and “DTABLE” are specified in field 2, “DESVAR” must appear first.
3. The fifth field of the entry, CPNAME, only accepts string characters. These string values must be the
same as those given in the connectivity entry descriptions in this Guide. For example, if the plate
offset is to be designed (CQUAD4, CTRIA3, etc.), ZOFFS (case insensitive) must be specified on
the CPNAME field.
4. If the user inputs CQUAD4/CTRIA3 entries and then uses QRMETH = 5 to convert them to
CQUADR/CTRIAR entries, the design of items on these entries using the DVCREL2 entry should
refer to the converted type (i.e., CQUADR/CTRIAR). Similarly, if QRMETH=2 or 3 is used, the
DVCREL2 entry should refer to CQUAD4/CTRIA3 types.
Main Index
1740 DVGRID
Design Variable to Grid Point Relation
DVGRID Design Variable to Grid Point Relation
Defines the relationship between design variables and grid point locations.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DVGRID DVID GID CID COEFF N1 N2 N3
Example:
DVGRID 3 108 5 0.2 0.5 0.3 1.0
Describer Meaning
DVID DESVAR entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
GID Grid point (GRID) or geometric point (POINT) identification number. (Integer > 0)
COEFF Multiplier of the vector defined by Ni. (Real; Default = 0.0)
Ni Components of the vector measured in the coordinate system defined by CID. (Real;
at least one Ni ≠ 0.0)
Remarks:
1. A CID of zero or blank (the default) references the basic coordinate system.
2. Multiple references to the same grid ID and design variable result in vectorial addition of the
participation vectors defined by CID, COEFF, and Ni. There is no restriction on the number of
DVGRID entries that may reference a given grid (GID) or design variable (DVID).
3. The coordinate update equation is given as
0 0
{ g }i – { g }i =  COEFF j ( X DVIDj –X DVIDj ) { N } j
j
where { g } i is the location of the i-th grid, [ g x g y g z ]T .
The vector { N } = [ N x N y N z ] T is determined from CID and Ni. Note that it is a change in a design
variable from its initial value X 0 , and not the absolute value of the design variable itself, that
represents a change in a grid point location, { g } i – { g } 0i .
4. The DVGRID entry defines the participation coefficients (basis vectors) of each design variable for
each of the coordinates affected by the design process in the relationship
{ Δg } i =  { T }ij ⋅ ΔXj
j
Main Index
DVGRID 1741
Design Variable to Grid Point Relation
5. DVGRID entries that reference grid points on MPCs or RSSCON entries produce incorrect
sensitivities. Often the sensitivities are 0.0 which may result in a warning message indicating zero
gradients which may be followed by UFM 6499. Other rigid elements produce correct results.
Main Index
1742 DVLREL1
Defines the linear relation between analysis model loading and design variables
DVLREL1 Defines the linear relation between analysis model loading and design variables
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DVLREL1 ID TYPE SID LNAME LMIN LMAX C0
ATT1 ATT2 ATT3 ATT4 ATT5
DVID COEF DVID2 COEF2 DVID3 Etc
Example: Design the N1 FORCE at GRID 100 to be equal to DESVAR=10

DVLREL1 10 FORCE 300 N1
100
10 1.0
Describer Meaning
ID Unique identification number (Integer>0)
TYPE Name of Load, such as FORCE, see Remark 2. for supported types (Character)
SID Load set ID (Integer>0)
LNAME Load Name, such as F or N1 on the FORCE entry. See Remark 2. (Character)
LMIN Minimum value for the load. See Remark 5. (Real, default=-1.0e35)
LMAX Maximum value for the load (Real, Default=1.0e20)
C0 Constant term of relation (Real, Default=0.0)
ATTi Attributes of the designed load, see Remark 2. (Integer>0 or blank)
DVIDi DESVAR entry identification number. (Integer>0)
COEFi Coefficient of linear relation or keyword=”PVAL”, See Remark 3. (If i=1, Real or
Character; if i>1, Real )
Remarks:
1. The relationship between the analysis model load and the design variables is given by:
Li = C0 +  COEFF i XDVIDi
Main Index
DVLREL1 1743
Defines the linear relation between analysis model loading and design variables
2. Supported TYPEs and their ATTi meaning are given in the following table:
LNAME ATT1 ATT2 ATT3 ATT4 ATT5

Load Type (character) (integer) (integer) (integer) (integer) (integer)
FORCE F, N1, N2 or G CID
N3
(see remark 6)
LOAD S or Si 0 if LNAME is
S, Li otherwise
MOMENT M, N1, N2 or G CID (see
N3 remark 6)
obtained from the load bulk data entry. If a DVLREL1 entry references more than one design
variable with the PVAL option, a User Fatal Message will be issued.
4. If there are multiple loads that satisfy the designation of the request (for example two FORCE entries
with identical SID, GRID and CID values), it is a user input error.
5. The default values of LMIN and LMAX are not applied when the linear property is a function of a
single design variable and C0=0. It is expected that the limits applied on the DESVAR entry will keep
the designed property within reasonable bounds
6. Input of these data is optional. It most cases, leaving it off will result in a single load that qualifies with
the remaining attributes. If there are multiple instances that qualify, it is a user input error.
Main Index
1744 DVMREL1
Design Variable to Material Relation
DVMREL1 Design Variable to Material Relation
Defines the relation between a material property and design variables.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DVMREL1 ID TYPE MID MPNAME MPMIN MPMAX C0
DVID1 COEF1 DVID2 COEF2 DVID3 COEF3 -etc.-
Example:
DVMREL1 5 MAT1 1 RHO 0.05 1.0
1 1.0
Describer Meaning
TYPE Name of a material property entry, such as “MAT1”, “MAT2”, etc. (Character)
MID Material Identification number. (Integer > 0)
MPNAME Name of material property, such as “E” or “RHO”. (Character)
MPMIN Minimum value allowed for this property. If MPNAME references a material property
that can only be positive, then the default value for MPMIN is 1.0E-15. Otherwise, it
is -1.0E35. See Remark 4. (Real)
MPMAX Maximum value allowed for this property. See Remark 4. (Real; Default = 1.0E+20)
COEFi Coefficient of linear relation or keyword = “PVAL”. (If i = 1, Real or Character; if i >
1, Real)
Remarks:
1. The relationship between the material property and design variables is given by:
MP i = C 0 +  COEF i ⋅ XDVIDi
i

3. The fifth field of the entry, MPNAME, only accepts string characters. It must be the same as the name
that appears in the Bulk Data Entries, 1071 for various material properties. For example, if the isotropic
material density is to be designed, RHO (case insensitive) must be specified on the MPNAME field.
Main Index
DVMREL1 1745
4. The default value for MPMIN and MPMAX are not applied when the linear property is a function
of a single design variable and C0=0.0. It is expected that the limits applied to the DESVAR entry
will keep the designed property within reasonable bounds.
obtained from the material bulk data entry. If a DVMREL1 entry references more than one design
Main Index
1746 DVMREL2
DVMREL2 Design Variable to Material Relation
Defines the relation between a material property and design variables with a user-supplied equation.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DVMREL2 ID TYPE MID MPNAME MPMIN MPMAX EQID
DESVAR DVID1 DVID2 DVID3 DVID4 DVID5 DVID6 DVID7
DVID8 -etc.-
DTABLE LABL1 LABL2 LABL3 LABL4 LABL5 LABL6 LABL7
LABL8 -etc.-
Example:
DVMREL2 5 MAT1 1 E 0.05 1.0 100
DESVAR 1 2
DTABLE E0
Describer Meaning
TYPE Name of a material property entry, such as “MAT1”, “MAT2”, etc. (Character)
MID Material Identification number. (Integer > 0)
MPNAME Name of material property, such as “E” or “RHO”. (Character)
MPMIN Minimum value allowed for this property. If MPNAME references a material property
that can only be positive, then the default value for MPMIN is 1.0E-15. Otherwise, it
is -1.0E35. (Real)
MPMAX Maximum value allowed for this property. (Real; Default = 1.0E+20)
DESVAR DESVAR flag. Indicates that the IDs of DESVAR entries follow. (Character)
DTABLE DTABLE flag. Indicates that the LABLs for the constants in a DTABLE or DTABLE2
entry follow. This field may be omitted if there are no constants involved in this
relation. (Character)
Main Index
DVMREL2 1747
Remarks:
1. The variables identified by DVIDi and LABLi correspond to variable names (x1, x2, etc.) listed in the
x1 through xN (where N = m + n ) are assigned in the order DVID1, DVID2, ..., DVIDm, LABL1,
LABL2, ..., LABLn.
3. The fifth field of the entry, MPNAME, only accepts string characters. It must be the same as the name
that appears in the Bulk Data Entries, 1071 for various material properties. For example, if the isotropic
material density is to be designed, RHO (case insensitive) must be specified on the MPNAME field.
Main Index
1748 DVPREL1
Design Variable to Property Relation
DVPREL1 Design Variable to Property Relation
Defines the relation between an analysis model property and design variables.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DVPREL1 ID TYPE PID PNAME/ PMIN PMAX C0
FID
DVID1 COEF1 DVID2 COEF2 DVID3 -etc.-
Example:
DVPREL1 12 PBAR 612 6 0.2 3.0
4 0.25 20 20.0 5 0.3
Describer Meaning
TYPE Name of a property entry, such as “PBAR”, “PBEAM”, etc. (Character)
PID Property entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
PNAME/FlD Property name, such as “T”, “A”, or field position of the property entry, or word
position in the element property table of the analysis model. Property names that
begin with an integer such as 12I/T**3 may only be referred to by field position.
(Character or Integer ≠ 0)
PMIN Minimum value allowed for this property. If PMIN references a property that can
only be positive, then the default value for PMIN is 1.0E-15. Otherwise, it is -
1.0E35. See Remark 6. (Real)
PMAX Maximum value allowed for this property. (Real; Default = 1.0E+20)
COEFi Coefficient of linear relation or keyword = “PVAL”. See Remark 7. (If i = 1, Real or
Character; if i > 1, Real)
Remarks:
1. The relationship between the analysis model property and design variables is given by:
Pj = C0 +  COEF i ⋅ XDVIDi
i

3. TYPE=“PBEND” is not supported. TYPE=“PBEAML” supports only PNAME and not FID.
Main Index
DVPREL1 1749
4. FID may be either a positive or a negative number. If FID > 0, it identifies the field position on a
property entry. If FID < 0, it identifies the word position of an entry in the element property table.
For example, to specify the area of a PBAR, either PNAME=A, FID=+4 or FID=-3 can be used. In
general, use of PNAME is recommended. For Type "PBUSH", PNAME is recommended, if FID is
used it must be < 0.
5. Designing PBEAML or PBEAM requires specification of both property name and station. Table 14
shows several examples.
Table 14
Property
PTYPE Name END A END B i-th Station
PBEAML DIM1 DIM1 or DIM1(B) DIM1(i)
DIM1(A)
PBEAM A A or A(A) A(B) A(i)
Only stations that are input on a PBEAM or PBEAML entry can be referenced by a DVPREL1. For
example, referencing an END B property name on a DVPREL1 entry when the referenced PBEAM
does not explicitly specify the END B station, is not allowed.
6. The default values of PMIN and PMAX are not applied when the linear property is a function of a
single design variable and C0=0. It is expected that the limits applied on the DESVAR entry will keep
the designed property within reasonable bounds.
obtained from the property bulk data entry. If a DVPREL1 entry references more than one design
8. With GPLY for TYPE field and GPLYID for PID field, a ply identified with GPLYID across all
PCOMPG entries in the model can be designed. Internally, a DVPREL1 will be spawned for each
PCOMPG has a ply ID of GPLYID. For TYPE=GPLY, the relationship between the analysis model
property and design variables is given by.
P i = C0 + ( T0 i or THETA0 i ) ⋅  ( COEF j ⋅ X DVIDj ) for PNAME=T or THETA

j
Where T0 and THETA0 are value of thickness and theta angle on the original PCOMPG. Note that
non-zero C0 is not recommended for TYPE=GPLY or PCOMPG. For THETA0 with original value
equal to 0.0, THETA0 is taken as 1.0 and it is recommended to have XINIT of DVID set to 0.0.
Main Index
1750 DVPREL2
DVPREL2 Design Variable to Property Relation
Defines the relation between an analysis model property and design variables with a user-supplied equation.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DVPREL2 ID TYPE PID PNAME/ PMIN PMAX EQID
FID
DVID8 -etc.-
LABL8 -etc.-
Example:
DVPREL2 13 PBAR 712 5 0.2 0.4 50
DESVAR 4 11 13 5
DTABLE PI YM
Describer Meaning
TYPE Name of a property entry, such as PBAR, PBEAM, etc. (Character)
PID Property entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
PNAME/FID Property name, such as “T”, “A”, or field position of the property entry, or word
position in the element property table of the analysis model. Property names that
begin with an integer such as 12I/T**3 may only be referred to by field position.
(Character or Integer ≠ 0)
PMIN Minimum value allowed for this property. If FID references a stress recovery
location field, then the default value for PMIN is -1.0+35. PMIN must be
explicitly set to a negative number for properties that may be less than zero (for
example, field ZO on the PCOMP entry). (Real; Default = 1.E-15)
PMAX Maximum value allowed for this property. (Real; Default = 1.0E20)
“DESVAR” DESVAR flag. Indicates that the IDs of DESVAR entries follow. (Character)
DTABLE2 entry follow. This field may be omitted if there are no constants
involved in this relation. (Character)
Main Index
DVPREL2 1751
Remarks:
1. The variables identified by DVIDi and LABLi correspond to variable names (x1, x2, etc.) listed in the
x1 through xN (where N = m+n) are assigned in the order DVID1, DVID2, ..., DVIDn, LABL1,
LABL2, ..., LABLm.
3. FID may be either a positive or a negative number. If FID > 0, it identifies the field position on a
property entry. If FID < 0, it identifies the word position of an entry in EPT. For example, to specify
the area of a PBAR, either PNAME=A, FID = +4 or FID = -3 may be used. In general, use of
PNAME is recommended. For Type "PBUSH", PNAME is recommended, if FID is used it must be
< 0.
4. Types “PBEND”, “PBARL” and “PBEAML” are not supported for the DVPREL2.
5. Designing PBEAM requires specification of both property name and station. Table 15 shows one
example.
Table 15
PTYPE Property Name END A END B i-th Station
PBEAM A A or A(A) A(B) A(i)
Only stations that are input on a PBEAM entry can be referenced by a DVPREL2. For example,
referencing an END B property name on a DVPREL2 entry when the referenced PBEAM does not
explicitly specify the END B station, is not allowed.
Main Index
1752 DVSHAP
Design Variable to Basis Vector(s)
DVSHAP Design Variable to Basis Vector(s)
Defines a shape basis vector by relating a design variable identification number (DVID) to columns of a
displacement matrix.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DVSHAP DVID COL1 SF1 COL2 SF2 COL3 SF3
Example:
DVSHAP 2 1 2.0 4 1.0
Describer Meaning
DVID Design variable identification number on the DESVAR entry. (Integer > 0)
COLi Column number of the displacement matrix. See Remark 2. (1 < Integer < maximum
column number in the displacement matrix.)
SFi Scaling factor applied to the COLi-th column of the displacement matrix. (Real;
Default = 1.0)
Remarks:
1. DVID must be defined on a DESVAR entry.
2. COLi must be a valid column number in the displacement matrix.
3. Multiple references to the same DVID and/or COLi will result in a linear combination of
displacement vectors. In the example above, the shape basis vector is a linear combination of the
fourth column and twice the second column.
4. The displacement matrix must have been created by SOL 700 and be available on a database, which
is attached via the DBLOCATE FMS statement shown below:
ASSIGN DISPMAT=’ physical filename of MASTER DBset ’
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(UG/UGD,GEOM1/GEOM1D,GEOM2/GEOM2D) ,
LOGICAL=DISPMAT
Main Index
DVPSURF 1753
Design Variable to Control Surface Setting Relation
DVPSURF Design Variable to Control Surface Setting Relation
Defines the relationship between a control surface setting in a particular subcase and a design variable.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DVPSURF ID AELABEL TRIMID DVID COEF
Example:
DVPSURF 10 OBDFLAP 1 100 0.01746
Describer Meaning
ID Unique identification number (Integer>0)
AELABEL LABEL of the AESURF entry that is being designed (Character ,no default)
TRIMID Associated trim set identification number (Integer>0)
DVID DESVAR entry identification number (Integer>0)
COEF Coefficient of linear relation (Real)
Remarks:
1. The relationship between the control surface setting and the design variable is given by δSURF =
COEF * XDVID
2. The surface called out by AELABEL must also appear on the trim entry specified by TRIMID. The
value specified on the trim entry will be overwritten by the value obtained from the relationship of
Remark 1.
3. Limits on the control deflection are not provided on this entry but can be specified on the underlying
DESVAR
4. The DVID called out on this entry cannot be associated with any other designed property.
5. Note that since the DVPSURF calls out a TRIM ID, it is associated only with a single subcase.
Main Index
1754 DYFSISW
Fluid Structure Interaction Activation Switch
DYFSISW Fluid Structure Interaction Activation Switch
Allows activating or deactivating Fluid Structure Interaction and Eulerian solver. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DYFSISW SWID TID INITV
Example:
DYFSISW 14 10
Describer Meaning
SWID Unique number of a DYFSISW entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
TID TABLED1 ID. Fluid Structure Interface and Euler solver are switched on and off,
depending on the y-value of the table. The x-value of the table represents the time; the
y-value denotes:
ON y > 0.0
OFF y < 0.0
INITV Euler element initialization flag. See remark 3. (Character, Default=NO)
NO Element initialization at cycle 0
YES Element initialization when the elements becomes active
Remarks:
1. The default is that COUPLE, AIRBAG and Euler solver is active at all times.
2. When Euler solver is deactivated, no output will be generated for the Eulerian elements.
3. For simulations involving a prestress phase the Euler elements can be initially deactivated. When the
Euler elements are activated the Eulerian masses still originate from the Euler initiation at cycle 0. If
during prestressing the structure did not move much, then these Eulerian masses of cycle 0 can give
a stable run. But if there has been substantial movement of the structure then Eulerian masses can be
erroneously compressed. This shows up by large pressures and velocities in the Euler elements and a
time step too small. To avoid this instability the Euler initialization can be postponed until the Euler
elements become active.
Main Index
DYPARAM, ATBAOUT 1755
Output Frequency to Main Output File of ATB - SOL 700
DYPARAM, ATBAOUT Output Frequency to Main Output File of ATB - SOL 700
Defines the frequency at which output is written to the main output file of ATB. Used in SOL700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM, ATBAOUT, value
Example:
DYPARAM, ATBAOUT, 5.0E-3
Option Content
Value Every multiple of ATBAOUT seconds, the main output file of ATB is updated. (Real
> 0.0; default=10.0E-3)
Remarks:
1. Only active when field 3 on the A5 card of the ATB input file is set to a value of -1.
2. Controls the frequency of the output of segment acceleration, velocity and displacement, joint forces
and moments.
Main Index
1756 DYPARAM, ATBHOUT
Write ATB Output to Time history files - SOL 700
DYPARAM, ATBHOUT Write ATB Output to Time history files - SOL 700
A time-history file is created containing the output as requested in the ATB input file on cards H.1 to H.11.
Used in SOL700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM, ATBHOUT, option
Example:
DYPARAM, ATBHOUT, NO
Option Content
Option Flag of ATBHOUT. (Character; default=YES)
YES: The time history files are created.
NO: The time history files are not created.
Main Index
DYPARAM, ATBTOUT 1757
Output Frequency to Time-History Files of ATB - SOL 700
DYPARAM, ATBTOUT Output Frequency to Time-History Files of ATB - SOL 700
Defines the frequency at which output is written to the time-history files of ATB. Used in SOL700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM, ATBTOUT, value
Example:
DYPARAM, ATBTOUT, 1.0E-4
Option Content
Value Every multiple of ATBTOUT seconds, the time-history files of ATB are updated.
(Real > 0.0; default=1.0E-3)
Remarks:
1. Only active when field 26 on the A5 card of the ATB input file is set to a value of -1.
2. Controls the frequency of all output requested on the H-cards, and of the tabular time-histories that are
controlled by field 18 on the A5 card of the ATB input file.
Main Index
1758 DYPARAM,AUTOCOUP
Automatic Coupling
DYPARAM,AUTOCOUP Automatic Coupling
Defines the automatic coupling algorithm. Used in Sol700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,AUTOCOUP,ACTIVE,CLEAN,DUMMY, TOL_AREA, OUTPUT, FAIL
Example:
DYPARAM, AUTOCOUP, ON
Describer Meaning
ACTIVE Flag of activation of the sub element approach. (Character; default=OFF)
ON Turn on the sub element approach.
OFF Turn off the sub element approach.
CLEAN Flag of cleaning obsolete sub elements. (Character; default=OFF)
ON Cleans obsolete sub elements
OFF Obsolete elements will not be removed from memory.
DUMMY Flag of putting dummy segments on coupling surface archives. (Character; default=OFF)
ON Puts dummy segments on the coupling surface archive
OFF Does not put dummy segments on the coupling surface archive.
TOL_AREA If the area of a hole is smaller than TOL_AREA a 1D flow computation method is used.
(Real ≥ 0.0; default=0.0).
OUTPUT Determines how results of Euler elements that are intersected by the structure are written
to the Euler archive. (Character, Default = ZERO).
ZERO Write zero for the results of these intersected elements.
AVERAGE Average across sub elements. Each sub element has the same weight.
AVEREAGEU Average across sub element using the uncover fraction as weights.
MAXUNC The results are taken from the sub element with the largest volume
uncover fraction.
COVER Uses the cover field of COUPLE to select the proper sub element. Only
supported for COVER=OUTSIDE or COVER=INSIDE. Not
supported for COVER =NONE.
FAIL Activates fluid flow through failed shell segments in the coupling surface. (Character;
there is no default, if failure is not used, then FAIL should be left blank)
POROUS Makes failed segment porous. This is the fast coupling approach.
Main Index
DYPARAM,AUTOCOUP 1759
Automatic Coupling
REMOVE Removes the failed segments from the coupling surface.
Remarks:
1. Features that are not supported are:
• Multiple Euler domain
• Adaptive Euler meshes
• Fluid flow through failed segments in the coupling surface failure can only be defined by option
FAIL of DYPARAM, AUTOCOUP. Defining this failure by use of COUP1FL and COUPINT
is not supported.
• COUPLE with option AIRBAG
• Graded meshes
• Euler import
• Viscosity
• Porosity
• Option FAIL=POROUS and REMOVE are not supported by DMP.
• Markers
2. With automatic coupling fluid can be defined on both sides of the coupling surface. To do this option
COVER of the COUPLE entry has to be set to NONE. When using COVER = OUTSIDE fluid is
only initialized in the inside region of the coupling surface. For COVER = INSIDE the opposite
applies. When the coupling surface is not closed, only COVER=NONE is allowed.
3. In the auto coupling approach holes in the coupling surface are meshed with dummy segments. For
holes with large deformations PARAM DUMSEGS, ON can be used to maintain good dummy
segments.
4. For adding FAIL = POROUS failed segments have to be made fully porous. This is straightforward.
5. FAIL = REMOVE. When the structure fails, holes in the coupling surface are formed. For a closed
coupling surface each side of a segment is connected to another segment. Therefore, the segments
have no free edges. But a segment adjacent to a hole has a free edge. At this edge it is not connected
to any other segment. A list of free edges of the coupling surface specifies the holes.By maintaining a
list of free edges auto coupling handles these holes automatically. If a segment fails, this list of free
edges has to be updated. Also the failed segment has to be removed from the coupling surface.
Main Index
1760 DYPARAM,AUTOCOUP
Automatic Coupling
Note: This entry also supports DMP. While using for DMP, no changes to input is
needed. In the auto coupling method Euler elements that are intersected by the
structure are split into sub elements. For details refer to [1]. To enable dmp for auto
coupling some of the properties of sub elements have to be communicated across
CPU's.If holes in the coupling surface extend across multiple CPUs, also
communication across CPU's is needed.
Main Index
DYPARAM,AXIALSYM 1761
Axial Symmetric Analyses - SOL 700
DYPARAM,AXIALSYM Axial Symmetric Analyses - SOL 700
Enables an efficient and accurate 2-D axial symmetry for Eulerian materials. A much larger time step becomes
possible by not taking into account the mesh-size in circumferential direction. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,AXIALSYM,MESHTYPE,AXIALAXIS,SYMPLAN,PHI,ALIGN,PHI2
Example:
DYPARAM,AXIALSYM,RECT,X,XY,2.5,YES,0.0
Describer Meaning
MESHTYPE Two types of Euler meshes are supported: (Character; Required)
AXIAL Axial symmetric meshes.
RECT Rectangular meshes
AXIAL AXIS X X-Axis (Character; Required)
Y Y-Axis
Z Z-Axis
SYMPLAN The approximate symmetry plan of the Euler mesh. On for MESHTYPE=AXIAL. See
Remark 7. (Character; Required)
XY XY-Plane
YZ YZ-Plane
ZX ZX-Plane
PHI Only used for MESHTYPE = RECT. Used to create a 2D axial symmetric mesh with
angles +PHI/2 and -PHI/2. (Real; Default = 0.0)
ALIGN Only used for MESHTYPE = AXIAL. (Character; Default = YES)
YES Align normals of oblique Euler element faces. This prevents errors in
strains that can arise from small errors in Euler face normals.
NO Do not align normals.
PHI2 As a final operation rotate the mesh around the axial axis by the angle PHI2. See
Remarks:
1. Only available for Eulerian elements and does not support Lagrange elements. The effect of this
parameter is not limited to the solvers. Also Euler archives will reflect the modified Euler mesh
geometry.
Main Index
1762 DYPARAM,AXIALSYM
Axial Symmetric Analyses - SOL 700
2. The Euler mesh can already be symmetric but also a rectangular mesh comprising of one layer can be
used. Using the angle specified by PHI this Euler mesh is mapped into a 2d axial symmetric mesh.
3. The Euler mesh has to consist of one layer.
4. Rectangular meshes that can be made 2d symmetric using the angle PHI should satisfy:
• All boundary Euler faces are aligned with a coordinate direction
• Only one layer thick.
• The axial symmetry axis is either on the boundary of the Euler mesh or outside the Euler mesh.
It is not allowed that the axial axis is inside the Euler mesh.
Initialization of Euler element using geometric regions as defined by the TICEUL entry is carried
out onto the transformed 2d axial mesh.
5. In the time step computation the circumferential mesh-size will not be taken into account.
6. Use option PHI2 with caution. Euler initialization is done using the mesh rotated by the angle PHI2.
So after including the angle PHI2 or modifying its value the Euler initialization should be revised.
7. It is assumed that one of the coordinate planes is an approximate symmetry plane of the Euler mesh.
Although approximate symmetry is sufficient, the coordinate plane can always be made an exact
symmetry plane by the use of PHI2. If for example the Euler mesh has angles 0 and 2.5, PHI2 has to
be set to -1.25 to get exact symmetry.
Main Index
DYPARAM,AXREMAP 1763
2D Axial symmetric Euler archive remap - SOL 700
DYPARAM,AXREMAP 2D Axial symmetric Euler archive remap - SOL 700
Allows import of a 2D axial symmetric Euler archive into a 3D simulation.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DYPARAM AXREMAP x0 y0 z0 xn yn zn range
Example:
DYPARAM AXREMAP 0.0 0.5 0.5 1. 0. 0.
Describer Meaning
x0,y0,z0 x,y,z-coordinate of the point at which the 2D axial symmetric mesh is remapped. (Real;
Default = 0.0)
xn,yn,zn Unit vector that specifies the direction of the axial axis of the 2D axial symmetric mesh
as viewed in the 3D mesh. (Real; Default = (1.0. , 0.0, 0.0 )
range Only material whose distance from the axial axis is smaller than "range" will be
initialized with the 2D axi-symmetric Euler archive. (Real, Default = 1e+20)
Remarks:
1. Since 2D axial symmetric simulations run much faster than 3D simulation it can save much cpu time
to do the first part of the simulation with a 2D axial symmetric mesh. Afterwards the 2D-axial
symmetric Euler archive is imported into the 3D simulation. By default the 2D axial symmetric
archive will not be expanded in 3D. To enable this expansion DYPARAM, AXREMAP has to be
used. It is useful for blast wave simulations. The 2D axial symmetric simulation has to be terminated
before the blast wave approaches any 3D structure.
2. This import of Euler archives is done by means of the eid option in the pth file.
3. To generate axial symmetric meshes DYPARAM,AXIALSYM can be used.
Main Index
1764 DYPARAM,BULKL
Linear Bulk Viscosity Coefficient
DYPARAM,BULKL Linear Bulk Viscosity Coefficient
Defines the default value of the linear bulk viscosity coefficient.
Format:
DYPARAM,BULKL,VALUE
Example:
DYPARAM,BULKL,0.1
Describer Meaning
value Value of the linear coefficient in the bulk viscosity equation. (Real ≥ 0.0; default=0.0)
Remarks:
1. The default value works well for the majority of problems.
2. The value defined on this entry is used as the default whenever BULKL is blank on the MATBV
material entry.
3. When BULKL is specified on a material definition entry, the default value is overridden for that
specific material.
Main Index
DYPARAM,BULKQ 1765
Quadratic Bulk Viscosity Coefficient
DYPARAM,BULKQ Quadratic Bulk Viscosity Coefficient
Defines the default value of the quadratic bulk viscosity coefficient.
Format:
DYPARAM,BULKQ,VALUE
Example:
DYPARAM, BULKQ,1.6
Describer Meaning
value Value of the quadratic coefficient in the bulk viscosity equation. (Real ≥ 0.0; default=0.0)
Remarks:
1. The default value works well in the majority of situations.
2. The value defined on this entry is used as the default whenever BULKQ is blank on the MATBV
material entry.
3. When BULKQ is specified on a material definition entry, the default value is overridden for that
specific material.
Main Index
1766 DYPARAM,BULKTYP
Bulk Viscosity Type
DYPARAM,BULKTYP Bulk Viscosity Type
Defines the default type of bulk viscosity.
Format:
DYPARAM,BULKTYP,option
Example:
DYPARAM, BULKTYP,DYNA
Describer Meaning
Option bulk viscosity type. (Character; Default=DYNA)
DYNA Standard DYNA3D model
DYTRAN Enhanced DYNA model
Remarks:
Main Index
DYPARAM,CFULLRIG 1767
Converts 123456 Constraints to FULLRIG on RBE2
DYPARAM,CFULLRIG Converts 123456 Constraints to FULLRIG on RBE2
Converts all 123456 constraints to the FULLRIG option on all entries. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,CFULLRIG,value
Example:
DYPARAM,CFULLRIG,NO
Describer Meaning
value Activation flag. (Character; Default=YES)
YES 123456 constraints are converted to FULLRIG.
NO 123456 constraints are not converted to FULLRIG.
Main Index
1768 DYPARAM,CLUFLIM
Limiter of Volume Stain Rate for Clumps
DYPARAM,CLUFLIM Limiter of Volume Stain Rate for Clumps
In some cases, airbag runs become instable. Often, this is caused by a much too large volume strain rate
in a clump that consists of too many elements. These clumps typically have a small average volume
uncovered fraction. The large volume strain rate causes a huge compression work and this blows up the
specific internal energy. When this happens it is clearly visible in the OUT file and in the results. This
DYPARAM activates a limiter that scales down the volume strain rate for clumps with a small average
uncovered fraction. It can keep an instable airbag run stable, just like PARAM, VELMAX can keep
runs stable. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,CLUFLIM,value
Example:
DYPARAM,CLUFLIM,0.22
Describer Meaning
value The volume strain rate in a clump will be reduced when the average Uncovered Fraction
of elements in a CLump falls below CLUFLIM. CLUFLIM has to be smaller than
FBLEND. The default value of FBLEND is 0.66 giving a value of 0.22 for CLUFLIM.
For more details on FBLEND refer to PARAM,FBLEND. (0<Real<FLBEND;
default=FBLEND/3)
Remarks:
1. The Volume strain rate DIV

----------- in clumps will be limited by
Δt
 DIV
-----------
U DIV
= MIN  1, -----------------------------  -----------
 Δt  Lim  CLUFLIM  Δt 
Here, U is the average uncovered fraction of elements in the clump as given by

Σ eleclump Uncf el ⋅ Vol el
U = -----------------------------------------------------------
Σ eleclump
Here Uncf and Vol denote the uncovered fraction and volume of an element inside the clump.
Therefore, only when the average uncover fraction falls below CLUFLIM, the volume strain rate is
limited.
Main Index
DYPARAM,CLUMPENR 1769
Switch for Kinetic Energy Calculation Scheme of Blended Clumps
DYPARAM,CLUMPENR Switch for Kinetic Energy Calculation Scheme of Blended

Clumps
Sets the definition of the kinetic energy calculation method for Eulerian blended clumps. Used in SOL 700
only.
Format:
DYPARAM,CLUMPENR,value
Example:
DYPARAM,CLUMPENR,SUM
Describer Meaning
value Flag for CLUMPENR.(Character; default=AVERAGE)
AVERAGE The kinetic energy of a Eulerian blended clump is calculated from the
average velocity of the clump. The average velocity of the blended clump
is computed as the sum of the momentum of each member of the clump
divided by the total clump mass.
SUM The kinetic energy of a Eulerian blended clump is calculated as the sum of
the kinetic energy of each member of the clump.
Main Index
1770 DYPARAM,CONM2OUT
CONM2 Summary Output
DYPARAM,CONM2OUT CONM2 Summary Output
Determines if a summary of concentrated masses and their energy and momentum is written to the output
file. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,CONM2OUT,value
Example:
DYPARAM,CONM2OUT,NO
Describer Meaning
value Flag for COMN2OUT. (Character; default=NO)
NO No information about concentrated masses is written to the cycle and
material summaries on the output file.
YES A complete summary of concentrated masses including the associated
mass, momentum, and energy is written to the output file.
Remarks:
1. When DYPARAM,CONM2OUT is set to NO, there is no summary of the concentrated mass. This
means that the mass, momentum, and energy of the concentrated masses, is not added to the material
and cycle summaries. Setting DYPARAM,CONM2OUT,NO saves memory and CPU time.
Main Index
DYPARAM,CONTACT 1771
Sets Defaults for CONTACT
DYPARAM,CONTACT Sets Defaults for CONTACT
Defines certain defaults for the contact definitions. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,CONTACT,option,value1,value2,value3,value4,value5,value6
Example:
DYPARAM,CONTACT,VERSION,V4
Describer Meaning
VERSION Defined the default version of contact. Only support value1. (Character; required)
V4 General Contact algorithm of SOL700
BELT Suited for modeling contact between a belt element and a rigid structure.
Master slave contact only.
The contact logic doesn't apply a contact force, but applies an enforced
displacement and velocity that keeps the slave nodes exactly on top of the
master face.
The slave node does not slide relative to the master face when the friction
coefficient (FS) is set to 1E20.
BELT1 Identical to BELT algorithm, except that the slave nodes are initially
repositioned on top of the closest master face.
DRAWBEAD Suited for modeling a drawbead.
THICK Defines the default value for THICK. Only support vaule1. (Real>0.0; required.)
GAP Defines the default value for GAP. Only support vaule1. (Real>0.0; required.)
LIMITS Definition of a three dimensional contact region where contact in the analysis model takes
place. Significant CPU time savings can be achieved when used in adaptive contact. 6
values are used to define area.
The format of this option is

DYPARAM,CONTACT,LIMITS,xmin,xmax,ymin,ymax,zmin.zmax.
(Real; default=1.0E20 for xmax, ymax and zmax and -1.0E20 for xmin, ymin and zmin)
XMIN(value1) Lower limit in x-direction where main contact occurs
XMAX(value2) Upper limit in x-direction where main contact occurs
YMIN(value3) Lower limit in y-direction where main contact occurs
YMAX(value4) Upper limit in y-direction where main contact occurs
ZMIN(value5) Lower limit in z-direction where main contact occurs
ZMAX(value6) Upper limit in z-direction where main contact occurs
DAMPING Defines the default for usage of damping. Only support value1. (Character; required)
YES Use damping in CONTACT
Main Index
1772 DYPARAM,CONTACT
Describer Meaning
NO Not use damping in CONTACT
COPOR Activates contact based porosity. Only support value1. (Character; default=NO)
YES Use porosity in CONTACT
NO Not use porosity in CONTACT
DAMPFOR Defines whether the noncontact forces acting on the grid points need to be taken into
account in the contact damping. This option is only used if DAMPING is set to YES. This
option prevents large penetrations that might occur when the forces acting on the grid
points tend to push them into the contact surface. This happens, for example, in airbag
analyses, where a large pressure exists inside the bag. Only support value1. (Character;
required)
YES Damping is considered in noncontact forces
NO Damping is not considered in noncontact forces
DYNA The following parameters of the contact definition get the default values consistent with
Dyna. (Character ; required)
THICK 1.0
THICKOF 0.0
INFO Information on the contact state of grid points G1,G2,... is printed to ASCII files, named
CNT. This information can be useful in debugging models with contacts. Supports many
values as you want. (Integer > 0; required.)
EVIEW Defines the default value of the view angle of Edge to Edge contacts. The value of the angle
must be in degrees. Only support value1. (Real > 0.0; required)
FORCE Controls the contact forces on the grid points. Supports value1, value2, value3. See
Remark 1. (value1: Integer > 0; default=10, value2: Real > 0; default=10.0; value3:
Character; default=ZERO)
NMCYC Frequency check of contact force; applied on each grid point. (Integer > 0;
(value1) default = 100).
SCALE Scale factor for maximum allowable contact force.
(value2) F ma x = SCALE ⋅ F last check (Integer > 0; default = 10)
TYPE Contact force limitation. (Character; default=ZERO)

(value3)
ZERO 0.0
FMAXF Update contact limit forces using new contact forces (where
non allowable forces are not taken into account)
Main Index
DYPARAM,CONTACT 1773
Remarks:
1. The DYPARAM,FORCE check takes up some CPU time and, therefore, do not make this value too
small. Furthermore, when the check is performed at each cycle, the force will be too limited and the
bag will not unfold. Recommended values are between 5 and 200. The same problems can occur for
SCALE(value2). In case this value is too small, the bag will not unfold either. The minimum
value for air bags that should be used is about 5. The maximum is about 20. When this value is too
big a difference will not be noticed. TYPE(value3)=ZERO is a bigger restriction. In some cases,
TYPE=FMAXF might yield better results.
Main Index
1774 DYPARAM,COSUBMXT
Time-dependent Subcycle Limit in Euler/Lagrange Coupling
DYPARAM,COSUBMXT Time-dependent Subcycle Limit in Euler/Lagrange

Coupling
Defines the maximum number of subcycles that can occur in Euler/Lagrange coupling. During a subcycle,
the geometry of the coupling surface is not updated. This number can vary in time and is given by a table.
Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,COSUBMXT,value
Example:
DYPARAM,COSUBMAT,10
Describer Meaning
value TABLED1 ID that specifies for each time the maximum number of time steps between
updating the coupling surface geometry in the coupling calculations. (Integer > 0;
required)
Remarks:
2. The smaller the value of this parameter, the greater the accuracy of the analysis and the greater the
cost. Conversely, larger values offer significant CPU savings, but very large values give incorrect
results.
3. If the geometry of the coupling surface is changing rapidly, smaller values on the table should be used.
Main Index
DYPARAM,COUFRIC 1775
Coupling Surface Friction for Nonmetallic Eulerian Solids
DYPARAM,COUFRIC Coupling Surface Friction for Nonmetallic Eulerian Solids
Defines the Coulomb friction scheme. Please check DYPARAM,COHESION too. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,COUFRIC,value
Example:
DYPARAM,COUFRIC,NO-METAL
Describer Meaning
value Flag for COUFRIC usage. (Character; default=METAL)
METAL A tensile condition will result in zero load on the structure part on cohesive
coupling.
NO- a tensile load was applied in tensile condition on cohesive coupling.
METAL
Remarks:
1. Only used when Coulomb friction coefficients have been specified for a COUPLE entry.
Main Index
1776 DYPARAM,COHESION
Cohesion for Coulomb Friction - SOL 700
DYPARAM,COHESION Cohesion for Coulomb Friction - SOL 700
Allows friction and sticking during tensile conditions at the coupling surface.
Format:
DYPARAM,COHESION,MAXSTRS,FRIC,REFVEL
Example:
DYPARAM,COHESION,8.0e+10,8.0e+5,20.0
Describer Meaning
MAXSTRS Maximal normal stress. Allows tensile stresses at the coupling surface as long as the normal
stress does not exceed MAXSTRS. (Real > 0)
FRIC Friction stress under tensile conditions. (Real > 0)
REFVEL Reference value for velocity. (Real > 0)
Remarks:
1. Only used when coulomb friction coefficients have been specified for a COUPLE entry.
2. During tension any relative tangential velocity between coupling surface and Eulerian material will
yield a shear stress whose magnitude equals:
V rel,tangential
FRIC ⋅ min  1, ----------------------------
 REFVEL 
This is a viscous-like friction law.

3. This shear force opposes the relative tangential movement along the coupling surface.
Main Index
DYPARAM DUMSEGS 1777
Creating dummy segments for the auto coupling approach
DYPARAM DUMSEGS Creating dummy segments for the auto coupling approach
Specifies how holes in the coupling surface are meshed. It is only used for the auto coupling approach. This
approach is activated by DYPARAM, AUTOCOUP.
Format and Example:

DYPARAM,DUMSEGS,INTERNAL
Describer Meaning
INTERNAL Meshes internal holes with a triangular dummy segment mesh [YES,NO] Default NO
Remarks:
1. With the auto coupling method, holes are partially or completely meshed with dummy segments.
With option NO the standard method of creating dummy segment is used. For details see chapter 8
of the SOL700 User’s Guide. In this standard method holes are partially meshed with dummy
segments. For an example refer to Figure 20 of Chapter 8. For holes that rotate, have arbitrary form
or show large deformations, the standard method of creating dummy segments can cause the
simulation to terminate with messages like
%E-P4307807-P4_SUBELM_MESH_CURVED_HOLES, , ,(13), DUMMY SURFACE
CANNOT BE TRIANGULATED THIS IS PROGRAM ERROR. PLEASE CONTACT
MSC. USING PARAM,DUMSEGS,ON CAN SOLVE THIS TRIANGULATION
PROBLEM.
%E-P4309907-V4_SUBELEM_CONNECT_EXTENDED_GPS, , DUMMY SURFACE
CANNOT BE TRIANGULATED THIS IS PROGRAM ERROR. PLEASE CONTACT
MSC. USING PARAM,DUMSEGS,ON CAN SOLVE THIS TRIANGULATION
PROBLEM.
In that case PARAM,DUMSEGS,ON can maintain a good dummy surface. The quality of the
dummy surface can be checked by requesting a coupling surface archive. This is done by using the
CPLSURFS command and by putting option DUMMY of DYPARAM, AUTOCOUP to ON. For
all holes that are not internal holes, the standard method is used.
Main Index
1778 DYPARAM,ELDLTH
DYPARAM,ELDLTH
Print initial time step sizes for elements in the first cycle in SOL 700.
Format:
DYPARAM,ELDLTH,<value>
Example:
DYPARAM,ELDLTH,1
Describer Meaning
value Number of elements to be output. (Integer)
0 First 100 elements with the smallest time step sizes are printed.
1 The governing time step sized for all elements are printed. (Default)
Main Index
DYPARAM,EULERCB 1779
Euler Domain Decomposition Control
DYPARAM,EULERCB Euler Domain Decomposition Control
Divides a Euler domain into several cubes. For SOL 700 only
Format:
DYPARAM,EULERCB,NELCUBE,NBX,NBY,NBZ
Example:
DYPARAM,EULERCB,2000,2,2,2
Describer Meaning
NELCUBE The number of elements per cube. (Integer; Default = 0)
NBX The number of cubes in the x-direction. See Remark 2. (Integer; Default = 0)
NBY The number of cubes in the y-direction. (Integer; Default = NBX)
NBZ The number of cubes in the z-direction. (Integer; Default = NBX)
Remarks:
1. By setting NELCUBE equal to 2000 optimal use is made of memory caching during Euler
computation. This may give a speedup of 1.5. When using adaptive meshing with dmp additional
Euler cubes are created during the simulation. To keep the total number of cubes that are created
within bounds the initial number of cubes should be limited to 100.
2. Defining NBX overrules the definition of NELCUBE.
3. Only supports Euler domains created by MESH,BOX. Limitations are:
• No PEULERx/CHEXA's
• No FLOW or BARRIER that use the BCID option are allowed. All FLOW and BARRIER
entries must use either the DIR option or the XMIN,YMIN,ZMIN, XMAX,YMAX,ZMAX
option to define the Euler MESH boundaries.
Main Index
1780 DYPARAM,EULERPR
Euler Cube Partition Control
DYPARAM,EULERPR Euler Cube Partition Control
Divides a Euler domain into several cubes. For SOL 700 only
Format:
DYPARAM,EULERPR,PROCDIR,NPX,NPY,NPZ
Example:
DYPARAM,EULERPR,USER,2,2,2
Describer Meaning
PROCDIR This directive controls the way cubes are distributed across processors. The effect can be
checked by checking the Eulerian output variable PARTITION. (Character; Default = X)
X Partition in global X direction first.
Y Partition in global Y direction first.
Z Partition in global Z direction first.
USER Define user defined partitioning
SIMPLE Partition Euler cubes in a simple pattern.
ORB Partitions using orthogonal recursive bisection
NPX The number of cubes in the x-direction. Required for PROCDIR=USER. (Integer;
Default = 0)
NPY The number of cubes in the y-direction. (Integer; Default = NPX)
NPZ The number of cubes in the z-direction. (Integer; Default = NPX)
Remarks:
1. There are several ways to distribute cubes across processors. Some ways may lead to bad load
balancing. To avoid this it is possible to control the way Euler cubes are distributed across processors
by defining PROCDIR.
2. When option PROCDIR=USER, the values for NBX, NBY and NBZ must be such that NBX is
equal or a multiple of NPX, NBY is equal or a multiple of NPY and NBZ is equal or a multiple of
NPZ. Also for this option, NPX*NPY*NPZ must be equal to the number of processors used in the
cluster.
3. For option PROCDIR=SIMPLE, the values NBX, NBY and NBZ on DYPARAM,EULERCB must
be such that NBX*NBY*NBZ is equal or a multiple of the number of processors used. For instance,
if the number of processors in the cluster is 4, NBX*NBY*NBZ must be equal to either 4 or 8 or 12,
etc. Otherwise the calculation will terminate prematurely with an error message.
4. Only supports Euler domains created by MESH,BOX. Limitations are:
• No MESH,ADAPT and no PEULERx/CHEXA’s
Main Index
DYPARAM,EULERPR 1781
Euler Cube Partition Control
• No FLOW or BARRIER that use the BCID option are allowed. All FLOW and BARRIER
entries must use either the DIR option or the XMIN,YMIN,ZMIN, XMAX,YMAX,ZMAX
option to define the Euler MESH boundaries.
5. With the orthogonal recursive bisection method the mesh is repeatedly cut in half. Each cut is along
a coordinate direction and the direction of the cut is chosen to minimize the communication cost. To
illustrate this method consider for example a mesh with 200,150 and 50 elements in respectively the
x,y and z-direction. When split in x-direction the number of Euler faces at the split will be 150*50 =
7500. When splitting across the y-direction it will be 200*50=10000 and for the z-direction it will be
200*150=30000. Since the x-split has the smallest number of faces at the split, the x-split has the
smallest communication cost. Therefore the ORB scheme will select the x-split. At the x-split there
are two mesh parts. Both have 100*150*50 elements. Now a split in y-direction will give the minimal
communication costs. This process of bisecting is continued until the number of sub meshes equals
the number of CPU's.
Main Index
1782 DYPARAM,EULTRAN
Switch for Euler Transport Scheme of the Multi-Material Solver and the Single Material Strength Solver
DYPARAM,EULTRAN Switch for Euler Transport Scheme of the Multi-Material

Solver and the Single Material Strength Solver
Sets the definition of the face velocity used in the transport scheme of the Multi-material solver and the single
material strength solver. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,EULTRAN,option1,option2
Example:
DYPARAM,EULTRAN,AVERAGE,FAIL
Describer Meaning
Option1 IMPULSE The face velocity is impulse weighted. (Character; Default = IMPULSE)
AVERAGE The face velocity is a simple average.
Option2 NOFAIL Failure is transported. See Remark 5. and 6. (Character; Default =
NOFAIL)
FAIL Failure is transported. See Remark 5. and 6.
Remarks:
1. The default value of IMPULSE is sufficient for most Euler problems. Especially problems where the
reference density of the different materials varies widely (e.g., orders of magnitude) are required to use
the default option.
2. In case the IMPULSE option (default) is used, the Euler transport scheme computes that the face
velocity uses an impulse weighted average of the material velocity in the left and the right element
adjacent to the face.
3. In case the AVERAGE option is used, the Euler transport scheme computes the face velocity as one-
half times the sum of the material velocity in the left and the right element adjacent to the face.
4. Does not apply to the single material hydrodynamic solver and the Roe solver.
5. The option FAIL requires a failure model for at least one Eulerian material. In case of the default
NOFAIL then failed Euler material can support shear stress again as soon as new material enters the
Euler element. Thus the information that part of the material inside the Euler element has failed is
lost. The option FAIL activates transport of fail fraction and thereby keeps track of material that has
failed. In this way only the failed part of the element can no longer supports shear stresses. In more
detail, the yield stress in the material is scaled by (1-failfrac), where failfrac denotes the fail fraction of
the material. The fail fraction of the first material in an element can be retrieved from Euler archive
or time-history results files in the variable DAMAGE. The value of fail fraction DAMAGE is between
zero and one.
6. Option FAIL cannot be combined with the Johnson-Cook failure model (FAILJC).
Main Index
DYPARAM,EUSUBMAX 1783
DYPARAM,EUSUBMAX
Defines the maximum number of subcycles that can occur in the Euler solver. During a subcycle, the Euler
computations are skipped. Used in SOL 700 only.
If coupling surface computations are more expensive than Euler computations than use of
PARAM,COSUBMAX should be considered first. In that case the optimal setting of EUSUBMAX is
LINKCS=BOTH and DFVUMAX is blank.
As with PARAM,COSUBMAX use of EUSUBMAX can lead to loss of accuracy for certain simulations. It is
recommended to validate the use of EUSUBMAX by comparing the difference in results between using
EUSUBMAX and not using EUSUBMAX for some typical target simulations.
Format
DYPARAM,EUSUBMAX,NSUBMAX,DFVUMAX,LINKCS
Example:
DYPARAM,EUSUBMAX,5
Describer Meaning
NSUBMAX NSUBMAX, The maximum number of time steps between updating Euler variables.
DFVUMAX Maximum allowed increase in uncovered volume fraction between to subsequent Eulerian
computations. (Real > 0; Required when COSUBMAX is present. Leave blank when
COSUBMAX is not present.)
LINKCS Specifies interactions between Euler subcycling and coupling surface subcycling.
EUSUBMAX can be used with COSUBMAX. LINKCS specifies how the two subcycling
processes influence each other. (Character; Default = BOTH)
BOTH The Euler computations will not be skipped when the coupling surface
computations has been done. On the other hand if an Euler computation
is to be done, also a coupling surface computation is done. The number
of time that the Euler computation I skipped equals the number of times
that the coupling surface computation has been done.
COUPLE If an Euler computation is to be done, also a coupling surface
computation is done.
EULER If a coupling surface computation is to be done, also a Euler computation

is done.
NONE The Euler subcycling and coupling surface subcycling are independent.
DFVUMAX has to be defined.
Main Index
1784 DYPARAM,EUSUBMAX
Remarks:
2. The smaller the value of DFVUMAX, the greater the accuracy of the analysis and the greater the cost.
Conversely, larger values offer significant CPU savings, but very large values give incorrect results.
3. When the Euler time step is considerably larger than the Lagrange time step it can be worthwhile to
skip the Euler computation for several cycles. This can reduce computational costs considerable.
4. Skipping the Euler computation for several cycles, leads to postponed time steps. When the Euler
computations are done these have to be taken into account by fluxing with an accumulated time step.
Skipping the Euler computation is stopped as soon as the accumulated time step will become larger
than the stable Euler time step. The total number of skipped cycles is limited by NSUBMAX.
NSUBMAX is required input.
5. In skipping the Euler computation also the movement of the coupling surface has to be monitored.
To estimate this movement the change in uncovered fraction of the elements is used. If the change in
uncovered volume fraction from one cycle to the other is larger than DFVUMAX than the Euler
computation is not skipped that cycle. DFVUMAX has to be left blank if coupling surface subcycling
is used. Coupling surface subcycling already monitors the movement of the coupling surface.
Choosing too large values for DFVUMAX can make results inaccurate.
6. EUSUBMAX is only supported by the multi-material Euler solver and the standard single material
Euler solver. It is not supported by the Roe solver.
Main Index
DYPARAM,EUSUBCYC 1785
Growth or Subcycling Interval in Euler Computations
DYPARAM,EUSUBCYC Growth or Subcycling Interval in Euler Computations
Controls the growth of the subcycling interval in Euler computations. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,EUSUBCYC,value
Example:
DYPARAM,EUSUBCYC,100
Describer Meaning
value Maximum growth of the subcycling interval. (Integer > 0; default=1)
Remarks:
For example, EUSUBCYC is set to 1, and the current number of time steps between updates of the
Euler variables. If Dytran estimates that the subcycling interval should be 7, the subcycling interval is
increased by 1 until a value of 7 is reached.
Main Index
1786 DYPARAM,FAILDT
Element Time-step Based Failure Model
DYPARAM,FAILDT Element Time-step Based Failure Model
Defines the property of a failure model where element failure occurs when the element’s time step falls below
the specified limit. Used in SOL 700 only
Format:
DYPARAM,FAILDT,value
Example:
DYPARAM,FAILDT,1.0E-3
Describer Meaning
value Minimum time-step. (Real > 0.0; default=1.0E-20)
Remarks:
1. This failure model is valid for all Lagrangian solid (CHEXA)and shell (CQUAD4) elements.
2. All elements for which the time step falls below the specified value are removed from the
computation.
3. Although it is not usually necessary to limit the element time-step for Lagrangian elements, there are
occasions where specifying a minimum time-step can be advantageous for computational
performance, for example, when adaptive contact is used.
4. Note that this parameter should be used with care as you may influence the results of the analysis
when you set the time-step criterion to a too high value. You then run the risk that elements are
removed from the analysis while they may still be relevant.
Main Index
DYPARAM,FAILOUT 1787
Failed Element Output Parameter
DYPARAM,FAILOUT Failed Element Output Parameter
Defines whether failed elements are written to the output file (ARCHIVES). Used in SOL700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,FAILOUT,value
Example:
DYPARAM,FAILOUT,NO
Describer Meaning
value Flag for FAILOUT. (Character; default=YES)
NO Failed elements are not written to the archive files.
YES Failed elements are written to the archive files.
Remarks:
1. When the NO option is chosen, the archives are written out as one file per requested time step
regardless of the number set in the SAVE command for the archive files that appear in the Case
Control Section. Please check $S700.
Main Index
1788 DYPARAM,FLOWMETH
Flow-Method Between Two Euler Domains Across Open Areas in Coupling Surfaces
DYPARAM,FLOWMETH Flow-Method Between Two Euler Domains Across Open

Areas in Coupling Surfaces
Defines the method for simulating material flow between two Euler domains across open areas in coupling
surfaces. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,FLOWMETH,value
Example:
DYPARAM,FLOWMETH,POLPACK
Describer Meaning
value Flag for FLOWMETH. (Character; default=NO)
POLPACK The facets in the coupling surfaces that represent an open area are
subdivided into smaller facets, with each connecting exactly to one Euler
element in the first Euler domain and to exactly one Euler element in the
second Euler domain. Material flow takes place across these smaller,
subdivided facets (POLPACKs). This is the most accurate method.
FACET The facets in the coupling surfaces that represent an open area are not
subdivided. Material flow takes place across the original facets. If these
facets are too large in relation with the Euler elements, the method
becomes inaccurate. Material flow across one facet can involve several Euler
elements on both sides of the hole and averaging occurs.
Remarks:
1. This parameter applies to simulations where:
• Two coupling surfaces share a common set of facets.
• Each coupling surface has own Euler domain.
• Material flows from one Euler domain into the other through the open area represented by the
common set of facets.
Flow only occurs if:
• The common facets are defined as ‘open’, using PORFCPL.
• The common facets open up due to failure of a shell structure, using COUP1INT.
Examples simulations are:
• Holes between air bag compartments.
• Holes between containers filled with gas or liquid.
• Open area between the top of a fuel-tank baffle and the fuel-tank skin.
Main Index
DYPARAM,FLOWMETH 1789
• Open area in-between wide straps inside an air bag.

• Failure of walls in between aircraft wing compartments.
• Failure of tank armor by a blast wave.
• Etc.
2. The following table summarizes what input cards support the simulation of material flow between
two Euler domains across open areas in coupling surfaces:
Material
flow COUP1INT/ COUP1FL
through a FLOW- FLOW- PORFLCPL PORFLCPL (Failure of shell
coupling METOD= METHOD (velocity (Pressure elements creates the
Euler Solver surface POLPACK =FACET based) based) opening)
HYDRO YES YES NO YES YES Only for flow
method = polpack
HYDRO-Roe YES YES YES YES YES YES
solver-1st
Order
HYDRO-Roe YES YES YES YES YES YES
solver- 2nd
Order
MMHYDRO YES YES NO YES NO Only for flow
method = polpack
STRENGTH NO - - - - -
MMSTREN YES YES NO YES NO Only for flow
method = polpack
3. The Euler domains are shown below with the support types for each:
FLOW-METHOD=POLACK FLOW METHOD = FACET

YES No
MESH → TYPE = ADAPT
MESH → TYPE = BOX YES YES
Modeling of CHEXA No YES

elements
4. A Euler domain is associated with a coupling surface by specifying the MESHID or SET1ID on the
COUPLE option.
5. FLOWMETH = POLPACK has the following limitations:
The entries NSTGP and NSTEL on all MESH entries should be left blank. It is not allowed to
specify for any MESH entry the starting element number or starting grid point number.
Main Index
1790 DYPARAM,FLOWMETH
• There are restrictions on output requests.

• Flow faces and wallets are not supported while FLOWDEF is supported.
• Viscosity is not supported
A case where these limitations require the use of FLOWMETH = FACET is when the Euler
elements are generated in Patran, not using the MESH option, and one or more of the following
options is used:
• FLOW boundaries are defined on some Euler faces.
• WALLET boundaries are defined on some Euler faces.
• Viscosity is defined.
Main Index
DYPARAM,GEOCHECK 1791
Define Geometry Consistency Check
DYPARAM,GEOCHECK Define Geometry Consistency Check
This parameter forces a check of the geometry for consistent connectivity of the defined hexagonal elements
and correction if needed. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,GEOCHECK,value
Example:
DYPARAM,GEOCHECK,ON
Describer Meaning
value Flag for activating GEOCHECK. (Character; default=OFF)
ON Geometry consistency check is performed.
OFF No geometry consistency check is performed.
Remarks:
1. The defined geometry is checked for consistent connectivity of the hexagonal elements. If an
inconsistency is detected, the connectivity is corrected. CFACE entries with references to elements
that have been corrected are corrected as well.
2. If a hexagonal mesh is generated with other commercial preprocessors, this parameter can correct the
connectivity of the hexagonal elements in case problems are encountered with face generation or
volume computation.
Main Index
1792 DYPARAM,FASTCOUP
Fast Coupling Algorithm
DYPARAM,FASTCOUP Fast Coupling Algorithm
Defines the fast coupling algorithm. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,FASTCOUP,option1,option2,option3,option4,option5,option6,option7
Example:
DYPARAM,FASTCOUP,INPLANE,FAIL
Describer Meaning
Option1 NO Fast coupling interaction is turned off. (Character; Default = INPLANE)
INPLANE Small offset for inplane coupling surface segments.
NOFFSET No offset for inplane coupling surface segments
Option2 NOFAIL No failure of the coupling surface. (Character; Default = NOFAIL)
FAIL Failure of the coupling surface will be taken into account.
Option3 Euler check algorithm. (Character; Default = NOCHKEUL)
CHKEUL Checking whether all segments of the coupling surface are fully inside Euler
elements.
NOCHKEU No checking
L
Option4 Euler update algorithm. (Character; Default = ALL)
NEARONLY Do the full coupling surface only in the first cycle. In subsequent cycles
only update elements and faces that are near the coupling surface.
ALL Do the full coupling surface computation each cycle.
Option5 Controls coupling surface computations when there are multiple cubes defined with
DYPARAM,EULERCB. (Character; Default = NONE)
NONE All coupling surface computations are done for each cube.
FACES The face cover fraction computation is done in one go for all cubes. The
other coupling computations are still done per cube.
POLPK The polpack computation efficiently handles multiple cubes. The other
coupling computations are still done per cube.
ALL All coupling surface computations efficiently handle cubes.
Main Index
DYPARAM,FASTCOUP 1793
Fast Coupling Algorithm
Describer Meaning
Option6 In the coupling surface computations it is determined which structural segments intersect
the Euler mesh. This is done by looping across all structural segments. For dmp each cpu
has only part of the Euler mesh. Therefore for many segments it is known beforehand that
they will not intersect the Euler mesh of the cpu and can be skipped at an early stage of the
computation. Option 6 activates this skipping. (Character; Default = ON)
OFF For dmp each CPU goes over all segments.
ON Each CPU skips all segments that do not intersect the Euler mesh of the
CPU.
Option7 Each coupling surface segment has to be intersected with the Euler elements and Euler
faces. For large Euler meshes a substantial amount of checking has to be done do find the
intersecting elements and faces. By dividing the Euler mesh in search boxes the costs of this
checking is kept to a minimum. Especially for large Euler meshes combined with large
coupling surface this checking can become expensive and then the use of search boxes can
significantly reduce the costs. For Euler meshes of less than 100000 elements the use of
search will boxes have little effect. (Character; Default = ON)
OFF Search boxes are not used.
ON Search boxes are used.
Remarks:
1. The fast coupling algorithm is always turned on by default. In order to use general coupling,
option1=NO should be used.
2. When option1 is set to INPLANE or when option 1 is blank, a small offset is given to coupling
surface segments that are on top of a face of an Eulerian element. This is done because coupling
surfaces segments on Eulerfaces make the Euler element volume computation invalid. Also boundary
conditions on these segments are not correctly imposed. The net effect of these problems is
unpredictable. The problem can either run correctly, or remain stable but give false results or become
instable.
3. Option2 can only be used in combination with either PARAM,LIMITER,ROE or MMHYDRO or
MMSTREN. The coupling surface must consist of CQUADs and/or CTRIAs and a failure model
for the material of the surface must be defined.
4. This parameter can only be used when the Eulerian mesh is aligned with the basic coordinate system
axes.
Main Index
1794 DYPARAM,HYDROBOD
Hydro Body Force
DYPARAM,HYDROBOD Hydro Body Force
Defines a body force for single hydro material in Euler. Used in MSC Nasran SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,HYDROBOD,XACC,YACC,ZACC
Example:
DYPARAM,HYDROBOD,-300.,0.,150.
Describer Meaning
XACC X-acceleration (Real; Default = 0.0)
YACC Y-acceleration. (Real; Default = 0.0)
ZACC Z-acceleration. (Real; Default = 0.0)
Remark:
1. This parameter defines a constant body force load in Euler for single hydro material only.
Main Index
DYPARAM,HGCMEM 1795
Shell Membrane Hourglass Damping Coefficient Parameters
DYPARAM,HGCMEM Shell Membrane Hourglass Damping Coefficient

Parameters
Defines the default membrane damping coefficient for shell elements. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,HGCMEM,value
Example:
DYPARAM,HGCMEM,0.07
Describer Meaning
value Hourglass damping coefficient. (0.0 ≤ Real ≤ 0.15; default=See remark 3.)
Remarks:
1. The default value applies to all types of hourglass suppression methods and should be used unless
there is a good reason to define the hourglass damping coefficient by another means.
2. The value specified on this entry is used whenever the coefficient is not explicitly defined on the
HGSUPPR entry.
3. If this entry is omitted, the default value of the coefficient used in the hourglass suppression method
for shell elements is either equal to the default value of 0.1 or is equal to the default value defined on
a DYPARAM,HGCOEFF entry.
Main Index
1796 DYPARAM,HGCOEFF
Hourglass Damping Coefficient
DYPARAM,HGCOEFF Hourglass Damping Coefficient
Defines the global default hourglass damping coefficient. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,HGCOEFF,value
Example:
DYPARAM,HGCOEFF,0.14
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
1. The default applies to all types of hourglass suppression methods and should be used unless there is
good reason to define the hourglass damping coefficient by another means.
2. The value specified on this entry is used whenever the coefficients are not explicitly defined on
HGSUPPR entries or on a HGCMEM HGCWRP, HGCTWS, or HGCSOL entry.
3. If this entry is omitted, the default value of the hourglass damping coefficients is either equal to the
default value of 0.1 or is equal to the value specified on a HGCMEM, HGCTWS, HGCWRP, or
HGCSOL DYPARAM entry.
4. The value of the coefficients can be explicitly defined for each property by using an HGSUPPR entry.
Main Index
DYPARAM,HGCSOL 1797
Solid Hourglass Damping Coefficient
DYPARAM,HGCSOL Solid Hourglass Damping Coefficient
Define the default damping coefficient for solid elements. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,HGCSOL,value
Example:
DYPARAM,HGCSOL,0.11
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
HGSUPPR entry.
for solid elements is either equal to the default value of 0.1 or is equal to the default value defined on
Main Index
1798 DYPARAM,HGCTWS
Shell Twisting Hourglass Damping Coefficient
DYPARAM,HGCTWS Shell Twisting Hourglass Damping Coefficient
Defines the default twisting damping coefficient for shell elements. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,HGCTWS,value
Example:
DYPARAM,HGCTWS,0.02
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
HGSUPPR entry.
Main Index
DYPARAM,HGCWRP 1799
Shell Warping Hourglass Damping Coefficient
DYPARAM,HGCWRP Shell Warping Hourglass Damping Coefficient
Defines the default warping damping coefficient for shell elements. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,HGCWRP,value
Example:
DYPARAM,HGCWRP,0.0
Describer Meaning
Remarks:
HGSUPPR entry.
Main Index
1800 DYPARAM,HGSHELL
Shell Hourglass Suppression Method
DYPARAM,HGSHELL Shell Hourglass Suppression Method
Defines the default hourglass suppression method for shell elements. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,HGSHELL,value
Example:
DYPARAM,HGSHELL,DYNA
Describer Meaning
value Type of HGSHELL. (Character; default=See remark 2.)
FBV Flanagan-Belytschko viscous hourglass damping
DYNA Viscous hourglass damping
Remarks:
1. The type of hourglass suppression method defined on this entry is used as the default whenever the
type fields on the HGSUPPR for shell properties are left blank.
2. If this entry is omitted, the default suppression method used for shell elements is either FBV or the
default method defined on the DYPARAM,HGTYPE entry.
Main Index
DYPARAM,HGSOLID 1801
Solid Hourglass Suppression Method
DYPARAM,HGSOLID Solid Hourglass Suppression Method
Defines the default hourglass suppression method for solid elements. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,HGSOLID,value
Example:
DYPARAM,HGSOLID,FBS
Describer Meaning
value Type of HGSOLID. (Character; default=See remark 2.)
FBS Flanagan-Belytschko stiffness hourglass damping
DYNA Viscous hourglass damping
Remarks:
1. The type of hourglass suppression method defined on this entry is used as the default whenever the
type fields on the HGSUPPR for solid properties are left blank.
2. If this entry is omitted, the default suppression method used for solid elements is either FBS or the
default method defined on the DYPARAM,HGTYPE entry.
Main Index
1802 DYPARAM,HGTYPE
Hourglass Suppression Method
DYPARAM,HGTYPE Hourglass Suppression Method
Defines the default type of hourglass suppression method. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,HGTYPE,value
Example:
DYPARAM,HGTYPE,FBS
Describer Meaning
value Type of HGTYPE. (Character; default=See remark 2.)
FBS Flanagan-Belytschko stiffness hourglass damping.
FBV Flanagan-Belytschko viscous hourglass damping.
DYNA Viscous hourglass damping.
Remarks:
1. The type of the hourglass suppression method defined on this entry is used as the default whenever
the type fields in the HGSUPPR entries are left blank.
2. If this entry is omitted, the type can be defined on a DYPARAM,HGSHELL entry for shell elements,
a DYPARAM,HGSOLID entry for solid elements, or on the HGSUPPR entries; otherwise the
defaults apply. For shell elements the default is FBV; for solid elements, the default is FBS.
Main Index
DYPARAM,HICGRAV 1803
Gravity Used by HIC Calculations
DYPARAM,HICGRAV Gravity Used by HIC Calculations
Defines the value of the gravity to be used by the HIC calculations. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,HICGRAV,value
Example:
DYPARAM,HICGRAV,980.7
Describer Meaning
value Gravity used by HIC Calculations. (Real > 0.0; default=9.80665)
Remarks:
1. The value set by this parameter will be used by all HIC output requests.
2. This parameter can only be set once in the input deck.
Main Index
1804 DYPARAM,HVLFAIL
Failure at Hydrodynamic Volume Limit
DYPARAM,HVLFAIL Failure at Hydrodynamic Volume Limit
Defines element failure on the hydrodynamic volume limit. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,HVLFAIL,value
Example:
DYPARAM,HVLFAIL,YES
Describer Meaning
value Flag of HVLFAIL. (Character; default=NO)
YES Element failure on hydrodynamic volume limit
NO No element failure on hydrodynamic volume limit
Remarks:
1. Lagrangian elements (CHEXA) that have a material model with a failure model fail when the
hydrodynamic volume limit is reached and the parameter is set to YES.
The elements can fail only when the following items are presented in the input:
a. The material model has a hydrodynamic volume limit (HVL).
b. A failure model is defined.
c. DYPARAM, HVLFAIL, YES
2. The hydrodynamic volume limit by default allows for 10% expansion.
Main Index
DYPARAM,IMM 1805
Initial Metric Method Formulation
DYPARAM,IMM Initial Metric Method Formulation
The option allows to specify the IMM method to be used. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,IMM,OPTION1,OPTION2,VALUE1,VALUE2
Example:
DYPARAM,IMM,ZERO,YES,1.0E-3,1.0E-3
Describer Meaning
OPTION1 Flag for element condition under compression. (Character; default=FULL)
FULL While elements are under IMM condition, they will carry stresses when under
compression.
REDUCED While elements are under IMM condition they will carry a reduced stress
when under compression. The relative area factor SMDFER is used to reduce
the Young’s modulus.
ZERO While elements are under IMM condition they do not carry any compressive
stresses. Use material damping to avoid excessive nodal velocities.
OPTION2 Flag for recalculation of IMM strain. (Character; default=See remark 2.)
NO or OFF Do not recalculate IMM strains during the calculation.
YES or ON Recalculate IMM strains during the calculation.
VALUE1 Start time of recalculation of IMM strains. See remark 3.(Real > 0.0; Default is 1.0E-3)
VALUE2 Times between recalculation of IMM strains. See remark 3.(Real > 0.0; Default is 1.0E-3)
Remarks:
1. Method ZERO is best suitable when initially more than a couple of elements with zero or near zero
area are present in the model.
2. The default for Option2 depends on Option1.
Option1 Default for Option2

FULL OFF
REDUCED OFF
ZERO ON
3. When Option2 is OFF or NO, STREC and DTREC are neglected.
Main Index
1806 DYPARAM,INFOBJ
List the Generated BJOINs and Spotwelds
DYPARAM,INFOBJ List the Generated BJOINs and Spotwelds
Additional information about the BJOIN and spotweld connectivity will be listed in the output file. Used in
SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,INFOBJ,value
Example:
DYPARAM,INFOBJ,0.14
Describer Meaning
value Flag of activation of writing BJOIN information. (Character; default=NO)
YES Information is issued.
NO Information is not issued.
Remarks:
1. The information listed is:
• Grid point pairs forming a BJOIN or a spotweld.
• BJOINs and spotwelds initially connected.
Main Index
DYPARAM,INISTEP 1807
Initial Time Step
DYPARAM,INISTEP Initial Time Step
Defines the time step used at the start of the analysis. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,INISTEP,value
Example:
DYPARAM,INISTEP,1.0E-6
Describer Meaning
value Time step (in analysis time units) used for the first iteration. (Real > 0.0; required)
Remarks:
1. This parameter is required to start an analysis.
Main Index
1808 DYPARAM,LIMCUB
Contact Cube Sort Algorithm
DYPARAM,LIMCUB Contact Cube Sort Algorithm
Defines the maximum number of cubes used to sort the grid points in a contact definition. Used in SOL 700
only.
Format:
DYPARAM,LIMCUB,value
Example:
DYPARAM,LIMCUB,2300
Describer Meaning
value Maximum number of cubes. (Integer > 0; default=200)
Remarks:
1. Each slave node has to search for master nodes that are close enough to have potential contact. It is
too expensive to have each slave node check each master node. To limit the number of checks, the
space in which the nodes reside is subdivided into cubes. This subdivision is done so that the slave
nodes have to check only the master nodes in their own cube and those in the neighboring cubes. The
maximum number of cubes used to subdivide the space is equal to the value of LIMCUB.
Main Index
DYPARAM,MATRMERG 1809
Merges MATRIG and RBE2-FULLRIG Assemblies
DYPARAM,MATRMERG Merges MATRIG and RBE2-FULLRIG Assemblies
Merges MATRIG and/or RBE2-FULLRIG rigid bodies into a new FULLRIG assembly. Used in SOL 700
only.
Format:
DYPARAM,MATRMERG,FR<id1>,MR<id2>,MR<id3>,FR<id4>,…
DYPARAM,MATRMERG,AUTO
Example:
DYPARAM,MATRMERG,FR1,MR2,MR6,MR7,FR4,MR8
Describer Meaning
FR<id1> Name of the new FULLRIG assembly. (Character; required.)
MR<idi> or FR<idi> Names of MATRIG and/or RBE2-FULLRIG rigid bodies merged into a new
FULLRIG assembly with name FR<id1>. No names can be supplied for the
AUTO option.
AUTO Automatic merge. See remark 2. (Character; required.)
Remarks:
1. FR<id1> must be a nonexisting RBE2-FULLRIG. The properties of FR<id1> (as mass, center of
gravity, and moments of inertia) are computed by solver from the properties of each rigid body
mentioned on the entry. Rigid body output can be asked for FR<id1>, and loads or rigid body
constraints can be applied to FR<id1>. The other MATRIGs and RBE2-FULLRIGs mentioned on
the MATRMERG entry disappear after they have been merged.
2. Instead of supplying rigid body names, the AUTO option can be used. After all the normal
DYPARAM,MATRMERG and DYPARAM,MATRMRG1 entries have been applied, a
DYPARAM,MATRMERG,AUTO merges all the resulting MATRIGs and RBE2-FULLRIGs which
have common grid points into a new rigid assembly called FM<id>, where the id is a new FM number
starting from 1. As it is not known at the start of an analysis how many FM assemblies will be created,
no rigid body output can be asked for FM<id>, and no constraints or loads can be applied to FM<id>.
The MATRIGs and RBE2-FULLRIGs, which have been merged by the AUTO option into a new
FM<id> assembly, disappear.
3. To supply predefined properties for the merged assembly, DYPARAM,MATRMRG1 can be used,
where the first rigid body mentioned on the entry must be an existing RBE2-FULLRIG or MATRIG.
Main Index
1810 DYPARAM,MATRMRG1
Merges MATRIG and RBE2-FULLRIG Assemblies
DYPARAM,MATRMRG1 Merges MATRIG and RBE2-FULLRIG Assemblies
Merges MATRIG and/or RBE2-FULLRIG rigid bodies into one existing MATRIG or RBE2-FULLRIG
assembly with predefined properties. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,MATRMRG1,MR<id1>,MR<id2>,MR<id3>,FR<id4>,...
DYPARAM,MATRMRG1,FR<id1>,MR<id2>,MR<id3>,FR<id4>,...
Example:
DYPARAM,MATRMRG1,MR1,MR2,MR6,MR7,FR4,MR8
Describer Meaning
MR<id1> or FR<id1> Name of the existing MATRIG or FULLRIG assembly (must be an
existing one). (Character; required.)
MR<idi> or FR<idi> Names of MATRIG and/or RBE2-FULLRIG rigid bodies, which are
merged with the existing MR<id1> or FR<id1> into a new MATRIG
assembly, with name MR<id1> or FR<id1>. (Character; required.)
Remarks:
1. MR<id1> or FR<id1> must be an existing MATRIG or RBE2-FULLRIG, respectively. For a
FULLRIG, the properties of FR<id1> (as mass, center of gravity and moments of inertia) are
computed by solver from the properties of each rigid body mentioned on the entry. For a MATRIG,
the mass of MR<id1> is either the predefined mass on the MATRIG (id1) entry or the predefined
density on the MATRIG (id1) entry times the total volume of all MATRIG members in the
MATRMRG1 entry. The center of gravity and moments of inertia of MR<id1> are either predefined
on the MATRIG (id1) entry, or are otherwise computed from the properties of each rigid body on
the entry. The other MATRIGs and RBE2 FULLRIGs mentioned on the MATRMRG1 entry
disappear after they have been merged.
Main Index
DYPARAM,MAXSTEP 1811
Maximum Time Step
DYPARAM,MAXSTEP Maximum Time Step
Defines the maximum allowable time step. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,MAXSTEP,value
Example:
DYPARAM,MAXSTEP,1.E-3
Describer Meaning
value The maximum time step. (Real > 0.0; default=1.0E20)
Remarks:
1. If the time step calculated by solver is greater than MAXSTEP, the time step is set to MAXSTEP.
Main Index
1812 DYPARAM,MESHPLN
Mesh Density for Covering Rigid Planes
DYPARAM,MESHPLN Mesh Density for Covering Rigid Planes
Defines Mesh density for covering rigid planes. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,MESHPLN,value
Example:
DYPARAM,MESHPLN,4
Describer Meaning
value Rigid planes will be meshed with MESHPLN times MESHPLN dummy quad elements.
(Integer > 0; default=3)
Remarks:
1. The default is sufficient in most cases.
Main Index
DYPARAM,MINSTEP 1813
Minimum Time Step
DYPARAM,MINSTEP Minimum Time Step
Defines the minimum time step that causes the analysis to terminate. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,MINSTEP,value
Example:
DYPARAM,MINSTEP,1.E-6
Describer Meaning
value When the time step is less than the MINSTEP value, the analysis terminates. (Real > 0.0;
default=10% of DYPARAM,INISTEP)
Remarks:
1. When the elements become very distorted, in a poorly designed mesh for example, or when they have
endured a very large distortion, the time step may drop dramatically. The analysis continues, however,
and a lot of computer resources may be wasted. This option allows you to specify a minimum time
step that causes the analysis to terminate.
Main Index
1814 DYPARAM,MIXGAS
Controls Updating of Gas Fractions
DYPARAM,MIXGAS Controls Updating of Gas Fractions
Specifies whether the gas constants of the Euler material or of gas bags are updated based on the gas
composition and temperature. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,MIXGAS,value
Example:
DYPARAM,MIXGAS,YES
Describer Meaning
value Flag of MIXGAS. (Character; default=NO)
YES The gas constants for the Euler material and any gas bags are recalculated
based on temperature and gas composition.
NO Euler and gas bag gas constants are not recalculated.
Remarks:
1. This parameter is only defined for use with GBAG gas bag definitions and/or the single-material Euler
solver.
2. This parameter can be used in conjunction with INFLTR and INFLHB inflator definitions and with
PORHOLE, PERMEAB, PORFGBG, and PERMGBG porosity definitions.
3. By default, DYPARAM,MIXGAS is set to YES if any INFLHB or INFLGAS entries are present.
Main Index
DYPARAM,NZEROVEL 1815
Auto Constrain Failed Nodes
DYPARAM,NZEROVEL Auto Constrain Failed Nodes
Set the velocity of a node to zero in case all attached elements have failed. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,NZEROVEL,value
Example:
DYPARAM,NZEROVEL,YES
Describer Meaning
value Flag of NZEROVEL. (Character; default=NO)
YES Perform check and set the velocity to zero if all attached elements have
failed.
NO Do not perform check.
Remarks:
1. This parameter applies only to nodes of Lagrangian elements.
2. Specifying NO reduces the CPU overhead time.
3. When the velocity of a node is set to zero, effectively the node is constraint, like an SPC or SPC1.
4. Special attention is necessary for the contact definition. If the failed node is not taken out of the
contact, it behaves as a rigid boundary constraint.
Main Index
1816 DYPARAM,OLDLAGT
Use Collapsed Hexahedron Scheme for CTETRA
DYPARAM,OLDLAGT Use Collapsed Hexahedron Scheme for CTETRA
Activate the collapsed hexahedron scheme as default for lagrangian CTETRA elements. Used in SOL 700
only.
Format:
DYPARAM,OLDLAGT,value
Example:
DYPARAM,OLDLAGT,1
Describer Meaning
value Flag of OLDLAGT. (Integer ≥ 0; default=See remark 1.)
0 Deactivate collapsed hexahedron scheme
1 Activate
Remarks:
1. The current default integration scheme for Lagrangian CTETRA elements use linear tetrahedron FE
one. It is more consistent (in terms of accuracy) and efficient (both in memory and CPU time)
compared with the collapsed hexahedron scheme. The old scheme based on collapsed hexahedron
with reduced integration is deactivated. If the old scheme is activated, it is used as default. But, it is
still possible to use the new scheme for CTETRA by using separate PSOLID with IN = 1 and ISOP
= 1 combination.
Main Index
DYPARAM,JWLDET 1817
Hydro Body Force
DYPARAM,JWLDET Hydro Body Force
Specifies whether the blast wave of one explosive can ignite another explosive. Here it assumed that the
explosives are modeled by a combination of EOSJWL and DETSPH entries.
Format:
PARAMJWLDET,OPTION
Example:
PARAM,JWLDET,NOLINK
Describer Meaning
LINK Multiple denotations with EOSJWL are LINKED.
The detonation wave of one explosive can ignite another explosive.
NOLINK Multiple denotations with EOSJWL are NOT LINKED.
The detonation wave of one explosive cannot ignite another explosive
Default NOLINK
Remark:
1. Option NOLINK: TDET is set to -1 for elements that have no JWL material. The "NOLINK"
option is only valid with true JWL materials - not valid for the "Static Detonation/Ideal Gas" model.
2. Setting this parameter as "NOLINK" will prevent "sympathetic ignition". Each charge will ignite at
the specified "TDET" in its own DETSPH card.
Main Index
1818 DYPARAM,LIMITER
Original Roe-Type Euler Solver Scheme
DYPARAM,LIMITER Original Roe-Type Euler Solver Scheme
Defines the type and the spatial accuracy of scheme used in the Euler solver based on the ideas of Prof. Philip
Roe. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,LIMITER,TYPE,OPTION
Example:
DYPARAM,LIMITER,ROE
Describer Meaning
TYPE Type of scheme. (Character; Default = ROE)
ROE Roe solver for single hydrodynamic materials.
OPTION blank Second order in space. (Character; Default = blank)
NONE First order in space.
Remarks:
1. By default, when the parameter is not set, the solver is used that is defined on the PEULER or the
PEULER1 entry. In case “2ndOrder” or “1stOrder” was defined on the PEULER or PEULER1
entry, the parameter setting has no effect.
2. By default, second order spatial accuracy is used. The temporal accuracy is automatically defined
according to the spatial accuracy that you select.
3. Note that 2nd order spatial accuracy in the Roe solver involves the internal flow field only. We
recommend that you use the full 2nd order improved fluid-and gas Euler solver. You can activate the
improved solver by putting the “2ndOrder” field on the PEULER or PEULER1 entry.
4. When type ROE is defined, no void elements are allowed and it cannot be used in combination with
EOSJWL. Also options concerning air-bag analyses are not supported.
5. For more details on fluid- and gas Euler solvers, refer to the Getting Started and the Theory Manuals.
Main Index
DYPARAM,PARALLEL 1819
Parallel Execution Information
DYPARAM,PARALLEL Parallel Execution Information
The option allows you to gather information on the parallel section. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,PARALLEL,INFPAR,value
Example:
DYPARAM,PARALLEL,INFPAR,ON
Describer Meaning
INFPAR A report is written on the actual amount of work done at the reported parallel levels.
Value Flag for INFPAR. (Character; default=OFF)
ON Activate writing information.
OFF Deactivate writing information.
Remarks:
1. A summary on the parallel operation when using the shared-memory mode can be requested by
including a DYPARAM,PARALLEL,INFPAR,ON entry in the input file.
2. Currently, the information on the parallel sections is available for the shell solver only.
Main Index
1820 DYPARAM,PLCOVCUT
Pressure Cut Off Time
DYPARAM,PLCOVCUT Pressure Cut Off Time
Defines time when PLCOVER is cut off. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,PLCOVCUT,value
Example:
DYPARAM,PLCOVCUT,3.E-3
Describer Meaning
value If there are one or more COUPLE definitions with a PLCOVER specified on the
COUOPT entry, a cut off is applied to the PLCOVER until time = PLCOVCUT. From
time = 0 to time = PLCOVCUT, the PLCOVER is cut off to the pressure in the
intersected Eulerian element.
For times greater than PLCOVCUT, the full PLCOVER is applied to the coupling
surface.
This parameter is useful in air-bag analyses, where PLCOVER is used to model the
environment pressure. During the early stages of the deployment of the air bag, the
pressure inside the bag may drop. Applying the full PLCOVER may lead to an unstable
deployment of the air bag. (Real ≥ 0.0; default=0.
Remarks:
1. See also the COUPLE and COUOPT Bulk Data entries.
Main Index
DYPARAM,PMINFAIL 1821
Switches Failure at Spall Limit
DYPARAM,PMINFAIL Switches Failure at Spall Limit
Defines Lagrangian solid element failure on reaching the spall limit. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,PMINFAIL,value
Example:
DYPARAM,PMINFAIL,YES
Describer Meaning
VALUE Flag of PMINFAIL. (Character; default=NO)
YES Element failure on spall limit
NO No element failure on spall limit
Remarks:
1. Lagrangian elements (CHEXA) that have a material definition with a failure model will fail when the
parameter is set to YES and the spall limit (minimum pressure) is reached, even when the other failure
criterion is not yet reached.
2. The spall limit is set on the PMINC entry.
Main Index
1822 DYPARAM,RBE2INFO
Lists MATRIG and RBE2 Grid Points
DYPARAM,RBE2INFO Lists MATRIG and RBE2 Grid Points
The grid points attached to MATRIG and RBE2assemblies are listed to the output file. Used in SOL 700
only.
Format:
DYPARAM,RBE2INFO,value
Example:
DYPARAM,RBE2INFO,GRIDON
Describer Meaning
VALUE Flag of PBE2INFO. (Character; default=GRIDOFF)
GRIDON Information is issued C
GRIDOFF No information is issued
Main Index
DYPARAM,RHOCUT 1823
Global Density Cutoff Value
DYPARAM,RHOCUT Global Density Cutoff Value
Defines the minimum density for all Eulerian elements. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,RHOCUT,value
Example:
DYPARAM,RHOCUT,1.E–10
Describer Meaning
value Density cutoff. (Real > 0.0; default=See remark 4.)
Remarks:
1. Any Eulerian element with a density less than RHOCUT is considered to be empty. All of its variables
are set to zero, and the equation of state is bypassed.
a. If the density of element B after transport is less than RHOCUT, then no transport is done.
b. If the density of element A after transport is less than RHOCUT, then all of the mass is
transported to element B.
3. A reasonable value of RHOCUT is 1.E–5 times the initial density.
4. If only RHOCUT is defined, all Eulerian elements use the RHOCUT value as cutoff density. If
RHOCUT is omitted, all Eulerian elements use a cutoff density automatically set to 1.E–5 times a
characteristic density. For single-material Eulerian elements, this characteristic density is the reference
density.
Main Index
1824 DYPARAM,RJSTIFF
Rigid-joint Stiffness
DYPARAM,RJSTIFF Rigid-joint Stiffness
Defines the stiffness of a rigid joint. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,RJSTIFF,value
Example:
DYPARAM,RJSTIFF,100.
Describer Meaning
value Multiplication factor for the stiffness of all rigid joints. (Real > 0.0; default=1.0)
Remarks:
1. The absolute stiffness of rigid joints is calculated automatically by solver. The stiffness of joints is
taken so that a stable solution is guaranteed. The stiffness calculation takes into account the fact that
a rigid body can be constrained by more than one joint.
2. This parameter can be used to increase or decrease the stiffness of the joints. Care must be taken
because too high a value may lead to an unstable calculation.
Main Index
DYPARAM,SHELLFRM 1825
Sets the Default of the Shell Formulation
DYPARAM,SHELLFRM Sets the Default of the Shell Formulation
Sets the default for the shell formulation for quadrilateral elements. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,SHELLFORM,value
Example:
DYPARAM,SHELLFORM,BLT
Describer Meaning
value Flag for default of shell formulation. (Character; default=KEYHOFF)
BLT The shell-formulation default is BLT.
KEYHOFF The shell-formulation default if KEYHOFF.
Remarks:
1. The DYPARAM,SHELLFORM changes the default formulation for quadrilateral shell elements. All
shell properties entries that do not explicitly define the formulation, use the default as specified on
the DYPARAM entry.
2. Triangular shell elements have only one formulation (C0-TRIA). Therefore, the DYPARAM is
ignored for triangular elements.
Main Index
1826 DYPARAM,SHELMSYS
Shell Element System Definition
DYPARAM,SHELMSYS Shell Element System Definition
Defines the shell element system for the BLT shells. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,SHELMSYS,value
Example:
DYPARAM,SHELMSYS,SIDE21
Describer Meaning
value Type of shell element system. (Character; default=MIDSIDES)
SIDE21 x-axis along side21.
MIDSIDES x-axis connecting midpoints.
Remarks:
1. SIDE21 puts the x-axis along side21 of the element, whereas MIDSIDES puts the x-axis along the
vector connecting the midpoints of the side14 and side32.
2. Using the SIDE21 option for the BLT shell will result in the same Belytschko-Lin-Tsay
implementation as BELY.
Main Index
DYPARAM,SHPLAST 1827
Type of Plane-Stress Plasticity for Shells
DYPARAM,SHPLAST Type of Plane-Stress Plasticity for Shells
Specifies the type of calculation used to determine the plane-stress plasticity method for shells. Used in SOL
700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,SHPLAST,value
Example:
DYPARAM,SHPLAST,VECT
Describer Meaning
value Type of Plain-stress plasticity for shells. (Character; default=ITER)
RADIAL Noniterative, approximate radial return.
VECT Iterative, vectorized with three iterations.
ITER Nonvectorized iterations.
Remarks:
1. The RADIAL approach does not require iterations and, therefore, is the most efficient. It is, however,
an approximation.
2. The other two approaches iterate to find the solution. ITER is the best since it takes as many iterations
as are necessary. On vector machines, such as CRAY, this is inefficient since it cannot be vectorized.
VECT always performs three vectorized iterations, which is more efficient. However, three iterations
may not be enough, and inaccuracies could occur.
Main Index
1828 DYPARAM,SHSTRDEF
Composite Shell Stress and Strain Output Definition
DYPARAM,SHSTRDEF Composite Shell Stress and Strain Output Definition
Specifies the default coordinate system for the stress and strain output of composite shells. Used in SOL 700
only.
Format:
DYPARAM,SHSTRDEF,value
Example:
DYPARAM,SHSTRDEF,ELEM
Describer Meaning
value Type of output. (Character; default=FIBER)
FIBER Stresses and strains are output in the fiber and matrix directions.
ELEM Stresses and strains are output in the element coordinate system.
Remarks:
1. The default setting can be overruled per property on a PCOMPA entry on the STRDEF field.
Main Index
DYPARAM,SHTHICK 1829
Shell-Thickness Modification Option
DYPARAM,SHTHICK Shell-Thickness Modification Option
Specifies whether or not the thickness of the shell changes with membrane straining. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,SHTHICK,value
Example:
DYPARAM,SHTHICK,YES
Describer Meaning
value Flag of shell thickness modification. (Character; default=YES)
YES Shell thickness is modified according to the membrane strain.
NO Shell thickness is constant.
Remarks:
1. The YES option gives a true large-strain shell but requires some extra computation.
2. The NO option should give adequate results as long as the membrane strains are not very large (i.e.,
not more than 5–10%).
3. This option applies to all the formulations of the shell elements, except for the PCOMP. The
thickness of PCOMP shell elements will always remain constant.
Main Index
1830 DYPARAM,SLELM
Store Shell Sublayer Variables
DYPARAM,SLELM Store Shell Sublayer Variables
Defines whether shell sublayer variables are to be stored in the element arrays. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,SLELM,value
Example:
DYPARAM,SLELM,NO
Describer Meaning
value Flag of storing shell sublayer variables. (Character; default=YES)
YES Store as an element variable.
NO Do not store as an element variable.
Remarks:
1. This parameter applies only to shell elements.
2. The shell sublayer variables are primarily stored in sublayer arrays. They can be copied into the
element arrays only for specific output purposes.
3. Specifying NO reduces the CPU overhead time.
4. Irrespective of the entry on this parameter, sublayer variables are accessible in the sublayer arrays. For
example, requesting TXX1 retrieves the stress from the element array, whereas TXX01 retrieves it
from the sublayer arrays.
Main Index
DYPARAM,SMP,BATCHSIZ 1831
SMP Batchsize and CPULOOP Definition
DYPARAM,SMP,BATCHSIZ SMP Batchsize and CPULOOP Definition
Define batch size and number of CPU loops, per entity type. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,SMP,<entity>,BATCHSIZ,<value1>,CPULOOPS,<value2>
Example:
DYPARAM,SMP,BEAMS,BATCHSIZ,AUTOMAT
DYPARAM,SMP,BEAMS,BATCHSIZ,256
Describer Meaning
ENTITY Define the batchsize for the following entities. (Character; required)
BEAMS Beam elements
SHELLS Shell elements
SOLIDS Solid elements
CONTACT Contacts
VALUE1 The batchsize for this entity (Integer number) or AUTOMAT (character). See Remarks
1.and 3. (Character or Integer >0; default = 63)
VALUE2 If value1 is defined as AUTOMATIC, the user may define the number of loops per CPU
See Remark 2.(Integer > 0; default=2)
Remarks:
1. The batchsize may be defined per entity type. The SMP parts uses the batchsize to assign a certain
number of batches to each CPU. Example:
• Batchsize = 63 (default)
• Number of Beam elements = 580
• Number of CPUs = 4
As a results,
• Needs to process 10 batches (9x63 + 1x13)
• To spread this evenly over four CPUs, a solver increases this to 12 batches because then each
CPU can process 3 batches.
• As a result, the batch size is recalculated for 12 batches to: batchsize = 49
• This means that:
CPU# 1,2,3 process three batches of 49 elements each (3x3x49 = 441 elements)
CPU# 4 processes two batches of 49 elements and one batch of 41
Main Index
1832 DYPARAM,SMP,BATCHSIZ
SMP Batchsize and CPULOOP Definition
It is clear that the user-defined batchsize may not be used ultimately. The reason for this is that each
CPU is allocated the same number of batches in order to optimize the work done by each processor.
2. When the batchsize is set to AUTOMAT, a solver computes an initial batchsize based on the number
of batches processed by each CPU. By default, processes two batches per CPU.
In the example above, this means that based on:
• Batchsize = AUTOMAT
• Number of batches per CPU = 2 (default)
• Number of Beam elements = 580
• Number of CPUs = 4
As a result,
• Computes an initial batchsize of 72 (=580/(4*2))
• Increases this batchsize to a higher number to make sure the number of batches fits in the fixed
number of CPU’s: batchsize = 72 + (580 – 4*2*72) = 72 + 4 = 76 elements
• Based on this initial batchsize, the number of batches would be: 1 + (580-1)/76 = 8 batches
• This fits nicely on four CPU’s as expected
• The CPUs process:
CPU# 1,2,3 processes two batches of 76 elements each (3x2x76 = 456 elements)
CPU# 4 processes one batch of 76 elements and 1 batch of 48 elements.
3. By default, a solver does not use the AUTOMAT batchsize algorithm. Testing has shown that an
initial batchsize of 63 yields the fastest results. This may vary depending on the problem simulated
and the number of elements and may be worth adjusting.
The reason for this may be found in the fact, that with many elements in the model, the number of
elements per batch increases significantly when the AUTOMAT batchsize algorithm is used. Each
CPU will have to process two batches (by default) with many elements. Based on the cache memory,
this is usually not optimal for a CPU processor. Shorter batchsizes (< 128) will do a better job.
Main Index
DYPARAM,SMP,CPUINFO 1833
SMP CPU Information
DYPARAM,SMP,CPUINFO SMP CPU Information
Define the CPU information per entity type. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,SMP,<entity>,CPUINFO,<value1>
Example:
DYPARAM,SMP,CONTACT,CPUINFO,ON
Describer Meaning
ENTITY Define the CPUINFO for the following entities. (Character; required)
BEAMS Beam elements
SHELLS Shell elements
SOLIDS Solid elements
CONTACT Contacts
MEMBR Membrane elements
EULT9 Eulerian Roe Solver
FSCOUP Fast coupling algorithm
ALL Output for all of the above
VALUE1 Flag for writing CPU information. (Character; required)
ON Ask for parallel CPU time information C
OFF No CPU time information (default)
Remarks:
1. By default, a solver does not give any SMP CPU timings per entity. In order to judge the efficiency
of the different algorithms, this parameter may be used to judge the speedup acquired by processing
on multiple CPUs.
Main Index
1834 DYPARAM,SNDLIM
Sound Speed Minimum Value
DYPARAM,SNDLIM Sound Speed Minimum Value
Defines the minimum value for the speed of sound. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,SNDLIM,value
Example:
DYPARAM,SNDLIM,1.E-6
Describer Meaning
value Minimum value of speed of sound. (Real > 0.0; default=1.0E-3)
Remarks:
1. This parameter is used to avoid the possibility of division by zero in the time step calculation.
2. SNDLIM has the units of velocity.
Main Index
DYPARAM,SPREMAP 1835
1-D Spherical Symmetric Euler Archive Remap
DYPARAM,SPREMAP 1-D Spherical Symmetric Euler Archive Remap
Allows a 1-D spherical symmetric Euler archive importation to a 3-D simulation. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,SPREMAP,X0,Y0,Z0,range
Example:
DYPARAM,SPREMAP,0.0,0.5,0.5
Describer Meaning
X0,Y0,Z0 X, Y, Z coordinate of the point at which the 1-D spherical symmetric mesh is remapped.
(Real; default=0.0)
RANGE Only material whose distance to (X0,Y0,Z0) is smaller than “range” will be initialized with
the 1-D spherical symmetric Euler archive. (Real > 0.0; default = 1.0E20)
Remarks:
1. Since 1-D spherical symmetric simulations run much faster than 3-D simulation, it can save much
CPU time to do the first part of the simulation with a 1-D axial symmetric mesh. Afterwards, the 1-
D spherical symmetric Euler archive is imported into the 3-D simulation. By default, the 1-D
spherical symmetric archive will not be expanded in 3-D. To enable this expansion,
DYPARAM,SPREMAP has to be used. It is useful for blast wave simulations. The 1-D spherical
symmetric simulation has to be terminated before the blast wave approaches any 3-D structure.
2. This import of Euler archives is done by means of the EID option in the pth file.
3. To generate axial symmetric meshes DYPARAM,SPHERSYM can be used.
4. The remap of 1-D spherical symmetric to axial symmetric Euler meshes is supported.
Main Index
1836 DYPARAM,SPHERSYM
Spherical Symmetric Analyses
DYPARAM,SPHERSYM Spherical Symmetric Analyses
Enables an efficient and accurate 1D spherical symmetric solution for Eulerian materials. A much larger time
step becomes possible by basing the time step only on the mesh-size in radial direction. Used in SOL 700
only.
Format:
DYPARAM,SPHERSYM,MESHTYPE,RADAXIS,PHI
Example:
PARAM,SPHERSYM,RECT,X,2.0
Describer Meaning
MESHTYPE Two types of Euler meshes are supported. (Character; required)
SPHERIC Axial symmetric meshes
RECT Rectangular meshes
RADAXIS Radial Axis. (Character; required.)
X Global x direction
Y Global y direction
Z Global z direction
PHI Only used for MESHTYPE = RECT. Used to creates a 1d Spherical mesh with angles
+PHI/2 and –PHI/2. (Real ≥ 0; default=0.0)
Remarks:
1. Only available for Eulerian elements and does not support Lagrange elements. The effect of this
parameter is not limited to the solvers. Also Euler archives will reflect the modified Euler mesh
geometry.
2. The Euler mesh can already be symmetric but also a rectangular mesh comprising of one row of
elements can be used. Using the angle specified by PHI this Euler mesh is mapped into a 1D spherical
symmetric mesh.
3. The Euler mesh has to consist of one row of elements.
4. In the time step computation only the mesh-size in radial direction will be taken into account.
Main Index
DYPARAM,STRNOUT 1837
Shell Sublayer Strain Output
DYPARAM,STRNOUT Shell Sublayer Strain Output
Saves the total strains and equivalent effective stress (von Mises stress) at shell sublayers for output. Used in
SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,STRNOUT,value
Example:
DYPARAM,STRNOUT,YES
Describer Meaning
value Flag for writing strain results. (Character; default=YES)
YES Save
NO Do not save.
Remarks:
1. A limited output set saves memory.
2. Perfectly elastic materials only have the limited output set.
3. Total strain output for shell composite materials can be requested from the PCOMPA Bulk Data
entry.
Main Index
1838 DYPARAM,TOLCHK
Tolerance for Fast Coupling
DYPARAM,TOLCHK Tolerance for Fast Coupling
Fast coupling requires that Euler elements are orthogonal. This means that normals of Euler element faces
have to be in a coordinate direction. In practice there can be small errors in the geometry of the Euler element
and Euler face normals do not always exactly point into a coordinate direction. Small deviations from the
coordinate direction do not give problems and are allowed by fast coupling.
To check the direction of an Euler face, the face normal vector is projected onto the closest coordinate
direction. If this projection is 1, the normal is exactly in the coordinate direction. When this projection is
within a sufficient small tolerance of 1, the face can be handled by fast coupling. The tolerance used is
TOLCHK. If the projection is smaller than 1-TOLCHK, the face cannot be handled by fast coupling and
the analysis terminates. Options are then to slightly increase TOLCHK , write out double precision format
in PATRAN, use general coupling, or use the MESH entry. Increasing TOLCHK too much can make the
coupling surface computation less accurate. To keep the computation accurate, the maximal allowed value of
TOLCHK is 1e-6. If DYPARAM,TOLCHK is not used, the tolerance used is 1e-14. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,TOLCHK,value
Example:
DYPARAM,TOLCHK,1e-10
Describer Meaning
value Tolerance in accepting faces by fast coupling. (Real > 0.0; required.)
Main Index
DYPARAM,VDAMP 1839
Dynamic Relaxation Parameter
DYPARAM,VDAMP Dynamic Relaxation Parameter
Controls the global damping in the dynamic relaxation. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,VDAMP,value
Example:
DYPARAM,VDAMP,0.001
Describer Meaning
value Dynamic relaxation parameter. (Real ≥ 0.0; default=0.0)
0.0 No dynamic relaxation.
Remarks:
1. The dynamic relaxation parameter is connected to the system natural frequency, ?, as ?=s??t, where s
denotes a percentage of critical damping. The damping occurs by factoring the velocities every time
step as follows:
F1=(1-?)/(1+?)
F2=1/(1+?)
vn+1/2=F1 vn-1/2+F2 an?tn

where v is the velocity, is the acceleration, and ? is the dynamic relaxation parameter.
Main Index
1840 DYPARAM,VELMAX
Maximum Velocity
DYPARAM,VELMAX Maximum Velocity
Defines the maximum velocity in Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,VELMAX,value,option
Example:
DYPARAM,VELMAX,1.E6
Describer Meaning
VALUE Maximum velocity. (Real > 0.0; default=1.0E10)
OPTION Flag for removing Euler elements. (Character; default=YES)
YES Remove the mass in Eulerian elements in which the velocity exceeds the
maximum specified velocity.
NO Do not remove the mass in Eulerian elements in which the velocity exceeds
the maximum specified velocity.
Remarks:
1. For Eulerian elements, VELMAX is applied to the velocity components separately. Therefore, the
magnitude of the velocity vector is limited to VELMAX. For Lagrangian elements, all components
are scaled down by the same factor to ensure that the maximal magnitude of the velocity vector does
not exceed VELMAX.
2. Although it is not usually necessary to limit the velocity in Eulerian meshes, there are occasions in
regions of near-vacuous flow for example, where specifying a maximum velocity can be advantageous.
The same applies to Lagrangian meshes in contact regions for example. This parameter should be used
with care.
3. Because very high velocities occur mostly in Eulerian elements with very small mass, the mass in these
elements can be removed to keep the analysis stable. This option is not available for Lagrangian solid
elements.
4. VELMAX must be greater than the minimum velocity specified by PARAM,VELCUT.
Main Index
DYPARAM,VELMAX1 1841
Maximum Translational and Angular Velocity
DYPARAM,VELMAX1 Maximum Translational and Angular Velocity
Defines the maximum translational and angular velocity in Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes. Used in SOL
700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,VELMAX1,VELMAXT,option,VELMAXA
Example:
DYPARAM,VELMAX1,1.E6
Describer Meaning
VELMAXT Maximum translational velocity. (Real > 0.0; default=1.0E20)
OPTION Flag for removing Euler elements. (Character; default=YES)
YES Remove the mass in Eulerian elements in which the velocity exceeds the
maximum specified velocity.
NO Do not remove the mass in Eulerian elements in which the velocity exceeds
the maximum specified velocity.
VELMAXA Maximum angular velocity. (Real > 0.0; default=1.0E20)
Remarks:
1. For Eulerian elements, VELMAXT is applied to the velocity components separately. Therefore, the
magnitude of the velocity vector is limited to VELMAXT. For Lagrangian elements, all components
are scaled down by the same factor to ensure that the maximal magnitude of the velocity vector does
not exceed VELMAXT.
2. VELMAXA is used to limit the angular velocity of grid points. By default, the angular velocities are
not limited. In general, there is no need to limit angular grid point velocities.
3. Although it is not usually necessary to limit the velocity in Eulerian meshes, there are occasions in
regions of near-vacuous flow for example, where specifying a maximum velocity can be advantageous.
The same applies to Lagrangian meshes in contact regions for example. This parameter should be used
with care.
4. Because very high velocities occur mostly in Eulerian elements with very small mass, the mass in these
elements can be removed to keep the analysis stable. This option is not available for Lagrangian solid
elements.
5. VELMAXT must be greater than the minimum velocity specified by PARAM,VELCUT.
6. DYPARAM, VELMAX, and DYPARAM,VELMAX1 can be used in the same input deck. The values
set by DYPARAM,VELMAX1 will overrule the values set by DYPARAM,VELMAX.
For example, when using
DYPARAM,VELMAX,1000,YES
Main Index
1842 DYPARAM,VELMAX1
Maximum Translational and Angular Velocity
DYPARAM,VELMAX1,,YES,1e+10
In the OUT file shows:
%I-INIT 02-p3_set_velmaxat, , ,(13),
SUMMARY VELMAX SETTINGS:
MAXIMAL VALUE TRANSLATIONAL VELOCITY = 0.100000E+04
MAXIMAL VALUE ANGULAR VELOCITY = 0.100000E+11
REMOVE EULERIAN MASS WHEN VELOCUITY EXCEEDS LIMIT: YES
Main Index
DYPARAM,VISCPLAS 1843
Use Overstress Formula to Update Strain-rate Dependent Plasticity
DYPARAM,VISCPLAS Use Overstress Formula to Update Strain-rate Dependent

Plasticity
Activate the overstress formula to update strain-rate dependent plasticity. This formula is normally used for
viscous-plastic material. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
DYPARAM,VISCOPLAS,value
Example:
DYPARAM,VISCOPLAS,1
Describer Meaning
VALUE Flag of updating overstress formula. (Integer ≥ 0; default=0)
0 Use scaling-up scheme
1 Use overstress formula
Remarks:
1. The strain rate dependent plasticity is normally calculated by scaling up the basic yield stress without
strain rate effect. Then the trial stresses are mapped back to the scaled-up yield surface. This algorithm
may lead to premature instability. Another technique is to calculate the so-called viscous-plastic strain
rate using “overstress” formula. And then the stresses are updated based on this viscous-plastic strain.
This technique seems to be more stable then the previous one. For shell elements, this option works
when combined with DYPARAM,SHPLAST,RADIAL. Only MATEP and Johnson-Cook models
are supported. For solid elements, this option works only for MATEP.
2. For shell elements, DYPARAM,VISCOPLAS,1, in combination with
DYPARAM,SHPLAST,RADIAL, will use consistent plane stress plasticity algorithm both for strain
rate dependent and independent plasticity. This new algorithm is more accurate than 3-D approach.
Main Index
1844 ECHOOFF
Deactivate Printed Echo
ECHOOFF Deactivate Printed Echo
Marks the point or points in the input file to deactivate printed echo of the input file.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ECHOOFF
Example:
ECHOOFF
Remarks:
1. This entry may also be used in the Executive Control and Case Control Sections. It is described in
the Case Control command, ECHO (Case), 293.
2. The companion to this entry is the ECHOON entry.
Main Index
ECHOON 1845
Activate Printed Echo
ECHOON Activate Printed Echo
Marks the point or points in the input file to activate printed echo of the input file.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ECHOON
Example:
ECHOON
Remarks:
1. This entry may also be used in the Executive Control and Case Control Sections. It is described in
the Case Control command, ECHO (Case), 293.
2. The companion to this entry is the ECHOOFF entry.
Main Index
1846 EIGB
Buckling Analysis Set
EIGB Buckling Analysis Set
Defines data needed to perform buckling analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EIGB SID METHOD L1 L2 NEP NDP NDN
NORM G C
Example:
EIGB 13 INV 0.1 2.5 2 1 1
MAX
Describer Meaning
METHOD Method of eigenvalue extraction. (Character: “INV” for inverse power method or
“SINV” for enhanced inverse power method.)
L1, L2 Eigenvalue range of interest. (Real, L1 < L2)
NEP Estimate of number of roots in positive range not used for METHOD = “SINV”.
(Integer > 0)
NDP, NDN Desired number of positive and negative roots. (Integer>0; Default = 3*NEP)
NORM Method for normalizing eigenvectors. (Character: “MAX” or “POINT”; Default =
“MAX”)
MAX Normalize eigenvectors to the unit value of the largest component in the
analysis set. (Default).
POINT Normalize eigenvectors to the unit value of the component defined in G
and C fields. The value for NORM defaults to MAX if the defined
component is zero.
G Grid or scalar point identification number. Required only if NORM=“POINT”.
(Integer > 0)
C Component number. Required only if NORM=“POINT” and G is a geometric grid
point. (1 < Integer < 6)
Remarks:
1. The EIGB entry must be selected with the Case Control command METHOD = SID.
2. Each eigenvalue is the factor by which the prebuckling state of stress is multiplied to produce buckling
in the shape defined by the corresponding eigenvector.
Main Index
EIGB 1847
Buckling Analysis Set
3. The continuation entry is optional. If the continuation is not specified, than NORM = “MAX”
normalization is performed.
4. See The Nastran Theoretical Manual, Sections 10.3.6 and 10.4.2.2, for a discussion of convergence
criteria.
5. If NORM = “MAX”, components that are not in the analysis set may have values larger than unity.
6. The SINV method is an enhanced version of the INV method. It uses Sturm sequence techniques to
ensure that all roots in the range have been found. It is generally more reliable and more efficient
than the INV method.
7. Convergence is achieved at 10 – 6 .
8. For buckling solutions, the Lanczos algorithm is most reliable if it is allowed to compute the lowest
mode first, then the remainder in increasing order of magnitude. The lowest mode is usually the mode
of most interest. If the L1 and L2 fields are left blank, an estimate of the first mode eigenvalue is found
by a robust, efficient inverse iteration. If NDP and NDN are set to 1, there is a high probability that
the first mode will be computed reliably. If more modes are needed it is easier to fill out the other
fields correctly once the location of the lowest mode is known.
Main Index
1848 EIGC
Complex Eigenvalue Extraction Data
EIGC Complex Eigenvalue Extraction Data
Defines data needed to perform complex eigenvalue analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EIGC SID METHOD NORM G C E ND0
The following continuation is repeated for each desired search region. (J = 1 to n, where n is the number of
search regions.
)
ALPHAAJ OMEGAAJ ALPHABJ OMEGABJ LJ NEJ NDJ
Alternate Format for Continuation Entry for Block Complex Lanczos:

ALPHAAJ OMEGAAJ MBLKSZ IBLKSZ KSTEPS NJi
Examples:
EIGC 14 CLAN
+5.6 4
EIGC 15 HESS 6
Describer Meaning
METHOD Method of complex eigenvalue extraction. (Character: “INV”, “HESS”, or “CLAN”)
INV Inverse power.
HESS Upper Hessenberg. For linear perturbation of ANALYSIS= DCEIG with
large displacement, please don't use HESS. See Remarks 2. and 3.
CLAN Complex Lanczos. For linear perturbation of ANALYSIS= DCEIG with
large displacement, CLAN is recommended. See Remark 9.
IRAM Implicitly Restarted Arnoldi Method. See Remark 13.
NORM Method for normalizing eigenvectors. See Remark 8. (Character: “MAX” or “POINT”;
Default = “MAX”)
MAX Normalize the component having the largest magnitude to a unit value for
the real part and a zero value for the imaginary part.
POINT Normalize the component defined in fields 5 and 6 to a unit value for the
real part and a zero value for the imaginary part. The value for NORM
defaults to "MAX" if the magnitude of the defined component is zero.
G Grid or scalar point identification number. Required if and only if NORM = “POINT”.
(Integer > 0)
Main Index
EIGC 1849
Describer Meaning
C Component number. Required if and only if NORM=“POINT” and G is a geometric
grid point. (0 < Integer < 6)
E Convergence criterion. (Real > 0.0. Default values are: 10-4 for METHOD = “INV”, 10-
15
for METHOD = “HESS”, E is machine dependent for METHOD = “CLAN”.)
MBLKSZ Maximum block size. See Remark 12. (Default = 7; Real > 0.0)
IBLKSZ Initial block size. See Remark 12. (Default = 2; Real > 0.0)
KSTEPS Frequency of solve. (Default = 5; Integer > 0)
Table 9-11 Relationship Between METHOD Field and Other Fields

METHOD Field
Field HESS INV CLAN
NDj (Integer > 0) Desired number of Desired number of roots and Desired number of roots
eigenvalues and eigenvectors in j-th search and eigenvectors to be
eigenvectors. (No region. extracted at j-th shift
Default) (Default = 3*NEj) point. (No Default)
ALPHAAj Not used End point Aj of j-th search j-th shift point.
OMEGAAj region in complex plane. (Default = 0.0)
Real and imaginary (Default = 0.0)
parts of Aj in radians
per unit time. (Real).
ALPHABj Not used End point Bj of j-th search See alternate definitions in
OMEGABj region in complex plane. fields MBLKSZ and
Real and imaginary (Default = 0.0) IBLKSZ below; see also
parts of Bj in radians Remark 12.
per unit time. (Real).
Lj (Real > 0.0) Not used Width of j-th search region. See alternate definitions in
(Default = 1.0) fields MBLKSZ and
IBLKSZ below; see also
Remark 12.
NEj (Integer > 0) Not used Estimated number of roots Not used
in j-th search region.
MBLKSZ Maximum Block Size
For block CLAN only Default = 7
IBLKSZ Initial Block Size
For block CLAN only Default = 2
Main Index
1850 EIGC
OMEGA
A1
B2
L2
ALPHA
L1
A2
B1
Figure 9-90 Sample Search Regions
Remarks:
1. The EIGC entry must be selected in the Case Control Section with the command
CMETHOD = SID. Methods of solution are also controlled by SYSTEM(108) on the NASTRAN
statements (described in Executing MSC Nastran, 1).
SYSTEM(108) Specification
0 QZ HESS method or CLAN block Lanczos, as selected by EIGC entry or
(Default) equivalent PARAM input. Default value.
1 Force Householder QR (Hessenberg with spill, mass matrix must be
nonsingular)
2 Force old single vector complex Lanczos
4 Force new block complex Lanczos
8 Debugging output for Lanczos methods
16 Turn off block reduction in block complex Lanczos
32 Turn off block augmentation in block complex Lanczos
64 Turn of full orthogonality in block complex Lanczos
Main Index
EIGC 1851
SYSTEM(108) Specification
128 Turn off preprocessing of initial vectors in block complex Lanczos
256 Force LR method (Hessenberg, no spill, mass matrix must be invertible)
512 Force QZ method
65536 Use semi-algebraic sort on imaginary part of roots (pre-V70.6 sort)
The word “force” above implies that the method selected by the system cell will be used even when
another method has been selected on an EIGC entry. Sums of these values will produce two or more
actions at once, when feasible. As the numbers get larger, the function is more developer-oriented
than user-oriented.
2. When using METHOD = “HESS”, the following should be noted:
The “HESS” method is generally more reliable and economical for small and moderate-size problems.
It computes ND eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
For linear perturbation of ANALYSIS= DCEIG with large displacement (param, lgdisp, 1) in SOL
400, HESS may yield incorrect results. Therefore, please avoid to use HESS in linear perturbation
analysis with large displacement.
3. The EIGC entry may or may not require continuations as noted below.
• For the “HESS” method, continuations are not required; and their contents are ignored when
present, except for ND1. However, it is recommended that continuations are not used.
• For the “CLAN” method when the continuation entry is not used a shift is calculated
automatically. When a shift is input on the first continuation entry it is used as the initial shift.
Only one shift is used. Data on other continuation entries is ignored.
• For METHOD = “INV”, each continuation defines a rectangular search region. Any number of
regions may be used and they may overlap. Roots in overlapping regions will not be extracted
more than once.
• For all methods, if no continuation is present, then ND0 must be specified on the first entry. If
a continuation is present, then NDj must be specified on the continuation and not on the first
entry.
4. The units of ALPHAAJ, OMEGAAJ, ALPHABJ, and OMEGABJ are radians per unit time.
5. See The NASTRAN Theoretical Manual, Sections 10.4.4.5 and 10.4.4.6, for a discussion of
convergence criteria and the search procedure with the INV method.
6. DIAG 12 prints diagnostics for the inverse power method, the complex Lanczos method and the QZ
HESS method.
7. If METHOD = “HESS” and the LR or QR methods (non-default methods) are selected by system
cell 108 the mass matrix must be nonsingular. The default QZ method does not require a
nonsingular mass matrix.
8. The normalized eigenvectors may be output with the SDISPLACEMENT and/or
DISPLACEMENT Case Control commands.
Main Index
1852 EIGC
9. When using METHOD = CLAN, the following should be noted. The modern CLAN method
(default for METHOD entry of CLAN) has been enhanced to include a block complex Lanczos
approach. This method is more reliable and will not accept inaccurate roots which the old method
had a tendency to do. Thus, given the same input, the new method may often accept fewer roots.
For continuity the old method has been maintained and may be selected by setting SYSTEM(108).
For linear perturbation of ANALYSIS= DCEIG with large displacement (param, lgdisp, 1) in SOL
400, CLAN is recommended.
10. The SVD method is provided for DMAP applications. If used in solution 107 or 110, and mass or
damping terms are present, a user fatal exit is taken. See the MSC Web site for the Flight Loads
Product examples on the use of the SVD method. The SVD operation decomposes the input stiffness
matrix K into the factors U, S, and V. U and V are collections of vectors of orthogonal functions. S
is a rectangular matrix with terms on the diagonal of its left partition. The factors satisfy the equation
K = U*S*V’, where “ ’ ” implies complex conjugate transpose. The ND1 value has a meaning for the
SVD functions which differs from eigensolution.
ND1 OUTPUT
>0 All vectors of U and V are output.
=0 U and V are returned in a purged state.
<0 S is returned as a square matrix whose number of columns is equal to the minimum
number of rows or columns of the input matrix. U and V are truncated to be
commensurate with S. This is a method to reduce the costs of solving very
rectangular input matrices by providing a partial solution for the most interesting
vectors.
11. For DMAP applications there are input parameters, not present in the solution sequences, that may
be used to replace the function of the EIGC and CMETHOD entries. See the MSC Software Web
site for details.
12. The MBLKSZ and IBKLSZ parameters are integers in concept, but must be input at real numbers
(that is, with a decimal point.) They represent maximum sizes, and may be reduced internally for
small size problems.
13. The IRAM method is an out-of-core implementation of the public domain ARPACK complex
eigenvalue solver. To use IRAM, the mass matrix has to be symmetric or Hermitian, and the number
of modes desired can be at most the order of the generalized eigenproblem minus one. IRAM does
not compute the left eigenvectors and thus is not suitable for SOL200 design optimization analysis.
14. For the "IRAM" method, only the fields that contain EIGC, SID, METHOD, NORM, ND0, NDJ
are meaningful. The user selects the method by specifying IRAM in the METHOD field, the
eigenvector normalization scheme in the NORM field, and the number of desired modes in the ND0
or the NDj field. The other fields are irrelevant.
Main Index
EIGP 1853
Poles in Complex Plane
EIGP Poles in Complex Plane
Defines poles that are used in complex eigenvalue extraction by the Determinant method.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EIGP SID ALPHA1 OMEGA1 M1 ALPHA2 OMEGA2 M2
Example:
EIGP 15 -5.2 0.0 2 6.3 5.5 3
Describer Meaning
ALPHAi,OMEGAi Coordinates of point in complex plane. (Real)
Mi Multiplicity of complex root at pole defined by point at ALPHAi and OMEGAi.
(Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. The EIGP entry defines poles in the complex plane that are used with an associated EIGC entry
having the same set number.
2. The units of ALPHAi and OMEGAi are radians per unit time.
3. Poles are used only in the determinant method. (METHOD = “DET” on the EIGC entry).
4. One or two poles may be defined on a single entry.
5. See The NASTRAN Theoretical Manual, Section 10.3.4, for details.
Main Index
1854 EIGR
Real Eigenvalue Extraction Data
EIGR Real Eigenvalue Extraction Data
Defines data needed to perform real eigenvalue analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EIGR SID METHOD F1 F2 NE ND
NORM G C
Example:
EIGR 13 LAN 12
Describer Meaning
METHOD Method of eigenvalue extraction. (Character)
Modern Methods:
LAN Lanczos Method
AHOU Automatic selection of HOU or MHOU method. See Remark 13.
Obsolete Methods:
INV Inverse Power method.
SINV Inverse Power method with enhancements.
GIV Givens method of tridiagonalization.
MGIV Modified Givens method.
HOU Householder method of tridiagonalization.
MHOU Modified Householder method.
AGIV Automatic selection of METHOD = “GIV” or “MGIV”. See Remark 13.
NORM Method for normalizing eigenvectors. (Character: “MASS,” “MAX,” or “POINT”;
Default = “MASS”)
MASS Normalize to unit value of the generalized mass. (Default)
MAX Normalize to unit value of the largest component in the analysis set.
POINT Normalize to a positive or negative unit value of the component defined
in fields 3 and 4. The POINT option is not supported for
METHOD=LAN. (Defaults to “MASS” if defined component is zero.)
Main Index
EIGR 1855
Describer Meaning
G Grid or scalar point identification number. Required only if NORM = “POINT”.
(Integer > 0)
C Component number. Required only if NORM = “POINT” and G is a geometric grid
point. (1 < Integer < 6)
Table 9-12 Relationship Between METHOD Field and Other Fields for
Obsolete Methods
METHOD Field
Field INV or SINV GIV, MGIV, HOU, or MHOU
F1, F2 Frequency range of interest. F1 must Frequency range of interest. If ND is not blank, F1
be input. If METHOD = “SINV” and and F2 are ignored. If ND is blank, eigenvectors are
ND, is blank, then F2 must be input. found with natural frequencies that lie in the range
See also Remark 21. between F1 and F2. (Real > 0.0; F1 < F2)
(Real > 0.0)
NE Estimate of number of roots in range Not used.
(Required for METHOD = “INV”).
Not used by “SINV” method.
(Integer > 0)
ND Desired number of roots. If this field is Desired number of eigenvectors. If ND is zero, the
blank and METHOD = “SINV”, then number of eigenvectors is determined from F1 and
all roots between F1 and F2 are F2. If all three are blank, then ND is automatically
searched and the limit is 600 roots. set to one more than the number of degrees-of-
(Integer > 0, Default is 3 ⋅ NE for freedom listed on SUPORTi entries. (Integer > 0;
METHOD = “INV” only.) Default = 0)
Remarks:
1. The EIGR entry must be selected with the Case Control command METHOD = SID.
2. See Real Eigenvalue Analysis (p. 41) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide for a discussion
of method selection.
3. The units of F1 and F2 are cycles per unit time.
4. The continuation entry is optional. If the continuation entry is not specified, then mass
normalization is performed.
5. The contemporary methods are LAN and AHOU. The other methods are in a maintenance-only
status, with no enhancements planned for them. They may be eliminated in a future release
of Nastran.
Main Index
1856 EIGR
6. The LAN method is the most general-purpose method, and may be used on both small- and large-
size problems. It takes advantage of sparsity of input matrices, leading to greater efficiency on large-
size problems. Because Lanczos performance is tuned for medium to large problems, this has caused
difficulties with very small problems. Thus, by default, on problems with fewer than 20 degrees-of-
freedom when the LAN method is selected, the method is switched to AHOU. The criteria for
automatic switching is controlled by SYSTEM(359) on the NASTRAN entry. The NE, G, and C
fields are ignored for the LAN method. The NORM field may be set to MASS (the default value) or
NORM. The conventions used when both the Fi and ND fields are specified are described in
Table 9-13 of the EIGRL entry description. The EIGRL entry is an alternate method to select the LAN
method. It has several other input options for special cases. When both and EIGRL and EIGR have
the same SID and that SID is selected by a METHOD command the EIGRL entry takes precedence.
7. The AHOU method is competitive with the LAN method when there are small, dense matrices and
many eigenvectors are required. This most commonly occurs when static or dynamic reduction is
performed. The AHOU method does not take advantage of matrix sparsity, so that computation cost
rises with the cube of the number of DOFs. The AHOU method responds to all permitted values for
all the other fields except NE, which is ignored.
8. All methods require a positive semi-definite (psd) mass matrix for stable solutions. The mass matrix
may be tested for this condition for all methods of solution by setting SYSTEM(303). A value of “-
4” should be sufficient to identify problem matrices. A fatal error exit is taken when it is not met. All
Nastran metric elements are designed to produce psd mass matrices. CMASSi elements, DMIG
matrices selected by the M2GG command, and matrices input via INPUTT4 are special methods
that allow addition of non-psd terms by use of non-metric element input. If none of this type of
special input is present and the fatal error exit is taken you may have encountered an error in a metric
element. Contact your local MSC technical representative for corrective action in this case.
9. The LAN and AHOU methods allow singular but positive semi-definite mass matrices.
10. The tridiagonal methods include the xGIV and xHOU methods, where “x” is described in the
following comments. All tridiagonal methods compute all eigenvalues, and the number of
eigenvectors specified by the Fi and Nd fields, as described in Table 9-12.
11. If “x” is blank (for example, the HOU method is selected) the mass matrix must be non-singular.
12. If “x” is M (for example, the MHOU method is selected) the mass matrix may be singular. A
modified, shifted problem is solved in an inverse basis with this method. Some precision in the
solution and longer computation time is exchanged for a more stable solution.
13. If “x” is A (for example, the AHOU method is selected) an attempt is made to solve the problem
without shifting, in the interest of cost reduction and maximum precision. If the mass matrix is
determined to be poorly conditioned for inversion the basis is automatically shifted with the modified
method.
14. If NORM = “MAX”, components that are not in the analysis set may have values larger than unity.
15. If NORM = “POINT”, the selected component should be in the analysis set (a-set). (The program
uses NORM = “MAX” when it is not in the analysis set.) The displacement value at the selected
component will be positive or negative unity.
Main Index
EIGR 1857
16. The “SINV” method is an enhanced version of the “INV” method. It uses Sturm sequence number
techniques to make it more likely that all roots in the range have been found. It is generally more
reliable and more efficient than the “INV” method.
17. For the “INV” and “SINV” methods, convergence is achieved at 10 – 6 . Convergence is tested by other
criteria for the other methods.
18. For the “SINV” method only, if F2 is blank, the first shift will be made at F1, and only one
eigensolution above F1 will be calculated. If there are no modes below F1, it is likely that the first
mode will be calculated. If there are modes below F1 (including rigid body modes defined by
SUPORT entries), a mode higher than the first mode above F1 may be calculated.
19. When F1, F2, and ND are all zero or blank, ND is reset to 1. A User Warning Message is produced
for this condition, which is interpreted as likely to be due to an inadvertent omission by the user.
of most interest. If the F1 and F2 fields are left blank, an estimate of the first mode eigenvalue is found
by a robust, efficient inverse iteration. If ND is set to 1, there is a high probability that the first mode
will be computed reliably. If more modes are needed it is easier to fill out the other fields correctly
once the location of the lowest mode is known.
21. F2 must be specified if DOMAINSOLVER ACMS or DOMAINSOLVER MODES is also specified
in the Executive Control Section.
22. For large sized problems, Lanczos is the most efficient and is the recommended method for large
problems.
23. It is not recommended to use AHOU, HOU, MHOU if RIGID=LAGRAN case control.
Main Index
1858 EIGRL
Real Eigenvalue Extraction Data, Lanczos Method
EIGRL Real Eigenvalue Extraction Data, Lanczos Method
Defines data needed to perform real eigenvalue (vibration or buckling) analysis with the Lanczos method.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EIGRL SID V1 V2 ND MSGLVL MAXSET SHFSCL NORM
option_1 = value_1 option_2 = value_2, etc.
Example:
EIGRL 1 0.1 3.2 10
NORM=MAX NUMS=2
Describer Meaning
V1, V2 For vibration analysis: frequency range of interest. For buckling analysis: eigenvalue
range of interest. See Remark 4. (Real or blank, – 5 × 10 16 ≤ V1 < V2 ≤ 5. × 10 16 )
ND Number of roots desired. See Remark 4. (Integer > 0 or blank)
MSGLVL Diagnostic level. (0 < Integer < 4; Default = 0)
MAXSET Number of vectors in block or set. Default is machine dependent. See Remark 14.
SHFSCL Estimate of the first flexible mode natural frequency. See Remark 10. (Real or blank)
NORM Method for normalizing eigenvectors (Character: “MASS” or “MAX”)
MASS Normalize to unit value of the generalized mass. Not available for
buckling analysis. (Default for normal modes analysis.)
MAX Normalize to unit value of the largest displacement in the analysis set.
Displacements not in the analysis set may be larger than unity. (Default
for buckling analysis.)
ALPH Specifies a constant for the calculation of frequencies (Fi) at the upper boundary
segments for the parallel method based on the following formula. See Remark 13.
(Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0):
i
1 – ALPH
ALPH< 1.0, Fi = V1 + ( V2 – V1 ) ---------------------------------------
NUMS
-
1. – ALPH
i
ALPH = 1.0, Fi = V1 + ( V2 – V1 ) -----------------
NUMS
NUMS Number of frequency segments for the parallel method. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
Main Index
EIGRL 1859
Describer Meaning
Fi Frequency at the upper boundary of the i-th segment. See Remark 13. (Real or blank;
V1 < F1 < F2 < …F15 < V2 )
option_i= Assigns a value to the fields above except for SID. ALPH, NUMS, and Fi must be
value_i specified in this format. V1, V2, ND, MSGLVL, MAXSET, SHFSCL, and NORM
may be specified in this format as long as their corresponding field is blank in the
parent entry.
Remarks:
1. Real eigenvalue extraction data sets must be selected with the Case Control command
METHOD = SID.
2. The units of V1 and V2 are cycles per unit time in vibration analysis, and are eigenvalues in buckling
analysis. Each eigenvalue is the factor by which the prebuckling state of stress is multiplied to produce
buckling in the shape defined by the corresponding eigenvector.
3. NORM = “MASS” is ignored in buckling analysis and NORM = “MAX” will be applied.
4. The roots are found in order of increasing magnitude; that is, those closest to zero are found first.
The number and type of roots to be found can be determined from Table 9-13.
Table 9-13 Number and Type of Roots Found with EIGRL Entry
V1 V2 ND Number and Type of Roots Found
V1 V2 ND Lowest ND or all in range, whichever is smaller.
V1 V2 blank All in range
V1 blank ND Lowest ND in range [V1,+∞]
V1 blank blank Lowest root in range [V1,+∞]
blank blank ND Lowest ND roots in [-∞,+∞]
blank blank blank Lowest root. See Remark 11.
blank V2 ND Lowest ND roots below V2
blank V2 blank All below V2
5. In vibration analysis, if V1 < 0.0, the negative eigenvalue range will be searched. (Eigenvalues are
proportional to Vi squared; therefore, the negative sign would be lost.) This is a means for diagnosing
improbable models. In buckling analysis, negative V1 and/or V2 require no special logic.
6. Eigenvalues are sorted on order of magnitude for output. An eigenvector is found for each eigenvalue.
7. MSGLVL controls the amount of diagnostic output during the eigenvalue extraction process. The
default value of zero suppresses all diagnostic output. A value of one prints eigenvalues accepted at
each shift. Higher values result in increasing levels of diagnostic output.
Main Index
1860 EIGRL
8. MAXSET is used to limit the maximum block size. It is otherwise set by the region size or by ND
with a maximum size of 15. It may also be reset if there is insufficient memory available. The default
value is recommended.
9. In vibration analysis, if V1 is blank, all roots less than zero are calculated. Small negative roots are
usually computational zeroes which indicate rigid body modes. Finite negative roots are an indication
of modeling problems. If V1 is set to zero, negative eigenvalues are not calculated.
10. A specification for SHFSCL may improve performance, especially when large mass techniques are
used in enforced motion analysis. Large mass techniques can cause a large gap between the rigid body
and flexible frequencies. If this field is blank, a value for SHFSCL is estimated automatically.
11. On occasion, it may be necessary to compute more roots than requested to ensure that all roots in the
range have been found. However, this method will not output the additional roots.
12. NASTRAN SYSTEM(146) (also known as FBSMEM) provides options for I/O reduction during
FBS operations according to the following table.
Table 16 SYSTEM(146) Options

SYSTEM(146)
(default=0) Description
-1 or 0 Use available memory to store as much of the factor matrix as possible
during FBS operations. System Information Message 4199 is printed in
the F04 file.
1 Disable all special memory operations for FBS.
2 Increase memory reserved for sparse method by approximately 200%.
13. For the distributed parallel method, the frequency range between V1 and V2 may be subdivided into
segments that can then be analyzed in parallel. V1 and V2 must be specified for the parallel method.
NUMS must be specified greater than 1 to take advantage of the parallel method. NUMS may also
be specified on the NUMSEG keyword of the NASTRAN statement. Currently, NUMSEG must
equal the number of processors and by default NUMSEG is set to the number of processors requested
by the DMP keyword. If both are specified, then NUMS takes precedence.
The upper frequencies of each segment may be generated automatically by ALPH or specified directly
in Fi. If both are specified, then Fi takes precedence over ALPH as long as they are consistent. ALPH
if multiplied by 100 may also be specified on FRQSEQ keyword of the NASTRAN statement.
14. Increasing MAXSET may improve performance for large problems where a large number of
eigenvalues are being found. The default is 7 on all machines. SYSTEM(263) may be set in an rcfile
to effectively modify the default; however the setting on the EIGRL entry always takes precedence.
Main Index
EIGRL 1861
15. SYSTEM(196), keyword SCRSAVE, controls reuse of scratch files when segment logic is invoked.
SYSTEM(196) is useful only when multiple frequency segments are requested on a Lanczos run.
(Multiple frequency segments can be requested via the NUMS field in the EIGRL entry and by
SYSTEM(197).) Each frequency segment requires a minimum of three scratch files. When multiple
frequency segments are used on a single processor computer then each frequency segment is solved
serially. In this case, it makes sense to let segment #2 use the scratch files which were used by segment
#1 since work for segment #1 has been completed (otherwise it wouldn’t be working on #2).
Similarly, when work for segment #2 is finished, segment #3 should be able to use #2’s scratch files.
SYSTEM(196)=1 allows such file reuse and is considered a safe default on Version 70 and later
systems.
16. The new buckling shift logic in Version 70.5 tends to shift to 1.0 first. The logic may have difficulty
finding the lowest ND roots if a problem requests a small number of roots (ND) when there are
thousands of roots below 1. In this case either the loading should be scaled, SHFSCL specified, or a
smaller frequency range requested.
17. Because Lanczos performance is tuned for medium to large problems, this has caused difficulties with
very small problems. Thus, by default, on problems with fewer than 20 degrees-of-freedom when the
LAN method is selected, the method is switched to AHOU. The criteria for automatic switching is
controlled by SYSTEM(359) on the NASTRAN entry.
18. V2 must be specified if DOMAINSOLVER ACMS or DOMAINSOLVER MODES is also specified
in the Executive Control Section.
of most interest. If the V1 and V2 fields are left blank, an estimate of the first mode eigenvalue is
found by a robust, efficient inverse iteration. If ND is set to 1, there is a high probability that the first
mode will be computed reliably. If more modes are needed it is easier to fill out the other fields
correctly once the location of the lowest mode is known.
20. For buckling solutions, if V1 is explicitly set to 0.0, negative eigenvalues will be calculated based on
a negative shift value. This is done to avoid singularities resulting from a shift at 0.0. If V1 is set to a
small positive value, then negative eigenvalues will not be calculated. This behavior was changed with
the MSC Nastran 2010 release whereas before setting V1 to 0.0 yielded no negative eigenvalues. The
best approach, however, is to follow the suggestion from Remark 19.
Main Index
1862 ELEMUDS
Element Property User Defined Service or Subroutine
ELEMUDS Element Property User Defined Service or Subroutine
Allows the user to provide element property routines for use with specified Nastran elements.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ELEMUDS PID PTYPE GROUP UNAME DEPEN
Examples:
In FMS Section of Nastran input stream:
CONNECT SERVICE ELEMENT ‘SCA.MDSolver.Util.Ums’
In Bulk Data:
ELEMUDS 17 PBUSH2D ELEMENT THPAD FREQ
Describer Meaning
PID Element property identification number that matches the identification number on a
PBUSH2D element property entry. (Integer > 0)
PTYPE The name of the element entry. Currently supported element property entry is:
PBUSH2D. (Character; no Default)
GROUP The group name used for the FMS section CONNECT SERVICE statement. (Character;
no Default)
UNAME User subroutine name associated with the entry. See Remark 6.(Character)
DEPEN Specifies if element is frequency dependent. DEPEN=NOM or blank; user element is not
frequency dependent. DEPEN=FREQ; user element is frequency dependent. (Character
default=NOM)
IDATAi Additional user supplied Integer data not already existing on the specified property entry.
RDATAi Additional user supplied Real data not already existing on the specified property entry.
(Real; no Default)
Main Index
ELEMUDS 1863
Element Property User Defined Service or Subroutine
“CHAR” Keyword indicating that the following data is Character. (Character)

CDATAi Additional user supplied Character data not already existing on the specified property
entry. (Character; no Default)
Remarks:
1. This entry triggers the call to a user element property subroutine for advanced nonlinear materials.
The GROUP must match the GROUP field of the CONNECT SERVICE FMS statement.
2. On the FMS CONNECT statement, only the CONNECT SERVICE can be used with this entry.
3. PID must match an existing PID.
5. Certain user subroutines may require integer, real, or character data input as specified in the User
Defined Services manual.
6. UNAME must be truncated to 8 characters in the bulk data field
7. If the ROMAC interface is being used then UNAME=THPAD is required. See the THPAD Bulk
Data entry (p. 3150) for a description of ROMAC service. (http://www.virginia.edu/romac/)
Main Index
1864 ELEMUDS
Element Property User Defined Service or Subroutine - SOL 600
ELEMUDS Element Property User Defined Service or Subroutine - SOL 600
Allows the user to provide element property routines for use with enhanced nonlinear elements in SOL 600.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ELEMUDS PID PTYPE GROUP UNAME
Examples:
ELEMUDS 17 PSHELL UELEM RTN1
ELEMUDS 17 PSHELL UELEM1 RTN3

REAL .00134 1.467+4 .03
INT 8 3
Describer Meaning
PID Element property identification number that matches the identification number on a
PSHELL, PSOLID, PCOMP, PCOMPG, PBAR, PBEAM, PSHEAR, or PROD
element property entry. (Integer > 0)
PTYPE The name of the element entry. Currently supported element property entries include:
PSHELL, PSOLID, PCOMP, PCOMPG, PBAR, PBEAM, PSHEAR, or PROD.
GROUP The group name used for the FMS section CONNECT SERVICE entry. (Character; no
Default)
UNAME A primary or secondary name to identify the user subroutine. See Remark 6. (Character;
Default blank)
IDATAi Additional user supplied Integer data not already existing on the specified MAT entry.
RDATAi Additional user supplied Real data not already existing on the specified MAT entry. (Real;
no Default)
Main Index
ELEMUDS 1865
Element Property User Defined Service or Subroutine - SOL 600
“CHAR” Keyword indicating that the following data is Character. See Remark 7. (Character)
CDATAi Additional user supplied Character data not already existing on the specified MAT entry.
Remarks:
1. This entry triggers the call to a user element property subroutine for advanced nonlinear materials.
2. PID must match an existing PID.
4. Certain user subroutines may require integer, real, or character data input as specified in the User
Defined Services manual.
5. The ELEMUDS entry may be used instead of the USRSUB6 entry. Both entries should not be used
in the same run. EVAL will be stored as a character*16 name in common block /userch/.
6. UNAME identifies the user subroutine name to be called.
7. Character fields CDATAi are ignored in SOL 600 are not passed to the user subroutine.
Main Index
1866 ELIST
Element List
ELIST Element List
Defines a list of CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 structural elements for virtual fluid mass.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ELIST LID E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7
E8 E9 E10 -etc.-
Example:
ELIST 3 51 -62 68 THRU 102 122
Describer Meaning
LID Identification number of list. (Integer > 0)
Ei Identification number of a structural element. See Remark 1. for the meaning of the
negative sign. The string “THRU” may be used to indicate that all existing elements
between those referenced in the preceding and succeeding fields are in the list.
(Integer ≠ 0 or “THRU”)
Remarks:
1. If the ELIST entry is referenced by field 6 of an MFLUID entry, the wetted side of the element is
determined by the presence or absence of a minus sign preceding the element’s ID on the ELIST
entry. A minus sign indicates that the fluid is on the side opposite to the element’s positive normal
as determined by applying the right-hand rule to the sequence of its corner points. If the “THRU”
option is used, then immediately preceding and succeeding elements must have the same sign.
2. Large open “THRUs” should be avoided.
3. The word “THRUs” must not appear in field 2 or 9 on the parent entry or on any continuations.
4. If any ELIST entry is changed or added on restart then a complete re-analysis may be performed.
Therefore, ELIST entry changes or additions are not recommended on restart.
Main Index
ENDDATA 1867
Bulk Data Delimiter
ENDDATA Bulk Data Delimiter
Designates the end of the Bulk Data Section.
Format:
ENDDATA
Remark:
1. ENDDATA is optional.
Main Index
1868 ENDDYNA
Defines the End of Direct Text to Dytran
ENDDYNA Defines the End of Direct Text to Dytran
All entries between TODYNA and ENDDYNA will be passed directly by SOL 700 to Dytran. Used in SOL
700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ENDDYNA
Example:
TODYNA
MAT1 345 29.0E6 0.285 0.0004
ENDDYNA
Describer Meaning
TODYNA
MAT1
ENDDYNA
Remarks:
See TODYNA, 3177 for details of how this entry is used.
Main Index
ENTUDS 1869
User Defined Logic at Entry Point
ENTUDS User Defined Logic at Entry Point
Calls user defined logic within a SCA service at the point specified within the solution sequence.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ENTUDS ENTID ENTPNT GROUP
Example:
ENTUDS 1 RCENT1 MY_FUNC
INT 2 17
REAL .5 .25
Describer Meaning
ENTID Entry point identification number (Integer > 0)
ENTPNT The point of entry in the solution sequence. Acceptable values for now: “RCENT1”,
“RCENT2”, “RCOUT1”, “RCEXEC1”. (Character; Required)
GROUP The SCA group name used to identify the service (Character; Required)
“INT” Key word indicating that the following data is integer. (Character)
IDATAi Additional user supplied Integer data not already existing on the specified MAT entry.
“REAL” Key word indicating that the following data is real. (Character)
RDATAi Additional user supplied Real data not already existing on the specified MAT entry.
(Real; no Default)
“CHAR” Key word indicating that the following data is Character. (Character)
CDATAi Additional user supplied Character data not already existing on the specified MAT
entry. (Character; no Default)
Remarks:
1. This entry is for RC Network solver only.
2. In SINDA input file, there are 4 entry points for users to input customized logics.
a. RCENT1 ---- Variable 1 block
Main Index
1870 ENTUDS
User Defined Logic at Entry Point
b. RCENT2 ---- Variable 2 block

c. RCOUT1 ---- Output block
d. RCEXEC1 ---- Execution block
Main Index
EOSDEF 1871
Deflagration
EOSDEF Deflagration
EOSDEF defines the properties of the deflagration equation of state, and the reaction rate to model the
burning of solid propellants. The burning of the solid propellant produces hot gas.
Note: With limitations of Dytran solver, the solid propellant is not modeled, and only the hot gas is
modeled. During burning hot gas flows into the Euler elements. Format and
Example
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EOSDEF MID GAMMA B R Cv Cp E RHOS +EOSDEF1
EOSDEF 3 1.123 0.001 304 1E+6 1600 +EOSDEF1
+EOSDEF1 RHOF W BETA SAVR X Y

+EOSDEF1 0.1 4E-8 0.85 6000 0.6 0.0
Field Contents Type Default

MID Unique material number. I>0 Required
GAMMA Constant ϒ R>0 Required
B Gas co-volume R≥ 0 Required
R Gas constant. R>0 Refer to remark 2.
CV Specific heat at constant volume R>0 Refer to remark 3.
CP Specific heat at constant pressure R>0 Refer to remark 3.
E Chemical energy per unit burned mass R>0.0 Required
RHOS Reference density of propellant R>0 Required
RHOF Density of powder R>0 Refer to remark 5.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
reference density of propellant
W Burning rate coefficient R≥ 0.0 Required

BETA Burning rate exponent R≥ 0.0 Required
SAVR Initial surface area divided by volume R>0 Required
X Parameter form function R≥ 0.0 Required
Y Parameter form function R≥ 0.0 Required
Main Index
1872 EOSDEF
Deflagration
Remarks
1. EOSDEF – The deflagration Equation of State is explained in Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4:
Models.
2. This equation of state is used with Eulerian elements.
3. The temperature of gas is calculated when one of the constants R, C v or C p are specified. When
temperature is not mentioned in an output request, omit the he constants .
4. The pressure in the reaction products is defined by the Noble-Abel equation of state as follows:
ρ
ρ = ( ϒ – 1 ) ---------------- e for reacted product,
1 – bρ
( ϒ – 1 )e
T = --------------------- where ϒ , b are constants and R is the gas constant.
R
The chemical reaction rate for conversion of un-reacted explosive to reaction products is mentioned the
relation below:
ξ = wSAVR vivacity
φ = ( 1 – F ) + YF
X form function
dF
------ = ξφp β
time derivative of burn fraction
dt
where
w= burning rate coefficient

β = burning rate exponent
SAVR = initial surface area divided by volume
Y= parameter form function
S= parameter form function
Note: F denotes the burn fraction which is defined as the fraction of the explosive that has a
5. RHOF allows taking into account the air between gunpowder grains. Also, it allows taking into
account air inside the combustion chamber. For example If the chamber is filled with 10% real
propellant and the rest is filled with air then RHOF = 0.1.
6. To indicate what Eulerian regions can burn, the variable DEFMAT can be used. In regions that can
burn DEFMAT=1. DEFMAT can be set on the TICVAL card:
TICVAL,14,,DENSITY,1.14,SIE,300000.2,DEFMAT,1.0
7. Ignition of the propellant approached by setting SIE to the flame temperature in specific areas:
TICVAL,15,DENSITY,1.14,SIE,4231908.591,DEFMAT,1.0
Main Index
EOSDEF 1873
Deflagration
Where SIEignition = Flame Temp x Cv

Flame Temp can be extracted from Chemical Energy per unit burned mass and Gas constant: Tflame
=E/R.
Main Index
1874 EOSGAM
Gamma Law Gas Equation of State
EOSGAM Gamma Law Gas Equation of State
Defines the properties of a Gamma Law equation of state where the pressure p is defined as:
p = ( γ – 1 )ρe
where:
e = specific internal energy per unit mass

ρ = overall material density
γ = A constant
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EOSGAM EID GAMMA R CV CP VISC
Example:
EOSGAM 2 1.4 287.0
Describer Meaning
EID Unique equation of state number. (Integer > 0, Required)
GAMMA Constant γ . (Real > 0, default=blank)
R Gas constant. See Remarks 1. and 3. (Real > 0, default=blank)
CV Specific heat at constant volume. See Remarks 1. and 3. (Real > 0, default=blank)
CP Specific heat at constant pressure. See Remarks 1. and 3. (Real > 0, default=blank)
VISC Viscosity coefficient. If zero, no viscosity. See Remarks 4., 5., and 6. (Real > 0,
default=blank)
Remarks:
1. The temperature of the gas will be calculated when one of the gas constants, R, C v or C p is specified.
2. The Euler variable name for temperature is TEMPTURE.
3. γ , R, C v and C p have the following relationships:
cp
γ = ----- R = cp – cν
cν
Main Index
EOSGAM 1875
Gamma Law Gas Equation of State
4. The viscosity coefficient is the dynamic viscosity. It is the ratio between shear stress and velocity
gradient. The SI-unit of viscosity is
Ns kg
Pa ⋅ s = -------2 = -------
M ms
5. If possible, use (in coupled analysis) the FASTCOUP coupling algorithm because viscous fluxes are
computed more accurately for fast coupling than for general coupling.
6. For the single mat solver, viscous stresses can be requested by the use of TXX through TZX. Also,
EFFSTS is available. For the multi-material solver, viscous stresses are stored in TXX-VIS, TYY-VIS,
TZZ-VIS, TXY-VIS, TYZ-VIS, TZX-VIS. This viscous stresses depend only on the current velocity
gradients. The stresses like TXX are elastic-plastic stresses and depend on past stress. The total stress
tensor in the element is given by the average of the viscous stress and elastic-plastic stress. The weight
factors are the material fraction of viscous fluid and the remaining materials.
Main Index
1876 EOSGRUN
The Gruneisen Equation of State
EOSGRUN The Gruneisen Equation of State
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EOSGRUN EOSID C S1 S2 S3 GAMAO A E0
V0
Example:
EOSGRUN 2 3958.0 1.497 0.0 0.0 2.0 0.0 0.0
0.0
Describer Meaning
EOSID Equation of state ID and must be unique. (Integer; Required)
C Constant C. (Real; Required)
S1 Constant S1. (Real; Required)
GAMAO Gruneisen gamma. (Real; Required)
A First order volume correction to GAMAO. (Real; Required)
E0 Initial internal energy. (Real; Required)
V0 Initial relative volume. (Real; Required)
Remark:
The Gruneisen equation of state with cubic shock velocity-particle velocity defines pressure for compressed
materials as
γ0 α 2
ρ 0 C μ 1 +  1 – ---- μ – --- μ
2
 2 2
p = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- + ( γ 0 + αμ )E
2 3 2
μ μ
1 – ( S 1 – 1 )μ – S 2 ------------- – S 3 --------------------2
μ+1 (μ + 1)
and for expanded materials as

2
p = ρ 0 C μ + ( γ 0 + αμ )E
where C is the intercept of the vs-vp curve; S 1 , S 2 , and S 3 are the coefficients of the slope of the vs-vp curve;
γ 0 is the Gruneisen gamma; a is the first order volume correction to γ 0 ; and μ = ρ ⁄ ρ 0 – 1 .
Main Index
EOSIG 1877
Ignition and Growth Equation of State
EOSIG Ignition and Growth Equation of State
Defines the properties of Ignition and Growth equation of state and the reaction rate equation used to model
high explosives. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EOSIG EID UNITDEF DBEXPL UNITCNV +
+ AE BE R1E R2E OMGE I G +
+ A AP BP R1P R2P OMGP X Y +
+ Z R ECHEM PRSTOL ITRMAX
Example:
EOSIG 10 LX17 SI
Describer Meaning
EID Unique equation of state number referenced from MATDEOL. (Integer > 0; Required)
UNITDEF User-defined default unit for the inputs: See Remarks 2. and 3. (Character)
CCGMS m/g/ μs units
SI International System units
METRIC Metric units
IMPER imperial units
MMMG mm/mg/ μs units
DBEXPL Use explosive material from the database (See Remarks 4. and 6.) (Character, NO). The
following detonation materials are available in the data base:
NO The database is not used. See Remark 5.
P94A PBX-9404 (a) explosive
TATB TATB explosive
PENT PETN explosive
CTNT Cast TNT explosive
LCOMPB LANL COMP B explosive
MCOMPB Military COMP B explosive
P94B PBX-9404 (b) explosive
LX17 LX-17 explosive
UNITCNV User defined conversion units: (Character; see Remarks 2. and 3.)
CGMS cm/g/ μs units
Main Index
1878 EOSIG
Describer Meaning
SI International System units
METRIC Metric units
IMPER Imperial units
MMMGS mm/mg/ μs units
AE Constant A e for un-reacted explosive. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
BE Constant B e for un-reacted explosive. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
R1E Constant R 1e for un-reacted explosive. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
R2E Constant R 2e for un-reacted explosive. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
OMGE Constant ω e for un-reacted explosive
I First ignition coefficient. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
G Second ignition coefficient. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
A Density ignition coefficient. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
AP Constant Ap for reacted product. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
BP Constant Bp for reacted product. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
R1P Constant R1p for reacted product. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
R2P Constant R2p for reacted product. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
OMGP Constant ω p for reacted product. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
X Surface burning exponent. See Remark 5. (Real, 2./9.)
Y Surface burning exponent. See Remark 5. (Real, 2./3.)
Z Pressure exponent. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
R Relative density exponent. See Remark 5. (Real, .4)
ECHEM Chemical energy of high explosive per unit mass. See Remark 5. (Real; Required)
PRSTOL Tolerance for pressure equilibrium iterations in mixed phase elements. (Real > 0, 1.E-6)
ITRMAX Maximum number of iterations in pressure equilibrium iterations. (Integer > 0, 16)
Remarks:
1. This equation of state can only be used with solid Eulerian elements.
2. The definition of the unit system in which the input values are defined is required information only
in case you wish to have an automatic conversion to a different unit system as defined by the
UNITCNV field. In case you are using the conversion mechanism, note that the density RHO in the
corresponding MATDEUL entry will be interpreted in the unit system defined here. Table 9-14
defines sets of units available:
Main Index
EOSIG 1879
Table 9-14 Sets of Units Used in the IG Model

Quantity CGμs SI Metric Imperial MMMGμs
Length Centimeter (cm) Meter (m) Centimeter Inch (in) Millimeter
(cm) (mm)
Time Microsecond (μs) Second (s) Second (s) Second (s) Microsecond
(μs)
Mass Gram (g) Kilogram Gram (g) Slug (lbf-s2/in) Milligram
(kg) (mg)
Force Teradyne Newton (N) Dyne Pound force kN
(lbf )
Density g/cm3 Kg/m3 g/cm3 lbf-s2/in4 mg/ mm3
Stress Mbar Pascal (Pa) μbar Lbf/in2 GPa
Energy 1012 erg (Mbars-cm3) Joule (J) Erg Lbf-in J
Temperature Kelvin (K) Kelvin (K) Kelvin (K) Kelvin (K) Kelvin (K)
3. The UNITCNV field defines the unit system to which the material parameters are converted. In case
you are not using one of the database material models, you also have to define the default unit system
(UNITDEF) in which you supplied the data.
4. You can use the database containing several detonation materials to start the analysis. The material
data are taken from Lee/Tarver (Ref. 1) and Murphy/Lee (Ref. 2) papers in the Theory Manual. The
equations of state parameters are given in the Table 9-15.
5. The default setting for DBEXPL is NO, which means you should define the values in the input fields
(fields 12 to 36). If the database material name is defined, all values in the input fields will be
overridden. The reference density RHO defined on the corresponding MATDEUL entry will be set
to the value from the database.
6. The default unit system for the material database parameters is the CGMS unit system. If you wish
to use the material base data in a different unit system, you can specify this by defining the target unit
system in the UNITCNV field.
7. You can define the shear property and yield model of the material with respectively SHXXX and
YLDXX entry. Note that the unit system of data required in these entries should be consistent with
the unit system defined in the UNITCNV field.
8. The IG equation of state cannot be used in combination with a spallation model.
9. The following JWL equation of state is used to calculate the pressure of the un-reacted explosive (in
“solid” state):
Main Index
1880 EOSIG
– R 1e – R 2e
------------- -------------
ωe ηe ηe ωe ηe ηe
p e = A e  1 – ------------ e + B e  1 – ------------ e + ωe ηe ρe Ee
 R 1e   R 2e 
where:
ηe = ρe ⁄ ρ0 = the relative density of the unreacted explosive.

Ee = the specified internal energy per unit mass of the unreacted explosive
ρ0 = the initial density of the explosive
A e, B e, ω e, R 1e, R 2e = the input constants of the unreacted explosive
Similarly, the pressure in the reaction products (in “gas” state) is defined by another JWL form as
follows:
– R 1p – R 2p
-------------- --------------
ωp ηp ηp ωp ηp ηp
p p = A p  1 – ------------- e + B p  1 – ------------- e
1
+ ωp ηp ρp Ep
 R 1p   R 2p 
where:
ηp = ρp ⁄ ρ0 = the relative density of the unreacted explosive

Ep = the specified internal energy per unit mass of the unreacted explosive
A p, B p, ω p, R 1p, R 2p = the input constants of the reaction product. The chemical reaction rate
for conversion of un-reacted explosive to reaction products is described
by the following reaction rate equation:
∂F
------ = I ( 1 – F ) x ( η e – 1 – a ) r + G ( 1 – F ) x F y ( P ) z
∂t
here F denotes the burn fraction that is defined as the fraction of the
explosive that has already reacted. For more details concerning the
implementation of this equation of state, please refer to the Theory
Manual
Main Index
EOSIG 1881
10. You can access the results of the un-reacted explosive and reaction products for IG elements. These
EOSIG specific output variables are
Keyword Description
SIE-E Specific internal energy per unit mass of un-reacted explosive part
SIE-P Specific internal energy per unit mass of reaction products part
FMAT Volume fraction
RHO-E Density of un-reacted explosive part
RHO-P Density of reaction products part
MASS-E Mass of un-reacted explosive part
MASS-P Mass of reaction products part
The output variables for the burn fraction are
Keyword Type of Elements Description

Solid Lagrangian Burn fraction of EOSIG material
Elements
FBURN
Euler Elements Not applicable for EOSIG materials. Burn fraction for
EOSJWL material
Solid Lagrangian Not available
IGBURN Elements
Euler Elements Burn fraction of EOSIG MATERIAL
11. The ignition of IG material can be initiated by:

a. Compression of the IG material in a small region, where the compression originates from outside
that region. This is the most physical method to initiate ignition. Examples are a shock wave
entering the region, a flow boundary that supplies mass to the region and a plate or other
structural part that compresses the region. In all these cases the IG material should be initialized
with zero pressures. This can be achieved by not specifying the specific energy on the TICVAL
entry that prescribes the initial state of the IG material. The specific energy will be computed such
that the initial pressure is zero.
b. Compression of the IG material in a small region where the compression originates within that
region. This can be done by specifying either a density that exceeds the compression limit or a
specific energy that gives rise to a sufficiently large pressure.
Main Index
1882 EOSIG
Table 9-15 Coefficients for the IG Model of Several Explosions in the Database.
PBX- LANL Military PBX-
Explosive 9404 (a) TATB PETN Case TNT COMP B COMP B 9404 (b) LX-17
Unreacted Equation of State and Constitutive Values:
RHO 1.842 1.90 1.842 1.61 1.712 1.630 1.842 1.903
(g/cm3)
AE (Mbar) 69.69 108.2 37.42 17.98 778.1 1479. 9522. 778.1
BE (Mbar) -1.727 -2.406 -1.313 -0.931 -0.05031 -0.05261 -0.5944 -0.05031
R1E 7.8 8.2 7.2 6.2 11.3 12. 14.1 11.3
R2E 3.9 4.1 3.6 3.1 1.13 1.2 1.41 1.13
OMGE 0.8578 1.251 1.173 0.8926 0.8938 0.9120 0.8867 0.8938
Reacted Product Equation of State Values:
AP (Mbar) 8.524 6.5467 6.17 3.712 5.242 5.5748 8.524 6.5467
BP (Mbar) 0.1802 0.071236 0.16926 0.032306 0.07678 0.0783 0.1802 0.071236
R1P 4.6 4.45 4.4 4.15 4.2 4.5 4.6 4.45
R2P 1.3 1.2 1.2 0.95 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.2
OMGP 0.38 0.35 0.25 0.30 0.34 0.34 0.38 0.35
ECHEM 0.0554 0.0363 0.0548 0.0433 0.0496 0.04969 0.0554 0.03626
(Mbar-cm
3/g)
Reaction Rate Parameters:
I ( μ s-1) 44.0 50.0 20.0 50.0 44.0 44.0 44.0 50.0
G (Mbar- 200.0 125.0 400.0 40.0 414.0 514.0 850.0 500.0
z μ s-1)
A 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.0
Z 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0
X 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9
Y 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3
R 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
12. EID must unique among all EOSxx entries in one model.
Main Index
EOSJWL 1883
JWL Explosive Equation of State
EOSJWL JWL Explosive Equation of State
Defines the properties of a JWL equation of state commonly used to calculate the pressure p of the detonation
products of high explosives
–R1 –R2
ωη ---------- ωη ---------- ωρλQ
p = p 0 + A  1 – -------- e η + B  1 – -------- e η + ωηρ 0 e + ----------------
 R1   R2  ρ0
dλ
------ = a ( 1 – λ ) m p n
dt

ρ0 = reference density
η = ρ ⁄ ρ0
p0 = initial pressure
λ = fraction that describes the afterburning. It ranges from 0 to 1
A , B , R1 , R2 , a, m, n and Q are constants.
The last term: ωρλQ

---------------- models afterburning.
ρ0
Format and Example

EOSJWL MID A B R1 R2 OMEGA P0 Q +
EOSJWL 37 5.2E11 0.77E11 4.1 1.1 0.34 0.0 +
+ a m n
+ 0.0 0.0 0.0

EID Unique equation of state number referenced I>0 Required
from MATDEUL. (Integer > 0; Required)
A Constant A. (Real, 0.0) R 0.0
B Constant B. (Real, 0.0) R 0.0
R1 Constant R1. (Real, 0.0) R 0.0
Ρ2 Constant R2. (Real, 0.0) R 0.0
Main Index
1884 EOSJWL
JWL Explosive Equation of State

OMEGA Constant ω . (Real, 0.0) R 0.0
P0 Initial pressure. See Remark 3. (Real, 0.0) R 0.0; see Remark 4.
Q Initial pressure R≥ 0.0 0.0; see Remark 6.
a Initial pressure R≥ 0.0 0.0; see Remark 6.
m Initial pressure R≥ 0.0 0.0; see Remark 6.
n Initial pressure R≥ 0.0 0.0; see Remark 6.
Remarks:
1. This equation of state can be used only with Eulerian elements.
2. A DETSPH entry must be used to specify the detonation model.
3. This equation of state is discussed in Dytran Theory Manual, Chapter 4: Models, EOSJWL – JWL Equation
of State.
4. In simulations with ideal gases, the JWL material needs to have an initial pressure to counter balance
the pressure of the ideal gas. Similarly, in case of under calculations where an explosive is located at a
certain depth, P0 should be preset to equal the initial hydrostatic pressure.
5. The DETSPH definition of one EOSJWL material also applies to all other EOSJWL materials.
Therefore, the blast wave of one explosive can ignite other explosives. To prevent this linked ignition,
PARAM,JWLDET,NOLINK can be used.
6. By default the constants a,m,n and Q are zero, and afterburning is not taken into account. To model
afterburning all the variables Q, a, m and n have to be set to positive constants. The extent of the
afterburning can be checked by requesting the Euler element variable AFTERBURN. This variable
equals λ . If the afterburning in an Euler element is complete then AFTERBURN = 1.0.
Main Index
EOSMG 1885
Mie-Gruneisen Equation of State
EOSMG Mie-Gruneisen Equation of State
Defines the properties of a Mie-Gruneisen equation of state commonly used to calculate the pressure p in
high strain rate processes. Used in SOL 700 only.
2
ρ0 c n Γ0 η
p = ----------------------2-  1 – ---------- + Γ 0 ρ 0 e
 2 
( 1 – sη )
ρ0
η = 1 – -----
ρ1
ρ 1 = min ( ρ, RM )
where
e = specific internal energy per unit mass. For material at zero pressure, e has to be initialized as zero.
ρ0 = reference density
Γ0 = Gruneisen parameter at reference density.
s = defined by U s = c 0 + sU p ,where U s and U p are respectively the linear shock velocity and particle
velocity as obtained from shock data.
c = sound speed at reference density
RM = Cut-off value for density.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EOSMG EID c S R1 RM
Example:
EOSMG 37 2000 1.5 2.0 3000
Describer Meaning
EID Unique equation of state number referenced from MATDEUL. (Integer > 0; Required)
c Sound speed at reference density. (Real; Required)
s Constant s. (Real; Required)
Γ0 Gruneisen gamma. (Real; Required)
RM Cut off value for density. (Real; Required)
Main Index
1886 EOSMG
Mie-Gruneisen Equation of State
Remarks:
1. This equation of state can be used only with Eulerian elements.
2. This equation of state is discussed in Equations of State.
3. The cut off value RM is only used for limiting the pressure. To prevent division by zero RM should
be less than s ⁄ s – 1 ρ ref . RM can be set slightly below this value. In case the simulation gets instable
because of too large pressures RM can be decreased.
4. EID must unique among all EOSxx entries in one model.
Main Index
EOSNA 1887
Noble-Abel equation of state
EOSNA Noble-Abel equation of state
Defines the properties of Noble-Abel equation of state where the pressure p is defined as:
ρ
p = ( ϒ – 1 ) ---------------- e
1 – bρ
where:

γ = a constant
b = Gas co-volume
Format and Example

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EOSNA EID GAMMA B R CV CP
EOSNA 35 1.2363 0.001 314.46
Field Contents Type Default

EID Unique equation of state number. I>0 Required
GAMMA Constant ϒ . R≥ 0.0 Required
B Gas co-volume . R≥ 0.0 0.0
Refer to Remark 3.
R Gas constant. R>0.0 Refer to remark 4.
CV Specific heat at constant volume. R>0.0 Refer to remark 4.
CP Specific heat at constant pressure R>0.0 Refer to remark 4.
Main Index
1888 EOSNA
Noble-Abel equation of state
Remarks
1. Refer to Dytran Theory Manual: Chapter 4-Models, for EOSNA – Noble-Abel Equation of State.
2. EOSNA – Noble-Abel Equation of State is used with Eulerian elements only.
3. The parameter B models the interactions between gas particles.
4. The temperature of the gas is calculated when one of the gas constants, R , Cv , and C p is
mentioned.
5. The Euler variable name for temperature is TEMPTURE.
6. The relation between Gamma, R , C v , and C p is shown below:
Cp
γ = ------ R = C p – C v
Cv
Main Index
EOSPOL 1889
Polynomial Equation of State for Solids
EOSPOL Polynomial Equation of State for Solids
Defines the properties of a polynomial equation of state where the pressure p is defined in SOL 700 as follows:
In compression ( μ > 0 ) ,
2 3 2 3
p = a 1 μ + a 2 μ + a 3 μ + ( b 0 + b 1 + b 2 μ + b 3 μ )ρ 0 e
In tension ( i < 0 ) ,
p = a 1 μ + ( b 0 + b 1 μ )ρ 0 e
Where
μ = η–1
η = ρ ⁄ ρ0
p = overall material density
p 0 = reference density
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EOSPOL EID A1 A2 A3 B0 B1 B2 B3
HVL VISC
Example:
EOSPOL 100 80.E6
1.1
Describer Meaning
EID Unique equation of state member. (Integer > 0; Required)
A1 Coefficient a1 or Bulk Modulus. (Real; Default = 0.0)
A2 Coefficient a2. (Real; Default = 0.0)
A3 Coefficient a3. (Real; Default = 0.0)
B0 Coefficient b0. (Real; Default = 0.0)
Main Index
1890 EOSPOL
Polynomial Equation of State for Solids
Describer Meaning
HVL Hydrodynamic volume limit. (Real > 1.0; Default = 1.1)
VISC Viscosity coefficient.(Real; Default = 0.0)
Remarks:
1. When the relative volume ( ρ 0 ⁄ ρ ) exceeds HVL, the pressure is cut off to
P HVL = f ( μ HVL )
with
1
μ HVL = ------------- – 1
HVL
e.g., for p = a1 ⋅ μ , the pressure behavior is as follows:
a1
μHVL
μ
2. When the PARAM,HVLFAIL is set to YES, the elements where the relative volume ( ρ 0 ⁄ ρ ) exceeds
HVL fail completely. Their stress state is zero.
Main Index
EOSUDS 1891
User-defined Equation of State
EOSUDS User-defined Equation of State
Defines the frequency dependent properties for an isotropic poroelastic material. Use in SOL700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EOSUDS EID GROUP UNAME VISC
Example:
CONNECT SERVICE water ' SCA.MDSolver.Obj.Uds.Dytran.Materials '
In Bulk Data:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EOSUDS 12 WATER EXEOS .01
Describer Meaning
EID Unique equation of state number. (Integer > 0; Required)
UNAME User subroutine name associated with the entry. (Character; default=EXEOS)
VISC Viscosity coefficient R > 0 No viscosity. See Remarks 4.and 5.
Remarks:
1. The EID must be referenced by a MATDEUL or MAT1 entry.
2. The equation of state name is passed to method usrEOS of the SCAIMDSolver700 interface and can
be used to identify the equation of state.
3. The viscosity coefficient is the dynamic viscosity. It is the ratio between shear stress and velocity
gradient.
4. For the single mat solver viscous stresses will be stored in the output files by the use of TXX through
TZX. Also, EFFSTS is available. For the multi-material solver viscous stresses are stored in TXX-VIS,
TYY-VIS, TZZ-VIS, TXY-VIS, TYZ-VIS, TZX-VIS. These viscous stresses only depend on the
current velocity gradients. The stresses like TXX are elastic-plastic stresses and depend on past stresses.
The total stress tensor in the element is given by the average of the viscous stress and elastic-plastic
stress. The weight factors are the material fraction of viscous fluid and the remaining materials.
5. UNAME can be:
EXEOS Standard user defined Equation of State
Main Index
1892 EOSUDS
User-defined Equation of State
6. Only can be used for SOL 700.
Main Index
EPOINT 1893
Extra Point List
EPOINT Extra Point List
Defines extra points for use in dynamics problems.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EPOINT ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8
Example:
EPOINT 3 18 1 4 16 2

EPOINT ID1 “THRU” ID2
EPOINT 17 THRU 43
Describer Meaning
IDi Extra point identification number. (100,000,000 > Integer > 0; for “THRU” option,
ID1 < ID2).
Remarks:
1. All extra point identification numbers must be unique with respect to all other structural, scalar, and
fluid points for direct methods of solution. For modal methods, they must be larger than the number
of eigenvectors retained for analysis.
2. EPOINT is used to define coordinates used in transfer function definitions (see the TF and DMIG
entries).
3. If the alternate format is used, extra points ID1 through ID2 are also defined to be extra points.
4. See the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide for a discussion of extra points.
Main Index
1894 ERPPNL
Equivalent Radiated Power Definition
ERPPNL Equivalent Radiated Power Definition
Defines one or more panels by referencing sets of elements or properties.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ERPPNL NAME1 SETID1 NAME2 SETID2 NAME3 SETID3 NAME4 SETID4
NAME5 SETID5
Example:
ERPPNL ROOF 1 DOORLF 16
Describer Meaning
NAMEi Panel label. (CHAR)
SETIDi Identification number of a SET3 Bulk Data entry that lists the panel property entries
or the panel elements. (Integer > 0)
Remarks:
1. The SET3 entries can only refer to 2D and/or 3D structural element types, such as QUAD4, TRIA3,
QUADR, CTRIAR, QUAD8, TRIA6, HEXA, PENTA and TETRA, or PSHELL, PCOMP,
PCOMPG and PSOLID entry associated with those element types.
2. NAMEi are used in a Case Control SET definition defining setp to select the panels in the Case
Control command ERP.
3. Duplicate Element IDs are removed if they occur on the referencing SET3 entries prior to the ERP
calculation.
4. User does not need to specify the outer face(s) of 3D elements. The outer face(s) or exposed face(s)
of 3D elements will be determined automatically. Interior 3D element(s) which has no exposed
face(s) will not be included for ERP computation.
Main Index
EULFOR 1895
Body Force Loading on Euler Elements
EULFOR Body Force Loading on Euler Elements
Defines a body force loading (acceleration) on Euler elements per unit mass. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EULFOR BID CID VALUE TID N1 N2 N3
Example:
EULFOR 100 5 13 1. 0. 0.
Describer Meaning
BID Unique body force number. (Integer > 0; Required)
CID ID of a coordinate system. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
VALUE Scale factor for the vector. See Remark 1. (Real > 0.0)
TID TABLED1 ID describing the scale factor for the load as function of time. See Remark
1. (Integer)
N1, N2, N3 Components of a vector giving the load (acceleration) direction defined in coordinate
system CID. At lease one must be nonzero. See Remark 2. (Real; Default = 0.0)
Remarks:
1. Either VALUE or TID must be nonzero.
2. By default the components are zero, but at least one of them should be nonzero.
Main Index
1896 EULFOR1
Body force for Eulerian Regions
EULFOR1 Body force for Eulerian Regions
Alternative way to define an acceleration within a geometric region of the Euler model regions are defined
by geometric shapes which are defined by EULFREG entries.
Format:
EULFOR1 SID ESID
Example:
EULFOR1 300 1
Describer Meaning
SID Unique EULFOR1 number referenced from a PEULER1 entry .(Integer >0, required)
ESID Group of geometric region EULFREG ID. (Integer > 0; Required)
Remarks:
1. EULFOR1 and EULFREG are only available for the multi-material Euler solver.
2. The combination of Eulerian region and material ID determines where the acceleration field is
applied.
3. It is allowed to cover only part of the Euler domain with EULFOR1 definitions.
4. To increase the accuracy of the region definition parameter MICRO can be used.
Main Index
EULFREG 1897
EULFREG Body force for Eulerian Regions
Defines the acceleration field for sets of Eulerian regions, The Eulerian regions are defined by geometric
shapes. For each coordinate direction a time-depended acceleration can be defined.
Format:
EUL- ERID ESID TYPE1 VID1 MID1 ACCX ACCY ACCZ
FREG
LEVEL
Example:
EULFREG 300 1 BOX 400 100 100 200 300
0.0
Describer Meaning
ERID Unique ERID number. (Integer > 0; Required)
ESID ID of group of Euler regions referenced from the EULFOR1 entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
TYPEi The type of Eulerian region. (Character; Required)
SURF Region inside or outside a multifaceted surface.
SPHERE Region inside a sphere.
CYLINDER Region inside a cylinder.
BOX Region inside a box.
ELEM Region defined by element list.
VIDi Number of a geometric entity, a SET1 number, or number of a SURFINI entry. (Integer >
0; Required)
MIDi Number of a MATDEUL entry to which the acceleration field will be applied. (Integer > 0;
Required)
ACCi Unique table number that defines the variation of acceleration in time. ACCX, ACCY and
ACCZ respectively denote the acceleration in the x-, y- and z-direction. (Integer > 0; Re-
quired)
LEVELi Level indicator for this material and initial values. (Real; default=0.0)
Remarks:
1. EULFOR1 and EULFREG are only available for the multi-material Euler solver.
2. The combination of Eulerian region and material ID determines where the acceleration field is
applied.
Main Index
1898 EULFREG
3. It is allowed to cover only part of the Euler domain with EULFOR1 definitions.
4. All level indicators LEVELi must have different values. The level indicator can be negative.
5. To increase the accuracy of the region definition parameter MICRO can be used.
Main Index
EXCLUDE 1899
Ignore Bulk Data entries from primary to secondary Module
EXCLUDE Ignore Bulk Data entries from primary to secondary Module
Specifies Bulk Data entries in the primary Module to be ignored in the secondary (or copied) Module.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EXCLUDE ENTRY1 ENTRY2 ENTRY3 -etc.,
Example:
EXCLUDE SPC FORCE
Describer Meaning
ENTRYi Name of a Bulk Data entry to be ignored.
Remarks:
1. A secondary Module may have its own BEGIN MODULE section but it is not required as long as
the user is willing to accept all modeling data from the reference Module because, by default, all
entries in the reference Module will be copied to the secondary Module. However, if the user wishes
to exclude and/or replace some of the entries from the reference Module in the copy then he simply
specifies at least one instance of the entry to be ignored. For example, if the user wants to ignore all
FORCE entries from the reference Module then specify a single FORCE entry in the secondary
Module's Bulk Data section. Alternatively, the user may specify a list of Bulk Data entries to ignore
on the EXCLUDE Bulk Data entry in the secondary Module's Bulk Data section.
2. EXCLUDE must be specified in the secondary (or copied) Module's Bulk Data section.
3. GRID entries cannot be ignored or replaced and EXCLUDE,GRID will cause a fatal error.
4. See MDBULK for the definition of secondary (or copied) Modules.
Main Index
1900 EXTRN
Partitioned External Superelement Connection
EXTRN Partitioned External Superelement Connection
Defines a boundary connection for an external superelement.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EXTRN GID1 C1 GID2 C2 GID3 C3 GID4 C4
-etc.- GID6 “THRU” GID7 C6 -etc.-
Example:
EXTRN 1001 123 1120 123456 1201 123
Describer Meaning
GIDi Grid identification number to which the exterior superelement matrices will be
connected.
Ci Component numbers. (Integer 0, blank, or 1 for scalar points; Integers 1 through 6
with no embedded blanks for grids.)
Remarks:
1. EXTRN can only be specified in partitioned Bulk Data Sections and is ignored in the main Bulk Data
Section.
2. Connection grids must be specified in the partitioned Bulk Data Section following
BEGIN SUPER = SEID.
3. “THRU” may be specified only in fields 3, 5, or 7.
4. Pairs of blank fields may be entered to allow easier modification of the EXTRN entry.
Main Index
FAILJC 1901
Johnson-Cook Failure Model
Entries F - L
FAILJC Johnson-Cook Failure Model
Defines the properties of the Johnson-Cook failure model. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
·0
FAILJC FID D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 ε pl TROOM
TMELT CP MTH
Example:
FAILJC 1 .05 3.44 -2.12 0.002 0.16 1.0 297.0
1495 450 CONT
Describer Meaning
FID Unique failure model number. Referenced from MATDEUL. (Integer > 0; Required)
D1...D5 Parameters. See Remark 4. (Real; Default = 0.0)
·0
ε pl Reference plastic strain rate. (Real; Default = 1.0)
TROOM Room temperature. (Real; 0.0)
TMELT Melt temperature. (Real; 1.E+20)
CP Heat capacity. (Real; 1.E+20)
MTH Specifies how failure is applied. (Character; CONT)
CONT Continuous failure
DISC Discrete failure
NOFAIL Damage is not used for failure
Remarks:
1. This failure model is only available for Eulerian materials using the multi-material solver with
strength.
2. The use of coupling surfaces is not supported.
3. The variable D can be visualized by adding DAMAGE to the Output request for Euler elements.
4. Defines the properties of a failure model where failure is determined by a damage model. The
damage model is given by:
Main Index
1902 FAILJC
Johnson-Cook Failure Model
Δε p
D =  ----------
ε
frac
-
time
·
frac *  ε pl *
ε = ( D 1 + D 2 exp ( D 3 σ ) )  1 + D 4 In ------ ( 1 + D5 T )
 ·0 
ε pl
* σm
σ = -------
σ
* T – T room
T = ---------------------------------
T melt – T room
The summation is performed over all past time increments. The variable D measures the damage; T
is the temperature, is the mean stress, the effective stress and is the fracture strain. The fracture
strain depends on a non-dimensional plastic strain rate ε· pl ⁄ ε· pl . If D exceeds one it set equal to one.
0
The damage variable D is transported along with the Eulerian material.

There are two methods to determine when elements fail:
• Continuous failure: The yield stress is reduced by a factor (1-D). When D exceeds 1 the yield
stress equals zero and the element fails.
• Discrete failure: the element fails when D equals one.
This failure model applies to high-strain rate deformation of metals. It is less suitable for quasi-static
problems.
Main Index
FAILMPS 1903
Maximum Plastic Strain Failure Model
FAILMPS Maximum Plastic Strain Failure Model
Defines the properties of a failure model where failure occurs when the equivalent plastic strain exceeds the
specified value. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FAILMPS FID MPS
Example:
FAILMPS 1 .15
Describer Meaning
FID Unique failure model number referenced from MATDEUL. (Integer > 0; Required)
MPS Maximum plastic strain that causes failure. (Real; Required)
Main Index
1904 FAILUDS
User Defined Failure For Nonlinear Explicit Analysis.
FAILUDS User Defined Failure For Nonlinear Explicit Analysis.
User defined simple failure of Eulerian materials. Use in SOL700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FAILUDS FID GROUP UNAME
Example:
CONNECT SERVICE usrfail ' SCA.MDSolver.Obj.Uds.Dytran.Materials '
In Bulk Data:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FAILUDS 200 usrfail EXFAIL
Describer Meaning
FID Unique output number. (Integer > 0; Required)
UNAME User subroutine name associated with the entry. (Character; default=EXFAIL)
Remarks:
2. FID has to be referenced by a MATDEUL, MAT1 or MATORT entry.
3. UNAME can be:
EXFAIL Standard user defined failure
EXFAIL1 Alternative 1 user defined failure
EXFAIL2 Alternative 2 user defined failure
4. For option UNAME=EXFAIL2, for each material and for each Euler element a variable will be
created that monitors the degree of failure of the material. This variable is denoted by DAMAGE and
is between 0 and 1. The EXFAIL2 routine allows updating this damage variable due to the plastic
strain increment of the current cycle.
5. For option UNAME=EXFAIL2 there are three ways in which this damage variable can model failure.
These are:
Main Index
FAILUDS 1905
User Defined Failure For Nonlinear Explicit Analysis.
• Continuous failure: The yield stress is reduced by a factor (1-D). When D exceeds 1.0, the yield
stress equals zero and the element fails.
• Discrete failure: the element fails when D equals one.
• No failure: positive damage values will not lead to failure. This is useful if the failure modeling is
done by an YLDUDS routine. Then the yield stress can be reduced depending on the magnitude
of the damage variable.
6. UNAME=EXFAIL2 is only supported by the multi-material Euler solver with strength.
7. UNAME=EXFAIL1 is only supported with MATORT.
8. For Lagrangian materials, UNAME=EXFAIL or EXFAIL1 are only available.
Main Index
1906 FBADLAY
Dynamic Load Time Delay for FRF Based Assembly (FBA)
FBADLAY Dynamic Load Time Delay for FRF Based Assembly (FBA)
Defines the time delay term τ in the equations of motion of the dynamic loading function for frequency
dependent loads in an FRF Based Assembly (FBA) process.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FBADLAY SID COMPID/ PNTID C DELAY
COMPNAME
Examples:
FBADLAY 15 BODY 10 3 0.5
FBADLAY 25 30 5 2 0.1
Describer Meaning
SID Identification number. See Remark 1. (Integer > 0)
COMPID Identification number of the FRF component whose FRFs have been generated in a
previous Nastran execution. (Integer > 0)
COMPNAME Name of the FRF component whose FRFs have been generated in a a previous Nastran
execution. (Up to 8 characters; no blank allowed)
PNTID Grid or scalar point identification number. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0)
C Component number. See Remark 3. (Integer 1 through 6 for grid point; blank or 0 for
scalar point)
DELAY Time delay term τ . See Remark 4. (Real)
Remarks:
1. SID is referenced by RLOAD1, RLOAD2 and ACSRCE entries.
2. This entry is ignored if the specified COMPID/COMPNAME is not part of the FBA process. A user
warning message is issued in this case.
3. The component C of the point PNTID specified in this entry must be among the excitation degrees
of freedom of the FBA process. If not, the program terminates the job with a user fatal message.
4. Refer to RLOAD1, RLOAD2 and ACSRCE entries for the formulas that define the time delay term
τ in frequency response analysis.
5. All FBADLAY entries specified in an FBA process are automatically converted internally by the
program to equivalent DELAY entries by replacing the grid/scalar point IDs referenced in these
entries by equivalent internal point IDs.
Main Index
FBALOAD 1907
Load Scale Factor Specification for FRF Based Assembly (FBA) Process
FBALOAD Load Scale Factor Specification for FRF Based Assembly (FBA) Process
Defines the scale factor for frequency dependent loads in an FRF Based Assembly (FBA) process.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FBALOAD SID COMPID/ PNTID C A
COMPNAME
Examples:
FBALOAD 10 WING 20 3 2.5
FBALOAD 20 30 25 1 1.5
Describer Meaning
COMPID Identification number of the FRF component whose FRFs have been generated in
a previous Nastran execution. (Integer > 0)
COMPNAME Optional name of the FRF component whose FRFs have been generated in a
previous Nastran execution. (Up to 8 characters; no blank allowed).
PNTID Grid or scalar point identification number. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0)
C Component number. See Remark 3. (Integer 1 through 6 for grid point; blank or
0 for scalar point)
A Scale factor. See Remark 4. (Real)
Remarks:
4. Refer to RLOAD1, RLOAD2 and ACSRCE entries for the formulas that define the scale factor A in
frequency response analysis.
5. All FBALOAD entries specified in an FBA process are automatically converted internally by the
program to equivalent DAREA entries by replacing the grid/scalar point IDs referenced in these
Main Index
1908 FBAPHAS
Dynamic Load Phase Lead for FRF Based Assembly (FBA)
FBAPHAS Dynamic Load Phase Lead for FRF Based Assembly (FBA)
Defines the phase lead term θ in the equations of motion of the dynamic loading function for frequency
dependent loads in an FRF Based Assembly (FBA) process.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FBAPHAS SID COMPID/ PNTID C PHASE
COMPNAME
Examples:
FBAPHAS 25 FRAME 40 1 10.0
FBAPHAS 30 50 10 2 5.0
Describer Meaning
COMPID Identification number of the FRF component whose FRFs have been generated in a
previous Nastran execution. (Integer > 0)
COMPNAME Name of the FRF component whose FRFs have been generated in a previous Nastran
execution. (Up to 8 characters; no blank allowed)
PNTIDi Grid or scalar point identification numbers. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0)
C Component number. See Remark 3. (Integers 1 through 6 for grid points; blank or 0 for
scalar points.)
PHASE Phase lead term θ . See Remark 4. (Real)
Remarks:
4. Refer to RLOAD1, RLOAD2 and ACSRCE entries for the formulas that define the phase lead term
θ in frequency response analysis.
5. All FBAPHAS entries specified in an FBA process are automatically converted internally by the
program to equivalent DPHASE entries by replacing the grid/scalar point IDs referenced in these
Main Index
FBODYLD 1909
Equilibrated Free-Body Applied Load Case Definition
FBODYLD Equilibrated Free-Body Applied Load Case Definition
Defines an equilibrated free-body applied load case.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FBODYLD NAMEL FBODYSB
LABEL LABEL LABEL LABEL LABEL LABEL LABEL LABEL
Example:
FBODYLD WINGL WINGSB
D
LOAD ON THE RIGHT WING
Describer Meaning
NAMEL User defined name identifying the load case. (Character; Required)
FBODYSB Name of a FBODYSB Bulk Data entry that defines the subsystem for this load.
(Character; Required)
LABEL A string comprising no more than 64 characters (fields 2 through 9) that identifies
and labels the load case. (Character; optional)
Remarks:
1. NAMEL must be unique.
2. The Label is optional.
Main Index
1910 FBODYSB
Equilibrated Free-Body Subsystems Definition
FBODYSB Equilibrated Free-Body Subsystems Definition
Defines an equilibrated free-body subsystem.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FBODYSB NAMES GRIDSET ELEMSET XFLAG
LABEL LABEL LABEL LABEL LABEL LABEL LABEL LABEL
Example:
FBODYSB WING 1 1 ADM
RIGHT WING
Describer Meaning
NAMES User defined name identifying the submodel. (Character; Required)
GRIDSET Identification number of a SET1 entry that has a list of Grid Point Force grids to
include in defining the subsystem. (Integer > 0)
ELEMSET Identification number of a SET1 entry that has a list of elements to include in the
system (Integer > 0 or blank)
XFLAG Exclusion flag. Exclude the indicated Grid Point Force types.
Default Blank (no type excluded)
S SPC forces
M MPC forces
A, L, or P Applied loads
D DMIG’s (and any other type not described above)
Label An optional string of up to 64 characters (fields 2 through 9) that identifies the
subsystem.
Remarks:
1. Only those Grid Point Forces which have both an included grid point and element (or Grid Point
Force type) will be taken into account.
2. If ELEMSET is blank, no contributions are made from the set of elements attached to the grid.
3. Fictitious grids or elements do not produce error or warning messages.
4. The XFLAG data can be any combination of the letters S,M,A,L,P and D (e.g., MAD).
Main Index
FEEDGE 1911
Finite Element Edge Definition
FEEDGE Finite Element Edge Definition
Defines a finite element edge and associates it with a curve.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FEEDGE EDGEID GRID1 GRID2 CIDBC GEOMI ID1 ID2
N
Example:
FEEDGE 101 123 547 GMCURV 12
Describer Meaning
EDGEID Unique identification number. Integer > 0 Required
GRIDi Identification number of end GRIDs defining this edge. Integer > 0 Required
CIDBC Identification number of the coordinate system in which Integer > 0 Required
constraints specified on GMBC and GMSPC entries are
defined. See Remark 1.
GEOMIN Type of entry referenced by IDi; “GMCURV” or “POINT”. Character POINT
See Remark 2.
IDi Identification number of a POINT or GMCURV entry. See Integer > 0
Remarks 2., 3., and 4.
Remarks:
1. If CIDBC is not blank then it overrides the CIDBC specified on the GMSURF or FEFACE entries
for this particular edge. A fatal message will be issued when more than one CIDBC is associated with
any entity.
2. The Bulk Data entries referenced by ID1 and ID2 depends on the GEOMIN field:
GEOMIN ID1 ID2

POINT POINT POINT
GMCURV GMCURV not applicable
3. When GEOMIN = “GMCURV”

• FEEDGE associates the finite element model and the geometric information.
• GRID1 and GRID2 are the end points of the edge, and the edge is on the CURVID curve. A
locally parametric cubic curve is fit to the geometric curve such that the two have the same tangent
at GRIDi (C1 continuous).
Main Index
1912 FEEDGE
FEEDGE 300
GRID 2
GRID 1 GMCURV 101
GRID 4
ELEMENT 101
GRID 10 ELEMENT 203
ELEMENT 204
GRID 11 GRID 110

GRID 121
GMCURV 201
FEEDGE,300,1,2,,GMCURV, 101
Figure 9-91 Specifying Geometry Using GEOMIN=GMCURV Method
4. When GEOMIN = “POINT”

• The edge passes through the points defined on the POINT entries referenced by ID1 and ID2.
• The shape of the edge is selected as follows:
ID1 ID2 Shape of the FEEDGE

Blank or 0 Blank or 0 Linear
>0 Blank or 0 Quadratic
>0 >0 Cubic
Blank or 0 >0 Not allowed
Main Index
FEEDGE 1913
POINT 20 GRID 2
GRID 1
GRID 4
ELEMENT 101
POINT 203
POINT 204
GRID 10
ELEMENT 203
GRID 110
GRID 121
FEEDGE,301,10,4,,POINT,203,204
Figure 9-92 Specifying Geometry Using GEOMIN=POINT Method
5. A local coordinate system can be associated with an edge using the GMCORD entry.
6. The hierarchy set to resolve the conflicts arising in the Global System input data is described under
Remark 10 of the GMBC, 2005 entry description.
Main Index
1914 FEFACE
Finite Element Face Definition
FEFACE Finite Element Face Definition
Defines geometric information that will be used in elements, surface definition, load definition, and
boundary condition definition.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FEFACE FACEID GRID1 GRID2 GRID3 GRID4 CIDBC SURFID
Example:
FEFACE 101 123 547 243 295 12
Describer Meaning
FACEID Unique identification number. See Remark 1. Integer > 0 Required
GRIDi Identification number of end GRIDs defining a Integer > 0 Required
triangular or quadrilateral face. See Remark 2.
CIDBC Identification number of the coordinate system in Integer > 0 Remark 3.
which constraints specified on GMBC and GMSPC
entries are defined. See Remark 3.
SURFID Alternate method used to specify the geometry of the Integer > 0 0
edges of the face. See Remarks 4. and 5.
Remarks:
1. An FEFACE entry is required if any of the following situations exist:
• The geometry of the surface defined by SURFID is to be used by a finite element;
• CIDBC is specified for a face or surface; or
• If loads or constraints or enforced boundary conditions are applied to a surface.
2. The shape (geometry) of the face is defined by the shape of the edges. The points defined by GRIDi
must be specified in either a clockwise or counterclockwise order.
3. If CIDBC is not blank, then it overrides the CIDBC specified on the GMSURF entry for this
particular face. A fatal message will be issued when more than one CIDBC is associated with any
entity.
4. When SURFID is blank or 0, the edges will be considered linear unless there is an FEEDGE entry
for the given edge.
5. When SURFID > 0,
• FEFACE associates the finite element model and the geometric information specified on the
GMSURF entry.
Main Index
FEFACE 1915
Finite Element Face Definition
• GRIDi defines a finite element face (clockwise or counter clockwise in order) that is on the
SURFID surface.
• For the edges of this face, which are not defined by an FEEDGE entry, locally parametric cubic
curves are fit to the geometric surface such that the two have the same tangent at GRIDi (C1
continuous).
6. Whenever a given edge of a face is common to two or more surfaces (i.e., lies on the intersecting
curve), then the user must supply GMCURV and FEEDGE entries in order to resolve the conflict
in the input geometry. A fatal message is issued if an edge is not uniquely defined.
GMSURF 3000
GRID 3
GRID 4
GRID 1 FEFACT 206

GRID 2
GMSURF 3000 FEFACT 207
GMCURV 101
ELEMENT 101
GRID 96
GRID 21
GMSURF 4000 FEEDGE 300
GMSURF 4000
Figure 9-93 Face Edge Common to Two Surfaces
7. The hierarchy set to resolve the conflicts arising in the Global System input data is described under
Remark 10 of the GMBC, 2005 entry description.
Main Index
1916 FFCONTR
Closed Volume Intended for Fluid Filled Containers
FFCONTR Closed Volume Intended for Fluid Filled Containers
Defines the pressure within a closed volume. Intended for the use in (partially) filled containers, where
dynamic fluid effects are negligible, e.g. top loading and hot filling. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FFCONTR FFID SID FVOL PATM TEMPTAB DENSTAB TACTIVE
Example:
FFCONTR 1 2 1.50E-03 0.1E6 10 20
Describer Meaning
FFID Unique FFCONTR identification number. (Integer > 0; Required)
SID Number of a BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP, BCMATL or BCSEG entry defining the
closed surface. (Integer > 0; Required)
FVOL Fluid volume in the container. (Real > 0.0; Required)
PATM Atmospheric pressure. Used for determination of the constant C for p ⋅ V = C . (Real
> 0.0; Required)
TEMPTAB A reference to a TABLED1 ID that specifies how temperature of the container changes
in time. (Integer > 0; Blank)
DENSTAB A reference to a TABLED1 ID that specifies how density of the container changes with
temperature. (Integer > 0; Blank)
TACTIVE Time at which the pressure computation of the bottle is started. Until this time the
pressure inside the bottle equals the ambient pressure. The volume of the bottle at
TACTIVE will be used for the initial pressure computation of the gas in the bottle.
Remarks:
1. If TEMPTAB is not set, the gas above the fluid is assumed to be an ideal, iso-thermal gas: p ⋅ V = C ,
where C is a constant. If TEMPTAB is set, the temperature is applied to both the fluid as well as the
gas. Then the gas satisfies p ⋅ V ⁄ T = C , where T is the temperature of the fluid.
2. The fluid is assumed incompressible.
3. The pressure is based on the uniform pressure gasbag algorithm, where the pressure is uniform in the
volume, but variable in time.
4. Output for the fluid-filled container is available through a SURFOUT definition. The available
variables are: PRESSURE, VOLUME, TEMPTURE, VOLGAS, VOLFLUID, GAUGEPRES and
RHOFLUID.
5. The normals of the surface referenced by SID are reversed automatically if required.
Main Index
FFCONTR 1917
Closed Volume Intended for Fluid Filled Containers
6. Modeling guidelines are described in the “Getting Started” Section.

7. If DENSTAB is set then volume of the fluid changes according to
Fluid
Fluid ρ ( T 0 )V 0
V = ------------------------------
ρ(T)
Fluid
Here T 0 and V 0 are initial values for temperature and fluid volume, ρ is the fluid density and T
denotes the current temperature. If TEMPTAB is not set the DENSTAB entry will not be used.
8. At time=TACTIVE the gas is assumed to be in contact with the ambient pressure for the last time.
This means that at Time = TACTIVE the pressure in the bottle equals the ambient pressure. After
TACTIVE the bottle has been closed and there is no longer contact between ambient and gas inside
the bottle. Any change in volume of the bottle or temperature or fluid will result in change of pressure
of the gas inside the bottle.
Main Index
1918 FLFACT
FLFACT Aerodynamic Physical Data
Used to specify density ratios, Mach numbers, reduced frequencies, and velocities for flutter analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FLFACT SID F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
F8 F9 -etc.-
Example:
FLFACT 97 .3 .7 3.5

FLFACT SID F1 “THRU” FNF NF FMID
FLFACT 201 .200 THRU .100 11 .133333
Describer Meaning
Fi Aerodynamic factor. (Real)
FNF Final aerodynamic factor. (Real)
NF Number of aerodynamic factors. (Integer > 0)
FMID Intermediate aerodynamic factors. See Remark 4. (Real)
Remarks:
1. Only the factors selected by a FLUTTER entry will be used.
2. Embedded blank fields are not allowed in the first format above.
3. The factors must be specified in the order in which they are to be used within the looping of flutter
analysis.
4. FMID must lie between F1 and FNF ; otherwise, FMID will be set to ( F1 + FNF ) ⁄ 2 . Then
F1 ( FNF – FMID ) ( NF – i ) + FNF ( FMID – F1 ) ( i – 1 )

Fi = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
( FNF – FMID ) ( NF – i ) + ( FMID – F1 ) ( i – 1 )
where i = 1, 2, ..., NF
The use of FMID (middle factor selection) allows unequal spacing of the factors.
Main Index
FLFACT 1919
2 ⋅ F1 ⋅ FNF
FMID = ------------------------------- gives equal values to increments of the reciprocal
F1 + FNF
of Fi .
5. If method = PK and this entry specifies velocities, then the velocities must be non-zero. Input of
negative values produces eigenvector results at a velocity equal to the positive value of the input. Input
of positive values provide eigenvalues results without eigenvectors.
Main Index
1920 FLOW
Flow Boundary Condition
FLOW Flow Boundary Condition
Defines the properties of a material for the boundaries of an Eulerian mesh. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FLOW LID BCID MESH DIR
TYPE1 VALUE1 TYPE2 VALUE2 TYPE3 VALUE3 TYPE4 VALUE4
TYPE5 VALUE5
Example:
FLOW 120 122
XVEL 100.0
Describer Meaning
LID Number of a set of flow boundary conditions. (Integer > 0; Required)
BCID Number of a set of segments, specified by BCSEG entries, where the flow boundary is
located. See Remark 5. (Integer > 0)
DIR Allowed values are: NEGX, POSX, NEGY, POSY, NEGZ and POSZ. See Remark 7.
(Character)
TYPEi The flow boundary property being defined. (Character)
Material The MATDEUL ID number.
XVEL The material velocity in the x-direction.
YVEL The material velocity in the y-direction.
ZVEL The material velocity in the z-direction.
PRESSURE The pressure of the material at the boundary.
DENSITY The density of the material at inflow.
SIE The specific internal energy at inflow
FLOW The type of flow boundary required.
Main Index
FLOW 1921
Flow Boundary Condition
Describer Meaning
HYDSTAT A Hydrostatic pressure profile using a HYDSTAT entry.
VALUEi The value for the property defined. (Real; Integer or Character; Required)
For TYPEi set to FLOW, the value is a character entry being either IN, OUT, BOTH or
SYM defining that the flow boundary is defined as an inflow, outflow, possibly an in-
or outflow or symmetry boundary. The default is BOTH.
VALUEi is required data only if one or more of the TYPEi entries are defined. The
TYPEi entries are not required. Thus, a flow boundary by default allows for in- or
outflow of the material adjacent to the boundary.
For TYPE = HYDSTAT, the value is an integer entry denoting the HYDSTAT entry to
be used.
Remarks:
1. LID must be referenced by a TLOAD1 entry.
2. Any material properties not specifically defined have the same value as the element with the flow
boundary condition.
3. TLOAD entries referencing FLOW entries must have the TID field blank or zero.
4. In the case of material flow into a multi-material Euler mesh, the density and specific energy have to
be set. On the other hand when material flows out of a multi-material Euler mesh it is assumed that
each of the materials present in the outflow Euler element contributes to the out flow of mass. The
materials are transported in proportion to their relative volume fractions.
5. BCID is optional. If used, all other inputs are ignored. If not used, the flow boundary can be defined
by either using DIR or by using XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, etc.
etc. are ignored.
8. XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, etc. are only used when both BCID and DIR are blank. If neither the MIN
nor MAX value has been set the default value is respectively -1E+20 and 1E+20 for the MIN and
MAX value. If the MIN value has been set the default value of the MAX value is the Min value.
9. Prescribing both pressure and velocity may lead to the instabilities.
10. For TYPE = HYDSTAT, the pressure is set using HYDSTAT, the velocity equals the element
velocity. In case of inflow the density follows from the hydrostatic pressure by using the equation of
state.
Main Index
1922 FLOWC
Cyclic Flow Boundary Condition
FLOWC Cyclic Flow Boundary Condition
Defines the properties of a material for the boundaries of a Eulerian mesh.

Inflow values can be taken from another boundary condition. This allows cyclic or periodic boundary
conditions. Likewise, the outflow of material goes into the other boundary condition.
FLOWC entries have to be defined in pairs. The FID on one entry has to be equal to FID2 of the other
entry. For example
FLOWC,10,30,20
FLOWC,20,40,10
For FLOWC boundaries, mass flow summaries can be created as time history. Used in SOL700 only
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FLOWC FID BCID TYPE MESH DIR FID2 +
+ XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX ZMIN ZMAX +
+ METHOD TID
Example:
FLOWC 1 122 2
+
+ 2 1
Field Contents
FID Unique number of a FLOWC entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
BCID Number of a set of segments specified by the BCSEG entries where the flow boundary
is located. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0)
Main Index
FLOWC 1923
Field Contents
TYPE Flow boundary types. See Remarks 2.and 3. (Character; Required)
IN: Only inflow is allowed. The inflow velocity and pressure can be optionally specified.
If not given, the values in the adjacent Euler element will be used. The same holds for
the density and sie.
OUT: Only outflow is allowed. The inflow velocity and pressure can be optionally
specified. If not given, the values in the adjacent Euler element will be used. The outflow
boundary will always use material mixture as present in the adjacent Euler element.
BOTH: Material is allowed to flow in or out. In or outflow is based on the direction of

the velocity in the adjacent Euler element. Only pressure can be optionally defined. If
not given the pressure in the adjacent Euler element will be taken.
(Character; no default)
FID2 Referenced FLOWC id from which inflow and outflow values will be taken from.
blank. See Remark 6. (Real))
METHOD Method describing how material properties and pressure are mapped going from one
boundary to the other. (Integer > 0; Default=1)
1. Map both velocity, material flow properties, and pressure loads one-to-one.
2. Map velocity, material flow one-to-one. Pressure is given by element pressures.
3. Inflow is taken as the average of outflow properties. This applies to both velocity
and material properties. Pressure is given by element pressures.
TID TABLED1 ID that specifies a time dependent scale factor by which the amount of
inflow is multiplied. This will not conserve total mass. (Integer > 0. Default = not used).
Remarks:
Main Index
1924 FLOWC
etc. are ignored.
7. FLOWC can be used to specify flow boundaries for CHEXA's and also for Euler element created by
the MESH,BOX option.
8. FLOWC is only supported by the multi-material Euler solver.
9. To enable using the outflow values of FID2 as the inflow values for FID, the boundary faces of FID
and FID2 are mapped onto each other. For this mapping, only translations and rotations around
coordinate axes are permitted.
10. Consider a cubic Euler mesh and that material flows from the left to the right. At the right side, the
boundary condition is imposed
FLOWC,4,30,,5
and at the left side
FLOWC,5,40,,4
These definitions cause all material that flows out of the right side boundary into the left side
boundary. Moreover, the Euler element pressures on the right side are put on the Euler elements of
the left boundary condition.
In practice, it may be useful to skip the coupling between the two boundaries with regard to pressure.
This can be done by setting METHOD equal to 2.
With these definitions, material from boundary 4 still flows into boundary 5 but pressure boundaries
are transmitting.
11. TID is useful if several objects have identical outflow that is used as inflow by another object. Then
only one object has to be modeled. To account for the other objects when defining inflow, the scale
factor can be used. It can also be used to turn off in and outflow. When TID is set, either
METHOD=2 or METHOD=3 are recommended and METHOD=1 should not be used.
12. It is allowed that the definition of the FLOWC entry overlaps with FLOW definitions. In that case,
the FLOWC definition overrules the other ones
Main Index
FLOWDEF 1925
Default Flow Boundary
FLOWDEF Default Flow Boundary
Definition of default Eulerian flow boundary condition. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FLOWDEF FID TYPEM
TYPE1 VALUE1 TYPE2 -etc.-
Example:
FLOWDEF 25 HYDRO
DENSITY 1000
Describer Meaning
FID Unique FLOWDEF number. (Integer > 0; Required
TYPEM HYDRO, STRENGTH, MMHYDRO, or MMSTREN. (Character, HYDRO)
TYPEi The flow boundary property being defined. (Character)
Material The MATDEUL ID number.
XVEL The material velocity in the x-direction.
YVEL The material velocity in the y-direction.
ZVEL The material velocity in the z-direction.
PRESSURE The pressure of the material at the boundary.
DENSITY The density of the material at inflow.
SIE The specific internal energy at inflow
FLOW The type of flow boundary required.
HYDSTAT A Hydrostatic pressure profile using a HYDSTAT entry.
VALUEi The value for the property defined. (Real; Integer or Character; Required)
For TYPEi set to flow the value is a character entry being either IN, OUT, or BOTH,
defining that the flow boundary is defined as an inflow, outflow, or possibly an in- or
outflow boundary. The default is BOTH.
VALUEi is required data only if one or more of the TYPEi entries are defined. The
TYPEi entries are not required. Thus, a flow boundary by default allows for in- or
outflow of the material adjacent to the boundary.
For TYPE = HYDSTAT, the value is an integer entry denoting the HYDSTAT entry to
be used.
Main Index
1926 FLOWDEF
Default Flow Boundary
Remark:
1. If this entry is not specified, a default wall boundary condition is applied to all Eulerian free faces.
2. For TYPE = HYDSTAT, the pressure is set using HYDSTAT, the velocity equals the element
velocity. In case of inflow the density follows from the hydrostatic pressure by using the equation of
state.
Main Index
FLOWT 1927
Time Dependent Flow Boundary
FLOWT Time Dependent Flow Boundary
Defines the material properties for the in- or outflow of material trough the boundary of an Euler mesh.
Inflow velocity and material properties can be chosen time dependent. Used in SOL 700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FLOWT FID BCID TYPE MESH DIR
VELTYPE VELOCITY PRESTYP PRES
MID DENSTYP DENSITY SIETYPE SIE
Example:
FLOWT 2 122 IN
TABLE 101 TABLE 102

91 TABLE 104 TABLE 107
Describer Meaning
FID Unique number of a FLOWT entry. (Integer > 0; Required)
BCID Number of a set of segments specified by the BCSEG entries where the flow boundary
is located. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0)
TYPE IN Inflow boundary. See Remarks 2.and 3. (Character; Required)
Only inflow is allowed. The inflow velocity and pressure can be
optionally specified. If not given, the values in the adjacent Euler
element will be used. The same holds for the density and sie.
OUT Only outflow is allowed. The inflow velocity and pressure can be
optionally specified. If not given, the values in the adjacent Euler
element will be used. The outflow boundary will always use material
mixture as present in the adjacent Euler element.
BOTH Material is allowed to flow in or out. In or outflow is based on the
direction of the velocity in the adjacent Euler element. Only pressure
can be optionally defined. If not given the pressure in the adjacent
Euler element will be taken.
(Character)
Main Index
1928 FLOWT
Describer Meaning
VELTYPE Type of velocity definition. (Character, Element)
ELEMENT Value of Euler Element
CONSTANT Value is constant in time
TABLE Value varies in time
VELOCITY Value of inflow or outflow velocity. If VELTYPE = TABLE it refers to a TABLED1. The
velocity direction is normal to the coupling surface or subsurface. A positive velocity
corresponds with inflow. See Remark 6. (Integer or Real)
PRESTYP Type of pressure definition (Character, Element)
ELEMENT Value of Euler element
PRES Value of inflow or outflow pressure. If PRESTYPE = TABLE it refers to a TABLED1
ID. (Integer or Real)
MID MATDEUL ID of inflowing material. Input is not allowed for TYPE = OUT.
When MID is specified, it is required to also define density and sie for the inflowing
material. (Integer)
DESTYP Type of density definition. (Character, Default is required when MID is given.)
DENSITY Value of density. If DENSTYP = TABLE it refers to a TABLED1 ID. (Character;
Default is required when MID is given.)
SIETYPE Type of density definition. (Character; Default is required when MID is given.)
TABLE Value varies in time.
SIE Value of specific internal energy. If SIETYPE = TABLE it refers to a TABLED1 ID.
(Integer or Real; Default is required when MID is given.)
Remarks:
Main Index
FLOWT 1929
etc. are ignored.
7. Any material properties not specifically defined have the same value as the element that with the
boundary conditions.
8. In the case of material flow into a multi-material Euler mesh, the material number, the density and
specific energy have to be set. On the other hand when material flows out of a multi-material Euler
mesh it is assumed that each of the materials present in the outflow Euler element contributes to the
out flow of mass. The materials are transported in proportion to their relative volume fractions
9. The boundary condition initiates/determines a wave in compressible material like gas and water. This
can be either an outgoing or an ingoing wave. For stability it is important that the waves created are
compatible with the flow type near the boundary. Relevant flow types are subsonic inflow, subsonic
outflow, supersonic inflow and supersonic outflow. For example for subsonic inflow prescribing both
pressure and velocity would initiate outgoing waves. Outgoing waves for an inflow boundary
condition is known to be instable. However, for supersonic inflow one can specify both pressure and
velocities there are no outgoing waves at a supersonic inflow boundary.
Main Index
1930 FLOWUDS
User Defined Flow Boundary.
FLOWUDS User Defined Flow Boundary.
Defines a flow boundary on an Eulerian mesh specified by a user subroutine. Use in SOL700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FLOWUDS LID GROUP UNAME BCID MESH DIR
+ XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX ZMIN ZMAX
Example:
CONNECT SERVICE myflow ' SCA.MDSolver.Obj.Uds.Dytran.Flow '
In Bulk Data:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FLOWUDS 12 MYFLOW EXFLOW 300
Describer Meaning
LID Unique output number. (Integer > 0; Required)
UNAME User subroutine name associated with the entry. (Character; default=EXFLOW)
BCID Number of a set of segments, specified by BCSEG entries, where the flow boundary is
located. See Remark 6. (Integer > 0)
(Character)
Remarks:
2. UNAME can be:
EXFLOW Standard user defined flow boundary on the Euler mesh
Main Index
FLOWUDS 1931
User Defined Flow Boundary.
3. For multi material models EXFLOW allows for the definition of any material to flow into the
Eulerian mesh. The outflow can only be of materials present in the mesh.
4. TLOAD1 entries referencing FLOWUDS entries must have the TID field blank or zero.
etc. are ignored.
MAX value. If the MIN value has been set the default value of the MAX value is the MIN value.
Main Index
1932 FLSYM
Axisymmetric Symmetry Control
FLSYM Axisymmetric Symmetry Control
Defines the relationship between the axisymmetric fluid and a structural boundary having symmetric
constraints. The purpose is to allow fluid boundary matrices to conform to structural symmetry definitions.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FLSYM M S1 S2
Example:
FLSYM 12 S A
Describer Meaning
M Number of symmetric sections of structural boundary around the circumference of the
fluid being modeled by the set of structural elements. (Even Integers > 2)
S1, S2 Description of boundary constraints used on the structure at the first and second planes
of symmetry. (Character: “S” means symmetric, “A” means antisymmetric.)
Remarks:
2. Only one FLSYM entry is allowed.
3. This entry is not required if there are no planes of symmetry.
4. First plane of symmetry is assumed to be at φ = 0 . Second plane of symmetry is assumed to be at
φ = 360° ⁄ M .
5. Symmetric and antisymmetric constraints for the structure must, in addition, be provided by the user.
6. The solution is performed for those harmonic indices listed on the AXIF entry that are compatible
with the symmetry conditions.
7. For example, if FLSYM is used to model a quarter section of structure at the boundary, M = 4. If the
boundary constraints are “SS”, the compatible cosine harmonics are 0, 2, 4, ..., etc. If “SA” is used,
the compatible cosine harmonics are 1, 3, 5, ..., etc.
Main Index
FLUTTER 1933
Aerodynamic Flutter Data
FLUTTER Aerodynamic Flutter Data
Defines data needed to perform flutter analysis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FLUTTER SID METHOD DENS MACH RFREQ IMETH NVALUE/ EPS
OMAX
Example:
FLUTTER 19 K 119 219 319 S 5 1.-4
Describer Meaning
METHOD Flutter analysis method. (Character: “K” for K method, “PK” for PK method, “PKNL”
for PK method with no looping, “PKS” for PK sweep method, “PKNLS” for PK sweep
method with no looping, “KE” for the K method restricted for efficiency.) See Remark
9.
DENS Identification number of an FLFACT entry specifying density ratios to be used in
flutter analysis. (Integer > 0)
MACH Identification number of an FLFACT entry specifying Mach numbers ( m ) to be used
in flutter analysis. (Integer > 0)
RFREQ (or Identification number of an FLFACT entry specifying reduced frequencies ( k ) to be
VEL) used in flutter analysis; for the “PKx” methods, the velocities FLFACT entry is specified
in this field. (Integer > 0)
IMETH Choice of interpolation method for aerodynamic matrix interpolation. See Remark 6.
(Character: “L” = linear, “S” = surface; “TCUB” = termwise cubic; Default = “L”.)
NVALUE Number of eigenvalues beginning with the first eigenvalue for output and plots.
(Integer > 0; Default is the number of modal degrees-of-freedom (uh).)
OMAX For the PKS and PKNLS methods, OMAX specifies the maximum frequency, in Hz.,
to be used in he flutter sweep. (Real > 0.0; Default = maximum normal mode
eigenfrequency)
EPS Convergence parameter for k. Used in the PK and PKNL methods only. See Remark 4.
–3
(Real > 0.0; Default = 10 .)
Remarks:
1. The FLUTTER entry must be selected with the Case Control command FMETHOD = SID.
2. The density is given by DENS ⋅ RHOREF , where RHOREF is the reference value specified on the
AERO entry and DENS is the density ratio specified on the FLFACT entry.
Main Index
1934 FLUTTER
Aerodynamic Flutter Data
3. The reduced frequency is given by k = ( REFC ⋅ ω ⁄ 2 ⋅ V ) , where REFC is given on the AERO entry,
ω is the circular frequency, and V is the velocity. If k = 0.0 , as specified on the FLFACT entry, then
only the K method may be specified and the Inverse Power method of eigenvalue extraction (INV on
the EIGC entry) must be used. Aeroelastic divergence analysis is more appropriately performed using
one of the “PKx” methods.
4. For the PK and PKNL methods, an eigenvalue is accepted when:
k – k estimate < EPS for k estimate < 1.0
k – k estimate < EPS ⋅ k estim for k estimate ≥ 1.0
5. When one of the “PKx” methods is selected, physical displacements will only be generated for the
velocities on the FLFACT that are specified as negative values of the requested velocity. Also,
structural damping as specified on the GE field of MATi entries is ignored.
6. If IMETH = “L”, a linear interpolation is performed on reduced frequencies at the Mach numbers
specified on the FLFACT entry using the MKAEROi entry Mach number that is closest to the
FLFACT entry Mach number. For IMETH = “S”, a surface interpolation is performed across Mach
numbers and reduced frequencies. For IMETH = “TCUB” a termwise cubic interpolation on
reduced frequency is used. IMETH = “S” is only available for the “K” and “KE” flutter methods.
IMETH = “TCUB” is only available for the “PKx” methods. For the “PKx” methods, IMETH = “S”
or “L” or blank provides linear interpolation while “TCUB” provides a termwise cubic interpolation.
7. For the “K”, “KE”, “PK”, and “PKS” methods, all combinations of the FLFACT entry are analyzed.
For the “PKNL” and “PKNLS” methods, only ordered pairs are analyzed; i.e.,
( ρ 1, M 1, V 1 ), ( ρ 2, M 2, V 2 )… ( ρ n, M n, V n ) . For the PKNL and PKNLS methods, equal number of
densities, Mach numbers and velocities must be specified.
8. “K” and “KE” methods are not supported for design sensitivity and optimization.
9. The PKS and PKNLS methods determine flutter eigenvalues by performing a sweep of equally spaced
reduced frequencies ranging from k est = 0.0 through k est = π ⋅ REFC ⋅ OMAX/Velocity . The
number of intervals is calculated using NINT = INT(1.0/EPS).
10.
• The PK method uses only real matrix terms for computing the flutter solution. This means any
imaginary terms in any of the matrices, M, B, or K are ignored with the PK method and the
imaginary part of the aerodynamic matrix is added as a real matrix to the viscous damping matrix
B.
• For the KE method, the B matrix is ignored while complex stiffness forms of structural damping
are supported. Modal viscous damping (TABDMP1 input) will be included when the KDAMP
parameter is set to -1.
• The K method supports all forms of damping.
11. METHOD=K requires a CMETHOD in Case Control pointing to an EIGC Bulk Data entry. It is
recommended that the number of roots requested on the EIGC entry be twice the number of normal
modes used in the modal flutter analysis.
Main Index
FORCE 1935
Static Force
FORCE Static Force
Defines a static concentrated force at a grid point by specifying a vector.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FORCE SID G CID F N1 N2 N3
Example:
FORCE 2 5 6 2.9 0.0 1.0 0.0
Describer Meaning
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
G Grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
F Scale factor. (Real)
Ni Components of a vector measured in coordinate system defined by CID. (Real; at least
one Ni ≠ 0.0. unless F is zero)
Remarks:
1. The static force applied to grid point G is given by
f = FN
where N is the vector defined in fields 6, 7 and 8. The magnitude of f is equal to F times the
magnitude of N .
2. In the static solution sequences, SID must be selected by the LOAD Case Control command.
In the dynamic solution sequences, if there is a LOADSET Case Control command, then SID must
be referenced in the LID field of a selected LSEQ entry. If there is no LOADSET Case Control
command, then SID must be referenced in the EXCITEID field of an RLOADi or TLOADi entry.
3. A CID of zero or blank (the default) references the basic coordinate system.
4. For scalar points see SLOAD.
5. For TYPE=12 or TYPE=13 on the TLOAD1, G is the ID of a rigid body: the MID of a rigid material
(MATRIG or MATD020) or the EID of a RBE2D. The MID of a rigid material and the EID of
RBE2 must be different when both of a RBE2D and a rigid material are used with these TYPEs. SOL
700 only.
6. For axisymmetric elements, the point loads to be entered on the card should be obtained by
integrating over 1 radian of the circumference.
Main Index
1936 FORCE1
Follower Force, Alternate Form 1
FORCE1 Follower Force, Alternate Form 1
Defines a concentrated force at a grid point by specification of a magnitude and two grid points that
determine the direction.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FORCE1 SID G F G1 G2
Example:
FORCE1 6 13 -2.93 16 13
Describer Meaning
F Magnitude of the force. (Real)
G1, G2 Grid point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; G1 and G2 may not be coincident.)
Remarks:
1. The force applied to grid point G is given by
f = Fn
where n is a unit vector parallel to a vector from G1 to G2.

3. The follower force effects due to loads from this entry are included in the stiffness in all linear solution
sequences that calculate a differential stiffness. The solution sequences are SOLs 103, 105, 107 to
112, 115 and 116 (see also the parameter FOLLOWK, 785). In addition, follower force effects are
included in the force balance in the nonlinear static and nonlinear transient dynamic solution
sequences, SOLs 106, 129, 153, 159, 400, if geometric nonlinear effects are turned on with
PARAM,LGDISP,1. The follower force stiffness is included in the nonlinear static solution sequences
(SOLs 106, 153 and 400) but not in the nonlinear transient dynamic solution sequences (SOLs 129
and 159).
Main Index
FORCE2 1937
Follower Force, Alternate Form 2
FORCE2 Follower Force, Alternate Form 2
Defines a concentrated force at a grid point by specification of a magnitude and four grid points that
determine the direction.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FORCE2 SID G F G1 G2 G3 G4
Example:
FORCE2 6 13 -2.93 16 13 17 13
Describer Meaning
F Magnitude of the force. (Real)
Gi Grid point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; G1 and G2 may not be coincident;
G3 and G4 cannot be coincident.)
Remarks:
1. The direction of the force is parallel to the cross product of vectors from G1 to G2 and G3 to G4.
3. The follower force effects due to loads from this entry are included in the stiffness in all linear solution
sequences that calculate a differential stiffness. The solution sequences are SOLs 103, 105, 107 to
112, 115 and 116 (see also the parameter FOLLOWK, 785). In addition, follower force effects are
included in the force balance in the nonlinear static and nonlinear transient dynamic solution
sequences, SOLs 106, 129, 153, 159, and 400 if geometric nonlinear effects are turned on with
PARAM,LGDISP,1. The follower force stiffness is included in the nonlinear static solution
sequences (SOLs 106, 153 and 400) but not in the nonlinear transient dynamic solution sequences
(SOLs 129 and 159).
Main Index
1938 FORCEAX
Conical Shell Static Force
FORCEAX Conical Shell Static Force
Defines a static concentrated force on a conical shell ring.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FORCEAX SID RID HID S FR FP FZ
Example:
FORCEAX 1 2 3 2.0 0.1 0.2 0.3
Describer Meaning
RID RINGAX entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
HID Harmonic identification number or a sequence of harmonics. See Remark 5.
(Integer > 0)
S Scale factor for the force. (Real)
FR, FP, FZ Force components in r, φ, z directions. (Real)
Remarks:
1. FORCEAX is allowed only if an AXIC entry is also present.
2. Axisymmetric shell loads must be selected with the Case Control command LOAD = SID.
3. A separate entry is needed for the definition of the force associated with each harmonic.
4. See Conical Shell Element (RINGAX) (Ch. 3) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide for further discussion.
5. If a sequence of harmonics is to be placed in HID, the form is as follows: “Sn1Tn2” where n1 is the
start of the sequence and n2 is the end of the sequence (e.g., for harmonics 0 through 10, the field
would contain “S0T10”).
Main Index
FORCUDS 1939
User-defined Enforced Motion at Grid Points
FORCUDS User-defined Enforced Motion at Grid Points
Defines enforced motion at grid points specified by a user subroutine. Used in SOL700 only.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FORCUDS LID GROUP UNAME
+ G1 G2 THRU G3
Example:
CONNECT SERVICE extvel ' SCA.MDSolver.Obj.Uds.Dytran.Loads '
In Bulk Data:
FORCUD 1 EXTVEL
+ 1 2 3 5
Field Contents
LID Number of a set of loads.(Integer>0;required)
UNAME User subroutine name associated with the entry. (Character; default=EXTVEL)
Gi Numbers of the grid points that are constrained. If the word THRU appears between
two numbers, all the numbers in the range are included in the list. BY indicates the
increment to be used within this range. (Integer or character; required.)
Remarks:
2. FORCUDS can only be used to specify enforced velocities for grid points. The TYPE field on the
TLOAD1 entry must be set to two. The TID on the TLOAD1 entry must be set to zero or blank
(no time variation).
3. The GROUP name must be unique from all other GROUP names if more than one FORCUDS is
used. Therefore each FORCUDS must have its own group name in a FMS section CONNECT
SERVICE statement.
4. The constraint name is passed to the subroutine and can be used to identify the constraint.
5. A THRU specification, including the start and finish points in the range, must be on one line.
Main Index
1940 FORCUDS
User-defined Enforced Motion at Grid Points
6. If the THRU specification is used, all the points in the sequence do not have to exist. Those that do
not exist are ignored. The first point in the THRU specification must be a valid grid point. BY can
be used to exclude grid points.
7. None of the fields in the list of grid points can be blank or zero, since this designation marks the end
of the list.
8. Any number of continuation lines can be used to define the list of grid points.
9. UNAME can be:
EXTVEL user defined velocities on grid points
Main Index
FREEPT 1941
Fluid Free Surface Point
FREEPT Fluid Free Surface Point
Defines the location of points on the surface of a fluid for recovery of surface displacements in a gravity field.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FREEPT IDF IDP1 PHI1 IDP2 PHI2 IDP3 PHI3
Example:
FREEPT 3 301 22.5 302 90.0 303 370.0
Describer Meaning
IDF RINGFL entry identification number. (Integer > 0)
IDPi Free surface point identification number. (Integer > 0)
PHIi Azimuthal position on fluid point (RINGFL entry) in the fluid coordinate system.
(Real)
Remarks:
1. FREEPT is allowed only if an AXIF entry is also present.
2. All free surface point identification numbers must be unique with respect to other scalar, structural,
and fluid points.
3. The free surface points are used for the identification of output data only.
4. Three points may be defined on a single entry.
5. The referenced fluid point (IDF) must be included in a free surface list (FSLIST entry).
6. Output requests for velocity and acceleration can be made at these points.
Main Index
1942 FREQ
Frequency List
FREQ Frequency List
Defines a set of frequencies to be used in the solution of frequency response problems.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FREQ SID F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
F8 F9 F10 -etc.-
Example:
FREQ 3 2.98 3.05 17.9 21.3 25.6 28.8 31.2
29.2 22.4 19.3
Describer Meaning
Fi Frequency value in units of cycles per unit time. (Real > 0.0)
Remarks:
1. Frequency sets must be selected with the Case Control command FREQUENCY = SID.
2. All FREQi entries with the same frequency set identification numbers will be used. Duplicate
frequencies will be ignored. f N and f N – 1 are considered duplicated if
f N – f N – 1 < DFREQ ⋅ f MAX – f MIN ,
–5
where DFREQ is a user parameter, with a default of 10 . f MAX and f MIN are the maximum and
minimum excitation frequencies of the combined FREQi entries.
3. In modal analysis, solutions for modal DOFs from rigid body modes at zero excitation frequencies
may be discarded. Solutions for nonzero modes are retained.
Main Index
FREQ1 1943
Frequency List, Alternate Form 1
FREQ1 Frequency List, Alternate Form 1
Defines a set of frequencies to be used in the solution of frequency response problems by specification of a
starting frequency, frequency increment, and the number of increments desired.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FREQ1 SID F1 DF NDF
Example:
FREQ1 6 2.9 0.5 13
Describer Meaning
F1 First frequency in set. (Real > 0.0)
DF Frequency increment. (Real > 0.0)
NDF Number of frequency increments. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
Remarks:
1. FREQ1 entries must be selected with the Case Control command FREQUENCY = SID.
2. The units for F1 and DF are cycles per unit time.
3. The frequencies defined by this entry are given by
f i = F1 + DF ⋅ ( i – 1 )
where i = 1 to (NDF + 1).

–5
Main Index
1944 FREQ2
Defines a set of frequencies to be used in the solution of frequency response problems by specification of a
starting frequency, final frequency, and the number of logarithmic increments desired.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FREQ2 SID F1 F2 NF
Example:
FREQ2 6 1.0 8.0 6
Describer Meaning
F1 First frequency. (Real > 0.0)
F2 Last frequency. (Real > 0.0, F2 > F1)
NF Number of logarithmic intervals. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
Remarks:
2. The units for F1 and F2 are cycles per unit time.
( i – 1 )d
f i = F1 ⋅ e
1
where d = -------- ln F2
------- and i = 1, 2, …, ( NF + 1 )
NF F1
In the example above, the list of frequencies will be 1.0, 1.4142, 2.0, 2.8284, 4.0, 5.6569 and 8.0
cycles per unit time.
–5
Main Index
FREQ3 1945
Frequency List, Alternate 3
FREQ3 Frequency List, Alternate 3
Defines a set of excitation frequencies for modal frequency-response solutions by specifying number of
excitation frequencies between two modal frequencies.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FREQ3 SID F1 F2 TYPE NEF CLUSTER
Example:
FREQ3 6 20.0 2000.0 LINEAR 10 2.0
Describer Meaning
F1 Lower bound of modal frequency range in cycles per unit time. (Real > 0.0 for
TYPE = LINEAR and Real = 0.0 for TYPE = LOG)
F2 Upper bound of modal frequency range in cycles per unit time. (Real > 0.0; F2 > F1;
Default = F1)
TYPE LINEAR or LOG. Specifies linear or logarithmic interpolation between frequencies.
(Character; Default = “LINEAR”)
NEF Number of excitation frequencies within each subrange including the end points. The
first subrange is between F1 and the first modal frequency within the bounds. The
second subrange is between first and second modal frequencies between the bounds.
The last subrange is between the last modal frequency within the bounds and F2.
CLUSTER Specifies clustering of the excitation frequency near the end points of the range. See
Remarks:
1. FREQ3 applies only to modal frequency-response solutions (SOLs 111, 146, and 200) and is ignored
in direct frequency response solutions.
3. In the example above, there will be 10 frequencies in the interval between each set of modes within
the bounds 20 and 2000, plus 10 frequencies between 20 and the lowest mode in the range, plus 10
frequencies between the highest mode in the range and 2000.
4. Since the forcing frequencies are near structural resonances, it is important that some amount of
damping be specified.
Main Index
1946 FREQ3
–5
where DFREQ is a user parameter, with a default of 10 . f MAX an f MIN are the maximum and
6. CLUSTER is used to obtain better resolution near the modal frequencies where the response varies
the most. CLUSTER > 1.0 provides closer spacing of excitation frequency towards the ends of the
frequency range, while values of less than 1.0 provide closer spacing towards the center of the
frequency range. For example, if the frequency range is between 10 and 20, NEF = 11,
TYPE = “LINEAR”; then, the excitation frequencies for various values of CLUSTER would be as
shown in Table 17.
ˆf = 1--- ( ˆf + ˆf ) + 1--- ( ˆf – ˆf ) ξ 1 ⁄ CLUSTER ⋅ SIGN ( ξ )

k
2 1 2 2 2 1
where
ξ = – 1 + 2 ( k – 1 ) ⁄ ( NEF – 1 ) is a parametric coordinate between -1 and 1

k = varies from 1 to NEF (k = 1, 2, ..., NEF)
ˆf
1 = is the lower limit of the frequency subrange
ˆf
2 = is the upper limit of the subrange
ˆf
k = is the k-th excitation frequency
ˆf
= is the frequency, or the logarithm of the frequency, depending on the value specified for
TYPE
Table 17 CLUSTER Usage Example

CLUSTER
Excitation c=0.25 c-0.50 c-1.0 c-2.0 c-4.0
Frequency
Number ξ Excitation Frequencies in Hertz
1 -1.0 10.00 10.0 10.0 10.00 10.00
2 -0.8 12.95 11.8 11.0 10.53 10.27
3 -0.6 14.35 13.2 12.0 11.13 10.60
4 -0.4 14.87 14.2 13.0 11.84 11.02
5 -0.2 14.99 14.8 14.0 12.76 11.66
6 0.0 15.00 15.0 15.0 15.00 15.00
7 0.2 15.01 15.2 16.0 17.24 18.34
Main Index
FREQ3 1947
Table 17 CLUSTER Usage Example

CLUSTER
Excitation c=0.25 c-0.50 c-1.0 c-2.0 c-4.0
Frequency
Number ξ Excitation Frequencies in Hertz
8 0.4 15.13 15.8 17.0 18.16 18.98
9 0.6 15.65 16.8 18.0 18.87 19.40
10 0.8 17.05 18.2 19.0 19.47 19.73
11 1.0 20.00 20.0 20.0 20.00 20.00
7. In design optimization (SOL 200), the excitation frequencies are derived from the natural frequencies
computed at each design cycle.
Main Index
1948 FREQ4
Defines a set of frequencies used in the solution of modal frequency-response problems by specifying the
amount of “spread” around each natural frequency and the number of equally spaced excitation frequencies
within the spread.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FREQ4 SID F1 F2 FSPD NFM
Example:
FREQ4 6 20.0 2000.0 0.30 21
Describer Meaning
F1 Lower bound of frequency range in cycles per unit time. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
F2 Upper bound of frequency range in cycles per unit time. (Real > 0.0; F2 > F1;
Default = 1.0E20)
FSPD Frequency spread, +/- the fractional amount specified for each mode which occurs in
the frequency range F1 to F2. (1.0 > Real > 0.0; Default = 0.10)
NFM Number of evenly spaced frequencies per “spread” mode. (Integer > 0; Default = 3; If
NFM is even, NFM + 1 will be used.)
Remarks:
1. FREQ4 applies only to modal frequency-response solutions (SOLs 111, 146, and 200 and is ignored
in direct frequency-response solutions.
3. There will be NFM excitation frequencies between ( 1 – FSPD ) ⋅ f N and ( 1 + FSPD ) ⋅ f N , for each
natural frequency in the range F1 to F2.
4. In the example above there will be 21 equally spaced frequencies across a frequency band of 0.7 ⋅ f N
to 1.3 ⋅ f N for each natural frequency that occurs between 20 and 2000. See Figure 9-94 for the
definition of frequency spread.
( 1 – FSPD ) ⋅ f N fN ( 1 + FSPD ) ⋅ f N
Main Index
FREQ4 1949
Figure 9-94 Frequency Spread Definition
Excitation frequencies may be based on natural frequencies that are not within the range (F1 and F2)
as long as the calculated excitation frequencies are within the range. Similarly, an excitation
frequency calculated based on natural frequencies within the range (F1 through F2) may be excluded
if it falls outside the range.
5. The frequency spread can be used also to define the half-power bandwidth. The half-power
bandwidth is given by 2 ⋅ ξ ⋅ f N , where ξ is the damping ratio. Therefore, if FSPD is specified
equal to the damping ratio for the mode, NFM specifies the number of excitation frequency within
the half-power bandwidth. See Figure 9-95 for the definition of half-power bandwidth.
Peak Response
2 ⋅ ξ ⋅ fN
Half-Power Point (.707 Peak)
Amplitude
fN Frequency
Half-Power
Bandwidth
Figure 9-95 Half-Power Bandwidth Definition
Main Index
1950 FREQ4
–5
where DFREQ is a user parameter with a default of 10 . The values f MAX and f MIN are the
maximum and minimum excitation frequencies of the combined FREQi entries.
Main Index
FREQ5 1951
Defines a set of frequencies used in the solution of modal frequency-response problems by specification of a
frequency range and fractions of the natural frequencies within that range.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FREQ5 SID F1 F2 FR1 FR2 FR3 FR4 FR5
FR6 FR7 -etc.-
Example:
FREQ5 6 20.0 2000.0 1.0 0.6 0.8 0.9 0.95
1.05 1.1 1.2
Describer Meaning
F1 Lower bound of frequency range in cycles per unit time. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
F2 Upper bound of frequency range in cycles per unit time. (Real > 0.0; F2 > F1;
Default = 1.0E20)
FRi Fractions of the natural frequencies in the range F1 to F2. (Real > 0.0)
Remarks:
1. FREQ5 applies only to modal frequency-response solutions (SOLs 111, 146, and 200) and is ignored
in direct frequency response solutions.
f i = FRi ⋅ f N
i
where f Ni are the natural frequencies in the range F1 through F2.
4. In the example above, the list of frequencies will be 0.6, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0, 1.05, 1.1, and 1.2 times
each natural frequency between 20 and 2000. If this computation results in excitation frequencies
less then F1 and greater than F2, those computed excitation frequencies are ignored.
Excitation frequencies may be based on natural frequencies that are not within the range (F1 and F2)
as long as the calculated excitation frequencies are within the range. Similarly, an excitation
frequency calculated based on natural frequencies within the range (F1 through F2) may be excluded
if it falls outside the range.
Main Index
1952 FREQ5
–5
where DFREQ is a user parameter with a default of 10 . The values f MAX and f MIN are the
maximum and minimum excitation frequencies of the combined FREQi entries.
Main Index
FRFCOMP 1953
Frequency Response Function (FRF) Component Specification for FRF Based Assembly (FBA)
FRFCOMP Frequency Response Function (FRF) Component Specification for FRF Based
Assembly (FBA)
Specifies the FRF components that are to be assembled as part of an FRF Based Assembly (FBA) process.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FRFCOMP COMPID COMPNAME MEDIUM UNITNO LSCALFAC FSCALFAC
Examples:
FRFCOMP 10 LEFTWING OP2 25
FRFCOMP 20 FRAME UF 30 1000.0
Describer Meaning
COMPID ID of the component whose FRFs have been generated in a previous Nastran
execution. (Integer > 0)
COMPNAME Name of the COMPID FRF component. See Remark 1. (Up to 8 characters).
MEDIUM Medium on which the FRF matrices and other related data are stored. Acceptable
character values are DB (for database), OP2 (for OUTPUT2 file) or UF (for
Universal file). See Remarks 2., 3. and 4.
UNITNO Fortran unit number for the OP2 and UF options. (Integer > 0). See Remarks 3.
and 4.
LSCALFAC Length scale factor for the UF option. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0). See Remarks 7.,
8., 9., 10. and 11.
FSCALFAC Force scale factor for the UF option. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0). See Remarks 7.,
8., 9., 10., and 11.
Remarks:
1. COMPNAME may be referenced by the ASMOUT keyword in the FRF Case Control command in
order to request output for a specific FRF component in the FBA process. Accordingly,
COMPNAME may not have the values of CONNINFO, ALL, COMP or ASSEMBLY as these are
all reserved words for use with the ASMOUT keyword in the FRF Case Control command.

MSC Nastran 2019 Quick Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MSC Nastran 2019 Quick Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MSC Nastran 2019 Quick Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MSC Nastran 2019

MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide

Quick Reference Guide

U.S. Patent 9,361,413

List of MSC Nastran Books

Installation and Release Guides

Training and Internet Resources

1 Executing MSC Nastran

Executing MSC Nastran

after after = time Default: None

append append={yes|no} Default: no

batch batch={yes|no} Default: yes

Example: nast20190 example batch=no

dbs dbs=pathname Default= . {Current directory}

Specifying dmparallel > 1 and not including a DOMAINSOLVER Executive

 The extraction of eigenvalues may be performed using Automated Component

gpuid gpuid=id,id or gpuid=id:id Default: none

GPGPU processing is available for direct solution methods only; iterative

gpu_min_rank gpu_min_rank=value Default: 1024

news news={yes|no|auto} Default=yes

Example: nast20190 example notify=yes

old old={yes|no} Default=yes

out out=pathname Default= .

rcf rcf=pathname Default=no

scratch scratch={yes|no|mini|post} Default=no

smp parallelization is available for mathematical kernels.

 DMP (DMP overrides SMP);

uds uds={filename | model} Default: None

If user routine is written in Fortran: nast20190 example uds=mysource.F

If user routine is written in C++: nast20190 example

Keeps or deletes the previous copy of the .xdb.

ASSIGN dbc=<file_name>.xdb delete

Example: nast20190 example xdbold=no

The NASTRAN Statement

NASTRAN Executive System Parameter Modification

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

*** SYSTEM FATAL MESSAGE 1267 (XSTORE)

A DMAP workaround is of the form:

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)

Only used when HDF5(702) is 0 or 1.

Table 2-1 System Cell Summary (continued)